OHSA CFR 29 - 2013 - Part 1926

PART 1926—SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926.
61 Retention of DOT markings, plac-

ards and labels.
REGULATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION 1926.62 Lead.
1926.64 Process safety management of high-
Subpart A—General ly hazardous chemicals.
Sec. 1926.65 Hazardous waste operations and
1926.1 Purpose and scope. emergency response.
1926.2 Variances from safety and health 1926.66 Criteria for design and construction
standards. of spray booths.
1926.3 Inspections—right of entry.
1926.4 Rules of practice for administrative Subpart E—Personal Protective and Life
adjudications for enforcement of safety Saving Equipment
and health standards.
1926.5 OMB control numbers under the Pa- 1926.95 Criteria for personal protective
perwork Reduction Act. equipment.
1926.6 Incorporation by reference. 1926.96 Occupational foot protection.
1926.97–1926.98 [Reserved]
Subpart B—General Interpretations 1926.100 Head protection.
1926.101 Hearing protection.
1926.10 Scope of subpart.
1926.102 Eye and face protection.
1926.11 Coverage under section 103 of the act
1926.103 Respiratory protection.
distinguished.
1926.12 Reorganization Plan No. 14 of 1950. 1926.104 Safety belts, lifelines, and lanyards.
1926.13 Interpretation of statutory terms. 1926.105 Safety nets.
1926.14 Federal contract for ‘‘mixed’’ types 1926.106 Working over or near water.
of performance. 1926.107 Definitions applicable to this sub-
1926.15 Relationship to the Service Contract part.
Act; Walsh-Healey Public Contracts Act.
1926.16 Rules of construction. Subpart F—Fire Protection and Prevention
Subpart C—General Safety and Health 1926.150 Fire protection.

Provisions 1926.151 Fire prevention.
1926.152 Flammable liquids.
1926.20 General safety and health provi- 1926.153 Liquefied petroleum gas (LP-Gas).
sions. 1926.154 Temporary heating devices.
1926.21 Safety training and education. 1926.155 Definitions applicable to this sub-
1926.22 Recording and reporting of injuries. part.
[Reserved]
1926.23 First aid and medical attention. Subpart G—Signs, Signals, and Barricades
1926.24 Fire protection and prevention.
1926.25 Housekeeping. 1926.200 Accident prevention signs and tags.
1926.26 Illumination. 1926.201 Signaling.
1926.27 Sanitation. 1926.202 Barricades.
1926.28 Personal protective equipment. 1926.203 Definitions applicable to this sub-
1926.29 Acceptable certifications. part.
1926.30 Shipbuilding and ship repairing.
1926.32 Definitions.
Subpart H—Materials Handling, Storage,
1926.33 Access to employee exposure and
medical records. Use, and Disposal
1926.34 Means of egress. 1926.250 General requirements for storage.
1926.35 Employee emergency action plans.
1926.251 Rigging equipment for material
handling.
Subpart D—Occupational Health and
1926.252 Disposal of waste materials.
Environmental Controls
1926.50 Medical services and first aid. Subpart I—Tools—Hand and Power
1926.51 Sanitation.
1926.300 General requirements.
1926.52 Occupational noise exposure.
1926.53 Ionizing radiation. 1926.301 Hand tools.
1926.54 Nonionizing radiation. 1926.302 Power-operated hand tools.
1926.55 Gases, vapors, fumes, dusts, and 1926.303 Abrasive wheels and tools.
mists. 1926.304 Woodworking tools.
1926.56 Illumination. 1926.305 Jacks—lever and ratchet, screw,
1926.57 Ventilation. and hydraulic.
1926.58 [Reserved] 1926.306 Air receivers.
1926.59 Hazard communication. 1926.307 Mechanical power-transmission ap-
1926.60 Methylenedianiline. paratus.
VerDate Mar<15>2010 22:32 Aug 15, 2013 Jkt 229119 PO 00000 Frm 00017 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Q:\29\29V8.TXT ofr150 PsN: PC150
Pt. 1926 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–13 Edition)
Subpart J—Welding and Cutting APPENDIX C TO SUBPART L—LIST OF NA-
TIONAL CONSENSUS STANDARDS
1926.350 Gas welding and cutting. APPENDIX D TO SUBPART L—LIST OF TRAINING
1926.351 Arc welding and cutting. TOPICS FOR SCAFFOLD ERECTORS AND DIS-
1926.352 Fire prevention. MANTLERS [RESERVED]
1926.353 Ventilation and protection in weld- APPENDIX E TO SUBPART L—DRAWINGS AND
ing, cutting, and heating. ILLUSTRATIONS
1926.354 Welding, cutting, and heating in
way of preservative coatings. Subpart M—Fall Protection
Subpart K—Electrical 1926.500 Scope, application, and definitions
applicable to this subpart.
GENERAL 1926.501 Duty to have fall protection.
1926.502 Fall protection systems criteria
1926.400 Introduction.
and practices.
1926.401 [Reserved]
1926.503 Training requirements.
INSTALLATION SAFETY REQUIREMENTS APPENDIX A TO SUBPART M—DETERMINING
ROOF WIDTHS
1926.402 Applicability.
APPENDIX B TO SUBPART M—GUARDRAIL SYS-
1926.403 General requirements.
TEMS
1926.404 Wiring design and protection.
APPENDIX C TO SUBPART M—PERSONAL FALL
1926.405 Wiring methods, components, and
ARREST SYSTEMS
equipment for general use.
APPENDIX D TO SUBPART M—POSITIONING DE-
1926.406 Specific purpose equipment and in-
VICE SYSTEMS
stallations.
APPENDIX E TO SUBPART M—SAMPLE FALL
1926.407 Hazardous (classified) locations.
PROTECTION PLANS
1926.408 Special systems.
1926.409–1926.415 [Reserved]
Subpart N—Helicopters, Hoists, Elevators,
SAFETY-RELATED WORK PRACTICES and Conveyors
1926.416 General requirements. 1926.550 [Reserved]
1926.417 Lockout and tagging of circuits. 1926.551 Helicopters.
1926.418–1926.430 [Reserved] 1926.552 Material hoists, personnel hoists,
and elevators.
SAFETY-RELATED MAINTENANCE AND 1926.553 Base-mounted drum hoists.
ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS 1926.554 Overhead hoists.
1926.431 Maintenance of equipment. 1926.555 Conveyors.
1926.432 Environmental deterioration of
equipment. Subpart O—Motor Vehicles, Mechanized
1926.433–1926.440 [Reserved] Equipment, and Marine Operations
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR SPECIAL 1926.600 Equipment.
EQUIPMENT 1926.601 Motor vehicles.
1926.602 Material handling equipment.
1926.441 Batteries and battery charging. 1926.603 Pile driving equipment.
1926.442–1926.448 [Reserved] 1926.604 Site clearing.
1926.605 Marine operations and equipment.
DEFINITIONS
1926.606 Definitions applicable to this sub-
1926.449 Definitions applicable to this subpart.
part.
Subpart P—Excavations
Subpart L—Scaffolds
1926.650 Scope, application, and definitions
1926.450 Scope, application and definitions applicable to this subpart.
applicable to this subpart. 1926.651 Specific excavation requirements.
1926.451 General requirements. 1926.652 Requirements for protective sys-
1926.452 Additional requirements applicable tems.
to specific types of scaffolds. APPENDIX A TO SUBPART P—SOIL CLASSIFICA-
1926.453 Aerial lifts. TION
1926.454 Training requirements. APPENDIX B TO SUBPART P—SLOPING AND
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART L—SCAFFOLD SPECI- BENCHING
FICATIONS APPENDIX C TO SUBPART P—TIMBER SHORING
APPENDIX B TO SUBPART L—CRITERIA FOR DE- FOR TRENCHES
TERMINING THE FEASIBILITY OF PROVIDING APPENDIX D TO SUBPART P—ALUMINUM HY-
SAFE ACCESS AND FALL PROTECTION FOR DRAULIC SHORING FOR TRENCHES
SCAFFOLD ERECTORS AND DISMANTLERS APPENDIX E TO SUBPART P—ALTERNATIVES TO
[RESERVED] TIMBER SHORING
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926
APPENDIX F TO SUBPART P—SELECTION OF CONNECTION AND A STAGGERED CONNEC-
PROTECTIVE SYSTEMS TION: NON-MANDATORY GUIDELINES FOR
COMPLYING WITH COMPLYING WITH
Subpart Q—Concrete and Masonry § 1926.756(C)(1)
Construction
Subpart S—Underground Construction,
1926.700 Scope, application, and definitions Caissons, Cofferdams and Compressed Air
applicable to this subpart.
1926.701 General requirements. 1926.800 Underground construction.
1926.702 Requirements for equipment and 1926.801 Caissons.
tools. 1926.802 Cofferdams.
1926.703 Requirements for cast-in-place con- 1926.803 Compressed air.
crete. 1926.804 Definitions applicable to this sub-
1926.704 Requirements for precast concrete. part.
1926.705 Requirements for lift-slab construc- APPENDIX A TO SUBPART S—DECOMPRESSION
tion operations. TABLES
1926.706 Requirements for masonry con-
struction. Subpart T—Demolition
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART Q—REFERENCES TO
SUBPART Q OF PART 1926 1926.850 Preparatory operations.
1926.851 Stairs, passageways, and ladders.
Subpart R—Steel Erection 1926.852 Chutes.
1926.853 Removal of materials through floor
1926.750 Scope. openings.
1926.751 Definitions. 1926.854 Removal of walls, masonry sec-
1926.752 Site layout, site-specific erection tions, and chimneys.
plan and construction sequence. 1926.855 Manual removal of floors.
1926.753 Hoisting and rigging. 1926.856 Removal of walls, floors, and mate-
1926.754 Structural steel assembly. rial with equipment.
1926.755 Column anchorage. 1926.857 Storage.
1926.756 Beams and columns. 1926.858 Removal of steel construction.
1926.757 Open web steel joists. 1926.859 Mechanical demolition.
1926.758 Systems-engineered metal build- 1926.860 Selective demolition by explosives.
ings.
1926.759 Falling object protection. Subpart U—Blasting and the Use of
1926.760 Fall protection. Explosives
1926.761 Training.
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART R—GUIDELINES FOR 1926.900 General provisions.
ESTABLISHING THE COMPONENTS OF A SITE- 1926.901 Blaster qualifications.
SPECIFIC ERECTION PLAN: NON-MANDATORY 1926.902 Surface transportation of explo-
GUIDELINES FOR COMPLYING WITH sives.
§ 1926.752(E) 1926.903 Underground transportation of ex-
APPENDIX B TO SUBPART R [RESERVED] plosives.
APPENDIX C TO SUBPART R—ILLUSTRATIONS 1926.904 Storage of explosives and blasting
OF BRIDGING TERMINUS POINTS: NON-MAN- agents.
DATORY GUIDELINES FOR COMPLYING WITH 1926.905 Loading of explosives or blasting
§ 1926.757(A)(10) AND § 1926.757(C)(5) agents.
APPENDIX D TO SUBPART R—ILLUSTRATION OF 1926.906 Initiation of explosive charges—
THE USE OF CONTROL LINES TO DEMARCATE electric blasting.
CONTROLLED DECKING ZONES (CDZS): NON- 1926.907 Use of safety fuse.
MANDATORY GUIDELINES FOR COMPLYING 1926.908 Use of detonating cord.
WITH § 1926.760(C)(3) 1926.909 Firing the blast.
APPENDIX E TO SUBPART R—TRAINING: NON- 1926.910 Inspection after blasting.
MANDATORY GUIDELINES FOR COMPLYING 1926.911 Misfires.
WITH § 1926.761 1926.912 Underwater blasting.
APPENDIX F TO SUBPART R—PERIMETER COL- 1926.913 Blasting in excavation work under
UMNS: NON-MANDATORY GUIDELINES FOR compressed air.
COMPLYING WITH § 1926.756(E) TO PROTECT 1926.914 Definitions applicable to this sub-
THE UNPROTECTED SIDE OR EDGE OF A part.
WALKING/WORKING SURFACE
APPENDIX G TO SUBPART R—FALL PROTECTION Subpart V—Power Transmission and
SYSTEMS CRITERIA AND PRACTICES FROM Distribution
§ 1926.502: NON-MANDATORY GUIDELINES
FOR COMPLYING WITH COMPLYING WITH 1926.950 General requirements.
§ 1926.760(D) 1926.951 Tools and protective equipment.
APPENDIX H TO SUBPART R—DOUBLE CONNEC- 1926.952 Mechanical equipment.
TIONS: ILLUSTRATION OF A CLIPPED END 1926.953 Material handling.
Pt. 1926 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–13 Edition)
1926.954 Grounding for protection of em- RECORDKEEPING
ployees.
1926.1091 Recordkeeping requirements.
1926.955 Overhead lines.
1926.956 Underground lines. APPENDIX A TO SUBPART Y—EXAMPLES OF
1926.957 Construction in energized sub- CONDITIONS WHICH MAY RESTRICT OR
stations. LIMIT EXPOSURE TO HYPERBARIC CONDI-
1926.958 External load helicopters. TIONS
1926.959 Lineman’s body belts, safety straps, APPENDIX B TO SUBPART Y—GUIDELINES FOR
and lanyards. SCIENTIFIC DIVING
1926.960 Definitions applicable to this sub-
part. Subpart Z—Toxic and Hazardous
Substances
Subpart W—Rollover Protective Structures; 1926.1100 [Reserved]
Overhead Protection 1926.1101 Asbestos.
1926.1102 Coal tar pitch volatiles; interpre-
1926.1000 Rollover protective structures
tation of term.
(ROPS) for material handling equipment.
1926.1103 13 carcinogens (4-Nitrobiphenyl,
1926.1001 Minimum performance criteria for
etc.).
rollover protective structures for des-
1926.1104 alpha-Naphthylamine.
ignated scrapers, loaders, dozers, graders,
1926.1105 [Reserved]
and crawler tractors. 1926.1106 Methyl chloromethyl ether.
1926.1002 Protective frames (roll-over pro- 1926.1107 3,3′-Dichlorobenzidiene (and its
tective structures, known as ROPS) for salts).
wheel-type agricultural and industrial 1926.1108 bis-Chloromethyl ether.
tractors used in construction. 1926.1109 beta-Naphthylamine.
1926.1003 Overhead protection for operators 1926.1110 Benzidine.
of agricultural and industrial tractors 1926.1111 4-Aminodiphenyl.
used in construction. 1926.1112 Ethyleneimine.
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART W—FIGURES W–14 1926.1113 beta-Propiolactone.
THROUGH W–28 1926.1114 2-Acetylaminofluorene.
1926.1115 4-Dimethylaminoazobenzene.
Subpart X—Stairways and Ladders 1926.1116 N-Nitrosodimethylamine.
1926.1117 Vinyl chloride.
1926.1050 Scope, application, and definitions 1926.1118 Inorganic arsenic.
applicable to this subpart. 1926.1126 Chromium (VI).
1926.1051 General requirements. 1926.1127 Cadmium.
1926.1052 Stairways. 1926.1128 Benzene.
1926.1053 Ladders. 1926.1129 Coke oven emissions.
1926.1054–1926.1059 [Reserved] 1926.1144 1,2-dibromo-3-chloropropane.
1926.1060 Training requirements. 1926.1145 Acrylonitrile.
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART X—LADDERS 1926.1147 Ethylene oxide.
1926.1148 Formaldehyde.
Subpart Y—Diving 1926.1152 Methylene chloride.
GENERAL Subparts AA–BB [Reserved]

1926.1071 Scope and application. Subpart CC—Cranes and Derricks in
1926.1072 Definitions.
Construction
PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS
1926.1400 Scope.
1926.1076 Qualifications of dive team. 1926.1401 Definitions.
1926.1402 Ground conditions.
GENERAL OPERATIONS PROCEDURES 1926.1403 Assembly/Disassembly—selection
1926.1080 Safe practices manual. of manufacturer or employer procedures.
1926.1081 Pre-dive procedures. 1926.1404 Assembly/Disassembly—general re-
1926.1082 Procedures during dive. quirements (applies to all assembly and
1926.1083 Post-dive procedures. disassembly operations).
1926.1405 Disassembly—additional require-
SPECIFIC OPERATIONS PROCEDURES ments for dismantling of booms and jibs
(applies to both the use of manufacturer
1926.1084 SCUBA diving. procedures and employer procedures).
1926.1085 Surface-supplied air diving. 1926.1406 Assembly/Disassembly—employer
1926.1086 Mixed-gas diving. procedures—general requirements.
1926.1087 Liveboating. 1926.1407 Power line safety (up to 350 kV)—
assembly and disassembly.
EQUIPMENT PROCEDURES AND REQUIREMENTS
1926.1408 Power line safety (up to 350 kV)—
1926.1090 Equipment. equipment operations.
10
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.2
1926.1409 Power line safety (over 350 kV). and Health Standards contained in 29 CFR
1926.1410 Power line safety (all voltages)— part 1910, which have been identified as also
equipment operations closer than the applicable to construction work. This repub-
Table A zone. lication developed a single set of OSHA regu-
1926.1411 Power line safety—while traveling. lations for both labor and management
1926.1412 Inspections. forces within the construction industry.
1926.1413 Wire rope—inspection.
1926.1414 Wire rope—selection and installa-
tion criteria.
Subpart A—General
1926.1415 Safety devices.
1926.1416 Operational aids. AUTHORITY: 40 U.S.C. 333; 29 U.S.C. 653, 655,
1926.1417 Operation. 657; Secretary of Labor’s Order No. 12–71 (36
1926.1418 Authority to stop operation. FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736),
1926.1419 Signals—general requirements. 6–96 (62 FR 111), 5–2007 (72 FR 31160), 4–2010 (75
1926.1420 Signals—radio, telephone or other FR 55355), or 1–2012 (77 FR 3912), as applica-
electronic transmission of signals. ble; and 29 CFR part 1911.
1926.1421 Signals—voice signals—additional
requirements. § 1926.1 Purpose and scope.
1926.1422 Signals—hand signal chart.
1926.1423 Fall protection. (a) This part sets forth the safety and
1926.1424 Work area control. health standards promulgated by the
1926.1425 Keeping clear of the load. Secretary of Labor under section 107 of
1926.1426 Free fall and controlled load low- the Contract Work Hours and Safety
ering. Standards Act. The standards are pub-
1926.1427 Operator qualification and certifi- lished in subpart C of this part and fol-
cation. lowing subparts.
1926.1428 Signal person qualifications.
1926.1429 Qualifications of maintenance & (b) Subpart B of this part contains
repair employees. statements of general policy and inter-
1926.1430 Training. pretations of section 107 of the Con-
1926.1431 Hoisting personnel. tract Work Hours and Safety Stand-
1926.1432 Multiple-crane/derrick lifts—sup- ards Act having general applicability.
plemental requirements.
1926.1433 Design, construction and testing. § 1926.2 Variances from safety and
1926.1434 Equipment modifications. health standards.
1926.1435 Tower cranes.
1926.1436 Derricks. (a) Variances from standards which
1926.1437 Floating cranes/derricks and land are, or may be, published in this part
cranes/derricks on barges. may be granted under the same cir-
1926.1438 Overhead & gantry cranes. cumstances whereunder variances may
1926.1439 Dedicated pile drivers. be granted under section 6(b)(A) or 6(d)
1926.1440 Sideboom cranes. of the Williams-Steiger Occupational
1926.1441 Equipment with a rated hoisting/
lifting capacity of 2,000 pounds or less.
Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C.
1926.1442 Severability. 65). The procedures for the granting of
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART CC OF PART 1926— variances and for related relief under
STANDARD HAND SIGNALS this part are those published in part
APPENDIX B TO SUBPART CC OF PART 1926— 1905 of this title.
ASSEMBLY/DISASSEMBLY—SAMPLE PROCE- (b) Any requests for variances under
DURES FOR MINIMIZING THE RISK OF UNIN- this section shall also be considered re-
TENDED DANGEROUS BOOM MOVEMENT quests for variances under the Wil-
APPENDIX C TO SUBPART CC OF PART 1926— liams-Steiger Occupational Safety and
OPERATOR CERTIFICATION—WRITTEN EX-
Health Act of 1970, and any requests for
AMINATION—TECHNICAL KNOWLEDGE CRI-
TERIA
variances under Williams-Steiger Occu-
APPENDIX A TO PART 1926—DESIGNATIONS FOR pational Safety and Health Act with
GENERAL INDUSTRY STANDARDS INCOR- respect to construction safety or
PORATED INTO BODY OF CONSTRUCTION health standards shall be considered to
STANDARDS be also variances under the Construc-
SOURCE: 44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR tion Safety Act. Any variance from a
20940, Apr. 6, 1979, unless otherwise noted. construction safety or health standard
which is contained in this part and
EDITORIAL NOTE: At 44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979,
and corrected at 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979, which is incorporated by reference in
OSHA reprinted without change the entire part 1910 of this title shall be deemed a
text of 29 CFR part 1926 together with cer- variance from the standard under both
tain General Industry Occupational Safety the Construction Safety Act and the
11
§ 1926.3 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–13 Edition)
Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety publish a notice in the FEDERAL REG-
and Health Act of 1970. ISTER that the request has been re-
ceived and afford interested persons an
§ 1926.3 Inspections—right of entry. opportunity to be heard upon the re-
(a) It shall be a condition of each quest, and thereafter the provisions of
contract which is subject to section 107 part 6 of this title shall apply with re-
of the Contract Work Hours and Safety spect to prehearing conferences, hear-
Standards Act that the Secretary of ings and related matters, and decisions
Labor or any authorized representative and orders.
shall have a right of entry to any site
of contract performance for the fol- § 1926.5 OMB control numbers under
the Paperwork Reduction Act.
lowing purposes:
(1) To inspect or investigate the mat- The following sections or paragraphs
ter of compliance with the safety and each contain a collection of informa-
health standards contained in subpart tion requirement which has been ap-
C of this part and following subparts; proved by the Office of Management
and and Budget under the control number
(2) To carry out the duties of the Sec- listed.
retary under section 107(b) of the Act. OMB con-
(b) For the purpose of carrying out 29 CFR citation
trol No.
his investigative duties under the Act,
1926.33 ................................................................ 1218–0065
the Secretary of Labor may, by agree- 1926.50 ................................................................ 1218–0093
ment, use with or without reimburse- 1926.52 ................................................................ 1218–0048
ment the services, personnel, and fa- 1926.53 ................................................................ 1218–0103
1926.59 ................................................................ 1218–0072
cilities of any State or Federal agency. 1926.60 ................................................................ 1218–0183
Any agreements with States under this 1926.62 ................................................................ 1218–0189
section shall be similar to those pro- 1926.64 ................................................................ 1218–0200
1926.65 ................................................................ 1218–0202
vided for under the Walsh-Healey Pub- 1926.103 .............................................................. 1218–0099
lic Contracts Act under 41 CFR part 50– 1926.200 .............................................................. 1218–0132
205. 1926.250 .............................................................. 1218–0093
1926.251 .............................................................. 1218–0233
§ 1926.4 Rules of practice for adminis- 1926.403 .............................................................. 1218–0130
1926.404 .............................................................. 1218–0130
trative adjudications for enforce- 1926.405 .............................................................. 1218–0130
ment of safety and health stand- 1926.407 .............................................................. 1218–0130
ards. 1926.408 .............................................................. 1218–0130
1926.453(a)(2) ..................................................... 1218–0216
(a) The rules of practice for adminis- 1926.502 .............................................................. 1218–0197
trative adjudications for the enforce- 1926.503 .............................................................. 1218–0197
ment of the safety and health stand- 1926.550(a)(1) ..................................................... 1218–0115
ards contained in subpart C of this part 1926.550(a)(2) ..................................................... 1218–0115
1926.550(a)(4) ..................................................... 1218–0115
and the following subparts shall be the 1926.550(a)(6) ..................................................... 1218–0113
same as those published in part 6 of 1926.550(a)(11) ................................................... 1218–0054
this title with respect to safety and 1926.550(a)(16) ................................................... 1218–0115
1926.550(b)(2) ..................................................... 1218–0232
health violations of the Service Con- 1926.550(g) ......................................................... 1218–0151
tract Act of 1965 (69 Stat. 1035), except 1926.552 .............................................................. 1218–0231
as provided in paragraph (b) of this sec- 1926.652 .............................................................. 1218–0137
tion. 1926.703 .............................................................. 1218–0095
1926.800 .............................................................. 1218–0067
(b) In the case of debarment, the find- 1926.803 .............................................................. 1218–0067
ings required by section 107(d) of the 1926.900 .............................................................. 1218–0217
Act shall be made by the hearing exam- 1926.903 .............................................................. 1218–0227
1926.1080 ............................................................ 1218–0069
iner or the Assistant Secretary of 1926.1081 ............................................................ 1218–0069
Labor for Occupational Safety and 1926.1083 ............................................................ 1218–0069
Health, as the case may be. Whenever, 1926.1090 ............................................................ 1218–0069
as provided in section 107(d)(2), a con- 1926.1091 ............................................................ 1218–0069
1926.1101 ............................................................ 1218–0134
tractor requests termination of debar- 1926.1103 ............................................................ 1218–0085
ment before the end of the 3-year pe- 1926.1104 ............................................................ 1218–0084
riod prescribed in that section, the re- 1926.1106 ............................................................ 1218–0086
1926.1107 ............................................................ 1218–0083
quest shall be filed in writing with the 1926.1108 ............................................................ 1218–0087
Assistant Secretary of Labor for Occu- 1926.1109 ............................................................ 1218–0089
pational Safety and Health who shall 1926.1110 ............................................................ 1218–0082
12
29 CFR citation
OMB con- (2) The Regional and Field Offices of
trol No. the Occupational Safety and Health
1926.1111 ............................................................ 1218–0090 Administration, which are listed in the
1926.1112 ............................................................ 1218–0080 U.S. Government Manual.
1926.1113 ............................................................ 1218–0079 (b) The materials listed in para-
1926.1114 ............................................................ 1218–0088
1926.1115 ............................................................ 1218–0044 graphs (g) through (ff) of this section
1926.1116 ............................................................ 1218–0081 are incorporated by reference in the
1926.1117 ............................................................ 1218–0010 corresponding sections noted as they
1926.1118 ............................................................ 1218–0104
1926.1126 ............................................................ 1218–0252 exist on the date of the approval, and a
1926.1127 ............................................................ 1218–0186 notice of any change in these materials
1926.1128 ............................................................ 1218–0129 will be published in the FEDERAL REG-
1926.1129 ............................................................ 1218–0128
1926.1144 ............................................................ 1218–0101
ISTER. These incorporations by ref-
1926.1145 ............................................................ 1218–0126 erence were approved by the Director
1926.1147 ............................................................ 1218–0108 of the Federal Register in accordance
1926.1148 ............................................................ 1218–0145
1926.1402 ............................................................ 1218–0261
with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51.
1926.1403 ............................................................ 1218–0261 (c) Copies of standards listed in this
1926.1404 ............................................................ 1218–0261 section and issued by private standards
1926.1406 ............................................................ 1218–0261 organizations are available for pur-
1926.1407 ............................................................ 1218–0261
1926.1408 ............................................................ 1218–0261 chase from the issuing organizations at
1926.1409 ............................................................ 1218–0261 the addresses or through the other con-
1926.1410 ............................................................ 1218–0261 tact information listed below for these
1926.1411 ............................................................ 1218–0261
1926.1412 ............................................................ 1218–0261 private standards organizations. In ad-
1926.1413 ............................................................ 1218–0261 dition, these standards are available
1926.1414 ............................................................ 1218–0261 for inspection at the National Archives
1926.1417 ............................................................ 1218–0261
1926.1423 ............................................................ 1218–0261
and Records Administration (NARA).
1926.1424 ............................................................ 1218–0261 For information on the availability of
1926.1427 ............................................................ 1218–0261 these standards at NARA, telephone:
1926.1428 ............................................................ 1218–0261 202–741–6030, or go to http://
1926.1431 ............................................................ 1218–0261
1926.1433 ............................................................ 1218–0261 www.archives.gov/federallregister/
1926.1434 ............................................................ 1218–0261 codeloflfederallregulations/
1926.1435 ............................................................ 1218–0261 ibrllocations.html. Also, the standards
1926.1436 ............................................................ 1218–0261
1926.1437 ............................................................ 1218–0261 are available for inspection at any Re-
1926.1441 ............................................................ 1218–0261 gional Office of the Occupational Safe-
ty and Health Administration (OSHA),
[61 FR 5509, Feb. 13, 1996, as amended at 63 or at the OSHA Docket Office, U.S. De-
FR 3814, Jan. 27, 1998; 63 FR 13340, Mar. 19, partment of Labor, 200 Constitution
1998; 63 FR 17094, Apr. 8, 1998; 64 FR 18810, Avenue, NW., Room N–2625, Wash-
Apr. 16, 1999; 71 FR 38086, July 5, 2006; 75 FR ington, DC 20210; telephone: 202–693–2350
68430, Nov. 8, 2010] (TTY number: 877–889–5627).
(d)–(f) [Reserved]
§ 1926.6 Incorporation by reference. (g) The following material is avail-
(a) The standards of agencies of the able for purchase from the American
U.S. Government, and organizations Conference of Governmental Industrial
which are not agencies of the U.S. Gov- Hygienists (ACGIH), 1330 Kemper
ernment which are incorporated by ref- Meadow Drive, Cincinnati, OH 45240;
erence in this part, have the same force telephone: 513–742–6163; fax: 513–742–
and effect as other standards in this 3355; e-mail: mail@acgih.org; Web site:
part. Only the mandatory provisions http://www.acgih.org:
(i.e., provisions containing the word (1) Threshold Limit Values of Air-
‘‘shall’’ or other mandatory language) borne Contaminants for 1970, 1970, IBR
of standards incorporated by reference approved for § 1926.55(a) and appendix A
are adopted as standards under the Oc- of § 1926.55.
cupational Safety and Health Act. The (h) The following material is avail-
locations where these standards may able for purchase from the American
be examined are as follows: National Standards Institute (ANSI),
(1) Offices of the Occupational Safety 25 West 43rd Street, Fourth Floor, New
and Health Administration, U.S. De- York, NY 10036; telephone: 212–642–4900;
partment of Labor, Frances Perkins fax: 212–302–1286; e-mail: info@ansi.org;
Building, Washington, DC 20210. Web site: http://www.ansi.org/.
13
(1) ANSI A10.3–1970, Safety Require- (17) ANSI J6.1–1950 (R1971), Rubber
ments for Explosive-Actuated Fas- Insulating Line Hose, IBR approved for
tening Tools, IBR approved for § 1926.951(a).
§ 1926.302(e). (18) ANSI J6.2–1950 (R1971), Rubber
(2) ANSI A10.4–1963, Safety Require- Insulating Hoods, IBR approved for
ments for Workmen’s Hoists, IBR ap- § 1926.951(a).
proved for § 1926.552(c). (19) ANSI J6.4–1971, Rubber Insu-
(3) ANSI A10.5–1969, Safety Require- lating Blankets, IBR approved for
ments for Material Hoists, IBR ap- § 1926.951(a).
proved for § 1926.552(b). (20) ANSI J6.5–1971, Rubber Insu-
(4) ANSI A11.1–1965 (R1970), Practice lating Sleeves, IBR approved for
for Industrial Lighting, IBR approved § 1926.951(a).
for § 1926.56(b).
(21) ANSI J6.6–1971, Rubber Insu-
(5) ANSI A17.1–1965, Elevators,
Dumbwaiters, Escalators, and Moving lating Gloves, IBR approved for
Walks, IBR approved for § 1926.552(d). § 1926.951(a).
(6) ANSI A17.1a–1967, Elevators, (22) ANSI J6.7–1935 (R1971), Rubber
Dumbwaiters, Escalators, and Moving Matting for Use Around Electric Appa-
Walks Supplement, IBR approved for ratus, IBR approved for § 1926.951(a).
§ 1926.552(d). (23) ANSI O1.1–1961, Safety Code for
(7) ANSI A17.1b–1968, Elevators, Woodworking Machinery, IBR approved
Dumbwaiters, Escalators, and Moving for § 1926.304(f).
Walks Supplement, IBR approved for (24) ANSI Z35.1–1968, Specifications
§ 1926.552(d). for Accident Prevention Signs, IBR ap-
(8) ANSI A17.1c–1969, Elevators, proved for § 1926.200(i).
Dumbwaiters, Escalators, and Moving (25) ANSI Z35.2–1968, Specifications
Walks Supplement, IBR approved for for Accident Prevention Tags, IBR ap-
§ 1926.552(d). proved for § 1926.200(i).
(9) ANSI A17.1d–1970, Elevators, (26) ANSI Z49.1–1967, Safety in Weld-
Dumbwaiters, Escalators, and Moving ing and Cutting, IBR approved for
Walks Supplement, IBR approved for § 1926.350(j).
§ 1926.552(d). (27) ANSI Z87.1–1968, Practice for Oc-
(10) ANSI A17.2–1960, Practice for the cupational and Educational Eye and
Inspection of Elevators (Inspector’s Face Protection, IBR approved for
Manual), IBR approved for § 1926.552(d). § 1926.102(a).
(11) ANSI A17.2a–1965, Practice for
(28) American National Standards In-
the Inspection of Elevators (Inspector’s
stitute (ANSI) Z89.1–2009, American Na-
Manual) Supplement, IBR approved for
tional Standard for Industrial Head
§ 1926.552(d).
Protection, approved January 26, 2009;
(12) ANSI A17.2b–1967, Practice for
the Inspection of Elevators (Inspector’s IBR approved for § 1926.100(b)(1)(i). Cop-
Manual) Supplement, IBR approved for ies of ANSI Z89.1–2009 are available for
§ 1926.552(d). purchase only from the International
(13) ANSI A92.2–1969, Vehicle Mount- Safety Equipment Association, 1901
ed Elevating and Rotating Work Plat- North Moore Street, Arlington, VA
forms, IBR approved for §§ 1926.453(a) 22209–1762; telephone: 703–525–1695; fax:
and 1926.453(b). 703–528–2148; Web site:
(14) ANSI B7.1–1970, Safety Code for www.safetyequipment.org.
the Use, Care, and Protection of Abra- (29) American National Standards In-
sive Wheels, IBR approved for stitute (ANSI) Z89.1–2003, American Na-
§§ 1926.57(g), 1926.303(b), 1926.303(c), and tional Standard for Industrial Head
1926.303(d). Protection; IBR approved for
(15) ANSI B20.1–1957, Safety Code for § 1926.100(b)(1)(ii). Copies of ANSI Z89.1–
Conveyors, Cableways, and Related 2003 are available for purchase only
Equipment, IBR approved for from the International Safety Equip-
§ 1926.555(a). ment Association, 1901 North Moore
(16) ANSI B56.1–1969, Safety Stand- Street, Arlington, VA 22209–1762; tele-
ards for Powered Industrial Trucks, phone: 703–525–1695; fax: 703–528–2148;
IBR approved for § 1926.602(c). Web site: www.safetyequipment.org.
14
(30) American National Standards In- (1) ASME B30.2–2005, Overhead and
stitute (ANSI) Z89.1–1997, American Na- Gantry Cranes (Top Running Bridge,
tional Standard for Personnel Protec- Single or Multiple Girder, Top Running
tion—Protective Headwear for Indus- Trolley Hoist), issued Dec. 30, 2005
trial Workers—Requirements; IBR ap- (‘‘ASME B30.2–2005’’), IBR approved for
proved for § 1926.100(b)(1)(iii). Copies of § 1926.1438(b).
ANSI Z89.1–1997 are available for pur- (2) ASME B30.5–2004, Mobile and Lo-
chase only from the International Safe- comotive Cranes, issued Sept. 27, 2004
ty Equipment Association, 1901 North (‘‘ASME B30.5–2004’’), IBR approved for
Moore Street, Arlington, VA 22209–1762; §§ 1926.1414(b); 1926.1414(e); 1926.1433(b).
telephone: 703–525–1695; fax: 703–528– (3) ASME B30.7–2001, Base-Mounted
2148; Web site: www.safetyequipment.org. Drum Hoists, issued Jan. 21, 2002
(i) [Reserved] (‘‘ASME B30.7–2001’’), IBR approved for
(j) The following material is avail- § 1926.1436(e).
able for purchase from the American (4) ASME B30.14–2004, Side Boom
Society for Testing and Materials Tractors, issued Sept. 20, 2004 (‘‘ASME
(ASTM), ASTM International, 100 Barr B30.14–2004’’), IBR approved for
Harbor Drive, PO Box C700, West § 1926.1440(c).
Conshohocken, PA, 19428–2959; tele- (5) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
phone: 610–832–9585; fax: 610–832–9555; e- Code, Section VIII, 1968, IBR approved
mail: service@astm.org; Web site: http:// for §§ 1926.152(i), 1926.306(a), and
www.astm.org/: 1926.603(a).
(1) ASTM A370–1968, Methods and (6) ASME Power Boilers, Section I,
Definitions for Mechanical Testing and 1968, IBR approved for § 1926.603(a).
Steel Products, IBR approved for
(m) The following material is avail-
§ 1926.1001(f).
able for purchase from the American
(2) ASTM B117–1964, 50 Hour Test,
Welding Society (AWS), 550 N.W.
IBR approved for § 1926.959(a).
LeJeune Road, Miami, Florida 33126;
(3) ASTM D56–1969, Standard Method
telephone: 1–800–443–9353; Web site:
of Test for Flash Point by the Tag
http://www.aws.org/:
Closed Tester, IBR approved for
§ 1926.155(i). (1) AWS D1.1/D1.1M:2002, Structural
(4) ASTM D93–1969, Standard Method Welding Code—Steel, 18th ed., ANSI ap-
of Test for Flash Point by the Pensky proved Aug. 31, 2001 (‘‘AWS D1.1/
Martens Closed Tester, IBR approved D1.1M:2002’’), IBR approved for
for § 1926.155(i). § 1926.1436(c).
(5) ASTM D323–1958 (R1968), Standard (2) ANSI/AWS D14.3–94, Specification
Method of Test for Vapor Pressure of for Welding Earthmoving and Con-
Petroleum Products (Reid Method), struction Equipment, ANSI approved
IBR approved for § 1926.155(m). Jun. 11, 1993 (‘‘ANSI/AWS D14.3–94’’),
(k) The following material is avail- IBR approved for § 1926.1436(c).
able for purchase from the American (n) The following material is avail-
Society of Agricultural and Biological able for purchase from the British
Engineers (ASABE), 2950 Niles Road, Standards Institution (BSI), 389
St. Joseph, MI 49085; telephone: 269–429– Chiswick High Road, London, W4 4AL,
0300; fax: 269–429–3852; e-mail: United Kingdom; telephone: +44 20 8996
hq@asabe.org; Web site: http:// 9001; fax: +44 20 8996 7001; e-mail:
www.asabe.org/: cservices@bsigroup.com; Web site: http://
(1) ASAE R313.1–1971, Soil Cone Pene- www.bsigroup.com/:
trometer, reaffirmed 1975, IBR ap- (1) BS EN 13000:2004, Cranes—Mobile
proved for § 1926.1002(e). Cranes, published Jan. 4, 2006 (‘‘BS EN
(l) The following material is avail- 13000:2004’’), IBR approved for
able for purchase from the American § 1926.1433(c).
Society of Mechanical Engineers (2) BS EN 14439:2006, Cranes—Safety—
(ASME), Three Park Avenue, New Tower Cranes, published Jan. 31, 2007
York, NY 10016; telephone: 1–800–843– (‘‘BS EN 14439:2006’’), IBR approved for
2763; fax: 973–882–1717; e-mail: § 1926.1433(c).
infocentral@asme.org; Web site: http:// (o) The following material is avail-
www.asme.org/: able for purchase from the Bureau of
15
Reclamation, United States Depart- fax: +41 22 733 34 30; Web site: http://
ment of the Interior, 1849 C Street, www.iso.org/:
NW., Washington DC 20240; telephone: (1) ISO 11660–1:2008(E), Cranes—Ac-
202–208–4501; Web site: http:// cess, guards and restraints—Part 1:
www.usbr.gov/: General, 2d ed., Feb. 15, 2008 (‘‘ISO
(1) Safety and Health Regulations for 11660–1:2008(E)’’), IBR approved for
Construction, Part II, Sept. 1971, IBR § 1926.1423(c).
approved for § 1926.1000(f). (2) ISO 11660–2:1994(E), Cranes—Ac-
(p) The following material is avail- cess, guards and restraints—Part 2: Mo-
able for purchase from the California bile cranes, 1994 (‘‘ISO 11660–2:1994(E)’’),
Department of Industrial Relations, 455 IBR approved for § 1926.1423(c).
Golden Gate Avenue, San Francisco CA (3) ISO 11660–3:2008(E), Cranes—Ac-
94102; telephone: (415) 703–5070; e-mail: cess, guards and restraints—Part 3:
info@dir.ca.gov; Web site: http:// Tower cranes, 2d ed., Feb. 15, 2008 (‘‘ISO
www.dir.ca.gov/: 11660–3:2008(E)’’), IBR approved for
(1) Construction Safety Orders, IBR § 1926.1423(c).
approved for § 1926.1000(f). (y) The following material is avail-
(q)–(t) [Reserved] able for purchase from the National
(u) The following material is avail- Fire Protection Association (NFPA), 1
able for purchase from the Federal Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02169;
Highway Administration, United telephone: 617–770–3000; fax: 617–770–
States Department of Transportation, 0700; Web site: http://www.nfpa.org/:
1200 New Jersey Ave., SE., Washington, (1) NFPA 10A–1970, Maintenance and
DC 20590; telephone: 202–366–4000; Web Use of Portable Fire Extinguishers,
site: http://www.fhwa.dot.gov/: IBR approved for § 1926.150(c).
(1) Manual on Uniform Traffic Con-
(2) NFPA 13–1969, Standard for the In-
trol Devices, Millennium Edition, Dec.
stallation of Sprinkler Systems, IBR
2000, IBR approved for §§ 1926.200(g),
approved for § 1926.152(d).
1926.201(a), and 1926.202.
(3) NFPA 30–1969, The Flammable and
(v) The following material is avail-
Combustible Liquids Code, IBR ap-
able for purchase from the General
proved for § 1926.152(c).
Services Administration (GSA), 1800 F
Street, NW., Washington, DC 20405; (4) NFPA 80–1970, Standard for Fire
telephone: (202) 501–0800; Web site: Doors and Windows, Class E or F Open-
http://www.gsa.gov/: ings, IBR approved for § 1926.152(b).
(1) QQ–P–416, Federal Specification (5) NFPA 251–1969, Standard Methods
Plating Cadmium (Electrodeposited), of Fire Test of Building Construction
IBR approved for § 1926.104(e). and Material, IBR approved for
(w) The following material is avail- §§ 1926.152(b) and 1926.155(f).
able for purchase from the Institute of (6) NFPA 385–1966, Standard for Tank
Makers of Explosives (IME), 1120 19th Vehicles for Flammable and Combus-
Street, NW., Suite 310, Washington, DC tible Liquids, IBR approved for
20036; telephone: 202–429–9280; fax: 202– § 1926.152(g).
429–9280; e-mail: info@ime.org; Web site: (z) [Reserved]
http://www.ime.org/: (aa) The following material is avail-
(1) IME Pub. No. 2, American Table of able for purchase from the Power Crane
Distances for Storage of Explosives, and Shovel Association (PCSA), 6737 W.
Jun. 5, 1964, IBR approved for Washington Street, Suite 2400, Mil-
§ 1926.914(a). waukee, WI 53214; telephone: 1–800–369–
(2) IME Pub. No. 20, Radio Frequency 2310; fax: 414–272–1170; Web site: http://
Energy—A Potential Hazard in the Use www.aem.org/CBC/ProdSpec/PCSA/:
of Electric Blasting Caps, Mar. 1968, (1) PCSA Std. No. 1, Mobile Crane
IBR approved for § 1926.900(k). and Excavator Standards, 1968, IBR ap-
(x) The following material is avail- proved for § 1926.602(b).
able for purchase from the Inter- (2) PCSA Std. No. 2, Mobile Hydraulic
national Organization for Standardiza- Crane Standards, 1968 (‘‘PCSA Std. No.
tion (ISO), 1, ch. de la Voie-Creuse, 2 (1968)’’), IBR approved for
Case postale 56, CH–1211 Geneva 20, §§ 1926.602(b), 1926.1433(a), and
Switzerland; telephone: +41 22 749 01 11; 1926.1501(a).
16
(3) PCSA Std. No. 3, Mobile Hydraulic tive Structure for Motor Graders, IBR
Excavator Standards, 1969, IBR ap- approved for § 1926.1001(h).
proved for § 1926.602(b). (15) SAE J397–1969, Critical Zone
(bb)–(cc) [Reserved] Characteristics and Dimensions for Op-
(dd) The following material is avail- erators of Construction and Industrial
able for purchase from the Society of Machinery, IBR approved for
Automotive Engineers (SAE), 400 Com- § 1926.1001(f).
monwealth Drive, Warrendale, PA (16) SAE J743a–1964, Tractor Mounted
15096; telephone: 1–877–606–7323; fax: 724– Side Boom, 1964 (‘‘SAE J743a–1964’’),
776–0790; Web site: http://www.sae.org/:
IBR approved for § 1926.1501(a).
(1) SAE 1970 Handbook, IBR approved
for § 1926.602(b). (17) SAE J959–1966, Lifting Crane
(2) SAE 1971 Handbook, IBR approved Wire-Rope Strength Factors, 1966
for § 1926.1001(h). (‘‘SAE J959–1966’’), IBR approved for
(3) SAE J166–1971, Trucks and Wag- § 1926.1501(a).
ons, IBR approved for § 1926.602(a). (18) SAE J987 (rev. Jun. 2003), Lattice
(4) SAE J168–1970, Protective Enclo- Boom Cranes—Method of Test, revised
sures—Test Procedures and Perform- Jun. 2003 (‘‘SAE J987 (Jun. 2003)’’), IBR
ance Requirements, IBR approved for approved for § 1926.1433(c).
§ 1926.1002(a). (19) SAE J1063 (rev. Nov. 1993), Canti-
(5) SAE J185 (reaf. May 2003), Access levered Boom Crane Structures—Meth-
Systems for Off-Road Machines, re- od of Test, revised Nov. 1993 (‘‘SAE
affirmed May 2003 (‘‘SAE J185 (May J1063 (Nov. 1993)’’), IBR approved for
1993)’’), IBR approved for § 1926.1423(c). § 1926.1433(c).
(6) SAE J236–1971, Self-Propelled (ee) The following material is avail-
Graders, IBR approved for § 1926.602(a). able for purchase from the United
(7) SAE J237–1971, Front End Loaders States Army Corps of Engineers, 441 G
and Dozers, IBR approved for Street, NW., Washington, DC 20314;
§ 126.602(a).
telephone: 202–761–0011; e-mail: hq-
(8) SAE J319b–1971, Self-Propelled
publicaffairs@usace.army.mil; Web site:
Scrapers, IBR approved for § 1926.602(a).
http://www.usace.army.mil/:
(9) SAE J320a–1971, Minimum Per-
formance Criteria for Roll-Over Protec- (1) EM–385–1–1, General Safety Re-
tive Structure for Rubber-Tired, Self- quirements, Mar. 1967, IBR approved
Propelled Scrapers, IBR approved for for § 1926.1000(f).
§ 1926.1001(h). (ff) The following material is avail-
(10) SAE J321a–1970, Fenders for able for purchase from standards re-
Pneumatic-Tired Earthmoving Haulage sellers such as the Document Center
Equipment, IBR approved for Inc., 111 Industrial Road, Suite 9, Bel-
§ 1926.602(a). mont, CA 94002; telephone: 650–591–7600;
(11) SAE J333a–1970, Operator Protec- fax: 650–591–7617; e-mail: info@document-
tion for Agricultural and Light Indus- center.com; Web site: http://
trial Tractors, IBR approved for www.document-center.com/:
§ 1926.602(a). (1) ANSI B15.1–1953 (R1958), Safety
(11) SAE J386–1969, Seat Belts for Code for Mechanical Power-Trans-
Construction Equipment, IBR approved mission Apparatus, revised 1958, IBR
for § 1926.602(a). approved for §§ 1926.300(b)(2) and
(12) SAE J394–1971, Minimum Per- 1926.1501(a).
formance Criteria for Roll-Over Protec-
(2) ANSI B30.2.0–1967, Safety Code for
tive Structure for Rubber-Tired Front
Overhead and Gantry Cranes, approved
End Loaders and Robber-Tired Dozers,
IBR approved for § 1926.1001(h). May 4, 1967, IBR approved for
(13) SAE J395–1971, Minimum Per- § 1926.1501(d).
formance Criteria for Roll-Over Protec- (3) ANSI B30.5–1968, Crawler, Loco-
tive Structure for Crawler Tractors motive, and Truck Cranes, approved
and Crawler-Type Loaders, IBR ap- Dec. 16, 1968, IBR approved for
proved for § 1926.1001(h). §§ 1926.1433(a), 1926.1501(a), and
(14) SAE J396–1971, Minimum Per- 1926.1501(b).
formance Criteria for Roll-Over Protec-
17
(4) ANSI B30.6–1969, Safety Code for 1695; fax: 703–528–2148; Web site:
Derricks, approved Dec. 18, 1967, IBR www.safetyequipment.org.
approved for § 1926.1501(e).
[75 FR 48130, Aug. 9, 2010, as amended at 77
* * * * *
FR 37600, June 22, 2012] (u) * * *
EFFECTIVE DATE NOTE: At 78 FR 35567, June (1) Manual on Uniform Traffic Control De-
13, 2013, § 1926.6 was amended by revising vices (MUTCD), Part VI, Standards and
paragraph (h)(24); redesignating paragraphs Guides for Traffic Controls for Street and
(h)(27) through (h)(30) as (h)(31) through Highway Construction, Maintenance, Util-
(h)(34) and paragraph (u)(1) as (u)(2); adding ity, and Incident Management Operation,
paragraphs (h)(27) through (h)(30), and (u)(1); 1988 Edition, Revision 3, September 3, 1993;
and revising newly redesignated paragraph IBR approved for §§ 1926.200(g), 1926.201(a),
(u)(2), effective Sept. 11, 2013. For the con- and 1926.202. Electronic copies of the
venience of the user, the added and revised MUTCD, 1988 Edition, Revision 3, are avail-
text is set forth as follows: able for downloading at http://www.osha.gov/
doc/highwaylworkzones/mutcd/index.html.
§ 1926.6 Incorporation by reference. (2) Manual on Uniform Traffic Control De-
vices (MUTCD), Millennium Edition, Dec.
* * * * * 2000; IBR approved for §§ 1926.200(g)),
1926.201(a), and 1926.202. Electronic copies of
(h) * * * the MUTCD 2000 are available for
(24) ANSI Z35.1–1968, Specifications for Ac- downloading at http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov/kno-
cident Prevention Signs; IBR approved for millenniuml12.18.00.htm.
§ 1926.200(b), (c), and 1 (i). Copies available for
purchase from the IHS Standards Store, 15
Inverness Way East, Englewood, CO 80112; * * * * *
telephone: 1–877–413–5184; Web site:
www.global.ihs.com. Subpart B—General
Interpretations
* * * * *
(27) USA Z53.1–1967 (also referred to as AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours
ANSI Z53.1–1967), Safety Color Code for and Safety Standards Act (Construction
Marking Physical Hazards, ANSI approved Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333).
October 9, 1967; IBR approved for § 1926.200(c).
Copies available for purchase from the IHS § 1926.10 Scope of subpart.
Standards Store, 15 Inverness Way East, En-
glewood, CO 80112; telephone: 1–877–413–5184;
(a) This subpart contains the general
Web site: www.global.ihs.com. rules of the Secretary of Labor inter-
(28) ANSI Z535.1–2006(R2011), Safety Colors, preting and applying the construction
reaffirmed July 19, 2011; IBR approved for safety and health provisions of section
§ 1926.200(c). Copies available for purchase 107 of the Contract Work Hours and
from the International Safety Equipment Safety Standards Act (83 Stat. 96). Sec-
Association, 1901 North Moore Street, Ar- tion 107 requires as a condition of each
lington, VA 22209–1762; telephone: 703–525–
contract which is entered into under
1695; fax: 703–528–2148; Web site:
www.safetyequipment.org. legislation subject to Reorganization
(29) ANSI Z535.2–2011, Environmental and Plan Number 14 of 1950 (64 Stat. 1267),
Facility Safety Signs, published September and which is for construction, alter-
15, 2011; IBR approved for § 1926.200(b), (c), ation, and/or repair, including painting
and (i). Copies available for purchase from and decorating, that no contractor or
the International Safety Equipment Associa- subcontractor contracting for any part
tion, 1901 North Moore Street, Arlington, VA
of the contract work shall require any
22209–1762; telephone: 703–525–1695; fax: 703–
528–2148; Web site: www.safetyequipment.org. laborer or mechanic employed in the
(30) ANSI Z535.5–2011, Safety Tags and Bar- performance of the contract to work in
ricade Tapes (for Temporary Hazards), pub- surroundings or under working condi-
lished September 15, 2011, including Errata, tions which are unsanitary, hazardous,
November 14, 2011; IBR approved for or dangerous to his health or safety, as
§ 1926.200(h) and (i). Copies available for pur- determined under construction safety
chase from the International Safety Equip-
and health standards promulgated by
ment Association, 1901 North Moore Street,
Arlington, VA 22209–1762; telephone: 703–525– the Secretary by regulation.
18
§ 1926.11 Coverage under section 103 applied, such as the Contract Work
of the act distinguished. Hours Standards Act by virtue of sec-
(a) Coverage under section 103. It is im- tion 104(d) thereof.
portant to note that the coverage of (b) The Plan. (1) The statutes subject
section 107 differs from that for the to Reorganization Plan No. 14 of 1950
overtime requirements of the Contract are cited and briefly described in the
Work Hours and Safety Standards Act. remaining paragraphs of this section.
The application of the overtime re- These descriptions are general in na-
quirements is governed by section 103, ture and not intended to convey the
which subject to specific exemptions, full scope of the work to be performed
includes: (1) Federal contracts requir- under each statute. The individual
ing or involving the employment of la- statutes should be resorted to for a
borers or mechanics (thus including, more detailed scope of the work.
but not limited to, contracts for con- (2) Federal-Aid Highway Acts. The pro-
struction), and (2) contracts assisted in visions codified in 23 U.S.C. 113 apply
whole or in part by Federal loans, to the initial construction, reconstruc-
grants, or guarantees under any stat- tion, or improvement work performed
ute ‘‘providing wage standards for such by contractors or subcontractors on
work.’’ The statutes ‘‘providing wage highway projects on the Federal-aid
standards for such work’’ include stat- systems, the primary and secondary, as
utes for construction which require the well as their extensions in urban areas,
payment of minimum wages in accord- and the Interstate System, authorized
ance with prevailing wage findings by under the highway laws providing for
the Secretary of Labor in accordance the expenditure of Federal funds upon
with the Davis-Bacon Act. A provision the Federal-aid system. As cited in 41
to section 103 excludes from the over- Op. A.G. 488, 496, the Attorney General
time requirements work where the ruled that the Federal-Aid Highway
Federal assistance is only in the form Acts are subject to Reorganization
of a loan guarantee or insurance. Plan No. 14 of 1950.
(b) Coverage under section 107. To be
(3) National Housing Act (12 U.S.C.
covered by section 107 of the Contract
1713, 1715a, 1715e, 1715k, 1715l(d)(3) and
Work Hours and Safety Standards Act,
(4), 1715v, 1715w, 1715x, 1743, 1747, 1748,
a contract must be one which (1) is en-
1748h–2, 1750g, 1715l(h)(1), 1715z(j)(1),
tered into under a statute that is sub-
1715z–1, 1715y(d), Subchapter 1x-A and
ject to Reorganization Plan No. 14 of
1x-B, 1715z–7). This act covers construc-
1950 (64 Stat. 1267); and (2) is for ‘‘con-
tion which is financed with assistance
struction, alteration, and/or repair, in-
by the Federal Government through
cluding painting and decorating.’’
programs of loan and mortgage insur-
§ 1926.12 Reorganization Plan No. 14 ance for the following purposes:
of 1950. (i) Rental Housing—Section 1713 pro-
(a) General provisions. Reorganization vides mortgage and insurance on rental
Plan No. 14 of 1950 relates to the pre- housing of eight or more units and on
scribing by the Secretary of Labor of mobile-home courts.
‘‘appropriate standards, regulations, (ii) Section 1715a—Repealed.
and procedures’’ with respect to the en- (iii) Cooperative Housing—Section
forcement of labor standards under 1715e authorizes mortgage insurance on
Federal and federally assisted con- cooperative housing of five or more
tracts which are subject to various units as well as supplementary loans
statutes subject to the Plan. The rules for improvement of repair or resale of
of the Secretary of Labor imple- memberships.
menting the Plan are published in part (iv) Urban Renewal Housing—Section
5 of this title. Briefly, the statutes sub- 1715k provides mortgage insurance on
ject to the Plan include the Davis- single family or multifamily housing
Bacon Act, including its extension to in approved urban renewal areas.
Federal-aid highway legislation subject (v) Low or Moderate Income Hous-
to 23 U.S.C. 113, and other statutes sub- ing—Section 1715L(d) (3) and (4) insures
ject to the Plan by its original terms, mortgages on low-cost single family or
statutes by which the Plan is expressly multifamily housing.
19
(vi) Housing for Elderly—Section ments are also authorized for certain
1715v provides mortgage insurance on State or locally aided projects.
rental housing for elderly or handi- (xvii) Condominium Housing—Sec-
capped persons. tion 1715y(d) provides mortgage insur-
(vii) Nursing Homes—Section 1715w ance on property purchased for the de-
authorizes mortgage insurance on velopment of building sites. This in-
nursing home facilities and major cludes waterlines and water supply in-
equipment. stallations, sewer lines and sewage dis-
(viii) Experimental Housing—Section posal installations, steam, gas, and
1715x provides mortgage insurance on electrical lines and installations,
single family or multifamily housing roads, streets, curbs, gutters, side-
with experimental design of materials. walks, storm drainage facilities, and
(ix) War Housing Insurance—Section other installations or work.
1743 not active. (xviii) Group Medical Practice Facili-
(x) Yield Insurance—Section 1747 in- ties—Subchapter LX-B authorizes
sures investment returns on multi- mortgage insurance for the financing
family housing. of construction and equipment, of fa-
(xi) Armed Services Housing—Sec- cilities for group practice of medicine,
tion 1748b to assist in relieving acute optometry, or dentistry.
shortage and urgent need for family (xix) Nonprofit Hospitals—1715z–7 au-
housing at or in areas adjacent to mili- thorizes mortgage insurance to cover
tary installations. new and rehabilitated hospitals, in-
(xii) Defense Housing for Impacted cluding initial equipment.
Areas—Section 1748h–2 provides mort- (4) Hospital Survey and Construction
gage insurance on single family or Act, as amended by the Hospital and
multifamily housing for sale or rent Medical Facilities Amendments of 1964 (42
primarily to military or civilian per- U.S.C. 291e). The provisions of this Act
sonnel of the Armed Services, National cover construction contracts made by
Aeronautics and Space Administration, State or local authorities or private in-
or Atomic Energy Commission. stitutions under Federal grant-in-aid
(xiii) Defense Rental Housing—Sec- programs for the construction of hos-
tion 1750g provides for mortgage insur- pitals and other medical facilities.
ance in critical defense housing areas. (5) Federal Airport Act (49 U.S.C.
(xiv) Rehabilitation—Section 1715L 1114(b)). The act provides grant-in-aid
(h)(1) provides mortgage insurance for funds for airport construction limited
nonprofit organizations to finance the to general site preparation runways,
purchase and rehabilitation of deterio- taxiways, aprons, lighting appurtenant
rating or substandard housing for sub- thereto, and fire, rescue, and mainte-
sequent resale to low-income home nance buildings. The act excludes con-
purchasers. There must be located on struction intended for use as a public
the property five or more single family parking facility for passenger auto-
dwellings of detached, semidetached, or mobiles and the cost of construction of
row construction. any part of an airport building except
(xv) Homeowner Assistance—Section such of those buildings or parts of
1715Z(j)(1) authorizes mortgage insur- buildings to house facilities or activi-
ance to nonprofit organizations or pub- ties directly related to the safety of
lic bodies or agencies executed to fi- persons at the airport.
nance sale of individual dwellings to (6) Housing Act of 1949 (42 U.S.C. 1459).
lower income individuals or families. Construction contracts awarded by
Also includes the rehabilitation of such local authorities financed with the as-
housing if it is deteriorating or sub- sistance of loans and grants from the
standard for subsequent resale to lower Federal Government. The construction
income home purchasers. programs are for slum clearance and
(xvi) Rental Housing Assistance— urban renewal which includes rehabili-
Section 1715Z–1 authorizes mortgage tation grants, neighborhood develop-
insurance and interest reduction payment programs, neighborhood renewal
ments on behalf of owners of rental plans, community renewal, demolition
housing projects designed for occu- projects, and assistance for blighted
pancy by lower income families. Pay- areas. See the Housing Act of 1964,
20
paragraph (b)(21) of this section, con- from. Construction includes new build-
cerning financial assistance for low- ings, and the acquisition, expansion,
rent housing for domestic farm labor. remodeling, replacement, and alter-
(7) School Survey and Construction Act ation of existing buildings and the
of 1950 (20 U.S.C. 636). This act provides equipping of new buildings and existing
for a Federal grant-in-aid program to buildings.
assist in the construction of schools in (13) Health Professions Educational As-
federally affected areas. sistance Act of 1963 (42 U.S.C. 292d (c)(4),
(8) Defense Housing & Community Fa- 293a(c)(5)). The provisions of this act
cilities & Services Act of 1951 (42 U.S.C. provide for grants to assist public and
1592i). Inactive Program. nonprofit medical, dental, and similar
(9) United States Housing Act of 1937 schools for the construction, expan-
(42 U.S.C. 1416). This statute covers the sion, or renovation of teaching facili-
construction of low-rent public housing ties.
and slum clearance projects awarded (14) Mental Retardation Facilities Con-
by local authorities. These projects are struction Act (42 U.S.C. 295(a)(2)(D),
financed with the assistance of loans 2662(5), 2675(a)(5)). This act authorizes
and grants from the Federal Govern- Federal financial assistance in the con-
ment. The slum clearance is the demo- struction of centers for research on
lition and removal of buildings from mental retardation and related aspects
any slum area to be used for a low-rent of human development, of university-
housing project. affiliated facilities for the mentally re-
(10) Federal Civil Defense Act of 1950 (50 tarded and of facilities for the men-
U.S.C. App. 2281). This act provides for tally retarded.
Federal assistance to the several
(15) Community Mental Health Centers
States and their political subdivisions
Act (42 U.S.C. 2685(a)(5)). This act au-
in the field of civil defense which in-
thorizes Federal grants for the con-
cludes procurement, construction, leas-
struction of public and other nonprofit
ing, or renovating of materials and fa-
community mental health centers.
cilities.
(11) Delaware River Basin Compact (16) Higher Education Facilities Act of
(sec. 15.1, 75 Stat. 714). This joint resolu- 1963 (20 U.S.C. 753). This act authorizes
tion creates, by intergovernmental the grant or loan of Federal funds to
compact between the United States, assist public and other nonprofit insti-
Delaware, New Jersey, New York, and tutions of higher education in financ-
Pennsylvania, a regional agency for ing the construction, rehabilitation, or
planning, conservation, utilization, de- improvement of academic and related
velopment, management and control of facilities in undergraduate and grad-
the water and related sources of the uate schools.
Delaware River. (17) Vocational Educational Act of 1963
(12) Cooperative Research Act (20 U.S.C. (20 U.S.C. 35f). This act provides for
332a(c)). This act provides Federal Federal grants to the various States
grants to a university, college, or other for construction of area vocational
appropriate public or nonprofit private education school facilities.
agency or institution for part or all of (18) Library Services and Construction
the cost of constructing a facility for Act (20 U.S.C. 355e(a)(4)). This act pro-
research or for research and related vides for Federal assistance to the var-
purposes. Research and related pur- ious States for the construction of pub-
poses means research, research train- lic libraries.
ing, surveys, or demonstrations in the (19) Urban Mass Transportation Act of
field of education, or the dissemination 1954 (49 U.S.C. 1609). This act provides
of information derived therefrom, or for grants and loans to assist States
all of such activities, including (but and local public bodies and agencies
without limitation) experimental thereof in financing the acquisition,
schools, except that such term does not construction, reconstruction, and im-
include research, research training, provement of facilities and equipment
surveys, or demonstrations in the field for use, by operation or lease or other-
of sectarian instruction or the dissemi- wise, in mass transportation service in
nation of information derived there- urban areas and in coordinating such
21
service with highway and other trans- required to conform the property to ap-
portation in such areas. plicable code requirements or carry out
(20) Economic Opportunity Act of 1964 the objectives of the urban renewal
(42 U.S.C. 2947). This act covers con- plan for the area.
struction which is financed with assist- (22) The Commercial Fisheries Research
ance of the Federal Government for the and Development Act of 1964 (16 U.S.C.
following purposes: 779e(b)). This Act authorizes financial
(i) Authorizes Federal assistance for assistance to State agencies for con-
construction of projects, buildings and struction projects designed for the re-
works which will provide young men search and development of the com-
and women in rural and urban residen- mercial fisheries resources of the Na-
tial centers with education, vocational tion.
training, and useful work experience (23) The Nurse Training Act of 1964 (42
(Title I). U.S.C. 296a(b)(5)). This act provides for
(ii) Authorizes financial assistance grants to assist in the construction of
for construction work planned and car- new facilities for collegiate, associate
ried out at the community level for degree, and diploma schools of nursing,
antipoverty programs (Title II): or replacement or rehabilitation of ex-
(a) Authorizes loans to low income isting facilities of such schools.
rural families by assisting them to ac- (24) Elementary and Secondary Edu-
quire or improve real estate or reduce cation Act of 1965 (20 U.S.C. 241i, 848).
encumbrances or erect improvements The purpose of the act is to provide fi-
thereon, and to participate in coopera- nancial assistance to local educational
tive associations and/or to finance non- agencies serving areas with concentra-
agricultural enterprises which will en- tions of children from low-income fam-
able such families to supplement their ilies for construction in connection
income (Title III); with the expansion or improvement of
(b) Authorizes loans to local coopera- their educational programs.
tive associations furnishing essential (25) Federal Water Pollution Control
processing, purchasing, or marketing Act, as amended by the Water Quality Act
services, supplies, or facilities predomi- of 1965 (3 U.S.C. 466e(g)). Provides for fi-
nantly to low-income rural families nancial assistance to States or munici-
(Title III); palities for construction of facilities in
(c) Authorizes financial assistance to connection with the prevention and
States, political subdivisions of States, control of water pollution. This in-
public and nonprofit agencies, institu- cludes projects that will control the
tions, organizations, farm associations, discharge into any waters of untreated
or individuals in establishing housing, or inadequately treated sewage.
sanitation, education, and child day- (26) Appalachian Regional Development
care programs for migrants and other Act of 1965 (40 U.S.C. App. 402). Author-
seasonally employed agricultural em- izes Federal assistance in the construc-
ployees and their families (Title III). tion of an Appalachian development
(iii) Authorizes loans or guarantees highway system; construction of multi-
loans to small businesses for construc- county demonstration health facilities,
tion work (Title IV). hospitals, regional health, diagnostic
(iv) Authorizes the payment of the and treatment centers, and other fa-
cost of experimental, pilot, or dem- cilities for health; seal and fill voids in
onstration projects to foster State pro- abandoned mines and to rehabilitate
grams providing construction work ex- strip mine areas; construction of
perience or training for unemployed fa- school facilities for vocational edu-
thers and needy people (Title V). cation; and to assist in construction of
(21) Housing Act of 1964 (42 U.S.C. sewage treatment works.
1486(f); 42 U.S.C. 1452b(e)). Provides fi- (27) National Technical Institute for the
nancial assistance for low-rent housing Deaf Act (20 U.S.C. 684(b)(5)). Provides
for domestic farm labor. The Act fur- for financial assistance for institutions
ther provides for loans, through public of higher education for the establish-
or private agencies, where feasible, to ment, construction, including equip-
owners or tenants of property in urban ment and operation, of a National In-
renewal areas to finance rehabilitation stitution for the Deaf.
22
(28) Housing Act of 1959 (12 U.S.C. tivity, including construction of nec-
1701(q)(c)(3)). This act authorizes loans essary facilities.
to nonprofit corporations to be used for (32) Public Works and Economic Devel-
the construction of housing and related opment Act of 1965 (42 U.S.C. 3222). This
facilities for elderly families. Also, the act provides for Federal assistance for
provisions of the act provide for reha- the following purposes:
bilitation, alteration, conversion or (i) Grants for the acquisition or de-
improvement of existing structures velopment of land or improvements for
which are otherwise inadequate for public works or development facility
proposed dwellings used by such fami- usage in redevelopment areas. It au-
lies. thorizes loans to assist in financing the
(29) College Housing Act of 1950, as purchase or development of land for
amended (12 U.S.C. 1749a(f)). This act public works which will assist in the
provides for Federal loans to assist creation of long-term employment op-
educational institutions in providing portunities in the area.
housing and other educational facili- (ii) Loans for the purchase or devel-
ties for students and faculties. opment of land and facilities (including
(30) Housing and Urban Development machinery and equipment) for indus-
Act of 1965 (42 U.S.C. 1500c–3, 3107). This trial or commercial usage within rede-
act provides for Federal assistance for velopment areas; guarantee of loans for
the following purposes: working capital made to private bor-
rowers by private lending institutions
(i) Grants to States and local public
in connection with direct loan projects;
bodies to assist in any construction
and to contract to pay to, or on behalf
work to be carried out under the open-
of, business entities locating in rede-
space land and urban beautification
velopment areas, a portion of the inter-
provisions contained therein. It pro-
est costs which they incur in financing
vides for parks and recreation areas,
their expansions from private sources.
conservation of land and other natural
(iii) Loans and grants to create eco-
resources, and historical and scenic
nomic development centers within des-
purposes. ignated county economic development
(ii) Grants to local public bodies and districts.
agencies to finance specific projects for (33) High-Speed Ground Transportation
basic public water facilities (including Study (40 U.S.C. 1636(b)). This act pro-
works for the storage, treatment, puri- vides for financial assistance for con-
fication, and distribution of water), struction activities in connection with
and for basic public sewer facilities research and development of different
(other than ‘‘treatment works’’ as de- forms of high-speed ground transpor-
fined in the Federal Water Pollution tation and demonstration projects re-
Control Act). lating to intercity rail passenger serv-
(iii) Grants to any local public body ice.
or agency to assist in financing neigh- (34) Heart Disease, Cancer and Stroke
borhood facilities. These facilities Amendments of 1965 (42 U.S.C. 299(b)(4)).
must be necessary for carrying out a This act provides for grants to public
program of health, recreational, social, or nonprofit private universities, med-
or similar community service and lo- ical schools, research, institutions,
cated so as to be available for the use hospitals, and other public and non-
of the area’s low or moderate income profit agencies and institutions, or as-
residents. sociations thereof to assist in construc-
(31) National Foundation on the Arts tion and equipment of facilities in con-
and the Humanities Act of 1965 (20 U.S.C. nection with research, training, dem-
954(k)). The act establishes the ‘‘Na- onstration of patient care, diagnostic
tional Foundation on the Arts and the and treatment related to heart disease,
Humanities’’ which may provide cancer, stroke, and other major dis-
matching grants to groups (nonprofit eases.
organizations and State and other pub- (35) Mental Retardation Facilities and
lic organizations) and to individuals Community Mental Health Centers Con-
engaged in creative and performing struction Act Amendments of 1965 (20
arts for the entire range of artistic ac- U.S.C. 618(g)). These provisions provide
23
for grants to institutions of higher edu- (43) Allied Health Professions Personnel
cation for construction of facilities for Training Act of 1966 (42 U.S.C.
research or for research and related 295h(b)(2)(E)). This act provides for
purposes relating to education for men- grants to assist in the construction of
tally retarded, hard of hearing, deaf, new facilities for training centers for
speech impaired, visually handicapped, allied health professions, or replace-
seriously emotionally disturbed, crip- ment or rehabilitation of existing fa-
pled, or other health impaired children cilities for such centers.
who by reason thereof require special (44) Demonstration Cities and Metro-
education. politan Development Act of 1966 (42
(36) Vocational Rehabilitation Act U.S.C. 3310; 12 U.S.C. 1715c; 42 U.S.C.
Amendments of 1965 (29 U.S.C. 41a(b)(4)). 1416). This act provides for Federal as-
This act authorizes grants to assist in sistance for the following purposes:
meeting the costs of construction of (i) Grants to assist in the construc-
public or other nonprofit workshops tion, rehabilitation, alteration, or re-
and rehabilitation facilities. pair of residential property only if such
(37) Clean Air and Solid Waste Disposal residential property is designed for res-
Acts (42 U.S.C. 3256). This act provides idential use for eight or more families
for financial assistance to public (Fed- to enable city demonstration agencies
eral, State, interstate, or local) au- to carry out comprehensive city dem-
thorities, agencies, and institutions, onstration programs (42 U.S.C. 3310).
private agencies and institutions, and (ii) Amends the National Housing Act
individuals in the construction of fa- (12 U.S.C. 1715c) and the Housing Act of
cilities for solid-waste disposal. The 1937 (42 U.S.C. 1416). See these acts for
term construction includes the instal- coverage.
lation of initial equipment. (45) Air Quality Act of 1967 (42 U.S.C.
1857j–3). This act provides for Federal
(38) Medical Library Assistance Act of
assistance to public or nonprofit agen-
1965 (42 U.S.C. 280b–3(b)(3)). This act
cies, institutions, and organizations
provides for grants to public or private
and to individuals, and contracts with
non-profit agencies or institutions for
public or private agencies, institutions,
the cost of construction of medical li- or persons for construction of research
brary facilities. and development facilities and dem-
(39) Veterans Nursing Home Care Act onstration plants relating to the appli-
(38 U.S.C. 5035(a)(8)). The construction cation of preventing or controlling dis-
industry health and safety standards charges into the air of various types of
do not apply to this act since it is not pollutants.
subject to Reorganization Plan No. 14 (46) Elementary and Secondary Edu-
of 1950. cation Amendments of 1967 (Title VII—Bi-
(40) National Capital Transportation lingual Education Act) (20 U.S.C. 880b–6).
Act of 1965 (40 U.S.C. 682(b)(4)). This act This act provides for Federal assist-
provides for Federal assistance to the ance to local educational agencies or
National Capital Transportation Agen- to an institution of higher education
cy for construction of a rail rapid tran- applying jointly with a local edu-
sit system and related facilities for the cational agency for minor remodeling
Nation’s Capital. projects in connection with bilingual
(41) Alaska Centennial—1967 (80 Stat. education programs to meet the special
82). The program under this legislation needs of children with limited English-
has expired. speaking ability in the United States.
(42) Model Secondary School for the (47) Vocational Rehabilitation Amend-
Deaf Act (80 Stat. 1028). This act pro- ments of 1967 (29 U.S.C. 42a(c)(3)). This
vides for funds to establish and oper- act authorizes Federal assistance to
ate, including construction and initial any public or nonprofit private agency
equipment of new buildings, expansion, or organization for the construction of
remodeling, and alteration of existing a center for vocational rehabilitation
buildings and equipment thereof, a of handicapped individuals who are
model secondary school for the deaf to both deaf and blind which shall be
serve the residents of the District of known as the National Center for Deaf-
Columbia and nearby States. Blind Youths and Adults. Construction
24
includes new buildings and expansion, and treatment of alcoholism or treat-
remodeling, alteration and renovation ment of narcotic addicts.)
of existing buildings, and initial equip- (52) Vocational Education Amendments
ment of such new, newly acquired, ex- of 1968 (20 U.S.C. 1246). This act pro-
panded, remodeled, altered, or ren- vides for grants to States for the con-
ovated buildings. struction of area vocational education
(48) National Visitor Center Facilities school facilities. The act further pro-
Act of 1968 (40 U.S.C. 808). This act au- vides grants to public educational
thorizes agreements and leases with agencies, organizations, or institutions
the owner of property in the District of for construction of residential schools
Columbia known as Union Station for to provide vocational education for the
the use of all or a part of such property purpose of demonstrating the feasi-
for a national visitor center to be bility and desirability of such schools.
known as the National Visitor Center. The act still further provides grants to
The agreements and leases shall pro- State boards, to colleges and univer-
vide for such alterations of the Union sities, to public educational agencies,
Station Building as necessary to pro- organizations or institutions to reduce
vide adequate facilities for visitors. the cost of borrowing funds for the con-
They also provide for the construction struction of residential schools and
of a parking facility, including nec- dormitories.
essary approaches and ramps. (53) Postal Reorganization Act (39
(49) Juvenile Delinquency Prevention U.S.C. 410(d)(2)). This Act provides for
and Control Act of 1968 (42 U.S.C. 3843). construction, modification, alteration,
This act provides for Federal grants to repair, and other improvements of
State, county, municipal, or other pub- postal facilities located in leased build-
lic agency or combination thereof for ings.
the construction of facilities to be used (54) Airport and Airway Development
Act of 1970 (Pub. L. 91–258, section
in connection with rehabilitation serv-
52(b)(7)). This Act provides for Federal
ices for the diagnosis, treatment, and
financial assistance to States and lo-
rehabilitation of delinquent youths and
calities for the construction, improve-
youths in danger of becoming delin-
ment, or repair of public airports.
quent.
(55) (i) Public Law 91–230. This Act
(50) Housing and Urban Development provides for federal financial assist-
Act of 1968 (including New Communities ance to institutions of higher learning
Act of 1968) (42 U.S.C. 3909). This act for the construction of a National Cen-
provides for Federal assistance for the ter on Educational Media and Mate-
following purposes: rials for the Handicapped. The program
(i) Guarantees, and commitments to under this statute expires on July 1,
guarantee, the bonds, debentures, 1971. Public Law 91–230, section 662(1).
notes, and other obligations issued by (ii) Education of the Handicapped Act
new community developers to help fi- (20 U.S.C. 12326, 1404(a)). This Act pro-
nance new community development vides for financial assistance to States
projects. for construction, expansion, remod-
(ii) Amends section 212(a) of the Na- eling, or alteration of facilities for the
tional Housing Act, adding section 236 education of handicapped children at
for ‘‘Rental Housing for Lower Income the preschool, elementary school, and
Families’’ and section 242 ‘‘Mortgage secondary school levels.
Insurance for Nonprofit Hospitals’’ (56) Housing and Urban Development
thereto. Act of 1970 (Pub. L. 91–609, section
(51) Public Health Service Act Amend- 707(b)). This Act provides for grants to
ment (Alcoholic and Narcotic Addict Re- States and local public agencies to help
habilitation Amendments of 1968) (42 finance the development of open-space
U.S.C. 2681, et seq.). This act provides or other land in urban areas for open-
for grants to a public and nonprofit pri- space uses. This Act becomes effective
vate agency or organization for con- on July 1, 1971.
struction projects consisting of any fa- (57) Developmental Disabilities Services
cilities (including post-hospitalization and Facilities Construction Amendments
treatment facilities for the prevention of 1970 (Pub. L. 91–517, section 135(a)(5)).
25
This Act authorizes grants to States mechanics ‘‘employed directly’’ upon
for construction of facilities for the the ‘‘site of the work.’’ There is no
provision of services to persons with comparable limitation in section 107 of
developmental disabilities who are un- the Act. Section 107 expressly requires
able to pay for such services. as a self-executing condition of each
(58) Rail Passenger Service Act of 1970 covered contract that no contractor or
(Pub. L. 91–518, section 405(d)). This stat- subcontractor shall require ‘‘any la-
ute provides that the National Rail- borer or mechanic employed in the per-
road Passenger Corporation may conformance of the contract to work in
struct physical facilities necessary to surroundings or under working condi-
intercity rail passenger operations tions which are unsanitary, hazardous,
within the basic national rail pas- or dangerous to his health or safety’’ as
senger system designated by the Sec- these health and safety standards are
retary of Transportation. applied in the rules of the Secretary of
(c) VA and FHA housing. In the course Labor.
of the legislative development of sec- (c) The term subcontractor under sec-
tion 107, it was recognized that section tion 107 is considered to mean a person
107 would not apply to housing con- who agrees to perform any part of the
struction for which insurance was labor or material requirements of a
issued by the Federal Housing Author- contract for construction, alteration or
ity and Veterans’ Administration for repair. Cf. MacEvoy Co. v. United
individual home ownership. Concerning States, 322 U.S. 102, 108–9 (1944). A per-
construction under the National Hous- son who undertakes to perform a por-
ing Act, Reorganization Plan No. 14 of tion of a contract involving the fur-
1950 applies to construction which is nishing of supplies or materials will be
subject to the minimum wage require- considered a ‘‘subcontractor’’ under
ments of section 212(a) thereof (12 this part and section 107 if the work in
U.S.C. 1715c). question involves the performance of
construction work and is to be per-
§ 1926.13 Interpretation of statutory formed: (1) Directly on or near the con-
terms. struction site, or (2) by the employer
(a) The terms construction, alteration, for the specific project on a customized
and repair used in section 107 of the Act basis. Thus, a supplier of materials
are also used in section 1 of the Davis- which will become an integral part of
Bacon Act (40 U.S.C. 276a), providing the construction is a ‘‘subcontractor’’
minimum wage protection on Federal if the supplier fabricates or assembles
construction contracts, and section 1 of the goods or materials in question spe-
the Miller Act (40 U.S.C. 270a), pro- cifically for the construction project
viding performance and payment bond and the work involved may be said to
protection on Federal construction be construction activity. If the goods
contracts. Similarly, the terms con- or materials in question are ordinarily
tractor and subcontractor are used in sold to other customers from regular
those statutes, as well as in Copeland inventory, the supplier is not a ‘‘sub-
(Anti-Kickback) Act (40 U.S.C. 276c) contractor.’’ Generally, the furnishing
and the Contract Work Hours and Safe- of prestressed concrete beams and
ty Standards Act itself, which apply prestressed structural steel would be
concurrently with the Miller Act and considered manufacturing; therefore a
the Davis-Bacon Act on Federal con- supplier of such materials would not be
struction contracts and also apply to considered a ‘‘subcontractor.’’ An ex-
most federally assisted construction ample of material supplied ‘‘for the
contracts. The use of the same or iden- specific project on a customized basis’’
tical terms in these statutes which as that phrase is used in this section
apply concurrently with section 107 of would be ventilating ducts, fabricated
the Act have considerable precedential in a shop away from the construction
value in ascertaining the coverage of job site and specifically cut for the
section 107. project according to design specifica-
(b) It should be noted that section 1 tions. On the other hand, if a con-
of the Davis-Bacon Act limits min- tractor buys standard size nails from a
imum wage protection to laborers and foundry, the foundry would not be a
26
covered ‘‘subcontractor.’’ Ordinarily a clear from the legislative history of
contract for the supplying of construc- section 107 that no gaps in coverage be-
tion equipment to a contractor would tween the two statutes are intended.
not, in and of itself, be considered a (b) The Walsh-Healey Public Con-
‘‘subcontractor’’ for purposes of this tracts Act requires that contracts en-
part. tered into by any Federal agency for
the manufacture or furnishing of mate-
§ 1926.14 Federal contract for ‘‘mixed’’ rials, supplies, articles, and equipment
types of performance. in any amount exceeding $10,000 must
(a) It is the intent of the Congress to contain, among other provisions, a re-
provide safety and health protection of quirement that ‘‘no part of such con-
Federal, federally financed, or feder- tract will be performed nor will any of
ally assisted construction. See, for ex- the materials, supplies, articles or
ample, H. Report No. 91–241, 91st Cong., equipment to be manufactured or fur-
first session, p. 1 (1969). Thus, it is clear nished under said contract be manufac-
that when a Federal contract calls for tured or fabricated in any plants, fac-
mixed types of performance, such as tories, buildings, or surroundings or
both manufacturing and construction, under working conditions which are
section 107 would apply to the con- unsanitary or hazardous or dangerous
struction. By its express terms, section to the health and safety of employees
107 applies to a contract which is ‘‘for engaged in the performance of said
construction, alteration, and/or re- contract.’’ The rules of the Secretary
pair.’’ Such a contract is not required concerning these standards are pub-
to be exclusively for such services. The lished in 41 CFR part 50–204, and ex-
application of the section is not lim- press the Secretary of Labor’s interpre-
ited to contracts which permit an over- tation and application of section 1(e) of
all characterization as ‘‘construction the Walsh-Healey Public Contracts Act
contracts.’’ The text of section 107 is to certain particular working condi-
not so limited. tions. None of the described working
(b) When the mixed types of perform- conditions are intended to deal with
ances include both construction and construction activities, although such
manufacturing, see also § 1926.15(b) con- activities may conceivably be a part of
cerning the relationship between the a contract which is subject to the
Walsh-Healey Public Contracts Act and Walsh-Healey Public Contracts Act.
section 107. Nevertheless, such activities remain
subject to the general statutory duty
§ 1926.15 Relationship to the Service prescribed by section 1(e). Section
Contract Act; Walsh-Healey Public 103(b) of the Contract Work Hours and
Contracts Act. Safety Standards Act provides, among
(a) A contract for ‘‘construction’’ is other things, that the Act shall not
one for nonpersonal service. See, e.g., apply to any work required to be done
41 CFR 1–1.208. Section 2(e) of the Serv- in accordance with the provisions of
ice Contract Act of 1965 requires as a the Walsh-Healey Public Contracts
condition of every Federal contract Act.
(and bid specification therefor) exceed-
ing $2,500, the ‘‘principal purpose’’ of § 1926.16 Rules of construction.
which is to furnish services to the (a) The prime contractor and any
United States through the use of subcontractors may make their own
‘‘service employees,’’ that certain safe- arrangements with respect to obliga-
ty and health standards be met. See 29 tions which might be more appro-
CFR part 1925, which contains the De- priately treated on a jobsite basis rath-
partment rules concerning these stand- er than individually. Thus, for exam-
ards. Section 7 of the Service Contract ple, the prime contractor and his sub-
Act provides that the Act shall not contractors may wish to make an ex-
apply to ‘‘any contract of the United press agreement that the prime con-
States or District of Columbia for contractor or one of the subcontractors
struction, alteration, and/or repair, in- will provide all required first-aid or
cluding painting and decorating of pub- toilet facilities, thus relieving the sub-
lic buildings or public works.’’ It is contractors from the actual, but not
27
any legal, responsibility (or, as the subcontractor for any part of the con-
case may be, relieving the other sub- tract work shall require any laborer or
contractors from this responsibility). mechanic employed in the performance
In no case shall the prime contractor of the contract to work in sur-
be relieved of overall responsibility for roundings or under working conditions
compliance with the requirements of which are unsanitary, hazardous, or
this part for all work to be performed dangerous to his health or safety.
under the contract. (b) Accident prevention responsibilities.
(b) By contracting for full perform- (1) It shall be the responsibility of the
ance of a contract subject to section employer to initiate and maintain such
107 of the Act, the prime contractor as- programs as may be necessary to com-
sumes all obligations prescribed as em- ply with this part.
ployer obligations under the standards (2) Such programs shall provide for
contained in this part, whether or not frequent and regular inspections of the
he subcontracts any part of the work. job sites, materials, and equipment to
(c) To the extent that a subcon- be made by competent persons des-
tractor of any tier agrees to perform ignated by the employers.
any part of the contract, he also as- (3) The use of any machinery, tool,
sumes responsibility for complying material, or equipment which is not in
with the standards in this part with re- compliance with any applicable re-
spect to that part. Thus, the prime quirement of this part is prohibited.
contractor assumes the entire responsi- Such machine, tool, material, or equip-
bility under the contract and the sub- ment shall either be identified as un-
contractor assumes responsibility with safe by tagging or locking the controls
respect to his portion of the work. to render them inoperable or shall be
With respect to subcontracted work,
physically removed from its place of
the prime contractor and any subcon-
operation.
tractor or subcontractors shall be
(4) The employer shall permit only
deemed to have joint responsibility.
those employees qualified by training
(d) Where joint responsibility exists,
or experience to operate equipment and
both the prime contractor and his sub-
machinery.
contractor or subcontractors, regard-
less of tier, shall be considered subject (c) The standards contained in this
to the enforcement provisions of the part shall apply with respect to em-
Act. ployments performed in a workplace in
a State, the District of Columbia, the
Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, the
Subpart C—General Safety and Virgin Islands, American Samoa,
Health Provisions Guam, Trust Territory of the Pacific
Islands, Wake Island, Outer Conti-
AUTHORITY: Sec. 3704, Contract Work Hours nental Shelf lands defined in the Outer
and Safety Standards Act (40 U.S.C. 333); Continental Shelf Lands Act, Johnston
secs. 4, 6, and 8, Occupational Safety and Island, and the Canal Zone.
Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657);
Secretary of Labor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR (d) (1) If a particular standard is spe-
8754), 8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 6– cifically applicable to a condition,
96 (62 FR 111), or 5–2007 (72 FR 31160) as appli- practice, means, method, operation, or
cable; and 29 CFR part 1911. process, it shall prevail over any dif-
ferent general standard which might
§ 1926.20 General safety and health otherwise be applicable to the same
provisions. condition, practice, means, method, op-
(a) Contractor requirements. (1) Sec- eration, or process.
tion 107 of the Act requires that it (2) On the other hand, any standard
shall be a condition of each contract shall apply according to its terms to
which is entered into under legislation any employment and place of employ-
subject to Reorganization Plan Number ment in any industry, even though par-
14 of 1950 (64 Stat. 1267), as defined in ticular standards are also prescribed
§ 1926.12, and is for construction, alter- for the industry to the extent that
ation, and/or repair, including painting none of such particular standards ap-
and decorating, that no contractor or plies.
28
(e) In the event a standard protects ards or other exposure to illness or in-
on its face a class of persons larger jury.
than employees, the standard shall be (3) Employees required to handle or
applicable under this part only to em- use poisons, caustics, and other harm-
ployees and their employment and ful substances shall be instructed re-
places of employment. garding the safe handling and use, and
(f) Compliance duties owed to each em- be made aware of the potential haz-
ployee—(1) Personal protective equipment. ards, personal hygiene, and personal
Standards in this part requiring the protective measures required.
employer to provide personal protec- (4) In job site areas where harmful
tive equipment (PPE), including res- plants or animals are present, employ-
pirators and other types of PPE, be- ees who may be exposed shall be in-
cause of hazards to employees impose a structed regarding the potential haz-
separate compliance duty with respect ards, and how to avoid injury, and the
to each employee covered by the re- first aid procedures to be used in the
quirement. The employer must provide event of injury.
(5) Employees required to handle or
PPE to each employee required to use
use flammable liquids, gases, or toxic
the PPE, and each failure to provide
materials shall be instructed in the
PPE to an employee may be considered
safe handling and use of these mate-
a separate violation.
rials and made aware of the specific re-
(2) Training. Standards in this part quirements contained in subparts D, F,
requiring training on hazards and re- and other applicable subparts of this
lated matters, such as standards re- part.
quiring that employees receive train- (6)(i) All employees required to enter
ing or that the employer train employ- into confined or enclosed spaces shall
ees, provide training to employees, or be instructed as to the nature of the
institute or implement a training pro- hazards involved, the necessary pre-
gram, impose a separate compliance cautions to be taken, and in the use of
duty with respect to each employee protective and emergency equipment
covered by the requirement. The em- required. The employer shall comply
ployer must train each affected em- with any specific regulations that
ployee in the manner required by the apply to work in dangerous or poten-
standard, and each failure to train an tially dangerous areas.
employee may be considered a separate (ii) For purposes of paragraph (b)(6)(i)
violation. of this section, confined or enclosed
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, space means any space having a limited
1979, as amended at 58 FR 35078, June 30, 1993; means of egress, which is subject to the
73 FR 75588, Dec. 12, 2008] accumulation of toxic or flammable
contaminants or has an oxygen defi-
§ 1926.21 Safety training and edu- cient atmosphere. Confined or enclosed
cation. spaces include, but are not limited to,
(a) General requirements. The Sec- storage tanks, process vessels, bins,
retary shall, pursuant to section 107(f) boilers, ventilation or exhaust ducts,
of the Act, establish and supervise pro- sewers, underground utility vaults,
grams for the education and training of tunnels, pipelines, and open top spaces
employers and employees in the rec- more than 4 feet in depth such as pits,
ognition, avoidance and prevention of tubs, vaults, and vessels.
unsafe conditions in employments cov- § 1926.22 Recording and reporting of
ered by the act. injuries. [Reserved]
(b) Employer responsibility. (1) The em-
ployer should avail himself of the safe- § 1926.23 First aid and medical atten-
ty and health training programs the tion.
Secretary provides. First aid services and provisions for
(2) The employer shall instruct each medical care shall be made available
employee in the recognition and avoid- by the employer for every employee
ance of unsafe conditions and the regu- covered by these regulations. Regula-
lations applicable to his work environ- tions prescribing specific requirements
ment to control or eliminate any haz- for first aid, medical attention, and
29
emergency facilities are contained in personal protective equipment in all
subpart D of this part. operations where there is an exposure
to hazardous conditions or where this
§ 1926.24 Fire protection and preven- part indicates the need for using such
tion. equipment to reduce the hazards to the
The employer shall be responsible for employees.
the development and maintenance of (b) Regulations governing the use, se-
an effective fire protection and preven- lection, and maintenance of personal
tion program at the job site through- protective and lifesaving equipment
out all phases of the construction, re- are described under subpart E of this
pair, alteration, or demolition work. part.
The employer shall ensure the avail-
ability of the fire protection and sup- § 1926.29 Acceptable certifications.
pression equipment required by subpart (a) Pressure vessels. Current and valid
F of this part. certification by an insurance company
or regulatory authority shall be
§ 1926.25 Housekeeping. deemed as acceptable evidence of safe
(a) During the course of construction, installation, inspection, and testing of
alteration, or repairs, form and scrap pressure vessels provided by the em-
lumber with protruding nails, and all ployer.
other debris, shall be kept cleared from (b) Boilers. Boilers provided by the
work areas, passageways, and stairs, in employer shall be deemed to be in com-
and around buildings or other struc- pliance with the requirements of this
tures. part when evidence of current and valid
(b) Combustible scrap and debris certification by an insurance company
shall be removed at regular intervals or regulatory authority attesting to
during the course of construction. Safe the safe installation, inspection, and
means shall be provided to facilitate testing is presented.
such removal. (c) Other requirements. Regulations
(c) Containers shall be provided for prescribing specific requirements for
the collection and separation of waste, other types of pressure vessels and
trash, oily and used rags, and other similar equipment are contained in
refuse. Containers used for garbage and subparts F and O of this part.
other oily, flammable, or hazardous
wastes, such as caustics, acids, harmful § 1926.30 Shipbuilding and ship repair-
ing.
dusts, etc. shall be equipped with cov-
ers. Garbage and other waste shall be (a) General. Shipbuilding, ship repair-
disposed of at frequent and regular ining, alterations, and maintenance per-
tervals. formed on ships under Government
contract, except naval ship construc-
§ 1926.26 Illumination. tion, is work subject to the Act.
Construction areas, aisles, stairs, (b) Applicable safety and health stand-
ramps, runways, corridors, offices, ards. For the purpose of work carried
shops, and storage areas where work is out under this section, the safety and
in progress shall be lighted with either health regulations in part 1915 of this
natural or artificial illumination. The title, Shipyard Employment, shall
minimum illumination requirements apply.
for work areas are contained in subpart [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
D of this part. 1979, as amended at 61 FR 9249, Mar. 7, 1996]
§ 1926.27 Sanitation. § 1926.32 Definitions.

Health and sanitation requirements The following definitions shall apply
for drinking water are contained in in the application of the regulations in
subpart D of this part. this part:
(a) Act means section 107 of the Con-
§ 1926.28 Personal protective equip- tract Work Hours and Safety Stand-
ment. ards Act, commonly known as the Con-
(a) The employer is responsible for struction Safety Act (86 Stat. 96; 40
requiring the wearing of appropriate U.S.C. 333).
30
(b) ANSI means American National (k) Employer means contractor or
Standards Institute. subcontractor within the meaning of
(c) Approved means sanctioned, en- the Act and of this part.
dorsed, accredited, certified, or accept- (l) Hazardous substance means a sub-
ed as satisfactory by a duly constituted stance which, by reason of being explo-
and nationally recognized authority or sive, flammable, poisonous, corrosive,
agency. oxidizing, irritating, or otherwise
(d) Authorized person means a person harmful, is likely to cause death or in-
approved or assigned by the employer jury.
to perform a specific type of duty or (m) Qualified means one who, by pos-
duties or to be at a specific location or session of a recognized degree, certifi-
locations at the jobsite. cate, or professional standing, or who
(e) Administration means the Occupa- by extensive knowledge, training, and
tional Safety and Health Administra- experience, has successfully dem-
tion. onstrated his ability to solve or resolve
(f) Competent person means one who is problems relating to the subject mat-
capable of identifying existing and pre- ter, the work, or the project.
dictable hazards in the surroundings or (n) Safety factor means the ratio of
working conditions which are unsani- the ultimate breaking strength of a
tary, hazardous, or dangerous to em- member or piece of material or equip-
ployees, and who has authorization to
ment to the actual working stress or
take prompt corrective measures to
safe load when in use.
eliminate them.
(o) Secretary means the Secretary of
(g) Construction work. For purposes of
this section, Construction work means Labor.
work for construction, alteration, and/ (p) SAE means Society of Automotive
or repair, including painting and deco- Engineers.
rating. (q) Shall means mandatory.
(h) Defect means any characteristic (r) Should means recommended.
or condition which tends to weaken or (s) Suitable means that which fits,
reduce the strength of the tool, object, and has the qualities or qualifications
or structure of which it is a part. to meet a given purpose, occasion, con-
(i) Designated person means ‘‘author- dition, function, or circumstance.
ized person’’ as defined in paragraph (d)
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
of this section. 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35078, June 30, 1993]
(j) Employee means every laborer or
mechanic under the Act regardless of § 1926.33 Access to employee exposure
the contractual relationship which and medical records.
may be alleged to exist between the la-
NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
borer and mechanic and the contractor
struction work under this section are iden-
or subcontractor who engaged him. tical to those set forth at § 1910.1020 of this
‘‘Laborer and mechanic’’ are not de- chapter.
fined in the Act, but the identical
terms are used in the Davis-Bacon Act [61 FR 31431, June 20, 1996]
(40 U.S.C. 276a), which provides for
minimum wage protection on Federal § 1926.34 Means of egress.
and federally assisted construction (a) General. In every building or
contracts. The use of the same term in structure exits shall be so arranged and
a statute which often applies concur- maintained as to provide free and un-
rently with section 107 of the Act has obstructed egress from all parts of the
considerable precedential value in building or structure at all times when
ascertaining the meaning of ‘‘laborer it is occupied. No lock or fastening to
and mechanic’’ as used in the Act. La- prevent free escape from the inside of
borer generally means one who per- any building shall be installed except
forms manual labor or who labors at an in mental, penal, or corrective institu-
occupation requiring physical strength; tions where supervisory personnel is
mechanic generally means a worker continually on duty and effective pro-
skilled with tools. See 18 Comp. Gen. visions are made to remove occupants
341. in case of fire or other emergency.
31
(b) Exit marking. Exits shall be cient number of persons to assist in the
marked by a readily visible sign. Ac- safe and orderly emergency evacuation
cess to exits shall be marked by readily of employees.
visible signs in all cases where the exit (2) The employer shall review the
or way to reach it is not immediately plan with each employee covered by
visible to the occupants. the plan at the following times:
(c) Maintenance and workmanship. (i) Initially when the plan is devel-
Means of egress shall be continually oped,
maintained free of all obstructions or (ii) Whenever the employee’s respon-
impediments to full instant use in the sibilities or designated actions under
case of fire or other emergency. the plan change, and
[58 FR 35083, June 30, 1993] (iii) Whenever the plan is changed.
(3) The employer shall review with
§ 1926.35 Employee emergency action each employee upon initial assignment
plans. those parts of the plan which the em-
(a) Scope and application. This section ployee must know to protect the em-
applies to all emergency action plans ployee in the event of an emergency.
required by a particular OSHA stand- The written plan shall be kept at the
ard. The emergency action plan shall workplace and made available for em-
be in writing (except as provided in the ployee review. For those employers
last sentence of paragraph (e)(3) of this with 10 or fewer employees the plan
section) and shall cover those des- may be communicated orally to em-
ignated actions employers and employ- ployees and the employer need not
ees must take to ensure employee safe- maintain a written plan.
ty from fire and other emergencies.
[58 FR 35083, June 30, 1993]
(b) Elements. The following elements,
at a minimum, shall be included in the
plan: Subpart D—Occupational Health
(1) Emergency escape procedures and and Environmental Controls
emergency escape route assignments;
(2) Procedures to be followed by em- AUTHORITY: Section 107 of the Contract
ployees who remain to operate critical Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (40
plant operations before they evacuate; U.S.C. 3704); Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occu-
(3) Procedures to account for all em- pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29
ployees after emergency evacuation U.S.C. 653, 655, and 657); and Secretary of La-
has been completed; bor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR
25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55 FR 9033), 6–
(4) Rescue and medical duties for
96 (62 FR 111), 3–2000 (65 FR 50017), 5–2002 (67
those employees who are to perform FR 65008), 5–2007 (72 FR 31159), 4–2010 (75 FR
them; 55355), or 1–2012 (77 FR 3912) as applicable;
(5) The preferred means of reporting and 29 CFR part 1911.
fires and other emergencies; and Sections 1926.58, 1926.59, 1926.60, and 1926.65
(6) Names or regular job titles of per- also issued under 5 U.S.C. 553 and 29 CFR
sons or departments who can be con- part 1911.
tacted for further information or expla- Section 1926.61 also issued under 49 U.S.C.
nation of duties under the plan. 1801–1819 and 6 U.S.C. 553.
(c) Alarm system. (1) The employer Section 1926.62 also issued under section
1031 of the Housing and Community Develop-
shall establish an employee alarm sys- ment Act of 1992 (42 U.S.C. 4853).
tem which complies with § 1926.159. Section 1926.65 also issued under section
(2) If the employee alarm system is 126 of the Superfund Amendments and Reau-
used for alerting fire brigade members, thorization Act of 1986, as amended (re-
or for other purposes, a distinctive sig- printed at 29 U.S.C.A. 655 Note), and 5 U.S.C.
nal for each purpose shall be used. 553.
(d) Evacuation. The employer shall
establish in the emergency action plan § 1926.50 Medical services and first
the types of evacuation to be used in aid.
emergency circumstances. (a) The employer shall insure the
(e) Training. (1) Before implementing availability of medical personnel for
the emergency action plan, the em- advice and consultation on matters of
ployer shall designate and train a suffi- occupational health.
32
(b) Provisions shall be made prior to tities and types of supplies and equipment in
commencement of the project for the first aid kits.
prompt medical attention in case of se- In a similar fashion, employers who have
rious injury. unique or changing first-aid needs in their
workplace may need to enhance their first-
(c) In the absence of an infirmary, aid kits. The employer can use the OSHA 300
clinic, hospital, or physician, that is log, OSHA 301 log, or other reports to iden-
reasonably accessible in terms of time tify these unique problems. Consultation
and distance to the worksite, which is from the local fire/rescue department, appro-
available for the treatment of injured priate medical professional, or local emer-
employees, a person who has a valid gency room may be helpful to employers in
certificate in first-aid training from these circumstances. By assessing the spe-
the U.S. Bureau of Mines, the Amer- cific needs of their workplace, employers can
ican Red Cross, or equivalent training ensure that reasonably anticipated supplies
that can be verified by documentary are available. Employers should assess the
specific needs of their worksite periodically
evidence, shall be available at the
and augment the first aid kit appropriately.
worksite to render first aid. If it is reasonably anticipated employees
(d)(1) First aid supplies shall be eas- will be exposed to blood or other potentially
ily accessible when required. infectious materials while using first-aid
(2) The contents of the first aid kit supplies, employers should provide personal
shall be placed in a weatherproof con- protective equipment (PPE). Appropriate
tainer with individual sealed packages PPE includes gloves, gowns, face shields,
for each type of item, and shall be masks and eye protection (see ‘‘Occupational
checked by the employer before being Exposure to Blood borne Pathogens’’, 29 CFR
1910.1030(d)(3)) (56 FR 64175).
sent out on each job and at least week-
ly on each job to ensure that the ex- [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
pended items are replaced. 1979, as amended at 49 FR 18295, Apr. 30, 1984;
(e) Proper equipment for prompt 58 FR 35084, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13,
1996; 63 FR 33469, June 18, 1998; 76 FR 80740,
transportation of the injured person to
Dec. 27, 2011]
a physician or hospital, or a commu-
nication system for contacting nec- § 1926.51 Sanitation.
essary ambulance service, shall be pro-
vided. (a) Potable water. (1) An adequate sup-
(f) In areas where 911 is not available, ply of potable water shall be provided
the telephone numbers of the physi- in all places of employment.
cians, hospitals, or ambulances shall be (2) Portable containers used to dis-
conspicuously posted. pense drinking water shall be capable
(g) Where the eyes or body of any of being tightly closed, and equipped
person may be exposed to injurious cor- with a tap. Water shall not be dipped
rosive materials, suitable facilities for from containers.
quick drenching or flushing of the eyes (3) Any container used to distribute
and body shall be provided within the drinking water shall be clearly marked
work area for immediate emergency as to the nature of its contents and not
use. used for any other purpose.
(4) The common drinking cup is pro-
APPENDIX A TO § 1926.50—FIRST AID KITS
(NON-MANDATORY) hibited.
(5) Where single service cups (to be
First aid supplies are required to be easily used but once) are supplied, both a san-
accessible under paragraph § 1926.50(d)(1). An
example of the minimal contents of a generic
itary container for the unused cups and
first aid kit is described in American Na- a receptacle for disposing of the used
tional Standard (ANSI) Z308.1–1978 ‘‘Min- cups shall be provided.
imum Requirements for Industrial Unit-Type (6) Potable water means water that
First-aid Kits’’. The contents of the kit list- meets the standards for drinking pur-
ed in the ANSI standard should be adequate poses of the State or local authority
for small work sites. When larger operations
having jurisdiction, or water that
or multiple operations are being conducted
at the same location, employers should de- meets the quality standards prescribed
termine the need for additional first aid kits by the U.S. Environmental Protection
at the worksite, additional types of first aid Agency’s National Primary Drinking
equipment and supplies and additional quan- Water Regulations (40 CFR part 141).
33
(b) Nonpotable water. (1) Outlets for vided, they shall be heated, ventilated,
nonpotable water, such as water for in- and lighted.
dustrial or firefighting purposes only, (f) Washing facilities. (1) The employer
shall be identified by signs meeting the shall provide adequate washing facili-
requirements of subpart G of this part, ties for employees engaged in the ap-
to indicate clearly that the water is plication of paints, coating, herbicides,
unsafe and is not to be used for drink- or insecticides, or in other operations
ing, washing, or cooking purposes. where contaminants may be harmful to
(2) There shall be no cross-connec- the employees. Such facilities shall be
tion, open or potential, between a sys- in near proximity to the worksite and
tem furnishing potable water and a shall be so equipped as to enable em-
system furnishing nonpotable water. ployees to remove such substances.
(c) Toilets at construction jobsites. (1) (2) General. Washing facilities shall
Toilets shall be provided for employees be maintained in a sanitary condition.
according to the following table: (3) Lavatories. (i) Lavatories shall be
made available in all places of employ-
TABLE D–1 ment. The requirements of this sub-
Number of em-
division do not apply to mobile crews
Minimum number of facilities or to normally unattended work loca-
ployees
tions if employees working at these lo-
20 or less .......... 1.
20 or more ......... 1 toilet seat and 1 urinal per 40 workers.
cations have transportation readily
200 or more ....... 1 toilet seat and 1 urinal per 50 workers. available to nearby washing facilities
which meet the other requirements of
(2) Under temporary field conditions, this paragraph.
provisions shall be made to assure not (ii) Each lavatory shall be provided
less than one toilet facility is avail- with hot and cold running water, or
able. tepid running water.
(3) Job sites, not provided with a san- (iii) Hand soap or similar cleansing
itary sewer, shall be provided with one agents shall be provided.
of the following toilet facilities unless (iv) Individual hand towels or sec-
prohibited by local codes: tions thereof, of cloth or paper, air
(i) Privies (where their use will not blowers or clean individual sections of
contaminate ground or surface water); continuous cloth toweling, convenient
(ii) Chemical toilets; to the lavatories, shall be provided.
(iii) Recirculating toilets; (4) Showers. (i) Whenever showers are
(iv) Combustion toilets. required by a particular standard, the
(4) The requirements of this para- showers shall be provided in accord-
graph (c) for sanitation facilities shall ance with paragraphs (f)(4) (ii) through
not apply to mobile crews having (v) of this section.
transportation readily available to (ii) One shower shall be provided for
nearby toilet facilities. each 10 employees of each sex, or nu-
(d) Food handling. (1) All employees’ merical fraction thereof, who are re-
food service facilities and operations quired to shower during the same shift.
shall meet the applicable laws, ordi- (iii) Body soap or other appropriate
nances, and regulations of the jurisdic- cleansing agents convenient to the
tions in which they are located. showers shall be provided as specified
(2) All employee food service facili- in paragraph (f)(3)(iii) of this section.
ties and operations shall be carried out (iv) Showers shall be provided with
in accordance with sound hygienic hot and cold water feeding a common
principles. In all places of employment discharge line.
where all or part of the food service is (v) Employees who use showers shall
provided, the food dispensed shall be be provided with individual clean tow-
wholesome, free from spoilage, and els.
shall be processed, prepared, handled, (g) Eating and drinking areas. No em-
and stored in such a manner as to be ployee shall be allowed to consume
protected against contamination. food or beverages in a toilet room nor
(e) Temporary sleeping quarters. When in any area exposed to a toxic mate-
temporary sleeping quarters are pro- rial.
34
(h) Vermin control. Every enclosed TABLE D–2—PERMISSIBLE NOISE EXPOSURES—
workplace shall be so constructed, Continued
equipped, and maintained, so far as
Sound level
reasonably practicable, as to prevent Duration per day, hours dBA slow
the entrance or harborage of rodents, response
insects, and other vermin. A con- ⁄ .......................................................................
12 110
tinuing and effective extermination ⁄ or less ...........................................................
14 115
program shall be instituted where their
presence is detected. (2)(i) When the daily noise exposure
(i) Change rooms. Whenever employ- is composed of two or more periods of
ees are required by a particular stand- noise exposure of different levels, their
ard to wear protective clothing because combined effect should be considered,
of the possibility of contamination rather than the individual effect of
with toxic materials, change rooms each. Exposure to different levels for
equipped with storage facilities for various periods of time shall be com-
street clothes and separate storage fa- puted according to the formula set
cilities for the protective clothing forth in paragraph (d)(2)(ii) of this sec-
shall be provided. tion.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, (ii) Fe = (T1/L1)+(T2/L2)+ · · · + (Tn/Ln)
1979, as amended at 58 FR 35084, June 30, 1993; Where:
76 FR 33611, June 8, 2011]
Fe = The equivalent noise exposure factor.
§ 1926.52 Occupational noise exposure. T = The period of noise exposure at any es-
sentially constant level.
(a) Protection against the effects of L = The duration of the permissible noise ex-
noise exposure shall be provided when posure at the constant level (from Table
the sound levels exceed those shown in D–2).
Table D–2 of this section when meas-
ured on the A-scale of a standard sound If the value of Fe exceeds unity (1) the
level meter at slow response. exposure exceeds permissible levels.
(b) When employees are subjected to (iii) A sample computation showing
sound levels exceeding those listed in an application of the formula in para-
Table D–2 of this section, feasible ad- graph (d)(2)(ii) of this section is as fol-
ministrative or engineering controls lows. An employee is exposed at these
shall be utilized. If such controls fail to levels for these periods:
reduce sound levels within the levels of 110 db A 1⁄4 hour.
the table, personal protective equip- 100 db A 1⁄2 hour.
ment as required in subpart E, shall be 90 db A 11⁄2 hours.
provided and used to reduce sound lev- Fe = (1⁄4/1⁄2)+(1⁄2/2)+(11⁄2/8)
els within the levels of the table. Fe = 0.500+0.25+0.188
(c) If the variations in noise level in- Fe = 0.938
volve maxima at intervals of 1 second
or less, it is to be considered contin- Since the value of Fe does not exceed
uous. unity, the exposure is within permis-
(d)(1) In all cases where the sound sible limits.
levels exceed the values shown herein, (e) Exposure to impulsive or impact
a continuing, effective hearing con- noise should not exceed 140 dB peak
servation program shall be adminis- sound pressure level.
tered. § 1926.53 Ionizing radiation.
TABLE D–2—PERMISSIBLE NOISE EXPOSURES (a) In construction and related ac-
tivities involving the use of sources of
Sound level
Duration per day, hours dBA slow ionizing radiation, the pertinent provi-
response sions of the Nuclear Regulatory Com-
8 ......................................................................... 90
mission’s Standards for Protection
6 ......................................................................... 92 Against Radiation (10 CFR part 20), re-
4 ......................................................................... 95 lating to protection against occupa-
3 ......................................................................... 97 tional radiation exposure, shall apply.
2 ......................................................................... 100
11⁄2 ..................................................................... 102 (b) Any activity which involves the
1 ......................................................................... 105 use of radioactive materials or X-rays,
35
whether or not under license from the (i) Laser equipment shall bear a label
Nuclear Regulatory Commission, shall to indicate maximum output.
be performed by competent persons (j) Employees shall not be exposed to
specially trained in the proper and safe light intensities above:
operation of such equipment. In the (1) Direct staring: 1 micro-watt per
case of materials used under Commis- square centimeter;
sion license, only persons actually li- (2) Incidental observing: 1 milliwatt
censed, or competent persons under di- per square centimeter;
rection and supervision of the licensee,
(3) Diffused reflected light: 21⁄2 watts
shall perform such work.
per square centimeter.
(c)–(r) [Reserved]
(k) Laser unit in operation should be
NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- set up above the heads of the employ-
struction work under paragraphs (c) through ees, when possible.
(r) of this section are identical to those set
forth at paragraphs (a) through (p) of (l) Employees shall not be exposed to
§ 1910.1096 of this chapter. microwave power densities in excess of
10 milliwatts per square centimeter.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
1979, as amended at 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996;
61 FR 31431, June 20, 1996]
§ 1926.55 Gases, vapors, fumes, dusts,
and mists.
§ 1926.54 Nonionizing radiation. (a) Exposure of employees to inhala-
(a) Only qualified and trained em- tion, ingestion, skin absorption, or
ployees shall be assigned to install, ad- contact with any material or substance
just, and operate laser equipment. at a concentration above those speci-
(b) Proof of qualification of the laser fied in the ‘‘Threshold Limit Values of
equipment operator shall be available Airborne Contaminants for 1970’’ of the
and in possession of the operator at all American Conference of Governmental
times. Industrial Hygienists, shall be avoided.
(c) Employees, when working in areas See appendix A to this section.
in which a potential exposure to direct (b) To achieve compliance with para-
or reflected laser light greater than graph (a) of this section, administra-
0.005 watts (5 milliwatts) exists, shall tive or engineering controls must first
be provided with antilaser eye protec- be implemented whenever feasible.
tion devices as specified in subpart E of When such controls are not feasible to
this part. achieve full compliance, protective
(d) Areas in which lasers are used equipment or other protective meas-
shall be posted with standard laser ures shall be used to keep the exposure
warning placards. of employees to air contaminants with-
(e) Beam shutters or caps shall be in the limits prescribed in this section.
utilized, or the laser turned off, when Any equipment and technical measures
laser transmission is not actually re-
used for this purpose must first be ap-
quired. When the laser is left unat-
proved for each particular use by a
tended for a substantial period of time,
competent industrial hygienist or
such as during lunch hour, overnight,
other technically qualified person.
or at change of shifts, the laser shall be
Whenever respirators are used, their
turned off.
(f) Only mechanical or electronic use shall comply with § 1926.103.
means shall be used as a detector for (c) Paragraphs (a) and (b) of this sec-
guiding the internal alignment of the tion do not apply to the exposure of
laser. employees to airborne asbestos,
(g) The laser beam shall not be di- tremolite, anthophyllite, or actinolite
rected at employees. dust. Whenever any employee is ex-
(h) When it is raining or snowing, or posed to airborne asbestos, tremolite,
when there is dust or fog in the air, the anthophyllite, or actinolite dust, the
operation of laser systems shall be pro- requirements of § 1910.1101 or § 1926.58 of
hibited where practicable; in any this title shall apply.
event, employees shall be kept out of (d) Paragraphs (a) and (b) of this sec-
range of the area of source and target tion do not apply to the exposure of
during such weather conditions. employees to formaldehyde. Whenever
36
any employee is exposed to formalde-
hyde, the requirements of § 1910.1048 of
this title shall apply.
APPENDIX A TO § 1926.55—1970 AMERICAN CONFERENCE OF GOVERNMENTAL INDUSTRIAL

HYGIENISTS’ THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS
THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS FOR CONSTRUCTION
Skin Designa-
Substance CAS No. d ppm a mg/m 3,b tion
Abate; see Temephos.

Acetaldehyde ......................................... 75–07–0 200 360 —
Acetic acid ............................................. 64–19–7 10 25 —
Acetic anhydride .................................... 108–24–7 5 20 —
Acetone ................................................. 67–64–1 1000 2400 —
Acetonitrile ............................................. 75–05–8 40 70 —
2-Acetylaminofluorine; see § 1926.1114 53–96–3
Acetylene ............................................... 74–86–2 E
Acetylene dichloride; see 1,2-
Dichloroethylene.
Acetylene tetrabromide ......................... 79–27–6 1 14 —
Acrolein ................................................. 107–02–8 0.1 0.25 —
Acrylamide ............................................. 79–06–1 — 0.3 X
Acrylonitrile; see § 1926.1145 ............... 107–13–1
Aldrin ..................................................... 309–00–2 — 0.25 X
Allyl alcohol ........................................... 107–18–6 2 5 X
Allyl chloride .......................................... 107–05–1 1 3 —
Allyl glycidyl ether (AGE) ...................... 106–92–3 (C)10 (C)45 —
Allyl propyl disulfide .............................. 2179–59–1 2 12 —
alpha-Alumina ....................................... 1344–28–1
Total dust ....................................... — —
Respirable fraction ......................... — —
Alundum; see alpha-Alumina.
4-Aminodiphenyl; see § 1926.1111 ....... 92–67–1
2-Aminoethanol; see Ethanolamine.
2-Aminopyridine .................................... 504–29–0 0.5 2 —
Ammonia ............................................... 7664–41–7 50 35 —
Ammonium sulfamate ........................... 7773–06–0
Total dust ....................................... — 15 —
Respirable fraction ......................... — 5 —
n-Amyl acetate ...................................... 628–63–7 100 525 —
sec-Amyl acetate ................................... 626–38–0 125 650 —
Aniline and homologs ............................ 62–53–3 5 19 X
Anisidine (o-, p-isomers) ....................... 29191–52–4 — 0.5 X
Antimony and compounds (as Sb) ....... 7440–36–0 — 0.5 —
ANTU (alpha Naphthylthiourea) ............ 86–88–4 — 0.3 —
Argon ..................................................... 7440–37–1 E
Arsenic, inorganic compounds (as As);
see § 1926.1118 ................................ 7440–38–2 — — —
Arsenic, organic compounds (as As) .... 7440–38–2 — 0.5 —
Arsine .................................................... 7784–42–1 0.05 0.2 —
Asbestos; see 1926.58.
Azinphos-methyl .................................... 86–50–0 — 0.2 X
Barium, soluble compounds (as Ba) ..... 7440–39–3 — 0.5 —
Benzene g; see § 1926.1128 ................. 71–43–2
Benzidine; see § 1926.1110 .................. 92–87–5
p-Benzoquinone; see Quinone.
Benzo(a)pyrene; see Coal tar pitch
volatiles.
Benzoyl peroxide ................................... 94–36–0 — 5 —
Benzyl chloride ...................................... 100–44–7 1 5 —
Beryllium and beryllium compounds (as
Be) ..................................................... 7440–41–7 — 0.002 —
37
THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS FOR CONSTRUCTION—Continued
Skin Designa-
Biphenyl; see Diphenyl.

Bisphenol A; see Diglycidyl ether.
Boron oxide ........................................... 1303–86–2
Total dust ....................................... — 15 —
Boron tribromide .................................... 10294–33–4 1 10 —
Boron trifluoride ..................................... 7637–07–2 (C)1 (C)3 —
Bromine ................................................. 7726–95–6 0.1 0.7 —
Bromine pentafluoride ........................... 7789–30–2 0.1 0.7 —
Bromoform ............................................. 75–25–2 0.5 5 X
Butadiene (1,3-Butadiene); see 29 CFR
1910.1051; 29 CFR 1910.19(l) .......... 106–99–0 STEL
1 ppm/5 ppm —
Butanethiol; see Butyl mercaptan.

2-Butanone (Methyl ethyl ketone) ......... 78–93–3 200 590 —
2-Butoxyethanol .................................... 111–76–2 50 240 X
n-Butyl-acetate ...................................... 123–86–4 150 710 —
sec-Butyl acetate ................................... 105–46–4 200 950 —
tert-Butyl acetate ................................... 540–88–5 200 950 —
n-Butyl alcohol ....................................... 71–36–3 100 300 —
sec-Butyl alcohol ................................... 78–92–2 150 450 —
tert-Butyl alcohol ................................... 75–65–0 100 300 —
Butylamine ............................................. 109–73–9 (C)5 (C)15 X
tert-Butyl chromate (as CrO3); see
1926.1126 n ........................................ 1189–85–1
n-Butyl glycidyl ether (BGE) .................. 2426–08–6 50 270 —
Butyl mercaptan .................................... 109–79–5 0.5 1.5 —
p-tert-Butyltoluene ................................. 98–51–1 10 60 —
Cadmium (as Cd); see 1926.1127 ........ 7440–43–9
Calcium carbonate ................................ 1317–65–3
Total dust ....................................... — —
Calcium oxide ........................................ 1305–78–8 — 5 —
Calcium sulfate ...................................... 7778–18–9
Total dust ....................................... — 15 —
Camphor, synthetic ............................... 76–22–2 — 2 —
Carbaryl (Sevin) .................................... 63–25–2 — 5 —
Carbon black ......................................... 1333–86–4 — 3.5 —
Carbon dioxide ...................................... 124–38–9 5000 9000 —
Carbon disulfide .................................... 75–15–0 20 60 X
Carbon monoxide .................................. 630–08–0 50 55 —
Carbon tetrachloride .............................. 56–23–5 10 65 X
Cellulose ................................................ 9004–34–6
Total dust ....................................... — —
Chlordane .............................................. 57–74–9 — 0.5 X
Chlorinated camphene .......................... 8001–35–2 — 0.5 X
Chlorinated diphenyl oxide .................... 55720–99–5 — 0.5 —
Chlorine ................................................. 7782–50–5 1 3 —
Chlorine dioxide .................................... 10049–04–4 0.1 0.3
Chlorine trifluoride ................................. 7790–91–2 (C)0.1 (C)0.4 —
Chloroacetaldehyde .............................. 107–20–0 (C)1 (C)3 —
a-Chloroacetophenone (Phenacyl chlo-
ride) .................................................... 532–27–4 0.05 0.3 —
Chlorobenzene ...................................... 108–90–7 75 350 —
o-Chlorobenzylidene malononitrile ........ 2698–41–1 0.05 0.4 —
Chlorobromomethane ............................ 74–97–5 200 1050 —
2-Chloro-1,3-butadiene; see beta-Chlo-
roprene.
Chlorodiphenyl (42% Chlorine) (PCB) .. 53469–21–9 — 1 X
Chlorodiphenyl (54% Chlorine) (PCB) .. 11097–69–1 — 0.5 X
38
Skin Designa-
1-Chloro,2,3-epoxypropane; see
Epichlorohydrin.
2-Chloroethanol; see Ethylene
chlorohydrin.
Chloroethylene; see Vinyl chloride.
Chloroform (Trichloromethane) ............. 67–66–3 (C)50 (C)240 —
bis(Chloromethyl) ether; see
§ 1926.1108 ....................................... 542–88–1
Chloromethyl methyl ether; see
§ 1926.1106 ....................................... 107–30–2
1-Chloro-1-nitropropane ........................ 600–25–9 20 100 —
Chloropicrin ........................................... 76–06–2 0.1 0.7 —
beta-Chloroprene .................................. 126–99–8 25 90 X
Chromium (II) compounds.
(as Cr) ............................................ 7440–47–3 — 0.5 —
Chromium (III) compounds.
(as Cr) ............................................ 7440–47–3 — 0.5 —
Chromium (VI) compounds; See
1926.1126 o.
Chromium metal and insol. salts (as
Cr) ...................................................... 7440–47–3 — 1 —
Chrysene; see Coal tar pitch volatiles.
Coal tar pitch volatiles (benzene solu-
ble fraction), anthracene, BaP, phen-
anthrene, acridine, chrysene, pyrene 65996–93–2 — 0.2 —
Cobalt metal, dust, and fume (as Co) .. 7440–48–4 — 0.1 —
Coke oven emissions; see § 1926.1129.
Copper ................................................... 7440–50–8
Fume (as Cu) ................................. — 0.1 —
Dusts and mists (as Cu) ................ — 1 —
Corundum; see Emery.
Cotton dust (raw) .................................. — 1
Crag herbicide (Sesone) ....................... 136–78–7
Total dust ....................................... — —
Cresol, all isomers ................................ 1319–77–3 5 22 X
Crotonaldehyde ..................................... 123–73–9; 2 6
4170–30–3
Cumene ................................................. 98–82–8 50 245 X
Cyanides (as CN) .................................. Varies with — 5 X
Compound
Cyanogen .............................................. 460–19–5 10 — —
Cyclohexane .......................................... 110–82–7 300 1050 —
Cyclohexanol ......................................... 108–93–0 50 200 —
Cyclohexanone ...................................... 108–94–1 50 200 —
Cyclohexene .......................................... 110–83–8 300 1015 —
Cyclonite ................................................ 121–82–4 — 1.5 X
Cyclopentadiene .................................... 542–92–7 75 200 —
DDT, see
Dichlorodiphenyltrichloroethane.
DDVP, see Dichlorvos.
2,4-D (Dichlorophenoxyacetic acid) ...... 94–75–7 — 10 —
Decaborane ........................................... 17702–41–9 0.05 0.3 X
Demeton (Systox) ................................. 8065–48–3 — 0.1 X
Diacetone alcohol (4-Hydroxy-4-methyl-
2-pentanone) ..................................... 123–42–2 50 240 —
1,2-Diaminoethane; see Ethylene-
diamine.
Diazomethane ....................................... 334–88–3 0.2 0.4 —
Diborane ................................................ 19287–45–7 0.1 0.1 —
1,2-Dibromo-3-chloropropane (DBCP);
see § 1926.1144 ................................ 96–12–8 —
39
Substance CAS No. d ppm a mg/m 3,b Skin Designa-

tion
1,2-Dibromoethane; see Ethylene

dibromide.
Dibutyl phosphate ................................. 107–66–4 1 5 —
Dibutyl phthalate ................................... 84–74–2 — 5 —
Dichloroacetylene .................................. 7572–29–4 (C)0.1 (C)0.4 —
o-Dichlorobenzene ................................ 95–50–1 (C)50 (C)300 —
p-Dichlorobenzene ................................ 106–46–7 75 450 —
3,3′-Dichlorobenzidine; see
§ 1926.1107 ....................................... 91–94–1
Dichlorodifluoromethane ....................... 75–71–8 1000 4950 —
1,3-Dichloro-5,5-dimethyl hydantoin ..... 118–52–5 — 0.2 —
Dichlorodiphenyltrichloroethane (DDT) 50–29–3 — 1 X
1,1-Dichloroethane ................................ 75–34–3 100 400 —
1,2-Dichloroethane; see Ethylene di-
chloride.
1,2-Dichloroethylene ............................. 540–59–0 200 790 —
Dichloroethyl ether ................................ 111–44–4 (C)15 (C)90 X
Dichloromethane; see Methylene chlo-
ride.
Dichloromonofluoromethane ................. 75–43–4 1000 4200 —
1,1-Dichloro-1-nitroethane ..................... 594–72–9 (C)10 (C)60 —
1,2-Dichloropropane; see Propylene di-
chloride.
Dichlorotetrafluoroethane ...................... 76–14–2 1000 7000 —
Dichlorvos (DDVP) ................................ 62–73–7 — 1 X
Dieldrin .................................................. 60–57–1 — 0.25 X
Diethylamine .......................................... 109–89–7 25 75 —
2-Diethylaminoethanol ........................... 100–37–8 10 50 X
Diethylene triamine ............................... 111–40–0 (C)10 (C)42 X
Diethyl ether; see Ethyl ether.
Difluorodibromomethane ....................... 75–61–6 100 860 —
Diglycidyl ether (DGE) .......................... 2238–07–5 (C)0.5 (C)2.8 —
Dihydroxybenzene; see Hydroquinone.
Diisobutyl ketone ................................... 108–83–8 50 290 —
Diisopropylamine ................................... 108–18–9 5 20 X
4-Dimethylaminoazobenzene; see
§ 1926.1115 ....................................... 60–11–7
Dimethoxymethane; see Methylal.
Dimethyl acetamide ............................... 127–19–5 10 35 X
Dimethylamine ....................................... 124–40–3 10 18 —
Dimethylaminobenzene; see Xylidine.
Dimethylaniline (N,N-Dimethylaniline) ... 121–69–7 5 25 X
Dimethylbenzene; see Xylene.
Dimethyl-1,2-dibromo- 2,2-dichloroethyl
phosphate .......................................... 300–76–5 — 3 —
Dimethylformamide ............................... 68–12–2 10 30 X
2,6-Dimethyl-4-heptanone; see
Diisobutyl ketone.
1,1-Dimethylhydrazine ........................... 57–14–7 0.5 1 X
Dimethylphthalate .................................. 131–11–3 — 5 —
Dimethyl sulfate ..................................... 77–78–3 1 5 X
Dinitrobenzene (all isomers) ................. 1 X
(ortho) ............................................. 528–29–0
(meta) ............................................. 99–65–0
(para) .............................................. 100–25–4
Dinitro-o-cresol ...................................... 534–52–1 — 0.2 X
Dinitrotoluene ........................................ 25321–14–6 — 1.5 X
Dioxane (Diethylene dioxide) ................ 123–91–1 100 360 X
Diphenyl (Biphenyl) ............................... 92–52–4 0.2 1 —
Diphenylamine ....................................... 122–39–4 — 10 —
Diphenylmethane diisocyanate; see
Methylene bisphenyl isocyanate.
40

tion
Dipropylene glycol methyl ether ............ 34590–94–8 100 600 X

Di-sec octyl phthalate (Di-(2-ethylhexyl)
phthalate) ........................................... 117–81–7 — 5 —
Emery .................................................... 12415–34–8
Total dust ....................................... — —
Endosulfan ............................................ 115–29–7 — 0.1 X
Endrin .................................................... 72–20–8 — 0.1 X
Epichlorohydrin ...................................... 106–89–8 5 19 X
EPN ....................................................... 2104–64–5 — 0.5 X
1,2-Epoxypropane; see Propylene
oxide.
2,3-Epoxy-1-propanol; see Glycidol.
Ethane ................................................... 74–84–0 E
Ethanethiol; see Ethyl mercaptan.
Ethanolamine ........................................ 141–43–5 3 6 —
2-Ethoxyethanol (Cellosolve) ................ 110–80–5 200 740 X
2-Ethoxyethyl acetate (Cellosolve ace-
tate) .................................................... 111–15–9 100 540 X
Ethyl acetate ......................................... 141–78–6 400 1400 —
Ethyl acrylate ......................................... 140–88–5 25 100 X
Ethyl alcohol (Ethanol) .......................... 64–17–5 1000 1900 —
Ethylamine ............................................. 75–04–7 10 18 —
Ethyl amyl ketone (5-Methyl-3-
heptanone) ......................................... 541–85–5 25 130 —
Ethyl benzene ....................................... 100–41–4 100 435 —
Ethyl bromide ........................................ 74–96–4 200 890 —
Ethyl butyl ketone (3-Heptanone) ......... 106–35–4 50 230 —
Ethyl chloride ......................................... 75–00–3 1000 2600 —
Ethyl ether ............................................. 60–29–7 400 1200 —
Ethyl formate ......................................... 109–94–4 100 300 —
Ethyl mercaptan .................................... 75–08–1 0.5 1 —
Ethyl silicate .......................................... 78–10–4 100 850 —
Ethylene ................................................ 74–85–1 E
Ethylene chlorohydrin ............................ 107–07–3 5 16 X
Ethylenediamine .................................... 107–15–3 10 25 —
Ethylene dibromide ............................... 106–93–4 (C)25 (C)190 X
Ethylene dichloride (1,2-
Dichloroethane) ................................. 107–06–2 50 200 —
Ethylene glycol dinitrate ........................ 628–96–6 (C)0.2 (C)1 X
Ethylene glycol methyl acetate; see
Methyl cellosolve acetate.
Ethyleneimine; see § 1926.1112 ........... 151–56–4
Ethylene oxide; see § 1926.1147 .......... 75–21–8
Ethylidene chloride; see 1,1-
Dichloroethane.
N-Ethylmorpholine ................................. 100–74–3 20 94 X
Ferbam .................................................. 14484–64–1
Total dust ....................................... — 15 —
Ferrovanadium dust .............................. 12604–58–9 — 1 —
Fibrous Glass.
Total dust ....................................... —
Fluorides (as F) ..................................... Varies with — 2.5 —
compound
Fluorine ................................................. 7782–41–4 0.1 0.2 —
Fluorotrichloromethane
(Trichlorofluoromethane) ................... 75–69–4 1000 5600 —
Formaldehyde; see § 1926.1148 ........... 50–00–0
Formic acid ............................................ 64–18–6 5 9 —
Furfural .................................................. 98–01–1 5 20 X
Furfuryl alcohol ...................................... 98–00–0 50 200 —
41

tion
Gasoline ................................................ 8006–61–9 A3 —

Glycerin (mist) ....................................... 56–81–5
Total dust ....................................... — —
Glycidol .................................................. 556–52–5 50 150 —
Glycol monoethyl ether; see 2-
Ethoxyethanol.
Graphite, natural, respirable dust ......... 7782–42–5 ( 2) ( 2) (2)
Graphite, synthetic.
Total dust ....................................... — —
Guthion; see Azinphos methyl.
Gypsum ................................................. 13397–24–5
Total dust ....................................... — —
Hafnium ................................................. 7440–58–6 — 0.5 —
Helium ................................................... 7440–59–7 E
Heptachlor ............................................. 76–44–8 — 0.5 X
Heptane (n-Heptane) ............................ 142–82–5 500 2000 —
Hexachloroethane ................................. 67–72–1 1 10 X
Hexachloronaphthalene ........................ 1335–87–1 — 0.2 X
n-Hexane ............................................... 110–54–3 500 1800 —
2-Hexanone (Methyl n-butyl ketone) ..... 591–78–6 100 410 —
Hexone (Methyl isobutyl ketone) .......... 108–10–1 100 410 —
sec-Hexyl acetate .................................. 108–84–9 50 300 —
Hydrazine .............................................. 302–01–2 1 1.3 X
Hydrogen ............................................... 1333–74–0 E
Hydrogen bromide ................................. 10035–10–6 3 10 —
Hydrogen chloride ................................. 7647–01–0 (C)5 (C)7 —
Hydrogen cyanide ................................. 74–90–8 10 11 X
Hydrogen fluoride (as F) ....................... 7664–39–3 3 2 —
Hydrogen peroxide ................................ 7722–84–1 1 1.4 —
Hydrogen selenide (as Se) ................... 7783–07–5 0.05 .02 —
Hydrogen sulfide ................................... 7783–06–4 10 15 —
Hydroquinone ........................................ 123–31–9 — 2 —
Indene ................................................... 95–13–6 10 45 —
Indium and compounds (as In) ............. 7440–74–6 — 0.1 —
Iodine ..................................................... 7553–56–2 (C)0.1 (C)1 —
Iron oxide fume ..................................... 1309–37–1 — 10 —
Iron salts (soluble) (as Fe) .................... Varies with — 1 —
compound
Isoamyl acetate ..................................... 123–92–2 100 525 —
Isoamyl alcohol (primary and sec-
ondary) ............................................... 123–51–3 100 360 —
Isobutyl acetate ..................................... 110–19–0 150 700 —
Isobutyl alcohol ..................................... 78–83–1 100 300 —
Isophorone ............................................ 78–59–1 25 140 —
Isopropyl acetate ................................... 108–21–4 250 950 —
Isopropyl alcohol ................................... 67–63–0 400 980 —
Isopropylamine ...................................... 75–31–0 5 12 —
Isopropyl ether ...................................... 108–20–3 500 2100 —
Isopropyl glycidyl ether (IGE) ................ 4016–14–2 50 240 —
Kaolin .................................................... 1332–58–7
Total dust ....................................... — —
Ketene ................................................... 463–51–4 0.5 0.9 —
Lead, inorganic (as Pb); see 1926.62 .. 7439–92–1
Limestone .............................................. 1317–65–3
Total dust ....................................... — —
Lindane .................................................. 58–89–9 — 0.5 X
Lithium hydride ...................................... 7580–67–8 — 0.025 —
42

tion
L.P.G. (Liquefied petroleum gas) .......... 68476–85–7 1000 1800

Magnesite .............................................. 546–93–0
Total dust ....................................... — —
Magnesium oxide fume ......................... 1309–48–4
Total particulate ............................. 15 — —
Malathion ............................................... 121–75–5
Total dust ....................................... — 15 X
Maleic anhydride ................................... 108–31–6 0.25
Manganese compounds (as Mn) .......... 7439–96–5 — (C)5 —
Manganese fume (as Mn) ..................... 7439–96–5 — (C)5 —
Marble ................................................... 1317–65–3
Total dust ....................................... — —
Mercury (aryl and inorganic)(as Hg) ..... 7439–97–6 0.1 X
Mercury (organo) alkyl compounds (as
Hg) ..................................................... 7439–97–6 — 0.01 X
Mercury (vapor) (as Hg) ........................ 7439–97–6 — 0.1 X
Mesityl oxide ......................................... 141–79–7 25 100 —
Methane ................................................ 74–82–8 E
Methanethiol; see Methyl mercaptan.
Methoxychlor ......................................... 72–43–5
Total dust ....................................... — 15 —
2-Methoxyethanol (Methyl cellosolve) ... 109–86–4 25 80 X
2-Methoxyethyl acetate (Methyl
cellosolve acetate) ............................. 110–49–6 25 120 X
Methyl acetate ....................................... 79–20–9 200 610 —
Methyl acetylene (Propyne) .................. 74–99–7 1000 1650 —
Methyl acetylene-propadiene mixture
(MAPP) .............................................. 1000 1800 —
Methyl acrylate ...................................... 96–33–3 10 35 X
Methylal (Dimethoxy-methane) ............. 109–87–5 1000 3100 —
Methyl alcohol ....................................... 67–56–1 200 260 —
Methylamine .......................................... 74–89–5 10 12 —
Methyl amyl alcohol; see Methyl iso-
butyl carbinol.
Methyl n-amyl ketone ............................ 110–43–0 100 465 —
Methyl bromide ...................................... 74–83–9 (C)20 (C)80 X
Methyl butyl ketone; see 2-Hexanone.
Methyl cellosolve; see 2-
Methoxyethanol.
Methyl cellosolve acetate; see 2-
Methoxyethyl acetate.
Methylene chloride; see § 1910.1052.
Methyl chloroform (1,1,1-Trichloro-
ethane) ............................................... 71–55–6 350 1900 —
Methylcyclohexane ................................ 108–87–2 500 2000 —
Methylcyclohexanol ............................... 25639–42–3 100 470 —
o-Methylcyclohexanone ......................... 583–60–8 100 460 X
Methylene chloride ................................ 75–09–2 500 1740 —
Methylenedianiline (MDA) ..................... 101–77–9
Methyl ethyl ketone (MEK); see 2-Buta-
none.
Methyl formate ...................................... 107–31–3 100 250 —
Methyl hydrazine (Monomethyl hydra-
zine) ................................................... 60–34–4 (C)0.2 (C)0.35 X
Methyl iodide ......................................... 74–88–4 5 28 X
Methyl isoamyl ketone .......................... 110–12–3 100 475 —
Methyl isobutyl carbinol ......................... 108–11–2 25 100 X
Methyl isobutyl ketone; see Hexone.
Methyl isocyanate ................................. 624–83–9 0.02 0.05 X
Methyl mercaptan .................................. 74–93–1 0.5 1 —
43

tion
Methyl methacrylate .............................. 80–62–6 100 410 —

Methyl propyl ketone; see 2-Pentanone.
Methyl silicate ........................................ 681–84–5 (C)5 (C)30 —
alpha-Methyl styrene ............................. 98–83–9 (C)100 (C)480 —
Methylene bisphenyl isocyanate (MDI) 101–68–8 (C)0.02 (C)0.2 —
Mica; see Silicates.
Molybdenum (as Mo) ............................ 7439–98–7
Soluble compounds ....................... — 5 —
Insoluble compounds.
Total dust .................................... — 15 —
Monomethyl aniline ............................... 100–61–8 2 9 X
Monomethyl hydrazine; see Methyl hy-
drazine.
Morpholine ............................................. 110–91–8 20 70 X
Naphtha (Coal tar) ................................ 8030–30–6 100 400 —
Naphthalene .......................................... 91–20–3 10 50 —
alpha-Naphthylamine; see § 1926.1104 134–32–7
beta-Naphthylamine; see § 1926.1109 91–59–8 —
Neon ...................................................... 7440–01–9 E
Nickel carbonyl (as Ni) .......................... 13463–39–3 0.001 0.007 —
Nickel, metal and insoluble compounds
(as Ni) ................................................ 7440–02–0 — 1 —
Nickel, soluble compounds (as Ni) ....... 7440–02–0 — 1 —
Nicotine ................................................. 54–11–5 — 0.5 X
Nitric acid .............................................. 7697–37–2 2 5 —
Nitric oxide ............................................ 10102–43–9 25 30 —
p-Nitroaniline ......................................... 100–01–6 1 6 X
Nitrobenzene ......................................... 98–95–3 1 5 X
p-Nitrochlorobenzene ............................ 100–00–5 — 1 X
4-Nitrodiphenyl; see § 1926.1103 ......... 92–93–3
Nitroethane ............................................ 79–24–3 100 310 —
Nitrogen ................................................. 7727–37–9 E
Nitrogen dioxide .................................... 10102–44–0 (C)5 (C)9 —
Nitrogen trifluoride ................................. 7783–54–2 10 29 —
Nitroglycerin .......................................... 55–63–0 (C)0.2 (C)2 X
Nitromethane ......................................... 75–52–5 100 250 —
1-Nitropropane ...................................... 108–03–2 25 90 —
2-Nitropropane ...................................... 79–46–9 25 90 —
N-Nitrosodimethylamine; see
§ 1926.1116 ....................................... 62–79–9 —
Nitrotoluene (all isomers) ...................... 5 30 X
o-isomer ......................................... 88–72–2;
m-isomer ........................................ 99–08–1;
p-isomer ......................................... 99–99–0
Nitrotrichloromethane; see Chloropicrin.
Nitrous oxide ......................................... 10024–97–2 E
Octachloronaphthalene ......................... 2234–13–1 — 0.1 X
Octane ................................................... 111–65–9 400 1900 —
Oil mist, mineral .................................... 8012–95–1 — 5 —
Osmium tetroxide (as Os) ..................... 20816–12–0 — 0.002 —
Oxalic acid ............................................. 144–62–7 — 1 —
Oxygen difluoride .................................. 7783–41–7 0.05 0.1 —
Ozone .................................................... 10028–15–6 0.1 0.2 —
Paraquat, respirable dust ...................... 4685–14–7; — 0.5 X
1910–42–5;
2074–50–2
Parathion ............................................... 56–38–2 — 0.1 X
Particulates not otherwise regulated.
Total dust organic and inorganic ... — 15 —
PCB; see Chlorodiphenyl (42% and
54% chlorine).
Pentaborane .......................................... 19624–22–7 0.005 0.01 —
44

tion
Pentachloronaphthalene ....................... 1321–64–8 — 0.5 X

Pentachlorophenol ................................ 87–86–5 — 0.5 X
Pentaerythritol ....................................... 115–77–5
Total dust ....................................... — —
Pentane ................................................. 109–66–0 500 1500 —
2-Pentanone (Methyl propyl ketone) ..... 107–87–9 200 700 —
Perchloroethylene
(Tetrachloroethylene) ......................... 127–18–4 100 670 —
Perchloromethyl mercaptan .................. 594–42–3 0.1 0.8 —
Perchloryl fluoride ................................. 7616–94–6 3 13.5 —
Petroleum distillates (Naphtha)(Rubber
Solvent) .............................................. A3 —
Phenol ................................................... 108–95–2 5 19 X
p-Phenylene diamine ............................ 106–50–3 — 0.1 X
Phenyl ether, vapor ............................... 101–84–8 1 7 —
Phenyl ether-biphenyl mixture, vapor ... 1 7 —
Phenylethylene; see Styrene.
Phenyl glycidyl ether (PGE) .................. 122–60–1 10 60 —
Phenylhydrazine .................................... 100–63–0 5 22 X
Phosdrin (Mevinphos) ........................... 7786–34–7 — 0.1 X
Phosgene (Carbonyl chloride) .............. 75–44–5 0.1 0.4 —
Phosphine ............................................. 7803–51–2 0.3 0.4 —
Phosphoric acid ..................................... 7664–38–2 — 1 —
Phosphorus (yellow) .............................. 7723–14–0 — 0.1 —
Phosphorus pentachloride .................... 10026–13–8 — 1 —
Phosphorus pentasulfide ....................... 1314–80–3 — 1 —
Phosphorus trichloride .......................... 7719–12–2 0.5 3 —
Phthalic anhydride ................................. 85–44–9 2 12 —
Picric acid .............................................. 88–89–1 — 0.1 X
Pindone (2-Pivalyl-1,3-indandione) ....... 83–26–1 — 0.1 —
Plaster of Paris ...................................... 26499–65–0
Total dust ....................................... — —
Platinum (as Pt) .................................... 7440–06–4
Metal .............................................. — — —
Soluble salts ................................... — 0.002 —
Polytetrafluoroethylene decomposition
products ............................................. A2
Portland cement .................................... 65997–15–1
Total dust ....................................... — 15 —
Respirable fraction ......................... 5 —
Propane ................................................. 74–98–6 E
Propargyl alcohol .................................. 107–19–7 1 — X
beta-Propriolactone; see § 1926.1113 .. 57–57–8
n-Propyl acetate .................................... 109–60–4 200 840 —
n-Propyl alcohol .................................... 71–23–8 200 500 —
n-Propyl nitrate ...................................... 627–13–4 25 110 —
Propylene dichloride .............................. 78–87–5 75 350 —
Propylene imine .................................... 75–55–8 2 5 X
Propylene oxide .................................... 75–56–9 100 240 —
Propyne; see Methyl acetylene.
Pyrethrum .............................................. 8003–34–7 — 5 —
Pyridine ................................................. 110–86–1 5 15 —
Quinone ................................................. 106–51–4 0.1 0.4 —
RDX; see Cyclonite.
Rhodium (as Rh), metal fume and in-
soluble compounds ............................ 7440–16–6 — 0.1 —
Rhodium (as Rh), soluble compounds 7440–16–6 — 0.001 —
Ronnel ................................................... 299–84–3 — 10 —
Rotenone ............................................... 83–79–4 — 5 —
Rouge.
45

tion
Total dust ....................................... — —

Selenium compounds (as Se) ............... 7782–49–2 — 0.2 —
Selenium hexafluoride (as Se) .............. 7783–79–1 0.05 0.4 —
Silica, amorphous, precipitated and gel 112926–00–8 ( 2) ( 2) (2)
Silica, amorphous, diatomaceous earth,
containing less than 1% crystalline
silica ................................................... 61790–53–2 ( 2) (2) ( 2)
Silica, crystalline cristobalite, respirable
dust .................................................... 14464–46–1 ( 2) ( 2) (2)
Silica, crystalline quartz, respirable dust 14808–60–7 ( 2) ( 2) (2)
Silica, crystalline tripoli (as quartz), res-
pirable dust ........................................ 1317–95–9 ( 2) (2) ( 2)
Silica, crystalline tridymite, respirable
dust .................................................... 15468–32–3 ( 2) (2) (2)
Silica, fused, respirable dust ................. 60676–86–0 ( 2) (2) (2)
Silicates (less than 1% crystalline sili-
ca).
Mica (respirable dust) .................... 12001–26–2 ( 2) (2) ( 2)
Soapstone, total dust ..................... ( 2) ( 2) (2)
Soapstone, respirable dust ............ ( 2) ( 2) (2)
Talc (containing asbestos); use as-
bestos limit; see 1926.58.
Talc (containing no asbestos), res-
pirable dust ................................. 14807–96–6 ( 2) (2) ( 2)
Tremolite, asbestiform; see
1926.58.
Silicon carbide ....................................... 409–21–2
Total dust ....................................... — —
Silver, metal and soluble compounds
(as Ag) ............................................... 7440–22–4 — 0.01 —
Soapstone; see Silicates.
Sodium fluoroacetate ............................ 62–74–8 — 0.05 X
Sodium hydroxide ................................. 1310–73–2 — 2 —
Starch .................................................... 9005–25–8
Total dust ....................................... — —
Stibine ................................................... 7803–52–3 0.1 0.5 —
Stoddard solvent ................................... 8052–41–3 200 1150 —
Strychnine ............................................. 57–24–9 — 0.15 —
Styrene .................................................. 100–42–5 (C)100 (C)420 —
Sucrose ................................................. 57–50–1
Total dust ....................................... — —
Sulfur dioxide ........................................ 7446–09–5 5 13 —
Sulfur hexafluoride ................................ 2551–62–4 1000 6000 —
Sulfuric acid ........................................... 7664–93–9 — 1 —
Sulfur monochloride .............................. 10025–67–9 1 6 —
Sulfur pentafluoride ............................... 5714–22–7 0.025 0.25 —
Sulfuryl fluoride ..................................... 2699–79–8 5 20 —
Systox, see Demeton.
2,4,5-T (2,4,5-trichlorophenoxyacetic
acid) ................................................... 93–76–5 — 10 —
Talc; see Silicates—.
Tantalum, metal and oxide dust ........... 7440–25–7 — 5 —
TEDP (Sulfotep) .................................... 3689–24–5 — 0.2 X
Teflon decomposition products ............. A2
Tellurium and compounds (as Te) ........ 13494–80–9 — 0.1 —
Tellurium hexafluoride (as Te) .............. 7783–80–4 0.02 0.2 —
Temephos ............................................. 3383–96–8
Total dust ....................................... — —
46

tion

TEPP (Tetraethyl pyrophosphate) ........ 107–49–3 — 0.05 X
Terphenyls ............................................. 26140–60–3 (C)1 (C)9 —
1,1,1,2-Tetrachloro-2,2-difluoroethane .. 76–11–9 500 4170 —
1,1,2,2-Tetrachloro-1,2-difluoroethane .. 76–12–0 500 4170 —
1,1,2,2-Tetrachloroethane ..................... 79–34–5 5 35 X
Tetrachloroethylene; see
Perchloroethylene.
Tetrachloromethane; see Carbon tetra-
chloride.
Tetrachloronaphthalene ........................ 1335–88–2 — 2 X
Tetraethyl lead (as Pb) ......................... 78–00–2 — 0.1 X
Tetrahydrofuran ..................................... 109–99–9 200 590 —
Tetramethyl lead, (as Pb) ..................... 75–74–1 — 0.15 X
Tetramethyl succinonitrile ..................... 3333–52–6 0.5 3 X
Tetranitromethane ................................. 509–14–8 1 8 —
Tetryl (2,4,6-
Trinitrophenylmethylnitramine) .......... 479–45–8 — 1.5 X
Thallium, soluble compounds (as Tl) .... 7440–28–0 — 0.1 X
Thiram ................................................... 137–26–8 — 5 —
Tin, inorganic compounds (except ox-
ides) (as Sn) ...................................... 7440–31–5 — 2 —
Tin, organic compounds (as Sn) ........... 7440–31–5 — 0.1 —
Tin oxide (as Sn) ................................... 21651–19–4 — — —
Total dust ....................................... — —
Titanium dioxide .................................... 13463–67–7
Total dust ....................................... — —
Toluene ................................................. 108–88–3 200 750 —
Toluene-2,4-diisocyanate (TDI) ............. 584–84–9 (C)0.02 (C)0.14 —
o-Toluidine ............................................. 95–53–4 5 22 X
Toxaphene; see Chlorinated camphene.
Tremolite; see Silicates.
Tributyl phosphate ................................. 126–73–8 — 5 —
1,1,1-Trichloroethane; see Methyl chlo-
roform.
1,1,2-Trichloroethane ............................ 79–00–5 10 45 X
Trichloroethylene ................................... 79–01–6 100 535 —
Trichloromethane; see Chloroform.
Trichloronaphthalene ............................. 1321–65–9 — 5 X
1,2,3-Trichloropropane .......................... 96–18–4 50 300 —
1,1,2-Trichloro-1,2,2-trifluoroethane ...... 76–13–1 1000 7600 —
Triethylamine ......................................... 121–44–8 25 100 —
Trifluorobromomethane ......................... 75–63–8 1000 6100 —
Trimethyl benzene ................................. 25551–13–7 25 120 —
2,4,6-Trinitrophenol; see Picric acid.
2,4,6-Trinitrophenylmethylnitramine;
see Tetryl.
2,4,6-Trinitrotoluene (TNT) .................... 118–96–7 — 1.5 X
Triorthocresyl phosphate ....................... 78–30–8 — 0.1 —
Triphenyl phosphate .............................. 115–86–6 — 3 —
Tungsten (as W) ................................... 7440–33–7
Insoluble compounds ..................... — 5 —
Soluble compounds ....................... — 1 —
Turpentine ............................................. 8006–64–2 100 560 —
Uranium (as U) ...................................... 7440–61–1
Soluble compounds ....................... — 0.2 —
Insoluble compounds ..................... — 0.2 —
Vanadium .............................................. 1314–62–1
Respirable dust (as V2 O5) ............ — (C)0.5 —
Fume (as V2 O5) ............................ — (C)0.1 —
Vegetable oil mist.
47
Skin Designa-
Total dust ....................................... — —

Vinyl benzene; see Styrene.
Vinyl chloride; see § 1926.1117 ............ 75–01–4
Vinyl cyanide; see Acrylonitrile.
Vinyl toluene .......................................... 25013–15–4 100 480 —
Warfarin ................................................. 81–81–2 — 0.1 —
Xylenes (o-, m-, p-isomers) .................. 1330–20–7 100 435 —
Xylidine .................................................. 1300–73–8 5 25 X
Yttrium ................................................... 7440–65–5 — 1 —
Zinc chloride fume ................................. 7646–85–7 — 1 —
Zinc oxide fume ..................................... 1314–13–2 — 5 —
Zinc oxide .............................................. 1314–13–2
Total dust ....................................... — 15 —
Zirconium compounds (as Zr) ............... 7440–67–7 — 5
MINERAL DUSTS
SILICA:
Crystalline
Quartz. Threshold Limit calculated from the formula .......... 250 (k)
%SiO2+5
Cristobalite.
Amorphous, including natural diatomaceous earth ...... 20
SILICATES (less than 1% crystalline silica)
Mica .............................................................................. 20
Portland cement ............................................................ 50
Soapstone ..................................................................... 20
Talc (non-asbestiform) .................................................. 20
Talc (fibrous), use asbestos limit .................................. --
Graphite (natural) ................................................................. 15
Inert or Nuisance Particulates: (m) 50 (or 15 mg/m3 whichever is the smaller) of total
dust <1% SiO2
[Inert or Nuisance Dusts includes all mineral, inorganic,
and organic dusts as indicated by examples in TLV’s
appendix D]
Conversion factors.
mppcf × 35.3 = million particles per cubic meter = particles
per c.c.
Footnotes
1 [Reserved]
2 See Mineral Dusts Table.
3 Use Asbestos Limit § 1926.58.
4 See 1926.58.
* The PELs are 8-hour TWAs unless otherwise noted; a (C) designation denotes a ceiling limit.
** As determined from breathing-zone air samples.
a Parts of vapor or gas per million parts of contaminated air by volume at 25 °C and 760 torr.
b Milligrams of substance per cubic meter of air. When entry is in this column only, the value is exact; when listed with a
ppm entry, it is approximate.
c [Reserved]
d The CAS number is for information only. Enforcement is based on the substance name. For an entry covering more than
one metal compound, measured as the metal, the CAS number for the metal is given—not CAS numbers for the individual
compounds.
e f [Reserved]
g For sectors excluded from § 1926.1128 the limit is 10 ppm TWA.
h i [Reserved]
j Millions of particles per cubic foot of air, based on impinger samples counted by light-field techniques.
k The percentage of crystalline silica in the formula is the amount determined from airborne samples, except in those in-
stances in which other methods have been shown to be applicable.
l [Reserved]
m Covers all organic and inorganic particulates not otherwise regulated. Same as Particulates Not Otherwise Regulated.
n If the exposure limit in § 1926.1126 is stayed or is otherwise not in effect, the exposure limit is a ceiling of 0.1 mg/m3.
48
o If the exposure limit in § 1926.1126 is stayed or is otherwise not in effect, the exposure limit is 0.1 mg/m3 (as CrO ) as an
3
8-hour TWA.
The 1970 TLV uses letter designations instead of a numerical value as follows:
A 1 [Reserved]
A 2 Polytetrafluoroethylene decomposition products. Because these products decompose in part by hydrolysis in alkaline solu-
tion, they can be quantitatively determined in air as fluoride to provide an index of exposure. No TLV is recommended pending
determination of the toxicity of the products, but air concentrations should be minimal.
A 3 Gasoline and/or Petroleum Distillates. The composition of these materials varies greatly and thus a single TLV for all
types of these materials is no longer applicable. The content of benzene, other aromatics and additives should be determined
to arrive at the appropriate TLV.
E Simple asphyxiants. The limiting factor is the available oxygen which shall be at least 19.5% and be within the require-
ments addressing explosion in part 1926.
[39 FR 22801, June 24, 1974, as amended at 51 FR 37007, Oct. 17, 1986; 52 FR 46312, Dec. 4, 1987;
58 FR 35089, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9249, 9250, Mar. 7, 1996; 61 FR 56856, Nov. 4, 1996; 62 FR 1619,
Jan. 10, 1997; 71 FR 10381, Feb. 28, 2006; 71 FR 36009, June 23, 2006]
§ 1926.56 Illumination. limits specified in § 1926.55(a). When

ventilation is used as an engineering
(a) General. Construction areas,
control method, the system shall be in-
ramps, runways, corridors, offices,
shops, and storage areas shall be light- stalled and operated according to the
ed to not less than the minimum illu- requirements of this section.
mination intensities listed in Table D– (b) Local exhaust ventilation. Local ex-
3 while any work is in progress: haust ventilation when used as de-
scribed in (a) shall be designed to pre-
TABLE D–3—MINIMUM ILLUMINATION INTENSITIES vent dispersion into the air of dusts,
IN FOOT-CANDLES fumes, mists, vapors, and gases in con-
centrations causing harmful exposure.
Foot-candles Area or operation Such exhaust systems shall be so de-
5 ........................ General construction area lighting. signed that dusts, fumes, mists, vapors,
3 ........................ General construction areas, concrete or gases are not drawn through the
placement, excavation and waste areas, work area of employees.
accessways, active storage areas, load-
ing platforms, refueling, and field main- (c) Design and operation. Exhaust
tenance areas. fans, jets, ducts, hoods, separators, and
5 ........................ Indoors: warehouses, corridors, hallways, all necessary appurtenances, including
and exitways.
5 ........................ Tunnels, shafts, and general underground
refuse receptacles, shall be so designed,
work areas: (Exception: minimum of 10 constructed, maintained and operated
foot-candles is required at tunnel and as to ensure the required protection by
shaft heading during drilling, mucking, maintaining a volume and velocity of
and scaling. Bureau of Mines approved
cap lights shall be acceptable for use in exhaust air sufficient to gather dusts,
the tunnel heading.) fumes, vapors, or gases from said
10 ...................... General construction plant and shops equipment or process, and to convey
(e.g., batch plants, screening plants,
mechanical and electrical equipment
them to suitable points of safe dis-
rooms, carpenter shops, rigging lofts posal, thereby preventing their disper-
and active storerooms, barracks or liv- sion in harmful quantities into the at-
ing quarters, locker or dressing rooms, mosphere where employees work.
mess halls, and indoor toilets and work-
rooms). (d) Duration of operations. (1) The ex-
30 ...................... First aid stations, infirmaries, and offices. haust system shall be in operation con-
tinually during all operations which it
(b) Other areas. For areas or oper- is designed to serve. If the employee re-
ations not covered above, refer to the mains in the contaminated zone, the
American National Standard A11.1– system shall continue to operate after
1965, R1970, Practice for Industrial the cessation of said operations, the
Lighting, for recommended values of il- length of time to depend upon the indi-
lumination. vidual circumstances and effectiveness
of the general ventilation system.
§ 1926.57 Ventilation. (2) Since dust capable of causing dis-
(a) General. Whenever hazardous sub- ability is, according to the best med-
stances such as dusts, fumes, mists, va- ical opinion, of microscopic size, tend-
pors, or gases exist or are produced in ing to remain for hours in suspension
the course of construction work, their in still air, it is essential that the ex-
concentrations shall not exceed the haust system be continued in operation
49
for a time after the work process or of the following elements (A) enclosure
equipment served by the same shall or hood, (B) duct work, (C) dust col-
have ceased, in order to ensure the re- lecting equipment, (D) exhauster, and
moval of the harmful elements to the (E) discharge stack.
required extent. For the same reason, (ix) Particulate-filter respirator. An air
employees wearing respiratory equip- purifying respirator, commonly re-
ment should not remove same imme- ferred to as a dust or a fume respirator,
diately until the atmosphere seems which removes most of the dust or
clear. fume from the air passing through the
(e) Disposal of exhaust materials. The device.
air outlet from every dust separator, (x) Respirable dust. Airborne dust in
and the dusts, fumes, mists, vapors, or sizes capable of passing through the
gases collected by an exhaust or ven- upper respiratory system to reach the
tilating system shall discharge to the lower lung passages.
outside atmosphere. Collecting sys- (xi) Rotary blast cleaning table. An en-
tems which return air to work area closure where the pieces to be cleaned
may be used if concentrations which are positioned on a rotating table and
accumulate in the work area air do not are passed automatically through a se-
result in harmful exposure to employ- ries of blast sprays.
ees. Dust and refuse discharged from an (xii) Abrasive blasting. The forcible
exhaust system shall be disposed of in application of an abrasive to a surface
such a manner that it will not result in by pneumatic pressure, hydraulic pres-
harmful exposure to employees. sure, or centrifugal force.
(f) Abrasive blasting—(1) Definitions (2) Dust hazards from abrasive blasting.
applicable to this paragraph—(i) Abra- (i) Abrasives and the surface coatings
sive. A solid substance used in an abra- on the materials blasted are shattered
sive blasting operation. and pulverized during blasting oper-
(ii) Abrasive-blasting respirator. A res- ations and the dust formed will contain
pirator constructed so that it covers particles of respirable size. The com-
the wearer’s head, neck, and shoulders position and toxicity of the dust from
to protect the wearer from rebounding these sources shall be considered in
abrasive. making an evaluation of the potential
(iii) Blast cleaning barrel. A complete health hazards.
enclosure which rotates on an axis, or (ii) The concentration of respirable
which has an internal moving tread to dust or fume in the breathing zone of
tumble the parts, in order to expose the abrasive-blasting operator or any
various surfaces of the parts to the ac- other worker shall be kept below the
tion of an automatic blast spray. levels specified in § 1926.55 or other per-
(iv) Blast cleaning room. A complete tinent sections of this part.
enclosure in which blasting operations (iii) Organic abrasives which are
are performed and where the operator combustible shall be used only in auto-
works inside of the room to operate the matic systems. Where flammable or ex-
blasting nozzle and direct the flow of plosive dust mixtures may be present,
the abrasive material. the construction of the equipment, in-
(v) Blasting cabinet. An enclosure cluding the exhaust system and all
where the operator stands outside and electric wiring, shall conform to the
operates the blasting nozzle through an requirements of American National
opening or openings in the enclosure. Standard Installation of Blower and
(vi) Clean air. Air of such purity that Exhaust Systems for Dust, Stock, and
it will not cause harm or discomfort to Vapor Removal or Conveying, Z33.1–
an individual if it is inhaled for ex- 1961 (NFPA 91–1961), and subpart S of
tended periods of time. this part. The blast nozzle shall be
(vii) Dust collector. A device or com- bonded and grounded to prevent the
bination of devices for separating dust build up of static charges. Where flam-
from the air handled by an exhaust mable or explosive dust mixtures may
ventilation system. be present, the abrasive blasting enclo-
(viii) Exhaust ventilation system. A sure, the ducts, and the dust collector
system for removing contaminated air shall be constructed with loose panels
from a space, comprising two or more or explosion venting areas, located on
50
sides away from any occupied area, to lation is completed and periodically
provide for pressure relief in case of ex- thereafter to assure continued satisfac-
plosion, following the principles set tory operation. Whenever an appre-
forth in the National Fire Protection ciable change in the pressure drop indi-
Association Explosion Venting Guide. cates a partial blockage, the system
NFPA 68–1954. shall be cleaned and returned to nor-
(3) Blast-cleaning enclosures. (i) Blast- mal operating condition.
cleaning enclosures shall be exhaust (ii) In installations where the abra-
ventilated in such a way that a contin- sive is recirculated, the exhaust ven-
uous inward flow of air will be main- tilation system for the blasting enclo-
tained at all openings in the enclosure sure shall not be relied upon for the re-
during the blasting operation. moval of fines from the spent abrasive
(A) All air inlets and access openings instead of an abrasive separator. An
shall be baffled or so arranged that by abrasive separator shall be provided for
the combination of inward air flow and the purpose.
baffling the escape of abrasive or dust (iii) The air exhausted from blast-
particles into an adjacent work area cleaning equipment shall be discharged
will be minimized and visible spurts of through dust collecting equipment.
dust will not be observed. Dust collectors shall be set up so that
(B) The rate of exhaust shall be suffi- the accumulated dust can be emptied
cient to provide prompt clearance of and removed without contaminating
the dust-laden air within the enclosure other working areas.
after the cessation of blasting.
(5) Personal protective equipment. (i)
(C) Before the enclosure is opened,
Employers must use only respirators
the blast shall be turned off and the ex-
approved by NIOSH under 42 CFR part
haust system shall be run for a suffi-
84 for protecting employees from dusts
cient period of time to remove the
produced during abrasive-blasting op-
dusty air within the enclosure.
erations.
(D) Safety glass protected by screen-
ing shall be used in observation win- (ii) Abrasive-blasting respirators
dows, where hard deep-cutting abra- shall be worn by all abrasive-blasting
sives are used. operators:
(E) Slit abrasive-resistant baffles (A) When working inside of blast-
shall be installed in multiple sets at all cleaning rooms, or
small access openings where dust (B) When using silica sand in manual
might escape, and shall be inspected blasting operations where the nozzle
regularly and replaced when needed. and blast are not physically separated
(1) Doors shall be flanged and tight from the operator in an exhaust venti-
when closed. lated enclosure, or
(2) Doors on blast-cleaning rooms (C) Where concentrations of toxic
shall be operable from both inside and dust dispersed by the abrasive blasting
outside, except that where there is a may exceed the limits set in § 1926.55 or
small operator access door, the large other pertinent sections of this part
work access door may be closed or and the nozzle and blast are not phys-
opened from the outside only. ically separated from the operator in
(4) Exhaust ventilation systems. (i) The an exhaust-ventilated enclosure.
construction, installation, inspection, (iii) Properly fitted particulate-filter
and maintenance of exhaust systems respirators, commonly referred to as
shall conform to the principles and re- dust-filter respirators, may be used for
quirements set forth in American Na- short, intermittent, or occasional dust
tional Standard Fundamentals Gov- exposures such as cleanup, dumping of
erning the Design and Operation of dust collectors, or unloading shipments
Local Exhaust Systems, Z9.2–1960, and of sand at a receiving point when it is
ANSI Z33.1–1961. not feasible to control the dust by en-
(a) When dust leaks are noted, re- closure, exhaust ventilation, or other
pairs shall be made as soon as possible. means. The respirators used must be
(b) The static pressure drop at the ex- approved by NIOSH under 42 CFR part
haust ducts leading from the equip- 84 for protection against the specific
ment shall be checked when the instal- type of dust encountered.
51
(iv) A respiratory protection program than 20 inches (50.8 cm) in diameter,
as defined and described in § 1926.103, used for a multitude of operations var-
shall be established wherever it is nec- iously known as cutting, cutting off,
essary to use respiratory protective grooving, slotting, coping, and joint-
equipment. ing, and the like. The wheels may be
(v) Operators shall be equipped with ‘‘solid’’ consisting of organic-bonded
heavy canvas or leather gloves and abrasive material throughout, ‘‘steel
aprons or equivalent protection to pro- centered’’ consisting of a steel disc
tect them from the impact of abra- with a rim of organic-bonded material
sives. Safety shoes shall be worn to moulded around the periphery, or of
protect against foot injury where the ‘‘inserted tooth’’ type consisting of
heavy pieces of work are handled. a steel disc with organic-bonded abra-
(A) Safety shoes shall conform to the sive teeth or inserts mechanically se-
requirements of American National cured around the periphery.
Standard for Men’s Safety-Toe Foot- (ii) Belts. All power-driven, flexible,
wear, Z41.1–1967. coated bands used for grinding,
(B) Equipment for protection of the polishing, or buffing purposes.
eyes and face shall be supplied to the (iii) Branch pipe. The part of an ex-
operator when the respirator design haust system piping that is connected
does not provide such protection and to directly to the hood or enclosure.
any other personnel working in the vi- (iv) Cradle. A movable fixture, upon
cinity of abrasive blasting operations. which the part to be ground or polished
This equipment shall conform to the is placed.
requirements of § 1926.102. (v) Disc wheels. All power-driven ro-
(6) Air supply and air compressors. Air tatable discs faced with abrasive mate-
for abrasive-blasting respirators must rials, artificial or natural, and used for
be free of harmful quantities of dusts, grinding or polishing on the side of the
mists, or noxious gases, and must meet assembled disc.
the requirements for supplied-air qual- (vi) Entry loss. The loss in static pres-
ity and use specified in 29 CFR sure caused by air flowing into a duct
1910.134(i). or hood. It is usually expressed in
(7) Operational procedures and general inches of water gauge.
safety. Dust shall not be permitted to (vii) Exhaust system. A system con-
accumulate on the floor or on ledges sisting of branch pipes connected to
outside of an abrasive-blasting enclo- hoods or enclosures, one or more head-
sure, and dust spills shall be cleaned up er pipes, an exhaust fan, means for sep-
promptly. Aisles and walkways shall be arating solid contaminants from the
kept clear of steel shot or similar abra- air flowing in the system, and a dis-
sive which may create a slipping haz- charge stack to outside.
ard. (viii) Grinding wheels. All power-driv-
(8) Scope. This paragraph applies to en rotatable grinding or abrasive
all operations where an abrasive is wheels, except disc wheels as defined in
forcibly applied to a surface by pneu- this standard, consisting of abrasive
matic or hydraulic pressure, or by cen- particles held together by artificial or
trifugal force. It does not apply to natural bonds and used for peripheral
steam blasting, or steam cleaning, or grinding.
hydraulic cleaning methods where (ix) Header pipe (main pipe). A pipe
work is done without the aid of abra- into which one or more branch pipes
sives. enter and which connects such branch
(g) Grinding, polishing, and buffing op- pipes to the remainder of the exhaust
erations—(1) Definitions applicable to system.
this paragraph— (x) Hoods and enclosures. The partial
(i) Abrasive cutting-off wheels. Or- or complete enclosure around the
ganic-bonded wheels, the thickness of wheel or disc through which air enters
which is not more than one forty- an exhaust system during operation.
eighth of their diameter for those up (xi) Horizontal double-spindle disc
to, and including, 20 inches (50.8 cm) in grinder. A grinding machine carrying
diameter, and not more than one-six- two power-driven, rotatable, coaxial,
tieth of their diameter for those larger horizontal spindles upon the inside
52
ends of which are mounted abrasive to be thrown into the operator’s
disc wheels used for grinding two sur- breathing zone.
faces simultaneously. (ii) Grinding wheels on floor stands,
(xii) Horizontal single-spindle disc pedestals, benches, and special-purpose
grinder. A grinding machine carrying grinding machines and abrasive cut-
an abrasive disc wheel upon one or ting-off wheels shall have not less than
both ends of a power-driven, rotatable the minimum exhaust volumes shown
single horizontal spindle. in Table D–57.1 with a recommended
(xiii) Polishing and buffing wheels. All minimum duct velocity of 4,500 feet per
power-driven rotatable wheels com- minute in the branch and 3,500 feet per
posed all or in part of textile fabrics, minute in the main. The entry losses
wood, felt, leather, paper, and may be from all hoods except the vertical-spin-
coated with abrasives on the periphery dle disc grinder hood, shall equal 0.65
of the wheel for purposes of polishing, velocity pressure for a straight takeoff
buffing, and light grinding. and 0.45 velocity pressure for a tapered
(xiv) Portable grinder. Any power-driv- takeoff. The entry loss for the vertical-
en rotatable grinding, polishing, or spindle disc grinder hood is shown in
buffing wheel mounted in such manner figure D–57.1 (following paragraph (g)
that it may be manually manipulated. of this section).
(xv) Scratch brush wheels. All power- TABLE D–57.1—GRINDING AND ABRASIVE
driven rotatable wheels made from CUTTING-OFF WHEELS
wire or bristles, and used for scratch
cleaning and brushing purposes. Wheel Minimum
width, exhaust
(xvi) Swing-frame grinder. Any power- Wheel diameter, inches (cm) inches volume
driven rotatable grinding, polishing, or (cm) (feet3/min.)
buffing wheel mounted in such a man- To 9 (22.86) ................................... 11⁄2 (3.81) 220
ner that the wheel with its supporting Over 9 to 16 (22.86 to 40.64) ....... 2 (5.08) 390
framework can be manipulated over Over 16 to 19 (40.64 to 48.26) ..... 3 (7.62) 500
stationary objects. Over 19 to 24 (48.26 to 60.96) ..... 4 (10.16) 610
Over 24 to 30 (60.96 to 76.2) ....... 5 (12.7) 880
(xvii) Velocity pressure (vp). The ki-
Over 30 to 36 (76.2 to 91.44) ....... 6 (15.24) 1,200
netic pressure in the direction of flow
necessary to cause a fluid at rest to
flow at a given velocity. It is usually For any wheel wider than wheel diame-
expressed in inches of water gauge. ters shown in Table D–57.1, increase the
(xviii) Vertical spindle disc grinder. A exhaust volume by the ratio of the new
grinding machine having a vertical, ro- width to the width shown.
tatable power-driven spindle carrying a Example: If wheel width = 41⁄2 inches (11.43
horizontal abrasive disc wheel. cm),
(2) Application. Wherever dry grind- then 4.5÷4 × 610 = 686 (rounded to 690).
ing, dry polishing or buffing is per- (iii) Scratch-brush wheels and all
formed, and employee exposure, with- buffing and polishing wheels mounted
out regard to the use of respirators, ex- on floor stands, pedestals, benches, or
ceeds the permissible exposure limits special-purpose machines shall have
prescribed in § 1926.55 or other perti- not less than the minimum exhaust
nent sections of this part, a local ex- volume shown in Table D–57.2.
haust ventilation system shall be pro-
vided and used to maintain employee TABLE D–57.2—BUFFING AND POLISHING
exposures within the prescribed limits. WHEELS
(3) Hood and branch pipe requirements.
(i) Hoods connected to exhaust systems Minimum
Wheel exhaust
shall be used, and such hoods shall be Wheel diameter, inches (cm) width, volume
inches cm)
designed, located, and placed so that (feet3/min.)
the dust or dirt particles shall fall or To 9 (22.86) ................................... 2 (5.08) 300
be projected into the hoods in the di- Over 9 to 16 (22.86 to 40.64) ....... 3 (7.62) 500
rection of the air flow. No wheels, Over 16 to 19 (40.64 to 48.26) ..... 4 (10.16) 610
discs, straps, or belts shall be operated Over 19 to 24 (48.26 to 60.96) ..... 5 (12.7) 740
Over 24 to 30 (60.96 to 76.2) ....... 6 (15.24) 1,040
in such manner and in such direction
Over 30 to 36 (76.2 to 91.44) ....... 6 (15.24) 1,200
as to cause the dust and dirt particles
53
(iv) Grinding wheels or discs for hori- (vii) Grinding and polishing belts
zontal single-spindle disc grinders shall shall be provided with hoods to remove
be hooded to collect the dust or dirt dust and dirt generated in the oper-
generated by the grinding operation ations and the hoods shall be connected
and the hoods shall be connected to to branch pipes having exhaust vol-
branch pipes having exhaust volumes umes as shown in Table D–57.6.
as shown in Table D–57.3.
TABLE D–57.6—GRINDING AND POLISHING
TABLE D–57.3—HORIZONTAL SINGLE-SPINDLE BELTS
DISC GRINDER
Exhaust
Exhaust Belts width, inches (cm) volume
Disc diameter, inches (cm) volume (ft.3/min.)
(ft.3/min.)
Up to 3 (7.62) ...................................................... 220
Up to 12 (30.48) .................................................. 220 Over 3 to 5 (7.62 to 12.7) ................................... 300
Over 12 to 19 (30.48 to 48.26) ........................... 390 Over 5 to 7 (12.7 to 17.78) ................................. 390
Over 19 to 30 (48.26 to 76.2) ............................. 610 Over 7 to 9 (17.78 to 22.86) ............................... 500
Over 30 to 36 (76.2 to 91.44) ............................. 880
Over 9 to 11 (22.86 to 27.94) ............................. 610
Over 11 to 13 (27.94 to 33.02) ........................... 740
(v) Grinding wheels or discs for hori-
zontal double-spindle disc grinders (viii) Cradles and swing-frame grind-
shall have a hood enclosing the grinders. Where cradles are used for han-
ing chamber and the hood shall be con- dling the parts to be ground, polished,
nected to one or more branch pipes or buffed, requiring large partial enclo-
having exhaust volumes as shown in sures to house the complete operation,
Table D–57.4. a minimum average air velocity of 150
feet per minute shall be maintained
TABLE D–57.4—HORIZONTAL DOUBLE-SPINDLE
over the entire opening of the enclo-
DISC GRINDER
sure. Swing-frame grinders shall also
Exhaust be exhausted in the same manner as
Disc diameter, inches (cm) volume provided for cradles. (See fig. D–57.3)
(ft.3/min.)
(ix) Where the work is outside the
Up to 19 (48.26) .................................................. 610 hood, air volumes must be increased as
Over 19 to 25 (48.26 to 63.5) ............................. 880
Over 25 to 30 (63.5 to 76.2) ............................... 1,200
shown in American Standard Fun-
Over 30 to 53 (76.2 to 134.62) ........................... 1,770 damentals Governing the Design and
Over 53 to 72 (134.62 to 182.88) ....................... 6,280 Operation of Local Exhaust Systems,
Z9.2–1960 (section 4, exhaust hoods).
(vi) Grinding wheels or discs for (4) Exhaust systems. (i) Exhaust sys-
vertical single-spindle disc grinders tems for grinding, polishing, and buff-
shall be encircled with hoods to remove ing operations should be designed in
the dust generated in the operation. accordance with American Standard
The hoods shall be connected to one or Fundamentals Governing the Design
more branch pipes having exhaust vol- and Operation of Local Exhaust Sys-
umes as shown in Table D–57.5. tems, Z9.2–1960.
(ii) Exhaust systems for grinding,
TABLE D–57.5—VERTICAL SPINDLE DISC
polishing, and buffing operations shall
GRINDER
be tested in the manner described in
One-half or more Disc not cov- American Standard Fundamentals
of disc covered ered Governing the Design and Operation of
Disc diameter, inches Ex- Ex- Local Exhaust Systems, Z9.2–1960.
(cm) Num- haust Num- haust
ber 1 foot 3/ ber 1 foot3/ (iii) All exhaust systems shall be pro-
min. min. vided with suitable dust collectors.
Up to 20 (50.8) .......... 1 500 2 780
(5) Hood and enclosure design. (i) (A) It
Over 20 to 30 (50.8 to is the dual function of grinding and ab-
76.2) ....................... 2 780 2 1,480 rasive cutting-off wheel hoods to pro-
Over 30 to 53 (76.2 to tect the operator from the hazards of
134.62) ................... 2 1,770 4 3,530
Over 53 to 72 (134.62 bursting wheels as well as to provide a
to 182.88) ............... 2 3,140 5 6,010 means for the removal of dust and dirt
1 Number of exhaust outlets around periphery of hood, or generated. All hoods shall be not less
equal distribution provided by other means. in structural strength than specified in
54
the American National Standard Safe- the performance of the operation and
ty Code for the Use, Care, and Protec- the average air velocity into the work-
tion of Abrasive Wheels, B7.1–1970. ing face of the enclosure shall not be
(B) Due to the variety of work and less than 150 feet per minute.
types of grinding machines employed, (vii) Hoods for horizontal single-spin-
it is necessary to develop hoods adapt- dle disc grinders shall be constructed
able to the particular machine in ques- to conform as closely as possible to the
tion, and such hoods shall be located as hood shown in figure D–57.6. It is essen-
close as possible to the operation. tial that there be a space between the
(ii) Exhaust hoods for floor stands, back of the wheel and the hood, and a
pedestals, and bench grinders shall be space around the periphery of the
designed in accordance with figure D– wheel of at least 1 inch (2.54 cm) in
57.2. The adjustable tongue shown in order to permit the suction to act
the figure shall be kept in working around the wheel periphery. The open-
order and shall be adjusted within one- ing on the side of the disc shall be no
fourth inch (0.635 cm) of the wheel pe- larger than is required for the grinding
riphery at all times. operation, but must never be less than
(iii) Swing-frame grinders shall be twice the area of the branch outlet.
provided with exhaust booths as indi- (viii) Horizontal double-spindle disc
cated in figure D–57.3. grinders shall have a hood encircling
(iv) Portable grinding operations, the wheels and grinding chamber simi-
whenever the nature of the work per- lar to that illustrated in figure D–57.7.
mits, shall be conducted within a par- The openings for passing the work into
tial enclosure. The opening in the en- the grinding chamber should be kept as
closure shall be no larger than is actu- small as possible, but must never be
ally required in the operation and an less than twice the area of the branch
average face air velocity of not less outlets.
than 200 feet per minute shall be main- (ix) Vertical-spindle disc grinders
tained. shall be encircled with a hood so con-
(v) Hoods for polishing and buffing structed that the heavy dust is drawn
and scratch-brush wheels shall be con- off a surface of the disc and the lighter
structed to conform as closely to figure dust exhausted through a continuous
D–57.4 as the nature of the work will slot at the top of the hood as shown in
permit. figure D–57.1.
(vi) Cradle grinding and polishing op- (x) Grinding and polishing belt hoods
erations shall be performed within a shall be constructed as close to the op-
partial enclosure similar to figure D– eration as possible. The hood should
57.5. The operator shall be positioned extend almost to the belt, and 1-inch
outside the working face of the opening (2.54 cm) wide openings should be pro-
of the enclosure. The face opening of vided on either side. Figure D–57.8
the enclosure should not be any greater shows a typical hood for a belt oper-
in area than that actually required for ation.
55
Dia. D inches (cm) Exhaust E Volume Ex-

hausted at
4,500 ft/min Note
Min. Max. No Pipes Dia.
ft3/min
.................................... 20 (50.8) 1 41⁄4 (10.795) 500 When one-half or more of the disc
can be hooded, use exhaust
ducts as shown at the left.
Over 20 (50.8) ........... 30 (76.2) 2 4 (10.16) 780
Over 30 (76.2) ........... 72 (182.88) 2 6 (15.24) 1,770
Over 53 (134.62) ....... 72 (182.88) 2 8 (20.32) 3,140
.................................... 20 (50.8) 2 4 (10.16) 780 When no hood can be used over

disc, use exhaust ducts as
shown at left.
Over 20 (50.8) ........... 20 (50.8) 2 4 (10.16) 780
Over 30 (76.2) ........... 30 (76.2) 2 51⁄2 (13.97) 1,480
Over 53 (134.62) ....... 53 (134.62) 4 6 (15.24) 3,530
72 (182.88) 5 7 (17.78) 6,010
Entry loss=1.0 slot velocity pressure + 0.5 branch velocity pressure.
Minimum slot velocity=2,000 ft/min—1⁄2-inch (1.27 cm) slot width.
56
EC30OC91.000
Wheel dimension, inches (centimeters)

Volume of
Exhaust outlet,
Diameter inches (centi- air at
4,500 ft/
Width, Max meters) E
min
Min= d Max= D
9 (22.86) 11⁄2 (3.81) 3 220

Over 9 (22.86) ............................................................................. 16 (40.64) 2 (5.08) 4 390
Over 16 (40.64) ........................................................................... 19 (48.26) 3 (7.62) 41⁄2 500
Over 19 (48.26) ........................................................................... 24 (60.96) 4 (10.16) 5 610
Over 24 (60.96) ........................................................................... 30 (76.2) 5 (12.7) 6 880
Over 30 (76.2) ............................................................................. 36 (91.44) 6 (15.24) 7 1,200
Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff 0.65 velocity pressure for straight takeoff.
57
EC30OC91.001
FIGURE D–57.3—A METHOD OF APPLYING AN EXHAUST ENCLOSURE TO SWING-FRAME GRINDERS
NOTE: Baffle to reduce front opening as

much as possible
58
EC30OC91.002
STANDARD BUFFING AND POLISHING HOOD

Wheel dimension, inches (centimeters)
Volume of
Exhaust outlet, air at
Diameter
inches E 4,500 ft/
Width, Max min
Min= d Max= D
9 (22.86) 2 (5.08) 31⁄2 (3.81) 300

Over 9 (22.86) ............................................................................. 16 (40.64) 3 (5.08) 4 500
Over 16 (40.64) ........................................................................... 19 (48.26) 4 (11.43) 5 610
Over 19 (48.26) ........................................................................... 24 (60.96) 5 (12.7) 51⁄2 740
Over 24 (60.96) ........................................................................... 30 (76.2) 6 (15.24) 61⁄2 1.040
Over 30 (76.2) ............................................................................. 36 (91.44) 6 (15.24) 7 1.200
Entry loss = 0.15 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff; 0.65 velocity pressure for straight takeoff.
59
EC30OC91.003
FIGURE D–57.5—CRADLE POLISHING OR GRINDING ENCLOSURE
Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for

tapered takeoff
60
EC30OC91.004
Dia D, inches (centimeters) Volume ex-

Exhaust E,
hausted at
dia. inches
Min. Max. (cm) 4,500 ft/min
ft3/min
12 (30.48) 3 (7.6) 220

Over 12 (30.48) ........................................................................................................... 19 (48.26) 4 (10.16) 390
Over 19 (48.26) ........................................................................................................... 30 (76.2) 5 (12.7) 610
Over 30 (76.2) ............................................................................................................. 36 (91.44) 6 (15.24) 880
NOTE: If grinding wheels are used for disc grinding purposes, hoods must conform to structural strength and materials as de-
scribed in 9.1.
Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff.
61
EC30OC91.005
Disc dia. inches (centimeters) Exhaust E Volume

exhaust at
4,500 ft/ Note
Min. Max. No Pipes Dia. min. ft3/
min
19 (48.26) 1 5 610
Over 19 (48.26) ................. 25 (63.5) 1 6 880 When width ‘‘W’’ permits, exhaust
ducts should be as near heaviest
grinding as possible.
Over 25 (63.5) ................... 30 (76.2) 1 7 1,200
Over 30 (76.2) ................... 53 (134.62) 2 6 1,770
Over 53 (134.62) ............... 72 (182.88) 4 8 6,280
Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff.
62
EC30OC91.006
FIGURE D–57.8—A TYPICAL HOOD FOR A BELT OPERATION
Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for mable and Combustible Materials,
tapered takeoff NFPA No. 33–1969).
(iii) Spray room. A spray room is a
Exhaust room in which spray-finishing oper-
Belt width W. inches (centimeters) volume.
ft.1/min ations not conducted in a spray booth
are performed separately from other
Up to 3 (7.62) ...................................................... 220
3 to 5 (7.62 to 12.7) ............................................ 300
areas.
5 to 7 (12.7 to 17.78) .......................................... 390 (iv) Minimum maintained velocity. Min-
7 to 9 (17.78 to 22.86) ........................................ 500 imum maintained velocity is the veloc-
9 to 11 (22.86 to 27.94) ...................................... 610 ity of air movement which must be
11 to 13 (27.94 to 33.02) .................................... 740 maintained in order to meet minimum
Minimum duct velocity = 4,500 ft/min branch, 3,500 ft/min specified requirements for health and
main. safety.
Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff; 0.65
velocity pressure for straight takeoff. (2) Location and application. Spray
booths or spray rooms are to be used to
(6) Scope. This paragraph (g), pre- enclose or confine all operations.
scribes the use of exhaust hood enclo- Spray-finishing operations shall be lo-
sures and systems in removing dust, cated as provided in sections 201
dirt, fumes, and gases generated through 206 of the Standard for Spray
through the grinding, polishing, or Finishing Using Flammable and Com-
buffing of ferrous and nonferrous met- bustible Materials, NFPA No. 33–1969.
als. (3) Design and construction of spray
(h) Spray finishing operations—(1) Defi- booths. (i) Spray booths shall be de-
nitions applicable to this paragraph—(i) signed and constructed in accordance
Spray-finishing operations. Spray-fin- with § 1926.66(b) (1) through (4) and (6)
ishing operations are employment of through (10) (see sections 301–304 and
methods wherein organic or inorganic 306–310 of the Standard for Spray Fin-
materials are utilized in dispersed form ishing Using Flammable and Combus-
for deposit on surfaces to be coated, tible Materials, NFPA No. 33–1969), for
treated, or cleaned. Such methods of general construction specifications.
deposit may involve either automatic, For a more detailed discussion of fun-
manual, or electrostatic deposition but damentals relating to this subject, see
do not include metal spraying or met- ANSI Z9.2–1960
allizing, dipping, flow coating, roller (A) Lights, motors, electrical equip-
coating, tumbling, centrifuging, or ment, and other sources of ignition
spray washing and degreasing as con- shall conform to the requirements of
ducted in self-contained washing and § 1926.66(b)(10) and (c). (See section 310
degreasing machines or systems. and chapter 4 of the Standard for Spray
(ii) Spray booth. Spray booths are de- Finishing Using Flammable and Com-
fined and described in § 1926.66(a). (See bustible Materials NFPA No. 33–1969.)
sections 103, 104, and 105 of the Stand- (B) In no case shall combustible ma-
ard for Spray Finishing Using Flam- terial be used in the construction of a
63
EC30OC91.007
spray booth and supply or exhaust duct concrete, masonry, or other material
connected to it. having similar properties.
(ii) Unobstructed walkways shall not (A) Tanks shall be provided with
be less than 61⁄2 feet (1.976 m) high and weirs, skimmer plates, or screens to
shall be maintained clear of obstruc- prevent sludge and floating paint from
tion from any work location in the entering the pump suction box. Means
booth to a booth exit or open booth for automatically maintaining the
front. In booths where the open front is proper water level shall also be pro-
the only exit, such exits shall be not vided. Fresh water inlets shall not be
less than 3 feet (0.912 m) wide. In submerged. They shall terminate at
booths having multiple exits, such least one pipe diameter above the safe-
exits shall not be less than 2 feet (0.608 ty overflow level of the tank.
m) wide, provided that the maximum (B) Tanks shall be so constructed as
distance from the work location to the to discourage accumulation of haz-
exit is 25 feet (7.6 m) or less. Where ardous deposits.
booth exits are provided with doors, (vi) Pump manifolds, risers, and
such doors shall open outward from the headers shall be adequately sized to in-
booth. sure sufficient water flow to provide ef-
(iii) Baffles, distribution plates, and ficient operation of the water chamber.
dry-type overspray collectors shall (4) Design and construction of spray
conform to the requirements of rooms. (i) Spray rooms, including
§ 1926.66(b) (4) and (5). (See sections 304 floors, shall be constructed of masonry,
and 305 of the Standard for Spray Fin- concrete, or other noncombustible ma-
ishing Using Flammable and Combus- terial.
tible Materials, NFPA No. 33–1969.) (ii) Spray rooms shall have non-
(A) Overspray filters shall be in- combustible fire doors and shutters.
stalled and maintained in accordance (iii) Spray rooms shall be adequately
with the requirements of § 1926.66(b)(5), ventilated so that the atmosphere in
(see section 305 of the Standard for the breathing zone of the operator
Spray Finishing Using Flammable and shall be maintained in accordance with
Combustible Materials, NFPA No. 33– the requirements of paragraph (h)(6)(ii)
1969), and shall only be in a location of this section.
easily accessible for inspection, clean- (iv) Spray rooms used for production
ing, or replacement. spray-finishing operations shall con-
(B) Where effective means, inde- form to the requirements for spray
pendent of the overspray filters, are in- booths.
stalled which will result in design air (5) Ventilation. (i) Ventilation shall be
distribution across the booth cross sec- provided in accordance with provisions
tion, it is permissible to operate the of § 1926.66(d) (see chapter 5 of the
booth without the filters in place. Standard for Spray Finishing Using
(iv) (A) For wet or water-wash spray Flammable or Combustible Materials,
booths, the water-chamber enclosure, NFPA No. 33–1969), and in accordance
within which intimate contact of con- with the following:
taminated air and cleaning water or (A) Where a fan plenum is used to
other cleaning medium is maintained, equalize or control the distribution of
if made of steel, shall be 18 gage or exhaust air movement through the
heavier and adequately protected booth, it shall be of sufficient strength
against corrosion. or rigidity to withstand the differential
(B) Chambers may include scrubber air pressure or other superficially im-
spray nozzles, headers, troughs, or posed loads for which the equipment is
other devices. Chambers shall be pro- designed and also to facilitate clean-
vided with adequate means for creating ing. Construction specifications shall
and maintaining scrubbing action for be at least equivalent to those of para-
removal of particulate matter from the graph (h)(5)(iii) of this section.
exhaust air stream. (B) [Reserved]
(v) Collecting tanks shall be of weld- (ii) Inlet or supply ductwork used to
ed steel construction or other suitable transport makeup air to spray booths
non-combustible material. If pits are or surrounding areas shall be con-
used as collecting tanks, they shall be structed of noncombustible materials.
64
(A) If negative pressure exists within (E) Inspection or clean-out doors
inlet ductwork, all seams and joints shall be provided for every 9 to 12 feet
shall be sealed if there is a possibility (2.736 to 3.648 m) of running length for
of infiltration of harmful quantities of ducts up to 12 inches (0.304 m) in di-
noxious gases, fumes, or mists from ameter, but the distance between
areas through which ductwork passes. cleanout doors may be greater for larg-
(B) Inlet ductwork shall be sized in er pipes. (See 8.3.21 of American Na-
accordance with volume flow require- tional Standard Z9.1–1951.) A clean-out
ments and provide design air require- door or doors shall be provided for serv-
ments at the spray booth. icing the fan, and where necessary, a
(C) Inlet ductwork shall be ade- drain shall be provided.
quately supported throughout its (F) Where ductwork passes through a
length to sustain at least its own combustible roof or wall, the roof or
weight plus any negative pressure wall shall be protected at the point of
which is exerted upon it under normal penetration by open space or fire-resis-
operating conditions. tive material between the duct and the
(iii) [Reserved] roof or wall. When ducts pass through
(A) Exhaust ductwork shall be ade- firewalls, they shall be provided with
quately supported throughout its automatic fire dampers on both sides of
length to sustain its weight plus any the wall, except that three-eighth-inch
normal accumulation in interior dur- steel plates may be used in lieu of
ing normal operating conditions and automatic fire dampers for ducts not
any negative pressure exerted upon it. exceeding 18 inches (45.72 cm) in diame-
(B) Exhaust ductwork shall be sized ter.
in accordance with good design prac- (G) Ductwork used for ventilating
tice which shall include consideration any process covered in this standard
of fan capacity, length of duct, number shall not be connected to ducts ven-
of turns and elbows, variation in size, tilating any other process or any chim-
volume, and character of materials ney or flue used for conveying any
being exhausted. See American Na- products of combustion.
tional Standard Z9.2–1960 for further (6) Velocity and air flow requirements.
details and explanation concerning ele- (i) Except where a spray booth has an
ments of design. adequate air replacement system, the
(C) Longitudinal joints in sheet steel velocity of air into all openings of a
ductwork shall be either lock-seamed, spray booth shall be not less than that
riveted, or welded. For other than steel specified in Table D–57.7 for the oper-
construction, equivalent securing of ating conditions specified. An adequate
joints shall be provided. air replacement system is one which
(D) Circumferential joints in duct- introduces replacement air upstream
work shall be substantially fastened or above the object being sprayed and
together and lapped in the direction of is so designed that the velocity of air
airflow. At least every fourth joint in the booth cross section is not less
shall be provided with connecting than that specified in Table D–57.7
flanges, bolted together, or of equiva- when measured upstream or above the
lent fastening security. object being sprayed.
TABLE D–57.7—MINIMUM MAINTAINED VELOCITIES INTO SPRAY BOOTHS
Crossdraft, Airflow velocities, f.p.m.

Operating conditions for objects completely inside booth f.p.m.
Design Range
Electrostatic and automatic airless operation contained in booth Negligible .... 50 large booth ...................... 50–75
without operator.
................. 100 small booth .................... 75–125
Air-operated guns, manual or automatic ............................................ Up to 50 ...... 100 large booth .................... 75–125
................. 150 small booth .................... 125–175

Air-operated guns, manual or automatic ............................................ Up to 100 .... 150 large booth .................... 125–175
................. 200 small booth .................... 150–250

NOTES:
65
(1) Attention is invited to the fact that the effectiveness of the spray booth is dependent upon the relationship of the depth of
the booth to its height and width.
(2) Crossdrafts can be eliminated through proper design and such design should be sought. Crossdrafts in excess of
100fpm (feet per minute) should not be permitted.
(3) Excessive air pressures result in loss of both efficiency and material waste in addition to creating a backlash that may
carry overspray and fumes into adjacent work areas.
(4) Booths should be designed with velocities shown in the column headed ‘‘Design.’’ However, booths operating with veloci-
ties shown in the column headed ‘‘Range’’ are in compliance with this standard.
(ii) In addition to the requirements TABLE D–57.8—LOWER EXPLOSIVE LIMIT OF

in paragraph (h)(6)(i) of this section the SOME COMMONLY USED SOLVENTS—Continued
total air volume exhausted through a
Lower ex-
spray booth shall be such as to dilute Cubic feet plosive
per gallon
solvent vapor to at least 25 percent of of vapor of
limit in per-
Solvent cent by
the lower explosive limit of the solvent liquid at 70 volume of
°F (21.11
being sprayed. An example of the meth- air at 70 °F
°C). (21.11 °C)
od of calculating this volume is given
below. Butyl Alcohol (n) ............................ 35.2 1.4
Butyl Cellosolve ............................. 24.8 1.1
Example: To determine the lower explosive Cellosolve ...................................... 33.6 1.8
limits of the most common solvents used in Cellosolve Acetate ......................... 23.2 1.7
spray finishing, see Table D–57.8. Column 1 Cyclohexanone .............................. 31.2 1 1.1
gives the number of cubic feet of vapor per 1,1 Dichloroethylene ...................... 42.4 5.9
gallon of solvent and column 2 gives the 1,2 Dichloroethylene ...................... 42.4 9.7
Ethyl Acetate ................................. 32.8 2.5
lower explosive limit (LEL) in percentage by Ethyl Alcohol .................................. 55.2 4.3
volume of air. Note that the quantity of sol- Ethyl Lactate .................................. 28.0 1 1.5
vent will be diminished by the quantity of Methyl Acetate ............................... 40.0 3.1
solids and nonflammables contained in the Methyl Alcohol ............................... 80.8 7.3
finish. Methyl Cellosolve .......................... 40.8 2.5
To determine the volume of air in cubic Methyl Ethyl Ketone ...................... 36.0 1.8
Methyl n-Propyl Ketone ................. 30.4 1.5
feet necessary to dilute the vapor from 1 gal- Naphtha (VM&P) (76°Naphtha) ..... 22.4 0.9
lon of solvent to 25 percent of the lower ex- Naphtha (100°Flash) Safety Sol-
plosive limit, apply the following formula: vent—Stoddard Solvent ............. 23.2 1.0
Dilution volume required per gallon of Propyl Acetate (n) ......................... 27.2 2.8
solvent=4 (100–LEL) (cubic feet of vapor Propyl Acetate (iso) ....................... 28.0 1.1
Propyl Alcohol (n) .......................... 44.8 2.1
per gallon)÷ LEL Propyl Alcohol (iso) ....................... 44.0 2.0
Using toluene as the solvent. Toluene .......................................... 30.4 1.4
Turpentine ..................................... 20.8 0.8
(1) LEL of toluene from Table D–57.8, col-
Xylene (o) ...................................... 26.4 1.0
umn 2, is 1.4 percent.
(2) Cubic feet of vapor per gallon from 1 At 212 °F (100 °C).
Table D–57.8, column 1, is 30.4 cubic feet per
(iii)(A) When an operator is in a
gallon.
(3) Dilution volume required = booth downstream of the object being
sprayed, an air-supplied respirator or
4 (100–1.4) 30.4÷ 1.4=8,564 cubic feet.
other type of respirator approved by
(4) To convert to cubic feet per minute of NIOSH under 42 CFR part 84 for the
required ventilation, multiply the dilution material being sprayed should be used
volume required per gallon of solvent by the
by the operator.
number of gallons of solvent evaporated per
minute.
(B) Where downdraft booths are pro-
vided with doors, such doors shall be
TABLE D–57.8—LOWER EXPLOSIVE LIMIT OF closed when spray painting.
SOME COMMONLY USED SOLVENTS (7) Make-up air. (i) Clean fresh air,
free of contamination from adjacent
Cubic feet Lower ex- industrial exhaust systems, chimneys,
per gallon plosive
of vapor of
limit in per- stacks, or vents, shall be supplied to a
Solvent cent by spray booth or room in quantities
liquid at 70 volume of
°F (21.11 equal to the volume of air exhausted
°C). air at 70 °F
(21.11 °C) through the spray booth.
Column 1 Column 2 (ii) Where a spray booth or room re-
Acetone ......................................... 44.0 2.6 ceives make-up air through self-closing
Amyl Acetate (iso) ......................... 21.6 1 1.0 doors, dampers, or louvers, they shall
Amyl Alcohol (n) ............................ 29.6 1.2 be fully open at all times when the
Amyl Alcohol (iso) ......................... 29.6 1.2
Benzene ........................................ 36.8 1 1.4 booth or room is in use for spraying.
Butyl Acetate (n) ............................ 24.8 1.7 The velocity of air through such doors,
66
dampers, or louvers shall not exceed (C) No means of heating make-up air
200 feet per minute. If the fan charac- shall be located in a spray booth.
teristics are such that the required air (D) Where make-up air is heated by
flow through the booth will be pro- coal or oil, the products of combustion
vided, higher velocities through the shall not be allowed to mix with the
doors, dampers, or louvers may be make-up air, and the products of com-
used. bustion shall be conducted outside the
(iii) (A) Where the air supply to a building through a flue terminating at
spray booth or room is filtered, the fan a point remote from all points where
static pressure shall be calculated on make-up air enters the building.
the assumption that the filters are (E) Where make-up air is heated by
dirty to the extent that they require gas, and the products of combustion
cleaning or replacement. are not mixed with the make-up air but
(B) The rating of filters shall be gov- are conducted through an independent
erned by test data supplied by the man- flue to a point outside the building re-
ufacturer of the filter. A pressure gage mote from all points where make-up
shall be installed to show the pressure air enters the building, it is not nec-
drop across the filters. This gage shall essary to comply with paragraph
be marked to show the pressure drop at (h)(7)(iv)(F) of this section.
which the filters require cleaning or re- (F) Where make-up air to any manu-
placement. Filters shall be replaced or ally operated spray booth or room is
cleaned whenever the pressure drop heated by gas and the products of com-
across them becomes excessive or bustion are allowed to mix with the
whenever the air flow through the face supply air, the following precautions
of the booth falls below that specified must be taken:
in Table D–57.7. (1) The gas must have a distinctive
(iv) (A) Means for heating make-up and strong enough odor to warn work-
air to any spray booth or room, before men in a spray booth or room of its
or at the time spraying is normally presence if in an unburned state in the
performed, shall be provided in all make-up air.
places where the outdoor temperature (2) The maximum rate of gas supply
may be expected to remain below 55 °F. to the make-up air heater burners
(12.77 °C.) for appreciable periods of must not exceed that which would
time during the operation of the booth yield in excess of 200 p.p.m. (parts per
except where adequate and safe means million) of carbon monoxide or 2,000
of radiant heating for all operating per- p.p.m. of total combustible gases in the
sonnel affected is provided. The re- mixture if the unburned gas upon the
placement air during the heating sea- occurrence of flame failure were mixed
sons shall be maintained at not less with all of the make-up air supplied.
than 65 °F. (18.33 °C.) at the point of (3) A fan must be provided to deliver
entry into the spray booth or spray the mixture of heated air and products
room. When otherwise unheated make- of combustion from the plenum cham-
up air would be at a temperature of ber housing the gas burners to the
more than 10 °F. below room tempera- spray booth or room.
ture, its temperature shall be regulated (8) Scope. Spray booths or spray
as provided in section 3.6.3 of ANSI rooms are to be used to enclose or con-
Z9.2–1960. fine all spray finishing operations cov-
(B) As an alternative to an air re- ered by this paragraph (h). This para-
placement system complying with the graph does not apply to the spraying of
preceding section, general heating of the exteriors of buildings, fixed tanks,
the building in which the spray room or similar structures, nor to small
or booth is located may be employed portable spraying apparatus not used
provided that all occupied parts of the repeatedly in the same location.
building are maintained at not less (i) Open surface tanks—(1) General. (i)
than 65 °F. (18.33 °C.) when the exhaust This paragraph applies to all oper-
system is in operation or the general ations involving the immersion of ma-
heating system supplemented by other terials in liquids, or in the vapors of
sources of heat may be employed to such liquids, for the purpose of clean-
meet this requirement. ing or altering the surface or adding to
67
or imparting a finish thereto or chang- tion. Where the tank contains a mix-
ing the character of the materials, and ture of liquids, other than organic sol-
their subsequent removal from the liq- vents, whose effects are additive, the
uid or vapor, draining, and drying. hygienic standard of the most toxic
These operations include washing, elec- component (for example, the one hav-
troplating, anodizing, pickling, ing the lowest p.p.m. or mg./m.3) shall
quenching, dying, dipping, tanning, be used, except where such substance
dressing, bleaching, degreasing, alka- constitutes an insignificantly small
line cleaning, stripping, rinsing, digest- fraction of the mixture. For mixtures
ing, and other similar operations. of organic solvents, their combined ef-
(ii) Except where specific construc- fect, rather than that of either individ-
tion specifications are prescribed in ually, shall determine the hazard po-
this section, hoods, ducts, elbows, fans, tential. In the absence of information
blowers, and all other exhaust system to the contrary, the effects shall be
parts, components, and supports there- considered as additive. If the sum of
of shall be so constructed as to meet the ratios of the airborne concentra-
conditions of service and to facilitate tion of each contaminant to the toxic
maintenance and shall conform in con- concentration of that contaminant ex-
struction to the specifications con- ceeds unity, the toxic concentration
tained in American National Standard shall be considered to have been ex-
Fundamentals Governing the Design ceeded. (See Note A to paragraph
and Operation of Local Exhaust Sys- (i)(2)(v) of this section.)
tems, Z9.2–1960. (v) Hazard potential shall be deter-
(2) Classification of open-surface tank mined from Table D–57.9, with the
operations. (i) Open-surface tank oper- value indicating greater hazard being
ations shall be classified into 16 class- used. When the hazardous material
es, numbered A–1 to D–4, inclusive. may be either a vapor with a threshold
(ii) Determination of class. Class is de- limit value (TLV) in p.p.m. or a mist
termined by two factors, hazard poten- with a TLV in mg./m.3, the TLV indi-
tial designated by a letter from A to D, cating the greater hazard shall be used
inclusive, and rate of gas, vapor, or (for example, A takes precedence over
mist evolution designated by a number B or C; B over C; C over D).
from 1 to 4, inclusive (for example, B.3).
(iii) Hazard potential is an index, on NOTE A:
a scale of from A to D, inclusive, of the (c1÷TLV1)+(c2÷TLV2)+(c3÷TLV3)+; . .
severity of the hazard associated with .(cN÷TLVN)1
the substance contained in the tank be- Where:
cause of the toxic, flammable, or explo- c = Concentration measured at the operation
sive nature of the vapor, gas, or mist in p.p.m.
produced therefrom. The toxic hazard
is determined from the concentration, TABLE D–57.9—DETERMINATION OF HAZARD
measured in parts by volume of a gas POTENTIAL
or vapor, per million parts by volume
of contaminated air (p.p.m.), or in mil- Toxicity group
ligrams of mist per cubic meter of air Hazard potential Gas or Mist (mg./ Flash point in
(mg./m.3), below which ill effects are vapor m3) degrees F. (C.)
(p.p.m.)
unlikely to occur to the exposed work-
er. The concentrations shall be those in A .......................... 0–10 0–0.1 ..........................
§ 1926.55 or other pertinent sections of B .......................... 11–100 0.11–1.0 Under 100
(37.77)
this part.
C .......................... 101–500 1.1–10 100 200
(iv) The relative fire or explosion (37.77–93.33)
hazard is measured in degrees Fahr- D .......................... Over 500 Over 10 Over 200
enheit in terms of the closed-cup flash (93.33)
point of the substance in the tank. De-
tailed information on the prevention of (vi) Rate of gas, vapor, or mist evo-
fire hazards in dip tanks may be found lution is a numerical index, on a scale
in Dip Tanks Containing Flammable or of from 1 to 4, inclusive, both of the
Combustible Liquids, NFPA No. 34– relative capacity of the tank to
1966, National Fire Protection Associa- produce gas, vapor, or mist and of the
68
relative energy with which it is pro- (D) The extent that the tank gases or
jected or carried upwards from the produces mist in an arbitrary scale—
tank. Rate is evaluated in terms of high, medium, low, and nil. (See Table
(A) The temperature of the liquid in D–57.10, Note 2.) Gassing depends upon
the tank in degrees Fahrenheit; electrochemical or mechanical proc-
(B) The number of degrees Fahr- esses, the effects of which have to be
enheit that this temperature is below individually evaluated for each instal-
the boiling point of the liquid in de- lation (see Table D–57.10, Note 3).
grees Fahrenheit; (vii) Rate of evolution shall be deter-
(C) The relative evaporation of the mined from Table D–57.10. When evapo-
liquid in still air at room temperature ration and gassing yield different rates,
in an arbitrary scale—fast, medium, the lowest numerical value shall be
slow, or nil; and used.
TABLE D–57.10—DETERMINATION OF RATE OF GAS, VAPOR, OR MIST EVOLUTION 1
Liquid temperature, Degrees below boil-
Rate °F. (C.) ing point Relative evaporation 2 Gassing 3
1 ................................ Over 200 (93.33) 0–20 Fast ...................................... High.

2 ................................ 150–200 (65.55– 21–50 Medium ................................ Medium.
93.33)
3 ................................ 94–149 (34.44–65) 51–100 Slow ..................................... Low.
4 ................................ Under 94 (34.44) Over 100 Nil ........................................ Nil.
1 In certain classes of equipment, specifically vapor degreasers, an internal condenser or vapor level thermostat is used to pre-
vent the vapor from leaving the tank during normal operation. In such cases, rate of vapor evolution from the tank into the work-
room is not dependent upon the factors listed in the table, but rather upon abnormalities of operating procedure, such as carry-
out of vapors from excessively fast action, dragout of liquid by entrainment in parts, contamination of solvent by water and other
materials, or improper heat balance. When operating procedure is excellent, effective rate of evolution may be taken as 4. When
operating procedure is average, the effective rate of evolution may be taken as 3. When operation is poor, a rate of 2 or 1 is in-
dicated, depending upon observed conditions.
2 Relative evaporation rate is determined according to the methods described by A. K. Doolittle in Industrial and Engineering
Chemistry, vol. 27, p. 1169, (3) where time for 100-percent evaporation is as follows: Fast: 0–3 hours; Medium: 3–12 hours;
Slow: 12–50 hours; Nil: more than 50 hours.
3 Gassing means the formation by chemical or electrochemical action of minute bubbles of gas under the surface of the liquid
in the tank and is generally limited to aqueous solutions.
(3) Ventilation. Where ventilation is (ii) All tanks exhausted by means of

used to control potential exposures to hoods which
workers as defined in paragraph (A) Project over the entire tank;
(i)(2)(iii) of this section, it shall be ade- (B) Are fixed in position in such a lo-
quate to reduce the concentration of cation that the head of the workman,
the air contaminant to the degree that in all his normal operating positions
a hazard to the worker does not exist. while working at the tank, is in front
Methods of ventilation are discussed in
of all hood openings; and
American National Standard Fun-
damentals Governing the Design and (C) Are completely enclosed on at
Operation of Local Exhaust Systems, least two sides, shall be considered to
Z9.2–1960. be exhausted through an enclosing
(4) Control requirements. (i) Control hood.
velocities shall conform to Table D– (D) The quantity of air in cubic feet
57.11 in all cases where the flow of air per minute necessary to be exhausted
past the breathing or working zone of through an enclosing hood shall be not
the operator and into the hoods is unless than the product of the control ve-
disturbed by local environmental con- locity times the net area of all open-
ditions, such as open windows, wall ings in the enclosure through which air
fans, unit heaters, or moving machin- can flow into the hood.
ery.
69
TABLE D–57.11—CONTROL VELOCITIES IN FEET PER MINUTE (F.P.M.) FOR UNDISTURBED LOCATIONS
Enclosing hood Canopy hood 2
Class Lateral ex-
One open Two open haust 1 Three Four open
side sides open sides sides
B–1 and A–2 ........................................................................... 100 150 150 Do not use Do not use
A–3 2, B–1, B–2, and C–1 ....................................................... 75 100 100 125 175
A–3, C–2, and D–1 3 ............................................................... 65 90 75 100 150
B–4 2, C–3, and D–2 3 ............................................................. 50 75 50 75 125
A–4, C–4, D–3 3, and D–4 4 .................................................... .................. .................. .................. .................. ..................
1 See Table D–57.12 for computation of ventilation rate.
2 Do not use canopy hood for Hazard Potential A processes.
3 Where complete control of hot water is desired, design as next highest class.
4 General room ventilation required.
(iii) All tanks exhausted by means of (A) For lateral exhaust hoods over 42
hoods which do not project over the en- inches (1.06 m) wide, or where it is de-
tire tank, and in which the direction of sirable to reduce the amount of air re-
air movement into the hood or hoods is moved from the workroom, air supply
substantially horizontal, shall be con- slots or orifices shall be provided along
sidered to be laterally exhausted. The the side or the center of the tank oppo-
quantity of air in cubic feet per minute site from the exhaust slots. The design
necessary to be laterally exhausted per of such systems shall meet the fol-
square foot of tank area in order to
lowing criteria:
maintain the required control velocity
shall be determined from Table D–57.12 (1) The supply air volume plus the en-
for all variations in ratio of tank width trained air shall not exceed 50 percent
(W) to tank length $(L). The total of the exhaust volume.
quantity of air in cubic feet per minute (2) The velocity of the supply air-
required to be exhausted per tank shall stream as it reaches the effective con-
be not less than the product of the area trol area of the exhaust slot shall be
of tank surface times the cubic feet per less than the effective velocity over
minute per square foot of tank area, the exhaust slot area.
determined from Table D–57.12.
TABLE D–57.12—MINIMUM VENTILATION RATE IN CUBIC FEET OF AIR PER MINUTE PER SQUARE
FOOT OF TANK AREA FOR LATERAL EXHAUST
C.f.m. per sq. ft. to maintain required minimum velocities at fol-
Required minimum control velocity, f.p.m. (from Table D– lowing ratios (tank width (W)/tank length (L)). 1,2
57.11)
0.0–0.09 0.1–0.24 0.25–0.49 0.5–0.99 1.0–2.0
Hood along one side or two parallel sides of tank when one hood is against a wall or baffle. 2
Also for a manifold along tank centerline. 3
50 ............................................................................................ 50 60 75 90 100
75 ............................................................................................ 75 90 110 130 150
100 .......................................................................................... 100 125 150 175 200
150 .......................................................................................... 150 190 225 260 300
Hood along one side or two parallel sides of free standing tank not against wall or baffle.
50 ............................................................................................ 75 90 100 110 125

75 ............................................................................................ 110 130 150 170 190
100 .......................................................................................... 150 175 200 225 250
150 .......................................................................................... 225 260 300 340 375
1 Itis not practicable to ventilate across the long dimension of a tank whose ratio W/L exceeds 2.0.
It is undesirable to do so when W/L exceeds 1.0. For circular tanks with lateral exhaust along up to 1⁄2 the circumference, use
W/L=1.0; for over one-half the circumference use W/L=0.5.
2 Baffle is a vertical plate the same length as the tank, and with the top of the plate as high as the tank is wide. If the exhaust
hood is on the side of a tank against a building wall or close to it, it is perfectly baffled.
3 Use W/2 as tank width in computing when manifold is along centerline, or when hoods are used on two parallel sides of a
tank.
Tank Width (W) means the effective width over which the hood must pull air to operate (for example, where the hood face is
set back from the edge of the tank, this set back must be added in measuring tank width). The surface area of tanks can fre-
quently be reduced and better control obtained (particularly on conveyorized systems) by using covers extending from the upper
edges of the slots toward the center of the tank.
70
(3) The vertical height of the receiv- the liquid in the tank to minimize mist
ing exhaust hood, including any baffle, formation, or any combination thereof,
shall not be less than one-quarter the may all be used as gas, mist, or vapor
width of the tank. control means for open-surface tank
(4) The supply airstream shall not be operations, provided that they effec-
allowed to impinge on obstructions be- tively reduce the concentrations of
tween it and the exhaust slot in such a hazardous materials in the vicinity of
manner as to significantly interfere the worker below the limits set in ac-
with the performance of the exhaust cordance with paragraph (i)(2) of this
hood. section.
(5) Since most failure of push-pull (7) System design. (i) The equipment
systems result from excessive supply for exhausting air shall have sufficient
air volumes and pressures, methods of capacity to produce the flow of air re-
measuring and adjusting the supply air quired in each of the hoods and open-
shall be provided. When satisfactory ings of the system.
control has been achieved, the adjust- (ii) The capacity required in para-
able features of the hood shall be fixed graph (i)(7)(i) of this section shall be
so that they will not be altered. obtained when the airflow producing
(iv) All tanks exhausted by means of equipment is operating against the fol-
hoods which project over the entire lowing pressure losses, the sum of
tank, and which do not conform to the which is the static pressure:
definition of enclosing hoods, shall be (A) Entrance losses into the hood.
considered to be overhead canopy (B) Resistance to airflow in branch
hoods. The quantity of air in cubic feet pipe including bends and trans-
per minute necessary to be exhausted formations.
through a canopy hood shall be not less (C) Entrance loss into the main pipe.
than the product of the control veloc- (D) Resistance to airflow in main
ity times the net area of all openings pipe including bends and trans-
between the bottom edges of the hood formations.
and the top edges of the tank. (E) Resistance of mechanical equip-
(v) The rate of vapor evolution (in- ment; that is, filters, washers, con-
cluding steam or products of combus- densers, absorbers, etc., plus their en-
tion) from the process shall be esti- trance and exit losses.
mated. If the rate of vapor evolution is (F) Resistance in outlet duct and dis-
equal to or greater than 10 percent of charge stack.
the calculated exhaust volume re- (iii) Two or more operations shall not
quired, the exhaust volume shall be in- be connected to the same exhaust sys-
creased in equal amount. tem where either one or the combina-
(5) Spray cleaning and degreasing. tion of the substances removed may
Wherever spraying or other mechanical constitute a fire, explosion, or chem-
means are used to disperse a liquid ical reaction hazard in the duct sys-
above an open-surface tank, control tem. Traps or other devices shall be
must be provided for the airborne provided to insure that condensate in
spray. Such operations shall be en- ducts does not drain back into any
closed as completely as possible. The tank.
inward air velocity into the enclosure (iv) The exhaust system, consisting
shall be sufficient to prevent the dis- of hoods, ducts, air mover, and dis-
charge of spray into the workroom. charge outlet, shall be designed in ac-
Mechanical baffles may be used to help cordance with American National
prevent the discharge of spray. Spray Standard Fundamentals Governing the
painting operations are covered by Design and Operation of Local Exhaust
paragraph (h) of this section. Systems, Z9.2–1960, or the manual, In-
(6) Control means other than ventila- dustrial Ventilation, published by the
tion. Tank covers, foams, beads, chips, American Conference of Governmental
or other materials floating on the tank Industrial Hygienists 1970. Airflow and
surface so as to confine gases, mists, or pressure loss data provided by the man-
vapors to the area under the cover or ufacturer of any air cleaning device
to the foam, bead, or chip layer; or sur- shall be included in the design calcula-
face tension depressive agents added to tions.
71
(8) Operation. (i) The required airflow (ii) All persons required to work in
shall be maintained at all times during such a manner that their feet may be-
which gas, mist, or vapor is emitted come wet shall be provided with rubber
from the tank, and at all times the or other impervious boots or shoes,
tank, the draining, or the drying area rubbers, or wooden-soled shoes suffi-
is in operation or use. When the system cient to keep feet dry.
is first installed, the airflow from each (iii) All persons required to handle
hood shall be measured by means of a work wet with a liquid other than
pitot traverse in the exhaust duct and water shall be provided with gloves im-
corrective action taken if the flow is pervious to such a liquid and of a
less than that required. When the prop- length sufficient to prevent entrance of
er flow is obtained, the hood static liquid into the tops of the gloves. The
pressure shall be measured and re- interior of gloves shall be kept free
corded. At intervals of not more than 3 from corrosive or irritating contami-
months operation, or after a prolonged nants.
shutdown period, the hoods and duct (iv) All persons required to work in
system shall be inspected for evidence such a manner that their clothing may
of corrosion or damage. In any case become wet shall be provided with such
where the airflow is found to be less aprons, coats, jackets, sleeves, or other
than required, it shall be increased to garments made of rubber, or of other
the required value. (Information on air- materials impervious to liquids other
flow and static pressure measurement than water, as are required to keep
and calculations may be found in their clothing dry. Aprons shall extend
American National Standard Funda- well below the top of boots to prevent
mental Governing the Design and Oper- liquid splashing into the boots. Provi-
ation of Local Exhaust Systems, Z9.2– sion of dry, clean, cotton clothing
1960, or in the manual, Industrial Ven- along with rubber shoes or short boots
tilation, published by the American and an apron impervious to liquids
other than water shall be considered a
Conference of Governmental Industrial
satisfactory substitute where small
Hygienists.)
parts are cleaned, plated, or acid
(ii) The exhaust system shall dis-
dipped in open tanks and rapid work is
charge to the outer air in such a man- required.
ner that the possibility of its effluent (v) Whenever there is a danger of
entering any building is at a minimum. splashing, for example, when additions
Recirculation shall only be through a are made manually to the tanks, or
device for contaminant removal which when acids and chemicals are removed
will prevent the creation of a health from the tanks, the employees so en-
hazard in the room or area to which gaged shall be required to wear either
the air is recirculated. tight-fitting chemical goggles or an ef-
(iii) A volume of outside air in the fective face shield. See § 1926.102.
range of 90 percent to 110 percent of the (vi) When, during the emergencies
exhaust volume shall be provided to specified in paragraph (i)(11)(v) of this
each room having exhaust hoods. The section, employees must be in areas
outside air supply shall enter the work- where concentrations of air contami-
room in such a manner as not to be nants are greater than the limits set
detrimental to any exhaust hood. The by paragraph (i)(2)(iii) of this section
airflow of the makeup air system shall or oxygen concentrations are less than
be measured on installation. Corrective 19.5 percent, they must use respirators
action shall be taken when the airflow that reduce their exposure to a level
is below that required. The makeup air below these limits or that provide ade-
shall be uncontaminated. quate oxygen. Such respirators must
(9) Personal protection. (i) All employ- also be provided in marked, quickly-ac-
ees working in and around open-surface cessible storage compartments built
tank operations must be instructed as for this purpose when the possibility
to the hazards of their respective jobs, exists of accidental release of haz-
and in the personal protection and first ardous concentrations of air contami-
aid procedures applicable to these haz- nants. Respirators must be approved by
ards. NIOSH under 42 CFR part 84, selected
72
by a competent industrial hygienist or type of construction and by frequent
other technically-qualified source, and flushing. They shall be firm, sound, and
used in accordance with 29 CFR of the design and construction to mini-
1926.103. mize the possibility of tripping.
(vii) Near each tank containing a liq- (ii) Before cleaning the interior of
uid which may burn, irritate, or other- any tank, the contents shall be drained
wise be harmful to the skin if splashed off, and the cleanout doors shall be
upon the worker’s body, there shall be opened where provided. All pockets in
a supply of clean cold water. The water tanks or pits, where it is possible for
pipe (carrying a pressure not exceeding hazardous vapors to collect, shall be
25 pounds (11.325 kg)) shall be provided ventilated and cleared of such vapors.
with a quick opening valve and at least (iii) Tanks which have been drained
48 inches (1.216 m) of hose not smaller to permit employees to enter for the
than three-fourths inch, so that no purposes of cleaning, inspection, or
time may be lost in washing off liquids maintenance may contain atmospheres
from the skin or clothing. Alter- which are hazardous to life or health,
natively, deluge showers and eye through the presence of flammable or
flushes shall be provided in cases where toxic air contaminants, or through the
harmful chemicals may be splashed on absence of sufficient oxygen. Before
parts of the body. employees shall be permitted to enter
(viii) Operators with sores, burns, or any such tank, appropriate tests of the
other skin lesions requiring medical atmosphere shall be made to determine
treatment shall not be allowed to work
if the limits set by paragraph (i)(2)(iii)
at their regular operations until so au-
of this section are exceeded, or if the
thorized by a physician. Any small
oxygen concentration is less than 19.5
skin abrasions, cuts, rash, or open
percent.
sores which are found or reported shall
be treated by a properly designated (iv) If the tests made in accordance
person so that chances of exposures to with paragraph (i)(11)(iii) of this sec-
the chemicals are removed. Workers tion indicate that the atmosphere in
exposed to chromic acids shall have a the tank is unsafe, before any em-
periodic examination made of the nos- ployee is permitted to enter the tank,
trils and other parts of the body, to de- the tank shall be ventilated until the
tect incipient ulceration. hazardous atmosphere is removed, and
(ix) Sufficient washing facilities, in- ventilation shall be continued so as to
cluding soap, individual towels, and prevent the occurrence of a hazardous
hot water, shall be provided for all per- atmosphere as long as an employee is
sons required to use or handle any liq- in the tank.
uids which may burn, irritate, or oth- (v) If, in emergencies, such as rescue
erwise be harmful to the skin, on the work, it is necessary to enter a tank
basis of at least one basin (or its equiv- which may contain a hazardous atmos-
alent) with a hot water faucet for every phere, suitable respirators, such as
10 employees. See § 1926.51(f). self-contained breathing apparatus;
(x) Locker space or equivalent cloth- hose mask with blower, if there is a
ing storage facilities shall be provided possibility of oxygen deficiency; or a
to prevent contamination of street gas mask, selected and operated in ac-
clothing. cordance with paragraph (i)(9)(vi) of
(xi) First aid facilities specific to the this section, shall be used. If a con-
hazards of the operations conducted taminant in the tank can cause derma-
shall be readily available. titis, or be absorbed through the skin,
(10) Special precautions for cyanide. the employee entering the tank shall
Dikes or other arrangements shall be also wear protective clothing. At least
provided to prevent the possibility of one trained standby employee, with
intermixing of cyanide and acid in the suitable respirator, shall be present in
event of tank rupture. the nearest uncontaminated area. The
(11) Inspection, maintenance, and in- standby employee must be able to com-
stallation. (i) Floors and platforms municate with the employee in the
around tanks shall be prevented from tank and be able to haul him out of the
becoming slippery both by original tank with a lifeline if necessary.
73
(vi) Maintenance work requiring the vapors of such liquids, for the pur-
welding or open flame, where toxic pose of cleaning or altering their sur-
metal fumes such as cadmium, chro- faces, or adding or imparting a finish
mium, or lead may be evolved, shall be thereto, or changing the character of
done only with sufficient local exhaust the materials, and their subsequent re-
ventilation to prevent the creation of a moval from the liquids or vapors,
health hazard, or be done with res- draining, and drying. Such operations
pirators selected and used in accord- include washing, electroplating, anod-
ance with paragraph (i)(9)(vi) of this izing, pickling, quenching, dyeing, dip-
section. Welding, or the use of open ping, tanning, dressing, bleaching,
flames near any solvent cleaning degreasing, alkaline cleaning, strip-
equipment shall be permitted only ping, rinsing, digesting, and other simi-
after such equipment has first been lar operations, but do not include mol-
thoroughly cleared of solvents and va- ten materials handling operations, or
pors. surface coating operations.
(12) Vapor degreasing tanks. (i) In any (ii) Molten materials handling oper-
vapor degreasing tank equipped with a ations means all operations, other than
condenser or vapor level thermostat, welding, burning, and soldering oper-
the condenser or thermostat shall keep ations, involving the use, melting,
the level of vapors below the top edge smelting, or pouring of metals, alloys,
of the tank by a distance at least equal salts, or other similar substances in
to one-half the tank width, or at least the molten state. Such operations also
36 inches (0.912 m), whichever is short- include heat treating baths, descaling
er. baths, die casting stereotyping, gal-
(ii) Where gas is used as a fuel for vanizing, tinning, and similar oper-
heating vapor degreasing tanks, the ations.
combustion chamber shall be of tight (iii) Surface coating operations means
construction, except for such openings all operations involving the applica-
as the exhaust flue, and those that are tion of protective, decorative, adhe-
necessary for supplying air for combus- sive, or strengthening coating or im-
tion. Flues shall be of corrosion-resist- pregnation to one or more surfaces, or
ant construction and shall extend to into the interstices of any object or
the outer air. If mechanical exhaust is material, by means of spraying, spread-
used on this flue, a draft diverter shall ing, flowing, brushing, roll coating,
be used. Special precautions must be pouring, cementing, or similar means;
taken to prevent solvent fumes from and any subsequent draining or drying
entering the combustion air of this or operations, excluding open-tank oper-
any other heater when chlorinated or ations.
fluorinated hydrocarbon solvents (for
example, trichloroethylene, Freon) are [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
used. 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35099, June 30, 1993;
61 FR 9250, Mar. 3, 1996; 63 FR 1295, Jan. 8,
(iii) Heating elements shall be so de-
1998]
signed and maintained that their sur-
face temperature will not cause the § 1926.58 [Reserved]
solvent or mixture to decompose, break
down, or be converted into an excessive § 1926.59 Hazard communication.
quantity of vapor.
(iv) Tanks or machines of more than NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
4 square feet (0.368 m2) of vapor area, tical to those set forth at § 1910.1200 of this
used for solvent cleaning or vapor chapter.
degreasing, shall be equipped with suit-
able cleanout or sludge doors located [61 FR 31431, June 20, 1996]
near the bottom of each tank or still.
These doors shall be so designed and § 1926.60 Methylenedianiline.
gasketed that there will be no leakage (a) Scope and application. (1) This sec-
of solvent when they are closed. tion applies to all construction work as
(13) Scope. (i) This paragraph (i) ap- defined in 29 CFR 1910.12(b), in which
plies to all operations involving the there is exposure to MDA, including
immersion of materials in liquids, or in but not limited to the following:
74
(i) Construction, alteration, repair, ployer shall maintain records of the
maintenance, or renovation of struc- initial monitoring results or objective
tures, substrates, or portions thereof, data supporting that exemption and
that contain MDA; the basis for the employer’s reliance on
(ii) Installation or the finishing of the data, as provided in the record-
surfaces with products containing keeping provision of paragraph (o) of
MDA; this section.
(iii) MDA spill/emergency cleanup at (b) Definitions. For the purpose of this
construction sites; and section, the following definitions shall
(iv) Transportation, disposal, stor- apply:
age, or containment of MDA or prod- Action level means a concentration of
ucts containing MDA on the site or lo- airborne MDA of 5 ppb as an eight (8)-
cation at which construction activities hour time-weighted average.
are performed. Assistant Secretary means the Assist-
(2) Except as provided in paragraphs ant Secretary of Labor for Occupa-
(a)(7) and (f)(5) of this section, this sectional Safety and Health, U.S. Depart-
tion does not apply to the processing, ment of Labor, or designee.
use, and handling of products con-
Authorized person means any person
taining MDA where initial monitoring
specifically authorized by the employer
indicates that the product is not capa-
whose duties require the person to
ble of releasing MDA in excess of the
enter a regulated area, or any person
action level under the expected condi-
entering such an area as a designated
tions of processing, use, and handling
representative of employees for the
which will cause the greatest possible
purpose of exercising the right to ob-
release; and where no ‘‘dermal exposure
serve monitoring and measuring proce-
to MDA’’ can occur.
dures under paragraph (p) of this sec-
(3) Except as provided in paragraph
tion, or any other person authorized by
(a)(7) of this section, this section does
the Act or regulations issued under the
not apply to the processing, use, and
Act.
handling of products containing MDA
where objective data are reasonably re- Container means any barrel, bottle,
lied upon which demonstrate the prod- can, cylinder, drum, reaction vessel,
uct is not capable of releasing MDA storage tank, commercial packaging or
under the expected conditions of proc- the like, but does not include piping
essing, use, and handling which will systems.
cause the greatest possible release; and Decontamination area means an area
where no ‘‘dermal exposure to MDA’’ outside of but as near as practical to
can occur. the regulated area, consisting of an
(4) Except as provided in paragraph equipment storage area, wash area, and
(a)(7) of this section, this section does clean change area, which is used for
not apply to the storage, transpor- the decontamination of workers, mate-
tation, distribution or sale of MDA in rials, and equipment contaminated
intact containers sealed in such a man- with MDA.
ner as to contain the MDA dusts, va- Dermal exposure to MDA occurs where
pors, or liquids, except for the provi- employees are engaged in the handling,
sions of 29 CFR 1910.1200 and paragraph application or use of mixtures or mate-
(e) of this section. rials containing MDA, with any of the
(5) Except as provided in paragraph following non-airborne forms of MDA:
(a)(7) of this section, this section does (i) Liquid, powdered, granular, or
not apply to materials in any form flaked mixtures containing MDA in
which contain less than 0.1% MDA by concentrations greater than 0.1% by
weight or volume. weight or volume; and
(6) Except as provided in paragraph (ii) Materials other than ‘‘finished ar-
(a)(7) of this section, this section does ticles’’ containing MDA in concentra-
not apply to ‘‘finished articles con- tions greater than 0.1% by weight or
taining MDA.’’ volume.
(7) Where products containing MDA Director means the Director of the
are exempted under paragraphs (a)(2) National Institute for Occupational
through (a)(6) of this section, the em- Safety and Health, U.S. Department of
75
Health and Human Services, or des- diaminodiphenylmethane, Chemical
ignee. Abstract Service Registry number 101–
Emergency means any occurrence 77–9, in the form of a vapor, liquid, or
such as, but not limited to, equipment solid. The definition also includes the
failure, rupture of containers, or fail- salts of MDA.
ure of control equipment which results Regulated Areas means areas where
in an unexpected and potentially haz- airborne concentrations of MDA exceed
ardous release of MDA. or can reasonably be expected to ex-
Employee exposure means exposure to ceed, the permissible exposure limits,
MDA which would occur if the em- or where ‘‘dermal exposure to MDA’’
ployee were not using respirators or can occur.
protective work clothing and equip- STEL means short term exposure
ment. limit as determined by any 15-minute
Finished article containing MDA is de- sample period.
fined as a manufactured item: (c) Permissible exposure limits. The em-
(i) Which is formed to a specific ployer shall assure that no employee is
shape or design during manufacture; exposed to an airborne concentration
(ii) Which has end use function(s) de- of MDA in excess of ten parts per bil-
pendent in whole or part upon its shape lion (10 ppb) as an 8-hour time-weight-
or design during end use; and
ed average and a STEL of one hundred
(iii) Where applicable, is an item
parts per billion (100 ppb).
which is fully cured by virtue of having
(d) Communication among employers.
been subjected to the conditions (tem-
perature, time) necessary to complete On multi-employer worksites, an em-
the desired chemical reaction. ployer performing work involving the
Historical monitoring data means mon- application of MDA or materials con-
itoring data for construction jobs that taining MDA for which establishment
meet the following conditions: of one or more regulated areas is re-
(i) The data upon which judgments quired shall inform other employers on
are based are scientifically sound and the site of the nature of the employer’s
were collected using methods that are work with MDA and of the existence of,
sufficiently accurate and precise; and requirements pertaining to, regu-
(ii) The processes and work practices lated areas.
that were in use when the historical (e) Emergency situations—(1) Written
monitoring data were obtained are es- plan. (i) A written plan for emergency
sentially the same as those to be used situations shall be developed for each
during the job for which initial moni- construction operation where there is a
toring will not be performed; possibility of an emergency. The plan
(iii) The characteristics of the MDA- shall include procedures where the em-
containing material being handled ployer identifies emergency escape
when the historical monitoring data routes for his employees at each con-
were obtained are the same as those on struction site before the construction
the job for which initial monitoring operation begins. Appropriate portions
will not be performed; of the plan shall be implemented in the
(iv) Environmental conditions pre- event of an emergency.
vailing when the historical monitoring (ii) The plan shall specifically pro-
data were obtained are the same as vide that employees engaged in cor-
those on the job for which initial moni- recting emergency conditions shall be
toring will not be performed; and equipped with the appropriate personal
(v) Other data relevant to the oper- protective equipment and clothing as
ations, materials, processing, or em- required in paragraphs (i) and (j) of this
ployee exposures covered by the excep- section until the emergency is abated.
tion are substantially similar. The (iii) The plan shall specifically in-
data must be scientifically sound, the clude provisions for alerting and evacu-
characteristics of the MDA containing ating affected employees as well as the
material must be similar and the envi- applicable elements prescribed in 29
ronmental conditions comparable. CFR 1910.38 and 29 CFR 1910.39, ‘‘Emer-
4,4′Methylenedianiline or MDA means gency action plans’’ and ‘‘Fire preven-
the chemical; 4,4′- tion plans,’’ respectively.
76
(2) Alerting employees. Where there is monitoring for each such employee at
the possibility of employee exposure to least every six (6) months.
MDA due to an emergency, means shall (ii) If the monitoring required by
be developed to promptly alert employ- paragraph (f)(2) of this section reveals
ees who have the potential to be di- employee exposure above the PELs, the
rectly exposed. Affected employees not employer shall repeat such monitoring
engaged in correcting emergency con- for each such employee at least every
ditions shall be evacuated immediately three (3) months.
in the event that an emergency occurs. (iii) Employers who are conducting
Means shall also be developed for alert- MDA operations within a regulated
ing other employees who may be ex- area can forego periodic monitoring if
posed as a result of the emergency. the employees are all wearing supplied-
(f) Exposure monitoring—(1) General. air respirators while working in the
(i) Determinations of employee expo- regulated area.
sure shall be made from breathing zone (iv) The employer may alter the mon-
air samples that are representative of itoring schedule from every three
each employee’s exposure to airborne months to every six months for any
MDA over an eight (8) hour period. De- employee for whom two consecutive
termination of employee exposure to measurements taken at least 7 days
the STEL shall be made from breathing apart indicate that the employee expo-
zone air samples collected over a 15 sure has decreased to below the PELs
minute sampling period. but above the action level.
(ii) Representative employee expo- (4) Termination of monitoring. (i) If the
sure shall be determined on the basis of initial monitoring required by para-
one or more samples representing full graph (f)(2) of this section reveals em-
shift exposure for each shift for each ployee exposure to be below the action
level, the employer may discontinue
job classification in each work area
the monitoring for that employee, ex-
where exposure to MDA may occur.
cept as otherwise required by para-
(iii) Where the employer can docu-
graph (f)(5) of this section.
ment that exposure levels are equiva- (ii) If the periodic monitoring re-
lent for similar operations in different quired by paragraph (f)(3) of this sec-
work shifts, the employer shall only be tion reveals that employee exposures,
required to determine representative as indicated by at least two consecu-
employee exposure for that operation tive measurements taken at least 7
during one shift. days apart, are below the action level
(2) Initial monitoring. Each employer the employer may discontinue the
who has a workplace or work operation monitoring for that employee, except
covered by this standard shall perform as otherwise required by paragraph
initial monitoring to determine accu- (f)(5) of this section.
rately the airborne concentrations of (5) Additional monitoring. The em-
MDA to which employees may be ex- ployer shall institute the exposure
posed unless: monitoring required under paragraphs
(i) The employer can demonstrate, on (f)(2) and (f)(3) of this section when
the basis of objective data, that the there has been a change in production
MDA-containing product or material process, chemicals present, control
being handled cannot cause exposures equipment, personnel, or work prac-
above the standard’s action level, even tices which may result in new or addi-
under worst-case release conditions; or tional exposures to MDA, or when the
(ii) The employer has historical mon- employer has any reason to suspect a
itoring or other data demonstrating change which may result in new or ad-
that exposures on a particular job will ditional exposures.
be below the action level. (6) Accuracy of monitoring. Monitoring
(3) Periodic monitoring and monitoring shall be accurate, to a confidence level
frequency. (i) If the monitoring required of 95 percent, to within plus or minus
by paragraph (f)(2) of this section re- 25 percent for airborne concentrations
veals employee exposure at or above of MDA.
the action level, but at or below the (7) Employee notification of monitoring
PELs, the employer shall repeat such results. (i) The employer must, as soon
77
as possible but no later than 5 working drink, smoke, chew tobacco or gum, or
days after the receipt of the results of apply cosmetics in regulated areas.
any monitoring performed under this (h) Methods of compliance—(1) Engi-
section, notify each affected employee neering controls and work practices and
of these results either individually in respirators. (i) The employer shall use
writing or by posting the results in an one or any combination of the fol-
appropriate location that is accessible lowing control methods to achieve
to employees. compliance with the permissible expo-
(ii) The written notification required sure limits prescribed by paragraph (c)
by paragraph (f)(7)(i) of this section of this section:
shall contain the corrective action
(A) Local exhaust ventilation
being taken by the employer or any
other protective measures which have equipped with HEPA filter dust collec-
been implemented to reduce the em- tion systems;
ployee exposure to or below the PELs, (B) General ventilation systems;
wherever the PELs are exceeded. (C) Use of workpractices; or
(8) Visual monitoring. The employer (D) Other engineering controls such
shall make routine inspections of em- as isolation and enclosure that the As-
ployee hands, face and forearms poten- sistant Secretary can show to be fea-
tially exposed to MDA. Other potential sible.
dermal exposures reported by the em- (ii) Wherever the feasible engineering
ployee must be referred to the appro- controls and work practices ‘‘which
priate medical personnel for observa- can be instituted are not sufficient to
tion. If the employer determines that reduce employee exposure to or below
the employee has been exposed to MDA the PELs, the employer shall use them
the employer shall: to reduce employee exposure to the
(i) Determine the source of exposure; lowest levels achievable by these con-
(ii) Implement protective measures trols and shall supplement them by the
to correct the hazard; and
use of respiratory protective devices
(iii) Maintain records of the correc-
which comply with the requirements of
tive actions in accordance with para-
paragraph (i) of this section.
graph (o) of this section.
(g) Regulated areas—(1) Establish- (2) Special Provisions. For workers en-
ment—(i) Airborne exposures. The em- gaged in spray application methods,
ployer shall establish regulated areas respiratory protection must be used in
where airborne concentrations of MDA addition to feasible engineering con-
exceed or can reasonably be expected trols and work practices to reduce em-
to exceed, the permissible exposure ployee exposure to or below the PELs.
limits. (3) Prohibitions. Compressed air shall
(ii) Dermal exposures. Where employ- not be used to remove MDA, unless the
ees are subject to ‘‘dermal exposure to compressed air is used in conjunction
MDA’’ the employer shall establish with an enclosed ventilation system
those work areas as regulated areas. designed to capture the dust cloud cre-
(2) Demarcation. Regulated areas shall ated by the compressed air.
be demarcated from the rest of the (4) Employee rotation. The employer
workplace in a manner that minimizes shall not use employee rotation as a
the number of persons potentially ex- means of compliance with the exposure
posed. limits prescribed in paragraph (c) of
(3) Access. Access to regulated areas this section.
shall be limited to authorized persons.
(5) Compliance program. (i) The em-
(4) Personal protective equipment and
clothing. Each person entering a regu- ployer shall establish and implement a
lated area shall be supplied with, and written program to reduce employee
required to use, the appropriate per- exposure to or below the PELs by
sonal protective clothing and equip- means of engineering and work prac-
ment in accordance with paragraphs (i) tice controls, as required by paragraph
and (j) of this section. (h)(1) of this section, and by use of res-
(5) Prohibited activities. The employer piratory protection where permitted
shall ensure that employees do not eat, under this section.
78
(ii) Upon request this written pro- (ii) An employee who cannot use a
gram shall be furnished for examina- negative-pressure respirator must be
tion and copying to the Assistant Sec- given the option of using a positive-
retary, the Director, affected employ- pressure respirator, or a supplied-air
ees and designated employee represent- respirator operated in the continuous-
atives. The employer shall review and, flow or pressure-demand mode.
as necessary, update such plans at (j) Protective work clothing and equip-
least once every 12 months to make ment—(1) Provision and use. Where em-
certain they reflect the current status ployees are subject to dermal exposure
of the program. to MDA, where liquids containing MDA
(i) Respiratory protection—(1) General. can be splashed into the eyes, or where
For employees who use respirators re- airborne concentrations of MDA are in
quired by this section, the employer excess of the PEL, the employer shall
must provide each employee an appro- provide, at no cost to the employee,
priate respirator that complies with and ensure that the employee uses, ap-
the requirements of this paragraph. propriate protective work clothing and
Respirators must be used during: equipment which prevent contact with
(i) Periods necessary to install or im- MDA such as, but not limited to:
plement feasible engineering and work- (i) Aprons, coveralls or other full-
practice controls. body work clothing;
(ii) Work operations, such as mainte- (ii) Gloves, head coverings, and foot
nance and repair activities and spray- coverings; and
application processes, for which engi-
(iii) Face shields, chemical goggles;
neering and work-practice controls are
or
not feasible.
(iv) Other appropriate protective
(iii) Work operations for which fea-
equipment which comply with 29 CFR
sible engineering and work-practice
1910.133.
controls are not yet sufficient to re-
duce employee exposure to or below the (2) Removal and storage. (i) The em-
PELs. ployer shall ensure that, at the end of
(iv) Emergencies. their work shift, employees remove
(2) Respirator program. The employer MDA-contaminated protective work
must implement a respiratory protec- clothing and equipment that is not
tion program in accordance with routinely removed throughout the day
§ 1910.134 (b) through (d) (except in change areas provided in accordance
(d)(1)(iii)), and (f) through (m), which with the provisions in paragraph (k) of
covers each employee required by this this section.
section to use a respirator. (ii) The employer shall ensure that,
(3) Respirator selection. (i) Employers during their work shift, employees re-
must: move all other MDA-contaminated pro-
(A) Select, and provide to employees, tective work clothing or equipment be-
the appropriate respirators specified in fore leaving a regulated area.
paragraph (d)(3)(i)(A) of 29 CFR (iii) The employer shall ensure that
1910.134. no employee takes MDA-contaminated
(B) Provide HEPA filters for powered work clothing or equipment out of the
and non-powered air-purifying res- decontamination areas, except those
pirators. employees authorized to do so for the
(C) For escape, provide employees purpose of laundering, maintenance, or
with one of the following respirator op- disposal.
tions: Any self-contained breathing ap- (iv) MDA-contaminated work cloth-
paratus with a full facepiece or hood ing or equipment shall be placed and
operated in the positive-pressure or stored and transported in sealed, im-
continuous-flow mode; or a full face- permeable bags, or other closed imper-
piece air-purifying respirator. meable containers.
(D) Provide a combination HEPA fil- (v) Containers of MDA-contaminated
ter and organic vapor canister or car- protective work clothing or equipment
tridge with air-purifying respirators which are to be taken out of decon-
when MDA is in liquid form or used as tamination areas or the workplace for
part of a process requiring heat. cleaning, maintenance, or disposal,
79
shall bear labels warning of the hazards (iii) Equipment area. The equipment
of MDA. area shall be supplied with imper-
(3) Cleaning and replacement. (i) The meable, labeled bags and containers for
employer shall provide the employee the containment and disposal of con-
with clean protective clothing and taminated protective clothing and
equipment. The employer shall ensure equipment.
that protective work clothing or equip- (2) Shower area. (i) Where feasible,
ment required by this paragraph is shower facilities shall be provided
cleaned, laundered, repaired, or re- which comply with 29 CFR 1910.141(d)(3)
placed at intervals appropriate to wherever the possibility of employee
maintain its effectiveness. exposure to airborne levels of MDA in
(ii) The employer shall prohibit the excess of the permissible exposure
removal of MDA from protective work limit exists.
clothing or equipment by blowing, (ii) Where dermal exposure to MDA
shaking, or any methods which allow occurs, the employer shall ensure that
MDA to re-enter the workplace. materials spilled or deposited on the
(iii) The employer shall ensure that skin are removed as soon as possible by
laundering of MDA-contaminated methods which do not facilitate the
clothing shall be done so as to prevent dermal absorption of MDA.
the release of MDA in the workplace. (3) Lunch Areas. (i) Whenever food or
(iv) Any employer who gives MDA- beverages are consumed at the work-
contaminated clothing to another per- site and employees are exposed to MDA
son for laundering shall inform such the employer shall provide clean lunch
person of the requirement to prevent areas were MDA levels are below the
the release of MDA. action level and where no dermal expo-
(v) The employer shall inform any sure to MDA can occur.
person who launders or cleans protec- (ii) The employer shall ensure that
tive clothing or equipment contami- employees wash their hands and faces
nated with MDA of the potentially with soap and water prior to eating,
harmful effects of exposure. drinking, smoking, or applying cos-
(4) Visual Examination. (i) The em- metics.
ployer shall ensure that employees’ (iii) The employer shall ensure that
work clothing is examined periodically employees do not enter lunch facilities
for rips or tears that may occur during with contaminated protective work
performance of work. clothing or equipment.
(ii) When rips or tears are detected, (l) Communication of hazards to em-
the protective equipment or clothing ployees—(1) Hazard communication. The
shall be repaired and replaced imme- employer shall include
diately. Methylenedianiline (MDA) in the pro-
(k) Hygiene facilities and practices—(1) gram established to comply with the
General. (i) The employer shall provide Hazard Communication Standard
decontamination areas for employees (HCS) (§ 1910.1200). The employer shall
required to work in regulated areas or ensure that each employee has access
required by paragraph (j)(1) of this sec- to labels on containers of MDA and
tion to wear protective clothing. Excep- safety data sheets, and is trained in ac-
tion: In lieu of the decontamination cordance with the provisions of HCS
area requirement specified in para- and paragraph (l)(3) of this section. The
graph (k)(1)(i) of this section, the em- employer shall ensure that at least the
ployer may permit employees engaged following hazards are addressed: Can-
in small scale, short duration oper- cer; liver effects; and skin sensitiza-
ations, to clean their protective cloth- tion.
ing or dispose of the protective cloth- (2) Signs and labels— (i) Signs. (A) The
ing before such employees leave the employer shall post and maintain leg-
area where the work was performed. ible signs demarcating regulated areas
(ii) Change areas. The employer shall and entrances or access-ways to regu-
ensure that change areas are equipped lated areas that bear the following leg-
with separate storage facilities for pro- end:
tective clothing and street clothing, in DANGER
accordance with 29 CFR 1910.141(e). MDA
80
MAY CAUSE CANCER pendices A and B of this section, and
CAUSES DAMAGE TO THE LIVER indicate to employees where a copy of
RESPIRATORY PROTECTION AND PRO- the standard is available;
TECTIVE CLOTHING MAY BE REQUIRED
IN THIS AREA
(B) Describe the medical surveillance
AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY program required under paragraph (n)
of this section, and explain the infor-
(B) Prior to June 1, 2016, employers mation contained in appendix C of this
may use the following legend in lieu of section; and
that specified in paragraph (l)(2)(i)(A) (C) Describe the medical removal
of this section: provision required under paragraph (n)
DANGER of this section.
MDA (4) Access to training materials. (i) The
MAY CAUSE CANCER employer shall make readily available
LIVER TOXIN to all affected employees, without cost,
AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY
all written materials relating to the
RESPIRATORS AND PROTECTIVE CLOTH-
ING MAY BE REQUIRED TO BE WORN IN employee training program, including
THIS AREA a copy of this regulation.
(ii) The employer shall provide to the
(ii) Labels. (A) The employer shall en- Assistant Secretary and the Director,
sure that labels or other appropriate upon request, all information and
forms of warning are provided for con- training materials relating to the em-
tainers of MDA within the workplace. ployee information and training pro-
The labels shall comply with the re- gram.
quirements of § 1910.1200(f) and shall in- (m) Housekeeping. (1) All surfaces
clude at least the following informa- shall be maintained as free as prac-
tion for pure MDA and mixtures con- ticable of visible accumulations of
taining MDA: MDA.
DANGER (2) The employer shall institute a
CONTAINS MDA program for detecting MDA leaks,
MAY CAUSE CANCER spills, and discharges, including reg-
CAUSES DAMAGE TO THE LIVER ular visual inspections of operations
(B) Prior to June 1, 2015, employers involving liquid or solid MDA.
may include the following information (3) All leaks shall be repaired and liq-
workplace labels in lieu of the labeling uid or dust spills cleaned up promptly.
requirements in paragraph (l)(2)(ii)(A) (4) Surfaces contaminated with MDA
of this section: may not be cleaned by the use of com-
(1) For Pure MDA: pressed air.
(5) Shoveling, dry sweeping, and
DANGER
other methods of dry clean-up of MDA
CONTAINS MDA
MAY CAUSE CANCER may be used where HEPA filtered
LIVER TOXIN vacuuming and/or wet cleaning are not
feasible or practical.
(2) For mixtures containing MDA: (6) Waste, scrap, debris, bags, con-
DANGER tainers, equipment, and clothing con-
CONTAINS MDA taminated with MDA shall be collected
CONTAINS MATERIALS WHICH MAY and disposed of in a manner to prevent
CAUSE CANCER the re-entry of MDA into the work-
LIVER TOXIN
place.
(3) Information and training. (i) The (n) Medical surveillance—(1) General.
employer shall provide employees with (i) The employer shall make available
information and training on MDA, in a medical surveillance program for em-
accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1200(h), at ployees exposed to MDA under the fol-
the time of initial assignment and at lowing circumstances:
least annually thereafter. (A) Employees exposed at or above
(ii) In addition to the information re- the action level for 30 or more days per
quired under 29 CFR 1910.1200, the em- year;
ployer shall: (B) Employees who are subject to
(A) Provide an explanation of the dermal exposure to MDA for 15 or more
contents of this section, including ap- days per year;
81
(C) Employees who have been exposed intake, and the appearance of physical
in an emergency situation; signs relating to the liver, and the
(D) Employees whom the employer, skin;
based on results from compliance with (B) The appropriate tests and exami-
paragraph (f)(8) of this section, has rea- nations including liver function tests
son to believe are being dermally ex- and skin examinations; and
posed; and (C) Appropriate additional tests or
(E) Employees who show signs or examinations as deemed necessary by
symptoms of MDA exposure. the physician.
(ii) The employer shall ensure that (ii) If in the physician’s opinion the
all medical examinations and proce- results of liver function tests indicate
dures are performed by or under the su- an abnormality, the employee shall be
pervision of a licensed physician at a removed from further MDA exposure in
reasonable time and place, and pro- accordance with paragraph (n)(9) of
vided without cost to the employee. this section. Repeat liver function
(2) Initial examinations. (i) Within 150 tests shall be conducted on advice of
days of the effective date of this stand- the physician.
ard, or before the time of initial assign- (4) Emergency examinations. If the em-
ment, the employer shall provide each ployer determines that the employee
employee covered by paragraph (n)(1)(i) has been exposed to a potentially haz-
of this section with a medical examina- ardous amount of MDA in an emer-
tion including the following elements: gency situation under paragraph (e) of
(A) A detailed history which in- this section, the employer shall provide
cludes: medical examinations in accordance
(1) Past work exposure to MDA or with paragraphs (n)(3) (i) and (ii) of
any other toxic substances; this section. If the results of liver func-
(2) A history of drugs, alcohol, to- tion testing indicate an abnormality,
bacco, and medication routinely taken the employee shall be removed in ac-
(duration and quantity); and cordance with paragraph (n)(9) of this
(3) A history of dermatitis, chemical section. Repeat liver function tests
skin sensitization, or previous hepatic shall be conducted on the advice of the
disease. physician. If the results of the tests are
(B) A physical examination which in- normal, tests must be repeated two to
cludes all routine physical examina- three weeks from the initial testing. If
tion parameters, skin examination, and the results of the second set of tests
examination for signs of liver disease. are normal and on the advice of the
(C) Laboratory tests including: physician, no additional testing is re-
(1) Liver function tests and (2) Uri- quired.
nalysis. (5) Additional examinations. Where the
(D) Additional tests as necessary in employee develops signs and symptoms
the opinion of the physician. associated with exposure to MDA, the
(ii) No initial medical examination is employer shall provide the employee
required if adequate records show that with an additional medical examina-
the employee has been examined in action including liver function tests. Re-
cordance with the requirements of this peat liver function tests shall be con-
section within the previous six months ducted on the advice of the physician.
prior to the effective date of this stand- If the results of the tests are normal,
ard or prior to the date of initial as- tests must be repeated two to three
signment. weeks from the initial testing. If the
(3) Periodic examinations. (i) The em- results of the second set of tests are
ployer shall provide each employee normal and on the advice of the physi-
covered by this section with a medical cian, no additional testing is required.
examination at least annually fol- (6) Multiple physician review mecha-
lowing the initial examination. These nism. (i) If the employer selects the ini-
periodic examinations shall include at tial physician who conducts any med-
least the following elements: ical examination or consultation pro-
(A) A brief history regarding any new vided to an employee under this sec-
exposure to potential liver toxins, tion, and the employee has signs or
changes in drug, tobacco, and alcohol symptoms of occupational exposure to
82
MDA (which could include an abnormal recommendations of the second physi-
liver function test), and the employee cian, unless the employer and the em-
disagrees with the opinion of the exam- ployee reach a mutually acceptable
ining physician, and this opinion could agreement.
affect the employee’s job status, the (7) Information provided to the exam-
employee may designate an appro- ining physician. (i) The employer shall
priate and mutually acceptable second provide the following information to
physician: the examining physician:
(A) To review any findings, deter- (A) A copy of this regulation and its
minations or recommendations of the appendices;
initial physician; and (B) A description of the affected em-
(B) To conduct such examinations, ployee’s duties as they relate to the
consultations, and laboratory tests as employee’s potential exposure to MDA;
the second physician deems necessary (C) The employee’s current actual or
to facilitate this review. representative MDA exposure level;
(ii) The employer shall promptly no- (D) A description of any personal pro-
tify an employee of the right to seek a tective equipment used or to be used;
second medical opinion after each oc- and
casion that an initial physician con- (E) Information from previous em-
ducts a medical examination or con- ployment related medical examina-
sultation pursuant to this section. The tions of the affected employee.
employer may condition its participa- (ii) The employer shall provide the
tion in, and payment for, the multiple foregoing information to a second phy-
physician review mechanism upon the sician under this section upon request
employee doing the following within either by the second physician, or by
fifteen (15) days after receipt of the the employee.
foregoing notification, or receipt of the (8) Physician’s written opinion. (i) For
initial physician’s written opinion, each examination under this section,
whichever is later: the employer shall obtain, and provide
(A) The employee informing the em- the employee with a copy of, the exam-
ployer that he or she intends to seek a ining physician’s written opinion with-
second medical opinion, and in 15 days of its receipt. The written
(B) The employee initiating steps to opinion shall include the following:
make an appointment with a second (A) The occupationally pertinent re-
physician. sults of the medical examination and
(iii) If the findings, determinations, tests;
or recommendations of the second phy- (B) The physician’s opinion con-
sician differ from those of the initial cerning whether the employee has any
physician, then the employer and the detected medical conditions which
employee shall assure that efforts are would place the employee at increased
made for the two physicians to resolve risk of material impairment of health
any disagreement. from exposure to MDA;
(iv) If the two physicians have been (C) The physician’s recommended
unable to quickly resolve their dis- limitations upon the employee’s expo-
agreement, then the employer and the sure to MDA or upon the employee’s
employee through their respective phy- use of protective clothing or equipment
sicians shall designate a third physi- and respirators; and
cian: (D) A statement that the employee
(A) To review any findings, deter- has been informed by the physician of
minations, or recommendations of the the results of the medical examination
prior physicians; and and any medical conditions resulting
(B) To conduct such examinations, from MDA exposure which require fur-
consultations, laboratory tests, and ther explanation or treatment.
discussions with the prior physicians (ii) The written opinion obtained by
as the third physician deems necessary the employer shall not reveal specific
to resolve the disagreement of the findings or diagnoses unrelated to oc-
prior physicians. cupational exposures.
(v) The employer shall act consistent (9) Medical removal—(i) Temporary
with the findings, determinations, and medical removal of an employee—(A)
83
Temporary removal resulting from occupa- the employee no longer has a detected
tional exposure. The employee shall be medical condition which places the em-
removed from work environments in ployee at increased risk of material
which exposure to MDA is at or above impairment to health from exposure to
the action level or where dermal expo- MDA.
sure to MDA may occur, following an (B) For the purposes of this section,
initial examination (paragraph (n)(2) of the requirement that an employer re-
this section), periodic examinations turn an employee to his or her former
(paragraph (n)(3) of this section), an job status is not intended to expand
emergency situation (paragraph (n)(4) upon or restrict any rights an em-
of this section), or an additional exam- ployee has or would have had, absent
ination (paragraph (n)(5) of this sec- temporary medical removal, to a spe-
tion) in the following circumstances: cific job classification or position
(1) When the employee exhibits signs under the terms of a collective bar-
and/or symptoms indicative of acute gaining agreement.
exposure to MDA; or (iii) Removal of other employee special
(2) When the examining physician de- protective measure or limitations. The
termines that an employee’s abnormal employer shall remove any limitations
liver function tests are not associated placed on an employee or end any spe-
with MDA exposure but that the abnor- cial protective measures provided to an
malities may be exacerbated as a re- employee pursuant to a final medical
sult of occupational exposure to MDA. determination when a subsequent final
(B) Temporary removal due to a final medical determination indicates that
medical determination. (1) The employer the limitations or special protective
shall remove an employee from work measures are no longer necessary.
having an exposure to MDA at or above (iv) Employer options pending a final
the action level or where the potential medical determination. Where the physi-
for dermal exposure exists on each oc- cian review mechanism used pursuant
casion that a final medical determina- to the medical surveillance provisions
tion results in a medical finding, deter- of this section, has not yet resulted in
mination, or opinion that the employee a final medical determination with re-
has a detected medical condition which spect to an employee, the employer
places the employee at increased risk shall act as follows:
of material impairment to health from (A) Removal. The employer may re-
exposure to MDA. move the employee from exposure to
(2) For the purposes of this section, MDA, provide special protective meas-
the phrase ‘‘final medical determina- ures to the employee, or place limita-
tion’’ shall mean the outcome of the tions upon the employee, consistent
physician review mechanism used pur- with the medical findings, determina-
suant to the medical surveillance pro- tions, or recommendations of the phy-
visions of this section. sician who has reviewed the employee’s
(3) Where a final medical determina- health status.
tion results in any recommended spe- (B) Return. The employer may return
cial protective measures for an em- the employee to his or her former job
ployee, or limitations on an employee’s status, and end any special protective
exposure to MDA, the employer shall measures provided to the employee,
implement and act consistent with the consistent with the medical findings,
recommendation. determinations, or recommendations of
(ii) Return of the employee to former job any of the physicians who have re-
status. (A) The employer shall return viewed the employee’s health status,
an employee to his or her former job with two exceptions:
status: (1) If the initial removal, special pro-
(1) When the employee no longer tection, or limitation of the employee
shows signs or symptoms of exposure resulted from a final medical deter-
to MDA, or upon the advice of the phy- mination which differed from the find-
sician. ings, determinations, or recommenda-
(2) When a subsequent final medical tions of the initial physician; or
determination results in a medical (2) The employee has been on re-
finding, determination, or opinion that moval status for the preceding six
84
months as a result of exposure to MDA, with any employer made possible by
then the employer shall await a final virtue of the employee’s removal.
medical determination. (F) Employees who do not recover with-
(v) Medical removal protection bene- in the 6 months of removal. The em-
fits—(A) Provisions of medical removal ployer shall take the following meas-
protection benefits. The employer shall ures with respect to any employee re-
provide to an employee up to six (6) moved from exposure to MDA:
months of medical removal protection (1) The employer shall make avail-
benefits on each occasion that an em- able to the employee a medical exam-
ployee is removed from exposure to ination pursuant to this section to ob-
MDA or otherwise limited pursuant to tain a final medical determination
this section. with respect to the employee;
(B) Definition of medical removal pro- (2) The employer shall assure that
tection benefits. For the purposes of this the final medical determination ob-
section, the requirement that an em- tained indicates whether or not the
ployer provide medical removal protec- employee may be returned to his or her
tion benefits means that the employer former job status, and, if not, what
shall maintain the earnings, seniority, steps should be taken to protect the
and other employment rights and bene- employee’s health;
fits of an employee as though the em- (3) Where the final medical deter-
ployee had not been removed from nor- mination has not yet been obtained, or
mal exposure to MDA or otherwise lim- once obtained indicates that the em-
ited. ployee may not yet be returned to his
(C) Follow-up medical surveillance dur- or her former job status, the employer
ing the period of employee removal or lim- shall continue to provide medical re-
itations. During the period of time that moval protection benefits to the em-
an employee is removed from normal ployee until either the employee is re-
exposure to MDA or otherwise limited, turned to former job status, or a final
the employer may condition the provi- medical determination is made that
sion of medical removal protection the employee is incapable of ever safe-
benefits upon the employee’s participa- ly returning to his or her former job
tion in follow-up medical surveillance status; and
made available pursuant to this sec- (4) Where the employer acts pursuant
tion. to a final medical determination which
(D) Workers’ compensation claims. If a permits the return of the employee to
removed employee files a claim for his or her former job status despite
workers’ compensation payments for a what would otherwise be an unaccept-
MDA-related disability, then the em- able liver function test, later questions
ployer shall continue to provide med- concerning removing the employee
ical removal protection benefits pend- again shall be decided by a final med-
ing disposition of the claim. To the ex- ical determination. The employer need
tent that an award is made to the em- not automatically remove such an em-
ployee for earnings lost during the pe- ployee pursuant to the MDA removal
riod of removal, the employer’s med- criteria provided by this section.
ical removal protection obligation (vi) Voluntary removal or restriction of
shall be reduced by such amount. The an employee. Where an employer, al-
employer shall receive no credit for though not required by this section to
workers’ compensation payments re- do so, removes an employee from expo-
ceived by the employee for treatment- sure to MDA or otherwise places limi-
related expenses. tations on an employee due to the ef-
(E) Other credits. The employer’s obli- fects of MDA exposure on the employ-
gation to provide medical removal pro- ee’s medical condition, the employer
tection benefits to a removed employee shall provide medical removal protec-
shall be reduced to the extent that the tion benefits to the employee equal to
employee receives compensation for that required by paragraph (n)(9)(v) of
earnings lost during the period of re- this section.
moval either from a publicly or em- (o) Recordkeeping—(1) Objective data
ployer-funded compensation program, for exempted operations. (i) Where the
or receives income from employment employer has relied on objective data
85
that demonstrate that products made were obtained are the same as those on
from or containing MDA are not capa- the job for which initial monitoring
ble of releasing MDA or do not present will not be performed;
a dermal exposure problem under the (D) Environmental conditions pre-
expected conditions of processing, use, vailing when the historical monitoring
or handling to exempt such operations data were obtained are the same as
from the initial monitoring require- those on the job for which initial moni-
ments under paragraph (f)(2) of this toring will not be performed; and
section, the employer shall establish (E) Other data relevant to the oper-
and maintain an accurate record of ob- ations, materials, processing, or em-
jective data reasonably relied upon in ployee exposures covered by the excep-
support of the exemption. tion.
(ii) The record shall include at least (iii) The employer shall maintain
the following information: this record for the duration of the em-
(A) The product qualifying for ex- ployer’s reliance upon such historical
emption; monitoring data.
(B) The source of the objective data; (3) The employer may utilize the
(C) The testing protocol, results of services of competent organizations
testing, and/or analysis of the material such as industry trade associations and
for the release of MDA; employee associations to maintain the
(D) A description of the operation ex- records required by this section.
empted and how the data support the (4) Exposure measurements. (i) The em-
exemption; and ployer shall keep an accurate record of
(E) Other data relevant to the oper- all measurements taken to monitor
ations, materials, processing, or em- employee exposure to MDA.
ployee exposures covered by the ex- (ii) This record shall include at least
emption. the following information:
(iii) The employer shall maintain (A) The date of measurement;
this record for the duration of the em- (B) The operation involving exposure
ployer’s reliance upon such objective to MDA;
data. (C) Sampling and analytical methods
(2) Historical monitoring data. (i) used and evidence of their accuracy;
Where the employer has relied on his- (D) Number, duration, and results of
torical monitoring data that dem- samples taken;
onstrate that exposures on a particular (E) Type of protective devices worn,
job will be below the action level to ex- if any; and
empt such operations from the initial (F) Name, social security number,
monitoring requirements under para- and exposure of the employees whose
graph (f)(2) of this section, the em- exposures are represented.
ployer shall establish and maintain an (iii) The employer shall maintain
accurate record of historical moni- this record for at least thirty (30)
toring data reasonably relied upon in years, in accordance with 29 CFR
support of the exception. 1910.33.
(ii) The record shall include informa- (5) Medical surveillance. (i) The em-
tion that reflect the following condi- ployer shall establish and maintain an
tions: accurate record for each employee sub-
(A) The data upon which judgments ject to medical surveillance by para-
are based are scientifically sound and graph (n) of this section, in accordance
were collected using methods that are with 29 CFR 1910.33.
sufficiently accurate and precise; (ii) The record shall include at least
(B) The processes and work practices the following information:
that were in use when the historical (A) The name and social security
monitoring data were obtained are es- number of the employee;
sentially the same as those to be used (B) A copy of the employee’s medical
during the job for which initial moni- examination results, including the
toring will not be performed; medical history, questionnaire re-
(C) The characteristics of the MDA- sponses, results of any tests, and physi-
containing material being handled cian’s recommendations.
when the historical monitoring data (C) Physician’s written opinions;
86
(D) Any employee medical com- MDA conducted pursuant to paragraph
plaints related to exposure to MDA; (f) of this section.
and (2) Observation procedures. When ob-
(E) A copy of the information pro- servation of the measuring or moni-
vided to the physician as required by toring of employee exposure to MDA
paragraph (n) of this section. requires entry into areas where the use
(iii) The employer shall ensure that of protective clothing and equipment
this record is maintained for the dura- or respirators is required, the employer
tion of employment plus thirty (30) shall provide the observer with per-
years, in accordance with 29 CFR sonal protective clothing and equip-
1910.33. ment or respirators required to be worn
(iv) A copy of the employee’s medical by employees working in the area, as-
removal and return to work status. sure the use of such clothing and equip-
(6) Training records. The employer ment or respirators, and require the
shall maintain all employee training observer to comply with all other ap-
records for one (1) year beyond the last plicable safety and health procedures.
date of employment. (q) Appendices. The information con-
(7) Availability. (i) The employer, tained in appendices A, B, C, and D of
upon written request, shall make all this section is not intended, by itself,
records required to be maintained by to create any additional obligations
this section available to the Assistant not otherwise imposed by this standard
Secretary and the Director for exam- nor detract from any existing obliga-
ination and copying. tion.
(ii) The employer, upon request, shall
make any exposure records required by APPENDIX A TO § 1926.60—SUBSTANCE DATA
SHEET, FOR 4–4′ METHYLENEDIANILINE
paragraphs (f) and (n) of this section
available for examination and copying NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
to affected employees, former employ- struction work under this appendix A are
ees, designated representatives, and identical to those set forth in appendix A to
the Assistant Secretary, in accordance § 1910.1050 of this chapter.
with 29 CFR 1910.33(a)–(e) and (g)–(i). APPENDIX B TO § 1926.60—SUBSTANCE
(iii) The employer, upon request, TECHNICAL GUIDELINES, MDA
shall make employee medical records
required by paragraphs (n) and (o) of
struction work under this appendix B are
this section available for examination identical to those set forth in appendix B to
and copying to the subject employee, § 1910.1050 of this chapter.
anyone having the specific written con-
sent of the subject employee, and the APPENDIX C TO § 1926.60—MEDICAL
Assistant Secretary, in accordance SURVEILLANCE GUIDELINES FOR MDA
with 29 CFR 1910.33. NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
(8) Transfer of records. The employer struction work under this appendix C are
shall comply with the requirements identical to those set forth in appendix C to
concerning transfer of records set forth § 1910.1050 of this chapter.
in 29 CFR 1910.1020(h).
APPENDIX D TO § 1926.60—SAMPLING AND ANA-
(ii) Whenever the employer ceases to LYTICAL METHODS FOR MDA MONITORING
do business and there is no successor AND MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES
employer to receive and retain the
records for the prescribed period, the NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
struction work under this appendix D are
employer shall notify the Director at
identical to those set forth in appendix D to
least 90 days prior to disposal and, § 1910.1050 of this chapter.
upon request, transmit them to the Di-
rector. [57 FR 35681, Aug. 10, 1992, as amended at 57
FR 49649, Nov. 3, 1992; 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13,
(p) Observation of monitoring—(1) Em-
1996; 61 FR 31431, June 20, 1996; 63 FR 1296,
ployee observation. The employer shall Jan. 8, 1998; 69 FR 70373, Dec. 6, 2004; 70 FR
provide affected employees, or their 1143, Jan. 5, 2005; 71 FR 16674, Apr. 3, 2006; 71
designated representatives, an oppor- FR 50191, Aug. 24, 2006; 73 FR 75588, Dec. 12,
tunity to observe the measuring or 2008; 76 FR 33611, June 8, 2011; 77 FR 17889,
monitoring of employee exposure to Mar. 26, 2012]
87
§ 1926.61 Retention of DOT markings, Director means the Director, National

placards and labels. Institute for Occupational Safety and
NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- Health (NIOSH), U.S. Department of
struction work under this section are iden- Health and Human Services, or des-
tical to those set forth at § 1910.1201 of this ignee.
chapter. Lead means metallic lead, all inor-
[61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] ganic lead compounds, and organic lead
soaps. Excluded from this definition
§ 1926.62 Lead. are all other organic lead compounds.
(a) Scope. This section applies to all This section means this standard.
construction work where an employee (c) Permissible exposure limit. (1) The
may be occupationally exposed to lead. employer shall assure that no em-
All construction work excluded from ployee is exposed to lead at concentra-
coverage in the general industry stand- tions greater than fifty micrograms per
ard for lead by 29 CFR 1910.1025(a)(2) is cubic meter of air (50 µg/m3) averaged
covered by this standard. Construction over an 8-hour period.
work is defined as work for construc- (2) If an employee is exposed to lead
tion, alteration and/or repair, including for more than 8 hours in any work day
painting and decorating. It includes the employees’ allowable exposure, as a
but is not limited to the following: time weighted average (TWA) for that
(1) Demolition or salvage of struc- day, shall be reduced according to the
tures where lead or materials con- following formula:
taining lead are present; Allowable employee exposure (in µg/m3)
(2) Removal or encapsulation of ma- = 400 divided by hours worked in
terials containing lead; the day.
(3) New construction, alteration, re-
pair, or renovation of structures, sub- (3) When respirators are used to limit
strates, or portions thereof, that con- employee exposure as required under
tain lead, or materials containing lead; paragraph (c) of this section and all the
(4) Installation of products con- requirements of paragraphs (e)(1) and
taining lead; (f) of this section have been met, em-
(5) Lead contamination/emergency ployee exposure may be considered to
cleanup; be at the level provided by the protec-
(6) Transportation, disposal, storage, tion factor of the respirator for those
or containment of lead or materials periods the respirator is worn. Those
containing lead on the site or location periods may be averaged with exposure
at which construction activities are levels during periods when respirators
performed, and are not worn to determine the employ-
(7) Maintenance operations associ- ee’s daily TWA exposure.
ated with the construction activities (d) Exposure assessment—(1) General.
described in this paragraph. (i) Each employer who has a workplace
(b) Definitions. or operation covered by this standard
Action level means employee expo- shall initially determine if any em-
sure, without regard to the use of res- ployee may be exposed to lead at or
pirators, to an airborne concentration above the action level.
of lead of 30 micrograms per cubic (ii) For the purposes of paragraph (d)
meter of air (30 µg/m3) calculated as an of this section, employee exposure is
8-hour time-weighted average (TWA). that exposure which would occur if the
Assistant Secretary means the Assist- employee were not using a respirator.
ant Secretary of Labor for Occupa- (iii) With the exception of moni-
tional Safety and Health, U.S. Depart- toring under paragraph (d)(3), where
ment of Labor, or designee. monitoring is required under this sec-
Competent person means one who is tion, the employer shall collect per-
capable of identifying existing and pre- sonal samples representative of a full
dictable lead hazards in the sur- shift including at least one sample for
roundings or working conditions and each job classification in each work
who has authorization to take prompt area either for each shift or for the
corrective measures to eliminate them. shift with the highest exposure level.
88
(iv) Full shift personal samples shall posed to levels of lead below 500 µg/m3,
be representative of the monitored em- the employer may provide the exposed
ployee’s regular, daily exposure to employee with the appropriate res-
lead. pirator prescribed for such use at such
(2) Protection of employees during as- lower exposures, in accordance with
sessment of exposure. (i) With respect to Table 1 of this section. The tasks cov-
the lead related tasks listed in para- ered by this requirement are:
graph (d)(2)(i) of this section, where (A) Using lead containing mortar;
lead is present, until the employer per- lead burning
forms an employee exposure assess- (B) Where lead containing coatings or
ment as required in paragraph (d) of paint are present: rivet busting; power
this section and documents that the tool cleaning without dust collection
employee performing any of the listed systems; cleanup activities where dry
tasks is not exposed above the PEL, expendable abrasives are used; and ab-
the employer shall treat the employee rasive blasting enclosure movement
as if the employee were exposed above and removal.
the PEL, and not in excess of ten (10) (iv) With respect to the tasks listed
times the PEL, and shall implement in paragraph (d)(2)(iv) of this section,
employee protective measures pre- where lead is present, until the em-
scribed in paragraph (d)(2)(v) of this ployer performs an employee exposure
section. The tasks covered by this re-
assessment as required in paragraph (d)
quirement are:
of this section and documents that the
(A) Where lead containing coatings
employee performing any of the listed
or paint are present: Manual demoli-
tasks is not exposed to lead in excess of
tion of structures (e.g, dry wall), man-
2,500 µg/m3 (50×PEL), the employer
ual scraping, manual sanding, heat gun
shall treat the employee as if the em-
applications, and power tool cleaning
ployee were exposed to lead in excess of
with dust collection systems;
2,500 µg/m3 and shall implement em-
(B) Spray painting with lead paint.
ployee protective measures as pre-
(ii) In addition, with regard to tasks
scribed in paragraph (d)(2)(v) of this
not listed in paragraph (d)(2)(i), where
section. Where the employer does es-
the employee has any reason to believe
tablish that the employee is exposed to
that an employee performing the task
levels of lead below 2,500 µg/m3, the em-
may be exposed to lead in excess of the
ployer may provide the exposed em-
PEL, until the employer performs an
ployee with the appropriate respirator
employee exposure assessment as re-
prescribed for use at such lower expo-
quired by paragraph (d) of this section
sures, in accordance with Table I of
and documents that the employee’s
this section. Interim protection as de-
lead exposure is not above the PEL the
scribed in this paragaraph is required
employer shall treat the employee as if
where lead containing coatings or
the employee were exposed above the
paint are present on structures when
PEL and shall implememt employee
performing:
protective measures as prescribed in
(A) Abrasive blasting,
paragraph (d)(2)(v) of this section.
(iii) With respect to the tasks listed (B) Welding,
in paragraph (d)(2)(iii) of this section, (C) Cutting, and
where lead is present, until the em- (D) Torch burning.
ployer performs an employee exposure (v) Until the employer performs an
assessment as required in paragraph (d) employee exposure assessment as re-
of this section, and documents that the quired under paragraph (d) of this sec-
employee performing any of the listed tion and determines actual employee
tasks is not exposed in excess of 500 µg/ exposure, the employer shall provide to
m3, the employer shall treat the em- employees performing the tasks de-
ployee as if the employee were exposed scribed in paragraphs (d)(2)(i), (d)(2)(ii),
to lead in excess of 500 µg/m3 and shall (d)(2)(iii), and (d)(2)(iv) of this section
implement employee protective meas- with interim protection as follows:
ures as prescribed in paragraph (d)(2)(v) (A) Appropriate respiratory protec-
of this section. Where the employer tion in accordance with paragraph (f)
does establish that the employee is ex- of this section.
89
(B) Appropriate personal protective confidence levels of paragraph (d)(10) of
clothing and equipment in accordance this section.
with paragraph (g) of this section. (iv) Where the employer has objec-
(C) Change areas in accordance with tive data, demonstrating that a par-
paragraph (i)(2) of this section. ticular product or material containing
(D) Hand washing facilities in accord- lead or a specific process, operation or
ance with paragraph (i)(5) of this sec- activity involving lead cannot result in
tion. employee exposure to lead at or above
(E) Biological monitoring in accord- the action level during processing, use,
ance with paragraph (j)(1)(i) of this sec- or handling, the employer may rely
tion, to consist of blood sampling and upon such data instead of imple-
analysis for lead and zinc menting initial monitoring.
protoporphyrin levels, and (A) The employer shall establish and
(F) Training as required under para- maintain an accurate record docu-
graph (l)(1)(i) of this section regarding menting the nature and relevancy of
29 CFR 1926.59, Hazard Communication; objective data as specified in paragraph
training as required under paragraph (n)(4) of this section, where used in as-
(1)(2)(iii) of this section, regarding use sessing employee exposure in lieu of
of respirators; and training in accord- exposure monitoring.
ance with 29 CFR 1926.21, Safety train- (B) Objective data, as described in
ing and education. paragraph (d)(3)(iv) of this section, is
(3) Basis of initial determination. (i) not permitted to be used for exposure
Except as provided under paragraphs assessment in connection with para-
(d)(3)(iii) and (d)(3)(iv) of this section graph (d)(2) of this section.
the employer shall monitor employee (4) Positive initial determination and
exposures and shall base initial deter- initial monitoring. (i) Where a deter-
minations on the employee exposure mination conducted under paragraphs
monitoring results and any of the fol- (d) (1), (2) and (3) of this section shows
lowing, relevant considerations: the possibility of any employee expo-
(A) Any information, observations, or sure at or above the action level the
calculations which would indicate em- employer shall conduct monitoring
ployee exposure to lead; which is representative of the exposure
(B) Any previous measurements of for each employee in the workplace
airborne lead; and who is exposed to lead.
(C) Any employee complaints of (ii) Where the employer has pre-
symptoms which may be attributable viously monitored for lead exposure,
to exposure to lead. and the data were obtained within the
(ii) Monitoring for the initial deter- past 12 months during work operations
mination where performed may be lim- conducted under workplace conditions
ited to a representative sample of the closely resembling the processes, type
exposed employees who the employer of material, control methods, work
reasonably believes are exposed to the practices, and environmental condi-
greatest airborne concentrations of tions used and prevailing in the em-
lead in the workplace. ployer’s current operations, the em-
(iii) Where the employer has pre- ployer may rely on such earlier moni-
viously monitored for lead exposures, toring results to satisfy the require-
and the data were obtained within the ments of paragraph (d)(4)(i) of this sec-
past 12 months during work operations tion if the sampling and analytical
conducted under workplace conditions methods meet the accuracy and con-
closely resembling the processes, type fidence levels of paragraph (d)(10) of
of material, control methods, work this section.
practices, and environmental condi- (5) Negative initial determination.
tions used and prevailing in the em- Where a determination, conducted
ployer’s current operations, the em- under paragraphs (d) (1), (2), and (3) of
ployer may rely on such earlier moni- this section is made that no employee
toring results to satisfy the require- is exposed to airborne concentrations
ments of paragraphs (d)(3)(i) and (d)(6) of lead at or above the action level the
of this section if the sampling and ana- employer shall make a written record
lytical methods meet the accuracy and of such determination. The record shall
90
include at least the information speci- level being exposed above the PEL, the
fied in paragraph (d)(3)(i) of this sec- employer shall conduct additional
tion and shall also include the date of monitoring in accordance with this
determination, location within the paragraph.
worksite, and the name and social se- (8) Employee notification. (i) The em-
curity number of each employee mon- ployer must, as soon as possible but no
itored. later than 5 working days after the re-
(6) Frequency. (i) If the initial deter- ceipt of the results of any monitoring
mination reveals employee exposure to performed under this section, notify
be below the action level further expo- each affected employee of these results
sure determination need not be re- either individually in writing or by
peated except as otherwise provided in posting the results in an appropriate
paragraph (d)(7) of this section. location that is accessible to employ-
(ii) If the initial determination or ees.
subsequent determination reveals em- (ii) Whenever the results indicate
ployee exposure to be at or above the that the representative employee expo-
action level but at or below the PEL sure, without regard to respirators, is
the employer shall perform monitoring at or above the PEL the employer shall
in accordance with this paragraph at include in the written notice a state-
least every 6 months. The employer ment that the employees exposure was
shall continue monitoring at the re- at or above that level and a description
quired frequency until at least two of the corrective action taken or to be
consecutive measurements, taken at taken to reduce exposure to below that
least 7 days apart, are below the action level.
level at which time the employer may
(9) Accuracy of measurement. The em-
discontinue monitoring for that em-
ployer shall use a method of moni-
ployee except as otherwise provided in
toring and analysis which has an accu-
paragraph (d)(7) of this section.
racy (to a confidence level of 95%) of
(iii) If the initial determination re-
not less than plus or minus 25 percent
veals that employee exposure is above
the PEL the employer shall perform for airborne concentrations of lead
monitoring quarterly. The employer equal to or greater than 30 µg/m3.
shall continue monitoring at the re- (e) Methods of compliance—(1) Engi-
quired frequency until at least two neering and work practice controls. The
consecutive measurements, taken at employer shall implement engineering
least 7 days apart, are at or below the and work practice controls, including
PEL but at or above the action level at administrative controls, to reduce and
which time the employer shall repeat maintain employee exposure to lead to
monitoring for that employee at the or below the permissible exposure limit
frequency specified in paragraph to the extent that such controls are
(d)(6)(ii) of this section, except as oth- feasible. Wherever all feasible engi-
erwise provided in paragraph (d)(7) of neering and work practices controls
this section. The employer shall con- that can be instituted are not suffi-
tinue monitoring at the required fre- cient to reduce employee exposure to
quency until at least two consecutive or below the permissible exposure limit
measurements, taken at least 7 days prescribed in paragraph (c) of this sec-
apart, are below the action level at tion, the employer shall nonetheless
which time the employer may dis- use them to reduce employee exposure
continue monitoring for that employee to the lowest feasible level and shall
except as otherwise provided in para- supplement them by the use of res-
graph (d)(7) of this section. piratory protection that complies with
(7) Additional exposure assessments. the requirements of paragraph (f) of
Whenever there has been a change of this section.
equipment, process, control, personnel (2) Compliance program. (i) Prior to
or a new task has been initiated that commencement of the job each em-
may result in additional employees ployer shall establish and implement a
being exposed to lead at or above the written compliance program to achieve
action level or may result in employees compliance with paragraph (c) of this
already exposed at or above the action section.
91
(ii) Written plans for these compli- (3) Mechanical ventilation. When ven-
ance programs shall include at least tilation is used to control lead expo-
the following: sure, the employer shall evaluate the
(A) A description of each activity in mechanical performance of the system
which lead is emitted; e.g. equipment in controlling exposure as necessary to
used, material involved, controls in maintain its effectiveness.
place, crew size, employee job respon- (4) Administrative controls. If adminis-
sibilities, operating procedures and trative controls are used as a means of
maintenance practices; reducing employees TWA exposure to
(B) A description of the specific lead, the employer shall establish and
means that will be employed to achieve implement a job rotation schedule
compliance and, where engineering which includes:
controls are required engineering plans (i) Name or identification number of
and studies used to determine methods each affected employee;
selected for controlling exposure to (ii) Duration and exposure levels at
lead; each job or work station where each af-
(C) A report of the technology consid- fected employee is located; and
ered in meeting the PEL; (iii) Any other information which
(D) Air monitoring data which docu- may be useful in assessing the reli-
ments the source of lead emissions; ability of administrative controls to
(E) A detailed schedule for implemen- reduce exposure to lead.
tation of the program, including docu- (5) The employer shall ensure that, to
mentation such as copies of purchase the extent relevant, employees follow
orders for equipment, construction good work practices such as described
contracts, etc.; in appendix B of this section.
(F) A work practice program which (f) Respiratory protection—(1) General.
includes items required under para- For employees who use respirators re-
graphs (g), (h) and (i) of this section quired by this section, the employer
and incorporates other relevant work must provide each employee an appro-
practices such as those specified in priate respirator that complies with
paragraph (e)(5) of this section; the requirements of this paragraph.
(G) An administrative control sched- Respirators must be used during:
ule required by paragraph (e)(4) of this (i) Periods when an employee’s expo-
section, if applicable; sure to lead exceeds the PEL.
(H) A description of arrangements (ii) Work operations for which engi-
made among contractors on multi-con- neering and work-practice controls are
tractor sites with respect to informing not sufficient to reduce employee expo-
affected employees of potential exposures to or below the PEL.
sure to lead and with respect to respon- (iii) Periods when an employee re-
sibility for compliance with this sec- quests a respirator.
tion as set-forth in § 1926.16. (iv) Periods when respirators are re-
(I) Other relevant information. quired to provide interim protection of
(iii) The compliance program shall employees while they perform the op-
provide for frequent and regular inspec- erations specified in paragraph (d)(2) of
tions of job sites, materials, and equip- this section.
ment to be made by a competent per- (2) Respirator program. (i) The em-
son. ployer must implement a respiratory
(iv) Written programs shall be sub- protection program in accordance with
mitted upon request to any affected § 1910.134(b) through (d) (except
employee or authorized employee rep- (d)(1)(iii)), and (f) through (m), which
resentatives, to the Assistant Sec- covers each employee required by this
retary and the Director, and shall be section to use a respirator.
available at the worksite for examina- (ii) If an employee has breathing dif-
tion and copying by the Assistant Sec- ficulty during fit testing or respirator
retary and the Director. use, the employer must provide the em-
(v) Written programs must be revised ployee with a medical examination in
and updated at least annually to re- accordance with paragraph (j)(3)(i)(B)
flect the current status of the program. of this section to determine whether or
92
not the employee can use a respirator required by paragraph (g)(1) of this sec-
while performing the required duty. tion.
(3) Respirator selection. (i) Employers (iii) The employer shall repair or re-
must: place required protective clothing and
(A) Select, and provide to employees, equipment as needed to maintain their
the appropriate respirators specified in effectiveness.
paragraph (d)(3)(i)(A) of 29 CFR (iv) The employer shall assure that
1910.134. all protective clothing is removed at
(B) Provide employees with a full the completion of a work shift only in
facepiece respirator instead of a half change areas provided for that purpose
mask respirator for protection against as prescribed in paragraph (i)(2) of this
lead aerosols that may cause eye or section.
skin irritation at the use concentra- (v) The employer shall assure that
tions. contaminated protective clothing
(C) Provide HEPA filters for powered which is to be cleaned, laundered, or
and non-powered air-purifying res- disposed of, is placed in a closed con-
pirators. tainer in the change area which pre-
(ii) The employer must provide a vents dispersion of lead outside the
powered air-purifying respirator when container.
an employee chooses to use such a res- (vi) The employer shall inform in
pirator and it will provide adequate writing any person who cleans or laun-
protection to the employee. ders protective clothing or equipment
(g) Protective work clothing and equip- of the potentially harmful effects of ex-
ment—(1) Provision and use. Where an posure to lead.
employee is exposed to lead above the (vii)(A) The employer shall ensure
PEL without regard to the use of res- that the containers of contaminated
pirators, where employees are exposed protective clothing and equipment re-
to lead compounds which may cause quired by paragraph (g)(2)(v) of this
skin or eye irritation (e.g. lead arse- section are labeled as follows:
nate, lead azide), and as interim pro-
tection for employees performing tasks DANGER: CLOTHING AND EQUIPMENT
as specified in paragraph (d)(2) of this CONTAMINATED WITH LEAD. MAY
section, the employer shall provide at DAMAGE FERTILITY OR THE UNBORN
no cost to the employee and assure CHILD. CAUSES DAMAGE TO THE CEN-
TRAL NERVOUS SYSTEM. DO NOT EAT,
that the employee uses appropriate
DRINK OR SMOKE WHEN HANDLING. DO
protective work clothing and equip- NOT REMOVE DUST BY BLOWING OR
ment that prevents contamination of SHAKING. DISPOSE OF LEAD CONTAMI-
the employee and the employee’s gar- NATED WASH WATER IN ACCORDANCE
ments such as, but not limited to: WITH APPLICABLE LOCAL, STATE, OR
(i) Coveralls or similar full-body FEDERAL REGULATIONS.
work clothing;
(B) Prior to June 1, 2015, employers
(ii) Gloves, hats, and shoes or dispos- may include the following information
able shoe coverlets; and
on bags or containers of contaminated
(iii) Face shields, vented goggles, or protective clothing and equipment re-
other appropriate protective equip- quired by paragraph (g)(2)(v) in lieu of
ment which complies with § 1910.133 of the labeling requirements in paragraph
this chapter.
(g)(2)(vii)(A) of this section:
(2) Cleaning and replacement. (i) The
employer shall provide the protective Caution: Clothing contaminated with lead.
clothing required in paragraph (g)(1) of Do not remove dust by blowing or shaking.
this section in a clean and dry condi- Dispose of lead contaminated wash water in
tion at least weekly, and daily to em- accordance with applicable local, state, or
federal regulations.
ployees whose exposure levels without
regard to a respirator are over 200 µg/ (viii) The employer shall prohibit the
m3 of lead as an 8-hour TWA. removal of lead from protective cloth-
(ii) The employer shall provide for ing or equipment by blowing, shaking,
the cleaning, laundering, and disposal or any other means which disperses
of protective clothing and equipment lead into the air.
93
(h) Housekeeping—(1) All surfaces employees shower at the end of the
shall be maintained as free as prac- work shift and shall provide an ade-
ticable of accumulations of lead. quate supply of cleansing agents and
(2) Clean-up of floors and other sur- towels for use by affected employees.
faces where lead accumulates shall (4) Eating facilities. (i) The employer
wherever possible, be cleaned by shall provide lunchroom facilities or
vacuuming or other methods that min- eating areas for employees whose air-
imize the likelihood of lead becoming borne exposure to lead is above the
airborne. PEL, without regard to the use of res-
(3) Shoveling, dry or wet sweeping, pirators.
and brushing may be used only where (ii) The employer shall assure that
vacuuming or other equally effective lunchroom facilities or eating areas
methods have been tried and found not are as free as practicable from lead
to be effective. contamination and are readily acces-
(4) Where vacuuming methods are se- sible to employees.
lected, the vacuums shall be equipped (iii) The employer shall assure that
with HEPA filters and used and employees whose airborne exposure to
emptied in a manner which minimizes lead is above the PEL, without regard
the reentry of lead into the workplace. to the use of a respirator, wash their
(5) Compressed air shall not be used hands and face prior to eating, drink-
to remove lead from any surface unless ing, smoking or applying cosmetics.
the compressed air is used in conjunc- (iv) The employer shall assure that
tion with a ventilation system de- employees do not enter lunchroom fa-
signed to capture the airborne dust cre- cilities or eating areas with protective
ated by the compressed air. work clothing or equipment unless sur-
(i) Hygiene facilities and practices. (1) face lead dust has been removed by
The employer shall assure that in areas vacuuming, downdraft booth, or other
where employees are exposed to lead cleaning method that limits dispersion
above the PEL without regard to the of lead dust.
use of respirators, food or beverage is (5) Hand washing facilities. (i) The em-
not present or consumed, tobacco prod- ployer shall provide adequate
ucts are not present or used, and cos- handwashing facilities for use by em-
metics are not applied. ployees exposed to lead in accordance
(2) Change areas. (i) The employer with 29 CFR 1926.51(f).
shall provide clean change areas for (ii) Where showers are not provided
employees whose airborne exposure to the employer shall assure that employ-
lead is above the PEL, and as interim ees wash their hands and face at the
protection for employees performing end of the work-shift.
tasks as specified in paragraph (d)(2) of (j) Medical surveillance—(1) General. (i)
this section, without regard to the use The employer shall make available ini-
of respirators. tial medical surveillance to employees
(ii) The employer shall assure that occupationally exposed on any day to
change areas are equipped with sepa- lead at or above the action level. Ini-
rate storage facilities for protective tial medical surveillance consists of bi-
work clothing and equipment and for ological monitoring in the form of
street clothes which prevent cross-con- blood sampling and analysis for lead
tamination. and zinc protoporphyrin levels.
(iii) The employer shall assure that (ii) The employer shall institute a
employees do not leave the workplace medical surveillance program in ac-
wearing any protective clothing or cordance with paragraphs (j)(2) and
equipment that is required to be worn (j)(3) of this section for all employees
during the work shift. who are or may be exposed by the em-
(3) Showers. (i) The employer shall ployer at or above the action level for
provide shower facilities, where fea- more than 30 days in any consecutive
sible, for use by employees whose air- 12 months;
borne exposure to lead is above the (iii) The employer shall assure that
PEL. all medical examinations and proce-
(ii) The employer shall assure, where dures are performed by or under the su-
shower facilities are available, that pervision of a licensed physician.
94
(iv) The employer shall make avail- (B) The employer shall notify each
able the required medical surveillance employee whose blood lead level is at
including multiple physician review or above 40 µg/dl that the standard re-
under paragraph (j)(3)(iii) without cost quires temporary medical removal
to employees and at a reasonable time with Medical Removal Protection ben-
and place. efits when an employee’s blood lead
(2) Biological monitoring—(i) Blood lead level is at or above the numerical cri-
and ZPP level sampling and analysis. terion for medical removal under para-
The employer shall make available bio- graph (k)(1)(i) of this section.
logical monitoring in the form of blood (3) Medical examinations and consulta-
sampling and analysis for lead and zinc tions—(i) Frequency. The employer shall
protoporphyrin levels to each employee make available medical examinations
covered under paragraphs (j)(1)(i) and and consultations to each employee
(ii) of this section on the following covered under paragraph (j)(1)(ii) of
schedule: this section on the following schedule:
(A) For each employee covered under (A) At least annually for each em-
paragraph (j)(1)(ii) of this section, at ployee for whom a blood sampling test
least every 2 months for the first 6 conducted at any time during the pre-
months and every 6 months thereafter; ceding 12 months indicated a blood lead
(B) For each employee covered under level at or above 40 µg/dl;
paragraphs (j)(1) (i) or (ii) of this sec- (B) As soon as possible, upon notifi-
tion whose last blood sampling and cation by an employee either that the
analysis indicated a blood lead level at employee has developed signs or symp-
or above 40 µg/dl, at least every two toms commonly associated with lead
months. This frequency shall continue intoxication, that the employee desires
until two consecutive blood samples medical advice concerning the effects
and analyses indicate a blood lead level of current or past exposure to lead on
below 40 µg/dl; and the employee’s ability to procreate a
(C) For each employee who is re- healthy child, that the employee is
moved from exposure to lead due to an pregnant, or that the employee has
elevated blood lead level at least demonstrated difficulty in breathing
monthly during the removal period. during a respirator fitting test or dur-
(ii) Follow-up blood sampling tests. ing use; and
Whenever the results of a blood lead (C) As medically appropriate for each
level test indicate that an employee’s employee either removed from expo-
blood lead level is at or above the nu- sure to lead due to a risk of sustaining
merical criterion for medical removal material impairment to health, or oth-
under paragraph (k)(1)(i) of this sec- erwise limited pursuant to a final med-
tion, the employer shall provide a sec- ical determination.
ond (follow-up) blood sampling test (ii) Content. The content of medical
within two weeks after the employer examinations made available pursuant
receives the results of the first blood to paragraph (j)(3)(i)(B)–(C) of this sec-
sampling test. tion shall be determined by an exam-
(iii) Accuracy of blood lead level sam- ining physician and, if requested by an
pling and analysis. Blood lead level employee, shall include pregnancy
sampling and analysis provided pursu- testing or laboratory evaluation of
ant to this section shall have an accu- male fertility. Medical examinations
racy (to a confidence level of 95 per- made available pursuant to paragraph
cent) within plus or minus 15 percent (j)(3)(i)(A) of this section shall include
or 6 µg/dl, whichever is greater, and the following elements:
shall be conducted by a laboratory ap- (A) A detailed work history and a
proved by OSHA. medical history, with particular atten-
(iv) Employee notification. (A) Within tion to past lead exposure (occupa-
five working days after the receipt of tional and non-occupational), personal
biological monitoring results, the em- habits (smoking, hygiene), and past
ployer shall notify each employee in gastrointestinal, hematologic, renal,
writing of his or her blood lead level; cardiovascular, reproductive and neu-
and rological problems;
95
(B) A thorough physical examination, (C) If the findings, determinations or
with particular attention to teeth, recommendations of the second physi-
gums, hematologic, gastrointestinal, cian differ from those of the initial
renal, cardiovascular, and neurological physician, then the employer and the
systems. Pulmonary status should be employee shall assure that efforts are
evaluated if respiratory protection will made for the two physicians to resolve
be used; any disagreement.
(C) A blood pressure measurement; (D) If the two physicians have been
(D) A blood sample and analysis unable to quickly resolve their dis-
which determines: agreement, then the employer and the
(1) Blood lead level; employee through their respective phy-
(2) Hemoglobin and hematocrit deter- sicians shall designate a third physi-
minations, red cell indices, and exam- cian:
ination of peripheral smear mor- (1) To review any findings, deter-
phology; minations or recommendations of the
(3) Zinc protoporphyrin; prior physicians; and
(4) Blood urea nitrogen; and, (2) To conduct such examinations,
consultations, laboratory tests and dis-
(5) Serum creatinine;
cussions with the prior physicians as
(E) A routine urinalysis with micro-
the third physician deems necessary to
scopic examination; and
resolve the disagreement of the prior
(F) Any laboratory or other test rel- physicians.
evant to lead exposure which the exam- (E) The employer shall act consistent
ining physician deems necessary by with the findings, determinations and
sound medical practice. recommendations of the third physi-
(iii) Multiple physician review mecha- cian, unless the employer and the em-
nism. (A) If the employer selects the ployee reach an agreement which is
initial physician who conducts any otherwise consistent with the rec-
medical examination or consultation ommendations of at least one of the
provided to an employee under this sec- three physicians.
tion, the employee may designate a (iv) Information provided to examining
second physician: and consulting physicians. (A) The em-
(1) To review any findings, deter- ployer shall provide an initial physi-
minations or recommendations of the cian conducting a medical examination
initial physician; and or consultation under this section with
(2) To conduct such examinations, the following information:
consultations, and laboratory tests as (1) A copy of this regulation for lead
the second physician deems necessary including all Appendices;
to facilitate this review. (2) A description of the affected em-
(B) The employer shall promptly no- ployee’s duties as they relate to the
tify an employee of the right to seek a employee’s exposure;
second medical opinion after each oc- (3) The employee’s exposure level or
casion that an initial physician con- anticipated exposure level to lead and
ducts a medical examination or con- to any other toxic substance (if appli-
sultation pursuant to this section. The cable);
employer may condition its participa- (4) A description of any personal pro-
tion in, and payment for, the multiple tective equipment used or to be used;
physician review mechanism upon the (5) Prior blood lead determinations;
employee doing the following within and
fifteen (15) days after receipt of the (6) All prior written medical opinions
foregoing notification, or receipt of the concerning the employee in the em-
initial physician’s written opinion, ployer’s possession or control.
whichever is later: (B) The employer shall provide the
(1) The employee informing the em- foregoing information to a second or
ployer that he or she intends to seek a third physician conducting a medical
second medical opinion, and examination or consultation under this
(2) The employee initiating steps to section upon request either by the sec-
make an appointment with a second ond or third physician, or by the em-
physician. ployee.
96
(v) Written medical opinions. (A) The the employer shall assure that it be
employer shall obtain and furnish the done under the supervision of a li-
employee with a copy of a written med- censed physician in a clinical setting
ical opinion from each examining or with thorough and appropriate medical
consulting physician which contains monitoring and that the employee is
only the following information: notified in writing prior to its occur-
(1) The physician’s opinion as to rence.
whether the employee has any detected (k) Medical removal protection—(1)
medical condition which would place Temporary medical removal and return of
the employee at increased risk of ma- an employee—(i) Temporary removal due
terial impairment of the employee’s to elevated blood lead level. The em-
health from exposure to lead; ployer shall remove an employee from
(2) Any recommended special protec- work having an exposure to lead at or
tive measures to be provided to the em- above the action level on each occasion
ployee, or limitations to be placed that a periodic and a follow-up blood
upon the employee’s exposure to lead; sampling test conducted pursuant to
(3) Any recommended limitation this section indicate that the employ-
upon the employee’s use of respirators, ee’s blood lead level is at or above 50
including a determination of whether µg/dl; and,
the employee can wear a powered air (ii) Temporary removal due to a final
purifying respirator if a physician de- medical determination. (A) The employer
termines that the employee cannot shall remove an employee from work
wear a negative pressure respirator; having an exposure to lead at or above
and the action level on each occasion that
(4) The results of the blood lead de- a final medical determination results
terminations. in a medical finding, determination, or
(B) The employer shall instruct each opinion that the employee has a de-
examining and consulting physician to: tected medical condition which places
(1) Not reveal either in the written the employee at increased risk of ma-
opinion or orally, or in any other terial impairment to health from expo-
means of communication with the em- sure to lead.
ployer, findings, including laboratory (B) For the purposes of this section,
results, or diagnoses unrelated to an the phrase final medical determination
employee’s occupational exposure to means the written medical opinion on
lead; and the employees’ health status by the ex-
(2) Advise the employee of any med- amining physician or, where relevant,
ical condition, occupational or non- the outcome of the multiple physician
occupational, which dictates further review mechanism or alternate medical
medical examination or treatment. determination mechanism used pursu-
(vi) Alternate physician determination ant to the medical surveillance provi-
mechanisms. The employer and an em- sions of this section.
ployee or authorized employee rep- (C) Where a final medical determina-
resentative may agree upon the use of tion results in any recommended spe-
any alternate physician determination cial protective measures for an em-
mechanism in lieu of the multiple phy- ployee, or limitations on an employee’s
sician review mechanism provided by exposure to lead, the employer shall
paragraph (j)(3)(iii) of this section so implement and act consistent with the
long as the alternate mechanism is as recommendation.
expeditious and protective as the re- (iii) Return of the employee to former
quirements contained in this para- job status. (A) The employer shall re-
graph. turn an employee to his or her former
(4) Chelation. (i) The employer shall job status:
assure that any person whom he re- (1) For an employee removed due to a
tains, employs, supervises or controls blood lead level at or above 50 µg/dl
does not engage in prophylactic chela- when two consecutive blood sampling
tion of any employee at any time. tests indicate that the employee’s
(ii) If therapeutic or diagnostic che- blood lead level is below 40 µg/dl;
lation is to be performed by any person (2) For an employee removed due to a
in paragraph (j)(4)(i) of this section, final medical determination, when a
97
subsequent final medical determina- mination which differed from the find-
tion results in a medical finding, deter- ings, determinations, or recommenda-
mination, or opinion that the employee tions of the initial physician or;
no longer has a detected medical condi- (2) If the employee has been on re-
tion which places the employee at in- moval status for the preceding eight-
creased risk of material impairment to een months due to an elevated blood
health from exposure to lead. lead level, then the employer shall
(B) For the purposes of this section, await a final medical determination.
the requirement that an employer re- (2) Medical removal protection bene-
turn an employee to his or her former fits—(i) Provision of medical removal pro-
job status is not intended to expand tection benefits. The employer shall pro-
upon or restrict any rights an em- vide an employee up to eighteen (18)
ployee has or would have had, absent months of medical removal protection
temporary medical removal, to a spe- benefits on each occasion that an em-
cific job classification or position ployee is removed from exposure to
under the terms of a collective bar- lead or otherwise limited pursuant to
gaining agreement. this section.
(iv) Removal of other employee special (ii) Definition of medical removal pro-
protective measure or limitations. The tection benefits. For the purposes of this
employer shall remove any limitations section, the requirement that an em-
placed on an employee or end any spe- ployer provide medical removal protec-
cial protective measures provided to an tion benefits means that, as long as the
employee pursuant to a final medical job the employee was removed from
determination when a subsequent final continues, the employer shall maintain
medical determination indicates that the total normal earnings, seniority
the limitations or special protective and other employment rights and bene-
measures are no longer necessary. fits of an employee, including the em-
(v) Employer options pending a final ployee’s right to his or her former job
medical determination. Where the mul- status as though the employee had not
tiple physician review mechanism, or been medically removed from the em-
alternate medical determination mech- ployee’s job or otherwise medically
anism used pursuant to the medical limited.
surveillance provisions of this section, (iii) Follow-up medical surveillance
has not yet resulted in a final medical during the period of employee removal or
determination with respect to an em- limitation. During the period of time
ployee, the employer shall act as fol- that an employee is medically removed
lows: from his or her job or otherwise medi-
(A) Removal. The employer may re- cally limited, the employer may condi-
move the employee from exposure to tion the provision of medical removal
lead, provide special protective meas- protection benefits upon the employ-
ures to the employee, or place limita- ee’s participation in follow-up medical
tions upon the employee, consistent surveillance made available pursuant
with the medical findings, determina- to this section.
tions, or recommendations of any of (iv) Workers’ compensation claims. If a
the physicians who have reviewed the removed employee files a claim for
employee’s health status. workers’ compensation payments for a
(B) Return. The employer may return lead-related disability, then the em-
the employee to his or her former job ployer shall continue to provide med-
status, end any special protective ical removal protection benefits pend-
measures provided to the employee, ing disposition of the claim. To the ex-
and remove any limitations placed tent that an award is made to the em-
upon the employee, consistent with the ployee for earnings lost during the pe-
medical findings, determinations, or riod of removal, the employer’s med-
recommendations of any of the physi- ical removal protection obligation
cians who have reviewed the employ- shall be reduced by such amount. The
ee’s health status, with two exceptions. employer shall receive no credit for
(1) If the initial removal, special pro- workers’ compensation payments re-
tection, or limitation of the employee ceived by the employee for treatment-
resulted from a final medical deter- related expenses.
98
(v) Other credits. The employer’s obli- (iv) The employer shall also provide
gation to provide medical removal pro- the training program at least annually
tection benefits to a removed employee for each employee who is subject to
shall be reduced to the extent that the lead exposure at or above the action
employee receives compensation for level on any day.
earnings lost during the period of re- (2) Training program. The employer
moval either from a publicly or em- shall assure that each employee is
ployer-funded compensation program, trained in the following:
or receives income from employment (i) The content of this standard and
with another employer made possible its appendices;
by virtue of the employee’s removal. (ii) The specific nature of the oper-
(vi) Voluntary removal or restriction of ations which could result in exposure
an employee. Where an employer, al- to lead above the action level;
though not required by this section to (iii) The purpose, proper selection,
do so, removes an employee from expo- fitting, use, and limitations of res-
sure to lead or otherwise places limita- pirators;
tions on an employee due to the effects (iv) The purpose and a description of
of lead exposure on the employee’s the medical surveillance program, and
medical condition, the employer shall
the medical removal protection pro-
provide medical removal protection
gram including information concerning
benefits to the employee equal to that
the adverse health effects associated
required by paragraph (k)(2) (i) and (ii)
with excessive exposure to lead (with
of this section.
particular attention to the adverse re-
(l) Communication of hazards.—(1)
productive effects on both males and
General. (i) Hazard communication. The
females and hazards to the fetus and
employer shall include lead in the pro-
additional precautions for employees
gram established to comply with the
who are pregnant);
Hazard Communication Standard
(HCS) (§ 1910.1200). The employer shall (v) The engineering controls and
ensure that each employee has access work practices associated with the em-
to labels on containers of lead and safe- ployee’s job assignment including
ty data sheets, and is trained in ac- training of employees to follow rel-
cordance with the provisions of HCS evant good work practices described in
and paragraph (l) of this section. The appendix B of this section;
employer shall ensure that at least the (vi) The contents of any compliance
following hazards are addressed: plan in effect;
(A) Reproductive/developmental tox- (vii) Instructions to employees that
icity; chelating agents should not routinely
(B) Central nervous system effects; be used to remove lead from their bod-
(C) Kidney effects; ies and should not be used at all except
(D) Blood effects; and under the direction of a licensed physi-
(E) Acute toxicity effects. cian; and
(ii) The employer shall train each (viii) The employee’s right of access
employee who is subject to exposure to to records under 29 CFR 1910.20.
lead at or above the action level on any (3) Access to information and training
day, or who is subject to exposure to materials. (i) The employer shall make
lead compounds which may cause skin readily available to all affected em-
or eye irritation (e.g., lead arsenate, ployees a copy of this standard and its
lead azide), in accordance with the re- appendices.
quirements of this section. The em- (ii) The employer shall provide, upon
ployer shall institute a training pro- request, all materials relating to the
gram and ensure employee participa- employee information and training
tion in the program. program to affected employees and
(iii) The employer shall provide the their designated representatives, and
training program as initial training to the Assistant Secretary and the Di-
prior to the time of job assignment or rector.
prior to the start up date for this re- (m) Signs—(1) General. (i) The em-
quirement, whichever comes last. ployer shall post the following warning
99
signs in each work area where an em- (E) The environmental variables that
ployee’s exposure to lead is above the could affect the measurement of em-
PEL. ployee exposure.
DANGER
(iii) The employer shall maintain
LEAD WORK AREA monitoring and other exposure assess-
MAY DAMAGE FERTILITY OR THE UN- ment records in accordance with the
BORN CHILD provisions of 29 CFR 1910.33.
CAUSES DAMAGE TO THE CENTRAL (2) Medical surveillance. (i) The em-
NERVOUS SYSTEM ployer shall establish and maintain an
DO NOT EAT, DRINK OR SMOKE IN THIS accurate record for each employee sub-
AREA
ject to medical surveillance as required
(ii) The employer shall ensure that by paragraph (j) of this section.
no statement appears on or near any (ii) This record shall include:
sign required by this paragraph (m) (A) The name, social security num-
that contradicts or detracts from the ber, and description of the duties of the
meaning of the required sign. employee;
(iii) The employer shall ensure that (B) A copy of the physician’s written
signs required by this paragraph (m) opinions;
are illuminated and cleaned as nec- (C) Results of any airborne exposure
essary so that the legend is readily monitoring done on or for that em-
visible. ployee and provided to the physician;
(iv) The employer may use signs re- and
quired by other statutes, regulations or (D) Any employee medical com-
ordinances in addition to, or in complaints related to exposure to lead.
bination with, signs required by this (iii) The employer shall keep, or as-
paragraph (m). sure that the examining physician
(v) Prior to June 1, 2016, employers keeps, the following medical records:
may use the following legend in lieu of (A) A copy of the medical examina-
that specified in paragraph (m)(1)(i) of tion results including medical and
this section: work history required under paragraph
WARNING (j) of this section;
LEAD WORK AREA (B) A description of the laboratory
POISON procedures and a copy of any standards
NO SMOKING OR EATING or guidelines used to interpret the test
(n) Recordkeeping—(1) Exposure assess- results or references to that informa-
ment. (i) The employer shall establish tion;
and maintain an accurate record of all (C) A copy of the results of biological
monitoring and other data used in con- monitoring.
ducting employee exposure assess- (iv) The employer shall maintain or
ments as required in paragraph (d) of assure that the physician maintains
this section. medical records in accordance with the
(ii) Exposure monitoring records provisions of 29 CFR 1910.33.
shall include: (3) Medical removals. (i) The employer
(A) The date(s), number, duration, lo- shall establish and maintain an accu-
cation and results of each of the sam- rate record for each employee removed
ples taken if any, including a descrip- from current exposure to lead pursuant
tion of the sampling procedure used to to paragraph (k) of this section.
determine representative employee ex- (ii) Each record shall include:
posure where applicable; (A) The name and social security
(B) A description of the sampling and number of the employee;
analytical methods used and evidence (B) The date of each occasion that
of their accuracy; the employee was removed from cur-
(C) The type of respiratory protective rent exposure to lead as well as the
devices worn, if any; corresponding date on which the em-
(D) Name, social security number, ployee was returned to his or her
and job classification of the employee former job status;
monitored and of all other employees (C) A brief explanation of how each
whose exposure the measurement is in- removal was or is being accomplished;
tended to represent; and and
100
(D) A statement with respect to each employee exposure to lead requires
removal indicating whether or not the entry into an area where the use of res-
reason for the removal was an elevated pirators, protective clothing or equip-
blood lead level. ment is required, the employer shall
(iii) The employer shall maintain provide the observer with and assure
each medical removal record for at the use of such respirators, clothing
least the duration of an employee’s em- and equipment, and shall require the
ployment. observer to comply with all other ap-
(4) Objective data for exemption from re- plicable safety and health procedures.
quirement for initial monitoring. (i) For (ii) Without interfering with the
purposes of this section, objective data monitoring, observers shall be entitled
are information demonstrating that a to:
particular product or material con- (A) Receive an explanation of the
taining lead or a specific process, oper- measurement procedures;
ation, or activity involving lead cannot (B) Observe all steps related to the
release dust or fumes in concentrations monitoring of lead performed at the
at or above the action level under any place of exposure; and
expected conditions of use. Objective (C) Record the results obtained or re-
data can be obtained from an industry- ceive copies of the results when re-
wide study or from laboratory product turned by the laboratory.
test results from manufacturers of lead (p) Appendices. The information con-
containing products or materials. The tained in the appendices to this section
data the employer uses from an indus- is not intended by itself, to create any
try-wide survey must be obtained additional obligations not otherwise
under workplace conditions closely re- imposed by this standard nor detract
sembling the processes, types of mate- from any existing obligation.
rial, control methods, work practices
and environmental conditions in the APPENDIX A TO § 1926.62—SUBSTANCE DATA
SHEET FOR OCCUPATIONAL EXPOSURE TO LEAD
employer’s current operations.
(ii) The employer shall maintain the I. Substance Identification
record of the objective data relied upon A. Substance: Pure lead (Pb) is a heavy
for at least 30 years. metal at room temperature and pressure and
(5) Availability. The employer shall is a basic chemical element. It can combine
make available upon request all with various other substances to form nu-
records required to be maintained by merous lead compounds.
paragraph (n) of this section to affected B. Compounds covered by the standard: The
employees, former employees, and word lead when used in this interim final
their designated representatives, and standard means elemental lead, all inorganic
lead compounds and a class of organic lead
to the Assistant Secretary and the Di- compounds called lead soaps. This standard
rector for examination and copying. does not apply to other organic lead com-
(6) Transfer of records. (i) Whenever pounds.
the employer ceases to do business, the C. Uses: Exposure to lead occurs in several
successor employer shall receive and different occupations in the construction in-
retain all records required to be main- dustry, including demolition or salvage of
tained by paragraph (n) of this section. structures where lead or lead-containing ma-
(ii) The employer shall also comply terials are present; removal or encapsulation
of lead-containing materials, new construc-
with any additional requirements in-
tion, alteration, repair, or renovation of
volving the transfer of records set forth structures that contain lead or materials
in 29 CFR 1910.1020(h). containing lead; installation of products con-
(o) Observation of monitoring—(1) Em- taining lead. In addition, there are construc-
ployee observation. The employer shall tion related activities where exposure to
provide affected employees or their lead may occur, including transportation,
designated representatives an oppor- disposal, storage, or containment of lead or
tunity to observe any monitoring of materials containing lead on construction
sites, and maintenance operations associated
employee exposure to lead conducted
with construction activities.
pursuant to paragraph (d) of this sec- D. Permissible exposure: The permissible ex-
tion. posure limit (PEL) set by the standard is 50
(2) Observation procedures. (i) When- micrograms of lead per cubic meter of air (50
ever observation of the monitoring of µg/m3), averaged over an 8-hour workday.
101
E. Action level: The interim final standard rapidly developing acute effects of lead, and
establishes an action level of 30 micrograms chronic effects which take longer to acquire.
of lead per cubic meter of air (30 µg/m3), aver- Lead adversely affects numerous body sys-
aged over an 8-hour workday. The action tems, and causes forms of health impairment
level triggers several ancillary provisions of and disease which arise after periods of expo-
the standard such as exposure monitoring, sure as short as days or as long as several
medical surveillance, and training. years.
(2) Long-term (chronic) overexposure. Chron-
II. Health Hazard Data ic overexposure to lead may result in severe
damage to your blood-forming, nervous, uri-
A. Ways in which lead enters your body.
nary and reproductive systems. Some com-
When absorbed into your body in certain
mon symptoms of chronic overexposure in-
doses, lead is a toxic substance. The object of
clude loss of appetite, metallic taste in the
the lead standard is to prevent absorption of
mouth, anxiety, constipation, nausea, pallor,
harmful quantities of lead. The standard is
excessive tiredness, weakness, insomnia,
intended to protect you not only from the
headache, nervous irritability, muscle and
immediate toxic effects of lead, but also
joint pain or soreness, fine tremors, numb-
from the serious toxic effects that may not
ness, dizziness, hyperactivity and colic. In
become apparent until years of exposure lead colic there may be severe abdominal
have passed. Lead can be absorbed into your pain. Damage to the central nervous system
body by inhalation (breathing) and ingestion in general and the brain (encephalopathy) in
(eating). Lead (except for certain organic particular is one of the most severe forms of
lead compounds not covered by the standard, lead poisoning. The most severe, often fatal,
such as tetraethyl lead) is not absorbed form of encephalopathy may be preceded by
through your skin. When lead is scattered in vomiting, a feeling of dullness progressing to
the air as a dust, fume respiratory tract. In- drowsiness and stupor, poor memory, rest-
halation of airborne lead is generally the lessness, irritability, tremor, and convul-
most important source of occupational lead sions. It may arise suddenly with the onset
absorption. You can also absorb lead through of seizures, followed by coma, and death.
your digestive system if lead gets into your There is a tendency for muscular weakness
mouth and is swallowed. If you handle food, to develop at the same time. This weakness
cigarettes, chewing tobacco, or make-up may progress to paralysis often observed as
which have lead on them or handle them a characteristic ‘‘wrist drop’’ or ‘‘foot drop’’
with hands contaminated with lead, this will and is a manifestation of a disease to the
contribute to ingestion. A significant por- nervous system called peripheral neurop-
tion of the lead that you inhale or ingest athy. Chronic overexposure to lead also re-
gets into your blood stream. Once in your sults in kidney disease with few, if any,
blood stream, lead is circulated throughout symptoms appearing until extensive and
your body and stored in various organs and most likely permanent kidney damage has
body tissues. Some of this lead is quickly fil- occurred. Routine laboratory tests reveal the
tered out of your body and excreted, but presence of this kidney disease only after
some remains in the blood and other tissues. about two-thirds of kidney function is lost.
As exposure to lead continues, the amount When overt symptoms of urinary dysfunc-
stored in your body will increase if you are tion arise, it is often too late to correct or
absorbing more lead than your body is ex- prevent worsening conditions, and progres-
creting. Even though you may not be aware sion to kidney dialysis or death is possible.
of any immediate symptoms of disease, this Chronic overexposure to lead impairs the re-
lead stored in your tissues can be slowly productive systems of both men and women.
causing irreversible damage, first to indi- Overexposure to lead may result in decreased
vidual cells, then to your organs and whole sex drive, impotence and sterility in men.
body systems. Lead can alter the structure of sperm cells
B. Effects of overexposure to lead—(1) Short raising the risk of birth defects. There is evi-
term (acute) overexposure. Lead is a potent, dence of miscarriage and stillbirth in women
systemic poison that serves no known useful whose husbands were exposed to lead or who
function once absorbed by your body. Taken were exposed to lead themselves. Lead expo-
in large enough doses, lead can kill you in a sure also may result in decreased fertility,
matter of days. A condition affecting the and abnormal menstrual cycles in women.
brain called acute encephalopathy may arise The course of pregnancy may be adversely
which develops quickly to seizures, coma, affected by exposure to lead since lead
and death from cardiorespiratory arrest. A crosses the placental barrier and poses risks
short term dose of lead can lead to acute to developing fetuses. Children born of par-
encephalopathy. Short term occupational ex- ents either one of whom were exposed to ex-
posures of this magnitude are highly un- cess lead levels are more likely to have birth
usual, but not impossible. Similar forms of defects, mental retardation, behavioral dis-
encephalopathy may, however, arise from ex- orders or die during the first year of child-
tended, chronic exposure to lower doses of hood. Overexposure to lead also disrupts the
lead. There is no sharp dividing line between blood-forming system resulting in decreased
102
hemoglobin (the substance in the blood that maintain your BLL below 40 µg/dl. The provi-
carries oxygen to the cells) and ultimately sions of the standard are designed with this
anemia. Anemia is characterized by weak- end in mind.
ness, pallor and fatigability as a result of de- Your employer has prime responsibility to
creased oxygen carrying capacity in the assure that the provisions of the standard
blood. are complied with both by the company and
(3) Health protection goals of the standard. by individual workers. You, as a worker,
Prevention of adverse health effects for most however, also have a responsibility to assist
workers from exposure to lead throughout a your employer in complying with the stand-
working lifetime requires that a worker’s ard. You can play a key role in protecting
blood lead level (BLL, also expressed as PbB) your own health by learning about the lead
be maintained at or below forty micrograms hazards and their control, learning what the
per deciliter of whole blood (40 µg/dl). The standard requires, following the standard
blood lead levels of workers (both male and where it governs your own actions, and see-
female workers) who intend to have children ing that your employer complies with provi-
should be maintained below 30 µg/dl to mini- sions governing his or her actions.
mize adverse reproductive health effects to (4) Reporting signs and symptoms of health
the parents and to the developing fetus. The problems. You should immediately notify
measurement of your blood lead level (BLL) your employer if you develop signs or symp-
is the most useful indicator of the amount of toms associated with lead poisoning or if you
lead being absorbed by your body. Blood lead desire medical advice concerning the effects
levels are most often reported in units of of current or past exposure to lead or your
milligrams (mg) or micrograms (µg) of lead ability to have a healthy child. You should
(1 mg=1000 µg) per 100 grams (100g), 100 milli- also notify your employer if you have dif-
liters (100 ml) or deciliter (dl) of blood. These ficulty breathing during a respirator fit test
three units are essentially the same. Some- or while wearing a respirator. In each of
time BLLs are expressed in the form of mg% these cases, your employer must make avail-
or µg%. This is a shorthand notation for 100g, able to you appropriate medical examina-
100 ml, or dl. (References to BLL measure- tions or consultations. These must be pro-
ments in this standard are expressed in the vided at no cost to you and at a reasonable
form of µg/dl.) time and place. The standard contains a pro-
BLL measurements show the amount of cedure whereby you can obtain a second
lead circulating in your blood stream, but do opinion by a physician of your choice if your
not give any information about the amount employer selected the initial physician.
of lead stored in your various tissues. BLL
measurements merely show current absorp- APPENDIX B TO § 1926.62—EMPLOYEE
tion of lead, not the effect that lead is hav- STANDARD SUMMARY
ing on your body or the effects that past lead
exposure may have already caused. Past re- This appendix summarizes key provisions
search into lead-related diseases, however, of the interim final standard for lead in con-
has focused heavily on associations between struction that you as a worker should be-
BLLs and various diseases. As a result, your come familiar with.
BLL is an important indicator of the likeli- I. Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL)—
hood that you will gradually acquire a lead-
Paragraph (C)
related health impairment or disease.
Once your blood lead level climbs above 40 The standard sets a permissible exposure
µg/dl, your risk of disease increases. There is limit (PEL) of 50 micrograms of lead per
a wide variability of individual response to cubic meter of air (50 µg/m3), averaged over
lead, thus it is difficult to say that a par- an 8-hour workday which is referred to as a
ticular BLL in a given person will cause a time-weighted average (TWA). This is the
particular effect. Studies have associated highest level of lead in air to which you may
fatal encephalopathy with BLLs as low as 150 be permissibly exposed over an 8-hour work-
µg/dl. Other studies have shown other forms day. However, since this is an 8-hour aver-
of diseases in some workers with BLLs well age, short exposures above the PEL are per-
below 80 µg/dl. Your BLL is a crucial indi- mitted so long as for each 8-hour work day
cator of the risks to your health, but one your average exposure does not exceed this
other factor is also extremely important. level. This interim final standard, however,
This factor is the length of time you have takes into account the fact that your daily
had elevated BLLs. The longer you have an exposure to lead can extend beyond a typical
elevated BLL, the greater the risk that large 8-hour workday as the result of overtime or
quantities of lead are being gradually stored other alterations in your work schedule. To
in your organs and tissues (body burden). deal with this situation, the standard con-
The greater your overall body burden, the tains a formula which reduces your permis-
greater the chances of substantial perma- sible exposure when you are exposed more
nent damage. The best way to prevent all than 8 hours. For example, if you are exposed
forms of lead-related impairments and dis- to lead for 10 hours a day, the maximum per-
eases—both short term and long term—is to mitted average exposure would be 40 µg/m3.
103
II. Exposure Assessment—Paragraph (D) required to monitor the exposure of every
employee, but he or she must monitor a rep-
If lead is present in your workplace in any
resentative number of employees and job
quantity, your employer is required to make
types. Enough sampling must be done to en-
an initial determination of whether any em-
able each employee’s exposure level to be
ployee’s exposure to lead exceeds the action
reasonably represent full shift exposure. In
level (30 µg/m3 averaged over an 8-hour day).
addition, these air samples must be taken
Employee exposure is that exposure which
under conditions which represent each em-
would occur if the employee were not using
ployee’s regular, daily exposure to lead.
a respirator. This initial determination re-
Sampling performed in the past 12 months
quires your employer to monitor workers’ may be used to determine exposures above
exposures unless he or she has objective data the action level if such sampling was con-
which can demonstrate conclusively that no ducted during work activities essentially
employee will be exposed to lead in excess of similar to present work conditions.
the action level. Where objective data is used The standard lists certain tasks which may
in lieu of actual monitoring the employer likely result in exposures to lead in excess of
must establish and maintain an accurate the PEL and, in some cases, exposures in ex-
record, documenting its relevancy in assess- cess of 50 times the PEL. If you are per-
ing exposure levels for current job condi- forming any of these tasks, your employer
tions. If such objective data is available, the must provide you with appropriate res-
employer need proceed no further on em- piratory protection, protective clothing and
ployee exposure assessment until such time equipment, change areas, hand washing fa-
that conditions have changed and the deter- cilities, biological monitoring, and training
mination is no longer valid. until such time that an exposure assessment
Objective data may be compiled from var- is conducted which demonstrates that your
ious sources, e.g., insurance companies and exposure level is below the PEL.
trade associations and information from sup- If you are exposed to lead and air sampling
pliers or exposure data collected from simi- is performed, your employer is required to
lar operations. Objective data may also com- notify you in writing within 5 working days
prise previously-collected sampling data in- of the air monitoring results which represent
cluding area monitoring. If it cannot be de- your exposure. If the results indicate that
termined through using objective data that your exposure exceeds the PEL (without re-
worker exposure is less than the action level, gard to your use of a respirator), then your
your employer must conduct monitoring or employer must also notify you of this in
must rely on relevant previous personal sam- writing, and provide you with a description
pling, if available. Where monitoring is re- of the corrective action that has been taken
quired for the initial determination, it may or will be taken to reduce your exposure.
be limited to a representative number of em- Your exposure must be rechecked by moni-
ployees who are reasonably expected to have toring, at least every six months if your ex-
the highest exposure levels. If your employer posure is at or over the action level but
has conducted appropriate air sampling for below the PEL. Your employer may dis-
lead in the past 12 months, he or she may use continue monitoring for you if 2 consecutive
these results, provided they are applicable to measurements, taken at least 7 days apart,
the same employee tasks and exposure condi- are at or below the action level. Air moni-
tions and meet the requirements for accu- toring must be repeated every 3 months if
racy as specified in the standard. As with ob- you are exposed over the PEL. Your em-
jective data, if such results are relied upon ployer must continue monitoring for you at
for the initial determination, your employer this frequency until 2 consecutive measure-
must establish and maintain a record as to ments, taken at least 7 days apart, are below
the relevancy of such data to current job the PEL but above the action level, at which
conditions. time your employer must repeat monitoring
If there have been any employee com- of your exposure every six months and may
plaints of symptoms which may be attrib- discontinue monitoring only after your expo-
utable to exposure to lead or if there is any sure drops to or below the action level. How-
other information or observations which ever, whenever there is a change of equip-
would indicate employee exposure to lead, ment, process, control, or personnel or a new
this must also be considered as part of the type of job is added at your workplace which
initial determination. may result in new or additional exposure to
If this initial determination shows that a lead, your employer must perform additional
reasonable possibility exists that any em- monitoring.
ployee may be exposed, without regard to
respirators, over the action level, your em- III. Methods of Compliance—Paragraph (E)
ployer must set up an air monitoring pro- Your employer is required to assure that
gram to determine the exposure level rep- no employee is exposed to lead in excess of
resentative of each employee exposed to lead the PEL as an 8-hour TWA. The interim final
at your workplace. In carrying out this air standard for lead in construction requires
monitoring program, your employer is not employers to institute engineering and work
104
practice controls including administrative Your employer is required to select res-
controls to the extent feasible to reduce em- pirators from the types listed in Table I of
ployee exposure to lead. Where such controls the Respiratory Protection section of the
are feasible but not adequate to reduce expo- standard (§ 1926.62 (f)). Any respirator chosen
sures below the PEL they must be used none- must be approved by the National Institute
theless to reduce exposures to the lowest for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH)
level that can be accomplished by these under the provisions of 42 CFR part 84. This
means and then supplemented with appro- respirator selection table will enable your
priate respiratory protection. employer to choose a type of respirator that
Your employer is required to develop and will give you a proper amount of protection
implement a written compliance program based on your airborne lead exposure. Your
prior to the commencement of any job where employer may select a type of respirator
employee exposures may reach the PEL as that provides greater protection than that
an 8-hour TWA. The interim final standard required by the standard; that is, one rec-
identifies the various elements that must be ommended for a higher concentration of lead
included in the plan. For example, employers than is present in your workplace. For exam-
are required to include a description of oper- ple, a powered air-purifying respirator
ations in which lead is emitted, detailing (PAPR) is much more protective than a typ-
other relevant information about the oper- ical negative pressure respirator, and may
ation such as the type of equipment used, also be more comfortable to wear. A PAPR
the type of material involved, employee job has a filter, cartridge, or canister to clean
responsibilities, operating procedures and the air, and a power source that continu-
maintenance practices. In addition, your em- ously blows filtered air into your breathing
ployer’s compliance plan must specify the zone. Your employer might make a PAPR
means that will be used to achieve compli- available to you to ease the burden of having
ance and, where engineering controls are re- to wear a respirator for long periods of time.
quired, include any engineering plans or The standard provides that you can obtain a
studies that have been used to select the PAPR upon request.
control methods. If administrative controls
Your employer must also start a Res-
involving job rotation are used to reduce em-
piratory Protection Program. This program
ployee exposure to lead, the job rotation
must include written procedures for the
schedule must be included in the compliance
proper selection, use, cleaning, storage, and
plan. The plan must also detail the type of
maintenance of respirators.
protective clothing and equipment, including
respirators, housekeeping and hygiene prac- Your employer must ensure that your res-
tices that will be used to protect you from pirator facepiece fits properly. Proper fit of
the adverse effects of exposure to lead. a respirator facepiece is critical to your pro-
The written compliance program must be tection from airborne lead. Obtaining a prop-
made available, upon request, to affected er fit on each employee may require your
employees and their designated representa- employer to make available several different
tives, the Assistant Secretary and the Direc- types of respirator masks. To ensure that
tor. your respirator fits properly and that face-
Finally, the plan must be reviewed and up- piece leakage is minimal, your employer
dated at least every 6 months to assure it re- must give you either a qualitative or quan-
flects the current status in exposure control. titative fit test as specified in appendix A of
the Respiratory Protection standard located
IV. Respiratory Protection—Paragraph (F) at 29 CFR 1910.134.
Your employer is required to provide and You must also receive from your employer
assure your use of respirators when your ex- proper training in the use of respirators.
posure to lead is not controlled below the Your employer is required to teach you how
PEL by other means. The employer must pay to wear a respirator, to know why it is need-
the cost of the respirator. Whenever you re- ed, and to understand its limitations.
quest one, your employer is also required to The standard provides that if your res-
provide you a respirator even if your air ex- pirator uses filter elements, you must be
posure level is not above the PEL. You given an opportunity to change the filter ele-
might desire a respirator when, for example, ments whenever an increase in breathing re-
you have received medical advice that your sistance is detected. You also must be per-
lead absorption should be decreased. Or, you mitted to periodically leave your work area
may intend to have children in the near fu- to wash your face and respirator facepiece
ture, and want to reduce the level of lead in whenever necessary to prevent skin irrita-
your body to minimize adverse reproductive tion. If you ever have difficulty in breathing
effects. While respirators are the least satis- during a fit test or while using a respirator,
factory means of controlling your exposure, your employer must make a medical exam-
they are capable of providing significant pro- ination available to you to determine wheth-
tection if properly chosen, fitted, worn, er you can safely wear a respirator. The re-
cleaned, maintained, and replaced when they sult of this examination may be to give you
stop providing adequate protection. a positive pressure respirator (which reduces
105
breathing resistance) or to provide alter- 1. Where applicable, place disposal cover-
native means of protection. alls and shoe covers with the abatement
waste;
V. Protective Work Clothing and Equipment— 2. Contaminated clothing which is to be
Paragraph (G) cleaned, laundered or disposed of must be
placed in closed containers in the change
If you are exposed to lead above the PEL
room.
as an 8-hour TWA, without regard to your
3. Clean protective gear, including res-
use of a respirator, or if you are exposed to
pirators, according to standard procedures;
lead compounds such as lead arsenate or lead
4. Wash hands and face again. If showers
azide which can cause skin and eye irrita-
are available, take a shower and wash hair.
tion, your employer must provide you with
If shower facilities are not available at the
protective work clothing and equipment ap-
work site, shower immediately at home and
propriate for the hazard. If work clothing is
wash hair.
provided, it must be provided in a clean and
dry condition at least weekly, and daily if VI. Housekeeping—Paragraph (H)
your airborne exposure to lead is greater
than 200 µg/m3. Appropriate protective work Your employer must establish a house-
clothing and equipment can include cover- keeping program sufficient to maintain all
alls or similar full-body work clothing, surfaces as free as practicable of accumula-
gloves, hats, shoes or disposable shoe cover- tions of lead dust. Vacuuming is the pre-
lets, and face shields or vented goggles. Your ferred method of meeting this requirement,
employer is required to provide all such and the use of compressed air to clean floors
equipment at no cost to you. In addition, and other surfaces is generally prohibited
your employer is responsible for providing unless removal with compressed air is done
repairs and replacement as necessary, and in conjunction with ventilation systems de-
also is responsible for the cleaning, laun- signed to contain dispersal of the lead dust.
dering or disposal of protective clothing and Dry or wet sweeping, shoveling, or brushing
equipment. may not be used except where vacuuming or
The interim final standard requires that other equally effective methods have been
your employer assure that you follow good tried and do not work. Vacuums must be
work practices when you are working in used equipped with a special filter called a
areas where your exposure to lead may ex- high-efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filter
ceed the PEL. With respect to protective and emptied in a manner which minimizes
clothing and equipment, where appropriate, the reentry of lead into the workplace.
the following procedures should be observed VII. Hygiene Facilities and Practices—
prior to beginning work: Paragraph (I)
1. Change into work clothing and shoe cov-
ers in the clean section of the designated The standard requires that hand washing
changing areas; facilities be provided where occupational ex-
2. Use work garments of appropriate pro- posure to lead occurs. In addition, change
tective gear, including respirators before en- areas, showers (where feasible), and
tering the work area; and lunchrooms or eating areas are to be made
3. Store any clothing not worn under pro- available to workers exposed to lead above
tective clothing in the designated changing the PEL. Your employer must assure that
area. except in these facilities, food and beverage
is not present or consumed, tobacco products
Workers should follow these procedures
are not present or used, and cosmetics are
upon leaving the work area:
not applied, where airborne exposures are
1. HEPA vacuum heavily contaminated
above the PEL. Change rooms provided by
protective work clothing while it is still
your employer must be equipped with sepa-
being worn. At no time may lead be removed
rate storage facilities for your protective
from protective clothing by any means
clothing and equipment and street clothes to
which result in uncontrolled dispersal of lead
avoid cross-contamination. After showering,
into the air;
no required protective clothing or equipment
2. Remove shoe covers and leave them in worn during the shift may be worn home. It
the work area; is important that contaminated clothing or
3. Remove protective clothing and gear in equipment be removed in change areas and
the dirty area of the designated changing not be worn home or you will extend your
area. Remove protective coveralls by care- exposure and expose your family since lead
fully rolling down the garment to reduce ex- from your clothing can accumulate in your
posure to dust. house, car, etc.
4. Remove respirators last; and Lunchrooms or eating areas may not be
5. Wash hands and face. entered with protective clothing or equip-
Workers should follow these procedures ment unless surface dust has been removed
upon finishing work for the day (in addition by vacuuming, downdraft booth, or other
to procedures described above): cleaning method. Finally, workers exposed
106
above the PEL must wash both their hands µg/dl. A zinc protoporphyrin (ZPP) test is a
and faces prior to eating, drinking, smoking very useful blood test which measures an ad-
or applying cosmetics. verse metabolic effect of lead on your body
All of the facilities and hygiene practices and is therefore an indicator of lead toxicity.
just discussed are essential to minimize ad- If your BLL exceeds 40 µg/dl the moni-
ditional sources of lead absorption from in- toring frequency must be increased from
halation or ingestion of lead that may accu- every 6 months to at least every 2 months
mulate on you, your clothes, or your posses- and not reduced until two consecutive BLLs
sions. Strict compliance with these provi- indicate a blood lead level below 40 µg/dl.
sions can virtually eliminate several sources Each time your BLL is determined to be over
of lead exposure which significantly con- 40 µg/dl, your employer must notify you of
tribute to excessive lead absorption. this in writing within five working days of
his or her receipt of the test results. The em-
VIII. Medical Surveillance—Paragraph (J)
ployer must also inform you that the stand-
The medical surveillance program is part ard requires temporary medical removal
of the standard’s comprehensive approach to with economic protection when your BLL ex-
the prevention of lead-related disease. Its ceeds 50 µg/dl. (See Discussion of Medical Re-
purpose is to supplement the main thrust of moval Protection-Paragraph (k).) Anytime
the standard which is aimed at minimizing your BLL exceeds 50 µg/dl your employer
airborne concentrations of lead and sources must make available to you within two
of ingestion. Only medical surveillance can weeks of receipt of these test results a sec-
determine if the other provisions of the ond follow-up BLL test to confirm your BLL.
standard have affectively protected you as If the two tests both exceed 50 µg/dl, and you
an individual. Compliance with the stand- are temporarily removed, then your em-
ard’s provision will protect most workers ployer must make successive BLL tests
from the adverse effects of lead exposure, but available to you on a monthly basis during
may not be satisfactory to protect individual the period of your removal.
workers (1) who have high body burdens of Medical examinations beyond the initial
lead acquired over past years, (2) who have one must be made available on an annual
additional uncontrolled sources of non-occu- basis if your blood lead level exceeds 40 µg/dl
pational lead exposure, (3) who exhibit unat any time during the preceding year and
usual variations in lead absorption rates, or you are being exposed above the airborne ac-
(4) who have specific non-work related med- tion level of 30 µg/m3 for 30 or more days per
ical conditions which could be aggravated by year. The initial examination will provide
lead exposure (e.g., renal disease, anemia). In information to establish a baseline to which
addition, control systems may fail, or hy- subsequent data can be compared.
giene and respirator programs may be inad-
An initial medical examination to consist
equate. Periodic medical surveillance of indi-
of blood sampling and analysis for lead and
vidual workers will help detect those fail-
zinc protoporphyrin must also be made avail-
ures. Medical surveillance will also be impor-
able (prior to assignment) for each employee
tant to protect your reproductive ability-re-
being assigned for the first time to an area
gardless of whether you are a man or woman.
where the airborne concentration of lead
All medical surveillance required by the
equals or exceeds the action level at any
interim final standard must be performed by
time. In addition, a medical examination or
or under the supervision of a licensed physi-
cian. The employer must provide required consultation must be made available as soon
medical surveillance without cost to employ- as possible if you notify your employer that
ees and at a reasonable time and place. The you are experiencing signs or symptoms
standard’s medical surveillance program has commonly associated with lead poisoning or
two parts—periodic biological monitoring that you have difficulty breathing while
and medical examinations. Your employer’s wearing a respirator or during a respirator
obligation to offer you medical surveillance fit test. You must also be provided a medical
is triggered by the results of the air moni- examination or consultation if you notify
toring program. Full medical surveillance your employer that you desire medical ad-
must be made available to all employees who vice concerning the effects of current or past
are or may be exposed to lead in excess of exposure to lead on your ability to procreate
the action level for more than 30 days a year a healthy child.
and whose blood lead level exceeds 40 µg/dl. Finally, appropriate follow-up medical ex-
Initial medical surveillance consisting of aminations or consultations may also be pro-
blood sampling and analysis for lead and zinc vided for employees who have been tempo-
protoporphyrin must be provided to all em- rarily removed from exposure under the
ployees exposed at any time (1 day) above medical removal protection provisions of the
the action level. standard. (See Part IX, below.)
Biological monitoring under the standard The standard specifies the minimum con-
must be provided at least every 2 months for tent of pre-assignment and annual medical
the first 6 months and every 6 months there- examinations. The content of other types of
after until your blood lead level is below 40 medical examinations and consultations is
107
left up to the sound discretion of the exam- whether you can wear a powered air puri-
ining physician. Pre-assignment and annual fying respirator (PAPR) if you are found un-
medical examinations must include (1) a de- able to wear a negative pressure respirator.
tailed work history and medical history; (2) The medical surveillance program of the
a thorough physical examination, including interim lead standard may at some point in
an evaluation of your pulmonary status if time serve to notify certain workers that
you will be required to use a respirator; (3) a they have acquired a disease or other adverse
blood pressure measurement; and (4) a series medical condition as a result of occupational
of laboratory tests designed to check your lead exposure. If this is true, these workers
blood chemistry and your kidney function. might have legal rights to compensation
In addition, at any time upon your request, from public agencies, their employers, firms
a laboratory evaluation of male fertility will that supply hazardous products to their em-
be made (microscopic examination of a ployers, or other persons. Some states have
sperm sample), or a pregnancy test will be laws, including worker compensation laws,
given. that disallow a worker who learns of a job-
The standard does not require that you related health impairment to sue, unless the
participate in any of the medical procedures, worker sues within a short period of time
tests, etc. which your employer is required after learning of the impairment. (This pe-
to make available to you. Medical surveil- riod of time may be a matter of months or
lance can, however, play a very important years.) An attorney can be consulted about
role in protecting your health. You are these possibilities. It should be stressed that
strongly encouraged, therefore, to partici- OSHA is in no way trying to either encour-
pate in a meaningful fashion. The standard age or discourage claims or lawsuits. How-
contains a multiple physician review mecha- ever, since results of the standard’s medical
nism which will give you a chance to have a surveillance program can significantly affect
physician of your choice directly participate the legal remedies of a worker who has ac-
in the medical surveillance program. If you quired a job-related disease or impairment,
are dissatisfied with an examination by a it is proper for OSHA to make you aware of
physician chosen by your employer, you can this.
select a second physician to conduct an inde- The medical surveillance section of the
pendent analysis. The two doctors would at- standard also contains provisions dealing
tempt to resolve any differences of opinion, with chelation. Chelation is the use of cer-
and select a third physician to resolve any tain drugs (administered in pill form or in-
firm dispute. Generally your employer will jected into the body) to reduce the amount
choose the physician who conducts medical of lead absorbed in body tissues. Experience
surveillance under the lead standard-unless accumulated by the medical and scientific
you and your employer can agree on the communities has largely confirmed the effec-
choice of a physician or physicians. Some tiveness of this type of therapy for the treat-
companies and unions have agreed in ad- ment of very severe lead poisoning. On the
vance, for example, to use certain inde- other hand, it has also been established that
pendent medical laboratories or panels of there can be a long list of extremely harmful
physicians. Any of these arrangements are side effects associated with the use of
acceptable so long as required medical sur- chelating agents. The medical community
veillance is made available to workers. has balanced the advantages and disadvan-
The standard requires your employer to tages resulting from the use of chelating
provide certain information to a physician to agents in various circumstances and has es-
aid in his or her examination of you. This in- tablished when the use of these agents is ac-
formation includes (1) the standard and its ceptable. The standard includes these ac-
appendices, (2) a description of your duties as cepted limitations due to a history of abuse
they relate to occupational lead exposure, (3) of chelation therapy by some lead compa-
your exposure level or anticipated exposure nies. The most widely used chelating agents
level, (4) a description of any personal pro- are calcium disodium EDTA, (Ca Na2 EDTA),
tective equipment you wear, (5) prior blood Calcium Disodium Versenate (Versenate),
lead level results, and (6) prior written med- and d-penicillamine (pencillamine or
ical opinions concerning you that the em- Cupramine).
ployer has. After a medical examination or The standard prohibits ‘‘prophylactic che-
consultation the physician must prepare a lation’’ of any employee by any person the
written report which must contain (1) the employer retains, supervises or controls. Pro-
physician’s opinion as to whether you have phylactic chelation is the routine use of
any medical condition which places you at chelating or similarly acting drugs to pre-
increased risk of material impairment to vent elevated blood levels in workers who
health from exposure to lead, (2) any rec- are occupationally exposed to lead, or the
ommended special protective measures to be use of these drugs to routinely lower blood
provided to you, (3) any blood lead level de- lead levels to predesignated concentrations
terminations, and (4) any recommended limi- believed to be ‘‘safe’’. It should be empha-
tation on your use of respirators. This last sized that where an employer takes a worker
element must include a determination of who has no symptoms of lead poisoning and
108
has chelation carried out by a physician (ei- The standard does not give specific in-
ther inside or outside of a hospital) solely to structions dealing with what an employer
reduce the worker’s blood lead level, that must do with a removed worker. Your job as-
will generally be considered prophylactic signment upon removal is a matter for you,
chelation. The use of a hospital and a physi- your employer and your union (if any) to
cian does not mean that prophylactic chela- work out consistent with existing procedures
tion is not being performed. Routine chela- for job assignments. Each removal must be
tion to prevent increased or reduce current accomplished in a manner consistent with
blood lead levels is unacceptable whatever existing collective bargaining relationships.
the setting. Your employer is given broad discretion to
The standard allows the use of ‘‘thera- implement temporary removals so long as no
peutic’’ or ‘‘diagnostic’’ chelation if adminis- attempt is made to override existing agree-
tered under the supervision of a licensed ments. Similarly, a removed worker is pro-
physician in a clinical setting with thorough vided no right to veto an employer’s choice
and appropriate medical monitoring. Thera- which satisfies the standard.
peutic chelation responds to severe lead poi- In most cases, employers will likely trans-
soning where there are marked symptoms. fer removed employees to other jobs with
Diagnostic chelation involved giving a pa- sufficiently low lead exposure. Alternatively,
tient a dose of the drug then collecting all a worker’s hours may be reduced so that the
urine excreted for some period of time as an time weighted average exposure is reduced,
aid to the diagnosis of lead poisoning. or he or she may be temporarily laid off if no
In cases where the examining physician de- other alternative is feasible.
termines that chelation is appropriate, you In all of these situation, MRP benefits
must be notified in writing of this fact before must be provided during the period of re-
such treatment. This will inform you of a po- moval—i.e., you continue to receive the
tentially harmful treatment, and allow you same earnings, seniority, and other rights
to obtain a second opinion. and benefits you would have had if you had
not been removed. Earnings includes more
IX. Medical Removal Protection—Paragraph than just your base wage; it includes over-
(K) time, shift differentials, incentives, and
Excessive lead absorption subjects you to other compensation you would have earned if
increased risk of disease. Medical removal you had not been removed. During the period
protection (MRP) is a means of protecting of removal you must also be provided with
you when, for whatever reasons, other meth- appropriate follow-up medical surveillance.
ods, such as engineering controls, work prac- If you were removed because your blood lead
tices, and respirators, have failed to provide level was too high, you must be provided
the protection you need. MRP involves the with a monthly blood test. If a medical opin-
temporary removal of a worker from his or ion caused your removal, you must be pro-
her regular job to a place of significantly vided medical tests or examinations that the
lower exposure without any loss of earnings, doctor believes to be appropriate. If you do
seniority, or other employment rights or not participate in this follow up medical sur-
benefits. The purpose of this program is to veillance, you may lose your eligibility for
cease further lead absorption and allow your MRP benefits.
body to naturally excrete lead which has pre- When you are medically eligible to return
viously been absorbed. Temporary medical to your former job, your employer must re-
removal can result from an elevated blood turn you to your ‘‘former job status.’’ This
lead level, or a medical opinion. For up to 18 means that you are entitled to the position,
months, or for as long as the job the em- wages, benefits, etc., you would have had if
ployee was removed from lasts, protection is you had not been removed. If you would still
provided as a result of either form of re- be in your old job if no removal had occurred
moval. The vast majority of removed work- that is where you go back. If not, you are re-
ers, however, will return to their former jobs turned consistent with whatever job assign-
long before this eighteen month period ex- ment discretion your employer would have
pires. had if no removal had occurred. MRP only
You may also be removed from exposure seeks to maintain your rights, not expand
even if your blood lead level is below 50 µg/ them or diminish them.
dl if a final medical determination indicates If you are removed under MRP and you are
that you temporarily need reduced lead ex- also eligible for worker compensation or
posure for medical reasons. If the physician other compensation for lost wages, your em-
who is implementing your employers med- ployer’s MRP benefits obligation is reduced
ical program makes a final written opinion by the amount that you actually receive
recommending your removal or other special from these other sources. This is also true if
protective measures, your employer must you obtain other employment during the
implement the physician’s recommendation. time you are laid off with MRP benefits.
If you are removed in this manner, you may The standard also covers situations where
only be returned when the doctor indicates an employer voluntarily removes a worker
that it is safe for you to do so. from exposure to lead due to the effects of
109
lead on the employee’s medical condition, the type of respiratory protection being
even though the standard does not require worn by the person sampled. Such records
removal. In these situations MRP benefits are to be retained for at least 30 years. Your
must still be provided as though the stand- employer is also required to keep all records
ard required removal. Finally, it is impor- of biological monitoring and medical exam-
tant to note that in all cases where removal ination results. These records must include
is required, respirators cannot be used as a the names of the employees, the physician’s
substitute. Respirators may be used before written opinion, and a copy of the results of
removal becomes necessary, but not as an al- the examination. Medical records must be
ternative to a transfer to a low exposure job,
preserved and maintained for the duration of
or to a lay-off with MRP benefits.
employment plus 30 years. However, if the
X. Employee Information and Training— employee’s duration of employment is less
Paragraph (L) than one year, the employer need not retain
that employee’s medical records beyond the
Your employer is required to provide an in-
period of employment if they are provided to
formation and training program for all em-
the employee upon termination of employ-
ployees exposed to lead above the action
level or who may suffer skin or eye irritation ment.
from lead compounds such as lead arsenate Recordkeeping is also required if you are
or lead azide. The program must train these temporarily removed from your job under
employees regarding the specific hazards as- the medical removal protection program.
sociated with their work environment, pro- This record must include your name and so-
tective measures which can be taken, includ- cial security number, the date of your re-
ing the contents of any compliance plan in moval and return, how the removal was or is
effect, the danger of lead to their bodies (in- being accomplished, and whether or not the
cluding their reproductive systems), and reason for the removal was an elevated blood
their rights under the standard. All employ- lead level. Your employer is required to keep
ees must be trained prior to initial assign- each medical removal record only for as long
ment to areas where there is a possibility of as the duration of an employee’s employ-
exposure over the action level. ment.
This training program must also be pro- The standard requires that if you request
vided at least annually thereafter unless fur- to see or copy environmental monitoring,
ther exposure above the action level will not blood lead level monitoring, or medical re-
occur.
moval records, they must be made available
XI. Signs—Paragraph (M) to you or to a representative that you au-
thorize. Your union also has access to these
The standard requires that the following records. Medical records other than BLL’s
warning sign be posted in work areas when
must also be provided upon request to you,
the exposure to lead is above the PEL:
to your physician or to any other person
DANGER whom you may specifically designate. Your
LEAD WORK AREA union does not have access to your personal
MAY DAMAGE FERTILITY OR THE UN- medical records unless you authorize their
BORN CHILD access.
CAUSES DAMAGE TO THE CENTRAL
NERVOUS SYSTEM XIII. Observation of Monitoring—Paragraph
DO NOT EAT, DRINK OR SMOKE IN THIS (O)
AREA
When air monitoring for lead is performed
Prior to June 1, 2016, employers may use at your workplace as required by this stand-
the following legend in lieu of that specified ard, your employer must allow you or some-
above: one you designate to act as an observer of
WARNING the monitoring. Observers are entitled to an
LEAD WORK AREA explanation of the measurement procedure,
POISON and to record the results obtained. Since re-
NO SMOKING OR EATING sults will not normally be available at the
time of the monitoring, observers are enti-
* * * * * tled to record or receive the results of the
monitoring when returned by the laboratory.
XII. Recordkeeping—Paragraph (N) Your employer is required to provide the ob-
Your employer is required to keep all server with any personal protective devices
records of exposure monitoring for airborne required to be worn by employees working in
lead. These records must include the name the area that is being monitored. The em-
and job classification of employees meas- ployer must require the observer to wear all
ured, details of the sampling and analytical such equipment and to comply with all other
techniques, the results of this sampling, and applicable safety and health procedures.
110
XIV. For Additional Information chelation therapy are also included in this
section.
A. A copy of the interim standard for lead
Section 2 discusses the toxic effects and
in construction can be obtained free of
clinical manifestations of lead poisoning and
charge by calling or writing the OSHA Office
effects of lead intoxication on enzymatic
of Publications, room N–3101, United States
pathways in heme synthesis. The adverse ef-
Department of Labor, Washington, DC 20210:
fects on both male and female reproductive
Telephone (202) 219–4667. capacity and on the fetus are also discussed.
B. Additional information about the stand- Section 3 outlines the recommended med-
ard, its enforcement, and your employer’s ical evaluation of the worker exposed to in-
compliance can be obtained from the nearest organic lead, including details of the medical
OSHA Area Office listed in your telephone history, physical examination, and rec-
directory under United States Government/ ommended laboratory tests, which are based
Department of Labor. on the toxic effects of lead as discussed in
APPENDIX C TO § 1926.62—MEDICAL Section 2.
SURVEILLANCE GUIDELINES Section 4 provides detailed information
concerning the laboratory tests available for
Introduction the monitoring of exposed workers. Included
also is a discussion of the relative value of
The primary purpose of the Occupational each test and the limitations and pre-
Safety and Health Act of 1970 is to assure, so cautions which are necessary in the interpre-
far as possible, safe and healthful working tation of the laboratory results.
conditions for every working man and
woman. The interim final occupational I. Medical Surveillance and Monitoring Re-
health standard for lead in construction is quirements for Workers Exposed to Inorganic
designed to protect workers exposed to inor- Lead
ganic lead including metallic lead, all inor-
Under the interim final standard for inor-
ganic lead compounds and organic lead
ganic lead in the construction industry, ini-
soaps. tial medical surveillance consisting of bio-
Under this interim final standard occupa- logical monitoring to include blood lead and
tional exposure to inorganic lead is to be ZPP level determination shall be provided to
limited to 50 µg/m3 (micrograms per cubic employees exposed to lead at or above the
meter) based on an 8 hour time-weighted av- action level on any one day. In addition, a
erage (TWA). This permissible exposure limit program of biological monitoring is to be
(PEL) must be achieved through a combina- made available to all employees exposed
tion of engineering, work practice and ad- above the action level at any time and addi-
ministrative controls to the extent feasible. tional medical surveillance is to be made
Where these controls are in place but are available to all employees exposed to lead
found not to reduce employee exposures to or above 30 µg/m3 TWA for more than 30 days
below the PEL, they must be used nonethe- each year and whose BLL exceeds 40 µg/dl.
less, and supplemented with respirators to This program consists of periodic blood sam-
meet the 50 µg/m3 exposure limit. pling and medical evaluation to be per-
The standard also provides for a program formed on a schedule which is defined by pre-
of biological monitoring for employees ex- vious laboratory results, worker complaints
posed to lead above the action level at any or concerns, and the clinical assessment of
time, and additional medical surveillance for the examining physician.
all employees exposed to levels of inorganic Under this program, the blood lead level
lead above 30 µg/m3 (TWA) for more than 30 (BLL) of all employees who are exposed to
days per year and whose BLL exceeds 40 µg/ lead above 30 µg/m3 for more than 30 days per
dl. year or whose blood lead is above 40 µg/dl but
The purpose of this document is to outline exposed for no more than 30 days per year is
the medical surveillance provisions of the in- to be determined at least every two months
terim standard for inorganic lead in con- for the first six months of exposure and
struction, and to provide further information every six months thereafter. The frequency
to the physician regarding the examination is increased to every two months for employ-
and evaluation of workers exposed to inor- ees whose last blood lead level was 40 µg/dl or
ganic lead. above. For employees who are removed from
Section 1 provides a detailed description of exposure to lead due to an elevated blood
the monitoring procedure including the re- lead, a new blood lead level must be meas-
quired frequency of blood testing for exposed ured monthly. A zinc protoporphyrin (ZPP)
workers, provisions for medical removal pro- measurement is strongly recommended on
tection (MRP), the recommended right of the each occasion that a blood lead level meas-
employee to a second medical opinion, and urement is made.
notification and recordkeeping requirements An annual medical examination and con-
of the employer. A discussion of the require- sultation performed under the guidelines dis-
ments for respirator use and respirator mon- cussed in Section 3 is to be made available to
itoring and OSHA’s position on prophylactic each employee exposed above 30 µg/m3 for
111
more than 30 days per year for whom a blood from exposure to lead at or above 30 µg/m3.
test conducted at any time during the pre- Alternatively, if the examining physician
ceding 12 months indicated a blood lead level recommends special protective measures for
at or above 40 µg/dl. Also, an examination is an employee (e.g., use of a powered air puri-
to be given to all employees prior to their as- fying respirator) or recommends limitations
signment to an area in which airborne lead on an employee’s exposure to lead, then the
concentrations reach or exceed the 30 µg/m3 employer must implement these rec-
for more than 30 days per year. In addition, ommendations.
a medical examination must be provided as
Recommendations may be more stringent
soon as possible after notification by an em-
than the specific provisions of the standard.
ployee that the employee has developed
signs or symptoms commonly associated The examining physician, therefore, is given
with lead intoxication, that the employee broad flexibility to tailor special protective
desires medical advice regarding lead expo- procedures to the needs of individual em-
sure and the ability to procreate a healthy ployees. This flexibility extends to the eval-
child, or that the employee has dem- uation and management of pregnant workers
onstrated difficulty in breathing during a and male and female workers who are plan-
respirator fitting test or during respirator ning to raise children. Based on the history,
use. An examination is also to be made avail- physical examination, and laboratory stud-
able to each employee removed from expo- ies, the physician might recommend special
sure to lead due to a risk of sustaining mate- protective measures or medical removal for
rial impairment to health, or otherwise lim- an employee who is pregnant or who is plan-
ited or specially protected pursuant to med- ning to conceive a child when, in the physi-
ical recommendations. cian’s judgment, continued exposure to lead
Results of biological monitoring or the rec- at the current job would pose a significant
ommendations of an examining physician risk. The return of the employee to his or
may necessitate removal of an employee her former job status, or the removal of spe-
from further lead exposure pursuant to the cial protections or limitations, depends upon
standard’s medical removal protection the examining physician determining that
(MRP) program. The object of the MRP pro-
the employee is no longer at increased risk
gram is to provide temporary medical re-
of material impairment or that special meas-
moval to workers either with substantially
elevated blood lead levels or otherwise at ures are no longer needed.
risk of sustaining material health impair- During the period of any form of special
ment from continued substantial exposure to protection or removal, the employer must
lead. maintain the worker’s earnings, seniority,
Under the standard’s ultimate worker re- and other employment rights and benefits
moval criteria, a worker is to be removed (as though the worker had not been removed)
from any work having an eight hour TWA for a period of up to 18 months or for as long
exposure to lead of 30 µg/m3 when his or her as the job the employee was removed from
blood lead level reaches 50 µg/dl and is con- lasts if less than 18 months. This economic
firmed by a second follow-up blood lead level protection will maximize meaningful worker
performed within two weeks after the em- participation in the medical surveillance
ployer receives the results of the first blood program, and is appropriate as part of the
sampling test. Return of the employee to his employer’s overall obligation to provide a
or her job status depends on a worker’s blood safe and healthful workplace. The provisions
lead level declining to 40 µg/dl. of MRP benefits during the employee’s re-
As part of the interim standard, the em- moval period may, however, be conditioned
ployer is required to notify in writing each
upon participation in medical surveillance.
employee whose blood lead level exceeds 40
The lead standard provides for a multiple
µg/dl. In addition each such employee is to be
informed that the standard requires medical physician review in cases where the em-
removal with MRP benefits, discussed below, ployee wishes a second opinion concerning
when an employee’s blood lead level exceeds potential lead poisoning or toxicity. If an
the above defined limit. employee wishes a second opinion, he or she
In addition to the above blood lead level can make an appointment with a physician
criterion, temporary worker removal may of his or her choice. This second physician
also take place as a result of medical deter- will review the findings, recommendations or
minations and recommendations. Written determinations of the first physician and
medical opinions must be prepared after conduct any examinations, consultations or
each examination pursuant to the standard. tests deemed necessary in an attempt to
If the examining physician includes a med- make a final medical determination. If the
ical finding, determination or opinion that first and second physicians do not agree in
the employee has a medical condition which their assessment they must try to resolve
places the employee at increased risk of ma- their differences. If they cannot reach an
terial health impairment from exposure to agreement then they must designate a third
lead, then the employee must be removed physician to resolve the dispute.
112
The employer must provide examining and tiate chelation therapy must be made on an
consulting physicians with the following spe- individual basis and take into account the
cific information: A copy of the lead regula- severity of symptoms felt to be a result of
tions and all appendices, a description of the lead toxicity along with blood lead levels,
employee’s duties as related to exposure, the ZPP levels, and other laboratory tests as ap-
exposure level or anticipated level to lead propriate. EDTA and penicillamine which
and any other toxic substances (if applica- are the primary chelating agents used in the
ble), a description of personal protective therapy of occupational lead poisoning have
equipment used, blood lead levels, and all significant potential side effects and their
prior written medical opinions regarding the
use must be justified on the basis of expected
employee in the employer’s possession or
benefits to the worker. Unless frank and se-
control. The employer must also obtain from
the physician and provide the employee with vere symptoms are present, therapeutic che-
a written medical opinion containing blood lation is not recommended, given the oppor-
lead levels, the physicians’s opinion as to tunity to remove a worker from exposure
whether the employee is at risk of material and allow the body to naturally excrete ac-
impairment to health, any recommended cumulated lead. As a diagnostic aid, the che-
protective measures for the employee if fur- lation mobilization test using CA-EDTA has
ther exposure is permitted, as well as any limited applicability. According to some in-
recommended limitations upon an employ- vestigators, the test can differentiate be-
ee’s use of respirators. tween lead-induced and other nephropathies.
Employers must instruct each physician The test may also provide an estimation of
not to reveal to the employer in writing or the mobile fraction of the total body lead
in any other way his or her findings, labora- burden.
tory results, or diagnoses which are felt to Employers are required to assure that ac-
be unrelated to occupational lead exposure. curate records are maintained on exposure
They must also instruct each physician to assessment, including environmental moni-
advise the employee of any occupationally or toring, medical surveillance, and medical re-
non-occupationally related medical condi-
moval for each employee. Exposure assess-
tion requiring further treatment or evalua-
ment records must be kept for at least 30
tion.
The standard provides for the use of res- years. Medical surveillance records must be
pirators where engineering and other pri- kept for the duration of employment plus 30
mary controls are not effective. However, years except in cases where the employment
the use of respirator protection shall not be was less than one year. If duration of em-
used in lieu of temporary medical removal ployment is less than one year, the employer
due to elevated blood lead levels or findings need not retain this record beyond the term
that an employee is at risk of material of employment if the record is provided to
health impairment. This is based on the nu- the employee upon termination of employ-
merous inadequacies of respirators including ment. Medical removal records also must be
skin rash where the facepiece makes contact maintained for the duration of employment.
with the skin, unacceptable stress to breath- All records required under the standard must
ing in some workers with underlying be made available upon request to the As-
cardiopulmonary impairment, difficulty in sistant Secretary of Labor for Occupational
providing adequate fit, the tendency for res- Safety and Health and the Director of the
pirators to create additional hazards by National Institute for Occupational Safety
interfering with vision, hearing, and mobil- and Health. Employers must also make envi-
ity, and the difficulties of assuring the max- ronmental and biological monitoring and
imum effectiveness of a complicated work medical removal records available to af-
practice program involving respirators. Res- fected employees and to former employees or
pirators do, however, serve a useful function
their authorized employee representatives.
where engineering and work practice con-
Employees or their specifically designated
trols are inadequate by providing supple-
representatives have access to their entire
mentary, interim, or short-term protection,
provided they are properly selected for the medical surveillance records.
environment in which the employee will be In addition, the standard requires that the
working, properly fitted to the employee, employer inform all workers exposed to lead
maintained and cleaned periodically, and at or above 30 µg/m3 of the provisions of the
worn by the employee when required. standard and all its appendices, the purpose
In its interim final standard on occupa- and description of medical surveillance and
tional exposure to inorganic lead in the con- provisions for medical removal protection if
struction industry, OSHA has prohibited pro- temporary removal is required. An under-
phylactic chelation. Diagnostic and thera- standing of the potential health effects of
peutic chelation are permitted only under lead exposure by all exposed employees along
the supervision of a licensed physician with with full understanding of their rights under
appropriate medical monitoring in an ac- the lead standard is essential for an effective
ceptable clinical setting. The decision to ini- monitoring program.
113
II. Adverse Health Effects of Inorganic Lead the development of the ZPP screening test
for lead exposure.
Although the toxicity of lead has been
known for 2,000 years, the knowledge of the While the significance of these effects is
complex relationship between lead exposure subject to debate, it is OSHA’s position that
and human response is still being refined. these enzyme disturbances are early stages
Significant research into the toxic prop- of a disease process which may eventually
erties of lead continues throughout the result in the clinical symptoms of lead poi-
world, and it should be anticipated that our soning. Whether or not the effects do
understanding of thresholds of effects and progress to the later stages of clinical dis-
margins of safety will be improved in future ease, disruption of these enzyme processes
years. The provisions of the lead standard over a working lifetime is considered to be a
are founded on two prime medical judg- material impairment of health.
ments: First, the prevention of adverse One of the eventual results of lead-induced
health effects from exposure to lead through- inhibition of enzymes in the heme synthesis
out a working lifetime requires that worker pathway is anemia which can be asymp-
blood lead levels be maintained at or below tomatic if mild but associated with a wide
40 µg/dl and second, the blood lead levels of array of symptoms including dizziness, fa-
workers, male or female, who intend to par- tigue, and tachycardia when more severe.
ent in the near future should be maintained Studies have indicated that lead levels as
below 30 µg/dl to minimize adverse reproduc- low as 50 µg/dl can be associated with a defi-
tive health effects to the parents and devel- nite decreased hemoglobin, although most
oping fetus. The adverse effects of lead on re- cases of lead-induced anemia, as well as
production are being actively researched and shortened red-cell survival times, occur at
OSHA encourages the physician to remain lead levels exceeding 80 µg/dl. Inhibited he-
abreast of recent developments in the area to moglobin synthesis is more common in
best advise pregnant workers or workers chronic cases whereas shortened erythrocyte
planning to conceive children. life span is more common in acute cases.
The spectrum of health effects caused by In lead-induced anemias, there is usually a
lead exposure can be subdivided into five de- reticulocytosis along with the presence of
velopmental stages: Normal, physiological basophilic stippling, and ringed sideroblasts,
changes of uncertain significance, although none of the above are
pathophysiological changes, overt symptoms pathognomonic for lead-induced anemia.
(morbidity), and mortality. Within this proc- 2. Neurological Effects. Inorganic lead has
ess there are no sharp distinctions, but rath- been found to have toxic effects on both the
er a continuum of effects. Boundaries be- central and peripheral nervous systems. The
tween categories overlap due to the wide var- earliest stages of lead-induced central nerv-
iation of individual responses and exposures ous system effects first manifest themselves
in the working population. OSHA’s develop- in the form of behavioral disturbances and
ment of the lead standard focused on central nervous system symptoms including
pathophysiological changes as well as later irritability, restlessness, insomnia and other
stages of disease. sleep disturbances, fatigue, vertigo, head-
1. Heme Synthesis Inhibition. The earliest ache, poor memory, tremor, depression, and
demonstrated effect of lead involves its abil- apathy. With more severe exposure, symp-
ity to inhibit at least two enzymes of the toms can progress to drowsiness, stupor, hal-
heme synthesis pathway at very low blood lucinations, delirium, convulsions and coma.
levels. Inhibition of delta aminolevulinic The most severe and acute form of lead
acid dehydrase (ALA-D) which catalyzes the poisoning which usually follows ingestion or
conversion of delta-aminolevulinic acid inhalation of large amounts of lead is acute
(ALA) to protoporphyrin is observed at a encephalopathy which may arise precipi-
blood lead level below 20 µg/dl. At a blood tously with the onset of intractable seizures,
lead level of 40 µg/dl, more than 20% of the coma, cardiorespiratory arrest, and death
population would have 70% inhibition of within 48 hours.
ALA-D. There is an exponential increase in While there is disagreement about what ex-
ALA excretion at blood lead levels greater posure levels are needed to produce the ear-
than 40 µg/dl. liest symptoms, most experts agree that
Another enzyme, ferrochelatase, is also in- symptoms definitely can occur at blood lead
hibited at low blood lead levels. Inhibition of levels of 60 µg/dl whole blood and therefore
ferrochelatase leads to increased free eryth- recommend a 40 µg/dl maximum. The central
rocyte protoporphyrin (FEP) in the blood nervous system effects frequently are not re-
which can then bind to zinc to yield zinc versible following discontinued exposure or
protoporphyrin. At a blood lead level of 50 chelation therapy and when improvement
µg/dl or greater, nearly 100% of the popu- does occur, it is almost always only partial.
lation will have an increase in FEP. There is The peripheral neuropathy resulting from
also an exponential relationship between lead exposure characteristically involves
blood lead levels greater than 40 µg/dl and only motor function with minimal sensory
the associated ZPP level, which has led to damage and has a marked predilection for
114
the extensor muscles of the most active ex- glycosuria, and hyperphosphaturia indi-
tremity. The peripheral neuropathy can cating severe injury to the proximal renal
occur with varying degrees of severity. The tubules is occasionally seen in children.
earliest and mildest form which can be de- 5. Reproductive effects. Exposure to lead
tected in workers with blood lead levels as can have serious effects on reproductive
low as 50 µg/dl is manifested by slowing of function in both males and females. In male
motor nerve conduction velocity often with- workers exposed to lead there can be a de-
out clinical symptoms. With progression of crease in sexual drive, impotence, decreased
the neuropathy there is development of pain- ability to produce healthy sperm, and ste-
less extensor muscle weakness usually in- rility. Malformed sperm (teratospermia), de-
volving the extensor muscles of the fingers creased number of sperm (hypospermia), and
and hand in the most active upper extrem- sperm with decreased motility
ity, followed in severe cases by wrist drop or, (asthenospermia) can all occur.
much less commonly, foot drop. Teratospermia has been noted at mean blood
In addition to slowing of nerve conduction, lead levels of 53 µg/dl and hypospermia and
electromyographical studies in patients with asthenospermia at 41 µg/dl. Furthermore,
blood lead levels greater than 50 µg/dl have there appears to be a dose-response relation-
demonstrated a decrease in the number of ship for teratospermia in lead exposed work-
acting motor unit potentials, an increase in ers.
the duration of motor unit potentials, and Women exposed to lead may experience
spontaneous pathological activity including menstrual disturbances including
fibrillations and fasciculations. Whether dysmenorrhea, menorrhagia and amenor-
these effects occur at levels of 40 µg/dl is un- rhea. Following exposure to lead, women
determined. have a higher frequency of sterility, pre-
While the peripheral neuropathies can oc-
mature births, spontaneous miscarriages,
casionally be reversed with therapy, again
and stillbirths.
such recovery is not assured particularly in
Germ cells can be affected by lead and
the more severe neuropathies and often im-
cause genetic damage in the egg or sperm
provement is only partial. The lack of re-
versibility is felt to be due in part to seg- cells before conception and result in failure
mental demyelination. to implant, miscarriage, stillbirth, or birth
3. Gastrointestinal. Lead may also affect defects.
the gastrointestinal system producing ab- Infants of mothers with lead poisoning
dominal colic or diffuse abdominal pain, con- have a higher mortality during the first year
stipation, obstipation, diarrhea, anorexia, and suffer from lowered birth weights, slower
nausea and vomiting. Lead colic rarely de- growth, and nervous system disorders.
velops at blood lead levels below 80 µg/dl. Lead can pass through the placental bar-
4. Renal. Renal toxicity represents one of rier and lead levels in the mother’s blood are
the most serious health effects of lead poi- comparable to concentrations of lead in the
soning. In the early stages of disease nuclear umbilical cord at birth. Transplacental pas-
inclusion bodies can frequently be identified sage becomes detectable at 12–14 weeks of
in proximal renal tubular cells. Renal func- gestation and increases until birth.
tion remains normal and the changes in this There is little direct data on damage to the
stage are probably reversible. With more ad- fetus from exposure to lead but it is gen-
vanced disease there is progressive intersti- erally assumed that the fetus and newborn
tial fibrosis and impaired renal function. would be at least as susceptible to neuro-
Eventually extensive interstitial fibrosis en- logical damage as young children. Blood lead
sues with sclerotic glomeruli and dilated and levels of 50–60 µg/dl in children can cause sig-
atrophied proximal tubules; all represent end nificant neurobehavioral impairments and
stage kidney disease. Azotemia can be pro- there is evidence of hyperactivity at blood
gressive, eventually resulting in frank ure- levels as low as 25 µg/dl. Given the overall
mia necessitating dialysis. There is occa- body of literature concerning the adverse
sionally associated hypertension and health effects of lead in children, OSHA feels
hyperuricemia with or without gout. that the blood lead level in children should
Early kidney disease is difficult to detect. be maintained below 30 µg/dl with a popu-
The urinalysis is normal in early lead lation mean of 15 µg/dl. Blood lead levels in
nephropathy and the blood urea nitrogen and the fetus and newborn likewise should not
serum creatinine increase only when two- exceed 30 µg/dl.
thirds of kidney function is lost. Measure- Because of lead’s ability to pass through
ment of creatinine clearance can often de- the placental barrier and also because of the
tect earlier disease as can other methods of demonstrated adverse effects of lead on re-
measurement of glomerular filtration rate. productive function in both the male and fe-
An abnormal Ca-EDTA mobilization test has male as well as the risk of genetic damage of
been used to differentiate between lead-in- lead on both the ovum and sperm, OSHA rec-
duced and other nephropathies, but this pro- ommends a 30 µg/dl maximum permissible
cedure is not widely accepted. A form of blood lead level in both males and females
Fanconi syndrome with aminoaciduria, who wish to bear children.
115
6. Other toxic effects. Debate and research and use of any protective clothing or res-
continue on the effects of lead on the human piratory protection equipment should be
body. Hypertension has frequently been noted. A complete work history is essential
noted in occupationally exposed individuals in the medical evaluation of a worker with
although it is difficult to assess whether this suspected lead toxicity, especially when long
is due to lead’s adverse effects on the kidney term effects such as neurotoxicity and
or if some other mechanism is involved. Vas- nephrotoxicity are considered.
cular and electrocardiographic changes have The medical history is also of fundamental
been detected but have not been well charac- importance and should include a listing of
terized. Lead is thought to impair thyroid all past and current medical conditions, cur-
function and interfere with the pituitary-ad- rent medications including proprietary drug
renal axis, but again these effects have not intake, previous surgeries and hospitaliza-
been well defined. tions, allergies, smoking history, alcohol
consumption, and also non-occupational lead
III. Medical Evaluation exposures such as hobbies (hunting, riflery).
The most important principle in evalu- Also known childhood exposures should be
ating a worker for any occupational disease elicited. Any previous history of
including lead poisoning is a high index of hematological, neurological, gastro-
suspicion on the part of the examining physi- intestinal, renal, psychological, gyneco-
cian. As discussed in Section 2, lead can af- logical, genetic, or reproductive problems
fect numerous organ systems and produce a should be specifically noted.
wide array of signs and symptoms, most of A careful and complete review of systems
which are non-specific and subtle in nature must be performed to assess both recognized
at least in the early stages of disease. Unless complaints and subtle or slowly acquired
serious concern for lead toxicity is present, symptoms which the worker might not ap-
many of the early clues to diagnosis may preciate as being significant. The review of
easily be overlooked. symptoms should include the following:
The crucial initial step in the medical 1. General—weight loss, fatigue, decreased
evaluation is recognizing that a worker’s appetite.
employment can result in exposure to lead. 2. Head, Eyes, Ears, Nose, Throat
The worker will frequently be able to define (HEENT)—headaches, visual disturbances or
exposures to lead and lead containing mate- decreased visual acuity, hearing deficits or
rials but often will not volunteer this infor- tinnitus, pigmentation of the oral mucosa,
mation unless specifically asked. In other or metallic taste in mouth.
situations the worker may not know of any 3. Cardio-pulmonary—shortness of breath,
exposures to lead but the suspicion might be cough, chest pains, palpitations, or orthop-
raised on the part of the physician because of nea.
the industry or occupation of the worker. 4. Gastrointestinal—nausea, vomiting,
Potential occupational exposure to lead and heartburn, abdominal pain, constipation or
its compounds occur in many occupations in diarrhea.
the construction industry, including demoli- 5. Neurologic—irritability, insomnia,
tion and salvaging operations, removal or weakness (fatigue), dizziness, loss of mem-
encapsulation of materials containing lead, ory, confusion, hallucinations,
construction, alteration, repair or renova- incoordination, ataxia, decreased strength in
tion of structures containing lead, transpor- hands or feet, disturbances in gait, difficulty
tation, disposal, storage or containment of in climbing stairs, or seizures.
lead or lead-containing materials on con- 6. Hematologic—pallor, easy fatigability,
struction sites, and maintenance operations abnormal blood loss, melena.
associated with construction activities. 7. Reproductive (male and female and
Once the possibility for lead exposure is spouse where relevant)—history of infer-
raised, the focus can then be directed toward tility, impotence, loss of libido, abnormal
eliciting information from the medical his- menstrual periods, history of miscarriages,
tory, physical exam, and finally from labora- stillbirths, or children with birth defects.
tory data to evaluate the worker for poten- 8. Musculo-skeletal—muscle and joint
tial lead toxicity. pains.
A complete and detailed work history is The physical examination should empha-
important in the initial evaluation. A listing size the neurological, gastrointestinal, and
of all previous employment with information cardiovascular systems. The worker’s weight
on job description, exposure to fumes or and blood pressure should be recorded and
dust, known exposures to lead or other toxic the oral mucosa checked for pigmentation
substances, a description of any personal characteristic of a possible Burtonian or lead
protective equipment used, and previous line on the gingiva. It should be noted, how-
medical surveillance should all be included ever, that the lead line may not be present
in the worker’s record. Where exposure to even in severe lead poisoning if good oral hy-
lead is suspected, information concerning giene is practiced.
on-the-job personal hygiene, smoking or eat- The presence of pallor on skin examination
ing habits in work areas, laundry procedures, may indicate an anemia which, if severe,
116
might also be associated with a tachycardia. If a peripheral neuropathy is suspected,
If an anemia is suspected, an active search nerve conduction studies are warranted both
for blood loss should be undertaken includ- for diagnosis and as a basis to monitor any
ing potential blood loss through the gastro- therapy.
intestinal tract. If renal disease is questioned, a 24 hour
A complete neurological examination urine collection for creatinine clearance,
should include an adequate mental status protein, and electrolytes may be indicated.
evaluation including a search for behavioral Elevated uric acid levels may result from
and psychological disturbances, memory lead-induced renal disease and a serum uric
testing, evaluation for irritability, insomnia, acid level might be performed.
hallucinations, and mental clouding. Gait An electrocardiogram and chest x-ray may
and coordination should be examined along be obtained as deemed appropriate.
with close observation for tremor. A detailed Sophisticated and highly specialized test-
evaluation of peripheral nerve function ining should not be done routinely and where
cluding careful sensory and motor function indicated should be under the direction of a
testing is warranted. Strength testing par- specialist.
ticularly of extensor muscle groups of all ex-
tremities is of fundamental importance. IV. Laboratory Evaluation
Cranial nerve evaluation should also be in- The blood lead level at present remains the
cluded in the routine examination. single most important test to monitor lead
The abdominal examination should include exposure and is the test used in the medical
auscultation for bowel sounds and abdominal surveillance program under the lead stand-
bruits and palpation for organomegaly, ard to guide employee medical removal. The
masses, and diffuse abdominal tenderness. ZPP has several advantages over the blood
Cardiovascular examination should evalu- lead level. Because of its relatively recent
ate possible early signs of congestive heart development and the lack of extensive data
failure. Pulmonary status should be ad- concerning its interpretation, the ZPP cur-
dressed particularly if respirator protection rently remains an ancillary test.
is contemplated. This section will discuss the blood lead
As part of the medical evaluation, the in- level and ZPP in detail and will outline their
terim lead standard requires the following relative advantages and disadvantages.
laboratory studies: Other blood tests currently available to
1. Blood lead level evaluate lead exposure will also be reviewed.
2. Hemoglobin and hematocrit determina- The blood lead level is a good index of cur-
tions, red cell indices, and examination of rent or recent lead absorption when there is
the peripheral blood smear to evaluate red no anemia present and when the worker has
blood cell morphology not taken any chelating agents. However,
blood lead levels along with urinary lead lev-
3. Blood urea nitrogen
els do not necessarily indicate the total body
4. Serum creatinine
burden of lead and are not adequate meas-
5. Routine urinalysis with microscopic ex- ures of past exposure. One reason for this is
amination. that lead has a high affinity for bone and up
6. A zinc protoporphyrin level. to 90% of the body’s total lead is deposited
In addition to the above, the physician is there. A very important component of the
authorized to order any further laboratory total lead body burden is lead in soft tissue
or other tests which he or she deems nec- (liver, kidney, and brain). This fraction of
essary in accordance with sound medical the lead body burden, the biologically active
practice. The evaluation must also include lead, is not entirely reflected by blood lead
pregnancy testing or laboratory evaluation levels since it is a function of the dynamics
of male fertility if requested by the em- of lead absorption, distribution, deposition
ployee. Additional tests which are probably in bone and excretion. Following discontinu-
not warranted on a routine basis but may be ation of exposure to lead, the excess body
appropriate when blood lead and ZPP levels burden is only slowly mobilized from bone
are equivocal include delta aminolevulinic and other relatively stable body stores and
acid and coproporphyrin concentrations in excreted. Consequently, a high blood lead
the urine, and dark-field illumination for de- level may only represent recent heavy expo-
tection of basophilic stippling in red blood sure to lead without a significant total body
cells. excess and likewise a low blood lead level
If an anemia is detected further studies in- does not exclude an elevated total body bur-
cluding a careful examination of the periph- den of lead.
eral smear, reticulocyte count, stool for oc- Also due to its correlation with recent ex-
cult blood, serum iron, total iron binding ca- posures, the blood lead level may vary con-
pacity, bilirubin, and, if appropriate, vita- siderably over short time intervals.
min B12 and folate may be of value in at- To minimize laboratory error and erro-
tempting to identify the cause of the ane- neous results due to contamination, blood
mia. specimens must be carefully collected after
117
thorough cleaning of the skin with appro- It is recommended that a hematocrit be de-
priate methods using lead-free blood con- termined whenever a confirmed ZPP of 50 µg/
tainers and analyzed by a reliable labora- 100 ml whole blood is obtained to rule out a
tory. Under the standard, samples must be significant underlying anemia. If the ZPP is
analyzed in laboratories which are approved in excess of 100 µg/100 ml and not associated
by OSHA. Analysis is to be made using atom- with abnormal elevations in blood lead lev-
ic absorption spectrophotometry, anodic els, the laboratory should be checked to be
stripping voltammetry or any method which sure that blood leads were determined using
meets the accuracy requirements set forth atomic absorption spectrophotometry anodic
by the standard. stripping voltammetry, or any method which
The determination of lead in urine is gen- meets the accuracy requirements set forth
erally considered a less reliable monitoring by the standard by an OSHA approved lab-
technique than analysis of whole blood pri- oratory which is experienced in lead level de-
marily due to individual variability in uri- terminations. Repeat periodic blood lead
nary excretion capacity as well as the tech- studies should be obtained in all individuals
nical difficulty of obtaining accurate 24 hour with elevated ZPP levels to be certain that
urine collections. In addition, workers with an associated elevated blood lead level has
renal insufficiency, whether due to lead or not been missed due to transient fluctua-
some other cause, may have decreased lead tions in blood leads.
clearance and consequently urine lead levels ZPP has a characteristic fluorescence spec-
may underestimate the true lead burden. trum with a peak at 594 nm which is detect-
Therefore, urine lead levels should not be able with a hematofluorimeter. The
used as a routine test. hematofluorimeter is accurate and portable
The zinc protoporphyrin test, unlike the and can provide on-site, instantaneous re-
blood lead determination, measures an ad- sults for workers who can be frequently test-
verse metabolic effect of lead and as such is ed via a finger prick.
a better indicator of lead toxicity than the However, careful attention must be given
level of blood lead itself. The level of ZPP re- to calibration and quality control proce-
flects lead absorption over the preceding 3 to dures. Limited data on blood lead-ZPP cor-
4 months, and therefore is a better indicator relations and the ZPP levels which are asso-
of lead body burden. The ZPP requires more ciated with the adverse health effects dis-
time than the blood lead to read signifi- cussed in Section 2 are the major limitations
cantly elevated levels; the return to normal of the test. Also it is difficult to correlate
after discontinuing lead exposure is also ZPP levels with environmental exposure and
slower. Furthermore, the ZPP test is sim- there is some variation of response with age
pler, faster, and less expensive to perform and sex. Nevertheless, the ZPP promises to
and no contamination is possible. Many in- be an important diagnostic test for the early
vestigators believe it is the most reliable detection of lead toxicity and its value will
means of monitoring chronic lead absorp- increase as more data is collected regarding
tion. its relationship to other manifestations of
Zinc protoporphyrin results from the inhi- lead poisoning.
bition of the enzyme ferrochelatase which Levels of delta-aminolevulinic acid (ALA)
catalyzes the insertion of an iron molecule in the urine are also used as a measure of
into the protoporphyrin molecule, which lead exposure. Increasing concentrations of
then becomes heme. If iron is not inserted ALA are believed to result from the inhibi-
into the molecule then zinc, having a greater tion of the enzyme delta-aminolevulinic acid
affinity for protoporphyrin, takes the place dehydrase (ALA-D). Although the test is rel-
of the iron, forming ZPP. atively easy to perform, inexpensive, and
An elevation in the level of circulating rapid, the disadvantages include variability
ZPP may occur at blood lead levels as low as in results, the necessity to collect a com-
20–30 µg/dl in some workers. Once the blood plete 24 hour urine sample which has a spe-
lead level has reached 40 µg/dl there is more cific gravity greater than 1.010, and also the
marked rise in the ZPP value from its nor- fact that ALA decomposes in the presence of
mal range of less than 100 µg/dl100 ml. In- light.
creases in blood lead levels beyond 40 µg/100 The pattern of porphyrin excretion in the
g are associated with exponential increases urine can also be helpful in identifying lead
in ZPP. intoxication. With lead poisoning, the urine
Whereas blood lead levels fluctuate over concentrations of coproporphyrins I and II,
short time spans, ZPP levels remain rel- porphobilinogen and uroporphyrin I rise. The
atively stable. ZPP is measured directly in most important increase, however, is that of
red blood cells and is present for the cell’s coproporphyrin III; levels may exceed 5,000
entire 120 day life-span. Therefore, the ZPP µg/l in the urine in lead poisoned individuals,
level in blood reflects the average ZPP pro- but its correlation with blood lead levels and
duction over the previous 3–4 months and ZPP are not as good as those of ALA. In-
consequently the average lead exposure dur- creases in urinary porphyrins are not diag-
ing that time interval. nostic of lead toxicity and may be seen in
118
porphyria, some liver diseases, and in pa- (ii) A process which involves a Cat-
tients with high reticulocyte counts. egory 1 flammable gas (as defined in
Summary. The Occupational Safety and § 1910.1200(c)) or flammable liquid with
Health Administration’s interim standard
for inorganic lead in the construction indus-
a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C) on
try places significant emphasis on the med- site in one location, in a quantity of
ical surveillance of all workers exposed to 10,000 pounds (4535.9 kg) or more except
levels of inorganic lead above 30 µg/m3 TWA. for:
The physician has a fundamental role in this (A) Hydrocarbon fuels used solely for
surveillance program, and in the operation of workplace consumption as a fuel (e.g.,
the medical removal protection program. propane used for comfort heating, gaso-
Even with adequate worker education on line for vehicle refueling), if such fuels
the adverse health effects of lead and appro-
priate training in work practices, personal
are not a part of a process containing
hygiene and other control measures, the another highly hazardous chemical
physician has a primary responsibility for covered by this standard;
evaluating potential lead toxicity in the (B) Flammable liquids with a
worker. It is only through a careful and de- flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C) stored
tailed medical and work history, a complete in atmospheric tanks or transferred
physical examination and appropriate lab- that are kept below their normal boil-
oratory testing that an accurate assessment ing point without benefit of chilling or
can be made. Many of the adverse health ef-
fects of lead toxicity are either irreversible
refrigeration.
or only partially reversible and therefore (2) This section does not apply to:
early detection of disease is very important. (i) Retail facilities;
This document outlines the medical moni- (ii) Oil or gas well drilling or serv-
toring program as defined by the occupa- icing operations; or,
tional safety and health standard for inor- (iii) Normally unoccupied remote fa-
ganic lead. It reviews the adverse health ef- cilities.
fects of lead poisoning and describes the im- (b) Definitions. Atmospheric tank
portant elements of the history and physical
examinations as they relate to these adverse
means a storage tank which has been
effects. Finally, the appropriate laboratory designed to operate at pressures from
testing for evaluating lead exposure and tox- atmospheric through 0.5 p.s.i.g. (pounds
icity is presented. per square inch gauge, 3.45 Kpa).
It is hoped that this review and discussion Boiling point means the boiling point
will give the physician a better under- of a liquid at a pressure of 14.7 pounds
standing of the OSHA standard with the ulti- per square inch absolute (p.s.i.a.) (760
mate goal of protecting the health and well- mm.). For the purposes of this section,
being of the worker exposed to lead under his
or her care.
where an accurate boiling point is un-
available for the material in question,
[58 FR 26627, May 4, 1993, as amended at 58 or for mixtures which do not have a
FR 34218, June 24, 1993; 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13,
constant boiling point, the 10 percent
1996; 63 FR 1296, Jan. 8, 1998; 70 FR 1143, Jan.
5, 2005; 71 FR 16674, Apr. 3, 2006; 71 FR 50191, point of a distillation performed in ac-
Aug. 24, 2006; 73 FR 75588, Dec. 12, 2008; 76 FR cordance with the Standard Method of
33611, June 8, 2011; 76 FR 80741, Dec. 27, 2011; Test for Distillation of Petroleum
77 FR 17890, Mar. 26, 2012] Products, ASTM D-86-62, may be used
as the boiling point of the liquid.
§ 1926.64 Process safety management Catastrophic release means a major
of highly hazardous chemicals. uncontrolled emission, fire, or explo-
Purpose. This section contains re- sion, involving one or more highly haz-
quirements for preventing or mini- ardous chemicals, that presents serious
mizing the consequences of cata- danger to employees in the workplace.
strophic releases of toxic, reactive, Facility means the buildings, con-
flammable, or explosive chemicals. tainers or equipment which contain a
These releases may result in toxic, fire process.
or explosion hazards. Highly hazardous chemical means a
(a) Application. (1) This section ap- substance possessing toxic, reactive,
plies to the following: flammable, or explosive properties and
(i) A process which involves a chem- specified by paragraph (a)(1) of this
ical at or above the specified threshold section.
quantities listed in appendix A to this Hot work means work involving elec-
section; tric or gas welding, cutting, brazing, or
119
similar flame or spark-producing oper- ployer shall complete a compilation of
ations. written process safety information be-
Normally unoccupied remote facility fore conducting any process hazard
means a facility which is operated, analysis required by the standard. The
maintained or serviced by employees compilation of written process safety
who visit the facility only periodically information is to enable the employer
to check its operation and to perform and the employees involved in oper-
necessary operating or maintenance ating the process to identify and under-
tasks. No employees are permanently stand the hazards posed by those proc-
stationed at the facility. Facilities esses involving highly hazardous
meeting this definition are not contig- chemicals. This process safety informa-
uous with, and must be geographically tion shall include information per-
remote from all other buildings, proc- taining to the hazards of the highly
esses or persons. hazardous chemicals used or produced
Process means any activity involving by the process, information pertaining
a highly hazardous chemical including to the technology of the process, and
any use, storage, manufacturing, han- information pertaining to the equip-
dling, or the on-site movement of such ment in the process.
chemicals, or combination of these ac- (1) Information pertaining to the haz-
tivities. For purposes of this definition, ards of the highly hazardous chemicals in
any group of vessels which are inter- the process. This information shall con-
connected and separate vessels which sist of at least the following:
are located such that a highly haz- (i) Toxicity information;
ardous chemical could be involved in a (ii) Permissible exposure limits;
potential release shall be considered a (iii) Physical data;
single process. (iv) Reactivity data:
Replacement in kind means a replace- (v) Corrosivity data;
ment which satisfies the design speci- (vi) Thermal and chemical stability
fication. data; and
Trade secret means any confidential (vii) Hazardous effects of inadvertent
formula, pattern, process, device, infor- mixing of different materials that
mation or compilation of information could foreseeably occur.
that is used in an employer’s business,
and that gives the employer an oppor- NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (d)(1): Safety data
tunity to obtain an advantage over sheets meeting the requirements of
competitors who do not know or use it. § 1910.1200(g) may be used to comply with this
requirement to the extent they contain the
Appendix D contained in § 1926.59 sets information required by this paragraph
out the criteria to be used in evalu- (d)(1).
ating trade secrets.
(c) Employee participation. (1) Employ- (2) Information pertaining to the tech-
ers shall develop a written plan of ac- nology of the process. (i) Information
tion regarding the implementation of concerning the technology of the proc-
the employee participation required by ess shall include at least the following:
this paragraph. (A) A block flow diagram or sim-
(2) Employers shall consult with em- plified process flow diagram (see appen-
ployees and their representatives on dix B to this section);
the conduct and development of proc- (B) Process chemistry;
ess hazards analyses and on the devel- (C) Maximum intended inventory;
opment of the other elements of proc- (D) Safe upper and lower limits for
ess safety management in this stand- such items as temperatures, pressures,
ard. flows or compositions; and,
(3) Employers shall provide to em- (E) An evaluation of the con-
ployees and their representatives ac- sequences of deviations, including
cess to process hazard analyses and to those affecting the safety and health of
all other information required to be de- employees.
veloped under this standard. (ii) Where the original technical in-
(d) Process safety information. In ac- formation no longer exists, such infor-
cordance with the schedule set forth in mation may be developed in conjunc-
paragraph (e)(1) of this section, the em- tion with the process hazard analysis
120
in sufficient detail to support the anal- (iv) All initial process hazards anal-
ysis. yses shall be completed by May 26, 1997.
(3) Information pertaining to the equip- (v) Process hazards analyses com-
ment in the process. (i) Information per- pleted after May 26, 1987 which meet
taining to the equipment in the process the requirements of this paragraph are
shall include: acceptable as initial process hazards
(A) Materials of construction; analyses. These process hazard anal-
(B) Piping and instrument diagrams yses shall be updated and revalidated,
(P&ID’s); based on their completion date, in ac-
(C) Electrical classification; cordance with paragraph (e)(6) of this
(D) Relief system design and design standard.
basis; (2) The employer shall use one or
(E) Ventilation system design; more of the following methodologies
(F) Design codes and standards em- that are appropriate to determine and
ployed; evaluate the hazards of the process
(G) Material and energy balances for being analyzed.
processes built after May 26, 1992; and, (i) What-If;
(H) Safety systems (e.g. interlocks, (ii) Checklist;
detection or suppression systems). (iii) What-If/Checklist;
(ii) The employer shall document (iv) Hazard and Operability Study
that equipment complies with recog- (HAZOP);
nized and generally accepted good engi- (v) Failure Mode and Effects Analysis
neering practices. (FMEA);
(iii) For existing equipment designed (vi) Fault-Tree Analysis; or
and constructed in accordance with (vii) An appropriate equivalent meth-
codes, standards, or practices that are odology.
no longer in general use, the employer (3) The process hazard analysis shall
shall determine and document that the address:
equipment is designed, maintained, in- (i) The hazards of the process;
spected, tested, and operating in a safe (ii) The identification of any previous
manner. incident which had a likely potential
(e) Process hazard analysis. (1) The for catastrophic consequences in the
employer shall perform an initial proc- workplace;
ess hazard analysis (hazard evaluation) (iii) Engineering and administrative
on processes covered by this standard. controls applicable to the hazards and
The process hazard analysis shall be their interrelationships such as appro-
appropriate to the complexity of the priate application of detection meth-
process and shall identify, evaluate, odologies to provide early warning of
and control the hazards involved in the releases. (Acceptable detection meth-
process. Employers shall determine and ods might include process monitoring
document the priority order for con- and control instrumentation with
ducting process hazard analyses based alarms, and detection hardware such as
on a rationale which includes such con- hydrocarbon sensors.);
siderations as extent of the process (iv) Consequences of failure of engi-
hazards, number of potentially affected neering and administrative controls;
employees, age of the process, and op- (v) Facility siting;
erating history of the process. The (vi) Human factors; and
process hazard analysis shall be con- (vii) A qualitative evaluation of a
ducted as soon as possible, but not range of the possible safety and health
later than the following schedule: effects of failure of controls on employ-
(i) No less than 25 percent of the ini- ees in the workplace.
tial process hazards analyses shall be (4) The process hazard analysis shall
completed by May 26, 1994; be performed by a team with expertise
(ii) No less than 50 percent of the ini- in engineering and process operations,
tial process hazards analyses shall be and the team shall include at least one
completed by May 26, 1995; employee who has experience and
(iii) No less than 75 percent of the knowledge specific to the process being
initial process hazards analyses shall evaluated. Also, one member of the
be completed by May 26, 1996; team must be knowledgeable in the
121
specific process hazard analysis meth- (B) Steps required to correct or avoid
odology being used. deviation.
(5) The employer shall establish a (iii) Safety and health consider-
system to promptly address the team’s ations:
findings and recommendations; assure (A) Properties of, and hazards pre-
that the recommendations are resolved sented by, the chemicals used in the
in a timely manner and that the reso- process;
lution is documented; document what (B) Precautions necessary to prevent
actions are to be taken; complete ac- exposure, including engineering con-
tions as soon as possible; develop a trols, administrative controls, and per-
written schedule of when these actions sonal protective equipment;
are to be completed; communicate the (C) Control measures to be taken if
actions to operating, maintenance and physical contact or airborne exposure
other employees whose work assign- occurs;
ments are in the process and who may (D) Quality control for raw materials
be affected by the recommendations or and control of hazardous chemical in-
actions. ventory levels; and,
(6) At least every five (5) years after (E) Any special or unique hazards.
the completion of the initial process (iv) Safety systems and their func-
hazard analysis, the process hazard tions.
analysis shall be updated and revali- (2) Operating procedures shall be
dated by a team meeting the require- readily accessible to employees who
ments in paragraph (e)(4) of this sec- work in or maintain a process.
tion, to assure that the process hazard (3) The operating procedures shall be
analysis is consistent with the current reviewed as often as necessary to as-
process. sure that they reflect current oper-
(7) Employers shall retain process ating practice, including changes that
hazards analyses and updates or re- result from changes in process chemi-
validations for each process covered by cals, technology, and equipment, and
this section, as well as the documented changes to facilities. The employer
resolution of recommendations de- shall certify annually that these oper-
scribed in paragraph (e)(5) of this sec- ating procedures are current and accu-
tion for the life of the process. rate.
(f) Operating procedures. (1) The em- (4) The employer shall develop and
ployer shall develop and implement implement safe work practices to pro-
written operating procedures that provide for the control of hazards during
vide clear instructions for safely con- operations such as lockout/tagout; con-
ducting activities involved in each cov- fined space entry; opening process
ered process consistent with the proc- equipment or piping; and control over
ess safety information and shall ad- entrance into a facility by mainte-
dress at least the following elements. nance, contractor, laboratory, or other
(i) Steps for each operating phase: support personnel. These safe work
practices shall apply to employees and
(A) Initial startup;
contractor employees.
(B) Normal operations;
(g) Training—(1) Initial training. (i)
(C) Temporary operations; Each employee presently involved in
(D) Emergency shutdown including operating a process, and each employee
the conditions under which emergency before being involved in operating a
shutdown is required, and the assign- newly assigned process, shall be
ment of shutdown responsibility to trained in an overview of the process
qualified operators to ensure that and in the operating procedures as
emergency shutdown is executed in a specified in paragraph (f) of this sec-
safe and timely manner. tion. The training shall include empha-
(E) Emergency operations; sis on the specific safety and health
(F) Normal shutdown; and, hazards, emergency operations includ-
(G) Startup following a turnaround, ing shutdown, and safe work practices
or after an emergency shutdown. applicable to the employee’s job tasks.
(ii) Operating limits: (ii) In lieu of initial training for
(A) Consequences of deviation; and those employees already involved in
122
operating a process on May 26, 1992, an and exit of contract employers and
employer may certify in writing that contract employees in covered process
the employee has the required knowl- areas.
edge, skills, and abilities to safely (v) The employer shall periodically
carry out the duties and responsibil- evaluate the performance of contract
ities as specified in the operating pro- employers in fulfilling their obliga-
cedures. tions as specified in paragraph (h)(3) of
(2) Refresher training. Refresher train- this section.
ing shall be provided at least every (vi) The employer shall maintain a
three years, and more often if nec- contract employee injury and illness
essary, to each employee involved in log related to the contractor’s work in
operating a process to assure that the process areas.
employee understands and adheres to (3) Contract employer responsibilities.
the current operating procedures of the (i) The contract employer shall assure
process. The employer, in consultation that each contract employee is trained
with the employees involved in oper- in the work practices necessary to safe-
ating the process, shall determine the ly perform his/her job.
appropriate frequency of refresher
(ii) The contract employer shall as-
training.
sure that each contract employee is in-
(3) Training documentation. The em-
structed in the known potential fire,
ployer shall ascertain that each em-
explosion, or toxic release hazards re-
ployee involved in operating a process
lated to his/her job and the process,
has received and understood the train-
and the applicable provisions of the
ing required by this paragraph. The
emergency action plan.
employer shall prepare a record which
contains the identity of the employee, (iii) The contract employer shall doc-
the date of training, and the means ument that each contract employee
used to verify that the employee under- has received and understood the train-
stood the training. ing required by this paragraph. The
(h) Contractors—(1) Application. This contract employer shall prepare a
paragraph applies to contractors per- record which contains the identity of
forming maintenance or repair, turn- the contract employee, the date of
around, major renovation, or specialty training, and the means used to verify
work on or adjacent to a covered proc- that the employee understood the
ess. It does not apply to contractors training.
providing incidental services which do (iv) The contract employer shall as-
not influence process safety, such as sure that each contract employee fol-
janitorial work, food and drink serv- lows the safety rules of the facility in-
ices, laundry, delivery or other supply cluding the safe work practices re-
services. quired by paragraph (f)(4) of this sec-
(2) Employer responsibilities. (i) The tion.
employer, when selecting a contractor, (v) The contract employer shall ad-
shall obtain and evaluate information vise the employer of any unique haz-
regarding the contract employer’s safe- ards presented by the contract employ-
ty performance and programs. er’s work, or of any hazards found by
(ii) The employer shall inform con- the contract employer’s work.
tract employers of the known potential (i) Pre-startup safety review. (1) The
fire, explosion, or toxic release hazards employer shall perform a pre-startup
related to the contractor’s work and safety review for new facilities and for
the process. modified facilities when the modifica-
(iii) The employer shall explain to tion is significant enough to require a
contract employers the applicable pro- change in the process safety informa-
visions of the emergency action plan tion.
required by paragraph (n) of this sec- (2) The pre-startup safety review
tion. shall confirm that prior to the intro-
(iv) The employer shall develop and duction of highly hazardous chemicals
implement safe work practices con- to a process:
sistent with paragraph (f)(4) of this sec- (i) Construction and equipment is in
tion, to control the entrance, presence accordance with design specifications;
123
(ii) Safety, operating, maintenance, the person who performed the inspec-
and emergency procedures are in place tion or test, the serial number or other
and are adequate; identifier of the equipment on which
(iii) For new facilities, a process haz- the inspection or test was performed, a
ard analysis has been performed and description of the inspection or test
recommendations have been resolved performed, and the results of the in-
or implemented before startup; and spection or test.
modified facilities meet the require- (5) Equipment deficiencies. The em-
ments contained in management of ployer shall correct deficiencies in
change, paragraph (l). equipment that are outside acceptable
(iv) Training of each employee in- limits (defined by the process safety in-
volved in operating a process has been formation in paragraph (d) of this sec-
completed. tion) before further use or in a safe and
(j) Mechanical integrity—(1) Applica- timely manner when necessary means
tion. Paragraphs (j)(2) through (j)(6) of are taken to assure safe operation.
this section apply to the following (6) Quality assurance. (i) In the con-
process equipment: struction of new plants and equipment,
(i) Pressure vessels and storage the employer shall assure that equip-
tanks; ment as it is fabricated is suitable for
(ii) Piping systems (including piping the process application for which they
components such as valves); will be used.
(iii) Relief and vent systems and de- (ii) Appropriate checks and inspec-
vices; tions shall be performed to assure that
(iv) Emergency shutdown systems; equipment is installed properly and
(v) Controls (including monitoring consistent with design specifications
devices and sensors, alarms, and inter- and the manufacturer’s instructions.
locks) and,
(iii) The employer shall assure that
(vi) Pumps.
maintenance materials, spare parts and
(2) Written procedures. The employer
equipment are suitable for the process
shall establish and implement written
application for which they will be used.
procedures to maintain the on-going
integrity of process equipment. (k) Hot work permit. (1) The employer
(3) Training for process maintenance shall issue a hot work permit for hot
activities. The employer shall train each work operations conducted on or near a
employee involved in maintaining the covered process.
on-going integrity of process equip- (2) The permit shall document that
ment in an overview of that process the fire prevention and protection re-
and its hazards and in the procedures quirements in 29 CFR 1926.352 have
applicable to the employee’s job tasks been implemented prior to beginning
to assure that the employee can per- the hot work operations; it shall indi-
form the job tasks in a safe manner. cate the date(s) authorized for hot
(4) Inspection and testing. (i) Inspec- work; and identify the object on which
tions and tests shall be performed on hot work is to be performed. The per-
process equipment. mit shall be kept on file until comple-
(ii) Inspection and testing procedures tion of the hot work operations.
shall follow recognized and generally (l) Management of change. (1) The em-
accepted good engineering practices. ployer shall establish and implement
(iii) The frequency of inspections and written procedures to manage changes
tests of process equipment shall be con- (except for ‘‘replacements in kind’’) to
sistent with applicable manufacturers’ process chemicals, technology, equip-
recommendations and good engineering ment, and procedures; and, changes to
practices, and more frequently if deter- facilities that affect a covered process.
mined to be necessary by prior oper- (2) The procedures shall assure that
ating experience. the following considerations are ad-
(iv) The employer shall document dressed prior to any change:
each inspection and test that has been (i) The technical basis for the pro-
performed on process equipment. The posed change;
documentation shall identify the date (ii) Impact of change on safety and
of the inspection or test, the name of health;
124
(iii) Modifications to operating pro- (6) The report shall be reviewed with
cedures; all affected personnel whose job tasks
(iv) Necessary time period for the are relevant to the incident findings in-
change; and, cluding contract employees where ap-
(v) Authorization requirements for plicable.
the proposed change. (7) Incident investigation reports
(3) Employees involved in operating a shall be retained for five years.
process and maintenance and contract (n) Emergency planning and re-
employees whose job tasks will be af- sponse. The employer shall establish
fected by a change in the process shall and implement an emergency action
be informed of, and trained in, the plan for the entire plant in accordance
change prior to start-up of the process with the provisions of 29 CFR 1926.35(a).
or affected part of the process. In addition, the emergency action plan
(4) If a change covered by this para- shall include procedures for handling
graph results in a change in the process small releases. Employers covered
safety information required by para- under this standard may also be sub-
graph (d) of this section, such informa- ject to the hazardous waste and emer-
tion shall be updated accordingly. gency response provisions contained in
(5) If a change covered by this para- 29 CFR 1926.65(a), (p) and (q).
graph results in a change in the oper- (o) Compliance audits. (1) Employers
ating procedures or practices required shall certify that they have evaluated
by paragraph (f) of this section, such compliance with the provisions of this
procedures or practices shall be up- section at least every three years to
dated accordingly. verify that the procedures and prac-
(m) Incident investigation. (1) The em- tices developed under the standard are
ployer shall investigate each incident adequate and are being followed.
which resulted in, or could reasonably (2) The compliance audit shall be
have resulted in a catastrophic release conducted by at least one person
of highly hazardous chemical in the knowledgeable in the process.
workplace. (3) A report of the findings of the
(2) An incident investigation shall be audit shall be developed.
initiated as promptly as possible, but (4) The employer shall promptly de-
not later than 48 hours following the termine and document an appropriate
incident. response to each of the findings of the
(3) An incident investigation team compliance audit, and document that
shall be established and consist of at deficiencies have been corrected.
least one person knowledgeable in the (5) Employers shall retain the two (2)
process involved, including a contract most recent compliance audit reports.
employee if the incident involved work
(p) Trade secrets. (1) Employers shall
of the contractor, and other persons
make all information necessary to
with appropriate knowledge and experi-
comply with the section available to
ence to thoroughly investigate and
those persons responsible for compiling
analyze the incident.
the process safety information (re-
(4) A report shall be prepared at the quired by paragraph (d) of this section),
conclusion of the investigation which those assisting in the development of
includes at a minimum: the process hazard analysis (required
(i) Date of incident; by paragraph (e) of this section), those
(ii) Date investigation began; responsible for developing the oper-
(iii) A description of the incident; ating procedures (required by para-
(iv) The factors that contributed to graph (f) of this section), and those in-
the incident; and, volved in incident investigations (re-
(v) Any recommendations resulting quired by paragraph (m) of this sec-
from the investigation. tion), emergency planning and response
(5) The employer shall establish a (paragraph (n) of this section) and com-
system to promptly address and resolve pliance audits (paragraph (o) of this
the incident report findings and rec- section) without regard to possible
ommendations. Resolutions and correc- trade secret status of such informa-
tive actions shall be documented. tion.
125
(2) Nothing in this paragraph shall Chemical Name CAS* TQ**
preclude the employer from requiring
the persons to whom the information is Chlorodiethylaluminum (also
made available under paragraph (p)(1) called Diethylaluminum
of this section to enter into confiden- Chloride) ............................ 96-10-6 5000
tiality agreements not to disclose the 1-Chloro-2,4-Dinitrobenzene 97-00-7 5000
Chloromethyl Methyl Ether .... 107-30-2 500
information as set forth in 29 CFR
Chloropicrin ........................... 76-06-2 500
1926.59. Chloropicrin and Methyl Bro-
(3) Subject to the rules and proce- mide mixture ...................... None 1500
dures set forth in 29 CFR 1926.59(i) (1) Chloropicrin and Methyl Chlo-
through (12), employees and their des- ride mixture ........................ None 1500
ignated representatives shall have ac- Cumene Hydroperoxide ........ 80-15-9 5000
cess to trade secret information con- Cyanogen .............................. 460-19-5 2500
tained within the process hazard anal- Cyanogen Chloride ............... 506-77-4 500
Cyanuric Fluoride .................. 675-14-9 100
ysis and other documents required to Diacetyl Peroxide (concentra-
be developed by this standard. tion greater than 70%) ....... 110-22-5 5000
Diazomethane ....................... 334-88-3 500
APPENDIX A TO § 1926.64—LIST OF HIGHLY HAZ-
Dibenzoyl Peroxide ............... 94-36-0 7500
ARDOUS CHEMICALS, TOXICS AND REACTIVES
Diborane ................................ 19287-45-7 100
(MANDATORY)
Dibutyl Peroxide (Tertiary) .... 110-05-4 5000
This appendix contains a listing of toxic Dichloro Acetylene ................ 7572-29-4 250
and reactive highly hazardous chemicals Dichlorosilane ........................ 4109-96-0 2500
which present a potential for a catastrophic Diethylzinc ............................. 557-20-0 10000
event at or above the threshold quantity. Diisopropyl
Peroxydicarbonate ............. 105-64-6 7500
Chemical Name CAS* TQ** Dilauroyl Peroxide ................. 105-74-8 7500
Dimethyldichlorosilane .......... 75-78-5 1000
Acetaldehyde ......................... 75-07-0 2500 Dimethylhydrazine, 1,1- ........ 57-14-7 1000
Acrolein (2-Propenal) ............ 107-02-8 150 Dimethylamine, Anhydrous ... 124-40-3 2500
Acrylyl Chloride ..................... 814-68-6 250 2,4-Dinitroaniline ................... 97-02-9 5000
Allyl Chloride ......................... 107-05-1 1000 Ethyl Methyl Ketone Peroxide
Allylamine .............................. 107-11-9 1000 (also Methyl Ethyl Ketone
Peroxide; concentration
Alkylaluminums ..................... Varies 5000
greater than 60%) .............. 1338-23-4 5000
Ammonia, Anhydrous ............ 7664-41-7 10000
Ethyl Nitrite ............................ 109-95-5 5000
Ammonia solutions (greater
Ethylamine ............................. 75-04-7 7500
than 44% ammonia by
Ethylene Fluorohydrin ........... 371-62-0 100
weight) ............................... 7664-41-7 15000
Ethylene Oxide ...................... 75-21-8 5000
Ammonium Perchlorate ......... 7790-98-9 500
Ethyleneimine ........................ 151-56-4 1000
Ammonium Permanganate ... 7787-36-2 7500
Fluorine ................................. 7782-41-4 1000
Arsine (also called Arsenic Formaldehyde (Formalin) ...... 50-00-0 1000
Hydride) ............................. 7784-42-1 100 Furan ..................................... 110-00-9 500
Bis(Chloromethyl) Ether ........ 542-88-1 100 Hexafluoroacetone ................ 684-16-2 5000
Boron Trichloride ................... 10294-34-5 2500 Hydrochloric Acid, Anhydrous 7647-01-0 5000
Boron Trifluoride .................... 7637-07-2 250 Hydrofluoric Acid, Anhydrous 7664-39-3 1000
Bromine ................................. 7726-95-6 1500 Hydrogen Bromide ................ 10035-10-6 5000
Bromine Chloride .................. 13863-41-7 1500 Hydrogen Chloride ................ 7647-01-0 5000
Bromine Pentafluoride ........... 7789-30-2 2500 Hydrogen Cyanide, Anhy-
Bromine Trifluoride ................ 7787-71-5 15000 drous .................................. 74-90-8 1000
3-Bromopropyne (also called Hydrogen Fluoride ................. 7664-39-3 1000
Propargyl Bromide) ............ 106-96-7 100 Hydrogen Peroxide (52% by
Butyl Hydroperoxide (Ter- weight or greater) .............. 7722-84-1 7500
tiary) ................................... 75-91-2 5000 Hydrogen Selenide ................ 7783-07-5 150
Butyl Perbenzoate (Tertiary) 614-45-9 7500 Hydrogen Sulfide ................... 7783-06-4 1500
Carbonyl Chloride (see Phos- Hydroxylamine ....................... 7803-49-8 2500
gene) .................................. 75-44-5 100 Iron, Pentacarbonyl ............... 13463-40-6 250
* Carbonyl Fluoride ............... 353-50-4 2500 Isopropylamine ...................... 75-31-0 5000
Cellulose Nitrate (concentra- Ketene ................................... 463-51-4 100
tion greater than 12.6% ni- Methacrylaldehyde ................ 78-85-3 1000
trogen ................................. 9004-70-0 2500 Methacryloyl Chloride ............ 920-46-7 150
Chlorine ................................. 7782-50-5 1500 Methacryloyloxyethyl
Chlorine Dioxide .................... 10049-04-4 1000 Isocyanate ......................... 30674-80-7 100
Chlorine Pentrafluoride ......... 13637-63-3 1000 Methyl Acrylonitrile ................ 126-98-7 250
Chlorine Trifluoride ................ 7790-91-2 1000 Methylamine, Anhydrous ....... 74-89-5 1000
126
Chemical Name CAS* TQ** Chemical Name CAS* TQ**
Methyl Bromide ..................... 74-83-9 2500 Perchloryl Fluoride ................ 7616-94-6 5000
Methyl Chloride ..................... 74-87-3 15000 Peroxyacetic Acid (concentra-
Methyl Chloroformate ............ 79-22-1 500 tion greater than 60% Ace-
Methyl Ethyl Ketone Peroxide tic Acid; also called Per-
(concentration greater than acetic Acid) ........................ 79-21-0 1000
60%) .................................. 1338-23-4 5000 Phosgene (also called Car-
Methyl Fluoroacetate ............. 453-18-9 100 bonyl Chloride) .................. 75-44-5 100
Methyl Fluorosulfate .............. 421-20-5 100 Phosphine (Hydrogen
Methyl Hydrazine .................. 60-34-4 100 Phosphide) ......................... 7803-51-2 100
Methyl Iodide ......................... 74-88-4 7500 Phosphorus Oxychloride
Methyl Isocyanate ................. 624-83-9 250 (also called Phosphoryl
Methyl Mercaptan .................. 74-93-1 5000 Chloride) ............................ 10025-87-3 1000
Methyl Vinyl Ketone .............. 79-84-4 100 Phosphorus Trichloride ......... 7719-12-2 1000
Methyltrichlorosilane .............. 75-79-6 500 Phosphoryl Chloride (also
Nickel Carbonly (Nickel called Phosphorus
Tetracarbonyl) .................... 13463-39-3 150 Oxychloride) ....................... 10025-87-3 1000
Nitric Acid (94.5% by weight Propargyl Bromide ................ 106-96-7 100
or greater) .......................... 7697-37-2 500 Propyl Nitrate ........................ 627-3-4 2500
Nitric Oxide ............................ 10102-43-9 250 Sarin ...................................... 107-44-8 100
Nitroaniline (para Nitroaniline 100-01-6 5000 Selenium Hexafluoride .......... 7783-79-1 1000
Nitromethane ......................... 75-52-5 2500 Stibine (Antimony Hydride) ... 7803-52-3 500
Nitrogen Dioxide .................... 10102-44-0 250 Sulfur Dioxide (liquid) ............ 7446-09-5 1000
Nitrogen Oxides (NO; NO(2); Sulfur Pentafluoride ............... 5714-22-7 250
N2O4; N2O3) ..................... 10102-44-0 250 Sulfur Tetrafluoride ................ 7783-60-0 250
Nitrogen Tetroxide (also Sulfur Trioxide (also called
called Nitrogen Peroxide) .. 10544-72-6 250 Sulfuric Anhydride) ............ 7446-11-9 1000
Nitrogen Trifluoride ................ 7783-54-2 5000 Sulfuric Anhydride (also
Nitrogen Trioxide ................... 10544-73-7 250 called Sulfur Trioxide) ........ 7446-11-9 1000
Oleum (65% to 80% by Tellurium Hexafluoride .......... 7783-80-4 250
weight; also called Fuming Tetrafluoroethylene ............... 116-14-3 5000
Sulfuric Acid) ..................... 8014-94-7 1000 Tetrafluorohydrazine ............. 10036-47-2 5000
Osmium Tetroxide ................. 20816-12-0 100 Tetramethyl Lead .................. 75-74-1 1000
Oxygen Difluoride (Fluorine Thionyl Chloride .................... 7719-09-7 250
Monoxide) .......................... 7783-41-7 100 Trichloro (chloromethyl) Sil-
Ozone .................................... 10028-15-6 100 ane ..................................... 1558-25-4 100
Pentaborane .......................... 19624-22-7 100 Trichloro (dichlorophenyl) Sil-
Peracetic Acid (concentration ane ..................................... 27137-85-5 2500
greater 60% Acetic Acid; Trichlorosilane ....................... 10025-78-2 5000
also called Peroxyacetic Trifluorochloroethylene .......... 79-38-9 10000
Acid) ................................... 79-21-0 1000 Trimethyoxysilane ................. 2487-90-3 1500
Perchloric Acid (concentration
greater than 60% by * Chemical Abstract Service Number
weight) ............................... 7601-90-3 5000 ** Threshold Quantity in Pounds (Amount
Perchloromethyl Mercaptan .. 594-42-3 150 necessary to be covered by this standard.)
127
APPENDIX B TO § 1926.64—BLOCK FLOW DIAGRAM AND SIMPLIFIED PROCESS

FLOW DIAGRAM (NONMANDATORY)
128
EC30OC91.008</GPH>
APPENDIX C TO § 1926.64—COMPLIANCE GUIDE- ment program requires a systematic ap-

LINES AND RECOMMENDATIONS FOR PROCESS proach to evaluating the whole process.
SAFETY MANAGEMENT (NONMANDATORY) Using this approach the process design, proc-
This appendix serves as a nonmandatory ess technology, operational and maintenance
guideline to assist employers and employees activities and procedures, nonroutine activi-
in complying with the requirements of this ties and procedures, emergency preparedness
section, as well as provides other helpful rec- plans and procedures, training programs, and
ommendations and information. Examples other elements which impact the process are
presented in this appendix are not the only all considered in the evaluation. The various
means of achieving the performance goals in lines of defense that have been incorporated
the standard. This appendix neither adds nor into the design and operation of the process
detracts from the requirements of the stand- to prevent or mitigate the release of haz-
ard. ardous chemicals need to be evaluated and
1. Introduction to Process Safety Manage- strengthened to assure their effectiveness at
ment. The major objective of process safety each level. Process safety management is the
management of highly hazardous chemicals proactive identification, evaluation and
is to prevent unwanted releases of hazardous mitigation or prevention of chemical re-
chemicals especially into locations which
leases that could occur as a result of failures
could expose employees and others to serious
in process, procedures or equipment.
hazards. An effective process safety manage-
129
EC30OC91.009</GPH>
The process safety management standard ready established means and methods to
targets highly hazardous chemicals that keep employees and their representatives in-
have the potential to cause a catastrophic formed about relevant safety and health
incident. This standard as a whole is to aid issues and employers may be able to adapt
employers in their efforts to prevent or miti- these practices and procedures to meet their
gate episodic chemical releases that could obligations under this standard. Employers
lead to a catastrophe in the workplace and who have not implemented an occupational
possibly to the surrounding community. To safety and health program may wish to form
control these types of hazards, employers a safety and health committee of employees
need to develop the necessary expertise, ex- and management representatives to help the
periences, judgement and proactive initia- employer meet the obligations specified by
tive within their workforce to properly im- this standard. These committees can become
plement and maintain an effective process
a significant ally in helping the employer to
safety management program as envisioned in
implement and maintain an effective process
the OSHA standard. This OSHA standard is
safety management program for all employ-
required by the Clean Air Act Amendments
as is the Environmental Protection Agency’s ees.
Risk Management Plan. Employers, who 3. Process Safety Information. Complete and
merge the two sets of requirements into accurate written information concerning
their process safety management program, process chemicals, process technology, and
will better assure full compliance with each process equipment is essential to an effective
as well as enhancing their relationship with process safety management program and to a
the local community. process hazards analysis. The compiled infor-
While OSHA believes process safety man- mation will be a necessary resource to a va-
agement will have a positive effect on the riety of users including the team that will
safety of employees in workplaces and also perform the process hazards analysis as re-
offers other potential benefits to employers quired under paragraph (e); those developing
(increased productivity), smaller businesses the training programs and the operating pro-
which may have limited resources available cedures; contractors whose employees will be
to them at this time, might consider alter- working with the process; those conducting
native avenues of decreasing the risks asso- the pre-startup reviews; local emergency
ciated with highly hazardous chemicals at preparedness planners; and insurance and en-
their workplaces. One method which might forcement officials.
be considered is the reduction in the inven- The information to be compiled about the
tory of the highly hazardous chemical. This chemicals, including process intermediates,
reduction in inventory will result in a reduc- needs to be comprehensive enough for an ac-
tion of the risk or potential for a cata- curate assessment of the fire and explosion
strophic incident. Also, employers including characteristics, reactivity hazards, the safe-
small employers may be able to establish ty and health hazards to workers, and the
more efficient inventory control by reducing corrosion and erosion effects on the process
the quantities of highly hazardous chemicals equipment and monitoring tools. Current
on site below the established threshold quan- safety data sheet (SDS) information can be
tities. This reduction can be accomplished
used to help meet this requirement which
by ordering smaller shipments and maintain-
must be supplemented with process chem-
ing the minimum inventory necessary for ef-
istry information including runaway reac-
ficient and safe operation. When reduced in-
tion and over pressure hazards if applicable.
ventory is not feasible, then the employer
might consider dispersing inventory to sev- Process technology information will be a
eral locations on site. Dispersing storage part of the process safety information pack-
into locations where a release in one loca- age and it is expected that it will include
tion will not cause a release in another loca- diagrams of the type shown in appendix B of
tion is a practical method to also reduce the this section as well as employer established
risk or potential for catastrophic incidents. criteria for maximum inventory levels for
2. Employee Involvement in Process Safety process chemicals; limits beyond which
Management. Section 304 of the Clean Air Act would be considered upset conditions; and a
Amendments states that employers are to qualitative estimate of the consequences or
consult with their employees and their rep- results of deviation that could occur if oper-
resentatives regarding the employers efforts ating beyond the established process limits.
in the development and implementation of Employers are encouraged to use diagrams
the process safety management program ele- which will help users understand the process.
ments and hazard assessments. Section 304 A block flow diagram is used to show the
also requires employers to train and educate major process equipment and inter-
their employees and to inform affected em- connecting process flow lines and show flow
ployees of the findings from incident inves- rates, stream composition, temperatures,
tigations required by the process safety man- and pressures when necessary for clarity.
agement program. Many employers, under The block flow diagram is a simplified dia-
their safety and health programs, have al- gram.
130
Process flow diagrams are more complex tant elements of the process safety manage-
and will show all main flow streams includ- ment program. A PHA is an organized and
ing valves to enhance the understanding of systematic effort to identify and analyze the
the process, as well as pressures and tem- significance of potential hazards associated
peratures on all feed and product lines with- with the processing or handling of highly
in all major vessels, in and out of headers hazardous chemicals. A PHA provides infor-
and heat exchangers, and points of pressure mation which will assist employers and em-
and temperature control. Also, materials of
ployees in making decisions for improving
construction information, pump capacities
safety and reducing the consequences of un-
and pressure heads, compressor horsepower
and vessel design pressures and temperatures wanted or unplanned releases of hazardous
are shown when necessary for clarity. In ad- chemicals. A PHA is directed toward ana-
dition, major components of control loops lyzing potential causes and consequences of
are usually shown along with key utilities fires, explosions, releases of toxic or flam-
on process flow diagrams. mable chemicals and major spills of haz-
Piping and instrument diagrams (P&Ids) ardous chemicals. The PHA focuses on equip-
may be the more appropriate type of dia- ment, instrumentation, utilities, human ac-
grams to show some of the above details and tions (routine and nonroutine), and external
to display the information for the piping de- factors that might impact the process. These
signer and engineering staff. The P&IDs are considerations assist in determining the haz-
to be used to describe the relationships be- ards and potential failure points or failure
tween equipment and instrumentation as modes in a process.
well as other relevant information that will The selection of a PHA methodology or
enhance clarity. Computer software pro-
technique will be influenced by many factors
grams which do P&Ids or other diagrams
including the amount of existing knowledge
useful to the information package, may be
used to help meet this requirement. about the process. Is it a process that has
The information pertaining to process been operated for a long period of time with
equipment design must be documented. In little or no innovation and extensive experi-
other words, what were the codes and stand- ence has been generated with its use? Or, is
ards relied on to establish good engineering it a new process or one which has been
practice. These codes and standards are pub- changed frequently by the inclusion of inno-
lished by such organizations as the American vative features? Also, the size and com-
Society of Mechanical Engineers, American plexity of the process will influence the deci-
Petroleum Institute, American National sion as to the appropriate PHA methodology
Standards Institute, National Fire Protec- to use. All PHA methodologies are subject to
tion Association, American Society for Test- certain limitations. For example, the check-
ing and Materials, National Board of Boiler list methodology works well when the proc-
and Pressure Vessel Inspectors, National As- ess is very stable and no changes are made,
sociation of Corrosion Engineers, American but it is not as effective when the process
Society of Exchange Manufacturers Associa-
has undergone extensive change. The check-
tion, and model building code groups.
In addition, various engineering societies list may miss the most recent changes and
issue technical reports which impact process consequently the changes would not be eval-
design. For example, the American Institute uated. Another limitation to be considered
of Chemical Engineers has published tech- concerns the assumptions made by the team
nical reports on topics such as two phase or analyst. The PHA is dependent on good
flow for venting devices. This type of tech- judgement and the assumptions made during
nically recognized report would constitute the study need to be documented and under-
good engineering practice. stood by the team and reviewer and kept for
For existing equipment designed and con- a future PHA.
structed many years ago in accordance with The team conducting the PHA need to un-
the codes and standards available at that derstand the methodology that is going to be
time and no longer in general use today, the used. A PHA team can vary in size from two
employer must document which codes and people to a number of people with varied
standards were used and that the design and operational and technical backgrounds.
construction along with the testing, inspec- Some team members may only be a part of
tion and operation are still suitable for the the team for a limited time. The team leader
intended use. Where the process technology
needs to be fully knowledgeable in the proper
requires a design which departs from the ap-
implementation of the PHA methodology
plicable codes and standards, the employer
that is to be used and should be impartial in
must document that the design and con-
struction is suitable for the intended pur- the evaluation. The other full or part time
pose. team members need to provide the team with
4. Process Hazard Analysis. A process hazard expertise in areas such as process tech-
analysis (PHA), sometimes called a process nology, process design, operating procedures
hazard evaluation, is one of the most impor-
131
and practices, including how the work is ac- less data, P&IDs, and process information is
tually performed, alarms, emergency proce- needed to perform a process hazard analysis.
dures, instrumentation, maintenance proce- Many small businesses have processes that
dures, both routine and nonroutine tasks, in- are not unique, such as cold storage lockers
cluding how the tasks are authorized, pro- or water treatment facilities. Where em-
curement of parts and supplies, safety and ployer associations have a number of mem-
health, and any other relevant subject as the bers with such facilities, a generic PHA,
need dictates. At least one team member evolved from a checklist or what-if ques-
must be familiar with the process. tions, could be developed and used by each
The ideal team will have an intimate employer effectively to reflect his/her par-
knowledge of the standards, codes, specifica- ticular process; this would simplify compli-
tions and regulations applicable to the proc- ance for them.
ess being studied. The selected team mem- When the employer has a number of proc-
bers need to be compatible and the team esses which require a PHA, the employer
leader needs to be able to manage the team must set up a priority system of which PHAs
and the PHA study. The team needs to be to conduct first. A preliminary or gross haz-
able to work together while benefiting from ard analysis may be useful in prioritizing the
the expertise of others on the team or out- processes that the employer has determined
side the team, to resolve issues, and to forge are subject to coverage by the process safety
a consensus on the findings of the study and management standard. Consideration should
the recommendations. first be given to those processes with the po-
The application of a PHA to a process may tential of adversely affecting the largest
involve the use of different methodologies number of employees. This prioritizing
for various parts of the process. For example, should consider the potential severity of a
a process involving a series of unit oper- chemical release, the number of potentially
ations of varying sizes, complexities, and affected employees, the operating history of
ages may use different methodologies and the process such as the frequency of chem-
team members for each operation. Then the ical releases, the age of the process and any
conclusions can be integrated into one final other relevant factors. These factors would
study and evaluation. A more specific exam- suggest a ranking order and would suggest
ple is the use of a checklist PHA for a stand- either using a weighing factor system or a
ard boiler or heat exchanger and the use of a systematic ranking method. The use of a
Hazard and Operability PHA for the overall preliminary hazard analysis would assist an
process. Also, for batch type processes like employer in determining which process
custom batch operations, a generic PHA of a should be of the highest priority and thereby
representative batch may be used where the employer would obtain the greatest im-
there are only small changes of monomer or provement in safety at the facility.
other ingredient ratios and the chemistry is Detailed guidance on the content and ap-
documented for the full range and ratio of plication of process hazard analysis meth-
batch ingredients. Another process that odologies is available from the American In-
might consider using a generic type of PHA stitute of Chemical Engineers’ Center for
is a gas plant. Often these plants are simply Chemical Process Safety (see appendix D).
moved from site to site and therefore, a ge- 5. Operating Procedures and Practices. Oper-
neric PHA may be used for these movable ating procedures describe tasks to be per-
plants. Also, when an employer has several formed, data to be recorded, operating condi-
similar size gas plants and no sour gas is tions to be maintained, samples to be col-
being processed at the site, then a generic lected, and safety and health precautions to
PHA is feasible as long as the variations of be taken. The procedures need to be tech-
the individual sites are accounted for in the nically accurate, understandable to employ-
PHA. Finally, when an employer has a large ees, and revised periodically to ensure that
continuous process which has several control they reflect current operations. The process
rooms for different portions of the process safety information package is to be used as
such as for a distillation tower and a blend- a resource to better assure that the oper-
ing operation, the employer may wish to do ating procedures and practices are consistent
each segment separately and then integrate with the known hazards of the chemicals in
the final results. the process and that the operating param-
Additionally, small businesses which are eters are accurate. Operating procedures
covered by this rule, will often have proc- should be reviewed by engineering staff and
esses that have less storage volume, less ca- operating personnel to ensure that they are
pacity, and less complicated than processes accurate and provide practical instructions
at a large facility. Therefore, OSHA would on how to actually carry out job duties safe-
anticipate that the less complex methodolo- ly.
gies would be used to meet the process haz- Operating procedures will include specific
ard analysis criteria in the standard. These instructions or details on what steps are to
process hazard analyses can be done in less be taken or followed in carrying out the
time and with a few people being involved. A stated procedures. These operating instruc-
less complex process generally means that tions for each procedure should include the
132
applicable safety precautions and should within the process area, such as nonroutine
contain appropriate information on safety tasks, also must be maintained. The hazards
implications. For example, the operating of the tasks are to be conveyed to operating
procedures addressing operating parameters personnel in accordance with established
will contain operating instructions about procedures and to those performing the ac-
pressure limits, temperature ranges, flow tual tasks. When the work is completed, op-
rates, what to do when an upset condition erating personnel should be informed to pro-
occurs, what alarms and instruments are vide closure on the job.
pertinent if an upset condition occurs, and 6. Employee Training. All employees, includ-
other subjects. Another example of using oping maintenance and contractor employees,
erating instructions to properly implement involved with highly hazardous chemicals
operating procedures is in starting up or need to fully understand the safety and
shutting down the process. In these cases, health hazards of the chemicals and proc-
different parameters will be required from esses they work with for the protection of
those of normal operation. These operating themselves, their fellow employees and the
instructions need to clearly indicate the dis- citizens of nearby communities. Training
tinctions between startup and normal oper- conducted in compliance with 1926.59, the
ations such as the appropriate allowances for Hazard Communication standard, will help
heating up a unit to reach the normal oper- employees to be more knowledgeable about
ating parameters. Also the operating in- the chemicals they work with as well as fa-
structions need to describe the proper meth- miliarize them with reading and under-
od for increasing the temperature of the unit standing SDS. However, additional training
until the normal operating temperature pain subjects such as operating procedures and
rameters are achieved. safety work practices, emergency evacuation
Computerized process control systems add and response, safety procedures, routine and
complexity to operating instructions. These nonroutine work authorization activities,
operating instructions need to describe the and other areas pertinent to process safety
logic of the software as well as the relation- and health will need to be covered by an em-
ship between the equipment and the control ployer’s training program.
system; otherwise, it may not be apparent to In establishing their training programs,
the operator. employers must clearly define the employees
Operating procedures and instructions are to be trained and what subjects are to be
important for training operating personnel. covered in their training. Employers in set-
The operating procedures are often viewed as ting up their training program will need to
the standard operating practices (SOPs) for clearly establish the goals and objectives
operations. Control room personnel and oper- they wish to achieve with the training that
ating staff, in general, need to have a full un- they provide to their employees. The learn-
derstanding of operating procedures. If working goals or objectives should be written in
ers are not fluent in English then procedures clear measurable terms before the training
and instructions need to be prepared in a sec- begins. These goals and objectives need to be
ond language understood by the workers. In tailored to each of the specific training mod-
addition, operating procedures need to be ules or segments. Employers should describe
changed when there is a change in the proc- the important actions and conditions under
ess as a result of the management of change which the employee will demonstrate com-
procedures. The consequences of operating petence or knowledge as well as what is ac-
procedure changes need to be fully evaluated ceptable performance.
and the information conveyed to the per- Hands-on-training where employees are
sonnel. For example, mechanical changes to able to use their senses beyond listening,
the process made by the maintenance depart- will enhance learning. For example, oper-
ment (like changing a valve from steel to ating personnel, who will work in a control
brass or other subtle changes) need to be room or at control panels, would benefit by
evaluated to determine if operating proce- being trained at a simulated control panel or
dures and practices also need to be changed. panels. Upset conditions of various types
All management of change actions must be could be displayed on the simulator, and
coordinated and integrated with current op- then the employee could go through the
erating procedures and operating personnel proper operating procedures to bring the
must be oriented to the changes in proce- simulator panel back to the normal oper-
dures before the change is made. When the ating parameters. A training environment
process is shutdown in order to make a could be created to help the trainee feel the
change, then the operating procedures must full reality of the situation but, of course,
be updated before startup of the process. under controlled conditions. This realistic
Training in how to handle upset conditions type of training can be very effective in
must be accomplished as well as what oper- teaching employees correct procedures while
ating personnel are to do in emergencies allowing them to also see the consequences
such as when a pump seal fails or a pipeline of what might happens if they do not follow
ruptures. Communication between operating established operating procedures. Other
personnel and workers performing work training techniques using videos or on-the-
133
job training can also be very effective for knowledge of work activities involving con-
teaching other job tasks, duties, or other im- tract employees working on or adjacent to
portant information. An effective training covered processes. Injury and illness logs of
program will allow the employee to fully both the employer’s employees and contract
participate in the training process and to employees allow an employer to have full
practice their skill or knowledge. knowledge of process injury and illness expe-
Employers need to periodically evaluate rience. This log will also contain informa-
their training programs to see if the nection which will be of use to those auditing
essary skills, knowledge, and routines are process safety management compliance and
being properly understood and implemented those involved in incident investigations.
by their trained employees. The means or Contract employees must perform their
methods for evaluating the training should work safely. Considering that contractors
be developed along with the training pro- often perform very specialized and poten-
gram goals and objectives. Training program tially hazardous tasks such as confined space
evaluation will help employers to determine entry activities and nonroutine repair activi-
the amount of training their employees un- ties it is quite important that their activi-
derstood, and whether the desired results ties be controlled while they are working on
were obtained. If, after the evaluation, it ap- or near a covered process. A permit system
pears that the trained employees are not at or work authorization system for these ac-
the level of knowledge and skill that was ex- tivities would also be helpful to all affected
pected, the employer will need to revise the employers. The use of a work authorization
training program, provide retraining, or pro- system keeps an employer informed of con-
vide more frequent refresher training ses- tract employee activities, and as a benefit
sions until the deficiency is resolved. Those the employer will have better coordination
who conducted the training and those who and more management control over the work
received the training should also be con- being performed in the process area. A well
sulted as to how best to improve the training run and well maintained process where em-
process. If there is a language barrier, the ployee safety is fully recognized will benefit
language known to the trainees should be all of those who work in the facility whether
used to reinforce the training messages and they be contract employees or employees of
information. the owner.
Careful consideration must be given to as- 8. Pre-Startup Safety. For new processes,
sure that employees including maintenance the employer will find a PHA helpful in im-
and contract employees receive current and proving the design and construction of the
updated training. For example, if changes process from a reliability and quality point
are made to a process, impacted employees of view. The safe operation of the new proc-
must be trained in the changes and under- ess will be enhanced by making use of the
stand the effects of the changes on their job PHA recommendations before final installa-
tasks (e.g., any new operating procedures tions are completed. P&IDs are to be com-
pertinent to their tasks). Additionally, as al- pleted along with having the operating pro-
ready discussed the evaluation of the em- cedures in place and the operating staff
ployee’s absorption of training will certainly trained to run the process before startup.
influence the need for training. The initial startup procedures and normal
7. Contractors. Employers who use contrac- operating procedures need to be fully evalu-
tors to perform work in and around processes ated as part of the pre-startup review to as-
that involve highly hazardous chemicals, sure a safe transfer into the normal oper-
will need to establish a screening process so ating mode for meeting the process param-
that they hire and use contractors who ac- eters.
complish the desired job tasks without com- For existing processes that have been shut-
promising the safety and health of employ- down for turnaround, or modification, etc.,
ees at a facility. For contractors, whose safe- the employer must assure that any changes
ty performance on the job is not known to other than ‘‘replacement in kind’’ made to
the hiring employer, the employer will need the process during shutdown go through the
to obtain information on injury and illness management of change procedures. P&IDs
rates and experience and should obtain con- will need to be updated as necessary, as well
tractor references. Additionally, the em- as operating procedures and instructions. If
ployer must assure that the contractor has the changes made to the process during shut-
the appropriate job skills, knowledge and down are significant and impact the training
certifications (such as for pressure vessel program, then operating personnel as well as
welders). Contractor work methods and expe- employees engaged in routine and nonrou-
riences should be evaluated. For example, tine work in the process area may need some
does the contractor conducting demolition refresher or additional training in light of
work swing loads over operating processes or the changes. Any incident investigation rec-
does the contractor avoid such hazards? ommendations, compliance audits or PHA
Maintaining a site injury and illness log recommendations need to be reviewed as
for contractors is another method employers well to see what impacts they may have on
must use to track and maintain current the process before beginning the startup.
134
9. Mechanical Integrity. Employers will need ety for Testing and Material, American Pe-
to review their maintenance programs and troleum Institute, National Fire Protection
schedules to see if there are areas where Association, American National Standards
‘‘breakdown’’ maintenance is used rather Institute, American Society of Mechanical
than an on-going mechanical integrity pro- Engineers, and other groups, provide infor-
gram. Equipment used to process, store, or mation to help establish an effective testing
handle highly hazardous chemicals needs to and inspection frequency, as well as appro-
be designed, constructed, installed and main- priate methodologies.
tained to minimize the risk of releases of The applicable codes and standards provide
such chemicals. This requires that a mechan- criteria for external inspections for such
ical integrity program be in place to assure items as foundation and supports, anchor
the continued integrity of process equip- bolts, concrete or steel supports, guy wires,
ment. Elements of a mechanical integrity nozzles and sprinklers, pipe hangers, ground-
program include the identification and cating connections, protective coatings and in-
egorization of equipment and instrumenta- sulation, and external metal surfaces of pip-
tion, inspections and tests, testing and ining and vessels, etc. These codes and stand-
spection frequencies, development of mainte- ards also provide information on methodolo-
nance procedures, training of maintenance gies for internal inspection, and a frequency
personnel, the establishment of criteria for formula based on the corrosion rate of the
acceptable test results, documentation of materials of construction. Also, erosion both
test and inspection results, and documenta- internal and external needs to be considered
tion of manufacturer recommendations as to along with corrosion effects for piping and
meantime to failure for equipment and in- valves. Where the corrosion rate is not
strumentation. known, a maximum inspection frequency is
The first line of defense an employer has recommended, and methods of developing
available is to operate and maintain the the corrosion rate are available in the codes.
process as designed, and to keep the chemi- Internal inspections need to cover items
cals contained. This line of defense is backed such as vessel shell, bottom and head; metal-
up by the next line of defense which is the lic linings; nonmetallic linings; thickness
controlled release of chemicals through measurements for vessels and piping; inspec-
venting to scrubbers or flares, or to surge or tion for erosion, corrosion, cracking and
overflow tanks which are designed to receive bulges; internal equipment like trays, baf-
such chemicals, etc. These lines of defense fles, sensors and screens for erosion, corro-
are the primary lines of defense or means to sion or cracking and other deficiencies.
prevent unwanted releases. The secondary Some of these inspections may be performed
lines of defense would include fixed fire pro- by state or local government inspectors
tection systems like sprinklers, water spray, under state and local statutes. However,
or deluge systems, monitor guns, etc., dikes, each employer needs to develop procedures
designed drainage systems, and other sys- to ensure that tests and inspections are con-
tems which would control or mitigate haz- ducted properly and that consistency is
ardous chemicals once an unwanted release maintained even where different employees
occurs. These primary and secondary lines of may be involved. Appropriate training is to
defense are what the mechanical integrity be provided to maintenance personnel to en-
program needs to protect and strengthen sure that they understand the preventive
these primary and secondary lines of de- maintenance program procedures, safe prac-
fenses where appropriate. tices, and the proper use and application of
The first step of an effective mechanical special equipment or unique tools that may
integrity program is to compile and cat- be required. This training is part of the over-
egorize a list of process equipment and in- all training program called for in the stand-
strumentation for inclusion in the program. ard.
This list would include pressure vessels, stor- A quality assurance system is needed to
age tanks, process piping, relief and vent help ensure that the proper materials of con-
systems, fire protection system components, struction are used, that fabrication and in-
emergency shutdown systems and alarms spection procedures are proper, and that in-
and interlocks and pumps. For the cat- stallation procedures recognize field instal-
egorization of instrumentation and the listed lation concerns. The quality assurance pro-
equipment the employer would prioritize gram is an essential part of the mechanical
which pieces of equipment require closer integrity program and will help to maintain
scrutiny than others. Meantime to failure of the primary and secondary lines of defense
various instrumentation and equipment that have been designed into the process to
parts would be known from the manufactur- prevent unwanted chemical releases or those
ers data or the employer’s experience with which control or mitigate a release. ‘‘As
the parts, which would then influence the in- built’’ drawings, together with certifications
spection and testing frequency and associ- of coded vessels and other equipment, and
ated procedures. Also, applicable codes and materials of construction need to be verified
standards such as the National Board Inspec- and retained in the quality assurance docu-
tion Code, or those from the American Soci- mentation. Equipment installation jobs need
135
to be properly inspected in the field for use changes in production rates, raw materials,
of proper materials and procedures and to as- experimentation, equipment unavailability,
sure that qualified craftsmen are used to do new equipment, new product development,
the job. The use of appropriate gaskets, change in catalyst and changes in operating
packing, bolts, valves, lubricants and weld- conditions to improve yield or quality.
ing rods need to be verified in the field. Also, Equipment changes include among others
procedures for installation of safety devices change in materials of construction, equip-
need to be verified, such as the torque on the ment specifications, piping pre-arrange-
bolts on ruptured disc installations, uniform ments, experimental equipment, computer
torque on flange bolts, proper installation of program revisions and changes in alarms and
pump seals, etc. If the quality of parts is a interlocks. Employers need to establish
problem, it may be appropriate to conduct means and methods to detect both technical
audits of the equipment supplier’s facilities
changes and mechanical changes.
to better assure proper purchases of required
equipment which is suitable for its intended Temporary changes have caused a number
service. Any changes in equipment that may of catastrophes over the years, and employ-
become necessary will need to go through ers need to establish ways to detect tem-
the management of change procedures. porary changes as well as those that are per-
10. Nonroutine Work Authorizations. Nonrou- manent. It is important that a time limit for
tine work which is conducted in process temporary changes be established and mon-
areas needs to be controlled by the employer itored since, without control, these changes
in a consistent manner. The hazards identi- may tend to become permanent. Temporary
fied involving the work that is to be accom- changes are subject to the management of
plished must be communicated to those change provisions. In addition, the manage-
doing the work, but also to those operating ment of change procedures are used to insure
personnel whose work could affect the safety that the equipment and procedures are re-
of the process. A work authorization notice turned to their original or designed condi-
or permit must have a procedure that de- tions at the end of the temporary change.
scribes the steps the maintenance super- Proper documentation and review of these
visor, contractor representative or other per- changes is invaluable in assuring that the
son needs to follow to obtain the necessary safety and health considerations are being
clearance to get the job started. The work incorporated into the operating procedures
authorization procedures need to reference and the process.
and coordinate, as applicable, lockout/tagout Employers may wish to develop a form or
procedures, line breaking procedures, con- clearance sheet to facilitate the processing
fined space entry procedures and hot work
of changes through the management of
authorizations. This procedure also needs to
change procedures. A typical change form
provide clear steps to follow once the job is
may include a description and the purpose of
completed in order to provide closure for
the change, the technical basis for the
those that need to know the job is now com-
change, safety and health considerations,
pleted and equipment can be returned to nor-
mal. documentation of changes for the operating
11. Managing Change. To properly manage procedures, maintenance procedures, inspec-
changes to process chemicals, technology, tion and testing, P&IDs, electrical classifica-
equipment and facilities, one must define tion, training and communications, pre-
what is meant by change. In this process startup inspection, duration if a temporary
safety management standard, change in- change, approvals and authorization. Where
cludes all modifications to equipment, proce- the impact of the change is minor and well
dures, raw materials and processing condi- understood, a check list reviewed by an au-
tions other than ‘‘replacement in kind.’’ thorized person with proper communication
These changes need to be properly managed to others who are affected may be sufficient.
by identifying and reviewing them prior to However, for a more complex or significant
implementation of the change. For example, design change, a hazard evaluation procedure
the operating procedures contain the oper- with approvals by operations, maintenance,
ating parameters (pressure limits, tempera- and safety departments may be appropriate.
ture ranges, flow rates, etc.) and the impor- Changes in documents such as P&IDs, raw
tance of operating within these limits. While materials, operating procedures, mechanical
the operator must have the flexibility to integrity programs, electrical classifica-
maintain safe operation within the estab- tions, etc., need to be noted so that these re-
lished parameters, any operation outside of visions can be made permanent when the
these parameters requires review and ap- drawings and procedure manuals are up-
proval by a written management of change dated. Copies of process changes need to be
procedure. kept in an accessible location to ensure that
Management of change covers such as design changes are available to operating
changes in process technology and changes personnel as well as to PHA team members
to equipment and instrumentation. Changes when a PHA is being done or one is being up-
in process technology can result from dated.
136
12. Investigation of Incidents. Incident inves- ferent emergency preparedness or tertiary
tigation is the process of identifying the un- lines of defense they plan to have and then
derlying causes of incidents and imple- develop the necessary plans and procedures,
menting steps to prevent similar events from and appropriately train employees in their
occurring. The intent of an incident inves- emergency duties and responsibilities and
tigation is for employers to learn from past then implement these lines of defense.
experiences and thus avoid repeating past Employers at a minimum must have an
mistakes. The incidents for which OSHA ex- emergency action plan which will facilitate
pects employers to become aware and to in- the prompt evacuation of employees when an
vestigate are the types of events which re- unwanted release of highly hazardous chem-
sult in or could reasonably have resulted in ical. This means that the employer will have
a catastrophic release. Some of the events a plan that will be activated by an alarm
are sometimes referred to as ‘‘near misses,’’ system to alert employees when to evacuate
meaning that a serious consequence did not and, that employees who are physically im-
occur, but could have. paired, will have the necessary support and
Employers need to develop in-house capa- assistance to get them to the safe zone as
bility to investigate incidents that occur in well. The intent of these requirements is to
their facilities. A team needs to be assem- alert and move employees to a safe zone
bled by the employer and trained in the tech- quickly. Delaying alarms or confusing
niques of investigation including how to con- alarms are to be avoided. The use of process
duct interviews of witnesses, needed docu- control centers or similar process buildings
mentation and report writing. A multi-dis- in the process area as safe areas is discour-
ciplinary team is better able to gather the aged. Recent catastrophes have shown that a
facts of the event and to analyze them and large life loss has occurred in these struc-
develop plausible scenarios as to what hap- tures because of where they have been sited
pened, and why. Team members should be se- and because they are not necessarily de-
lected on the basis of their training, knowl- signed to withstand over-pressures from
edge and ability to contribute to a team ef- shockwaves resulting from explosions in the
fort to fully investigate the incident. Em- process area.
ployees in the process area where the inci- Unwanted incidental releases of highly
dent occurred should be consulted, inter- hazardous chemicals in the process area
viewed or made a member of the team. Their must be addressed by the employer as to
knowledge of the events form a significant what actions employees are to take. If the
set of facts about the incident which oc- employer wants employees to evacuate the
curred. The report, its findings and rec- area, then the emergency action plan will be
ommendations are to be shared with those activated. For outdoor processes where wind
who can benefit from the information. The direction is important for selecting the safe
cooperation of employees is essential to an route to a refuge area, the employer should
effective incident investigation. The focus of place a wind direction indicator such as a
the investigation should be to obtain facts, wind sock or pennant at the highest point
and not to place blame. The team and the in- that can be seen throughout the process
vestigation process should clearly deal with area. Employees can move in the direction of
all involved individuals in a fair, open and cross wind to upwind to gain safe access to
consistent manner. the refuge area by knowing the wind direc-
13. Emergency Preparedness. Each employer tion.
must address what actions employees are to If the employer wants specific employees
take when there is an unwanted release of in the release area to control or stop the
highly hazardous chemicals. Emergency pre- minor emergency or incidental release, these
paredness or the employer’s tertiary (third) actions must be planned for in advance and
lines of defense are those that will be relied procedures developed and implemented.
on along with the secondary lines of defense Preplanning for handling incidental releases
when the primary lines of defense which are for minor emergencies in the process area
used to prevent an unwanted release fail to needs to be done, appropriate equipment for
stop the release. Employers will need to de- the hazards must be provided, and training
cide if they want employees to handle and conducted for those employees who will per-
stop small or minor incidental releases. form the emergency work before they re-
Whether they wish to mobilize the available spond to handle an actual release. The em-
resources at the plant and have them ployer’s training program, including the
brought to bear on a more significant re- Hazard Communication standard training is
lease. Or whether employers want their em- to address the training needs for employees
ployees to evacuate the danger area and who are expected to handle incidental or
promptly escape to a preplanned safe zone minor releases.
area, and allow the local community emer- Preplanning for releases that are more se-
gency response organizations to handle the rious than incidental releases is another im-
release. Or whether the employer wants to portant line of defense to be used by the em-
use some combination of these actions. Em- ployer. When a serious release of a highly
ployers will need to select how many dif- hazardous chemical occurs, the employer
137
through preplanning will have determined in gency response equipment, mutual aid infor-
advance what actions employees are to take. mation, and access to meteorological or
The evacuation of the immediate release weather condition data and any dispersion
area and other areas as necessary would be modeling data.
accomplished under the emergency action 14. Compliance Audits. Employers need to
plan. If the employer wishes to use plant per- select a trained individual or assemble a
sonnel such as a fire brigade, spill control trained team of people to audit the process
team, a hazardous materials team, or use safety management system and program. A
employees to render aid to those in the im- small process or plant may need only one
mediate release area and control or mitigate knowledgeable person to conduct an audit.
the incident, these actions are covered by The audit is to include an evaluation of the
1926.65, the Hazardous Waste Operations and design and effectiveness of the process safety
Emergency Response (HAZWOPER) stand- management system and a field inspection of
ard. If outside assistance is necessary, such the safety and health conditions and prac-
as through mutual aid agreements between tices to verify that the employer’s systems
employers or local government emergency are effectively implemented. The audit
response organizations, these emergency re- should be conducted or lead by a person
sponders are also covered by HAZWOPER. knowledgeable in audit techniques and who
The safety and health protections required is impartial towards the facility or area
for emergency responders are the responsi- being audited. The essential elements of an
bility of their employers and of the on-scene audit program include planning, staffing,
incident commander. conducting the audit, evaluation and correc-
Responders may be working under very tive action, follow-up and documentation.
hazardous conditions and therefore the ob- Planning in advance is essential to the suc-
jective is to have them competently led by cess of the auditing process. Each employer
an on-scene incident commander and the needs to establish the format, staffing,
commander’s staff, properly equipped to do scheduling and verification methods prior to
their assigned work safely, and fully trained conducting the audit. The format should be
to carry out their duties safely before they designed to provide the lead auditor with a
respond to an emergency. Drills, training ex- procedure or checklist which details the re-
ercises, or simulations with the local com- quirements of each section of the standard.
munity emergency response planners and re- The names of the audit team members
sponder organizations is one means to obtain should be listed as part of the format as well.
better preparedness. This close cooperation The checklist, if properly designed, could
and coordination between plant and local serve as the verification sheet which pro-
community emergency preparedness man- vides the auditor with the necessary infor-
agers will also aid the employer in com- mation to expedite the review and assure
plying with the Environmental Protection that no requirements of the standard are
Agency’s Risk Management Plan criteria. omitted. This verification sheet format
One effective way for medium to large fa- could also identify those elements that will
cilities to enhance coordination and commu- require evaluation or a response to correct
nication during emergencies for on plant op- deficiencies. This sheet could also be used for
erations and with local community organiza- developing the follow-up and documentation
tions is for employers to establish and equip requirements.
an emergency control center. The emergency The selection of effective audit team mem-
control center would be sited in a safe zone bers is critical to the success of the program.
area so that it could be occupied throughout Team members should be chosen for their ex-
the duration of an emergency. The center perience, knowledge, and training and should
would serve as the major communication be familiar with the processes and with au-
link between the on-scene incident com- diting techniques, practices and procedures.
mander and plant or corporate management The size of the team will vary depending on
as well as with the local community offi- the size and complexity of the process under
cials. The communication equipment in the consideration. For a large, complex, highly
emergency control center should include a instrumented plant, it may be desirable to
network to receive and transmit information have team members with expertise in proc-
by telephone, radio or other means. It is im- ess engineering and design, process chem-
portant to have a backup communication istry, instrumentation and computer con-
network in case of power failure or one com- trols, electrical hazards and classifications,
munication means fails. The center should safety and health disciplines, maintenance,
also be equipped with the plant layout and emergency preparedness, warehousing or
community maps, utility drawings including shipping, and process safety auditing. The
fire water, emergency lighting, appropriate team may use part-time members to provide
reference materials such as a government for the depth of expertise required as well as
agency notification list, company personnel for what is actually done or followed, com-
phone list, SARA Title III reports and safety pared to what is written.
data sheets, emergency plans and procedures An effective audit includes a review of the
manual, a listing with the location of emer- relevant documentation and process safety
138
information, inspection of the physical fa- cluding an explanation where no action is
cilities, and interviews with all levels of taken on a finding, needs to be documented
plant personnel. Utilizing the audit proce- as to what was done and why.
dure and checklist developed in the It is important to assure that each defi-
preplanning stage, the audit team can sys- ciency identified is addressed, the corrective
tematically analyze compliance with the action to be taken noted, and the audit per-
provisions of the standard and any other cor- son or team responsible be properly docu-
porate policies that are relevant. For exam- mented by the employer. To control the cor-
ple, the audit team will review all aspects of rective action process, the employer should
the training program as part of the overall consider the use of a tracking system. This
audit. The team will review the written tracking system might include periodic sta-
training program for adequacy of content, tus reports shared with affected levels of
frequency of training, effectiveness of train- management, specific reports such as com-
ing in terms of its goals and objectives as pletion of an engineering study, and a final
well as to how it fits into meeting the stand- implementation report to provide closure for
ard’s requirements, documentation, etc. audit findings that have been through man-
Through interviews, the team can determine agement of change, if appropriate, and then
the employee’s knowledge and awareness of shared with affected employees and manage-
the safety procedures, duties, rules, emer- ment. This type of tracking system provides
gency response assignments, etc. During the the employer with the status of the correc-
inspection, the team can observe actual tive action. It also provides the documenta-
practices such as safety and health policies, tion required to verify that appropriate cor-
procedures, and work authorization prac- rective actions were taken on deficiencies
tices. This approach enables the team to identified in the audit.
identify deficiencies and determine where
corrective actions or improvements are nec- APPENDIX D TO § 1926.64—SOURCES OF
essary. FURTHER INFORMATION (NONMANDATORY)
An audit is a technique used to gather suf-
ficient facts and information, including sta- 1. Center for Chemical Process Safety,
tistical information, to verify compliance American Institute of Chemical Engineers,
with standards. Auditors should select as 345 East 47th Street, New York, NY 10017,
part of their preplanning a sample size suffi- (212) 705-7319.
cient to give a degree of confidence that the 2. ‘‘Guidelines for Hazard Evaluation Pro-
audit reflects the level of compliance with cedures,’’ American Institute of Chemical
the standard. The audit team, through this Engineers; 345 East 47th Street, New York,
systematic analysis, should document areas NY 10017.
which require corrective action as well as 3. ‘‘Guidelines for Technical Management
those areas where the process safety man- of Chemical Process Safety,’’ Center for
agement system is effective and working in Chemical Process Safety of the American In-
an effective manner. This provides a record stitute of Chemical Engineers; 345 East 47th
of the audit procedures and findings, and Street, New York, NY 10017.
serves as a baseline of operation data for fu- 4. ‘‘Evaluating Process Safety in the Chem-
ture audits. It will assist future auditors in ical Industry,’’ Chemical Manufacturers As-
determining changes or trends from previous sociation; 2501 M Street NW, Washington, DC
audits. 20037.
Corrective action is one of the most impor- 5. ‘‘Safe Warehousing of Chemicals,’’
tant parts of the audit. It includes not only Chemical Manufacturers Association; 2501 M
addressing the identified deficiencies, but Street NW, Washington, DC 20037.
also planning, followup, and documentation. 6. ‘‘Management of Process Hazards,’’
The corrective action process normally be- American Petroleum Institute (API Rec-
gins with a management review of the audit ommended Practice 750); 1220 L Street, N.W.,
findings. The purpose of this review is to de- Washington, DC 20005.
termine what actions are appropriate, and to 7. ‘‘Improving Owner and Contractor Safe-
establish priorities, timetables, resource al- ty Performance,’’ American Petroleum Insti-
locations and requirements and responsibil- tute (API Recommended Practice 2220); API,
ities. In some cases, corrective action may 1220 L Street N.W., Washington, DC 20005.
involve a simple change in procedure or 8. Chemical Manufacturers Association
minor maintenance effort to remedy the con- (CMA’s Manager Guide), First Edition, Sep-
cern. Management of change procedures need tember 1991; CMA, 2501 M Street, N.W.,
to be used, as appropriate, even for what Washington, DC 20037.
may seem to be a minor change. Many of the 9. ‘‘Improving Construction Safety Per-
deficiencies can be acted on promptly, while formance,’’ Report A- 3, The Business Round-
some may require engineering studies or in- table; The Business Roundtable, 200 Park Av-
depth review of actual procedures and prac- enue, New York, NY 10166. (Report includes
tices. There may be instances where no ac- criteria to evaluate contractor safety per-
tion is necessary and this is a valid response formance and criteria to enhance contractor
to an audit finding. All actions taken, in- safety performance).
139
10. ‘‘Recommended Guidelines for Con- ardous substances has been
tractor Safety and Health,’’ Texas Chemical ascertained);
Council; Texas Chemical Council, 1402 (ii) Corrective actions involving
Nueces Street, Austin, TX 78701-1534.
clean-up operations at sites covered by
11. ‘‘Loss Prevention in the Process Indus-
the Resource Conservation and Recov-
tries,’’ Volumes I and II; Frank P. Lees,
Butterworth; London 1983. ery Act of 1976 (RCRA) as amended (42
12. ‘‘Safety and Health Program Manage- U.S.C. 6901 et seq.);
ment Guidelines,’’ 1989; U.S. Department of (iii) Voluntary clean-up operations at
Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Ad- sites recognized by Federal, state, local
ministration. or other governmental bodies as uncon-
13. ‘‘Safety and Health Guide for the Chem- trolled hazardous waste sites;
ical Industry,’’ 1986, (OSHA 3091); U.S. De- (iv) Operations involving hazardous
partment of Labor, Occupational Safety and wastes that are conducted at treat-
Health Administration; 200 Constitution Av- ment, storage, and disposal (TSD) fa-
enue, N.W., Washington, DC 20210. cilities regulated by 40 CFR parts 264
14. ‘‘Review of Emergency Systems,’’ June and 265 pursuant to RCRA; or by agen-
1988; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
cies under agreement with U.S.E.P.A.
(EPA), Office of Solid Waste and Emergency
Response, Washington, DC 20460. to implement RCRA regulations; and
15. ‘‘Technical Guidance for Hazards Anal- (v) Emergency response operations
ysis, Emergency Planning for Extremely for releases of, or substantial threats of
Hazardous Substances,’’ December 1987; U.S. releases of, hazardous substances with-
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), out regard to the location of the haz-
Federal Emergency Management Adminis- ard.
tration (FEMA) and U.S. Department of (2) Application. (i) All requirements of
Transportation (DOT), Washington, DC 20460. part 1910 and part 1926 of title 29 of the
16. ‘‘Accident Investigation...A New Ap- Code of Federal Regulations apply pur-
proach,’’ 1983, National Safety Council; 444 suant to their terms to hazardous
North Michigan Avenue, Chicago, IL 60611-
waste and emergency response oper-
3991.
17. ‘‘Fire & Explosion Index Hazard Classi-
ations whether covered by this section
fication Guide,’’ 6th Edition, May 1987, Dow or not. If there is a conflict or overlap,
Chemical Company; Midland, Michigan 48674. the provision more protective of em-
18. ‘‘Chemical Exposure Index,’’ May 1988, ployee safety and health shall apply
Dow Chemical Company; Midland, Michigan without regard to 29 CFR 1926.20(e)(1).
48674. (ii) Hazardous substance clean-up op-
[58 FR 35115, June 30, 1993, as amended at 77
erations within the scope of paragraphs
FR 17890, Mar. 26, 2012; 78 FR 9315, Feb. 8, (a)(1)(i) through (a)(1)(iii) of this sec-
2013] tion must comply with all paragraphs
of this section except paragraphs (p)
§ 1926.65 Hazardous waste operations and (q).
and emergency response. (iii) Operations within the scope of
(a) Scope, application, and definitions— paragraph (a)(1)(iv) of this section
(1) Scope. This section covers the fol- must comply only with the require-
lowing operations, unless the employer ments of paragraph (p) of this section.
can demonstrate that the operation NOTES AND EXCEPTIONS: (A) All provisions
does not involve employee exposure or of paragraph (p) of this section cover any
the reasonable possibility for employee treatment, storage or disposal (TSD) oper-
exposure to safety or health hazards: ation regulated by 40 CFR parts 264 and 265
or by state law authorized under RCRA, and
(i) Clean-up operations required by a required to have a permit or interim status
governmental body, whether Federal, from EPA pursuant to 40 CFR 270.1 or from
state, local or other involving haz- a state agency pursuant to RCRA.
ardous substances that are conducted (B) Employers who are not required to
at uncontrolled hazardous waste sites have a permit or interim status because they
(including, but not limited to, the are conditionally exempt small quantity
EPA’s National Priority Site List generators under 40 CFR 261.5 or are genera-
tors who qualify under 40 CFR 262.34 for ex-
(NPL), state priority site lists, sites
emptions from regulation under 40 CFR parts
recommended for the EPA NPL, and 264, 265 and 270 (‘‘excepted employers’’) are
initial investigations of government not covered by paragraphs (p)(1) through
identified sites which are conducted be- (p)(7) of this section. Excepted employers
fore the presence or absence of haz- who are required by the EPA or state agency
140
to have their employees engage in emer- substance. Responses to incidental re-
gency response or who direct their employ- leases of hazardous substances where
ees to engage in emergency response are cov-
the substance can be absorbed, neutral-
ered by paragraph (p)(8) of this section, and
cannot be exempted by (p)(8)(i) of this sec- ized, or otherwise controlled at the
tion. Excepted employers who are not re- time of release by employees in the im-
quired to have employees engage in emer- mediate release area, or by mainte-
gency response, who direct their employees nance personnel are not considered to
to evacuate in the case of such emergencies be emergency responses within the
and who meet the requirements of paragraph
(p)(8)(i) of this section are exempt from the
scope of this standard. Responses to re-
balance of paragraph (p)(8) of this section. leases of hazardous substances where
(C) If an area is used primarily for treat- there is no potential safety or health
ment, storage or disposal, any emergency re- hazard (i.e., fire, explosion, or chemical
sponse operations in that area shall comply exposure) are not considered to be
with paragraph (p)(8) of this section. In other emergency responses.
areas not used primarily for treatment, stor-
age, or disposal, any emergency response op- Facility means (A) any building,
erations shall comply with paragraph (q) of structure, installation, equipment, pipe
this section. Compliance with the require- or pipeline (including any pipe into a
ments of paragraph (q) of this section shall sewer or publicly owned treatment
be deemed to be in compliance with the re- works), well, pit, pond, lagoon, im-
quirements of paragraph (p)(8) of this sec-
poundment, ditch, storage container,
tion.
motor vehicle, rolling stock, or air-
(iv) Emergency response operations craft, or (B) any site or area where a
for releases of, or substantial threats of hazardous substance has been depos-
releases of, hazardous substances which ited, stored, disposed of, or placed, or
are not covered by paragraphs (a)(1)(i) otherwise come to be located; but does
through (a)(1)(iv) of this section must not include any consumer product in
only comply with the requirements of consumer use or any water-borne ves-
paragraph (q) of this section. sel.
(3) Definitions—Buddy system means a Hazardous materials response
system of organizing employees into
(HAZMAT) team means an organized
work groups in such a manner that
group of employees, designated by the
each employee of the work group is
designated to be observed by at least employer, who are expected to perform
one other employee in the work group. work to handle and control actual or
The purpose of the buddy system is to potential leaks or spills of hazardous
provide rapid assistance to employees substances requiring possible close ap-
in the event of an emergency. proach to the substance. The team
Clean-up operation means an oper- members perform responses to releases
ation where hazardous substances are or potential releases of hazardous sub-
removed, contained, incinerated, neu- stances for the purpose of control or
tralized, stabilized, cleared-up, or in stabilization of the incident. A
any other manner processed or handled HAZMAT team is not a fire brigade nor
with the ultimate goal of making the is a typical fire brigade a HAZMAT
site safer for people or the environ- team. A HAZMAT team, however, may
ment. be a separate component of a fire bri-
Decontamination means the removal gade or fire department.
of hazardous substances from employ- Hazardous substance means any sub-
ees and their equipment to the extent stance designated or listed under para-
necessary to preclude the occurrence of graphs (A) through (D) of this defini-
foreseeable adverse health affects. tion, exposure to which results or may
Emergency response or responding to result in adverse affects on the health
emergencies means a response effort by or safety of employees:
employees from outside the immediate (A) Any substance defined under sec-
release area or by other designated re-
tion 101(14) of CERCLA;
sponders (i.e., mutual-aid groups, local
fire departments, etc.) to an occurrence (B) Any biological agent and other
which results, or is likely to result, in disease-causing agent which after re-
an uncontrolled release of a hazardous lease into the environment and upon
141
exposure, ingestion, inhalation, or as- vidual’s ability to escape from a dan-
similation into any person, either di- gerous atmosphere.
rectly from the environment or indi- Oxygen deficiency means that con-
rectly by ingestion through food centration of oxygen by volume below
chains, will or may reasonably be an- which atmosphere supplying res-
ticipated to cause death, disease, be- piratory protection must be provided.
havioral abnormalities, cancer, genetic It exists in atmospheres where the per-
mutation, physiological malfunctions centage of oxygen by volume is less
(including malfunctions in reproduc- than 19.5 percent oxygen.
tion) or physical deformations in such Permissible exposure limit means the
persons or their offspring; exposure, inhalation or dermal permis-
(C) Any substance listed by the U.S. sible exposure limit specified either in
Department of Transportation as haz- § 1926.55, elsewhere in subpart D, or in
ardous materials under 49 CFR 172.101 other pertinent sections of this part.
and appendices; and Published exposure level means the ex-
(D) Hazardous waste as herein de- posure limits published in ‘‘NIOSH
fined. Recommendations for Occupational
Hazardous waste means—(A) A waste Health Standards’’ dated 1986 incor-
or combination of wastes as defined in porated by reference, or if none is spec-
40 CFR 261.3, or ified, the exposure limits published in
(B) Those substances defined as haz- the standards specified by the Amer-
ardous wastes in 49 CFR 171.8. ican Conference of Governmental In-
Hazardous waste operation means any dustrial Hygienists in their publication
operation conducted within the scope ‘‘Threshold Limit Values and Biologi-
of this standard. cal Exposure Indices for 1987–88’’ dated
Hazardous waste site or Site means 1987 incorporated by reference.
any facility or location within the Post emergency response means that
scope of this standard at which haz- portion of an emergency response per-
ardous waste operations take place. formed after the immediate threat of a
Health hazard means a chemical or a release has been stabilized or elimi-
pathogen where acute or chronic nated and clean-up of the site has
health effects may occur in exposed begun. If post emergency response is
employees. It also includes stress due performed by an employer’s own em-
to temperature extremes. The term ployees who were part of the initial
health hazard includes chemicals that emergency response, it is considered to
are classified in accordance with the be part of the initial response and not
Hazard Communication Standard, post emergency response. However, if a
§ 1910.1200, as posing one of the fol- group of an employer’s own employees,
lowing hazardous effects: acute tox- separate from the group providing ini-
icity (any route of exposure); skin cor- tial response, performs the clean-up op-
rosion or irritation; serious eye dam- eration, then the separate group of em-
age or eye irritation; respiratory or ployees would be considered to be per-
skin sensitization; germ cell mutage- forming post-emergency response and
nicity; carcinogenicity; reproductive subject to paragraph (q)(11) of this sec-
toxicity; specific target organ toxicity tion.
(single or repeated exposure); aspira- Qualified person means a person with
tion toxicity or simple asphyxiant. (See specific training, knowledge and expe-
Appendix A to § 1910.1200—Health Haz- rience in the area for which the person
ard Criteria (Mandatory) for the cri- has the responsibility and the author-
teria for determining whether a chem- ity to control.
ical is classified as a health hazard.) Site safety and health supervisor (or of-
IDLH or Immediately dangerous to life ficial) means the individual located on
or health means an atmospheric con- a hazardous waste site who is respon-
centration of any toxic, corrosive or sible to the employer and has the au-
asphyxiant substance that poses an im- thority and knowledge necessary to
mediate threat to life or would cause implement the site safety and health
irreversible or delayed adverse health plan and verify compliance with appli-
effects or would interfere with an indi- cable safety and health requirements.
142
Small quantity generator means a gen- (F) The employer’s standard oper-
erator of hazardous wastes who in any ating procedures for safety and health;
calendar month generates no more and
than 1,000 kilograms (2,205 pounds) of (G) Any necessary interface between
hazardous waste in that month. general program and site specific ac-
Uncontrolled hazardous waste site, tivities.
means an area identified as an uncon- (iii) Site excavation. Site excavations
trolled hazardous waste site by a gov- created during initial site preparation
ernmental body, whether Federal, or during hazardous waste operations
state, local or other where an accumu- shall be shored or sloped as appropriate
lation of hazardous substances creates to prevent accidental collapse in ac-
a threat to the health and safety of in- cordance with subpart P of 29 CFR part
dividuals or the environment or both. 1926.
Some sites are found on public lands (iv) Contractors and sub-contractors.
such as those created by former munic- An employer who retains contractor or
ipal, county or state landfills where il- sub-contractor services for work in
legal or poorly managed waste disposal hazardous waste operations shall in-
has taken place. Other sites are found form those contractors, sub-contrac-
on private property, often belonging to tors, or their representatives of the
generators or former generators of haz- site emergency response procedures
ardous substance wastes. Examples of and any potential fire, explosion,
such sites include, but are not limited health, safety or other hazards of the
to, surface impoundments, landfills, hazardous waste operation that have
dumps, and tank or drum farms. Nor- been identified by the employer, in-
mal operations at TSD sites are not cluding those identified in the employ-
covered by this definition. er’s information program.
(b) Safety and health program. (v) Program availability. The written
safety and health program shall be
NOTE TO (b): Safety and health programs made available to any contractor or
developed and implemented to meet other
subcontractor or their representative
Federal, state, or local regulations are con-
sidered acceptable in meeting this require- who will be involved with the haz-
ment if they cover or are modified to cover ardous waste operation; to employees;
the topics required in this paragraph. An ad- to employee designated representa-
ditional or separate safety and health pro- tives; to OSHA personnel, and to per-
gram is not required by this paragraph. sonnel of other Federal, state, or local
agencies with regulatory authority
(1) General. (i) Employers shall de-
over the site.
velop and implement a written safety
(2) Organizational structure part of the
and health program for their employ-
site program—(i) The organizationa1
ees involved in hazardous waste oper-
structure part of the program shall es-
ations. The program shall be designed
tablish the specific chain of command
to identify, evaluate, and control safe-
and specify the overall responsibilities
ty and health hazards, and provide for
of supervisors and employees. It shall
emergency response for hazardous
include, at a minimum, the following
waste operations.
elements:
(ii) The written safety and health
(A) A general supervisor who has the
program shall incorporate the fol-
responsibility and authority to direct
lowing:
all hazardous waste operations.
(A) An organizational structure; (B) A site safety and health super-
(B) A comprehensive workplan; visor who has the responsibility and
(C) A site-specific safety and health authority to develop and implement
plan which need not repeat the employ- the site safety and health plan and
er’s standard operating procedures re- verify compliance.
quired in paragraph (b)(1)(ii)(F) of this (C) All other personnel needed for
section; hazardous waste site operations and
(D) The safety and health training emergency response and their general
program; functions and responsibilities.
(E) The medical surveillance pro- (D) The lines of authority, responsi-
gram; bility, and communication.
143
(ii) The organizational structure (D) Medical surveillance require-
shall be reviewed and updated as nec- ments in accordance with the program
essary to reflect the current status of in paragraph (f) of this section.
waste site operations. (E) Frequency and types of air moni-
(3) Comprehensive workplan part of the toring, personnel monitoring, and envi-
site program. The comprehensive ronmental sampling techniques and in-
workplan part of the program shall ad- strumentation to be used, including
dress the tasks and objectives of the methods of maintenance and calibra-
site operations and the logistics and re- tion of monitoring and sampling equip-
sources required to reach those tasks ment to be used.
and objectives. (F) Site control measures in accord-
(i) The comprehensive workplan shall ance with the site control program re-
address anticipated clean-up activities quired in paragraph (d) of this section.
as well as normal operating procedures (G) Decontamination procedures in
which need not repeat the employer’s accordance with paragraph (k) of this
procedures available elsewhere. section.
(ii) The comprehensive workplan
(H) An emergency response plan
shall define work tasks and objectives
meeting the requirements of paragraph
and identify the methods for accom-
(l) of this section for safe and effective
plishing those tasks and objectives.
responses to emergencies, including
(iii) The comprehensive workplan
the necessary PPE and other equip-
shall establish personnel requirements
ment.
for implementing the plan.
(iv) The comprehensive workplan (I) Confined space entry procedures.
shall provide for the implementation of (J) A spill containment program
the training required in paragraph (e) meeting the requirements of paragraph
of this section. (j) of this section.
(v) The comprehensive workplan (iii) Pre-entry briefing. The site spe-
shall provide for the implementation of cific safety and health plan shall pro-
the required informational programs vide for pre-entry briefings to be held
required in paragraph (i) of this sec- prior to initiating any site activity,
tion. and at such other times as necessary to
(vi) The comprehensive workplan ensure that employees are apprised of
shall provide for the implementation of the site safety and health plan and
the medical surveillance program de- that this plan is being followed. The in-
scribed in paragraph (f) of this section. formation and data obtained from site
(4) Site-specific safety and health plan characterization and analysis work re-
part of the program—(i) General. The site quired in paragraph (c) of this section
safety and health plan, which must be shall be used to prepare and update the
kept on site, shall address the safety site safety and health plan.
and health hazards of each phase of site (iv) Effectiveness of site safety and
operation and include the requirements health plan. Inspections shall be con-
and procedures for employee protec- ducted by the site safety and health su-
tion. pervisor or, in the absence of that indi-
(ii) Elements. The site safety and vidual, another individual who is
health plan, as a minimum, shall ad- knowledgeable in occupational safety
dress the following: and health, acting on behalf of the em-
(A) A safety and health risk or haz- ployer as necessary to determine the
ard analysis for each site task and op- effectiveness of the site safety and
eration found in the workplan. health plan. Any deficiencies in the ef-
(B) Employee training assignments fectiveness of the site safety and
to assure compliance with paragraph health plan shall be corrected by the
(e) of this section. employer.
(C) Personal protective equipment to (c) Site characterization and analysis—
be used by employees for each of the (1) General. Hazardous waste sites shall
site tasks and operations being con- be evaluated in accordance with this
ducted as required by the personal pro- paragraph to identify specific site haz-
tective equipment program in para- ards and to determine the appropriate
graph (g)(5) of this section. safety and health control procedures
144
needed to protect employees from the (5) Personal protective equipment. Per-
identified hazards. sonal protective equipment (PPE) shall
(2) Preliminary evaluation. A prelimi- be provided and used during initial site
nary evaluation of a site’s characteris- entry in accordance with the following
tics shall be performed prior to site requirements:
entry by a qualified person in order to (i) Based upon the results of the pre-
aid in the selection of appropriate em- liminary site evaluation, an ensemble
ployee protection methods prior to site of PPE shall be selected and used dur-
entry. Immediately after initial site ing initial site entry which will provide
entry, a more detailed evaluation of protection to a level of exposure below
the site’s specific characteristics shall permissible exposure limits and pub-
be performed by a qualified person in lished exposure levels for known or sus-
order to further identify existing site pected hazardous substances and
hazards and to further aid in the selec- health hazards, and which will provide
tion of the appropriate engineering protection against other known and
controls and personal protective equip-
suspected hazards identified during the
ment for the tasks to be performed.
preliminary site evaluation. If there is
(3) Hazard identification. All suspected no permissible exposure limit or pub-
conditions that may pose inhalation or
lished exposure level, the employer
skin absorption hazards that are imme-
may use other published studies and in-
diately dangerous to life or health
formation as a guide to appropriate
(IDLH), or other conditions that may
cause death or serious harm, shall be personal protective equipment.
identified during the preliminary sur- (ii) If positive-pressure self-contained
vey and evaluated during the detailed breathing apparatus is not used as part
survey. Examples of such hazards in- of the entry ensemble, and if res-
clude, but are not limited to, confined piratory protection is warranted by the
space entry, potentially explosive or potential hazards identified during the
flammable situations, visible vapor preliminary site evaluation, an escape
clouds, or areas where biological indi- self-contained breathing apparatus of
cators such as dead animals or vegeta- at least five minute’s duration shall be
tion are located. carried by employees during initial site
(4) Required information. The fol- entry.
lowing information to the extent avail- (iii) If the preliminary site evalua-
able shall be obtained by the employer tion does not produce sufficient infor-
prior to allowing employees to enter a mation to identify the hazards or sus-
site: pected hazards of the site, an ensemble
(i) Location and approximate size of providing protection equivalent to
the site. Level B PPE shall be provided as min-
(ii) Description of the response activ- imum protection, and direct reading
ity and/or the job task to be performed. instruments shall be used as appro-
(iii) Duration of the planned em- priate for identifying IDLH conditions.
ployee activity. (See appendix B for a description of
(iv) Site topography and accessibility Level B hazards and the recommenda-
by air and roads. tions for Level B protective equip-
(v) Safety and health hazards ex- ment.)
pected at the site. (iv) Once the hazards of the site have
(vi) Pathways for hazardous sub- been identified, the appropriate PPE
stance dispersion. shall be selected and used in accord-
(vii) Present status and capabilities ance with paragraph (g) of this section.
of emergency response teams that (6) Monitoring. The following moni-
would provide assistance to hazardous toring shall be conducted during initial
waste clean-up site employees at the site entry when the site evaluation
time of an emergency. produces information that shows the
(viii) Hazardous substances and potential for ionizing radiation or
health hazards involved or expected at IDLH conditions, or when the site in-
the site, and their chemical and phys- formation is not sufficient reasonably
ical properties. to eliminate these possible conditions:
145
(i) Monitoring with direct reading in- (2) Site control program. A site control
struments for hazardous levels of ion- program for protecting employees
izing radiation. which is part of the employer’s site
(ii) Monitoring the air with appro- safety and health program required in
priate direct reading test equipment paragraph (b) of this section shall be
(i.e., combustible gas meters, detector developed during the planning stages of
tubes) for IDLH and other conditions a hazardous waste clean-up operation
that may cause death or serious harm and modified as necessary as new infor-
(combustible or explosive atmospheres, mation becomes available.
oxygen deficiency, toxic substances). (3) Elements of the site control program.
(iii) Visually observing for signs of The site control program shall, as a
actual or potential IDLH or other dan- minimum, include: A site map; site
gerous conditions. work zones; the use of a ‘‘buddy sys-
(iv) An ongoing air monitoring pro- tem’’; site communications including
gram in accordance with paragraph (h) alerting means for emergencies; the
of this section shall be implemented standard operating procedures or safe
after site characterization has deter- work practices; and, identification of
mined the site is safe for the start-up the nearest medical assistance. Where
of operations. these requirements are covered else-
(7) Risk identification. Once the pres-
where they need not be repeated.
ence and concentrations of specific
hazardous substances and health haz- (e) Training—(1) General. (i) All em-
ards have been established, the risks ployees working on site (such as but
associated with these substances shall not limited to equipment operators,
be identified. Employees who will be general laborers and others) exposed to
working on the site shall be informed hazardous substances, health hazards,
of any risks that have been identified. or safety hazards and their supervisors
In situations covered by the Hazard and management responsible for the
Communication Standard, 29 CFR site shall receive training meeting the
1926.59, training required by that stand- requirements of this paragraph before
ard need not be duplicated. they are permitted to engage in haz-
ardous waste operations that could ex-
NOTE TO (c)(7). Risks to consider include, pose them to hazardous substances,
but are not limited to: safety, or health hazards, and they
(a) Exposures exceeding the permissible ex-
posure limits and published exposure levels. shall receive review training as speci-
(b) IDLH concentrations. fied in this paragraph.
(c) Potential skin absorption and irritation (ii) Employees shall not be permitted
sources. to participate in or supervise field ac-
(d) Potential eye irritation sources. tivities until they have been trained to
(e) Explosion sensitivity and flammability a level required by their job function
ranges.
(f) Oxygen deficiency. and responsibility.
(2) Elements to be covered. The train-
(8) Employee notification. Any infor- ing shall thoroughly cover the fol-
mation concerning the chemical, phys- lowing:
ical, and toxicologic properties of each (i) Names of personnel and alternates
substance known or expected to be responsible for site safety and health;
present on site that is available to the
(ii) Safety, health and other hazards
employer and relevant to the duties an
present on the site;
employee is expected to perform shall
be made available to the affected em- (iii) Use of personal protective equip-
ployees prior to the commencement of ment;
their work activities. The employer (iv) Work practices by which the em-
may utilize information developed for ployee can minimize risks from haz-
the hazard communication standard for ards;
this purpose. (v) Safe use of engineering controls
(d) Site control—(1) General. Appro- and equipment on the site;
priate site control procedures shall be (vi) Medical surveillance require-
implemented to control employee expo- ments, including recognition of symp-
sure to hazardous substances before toms and signs which might indicate
clean-up work begins. overexposure to hazards; and
146
(vii) The contents of paragraphs (G) sponsibility is employees covered by
through (J) of the site safety and paragraphs (e)(3)(ii) and (e)(3)(iii)) and
health plan set forth in paragraph at least eight additional hours of spe-
(b)(4)(ii) of this section. cialized training at the time of job as-
(3) Initial training. (i) General site signment on such topics as, but not
workers (such as equipment operators, limited to, the employer’s safety and
general laborers and supervisory per- health program and the associated em-
sonnel) engaged in hazardous substance ployee training program, personal pro-
removal or other activities which ex- tective equipment program, spill con-
pose or potentially expose workers to tainment program, and health hazard
hazardous substances and health haz- monitoring procedure and techniques.
ards shall receive a minimum of 40 (5) Qualifications for trainers. Trainers
hours of instruction off the site, and a shall be qualified to instruct employees
minimum of three days actual field ex- about the subject matter that is being
perience under the direct supervision of presented in training. Such trainers
a trained, experienced supervisor. shall have satisfactorily completed a
(ii) Workers on site only occasionally training program for teaching the sub-
for a specific limited task (such as, but jects they are expected to teach, or
not limited to, ground water moni- they shall have the academic creden-
toring, land surveying, or geo-physical tials and instructional experience nec-
surveying) and who are unlikely to be essary for teaching the subjects. In-
exposed over permissible exposure lim- structors shall demonstrate competent
its and published exposure limits shall instructional skills and knowledge of
receive a minimum of 24 hours of in- the applicable subject matter.
struction off the site, and the min-
(6) Training certification. Employees
imum of one day actual field experi-
and supervisors that have received and
ence under the direct supervision of a
successfully completed the training
trained, experienced supervisor.
and field experience specified in para-
(iii) Workers regularly on site who
graphs (e)(1) through (e)(4) of this sec-
work in areas which have been mon-
tion shall be certified by their instruc-
itored and fully characterized indi-
tor or the head instructor and trained
cating that exposures are under per-
missible exposure limits and published supervisor as having successfully com-
exposure limits where respirators are pleted the necessary training. A writ-
not necessary, and the characterization ten certificate shall be given to each
indicates that there are no health haz- person so certified. Any person who has
ards or the possibility of an emergency not been so certified or who does not
developing, shall receive a minimum of meet the requirements of paragraph
24 hours of instruction off the site and (e)(9) of this section shall be prohibited
the minimum of one day actual field from engaging in hazardous waste oper-
experience under the direct supervision ations.
of a trained, experienced supervisor. (7) Emergency response. Employees
(iv) Workers with 24 hours of training who are engaged in responding to haz-
who are covered by paragraphs (e)(3)(ii) ardous emergency situations at haz-
and (e)(3)(iii) of this section, and who ardous waste clean-up sites that may
become general site workers or who are expose them to hazardous substances
required to wear respirators, shall have shall be trained in how to respond to
the additional 16 hours and two days of such expected emergencies.
training necessary to total the training (8) Refresher training. Employees spec-
specified in paragraph (e)(3)(i). ified in paragraph (e)(1) of this section,
(4) Management and supervisor train- and managers and supervisors specified
ing. On-site management and super- in paragraph (e)(4) of this section, shall
visors directly responsible for, or who receive eight hours of refresher train-
supervise employees engaged in, haz- ing annually on the items specified in
ardous waste operations shall receive paragraph (e)(2) and/or (e)(4) of this
40 hours initial training, and three section, any critique of incidents that
days of supervised field experience (the have occurred in the past year that can
training may be reduced to 24 hours serve as training examples of related
and one day if the only area of their re- work, and other relevant topics.
147
(9) Equivalent training. Employers ployee covered under paragraph (f)(2) of
who can show by documentation or cer- this section on the following schedules:
tification that an employee’s work ex- (i) For employees covered under
perience and/or training has resulted in paragraphs (f)(2)(i), (f)(2)(ii), and
training equivalent to that training re- (f)(2)(iv):
quired in paragraphs (e)(1) through (A) Prior to assignment;
(e)(4) of this section shall not be re- (B) At least once every twelve
quired to provide the initial training months for each employee covered un-
requirements of those paragraphs to less the attending physician believes a
such employees and shall provide a longer interval (not greater than bien-
copy of the certification or documenta- nially) is appropriate;
tion to the employee upon request. (C) At termination of employment or
However, certified employees or em- reassignment to an area where the em-
ployees with equivalent training new ployee would not be covered if the em-
to a site shall receive appropriate, site ployee has not had an examination
specific training before site entry and within the last six months;
have appropriate supervised field expe- (D) As soon as possible upon notifica-
rience at the new site. Equivalent tion by an employee that the employee
training includes any academic train- has developed signs or symptoms indi-
ing or the training that existing em- cating possible overexposure to haz-
ployees might have already received ardous substances or health hazards, or
from actual hazardous waste site work that the employee has been injured or
experience. exposed above the permissible exposure
(f) Medical surveillance—(1) General. limits or published exposure levels in
Employers engaged in operations speci- an emergency situation;
fied in paragraphs (a)(1)(i) through (E) At more frequent times, if the ex-
(a)(1)(iv) of this section and not cov- amining physician determines that an
ered by (a)(2)(iii) exceptions and em- increased frequency of examination is
ployers of employees specified in para- medically necessary.
graph (q)(9) shall institute a medical (ii) For employees covered under
surveillance program in accordance paragraph (f)(2)(iii) and for all employ-
with this paragraph. ees including those of employers cov-
ered by paragraph (a)(1)(v) who may
(2) Employees covered. The medical
have been injured, received a health
surveillance program shall be insti-
impairment, developed signs or symp-
tuted by the employer for the following
toms which may have resulted from ex-
employees:
posure to hazardous substances result-
(i) All employees who are or may be ing from an emergency incident, or ex-
exposed to hazardous substances or posed during an emergency incident to
health hazards at or above the permis- hazardous substances at concentra-
sible exposure limits or, if there is no tions above the permissible exposure
permissible exposure limit, above the limits or the published exposure levels
published exposure levels for these sub- without the necessary personal protec-
stances, without regard to the use of tive equipment being used:
respirators, for 30 days or more a year; (A) As soon as possible following the
(ii) All employees who wear a res- emergency incident or development of
pirator for 30 days or more a year or as signs or symptoms;
required by § 1926.103; (B) At additional times, if the exam-
(iii) All employees who are injured, ining physician determines that follow-
become ill or develop signs or symp- up examinations or consultations are
toms due to possible overexposure in- medically necessary.
volving hazardous substances or health (4) Content of medical examinations and
hazards from an emergency response or consultations. (i) Medical examinations
hazardous waste operation; and required by paragraph (f)(3) of this sec-
(iv) Members of HAZMAT teams. tion shall include a medical and work
(3) Frequency of medical examinations history (or updated history if one is in
and consultations. Medical examina- the employee’s file) with special em-
tions and consultations shall be made phasis on symptoms related to the han-
available by the employer to each em- dling of hazardous substances and
148
health hazards, and to fitness for duty (C) The results of the medical exam-
including the ability to wear any re- ination and tests if requested by the
quired PPE under conditions (i.e., tem- employee.
perature extremes) that may be ex- (D) A statement that the employee
pected at the work site. has been informed by the physician of
(ii) The content of medical examina- the results of the medical examination
tions or consultations made available and any medical conditions which re-
to employees pursuant to paragraph (f) quire further examination or treat-
shall be determined by the attending ment.
physician. The guidelines in the Occu- (ii) The written opinion obtained by
pational Safety and Health Guidance the employer shall not reveal specific
Manual for Hazardous Waste Site Activi- findings or diagnoses unrelated to oc-
ties (See appendix D, Reference #10) cupational exposures.
should be consulted. (8) Recordkeeping. (i) An accurate
(5) Examination bv a physician and record of the medical surveillance re-
costs. All medical examinations and quired by paragraph (f) of this section
procedures shall be performed by or shall be retained. This record shall be
under the supervision of a licensed phy- retained for the period specified and
sician, preferably one knowledgeable in meet the criteria of 29 CFR 1926.33.
occupational medicine, and shall be (ii) The record required in paragraph
provided without cost to the employee, (f)(8)(i) of this section shall include at
without loss of pay, and at a reason- least the following information:
able time and place. (A) The name and social security
number of the employee;
(6) Information provided to the physi-
(B) Physician’s written opinions, rec-
cian. The employer shall provide one
ommended limitations, and results of
copy of this standard and its appen-
examinations and tests;
dices to the attending physician, and in
(C) Any employee medical com-
addition the following for each em-
plaints related to exposure to haz-
ployee:
ardous substances;
(i) A description of the employee’s (D) A copy of the information pro-
duties as they relate to the employee’s vided to the examining physician by
exposures. the employer, with the exception of the
(ii) The employee’s exposure levels or standard and its appendices.
anticipated exposure levels. (g) Engineering controls, work prac-
(iii) A description of any personal tices, and personal protective equipment
protective equipment used or to be for employee protection. Engineering
used. controls, work practices, personal pro-
(iv) Information from previous med- tective equipment, or a combination of
ical examinations of the employee these shall be implemented in accord-
which is not readily available to the ance with this paragraph to protect
examining physician. employees from exposure to hazardous
(v) Information required by § 1926.103. substances and safety and health haz-
(7) Physician’s written opinion. (i) The ards.
employer shall obtain and furnish the (1) Engineering controls, work practices
employee with a copy of a written and PPE for substances regulated either
opinion from the attending physician in § 1926.55, elsewhere in subpart D, or in
containing the following: other pertinent sections of this part. (i)
(A) The physician’s opinion as to Engineering controls and work prac-
whether the employee has any detected tices shall be instituted to reduce and
medical conditions which would place maintain employee exposure to or
the employee at increased risk of ma- below the permissible exposure limits
terial impairment of the employee’s for substances regulated either in
health from work in hazardous waste § 1926.55 or other pertinent sections of
operations or emergency response, or this part, except to the extent that
from respirator use. such controls and practices are not fea-
(B) The physician’s recommended sible.
limitations upon the employee’s as- NOTE TO (g)(1)(i): Engineering controls
signed work. which may be feasible include the use of
149
pressurized cabs or control booths on equip- (iii) Positive pressure self-contained
ment, and/or the use of remotely operated breathing apparatus, or positive pres-
material handling equipment. Work prac- sure air-line respirators equipped with
tices which may be feasible are removing all
an escape air supply, shall be used
non-essential employees from potential ex-
posure during opening of drums, wetting when chemical exposure levels present
down dusty operations and locating employ- will create a substantial possibility of
ees upwind of possible hazards. immediate death, immediate serious
(ii) Whenever engineering controls and illness or injury, or impair the ability
work practices are not feasible or not re- to escape.
quired, any reasonable combination of engi- (iv) Totally-encapsulating chemical
neering controls, work practices and PPE protective suits (protection equivalent
shall be used to reduce and maintain em-
ployee exposures to or below the permissible
to Level A protection as recommended
exposure limits or dose limits for substances in appendix B) shall be used in condi-
regulated either in § 1926.55 or other perti- tions where skin absorption of a haz-
nent sections of this part. ardous substance may result in a sub-
(iii) The employer shall not implement a stantial possibility of immediate
schedule of employee rotation as a means of death, immediate serious illness or in-
compliance with permissible exposure limits jury, or impair the ability to escape.
or dose limits except when there is no other (v) The level of protection provided
feasible way of complying with the airborne
or dermal dose limits for ionizing radiation.
by PPE selection shall be increased
(iv) The provisions of subpart D shall be when additional information on site
followed. conditions indicates that increased
protection is necessary to reduce em-
(2) Engineering controls, work practices, ployee exposures below permissible ex-
and PPE for substances not regulated ei- posure limits and published exposure
ther in § 1926.55, elsewhere in subpart D, levels for hazardous substances and
or in other pertinent sections of this part. health hazards. (See appendix B for
An appropriate combination of engi- guidance on selecting PPE ensembles.)
neering controls, work practices and
personal protective equipment shall be NOTE TO (g)(3): The level of employee pro-
used to reduce and maintain employee tection provided may be decreased when ad-
ditional information or site conditions show
exposure to or below published expo-
that decreased protection will not result in
sure levels for hazardous substances hazardous exposures to employees.
and health hazards not regulated either
in § 1926.55, elsewhere in subpart D, or (vi) Personal protective equipment
in other pertinent sections of this part. shall be selected and used to meet the
The employer may use the published requirements of subpart E of this part
literature and MSDS as a guide in and additional requirements specified
making the employer’s determination in this section.
as to what level of protection the em- (4) Totally-encapsulating chemical pro-
ployer believes is appropriate for haz- tective suits. (i) Totally-encapsulating
ardous substances and health hazards suits shall protect employees from the
for which there is no permissible expo- particular hazards which are identified
sure limit or published exposure limit. during site characterization and anal-
(3) Personal protective equipment selec- ysis.
tion. (i) Personal protective equipment (ii) Totally-encapsulating suits shall
(PPE) shall be selected and used which be capable of maintaining positive air
will protect employees from the haz- pressure. (See appendix A for a test
ards and potential hazards they are method which may be used to evaluate
likely to encounter as identified during this requirement.)
the site characterization and analysis. (iii) Totally-encapsulating suits shall
(ii) Personal protective equipment be capable of preventing inward test
selection shall be based on an evalua- gas leakage of more than 0.5 percent.
tion of the performance characteristics (See appendix A for a test method
of the PPE relative to the require- which may be used to evaluate this re-
ments and limitations of the site, the quirement.)
task-specific conditions and duration, (5) Personal protective equipment (PPE)
and the hazards and potential hazards program. A written personal protective
identified at the site. equipment program, which is part of
150
the employer’s safety and health pro- condition such as the presence of flam-
gram required in paragraph (b) of this mable atmospheres or oxygen-deficient
section or required in paragraph (p)(1) environments.
of this section and which is also a part (3) Periodic monitoring. Periodic moni-
of the site-specific safety and health toring shall be conducted when the pos-
plan shall be established. The PPE pro- sibility of an IDLH condition or flam-
gram shall address the elements listed mable atmosphere has developed or
below. When elements, such as donning when there is indication that exposures
and doffing procedures, are provided by may have risen over permissible expo-
the manufacturer of a piece of equip- sure limits or published exposure levels
ment and are attached to the plan, since prior monitoring. Situations
they need not be rewritten into the where it shall be considered whether
plan as long as they adequately address the possibility that exposures have
the procedure or element. risen are as follows:
(i) PPE selection based upon site haz- (i) When work begins on a different
ards, portion of the site.
(ii) PPE use and limitations of the (ii) When contaminants other than
equipment, those previously identified are being
(iii) Work mission duration, handled.
(iv) PPE maintenance and storage, (iii) When a different type of oper-
(v) PPE decontamination and dis- ation is initiated (e.g., drum opening as
posal, opposed to exploratory well drilling).
(vi) PPE training and proper fitting, (iv) When employees are handling
(vii) PPE donning and doffing proce- leaking drums or containers or work-
dures, ing in areas with obvious liquid con-
(viii) PPE inspection procedures tamination (e.g., a spill or lagoon).
prior to, during, and after use, (4) Monitoring of high-risk employees.
(ix) Evaluation of the effectiveness of After the actual clean-up phase of any
the PPE program, and hazardous waste operation commences;
(x) Limitations during temperature for example, when soil, surface water
extremes, heat stress, and other appro- or containers are moved or disturbed;
priate medical considerations. the employer shall monitor those em-
(h) Monitoring—(1) General. (i) Moni- ployees likely to have the highest ex-
toring shall be performed in accord- posures to hazardous substances and
ance with this paragraph where there health hazards likely to be present
above permissible exposure limits or
may be a question of employee expo-
published exposure levels by using per-
sure to hazardous concentrations of
sonal sampling frequently enough to
hazardous substances in order to assure
characterize employee exposures. If the
proper selection of engineering con-
employees likely to have the highest
trols, work practices and personal pro-
exposure are over permissible exposure
tective equipment so that employees
limits or published exposure limits,
are not exposed to levels which exceed
then monitoring shall continue to de-
permissible exposure limits, or pub-
termine all employees likely to be
lished exposure levels if there are no
above those limits. The employer may
permissible exposure limits, for haz-
utilize a representative sampling ap-
ardous substances.
proach by documenting that the em-
(ii) Air monitoring shall be used to
ployees and chemicals chosen for moni-
identify and quantify airborne levels of
toring are based on the criteria stated
hazardous substances and safety and
above.
health hazards in order to determine
the appropriate level of employee pro- NOTE TO (h): It is not required to monitor
tection needed on site. employees engaged in site characterization
(2) Initial entry. Upon initial entry, operations covered by paragraph (c) of this
section.
representative air monitoring shall be
conducted to identify any IDLH condi- (i) Informational programs. Employers
tion, exposure over permissible expo- shall develop and implement a pro-
sure limits or published exposure lev- gram, which is part of the employer’s
els, exposure over a radioactive mate- safety and health program required in
rial’s dose limits or other dangerous paragraph (b) of this section, to inform
151
employees, contractors, and sub- (ix) Drums and containers that can-
contractors (or their representative) not be moved without rupture, leakage,
actually engaged in hazardous waste or spillage shall be emptied into a
operations of the nature, level and de- sound container using a device classi-
gree of exposure likely as a result of fied for the material being transferred.
participation in such hazardous waste (x) A ground-penetrating system or
operations. Employees, contractors and other type of detection system or de-
subcontractors working outside of the vice shall be used to estimate the loca-
operations part of a site are not cov- tion and depth of buried drums or con-
ered by this standard. tainers.
(j) Handling drums and containers—(1) (xi) Soil or covering material shall be
General. (i) Hazardous substances and removed with caution to prevent drum
contaminated soils, liquids, and other or container rupture.
residues shall be handled, transported, (xii) Fire extinguishing equipment
labeled, and disposed of in accordance meeting the requirements of subpart F
with this paragraph. of this part shall be on hand and ready
(ii) Drums and containers used dur- for use to control incipient fires.
ing the clean-up shall meet the appro- (2) Opening drums and containers. The
priate DOT, OSHA, and EPA regula- following procedures shall be followed
tions for the wastes that they contain. in areas where drums or containers are
(iii) When practical, drums and con- being opened:
tainers shall be inspected and their in-
(i) Where an airline respirator system
tegrity shall be assured prior to being
is used, connections to the source of air
moved. Drums or containers that can-
supply shall be protected from con-
not be inspected before being moved
tamination and the entire system shall
because of storage conditions (i.e., bur-
be protected from physical damage.
ied beneath the earth, stacked behind
other drums, stacked several tiers high (ii) Employees not actually involved
in a pile, etc.) shall be moved to an ac- in opening drums or containers shall be
cessible location and inspected prior to kept a safe distance from the drums or
further handling. containers being opened.
(iv) Unlabelled drums and containers (iii) If employees must work near or
shall be considered to contain haz- adjacent to drums or containers being
ardous substances and handled accord- opened, a suitable shield that does not
ingly until the contents are positively interfere with the work operation shall
identified and labeled. be placed between the employee and
(v) Site operations shall be organized the drums or containers being opened
to minimize the amount of drum or to protect the employee in case of acci-
container movement. dental explosion.
(vi) Prior to movement of drums or (iv) Controls for drum or container
containers, all employees exposed to opening equipment, monitoring equip-
the transfer operation shall be warned ment, and fire suppression equipment
of the potential hazards associated shall be located behind the explosion-
with the contents of the drums or con- resistant barrier.
tainers. (v) When there is a reasonable possi-
(vii) U.S. Department of Transpor- bility of flammable atmospheres being
tation specified salvage drums or con- present, material handling equipment
tainers and suitable quantities of prop- and hand tools shall be of the type to
er absorbent shall be kept available prevent sources of ignition.
and used in areas where spills, leaks, or (vi) Drums and containers shall be
ruptures may occur. opened in such a manner that excess
(viii) Where major spills may occur, a interior pressure will be safely re-
spill containment program, which is lieved. If pressure can not be relieved
part of the employer’s safety and from a remote location, appropriate
health program required in paragraph shielding shall be placed between the
(b) of this section, shall be imple- employee and the drums or containers
mented to contain and isolate the en- to reduce the risk of employee injury.
tire volume of the hazardous substance (vii) Employees shall not stand upon
being transferred. or work from drums or containers.
152
(3) Material handling equipment. Mate- Transportation regulations. Employers and
rial handiing equipment used to trans- their shippers should refer to 49 CFR 173.21
fer drums and containers shall be se- and 173.50.
lected, positioned and operated to min- (6) Laboratory waste packs. In addition
imize sources of ignition related to the to the requirements of paragraph (j)(5)
equipment from igniting vapors re- of this section, the following pre-
leased from ruptured drums or con- cautions shall be taken, as a minimum,
tainers. in handling laboratory waste packs
(4) Radioactive wastes. Drums and con-
(lab packs):
tainers containing radioactive wastes
shall not be handled until such time as (i) Lab packs shall be opened only
their hazard to employees is properly when necessary and then only by an in-
assessed. dividual knowledgeable in the inspec-
(5) Shock sensitive wastes. As a min- tion, classification, and segregation of
imum, the following special pre- the containers within the pack accord-
cautions shall be taken when drums ing to the hazards of the wastes.
and containers containing or suspected (ii) If crystalline material is noted on
of containing shock-sensitive wastes any container, the contents shall be
are handled: handled as a shock-sensitive waste
(i) All non-essential employees shall until the contents are identified.
be evacuated from the area of transfer. (7) Sampling of drum and container
(ii) Material handling equipment contents. Sampling of containers and
shall be provided with explosive con- drums shall be done in accordance with
tainment devices or protective shields a sampling procedure which is part of
to protect equipment operators from the site safety and health plan devel-
exploding containers. oped for and available to employees
(iii) An employee alarm system capa- and others at the specific worksite.
ble of being perceived above sur- (8) Shipping and transport. (i) Drums
rounding light and noise conditions and containers shall be identified and
shall be used to signal the commence- classified prior to packaging for ship-
ment and completion of explosive ment.
waste handling activities. (ii) Drum or container staging areas
(iv) Continuous communications (i.e.,
shall be kept to the minimum number
portable radios, hand signals, tele-
necessary to identify and classify ma-
phones, as appropriate) shall be main-
terials safely and prepare them for
tained between the employee-in-charge
transport.
of the immediate handling area and
both the site safety and health super- (iii) Staging areas shall be provided
visor and the command post until such with adequate access and egress routes.
time as the handling operation is com- (iv) Bulking of hazardous wastes
pleted. Communication equipment or shall be permitted only after a thor-
methods that could cause shock sen- ough characterization of the materials
sitive materials to explode shall not be has been completed.
used. (9) Tank and vault procedures. (i)
(v) Drums and containers under pres- Tanks and vaults containing hazardous
sure, as evidenced by bulging or swell- substances shall be handled in a man-
ing, shall not be moved until such time ner similar to that for drums and con-
as the cause for excess pressure is de- tainers, taking into consideration the
termined and appropriate containment size of the tank or vault.
procedures have been implemented to (ii) Appropriate tank or vault entry
protect employees from explosive relief procedures as described in the employ-
of the drum. er’s safety and health plan shall be fol-
(vi) Drums and containers containing lowed whenever employees must enter
packaged laboratory wastes shall be a tank or vault.
considered to contain shock-sensitive (k) Decontamination—(1) General. Pro-
or explosive materials until they have cedures for all phases of decontamina-
been characterized. tion shall be developed and imple-
CAUTION: Shipping of shock sensitive wastes mented in accordance with this para-
may be prohibited under U.S. Department of graph.
153
(2) Decontamination procedures. (i) A (8) Showers and change rooms. Where
decontamination procedure shall be de- the decontamination procedure indi-
veloped, communicated to employees cates a need for regular showers and
and implemented before any employees change rooms outside of a contami-
or equipment may enter areas on site nated area, they shall be provided and
where potential for exposure to haz- meet the requirements of 29 CFR
ardous substances exists. 1910.141. If temperature conditions pre-
(ii) Standard operating procedures vent the effective use of water, then
shall be developed to minimize em- other effective means for cleansing
ployee contact with hazardous sub- shall be provided and used.
stances or with equipment that has (l) Emergency response by employees at
contacted hazardous substances. uncontrolled hazardous waste sites—(1)
(iii) All employees leaving a contami- Emergency response plan. (i) An emer-
nated area shall be appropriately de- gency response plan shall be developed
contaminated; all contaminated cloth- and implemented by all employers
ing and equipment leaving a contami- within the scope of paragraphs (a)(1)
nated area shall be appropriately dis- (i)–(ii) of this section to handle antici-
posed of or decontaminated. pated emergencies prior to the com-
(iv) Decontamination procedures mencement of hazardous waste oper-
shall be monitored by the site safety ations. The plan shall be in writing and
and health supervisor to determine available for inspection and copying by
their effectiveness. When such proce- employees, their representatives,
dures are found to be ineffective, ap- OSHA personnel and other govern-
propriate steps shall be taken to cor- mental agencies with relevant respon-
rect any deficiencies. sibilities.
(3) Location. Decontamination shall (ii) Employers who will evacuate
be performed in geographical areas their employees from the danger area
that will minimize the exposure of when an emergency occurs, and who do
uncontaminated employees or equip- not permit any of their employees to
ment to contaminated employees or assist in handling the emergency, are
equipment. exempt from the requirements of this
(4) Equipment and solvents. All equip- paragraph if they provide an emer-
ment and solvents used for decon- gency action plan complying with
tamination shall be decontaminated or § 1926.35 of this part.
disposed of properly. (2) Elements of an emergency response
(5) Personal protective clothing and plan. The employer shall develop an
equipment. (i) Protective clothing and emergency response plan for emer-
equipment shall be decontaminated, gencies which shall address, as a min-
cleaned, laundered, maintained or re- imum, the following:
placed as needed to maintain their ef- (i) Pre-emergency planning.
fectiveness. (ii) Personnel roles, lines of author-
(ii) Employees whose non-imper- ity, and communication.
meable clothing becomes wetted with (iii) Emergency recognition and pre-
hazardous substances shall imme- vention.
diately remove that clothing and pro- (iv) Safe distances and places of ref-
ceed to shower. The clothing shall be uge.
disposed of or decontaminated before it (v) Site security and control.
is removed from the work zone. (vi) Evacuation routes and proce-
(6) Unauthorized employees. Unauthor- dures.
ized employees shall not remove pro- (vii) Decontamination procedures
tective clothing or equipment from which are not covered by the site safe-
change rooms. ty and health plan.
(7) Commercial laundries or cleaning es- (viii) Emergency medical treatment
tablishments. Commercial laundries or and first aid.
cleaning establishments that decon- (ix) Emergency alerting and response
taminate protective clothing or equip- procedures.
ment shall be informed of the poten- (x) Critique of response and follow-
tially harmful effects of exposures to up.
hazardous substances. (xi) PPE and emergency equipment.
154
(3) Procedures for handling emergency TABLE D–65.1—MINIMUM ILLUMINATION
incidents. (i) In addition to the ele- INTENSITIES IN FOOT-CANDLES—Continued
ments for the emergency response plan
Foot-
required in paragraph (1)(2) of this sec- can- Area or operations
tion, the following elements shall be dles
included for emergency response plans: 5 ........ Tunnels, shafts, and general underground work
(A) Site topography, layout, and pre- areas. (Exception: Minimum of 10 foot-candles is
vailing weather conditions. required at tunnel and shaft heading during drilling
mucking, and scaling. Mine Safety and Health Ad-
(B) Procedures for reporting inci- ministration approved cap lights shall be accept-
dents to local, state, and federal gov- able for use in the tunnel heading.)
ernmental agencies. 10 ...... General shops (e.g., mechanical and electrical
equipment rooms, active storerooms, barracks or
(ii) The emergency response plan living quarters, locker or dressing rooms, dining
shall be a separate section of the Site areas, and indoor toilets and workrooms.)
Safety and Health Plan. 30 ...... First aid stations, infirmaries, and offices.
(iii) The emergency response plan
shall be compatible and integrated (n) Sanitation at temporary work-
with the disaster, fire and/or emer- places—(1) Potable water. (i) An ade-
gency response plans of local, state, quate supply of potable water shall be
and federal agencies. provided on the site.
(iv) The emergency response plan (ii) Portable containers used to dis-
shall be rehearsed regularly as part of pense drinking water shall be capable
the overall training program for site of being tightly closed, and equipped
operations. with a tap. Water shall not be dipped
(v) The site emergency response plan from containers.
shall be reviewed periodically and, as (iii) Any container used to distribute
necessary, be amended to keep it cur- drinking water shall be clearly marked
rent with new or changing site condi- as to the nature of its contents and not
tions or information. used for any other purpose.
(vi) An employee alarm system shall (iv) Where single service cups (to be
be installed in accordance with 29 CFR used but once) are supplied, both a san-
1926.159 to notify employees of an emer- itary container for the unused cups and
gency situation; to stop work activities a receptacle for disposing of the used
if necessary; to lower background noise cups shall be provided.
in order to speed communication; and (2) Nonpotable water. (i) Outlets for
to begin emergency procedures. nonpotable water, such as water for
firefighting purposes, shall be identi-
(vii) Based upon the information
fied to indicate clearly that the water
available at time of the emergency, the
is unsafe and is not to be used for
employer shall evaluate the incident
drinking, washing, or cooking pur-
and the site response capabilities and
poses.
proceed with the appropriate steps to
(ii) There shall be no cross-connec-
implement the site emergency response
tion, open or potential, between a sys-
plan.
tem furnishing potable water and a
(m) Illumination. Areas accessible to
system furnishing nonpotable water.
employees shall be lighted to not less
(3) Toilet facilities. (i) Toilets shall be
than the minimum illumination inten-
provided for employees according to
sities listed in the following Table D–
the following Table D–65.2.
65.1 while any work is in progress:
TABLE D–65.2—TOILET FACILITIES
TABLE D–65.1—MINIMUM ILLUMINATION
INTENSITIES IN FOOT-CANDLES Number of employees Minimum number of facilities
Foot- 20 or fewer ............................. One.

can- Area or operations More than 20, fewer than 200 One toilet seat and one uri-
dles nal per 40 employees.
More than 200 ........................ One toilet seat and one uri-
5 ........ General site areas. nal per 50 employees.
3 ........ Excavation and waste areas, accessways, active
storage areas, loading platforms, refueling, and
field maintenance areas.
(ii) Under temporary field conditions,
5 ........ Indoors: Warehouses, corridors, hallways, and provisions shall be made to assure that
exitways. at least one toilet facility is available.
155
(iii) Hazardous waste sites not pro- the worksite, shall provide employees
vided with a sanitary sewer shall be with a clean area where they can re-
provided with the following toilet fa- move, store, and put on street clothing.
cilities unless prohibited by local The second area, with an exit to the
codes: worksite, shall provide employees with
(A) Chemical toilets; an area where they can put on, remove
(B) Recirculating toilets; and store work clothing and personal
(C) Combustion toilets; or protective equipment.
(D) Flush toilets. (iii) Showers and change rooms shall
(iv) The requirements of this para- be located in areas where exposures are
graph for sanitation facilities shall not below the permissible exposure limits
apply to mobile crews having transpor- and published exposure levels. If this
tation readily available to nearby toi- cannot be accomplished, then a ven-
let facilities. tilation system shall be provided that
(v) Doors entering toilet facilities will supply air that is below the per-
shall be provided with entrance locks missible exposure limits and published
controlled from inside the facility. exposure levels.
(4) Food handling. All food service fa- (iv) Employers shall assure that em-
cilities and operations for employees ployees shower at the end of their work
shall meet the applicable laws, ordi- shift and when leaving the hazardous
nances, and regulations of the jurisdic- waste site.
tions in which they are located. (o) New technology programs. (1) The
(5) Temporary sleeping quarters. When employer shall develop and implement
temporary sleeping quarters are pro- procedures for the introduction of ef-
vided, they shall be heated, ventilated, fective new technologies and equip-
and lighted. ment developed for the improved pro-
(6) Washing facilities. The employer tection of employees working with haz-
shall provide adequate washing facili- ardous waste clean-up operations, and
ties for employees engaged in oper- the same shall be implemented as part
ations where hazardous substances of the site safety and health program
may be harmful to employees. Such fa- to assure that employee protection is
cilities shall be in near proximity to being maintained.
the worksite; in areas where exposures (2) New technologies, equipment or
are below permissible exposure limits control measures available to the in-
and published exposure levels and dustry, such as the use of foams,
which are under the controls of the em- absorbents, adsorbents, neutralizers, or
ployer; and shall be so equipped as to other means to suppress the level of air
enable employees to remove hazardous contaminates while excavating the site
substances from themselves. or for spill control, shall be evaluated
(7) Showers and change rooms. When by employers or their representatives.
hazardous waste clean-up or removal Such an evaluation shall be done to de-
operations commence on a site and the termine the effectiveness of the new
duration of the work will require six methods, materials, or equipment be-
months or greater time to complete, fore implementing their use on a large
the employer shall provide showers and scale for enhancing employee protec-
change rooms for all employees ex- tion. Information and data from manu-
posed to hazardous substances and facturers or suppliers may be used as
health hazards involved in hazardous part of the employer’s evaluation ef-
waste clean-up or removal operations. fort. Such evaluations shall be made
(i) Showers shall be provided and available to OSHA upon request.
shall meet the requirements of 29 CFR (p) Certain operations conducted under
1926.51(f)(4). the Resource Conservation and Recovery
(ii) Change rooms shall be provided Act of 1976 (RCRA). Employers con-
and shall meet the requirements of 29 ducting operations at treatment, stor-
CFR 1926.51(i). Change rooms shall con- age and disposal (TSD) facilities speci-
sist of two separate change areas sepa- fied in paragraph (a)(1)(iv) of this sec-
rated by the shower area required in tion shall provide and implement the
paragraph (n)(7)(i) of this section. One programs specified in this paragraph.
change area, with an exit leading off See the ‘‘Notes and Exceptions’’ to
156
paragraph (a)(2)(iii) of this section for stances at TSD operations to enable
employers not covered.)’’. the employees to perform their as-
(1) Safety and health program. The em- signed duties and functions in a safe
ployer shall develop and implement a and healthful manner so as not endan-
written safety and health program for ger themselves or other employees. The
employees involved in hazardous waste initial training shall be for 24 hours
operations that shall be available for and refresher training shall be for eight
inspection by employees, their rep- hours annually. Employees who have
resentatives and OSHA personnel. The received the initial training required
program shall be designed to identify, by this paragraph shall be given a writ-
evaluate and control safety and health ten certificate attesting that they have
hazards in their facilities for the pur- successfully completed the necessary
pose of employee protection, to provide training.
for emergency response meeting the re- (ii) Current employees. Employers who
quirements of paragraph (p)(8) of this can show by an employee’s previous
section and to address as appropriate work experience and/or training that
site analysis, engineering controls, the employee has had training equiva-
maximum exposure limits, hazardous lent to the initial training required by
waste handling procedures and uses of this paragraph, shall be considered as
new technologies. meeting the initial training require-
(2) Hazard communication program. ments of this paragraph as to that em-
The employer shall implement a haz- ployee. Equivalent training includes
ard communication program meeting the training that existing employees
the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.59 as might have already received from ac-
part of the employer’s safety and pro- tual site work experience. Current em-
gram. ployees shall receive eight hours of re-
NOTE TO 1926.65: The exemption for haz- fresher training annually.
ardous waste provided in § 1926.59 is applica- (iii) Trainers. Trainers who teach ini-
ble to this section. tial training shall have satisfactorily
(3) Medical surveillance program. The completed a training course for teach-
employer shall develop and implement ing the subjects they are expected to
a medical surveillance program meet- teach or they shall have the academic
ing the requirements of paragraph (f) of credentials and instruction experience
this section. necessary to demonstrate a good com-
(4) Decontamination program. The em- mand of the subject matter of the
ployer shall develop and implement a courses and competent instructional
decontamination procedure meeting skills.
the requirements of paragraph (k) of (8) Emergency response program—(i)
this section. Emergency response plan. An emergency
(5) New technology program. The em- response plan shall be developed and
ployer shall develop and implement implemented by all employers. Such
procedures meeting the requirements plans need not duplicate any of the
of paragraph (o) of this section for in- subjects fully addressed in the employ-
troducing new and innovative equip- er’s contingency planning required by
ment into the workplace. permits, such as those issued by the
(6) Material handling program. Where U.S. Environmental Protection Agen-
employees will be handling drums or cy, provided that the contingency plan
containers, the employer shall develop is made part of the emergency response
and implement procedures meeting the plan. The emergency response plan
requirements of paragraphs (j)(1) (ii) shall be a written portion of the em-
through (viii) and (xi) of this section, ployers safety and health program re-
as well as (j)(3) and (j)(8) of this section quired in paragraph (p)(1) of this sec-
prior to starting such work. tion. Employers who will evacuate
(7) Training program—(i) New employ- their employees from the worksite lo-
ees. The employer shall develop and im- cation when an emergency occurs and
plement a training program, which is who do not permit any of their employ-
part of the employer’s safety and ees to assist in handling the emergency
health program, for employees exposed are exempt from the requirements of
to health hazards or hazardous subparagraph (p)(8) if they provide an
157
emergency action plan complying with ness training to recognize that an emer-
§ 1926.35 of this part. gency response situation exists and they
(ii) Elements of an emergency response have been instructed to call the designated
outside fully-trained emergency response
plan. The employer shall develop an
team for assistance.
emergency response plan for emer-
gencies which shall address, as a min- (B) Employee members of TSD facil-
imum, the following areas to the ex- ity emergency response organizations
tent that they are not addressed in any shall be trained to a level of com-
specific program required in this para- petence in the recognition of health
graph: and safety hazards to protect them-
(A) Pre-emergency planning and co- selves and other employees. This would
ordination with outside parties. include training in the methods used to
(B) Personnel roles, lines of author- minimize the risk from safety and
ity, and communication. health hazards; in the safe use of con-
(C) Emergency recognition and pre- trol equipment; in the selection and
vention. use of appropriate personal protective
(D) Safe distances and places of ref- equipment; in the safe operating proce-
uge. dures to be used at the incident scene;
(E) Site security and control. in the techniques of coordination with
(F) Evacuation routes and proce- other employees to minimize risks; in
dures. the appropriate response to over expo-
(G) Decontamination procedures. sure from health hazards or injury to
(H) Emergency medical treatment themselves and other employees; and
and first aid. in the recognition of subsequent symp-
(I) Emergency alerting and response toms which may result from over expo-
procedures. sures.
(J) Critique of response and follow- (C) The employer shall certify that
up. each covered employee has attended
(K) PPE and emergency equipment. and successfully completed the train-
(iii) Training. (A) Training for emer- ing required in paragraph (p)(8)(iii) of
gency response employees shall be this section, or shall certify the em-
completed before they are called upon ployee’s competency at least yearly.
to perform in real emergencies. Such The method used to demonstrate com-
training shall include the elements of petency for certification of training
the emergency response plan, standard shall be recorded and maintained by
operating procedures the employer has the employer.
established for the job, the personal (iv) Procedures for handling emergency
protective equipment to be worn and incidents. (A) In addition to the ele-
procedures for handling emergency in- ments for the emergency response plan
cidents. required in paragraph (p)(8)(ii) of this
Exception #1: An employer need not train all section, the following elements shall be
employees to the degree specified if the included for emergency response plans
employer divides the work force in a man- to the extent that they do not repeat
ner such that a sufficient number of em- any information already contained in
ployees who have responsibility to control the emergency response plan:
emergencies have the training specified, (1) Site topography, layout, and pre-
and all other employees, who may first re-
vailing weather conditions.
spond to an emergency incident, have suffi-
cient awareness training to recognize that (2) Procedures for reporting incidents
an emergency response situation exists and to local, state, and federal govern-
that they are instructed in that case to mental agencies.
summon the fully trained employees and (B) The emergency response plan
not attempt control activities for which shall be compatible and integrated
they are not trained. with the disaster, fire and/or emer-
Exception #2: An employer need not train all gency response plans of local, state,
employees to the degree specified if ar-
and federal agencies.
rangements have been made in advance for
an outside fully-trained emergency re- (C) The emergency response plan
sponse team to respond in a reasonable pe- shall be rehearsed regularly as part of
riod and all employees, who may come to the overall training program for site
the incident first, have sufficient aware- operations.
158
(D) The site emergency response plan imum, the following to the extent that
shall be reviewed periodically and, as they are not addressed elsewhere:
necessary, be amended to keep it cur- (i) Pre-emergency planning and co-
rent with new or changing site condi- ordination with outside parties.
tions or information. (ii) Personnel roles, lines of author-
(E) An employee alarm system shall ity, training, and communication.
be installed in accordance with 29 CFR (iii) Emergency recognition and pre-
1926.159 to notify employees of an emer- vention.
gency situation; to stop work activities
(iv) Safe distances and places of ref-
if necessary; to lower background noise
in order to speed communication; and uge.
to begin emergency procedures. (v) Site security and control.
(F) Based upon the information avail- (vi) Evacuation routes and proce-
able at time of the emergency, the em- dures.
ployer shall evaluate the incident and (vii) Decontamination.
the site response capabilities and pro- (viii) Emergency medical treatment
ceed with the appropriate steps to im- and first aid.
plement the site emergency response (ix) Emergency alerting and response
plan. procedures.
(q) Emerqency response to hazardous (x) Critique of response and follow-
substance releases. This paragraph cov- up.
ers employers whose employees are en- (xi) PPE and emergency equipment.
gaged in emergency response no matter
(xii) Emergency response organiza-
where it occurs except that it does not
tions may use the local emergency re-
cover employees engaged in operations
specified in paragraphs (a)(1)(i) through sponse plan or the state emergency re-
(a)(1)(iv) of this section. Those emer- sponse plan or both, as part of their
gency response organizations who have emergency response plan to avoid du-
developed and implemented programs plication. Those items of the emer-
equivalent to this paragraph for han- gency response plan that are being
dling releases of hazardous substances properly addressed by the SARA Title
pursuant to section 303 of the Super- III plans may be substituted into their
fund Amendments and Reauthorization emergency plan or otherwise kept to-
Act of 1986 (Emergency Planning and gether for the employer and employee’s
Community Right-to-Know Act of 1986, use.
42 U.S.C. 11003) shall be deemed to have (3) Procedures for handling emergency
met the requirements of this para- response. (i) The senior emergency re-
graph. sponse official responding to an emer-
(1) Emergency response plan. An emergency shall become the individual in
gency response plan shall be developed charge of a site-specific Incident Com-
and implemented to handle anticipated mand System (ICS). All emergency re-
emergencies prior to the commence- sponders and their communications
ment of emergency response oper- shall be coordinated and controlled
ations. The plan shall be in writing and through the individual in charge of the
available for inspection and copying by
ICS assisted by the senior official
employees, their representatives and
present for each employer.
OSHA personnel. Employers who will
evacuate their employees from the NOTE TO (g)(3)(i): The senior official at an
danger area when an emergency occurs, emergency response is the most senior offi-
and who do not permit any of their em- cial on the site who has the responsibility
ployees to assist in handling the emer- for controlling the operations at the site.
gency, are exempt from the require- Initially it is the senior officer on the first-
ments of this paragraph if they provide due piece of responding emergency apparatus
an emergency action plan in accord- to arrive on the incident scene. As more sen-
ior officers arrive (i.e., battalion chief, fire
ance with § 1926.35 of this part.
chief, state law enforcement official, site co-
(2) Elements of an emergency response ordinator, etc.) the position is passed up the
plan. The employer shall develop an line of authority which has been previously
emergency response plan for emer- established.
gencies which shall address, as a min-
159
(ii) The individual in charge of the (viii) When activities are judged by
ICS shall identify, to the extent pos- the safety official to be an IDLH condi-
sible, all hazardous substances or con- tion and/or to involve an imminent
ditions present and shall address as ap- danger condition, the safety official
propriate site analysis, use of engineer- shall have the authority to alter, sus-
ing controls, maximum exposure lim- pend, or terminate those activities.
its, hazardous substance handling pro- The safety official shall immediately
cedures, and use of any new tech- inform the individual in charge of the
nologies. ICS of any actions needed to be taken
(iii) Based on the hazardous sub- to correct these hazards at the emer-
stances and/or conditions present, the gency scene.
individual in charge of the ICS shall (ix) After emergency operations have
implement appropriate emergency op- terminated, the individual in charge of
erations, and assure that the personal the ICS shall implement appropriate
protective equipment worn is appro- decontamination procedures.
priate for the hazards to be encoun-
(x) When deemed necessary for meet-
tered. However, personal protective
ing the tasks at hand, approved self-
equipment shall meet, at a minimum,
contained compressed air breathing ap-
the criteria contained in 29 CFR 1926.97
paratus may be used with approved cyl-
when worn while performing fire fight-
inders from other approved self-con-
ing operations beyond the incipient
tained compressed air breathing appa-
stage for any incident.
ratus provided that such cylinders are
(iv) Employees engaged in emergency
of the same capacity and pressure rat-
response and exposed to hazardous sub-
ing. All compressed air cylinders used
stances presenting an inhalation haz-
with self-contained breathing appa-
ard or potential inhalation hazard shall
wear positive pressure self-contained ratus shall meet U.S. Department of
breathing apparatus while engaged in Transportation and National Institute
emergency response, until such time for Occupational Safety and Health cri-
that the individual in charge of the ICS teria.
determines through the use of air mon- (4) Skilled support personnel. Per-
itoring that a decreased level of res- sonnel, not necessarily an employer’s
piratory protection will not result in own employees, who are skilled in the
hazardous exposures to employees. operation of certain equipment, such as
(v) The individual in charge of the mechanized earth moving or digging
ICS shall limit the number of emer- equipment or crane and hoisting equip-
gency response personnel at the emer- ment, and who are needed temporarily
gency site, in those areas of potential to perform immediate emergency sup-
or actual exposure to incident or site port work that cannot reasonably be
hazards, to those who are actively per- performed in a timely fashion by an
forming emergency operations. How- employer’s own employees, and who
ever, operations in hazardous areas will be or may be exposed to the haz-
shall be performed using the buddy sys- ards at an emergency response scene,
tem in groups of two or more. are not required to meet the training
(vi) Back-up personnel shall stand by required in this paragraph for the em-
with equipment ready to provide as- ployer’s regular employees. However,
sistance or rescue. Advance first aid these personnel shall be given an ini-
support personnel, as a minimum, shall tial briefing at the site prior to their
also stand by with medical equipment participation in any emergency re-
and transportation capability. sponse. The initial briefing shall in-
(vii) The individual in charge of the clude instruction in the wearing of ap-
ICS shall designate a safety official, propriate personal protective equip-
who is knowledgable in the operations ment, what chemical hazards are in-
being implemented at the emergency volved, and what duties are to be per-
response site, with specific responsi- formed. All other appropriate safety
bility to identify and evaluate hazards and health precautions provided to the
and to provide direction with respect employer’s own employees shall be
to the safety of operations for the used to assure the safety and health of
emergency at hand. these personnel.
160
(5) Specialist employees. Employees Transportation’s Emergency Response
who, in the course of their regular job Guidebook.
duties, work with and are trained in (F) The ability to realize the need for
the hazards of specific hazardous sub- additional resources, and to make ap-
stances, and who will be called upon to propriate notifications to the commu-
provide technical advice or assistance nication center.
at a hazardous substance release inci- (ii) First responder operations level.
dent to the individual in charge, shall First responders at the operations level
receive training or demonstrate com- are individuals who respond to releases
petency in the area of their specializa- or potential releases of hazardous sub-
tion annually. stances as part of the initial response
(6) Training. Training shall be based to the site for the purpose of protecting
on the duties and function to be per- nearby persons, property, or the envi-
formed by each responder of an emer- ronment from the effects of the re-
gency response organization. The skill lease. They are trained to respond in a
and knowledge levels required for all defensive fashion without actually try-
new responders, those hired after the ing to stop the release. Their function
effective date of this standard, shall be is to contain the release from a safe
conveyed to them through training be- distance, keep it from spreading, and
fore they are permitted to take part in prevent exposures. First responders at
actual emergency operations on an in- the operational level shall have re-
cident. Employees who participate, or ceived at least eight hours of training
are expected to participate, in emer-
or have had sufficient experience to ob-
gency response, shall be given training
jectively demonstrate competency in
in accordance with the following para-
the following areas in addition to those
graphs:
listed for the awareness level and the
(i) First responder awareness level. employer shall so certify:
First responders at the awareness level
(A) Knowledge of the basic hazard
are individuals who are likely to wit-
and risk assessment techniques.
ness or discover a hazardous substance
release and who have been trained to (B) Know how to select and use prop-
initiate an emergency response se- er personal protective equipment pro-
quence by notifying the proper authori- vided to the first responder operational
ties of the release. They would take no level.
further action beyond notifying the au- (C) An understanding of basic haz-
thorities of the release. First respond- ardous materials terms.
ers at the awareness level shall have (D) Know how to perform basic con-
sufficient training or have had suffi- trol, containment and/or confinement
cient experience to objectively dem- operations within the capabilities of
onstrate competency in the following the resources and personal protective
areas: equipment available with their unit.
(A) An understanding of what haz- (E) Know how to implement basic de-
ardous substances are, and the risks as- contamination procedures.
sociated with them in an incident. (F) An understanding of the relevant
(B) An understanding of the potential standard operating procedures and ter-
outcomes associated with an emer- mination procedures.
gency created when hazardous sub- (iii) Hazardous materials technician.
stances are present. Hazardous materials technicians are
(C) The ability to recognize the pres- individuals who respond to releases or
ence of hazardous substances in an potential releases for the purpose of
emergency. stopping the release. They assume a
(D) The ability to identify the haz- more aggressive role than a first re-
ardous substances, if possible. sponder at the operations level in that
(E) An understanding of the role of they will approach the point of release
the first responder awareness indi- in order to plug, patch or otherwise
vidual in the employer’s emergency re- stop the release of a hazardous sub-
sponse plan including site security and stance. Hazardous materials techni-
control and the U.S. Department of cians shall have received at least 24
161
hours of training equal to the first re- (D) Be able to select and use proper
sponder operations level and in addi- specialized chemical personal protec-
tion have competency in the following tive equipment provided to the haz-
areas and the employer shall so certify: ardous materials specialist.
(A) Know how to implement the em- (E) Understand in-depth hazard and
ployer’s emergency response plan. risk techniques.
(B) Know the classification, identi- (F) Be able to perform specialized
fication and verification of known and control, containment, and/or confine-
unknown materials by using field sur- ment operations within the capabili-
vey instruments and equipment. ties of the resources and personal pro-
(C) Be able to function within an as- tective equipment available.
signed role in the Incident Command (G) Be able to determine and imple-
System. ment decontamination procedures.
(D) Know how to select and use prop- (H) Have the ability to develop a site
er specialized chemical personal pro- safety and control plan.
tective equipment provided to the haz- (I) Understand chemical, radiological
ardous materials technician. and toxicological terminology and be-
(E) Understand hazard and risk as- havior.
sessment techniques. (v) On scene incident commander. Inci-
(F) Be able to perform advance con- dent commanders, who will assume
trol, containment, and/or confinement control of the incident scene beyond
operations within the capabilities of the first responder awareness level,
the resources and personal protective shall receive at least 24 hours of train-
equipment available with the unit. ing equal to the first responder oper-
(G) Understand and implement de- ations level and in addition have com-
contamination procedures. petency in the following areas and the
(H) Understand termination proce- employer shall so certify:
dures. (A) Know and be able to implement
(I) Understand basic chemical and the employer’s incident command sys-
toxicological terminology and behav- tem.
ior. (B) Know how to implement the em-
(iv) Hazardous materials specialist. ployer’s emergency response plan.
Hazardous materials specialists are in- (C) Know and understand the hazards
dividuals who respond with and provide and risks associated with employees
support to hazardous materials techni- working in chemical protective cloth-
cians. Their duties parallel those of the ing.
hazardous materials technician, how- (D) Know how to implement the local
ever, those duties require a more di- emergency response plan.
rected or specific knowledge of the var- (E) Know of the state emergency re-
ious substances they may be called sponse plan and of the Federal Re-
upon to contain. The hazardous mate- gional Response Team.
rials specialist would also act as the (F) Know and understand the impor-
site liaison with Federal, state, local tance of decontamination procedures.
and other government authorities in (7) Trainers. Trainers who teach any
regards to site activities. Hazardous of the above training subjects shall
materials specialists shall have re- have satisfactorily completed a train-
ceived at least 24 hours of training ing course for teaching the subjects
equal to the technician level and in ad- they are expected to teach, such as the
dition have competency in the fol- courses offered by the U.S. National
lowing areas and the employer shall so Fire Academy, or they shall have the
certify: training and/or academic credentials
(A) Know how to implement the local and instructional experience necessary
emergency response plan. to demonstrate competent instruc-
(B) Understand classification, identi- tional skills and a good command of
fication and verification of known and the subject matter of the courses they
unknown materials by using advanced are to teach.
survey instruments and equipment. (8) Refresher training. (i) Those em-
(C) Know of the state emergency re- ployees who are trained in accordance
sponse plan. with paragraph (q)(6) of this section
162
shall receive annual refresher training sonal protective equipment and decon-
of sufficient content and duration to tamination procedures. All equipment
maintain their competencies, or shall to be used in the performance of the
demonstrate competency in those areas clean-up work shall be in serviceable
at least yearly. condition and shall have been inspected
(ii) A statement shall be made of the prior to use.
training or competency, and if a state-
APPENDICES TO § 1926.65—HAZARDOUS WASTE
ment of competency is made, the em-
OPERATIONS AND EMERGENCY RESPONSE
ployer shall keep a record of the meth-
odology used to demonstrate com- NOTE: The following appendices serve as
petency. non-mandatory guidelines to assist employ-
(9) Medical surveillance and consulta- ees and employers in complying with the ap-
propriate requirements of this section. How-
tion. (i) Members of an organized and
ever § 1926.65(g) makes mandatory in certain
designated HAZMAT team and haz- circumstances the use of Level A and Level
ardous materials specialists shall re- B PPE protection.
ceive a baseline physical examination
and be provided with medical surveil- APPENDIX A TO § 1926.65—PERSONAL
lance as required in paragraph (f) of PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT TEST METHODS
this section. This appendix sets forth the non-manda-
(ii) Any emergency response employ- tory examples of tests which may be used to
ees who exhibits signs or symptoms evaluate compliance with § 1926.65(g)(4) (ii)
which may have resulted from exposure and (iii). Other tests and other challenge
to hazardous substances during the agents may be used to evaluate compliance.
course of an emergency incident, either A. Totally-encapsulating chemical protective
immediately or subsequently, shall be suit pressure test
provided with medical consultation as
1.0—Scope
required in paragraph (f)(3)(ii) of this
1.1 This practice measures the ability of a
section. gas tight totally-encapsulating chemical
(10) Chemical protective clothing. protective suit material, seams, and closures
Chemical protective clothing and to maintain a fixed positive pressure. The re-
equipment to be used by organized and sults of this practice allow the gas tight in-
designated HAZMAT team members, or tegrity of a totally-encapsulating chemical
to be used by hazardous materials spe- protective suit to be evaluated.
cialists, shall meet the requirements of 1.2 Resistance of the suit materials to
paragraphs (g) (3) through (5) of this permeation, penetration, and degradation by
specific hazardous substances is not deter-
section.
mined by this test method.
(11) Post-emergency response oper- 2.0—Definition of terms
ations. Upon completion of the emer- 2.1 Totally-encapsulated chemical protective
gency response, if it is determined that suit (TECP suit) means a full body garment
it is necessary to remove hazardous which is constructed of protective clothing
substances, health hazards, and mate- materials; covers the wearer’s torso, head,
rials contaminated with them (such as arms, legs and respirator; may cover the
contaminated soil or other elements of wearer’s hands and feet with tightly at-
the natural environment) from the site tached gloves and boots; completely encloses
the wearer and respirator by itself or in com-
of the incident, the employer con-
bination with the wearer’s gloves and boots.
ducting the clean-up shall comply with 2.2 Protective clothing material means any
one of the following: material or combination of materials used in
(i) Meet all of the requirements of an item of clothing for the purpose of iso-
paragraphs (b) through (o) of this sec- lating parts of the body from direct contact
tion; or with a potentially hazardous liquid or gas-
(ii) Where the clean-up is done on eous chemicals.
plant property using plant or work- 2.3 Gas tight means, for the purpose of this
place employees, such employees shall test method, the limited flow of a gas under
pressure from the inside of a TECP suit to
have completed the training require-
atmosphere at a prescribed pressure and
ments of the following: 29 CFR 1926.35, time interval.
1926.59, and 1926.103, and other appro- 3.0—Summary of test method
priate safety and health training made 3.1 The TECP suit is visually inspected and
necessary by the tasks that they are modified for the test. The test apparatus is
expected to be performed such as per- attached to the suit to permit inflation to
163
the pre-test suit expansion pressure for re- sure to pressure (B), the suit test pressure.
moval of suit wrinkles and creases. The pres- Begin timing. At the end of three minutes,
sure is lowered to the test pressure and mon- record the suit pressure as pressure (C), the
itored for three minutes. If the pressure drop ending suit pressure. The difference between
is excessive, the TECP suit fails the test and the suit test pressure and the ending suit
is removed from service. The test is repeated test pressure (B-C) shall be defined as the
after leak location and repair. suit pressure drop.
4.0—Required Supplies 6.1.6 If the suit pressure drop is more than
4.1 Source of compressed air. 20 percent of the suit test pressure (B) during
4.2 Test apparatus for suit testing, includ- the three-minute test period, the suit fails
ing a pressure measurement device with a the test and shall be removed from service.
sensitivity of at least 1⁄4 inch water gauge. 7.0—Retest Procedure
4.3 Vent valve closure plugs or sealing 7.1 If the suit fails the test check for leaks
tape. by inflating the suit to pressure (A) and
4.4 Soapy water solution and soft brush. brushing or wiping the entire suit (including
4.5 Stop watch or appropriate timing de-
seams, closures, lens gaskets, glove-to-sleeve
vice.
joints, etc.) with a mild soap and water solu-
5.0—Safety Precautions
tion. Observe the suit for the formation of
5.1 Care shall be taken to provide the cor-
soap bubbles, which is an indication of a
rect pressure safety devices required for the
leak. Repair all identified leaks.
source of compressed air used.
6.0—Test Procedure 7.2 Retest the TECP suit as outlined in
6.1 Prior to each test, the tester shall per- Test procedure 6.0.
form a visual inspection of the suit. Check 8.0—Report
the suit for seam integrity by visually exam- 8.1 Each TECP suit tested by this practice
ining the seams and gently pulling on the shall have the following information re-
seams. Ensure that all air supply lines, fit- corded:
tings, visor, zippers, and valves are secure 8.1.1 Unique identification number, identi-
and show no signs of deterioration. fying brand name, date of purchase, material
6.1.1 Seal off the vent valves along with of construction, and unique fit features, e.g.,
any other normal inlet or exhaust points special breathing apparatus.
(such as umbilical air line fittings or face 8.1.2 The actual values for test pressures
piece opening) with tape or other appropriate (A), (B), and (C) shall be recorded along with
means (caps, plugs, fixture, etc.). Care should the specific observation times. If the ending
be exercised in the sealing process not to pressure (C) is less than 80 percent of the test
damage any of the suit components. pressure (B), the suit shall be identified as
6.1.2 Close all closure assemblies. failing the test. When possible, the specific
6.1.3 Prepare the suit for inflation by pro- leak location shall be identified in the test
viding an improvised connection point on the records. Retest pressure data shall be re-
suit for connecting an airline. Attach the corded as an additional test.
pressure test apparatus to the suit to permit 8.1.3 The source of the test apparatus used
suit inflation from a compressed air source shall be identified and the sensitivity of the
equipped with a pressure indicating regu- pressure gauge shall be recorded.
lator. The leak tightness of the pressure test 8.1.4 Records shall be kept for each pres-
apparatus should be tested before and after sure test even if repairs are being made at
each test by closing off the end of the tubing the test location.
attached to the suit and assuring a pressure
of three inches water gauge for three min- CAUTION
utes can be maintained. If a component is re-
Visually inspect all parts of the suit to be
moved for the test, that component shall be
sure they are positioned correctly and se-
replaced and a second test conducted with
cured tightly before putting the suit back
another component removed to permit a
into service. Special care should be taken to
complete test of the ensemble.
examine each exhaust valve to make sure it
6.1.4 The pre-test expansion pressure (A)
is not blocked.
and the suit test pressure (B) shall be sup-
plied by the suit manufacturer, but in no Care should also be exercised to assure
case shall they be less than: (A)=three inches that the inside and outside of the suit is
water gauge; and (B)=two inches water completely dry before it is put into storage.
gauge. The ending suit pressure (C) shall be B. Totally-encapsulating chemical protective
no less than 80 percent of the test pressure suit qualitative leak test
(B); i.e., the pressure drop shall not exceed 20
percent of the test pressure (B). 1.0—Scope
6.1.5 Inflate the suit until the pressure in- 1.1 This practice semi-qualitatively tests
side is equal to pressure (A), the pre-test ex- gas tight totally-encapsulating chemical
pansion suit pressure. Allow at least one protective suit integrity by detecting inward
minute to fill out the wrinkles in the suit. leakage of ammonia vapor. Since no modi-
Release sufficient air to reduce the suit pres- fications are made to the suit to carry out
164
this test, the results from this practice pro- the test room and his stand-by person meas-
vide a realistic test for the integrity of the ures the ammonia concentration inside the
entire suit. suit using a low range ammonia length of
1.2 Resistance of the suit materials to per- stain detector tube or other more sensitive
meation, penetration, and degradation is not ammonia detector. A stand-by person is re-
determined by this test method. ASTM test quired to observe the test individual during
methods are available to test suit materials the test procedure; aid the person in donning
for these characteristics and the tests are and doffing the TECP suit; and monitor the
usually conducted by the manufacturers of suit interior. The intrusion coefficient of the
the suits. suit can be calculated by dividing the aver-
2.0—Definition of terms age test area concentration by the interior
2.1 Totally-encapsulated chemical protective suit concentration. A colorimetric ammonia
suit (TECP suit) means a full body garment indicator strip of bromophenol blue or equiv-
which is constructed of protective clothing alent is placed on the inside of the suit face
materials; covers the wearer’s torso, head, piece lens so that the suited individual is
arms, legs and respirator; may cover the able to detect a color change and know if the
wearer’s hands and feet with tightly at- suit has a significant leak. If a color change
tached gloves and boots; completely encloses is observed the individual shall leave the test
the wearer and respirator by itself or in com- room immediately.
bination with the wearer’s gloves, and boots. 4.0—Required supplies
2.2 Protective clothing material means any 4.1 A supply of concentrated aqueous am-
material or combination of materials used in monium hydroxide (58% by weight).
an item of clothing for the purpose of iso- 4.2 A supply of bromophenol/blue indi-
lating parts of the body from direct contact cating paper or equivalent, sensitive to 5–10
with a potentially hazardous liquid or gas- ppm ammonia or greater over a two-minute
eous chemicals. period of exposure. [pH 3.0 (yellow) to pH 4.6
2.3 Gas tight means, for the purpose of this (blue)]
test method, the limited flow of a gas under 4.3 A supply of high range (0.5–10 volume
pressure from the inside of a TECP suit to percent) and low range (5–700 ppm) detector
atmosphere at a prescribed pressure and tubes for ammonia and the corresponding
time interval. sampling pump. More sensitive ammonia de-
2.4 Intrusion Coefficient means a number ex- tectors can be substituted for the low range
pressing the level of protection provided by a detector tubes to improve the sensitivity of
gas tight totally-encapsulating chemical this practice.
protective suit. The intrusion coefficient is 4.4 A shallow plastic pan (PVC) at least
calculated by dividing the test room chal- 12″:14″:1″ and a half pint plastic container
lenge agent concentration by the concentra- (PVC) with tightly closing lid.
tion of challenge agent found inside the suit. 4.5 A graduated cylinder or other volu-
The accuracy of the intrusion coefficient is metric measuring device of at least 50 milli-
dependent on the challenge agent monitoring liters in volume with an accuracy of at least
methods. The larger the intrusion coefficient ±1 milliliters.
the greater the protection provided by the
TECP suit. 5.0—SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
3.0—Summary of recommended practice 5.1 Concentrated aqueous ammonium hy-
3.1 The volume of concentrated aqueous droxide, NH4 OH, is a corrosive volatile liq-
ammonia solution (ammonia hydroxide NH4 uid requiring eye, skin, and respiratory pro-
OH) required to generate the test atmos- tection. The person conducting the test shall
phere is determined using the directions out- review the MSDS for aqueous ammonia.
lined in 6.1. The suit is donned by a person 5.2 Since the established permissible ex-
wearing the appropriate respiratory equip- posure limit for ammonia is 35 ppm as a 15
ment (either a positive pressure self-con- minute STEL, only persons wearing a posi-
tained breathing apparatus or a positive tive pressure self-contained breathing appa-
pressure supplied air respirator) and worn in- ratus or a positive pressure supplied air res-
side the enclosed test room. The con- pirator shall be in the chamber. Normally
centrated aqueous ammonia solution is only the person wearing the totally-encap-
taken by the suited individual into the test sulating suit will be inside the chamber. A
room and poured into an open plastic pan. A stand-by person shall have a positive pres-
two-minute evaporation period is observed sure self-contained breathing apparatus, or a
before the test room concentration is meas- positive pressure supplied air respirator
ured, using a high range ammonia length of available to enter the test area should the
stain detector tube. When the ammonia suited individual need assistance.
vapor reaches a concentration of between 5.3 A method to monitor the suited indi-
1000 and 1200 ppm, the suited individual vidual must be used during this test. Visual
starts a standardized exercise protocol to contact is the simplest but other methods
stress and flex the suit. After this protocol is using communication devices are acceptable.
completed, the test room concentration is 5.4 The test room shall be large enough to
measured again. The suited individual exits allow the exercise protocol to be carried out
165
and then to be ventilated to allow for easy centration of 1000 ppm ammonia or greater
exhaust of the ammonia test atmosphere shall be generated before the exercises are
after the test(s) are completed. started.
5.5 Individuals shall be medically 6.7 To test the integrity of the suit the
screened for the use of respiratory protection following four minute exercise protocol
and checked for allergies to ammonia before should be followed:
participating in this test procedure. 6.7.1 Raising the arms above the head
with at least 15 raising motions completed in
6.0—TEST PROCEDURE one minute.
6.1.1 Measure the test area to the nearest 6.7.2 Walking in place for one minute with
foot and calculate its volume in cubic feet. at least 15 raising motions of each leg in a
Multiply the test area volume by 0.2 milli- one-minute period.
liters of concentrated aqueous ammonia so- 6.7.3 Touching the toes with a least 10
lution per cubic foot of test area volume to complete motions of the arms from above
determine the approximate volume of con- the head to touching of the toes in a one-
centrated aqueous ammonia required to gen- minute period.
erate 1000 ppm in the test area. 6.7.4 Knee bends with at least 10 complete
6.1.2 Measure this volume from the supply standing and squatting motions in a one-
of concentrated aqueous ammonia and place minute period.
it into a closed plastic container. 6.8 If at any time during the test the col-
6.1.3 Place the container, several high orimetric indicating paper should change
range ammonia detector tubes, and the pump colors, the test should be stopped and section
in the clean test pan and locate it near the 6.10 and 6.12 initiated (See ¶ 4.2).
test area entry door so that the suited indi- 6.9 After completion of the test exercise,
vidual has easy access to these supplies. the test area concentration should be meas-
6.2.1 In a non-contaminated atmosphere, ured again using the high range colorimetric
open a pre-sealed ammonia indicator strip detector tube.
and fasten one end of the strip to the inside 6.10 Exit the test area.
of the suit face shield lens where it can be 6.11 The opening created by the suit zip-
seen by the wearer. Moisten the indicator per or other appropriate suit penetration
strip with distilled water. Care shall be should be used to determine the ammonia
taken not to contaminate the detector part concentration in the suit with the low range
of the indicator paper by touching it. A length of stain detector tube or other ammo-
small piece of masking tape or equivalent nia monitor. The internal TECP suit air
should be used to attach the indicator strip should be sampled far enough from the en-
to the interior of the suit face shield. closed test area to prevent a false ammonia
6.2.2 If problems are encountered with reading.
this method of attachment, the indicator 6.12 After completion of the measurement
strip can be attached to the outside of the of the suit interior ammonia concentration
respirator face piece lens being used during the test is concluded and the suit is doffed
the test. and the respirator removed.
6.3 Don the respiratory protective device 6.13 The ventilating fan for the test room
normally used with the suit, and then don should be turned on and allowed to run for
the TECP suit to be tested. Check to be sure enough time to remove the ammonia gas.
all openings which are intended to be sealed The fan shall be vented to the outside of the
(zippers, gloves, etc.) are completely sealed. building.
DO NOT, however, plug off any venting 6.14 Any detectable ammonia in the suit
valves. interior (five ppm ammonia (NH3) or more
6.4 Step into the enclosed test room such for the length of stain detector tube) indi-
as a closet, bathroom, or test booth, cates that the suit has failed the test. When
equipped with an exhaust fan. No air should other ammonia detectors are used a lower
be exhausted from the chamber during the level of detection is possible, and it should be
test because this will dilute the ammonia specified as the pass/fail criteria.
challenge concentrations. 6.15 By following this test method, an in-
6.5 Open the container with the pre-meas- trusion coefficient of approximately 200 or
ured volume of concentrated aqueous ammo- more can be measured with the suit in a
nia within the enclosed test room, and pour completely operational condition. If the in-
the liquid into the empty plastic test pan. trusion coefficient is 200 or more, then the
Wait two minutes to allow for adequate vola- suit is suitable for emergency response and
tilization of the concentrated aqueous am- field use.
monia. A small mixing fan can be used near
7.0—Retest procedures
the evaporation pan to increase the evapo-
ration rate of the ammonia solution. 7.1 If the suit fails this test, check for
6.6 After two minutes a determination of leaks by following the pressure test in test A
the ammonia concentration within the above.
chamber should be made using the high 7.2 Retest the TECP suit as outlined in
range colorimetric detector tube. A con- the test procedure 6.0.
166
8.0—Report or skin contact); and the performance of the
PPE materials (and seams) in providing a bar-
8.1 Each gas tight totally-encapsulating
rier to these hazards. The amount of protec-
chemical protective suit tested by this prac-
tion provided by PPE is material-hazard spe-
tice shall have the following information re-
corded. cific. That is, protective equipment mate-
8.1.1 Unique identification number, iden- rials will protect well against some haz-
tifying brand name, date of purchase, mate- ardous substances and poorly, or not at all,
rial of construction, and unique suit fea- against others. In many instances, protec-
tures; e.g., special breathing apparatus. tive equipment materials cannot be found
8.1.2 General description of test room which will provide continuous protection
used for test. from the particular hazardous substance. In
8.1.3 Brand name and purchase date of these cases the breakthrough time of the
ammonia detector strips and color change protective material should exceed the work
data. durations.
8.1.4 Brand name, sampling range, and ex- Other factors in this selection process to
piration date of the length of stain ammonia be considered are matching the PPE to the
detector tubes. The brand name and model of employee’s work requirements and task-spe-
the sampling pump should also be recorded. cific conditions. The durability of PPE mate-
If another type of ammonia detector is used, rials, such as tear strength and seam
it should be identified along with its min- strength, should be considered in relation to
imum detection limit for ammonia. the employee’s tasks. The effects of PPE in
8.1.5 Actual test results shall list the two relation to heat stress and task duration are
test area concentrations, their average, the a factor in selecting and using PPE. In some
interior suit concentration, and the cal- cases layers of PPE may be necessary to pro-
culated intrusion coefficient. Retest data vide sufficient protection, or to protect ex-
shall be recorded as an additional test. pensive PPE inner garments, suits or equip-
8.2 The evaluation of the data shall be ment.
specified as ‘‘suit passed’’ or ‘‘suit failed,’’ The more that is known about the hazards
and the date of the test. Any detectable am- at the site, the easier the job of PPE selec-
monia (five ppm or greater for the length of tion becomes. As more information about
stain detector tube) in the suit interior indi- the hazards and conditions at the site be-
cates the suit has failed this test. When comes available, the site supervisor can
other ammonia detectors are used, a lower make decisions to up-grade or down-grade
level of detection is possible and it should be the level of PPE protection to match the
specified as the pass fail criteria. tasks at hand.
The following are guidelines which an em-
CAUTION ployer can use to begin the selection of the
Visually inspect all parts of the suit to be appropriate PPE. As noted above, the site in-
sure they are positioned correctly and se- formation may suggest the use of combina-
cured tightly before putting the suit back tions of PPE selected from the different pro-
into service. Special care should be taken to tection levels (i.e., A, B, C, or D) as being
examine each exhaust valve to make sure it more suitable to the hazards of the work. It
is not blocked. should be cautioned that the listing below
Care should also be exercised to assure does not fully address the performance of the
that the inside and outside of the suit is specific PPE material in relation to the spe-
completely dry before it is put into storage. cific hazards at the job site, and that PPE
selection, evaluation and re-selection is an
APPENDIX B TO § 1926.65—GENERAL DESCRIP- ongoing process until sufficient information
TION AND DISCUSSION OF THE LEVELS OF about the hazards and PPE performance is
PROTECTION AND PROTECTIVE GEAR obtained.
This appendix sets forth information about Part A. Personal protective equipment is
personal protective equipment (PPE) protec- divided into four categories based on the de-
tion levels which may be used to assist em- gree of protection afforded. (See Part B of
ployers in complying with the PPE require- this appendix for further explanation of Lev-
ments of this section. els A, B, C, and D hazards.)
As required by the standard, PPE must be I. Level A— To be selected when the great-
selected which will protect employees from est level of skin, respiratory, and eye protec-
the specific hazards which they are likely to tion is required.
encounter during their work on-site. The following constitute Level A equip-
Selection of the appropriate PPE is a com- ment; it may be used as appropriate;
plex process which should take into consider- 1. Positive pressure, full face-piece self-
ation a variety of factors. Key factors in- contained breathing apparatus (SCBA), or
volved in this process are identification of positive pressure supplied air respirator with
the hazards, or suspected hazards; their escape SCBA, approved by the National In-
routes of potential hazard to employees (institute for Occupational Safety and Health
halation, skin absorption, ingestion, and eye (NIOSH).
167
2. Totally-encapsulating chemical-protec- 4. Boots, outer, chemical-resistant (dispos-
tive suit. able). 1
3. Coveralls. 1 5. Safety glasses or chemical splash
4. Long underwear. 1 goggles*.
5. Gloves, outer, chemical-resistant. 6. Hard hat. 1
6. Gloves, inner, chemical-resistant. 7. Escape mask. 1
7. Boots, chemical-resistant, steel toe and 8. Face shield. 1
shank. Part B. The types of hazards for which lev-
8. Hard hat (under suit). 1 els A, B, C, and D protection are appropriate
9. Disposable protective suit, gloves and are described below:
boots (depending on suit construction, may I. Level A—Level A protection should be
be worn over totally-encapsulating suit). used when:
II. Level B—The highest level of res- 1. The hazardous substance has been iden-
piratory protection is necessary but a lesser tified and requires the highest level of pro-
level of skin protection is needed. tection for skin, eyes, and the respiratory
The following constitute Level B equip- system based on either the measured (or po-
ment; it may be used as appropriate. tential for) high concentration of atmos-
1. Positive pressure, full-facepiece self-con- pheric vapors, gases, or particulates; or the
tained breathing apparatus (SCBA), or posi- site operations and work functions involve a
tive pressure supplied air respirator with es- high potential for splash, immersion, or ex-
cape SCBA (NIOSH approved). posure to unexpected vapors, gases, or par-
2. Hooded chemical-resistant clothing ticulates of materials that are harmful to
(overalls and long-sleeved jacket; coveralls; skin or capable of being absorbed through
one or two-piece chemical-splash suit; dis- the skin;
posable chemical-resistant overalls). 2. Substances with a high degree of hazard
3. Coveralls. 1 to the skin are known or suspected to be
4. Gloves, outer, chemical-resistant. present, and skin contact is possible; or
5. Gloves, inner, chemical-resistant. 3. Operations are being conducted in con-
6. Boots, outer, chemical-resistant steel fined, poorly ventilated areas, and the ab-
toe and shank. sence of conditions requiring Level A have
7. Boot-covers, outer, chemical-resistant not yet been determined.
(disposable). 1 II. Level B—Level B protection should be
8. Hard hat. 1 used when:
9. [Reserved] 1. The type and atmospheric concentration
10. Face shield. 1 of substances have been identified and re-
III. Level C—The concentration(s) and quire a high level of respiratory protection,
type(s) of airborne substance(s) is known and but less skin protection;
the criteria for using air purifying res- 2. The atmosphere contains less than 19.5
pirators are met. percent oxygen; or
The following constitute Level C equip- 3. The presence of incompletely identified
ment; it may be used as appropriate. vapors or gases is indicated by a direct-read-
1. Full-face or half-mask, air purifying res- ing organic vapor detection instrument, but
pirators (NIOSH approved). vapors and gases are not suspected of con-
2. Hooded chemical-resistant clothing taining high levels of chemicals harmful to
(overalls; two-piece chemical-splash suit; skin or capable of being absorbed through
disposable chemical-resistant overalls). the skin.
3. Coveralls. 1
4. Gloves, outer, chemical-resistant. NOTE: This involves atmospheres with
5. Gloves, inner, chemical-resistant. IDLH concentrations of specific substances
6. Boots (outer), chemical-resistant steel that present severe inhalation hazards and
toe and shank. 1 that do not represent a severe skin hazard;
7. Boot-covers, outer, chemical-resistant or that do not meet the criteria for use of
(disposable) 1. air-purifying respirators.
8. Hard hat. 1 III. Level C—Level C protection should be
9. Escape mask. 1 used when:
10. Face shield. 1 1. The atmospheric contaminants, liquid
IV. Level D—A work uniform affording splashes, or other direct contact will not ad-
minimal protection, used for nuisance con- versely affect or be absorbed through any ex-
tamination only. posed skin;
The following constitute Level D equip- 2. The types of air contaminants have been
ment; it may be used as appropriate: identified, concentrations measured, and an
1. Coveralls.
air-purifying respirator is available that can
2. Gloves. 1
remove the contaminants; and
3. Boots/shoes, chemical-resistant steel toe
3. All criteria for the use of air-purifying
and shank.
respirators are met.
IV. Level D—Level D protection should be
1 Optional, as applicable. used when:
168
1. The atmosphere contains no known haz- ty and health of employees at the site, and
ard; and the relationships with contractors or support
2. Work functions preclude splashes, im- services as to what each employer’s safety
mersion, or the potential for unexpected in- and health responsibilities are for their em-
halation of or contact with hazardous levels ployees on the site. Each contractor on the
of any chemicals. site needs to have its own safety and health
program so structured that it will smoothly
NOTE: As stated before, combinations of
interface with the program of the site coor-
personal protective equipment other than
dinator or principal contractor.
those described for Levels A, B, C, and D pro-
Also those employers involved with treat-
tection may be more appropriate and may be
ing, storing or disposal of hazardous waste as
used to provide the proper level of protec-
covered in paragraph (p) must have imple-
tion.
mented a safety and health program for their
As an aid in selecting suitable chemical
employees. This program is to include the
protective clothing, it should be noted that
hazard communication program required in
the National Fire Protection Association
paragraph (p)(1) and the training required in
(NFPA) has developed standards on chemical
paragraphs (p)(7) and (p)(8) as parts of the
protective clothing. The standards that have
employers comprehensive overall safety and
been adopted by include:
health program. This program is to be in
NFPA 1991—Standard on Vapor-Protective
writing.
Suits for Hazardous Chemical Emergencies
Each site or workplace safety and health
(EPA Level A Protective Clothing).
program will need to include the following:
NFPA 1992—Standard on Liquid Splash-
(1) Policy statements of the line of authority
Protective Suits for Hazardous Chemical
and accountability for implementing the
Emergencies (EPA Level B Protective Cloth-
program, the objectives of the program and
ing).
the role of the site safety and health super-
NFPA 1993—Standard on Liquid Splash-
visor or manager and staff; (2) means or
Protective Suits for Non-emergency, Non-
methods for the development of procedures
flammable Hazardous Chemical Situations for identifying and controlling workplace
(EPA Level B Protective Clothing). hazards at the site; (3) means or methods for
These standards apply documentation and the development and communication to em-
performance requirements to the manufac- ployees of the various plans, work rules,
ture of chemical protective suits. Chemical standard operating procedures and practices
protective suits meeting these requirements that pertain to individual employees and su-
are labelled as compliant with the appro- pervisors; (4) means for the training of super-
priate standard. It is recommended that visors and employees to develop the needed
chemical protective suits that meet these skills and knowledge to perform their work
standards be used. in a safe and healthful manner; (5) means to
APPENDIX C TO § 1926.65—COMPLIANCE anticipate and prepare for emergency situa-
GUIDELINES tions; and (6) means for obtaining informa-
tion feedback to aid in evaluating the pro-
1. Occupational Safety and Health Program. gram and for improving the effectiveness of
Each hazardous waste site clean-up effort the program. The management and employ-
will require an occupational safety and ees should be trying continually to improve
health program headed by the site coordi- the effectiveness of the program thereby en-
nator or the employer’s representative. The hancing the protection being afforded those
purpose of the program will be the protec- working on the site.
tion of employees at the site and will be an Accidents on the site or workplace should
extension of the employer’s overall safety be investigated to provide information on
and health program. The program will need how such occurrences can be avoided in the
to be developed before work begins on the future. When injuries or illnesses occur on
site and implemented as work proceeds as the site or workplace, they will need to be
stated in paragraph (b). The program is to fa- investigated to determine what needs to be
cilitate coordination and communication of done to prevent this incident from occurring
safety and health issues among personnel re- again. Such information will need to be used
sponsible for the various activities which as feedback on the effectiveness of the pro-
will take place at the site. It will provide the gram and the information turned into posi-
overall means for planning and imple- tive steps to prevent any reoccurrence. Re-
menting the needed safety and health train- ceipt of employee suggestions or complaints
ing and job orientation of employees who relating to safety and health issues involved
will be working at the site. The program will with site or workplace activities is also a
provide the means for identifying and con- feedback mechanism that can be used effec-
trolling worksite hazards and the means for tively to improve the program and may serve
monitoring program effectiveness. The pro- in part as an evaluative tool(s).
gram will need to cover the responsibilities For the development and implementation
and authority of the site coordinator or the of the program to be the most effective, pro-
employer’s manager on the site for the safe- fessional safety and health personnel should
169
be used. Certified Safety Professionals, ical surveillance program, the standard oper-
Board Certified Industrial Hygienists or Reg- ating procedures for the hazardous materials
istered Professional Safety Engineers are team including the use of plugging and
good examples of professional stature for patching equipment and other subject areas.
safety and health managers who will admin- Officers and leaders who may be expected
ister the employer’s program. to be in charge at an incident should be fully
2. Training. The training programs for em- knowledgeable of their company’s incident
ployees subject to the requirements of para- command system. They should know where
graph (e) of this standard should address: the and how to obtain additional assistance and
safety and health hazards employees should be familiar with the local district’s emer-
expect to find on hazardous waste clean-up gency response plan and the state emergency
sites; what control measures or techniques response plan.
are effective for those hazards; what moni- Specialist employees such as technical ex-
toring procedures are effective in character- perts, medical experts or environmental ex-
izing exposure levels; what makes an effec- perts that work with hazardous materials in
tive employer’s safety and health program; their regular jobs, who may be sent to the
what a site safety and health plan should in- incident scene by the shipper, manufacturer
clude; hands on training with personal pro- or governmental agency to advise and assist
tective equipment and clothing they may be the person in charge of the incident should
expected to use; the contents of the OSHA have training on an annual basis. Their
standard relevant to the employee’s duties training should include the care and use of
and function; and, employee’s responsibil- personal protective equipment including res-
ities under OSHA and other regulations. Su-
pirators; knowledge of the incident com-
pervisors will need training in their respon-
mand system and how they are to relate to
sibilities under the safety and health pro-
it; and those areas needed to keep them cur-
gram and its subject areas such as the spill
rent in their respective field as it relates to
containment program, the personal protec-
safety and health involving specific haz-
tive equipment program, the medical sur-
ardous substances.
veillance program, the emergency response
plan and other areas. Those skilled support personnel, such as
The training programs for employees sub- employees who work for public works depart-
ject to the requirements of paragraph (p) of ments or equipment operators who operate
this standard should address: the employers bulldozers, sand trucks, backhoes, etc., who
safety and health program elements impact- may be called to the incident scene to pro-
ing employees; the hazard communication vide emergency support assistance, should
program; the medical surveillance program; have at least a safety and health briefing be-
the hazards and the controls for such hazards fore entering the area of potential or actual
that employees need to know for their job exposure. These skilled support personnel,
duties and functions. All require annual re- who have not been a part of the emergency
fresher training. response plan and do not meet the training
The training programs for employees cov- requirements, should be made aware of the
ered by the requirements of paragraph (q) of hazards they face and should be provided all
this standard should address those com- necessary protective clothing and equipment
petencies required for the various levels of required for their tasks.
response such as: the hazards associated with There are two National Fire Protection As-
hazardous substances; hazard identification sociation standards, NFPA 472—‘‘Standard
and awareness; notification of appropriate for Professional Competence of Responders
persons; the need for and use of personal pro- to Hazardous Material Incidents’’ and NFPA
tective equipment including respirators; the 471—‘‘Recommended Practice for Responding
decontamination procedures to be used; to Hazardous Material Incidents’’, which are
preplanning activities for hazardous sub- excellent resource documents to aid fire de-
stance incidents including the emergency partments and other emergency response or-
reponse plan; company standard operating ganizations in developing their training pro-
procedures for hazardous substance emer- gram materials. NFPA 472 provides guidance
gency responses; the use of the incident com- on the skills and knowledge needed for first
mand system and other subjects. Hands-on responder awareness level, first responder
training should be stressed whenever pos- operations level, hazmat technicians, and
sible. Critiques done after an incident which hazmat specialist. It also offers guidance for
include an evaluation of what worked and the officer corp who will be in charge of haz-
what did not and how could the incident be ardous substance incidents.
better handled the next time may be counted 3. Decontamination. Decontamination pro-
as training time. cedures should be tailored to the specific
For hazardous materials specialists (usu- hazards of the site, and may vary in com-
ally members of hazardous materials teams), plexity and number of steps, depending on
the training should address the care, use and/ the level of hazard and the employee’s expo-
or testing of chemical protective clothing insure to the hazard. Decontamination proce-
cluding totally encapsulating suits, the med- dures and PPE decontamination methods
170
will vary depending upon the specific sub- the wearer from incorrect use and/or mal-
stance, since one procedure or method may function of the PPE. To accomplish these
not work for all substances. Evaluation of goals, a comprehensive PPE program should
decontamination methods and procedures include hazard identification, medical moni-
should be performed, as necessary, to assure toring, environmental surveillance, selec-
that employees are not exposed to hazards tion, use, maintenance, and decontamination
by re-using PPE. References in appendix D of PPE and its associated training.
may be used for guidance in establishing an The written PPE program should include
effective decontamination program. In addi- policy statements, procedures, and guide-
tion, the U.S. Coast Guard’s Manual, ‘‘Policy lines. Copies should be made available to all
Guidance for Response to Hazardous Chem- employees, and a reference copy should be
ical Releases,’’ U.S. Department of Transpor- made available at the worksite. Technical
tation, Washington, DC (COMDTINST data on equipment, maintenance manuals,
M16465.30) is a good reference for establishing relevant regulations, and other essential in-
an effective decontamination program. formation should also be collected and main-
4. Emergency response plans. States, along tained.
with designated districts within the states, 6. Incident command system (ICS). Paragraph
will be developing or have developed local 1926.65(q)(3)(ii) requires the implementation
emergency response plans. These state and of an ICS. The ICS is an organized approach
district plans should be utilized in the emer- to effectively control and manage operations
gency response plans called for in the stand- at an emergency incident. The individual in
ard. Each employer should assure that its charge of the ICS is the senior official re-
emergency response plan is compatible with sponding to the incident. The ICS is not
the local plan. The major reference being much different than the ‘‘command post’’ ap-
used to aid in developing the state and local
proach used for many years by the fire serv-
district plans is the Hazardous Materials
ice. During large complex fires involving sev-
Emergency Planning Guide, NRT–1. The cur-
eral companies and many pieces of appa-
rent Emergency Response Guidebook from
ratus, a command post would be established.
the U.S. Department of Transportation,
This enabled one individual to be in charge of
CMA’s CHEMTREC and the Fire Service
managing the incident, rather than having
Emergency Management Handbook may also
several officers from different companies
be used as resources.
making separate, and sometimes conflicting,
Employers involved with treatment, stor-
age, and disposal facilities for hazardous decisions. The individual in charge of the
waste, which have the required contingency command post would delegate responsibility
plan called for by their permit, would not for performing various tasks to subordinate
need to duplicate the same planning ele- officers. Additionally, all communications
ments. Those items of the emergency re- were routed through the command post to
sponse plan that are properly addressed in reduce the number of radio transmissions
the contingency plan may be substituted and eliminate confusion. However, strategy,
into the emergency response plan required in tactics, and all decisions were made by one
1926.65 or otherwise kept together for em- individual.
ployer and employee use. The ICS is a very similar system, except it
5. Personal protective equipment programs. is implemented for emergency response to
The purpose of personal protective clothing all incidents, both large and small, that in-
and equipment (PPE) is to shield or isolate volve hazardous substances.
individuals from the chemical, physical, and For a small incident, the individual in
biologic hazards that may be encountered at charge of the ICS may perform many tasks
a hazardous substance site. of the ICS. There may not be any, or little,
As discussed in appendix B, no single com- delegation of tasks to subordinates. For ex-
bination of protective equipment and cloth- ample, in response to a small incident, the
ing is capable of protecting against all haz- individual in charge of the ICS, in addition
ards. Thus PPE should be used in conjunc- to normal command activities, may become
tion with other protective methods and its the safety officer and may designate only
effectiveness evaluated periodically. one employee (with proper equipment) as a
The use of PPE can itself create significant back-up to provide assistance if needed.
worker hazards, such as heat stress, physical OSHA does recommend, however, that at
and psychological stress, and impaired vi- least two employees be designated as back-
sion, mobility, and communication. For any up personnel since the assistance needed
given situation, equipment and clothing may include rescue.
should be selected that provide an adequate To illustrate the operation of the ICS, the
level of protection. However, over-protec- following scenario might develop during a
tion, as well as under-protection, can be haz- small incident, such as an overturned tank
ardous and should be avoided where possible. truck with a small leak of flammable liquid.
Two basic objectives of any PPE program The first responding senior officer would
should be to protect the wearer from safety implement and take command of the ICS.
and health hazards, and to prevent injury to That person would size-up the incident and
171
determine if additional personnel and appa- ter; standard operating procedures and safe
ratus were necessary; would determine what work practices; medical assistance and
actions to take to control the leak; and, de- triage area; hazard monitoring plan (air con-
termine the proper level of personal protec- taminate monitoring, etc.); decontamination
tive equipment. If additional assistance is procedures and area; and other relevant
not needed, the individual in charge of the areas. This plan should be a part of the em-
ICS would implement actions to stop and ployer’s emergency response plan or an ex-
control the leak using the fewest number of tension of it to the specific site.
personnel that can effectively accomplish 8. Medical surveillance programs. Workers
the tasks. The individual in charge of the handling hazardous substances may be ex-
ICS then would designate himself as the safe-
posed to toxic chemicals, safety hazards, bio-
ty officer and two other employees as a
logic hazards, and radiation. Therefore, a
back-up in case rescue may become nec-
medical surveillance program is essential to
essary. In this scenario, decontamination
procedures would not be necessary. assess and monitor workers’ health and fit-
A large complex incident may require ness for employment in hazardous waste op-
many employees and difficult, time-con- erations and during the course of work; to
suming efforts to control. In these situa- provide emergency and other treatment as
tions, the individual in charge of the ICS will needed; and to keep accurate records for fu-
want to delegate different tasks to subordi- ture reference.
nates in order to maintain a span of control The Occupational Safety and Health Guid-
that will keep the number of subordinates, ance Manual for Hazardous Waste Site Activi-
that are reporting, to a manageable level. ties developed by the National Institute for
Delegation of task at large incidents may Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH),
be by location, where the incident scene is the Occupational Safety and Health Admin-
divided into sectors, and subordinate officers istration (OSHA), the U.S. Coast Guard
coordinate activities within the sector that (USCG), and the Environmental Protection
they have been assigned. Agency (EPA); October 1985 provides an ex-
Delegation of tasks can also be by func- cellent example of the types of medical test-
tion. Some of the functions that the indi- ing that should be done as part of a medical
vidual in charge of the ICS may want to del- surveillance program.
egate at a large incident are: medical serv- 9. New Technology and Spill Containment
ices; evacuation; water supply; resources Programs. Where hazardous substances may
(equipment, apparatus); media relations; be released by spilling from a container that
safety; and, site control (integrate activities will expose employees to the hazards of the
with police for crowd and traffic control). materials, the employer will need to imple-
Also for a large incident, the individual in ment a program to contain and control the
charge of the ICS will designate several em- spilled material. Diking and ditching, as well
ployees as back-up personnel; and a number
as use of absorbents like diatomaceous
of safety officers to monitor conditions and
earth, are traditional techniques which have
recommend safety precautions.
proven to be effective over the years. How-
Therefore, no matter what size or com-
ever, in recent years new products have come
plexity an incident may be, by implementing
an ICS there will be one individual in charge into the marketplace, the use of which com-
who makes the decisions and gives direc- plement and increase the effectiveness of
tions; and, all actions, and communications these traditional methods. These new prod-
are coordinated through one central point of ucts also provide emergency responders and
command. Such a system should reduce con- others with additional tools or agents to use
fusion, improve safety, organize and coordi- to reduce the hazards of spilled materials.
nate actions, and should facilitate effective These agents can be rapidly applied over a
management of the incident. large area and can be uniformly applied or
7. Site Safety and Control Plans. The safety otherwise can be used to build a small dam,
and security of response personnel and oth- thus improving the workers’ ability to con-
ers in the area of an emergeny response inci- trol spilled material. These application tech-
dent site should be of primary concern to the niques enhance the intimate contact be-
incident commander. The use of a site safety tween the agent and the spilled material al-
and control plan could greatly assist those in lowing for the quickest effect by the agent or
charge of assuring the safety and health of quickest control of the spilled material.
employees on the site. Agents are available to solidify liquid spilled
A comprehensive site safety and control materials, to suppress vapor generation from
plan should include the following: summary spilled materials, and to do both. Some spe-
analysis of hazards on the site and a risk cial agents, which when applied as rec-
analysis of those hazards; site map or ommended by the manufacturer, will react
sketch; site work zones (clean zone, transi- in a controlled manner with the spilled ma-
tion or decontamination zone, work or hot terial to neutralize acids or caustics, or
zone); use of the buddy system; site commu- greatly reduce the level of hazard of the
nications; command post or command cen- spilled material.
172
There are several modern methods and de- follow the employer’s established standard
vices for use by emergency response per- operating procedures for spill control. All in-
sonnel or others involved with spill control volved workers need to be trained in the es-
efforts to safely apply spill control agents to tablished operating procedures; in the use
control spilled material hazards. These in- and care of spill control equipment; and in
clude portable pressurized applicators simi- the associated hazards and control of such
lar to hand-held portable fire extinguishing hazards of spill containment work.
devices, and nozzle and hose systems similar These new tools and agents are the things
to portable fire fighting foam systems which that employers will want to evaluate as part
allow the operator to apply the agent with- of their new technology program. The treat-
out having to come into contact with the ment of spills of hazardous substances or
spilled material. The operator is able to wastes at an emergency incident as part of
apply the agent to the spilled material from the immediate spill containment and control
a remote position. efforts is sometimes acceptable to EPA and a
The solidification of liquids provides for permit exception is described in 40 CFR
rapid containment and isolation of haz- 264.1(g)(8) and 265.1(c)(11).
ardous substance spills. By directing the
agent at run-off points or at the edges of the APPENDIX D TO § 1926.65—REFERENCES
spill, the reactant solid will automatically The following references may be consulted
create a barrier to slow or stop the spread of for further information on the subject of this
the material. Clean-up of hazardous substandard:
stances is greatly improved when solidifying 1. OSHA Instruction DFO CPL 2.70—Janu-
agents, acid or caustic neutralizers, or acti- ary 29, 1986, Special Emphasis Program: Haz-
vated carbon adsorbents are used. Properly ardous Waste Sites.
applied, these agents can totally solidify liq- 2. OSHA Instruction DFO CPL 2–2.37A—
uid hazardous substances or neutralize or ab- January 29, 1986, Technical Assistance and
sorb them, which results in materials which Guidelines for Superfund and Other Hazardous
are less hazardous and easier to handle, Waste Site Activities.
transport, and dispose of. The concept of 3. OSHA Instruction DTS CPL 2.74—Janu-
spill treatment, to create less hazardous sub- ary 29, 1986, Hazardous Waste Activity Form,
stances, will improve the safety and level of OSHA 175.
protection of employees working at spill 4. Hazardous Waste Inspections Reference
clean-up operations or emergency response Manual, U.S. Department of Labor, Occupa-
operations to spills of hazardous substances. tional Safety and Health Administration,
The use of vapor suppression agents for 1986.
volatile hazardous substances, such as flam- 5. Memorandum of Understanding Among
mable liquids and those substances which the National Institute for Occupational Safe-
present an inhalation hazard, is important ty and Health, the Occupational Safety and
for protecting workers. The rapid and uni- Health Administration, the United States
form distribution of the agent over the sur- Coast Guard, and the United States Environ-
face of the spilled material can provide quick mental Protection Agency, Guidance for
vapor knockdown. There are temporary and Worker Protection During Hazardous Waste Site
long-term foam-type agents which are effec- Investigations and Clean-up and Hazardous
tive on vapors and dusts, and activated car- Substance Emergencies. December 18, 1980.
bon adsorption agents which are effective for 6. National Priorities List, 1st Edition, Octo-
vapor control and soaking-up of the liquid. ber 1984; U.S. Environmental Protection
The proper use of hose lines or hand-held Agency, Revised periodically.
portable pressurized applicators provides 7. The Decontamination of Response Per-
good mobility and permits the worker to de- sonnel, Field Standard Operating Procedures
liver the agent from a safe distance without (F.S.O.P.) 7; U.S. Environmental Protection
having to step into the untreated spilled ma- Agency, Office of Emergency and Remedial
terial. Some of these systems can be re- Response, Hazardous Response Support Divi-
charged in the field to provide coverage of sion, December 1984.
larger spill areas than the design limits of a 8. Preparation of a Site Safety Plan, Field
single charged applicator unit. Some of the Standard Operating Procedures (F.S.O.P.) 9;
more effective agents can solidify the liquid U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Of-
flammable hazardous substances and at the fice of Emergency and Remedial Response,
same time elevate the flashpoint above 140 Hazardous Response Support Division, April
°F so the resulting substance may be handled 1985.
as a nonhazardous waste material if it meets 9. Standard Operating Safety Guidelines; U.S.
the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency’s Environmental Protection Agency, Office of
40 CFR part 261 requirements (See particu- Emergency and Remedial Response, Haz-
larly § 261.21). ardous Response Support Division, Environ-
All workers performing hazardous sub- mental Response Team; November 1984.
stance spill control work are expected to 10. Occupational Safety and Health Guidance
wear the proper protective clothing and Manual for Hazardous Waste Site Activities,
equipment for the materials present and to National Institute for Occupational Safety
173
and Health (NIOSH), Occupational Safety programs must be developed on the basis of
and Health Administration (OSHA), U.S. a needs assessment of the hazardous waste
Coast Guard (USCG), and Environmental site, RCRA/TSDF, or emergency response op-
Protection Agency (EPA); October 1985. eration in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.65.
11. Protecting Health and Safety at Haz- It is noted that the legal requirements are
ardous Waste Sites: An Overview, U.S. Envi- set forth in the regulatory text of § 1926.65.
ronmental Protection Agency, EPA/625/9–85/ The guidance set forth here presents a highly
006; September 1985. effective program that in the areas covered
12. Hazardous Waste Sites and Hazardous would meet or exceed the regulatory require-
Substance Emergencies, NIOSH Worker Bul-
ments. In addition, other approaches could
letin, U.S. Department of Health and Human
meet the regulatory requirements.
Services, Public Health Service, Centers for
Disease Control, National Institute for Occu- Suggested General Criteria
pational Safety and Health; December 1982. Definitions:
13. Personal Protective Equipment for Haz- Competent means possessing the skills,
ardous Materials Incidents: A Selection Guide; knowledge, experience, and judgment to per-
U.S. Department of Health and Human Serv- form assigned tasks or activities satisfac-
ices, Public Health Service, Centers for Dis- torily as determined by the employer.
ease Control, National Institute for Occupa- Demonstration means the showing by actual
tional Safety and Health; October 1984. use of equipment or procedures.
14. Fire Service Emergency Management Hands-on training means training in a sim-
Handbook, International Association of Fire ulated work environment that permits each
Chiefs Foundation, 101 East Holly Avenue, student to have experience performing tasks,
Unit 10B, Sterling, VA 22170, January 1985. making decisions, or using equipment appro-
15. Emergency Response Guidebook, U.S De- priate to the job assignment for which the
partment of Transportation, Washington, training is being conducted.
DC, 1987. Initial training means training required
16. Report to the Congress on Hazardous Ma- prior to beginning work.
terials Training, Planning and Preparedness, Lecture means an interactive discourse
Federal Emergency Management Agency, with a class lead by an instructor.
Washington, DC, July 1986. Proficient means meeting a stated level of
17. Workbook for Fire Command, Alan V. achievement.
Brunacini and J. David Beageron, National Site-specific means individual training di-
Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch rected to the operations of a specific job site.
Park, Quincy, MA 02269, 1985.
Training hours means the number of hours
18. Fire Command, Alan V. Brunacini, Na-
devoted to lecture, learning activities, small
tional Fire Protection Association,
group work sessions, demonstration, evalua-
Batterymarch Park,, Quincy, MA 02269, 1985.
tions, or hands-on experience.
19. Incident Command System, Fire Protec-
tion Publications, Oklahoma State Univer- Suggested Core Criteria:
sity, Stillwater, OK 74078, 1983. 1. Training facility. The training facility
20. Site Emergency Response Planning, Chem- should have available sufficient resources,
ical Manufacturers Association, Washington, equipment, and site locations to perform di-
DC 20037, 1986. dactic and hands-on training when appro-
21. Hazardous Materials Emergency Planning priate. Training facilities should have suffi-
Guide, NRT–1, Environmental Protection cient organization, support staff, and serv-
Agency, Washington, DC, March 1987. ices to conduct training in each of the
22. Community Teamwork: Working Together courses offered.
to Promote Hazardous Materials Transportation 2. Training Director. Each training program
Safety. U.S. Department of Transportation, should be under the direction of a training
Washington, DC, May 1983. director who is responsible for the program.
23. Disaster Planning Guide for Business and The Training Director should have a min-
Industry, Federal Emergency Management imum of two years of employee education ex-
Agency, Publication No. FEMA 141, August perience.
1987. 3. Instructors. Instructors should be deem
competent on the basis of previous docu-
APPENDIX E TO § 1926.65—TRAINING
mented experience in their area of instruc-
CURRICULUM GUIDELINES
tion, successful completion of a ‘‘train-the-
The following non-mandatory general cri- trainer’’ program specific to the topics they
teria may be used for assistance in devel- will teach, and an evaluation of instruc-
oping site-specific training curriculum used tional competence by the Training Director.
to meet the training requirements of 29 CFR Instructors should be required to maintain
1926.65(e); 29 CFR 1926.65(p)(7), (p)(8)(iii); and professional competency by participating in
29 CFR 1926.65(q)(6), (q)(7), and (q)(8). These continuing education or professional devel-
are generic guidelines and they are not pre- opment programs or by completing success-
sented as a complete training curriculum for fully an annual refresher course and having
any specific employer. Site-specific training an annual review by the Training Director.
174
The annual review by the Training Direc- riculum and any update should be approved
tor should include observation of an instruc- by the Training Director.
tor’s delivery, a review of those observations The proficiency assessment methods, re-
with the trainer, and an analysis of any in- gardless of the approach or combination of
structor or class evaluations completed by approaches used, should be justified, docu-
the students during the previous year. ment and approved by the Training Director.
4. Course materials. The Training Director The proficiency of those taking the addi-
should approve all course materials to be tional courses for supervisors should be eval-
used by the training provider. Course mate- uated and document by using proficiency as-
rials should be reviewed and updated at least sessment methods acceptable to the Training
annually. Materials and equipment should be Director. These proficiency assessment
in good working order and maintained prop- methods must reflect the additional respon-
erly. sibilities borne by supervisory personnel in
All written and audio-visual materials in hazardous waste operations or emergency re-
training curricula should be peer reviewed by sponse.
technically competent outside reviewers or 8. Course certificate. Written documentation
by a standing advisory committee. should be provided to each student who sat-
Reviews should possess expertise in the fol- isfactorily completes the training course.
lowing disciplines were applicable: occupa- The documentation should include:
tional health, industrial hygiene and safety, a. Student’s name.
chemical/environmental engineering, em- b. Course title.
ployee education, or emergency response. c. Course date.
One or more of the peer reviewers should be d. Statement that the student has success-
a employee experienced in the work activi- fully completed the course.
ties to which the training is directed.
e. Name and address of the training pro-
5. Students. The program for accepting stu-
vider.
dents should include:
f. An individual identification number for
a. Assurance that the student is or will be
the certificate.
involved in work where chemical exposures
g. List of the levels of personal protective
are likely and that the student possesses the
skills necessary to perform the work. equipment used by the student to complete
b. A policy on the necessary medical clear- the course.
ance. This documentation may include a certifi-
6. Ratios. Student-instructor ratios should cate and an appropriate wallet-sized lami-
not exceed 30 students per instructor. Hands- nated card with a photograph of the student
on activity requiring the use of personal pro- and the above information. When such
tective equipment should have the following course certificate cards are used, the indi-
student-instructor ratios. For Level C or vidual identification number for the training
Level D personal protective equipment the certificate should be shown on the card.
ratio should be 10 students per instructor. 9. Recordkeeping. Training providers should
For Level A or Level B personal protective maintain records listing the dates courses
equipment the ratio should be 5 students per were presented, the names of the individual
instructor. course attenders, the names of those stu-
7. Proficiency assessment. Proficiency should dents successfully completing each course,
be evaluated and documented by the use of a and the number of training certificates
written assessment and a skill demonstra- issued to each successful student. These
tion selected and developed by the Training records should be maintained for a minimum
Director and training staff. The assessment of five years after the date an individual par-
and demonstration should evaluate the ticipated in a training program offered by
knowledge and individual skills developed in the training provider. These records should
the course of training. The level of minimum be available and provided upon the student’s
achievement necessary for proficiency shall request or as mandated by law.
be specified in writing by the Training Direc- 10. Program quality control. The Training
tor. Director should conduct or direct an annual
If a written test is used, there should be a written audit of the training program. Pro-
minimum of 50 questions. If a written test is gram modifications to address deficiencies, if
used in combination with a skills demonstra- any, should be documented, approved, and
tion, a minimum of 25 questions should be implemented by the training provider. The
used. If a skills demonstration is used, the audit and the program modification docu-
tasks chosen and the means to rate success- ments should be maintained at the training
ful completion should be fully documented facility.
by the Training Director. Suggested Program Quality Control Criteria
The content of the written test or of the Factors listed here are suggested criteria
skill demonstration shall be relevant to the for determining the quality and appropriate-
objectives of the course. The written test ness of employee health and safety training
and skill demonstration should be updated as for hazardous waste operations and emer-
necessary to reflect changes in the cur- gency response.
175
A. Training Plan. Adequacy and appropriateness of the facili-
Adequacy and appropriateness of the train- ties and resources for supporting the train-
ing program’s curriculum development, ining program should be considered, including,
structor training, distribution of course ma- 1. Space and equipment to conduct the
terials, and direct student training should be training.
considered, including 2. Facilities for representative hands-on
1. The duration of training, course content, training.
and course schedules/agendas; 3. In the case of multiple-site programs,
2. The different training requirements of equipment and facilities at the satellite cen-
the various target populations, as specified ters.
in the appropriate generic training cur- 4. Adequacy and appropriateness of the
riculum; quality control and evaluations program to
3. The process for the development of cur- account for instructor performance.
riculum, which includes appropriate tech- 5. Adequacy and appropriateness of the
nical input, outside review, evaluation, pro- quality control and evaluation program to
gram pretesting. ensure appropriate course evaluation, feed-
4. The adequate and appropriate inclusion back, updating, and corrective action.
of hands-on, demonstration, and instruction 6. Adequacy and appropriateness of dis-
methods; ciplines and expertise being used within the
5. Adequate monitoring of student safety, quality control and evaluation program.
progress, and performance during the train- 7. Adequacy and appropriateness of the
ing. role of student evaluations to provide feed-
B. Program management, Training Director, back for training program improvement.
staff, and consultants. D. Quality control and evaluation.
Adequacy and appropriateness of staff per- Adequacy and appropriateness of quality
formance and delivering an effective training control and evaluation plans for training
program should be considered, including programs should be considered, including:
1. Demonstration of the training director’s 1. A balanced advisory committee and/or
leadership in assuring quality of health and competent outside reviewers to give overall
safety training. policy guidance;
2. Demonstration of the competency of the 2. Clear and adequate definition of the
staff to meet the demands of delivering high composition and active programmatic role of
quality hazardous waste employee health the advisory committee or outside reviewers.
and safety training. 3. Adequacy of the minutes or reports of
3. Organization charts establishing clear the advisory committee or outside reviewers’
lines of authority. meetings or written communication.
4. Clearly defined staff duties including the 4. Adequacy and appropriateness of the
relationship of the training staff to the over- quality control and evaluations program to
all program. account for instructor performance.
5. Evidence that the training organiza- 5. Adequacy and appropriateness of the
tional structure suits the needs of the train- quality control and evaluation program to
ing program. ensure appropriate course evaluation, feed-
6. Appropriateness and adequacy of the back, updating, and corrective action.
training methods used by the instructors. 6. Adequacy and appropriateness of dis-
7. Sufficiency of the time committed by
ciplines and expertise being used within the
the training director and staff to the train-
quality control and evaluation program.
ing program.
7. Adequacy and appropriateness of the
8. Adequacy of the ratio of training staff to
role of student evaluations to provide feed-
students.
back for training program improvement.
9. Availability and commitment of the
training program of adequate human and E. Students
equipment resources in the areas of Adequacy and appropriateness of the pro-
a. Health effects, gram for accepting students should be con-
b. Safety, sidered, including
c. Personal protective equipment (PPE), 1. Assurance that the student already pos-
d. Operational procedures, sess the necessary skills for their job, includ-
e. Employee protection practices/proce- ing necessary documentation.
dures. 2. Appropriateness of methods the program
10. Appropriateness of management con- uses to ensure that recruits are capable of
trols. satisfactorily completing training.
11. Adequacy of the organization and ap- 3. Review and compliance with any medical
propriate resources assigned to assure appro- clearance policy.
priate training. F. Institutional Environment and Administra-
12. In the case of multiple-site training tive Support. The adequacy and appropriate-
programs, adequacy of satellite centers man- ness of the institutional environment and
agement. administrative support system for the train-
C. Training facilities and resources. ing program should be considered, including
176
1. Adequacy of the institutional commit- (6) Sanitation recommendation and equip-
ment to the employee training program. ment.
2. Adequacy and appropriateness of the ad- (7) Review and explanation of OSHA’s haz-
ministrative structure and administrative ard-communication standard (29 CFR
support. 1910.1200) and lock-out-tag-out standard (29
G. Summary of Evaluation Questions Key CFR 1910.147).
questions for evaluating the quality and ap- (8) Review of other applicable standards in-
propriateness of an overall training program cluding but not limited to those in the con-
should include the following: struction standards (29 CFR part 1926).
1. Are the program objectives clearly stat- (9) Rights and responsibilities of employers
ed? and employees under applicable OSHA and
2. Is the program accomplishing its objec- EPA laws.
tives? b. Technical knowledge. (1) Type of poten-
3. Are appropriate facilities and staff avail- tial exposures to chemical, biological, and
able? radiological hazards; types of human re-
4. Is there an appropriate mix of classroom, sponses to these hazards and recognition of
demonstration, and hands-on training? those responses; principles of toxicology and
5. Is the program providing quality em- information about acute and chronic haz-
ployee health and safety training that fully ards; health and safety considerations of new
meets the intent of regulatory requirements? technology.
6. What are the program’s main strengths? (2) Fundamentals of chemical hazards in-
7. What are the program’s main weak- cluding but not limited to vapor pressure,
nesses? boiling points, flash points, ph, other phys-
8. What is recommended to improve the ical and chemical properties.
program? (3) Fire and explosion hazards of chemi-
9. Are instructors instructing according to cals.
their training outlines? (4) General safety hazards such as but not
10. Is the evaluation tool current and ap- limited to electrical hazards, powered equip-
propriate for the program content? ment hazards, motor vehicle hazards, walk-
11. Is the course material current and rel- ing-working surface hazards, excavation haz-
evant to the target group? ards, and hazards associated with working in
hot and cold temperature extremes.
Suggested Training Curriculum Guidelines (5) Review and knowledge of confined space
The following training curriculum guide- entry procedures in 29 CFR 1910.146.
lines are for those operations specifically (6) Work practices to minimize employee
identified in 29 CFR 1926.65 as requiring risk from site hazards.
training. Issues such as qualifications of in- (7) Safe use of engineering controls, equip-
structors, training certification, and similar ment, and any new relevant safety tech-
criteria appropriate to all categories of oper- nology or safety procedures.
ations addressed in 1926.65 have been covered (8) Review and demonstration of com-
in the preceding section and are not re-ad- petency with air sampling and monitoring
dressed in each of the generic guidelines. equipment that may be used in a site moni-
Basic core requirements for training pro- toring program.
grams that are addressed include (9) Container sampling procedures and
1. General Hazardous Waste Operations safeguarding; general drum and container
2. RCRA operations—Treatment, storage, handling procedures including special re-
and disposal facilities. quirement for laboratory waste packs,
3. Emergency Response. shock-sensitive wastes, and radioactive
A. General Hazardous Waste Operations and wastes.
Site-specific Training 1. Off-site training. (10) The elements of a spill control pro-
Minimum training course content for haz- gram.
ardous waste operations, required by 29 CFR (11) Proper use and limitations of material
1926.65(e), should include the following topics handling equipment.
or procedures: (12) Procedures for safe and healthful prep-
a. Regulatory knowledge. aration of containers for shipping and trans-
(1) A review of 29 CFR 1926.65 and the core port.
elements of an occupational safety and (13) Methods of communication including
health program. those used while wearing respiratory protec-
(2) The content of a medical surveillance tion.
program as outlined in 29 CFR 1926.65(f). c. Technical skills. (1) Selection, use main-
(3) The content of an effective site safety tenance, and limitations of personal protec-
and health plan consistent with the require- tive equipment including the components
ments of 29 CFR 1926.65(b)(4)(ii). and procedures for carrying out a respirator
(4) Emergency response plan and proce- program to comply with 29 CFR 1910.134.
dures as outlined in 29 CFR 1910.38 and 29 (2) Instruction in decontamination pro-
CFR 1926.65(l). grams including personnel, equipment, and
(5) Adequate illumination. hardware; hands-on training including level
177
A, B, and C ensembles and appropriate de- (2) Activities and locations in their work
contamination lines; field activities includ- area where hazardous substance may be
ing the donning and doffing of protective present.
equipment to a level commensurate with the (3) Methods and observations that may be
employee’s anticipated job function and reused to detect the present or release of a haz-
sponsibility and to the degree required by ardous chemical in the work area (such as
potential hazards. monitoring conducted by the employer, con-
(3) Sources for additional hazard informa- tinuous monitoring devices, visual appear-
tion; exercises using relevant manuals and ances, or other evidence (sight, sound or
hazard coding systems. smell) of hazardous chemicals being released,
d. Additional suggested items. (1) A lami- and applicable alarms from monitoring de-
nated, dated card or certificate with photo, vices that record chemical releases.
denoting limitations and level of protection (4) The physical and health hazards of sub-
for which the employee is trained should be stances known or potentially present in the
issued to those students successfully com- work area.
pleting a course. (5) The measures employees can take to
(2) Attendance should be required at all help protect themselves from work-site haz-
training modules, with successful comple- ards, including specific procedures the em-
tion of exercises and a final written or oral ployer has implemented.
examination with at least 50 questions. (6) An explanation of the labeling system
(3) A minimum of one-third of the program and safety data sheets and how employees
should be devoted to hands-on exercises. can obtain and use appropriate hazard infor-
(4) A curriculum should be established for mation.
the 8-hour refresher training required by 29 (7) The elements of the confined space pro-
CFR 1926.65(e)(8), with delivery of such gram including special PPE, permits, moni-
courses directed toward those areas of pre- toring requirements, communication proce-
vious training that need improvement or re- dures, emergency response, and applicable
emphasis. lock-out procedures.
(5) A curriculum should be established for b. The employer should provide hazardous
the required 8-hour training for supervisors. waste employees information and training
Demonstrated competency in the skills and and should provide a review and access to
knowledge provided in a 40-hour course the site safety and plan as follows:
should be a prerequisite for supervisor train- (1) Names of personnel and alternate re-
ing. sponsible for site safety and health.
2. Refresher training. The 8-hour annual re- (2) Safety and health hazards present on
fresher training required in 29 CFR the site.
1926.65(e)(8) should be conducted by qualified (3) Selection, use, maintenance, and limi-
training providers. Refresher training should tations of personal protective equipment
include at a minimum the following topics specific to the site.
and procedures: (4) Work practices by which the employee
(a) Review of and retraining on relevant can minimize risks from hazards.
topics covered in the 40-hour program, as ap- (5) Safe use of engineering controls and
propriate, using reports by the students on equipment available on site.
their work experiences. (6) Safe decontamination procedures estab-
(b) Update on developments with respect to lished to minimize employee contact with
material covered in the 40-hour course. hazardous substances, including:
(c) Review of changes to pertinent provi- (A) Employee decontamination,
sions of EPA or OSHA standards or laws. (B) Clothing decontamination, and
(d) Introduction of additional subject areas (C) Equipment decontamination.
as appropriate. (7) Elements of the site emergency re-
(e) Hands-on review of new or altered PPE sponse plan, including:
or decontamination equipment or proce- (A) Pre-emergency planning.
dures. Review of new developments in per- (B) Personnel roles and lines of authority
sonal protective equipment. and communication.
(f) Review of newly developed air and con- (C) Emergency recognition and prevention.
taminant monitoring equipment. (D) Safe distances and places of refuge.
3. On-site training. a. The employer should (E) Site security and control.
provide employees engaged in hazardous (F) Evacuation routes and procedures.
waste site activities with information and (G) Decontamination procedures not cov-
training prior to initial assignment into ered by the site safety and health plan.
their work area, as follows: (H) Emergency medical treatment and first
(1) The requirements of the hazard commu- aid.
nication program including the location and (I) Emergency equipment and procedures
availability of the written program, required for handling emergency incidents.
lists of hazardous chemicals, and safety data c. The employer should provide hazardous
sheets. waste employees information and training
178
on personal protective equipment used at the (g) A review of procedures to minimize ex-
site, such as the following: posure to hazardous waste and various type
(1) PPE to be used based upon known or an- of waste streams, including the materials
ticipated site hazards. handling program and spill containment pro-
(2) PPE limitations of materials and con- gram.
struction; limitations during temperature (h) A review of hazard communication pro-
extremes, heat stress, and other appropriate grams meeting the requirements of 29 CFR
medical considerations; use and limitations 1910.1200.
of respirator equipment as well as docu- (i) A review of medical surveillance pro-
mentation procedures as outlined in 29 CFR grams meeting the requirements of 29 CFR
1910.134. 1926.65(p)(3) including the recognition of
(3) PPE inspection procedures prior to, signs and symptoms of overexposure to haz-
during, and after use. ardous substance including known syner-
(4) PPE donning and doffing procedures. gistic interactions.
(5) PPE decontamination and disposal pro- (j) A review of decontamination programs
cedures. and procedures meeting the requirements of
(6) PPE maintenance and storage. 29 CFR 1926.65(p)(4).
(7) Task duration as related to PPE limita- (k) A review of an employer’s requirements
tions. to implement a training program and its ele-
d. The employer should instruct the em- ments.
ployee about the site medical surveillance (l) A review of the criteria and programs
program relative to the particular site, infor proper selection and use of personal pro-
cluding tective equipment, including respirators.
(m) A review of the applicable appendices
(1) Specific medical surveillance programs
to 29 CFR 1926.65.
that have been adapted for the site.
(n) Principles of toxicology and biological
(2) Specific signs and symptoms related to
monitoring as they pertain to occupational
exposure to hazardous materials on the site.
health.
(3) The frequency and extent of periodic
(o) Rights and responsibilities of employ-
medical examinations that will be used on
ees and employers under applicable OSHA
the site.
and EPA laws.
(4) Maintenance and availability of
(p) Hands-on exercises and demonstrations
records.
of competency with equipment to illustrate
(5) Personnel to be contacted and proce-
the basic equipment principles that may be
dures to be followed when signs and symp-
used during the performance of work duties,
toms of exposures are recognized.
including the donning and doffing of PPE.
e. The employees will review and discuss (q) Sources of reference, efficient use of
the site safety plan as part of the training relevant manuals, and knowledge of hazard
program. The location of the site safety plan coding systems to include information con-
and all written programs should be discussed tained in hazardous waste manifests.
with employees including a discussion of the (r) At least 8 hours of hands-on training.
mechanisms for access, review, and ref- (s) Training in the job skills required for
erences described. an employee’s job function and responsi-
B. RCRA Operations Training for Treatment, bility before they are permitted to partici-
Storage and Disposal Facilities. pate in or supervise field activities.
1. As a minimum, the training course re- 2. The individual employer should provide
quired in 29 CFR 1926.65 (p) should include hazardous waste employees with information
the following topics: and training prior to an employee’s initial
(a) Review of the applicable paragraphs of assignment into a work area. The training
29 CFR 1926.65 and the elements of the em- and information should cover the following
ployer’s occupational safety and health plan. topics:
(b) Review of relevant hazards such as, but (a) The Emergency response plan and pro-
not limited to, chemical, biological, and ra- cedures including first aid.
diological exposures; fire and explosion haz- (b) A review of the employer’s hazardous
ards; thermal extremes; and physical haz- waste handling procedures including the ma-
ards. terials handling program and elements of the
(c) General safety hazards including those spill containment program, location of spill
associated with electrical hazards, powered response kits or equipment, and the names of
equipment hazards, lock-out-tag-out proce- those trained to respond to releases.
dures, motor vehicle hazards and walking- (c) The hazardous communication program
working surface hazards. meeting the requirements of 29 CFR
(d) Confined-space hazards and procedures. 1910.1200.
(e) Work practices to minimize employee (d) A review of the employer’s medical sur-
risk from workplace hazards. veillance program including the recognition
(f) Emergency response plan and proce- of signs and symptoms of exposure to rel-
dures including first aid meeting the require- evant hazardous substance including known
ments of paragraph (p)(8). synergistic interactions.
179
(e) A review of the employer’s decon- and the individuals responsible for the site
tamination program and procedures. where the response would be expected.
(f) An review of the employer’s training (1) Hazard recognition, including:
program and the parties responsible for that (A) Nature of hazardous substances
program. present,
(g) A review of the employer’s personal (B) Practical applications of hazard rec-
protective equipment program including the ognition, including presentations on biology,
proper selection and use of PPE based upon chemistry, and physics.
specific site hazards. (2) Principles of toxicology, biological
(h) All relevant site-specific procedures ad- monitoring, and risk assessment.
dressing potential safety and health hazards.
(3) Safe work practices and general site
This may include, as appropriate, biological
safety.
and radiological exposures, fire and explo-
sion hazards, thermal hazards, and physical (4) Engineering controls and hazardous
hazards such as electrical hazards, powered waste operations.
equipment hazards, lock-out-tag-out haz- (5) Site safety plans and standard oper-
ards, motor vehicle hazards, and walking- ating procedures.
working surface hazards. (6) Decontamination procedures and prac-
(i) Safe use engineering controls and equip- tices.
ment on site. (7) Emergency procedures, first aid, and
(j) Names of personnel and alternates re- self-rescue.
sponsible for safety and health. (8) Safe use of field equipment.
C. Emergency response training. (9) Storage, handling, use and transpor-
Federal OSHA standards in 29 CFR tation of hazardous substances.
1926.65(q) are directed toward private sector (10) Use, care, and limitations of personal
emergency responders. Therefore, the guide- protective equipment.
lines provided in this portion of the appendix (11) Safe sampling techniques.
are directed toward that employee popu- (12) Rights and responsibilities of employ-
lation. However, they also impact indirectly ees under OSHA and other related laws con-
through State OSHA or USEPA regulations cerning right-to-know, safety and health,
some public sector emergency responders. compensations and liability.
Therefore, the guidelines provided in this (13) Medical monitoring requirements.
portion of the appendix may be applied to (14) Community relations.
both employee populations. b. Suggested criteria for specific courses.
States with OSHA state plans must cover (1) First responder awareness level.
their employees with regulations at least as (A) Review of and demonstration of com-
effective as the Federal OSHA standards. petency in performing the applicable skills
Public employees in states without approved of 29 CFR 1926.65(q).
state OSHA programs covering hazardous
(B) Hands-on experience with the U.S. De-
waste operations and emergency response
partment of Transportation’s Emergency Re-
are covered by the U.S. EPA under 40 CFR
sponse Guidebook (ERG) and familiarization
311, a regulation virtually identical to
with OSHA standard 29 CFR 1926.60.
§ 1926.65.
Since this is a non-mandatory appendix (C) Review of the principles and practices
and therefore not an enforceable standard, for analyzing an incident to determine both
OSHA recommends that those employers, the hazardous substances present and the
employees or volunteers in public sector basic hazard and response information for
emergency response organizations outside each hazardous substance present.
Federal OSHA jurisdiction consider the fol- (D) Review of procedures for implementing
lowing criteria in developing their own actions consistent with the local emergency
training programs. A unified approach to response plan, the organization’s standard
training at the community level between operating procedures, and the current edi-
emergency response organizations covered tion of DOT’s ERG including emergency no-
by Federal OSHA and those not covered di- tification procedures and follow-up commu-
rectly by Federal OSHA can help ensure an nications.
effective community response to the release (E) Review of the expected hazards includ-
or potential release of hazardous substances ing fire and explosions hazards, confined
in the community. space hazards, electrical hazards, powered
a. General considerations. equipment hazards, motor vehicle hazards,
Emergency response organizations are re- and walking-working surface hazards.
quired to consider the topics listed in (F) Awareness and knowledge of the com-
§ 1926.65(q)(6). Emergency response organiza- petencies for the First Responder at the
tions may use some or all of the following Awareness Level covered in the National
topics to supplement those mandatory topics Fire Protection Association’s Standard No.
when developing their response training pro- 472, Professional Competence of Responders to
grams. Many of the topics would require an Hazardous Materials Incidents.
interaction between the response provider (2) First responder operations level.
180
(A) Review of and demonstration of com- (D) Review of procedures for implementing
petency in performing the applicable skills continuing response actions consistent with
of 29 CFR 1926.65(q). the local emergency response plan, the orga-
(B) Hands-on experience with the U.S. De- nization’s standard operating procedures,
partment of Transportation’s Emergency Re- and the current edition of DOT’s ERG in-
sponse Guidebook (ERG), manufacturer safety cluding extended emergency notification
data sheets, CHEMTREC/CANUTEC, shipper procedures and follow-up communications.
or manufacturer contacts and other relevant (E) Review of the principles and practice
sources of information addressing hazardous for proper selection and use of personal pro-
substance releases. Familiarization with tective equipment.
OSHA standard 29 CFR 1926.60. (F) Review of the principles and practices
(C) Review of the principles and practices of establishing exposure zones, proper decon-
for analyzing an incident to determine the tamination and medical surveillance sta-
hazardous substances present, the likely be- tions and procedures.
havior of the hazardous substance and its (G) Review of the expected hazards includ-
container, the types of hazardous substance ing fire and explosions hazards, confined
transportation containers and vehicles, the space hazards, electrical hazards, powered
types and selection of the appropriate defen- equipment hazards, motor vehicle hazards,
sive strategy for containing the release. and walking-working surface hazards.
(D) Review of procedures for implementing (H) Awareness and knowledge of the com-
continuing response actions consistent with petencies for the Hazardous Materials Tech-
the local emergency response plan, the orga- nician covered in the National Fire Protec-
nization’s standard operating procedures, tion Association’s Standard No. 472, Profes-
and the current edition of DOT’s ERG in- sional Competence of Responders to Hazardous
cluding extended emergency notification Materials Incidents.
procedures and follow-up communications. (4) Hazardous materials specialist.
(E) Review of the principles and practice (A) Review of and demonstration of com-
for proper selection and use of personal pro- petency in performing the applicable skills
tective equipment. of 29 CFR 1926.65(q).
(F) Review of the principles and practice of (B) Hands-on experience with retrieval and
personnel and equipment decontamination. use of written and electronic information
(G) Review of the expected hazards includ- relative to response decision making includ-
ing fire and explosions hazards, confined ing but not limited to the U.S. Department
space hazards, electrical hazards, powered of Transportation’s Emergency Response
equipment hazards, motor vehicle hazards, Guidebook (ERG), manufacturer safety data
and walking-working surface hazards. sheets, CHEMTREC/CANUTEC, shipper or
(H) Awareness and knowledge of the com- manufacturer contacts, computer data bases
petencies for the First Responder at the Op- and response models, and other relevant
erations Level covered in the National Fire sources of information addressing hazardous
Protection Association’s Standard No. 472, substance releases. Familiarization with 29
Professional Competence of Responders to Haz- CFR 1926.60.
ardous Materials Incidents. (C) Review of the principles and practices
(3) Hazardous materials technician. for analyzing an incident to determine the
(A) Review of and demonstration of com- hazardous substances present, their physical
petency in performing the applicable skills and chemical properties, and the likely be-
of 29 CFR 1926.65(q). havior of the hazardous substance and its
(B) Hands-on experience with written and container, vessel, or vehicle.
electronic information relative to response (D) Review of the principles and practices
decision making including but not limited to for identification of the types of hazardous
the U.S. Department of Transportation’s substance transportation containers, vessels
Emergency Response Guidebook (ERG), manu- and vehicles involved in the release; select-
facturer safety data sheets, CHEMTREC/ ing and using the various types of equipment
CANUTEC, shipper or manufacturer con- available for plugging or patching transpor-
tacts, computer data bases and response tation containers, vessels or vehicles; orga-
models, and other relevant sources of infor- nizing and directing the use of multiple
mation addressing hazardous substance re- teams of hazardous material technicians and
leases. Familiarization with 29 CFR 1926.60. selecting the appropriate strategy for ap-
(C) Review of the principles and practices proaching release sites and containing or
for analyzing an incident to determine the stopping the release.
hazardous substances present, their physical (E) Review of procedures for implementing
and chemical properties, the likely behavior continuing response actions consistent with
of the hazardous substance and its container, the local emergency response plan, the orga-
the types of hazardous substance transpor- nization’s standard operating procedures, in-
tation containers and vehicles involved in cluding knowledge of the available public
the release, the appropriate strategy for ap- and private response resources, establish-
proaching release sites and containing the ment of an incident command post, direction
release. of hazardous material technician teams, and
181
extended emergency notification procedures higher levels of response when required by
and follow-up communications. the changes to the response plan.
(F) Review of the principles and practice [58 FR 35129, June 30, 1993, as amended at 59
for proper selection and use of personal pro- FR 43275, Aug. 22, 1994: 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13,
tective equipment. 1996; 77 FR 17890, Mar. 26, 2012; 78 FR 9315,
(G) Review of the principles and practices Feb. 8, 2013]
of establishing exposure zones and proper de-
contamination, monitoring and medical sur- § 1926.66 Criteria for design and con-
veillance stations and procedures. struction of spray booths.
(H) Review of the expected hazards includ- (a) Definitions applicable to this sec-
ing fire and explosions hazards, confined tion—(1) Aerated solid powders. Aerated
space hazards, electrical hazards, powered powders shall mean any powdered ma-
equipment hazards, motor vehicle hazards,
terial used as a coating material which
and walking-working surface hazards.
shall be fluidized within a container by
(I) Awareness and knowledge of the com-
passing air uniformly from below. It is
petencies for the Off-site Specialist Em-
ployee covered in the National Fire Protec-
common practice to fluidize such mate-
tion Association’s Standard No. 472, Profes- rials to form a fluidized powder bed and
sional Competence of Responders to Hazardous then dip the part to be coated into the
Materials Incidents. bed in a manner similar to that used in
(5) Incident commander. The incident com- liquid dipping. Such beds are also used
mander is the individual who, at any one as sources for powder spray operations.
time, is responsible for and in control of the (2) Spraying area. Any area in which
response effort. This individual is the person dangerous quantities of flammable va-
responsible for the direction and coordina- pors or mists, or combustible residues,
tion of the response effort. An incident com- dusts, or deposits are present due to
mander’s position should be occupied by the the operation of spraying processes.
most senior, appropriately trained individual (3) Spray booth. A power-ventilated
present at the response site. Yet, as nec- structure provided to enclose or accom-
essary and appropriate by the level of re- modate a spraying operation to confine
sponse provided, the position may be occu- and limit the escape of spray, vapor,
pied by many individuals during a particular and residue, and to safely conduct or
response as the need for greater authority,
direct them to an exhaust system.
responsibility, or training increases. It is
(4) Waterwash spray booth. A spray
possible for the first responder at the aware-
ness level to assume the duties of incident
booth equipped with a water washing
commander until a more senior and appro- system designed to minimize dusts or
priately trained individual arrives at the re- residues entering exhaust ducts and to
sponse site. permit the recovery of overspray fin-
Therefore, any emergency responder ex- ishing material.
pected to perform as an incident commander (5) Dry spray booth. A spray booth not
should be trained to fulfill the obligations of equipped with a water washing system
the position at the level of response they will as described in paragraph (a)(4) of this
be providing including the following: section. A dry spray booth may be
(A) Ability to analyze a hazardous sub- equipped with
stance incident to determine the magnitude (i) Distribution or baffle plates to
of the response problem. promote an even flow of air through
(B) Ability to plan and implement an ap- the booth or cause the deposit of
propriate response plan within the capabili- overspray before it enters the exhaust
ties of available personnel and equipment. duct; or
(C) Ability to implement a response to fa- (ii) Overspray dry filters to minimize
vorably change the outcome of the incident dusts; or
in a manner consistent with the local emer- (iii) Overspray dry filters to mini-
gency response plan and the organization’s mize dusts or residues entering exhaust
standard operating procedures.
ducts; or
(D) Ability to evaluate the progress of the
(iv) Overspray dry filter rolls de-
emergency response to ensure that the re-
signed to minimize dusts or residues
sponse objectives are being met safely, effec-
tively, and efficiently.
entering exhaust ducts; or
(E) Ability to adjust the response plan to
(v) Where dry powders are being
the conditions of the response and to notify sprayed, with powder collection sys-
tems so arranged in the exhaust to cap-
ture oversprayed material.
182
(6) Fluidized bed. A container holding or filter rolls, if installed, shall con-
powder coating material which is aer- form to the following:
ated from below so as to form an air- (i) The spraying operations except
supported expanded cloud of such ma- electrostatic spraying operations shall
terial through which the preheated ob- be so designed, installed and main-
ject to be coated is immersed and tained that the average air velocity
transported. over the open face of the booth (or
(7) Electrostatic fluidized bed. A con- booth cross section during spraying op-
tainer holding powder coating material erations) shall be not less than 100 lin-
which is aerated from below so as to ear feet per minute. Electrostatic
form an air-supported expanded cloud spraying operations may be conducted
of such material which is electrically with an air velocity over the open face
charged with a charge opposite to the of the booth of not less than 60 linear
charge of the object to be coated; such feet per minute, or more, depending on
object is transported, through the con- the volume of the finishing material
tainer immediately above the charged being applied and its flammability and
and aerated materials in order to be explosion characteristics. Visible
coated. gauges or audible alarm or pressure ac-
(8) Approved. Shall mean approved tivated devices shall be installed to in-
and listed by a nationally recognized dicate or insure that the required air
testing laboratory. velocity is maintained. Filter rolls
(9) Listed. See ‘‘approved’’ in para- shall be inspected to insure proper re-
graph (a)(8) of this section. placement of filter media.
(b) Spray booths—(1) Construction. (ii) All discarded filter pads and filter
Spray booths shall be substantially rolls shall be immediately removed to
constructed of steel, securely and rig- a safe, well-detached location or placed
idly supported, or of concrete or main a water-filled metal container and
sonry except that aluminum or other disposed of at the close of the day’s op-
substantial noncombustible material eration unless maintained completely
may be used for intermittent or low in water.
volume spraying. Spray booths shall be (iii) The location of filters in a spray
designed to sweep air currents toward booth shall be so as to not reduce the
the exhaust outlet. effective booth enclosure of the arti-
(2) Interiors. The interior surfaces of cles being sprayed.
spray booths shall be smooth and con- (iv) Space within the spray booth on
tinuous without edges and otherwise the downstream and upstream sides of
designed to prevent pocketing of resi- filters shall be protected with approved
dues and facilitate cleaning and wash- automatic sprinklers.
ing without injury. (v) Filters or filter rolls shall not be
(3) Floors. The floor surface of a spray used when applying a spray material
booth and operator’s working area, if known to be highly susceptible to spon-
combustible, shall be covered with non- taneous heating and ignition.
combustible material of such character (vi) Clean filters or filter rolls shall
as to facilitate the safe cleaning and be noncombustible or of a type having
removal of residues. a combustibility not in excess of class
(4) Distribution or baffle plates. Dis- 2 filters as listed by Underwriters’ Lab-
tribution or baffle plates, if installed oratories, Inc. Filters and filter rolls
to promote an even flow of air through shall not be alternately used for dif-
the booth or cause the deposit of ferent types of coating materials,
overspray before it enters the exhaust where the combination of materials
duct, shall be of noncombustible mate- may be conducive to spontaneous igni-
rial and readily removable or acces- tion.
sible on both sides for cleaning. Such (6) Frontal area. Each spray booth
plates shall not be located in exhaust having a frontal area larger than 9
ducts. square feet shall have a metal deflector
(5) Dry type overspray collectors—(ex- or curtain not less than 2 1⁄2 inches (5.35
haust air filters). In conventional dry cm) deep installed at the upper outer
type spray booths, overspray dry filters edge of the booth over the opening.
183
(7) Conveyors. Where conveyors are deposits of combustible residues may
arranged to carry work into or out of readily accumulate.
spray booths, the openings therefor (4) Wiring conformance. Electrical wir-
shall be as small as practical. ing and equipment shall conform to the
(8) Separation of operations. Each provisions of this paragraph and shall
spray booth shall be separated from otherwise be in accordance with sub-
other operations by not less than 3 feet part S of this part.
(0.912 m), or by a greater distance, or (5) Combustible residues, areas. Unless
by such partition or wall as to reduce specifically approved for locations con-
the danger from juxtaposition of haz- taining both deposits of readily ignit-
ardous operations. See also paragraph able residue and explosive vapors, there
(c)(1) of this section. shall be no electrical equipment in any
(9) Cleaning. Spray booths shall be so spraying area, whereon deposits of
installed that all portions are readily combustible residues may readily accu-
accessible for cleaning. A clear space of mulate, except wiring in rigid conduit
not less than 3 feet (0.912 m) on all or in boxes or fittings containing no
sides shall be kept free from storage or taps, splices, or terminal connections.
combustible construction. (6) Wiring type approved. Electrical
(10) Illumination. When spraying areas wiring and equipment not subject to
are illuminated through glass panels or deposits of combustible residues but lo-
other transparent materials, only fixed cated in a spraying area as herein de-
lighting units shall be used as a source fined shall be of explosion-proof type
of illumination. Panels shall effec- approved for Class I, group D locations
tively isolate the spraying area from and shall otherwise conform to the pro-
the area in which the lighting unit is visions of subpart S of this part, for
located, and shall be of a noncombus- Class I, Division 1, Hazardous Loca-
tible material of such a nature or so tions. Electrical wiring, motors, and
protected that breakage will be un- other equipment outside of but within
likely. Panels shall be so arranged that 20 feet (6.08 m) of any spraying area,
normal accumulations of residue on and not separated therefrom by parti-
the exposed surface of the panel will tions, shall not produce sparks under
not be raised to a dangerous tempera- normal operating conditions and shall
ture by radiation or conduction from otherwise conform to the provisions of
the source of illumination. subpart S of this part for Class I, Divi-
sion 2 Hazardous Locations.
(c) Electrical and other sources of igni-
(7) Lamps. Electric lamps outside of,
tion—(1) Conformance. All electrical
but within 20 feet (6.08 m) of any spray-
equipment, open flames and other
ing area, and not separated therefrom
sources of ignition shall conform to the
by a partition, shall be totally enclosed
requirements of this paragraph, except
to prevent the falling of hot particles
as follows:
and shall be protected from mechanical
(i) Electrostatic apparatus shall con-
injury by suitable guards or by loca-
form to the requirements of paragraphs
tion.
(e) and (f) of this section;
(8) Portable lamps. Portable electric
(ii) Drying, curing, and fusion appa- lamps shall not be used in any spraying
ratus shall conform to the require- area during spraying operations. Port-
ments of paragraph (g) of this section; able electric lamps, if used during
(iii) [Reserved] cleaning or repairing operations, shall
(iv) Powder coating equipment shall be of the type approved for hazardous
conform to the requirements of para- Class I locations.
graph (c)(1) of this section. (9) Grounding. (i) All metal parts of
(2) Minimum separation. There shall be spray booths, exhaust ducts, and piping
no open flame or spark producing systems conveying flammable or com-
equipment in any spraying area nor bustible liquids or aerated solids shall
within 20 feet (6.08 m) thereof, unless be properly electrically grounded in an
separated by a partition. effective and permanent manner.
(3) Hot surfaces. Space-heating appli- (d) Ventilation—(1) Conformance. Ven-
ances, steampipes, or hot surfaces shall tilating and exhaust systems shall be
not be located in a spraying area where in accordance with the Standard for
184
Blower and Exhaust Systems for Vapor substantially supported. Exhaust ducts
Removal, NFPA No. 91–1961, where ap- without dampers are preferred; how-
plicable and shall also conform to the ever, if dampers are installed, they
provisions of this section. shall be maintained so that they will
(2) General. All spraying areas shall be in a full open position at all times
be provided with mechanical ventila- the ventilating system is in operation.
tion adequate to remove flammable va- (i) Exhaust ducts shall be protected
pors, mists, or powders to a safe loca- against mechanical damage and have a
tion and to confine and control com- clearance from unprotected combus-
bustible residues so that life is not en- tible construction or other combustible
dangered. Mechanical ventilation shall material of not less than 18 inches
be kept in operation at all times while (45.72 cm).
spraying operations are being con- (ii) If combustible construction is
ducted and for a sufficient time there- provided with the following protection
after to allow vapors from drying coat- applied to all surfaces within 18 inches
ed articles and drying finishing mate- (45.72 cm), clearances may be reduced
rial residue to be exhausted. to the distances indicated:
(3) Independent exhaust. Each spray (a) 28-gage sheet metal on 1/4-inch as- 12 inches (30.48
bestos mill board. cm).
booth shall have an independent ex- (b) 28-gage sheet metal on 1/8-inch as- 9 inches (22.86
haust duct system discharging to the bestos mill board spaced out 1 inch cm).
exterior of the building, except that (2.54 cm) on noncombustible spacers.
(c) 22-gage sheet metal on 1-inch 3 inches (7.62
multiple cabinet spray booths in which rockwool batts reinforced with wire cm).
identical spray finishing material is mesh or the equivalent.
used with a combined frontal area of (d) Where ducts are protected with an ap-
not more than 18 square feet may have proved automatic sprinkler system,
properly maintained, the clearance re-
a common exhaust. If more than one quired in paragraph (d)(7)(i) of this sec-
fan serves one booth, all fans shall be tion may be reduced to 6 inches (15.24
so interconnected that one fan cannot cm).
operate without all fans being oper- (8) Discharge clearance. Unless the
ated. spray booth exhaust duct terminal is
(4) Fan-rotating element. The fan-ro- from a water-wash spray booth, the
tating element shall be nonferrous or terminal discharge point shall be not
nonsparking or the casing shall consist less than 6 feet from any combustible
of or be lined with such material. exterior wall or roof nor discharge in
There shall be ample clearance be- the direction of any combustible con-
tween the fan-rotating element and the struction or unprotected opening in
fan casing to avoid a fire by friction, any noncombustible exterior wall with-
necessary allowance being made for or- in 25 feet (7.6 m).
dinary expansion and loading to pre- (9) Air exhaust. Air exhaust from
vent contact between moving parts and spray operations shall not be directed
the duct or fan housing. Fan blades so that it will contaminate makeup air
shall be mounted on a shaft suffi- being introduced into the spraying area
ciently heavy to maintain perfect or other ventilating intakes, nor di-
alignment even when the blades of the rected so as to create a nuisance. Air
fan are heavily loaded, the shaft pref- exhausted from spray operations shall
erably to have bearings outside the not be recirculated.
duct and booth. All bearings shall be of (10) Access doors. When necessary to
the self-lubricating type, or lubricated facilitate cleaning, exhaust ducts shall
from the outside duct. be provided with an ample number of
(5) Electric motors. Electric motors access doors.
driving exhaust fans shall not be placed (11) Room intakes. Air intake openings
inside booths or ducts. See also para- to rooms containing spray finishing op-
graph (c) of this section. erations shall be adequate for the effi-
(6) Belts. Belts shall not enter the cient operation of exhaust fans and
duct or booth unless the belt and pul- shall be so located as to minimize the
ley within the duct or booth are thor- creation of dead air pockets.
oughly enclosed. (12) Drying spaces. Freshly sprayed
(7) Exhaust ducts. Exhaust ducts shall articles shall be dried only in spaces
be constructed of steel and shall be provided with adequate ventilation to
185
prevent the formation of explosive va- (7) Conveyors required. Goods being
pors. In the event adequate and reliable painted using this process are to be
ventilation is not provided such drying supported on conveyors. The conveyors
spaces shall be considered a spraying shall be so arranged as to maintain
area. safe distances between the goods and
(e) Fixed electrostatic apparatus—(1) the electrodes or electrostatic atom-
Conformance. Where installation and izing heads at all times. Any irregu-
use of electrostatic spraying equip- larly shaped or other goods subject to
ment is used, such installation and use possible swinging or movement shall be
shall conform to all other paragraphs rigidly supported to prevent such
of this section, and shall also conform swinging or movement which would re-
to the requirements of this paragraph. duce the clearance to less than that
(2) Type approval. Electrostatic appa- specified in paragraph (e)(6) of this sec-
ratus and devices used in connection tion.
with coating operations shall be of ap- (8) Prohibition. This process is not ac-
proved types. ceptable where goods being coated are
(3) Location. Transformers, power manipulated by hand. When finishing
packs, control apparatus, and all other materials are applied by electrostatic
electrical portions of the equipment, equipment which is manipulated by
with the exception of high-voltage hand, see paragraph (f) of this section
grids, electrodes, and electrostatic for applicable requirements.
atomizing heads and their connections, (9) Fail-safe controls. Electrostatic ap-
shall be located outside of the spraying paratus shall be equipped with auto-
area, or shall otherwise conform to the matic controls which will operate with-
requirements of paragraph (c) of this out time delay to disconnect the power
section. supply to the high voltage transformer
(4) Support. Electrodes and electro- and to signal the operator under any of
static atomizing heads shall be ade- the following conditions:
quately supported in permanent loca- (i) Stoppage of ventilating fans or
tions and shall be effectively insulated failure of ventilating equipment from
from the ground. Electrodes and elec- any cause.
trostatic atomizing heads which are (ii) Stoppage of the conveyor car-
permanently attached to their bases, rying goods through the high voltage
supports, or reciprocators, shall be field.
deemed to comply with this section. (iii) Occurrence of a ground or of an
Insulators shall be nonporous and non- imminent ground at any point on the
combustible. high voltage system.
(5) Insulators, grounding. High-voltage (iv) Reduction of clearance below
leads to electrodes shall be properly in- that specified in paragraph (e)(6) of this
sulated and protected from mechanical section.
injury or exposure to destructive (10) Guarding. Adequate booths, fenc-
chemicals. Electrostatic atomizing ing, railings, or guards shall be so
heads shall be effectively and perma- placed about the equipment that they,
nently supported on suitable insulators either by their location or character or
and shall be effectively guarded both, assure that a safe isolation of the
against accidental contact or ground- process is maintained from plant stor-
ing. An automatic means shall be pro- age or personnel. Such railings, fenc-
vided for grounding the electrode sys- ing, and guards shall be of conducting
tem when it is electrically deenergized material, adequately grounded.
for any reason. All insulators shall be (11) Ventilation. Where electrostatic
kept clean and dry. atomization is used the spraying area
(6) Safe distance. A safe distance shall shall be so ventilated as to insure safe
be maintained between goods being conditions from a fire and health
painted and electrodes or electrostatic standpoint.
atomizing heads or conductors of at (12) Fire protection. All areas used for
least twice the sparking distance. A spraying, including the interior of the
suitable sign indicating this safe dis- booth, shall be protected by automatic
tance shall be conspicuously posted sprinklers where this protection is
near the assembly. available. Where this protection is not
186
available, other approved automatic tained in metallic contact with the
extinguishing equipment shall be pro- conveyor or other grounded support.
vided. Hooks shall be regularly cleaned to in-
(f) Electrostatic hand spraying equip- sure this contact and areas of contact
ment—(1) Application. This paragraph shall be sharp points or knife edges
shall apply to any equipment using where possible. Points of support of the
electrostatically charged elements for object shall be concealed from random
the atomization and/or, precipitation spray where feasible and where the ob-
of materials for coatings on articles, or jects being sprayed are supported from
for other similar purposes in which the a conveyor, the point of attachment to
atomizing device is hand held and ma- the conveyor shall be so located as to
nipulated during the spraying oper- not collect spray material during nor-
ation. mal operation.
(2) Conformance. Electrostatic hand (8) Interlocks. The electrical equip-
spraying equipment shall conform with ment shall be so interlocked with the
the other provisions of this section. ventilation of the spraying area that
(3) Equipment approval and specifica- the equipment cannot be operated un-
tions. Electrostatic hand spray appa- less the ventilation fans are in oper-
ratus and devices used in connection ation.
with coating operations shall be of ap- (9) Ventilation. The spraying oper-
proved types. The high voltage circuits ation shall take place within a spray
shall be designed so as to not produce area which is adequately ventilated to
a spark of sufficient intensity to ignite remove solvent vapors released from
any vapor-air mixtures nor result in the operation.
appreciable shock hazard upon coming (g) Drying, curing, or fusion appa-
in contact with a grounded object ratus—(1) Conformance. Drying, curing,
under all normal operating conditions. or fusion apparatus in connection with
The electrostatically charged exposed spray application of flammable and
elements of the handgun shall be capa- combustible finishes shall conform to
ble of being energized only by a switch the Standard for Ovens and Furnaces,
which also controls the coating mate- NFPA 86A–1969, where applicable and
rial supply. shall also conform with the following
(4) Electrical support equipment. Trans- requirements of this paragraph.
formers, powerpacks, control appa- (2) Alternate use prohibited. Spray
ratus, and all other electrical portions booths, rooms, or other enclosures used
of the equipment, with the exception of for spraying operations shall not alter-
the handgun itself and its connections nately be used for the purpose of dry-
to the power supply shall be located ing by any arrangement which will
outside of the spraying area or shall cause a material increase in the sur-
otherwise conform to the requirements face temperature of the spray booth,
of paragraph (c) of this section. room, or enclosure.
(5) Spray gun ground. The handle of (3) Adjacent system interlocked. Except
the spraying gun shall be electrically as specifically provided in paragraph
connected to ground by a metallic con- (g)(4) of this section, drying, curing, or
nection and to be so constructed that fusion units utilizing a heating system
the operator in normal operating posi- having open flames or which may
tion is in intimate electrical contact produce sparks shall not be installed in
with the grounded handle. a spraying area, but may be installed
(6) Grounding-general. All electrically adjacent thereto when equipped with
conductive objects in the spraying area an interlocked ventilating system ar-
shall be adequately grounded. This re- ranged to:
quirement shall apply to paint con- (i) Thoroughly ventilate the drying
tainers, wash cans, and any other ob- space before the heating system can be
jects or devices in the area. The equip- started;
ment shall carry a prominent perma- (ii) Maintain a safe atmosphere at
nently installed warning regarding the any source of ignition;
necessity for this grounding feature. (iii) Automatically shut down the
(7) Maintenance of grounds. Objects heating system in the event of failure
being painted or coated shall be main- of the ventilating system.
187
(4) Alternate use permitted. Auto- Subpart E—Personal Protective
mobile refinishing spray booths or en- and Life Saving Equipment
closures, otherwise installed and main-
tained in full conformity with this sec-
AUTHORITY: 40 U.S.C. 333; 29 U.S.C. 653, 655,
tion, may alternately be used for dry- 657; Secretary of Labor’s Order No. 12–71 (36
ing with portable electrical infrared FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736),
drying apparatus when conforming 1–90 (55 FR 9033), 6–96 (62 FR 111), 5–2007 (72
with the following: FR 31160), 4–2010 (75 FR 55355), or 1–2012 (77
(i) Interior (especially floors) of FR 3912), as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911.
spray enclosures shall be kept free of
overspray deposits. § 1926.95 Criteria for personal protec-
tive equipment.
(ii) During spray operations, the dry-
ing apparatus and electrical connec- (a) Application. Protective equipment,
tions and wiring thereto shall not be including personal protective equip-
located within spray enclosure nor in ment for eyes, face, head, and extrem-
any other location where spray resi- ities, protective clothing, respiratory
dues may be deposited thereon. devices, and protective shields and bar-
(iii) The spraying apparatus, the dry- riers, shall be provided, used, and
ing apparatus, and the ventilating sys- maintained in a sanitary and reliable
tem of the spray enclosure shall be condition wherever it is necessary by
equipped with suitable interlocks so ar- reason of hazards of processes or envi-
ranged that: ronment, chemical hazards, radio-
(a) The spraying apparatus cannot be logical hazards, or mechanical irri-
operated while the drying apparatus is tants encountered in a manner capable
inside the spray enclosure. of causing injury or impairment in the
(b) The spray enclosure will be function of any part of the body
purged of spray vapors for a period of through absorption, inhalation or
not less than 3 minutes before the dry- physical contact.
ing apparatus can be energized. (b) Employee-owned equipment. Where
(c) The ventilating system will main- employees provide their own protective
equipment, the employer shall be re-
tain a safe atmosphere within the en-
sponsible to assure its adequacy, in-
closure during the drying process and
cluding proper maintenance, and sani-
the drying apparatus will automati-
tation of such equipment.
cally shut off in the event of failure of
(c) Design. All personal protective
the ventilating system.
equipment shall be of safe design and
(iv) All electrical wiring and equip-
construction for the work to be per-
ment of the drying apparatus shall con-
formed.
form with the applicable sections of
(d) Payment for protective equipment.
subpart S of this part. Only equipment
(1) Except as provided by paragraphs
of a type approved for Class I, Division
(d)(2) through (d)(6) of this section, the
2 hazardous locations shall be located protective equipment, including per-
within 18 inches (45.72 cm) of floor sonal protective equipment (PPE), used
level. All metallic parts of the drying to comply with this part, shall be pro-
apparatus shall be properly electrically vided by the employer at no cost to
bonded and grounded. employees.
(v) The drying apparatus shall con- (2) The employer is not required to
tain a prominently located, perma- pay for non-specialty safety-toe protec-
nently attached warning sign indi- tive footwear (including steel-toe shoes
cating that ventilation should be main- or steel-toe boots) and non-specialty
tained during the drying period and prescription safety eyewear, provided
that spraying should not be conducted that the employer permits such items
in the vicinity that spray will deposit to be worn off the job-site.
on apparatus. (3) When the employer provides
[58 FR 35149, June 30, 1993] metatarsal guards and allows the em-
ployee, at his or her request, to use
shoes or boots with built-in metatarsal
188
protection, the employer is not re- (b) Criteria for head protection. (1) The
quired to reimburse the employee for employer must provide each employee
the shoes or boots. with head protection that meets the
(4) The employer is not required to specifications contained in any of the
pay for: following consensus standards:
(i) Everyday clothing, such as long- (i) American National Standards In-
sleeve shirts, long pants, street shoes, stitute (ANSI) Z89.1–2009, ‘‘American
and normal work boots; or National Standard for Industrial Head
(ii) Ordinary clothing, skin creams, Protection,’’ incorporated by reference
or other items, used solely for protec- in § 1926.6;
tion from weather, such as winter (ii) American National Standards In-
coats, jackets, gloves, parkas, rubber stitute (ANSI) Z89.1–2003, ‘‘American
boots, hats, raincoats, ordinary sun- National Standard for Industrial Head
glasses, and sunscreen.
Protection,’’ incorporated by reference
(5) The employer must pay for re-
in § 1926.6; or
placement PPE, except when the em-
ployee has lost or intentionally dam- (iii) American National Standards In-
aged the PPE. stitute (ANSI) Z89.1–1997, ‘‘American
(6) Where an employee provides ade- National Standard for Personnel Pro-
quate protective equipment he or she tection—Protective Headwear for In-
owns pursuant to paragraph (b) of this dustrial Workers—Requirements,’’ in-
section, the employer may allow the corporated by reference in § 1926.6.
employee to use it and is not required (2) The employer must ensure that
to reimburse the employee for that the head protection provided for each
equipment. The employer shall not re- employee exposed to high-voltage elec-
quire an employee to provide or pay for tric shock and burns also meets the
his or her own PPE, unless the PPE is specifications contained in Section 9.7
excepted by paragraphs (d)(2) through (‘‘Electrical Insulation’’) of any of the
(d)(5) of this section. consensus standards identified in para-
(7) This section shall become effec- graph (b)(1) of this section.
tive on February 13, 2008. Employers (3) OSHA will deem any head protec-
must implement the PPE payment re- tion device that the employer dem-
quirements no later than May 15, 2008. onstrates is at least as effective as a
NOTE TO § 1926.95(d): When the provisions of head protection device constructed in
another OSHA standard specify whether or accordance with one of the consensus
not the employer must pay for specific standards identified in paragraph (b)(1)
equipment, the payment provisions of that of this section to be in compliance with
standard shall prevail. the requirements of this section.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979, as amended at 77 FR
FR 64429, Nov. 15, 2007]
37600, June 22, 2012; 77 FR 42988, July 23, 2012]
§ 1926.96 Occupational foot protection.
§ 1926.101 Hearing protection.
Safety-toe footwear for employees
shall meet the requirements and speci- (a) Wherever it is not feasible to re-
fications in American National Stand- duce the noise levels or duration of ex-
ard for Men’s Safety-Toe Footwear, posures to those specified in Table D–2,
Z41.1–1967. Permissible Noise Exposures, in
§ 1926.52, ear protective devices shall be
[58 FR 35152, June 30, 1993] provided and used.
§§ 1926.97–1926.98 [Reserved] (b) Ear protective devices inserted in
the ear shall be fitted or determined in-
§ 1926.100 Head protection. dividually by competent persons.
(a) Employees working in areas (c) Plain cotton is not an acceptable
where there is a possible danger of head protective device.
injury from impact, or from falling or
§ 1926.102 Eye and face protection.
flying objects, or from electrical shock
and burns, shall be protected by protec- (a) General. (1) Employees shall be
tive helmets. provided with eye and face protection
189
equipment when machines or oper- (ii) Goggles that can be worn over
ations present potential eye or face in- corrective spectacles without dis-
jury from physical, chemical, or radi- turbing the adjustment of the spec-
ation agents. tacles;
(2) Eye and face protection equip- (iii) Goggles that incorporate correc-
ment required by this part shall meet tive lenses mounted behind the protec-
the requirements specified in American tive lenses.
National Standards Institute, Z87.1–
(4) Face and eye protection equip-
1968, Practice for Occupational and
Educational Eye and Face Protection. ment shall be kept clean and in good
(3) Employees whose vision requires repair. The use of this type equipment
the use of corrective lenses in spec- with structural or optical defects shall
tacles, when required by this regula- be prohibited.
tion to wear eye protection, shall be (5) Table E–1 shall be used as a guide
protected by goggles or spectacles of in the selection of face and eye protec-
one of the following types: tion for the hazards and operations
(i) Spectacles whose protective lenses noted.
provide optical correction;
*Non-side shield spectacles are avail- **See Table E–2, in paragraph (b) of
able for limited hazard use requiring this section, Filter Lens Shade Num-
only frontal protection. bers for Protection Against Radiant
Energy.
APPLICATIONS
Recommended protectors: Bold type numbers signify pre-
Operation Hazards ferred protection
Acetylene—Burning, Acety- Sparks, harmful rays, molten 7, 8, 9.

lene—Cutting, Acetylene— metal, flying particles.
Welding.
Chemical Handling .................... Splash, acid burns, fumes ...... 2, 10 (For severe exposure add 10 over 2).
Chipping .................................... Flying particles ........................ 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7A, 8A.

EC30OC91.011</GPH>
Electric (arc) welding ................ Sparks, intense rays, molten 9, 11, (11 in combination with 4, 5, 6, in tinted lenses, advis-
metal. able).
190
EC30OC91.010</GPH>
APPLICATIONS—Continued
Operation Hazards Recommended protectors: Bold type numbers signify pre-

ferred protection
Furnace operations ................... Glare, heat, molten metal ....... 7, 8, 9 (For severe exposure add 10).
Grinding—Light ......................... Flying particles ........................ 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10.
Grinding—Heavy ....................... Flying particles ........................ 1 , 3, 7A, 8A (For severe exposure add 10).
Laboratory ................................. Chemical splash, glass break- 2 (10 when in combination with 4, 5, 6).
age.
Machining .................................. Flying particles ........................ 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10.
Molten metals ........................... Heat, glare, sparks, splash ..... 7, 8, (10 in combination with 4, 5, 6, in tinted lenses).
Spot welding ............................. Flying particles, sparks ........... 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10.
(6) Protectors shall meet the fol- TABLE E–2—FILTER LENS SHADE NUMBERS FOR
lowing minimum requirements: PROTECTION AGAINST RADIANT ENERGY—
(i) They shall provide adequate pro- Continued
tection against the particular hazards
Shade
for which they are designed. Welding operation
number
(ii) They shall be reasonably com-
fortable when worn under the des- Shielded metal-arc welding 3⁄16-, 7⁄32-, 1⁄4-inch
diameter electrodes ......................................... 12
ignated conditions. 5⁄16-, 3⁄8-inch diameter electrodes ........................ 14
(iii) They shall fit snugly and shall Atomic hydrogen welding .................................... 10–14
not unduly interfere with the move- Carbon-arc welding ............................................. 14
Soldering .............................................................. 2
ments of the wearer. Torch brazing ....................................................... 3 or 4
(iv) They shall be durable. Light cutting, up to 1 inch .................................... 3 or 4
(v) They shall be capable of being dis- Medium cutting, 1 inch to 6 inches ..................... 4 or 5
infected. Heavy cutting, over 6 inches ............................... 5 or 6
Gas welding (light), up to 1⁄8-inch ....................... 4 or 5
(vi) They shall be easily cleanable. Gas welding (medium), 1⁄8-inch to 1⁄2-inch .......... 5 or 6
(7) Every protector shall be distinctly Gas welding (heavy), over 1⁄2-inch ...................... 6 or 8
marked to facilitate identification
only of the manufacturer. (2) Laser protection. (i) Employees
(8) When limitations or precautions whose occupation or assignment re-
are indicated by the manufacturer, quires exposure to laser beams shall be
they shall be transmitted to the user furnished suitable laser safety goggles
and care taken to see that such limita- which will protect for the specific
tions and precautions are strictly ob- wavelength of the laser and be of opti-
served. cal density (O.D.) adequate for the en-
(b) Protection against radiant energy— ergy involved. Table E–3 lists the max-
(1) Selection of shade numbers for welding imum power or energy density for
filter. Table E–2 shall be used as a guide which adequate protection is afforded
for the selection of the proper shade by glasses of optical densities from 5
numbers of filter lenses or plates used through 8.
in welding. Shades more dense than
those listed may be used to suit the in- TABLE E–3—SELECTING LASER SAFETY GLASS
dividual’s needs. Attenuation
Intensity, CW max-
imum power den-
TABLE E–2—FILTER LENS SHADE NUMBERS FOR sity (watts/cm2) Optical density Attenuation factor
(O.D.)
PROTECTION AGAINST RADIANT ENERGY
10¥2 5 10 5
Shade 10¥1 6 10 6
Welding operation number
1.0 7 10 7
Shielded metal-arc welding 1⁄16-, 3⁄32-, 1⁄8-, 5⁄32- 10.0 8 10 8
inch diameter electrodes .................................. 10
Gas-shielded arc welding (nonferrous) 1⁄16-, 3⁄32- Output levels falling between lines in
, 1⁄8-, 5⁄32-inch diameter electrodes .................. 11
Gas-shielded arc welding (ferrous) 1⁄16-, 3⁄32-, this table shall require the higher opti-
1⁄8-, 5⁄32-inch diameter electrodes .................... 12 cal density.
191
(ii) All protective goggles shall bear pounds without cracking, breaking, or
a label identifying the following data: taking a permanent deformation.
(a) The laser wavelengths for which
use is intended; § 1926.105 Safety nets.
(b) The optical density of those wave- (a) Safety nets shall be provided
lengths; when workplaces are more than 25 feet
(c) The visible light transmission. above the ground or water surface, or
other surfaces where the use of ladders,
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
scaffolds, catch platforms, temporary
1979, as amended at 58 FR 35160, June 30, 1993]
floors, safety lines, or safety belts is
§ 1926.103 Respiratory protection. impractical.
(b) Where safety net protection is re-
NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- quired by this part, operations shall
not be undertaken until the net is in
tical to those set forth at 29 CFR 1910.134 of
this chapter. place and has been tested.
(c)(1) Nets shall extend 8 feet beyond
[63 FR 1297; Jan. 8, 1998] the edge of the work surface where em-
ployees are exposed and shall be in-
§ 1926.104 Safety belts, lifelines, and
lanyards. stalled as close under the work surface
as practical but in no case more than
(a) Lifelines, safety belts, and lan- 25 feet below such work surface. Nets
yards shall be used only for employee shall be hung with sufficient clearance
safeguarding. Any lifeline, safety belt, to prevent user’s contact with the sur-
or lanyard actually subjected to in- faces or structures below. Such clear-
service loading, as distinguished from ances shall be determined by impact
static load testing, shall be imme- load testing.
diately removed from service and shall (2) It is intended that only one level
not be used again for employee safe- of nets be required for bridge construc-
guarding. tion.
(b) Lifelines shall be secured above (d) The mesh size of nets shall not ex-
the point of operation to an anchorage ceed 6 inches by 6 inches. All new nets
or structural member capable of sup- shall meet accepted performance
porting a minimum dead weight of 5,400 standards of 17,500 foot-pounds min-
pounds. imum impact resistance as determined
(c) Lifelines used on rock-scaling op- and certified by the manufacturers,
erations, or in areas where the lifeline and shall bear a label of proof test.
may be subjected to cutting or abra- Edge ropes shall provide a minimum
sion, shall be a minimum of 7⁄8-inch breaking strength of 5,000 pounds.
wire core manila rope. For all other (e) Forged steel safety hooks or
lifeline applications, a minimum of 3⁄4- shackles shall be used to fasten the net
inch manila or equivalent, with a min- to its supports.
imum breaking strength of 5,400 (f) Connections between net panels
pounds, shall be used. shall develop the full strength of the
(d) Safety belt lanyard shall be a net.
minimum of 1⁄2-inch nylon, or equiva-
lent, with a maximum length to pro- § 1926.106 Working over or near water.
vide for a fall of no greater than 6 feet. (a) Employees working over or near
The rope shall have a nominal breaking water, where the danger of drowning
strength of 5,400 pounds. exists, shall be provided with U.S.
(e) All safety belt and lanyard hard- Coast Guard-approved life jacket or
ware shall be drop forged or pressed buoyant work vests.
steel, cadmium plated in accordance (b) Prior to and after each use, the
with type 1, Class B plating specified in buoyant work vests or life preservers
Federal Specification QQ-P-416. Sur- shall be inspected for defects which
face shall be smooth and free of sharp would alter their strength or buoy-
edges. ancy. Defective units shall not be used.
(f) All safety belt and lanyard hard- (c) Ring buoys with at least 90 feet of
ware, except rivets, shall be capable of line shall be provided and readily avail-
withstanding a tensile loading of 4,000 able for emergency rescue operations.
192
Distance between ring buoys shall not delay in providing the necessary equip-
exceed 200 feet. ment.
(d) At least one lifesaving skiff shall (2) Access to all available firefighting
be immediately available at locations equipment shall be maintained at all
where employees are working over or times.
adjacent to water. (3) All firefighting equipment, pro-
vided by the employer, shall be con-
§ 1926.107 Definitions applicable to spicuously located.
this subpart. (4) All firefighting equipment shall
(a) Contaminant means any material be periodically inspected and main-
which by reason of its action upon, tained in operating condition. Defec-
within, or to a person is likely to cause tive equipment shall be immediately
physical harm. replaced.
(b) Lanyard means a rope, suitable (5) As warranted by the project, the
for supporting one person. One end is employer shall provide a trained and
fastened to a safety belt or harness and equipped firefighting organization
the other end is secured to a substan- (Fire Brigade) to assure adequate pro-
tial object or a safety line. tection to life.
(c) Lifeline means a rope, suitable for (b) Water supply. (1) A temporary or
supporting one person, to which a lan- permanent water supply, of sufficient
yard or safety belt (or harness) is at- volume, duration, and pressure, re-
tached. quired to properly operate the fire-
(d) O.D. means optical density and fighting equipment shall be made
refers to the light refractive character- available as soon as combustible mate-
istics of a lens. rials accumulate.
(e) Radiant energy means energy that (2) Where underground water mains
travels outward in all directions from are to be provided, they shall be in-
its sources. stalled, completed, and made available
(f) Safety belt means a device, usually for use as soon as practicable.
worn around the waist which, by rea- (c) Portable firefighting equipment—(1)
son of its attachment to a lanyard and Fire extinguishers and small hose lines. (i)
lifeline or a structure, will prevent a A fire extinguisher, rated not less than
worker from falling. 2A, shall be provided for each 3,000
square feet of the protected building
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979]
area, or major fraction thereof. Travel
distance from any point of the pro-
Subpart F—Fire Protection and tected area to the nearest fire extin-
Prevention guisher shall not exceed 100 feet.
(ii) One 55-gallon open drum of water
AUTHORITY: Section 107 of the Contract with two fire pails may be substituted
Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (40 for a fire extinguisher having a 2A rat-
U.S.C. 3704); Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occu- ing.
pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 (iii) A 1⁄2-inch diameter garden-type
U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s
hose line, not to exceed 100 feet in
Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR
25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736),1–90 (55 FR 9033), 6– length and equipped with a nozzle, may
96 (62 FR 111), 3–2000 (62 FR 50017), 5–2002 (67 be substituted for a 2A-rated fire extin-
FR 650008), 5–2007 (72 FR 31159), 4–2010 (75 FR guisher, providing it is capable of dis-
55355), or 1–2012 (77 FR 3912), as applicable; charging a minimum of 5 gallons per
and 29 CFR part 1911. minute with a minimum hose stream
range of 30 feet horizontally. The gar-
§ 1926.150 Fire protection. den-type hose lines shall be mounted
(a) General requirements. (1) The em- on conventional racks or reels. The
ployer shall be responsible for the de- number and location of hose racks or
velopment of a fire protection program reels shall be such that at least one
to be followed throughout all phases of hose stream can be applied to all points
the construction and demolition work, in the area.
and he shall provide for the firefighting (iv) One or more fire extinguishers,
equipment as specified in this subpart. rated not less than 2A, shall be pro-
As fire hazards occur, there shall be no vided on each floor. In multistory
193
buildings, at least one fire extinguisher (viii) Portable fire extinguishers
shall be located adjacent to stairway. shall be inspected periodically and
(v) Extinguishers and water drums, maintained in accordance with Mainte-
subject to freezing, shall be protected nance and Use of Portable Fire Extin-
from freezing. guishers, NFPA No. 10A–1970.
(vi) A fire extinguisher, rated not less (ix) Fire extinguishers which have
than 10B, shall be provided within 50 been listed or approved by a nationally
feet of wherever more than 5 gallons of
recognized testing laboratory, shall be
flammable or combustible liquids or 5
used to meet the requirements of this
pounds of flammable gas are being used
subpart.
on the jobsite. This requirement does
not apply to the integral fuel tanks of (x) Table F–1 may be used as a guide
motor vehicles. for selecting the appropriate portable
(vii) Carbon tetrachloride and other fire extinguishers.
toxic vaporizing liquid fire extin-
guishers are prohibited.
(2) Fire hose and connections. (i) One (iii) During demolition involving
hundred feet, or less, of 11⁄2-inch hose, combustible materials, charged hose
with a nozzle capable of discharging lines, supplied by hydrants, water tank
water at 25 gallons or more per minute, trucks with pumps, or equivalent, shall
may be substituted for a fire extin- be made available.
guisher rated not more than 2A in the (d) Fixed firefighting equipment—(1)
designated area provided that the hose Sprinkler protection. (i) If the facility
line can reach all points in the area. being constructed includes the instal-
(ii) If fire hose connections are not lation of automatic sprinkler protec-
compatible with local firefighting tion, the installation shall closely fol-
equipment, the contractor shall pro- low the construction and be placed in
vide adapters, or equivalent, to permit service as soon as applicable laws per-
connections. mit following completion of each story.
194
EC30OC91.012</GPH>
(ii) During demolition or alterations, compliance with the requirements of
existing automatic sprinkler installa- subpart K of this part.
tions shall be retained in service as (2) Internal combustion engine pow-
long as reasonable. The operation of ered equipment shall be so located that
sprinkler control valves shall be per- the exhausts are well away from com-
mitted only by properly authorized bustible materials. When the exhausts
persons. Modification of sprinkler sys- are piped to outside the building under
tems to permit alterations or addi- construction, a clearance of at least 6
tional demolition should be expedited inches shall be maintained between
so that the automatic protection may such piping and combustible material.
be returned to service as quickly as (3) Smoking shall be prohibited at or
possible. Sprinkler control valves shall in the vicinity of operations which con-
be checked daily at close of work to as- stitute a fire hazard, and shall be con-
certain that the protection is in serv- spicuously posted: ‘‘No Smoking or
ice. Open Flame.’’
(2) Standpipes. In all structures in (4) Portable battery powered lighting
which standpipes are required, or equipment, used in connection with the
where standpipes exist in structures storage, handling, or use of flammable
being altered, they shall be brought up gases or liquids, shall be of the type ap-
as soon as applicable laws permit, and proved for the hazardous locations.
shall be maintained as construction (5) The nozzle of air, inert gas, and
progresses in such a manner that they steam lines or hoses, when used in the
are always ready for fire protection cleaning or ventilation of tanks and
use. The standpipes shall be provided vessels that contain hazardous con-
with Siamese fire department connec- centrations of flammable gases or va-
tions on the outside of the structure, at pors, shall be bonded to the tank or
the street level, which shall be con- vessel shell. Bonding devices shall not
spicuously marked. There shall be at be attached or detached in hazardous
least one standard hose outlet at each concentrations of flammable gases or
floor. vapors.
(e) Fire alarm devices. (1) An alarm (b) Temporary buildings. (1) No tem-
system, e.g., telephone system, siren, porary building shall be erected where
etc., shall be established by the emit will adversely affect any means of
ployer whereby employees on the site exit.
and the local fire department can be (2) Temporary buildings, when lo-
alerted for an emergency. cated within another building or struc-
(2) The alarm code and reporting in- ture, shall be of either noncombustible
structions shall be conspicuously post- construction or of combustible con-
ed at phones and at employee en- struction having a fire resistance of
trances. not less than 1 hour.
(f) Fire cutoffs. (1) Fire walls and exit (3) Temporary buildings, located
stairways, required for the completed other than inside another building and
buildings, shall be given construction not used for the storage, handling, or
priority. Fire doors, with automatic use of flammable or combustible liq-
closing devices, shall be hung on open- uids, flammable gases, explosives, or
ings as soon as practicable. blasting agents, or similar hazardous
(2) Fire cutoffs shall be retained in occupancies, shall be located at a dis-
buildings undergoing alterations or tance of not less than 10 feet from an-
demolition until operations necessitate other building or structure. Groups of
their removal. temporary buildings, not exceeding
2,000 square feet in aggregate, shall, for
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, the purposes of this part, be considered
1979, as amended at 58 FR 35162, June 30, 1993; a single temporary building.
61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] (c) Open yard storage. (1) Combustible
materials shall be piled with due re-
§ 1926.151 Fire prevention. gard to the stability of piles and in no
(a) Ignition hazards. (1) Electrical wir- case higher than 20 feet.
ing and equipment for light, heat, or (2) Driveways between and around
power purposes shall be installed in combustible storage piles shall be at
195
least 15 feet wide and maintained free needed. Material shall not be stored
from accumulation of rubbish, equip- within 36 inches of a fire door opening.
ment, or other articles or materials.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
Driveways shall be so spaced that a 1979, as amended at 51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986]
maximum grid system unit of 50 feet
by 150 feet is produced. § 1926.152 Flammable liquids.
(3) The entire storage site shall be
kept free from accumulation of unnec- (a) General requirements. (1) Only ap-
essary combustible materials. Weeds proved containers and portable tanks
and grass shall be kept down and a reg- shall be used for storage and handling
ular procedure provided for the peri- of flammable liquids. Approved safety
odic cleanup of the entire area. cans or Department of Transportation
(4) When there is a danger of an un- approved containers shall be used for
derground fire, that land shall not be the handling and use of flammable liq-
used for combustible or flammable uids in quantities of 5 gallons or less,
storage. except that this shall not apply to
(5) Method of piling shall be solid those flammable liquid materials
wherever possible and in orderly and which are highly viscid (extremely
regular piles. No combustible material hard to pour), which may be used and
shall be stored outdoors within 10 feet handled in original shipping con-
of a building or structure. tainers. For quantities of one gallon or
(6) Portable fire extinguishing equip- less, the original container may be
ment, suitable for the fire hazard in- used, for storage, use and handling of
volved, shall be provided at convenient, flammable liquids.
conspicuously accessible locations in (2) Flammable liquids shall not be
the yard area. Portable fire extin- stored in areas used for exits, stair-
guishers, rated not less than 2A, shall ways, or normally used for the safe
be placed so that maximum travel dis- passage of people.
tance to the nearest unit shall not ex- (b) Indoor storage of flammable liquids.
ceed 100 feet. (1) No more than 25 gallons of flam-
(d) Indoor storage. (1) Storage shall mable liquids shall be stored in a room
not obstruct, or adversely affect, outside of an approved storage cabinet.
means of exit. For storage of liquefied petroleum gas,
(2) All materials shall be stored, han- see § 1926.153.
dled, and piled with due regard to their (2) Quantities of flammable liquid in
fire characteristics. excess of 25 gallons shall be stored in
(3) Noncompatible materials, which an acceptable or approved cabinet
may create a fire hazard, shall be seg- meeting the following requirements:
regated by a barrier having a fire re- (i) Acceptable wooden storage cabi-
sistance of at least 1 hour. nets shall be constructed in the fol-
(4) Material shall be piled to mini- lowing manner, or equivalent: The bot-
mize the spread of fire internally and tom, sides, and top shall be constructed
to permit convenient access for fire- of an exterior grade of plywood at least
fighting. Stable piling shall be main- 1 inch in thickness, which shall not
tained at all times. Aisle space shall be break down or delaminate under stand-
maintained to safely accommodate the ard fire test conditions. All joints shall
widest vehicle that may be used within be rabbeted and shall be fastened in
the building for firefighting purposes. two directions with flathead wood
(5) Clearance of at least 36 inches screws. When more than one door is
shall be maintained between the top used, there shall be a rabbeted overlap
level of the stored material and the of not less than 1 inch. Steel hinges
sprinkler deflectors. shall be mounted in such a manner as
(6) Clearance shall be maintained to not lose their holding capacity due
around lights and heating units to pre- to loosening or burning out of the
vent ignition of combustible materials. screws when subjected to fire. Such
(7) A clearance of 24 inches shall be cabinets shall be painted inside and out
maintained around the path of travel with fire retardant paint.
of fire doors unless a barricade is pro- (ii) Approved metal storage cabinets
vided, in which case no clearance is will be acceptable.
196
(iii) Cabinets shall be labeled in con- TABLE F–2—Continued
spicuous lettering, ‘‘Flammable-Keep
Total al-
Away from Open Flames.’’ lowable
(3) Not more than 60 gallons of Cat- Fire protection Fire resist- Maximum size quantities
provided ance gals./sq.
egory 1, 2 and/or 3 flammable liquids or ft./floor
120 gallons of Category 4 flammable area
liquids shall be stored in any one stor- Yes ................ 1 hr ............... 150 sq. ft ...... 5
age cabinet. Not more than three such No .................. 1 hr ............... 150 sq. ft ...... 2
cabinets may be located in a single NOTE: Fire protection system shall be sprinkler, water spray,
storage area. Quantities in excess of carbon dioxide or other system approved by a nationally rec-
ognized testing laboratory for this purpose.
this shall be stored in an inside storage
room. (v) Electrical wiring and equipment
(4)(i) Inside storage rooms shall be located in inside storage rooms shall be
constructed to meet the required fire- approved for Class I, Division 1, Haz-
resistive rating for their use. Such con- ardous Locations. For definition of
struction shall comply with the test Class I, Division 1, Hazardous Loca-
specifications set forth in Standard tions, see § 1926.449.
Methods of Fire Test of Building Con- (vi) Every inside storage room shall
struction and Material, NFPA 251–1969. be provided with either a gravity or a
(ii) Where an automatic extin- mechanical exhausting system. Such
guishing system is provided, the sys- system shall commence not more than
tem shall be designed and installed in 12 inches above the floor and be de-
an approved manner. Openings to other signed to provide for a complete
rooms or buildings shall be provided change of air within the room at least
with noncombustible liquid-tight 6 times per hour. If a mechanical ex-
raised sills or ramps at least 4 inches in hausting system is used, it shall be
height, or the floor in the storage area controlled by a switch located outside
shall be at least 4 inches below the sur- of the door. The ventilating equipment
rounding floor. Openings shall be pro- and any lighting fixtures shall be oper-
vided with approved self-closing fire ated by the same switch. An electric
doors. The room shall be liquid-tight pilot light shall be installed adjacent
where the walls join the floor. A per- to the switch if Category 1, 2, or 3 flam-
missible alternate to the sill or ramp is mable liquids are dispensed within the
an open-grated trench, inside of the room. Where gravity ventilation is pro-
room, which drains to a safe location. vided, the fresh air intake, as well as
Where other portions of the building or the exhausting outlet from the room,
other buildings are exposed, windows shall be on the exterior of the building
shall be protected as set forth in the in which the room is located.
Standard for Fire Doors and Windows, (vii) In every inside storage room
NFPA No. 80–1970, for Class E or F there shall be maintained one clear
openings. Wood of at least 1-inch nomi- aisle at least 3 feet wide. Containers
nal thickness may be used for shelving, over 30 gallons capacity shall not be
racks, dunnage, scuffboards, floor over- stacked one upon the other.
lay, and similar installations. (viii) Flammable liquids in excess of
(iii) Materials which will react with that permitted in inside storage rooms
water and create a fire hazard shall not shall be stored outside of buildings in
be stored in the same room with flam- accordance with paragraph (c) of this
mable liquids. section.
(iv) Storage in inside storage rooms (5) Quantity. The quantity of flam-
shall comply with Table F–2 following: mable liquids kept in the vicinity of
spraying operations shall be the min-
TABLE F–2 imum required for operations and
Total al-
should ordinarily not exceed a supply
lowable for 1 day or one shift. Bulk storage of
Fire protection Fire resist- quantities portable containers of flammable liq-
provided ance Maximum size gals./sq.
ft./floor uids shall be in a separate, constructed
area building detached from other impor-
Yes ................ 2 hrs ............. 500 sq. ft ...... 10 tant buildings or cut off in a standard
No .................. 2 hrs ............. 500 sq. ft ...... 4 manner.
197
(c) Storage outside buildings. (1) Stor- used for storage of more than 60 gal-
age of containers (not more than 60 lons of flammable liquids.
gallons each) shall not exceed 1,100 gal- (2) At least one portable fire extin-
lons in any one pile or area. Piles or guisher having a rating of not less than
groups of containers shall be separated 20–B units shall be located not less
by a 5-foot clearance. Piles or groups of than 25 feet, nor more than 75 feet,
containers shall not be nearer than 20 from any flammable liquid storage
feet to a building. area located outside.
(2) Within 200 feet of each pile of con- (3) When sprinklers are provided,
tainers, there shall be a 12-foot-wide they shall be installed in accordance
access way to permit approach of fire with the Standard for the Installation
control apparatus. of Sprinkler Systems, NFPA 13–1969.
(3) The storage area shall be graded (4) At least one portable fire extin-
in a manner to divert possible spills guisher having a rating of not less than
away from buildings or other expo- 20–B:C units shall be provided on all
sures, or shall be surrounded by a curb tank trucks or other vehicles used for
or earth dike at least 12 inches high. transporting and/or dispensing flam-
When curbs or dikes are used, provi- mable liquids.
sions shall be made for draining off ac- (e) Dispensing liquids. (1) Areas in
cumulations of ground or rain water, which flammable liquids are trans-
or spills of flammable liquids. Drains ferred at one time, in quantities great-
shall terminate at a safe location and er than 5 gallons from one tank or con-
shall be accessible to operation under tainer to another tank or container,
fire conditions. shall be separated from other oper-
(4) Outdoor portable tank storage: (i) ations by 25-feet distance or by con-
Portable tanks shall not be nearer than struction having a fire resistance of at
20 feet from any building. Two or more least 1 hour. Drainage or other means
portable tanks, grouped together, hav- shall be provided to control spills. Ade-
ing a combined capacity in excess of quate natural or mechanical ventila-
2,200 gallons, shall be separated by a 5- tion shall be provided to maintain the
foot-clear area. Individual portable concentration of flammable vapor at or
tanks exceeding 1,100 gallons shall be below 10 percent of the lower flam-
separated by a 5-foot-clear area. mable limit.
(ii) Within 200 feet of each portable (2) Transfer of Category 1, 2, or 3
tank, there shall be a 12-foot-wide ac- flammable liquids from one container
cess way to permit approach of fire to another shall be done only when
control apparatus. containers are electrically inter-
(5) Storage areas shall be kept free of connected (bonded).
weeds, debris, and other combustible (3) Flammable liquids shall be drawn
material not necessary to the storage. from or transferred into vessels, con-
(6) Portable tanks, not exceeding 660 tainers, or tanks within a building or
gallons, shall be provided with emer- outside only through a closed piping
gency venting and other devices, as re- system, from safety cans, by means of
quired by chapters III and IV of NFPA a device drawing through the top, or
30–1969, The Flammable and Combus- from a container, or portable tanks, by
tible Liquids Code. gravity or pump, through an approved
(7) Portable tanks, in excess of 660 self-closing valve. Transferring by
gallons, shall have emergency venting means of air pressure on the container
and other devices, as required by chap- or portable tanks is prohibited.
ters II and III of The Flammable and (4) The dispensing units shall be pro-
Combustible Liquids Code, NFPA 30– tected against collision damage.
1969. (5) Dispensing devices and nozzles for
(d) Fire control for flammable liquid Category 1, 2, or 3 flammable liquids
storage. (1) At least one portable fire shall be of an approved type.
extinguisher, having a rating of not (f) Handling liquids at point of final
less than 20–B units, shall be located use. (1) Category 1, 2, or 3 flammable
outside of, but not more than 10 feet liquids shall be kept in closed con-
from, the door opening into any room tainers when not actually in use.
198
(2) Leakage or spillage of flammable 20–B:C located so that an extinguisher
liquids shall be disposed of promptly will be within 75 feet of each pump, dis-
and safely. penser, underground fill pipe opening,
(3) Category 1, 2, or 3 flammable liq- and lubrication or service area.
uids may be used only where there are (h) Scope. This section applies to the
no open flames or other sources of igni- handling, storage, and use of flam-
tion within 50 feet of the operation, un- mable liquids with a flashpoint at or
less conditions warrant greater clear- below 199.4 °F (93 °C). This section does
ance. not apply to:
(g) Service and refueling areas. (1) (1) Bulk transportation of flammable
Flammable liquids shall be stored in liquids; and
approved closed containers, in tanks (2) Storage, handling, and use of fuel
located underground, or in above- oil tanks and containers connected
ground portable tanks. with oil burning equipment.
(2) The tank trucks shall comply (i) Tank storage—(1) Design and con-
with the requirements covered in the struction of tanks—(i) Materials. (A)
Standard for Tank Vehicles for Flam- Tanks shall be built of steel except as
mable and Combustible Liquids, NFPA provided in paragraphs (i)(1)(i) (B)
No. 385–1966. through (E) of this section.
(3) The dispensing hose shall be an (B) Tanks may be built of materials
approved type. other than steel for installation under-
(4) The dispensing nozzle shall be an ground or if required by the properties
approved automatic-closing type with- of the liquid stored. Tanks located
out a latch-open device. above ground or inside buildings shall
(5) Underground tanks shall not be be of noncombustible construction.
abandoned. (C) Tanks built of materials other
(6) Clearly identified and easily ac- than steel shall be designed to speci-
cessible switch(es) shall be provided at fications embodying principles recog-
a location remote from dispensing de- nized as good engineering design for
vices to shut off the power to all dis- the material used.
pensing devices in the event of an (D) Unlined concrete tanks may be
emergency. used for storing flammable liquids hav-
(7)(i) Heating equipment of an ap- ing a gravity of 40° API or heavier.
proved type may be installed in the lu- Concrete tanks with special lining may
brication or service area where there is be used for other services provided the
no dispensing or transferring of Cat- design is in accordance with sound en-
egory 1, 2, or 3 flammable liquids, pro- gineering practice.
vided the bottom of the heating unit is (E) [Reserved]
at least 18 inches above the floor and is (F) Special engineering consideration
protected from physical damage. shall be required if the specific gravity
(ii) Heating equipment installed in of the liquid to be stored exceeds that
lubrication or service areas, where Cat- of water or if the tanks are designed to
egory 1, 2, or 3 flammable liquids are contain flammable liquids at a liquid
dispensed, shall be of an approved type temperature below 0 °F.
for garages, and shall be installed at (ii) Fabrication. (A) [Reserved]
least 8 feet above the floor. (B) Metal tanks shall be welded, riv-
(8) There shall be no smoking or open eted, and caulked, brazed, or bolted, or
flames in the areas used for fueling, constructed by use of a combination of
servicing fuel systems for internal these methods. Filler metal used in
combustion engines, receiving or dis- brazing shall be nonferrous metal or an
pensing of flammable liquids. alloy having a melting point above 1000
(9) Conspicuous and legible signs pro- °F. and below that of the metal joined.
hibiting smoking shall be posted. (iii) Atmospheric tanks. (A) Atmos-
(10) The motors of all equipment pheric tanks shall be built in accord-
being fueled shall be shut off during ance with acceptable good standards of
the fueling operation. design. Atmospheric tanks may be
(11) Each service or fueling area shall built in accordance with:
be provided with at least one fire extin- (1) Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc.,
guisher having a rating of not less than Subjects No. 142, Standard for Steel
199
Aboveground Tanks for Flammable and 2.5 p.s.i.g. under emergency venting
Combustible Liquids, 1968; No. 58, conditions.
Standard for Steel Underground Tanks This paragraph may be used for oper-
for Flammable and Combustible Liq- ating pressures not exceeding 1 p.s.i.g.
uids, Fifth Edition, December 1961; or (D) Pressure vessels may be used as
No. 80, Standard for Steel Inside Tanks low-pressure tanks.
for Oil-Burner Fuel, September 1963. (v) Pressure vessels. (A) The normal
(2) American Petroleum Institute operating pressure of the vessel shall
Standards No. 12A, Specification for not exceed the design pressure of the
Oil Storage Tanks with Riveted Shells, vessel.
Seventh Edition, September 1951, or (B) Pressure vessels shall be built in
No. 650, Welded Steel Tanks for Oil accordance with the Code for Unfired
Storage, Third Edition, 1966. Pressure Vessels, Section VIII of the
(3) American Petroleum Institute ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
Standards No. 12B, Specification for 1968.
Bolted Production Tanks, Eleventh (vi) Provisions for internal corrosion.
Edition, May 1958, and Supplement 1, When tanks are not designed in accord-
March 1962; No. 12D, Specification for ance with the American Petroleum In-
Large Welded Production Tanks, Sev- stitute, American Society of Mechan-
enth Edition, August 1957; or No. 12F, ical Engineers, or the Underwriters’
Specification for Small Welded Produc- Laboratories, Inc.’s, standards, or if
tion Tanks, Fifth Edition, March 1961. corrosion is anticipated beyond that
Tanks built in accordance with these provided for in the design formulas
standards shall be used only as produc- used, additional metal thickness or
tion tanks for storage of crude petro- suitable protective coatings or linings
leum in oil-producing areas. shall be provided to compensate for the
(B) Tanks designed for underground corrosion loss expected during the de-
service not exceeding 2,500 gallons sign life of the tank.
(9,462.5 L) capacity may be used above- (2) Installation of outside aboveground
ground. tanks. (i) [Reserved]
(C) Low-pressure tanks and pressure (ii) Spacing (shell-to-shell) between
vessels may be used as atmospheric aboveground tanks. (A) The distance be-
tanks. tween any two flammable liquid stor-
age tanks shall not be less than 3 feet
(D) Atmospheric tanks shall not be
(0.912 m).
used for the storage of a flammable liq-
(B) Except as provided in paragraph
uid at a temperature at or above its
(i)(2)(ii)(C) of this section, the distance
boiling point.
between any two adjacent tanks shall
(iv) Low pressure tanks. (A) The nor- not be less than one-sixth the sum of
mal operating pressure of the tank their diameters. When the diameter of
shall not exceed the design pressure of one tank is less than one-half the di-
the tank. ameter of the adjacent tank, the dis-
(B) Low-pressure tanks shall be built tance between the two tanks shall not
in accordance with acceptable stand- be less than one-half the diameter of
ards of design. Low-pressure tanks may the smaller tank.
be built in accordance with: (C) Where crude petroleum in con-
(1) American Petroleum Institute junction with production facilities are
Standard No. 620. Recommended Rules located in noncongested areas and have
for the Design and Construction of capacities not exceeding 126,000 gallons
Large, Welded, Low-Pressure Storage (3,000 barrels), the distance between
Tanks, Third Edition, 1966. such tanks shall not be less than 3 feet
(2) The principles of the Code for (0.912 m).
Unfired Pressure Vessels, Section VIII (D) Where unstable flammable liquids
of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Ves- are stored, the distance between such
sels Code, 1968. tanks shall not be less than one-half
(C) Atmospheric tanks built accord- the sum of their diameters.
ing to Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc., (E) When tanks are compacted in
requirements in paragraph (i)(1)(iii)(A) three or more rows or in an irregular
of this section and shall be limited to pattern, greater spacing or other
200
means shall be provided so that inside prevent overpressure from any pump
tanks are accessible for firefighting discharging into the tank or vessel
purposes. when the pump discharge pressure can
(F) The minimum separation between exceed the design pressure of the tank
a liquefied petroleum gas container or vessel.
and a flammable liquid storage tank (D) If any tank or pressure vessel has
shall be 20 feet (6.08 m), except in the more than one fill or withdrawal con-
case of flammable liquid tanks oper- nection and simultaneous filling or
ating at pressures exceeding 2.5 p.s.i.g. withdrawal can be made, the vent size
or equipped with emergency venting shall be based on the maximum antici-
which will permit pressures to exceed pated simultaneous flow.
2.5 p.s.i.g. in which case the provisions (E) Unless the vent is designed to
of paragraphs (i)(2)(ii) (A) and (B) of limit the internal pressure 2.5 p.s.i. or
this section shall apply. Suitable less, the outlet of vents and vent drains
means shall be taken to prevent the ac- shall be arranged to discharge in such
cumulation of flammable liquids under a manner as to prevent localized over-
adjacent liquefied petroleum gas con- heating of any part of the tank in the
tainers such as by diversion curbs or event vapors from such vents are ig-
grading. When flammable liquid stor- nited.
age tanks are within a diked area, the (F) Tanks and pressure vessels stor-
liquefied petroleum gas containers ing Category 1 flammable liquids shall
shall be outside the diked area and at be equipped with venting devices that
least 10 feet (3.04 m) away from the shall be normally closed except when
centerline of the wall of the diked area. venting to pressure or vacuum condi-
The foregoing provisions shall not tions. Tanks and pressure vessels stor-
apply when liquefied petroleum gas ing Category 2 flammable liquids, or
containers of 125 gallons (473.125 L) or Category 3 flammable liquids with a
less capacity are installed adjacent to flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), shall
fuel oil supply tanks of 550 gallons be equipped with venting devices that
(2,081.75 L) or less capacity. shall be normally closed except when
(iii) [Reserved] venting under pressure or vacuum con-
(iv) Normal venting for aboveground ditions, or with approved flame arrest-
tanks. (A) Atmospheric storage tanks ers.
shall be adequately vented to prevent Exemption: Tanks of 3,000 bbls (bar-
the development of vacuum or pressure rels) (84 m(3)) capacity or less con-
sufficient to distort the roof of a cone taining crude petroleum in crude-pro-
roof tank or exceeding the design pres- ducing areas; and, outside aboveground
sure in the case of other atmospheric atmospheric tanks under 1,000 gallons
tanks, as a result of filling or (3,785 L) capacity containing other
emptying, and atmospheric tempera- than Category 1 flammable liquids may
ture changes. have open vents. (See paragraph
(B) Normal vents shall be sized either (i)(2)(vi)(B) of this section.)
in accordance with: (1) The American (G) Flame arresters or venting de-
Petroleum Institute Standard 2000 vices required in paragraph (i)(2)(iv)(F)
(1968), Venting Atmospheric and Low- of this section may be omitted for Cat-
Pressure Storage Tanks; or (2) other egory 2 flammable liquids or Category
accepted standard; or (3) shall be at 3 flammable liquids with a flashpoint
least as large as the filling or with- below 100 °F (37.8 °C) where conditions
drawal connection, whichever is larger are such that their use may, in case of
but in no case less than 11⁄4 inch (3.175 obstruction, result in tank damage.
cm) nominal inside diameter. (v) Emergency relief venting for fire ex-
(C) Low-pressure tanks and pressure posure for aboveground tanks. (A) Every
vessels shall be adequately vented to aboveground storage tank shall have
prevent development of pressure or some form of construction or device
vacuum, as a result of filling or that will relieve excessive internal
emptying and atmospheric tempera- pressure caused by exposure fires.
ture changes, from exceeding the de- (B) In a vertical tank the construc-
sign pressure of the tank or vessel. tion referred to in paragraph
Protection shall also be provided to (i)(2)(v)(A) of this section may take the
201
form of a floating roof, lifter roof, a capacity of both normal and emergency
weak roof-to-shell seam, or other ap- venting devices shall be not less than
proved pressure relieving construction. that derived from Table F–10 except as
The weak roof-to-shell seam shall be provided in paragraph (i)(2)(v) (E) or
constructed to fail preferential to any (F) of this section. Such device may be
other seam. a self-closing manhole cover, or one
(C) Where entire dependence for using long bolts that permit the cover
emergency relief is placed upon pres- to lift under internal pressure, or an
sure relieving devices, the total vent-
additional or larger relief valve or
ing capacity of both normal and emer-
valves. The wetted area of the tank
gency vents shall be enough to prevent
shall be calculated on the basis of 55
rupture of the shell or bottom of the
tank if vertical, or of the shell or heads percent of the total exposed area of a
if horizontal. If unstable liquids are sphere or spheroid, 75 percent of the
stored, the effects of heat or gas result- total exposed area of a horizontal tank
ing from polymerization, decomposi- and the first 30 feet (9.12 m) above
tion, condensation, or self-reactivity grade of the exposed shell area of a
shall be taken into account. The total vertical tank.
TABLE F–10—WETTED AREA VERSUS CUBIC FEET (METERS) FREE AIR PER HOUR
[14.7 psia and 60 °F. (15.55 °C)]
Square feet (m2) CFH (m3H) Square feet (m2) CFH (m3H) Square feet (m2) CFH (m3H)
20 (1.84) 21,100 (590.8) 200 (18.4) 211,000 (5,908) 1,000 (90.2) 524,000 (14,672)
30 (2.76) 31,600 (884.8) 250 (23) 239,000 (6,692) 1,200 (110.4) 557,000 (15,596)
40 (3.68) 42,100 (1,178.8) 300 (27.6) 265,000 (7,420) 1,400 (128.8) 587,000 (16,436)
50 (4.6) 52,700 (1,475.6) 350 (32.2) 288,000 (8,064) 1,600 (147.2) 614,000 (17,192)
60 (5.52) 63,200 (1,769.6) 400 (36.8) 312,000 (8,736) 1,800 (165.6) 639,000 (17,892)
70 (6.44) 73,700 (2,063.6) 500 (46) 354,000 (9,912) 2,000 (180.4) 662,000 (18,536)
80 (7.36) 84,200 (2,357.6) 600 (55.2) 392,000 (10,976) 2,400 (220.8) 704,000 (19,712)
90 (8.28) 94,800 (2,654.4) 700 (64.4) 428,000 (11,984) 2,800 (257.6) 742,000 (20,776)
100 (9.2) 105,000 (2,940) 800 (73.6) 462,000 (12,936) and
120 (11.04) 126,000 (3,528) 900 (82.8) 493,000 (13,804) over
140 (12.88) 147,000 (4,116) 1,000 (90.2) 524,000 (14,672)
160 (14.72) 168,000 (4,704)
180 (16.56) 190,000 (5,320)
200 (18.4) 211,000 (5,908)
(D) For tanks and storage vessels de- V = 1337÷L√ M

signed for pressure over 1 p.s.i.g., the
V = Cubic feet (meters) of free air per hour
total rate of venting shall be deter- from Table F–10.
mined in accordance with Table F–10, L = Latent heat of vaporization of specific
except that when the exposed wetted liquid in B.t.u. per pound.
area of the surface is greater than 2,800 M = Molecular weight of specific liquids.
square feet (257.6 m2), the total rate of
venting shall be calculated by the fol- (F) The required airflow rate of para-
lowing formula: graph (i)(2)(v) (C) or (E) of this section
may be multiplied by the appropriate
CFH = 1,107A0.82 factor listed in the following schedule
Where: when protection is provided as indi-
CFH = Venting requirement, in cubic feet cated. Only one factor may be used for
(meters) of free air per hour. any one tank.
A = Exposed wetted surface, in square feet
0.5 for drainage in accordance with para-
(m2).
graph (i)(2)(vii)(B) of this section for tanks
NOTE: The foregoing formula is based on over 200 square feet (18.4 m2) of wetted area.
Q=21,000A0.82. 0.3 for approved water spray.
0.3 for approved insulation.
(E) The total emergency relief vent-
0.15 for approved water spray with approved
ing capacity for any specific stable liq- insulation.
uid may be determined by the fol-
lowing formula:
202
(G) The outlet of all vents and vent to discharge, within the pressure limi-
drains on tanks equipped with emer- tations of the system, the vapors they
gency venting to permit pressures ex- may be required to handle when
ceeding 2.5 p.s.i.g. shall be arranged to manifolded tanks are subject to the
discharge in such a way as to prevent same fire exposure.
localized overheating of any part of the (vii) Drainage, dikes, and walls for
tank, in the event vapors from such aboveground tanks—(A) Drainage and
vents are ignited. diked areas. The area surrounding a
(H) Each commercial tank venting tank or a group of tanks shall be pro-
device shall have stamped on it the vided with drainage as in paragraph
opening pressure, the pressure at which (i)(2)(vii)(B) of this section, or shall be
the valve reaches the full open posi- diked as provided in (i)(2)(vii)(C) of this
tion, and the flow capacity at the lat- section, to prevent accidental dis-
ter pressure, expressed in cubic feet charge of liquid from endangering ad-
(meters) per hour of air at 60 °F. (15.55 joining property or reaching water-
°C) and at a pressure of 14.7 p.s.i.a. ways.
(I) The flow capacity of tank venting (B) Drainage. Where protection of ad-
devices 12 inches (30.48 cm) and smaller joining property or waterways is by
in nominal pipe size shall be deter- means of a natural or manmade drain-
mined by actual test of each type and age system, such systems shall comply
size of vent. These flow tests may be with the following:
conducted by the manufacturer if cer- (1) [Reserved]
tified by a qualified impartial observer, (2) The drainage system shall termi-
or may be conducted by an outside nate in vacant land or other area or in
agency. The flow capacity of tank an impounding basin having a capacity
venting devices larger than 12 inches not smaller than that of the largest
(30.48 cm) nominal pipe size, including tank served. This termination area and
manhole covers with long bolts or the route of the drainage system shall
equivalent, may be calculated provided be so located that, if the flammable
that the opening pressure is actually liquids in the drainage system are ig-
measured, the rating pressure and cor- nited, the fire will not seriously expose
responding free orifice area are stated, tanks or adjoining property.
the word ‘‘calculated’’ appears on the (C) Diked areas. Where protection of
nameplate, and the computation is adjoining property or waterways is ac-
based on a flow coefficient of 0.5 ap- complished by retaining the liquid
plied to the rated orifice area. around the tank by means of a dike,
(vi) Vent piping for aboveground tanks. the volume of the diked area shall
(A) Vent piping shall be constructed in comply with the following require-
accordance with paragraph (c) of this ments:
section. (1) Except as provided in paragraph
(B) Where vent pipe outlets for tanks (i)(2)(vii)(C)(2) of this section, the volu-
storing Category 1 or 2 flammable liq- metric capacity of the diked area shall
uids, or Category 3 flammable liquids not be less than the greatest amount of
with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), liquid that can be released from the
are adjacent to buildings or public largest tank within the diked area, as-
ways, they shall be located so that the suming a full tank. The capacity of the
vapors are released at a safe point out- diked area enclosing more than one
side of buildings and not less than 12 tank shall be calculated by deducting
feet (3.658 m) above the adjacent the volume of the tanks other than the
ground level. In order to aid their dis- largest tank below the height of the
persion, vapors shall be discharged up- dike.
ward or horizontally away from closely (2) For a tank or group of tanks with
adjacent walls. Vent outlets shall be fixed roofs containing crude petroleum
located so that flammable vapors will with boilover characteristics, the volu-
not be trapped by eaves or other ob- metric capacity of the diked area shall
structions and shall be at least 5 feet be not less than the capacity of the
(1.52 m) from building openings. largest tank served by the enclosure,
(C) When tank vent piping is assuming a full tank. The capacity of
manifolded, pipe sizes shall be such as the diked enclosure shall be calculated
203
by deducting the volume below the uids, or Category 3 flammable liquids
height of the dike of all tanks within with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C),
the enclosure. to the nearest wall of any basement or
(3) Walls of the diked area shall be of pit shall be not less than 1 foot (0.304
earth, steel, concrete or solid masonry m), and to any property line that may
designed to be liquidtight and to with- be built upon, not less than 3 feet (0.912
stand a full hydrostatic head. Earthen m). The distance from any part of a
walls 3 feet (0.912 m) or more in height tank storing Category 3 flammable liq-
shall have a flat section at the top not uids with a flashpoint at or above 100
less than 2 feet (0.608 m) wide. The °F (37.8 °C) or Category 4 flammable
slope of an earthen wall shall be con- liquids to the nearest wall of any base-
sistent with the angle of repose of the ment, pit or property line shall be not
material of which the wall is con- less than 1 foot (0.304 m).
structed. (ii) Depth and cover. Underground
(4) The walls of the diked area shall tanks shall be set on firm foundations
be restricted to an average height of 6 and surrounded with at least 6 inches
feet (1.824 m) above interior grade. (15.24 cm) of noncorrosive, inert mate-
(5) [Reserved] rials such as clean sand, earth, or grav-
(6) No loose combustible material, el well tamped in place. The tank shall
empty or full drum or barrel, shall be be placed in the hole with care since
permitted within the diked area. dropping or rolling the tank into the
(viii) Tank openings other than vents hole can break a weld, puncture or
for aboveground tanks. damage the tank, or scrape off the pro-
(A)–(C) [Reserved] tective coating of coated tanks. Tanks
(D) Openings for gaging shall be pro- shall be covered with a minimum of 2
vided with a vaportight cap or cover. feet (0.608 m) of earth, or shall be cov-
(E) For Category 2 flammable liquids ered with not less than 1 foot (0.304 m)
or Category 3 flammable liquids with a of earth, on top of which shall be
flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), other placed a slab of reinforced concrete not
than crude oils, gasolines, and as- less than 4 inches (10.16 cm) thick.
phalts, the fill pipe shall be so designed When underground tanks are, or are
and installed as to minimize the possi- likely to be, subject to traffic, they
bility of generating static electricity. shall be protected against damage from
A fill pipe entering the top of a tank vehicles passing over them by at least
shall terminate within 6 inches (15.24 3 feet (0.912 m) of earth cover, or 18
cm) of the bottom of the tank and shall inches (45.72 cm) of well-tamped earth,
be installed to avoid excessive vibra- plus 6 inches (15.24 cm) of reinforced
tion. concrete or 8 inches (20.32 cm) of as-
(F) Filling and emptying connections phaltic concrete. When asphaltic or re-
which are made and broken shall be lo- inforced concrete paving is used as part
cated outside of buildings at a location of the protection, it shall extend at
free from any source of ignition and least 1 foot (0.304 m) horizontally be-
not less than 5 feet (1.52 m) away from yond the outline of the tank in all di-
any building opening. Such connection rections.
shall be closed and liquidtight when (iii) Corrosion protection. Corrosion
not in use. The connection shall be protection for the tank and its piping
properly identified. shall be provided by one or more of the
(3) Installation of underground tanks— following methods:
(i) Location. Evacuation for under- (A) Use of protective coatings or
ground storage tanks shall be made wrappings;
with due care to avoid undermining of (B) Cathodic protection; or,
foundations of existing structures. Un- (C) Corrosion resistant materials of
derground tanks or tanks under build- construction.
ings shall be so located with respect to (iv) Vents. (A) Location and arrange-
existing building foundations and sup- ment of vents for Category 1 or 2 flam-
ports that the loads carried by the lat- mable liquids, or Category 3 flammable
ter cannot be transmitted to the tank. liquids with a flashpoint below 100 °F
The distance from any part of a tank (37.8 °C). Vent pipes from tanks storing
storing Category 1 or 2 flammable liq- Category 1 or 2 flammable liquids, or
204
Category 3 flammable liquids with a is less than 10 feet (3.04 m) in length, or
flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), shall greater than 2 inches (5.08 cm) in nomi-
be so located that the discharge point nal inside diameter, the outlet shall be
is outside of buildings, higher than the provided with a vacuum and pressure
fill pipe opening, and not less than 12 relief device or there shall be an ap-
feet (3.658 m) above the adjacent proved flame arrester located in the
ground level. Vent pipes shall dis- vent line at the outlet or within the
charge only upward in order to disperse approved distance from the outlet.
vapors. Vent pipes 2 inches (5.08 cm) or
(B) Size of vents. Each tank shall be
less in nominal inside diameter shall
vented through piping adequate in size
not be obstructed by devices that will
cause excessive back pressure. Vent to prevent blow-back of vapor or liquid
pipe outlets shall be so located that at the fill opening while the tank is
flammable vapors will not enter build- being filled. Vent pipes shall be not less
ing openings, or be trapped under eaves than 11⁄4 inch (3.175 cm) nominal inside
or other obstructions. If the vent pipe diameter.
TABLE F–11—VENT LINE DIAMETERS
Pipe length 1
Maximum flow GPM (L)
50 feet (15.2 m) 100 feet (30.4 m) 200 feet (60.8 m)
Inches (cm) Inches (cm) Inches (cm)

100 (378.5) ...................................................................................... 11⁄4 (3.175) 11⁄4 (3.175) 11⁄4 (3.175)
200 (757) ......................................................................................... 11⁄4 (3.175) 11⁄4 (3.175) 11⁄4 (3.175)
300 (1,135.5) ................................................................................... 11⁄4 (3.175) 11⁄4 (3.175) 11⁄2 (3.81)
400 (1,514) ...................................................................................... 11⁄4 (3.175) 11⁄2 (3.81) 2 (5.08)
500 (1,892.5) ................................................................................... 11⁄2 (3.81) 11⁄2 (3.81) 2 (5.08)
600 (2,271) ...................................................................................... 11⁄2 (3.81) 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08)
700 (2,649.5) ................................................................................... 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08)
800 (3,028) ...................................................................................... 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08) 3 (7.62)
900 (3,406.5) ................................................................................... 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08) 3 (7.62)
1,000 (3,785) ................................................................................... 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08) 3 (7.62)
1 Vent lines of 50 ft. (15.2 m), 100 ft. (30.4 m), and 200 ft. (60.8 m) of pipe plus 7 ells.
(C) Location and arrangement of to discharge, within the pressure limi-

vents for Category 3 flammable liquids tations of the system, the vapors they
with a flashpoint at or above 100 °F may be required to handle when
(37.8 °C) or Category 4 flammable liq- manifolded tanks are filled simulta-
uids. Vent pipes from tanks storing neously.
Category 3 flammable liquids with a (v) Tank openings other than vents. (A)
flashpoint at or above 100 °F (37.8 °C) or Connections for all tank openings shall
Category 4 flammable liquids shall ter- be vapor or liquid tight.
minate outside of the building and (B) Openings for manual gaging, if
higher than the fill pipe opening. Vent independent of the fill pipe, shall be
outlets shall be above normal snow provided with a liquid-tight cap or
level. They may be fitted with return
cover. If inside a building, each such
bends, coarse screens or other devices
opening shall be protected against liq-
to minimize ingress of foreign mate-
uid overflow and possible vapor release
rial.
(D) Vent piping shall be constructed by means of a spring loaded check
in accordance with paragraph (3)(iv)(C) valve or other approved device.
of this section. Vent pipes shall be so (C) Fill and discharge lines shall
laid as to drain toward the tank with- enter tanks only through the top. Fill
out sags or traps in which liquid can lines shall be sloped toward the tank.
collect. They shall be located so that (D) For Category 2 flammable liq-
they will not be subjected to physical uids, or Category 3 flammable liquids
damage. The tank end of the vent pipe with a flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C),
shall enter the tank through the top. other than crude oils, gasolines, and
(E) When tank vent piping is asphalts, the fill pipe shall be so de-
manifolded, pipe sizes shall be such as signed and installed as to minimize the
205
possibility of generating static elec- (i)(4)(iv)(B) of this section, and if a sep-
tricity by terminating within 6 inches arate valve, shall be located adjacent
(15.24 cm) of the bottom of the tank. to the valve required in paragraph
(E) Filling and emptying connections (i)(4)(iv)(B) of this section.
which are made and broken shall be lo- (D) Openings for manual gaging, if
cated outside of buildings at a location independent of the fill pipe (see para-
free from any source of ignition and graph (i)(4)(iv)(F) of this section), shall
not less than 5 feet (1.52 m) away from be provided with a vaportight cap or
any building opening. Such connection cover. Each such opening shall be pro-
shall be closed and liquidtight when tected against liquid overflow and pos-
not in use. The connection shall be sible vapor release by means of a spring
properly identified. loaded check valve or other approved
(4) Installation of tanks inside of build- device.
ings—(i) Location. Tanks shall not be (E) For Category 2 flammable liquids,
permitted inside of buildings except as or Category 3 flammable liquids with a
provided in paragraphs (e), (g), (h), or flashpoint below 100 °F (37.8 °C), other
(i) of this section. than crude oils, gasolines, and as-
(ii) Vents. Vents for tanks inside of phalts, the fill pipe shall be so designed
buildings shall be as provided in para- and installed as to minimize the possi-
graphs (i)(2) (iv), (v), (vi)(B), and (3)(iv) bility of generating static electricity
of this section, except that emergency by terminating within 6 inches (15.24
venting by the use of weak roof seams cm) of the bottom of the tank.
on tanks shall not be permitted. Vents (F) The fill pipe inside of the tank
shall discharge vapors outside the shall be installed to avoid excessive vi-
buildings. bration of the pipe.
(iii) Vent piping. Vent piping shall be (G) The inlet of the fill pipe shall be
constructed in accordance with para- located outside of buildings at a loca-
graph (c) of this section. tion free from any source of ignition
(iv) Tank openings other than vents. and not less than 5 feet (1.52 m) away
(A) Connections for all tank openings from any building opening. The inlet of
shall be vapor or liquidtight. Vents are the fill pipe shall be closed and
covered in paragraph (i)(4)(ii) of this liquidtight when not in use. The fill
section. connection shall be properly identified.
(B) Each connection to a tank inside (H) Tanks inside buildings shall be
of buildings through which liquid can equipped with a device, or other means
normally flow shall be provided with shall be provided, to prevent overflow
an internal or an external valve lo- into the building.
cated as close as practical to the shell (5) Supports, foundations, and anchor-
of the tank. Such valves, when exter- age for all tank locations—(i) General.
nal, and their connections to the tank Tank supports shall be installed on
shall be of steel except when the chem- firm foundations. Tank supports shall
ical characteristics of the liquid stored be of concrete, masonry, or protected
are incompatible with steel. When ma- steel. Single wood timber supports (not
terials other than steel are necessary, cribbing) laid horizontally may be used
they shall be suitable for the pressures, for outside aboveground tanks if not
structural stresses, and temperatures more than 12 inches (30.48 cm) high at
involved, including fire exposures. their lowest point.
(C) Flammable liquid tanks located (ii) Fire resistance. Steel supports or
inside of buildings, except in one-story exposed piling shall be protected by
buildings designed and protected for materials having a fire resistance rat-
flammable liquid storage, shall be pro- ing of not less than 2 hours, except that
vided with an automatic-closing heat- steel saddles need not be protected if
actuated valve on each withdrawal con- less than 12 inches (30.48 cm) high at
nection below the liquid level, except their lowest point. Water spray protec-
for connections used for emergency dis- tion or its equivalent may be used in
posal, to prevent continued flow in the lieu of fire-resistive materials to pro-
event of fire in the vicinity of the tank. tect supports.
This function may be incorporated in (iii) Spheres. The design of the sup-
the valve required in paragraph porting structure for tanks such as
206
spheres shall receive special engineer- sufficient weight to provide adequate
ing consideration. load for the tank when filled with flam-
(iv) Load distribution. Every tank mable liquid and submerged by flood
shall be so supported as to prevent the waters to the established flood stage,
excessive concentration of loads on the or adequately secured by other means.
supporting portion of the shell. (E) [Reserved]
(v) Foundations. Tanks shall rest on (F) At locations where there is no
the ground or on foundations made of ample and dependable water supply, or
concrete, masonry, piling, or steel. where filling of underground tanks
Tank foundations shall be designed to with liquids is impracticable because of
minimize the possibility of uneven set- the character of their contents, their
tling of the tank and to minimize cor- use, or for other reasons, each tank
rosion in any part of the tank resting shall be safeguarded against movement
on the foundation. when empty and submerged by high
(vi) Flood areas. Where a tank is lo- ground water or flood waters by an-
cated in an area that may be subjected choring, weighting with concrete or
to flooding, the applicable precautions other approved solid loading material,
outlined in this subdivision shall be ob- or securing by other means. Each such
served. tank shall be so constructed and in-
(A) No aboveground vertical storage stalled that it will safely resist exter-
tank containing a flammable liquid nal pressures due to high ground water
shall be located so that the allowable or flood waters.
liquid level within the tank is below
(G) At locations where there is an
the established maximum flood stage,
ample and dependable water supply
unless the tank is provided with a guid-
available, underground tanks con-
ing structure such as described in para-
taining flammable liquids, so installed
graphs (i)(5)(vi) (M), (N), and (O) of this
that more than 70 percent of their stor-
section.
age capacity will be submerged at the
(B) Independent water supply facili-
maximum flood stage, shall be so an-
ties shall be provided at locations
chored, weighted, or secured by other
where there is no ample and dependable
public water supply available for load- means, as to prevent movement of such
ing partially empty tanks with water. tanks when filled with flammable liq-
(C) In addition to the preceding re- uids, and submerged by flood waters to
quirements, each tank so located that the established flood stage.
more than 70 percent, but less than 100 (H) Pipe connections below the allow-
percent, of its allowable liquid storage able liquid level in a tank shall be pro-
capacity will be submerged at the es- vided with valves or cocks located as
tablished maximum flood stage, shall closely as practicable to the tank shell.
be safeguarded by one of the following Such valves and their connections to
methods: Tank shall be raised, or its tanks shall be of steel or other mate-
height shall be increased, until its top rial suitable for use with the liquid
extends above the maximum flood being stored. Cast iron shall not be per-
stage a distance equivalent to 30 permitted.
cent or more of its allowable liquid (I) At locations where an independent
storage capacity: Provided, however, water supply is required, it shall be en-
That the submerged part of the tank tirely independent of public power and
shall not exceed two and one-half times water supply. Independent source of
the diameter. Or, as an alternative to water shall be available when flood wa-
the foregoing, adequate noncombus- ters reach a level not less than 10 feet
tible structural guides, designed to per- (3.04 m) below the bottom of the lowest
mit the tank to float vertically with- tank on a property.
out loss of product, shall be provided. (J) The self-contained power and
(D) Each horizontal tank so located pumping unit shall be so located or so
that more than 70 percent of its stor- designed that pumping into tanks may
age capacity will be submerged at the be carried on continuously throughout
established flood stage, shall be an- the rise in flood waters from a level 10
chored, attached to a foundation of feet (3.04 m) below the lowest tank to
concrete or of steel and concrete, of the level of the potential flood stage.
207
(K) Capacity of the pumping unit with water loading operations shall be
shall be such that the rate of rise of closed and locked.
water in all tanks shall be equivalent (U) If a tank is equipped with a swing
to the established potential average line, the swing pipe shall be raised to
rate of rise of flood waters at any and secured at its highest position.
stage. (V) Inspections. The Assistant Sec-
(L) Each independent pumping unit retary or his designated representative
shall be tested periodically to insure shall make periodic inspections of all
that it is in satisfactory operating con- plants where the storage of flammable
dition. liquids is such as to require compliance
(M) Structural guides for holding with the foregoing requirements, in
floating tanks above their foundations order to assure the following:
shall be so designed that there will be (1) That all flammable liquid storage
no resistance to the free rise of a tank, tanks are in compliance with these re-
and shall be constructed of noncombus- quirements and so maintained.
tible material. (2) That detailed printed instructions
(N) The strength of the structure of what to do in flood emergencies are
shall be adequate to resist lateral properly posted.
movement of a tank subject to a hori- (3) That station operators and other
zontal force in any direction equivalent employees depended upon to carry out
such instructions are thoroughly in-
to not less than 25 pounds per square
formed as to the location and operation
foot (1.05 kg m2) acting on the pro-
of such valves and other equipment
jected vertical cross-sectional area of
necessary to effect these requirements.
the tank.
(vii) Earthquake areas. In areas sub-
(O) Where tanks are situated on ex-
ject to earthquakes, the tank supports
posed points or bends in a shoreline
and connections shall be designed to
where swift currents in flood waters
resist damage as a result of such
will be present, the structures shall be
shocks.
designed to withstand a unit force of
(6) Sources of ignition. In locations
not less than 50 pounds per square foot
where flammable vapors may be
(2.1 kg m2).
present, precautions shall be taken to
(P) The filling of a tank to be pro- prevent ignition by eliminating or con-
tected by water loading shall be start- trolling sources of ignition. Sources of
ed as soon as flood waters reach a dan- ignition may include open flames,
gerous flood stage. The rate of filling lightning, smoking, cutting and weld-
shall be at least equal to the rate of ing, hot surfaces, frictional heat,
rise of the floodwaters (or the estab- sparks (static, electrical, and mechan-
lished average potential rate of rise). ical), spontaneous ignition, chemical
(Q) Sufficient fuel to operate the and physical-chemical reactions, and
water pumps shall be available at all radiant heat.
times to insure adequate power to fill (7) Testing—(i) General. All tanks,
all tankage with water. whether shop built or field erected,
(R) All valves on connecting pipe- shall be strength tested before they are
lines shall be closed and locked in placed in service in accordance with
closed position when water loading has the applicable paragraphs of the code
been completed. under which they were built. The
(S) Where structural guides are pro- American Society of Mechanical Engi-
vided for the protection of floating neers (ASME) code stamp, American
tanks, all rigid connections between Petroleum Institute (API) monogram,
tanks and pipelines shall be discon- or the label of the Underwriters’ Lab-
nected and blanked off or blinded be- oratories, Inc., on a tank shall be evi-
fore the floodwaters reach the bottom dence of compliance with this strength
of the tank, unless control valves and test. Tanks not marked in accordance
their connections to the tank are of a with the above codes shall be strength
type designed to prevent breakage be- tested before they are placed in service
tween the valve and the tank shell. in accordance with good engineering
(T) All valves attached to tanks principles and reference shall be made
other than those used in connection to the sections on testing in the codes
208
listed in paragraphs (i)(1) (iii)(A), (A) Tubing or casing on any oil or gas
(iv)(B), or (v)(B) of this section. wells and any piping connected directly
(ii) Strength. When the vertical thereto.
length of the fill and vent pipes is such (B) Motor vehicle, aircraft, boat, or
that when filled with liquid the static portable or stationary engines.
head imposed upon the bottom of the (C) Piping within the scope of any ap-
tank exceeds 10 pounds per square inch plicable boiler and pressures vessel
(68.94 kPa), the tank and related piping code.
shall be tested hydrostatically to a (iii) Definitions. As used in this para-
pressure equal to the static head thus graph, piping systems consist of pipe,
imposed. tubing, flanges, bolting, gaskets,
(iii) Tightness. In addition to the valves, fittings, the pressure con-
strength test called for in paragraphs taining parts of other components such
(i)(7) (i) and (ii) of this section, all as expansion joints and strainers, and
tanks and connections shall be tested devices which serve such purposes as
for tightness. Except for underground mixing, separating, snubbing, distrib-
tanks, this tightness test shall be made uting, metering, or controlling flow.
at operating pressure with air, inert (2) Materials for piping, valves, and fit-
gas, or water prior to placing the tank tings—(i) Required materials. Materials
in service. In the case of field-erected for piping, valves, or fittings shall be
tanks the strength test may be consid- steel, nodular iron, or malleable iron,
ered to be the test for tank tightness. except as provided in paragraphs (j)(2)
Underground tanks and piping, before (ii), (iii) and (iv) of this section.
being covered, enclosed, or placed in (ii) Exceptions. Materials other than
use, shall be tested for tightness steel, nodular iron, or malleable iron
hydrostatically, or with air pressure at may be used underground, or if re-
not less than 3 pounds per square inch quired by the properties of the flam-
(20.68 kPa) and not more than 5 pounds mable liquid handled. Material other
per square inch (34.47 kPa). than steel, nodular iron, or malleable
(iv) Repairs. All leaks or deforma- iron shall be designed to specifications
tions shall be corrected in an accept- embodying principles recognized as
able manner before the tank is placed good engineering practices for the ma-
in service. Mechanical caulking is not terial used.
permitted for correcting leaks in weld- (iii) Linings. Piping, valves, and fit-
ed tanks except pinhole leaks in the tings may have combustible or non-
roof. combustible linings.
(v) Derated operations. Tanks to be op- (iv) Low-melting materials. When low-
erated at pressures below their design melting point materials such as alu-
pressure may be tested by the applica- minum and brass or materials that
ble provisions of paragraphs (i)(7) (i) or soften on fire exposure such as plastics,
(ii) of this section, based upon the pres- or non-ductile materials such as cast
sure developed under full emergency iron, are necessary, special consider-
venting of the tank. ation shall be given to their behavior
(j) Piping, valves, and fittings—(1) Gen- on fire exposure. If such materials are
eral—(i) Design. The design (including used in above ground piping systems or
selection of materials) fabrication, as- inside buildings, they shall be suitably
sembly, test, and inspection of piping protected against fire exposure or so
systems containing flammable liquids located that any spill resulting from
shall be suitable for the expected work- the failure of these materials could not
ing pressures and structural stresses. unduly expose persons, important
Conformity with the applicable provi- buildings or structures or can be read-
sions of Pressure Piping, ANSI B31 se- ily controlled by remote valves.
ries and the provisions of this para- (3) Pipe joints. Joints shall be made
graph, shall be considered prima facie liquid tight. Welded or screwed joints
evidence of compliance with the fore- or approved connectors shall be used.
going provisions. Threaded joints and connections shall
(ii) Exceptions. This paragraph does be made up tight with a suitable lubri-
not apply to any of the following: cant or piping compound. Pipe joints
209
dependent upon the friction character- located away from other structures so
istics of combustible materials for meas to provide room for safe ingress and
chanical continuity of piping shall not egress of craft to be fueled. Dispensing
be used inside buildings. They may be units shall in all cases be at least 20
used outside of buildings above or feet (6.08 m) from any activity involv-
below ground. If used above ground, the ing fixed sources of ignition.
piping shall either be secured to pre- (ii) Dispensing shall be by approved
vent disengagement at the fitting or dispensing units with or without inte-
the piping system shall be so designed gral pumps and may be located on open
that any spill resulting from such dis- piers, wharves, or floating docks or on
engagement could not unduly expose shore or on piers of the solid fill type.
persons, important buildings or struc- (iii) Dispensing nozzles shall be auto-
tures, and could be readily controlled matic-closing without a hold-open
by remote valves. latch.
(4) Supports. Piping systems shall be (2) Tanks and pumps. (i) Tanks, and
substantially supported and protected pumps not integral with the dispensing
against physical damage and excessive unit, shall be on shore or on a pier of
stresses arising from settlement, vibra- the solid fill type, except as provided in
tion, expansion, or contraction.
paragraphs (k)(2) (ii) and (iii) of this
(5) Protection against corrosion. All
section.
piping for flammable liquids, both
aboveground and underground, where (ii) Where shore location would re-
subject to external corrosion, shall be quire excessively long supply lines to
painted or otherwise protected. dispensers, tanks may be installed on a
(6) Valves. Piping systems shall con- pier provided that applicable portions
tain a sufficient number of valves to of paragraph (b) of this section relative
operate the system properly and to to spacing, diking, and piping are com-
protect the plant. Piping systems in plied with and the quantity so stored
connection with pumps shall contain a does not exceed 1,100 gallons (4,163.5 L)
sufficient number of valves to control aggregate capacity.
properly the flow of liquid in normal (iii) Shore tanks supplying marine
operation and in the event of physical service stations may be located above
damage. Each connection to pipelines, ground, where rock ledges or high
by which equipments such as tankcars water table make underground tanks
or tank vehicles discharge liquids by impractical.
means of pumps into storage tanks, (iv) Where tanks are at an elevation
shall be provided with a check valve for which would produce gravity head on
automatic protection against backflow the dispensing unit, the tank outlet
if the piping arrangement is such that shall be equipped with a pressure con-
backflow from the system is possible. trol valve positioned adjacent to and
(7) Testing. All piping before being outside the tank block valve specified
covered, enclosed, or placed in use in § 1926.152(c)(8) of this section, so ad-
shall be hydrostatically tested to 150 justed that liquid cannot flow by grav-
percent of the maximum anticipated ity from the tank in case of piping or
pressure of the system, or pneumati- hose failure.
cally tested to 110 percent of the max- (3) Piping. (i) Piping between shore
imum anticipated pressure of the sys- tanks and dispensing units shall be as
tem, but not less than 5 pounds per described in paragraph (k)(2)(iii) of this
square inch gage at the highest point section, except that, where dispensing
of the system. This test shall be main- is from a floating structure, suitable
tained for a sufficient time to complete lengths of oil-resistant flexible hose
visual inspection of all joints and con- may be employed between the shore
nections, but for at least 10 minutes. piping and the piping on the floating
(k) Marine service stations—(1) Dis- structure as made necessary by change
pensing. (i) The dispensing area shall be in water level or shoreline.
210
211
ER26MR12.128</GPH>
(ii) A readily accessible valve to shut and shall include all facilities used in
off the supply from shore shall be pro- connection therewith.
vided in each pipeline at or near the
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
approach to the pier and at the shore
1979, as amended at 51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986;
end of each pipeline adjacent to the 58 FR 35162, June 30, 1993; 63 FR 33469, June
point where flexible hose is attached. 18, 1998; 77 FR 17891, Mar. 26, 2012]
(iii) Piping shall be located so as to
be protected from physical damage. § 1926.153 Liquefied petroleum gas
(iv) Piping handling Category 1 or 2 (LP-Gas).
flammable liquids, or Category 3 flam-
mable liquids with a flashpoint below (a) Approval of equipment and systems.
100 °F (37.8 °C), shall be grounded to (1) Each system shall have containers,
control stray currents. valves, connectors, manifold valve as-
(4) Definition; as used in this section: semblies, and regulators of an approved
Marine service station shall mean that type.
portion of a property where flammable (2) All cylinders shall meet the De-
liquids used as fuels are stored and dis- partment of Transportation specifica-
pensed from fixed equipment on shore, tion identification requirements pub-
piers, wharves, or floating docks into lished in 49 CFR part 178, Shipping
the fuel tanks of self-propelled craft, Container Specifications.
212
ER26MR12.129</GPH>
(3) Definition. As used in this section, (f) Requirements for appliances. (1) LP-
Containers—All vessels, such as tanks, Gas consuming appliances shall be ap-
cylinders, or drums, used for transpor- proved types.
tation or storing liquefied petroleum (2) Any appliance that was originally
gases. manufactured for operation with a gas-
(b) Welding on LP-Gas containers. eous fuel other than LP-Gas, and is in
Welding is prohibited on containers. good condition, may be used with LP-
(c) Container valves and container ac- Gas only after it is properly converted,
cessories. (1) Valves, fittings, and acces- adapted, and tested for performance
sories connected directly to the con- with LP-Gas before the appliance is
tainer, including primary shut off placed in use.
valves, shall have a rated working pres- (g) Containers and regulating equip-
sure of at least 250 p.s.i.g. and shall be ment installed outside of buildings or
of material and design suitable for LP- structures. Containers shall be upright
Gas service. upon firm foundations or otherwise
(2) Connections to containers, except firmly secured. The possible effect on
safety relief connections, liquid level the outlet piping of settling shall be
gauging devices, and plugged openings, guarded against by a flexible connec-
shall have shutoff valves located as tion or special fitting.
(h) Containers and equipment used in-
close to the container as practicable.
side of buildings or structures. (1) When
(d) Safety devices. (1) Every container
operational requirements make port-
and every vaporizer shall be provided
able use of containers necessary, and
with one or more approved safety relief their location outside of buildings or
valves or devices. These valves shall be structures is impracticable, containers
arranged to afford free vent to the and equipment shall be permitted to be
outer air with discharge not less than 5 used inside of buildings or structures in
feet horizontally away from any open- accordance with paragraphs (h)(2)
ing into a building which is below such through (11) of this section.
discharge. (2) Containers in use means connected
(2) Shutoff valves shall not be infor use.
stalled between the safety relief device (3) Systems utilizing containers hav-
and the container, or the equipment or ing a water capacity greater than 21⁄2
piping to which the safety relief device pounds (nominal 1 pound LP-Gas ca-
is connected, except that a shutoff pacity) shall be equipped with excess
valve may be used where the arrange- flow valves. Such excess flow valves
ment of this valve is such that full re- shall be either integral with the con-
quired capacity flow through the safety tainer valves or in the connections to
relief device is always afforded. the container valve outlets.
(3) Container safety relief devices and (4) Regulators shall be either directly
regulator relief vents shall be located connected to the container valves or to
not less than 5 feet in any direction manifolds connected to the container
from air openings into sealed combus- valves. The regulator shall be suitable
tion system appliances or mechanical for use with LP-Gas. Manifolds and fit-
ventilation air intakes. tings connecting containers to pressure
(e) Dispensing. (1) Filling of fuel con- regulator inlets shall be designed for at
tainers for trucks or motor vehicles least 250 p.s.i.g. service pressure.
from bulk storage containers shall be (5) Valves on containers having water
performed not less than 10 feet from capacity greater than 50 pounds (nomi-
the nearest masonry-walled building, nal 20 pounds LP-Gas capacity) shall be
or not less than 25 feet from the near- protected from damage while in use or
est building or other construction and, storage.
in any event, not less than 25 feet from (6) Aluminum piping or tubing shall
any building opening. not be used.
(2) Filling of portable containers or (7) Hose shall be designed for a work-
containers mounted on skids from storing pressure of at least 250 p.s.i.g. De-
age containers shall be performed not sign, construction, and performance of
less than 50 feet from the nearest build- hose, and hose connections shall have
ing. their suitability determined by listing
213
by a nationally recognized testing (14) If two or more heater-container
agency. The hose length shall be as units, of either the integral or non-
short as practicable. Hoses shall be integral type, are located in an
long enough to permit compliance with unpartitioned area on the same floor,
spacing provisions of paragraphs (h)(1) the container or containers of each
through (13) of this section, without unit shall be separated from the con-
kinking or straining, or causing hose tainer or containers of any other unit
to be so close to a burner as to be dam- by at least 20 feet.
aged by heat. (15) When heaters are connected to
(8) Portable heaters, including sala- containers for use in an unpartitioned
manders, shall be equipped with an ap- area on the same floor, the total water
proved automatic device to shut off the capacity of containers, manifolded to-
flow of gas to the main burner, and gether for connection to a heater or
pilot if used, in the event of flame fail- heaters, shall not be greater than 735
ure. Such heaters, having inputs above
pounds (nominal 300 pounds LP-Gas ca-
50,000 B.t.u. per hour, shall be equipped
pacity). Such manifolds shall be sepa-
with either a pilot, which must be
rated by at least 20 feet.
lighted and proved before the main
burner can be turned on, or an elec- (16) Storage of containers awaiting
trical ignition system. use shall be in accordance with para-
graphs (j) and (k) of this section.
NOTE: The provisions of this subparagraph (i) Multiple container systems. (1)
do not apply to portable heaters under 7,500
B.t.u. per hour input when used with con-
Valves in the assembly of multiple con-
tainers having a maximum water capacity of tainer systems shall be arranged so
21⁄2 pounds. that replacement of containers can be
made without shutting off the flow of
(9) Container valves, connectors, reg- gas in the system. This provision is not
ulators, manifolds, piping, and tubing
to be construed as requiring an auto-
shall not be used as structural supports
matic changeover device.
for heaters.
(10) Containers, regulating equip- (2) Heaters shall be equipped with an
ment, manifolds, pipe, tubing, and hose approved regulator in the supply line
shall be located to minimize exposure between the fuel cylinder and the heat-
to high temperatures or physical dam- er unit. Cylinder connectors shall be
age. provided with an excess flow valve to
(11) Containers having a water capac- minimize the flow of gas in the event
ity greater than 21⁄2 pounds (nominal 1 the fuel line becomes ruptured.
pound LP-Gas capacity) connected for (3) Regulators and low-pressure relief
use shall stand on a firm and substan- devices shall be rigidly attached to the
tially level surface and, when nec- cylinder valves, clyinders, supporting
essary, shall be secured in an upright standards, the building walls, or other-
position. wise rigidly secured, and shall be so in-
(12) The maximum water capacity of stalled or protected from the elements.
individual containers shall be 245 (j) Storage of LPG containers. Storage
pounds (nominal 100 pounds LP-Gas ca- of LPG within buildings is prohibited.
pacity). (k) Storage outside of buildings. (1)
(13) For temporary heating, heaters Storage outside of buildings, for con-
(other than integral heater-container tainers awaiting use, shall be located
units) shall be located at least 6 feet from the nearest building or group of
from any LP-Gas container. This shall buildings, in accordance with the fol-
not prohibit the use of heaters specifi- lowing:
cally designed for attachment to the
container or to a supporting standard, TABLE F–3
provided they are designed and in-
Distance
stalled so as to prevent direct or radi- Quantity of LP-Gas stored
(feet)
ant heat application from the heater
onto the containers. Blower and radi- 500 lbs. or less .................................................... 0
ant type heaters shall not be directed 501 to 6,000 lbs ................................................... 10
6,001 to 10,000 lbs .............................................. 20
toward any LP-Gas container within 20
Over 10,000 lbs ................................................... 25
feet.
214
(2) Containers shall be in a suitable dles but shall have adequate ferrous
ventilated enclosure or otherwise pro- metal supports.
tected against tampering. (ii) They shall not be located with
(l) Fire protection. Storage locations the outside bottom of the container
shall be provided with at least one ap- shell more than 5 feet (1.52 m) above
proved portable fire extinguisher hav- the surface of the ground unless fire-re-
ing a rating of not less than 20–B:C. sisting supports are provided.
(m) Systems utilizing containers other (iii) The bottom of the skids shall not
than DOT containers—(1) Application. be less than 2 inches (5.08 cm) or more
This paragraph applies specifically to than 12 inches (30.48 cm) below the out-
systems utilizing storage containers side bottom of the container shell.
other than those constructed in accord- (iv) Flanges, nozzles, valves, fittings,
ance with DOT specifications. Para- and the like, having communication
graph (b) of this section applies to this with the interior of the container, shall
paragraph unless otherwise noted in be protected against physical damage.
paragraph (b) of this section. (v) When not permanently located on
(2) Design pressure and classification of fire-resisting foundations, piping con-
storage containers. Storage containers nections shall be sufficiently flexible
shall be designed and classified in ac- to minimize the possibility of breakage
cordance with Table F–31. or leakage of connections if the con-
tainer settles, moves, or is otherwise
TABLE F–31 displaced.
(vi) Skids, or lugs for attachment of
Minimum design pressure of con- skids, shall be secured to the container
tainer, lb. per sq. in. gage
For gases in accordance with the code or rules
with vapor 1949 edition of ASME under which the container is designed
press. Not 1949 and Code (Par. U–200,
Con-
to exceed earlier edi- U–201); 1950, 1952, and built (with a minimum factor of
tainer
type lb. per sq. tions of 1956, 1959, 1962, safety of four) to withstand loading in
in. gage at ASME 1965, and 1968 (Divi-
100 °F. Code (Par. sion 1) editions of any direction equal to four times the
(37.8 °C.) U–68, U– ASME Code; All edi- weight of the container and attach-
69) tions of API-ASME
Code 3 ments when filled to the maximum per-
missible loaded weight.
1 80 1 80 1 80 1 100
(4) Field welding where necessary
100 100 100 125
125 125 125 156
shall be made only on saddle plates or
150 150 150 187 brackets which were applied by the
175 175 175 219 manufacturer of the tank.
2 200 215 200 250 (n) When LP-Gas and one or more
1 New storage containers of the 80 type have not been au- other gases are stored or used in the
thorized since Dec. 31, 1947. same area, the containers shall be
2 Container type may be increased by increments of 25.
The minimum design pressure of containers shall be 100% of marked to identify their content.
the container type designation when constructed under 1949 Marking shall be in compliance with
or earlier editions of the ASME Code (Par. U–68 and U–69).
The minimum design pressure of containers shall be 125% of American National Standard Z48.1–
the container type designation when constructed under: (1) 1954, ‘‘Method of Marking Portable
the 1949 ASME Code (Par. U–200 and U–201), (2) 1950,
1952, 1956, 1959, 1962, 1965, and 1968 (Division 1) editions Compressed Gas Containers To Identify
of the ASME Code, and (3) all editions of the API-ASME the Material Contained.’’
Code.
3 Construction of containers under the API-ASME Code is (o) Damage from vehicles. When dam-
not authorized after July 1, 1961. age to LP-Gas systems from vehicular
(3) Containers with foundations at- traffic is a possibility, precautions
tached (portable or semiportable b con- against such damage shall be taken.
tainers with suitable steel ‘‘runners’’ [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
or ‘‘skids’’ and popularly known in the 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35170, June 30, 1993]
industry as ‘‘skid tanks’’) shall be de-
signed, installed, and used in accord- § 1926.154 Temporary heating devices.
ance with these rules subject to the fol- (a) Ventilation. (1) Fresh air shall be
lowing provisions: supplied in sufficient quantities to
(i) If they are to be used at a given maintain the health and safety of
general location for a temporary period workmen. Where natural means of
not to exceed 6 months they need not fresh air supply is inadequate, mechan-
have fire-resisting foundations or sad- ical ventilation shall be provided.
215
(2) When heaters are used in confined (2) Heaters designed for barometric
spaces, special care shall be taken to or gravity oil feed shall be used only
provide sufficient ventilation in order with the integral tanks.
to ensure proper combustion, maintain (3) [Reserved]
the health and safety of workmen, and (4) Heaters specifically designed and
limit temperature rise in the area. approved for use with separate supply
(b) Clearance and mounting. (1) Tem- tanks may be directly connected for
porary heating devices shall be in- gravity feed, or an automatic pump,
stalled to provide clearance to combus- from a supply tank.
tible material not less than the § 1926.155 Definitions applicable to
amount shown in Table F–4. this subpart.
(2) Temporary heating devices, which
(a) Approved, for the purpose of this
are listed for installation with lesser
subpart, means equipment that has
clearances than specified in Table F–4,
been listed or approved by a nationally
may be installed in accordance with recognized testing laboratory such as
their approval. Factory Mutual Engineering Corp., or
Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc., or
TABLE F–4
Federal agencies such as Bureau of
Minimum clearance, (inches) Mines, or U.S. Coast Guard, which
issue approvals for such equipment.
Heating appliances Chimney
Sides Rear con- (b) Closed container means a container
nector so sealed by means of a lid or other de-
Room heater, circulating
vice that neither liquid nor vapor will
type .................................. 12 12 18 escape from it at ordinary tempera-
Room heater, radiant type .. 36 36 18 tures.
(c) [Reserved]
(3) Heaters not suitable for use on (d) Combustion means any chemical
wood floors shall not be set directly process that involves oxidation suffi-
upon them or other combustible mate- cient to produce light or heat.
rials. When such heaters are used, they (e) Fire brigade means an organized
shall rest on suitable heat insulating group of employees that are knowl-
material or at least 1-inch concrete, or edgeable, trained, and skilled in the
equivalent. The insulating material safe evacuation of employees during
shall extend beyond the heater 2 feet or emergency situations and in assisting
more in all directions. in fire fighting operations.
(4) Heaters used in the vicinity of (f) Fire resistance means so resistant
combustible tarpaulins, canvas, or to fire that, for specified time and
similar coverings shall be located at under conditions of a standard heat in-
least 10 feet from the coverings. The tensity, it will not fail structurally and
coverings shall be securely fastened to will not permit the side away from the
prevent ignition or upsetting of the fire to become hotter than a specified
heater due to wind action on the cov- temperature. For purposes of this part,
fire resistance shall be determined by
ering or other material.
the Standard Methods of Fire Tests of
(c) Stability. Heaters, when in use,
Building Construction and Materials,
shall be set horizontally level, unless NFPA 251–1969.
otherwise permitted by the manufac- (g) Flammable means capable of being
turer’s markings. easily ignited, burning intensely, or
(d) Solid fuel salamanders. Solid fuel having a rapid rate of flame spread.
salamanders are prohibited in buildings (h) Flammable liquid means any liquid
and on scaffolds. having a vapor pressure not exceeding
(e) Oil-fired heaters. (1) Flammable 40 pounds per square inch (absolute) at
liquid-fired heaters shall be equipped 100 °F (37.8 °C) and having a flashpoint
with a primary safety control to stop at or below 199.4 °F (93 °C). Flammable
the flow of fuel in the event of flame liquids are divided into four categories
failure. Barometric or gravity oil feed as follows:
shall not be considered a primary safe- (1) Category 1 shall include liquids
ty control. having flashpoints below 73.4 °F (23 °C)
216
and having a boiling point at or below inch (absolute), exerted by a volatile
95 °F (35 °C). liquid as determined by the ‘‘Standard
(2) Category 2 shall include liquids Method of Test for Vapor Pressure of
having flashpoints below 73.4 °F (23 °C) Petroleum Products (Reid Method).’’
and having a boiling point above 95 °F (ASTM D–323–58).
(35 °C).
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
(3) Category 3 shall include liquids 1979, as amended at 77 FR 17894, Mar. 26, 2012]
having flashpoints at or above 73.4 °F
(23 °C) and at or below 140 °F (60 °C).
(4) Category 4 shall include liquids Subpart G—Signs, Signals, and
having flashpoints above 140 °F (60 °C) Barricades
and at or below 199.4 °F (93 °C).
(i) Flash point of the liquid means the AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours
temperature at which it gives off vapor and Safety Standards Act (Construction
sufficient to form an ignitable mixture Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); sections 4, 6, 8,
with the air near the surface of the liq- Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970
uid or within the vessel used as deter- (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s
Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR
mined by appropriate test procedure
25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), or 3–2000 (65 FR
and apparatus as specified below. 50017) as applicable, 29 CFR part 1911.
(1) The flashpoint of liquids having a
viscosity less than 45 Saybolt Uni- EFFECTIVE DATE NOTE: At 78 FR 35567, June
versal Second(s) at 100 °F (37.8 °C) and 13, 2013, the authority citation for subpart G
was revised, effective Sept. 11, 2013. For the
a flashpoint below 175 °F (79.4 °C) shall convenience of the user, the revised text is
be determined in accordance with the set forth as follows:
Standard Method of Test for Flash AUTHORITY: 40 U.S.C. 333; 29 U.S.C. 653, 655,
Point by the Tag Closed Tester, ASTM 657; Secretary of Labor’s Order No. 12–71 (36
D–56–69 (incorporated by reference; See FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736),
§ 1926.6), or an equivalent method as de- 3–2000 (65 FR 50017), 5–2002 (67 FR 65008), 5–
fined by § 1910.1200 appendix B. 2007 (72 FR 31159), 4–2010 (75 FR 55355), or 1–
(2) The flashpoints of liquids having a 2012 (77 FR 3912), as applicable; and 29 CFR
part 1911.
viscosity of 45 Saybolt Universal Sec-
ond(s) or more at 175 °F (79.4 °C) or § 1926.200 Accident prevention signs
higher shall be determined in accord- and tags.
ance with the Standard Method of Test
for Flash Point by the Pensky Martens (a) General. Signs and symbols re-
Closed Tester, ASTM D–93–69 (incor- quired by this subpart shall be visible
porated by reference; See § 1926.6), or an at all times when work is being per-
equivalent method as defined by formed, and shall be removed or cov-
§ 1910.1200 appendix B. ered promptly when the hazards no
(j) Liquefied petroleum gases, LPG and longer exist.
LP Gas mean and include any material (b) Danger signs. (1) Danger signs (see
which is composed predominantly of Figure G–1) shall be used only where an
any of the following hydrocarbons, or immediate hazard exists.
mixtures of them, such as propane, pro- (2) Danger signs shall have red as the
pylene, butane (normal butane or iso- predominating color for the upper
butane), and butylenes. panel; black outline on the borders;
(k) Portable tank means a closed con- and a white lower panel for additional
tainer having a liquid capacity more sign wording.
than 60 U.S. gallons, and not intended (c) Caution signs. (1) Caution signs
for fixed installation. (see Figure G–2) shall be used only to
(l) Safety can means an approved warn against potential hazards or to
closed container, of not more than 5 caution against unsafe practices.
gallons capacity, having a flash-arrest- (2) Caution signs shall have yellow as
ing screen, spring-closing lid and spout the predominating color; black upper
cover and so designed that it will safe- panel and borders: yellow lettering of
ly relieve internal pressure when sub- ‘‘caution’’ on the black panel; and the
jected to fire exposure. lower yellow panel for additional sign
(m) Vapor pressure means the pres- wording. Black lettering shall be used
sure, measured in pounds per square for additional wording.
217
vision 3, September 3, 1993, FHWA-SA–
94–027 or Part VI of the Manual on Uni-
form Traffic Control Devices, Millen-
nium Edition, December 2000, FHWA,
which are incorporated by reference.
The Director of the Federal Register
approves this incorporation by ref-
erence in accordance with 5 U.S.C.
552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. You may ob-
tain a copy of the Millennium Edition
from the following organizations:
American Traffic Safety Services Asso-
ciation, 15 Riverside Parkway, Suite
100, Fredericksburg, VA 22406–1022;
Telephone: 1–800–231–3475; FAX: (540)
368–1722; www.atssa.com; Institute of
Transportation Engineers, 1099 14th
(3) Standard color of the background Street, NW., Suite 300 West, Wash-
shall be yellow; and the panel, black ington, DC 20005–3438; FAX: (202) 289–
with yellow letters. Any letters used 7722; www.ite.org; and American Asso-
against the yellow background shall be ciation of State Highway and Trans-
black. The colors shall be those of portation Officials; www.aashto.org;
opaque glossy samples as specified in Telephone: 1–800–231–3475; FAX: 1–800–
Table 1 of American National Standard 525–5562. Electronic copies of the
Z53.1–1967. MUTCD 2000 are available for
(d) Exit signs. Exit signs, when re- downloading at http://
quired, shall be lettered in legible red mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov/kno-millennium.
letters, not less than 6 inches high, on Electronic copies of the 1988 Edition
a white field and the principal stroke MUTCD, Revision 3, are available for
of the letters shall be at least three- downloading at http://www.osha.gov/doc/
fourths inch in width. highwaylworkzones. Both documents
(e) Safety instruction signs. Safety in- are available for inspection at the
struction signs, when used, shall be OSHA Docket Office, Room N2625, U.S.
white with green upper panel with Department of Labor, 200 Constitution
white letters to convey the principal Avenue, NW., Washington, DC 20210 or
message. Any additional wording on at the National Archives and Records
the sign shall be black letters on the Administration (NARA). For informa-
white background. tion on the availability of this mate-
(f) Directional signs. Directional signs, rial at NARA, call 202–741–6030, or go
other than automotive traffic signs to: http://www.archives.gov/
specified in paragraph (g) of this sec- federallregister/
tion, shall be white with a black panel codeloflfederallregulations/
and a white directional symbol. Any ibrllocations.html.
additional wording on the sign shall be (h) Accident prevention tags. (1) Acci-
black letters on the white background. dent prevention tags shall be used as a
(g) Traffic signs. (1) Construction temporary means of warning employ-
areas shall be posted with legible traf- ees of an existing hazard, such as defec-
fic signs at points of hazard. tive tools, equipment, etc. They shall
(2) All traffic control signs or devices not be used in place of, or as a sub-
used for protection of construction stitute for, accident prevention signs.
workers shall conform to Part VI of (2) Specifications for accident pre-
the Manual of Uniform Traffic Control vention tags similar to those in Table
Devices (AMUTCD’’), 1988 Edition, Re- G–1 shall apply.
218
EC30OC91.013</GPH>
(i) Additional rules. American Na- rules not specifically prescribed in this
tional Standards Institute (ANSI) subpart.
Z35.1–1968, Specifications for Accident
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
Prevention Signs, and Z35.2–1968, Speci- 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35173, June 30, 1993;
fications for Accident Prevention Tags, 67 FR 57736, Sept. 12, 2002; 69 FR 18803, Apr.
contain rules which are additional to 9, 2004]
the rules prescribed in this section.
EFFECTIVE DATE NOTE: At 78 FR 35567, June
The employer shall comply with ANSI 13, 2013, § 1926.200 was amended by revising
Z35.1–1968 and Z35.2–1968 with respect to paragraphs (b)(1), (c)(1), (c)(3), (g)(2), (h)(2),
and (i), effective Sept. 11, 2013. For the con-
venience of the user, the revised text is set
forth as follows:
219
EC30OC91.014</GPH>
§ 1926.200 Accident prevention signs and Edition), which are incorporated by
tags. reference in § 1926.200(g)(2).
(b) Crane and hoist signals. Regula-
* * * * * tions for crane and hoist signaling will
(b) Danger signs. (1) Danger signs shall be be found in applicable American Na-
used only where an immediate hazard exists, tional Standards Institute standards.
and shall follow the specifications provided
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
in Figure 1 of ANSI Z35.1–1968 or in Figure 2
1979, as amended at 67 FR 57736, Sept. 12,
of ANSI Z535.2–2011, incorporated by ref-
2002]
erence in § 1926.6.
EFFECTIVE DATE NOTE: At 78 FR 35567, June
* * * * * 13, 2013, § 1926.201 was amended by revising
paragraph (a), effective Sept. 11, 2013. For the
(c) Caution signs. (1) Caution signs shall be convenience of the user, the revised text is
used only to warn against potential hazards set forth as follows:
or to caution against unsafe practices, and
shall follow the specifications provided in § 1926.201 Signaling.
Figure 4 of ANSI Z35.1–1968 or in Figure 2 of (a) Flaggers. Signaling by flaggers and the
ANSI Z535.2–2011, incorporated by reference use of flaggers, including warning garments
for the sections specified in § 1926.6. worn by flaggers, shall conform to Part VI of
the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control De-
* * * * * vices (1988 Edition, Revision 3, or the Millen-
nium Edition), incorporated by reference in
(3) The standard color of the background § 1926.6.
shall be yellow; and the panel, black with
yellow letters. Any letters used against the
yellow background shall be black. The colors * * * * *
shall be those of opaque glossy samples as
specified in Table 1 of ANSI Z53.1–1967 or in § 1926.202 Barricades.
Table 1 of ANSI Z535.1–2006(R2011), incor- Barricades for protection of employ-
porated by reference in § 1926.6.
ees shall conform to Part VI of the
Manual on Uniform Traffic Control De-
* * * * * vices (1988 Edition, Revision 3 or Mil-
(g) * * * lennium Edition), which are incor-
(2) All traffic control signs or devices used porated by reference in § 1926.200(g)(2).
for protection of construction workers shall
[67 FR 57736, Sept. 12, 2002]
conform to Part VI of the MUTCD, 1988 Edi-
tion, Revision 3, or Part VI of the MUTCD, EFFECTIVE DATE NOTE: At 78 FR 35567, June
Millennium Edition, incorporated by ref- 13, 2013, § 1926.202 was revised, effective Sept.
erence in § 1926.6. 11, 2013. For the convenience of the user, the
(h) * * * revised text is set forth as follows:
(2) For accident prevention tags, employers
shall follow specifications that are similar to § 1926.202 Barricades.
those in Figures 1 to 4 of ANSI Z35.2–1968 or Barricades for protection of employees
Figures 1 to 8 of ANSI Z535.5–2011, incor- shall conform to Part VI of the Manual on
porated by reference in § 1926.6. Uniform Traffic Control Devices (1988 Edi-
(i) Additional rules. ANSI Z35.1–1968, ANSI tion, Revision 3, or the Millennium Edition),
Z535.2–2011, ANSI Z35.2–1968, and ANSI incorporated by reference in § 1926.6.
Z535.5–2011, incorporated by reference in
§ 1926.6, contain rules in addition to those § 1926.203 Definitions applicable to
specifically prescribed in this subpart. The this subpart.
employer shall comply with ANSI Z35.1–1968
or ANSI Z535.2–2011, and ANSI Z35.2–1968 or (a) Barricade means an obstruction to
Z535.5–2011, with respect to such additional deter the passage of persons or vehi-
rules. cles.
(b) Signs are the warnings of hazard,
§ 1926.201 Signaling. temporarily or permanently affixed or
(a) Flaggers. Signaling by flaggers placed, at locations where hazards
and the use of flaggers, including warn- exist.
ing garments worn by flaggers shall (c) Signals are moving signs, provided
conform to Part VI of the Manual on by workers, such as flaggers, or by de-
Uniform Traffic Control Devices, (1988 vices, such as flashing lights, to warn
Edition, Revision 3 or the Millennium of possible or existing hazards.
220
(d) Tags are temporary signs, usually (5) Materials shall not be stored on
attached to a piece of equipment or scaffolds or runways in excess of sup-
part of a structure, to warn of existing plies needed for immediate operations.
or immediate hazards. (6) Brick stacks shall not be more
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, than 7 feet in height. When a loose
1979, as amended at 67 FR 57736, Sept. 12, brick stack reaches a height of 4 feet,
2002] it shall be tapered back 2 inches in
every foot of height above the 4-foot
Subpart H—Materials Handling, level.
Storage, Use, and Disposal (7) When masonry blocks are stacked
higher than 6 feet, the stack shall be
AUTHORITY: 40 U.S.C. 3701; 29 U.S.C. 653, 655, tapered back one-half block per tier
657; and Secretary of Labor’s Order No. 12–71 above the 6-foot level.
(36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR (8) Lumber:
35736), 1–90 (55 FR 9033), 4–2010 (75 FR 55355),
(i) Used lumber shall have all nails
or 1–2012 (77 FR 3912), as applicable. Section
1926.250 also issued under 29 CFR part 1911. withdrawn before stacking.
(ii) Lumber shall be stacked on level
§ 1926.250 General requirements for and solidly supported sills.
storage. (iii) Lumber shall be so stacked as to
(a) General. (1) All materials stored in be stable and self-supporting.
tiers shall be stacked, racked, blocked, (iv) Lumber piles shall not exceed 20
interlocked, or otherwise secured to feet in height provided that lumber to
prevent sliding, falling or collapse. be handled manually shall not be
(2) Maximum safe load limits of stacked more than 16 feet high.
floors within buildings and structures, (9) Structural steel, poles, pipe, bar
in pounds per square foot, shall be con- stock, and other cylindrical materials,
spicuously posted in all storage areas, unless racked, shall be stacked and
except for floor or slab on grade. Max-
blocked so as to prevent spreading or
imum safe loads shall not be exceeded.
tilting.
(3) Aisles and passageways shall be
kept clear to provide for the free and (c) Housekeeping. Storage areas shall
safe movement of material handling be kept free from accumulation of ma-
equipment or employees. Such areas terials that constitute hazards from
shall be kept in good repair. tripping, fire, explosion, or pest harbor-
(4) When a difference in road or work- age. Vegetation control will be exer-
ing levels exist, means such as ramps, cised when necessary.
blocking, or grading shall be used to (d) Dockboards (bridge plates). (1) Port-
ensure the safe movement of vehicles able and powered dockboards shall be
between the two levels. strong enough to carry the load im-
(b) Material storage. (1) Material posed on them.
stored inside buildings under construc- (2) Portable dockboards shall be se-
tion shall not be placed within 6 feet of cured in position, either by being an-
any hoistway or inside floor openings, chored or equipped with devices which
nor within 10 feet of an exterior wall will prevent their slipping.
which does not extend above the top of (3) Handholds, or other effective
the material stored.
means, shall be provided on portable
(2) Each employee required to work
dockboards to permit safe handling.
on stored material in silos, hoppers,
tanks, and similar storage areas shall (4) Positive protection shall be pro-
be equipped with personal fall arrest vided to prevent railroad cars from
equipment meeting the requirements being moved while dockboards or
of subpart M of this part. bridge plates are in position.
(3) Noncompatible materials shall be [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
segregated in storage. 1979, as amended at 49 FR 18295, Apr. 30, 1984;
(4) Bagged materials shall be stacked 54 FR 24334, June 7, 1989; 58 FR 35173, June 30,
by stepping back the layers and cross- 1993; 59 FR 40729, Aug. 9, 1994; 61 FR 5510, Feb.
keying the bags at least every 10 bags 13, 1996]
high.
221
§ 1926.251 Rigging equipment for ma- stating size, grade, rated capacity, and
terial handling. sling manufacturer.
(a) General. (1) Rigging equipment for (2) Hooks, rings, oblong links, pear-
material handling shall be inspected shaped links, welded or mechanical
prior to use on each shift and as nec- coupling links, or other attachments,
essary during its use to ensure that it when used with alloy steel chains, shall
is safe. Defective rigging equipment have a rated capacity at least equal to
shall be removed from service. that of the chain.
(2) Employers must ensure that rig- (3) Job or shop hooks and links, or
ging equipment: makeshift fasteners, formed from
(i) Has permanently affixed and leg- bolts, rods, etc., or other such attach-
ible identification markings as pre- ments, shall not be used.
scribed by the manufacturer that indi- (4) Employers must not use alloy
cate the recommended safe working steel-chain slings with loads in excess
load; of the rated capacities (i.e., working
(ii) Not be loaded in excess of its rec- load limits) indicated on the sling by
ommended safe working load as pre- permanently affixed and legible identi-
scribed on the identification markings fication markings prescribed by the
by the manufacturer; and manufacturer.
(iii) Not be used without affixed, leg- (5) Whenever wear at any point of
ible identification markings, required any chain link exceeds that shown in
by paragraph (a)(2)(i) of this section. Table H–1, the assembly shall be re-
(3) Rigging equipment, when not in moved from service.
use, shall be removed from the imme- (6) Inspections. (i) In addition to the
diate work area so as not to present a inspection required by other para-
hazard to employees. graphs of this section, a thorough peri-
(4) Special custom design grabs, odic inspection of alloy steel chain
hooks, clamps, or other lifting acces- slings in use shall be made on a regular
sories, for such units as modular pan- basis, to be determined on the basis of
els, prefabricated structures and simi- (A) frequency of sling use; (B) severity
lar materials, shall be marked to indi- of service conditions; (C) nature of lifts
cate the safe working loads and shall being made; and (D) experience gained
be proof-tested prior to use to 125 per- on the service life of slings used in
cent of their rated load. similar circumstances. Such inspec-
(5) Scope. This section applies to tions shall in no event be at intervals
slings used in conjunction with other greater than once every 12 months.
material handling equipment for the (ii) The employer shall make and
movement of material by hoisting, in maintain a record of the most recent
employments covered by this part. The month in which each alloy steel chain
types of slings covered are those made sling was thoroughly inspected, and
from alloy steel chain, wire rope, metal shall make such record available for
mesh, natural or synthetic fiber rope examination.
(conventional three strand construc- (c) Wire rope. (1) Employers must not
tion), and synthetic web (nylon, poly- use improved plow-steel wire rope and
ester, and polypropylene). wire-rope slings with loads in excess of
(6) Inspections. Each day before being the rated capacities (i.e., working load
used, the sling and all fastenings and limits) indicated on the sling by per-
attachments shall be inspected for manently affixed and legible identifica-
damage or defects by a competent per- tion markings prescribed by the manu-
son designated by the employer. Addi- facturer.
tional inspections shall be performed (2) Protruding ends of strands in
during sling use, where service condi- splices on slings and bridles shall be
tions warrant. Damaged or defective covered or blunted.
slings shall be immediately removed (3) Wire rope shall not be secured by
from service. knots, except on haul back lines on
(b) Alloy steel chains. (1) Welded alloy scrapers.
steel chain slings shall have perma- (4) The following limitations shall
nently affixed durable identification apply to the use of wire rope:
222
(i) An eye splice made in any wire the component rope diameter between
rope shall have not less than three full the loops or end fittings.
tucks. However, this requirement shall (iii) Cable laid grommets, strand laid
not operate to preclude the use of an- grommets and endless slings shall have
other form of splice or connection a minimum circumferential length of
which can be shown to be as efficient 96 times their body diameter.
and which is not otherwise prohibited. (14) Safe operating temperatures. Fiber
(ii) Except for eye splices in the ends core wire rope slings of all grades shall
of wires and for endless rope slings, be permanently removed from service
each wire rope used in hoisting or low- if they are exposed to temperatures in
ering, or in pulling loads, shall consist excess of 200 °F (93.33 °C). When
of one continuous piece without knot nonfiber core wire rope slings of any
or splice. grade are used at temperatures above
(iii) Eyes in wire rope bridles, slings, 400 °F (204.44 °C) or below minus 60 °F
or bull wires shall not be formed by (15.55 °C), recommendations of the sling
wire rope clips or knots. manufacturer regarding use at that
(iv) Wire rope shall not be used if, in temperature shall be followed.
any length of eight diameters, the (15) End attachments. (i) Welding of
total number of visible broken wires end attachments, except covers to
exceeds 10 percent of the total number thimbles, shall be performed prior to
of wires, or if the rope shows other the assembly of the sling.
signs of excessive wear, corrosion, or (ii) All welded end attachments shall
defect. not be used unless proof tested by the
(5) When U-bolt wire rope clips are manufacturer or equivalent entity at
used to form eyes, Table H–2 shall be twice their rated capacity prior to ini-
used to determine the number and tial use. The employer shall retain a
spacing of clips. certificate of the proof test, and make
(i) When used for eye splices, the U- it available for examination.
bolt shall be applied so that the ‘‘U’’ (16) Wire rope slings shall have per-
section is in contact with the dead end manently affixed, legible identification
of the rope. markings stating size, rated capacity
(i1) [Reserved] for the type(s) of hitch(es) used and the
angle upon which it is based, and the
(6) Slings shall not be shortened with
number of legs if more than one.
knots or bolts or other makeshift de-
(d) Natural rope, and synthetic fiber. (1)
vices.
Employers must not use natural- and
(7) Sling legs shall not be kinked.
synthetic-fiber rope slings with loads
(8) Slings used in a basket hitch shall in excess of the rated capacities (i.e.,
have the loads balanced to prevent slip- working load limits) indicated on the
page. sling by permanently affixed and leg-
(9) Slings shall be padded or pro- ible identification markings prescribed
tected from the sharp edges of their by the manufacturer.
loads. (2) All splices in rope slings provided
(10) Hands or fingers shall not be by the employer shall be made in ac-
placed between the sling and its load cordance with fiber rope manufacturers
while the sling is being tightened recommendations.
around the load. (i) In manila rope, eye splices shall
(11) Shock loading is prohibited. contain at least three full tucks, and
(12) A sling shall not be pulled from short splices shall contain at least six
under a load when the load is resting full tucks (three on each side of the
on the sling. centerline of the splice).
(13) Minimum sling lengths. (i) Cable (ii) In layed synthetic fiber rope, eye
laid and 6 × 19 and 6 × 37 slings shall splices shall contain at least four full
have a minimum clear length of wire tucks, and short splices shall contain
rope 10 times the component rope di- at least eight full tucks (four on each
ameter between splices, sleeves or end side of the centerline of the splice).
fittings. (iii) Strand end tails shall not be
(ii) Braided slings shall have a min- trimmed short (flush with the surface
imum clear length of wire rope 40 times of the rope) immediately adjacent to
223
the full tucks. This precaution applies project at least 6 inches (15.24 cm) be-
to both eye and short splices and all yond the last full tuck. Where a pro-
types of fiber rope. For fiber ropes jecting tail interferes with the use of
under 1-inch diameter, the tails shall the sling, the tail shall be tapered and
project at least six rope diameters be- spliced into the body of the rope using
yond the last full tuck. For fiber ropes at least two additional tucks (which
1-inch diameter and larger, the tails will require a tail length of approxi-
shall project at least 6 inches beyond mately six rope diameters beyond the
the last full tuck. In applications last full tuck).
where the projecting tails may be ob- (iv) Fiber rope slings shall have a
jectionable, the tails shall be tapered minimum clear length of rope between
and spliced into the body of the rope eye splices equal to 10 times the rope
using at least two additional tucks diameter.
(which will require a tail length of ap- (v) Knots shall not be used in lieu of
proximately six rope diameters beyond splices.
the last full tuck). (vi) Clamps not designed specifically
(iv) For all eye splices, the eye shall for fiber ropes shall not be used for
be sufficiently large to provide an in- splicing.
cluded angle of not greater than 60° at (vii) For all eye splices, the eye shall
the splice when the eye is placed over be of such size to provide an included
the load or support. angle of not greater than 60 degrees at
(v) Knots shall not be used in lieu of the splice when the eye is placed over
splices. the load or support.
(3) Safe operating temperatures. Nat- (5) End attachments. Fiber rope slings
ural and synthetic fiber rope slings, ex- shall not be used if end attachments in
cept for wet frozen slings, may be used contact with the rope have sharp edges
in a temperature range from minus 20 or projections.
°F (¥28.88 °C) to plus 180 °F (82.2 °C) (6) Removal from service. Natural and
without decreasing the working load synthetic fiber rope slings shall be im-
limit. For operations outside this tem- mediately removed from service if any
perature range and for wet frozen of the following conditions are present:
slings, the sling manufacturer’s rec- (i) Abnormal wear.
ommendations shall be followed. (ii) Powdered fiber between strands.
(4) Splicing. Spliced fiber rope slings
(iii) Broken or cut fibers.
shall not be used unless they have been
(iv) Variations in the size or round-
spliced in accordance with the fol-
ness of strands.
lowing minimum requirements and in
accordance with any additional rec- (v) Discoloration or rotting.
ommendations of the manufacturer: (vi) Distortion of hardware in the
(i) In manila rope, eye splices shall sling.
consist of at least three full tucks, and (7) Employers must use natural- and
short splices shall consist of at least synthetic-fiber rope slings that have
six full tucks, three on each side of the permanently affixed and legible identi-
splice center line. fication markings that state the rated
(ii) In synthetic fiber rope, eye capacity for the type(s) of hitch(es)
splices shall consist of at least four full used and the angle upon which it is
tucks, and short splices shall consist of based, type of fiber material, and the
at least eight full tucks, four on each number of legs if more than one.
side of the center line. (e) Synthetic webbing (nylon, polyester,
(iii) Strand end tails shall not be and polypropylene). (1) The employer
trimmed flush with the surface of the shall have each synthetic web sling
rope immediately adjacent to the full marked or coded to show:
tucks. This applies to all types of fiber (i) Name or trademark of manufac-
rope and both eye and short splices. turer.
For fiber rope under 1 inch (2.54 cm) in (ii) Rated capacities for the type of
diameter, the tail shall project at least hitch.
six rope diameters beyond the last full (iii) Type of material.
tuck. For fiber rope 1 inch (2.54 cm) in (2) Rated capacity shall not be ex-
diameter and larger, the tail shall ceeded.
224
(3) Webbing. Synthetic webbing shall sizes and types of specific and identifi-
be of uniform thickness and width and able hooks. All hooks for which no ap-
selvage edges shall not be split from plicable manufacturer’s recommenda-
the webbing’s width. tions are available shall be tested to
(4) Fittings. Fittings shall be: twice the intended safe working load
(i) Of a minimum breaking strength before they are initially put into use.
equal to that of the sling; and The employer shall maintain a record
(ii) Free of all sharp edges that could of the dates and results of such tests.
in any way damage the webbing.
(5) Attachment of end fittings to web- TABLE H–1—MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE WEAR AT
bing and formation of eyes. Stitching ANY POINT OF LINK
shall be the only method used to at- Maximum
tach end fittings to webbing and to Chain size (inches) allowable
wear (inch)
form eyes. The thread shall be in an
even pattern and contain a sufficient ⁄ .........................................................................
14 ⁄
3 64
number of stitches to develop the full ⁄ .........................................................................

38 ⁄
5 64
⁄ .........................................................................
12 ⁄
7 64
breaking strength of the sling. 5⁄8 ......................................................................... 9⁄64
(6) Environmental conditions. When 3⁄4 ......................................................................... 5⁄32
synthetic web slings are used, the fol- 7⁄8 ......................................................................... 11⁄64
lowing precautions shall be taken: 1 ........................................................................... 3⁄16
11⁄8 ....................................................................... 7⁄32

(i) Nylon web slings shall not be used 11⁄4 ....................................................................... 1⁄4
where fumes, vapors, sprays, mists or 13⁄8 ....................................................................... 9⁄32
liquids of acids or phenolics are 11⁄2 ....................................................................... 5⁄16
13⁄4 ....................................................................... 11⁄32

present.
(ii) Polyester and polypropylene web
slings shall not be used where fumes, TABLE H–2—NUMBER AND SPACING OF U-BOLT
vapors, sprays, mists or liquids of WIRE ROPE CLIPS
caustics are present. Number of clips
(iii) Web slings with aluminum fit- Minimum
Improved plow steel, rope spacing
tings shall not be used where fumes, diameter (inches) Drop Other
(inches)
forged material
vapors, sprays, mists or liquids of
caustics are present. ⁄ .....................................
12 3 4 3
⁄ .....................................
58 3 4 33⁄4
(7) Safe operating temperatures. Syn- ⁄ .....................................
34 4 5 41⁄2
thetic web slings of polyester and 7⁄8 ..................................... 4 5 51⁄4
nylon shall not be used at tempera- 1 ....................................... 5 6 6
11⁄8 ................................... 6 6 63⁄4
tures in excess of 180 °F (82.2 °C). Poly- 11⁄4 ................................... 6 7 71⁄2
propylene web slings shall not be used 13⁄8 ................................... 7 7 81⁄4
at temperatures in excess of 200 °F 11⁄2 ................................... 7 8 9
(93.33 °C).
(8) Removal from service. Synthetic [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
web slings shall be immediately re- 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35173, June 30, 1993;
moved from service if any of the fol- 76 FR 33611, June 8, 2011; 77 FR 23118, Apr. 18,
lowing conditions are present: 2012]
(i) Acid or caustic burns;
(ii) Melting or charring of any part of § 1926.252 Disposal of waste materials.
the sling surface; (a) Whenever materials are dropped
(iii) Snags, punctures, tears or cuts; more than 20 feet to any point lying
(iv) Broken or worn stitches; or outside the exterior walls of the build-
(v) Distortion of fittings. ing, an enclosed chute of wood, or
(f) Shackles and hooks. (1) Employers equivalent material, shall be used. For
must not use shackles with loads in ex- the purpose of this paragraph, an en-
cess of the rated capacities (i.e., work- closed chute is a slide, closed in on all
ing load limits) indicated on the shack- sides, through which material is moved
le by permanently affixed and legible from a high place to a lower one.
identification markings prescribed by (b) When debris is dropped through
the manufacturer. holes in the floor without the use of
(2) The manufacturer’s recommenda- chutes, the area onto which the mate-
tions shall be followed in determining rial is dropped shall be completely en-
the safe working loads of the various closed with barricades not less than 42
225
inches high and not less than 6 feet Examples of guarding methods are—
back from the projected edge of the barrier guards, two-hand tripping de-
opening above. Signs warning of the vices, electronic safety devices, etc.
hazard of falling materials shall be (4) Point of operation guarding. (i)
posted at each level. Removal shall not Point of operation is the area on a ma-
be permitted in this lower area until chine where work is actually performed
debris handling ceases above. upon the material being processed.
(c) All scrap lumber, waste material, (ii) The point of operation of ma-
and rubbish shall be removed from the chines whose operation exposes an em-
immediate work area as the work pro- ployee to injury, shall be guarded. The
gresses. guarding device shall be in conformity
(d) Disposal of waste material or de- with any appropriate standards there-
bris by burning shall comply with local for, or, in the absence of applicable spe-
fire regulations. cific standards, shall be so designed
(e) All solvent waste, oily rags, and and constructed as to prevent the oper-
flammable liquids shall be kept in fire ator from having any part of his body
resistant covered containers until rein the danger zone during the operating
moved from worksite. cycle.
(iii) Special handtools for placing and
Subpart I—Tools—Hand and removing material shall be such as to
Power permit easy handling of material with-
out the operator placing a hand in the
danger zone. Such tools shall not be in
AUTHORITY: Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occu-
lieu of other guarding required by this
pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29
section, but can only be used to supple-
Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR ment protection provided.
25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55 FR 9033), or (iv) The following are some of the
5–2002 (67 FR 65008), as applicable; and 29 CFR machines which usually require point
part 1911. Section 1926.307 also issued under 5 of operation guarding:
U.S.C. 553. (a) Guillotine cutters.
(b) Shears.
§ 1926.300 General requirements. (c) Alligator shears.
(a) Condition of tools. All hand and (d) Power presses.
power tools and similar equipment, (e) Milling machines.
whether furnished by the employer or (f) Power saws.
the employee, shall be maintained in a (g) Jointers.
safe condition. (h) Portable power tools.
(b) Guarding. (1) When power operated (i) Forming rolls and calenders.
tools are designed to accommodate (5) Exposure of blades. When the pe-
guards, they shall be equipped with riphery of the blades of a fan is less
such guards when in use. than 7 feet (2.128 m) above the floor or
(2) Belts, gears, shafts, pulleys, working level, the blades shall be
sprockets, spindles, drums, fly wheels, guarded. The guard shall have openings
chains, or other reciprocating, rotating no larger than 1⁄2 inch (1.27 cm).
or moving parts of equipment shall be (6) Anchoring fixed machinery. Ma-
guarded if such parts are exposed to chines designed for a fixed location
contact by employees or otherwise cre- shall be securely anchored to prevent
ate a hazard. Guarding shall meet the walking or moving.
requirements as set forth in American (7) Guarding of abrasive wheel machin-
National Standards Institute, B15.1– ery—exposure adjustment. Safety guards
1953 (R1958), Safety Code for Mechan- of the types described in paragraphs (b)
ical Power-Transmission Apparatus. (8) and (9) of this section, where the op-
(3) Types of guarding. One or more erator stands in front of the opening,
methods of machine guarding shall be shall be constructed so that the periph-
provided to protect the operator and eral protecting member can be ad-
other employees in the machine area justed to the constantly decreasing di-
from hazards such as those created by ameter of the wheel. The maximum an-
point of operation, ingoing nip points, gular exposure above the horizontal
rotating parts, flying chips and sparks. plane of the wheel spindle as specified
226
in paragraphs (b) (8) and (9) of this sec-
tion shall never be exceeded, and the
distance between the wheel periphery
and the adjustable tongue or the end of
the peripheral member at the top shall
never exceed 1⁄4 inch (0.635 cm). (See
Figures I–1 through I–6.)
Figure I–7 Figure I–8

Wherever the nature of the work requires
contact with the wheel below the hori-
zontal plane of the spindle, the exposure
shall not exceed 125° (See Figures I–9 and
I–10.)

Correct
Showing adjustable tongue giving required
angle protection for all sizes of wheel
used.

(9) Cylindrical grinders. The maximum
angular exposure of the grinding wheel
periphery and sides for safety guards
used on cylindrical grinding machines
Figure I–3 Figure I–4 shall not exceed 180°. This exposure
Correct shall begin at a point not more than 65°
Showing movable guard with opening small above the horizontal plane of the wheel
enough to give required protection for spindle. (See Figures I–11 and I–12 and
the smallest size wheel used. paragraph (b)(7) of this section.)
ER07MR96.005</GPH>
Figure I–5 Figure I–6 Figure I–11 Figure I–12
ER07MR96.004</GPH>
Incorrect (c) Personal protective equipment. Em-
Showing movable guard with size of opening ployees using hand and power tools and
correct for full size wheel but too large exposed to the hazard of falling, flying,
for smaller wheel. abrasive, and splashing objects, or ex-
ER07MR96.003</GPH>
(8) Bench and floor stands. The angu- posed to harmful dusts, fumes, mists,
lar exposure of the grinding wheel pe- vapors, or gases shall be provided with
the particular personal protective
riphery and sides for safety guards used
equipment necessary to protect them
on machines known as bench and floor
from the hazard. All personal protec-
stands should not exceed 90° or one-
tive equipment shall meet the require-
ER07MR96.002</GPH>
fourth of the periphery. This exposure ments and be maintained according to

shall begin at a point not more than 65° subparts D and E of this part.
above the horizontal plane of the wheel (d) Switches. (1) All hand-held pow-
spindle. (See Figures I–7 and I–8 and ered platen sanders, grinders with
paragraph (b)(7) of this section.) wheels 2-inch diameter or less, routers,
ER07MR96.000</GPH> ER07MR96.001</GPH>
planers, laminate trimmers, nibblers,

shears, scroll saws, and jigsaws with
227
blade shanks one-fourth of an inch the hose or whip by some positive
wide or less may be equipped with only means to prevent the tool from becom-
a positive ‘‘on-off’’ control. ing accidentally disconnected.
(2) All hand-held powered drills, tap- (2) Safety clips or retainers shall be
pers, fastener drivers, horizontal, securely installed and maintained on
vertical, and angle grinders with pneumatic impact (percussion) tools to
wheels greater than 2 inches in diame- prevent attachments from being acci-
ter, disc sanders, belt sanders, recipro- dentally expelled.
cating saws, saber saws, and other (3) All pneumatically driven nailers,
similar operating powered tools shall staplers, and other similar equipment
be equipped with a momentary contact provided with automatic fastener feed,
‘‘on-off’’ control and may have a lock- which operate at more than 100 p.s.i.
on control provided that turnoff can be pressure at the tool shall have a safety
accomplished by a single motion of the device on the muzzle to prevent the
same finger or fingers that turn it on. tool from ejecting fasteners, unless the
(3) All other hand-held powered tools, muzzle is in contact with the work sur-
such as circular saws, chain saws, and face.
percussion tools without positive ac- (4) Compressed air shall not be used
cessory holding means, shall be for cleaning purposes except where re-
equipped with a constant pressure duced to less than 30 p.s.i. and then
switch that will shut off the power only with effective chip guarding and
when the pressure is released. personal protective equipment which
(4) The requirements of this para- meets the requirements of subpart E of
graph shall become effective on July this part. The 30 p.s.i. requirement does
15, 1972. not apply for concrete form, mill scale
(5) Exception: This paragraph does and similar cleaning purposes.
not apply to concrete vibrators, con- (5) The manufacturer’s safe operating
crete breakers, powered tampers, jack pressure for hoses, pipes, valves, filters,
hammers, rock drills, and similar hand and other fittings shall not be exceed-
operated power tools. ed,
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, (6) The use of hoses for hoisting or
1979, as amended at 58 FR 35175, June 30, 1993; lowering tools shall not be permitted.
61 FR 9250, Mar. 7, 1996] (7) All hoses exceeding 1⁄2-inch inside
diameter shall have a safety device at
§ 1926.301 Hand tools. the source of supply or branch line to
(a) Employers shall not issue or per- reduce pressure in case of hose failure.
mit the use of unsafe hand tools. (8) Airless spray guns of the type
(b) Wrenches, including adjustable, which atomize paints and fluids at high
pipe, end, and socket wrenches shall pressures (1,000 pounds or more per
not be used when jaws are sprung to square inch) shall be equipped with
the point that slippage occurs. automatic or visible manual safety de-
(c) Impact tools, such as drift pins, vices which will prevent pulling of the
wedges, and chisels, shall be kept free trigger to prevent release of the paint
of mushroomed heads. or fluid until the safety device is
(d) The wooden handles of tools shall manually released.
be kept free of splinters or cracks and (9) In lieu of the above, a diffuser nut
shall be kept tight in the tool. which will prevent high pressure, high
velocity release, while the nozzle tip is
§ 1926.302 Power-operated hand tools. removed, plus a nozzle tip guard which
(a) Electric power-operated tools. (1) will prevent the tip from coming into
Electric power operated tools shall ei- contact with the operator, or other
ther be of the approved double-insu- equivalent protection, shall be pro-
lated type or grounded in accordance vided.
with subpart K of this part. (10) Abrasive blast cleaning nozzles.
(2) The use of electric cords for hoist- The blast cleaning nozzles shall be
ing or lowering tools shall not be per- equipped with an operating valve which
mitted. must be held open manually. A support
(b) Pneumatic power tools. (1) Pneu- shall be provided on which the nozzle
matic power tools shall be secured to may be mounted when it is not in use.
228
(c) Fuel powered tools. (1) All fuel pow- materials are backed by a substance
ered tools shall be stopped while being that will prevent the pin or fastener
refueled, serviced, or maintained, and from passing completely through and
fuel shall be transported, handled, and creating a flying missile hazard on the
stored in accordance with subpart F of other side.
this part. (9) No fastener shall be driven into a
(2) When fuel powered tools are used spalled area caused by an unsatisfac-
in enclosed spaces, the applicable re- tory fastening.
quirements for concentrations of toxic (10) Tools shall not be used in an ex-
gases and use of personal protective plosive or flammable atmosphere.
equipment, as outlined in subparts D (11) All tools shall be used with the
and E of this part, shall apply. correct shield, guard, or attachment
(d) Hydraulic power tools. (1) The fluid recommended by the manufacturer.
used in hydraulic powered tools shall (12) Powder-actuated tools used by
be fire-resistant fluids approved under employees shall meet all other applica-
Schedule 30 of the U.S. Bureau of ble requirements of American National
Mines, Department of the Interior, and Standards Institute, A10.3–1970, Safety
shall retain its operating characteris- Requirements for Explosive-Actuated
tics at the most extreme temperatures Fastening Tools.
to which it will be exposed. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
(2) The manufacturer’s safe operating 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35175, June 30, 1993]
pressures for hoses, valves, pipes, fil-
ters, and other fittings shall not be ex- § 1926.303 Abrasive wheels and tools.
ceeded. (a) Power. All grinding machines
(e) Powder-actuated tools. (1) Only em- shall be supplied with sufficient power
ployees who have been trained in the to maintain the spindle speed at safe
operation of the particular tool in use levels under all conditions of normal
shall be allowed to operate a powder- operation.
actuated tool. (b) Guarding. (1) Grinding machines
(2) The tool shall be tested each day shall be equipped with safety guards in
before loading to see that safety de- conformance with the requirements of
vices are in proper working condition. American National Standards Insti-
The method of testing shall be in ac- tute, B7.1–1970, Safety Code for the Use,
cordance with the manufacturer’s rec- Care and Protection of Abrasive
ommended procedure. Wheels, and paragraph (d) of this sec-
(3) Any tool found not in proper tion.
working order, or that develops a de- (2) Guard design. The safety guard
fect during use, shall be immediately shall cover the spindle end, nut, and
removed from service and not used flange projections. The safety guard
until properly repaired. shall be mounted so as to maintain
(4) Personal protective equipment proper alignment with the wheel, and
shall be in accordance with subpart E the strength of the fastenings shall ex-
of this part. ceed the strength of the guard, except:
(5) Tools shall not be loaded until (i) Safety guards on all operations
just prior to the intended firing time. where the work provides a suitable
Neither loaded nor empty tools are to measure of protection to the operator,
be pointed at any employees. Hands may be so constructed that the spindle
shall be kept clear of the open barrel end, nut, and outer flange are exposed;
end. and where the nature of the work is
(6) Loaded tools shall not be left un- such as to entirely cover the side of the
attended. wheel, the side covers of the guard may
(7) Fasteners shall not be driven into be omitted; and
very hard or brittle materials includ- (ii) The spindle end, nut, and outer
ing, but not limited to, cast iron, flange may be exposed on machines de-
glazed tile, surface-hardened steel, signed as portable saws.
glass block, live rock, face brick, or (c) Use of abrasive wheels. (1) Floor
hollow tile. stand and bench mounted abrasive
(8) Driving into materials easily pen- wheels, used for external grinding,
etrated shall be avoided unless such shall be provided with safety guards
229
(protection hoods). The maximum an- (6) When safety flanges are required,
gular exposure of the grinding wheel they shall be used only with wheels de-
periphery and sides shall be not more signed to fit the flanges. Only safety
than 90°, except that when work re- flanges, of a type and design and prop-
quires contact with the wheel below erly assembled so as to ensure that the
the horizontal plane of the spindle, the pieces of the wheel will be retained in
angular exposure shall not exceed 125°. case of accidental breakage, shall be
In either case, the exposure shall begin used.
not more than 65° above the horizontal (7) All abrasive wheels shall be close-
plane of the spindle. Safety guards ly inspected and ring-tested before
shall be strong enough to withstand mounting to ensure that they are free
the effect of a bursting wheel. from cracks or defects.
(2) Floor and bench-mounted grinders (8) Grinding wheels shall fit freely on
shall be provided with work rests the spindle and shall not be forced on.
which are rigidly supported and readily The spindle nut shall be tightened only
adjustable. Such work rests shall be enough to hold the wheel in place.
(9) All employees using abrasive
kept at a distance not to exceed one-
wheels shall be protected by eye pro-
eighth inch from the surface of the
tection equipment in accordance with
wheel.
the requirements of subpart E of this
(3) Cup type wheels used for external part, except when adequate eye protec-
grinding shall be protected by either a tion is afforded by eye shields which
revolving cup guard or a band type are permanently attached to the bench
guard in accordance with the provi- or floor stand.
sions of the American National Stand- (d) Other requirements. All abrasive
ards Institute, B7.1–1970 Safety Code wheels and tools used by employees
for the Use, Care, and Protection of Ab- shall meet other applicable require-
rasive Wheels. All other portable abra- ments of American National Standards
sive wheels used for external grinding, Institute, B7.1–1970, Safety Code for the
shall be provided with safety guards Use, Care and Protection of Abrasive
(protection hoods) meeting the require- Wheels.
ments of paragraph (c)(5) of this sec- (e) Work rests. On offhand grinding
tion, except as follows: machines, work rests shall be used to
(i) When the work location makes it support the work. They shall be of
impossible, a wheel equipped with safe- rigid construction and designed to be
ty flanges, as described in paragraph adjustable to compensate for wheel
(c)(6) of this section, shall be used; wear. Work rests shall be kept adjusted
(ii) When wheels 2 inches or less in closely to the wheel with a maximum
diameter which are securely mounted opening of 1⁄8 inch (0.3175 cm) to pre-
on the end of a steel mandrel are used. vent the work from being jammed be-
(4) Portable abrasive wheels used for tween the wheel and the rest, which
internal grinding shall be provided may cause wheel breakage. The work
with safety flanges (protection flanges) rest shall be securely clamped after
meeting the requirements of paragraph each adjustment. The adjustment shall
(c)(6) of this section, except as follows: not be made with the wheel in motion.
(i) When wheels 2 inches or less in di- [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
ameter which are securely mounted on 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35175, June 30, 1993]
the end of a steel mandrel are used;
(ii) If the wheel is entirely within the § 1926.304 Woodworking tools.
work being ground while in use. (a) Disconnect switches. All fixed
(5) When safety guards are required, power driven woodworking tools shall
they shall be so mounted as to main- be provided with a disconnect switch
tain proper alignment with the wheel, that can either be locked or tagged in
and the guard and its fastenings shall the off position.
be of sufficient strength to retain frag- (b) Speeds. The operating speed shall
ments of the wheel in case of acci- be etched or otherwise permanently
dental breakage. The maximum angu- marked on all circular saws over 20
lar exposure of the grinding wheel pe- inches in diameter or operating at over
riphery and sides shall not exceed 180°. 10,000 peripheral feet per minute. Any
230
saw so marked shall not be operated at all the requirements of paragraph (i)(1)
a speed other than that marked on the of this section for hoods for circular
blade. When a marked saw is reten- ripsaws.
sioned for a different speed, the mark- (i) Hand-fed ripsaws. (1) Each circular
ing shall be corrected to show the new hand-fed ripsaw shall be guarded by a
speed. hood which shall completely enclose
(c) Self-feed. Automatic feeding de- that portion of the saw above the table
vices shall be installed on machines and that portion of the saw above the
whenever the nature of the work will material being cut. The hood and
permit. Feeder attachments shall have mounting shall be arranged so that the
the feed rolls or other moving parts hood will automatically adjust itself to
covered or guarded so as to protect the the thickness of and remain in contact
operator from hazardous points. with the material being cut but it shall
(d) Guarding. All portable, power- not offer any considerable resistance to
driven circular saws shall be equipped insertion of material to saw or to pas-
with guards above and below the base sage of the material being sawed. The
plate or shoe. The upper guard shall hood shall be made of adequate
cover the saw to the depth of the teeth, strength to resist blows and strains in-
except for the minimum arc required cidental to reasonable operation, ad-
to permit the base to be tilted for bevel justing, and handling, and shall be so
cuts. The lower guard shall cover the designed as to protect the operator
saw to the depth of the teeth, except from flying splinters and broken saw
for the minimum arc required to allow teeth. It shall be made of material that
proper retraction and contact with the is soft enough so that it will be un-
work. When the tool is withdrawn from likely to cause tooth breakage. The
the work, the lower guard shall auto- hood shall be so mounted as to insure
matically and instantly return to the that its operation will be positive, reli-
covering position. able, and in true alignment with the
(e) Personal protective equipment. All saw; and the mounting shall be ade-
personal protective equipment pro- quate in strength to resist any reason-
vided for use shall conform to subpart able side thrust or other force tending
E of this part. to throw it out of line.
(f) Other requirements. All wood- [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
working tools and machinery shall 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35175, June 30, 1993;
meet other applicable requirements of 61 FR 9251, Mar. 7, 1996]
American National Standards Insti-
tute, 01.1–1961, Safety Code for Wood- § 1926.305 Jacks—lever and ratchet,
working Machinery. screw, and hydraulic.
(g) Radial saws. (1) The upper hood (a) General requirements. (1) The man-
shall completely enclose the upper por- ufacturer’s rated capacity shall be leg-
tion of the blade down to a point that ibly marked on all jacks and shall not
will include the end of the saw arbor. be exceeded.
The upper hood shall be constructed in (2) All jacks shall have a positive
such a manner and of such material stop to prevent overtravel.
that it will protect the operator from (b) [Reserved]
flying splinters, broken saw teeth, etc., (c) Blocking. When it is necessary to
and will deflect sawdust away from the provide a firm foundation, the base of
operator. The sides of the lower ex- the jack shall be blocked or cribbed.
posed portion of the blade shall be Where there is a possibility of slippage
guarded to the full diameter of the of the metal cap of the jack, a wood
blade by a device that will automati- block shall be placed between the cap
cally adjust itself to the thickness of and the load.
the stock and remain in contact with (d)(1) Operation and maintenance. (i)
stock being cut to give maximum pro- After the load has been raised, it shall
tection possible for the operation being be cribbed, blocked, or otherwise se-
performed. cured at once.
(h) Hand-fed crosscut table saws. (1) (ii) Hydraulic jacks exposed to freez-
Each circular crosscut table saw shall ing temperatures shall be supplied with
be guarded by a hood which shall meet an adequate antifreeze liquid.
231
(iii) All jacks shall be properly lubri- cumstances shall an air receiver be
cated at regular intervals. buried underground or located in an in-
(iv) Each jack shall be thoroughly inaccessible place.
spected at times which depend upon (2) Drains and traps. A drain pipe and
the service conditions. Inspections valve shall be installed at the lowest
shall be not less frequent than the fol- point of every air receiver to provide
lowing: for the removal of accumulated oil and
(a) For constant or intermittent use water. Adequate automatic traps may
at one locality, once every 6 months, be installed in addition to drain valves.
(b) For jacks sent out of shop for spe- The drain valve on the air receiver
cial work, when sent out and when re- shall be opened and the receiver com-
turned, pletely drained frequently and at such
(c) For a jack subjected to abnormal intervals as to prevent the accumula-
load or shock, immediately before and tion of excessive amounts of liquid in
immediately thereafter. the receiver.
(v) Repair or replacement parts shall (3) Gages and valves. (i) Every air re-
be examined for possible defects. ceiver shall be equipped with an indi-
(vi) Jacks which are out of order cating pressure gage (so located as to
shall be tagged accordingly, and shall be readily visible) and with one or
not be used until repairs are made. more spring-loaded safety valves. The
total relieving capacity of such safety
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
1979, as amended at 55 FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990; valves shall be such as to prevent pres-
58 FR 35176, June 30, 1993] sure in the receiver from exceeding the
maximum allowable working pressure
§ 1926.306 Air receivers. of the receiver by more than 10 per-
(a) General requirements—(1) Applica- cent.
tion. This section applies to compressed (ii) No valve of any type shall be
air receivers, and other equipment used placed between the air receiver and its
in providing and utilizing compressed safety valve or valves.
air for performing operations such as (iii) Safety appliances, such as safety
cleaning, drilling, hoisting, and chip- valves, indicating devices and control-
ping. On the other hand, however, this ling devices, shall be constructed, lo-
section does not deal with the special cated, and installed so that they can-
problems created by using compressed not be readily rendered inoperative by
air to convey materials nor the prob- any means, including the elements.
lems created when men work in com- (iv) All safety valves shall be tested
pressed air as in tunnels and caissons. frequently and at regular intervals to
This section is not intended to apply to determine whether they are in good op-
compressed air machinery and equip- erating condition.
ment used on transportation vehicles [58 FR 35176, June 30, 1993]
such as steam railroad cars, electric
railway cars, and automotive equip- § 1926.307 Mechanical power-trans-
ment. mission apparatus.
(2) New and existing equipment. (i) All (a) General requirements. (1) This sec-
new air receivers installed after the ef- tion covers all types and shapes of
fective date of these regulations shall power-transmission belts, except the
be constructed in accordance with the following when operating at two hun-
1968 edition of the A.S.M.E. Boiler and dred and fifty (250) feet per minute or
Pressure Vessel Code Section VIII. less: (i) Flat belts 1 inch (2.54 cm) or
(ii) All safety valves used shall be less in width, (ii) flat belts 2 inches
constructed, installed, and maintained (5.08 cm) or less in width which are free
in accordance with the A.S.M.E. Boiler from metal lacings or fasteners, (iii)
and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII round belts 1⁄2 inch (1.27 cm) or less in
Edition 1968. diameter; and (iv) single strand V-
(b) Installation and equipment require- belts, the width of which is thirteen
ments—(1) Installation. Air receivers thirty-seconds (13⁄32) inch or less.
shall be so installed that all drains, (2) Vertical and inclined belts (para-
handholes, and manholes therein are graphs (e) (3) and (4) of this section) if
easily accessible. Under no cir- not more than 21⁄2 inches (6.35 cm) wide
232
and running at a speed of less than one (v) Adjustable guard to be used for
thousand (1,000) feet per minute, and if starting engine or for running adjust-
free from metal lacings or fastenings ment may be provided at the flywheel
may be guarded with a nip-point belt of gas or oil engines. A slot opening for
and pulley guard. jack bar will be permitted.
(3) For the Textile Industry, because (vi) Wherever flywheels are above
of the presence of excessive deposits of working areas, guards shall be in-
lint, which constitute a serious fire stalled having sufficient strength to
hazard, the sides and face sections only hold the weight of the flywheel in the
of nip-point belt and pulley guards are event of a shaft or wheel mounting fail-
required, provided the guard shall ex- ure.
tend at least 6 inches (15.24 cm) beyond (2) Cranks and connecting rods. Cranks
the rim of the pulley on the in-running and connecting rods, when exposed to
and off-running sides of the belt and at contact, shall be guarded in accordance
least 2 inches (5.08 cm) away from the with paragraphs (m) and (n) of this sec-
rim and face of the pulley in all other tion, or by a guardrail as described in
directions. paragraph (o)(5) of this section.
(4) This section covers the principal (3) Tail rods or extension piston rods.
features with which power trans- Tail rods or extension piston rods shall
mission safeguards shall comply. be guarded in accordance with para-
(b) Prime-mover guards—(1) Flywheels. graphs (m) and (o) of this section, or by
Flywheels located so that any part is 7 a guardrail on sides and end, with a
feet (2.128 m) or less above floor or clearance of not less than 15 (38.1 cm)
platform shall be guarded in accord- nor more than 20 inches (50.8 cm) when
ance with the requirements of this sub- rod is fully extended.
paragraph: (c) Shafting—(1) Installation. (i) Each
(i) With an enclosure of sheet, per- continuous line of shafting shall be se-
forated, or expanded metal, or woven cured in position against excessive end-
wire; wise movement.
(ii) With guard rails placed not less (ii) Inclined and vertical shafts, par-
than 15 inches (38.1 cm) nor more than ticularly inclined idler shafts, shall be
20 inches (50.8 cm) from rim. When securely held in position against end-
flywheel extends into pit or is within 12 wise thrust.
inches (30.48 cm) of floor, a standard (2) Guarding horizontal shafting. (i) All
toeboard shall also be provided; exposed parts of horizontal shafting 7
(iii) When the upper rim of flywheel feet (2.128 m) or less from floor or
protrudes through a working floor, it working platform, excepting runways
shall be entirely enclosed or sur- used exclusively for oiling, or running
rounded by a guardrail and toeboard. adjustments, shall be protected by a
(iv) For flywheels with smooth rims 5 stationary casing enclosing shafting
feet (1.52 m) or less in diameter, where completely or by a trough enclosing
the preceding methods cannot be ap- sides and top or sides and bottom of
plied, the following may be used: A shafting as location requires.
disk attached to the flywheel in such (ii) Shafting under bench machines
manner as to cover the spokes of the shall be enclosed by a stationary cas-
wheel on the exposed side and present a ing, or by a trough at sides and top or
smooth surface and edge, at the same sides and bottom, as location requires.
time providing means for periodic in- The sides of the trough shall come
spection. An open space, not exceeding within at least 6 inches (15.24 cm) of
4 inches (10.16 cm) in width, may be left the underside of table, or if shafting is
between the outside edge of the disk located near floor within 6 inches (15.24
and the rim of the wheel if desired, to cm) of floor. In every case the sides of
facilitate turning the wheel over. trough shall extend at least 2 inches
Where a disk is used, the keys or other (5.08 cm) beyond the shafting or protu-
dangerous projections not covered by berance.
disk shall be cut off or covered. This (3) Guarding vertical and inclined
subdivision does not apply to flywheels shafting. Vertical and inclined shafting
with solid web centers. 7 feet (2.128 m) or less from floor or
233
working platform, excepting mainte- (3) Broken pulleys. Pulleys with
nance runways, shall be enclosed with cracks, or pieces broken out of rims,
a stationary casing in accordance with shall not be used.
requirements of paragraphs (m) and (o) (4) Pulley speeds. Pulleys intended to
of this section. operate at rim speed in excess of manu-
(4) Projecting shaft ends. (i) Projecting facturers normal recommendations
shaft ends shall present a smooth edge shall be specially designed and care-
and end and shall not project more fully balanced for the speed at which
than one-half the diameter of the shaft they are to operate.
unless guarded by nonrotating caps or (e) Belt, rope, and chain drives—(1)
safety sleeves. Horizontal belts and ropes. (i) Where
(ii) Unused keyways shall be filled up both runs of horizontal belts are 7 feet
or covered. (2.128 m) or less from the floor level,
(5) Power-transmission apparatus lo- the guard shall extend to at least 15
cated in basements. All mechanical inches (38.1 cm) above the belt or to a
power transmission apparatus located standard height except that where both
in basements, towers, and rooms used runs of a horizontal belt are 42 inches
exclusively for power transmission (106.68 cm) or less from the floor, the
equipment shall be guarded in accord- belt shall be fully enclosed.
ance with this section, except that the (ii) In powerplants or power-develop-
requirements for safeguarding belts, ment rooms, a guardrail may be used
pulleys, and shafting need not be com- in lieu of the guard required by para-
plied with when the following require- graph (e)(1)(i) of this section.
ments are met: (2) Overhead horizontal belts. (i) Over-
(i) The basement, tower, or room oc- head horizontal belts, with lower parts
cupied by transmission equipment is 7 feet (2.128 m) or less from the floor or
locked against unauthorized entrance. platform, shall be guarded on sides and
(ii) The vertical clearance in passage- bottom in accordance with paragraph
ways between the floor and power (o)(3) of this section.
transmission beams, ceiling, or any (ii) Horizontal overhead belts more
other objects, is not less than 5 ft. 6 in. than 7 feet (2.128 m) above floor or plat-
(1.672 m). form shall be guarded for their entire
(iii) The intensity of illumination length under the following conditions:
conforms to the requirements of ANSI (a) If located over passageways or
A11.1–1965 (R–1970). work places and traveling 1,800 feet or
(iv) [Reserved] more per minute.
(v) The route followed by the oiler is (b) If center to center distance be-
protected in such manner as to prevent tween pulleys is 10 feet (3.04 m) or
accident. more.
(d) Pulleys—(1) Guarding. Pulleys, any (c) If belt is 8 inches (20.32 cm) or
parts of which are 7 feet (2.128 m) or more in width.
less from the floor or working plat- (iii) Where the upper and lower runs
form, shall be guarded in accordance of horizontal belts are so located that
with the standards specified in para- passage of persons between them would
graphs (m) and (o) of this section. Pul- be possible, the passage shall be either:
leys serving as balance wheels (e.g., (a) Completely barred by a guardrail
punch presses) on which the point of or other barrier in accordance with
contact between belt and pulley is paragraphs (m) and (o) of this section;
more than 6 ft. 6 in. (1.976 m) from the or
floor or platform may be guarded with (b) Where passage is regarded as nec-
a disk covering the spokes. essary, there shall be a platform over
(2) Location of pulleys. (i) Unless the the lower run guarded on either side by
distance to the nearest fixed pulley, a railing completely filled in with wire
clutch, or hanger exceeds the width of mesh or other filler, or by a solid bar-
the belt used, a guide shall be provided rier. The upper run shall be so guarded
to prevent the belt from leaving the as to prevent contact therewith either
pulley on the side where insufficient by the worker or by objects carried by
clearance exists. him. In powerplants only the lower run
(ii) [Reserved] of the belt need be guarded.
234
(iv) Overhead chain and link belt (ii) Where suspended counterweights
drives are governed by the same rules are used and not guarded by location,
as overhead horizontal belts and shall they shall be so encased as to prevent
be guarded in the same manner as accident.
belts. (f) Gears, sprockets, and chains—(1)
(3) Vertical and inclined belts. (i) Gears. Gears shall be guarded in accord-
Vertical and inclined belts shall be en- ance with one of the following meth-
closed by a guard conforming to stand- ods:
ards in paragraphs (m) and (o) of this (i) By a complete enclosure; or
section. (ii) By a standard guard as described
(ii) All guards for inclined belts shall in paragraph (o) of this section, at
be arranged in such a manner that a least 7 feet (2.128 m) high extending 6
minimum clearance of 7 feet (2.128 m) inches (15.24 cm) above the mesh point
is maintained between belt and floor at of the gears; or
any point outside of guard. (iii) By a band guard covering the
(4) Vertical belts. Vertical belts run- face of gear and having flanges ex-
ning over a lower pulley more than 7 tended inward beyond the root of the
feet (2.128 m) above floor or platform teeth on the exposed side or sides.
shall be guarded at the bottom in the Where any portion of the train of gears
same manner as horizontal overhead guarded by a band guard is less than 6
belts, if conditions are as stated in feet (1.824 m) from the floor a disk
paragraphs (e)(2)(ii) (a) and (c) of this guard or a complete enclosure to the
section. height of 6 feet (1.824 m) shall be re-
(5) Cone-pulley belts. (i) The cone belt quired.
and pulley shall be equipped with a belt (2) Hand-operated gears. Paragraph
shifter so constructed as to adequately (f)(1) of this section does not apply to
guard the nip point of the belt and pul- hand-operated gears used only to ad-
ley. If the frame of the belt shifter does just machine parts and which do not
not adequately guard the nip point of continue to move after hand power is
the belt and pulley, the nip point shall removed. However, the guarding of
be further protected by means of a these gears is highly recommended.
vertical guard placed in front of the (3) Sprockets and chains. All sprocket
pulley and extending at least to the top wheels and chains shall be enclosed un-
of the largest step of the cone. less they are more than 7 feet (2.128 m)
(ii) If the belt is of the endless type above the floor or platform. Where the
or laced with rawhide laces, and a belt drive extends over other machine or
shifter is not desired, the belt will be working areas, protection against fall-
considered guarded if the nip point of ing shall be provided. This subpara-
the belt and pulley is protected by a graph does not apply to manually oper-
nip point guard located in front of the ated sprockets.
cone extending at least to the top of (4) Openings for oiling. When frequent
the largest step of the cone, and formed oiling must be done, openings with
to show the contour of the cone in hinged or sliding self-closing covers
order to give the nip point of the belt shall be provided. All points not read-
and pulley the maximum protection. ily accessible shall have oil feed tubes
(iii) If the cone is located less than 3 if lubricant is to be added while ma-
feet (0.912 m) from the floor or working chinery is in motion.
platform, the cone pulley and belt shall (g) Guarding friction drives. The driv-
be guarded to a height of 3 feet (0.912 ing point of all friction drives when ex-
m) regardless of whether the belt is posed to contact shall be guarded, all
endless or laced with rawhide. arm or spoke friction drives and all
(6) Belt tighteners. (i) Suspended web friction drives with holes in the
counterbalanced tighteners and all web shall be entirely enclosed, and all
parts thereof shall be of substantial projecting belts on friction drives
construction and securely fastened; the where exposed to contact shall be
bearings shall be securely capped. guarded.
Means must be provided to prevent (h) Keys, setscrews, and other projec-
tightener from falling, in case the belt tions. (1) All projecting keys, setscrews,
breaks. and other projections in revolving
235
parts shall be removed or made flush or (ii) Belt shifter and clutch handles
guarded by metal cover. This subpara- shall be rounded and be located as far
graph does not apply to keys or as possible from danger of accidental
setscrews within gear or sprocket cas- contact, but within easy reach of the
ings or other enclosures, nor to keys, operator. Where belt shifters are not
setscrews, or oilcups in hubs of pulleys directly located over a machine or
less than 20 inches (50.8 cm) in diame- bench, the handles shall be cut off 6 ft.
ter where they are within the plane of 6 in. (1.976 m) above floor level.
the rim of the pulley. (2) Belt shippers and shipper poles. The
(2) It is recommended, however, that use of belt poles as substitutes for me-
no projecting setscrews or oilcups be chanical shifters is not recommended.
used in any revolving pulley or part of (3) Belt perches. Where loose pulleys
machinery. or idlers are not practicable, belt
(i) Collars and couplings—(1) Collars. perches in form of brackets, rollers,
All revolving collars, including split etc., shall be used to keep idle belts
collars, shall be cylindrical, and screws away from the shafts.
or bolts used in collars shall not (4) Belt fasteners. Belts which of ne-
project beyond the largest periphery of cessity must be shifted by hand and
the collar. belts within 7 feet (2.128 m) of the floor
(2) Couplings. Shaft couplings shall be or working platform which are not
so constructed as to present no hazard guarded in accordance with this sec-
from bolts, nuts, setscrews, or revolv- tion shall not be fastened with metal in
ing surfaces. Bolts, nuts, and setscrews any case, nor with any other fastening
will, however, be permitted where they which by construction or wear will
are covered with safety sleeves or constitute an accident hazard.
where they are used parallel with the (m) Standard guards—general require-
shafting and are countersunk or else do ments—(1) Materials. (i) Standard condi-
not extend beyond the flange of the tions shall be secured by the use of the
coupling. following materials. Expanded metal,
(j) Bearings and facilities for oiling. All perforated or solid sheet metal, wire
drip cups and pans shall be securely mesh on a frame of angle iron, or iron
fastened. pipe securely fastened to floor or to
(k) Guarding of clutches, cutoff cou- frame of machine.
plings, and clutch pulleys—(1) Guards. (ii) All metal should be free from
Clutches, cutoff couplings, or clutch burrs and sharp edges.
pulleys having projecting parts, where (2) Methods of manufacture. (i) Ex-
such clutches are located 7 feet (2.128 panded metal, sheet or perforated
m) or less above the floor or working metal, and wire mesh shall be securely
platform, shall be enclosed by a sta- fastened to frame.
tionary guard constructed in accord- (n) [Reserved]
ance with this section. A ‘‘U’’ type (o) Approved materials—(1) Minimum
guard is permissible. requirements. The materials and dimen-
(2) Engine rooms. In engine rooms a sions specified in this paragraph shall
guardrail, preferably with toeboard, apply to all guards, except horizontal
may be used instead of the guard re- overhead belts, rope, cable, or chain
quired by paragraph (k)(1) of this sec- guards more than 7 feet (2.128 m) above
tion, provided such a room is occupied floor, or platform.
only by engine room attendants. (i) [Reserved]
(l) Belt shifters, clutches, shippers, (a) All guards shall be rigidly braced
poles, perches, and fasteners—(1) Belt every 3 feet (0.912 m) or fractional part
shifters. (i) Tight and loose pulleys on of their height to some fixed part of
all new installations made on or after machinery or building structure.
August 31, 1971, shall be equipped with Where guard is exposed to contact with
a permanent belt shifter provided with moving equipment additional strength
mechanical means to prevent belt from may be necessary.
creeping from loose to tight pulley. It (2) Wood guards. (i) Wood guards may
is recommended that old installations be used in the woodworking and chem-
be changed to conform to this rule. ical industries, in industries where the
236
presence of fumes or where manufac- height, with midrail between top rail
turing conditions would cause the and floor.
rapid deterioration of metal guards; (ii) Posts shall be not more than 8
also in construction work and in loca- feet (2.432 m) apart; they are to be per-
tions outdoors where extreme cold or manent and substantial, smooth, and
extreme heat make metal guards and free from protruding nails, bolts, and
railings undesirable. In all other indus- splinters. If made of pipe, the post shall
tries, wood guards shall not be used. be 11⁄4 inches (3.175 cm) inside diameter,
(3) Guards for horizontal overhead or larger. If made of metal shapes or
belts. (i) Guards for horizontal overhead bars, their section shall be equal in
belts shall run the entire length of the
strength to that of 11⁄2 (3.81 cm) by 11⁄2
belt and follow the line of the pulley to
(3.81 cm) by 3⁄16 inch angle iron. If made
the ceiling or be carried to the nearest
wall, thus enclosing the belt effec- of wood, the posts shall be two by four
tively. Where belts are so located as to (2 × 4) inches or larger. The upper rail
make it impracticable to carry the shall be two by four (2 × 4) inches, or
guard to wall or ceiling, construction two one by four (1 × 4) strips, one at the
of guard shall be such as to enclose top and one at the side of posts. The
completely the top and bottom runs of midrail may be one by four (1 × 4)
belt and the face of pulleys. inches or more. Where panels are fitted
(ii) [Reserved] with expanded metal or wire mesh the
(iii) Suitable reinforcement shall be middle rails may be omitted. Where
provided for the ceiling rafters or over- guard is exposed to contact with mov-
head floor beams, where such is nec- ing equipment, additional strength
essary, to sustain safely the weight and may be necessary.
stress likely to be imposed by the (iii) Toeboards shall be 4 inches (10.16
guard. The interior surface of all cm) or more in height, of wood, metal,
guards, by which is meant the surface or of metal grill not exceeding 1 inch
of the guard with which a belt will (2.54 cm) mesh.
come in contact, shall be smooth and (p) Care of equipment—(1) General. All
free from all projections of any char- power-transmission equipment shall be
acter, except where construction de-
inspected at intervals not exceeding 60
mands it; protruding shallow round-
days and be kept in good working con-
head rivets may be used. Overhead belt
dition at all times.
guards shall be at least one-quarter
wider than belt which they protect, ex- (2) Shafting. (i) Shafting shall be kept
cept that this clearance need not in in alignment, free from rust and excess
any case exceed 6 inches (15.24 cm) on oil or grease.
each side. Overhead rope drive and (ii) Where explosives, explosive dusts,
block and roller-chain-drive guards flammable vapors or flammable liquids
shall be not less than 6 inches (15.24 exist, the hazard of static sparks from
cm) wider than the drive on each side. shafting shall be carefully considered.
In overhead silent chain-drive guards (3) Bearings. Bearings shall be kept in
where the chain is held from lateral alignment and properly adjusted.
displacement on the sprockets, the side (4) Hangers. Hangers shall be in-
clearances required on drives of 20 inch spected to make certain that all sup-
(50.8 cm) centers or under shall be not porting bolts and screws are tight and
less than 1⁄4 inch (0.635 cm) from the that supports of hanger boxes are ad-
nearest moving chain part, and on justed properly.
drives of over 20 inch (50.8 cm) centers (5) Pulleys. (i) Pulleys shall be kept in
a minimum of 1⁄2 inch (1.27 cm) from
proper alignment to prevent belts from
the nearest moving chain part.
running off.
(4) Guards for horizontal overhead rope
and chain drives. Overhead-rope and (6) Care of belts.
chain-drive guard construction shall (i) [Reserved]
conform to the rules for overhead-belt (ii) Inspection shall be made of belts,
guard. lacings, and fasteners and such equip-
(5) Guardrails and toeboards. (i) Guard- ment kept in good repair.
rail shall be 42 inches (106.68 cm) in
237
(7) Lubrication. The regular oilers riods of time while cylinders are actu-
shall wear tight-fitting clothing. Ma- ally being hoisted or carried.
chinery shall be oiled when not in mo- (10) Oxygen cylinders in storage shall
tion, wherever possible. be separated from fuel-gas cylinders or
combustible materials (especially oil
FR 31882, June 8, 2004]
or grease), a minimum distance of 20
feet (6.1 m) or by a noncombustible bar-
rier at least 5 feet (1.5 m) high having
Subpart J—Welding and Cutting a fire-resistance rating of at least one-
half hour.
AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours (11) Inside of buildings, cylinders
and Safety Standards Act (Construction shall be stored in a well-protected,
Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); secs. 4, 6, 8, Occu- well-ventilated, dry location, at least
pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 20 feet (6.1 m) from highly combustible
Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR
materials such as oil or excelsior. Cyl-
25059), or 9–83 (48 FR 35736), as applicable. inders should be stored in definitely as-
signed places away from elevators,
§ 1926.350 Gas welding and cutting. stairs, or gangways. Assigned storage
places shall be located where cylinders
(a) Transporting, moving, and storing will not be knocked over or damaged
compressed gas cylinders. (1) Valve pro- by passing or falling objects, or subject
tection caps shall be in place and se- to tampering by unauthorized persons.
cured. Cylinders shall not be kept in
(2) When cylinders are hoisted, they unventilated enclosures such as lockers
shall be secured on a cradle, and cupboards.
slingboard, or pallet. They shall not be (12) The in-plant handling, storage,
hoisted or transported by means of and utilization of all compressed gases
magnets or choker slings. in cylinders, portable tanks, rail
(3) Cylinders shall be moved by tilt- tankcars, or motor vehicle cargo tanks
ing and rolling them on their bottom shall be in accordance with Compressed
edges. They shall not be intentionally Gas Association Pamphlet P–1–1965.
dropped, struck, or permitted to strike (b) Placing cylinders. (1) Cylinders
each other violently. shall be kept far enough away from the
(4) When cylinders are transported by actual welding or cutting operation so
powered vehicles, they shall be secured that sparks, hot slag, or flame will not
in a vertical position. reach them. When this is impractical,
(5) Valve protection caps shall not be fire resistant shields shall be provided.
used for lifting cylinders from one (2) Cylinders shall be placed where
vertical position to another. Bars shall they cannot become part of an elec-
not be used under valves or valve pro- trical circuit. Electrodes shall not be
tection caps to pry cylinders loose struck against a cylinder to strike an
when frozen. Warm, not boiling, water arc.
shall be used to thaw cylinders loose. (3) Fuel gas cylinders shall be placed
(6) Unless cylinders are firmly se- with valve end up whenever they are in
cured on a special carrier intended for use. They shall not be placed in a loca-
this purpose, regulators shall be re- tion where they would be subject to
moved and valve protection caps put in open flame, hot metal, or other sources
place before cylinders are moved. of artificial heat.
(7) A suitable cylinder truck, chain, (4) Cylinders containing oxygen or
or other steadying device shall be used acetylene or other fuel gas shall not be
to keep cylinders from being knocked taken into confined spaces.
over while in use. (c) Treatment of cylinders. (1) Cyl-
(8) When work is finished, when cylinders, whether full or empty, shall not
inders are empty, or when cylinders are be used as rollers or supports.
moved at any time, the cylinder valve (2) No person other than the gas sup-
shall be closed. plier shall attempt to mix gases in a
(9) Compressed gas cylinders shall be cylinder. No one except the owner of
secured in an upright position at all the cylinder or person authorized by
times except, if necessary, for short pe- him, shall refill a cylinder. No one
238
shall use a cylinder’s contents for pur- discontinued, and it shall be properly
poses other than those intended by the tagged and removed from the work
supplier. All cylinders used shall meet area. In the event that fuel gas should
the Department of Transportation re- leak from the cylinder valve, rather
quirements published in 49 CFR part than from the valve stem, and the gas
178, subpart C, Specification for Cyl- cannot be shut off, the cylinder shall
inders. be properly tagged and removed from
(3) No damaged or defective cylinder the work area. If a regulator attached
shall be used. to a cylinder valve will effectively stop
(d) Use of fuel gas. The employer shall a leak through the valve seat, the cyl-
thoroughly instruct employees in the inder need not be removed from the
safe use of fuel gas, as follows: work area.
(1) Before a regulator to a cylinder (6) If a leak should develop at a fuse
valve is connected, the valve shall be plug or other safety device, the cyl-
opened slightly and closed imme- inder shall be removed from the work
diately. (This action is generally area.
termed ‘‘cracking’’ and is intended to (e) Fuel gas and oxygen manifolds. (1)
clear the valve of dust or dirt that Fuel gas and oxygen manifolds shall
might otherwise enter the regulator.) bear the name of the substance they
The person cracking the valve shall contain in letters at least 1-inch high
stand to one side of the outlet, not in which shall be either painted on the
front of it. The valve of a fuel gas cyl- manifold or on a sign permanently at-
inder shall not be cracked where the tached to it.
gas would reach welding work, sparks, (2) Fuel gas and oxygen manifolds
flame, or other possible sources of igni- shall be placed in safe, well ventilated,
tion. and accessible locations. They shall
(2) The cylinder valve shall always be not be located within enclosed spaces.
opened slowly to prevent damage to (3) Manifold hose connections, in-
the regulator. For quick closing, valves cluding both ends of the supply hose
on fuel gas cylinders shall not be that lead to the manifold, shall be such
opened more than 11⁄2 turns. When a that the hose cannot be interchanged
special wrench is required, it shall be between fuel gas and oxygen manifolds
left in position on the stem of the valve and supply header connections. Adapt-
while the cylinder is in use so that the ers shall not be used to permit the
fuel gas flow can be shut off quickly in interchange of hose. Hose connections
case of an emergency. In the case of shall be kept free of grease and oil.
manifolded or coupled cylinders, at (4) When not in use, manifold and
least one such wrench shall always be header hose connections shall be
available for immediate use. Nothing capped.
shall be placed on top of a fuel gas cyl- (5) Nothing shall be placed on top of
inder, when in use, which may damage a manifold, when in use, which will
the safety device or interfere with the damage the manifold or interfere with
quick closing of the valve. the quick closing of the valves.
(3) Fuel gas shall not be used from (f) Hose. (1) Fuel gas hose and oxygen
cylinders through torches or other de- hose shall be easily distinguishable
vices which are equipped with shutoff from each other. The contrast may be
valves without reducing the pressure made by different colors or by surface
through a suitable regulator attached characteristics readily distinguishable
to the cylinder valve or manifold. by the sense of touch. Oxygen and fuel
(4) Before a regulator is removed gas hoses shall not be interchangeable.
from a cylinder valve, the cylinder A single hose having more than one gas
valve shall always be closed and the passage shall not be used.
gas released from the regulator. (2) When parallel sections of oxygen
(5) If, when the valve on a fuel gas and fuel gas hose are taped together,
cylinder is opened, there is found to be not more than 4 inches out of 12 inches
a leak around the valve stem, the valve shall be covered by tape.
shall be closed and the gland nut tight- (3) All hose in use, carrying acety-
ened. If this action does not stop the lene, oxygen, natural or manufactured
leak, the use of the cylinder shall be fuel gas, or any gas or substance which
239
may ignite or enter into combustion, § 1926.351 Arc welding and cutting.
or be in any way harmful to employees, (a) Manual electrode holders. (1) Only
shall be inspected at the beginning of manual electrode holders which are
each working shift. Defective hose specifically designed for arc welding
shall be removed from service. and cutting, and are of a capacity capa-
(4) Hose which has been subject to ble of safely handling the maximum
flashback, or which shows evidence of rated current required by the elec-
severe wear or damage, shall be tested trodes, shall be used.
to twice the normal pressure to which (2) Any current-carrying parts pass-
it is subject, but in no case less than ing through the portion of the holder
300 p.s.i. Defective hose, or hose in which the arc welder or cutter grips in
doubtful condition, shall not be used. his hand, and the outer surfaces of the
(5) Hose couplings shall be of the type jaws of the holder, shall be fully insu-
that cannot be unlocked or discon- lated against the maximum voltage en-
nected by means of a straight pull countered to ground.
without rotary motion. (b) Welding cables and connectors. (1)
(6) Boxes used for the storage of gas All arc welding and cutting cables shall
hose shall be ventilated. be of the completely insulated, flexible
type, capable of handling the max-
(7) Hoses, cables, and other equip-
imum current requirements of the
ment shall be kept clear of passage-
work in progress, taking into account
ways, ladders and stairs.
the duty cycle under which the arc
(g) Torches. (1) Clogged torch tip welder or cutter is working.
openings shall be cleaned with suitable (2) Only cable free from repair or
cleaning wires, drills, or other devices splices for a minimum distance of 10
designed for such purpose. feet from the cable end to which the
(2) Torches in use shall be inspected electrode holder is connected shall be
at the beginning of each working shift used, except that cables with standard
for leaking shutoff valves, hose cou- insulated connectors or with splices
plings, and tip connections. Defective whose insulating quality is equal to
torches shall not be used. that of the cable are permitted.
(3) Torches shall be lighted by fric- (3) When it becomes necessary to con-
tion lighters or other approved devices, nect or splice lengths of cable one to
and not by matches or from hot work. another, substantial insulated connec-
(h) Regulators and gauges. Oxygen and tors of a capacity at least equivalent to
fuel gas pressure regulators, including that of the cable shall be used. If con-
their related gauges, shall be in proper nections are effected by means of cable
working order while in use. lugs, they shall be securely fastened to-
(i) Oil and grease hazards. Oxygen cyl- gether to give good electrical contact,
inders and fittings shall be kept away and the exposed metal parts of the lugs
from oil or grease. Cylinders, cylinder shall be completely insulated.
caps and valves, couplings, regulators, (4) Cables in need of repair shall not
hose, and apparatus shall be kept free be used. When a cable, other than the
from oil or greasy substances and shall cable lead referred to in paragraph
(b)(2) of this section, becomes worn to
not be handled with oily hands or
the extent of exposing bare conductors,
gloves. Oxygen shall not be directed at
the portion thus exposed shall be pro-
oily surfaces, greasy clothes, or within
tected by means of rubber and friction
a fuel oil or other storage tank or ves-
tape or other equivalent insulation.
sel.
(c) Ground returns and machine
(j) Additional rules. For additional de- grounding. (1) A ground return cable
tails not covered in this subpart, appli- shall have a safe current carrying ca-
cable technical portions of American pacity equal to or exceeding the speci-
National Standards Institute, Z49.1– fied maximum output capacity of the
1967, Safety in Welding and Cutting, arc welding or cutting unit which it
shall apply. services. When a single ground return
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, cable services more than one unit, its
1979, as amended at 55 FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990; safe current-carrying capacity shall
58 FR 35179, June 30, 1993] equal or exceed the total specified
240
maximum output capacities of all the (3) When the arc welder or cutter has
units which it services. occasion to leave his work or to stop
(2) Pipelines containing gases or work for any appreciable length of
flammable liquids, or conduits con- time, or when the arc welding or cut-
taining electrical circuits, shall not be ting machine is to be moved, the power
used as a ground return. For welding supply switch to the equipment shall
on natural gas pipelines, the technical be opened.
portions of regulations issued by the (4) Any faulty or defective equipment
Department of Transportation, Office shall be reported to the supervisor.
of Pipeline Safety, 49 CFR part 192, (5) See § 1926.406(c) for additional re-
Minimum Federal Safety Standards for quirements.
Gas Pipelines, shall apply. (e) Shielding. Whenever practicable,
(3) When a structure or pipeline is all arc welding and cutting operations
employed as a ground return circuit, it shall be shielded by noncombustible or
shall be determined that the required flameproof screens which will protect
electrical contact exists at all joints. employees and other persons working
The generation of an arc, sparks, or in the vicinity from the direct rays of
heat at any point shall cause rejection the arc.
of the structures as a ground circuit. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
(4) When a structure or pipeline is 1979, as amended at 51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986]
continuously employed as a ground re-
turn circuit, all joints shall be bonded, § 1926.352 Fire prevention.
and periodic inspections shall be con- (a) When practical, objects to be
ducted to ensure that no condition of welded, cut, or heated shall be moved
electrolysis or fire hazard exists by vir- to a designated safe location or, if the
tue of such use. objects to be welded, cut, or heated
(5) The frames of all arc welding and cannot be readily moved, all movable
cutting machines shall be grounded ei- fire hazards in the vicinity shall be
ther through a third wire in the cable taken to a safe place, or otherwise pro-
containing the circuit conductor or tected.
through a separate wire which is (b) If the object to be welded, cut, or
grounded at the source of the current. heated cannot be moved and if all the
Grounding circuits, other than by fire hazards cannot be removed, posi-
means of the structure, shall be tive means shall be taken to confine
checked to ensure that the circuit be- the heat, sparks, and slag, and to pro-
tween the ground and the grounded tect the immovable fire hazards from
power conductor has resistance low them.
enough to permit sufficient current to (c) No welding, cutting, or heating
flow to cause the fuse or circuit break- shall be done where the application of
er to interrupt the current. flammable paints, or the presence of
(6) All ground connections shall be other flammable compounds, or heavy
inspected to ensure that they are me- dust concentrations creates a hazard.
chanically strong and electrically ade- (d) Suitable fire extinguishing equip-
quate for the required current. ment shall be immediately available in
(d) Operating instructions. Employers the work area and shall be maintained
shall instruct employees in the safe in a state of readiness for instant use.
means of arc welding and cutting as (e) When the welding, cutting, or
follows: heating operation is such that normal
(1) When electrode holders are to be fire prevention precautions are not suf-
left unattended, the electrodes shall be ficient, additional personnel shall be
removed and the holders shall be so assigned to guard against fire while the
placed or protected that they cannot actual welding, cutting, or heating op-
make electrical contact with employ- eration is being performed, and for a
ees or conducting objects. sufficient period of time after comple-
(2) Hot electrode holders shall not be tion of the work to ensure that no pos-
dipped in water; to do so may expose sibility of fire exists. Such personnel
the arc welder or cutter to electric shall be instructed as to the specific
shock. anticipated fire hazards and how the
241
firefighting equipment provided is to § 1926.353 Ventilation and protection
be used. in welding, cutting, and heating.
(f) When welding, cutting, or heating (a) Mechanical ventilation. For pur-
is performed on walls, floors, and ceil- poses of this section, mechanical ven-
ings, since direct penetration of sparks tilation shall meet the following re-
or heat transfer may introduce a fire quirements:
hazard to an adjacent area, the same (1) Mechanical ventilation shall con-
precautions shall be taken on the oppo- sist of either general mechanical ven-
site side as are taken on the side on tilation systems or local exhaust sys-
which the welding is being performed. tems.
(g) For the elimination of possible (2) General mechanical ventilation
fire in enclosed spaces as a result of gas shall be of sufficient capacity and so
escaping through leaking or improp- arranged as to produce the number of
erly closed torch valves, the gas supply air changes necessary to maintain
to the torch shall be positively shut off welding fumes and smoke within safe
at some point outside the enclosed limits, as defined in subpart D of this
space whenever the torch is not to be part.
used or whenever the torch is left unat- (3) Local exhaust ventilation shall
tended for a substantial period of time, consist of freely movable hoods in-
such as during the lunch period. Over- tended to be placed by the welder or
night and at the change of shifts, the burner as close as practicable to the
torch and hose shall be removed from work. This system shall be of sufficient
the confined space. Open end fuel gas capacity and so arranged as to remove
fumes and smoke at the source and
and oxygen hoses shall be immediately
keep the concentration of them in the
removed from enclosed spaces when
breathing zone within safe limits as de-
they are disconnected from the torch fined in subpart D of this part.
or other gas-consuming device.
(4) Contaminated air exhausted from
(h) Except when the contents are a working space shall be discharged
being removed or transferred, drums, into the open air or otherwise clear of
pails, and other containers which con- the source of intake air.
tain or have contained flammable liq- (5) All air replacing that withdrawn
uids shall be kept closed. Empty con- shall be clean and respirable.
tainers shall be removed to a safe area (6) Oxygen shall not be used for ven-
apart from hot work operations or open tilation purposes, comfort cooling,
flames. blowing dust from clothing, or for
(i) Drums containers, or hollow cleaning the work area.
structures which have contained toxic (b) Welding, cutting, and heating in
or flammable substances shall, before confined spaces. (1) Except as provided
welding, cutting, or heating is under- in paragraph (b)(2) of this section, and
taken on them, either be filled with paragraph (c)(2) of this section, either
water or thoroughly cleaned of such general mechanical or local exhaust
substances and ventilated and tested. ventilation meeting the requirements
For welding, cutting and heating on of paragraph (a) of this section shall be
steel pipelines containing natural gas, provided whenever welding, cutting, or
the pertinent portions of regulations heating is performed in a confined
issued by the Department of Transpor- space.
tation, Office of Pipeline Safety, 49 (2) When sufficient ventilation can-
CFR part 192, Minimum Federal Safety not be obtained without blocking the
Standards for Gas Pipelines, shall means of access, employees in the con-
apply. fined space shall be protected by air
(j) Before heat is applied to a drum, line respirators in accordance with the
requirements of subpart E of this part,
container, or hollow structure, a vent
and an employee on the outside of such
or opening shall be provided for the re-
a confined space shall be assigned to
lease of any built-up pressure during maintain communication with those
the application of heat. working within it and to aid them in
an emergency.
242
(3) Lifelines. Where a welder must als shall be protected by air line res-
enter a confined space through a man- pirators in accordance with the re-
hole or other small opening, means quirements of subpart E of this part.
shall be provided for quickly removing (4) Other employees exposed to the
him in case of emergency. When safety same atmosphere as the welders or
belts and lifelines are used for this pur- burners shall be protected in the same
pose they shall be so attached to the manner as the welder or burner.
welder’s body that his body cannot be (d) Inert-gas metal-arc welding. (1)
jammed in a small exit opening. An at- Since the inert-gas metal-arc welding
tendant with a pre-planned rescue pro- process involves the production of
cedure shall be stationed outside to ob- ultra-violet radiation of intensities of 5
serve the welder at all times and be ca- to 30 times that produced during
pable of putting rescue operations into shielded metal-arc welding, the decom-
effect. position of chlorinated solvents by ul-
(c) Welding, cutting, or heating of met- traviolet rays, and the liberation of
als of toxic significance. (1) Welding, cut- toxic fumes and gases, employees shall
ting, or heating in any enclosed spaces not be permitted to engage in, or be ex-
involving the metals specified in this posed to the process until the following
subparagraph shall be performed with special precautions have been taken:
either general mechanical or local ex- (i) The use of chlorinated solvents
haust ventilation meeting the require- shall be kept at least 200 feet, unless
ments of paragraph (a) of this section: shielded, from the exposed arc, and sur-
(i) Zinc-bearing base or filler metals faces prepared with chlorinated sol-
or metals coated with zinc-bearing ma- vents shall be thoroughly dry before
terials; welding is permitted on such surfaces.
(ii) Lead base metals; (ii) Employees in the area not pro-
(iii) Cadmium-bearing filler mate- tected from the arc by screening shall
rials; be protected by filter lenses meeting
(iv) Chromium-bearing metals or the requirements of subpart E of this
metals coated with chromium-bearing part. When two or more welders are ex-
materials. posed to each other’s arc, filter lens
(2) Welding, cutting, or heating in goggles of a suitable type, meeting the
any enclosed spaces involving the met- requirements of subpart E of this part,
als specified in this subparagraph shall shall be worn under welding helmets.
be performed with local exhaust ven- Hand shields to protect the welder
tilation in accordance with the require- against flashes and radiant energy
ments of paragraph (a) of this section, shall be used when either the helmet is
or employees shall be protected by air lifted or the shield is removed.
line respirators in accordance with the (iii) Welders and other employees
requirements of subpart E of this part: who are exposed to radiation shall be
(i) Metals containing lead, other than suitably protected so that the skin is
as an impurity, or metals coated with covered completely to prevent burns
lead-bearing materials; and other damage by ultraviolet rays.
(ii) Cadmium-bearing or cadmium- Welding helmets and hand shields shall
coated base metals; be free of leaks and openings, and free
(iii) Metals coated with mercury- of highly reflective surfaces.
bearing metals; (iv) When inert-gas metal-arc weld-
(iv) Beryllium-containing base or ing is being performed on stainless
filler metals. Because of its high tox- steel, the requirements of paragraph
icity, work involving beryllium shall (c)(2) of this section shall be met to
be done with both local exhaust ven- protect against dangerous concentra-
tilation and air line respirators. tions of nitrogen dioxide.
(3) Employees performing such oper- (e) General welding, cutting, and heat-
ations in the open air shall be pro- ing. (1) Welding, cutting, and heating,
tected by filter-type respirators in ac- not involving conditions or materials
cordance with the requirements of sub- described in paragraph (b), (c), or (d) of
part E of this part, except that employ- this section, may normally be done
ees performing such operations on be- without mechanical ventilation or res-
ryllium-containing base or filler met- piratory protective equipment, but
243
where, because of unusual physical or Subpart K—Electrical
atmospheric conditions, an unsafe ac-
cumulation of contaminants exists, AUTHORITY: Sections 6 and 8 of the Occupa-
suitable mechanical ventilation or res- tional Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29
piratory protective equipment shall be U.S.C. 655 and 657); sec. 107, Contract Work
provided. Hours and Safety Standards Act (40 U.S.C.
(2) Employees performing any type of 333); Secretary of Labor’s Order No. 9–83 (48
FR 35736) or 1–90 (55 FR 9033), as applicable;
welding, cutting, or heating shall be
29 CFR part 1911.
protected by suitable eye protective
equipment in accordance with the re- SOURCE: 51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986, unless
otherwise noted.
quirements of subpart E of this part.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, GENERAL
1979, as amended at 55 FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990;
58 FR 35179, June 30, 1993] § 1926.400 Introduction.
This subpart addresses electrical
§ 1926.354 Welding, cutting, and heat- safety requirements that are necessary
ing in way of preservative coatings. for the practical safeguarding of em-
(a) Before welding, cutting, or heat- ployees involved in construction work
ing is commenced on any surface cov- and is divided into four major divisions
ered by a preservative coating whose and applicable definitions as follows:
flammability is not known, a test shall (a) Installation safety requirements. In-
be made by a competent person to de- stallation safety requirements are con-
termine its flammability. Preservative tained in §§ 1926.402 through 1926.408. In-
coatings shall be considered to be high- cluded in this category are electric
ly flammable when scrapings burn with equipment and installations used to
extreme rapidity. provide electric power and light on
jobsites.
(b) Precautions shall be taken to pre-
(b) Safety-related work practices. Safe-
vent ignition of highly flammable
ty-related work practices are contained
hardened preservative coatings. When
in §§ 1926.416 and 1926.417. In addition to
coatings are determined to be highly covering the hazards arising from the
flammable, they shall be stripped from use of electricity at jobsites, these reg-
the area to be heated to prevent igni- ulations also cover the hazards arising
tion. from the accidental contact, direct or
(c) Protection against toxic preserva- indirect, by employees with all ener-
tive coatings: (1) In enclosed spaces, all gized lines, above or below ground,
surfaces covered with toxic preserva- passing through or near the jobsite.
tives shall be stripped of all toxic coat- (c) Safety-related maintenance and en-
ings for a distance of at least 4 inches vironmental considerations. Safety-re-
from the area of heat application, or lated maintenance and environmental
the employees shall be protected by air considerations are contained in
line respirators, meeting the require- §§ 1926.431 and 1926.432.
ments of subpart E of this part. (d) Safety requirements for special
(2) In the open air, employees shall be equipment. Safety requirements for spe-
protected by a respirator, in accord- cial equipment are contained in
ance with requirements of subpart E of § 1926.441.
this part. (e) Definitions. Definitions applicable
(d) The preservative coatings shall be to this subpart are contained in
removed a sufficient distance from the § 1926.449.
area to be heated to ensure that the § 1926.401 [Reserved]
temperature of the unstripped metal
will not be appreciably raised. Artifi- INSTALLATION SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
cial cooling of the metal surrounding
the heating area may be used to limit § 1926.402 Applicability.
the size of the area required to be (a) Covered. Sections 1926.402 through
cleaned. 1926.408 contain installation safety re-
quirements for electrical equipment
244
and installations used to provide elec- (vii) Other factors which contribute
tric power and light at the jobsite. to the practical safeguarding of em-
These sections apply to installations, ployees using or likely to come in con-
both temporary and permanent, used tact with the equipment.
on the jobsite; but these sections do (2) Installation and use. Listed, la-
not apply to existing permanent instal- beled, or certified equipment shall be
lations that were in place before the installed and used in accordance with
construction activity commenced. instructions included in the listing, la-
NOTE: If the electrical installation is made beling, or certification.
in accordance with the National Electrical (c) Interrupting rating. Equipment in-
Code ANSI/NFPA 70–1984, exclusive of For- tended to break current shall have an
mal Interpretations and Tentative Interim
Amendments, it will be deemed to be in com-
interrupting rating at system voltage
pliance with §§ 1926.403 through 1926.408, ex- sufficient for the current that must be
cept for §§ 1926.404(b)(1) and 1926.405(a)(2)(ii) interrupted.
(E), (F), (G), and (J). (d) Mounting and cooling of equip-
(b) Not covered. Sections 1926.402 ment—(1) Mounting. Electric equipment
through 1926.408 do not cover installa- shall be firmly secured to the surface
tions used for the generation, trans- on which it is mounted. Wooden plugs
mission, and distribution of electric driven into holes in masonry, concrete,
energy, including related communica- plaster, or similar materials shall not
tion, metering, control, and trans- be used.
formation installations. (However, (2) Cooling. Electrical equipment
these regulations do cover portable and which depends upon the natural cir-
vehicle-mounted generators used to culation of air and convection prin-
provide power for equipment used at ciples for cooling of exposed surfaces
the jobsite.) See subpart V of this part shall be installed so that room air flow
for the construction of power distribu- over such surfaces is not prevented by
tion and transmission lines. walls or by adjacent installed equip-
§ 1926.403 General requirements. ment. For equipment designed for floor
mounting, clearance between top sur-
(a) Approval. All electrical conduc- faces and adjacent surfaces shall be
tors and equipment shall be approved. provided to dissipate rising warm air.
(b) Examination, installation, and use
Electrical equipment provided with
of equipment—(1) Examination. The em-
ventilating openings shall be installed
ployer shall ensure that electrical
equipment is free from recognized haz- so that walls or other obstructions do
ards that are likely to cause death or not prevent the free circulation of air
serious physical harm to employees. through the equipment.
Safety of equipment shall be deter- (e) Splices. Conductors shall be
mined on the basis of the following spliced or joined with splicing devices
considerations: designed for the use or by brazing,
(i) Suitability for installation and welding, or soldering with a fusible
use in conformity with the provisions metal or alloy. Soldered splices shall
of this subpart. Suitability of equip- first be so spliced or joined as to be me-
ment for an identified purpose may be chanically and electrically secure
evidenced by listing, labeling, or cer- without solder and then soldered. All
tification for that identified purpose. splices and joints and the free ends of
(ii) Mechanical strength and dura- conductors shall be covered with an in-
bility, including, for parts designed to sulation equivalent to that of the con-
enclose and protect other equipment, ductors or with an insulating device
the adequacy of the protection thus designed for the purpose.
provided. (f) Arcing parts. Parts of electric
(iii) Electrical insulation.
equipment which in ordinary operation
(iv) Heating effects under conditions
of use. produce arcs, sparks, flames, or molten
(v) Arcing effects. metal shall be enclosed or separated
(vi) Classification by type, size, volt- and isolated from all combustible ma-
age, current capacity, specific use. terial.
245
(g) Marking. Electrical equipment sible from locations other than the
shall not be used unless the manufac- back.
turer’s name, trademark, or other de-
scriptive marking by which the organi- TABLE K–1—WORKING CLEARANCES
zation responsible for the product may Minimum clear distance
be identified is placed on the equip- Nominal voltage to ground for conditions 1
ment and unless other markings are (a) (b) (c)
provided giving voltage, current, watt-
age, or other ratings as necessary. The Feet 2 Feet 2 Feet 2
marking shall be of sufficient dura- 0–150 ......................................... 3 3 3
151–600 ..................................... 3 31⁄2 4
bility to withstand the environment in-
1 Conditions (a), (b), and (c) are as follows: (a) Exposed live
volved. parts on one side and no live or grounded parts on the other
(h) Identification of disconnecting side of the working space, or exposed live parts on both sides
means and circuits. Each disconnecting effectively guarded by insulating material. Insulated wire or in-
sulated busbars operating at not over 300 volts are not con-
means required by this subpart for mo- sidered live parts. (b) Exposed live parts on one side and
tors and appliances shall be legibly grounded parts on the other side. (c) Exposed live parts on
both sides of the workspace [not guarded as provided in Con-
marked to indicate its purpose, unless dition (a)] with the operator between.
2 Note: For International System of Units (SI): one
located and arranged so the purpose is foot=0.3048m.
evident. Each service, feeder, and
branch circuit, at its disconnecting (ii) Clear spaces. Working space re-
means or overcurrent device, shall be quired by this subpart shall not be used
legibly marked to indicate its purpose, for storage. When normally enclosed
unless located and arranged so the pur- live parts are exposed for inspection or
pose is evident. These markings shall servicing, the working space, if in a
be of sufficient durability to withstand passageway or general open space,
the environment involved. shall be guarded.
(i) 600 Volts, nominal, or less. This (iii) Access and entrance to working
paragraph applies to equipment oper- space. At least one entrance shall be
ating at 600 volts, nominal, or less. provided to give access to the working
(1) Working space about electric equip- space about electric equipment.
ment. Sufficient access and working (iv) Front working space. Where there
space shall be provided and maintained are live parts normally exposed on the
about all electric equipment to permit front of switchboards or motor control
ready and safe operation and mainte- centers, the working space in front of
nance of such equipment. such equipment shall not be less than 3
(i) Working clearances. Except as re- feet (914 mm).
quired or permitted elsewhere in this (v) Headroom. The minimum head-
subpart, the dimension of the working room of working spaces about service
space in the direction of access to live equipment, switchboards, panelboards,
parts operating at 600 volts or less and or motor control centers shall be 6 feet
likely to require examination, adjust- 3 inches (1.91 m).
ment, servicing, or maintenance while (2) Guarding of live parts. (i) Except as
alive shall not be less than indicated in required or permitted elsewhere in this
Table K–1. In addition to the dimen- subpart, live parts of electric equip-
sions shown in Table K–1, workspace ment operating at 50 volts or more
shall not be less than 30 inches (762 shall be guarded against accidental
mm) wide in front of the electric equip- contact by cabinets or other forms of
ment. Distances shall be measured enclosures, or by any of the following
from the live parts if they are exposed, means:
or from the enclosure front or opening (A) By location in a room, vault, or
if the live parts are enclosed. Walls similar enclosure that is accessible
constructed of concrete, brick, or tile only to qualified persons.
are considered to be grounded. Working (B) By partitions or screens so ar-
space is not required in back of assem- ranged that only qualified persons will
blies such as dead-front switchboards have access to the space within reach
or motor control centers where there of the live parts. Any openings in such
are no renewable or adjustable parts partitions or screens shall be so sized
such as fuses or switches on the back and located that persons are not likely
and where all connections are acces- to come into accidental contact with
246
the live parts or to bring conducting shall be made with metal-enclosed
objects into contact with them. equipment or shall be enclosed in a
(C) By location on a balcony, gallery, vault or in an area, access to which is
or platform so elevated and arranged as controlled by a lock. Metal-enclosed
to exclude unqualified persons. switchgear, unit substations, trans-
(D) By elevation of 8 feet (2.44 m) or formers, pull boxes, connection boxes,
more above the floor or other working and other similar associated equipment
surface and so installed as to exclude shall be marked with appropriate cau-
unqualified persons. tion signs. If equipment is exposed to
(ii) In locations where electric equip- physical damage from vehicular traffic,
ment would be exposed to physical guards shall be provided to prevent
damage, enclosures or guards shall be
such damage. Ventilating or similar
so arranged and of such strength as to
openings in metal-enclosed equipment
prevent such damage.
(iii) Entrances to rooms and other shall be designed so that foreign ob-
guarded locations containing exposed jects inserted through these openings
live parts shall be marked with con- will be deflected from energized parts.
spicuous warning signs forbidding un- (3) Workspace about equipment. Suffi-
qualified persons to enter. cient space shall be provided and main-
(j) Over 600 volts, nominal—(1) General. tained about electric equipment to per-
Conductors and equipment used on cir- mit ready and safe operation and main-
cuits exceeding 600 volts, nominal, tenance of such equipment. Where en-
shall comply with all applicable provi- ergized parts are exposed, the min-
sions of paragraphs (a) through (g) of imum clear workspace shall not be less
this section and with the following pro- than 6 feet 6 inches (1.98 m) high (meas-
visions which supplement or modify ured vertically from the floor or plat-
those requirements. The provisions of form), or less than 3 feet (914 mm) wide
paragraphs (j)(2), (j)(3), and (j)(4) of this (measured parallel to the equipment).
section do not apply to equipment on The depth shall be as required in Table
the supply side of the service conduc- K–2. The workspace shall be adequate
tors. to permit at least a 90-degree opening
(2) Enclosure for electrical installations. of doors or hinged panels.
Electrical installations in a vault,
(i) Working space. The minimum clear
room, closet or in an area surrounded
working space in front of electric
by a wall, screen, or fence, access to
equipment such as switchboards, con-
which is controlled by lock and key or
other equivalent means, are considered trol panels, switches, circuit breakers,
to be accessible to qualified persons motor controllers, relays, and similar
only. A wall, screen, or fence less than equipment shall not be less than speci-
8 feet (2.44 m) in height is not consid- fied in Table K–2 unless otherwise spec-
ered adequate to prevent access unless ified in this subpart. Distances shall be
it has other features that provide a de- measured from the live parts if they
gree of isolation equivalent to an 8-foot are exposed, or from the enclosure
(2.44-m) fence. The entrances to all front or opening if the live parts are
buildings, rooms or enclosures con- enclosed. However, working space is
taining exposed live parts or exposed not required in back of equipment such
conductors operating at over 600 volts, as deadfront switchboards or control
nominal, shall be kept locked or shall assemblies where there are no renew-
be under the observation of a qualified able or adjustable parts (such as fuses
person at all times. or switches) on the back and where all
(i) Installations accessible to qualified connections are accessible from loca-
persons only. Electrical installations tions other than the back. Where rear
having exposed live parts shall be ac- access is required to work on de-ener-
cessible to qualified persons only and gized parts on the back of enclosed
shall comply with the applicable provi- equipment, a minimum working space
sions of paragraph (j)(3) of this section. of 30 inches (762 mm) horizontally shall
(ii) Installations accessible to unquali-
be provided.
fied persons. Electrical installations
that are open to unqualified persons
247
TABLE K–2—MINIMUM DEPTH OF CLEAR WORK- cent to such entrance, they shall be
ING SPACE IN FRONT OF ELECTRIC EQUIP- guarded.
MENT
[51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986, as amended at 61
Conditions 1
FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996]
Nominal voltage to ground
(a) (b) (c) § 1926.404 Wiring design and protec-
tion.
Feet 2 Feet 2 Feet 2
601 to 2,500 .............................. 3 4 5 (a) Use and identification of grounded
2,501 to 9,000 ........................... 4 5 6 and grounding conductors—(1) Identifica-
9,001 to 25,000 ......................... 5 6 9 tion of conductors. A conductor used as
25,001 to 75 kV ......................... 6 8 10 a grounded conductor shall be identifi-
Above 75kV ............................... 8 10 12 able and distinguishable from all other
1Conditions (a), (b), and (c) are as follows: (a) Exposed live conductors. A conductor used as an
parts on one side and no live or grounded parts on the other equipment grounding conductor shall
side of the working space, or exposed live parts on both sides
effectively guarded by insulating materials. Insulated wire or be identifiable and distinguishable
insulated busbars operating at not over 300 volts are not con- from all other conductors.
sidered live parts. (b) Exposed live parts on one side and
grounded parts on the other side. Walls constructed of con- (2) Polarity of connections. No ground-
crete, brick, or tile are considered to be grounded surfaces. ed conductor shall be attached to any
(c) Exposed live parts on both sides of the workspace [not
guarded as provided in Condition (a)] with the operator be- terminal or lead so as to reverse des-
tween.
2 NOTE: For SI units: one foot=0.3048 m.
ignated polarity.
(3) Use of grounding terminals and de-
(ii) Lighting outlets and points of con- vices. A grounding terminal or ground-
trol. The lighting outlets shall be so ar- ing-type device on a receptacle, cord
ranged that persons changing lamps or connector, or attachment plug shall
making repairs on the lighting system not be used for purposes other than
will not be endangered by live parts or grounding.
other equipment. The points of control (b) Branch circuits—(1) Ground-fault
shall be so located that persons are not protection—(i) General. The employer
likely to come in contact with any live shall use either ground fault circuit in-
part or moving part of the equipment terrupters as specified in paragraph
while turning on the lights. (b)(1)(ii) of this section or an assured
(iii) Elevation of unguarded live parts. equipment grounding conductor pro-
Unguarded live parts above working gram as specified in paragraph
space shall be maintained at elevations (b)(1)(iii) of this section to protect em-
not less than specified in Table K–3. ployees on construction sites. These re-
quirements are in addition to any
TABLE K–3—ELEVATION OF UNGUARDED other requirements for equipment
ENERGIZED PARTS ABOVE WORKING SPACE grounding conductors.
(ii) Ground-fault circuit interrupters.
Nominal voltage between Minimum elevation All 120-volt, single-phase, 15- and 20-
phases
ampere receptacle outlets on construc-
601–7,500 .............................. 8 feet 6 inches. 1 tion sites, which are not a part of the
7,501–35,000 ......................... 9 feet. permanent wiring of the building or
Over 35kV .............................. 9 feet+0.37 inches per kV
above 35kV.
structure and which are in use by em-
ployees, shall have approved ground-
1 NOTE: For SI units: one inch=25.4 mm; one foot=0.3048
m.
fault circuit interrupters for personnel
protection. Receptacles on a two-wire,
(4) Entrance and access to workspace. single-phase portable or vehicle-
At least one entrance not less than 24 mounted generator rated not more
inches (610 mm) wide and 6 feet 6 inches than 5kW, where the circuit conductors
(1.98 m) high shall be provided to give of the generator are insulated from the
access to the working space about elec- generator frame and all other grounded
tric equipment. On switchboard and surfaces, need not be protected with
control panels exceeding 48 inches (1.22 ground-fault circuit interrupters.
m) in width, there shall be one en- (iii) Assured equipment grounding con-
trance at each end of such board where ductor program. The employer shall es-
practicable. Where bare energized parts tablish and implement an assured
at any voltage or insulated energized equipment grounding conductor pro-
parts above 600 volts are located adja- gram on construction sites covering all
248
cord sets, receptacles which are not a (F) The employer shall not make
part of the building or structure, and available or permit the use by employ-
equipment connected by cord and plug ees of any equipment which has not
which are available for use or used by met the requirements of this paragraph
employees. This program shall comply (b)(1)(iii) of this section.
with the following minimum require- (G) Tests performed as required in
ments: this paragraph shall be recorded. This
(A) A written description of the pro- test record shall identify each recep-
gram, including the specific procedures tacle, cord set, and cord- and plug-con-
adopted by the employer, shall be nected equipment that passed the test
available at the jobsite for inspection and shall indicate the last date it was
and copying by the Assistant Secretary tested or the interval for which it was
and any affected employee. tested. This record shall be kept by
(B) The employer shall designate one means of logs, color coding, or other ef-
or more competent persons (as defined fective means and shall be maintained
in § 1926.32(f)) to implement the pro- until replaced by a more current
gram. record. The record shall be made avail-
(C) Each cord set, attachment cap, able on the jobsite for inspection by
plug and receptacle of cord sets, and the Assistant Secretary and any af-
any equipment connected by cord and fected employee.
plug, except cord sets and receptacles (2) Outlet devices. Outlet devices shall
which are fixed and not exposed to have an ampere rating not less than
damage, shall be visually inspected be- the load to be served and shall comply
fore each day’s use for external defects, with the following:
such as deformed or missing pins or in- (i) Single receptacles. A single recep-
sulation damage, and for indications of tacle installed on an individual branch
possible internal damage. Equipment circuit shall have an ampere rating of
found damaged or defective shall not not less than that of the branch cir-
be used until repaired. cuit.
(D) The following tests shall be per- (ii) Two or more receptacles. Where
formed on all cord sets, receptacles connected to a branch circuit sup-
which are not a part of the permanent plying two or more receptacles or out-
wiring of the building or structure, and lets, receptacle ratings shall conform
cord- and plug-connected equipment re- to the values listed in Table K–4.
quired to be grounded: (iii) Receptacles used for the connection
(1) All equipment grounding conduc- of motors. The rating of an attachment
tors shall be tested for continuity and plug or receptacle used for cord- and
shall be electrically continuous. plug-connection of a motor to a branch
(2) Each receptacle and attachment circuit shall not exceed 15 amperes at
cap or plug shall be tested for correct 125 volts or 10 amperes at 250 volts if
attachment of the equipment ground- individual overload protection is omit-
ing conductor. The equipment ground- ted.
ing conductor shall be connected to its TABLE K–4—RECEPTACLE RATINGS FOR
proper terminal. VARIOUS SIZE CIRCUITS
(E) All required tests shall be per-
formed: Circuit rating amperes Receptacle
rating amperes
(1) Before first use;
(2) Before equipment is returned to 15 ................................................................... Not over 15.
service following any repairs; 20 ................................................................... 15 or 20.
30 ................................................................... 30.
(3) Before equipment is used after 40 ................................................................... 40 or 50.
any incident which can be reasonably 50 ................................................................... 50.
suspected to have caused damage (for
example, when a cord set is run over); (c) Outside conductors and lamps—(1)
and 600 volts, nominal, or less. Paragraphs
(4) At intervals not to exceed 3 (c)(1)(i) through (c)(1)(iv) of this sec-
months, except that cord sets and re- tion apply to branch circuit, feeder,
ceptacles which are fixed and not ex- and service conductors rated 600 volts,
posed to damage shall be tested at in- nominal, or less and run outdoors as
tervals not exceeding 6 months. open conductors.
249
(i) Conductors on poles. Conductors vertical or diagonal clearance of not
supported on poles shall provide a hori- less than 3 feet (914 mm), or
zontal climbing space not less than the (C) Where the voltage between con-
following: ductors is 300 volts or less and the roof
(A) Power conductors below commu- has a slope of not less than 4 inches (102
nication conductors—30 inches (762 mm) in 12 inches (305 mm), the clear-
mm) . ance from roofs shall be at least 3 feet
(B) Power conductors alone or above (914 mm), or
communication conductors: 300 volts or (D) Where the voltage between con-
less—24 inches (610 mm); more than 300 ductors is 300 volts or less and the con-
volts—30 inches (762 mm). ductors do not pass over more than 4
(C) Communication conductors below feet (1.22 m) of the overhang portion of
power conductors: with power conduc- the roof and they are terminated at a
tors 300 volts or less—24 inches (610 through-the-roof raceway or support,
mm); more than 300 volts—30 inches the clearance from roofs shall be at
(762 mm). least 18 inches (457 mm).
(ii) Clearance from ground. Open con- (2) Location of outdoor lamps. Lamps
ductors shall conform to the following for outdoor lighting shall be located
minimum clearances: below all live conductors, trans-
(A) 10 feet (3.05 m)—above finished formers, or other electric equipment,
grade, sidewalks, or from any platform unless such equipment is controlled by
or projection from which they might be a disconnecting means that can be
reached. locked in the open position or unless
(B) 12 feet (3.66 m)—over areas sub- adequate clearances or other safe-
ject to vehicular traffic other than guards are provided for relamping oper-
truck traffic. ations.
(C) 15 feet (4.57 m)—over areas other (d) Services—(1) Disconnecting means—
than those specified in paragraph (i) General. Means shall be provided to
(c)(1)(ii)(D) of this section that are sub- disconnect all conductors in a building
ject to truck traffic. or other structure from the service-en-
(D) 18 feet (5.49 m)—over public trance conductors. The disconnecting
streets, alleys, roads, and driveways. means shall plainly indicate whether it
(iii) Clearance from building openings. is in the open or closed position and
Conductors shall have a clearance of at shall be installed at a readily acces-
least 3 feet (914 mm) from windows, sible location nearest the point of en-
doors, fire escapes, or similar loca- trance of the service-entrance conduc-
tions. Conductors run above the top tors.
level of a window are considered to be (ii) Simultaneous opening of poles.
out of reach from that window and, Each service disconnecting means shall
therefore, do not have to be 3 feet (914 simultaneously disconnect all
mm) away. ungrounded conductors.
(iv) Clearance over roofs. Conductors (2) Services over 600 volts, nominal. The
above roof space accessible to employ- following additional requirements
ees on foot shall have a clearance from apply to services over 600 volts, nomi-
the highest point of the roof surface of nal.
not less than 8 feet (2.44 m) vertical (i) Guarding. Service-entrance con-
clearance for insulated conductors, not ductors installed as open wires shall be
less than 10 feet (3.05 m) vertical or di- guarded to make them accessible only
agonal clearance for covered conduc- to qualified persons.
tors, and not less than 15 feet (4.57 m) (ii) Warning signs. Signs warning of
for bare conductors, except that: high voltage shall be posted where un-
(A) Where the roof space is also ac- authorized employees might come in
cessible to vehicular traffic, the contact with live parts.
vertical clearance shall not be less (e) Overcurrent protection—(1) 600
than 18 feet (5.49 m), or volts, nominal, or less. The following re-
(B) Where the roof space is not nor- quirements apply to overcurrent pro-
mally accessible to employees on foot, tection of circuits rated 600 volts,
fully insulated conductors shall have a nominal, or less.
250
(i) Protection of conductors and equip- (1) Systems to be grounded. The fol-
ment. Conductors and equipment shall lowing systems which supply premises
be protected from overcurrent in ac- wiring shall be grounded:
cordance with their ability to safely (i) Three-wire DC systems. All 3-wire
conduct current. Conductors shall have DC systems shall have their neutral
sufficient ampacity to carry the load. conductor grounded.
(ii) Grounded conductors. Except for (ii) Two-wire DC systems. Two-wire DC
motor-running overload protection, systems operating at over 50 volts
overcurrent devices shall not interrupt through 300 volts between conductors
the continuity of the grounded con- shall be grounded unless they are rec-
ductor unless all conductors of the cir- tifier-derived from an AC system com-
cuit are opened simultaneously. plying with paragraphs (f)(1)(iii),
(iii) Disconnection of fuses and thermal (f)(1)(iv), and (f)(1)(v) of this section.
cutouts. Except for devices provided for (iii) AC circuits, less than 50 volts. AC
current-limiting on the supply side of circuits of less than 50 volts shall be
the service disconnecting means, all grounded if they are installed as over-
cartridge fuses which are accessible to head conductors outside of buildings or
other than qualified persons and all if they are supplied by transformers
fuses and thermal cutouts on circuits and the transformer primary supply
over 150 volts to ground shall be pro- system is ungrounded or exceeds 150
vided with disconnecting means. This volts to ground.
disconnecting means shall be installed (iv) AC systems, 50 volts to 1000 volts.
so that the fuse or thermal cutout can AC systems of 50 volts to 1000 volts
be disconnected from its supply with- shall be grounded under any of the fol-
out disrupting service to equipment lowing conditions, unless exempted by
and circuits unrelated to those pro- paragraph (f)(1)(v) of this section:
tected by the overcurrent device. (A) If the system can be so grounded
(iv) Location in or on premises. Over- that the maximum voltage to ground
current devices shall be readily acces- on the ungrounded conductors does not
sible. Overcurrent devices shall not be exceed 150 volts;
located where they could create an em- (B) If the system is nominally rated
ployee safety hazard by being exposed 480Y/277 volt, 3-phase, 4-wire in which
to physical damage or located in the the neutral is used as a circuit con-
vicinity of easily ignitible material. ductor;
(v) Arcing or suddenly moving parts. (C) If the system is nominally rated
Fuses and circuit breakers shall be so 240/120 volt, 3-phase, 4-wire in which
located or shielded that employees will the midpoint of one phase is used as a
not be burned or otherwise injured by circuit conductor; or
their operation. (D) If a service conductor is
(vi) Circuit breakers—(A) Circuit uninsulated.
breakers shall clearly indicate whether (v) Exceptions. AC systems of 50 volts
they are in the open (off) or closed (on) to 1000 volts are not required to be
position. grounded if the system is separately
(B) Where circuit breaker handles on derived and is supplied by a trans-
switchboards are operated vertically former that has a primary voltage rat-
rather than horizontally or ing less than 1000 volts, provided all of
rotationally, the up position of the the following conditions are met:
handle shall be the closed (on) position. (A) The system is used exclusively
(C) If used as switches in 120-volt, flu- for control circuits,
orescent lighting circuits, circuit (B) The conditions of maintenance
breakers shall be marked ‘‘SWD.’’ and supervision assure that only quali-
(2) Over 600 volts, nominal. Feeders fied persons will service the installa-
and branch circuits over 600 volts, tion,
nominal, shall have short-circuit pro- (C) Continuity of control power is re-
tection. quired, and
(f) Grounding. Paragraphs (f)(1) (D) Ground detectors are installed on
through (f)(11) of this section contain the control system.
grounding requirements for systems, (2) Separately derived systems. Where
circuits, and equipment. paragraph (f)(1) of this section requires
251
grounding of wiring systems whose circuit conductor to the grounding
power is derived from generator, trans- electrode. Both the equipment ground-
former, or converter windings and has ing conductor and the grounding elec-
no direct electrical connection, includ- trode conductor shall be connected to
ing a solidly connected grounded cir- the grounded circuit conductor on the
cuit conductor, to supply conductors supply side of the service disconnecting
originating in another system, para- means, or on the supply side of the sys-
graph (f)(5) of this section shall also tem disconnecting means or overcur-
apply. rent devices if the system is separately
(3) Portable and vehicle-mounted gen- derived.
erators—(i) Portable generators. Under (ii) Ungrounded systems. For an
the following conditions, the frame of a ungrounded service-supplied system,
portable generator need not be ground- the equipment grounding conductor
ed and may serve as the grounding shall be connected to the grounding
electrode for a system supplied by the electrode conductor at the service
generator: equipment. For an ungrounded sepa-
(A) The generator supplies only rately derived system, the equipment
equipment mounted on the generator grounding conductor shall be con-
and/or cord- and plug-connected equip- nected to the grounding electrode con-
ment through receptacles mounted on ductor at, or ahead of, the system dis-
the generator, and connecting means or overcurrent de-
(B) The noncurrent-carrying metal vices.
parts of equipment and the equipment (6) Grounding path. The path to
grounding conductor terminals of the ground from circuits, equipment, and
receptacles are bonded to the generator enclosures shall be permanent and con-
frame. tinuous.
(ii) Vehicle-mounted generators. Under (7) Supports, enclosures, and equipment
the following conditions the frame of a to be grounded—(i) Supports and enclo-
vehicle may serve as the grounding sures for conductors. Metal cable trays,
electrode for a system supplied by a metal raceways, and metal enclosures
generator located on the vehicle: for conductors shall be grounded, ex-
(A) The frame of the generator is cept that:
bonded to the vehicle frame, and (A) Metal enclosures such as sleeves
(B) The generator supplies only that are used to protect cable assem-
equipment located on the vehicle and/ blies from physical damage need not be
or cord- and plug-connected equipment grounded; and
through receptacles mounted on the (B) Metal enclosures for conductors
vehicle or on the generator, and added to existing installations of open
(C) The noncurrent-carrying metal wire, knob-and-tube wiring, and non-
parts of equipment and the equipment metallic-sheathed cable need not be
grounding conductor terminals of the grounded if all of the following condi-
receptacles are bonded to the generator tions are met:
frame, and (1) Runs are less than 25 feet (7.62 m);
(D) The system complies with all (2) Enclosures are free from probable
other provisions of this section. contact with ground, grounded metal,
(iii) Neutral conductor bonding. A neu- metal laths, or other conductive mate-
tral conductor shall be bonded to the rials; and
generator frame if the generator is a (3) Enclosures are guarded against
component of a separately derived sys- employee contact.
tem. No other conductor need be bond- (ii) Service equipment enclosures. Metal
ed to the generator frame. enclosures for service equipment shall
(4) Conductors to be grounded. For AC be grounded.
premises wiring systems the identified (iii) Fixed equipment. Exposed noncur-
conductor shall be grounded. rent-carrying metal parts of fixed
(5) Grounding connections—(i) Ground- equipment which may become ener-
ed system. For a grounded system, a gized shall be grounded under any of
grounding electrode conductor shall be the following conditions:
used to connect both the equipment (A) If within 8 feet (2.44 m) vertically
grounding conductor and the grounded or 5 feet (1.52 m) horizontally of ground
252
or grounded metal objects and subject (4) Tools likely to be used in wet and/
to employee contact. or conductive locations; and
(B) If located in a wet or damp loca- (5) Portable hand lamps.
tion and subject to employee contact. (6) Tools likely to be used in wet and/
(C) If in electrical contact with or conductive locations need not be
metal. grounded if supplied through an iso-
(D) If in a hazardous (classified) loca- lating transformer with an ungrounded
tion. secondary of not over 50 volts. Listed
(E) If supplied by a metal-clad, or labeled portable tools and appli-
metal-sheathed, or grounded metal ances protected by a system of double
raceway wiring method. insulation, or its equivalent, need not
(F) If equipment operates with any be grounded. If such a system is em-
terminal at over 150 volts to ground; ployed, the equipment shall be distinc-
however, the following need not be tively marked to indicate that the tool
grounded: or appliance utilizes a system of double
(1) Enclosures for switches or circuit insulation.
breakers used for other than service (v) Nonelectrical equipment. The metal
equipment and accessible to qualified parts of the following nonelectrical
persons only; equipment shall be grounded: Frames
(2) Metal frames of electrically heat- and tracks of electrically operated
ed appliances which are permanently
cranes; frames of nonelectrically driv-
and effectively insulated from ground;
en elevator cars to which electric con-
and
ductors are attached; hand-operated
(3) The cases of distribution appa-
metal shifting ropes or cables of elec-
ratus such as transformers and capaci-
tric elevators, and metal partitions,
tors mounted on wooden poles at a
grill work, and similar metal enclo-
height exceeding 8 feet (2.44 m) above
sures around equipment of over IkV be-
ground or grade level.
tween conductors.
(iv) Equipment connected by cord and
plug. Under any of the conditions de- (8) Methods of grounding equipment—
scribed in paragraphs (f)(7)(iv)(A) (i) With circuit conductors. Noncurrent-
through (f)(7)(iv)(C) of this section, ex- carrying metal parts of fixed equip-
posed noncurrent-carrying metal parts ment, if required to be grounded by
of cord- and plug-connected equipment this subpart, shall be grounded by an
which may become energized shall be equipment grounding conductor which
grounded: is contained within the same raceway,
(A) If in a hazardous (classified) loca- cable, or cord, or runs with or encloses
tion (see § 1926.407). the circuit conductors. For DC circuits
(B) If operated at over 150 volts to only, the equipment grounding con-
ground, except for guarded motors and ductor may be run separately from the
metal frames of electrically heated ap- circuit conductors.
pliances if the appliance frames are (ii) Grounding conductor. A conductor
permanently and effectively insulated used for grounding fixed or movable
from ground. equipment shall have capacity to con-
(C) If the equipment is one of the duct safely any fault current which
types listed in paragraphs may be imposed on it.
(f)(7)(iv)(C)(1) through (f)(7)(iv)(C)(5) of (iii) Equipment considered effectively
this section. However, even though the grounded. Electric equipment is consid-
equipment may be one of these types, ered to be effectively grounded if it is
it need not be grounded if it is exempt- secured to, and in electrical contact
ed by paragraph (f)(7)(iv)(C)(6). with, a metal rack or structure that is
(1) Hand held motor-operated tools; provided for its support and the metal
(2) Cord- and plug-connected equip- rack or structure is grounded by the
ment used in damp or wet locations or method specified for the noncurrent-
by employees standing on the ground carrying metal parts of fixed equip-
or on metal floors or working inside of ment in paragraph (f)(8)(i) of this sec-
metal tanks or boilers; tion. Metal car frames supported by
(3) Portable and mobile X-ray and as- metal hoisting cables attached to or
sociated equipment; running over metal sheaves or drums of
253
grounded elevator machines are also tem neutral impedance is connected
considered to be effectively grounded. shall be isolated from and separated in
(9) Bonding. If bonding conductors are the ground by at least 20 feet (6.1 m)
used to assure electrical continuity, from any other system or equipment
they shall have the capacity to conduct grounding electrode, and there shall be
any fault current which may be im- no direct connection between the
posed. grounding electrodes, such as buried
(10) Made electrodes. If made elec- pipe, fence or like objects.
trodes are used, they shall be free from (iii) Grounding of equipment. All non-
nonconductive coatings, such as paint current-carrying metal parts of port-
or enamel; and, if practicable, they able equipment and fixed equipment in-
shall be embedded below permanent cluding their associated fences,
moisture level. A single electrode con- housings, enclosures, and supporting
sisting of a rod, pipe or plate which has structures shall be grounded. However,
a resistance to ground greater than 25 equipment which is guarded by loca-
ohms shall be augmented by one addition and isolated from ground need not
tional electrode installed no closer be grounded. Additionally, pole-mount-
than 6 feet (1.83 m) to the first elec- ed distribution apparatus at a height
trode. exceeding 8 feet (2.44 m) above ground
(11) Grounding of systems and circuits or grade level need not be grounded.
of 1000 volts and over (high voltage)—(i)
General. If high voltage systems are [51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986, as amended at 54
grounded, they shall comply with all FR 24334, June 7, 1989; 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13,
applicable provisions of paragraphs 1996]
(f)(1) through (f)(10) of this section as
§ 1926.405 Wiring methods, compo-
supplemented and modified by this nents, and equipment for general
paragraph (f)(11). use.
(ii) Grounding of systems supplying
portable or mobile equipment. Systems (a) Wiring methods. The provisions of
supplying portable or mobile high volt- this paragraph do not apply to conduc-
age equipment, other than substations tors which form an integral part of
installed on a temporary basis, shall equipment such as motors, controllers,
comply with the following: motor control centers and like equip-
(A) Portable and mobile high voltage ment.
equipment shall be supplied from a sys- (1) General requirements—(i) Electrical
tem having its neutral grounded continuity of metal raceways and enclo-
through an impedance. If a delta-con- sures. Metal raceways, cable armor, and
nected high voltage system is used to other metal enclosures for conductors
supply the equipment, a system neu- shall be metallically joined together
tral shall be derived. into a continuous electric conductor
(B) Exposed noncurrent-carrying and shall be so connected to all boxes,
metal parts of portable and mobile fittings, and cabinets as to provide ef-
equipment shall be connected by an fective electrical continuity.
equipment grounding conductor to the (ii) Wiring in ducts. No wiring systems
point at which the system neutral im- of any type shall be installed in ducts
pedance is grounded. used to transport dust, loose stock or
(C) Ground-fault detection and relay- flammable vapors. No wiring system of
ing shall be provided to automatically any type shall be installed in any duct
de-energize any high voltage system used for vapor removal or in any shaft
component which has developed a containing only such ducts.
ground fault. The continuity of the (2) Temporary wiring—(i) Scope. The
equipment grounding conductor shall provisions of paragraph (a)(2) of this
be continuously monitored so as to de- section apply to temporary electrical
energize automatically the high volt- power and lighting wiring methods
age feeder to the portable equipment which may be of a class less than would
upon loss of continuity of the equip- be required for a permanent installa-
ment grounding conductor. tion. Except as specifically modified in
(D) The grounding electrode to which paragraph (a)(2) of this section, all
the portable or mobile equipment sys- other requirements of this subpart for
254
permanent wiring shall apply to tem- (G) Portable electric lighting used in
porary wiring installations. Temporary wet and/or other conductive locations,
wiring shall be removed immediately as for example, drums, tanks, and ves-
upon completion of construction or the sels, shall be operated at 12 volts or
purpose for which the wiring was in- less. However, 120-volt lights may be
stalled. used if protected by a ground-fault cir-
(ii) General requirements for temporary cuit interrupter.
wiring—(A) Feeders shall originate in a (H) A box shall be used wherever a
distribution center. The conductors change is made to a raceway system or
shall be run as multiconductor cord or a cable system which is metal clad or
cable assemblies or within raceways; metal sheathed.
or, where not subject to physical dam- (I) Flexible cords and cables shall be
age, they may be run as open conduc- protected from damage. Sharp corners
tors on insulators not more than 10 feet and projections shall be avoided. Flexi-
(3.05 m) apart. ble cords and cables may pass through
(B) Branch circuits shall originate in doorways or other pinch points, if pro-
a power outlet or panelboard. Conduc- tection is provided to avoid damage.
tors shall be run as multiconductor (J) Extension cord sets used with
cord or cable assemblies or open con- portable electric tools and appliances
ductors, or shall be run in raceways. shall be of three-wire type and shall be
All conductors shall be protected by designed for hard or extra-hard usage.
overcurrent devices at their ampacity. Flexible cords used with temporary and
Runs of open conductors shall be lo- portable lights shall be designed for
cated where the conductors will not be hard or extra-hard usage.
subject to physical damage, and the NOTE: The National Electrical Code, ANSI/
conductors shall be fastened at inter- NFPA 70, in Article 400, Table 400–4, lists
vals not exceeding 10 feet (3.05 m). No various types of flexible cords, some of which
branch-circuit conductors shall be laid are noted as being designed for hard or extra-
on the floor. Each branch circuit that hard usage. Examples of these types of flexi-
supplies receptacles or fixed equipment ble cords include hard service cord (types S,
shall contain a separate equipment ST, SO, STO) and junior hard service cord
(types SJ, SJO, SJT, SJTO).
grounding conductor if the branch cir-
cuit is run as open conductors. (iii) Guarding. For temporary wiring
(C) Receptacles shall be of the over 600 volts, nominal, fencing, bar-
grounding type. Unless installed in a riers, or other effective means shall be
complete metallic raceway, each provided to prevent access of other
branch circuit shall contain a separate than authorized and qualified per-
equipment grounding conductor, and sonnel.
all receptacles shall be electrically (b) Cabinets, boxes, and fittings—(1)
connected to the grounding conductor. Conductors entering boxes, cabinets, or
Receptacles for uses other than tem- fittings. Conductors entering boxes,
porary lighting shall not be installed cabinets, or fittings shall be protected
on branch circuits which supply tem- from abrasion, and openings through
porary lighting. Receptacles shall not which conductors enter shall be effec-
be connected to the same ungrounded tively closed. Unused openings in cabi-
conductor of multiwire circuits which nets, boxes, and fittings shall also be
supply temporary lighting. effectively closed.
(D) Disconnecting switches or plug (2) Covers and canopies. All pull boxes,
connectors shall be installed to permit junction boxes, and fittings shall be
the disconnection of all ungrounded provided with covers. If metal covers
conductors of each temporary circuit. are used, they shall be grounded. In en-
(E) All lamps for general illumina- ergized installations each outlet box
tion shall be protected from accidental shall have a cover, faceplate, or fixture
contact or breakage. Metal-case sock- canopy. Covers of outlet boxes having
ets shall be grounded. holes through which flexible cord pend-
(F) Temporary lights shall not be ants pass shall be provided with bush-
suspended by their electric cords unless ings designed for the purpose or shall
cords and lights are designed for this have smooth, well-rounded surfaces on
means of suspension. which the cords may bear.
255
(3) Pull and junction boxes for systems (2) Switches and circuit breakers.
over 600 volts, nominal. In addition to Switches, circuit breakers, and switch-
other requirements in this section for boards installed in wet locations shall
pull and junction boxes, the following be enclosed in weatherproof enclosures.
shall apply to these boxes for systems (f) Conductors for general wiring. All
over 600 volts, nominal: conductors used for general wiring
(i) Complete enclosure. Boxes shall shall be insulated unless otherwise per-
provide a complete enclosure for the mitted in this subpart. The conductor
contained conductors or cables. insulation shall be of a type that is
(ii) Covers. Boxes shall be closed by suitable for the voltage, operating tem-
covers securely fastened in place. Un- perature, and location of use. Insulated
derground box covers that weigh over conductors shall be distinguishable by
100 pounds (43.6 kg) meet this require- appropriate color or other means as
ment. Covers for boxes shall be perma- being grounded conductors,
nently marked ‘‘HIGH VOLTAGE.’’ ungrounded conductors, or equipment
The marking shall be on the outside of grounding conductors.
the box cover and shall be readily visi- (g) Flexible cords and cables—(1) Use of
ble and legible. flexible cords and cables—(i) Permitted
(c) Knife switches. Single-throw knife uses. Flexible cords and cables shall be
suitable for conditions of use and loca-
switches shall be so connected that the
tion. Flexible cords and cables shall be
blades are dead when the switch is in
used only for:
the open position. Single-throw knife
(A) Pendants;
switches shall be so placed that gravity
(B) Wiring of fixtures;
will not tend to close them. Single-
(C) Connection of portable lamps or
throw knife switches approved for use
appliances;
in the inverted position shall be pro-
(D) Elevator cables;
vided with a locking device that will
(E) Wiring of cranes and hoists;
ensure that the blades remain in the
(F) Connection of stationary equip-
open position when so set. Double-
ment to facilitate their frequent inter-
throw knife switches may be mounted change;
so that the throw will be either (G) Prevention of the transmission of
vertical or horizontal. However, if the noise or vibration; or
throw is vertical, a locking device shall (H) Appliances where the fastening
be provided to ensure that the blades means and mechanical connections are
remain in the open position when so designed to permit removal for mainte-
set. nance and repair.
(d) Switchboards and panelboards. (ii) Attachment plugs for cords. If used
Switchboards that have any exposed as permitted in paragraphs (g)(1)(i)(C),
live parts shall be located in perma- (g)(1)(i)(F), or (g)(1)(i)(H) of this sec-
nently dry locations and accessible tion, the flexible cord shall be equipped
only to qualified persons. Panelboards with an attachment plug and shall be
shall be mounted in cabinets, cutout energized from a receptacle outlet.
boxes, or enclosures designed for the (iii) Prohibited uses. Unless necessary
purpose and shall be dead front. How- for a use permitted in paragraph
ever, panelboards other than the dead (g)(1)(i) of this section, flexible cords
front externally-operable type are per- and cables shall not be used:
mitted where accessible only to quali- (A) As a substitute for the fixed wir-
fied persons. Exposed blades of knife ing of a structure;
switches shall be dead when open. (B) Where run through holes in walls,
(e) Enclosures for damp or wet loca- ceilings, or floors;
tions—(1) Cabinets, fittings, and boxes. (C) Where run through doorways,
Cabinets, cutout boxes, fittings, boxes, windows, or similar openings, except as
and panelboard enclosures in damp or permitted in paragraph (a)(2)(ii)(1) of
wet locations shall be installed so as to this section;
prevent moisture or water from enter- (D) Where attached to building sur-
ing and accumulating within the enclo- faces; or
sures. In wet locations the enclosures (E) Where concealed behind building
shall be weatherproof. walls, ceilings, or floors.
256
(2) Identification, splices, and termi- (i) For installation in lighting, fix-
nations—(i) Identification. A conductor tures and in similar equipment where
of a flexible cord or cable that is used enclosed or protected and not subject
as a grounded conductor or an equip- to bending or twisting in use; or
ment grounding conductor shall be dis- (ii) For connecting lighting fixtures
tinguishable from other conductors. to the branch-circuit conductors sup-
(ii) Marking. Type SJ, SJO, SJT, plying the fixtures.
SJTO, S, SO, ST, and STO cords shall (3) Uses not permitted. Fixture wires
not be used unless durably marked on shall not be used as branch-circuit con-
the surface with the type designation, ductors except as permitted for Class 1
size, and number of conductors. power-limited circuits.
(iii) Splices. Flexible cords shall be (j) Equipment for general use—(1)
used only in continuous lengths with- Lighting fixtures, lampholders, lamps,
out splice or tap. Hard service flexible and receptacles—(i) Live parts. Fixtures,
cords No. 12 or larger may be repaired lampholders, lamps, rosettes, and re-
if spliced so that the splice retains the ceptacles shall have no live parts nor-
insulation, outer sheath properties, mally exposed to employee contact.
and usage characteristics of the cord However, rosettes and cleat-type
being spliced. lampholders and receptacles located at
(iv) Strain relief. Flexible cords shall least 8 feet (2.44 m) above the floor may
be connected to devices and fittings so have exposed parts.
that strain relief is provided which will (ii) Support. Fixtures, lampholders,
prevent pull from being directly trans- rosettes, and receptacles shall be se-
mitted to joints or terminal screws. curely supported. A fixture that weighs
(v) Cords passing through holes. Flexi- more than 6 pounds (2.72 kg) or exceeds
ble cords and cables shall be protected 16 inches (406 mm) in any dimension
by bushings or fittings where passing shall not be supported by the screw
through holes in covers, outlet boxes, shell of a lampholder.
or similar enclosures.
(iii) Portable lamps. Portable lamps
(h) Portable cables over 600 volts, nomi-
shall be wired with flexible cord and an
nal. Multiconductor portable cable for
attachment plug of the polarized or
use in supplying power to portable or
grounding type. If the portable lamp
mobile equipment at over 600 volts,
uses an Edison-based lampholder, the
nominal, shall consist of No. 8 or larger
grounded conductor shall be identified
conductors employing flexible strand-
and attached to the screw shell and the
ing. Cables operated at over 2000 volts
identified blade of the attachment
shall be shielded for the purpose of con-
plug. In addition, portable handlamps
fining the voltage stresses to the insu-
shall comply with the following:
lation. Grounding conductors shall be
provided. Connectors for these cables (A) Metal shell, paperlined
shall be of a locking type with provi- lampholders shall not be used;
sions to prevent their opening or clos- (B) Handlamps shall be equipped with
ing while energized. Strain relief shall a handle of molded composition or
be provided at connections and termi- other insulating material;
nations. Portable cables shall not be (C) Handlamps shall be equipped with
operated with splices unless the splices a substantial guard attached to the
are of the permanent molded, vulcan- lampholder or handle;
ized, or other equivalent type. Termi- (D) Metallic guards shall be grounded
nation enclosures shall be marked with by the means of an equipment ground-
a high voltage hazard warning, and tering conductor run within the power
minations shall be accessible only to supply cord.
authorized and qualified personnel. (iv) Lampholders. Lampholders of the
(i) Fixture wires—(1) General. Fixture screw-shell type shall be installed for
wires shall be suitable for the voltage, use as lampholders only. Lampholders
temperature, and location of use. A fix- installed in wet or damp locations shall
ture wire which is used as a grounded be of the weatherproof type.
conductor shall be identified. (v) Fixtures. Fixtures installed in wet
(2) Uses permitted. Fixture wires may or damp locations shall be identified
be used: for the purpose and shall be installed
257
so that water cannot enter or accumu- ductors and shall be so designed that
late in wireways, lampholders, or other no pole can be operated independently.
electrical parts. (C) If a motor and the driven machin-
(2) Receptacles, cord connectors, and at- ery are not in sight from the controller
tachment plugs (caps)—(i) Configuration. location, the installation shall comply
Receptacles, cord connectors, and at- with one of the following conditions:
tachment plugs shall be constructed so (1) The controller disconnecting
that no receptacle or cord connector means shall be capable of being locked
will accept an attachment plug with a in the open position.
different voltage or current rating than (2) A manually operable switch that
that for which the device is intended. will disconnect the motor from its
However, a 20-ampere T-slot receptacle source of supply shall be placed in
or cord connector may accept a 15-am- sight from the motor location.
pere attachment plug of the same volt- (D) The disconnecting means shall
age rating. Receptacles connected to plainly indicate whether it is in the
circuits having different voltages, fre- open (off) or closed (on) position.
quencies, or types of current (ac or dc) (E) The disconnecting means shall be
on the same premises shall be of such readily accessible. If more than one
design that the attachment plugs used disconnect is provided for the same
on these circuits are not interchange- equipment, only one need be readily
able. accessible.
(ii) Damp and wet locations. A recep- (F) An individual disconnecting
tacle installed in a wet or damp loca- means shall be provided for each
tion shall be designed for the location. motor, but a single disconnecting
means may be used for a group of mo-
(3) Appliances—(i) Live parts. Appli-
tors under any one of the following
ances, other than those in which the
conditions:
current-carrying parts at high tem-
(1) If a number of motors drive spe-
peratures are necessarily exposed, shall
cial parts of a single machine or piece
have no live parts normally exposed to
of apparatus, such as a metal or wood-
employee contact.
working machine, crane, or hoist;
(ii) Disconnecting means. A means (2) If a group of motors is under the
shall be provided to disconnect each protection of one set of branch-circuit
appliance. protective devices; or
(iii) Rating. Each appliance shall be (3) If a group of motors is in a single
marked with its rating in volts and room in sight from the location of the
amperes or volts and watts. disconnecting means.
(4) Motors. This paragraph applies to (iii) Motor overload, short-circuit, and
motors, motor circuits, and control- ground-fault protection. Motors, motor-
lers. control apparatus, and motor branch-
(i) In sight from. If specified that one circuit conductors shall be protected
piece of equipment shall be ‘‘in sight against overheating due to motor over-
from’’ another piece of equipment, one loads or failure to start, and against
shall be visible and not more than 50 short-circuits or ground faults. These
feet (15.2 m) from the other. provisions do not require overload pro-
(ii) Disconnecting means—(A) A dis- tection that will stop a motor where a
connecting means shall be located in shutdown is likely to introduce addi-
sight from the controller location. The tional or increased hazards, as in the
controller disconnecting means for case of fire pumps, or where continued
motor branch circuits over 600 volts, operation of a motor is necessary for a
nominal, may be out of sight of the safe shutdown of equipment or process
controller, if the controller is marked and motor overload sensing devices are
with a warning label giving the loca- connected to a supervised alarm.
tion and identification of the dis- (iv) Protection of live parts—all
connecting means which is to be locked voltages—(A) Stationary motors having
in the open position. commutators, collectors, and brush
(B) The disconnecting means shall rigging located inside of motor end
disconnect the motor and the con- brackets and not conductively con-
troller from all ungrounded supply connected to supply circuits operating at
258
more than 150 volts to ground need not from fires which may originate in oil-
have such parts guarded. Exposed live insulated transformers attached to or
parts of motors and controllers oper- adjacent to a building or combustible
ating at 50 volts or more between ter- material.
minals shall be guarded against acci- (vi) Transformer vaults. Transformer
dental contact by any of the following: vaults shall be constructed so as to
(1) By installation in a room or en- contain fire and combustible liquids
closure that is accessible only to quali- within the vault and to prevent unau-
fied persons; thorized access. Locks and latches
(2) By installation on a balcony, gal- shall be so arranged that a vault door
lery, or platform, so elevated and ar- can be readily opened from the inside.
ranged as to exclude unqualified per- (vii) Pipes and ducts. Any pipe or duct
sons; or system foreign to the vault installa-
(3) By elevation 8 feet (2.44 m) or tion shall not enter or pass through a
more above the floor. transformer vault.
(B) Where live parts of motors or con- (viii) Material storage. Materials shall
trollers operating at over 150 volts to not be stored in transformer vaults.
ground are guarded against accidental (6) Capacitors—(i) Drainage of stored
contact only by location, and where ad- charge. All capacitors, except surge ca-
justment or other attendance may be pacitors or capacitors included as a
necessary during the operation of the component part of other apparatus,
apparatus, insulating mats or plat- shall be provided with an automatic
forms shall be provided so that the at- means of draining the stored charge
tendant cannot readily touch live parts and maintaining the discharged state
unless standing on the mats or plat- after the capacitor is disconnected
forms. from its source of supply.
(5) Transformers—(i) Application. The (ii) Over 600 volts. Capacitors rated
following paragraphs cover the instal- over 600 volts, nominal, shall comply
lation of all transformers, except: with the following additional require-
(A) Current transformers; ments:
(B) Dry-type transformers installed (A) Isolating or disconnecting switch-
as a component part of other appa- es (with no interrupting rating) shall
ratus; be interlocked with the load inter-
(C) Transformers which are an inte- rupting device or shall be provided
gral part of an X-ray, high frequency, with prominently displayed caution
or electrostatic-coating apparatus; signs to prevent switching load cur-
(D) Transformers used with Class 2 rent.
and Class 3 circuits, sign and outline (B) For series capacitors the proper
lighting, electric discharge lighting, switching shall be assured by use of at
and power-limited fire-protective sig- least one of the following:
naling circuits. (1) Mechanically sequenced isolating
(ii) Operating voltage. The operating and bypass switches,
voltage of exposed live parts of trans- (2) Interlocks, or
former installations shall be indicated
(3) Switching procedure prominently
by warning signs or visible markings
displayed at the switching location.
on the equipment or structure.
(iii) Transformers over 35 kV. Dry- [51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986, as amended at 61
type, high fire point liquid-insulated, FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996]
and askarel-insulated transformers in-
stalled indoors and rated over 35 kV § 1926.406 Specific purpose equipment
shall be in a vault. and installations.
(iv) Oil-insulated transformers. If they (a) Cranes and hoists. This paragraph
present a fire hazard to employees, oil- applies to the installation of electric
insulated transformers installed in- equipment and wiring used in connec-
doors shall be in a vault. tion with cranes, monorail hoists,
(v) Fire protection. Combustible mate- hoists, and all runways.
rial, combustible buildings and parts of (1) Disconnecting means—(i) Runway
buildings, fire escapes, and door and conductor disconnecting means. A readily
window openings shall be safeguarded accessible disconnecting means shall
259
be provided between the runway con- reliable metal-to-metal contact. In this
tact conductors and the power supply. case a separate bonding conductor
(ii) Disconnecting means for cranes and shall be provided.
monorail hoists. A disconnecting means, (b) Elevators, escalators, and moving
capable of being locked in the open po- walks—(1) Disconnecting means. Ele-
sition, shall be provided in the leads vators, escalators, and moving walks
from the runway contact conductors or shall have a single means for dis-
other power supply on any crane or connecting all ungrounded main power
monorail hoist. supply conductors for each unit.
(A) If this additional disconnecting (2) Control panels. If control panels
means is not readily accessible from are not located in the same space as
the crane or monorail hoist operating the drive machine, they shall be lo-
station, means shall be provided at the cated in cabinets with doors or panels
operating station to open the power capable of being locked closed.
circuit to all motors of the crane or (c) Electric welders—disconnecting
monorail hoist. means—(1) Motor-generator, AC trans-
(B) The additional disconnect may be former, and DC rectifier arc welders. A
omitted if a monorail hoist or hand- disconnecting means shall be provided
propelled crane bridge installation in the supply circuit for each motor-
meets all of the following:
generator arc welder, and for each AC
(1) The unit is floor controlled;
transformer and DC rectifier arc welder
(2) The unit is within view of the
which is not equipped with a dis-
power supply disconnecting means; and
connect mounted as an integral part of
(3) No fixed work platform has been
the welder.
provided for servicing the unit.
(2) Control. A limit switch or other (2) Resistance welders. A switch or cir-
device shall be provided to prevent the cuit breaker shall be provided by which
load block from passing the safe upper each resistance welder and its control
limit of travel of any hoisting mecha- equipment can be isolated from the
nism. supply circuit. The ampere rating of
(3) Clearance. The dimension of the this disconnecting means shall not be
working space in the direction of ac- less than the supply conductor
cess to live parts which may require ampacity.
examination, adjustment, servicing, or (d) X-Ray equipment—(1) Disconnecting
maintenance while alive shall be a means—(i) General. A disconnecting
minimum of 2 feet 6 inches (762 mm). means shall be provided in the supply
Where controls are enclosed in cabi- circuit. The disconnecting means shall
nets, the door(s) shall open at least 90 be operable from a location readily ac-
degrees or be removable, or the instal- cessible from the X-ray control. For
lation shall provide equivalent access. equipment connected to a 120-volt
(4) Grounding. All exposed metal branch circuit of 30 amperes or less, a
parts of cranes, monorail hoists, hoists grounding-type attachment plug cap
and accessories including pendant con- and receptacle of proper rating may
trols shall be metallically joined to- serve as a disconnecting means.
gether into a continuous electrical con- (ii) More than one piece of equipment.
ductor so that the entire crane or hoist If more than one piece of equipment is
will be grounded in accordance with operated from the same high-voltage
§ 1926.404(f). Moving parts, other than circuit, each piece or each group of
removable accessories or attachments, equipment as a unit shall be provided
having metal-to-metal bearing surfaces with a high-voltage switch or equiva-
shall be considered to be electrically lent disconnecting means. This dis-
connected to each other through the connecting means shall be constructed,
bearing surfaces for grounding pur- enclosed, or located so as to avoid con-
poses. The trolley frame and bridge tact by employees with its live parts.
frame shall be considered as elec- (2) Control—Radiographic and
trically grounded through the bridge fluoroscopic types. Radiographic and
and trolley wheels and its respective fluoroscopic-type equipment shall be
tracks unless conditions such as paint effectively enclosed or shall have inter-
or other insulating materials prevent locks that deenergize the equipment
260
automatically to prevent ready access ture or temperature range, based on
to live current-carrying parts. operation in a 40-degree C ambient, for
which it is approved. The temperature
§ 1926.407 Hazardous (classified) loca- marking shall not exceed the ignition
tions. temperature of the specific gas, vapor,
(a) Scope. This section sets forth re- or dust to be encountered. However,
quirements for electric equipment and the following provisions modify this
wiring in locations which are classified marking requirement for specific
depending on the properties of the equipment:
flammable vapors, liquids or gases, or (A) Equipment of the non-heat-pro-
combustible dusts or fibers which may ducing type (such as junction boxes,
be present therein and the likelihood conduit, and fitting) and equipment of
that a flammable or combustible con- the heat-producing type having a max-
centration or quantity is present. Each imum temperature of not more than
room, section or area shall be consid- 100 degrees C (212 degrees F) need not
ered individually in determining its have a marked operating temperature
classification. These hazardous (classi- or temperature range.
fied) locations are assigned six designa- (B) Fixed lighting fixtures marked
tions as follows: for use only in Class I, Division 2 loca-
tions need not be marked to indicate
Class I, Division 1 the group.
Class I, Division 2 (C) Fixed general-purpose equipment
Class II, Division 1
Class II, Division 2
in Class I locations, other than lighting
Class III, Division l fixtures, which is acceptable for use in
Class III, Division 2 Class I, Division 2 locations need not be
marked with the class, group, division,
For definitions of these locations see or operating temperature.
§ 1926.449. All applicable requirements (D) Fixed dust-tight equipment,
in this subpart apply to all hazardous other than lighting fixtures, which is
(classified) locations, unless modified acceptable for use in Class II, Division
by provisions of this section. 2 and Class III locations need not be
(b) Electrical installations. Equipment, marked with the class, group, division,
wiring methods, and installations of or operating temperature.
equipment in hazardous (classified) lo- (3) Safe for the hazardous (classified)
cations shall be approved as intrinsi- location. Equipment which is safe for
cally safe or approved for the haz- the location shall be of a type and de-
ardous (classified) location or safe for sign which the employer demonstrates
the hazardous (classified) location. Re- will provide protection from the haz-
quirements for each of these options ards arising from the combustibility
are as follows: and flammability of vapors, liquids,
(1) Intrinsically safe. Equipment and gases, dusts, or fibers.
associated wiring approved as intrinsi-
cally safe is permitted in any haz- NOTE: The National Electrical Code, NFPA
70, contains guidelines for determining the
ardous (classified) location included in type and design of equipment and installa-
its listing or labeling. tions which will meet this requirement. The
(2) Approved for the hazardous (classi- guidelines of this document address electric
fied) location—(i) General. Equipment wiring, equipment, and systems installed in
shall be approved not only for the class hazardous (classified) locations and contain
of location but also for the ignitible or specific provisions for the following: wiring
combustible properties of the specific methods, wiring connections, conductor in-
gas, vapor, dust, or fiber that will be sulation, flexible cords, sealing and drainage,
transformers, capacitors, switches, circuit
present.
breakers, fuses, motor controllers, recep-
NOTE: NFPA 70, the National Electrical tacles, attachment plugs, meters, relays, in-
Code, lists or defines hazardous gases, va- struments, resistors, generators, motors,
pors, and dusts by ‘‘Groups’’ characterized by lighting fixtures, storage battery charging
their ignitible or combustible properties. equipment, electric cranes, electric hoists
and similar equipment, utilization equip-
(ii) Marking. Equipment shall not be ment, signaling systems, alarm systems, re-
used unless it is marked to show the mote control systems, local loud speaker and
class, group, and operating tempera- communication systems, ventilation piping,
261
live parts, lightning surge protection, and tion of circuit breakers shall be pro-
grounding. Compliance with these guidelines vided.
will constitute one means, but not the only
(ii) Fused cutouts. Fused cutouts in-
means, of compliance with this paragraph.
stalled in buildings or transformer
(c) Conduits. All conduits shall be vaults shall be of a type identified for
threaded and shall be made wrench- the purpose. They shall be readily ac-
tight. Where it is impractical to make cessible for fuse replacement.
a threaded joint tight, a bonding jump- (iii) Equipment isolating means. A
er shall be utilized. means shall be provided to completely
[51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986, as amended at 61 isolate equipment for inspection and
FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996] repairs. Isolating means which are not
designed to interrupt the load current
§ 1926.408 Special systems. of the circuit shall be either
interlocked with a circuit interrupter
(a) Systems over 600 volts, nominal.
or provided with a sign warning
Paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(4) of this
section contain general requirements against opening them under load.
for all circuits and equipment operated (3) Mobile and portable equipment—(i)
at over 600 volts. Power cable connections to mobile ma-
(1) Wiring methods for fixed installa- chines. A metallic enclosure shall be
tions—(i) Above ground. Above-ground provided on the mobile machine for en-
conductors shall be installed in rigid closing the terminals of the power
metal conduit, in intermediate metal cable. The enclosure shall include pro-
conduit, in cable trays, in cablebus, in visions for a solid connection for the
other suitable raceways, or as open ground wire(s) terminal to ground ef-
runs of metal-clad cable designed for fectively the machine frame. The
the use and purpose. However, open method of cable termination used shall
runs of non-metallic-sheathed cable or prevent any strain or pull on the cable
of bare conductors or busbars may be from stressing the electrical connec-
installed in locations which are acces- tions. The enclosure shall have provi-
sible only to qualified persons. Metallic sion for locking so only authorized
shielding components, such as tapes, qualified persons may open it and shall
wires, or braids for conductors, shall be be marked with a sign warning of the
grounded. Open runs of insulated wires presence of energized parts.
and cables having a bare lead sheath or (ii) Guarding live parts. All energized
a braided outer covering shall be sup- switching and control parts shall be en-
ported in a manner designed to prevent closed in effectively grounded metal
physical damage to the braid or sheath. cabinets or enclosures. Circuit break-
(ii) Installations emerging from the ers and protective equipment shall
ground. Conductors emerging from the have the operating means projecting
ground shall be enclosed in raceways. through the metal cabinet or enclosure
Raceways installed on poles shall be of so these units can be reset without
rigid metal conduit, intermediate locked doors being opened. Enclosures
metal conduit, PVC schedule 80 or and metal cabinets shall be locked so
equivalent extending from the ground that only authorized qualified persons
line up to a point 8 feet (2.44 m) above have access and shall be marked with a
finished grade. Conductors entering a sign warning of the presence of ener-
building shall be protected by an enclo- gized parts. Collector ring assemblies
sure from the ground line to the point on revolving-type machines (shovels,
of entrance. Metallic enclosures shall draglines, etc.) shall be guarded.
be grounded. (4) Tunnel installations—(i) Applica-
(2) Interrupting and isolating devices— tion. The provisions of this paragraph
(i) Circuit breakers. Circuit breakers lo- apply to installation and use of high-
cated indoors shall consist of metal-en- voltage power distribution and utiliza-
closed or fire-resistant, cell-mounted tion equipment which is associated
units. In locations accessible only to with tunnels and which is portable and/
qualified personnel, open mounting of or mobile, such as substations, trailers,
circuit breakers is permitted. A means cars, mobile shovels, draglines, hoists,
of indicating the open and closed posi- drills, dredges, compressors, pumps,
262
conveyors, and underground exca- (B) A Class 1 remote control circuit
vators. or a Class 1 signaling circuit has a volt-
(ii) Conductors. Conductors in tunnels age which does not exceed 600 volts;
shall be installed in one or more of the however, the power output of the
following: source need not be limited.
(A) Metal conduit or other metal (ii) Class 2 and Class 3 circuits—(A)
raceway, Power for Class 2 and Class 3 circuits is
(B) Type MC cable, or limited either inherently (in which no
(C) Other suitable multiconductor overcurrent protection is required) or
cable. by a combination of a power source and
Conductors shall also be so located or overcurrent protection.
guarded as to protect them from phys- (B) The maximum circuit voltage is
ical damage. Multiconductor portable 150 volts AC or DC for a Class 2 inher-
cable may supply mobile equipment. ently limited power source, and 100
An equipment grounding conductor volts AC or DC for a Class 3 inherently
shall be run with circuit conductors in- limited power source.
side the metal raceway or inside the (C) The maximum circuit voltage is
multiconductor cable jacket. The 30 volts AC and 60 volts DC for a Class
equipment grounding conductor may 2 power source limited by overcurrent
be insulated or bare. protection, and 150 volts AC or DC for
(iii) Guarding live parts. Bare termi- a Class 3 power source limited by over-
nals of transformers, switches, motor current protection.
controllers, and other equipment shall (iii) Application. The maximum cir-
be enclosed to prevent accidental con- cuit voltages in paragraphs (b)(1)(i) and
tact with energized parts. Enclosures (b)(1)(ii) of this section apply to sinus-
for use in tunnels shall be drip-proof, oidal AC or continuous DC power
weatherproof, or submersible as resources, and where wet contact occur-
quired by the environmental condi- rence is not likely.
tions. (2) Marking. A Class 2 or Class 3
(iv) Disconnecting means. A dis- power supply unit shall not be used un-
connecting means that simultaneously less it is durably marked where plainly
opens all ungrounded conductors shall visible to indicate the class of supply
be installed at each transformer or and its electrical rating.
motor location. (c) Communications systems—(1) Scope.
(v) Grounding and bonding. All non- These provisions for communication
energized metal parts of electric equip- systems apply to such systems as cen-
ment and metal raceways and cable tral-station-connected and non-cen-
sheaths shall be grounded and bonded tral-station-connected telephone cir-
to all metal pipes and rails at the por- cuits, radio receiving and transmitting
tal and at intervals not exceeding 1000 equipment, and outside wiring for fire
feet (305 m) throughout the tunnel. and burglar alarm, and similar central
(b) Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote station systems. These installations
control, signaling, and power-limited cir- need not comply with the provisions of
cuits—(1) Classification. Class 1, Class 2, §§ 1926.403 through 1926.408(b), except
or Class 3 remote control, signaling, or § 1926.404(c)(1)(ii) and § 1926.407.
power-limited circuits are character- (2) Protective devices—(i) Circuits ex-
ized by their usage and electrical power posed to power conductors. Communica-
limitation which differentiates them tion circuits so located as to be ex-
from light and power circuits. These posed to accidental contact with light
circuits are classified in accordance or power conductors operating at over
with their respective voltage and power 300 volts shall have each circuit so ex-
limitations as summarized in para- posed provided with an approved pro-
graphs (b)(1)(i) through (b)(1)(iii) of tector.
this section. (ii) Antenna lead-ins. Each conductor
(i) Class 1 circuits—(A) A Class 1 of a lead-in from an outdoor antenna
power-limited circuit is supplied from shall be provided with an antenna dis-
a source having a rated output of not charge unit or other means that will
more than 30 volts and 1000 volt-am- drain static charges from the antenna
peres. system.
263
§§ 1926.409–1926.415 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–13 Edition)
(3) Conductor location—(i) Outside of controls accessible to the operating
buildings—(A) Receiving distribution personnel shall be effectively grounded.
lead-in or aerial-drop cables attached Unpowered equipment and enclosures
to buildings and lead-in conductors to shall be considered grounded where
radio transmitters shall be so installed connected to an attached coaxial cable
as to avoid the possibility of accidental with an effectively grounded metallic
contact with electric light or power shield.
conductors.
[51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986, as amended at 61
(B) The clearance between lead-in
FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996]
conductors and any lightning protec-
tion conductors shall not be less than 6 §§ 1926.409–1926.415 [Reserved]
feet (1.83 m).
(ii) On poles. Where practicable, com- SAFETY-RELATED WORK PRACTICES
munication conductors on poles shall
be located below the light or power § 1926.416 General requirements.
conductors. Communications conduc-
(a) Protection of employees—(1) No em-
tors shall not be attached to a cross-
ployer shall permit an employee to
arm that carries light or power conduc-
work in such proximity to any part of
tors.
an electric power circuit that the em-
(iii) Inside of buildings. Indoor anten-
nas, lead-ins, and other communication ployee could contact the electric power
conductors attached as open conduc- circuit in the course of work, unless
tors to the inside of buildings shall be the employee is protected against elec-
located at least 2 inches (50.8 mm) from tric shock by deenergizing the circuit
conductors of any light or power or and grounding it or by guarding it ef-
Class 1 circuits unless a special and fectively by insulation or other means.
equally protective method of conductor (2) In work areas where the exact lo-
separation is employed. cation of underground electric
(4) Equipment location. Outdoor metal powerlines is unknown, employees
structures supporting antennas, as well using jack-hammers, bars, or other
as self-supporting antennas such as hand tools which may contact a line
vertical rods or dipole structures, shall shall be provided with insulated protec-
be located as far away from overhead tive gloves.
conductors of electric light and power (3) Before work is begun the em-
circuits of over 150 volts to ground as ployer shall ascertain by inquiry or di-
necessary to avoid the possibility of rect observation, or by instruments,
the antenna or structure falling into or whether any part of an energized elec-
making accidental contact with such tric power circuit, exposed or con-
circuits. cealed, is so located that the perform-
(5) Grounding—(i) Lead-in conductors. ance of the work may bring any person,
If exposed to contact with electric tool, or machine into physical or elec-
light or power conductors, the metal trical contact with the electric power
sheath of aerial cables entering build- circuit. The employer shall post and
ings shall be grounded or shall be inter- maintain proper warning signs where
rupted close to the entrance to the such a circuit exists. The employer
building by an insulating joint or shall advise employees of the location
equivalent device. Where protective de- of such lines, the hazards involved, and
vices are used, they shall be grounded. the protective measures to be taken.
(ii) Antenna structures. Masts and (b) Passageways and open spaces—-(1)
metal structures supporting antennas Barriers or other means of guarding
shall be permanently and effectively shall be provided to ensure that work-
grounded without splice or connection space for electrical equipment will not
in the grounding conductor. be used as a passageway during periods
(iii) Equipment enclosures. Transmit- when energized parts of electrical
ters shall be enclosed in a metal frame equipment are exposed.
or grill or separated from the operating (2) Working spaces, walkways, and
space by a barrier, all metallic parts of similar locations shall be kept clear of
which are effectively connected to cords so as not to create a hazard to
ground. All external metal handles and employees.
264
(c) Load ratings. In existing installa- ronment, no conductors or equipment
tions, no changes in circuit protection shall be located:
shall be made to increase the load in (i) In damp or wet locations;
excess of the load rating of the circuit (ii) Where exposed to gases, fumes,
wiring. vapors, liquids, or other agents having
(d) Fuses. When fuses are installed or a deteriorating effect on the conduc-
removed with one or both terminals en- tors or equipment; or
ergized, special tools insulated for the (iii) Where exposed to excessive tem-
voltage shall be used. peratures.
(e) Cords and cables. (1) Worn or (2) Control equipment, utilization
frayed electric cords or cables shall not equipment, and busways approved for
be used. use in dry locations only shall be pro-
(2) Extension cords shall not be fas- tected against damage from the weath-
tened with staples, hung from nails, or er during building construction.
suspended by wire. (b) Protection against corrosion. Metal
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, raceways, cable armor, boxes, cable
1979, as amended at 55 FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990; sheathing, cabinets, elbows, couplings,
58 FR 35179, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9251, Mar. 7, fittings, supports, and support hard-
1996; 61 FR 41738, Aug. 12, 1996] ware shall be of materials appropriate
for the environment in which they are
§ 1926.417 Lockout and tagging of cir- to be installed.
cuits.
(a) Controls. Controls that are to be §§ 1926.433–1926.440 [Reserved]
deactivated during the course of work
on energized or deenergized equipment SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR SPECIAL
or circuits shall be tagged. EQUIPMENT
(b) Equipment and circuits. Equipment § 1926.441 Batteries and battery charg-
or circuits that are deenergized shall ing.
be rendered inoperative and shall have
tags attached at all points where such (a) General requirements—(1) Batteries
equipment or circuits can be energized. of the unsealed type shall be located in
(c) Tags. Tags shall be placed to iden- enclosures with outside vents or in well
tify plainly the equipment or circuits ventilated rooms and shall be arranged
being worked on. so as to prevent the escape of fumes,
gases, or electrolyte spray into other
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, areas.
1979, as amended at 55 FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990; (2) Ventilation shall be provided to
58 FR 35181, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9251, Mar. 7,
ensure diffusion of the gases from the
1996; 61 FR 41739, Aug. 12, 1996]]
battery and to prevent the accumula-
§§ 1926.418–1926.430 [Reserved] tion of an explosive mixture.
(3) Racks and trays shall be substan-
SAFETY-RELATED MAINTENANCE AND tial and shall be treated to make them
ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS resistant to the electrolyte.
(4) Floors shall be of acid resistant
§ 1926.431 Maintenance of equipment. construction unless protected from
The employer shall ensure that all acid accumulations.
wiring components and utilization (5) Face shields, aprons, and rubber
equipment in hazardous locations are gloves shall be provided for workers
maintained in a dust-tight, dust-igni- handling acids or batteries.
tion-proof, or explosion-proof condi- (6) Facilities for quick drenching of
tion, as appropriate. There shall be no the eyes and body shall be provided
loose or missing screws, gaskets, within 25 feet (7.62 m) of battery han-
threaded connections, seals, or other dling areas.
impairments to a tight condition. (7) Facilities shall be provided for
flushing and neutralizing spilled elec-
§ 1926.432 Environmental deteriora- trolyte and for fire protection.
tion of equipment. (b) Charging—(1) Battery charging in-
(a) Deteriorating agents—(1) Unless stallations shall be located in areas
identified for use in the operating envi- designated for that purpose.
265
(2) Charging apparatus shall be pro- structure or finish, or not permanently
tected from damage by trucks. closed in by the structure or finish of
(3) When batteries are being charged, the building. (See ‘‘concealed’’ and ‘‘ex-
the vent caps shall be kept in place to posed.’’)
avoid electrolyte spray. Vent caps shall Accessible. (As applied to equipment.)
be maintained in functioning condi- Admitting close approach; not guarded
tion. by locked doors, elevation, or other ef-
§§ 1926.442–1926.448 [Reserved] fective means. (See‘‘Readily acces-
sible.’’)
DEFINITIONS Ampacity. The current in amperes a
conductor can carry continuously
§ 1926.449 Definitions applicable to under the conditions of use without ex-
this subpart.
ceeding its temperature rating.
The definitions given in this section Appliances. Utilization equipment,
apply to the terms used in subpart K. generally other than industrial, nor-
The definitions given here for ‘‘ap- mally built in standardized sizes or
proved’’ and ‘‘qualified person’’ apply, types, which is installed or connecetcd
instead of the definitions given in as a unit to perform one or more func-
§ 1926.32, to the use of these terms in tions.
subpart K.
Acceptable. An installation or equip- Approved. Acceptable to the author-
ment is acceptable to the Assistant ity enforcing this subpart. The author-
Secretary of Labor, and approved with- ity enforcing this subpart is the Assist-
in the meaning of this subpart K: ant Secretary of Labor for Occupa-
(a) If it is accepted, or certified, or tional Safety and Health. The defini-
listed, or labeled, or otherwise deter- tion of ‘‘acceptable’’ indicates what is
mined to be safe by a qualified testing acceptable to the Assistant Secretary
laboratory capable of determining the of Labor, and therefore approved with-
suitability of materials and equipment in the meaning of this subpart.
for installation and use in accordance Askarel. A generic term for a group of
with this standard; or nonflammable synthetic chlorinated
(b) With respect to an installation or hydrocarbons used as electrical insu-
equipment of a kind which no qualified lating media. Askarels of various
testing laboratory accepts, certifies, compositional types are used. Under
lists, labels, or determines to be safe, if arcing conditions the gases produced,
it is inspected or tested by another while consisting predominantly of non-
Federal agency, or by a State, munic- combustible hydrogen chloride, can in-
ipal, or other local authority respon- clude varying amounts of combustible
sible for enforcing occupational safety gases depending upon the askarel type.
provisions of the National Electrical Attachment plug (Plug cap)(Cap). A de-
Code, and found in compliance with vice which, by insertion in a recep-
those provisions; or tacle, establishes connection between
(c) With respect to custom-made the conductors of the attached flexible
equipment or related installations
cord and the conductors connected per-
which are designed, fabricated for, and
manently to the receptacle.
intended for use by a particular cus-
tomer, if it is determined to be safe for Automatic. Self-acting, operating by
its intended use by its manufacturer on its own mechanism when actuated by
the basis of test data which the em- some impersonal influence, as for ex-
ployer keeps and makes available for ample, a change in current strength,
inspection to the Assistant Secretary pressure, temperature, or mechanical
and his authorized representatives. configuration.
Accepted. An installation is ‘‘accept- Bare conductor. See ‘‘Conductor.’’
ed’’ if it has been inspected and found Bonding. The permanent joining of
to be safe by a qualified testing labora- metallic parts to form an electrically
tory. conductive path which will assure elec-
Accessible. (As applied to wiring trical continuity and the capacity to
methods.) Capable of being removed or conduct safely any current likely to be
exposed without damaging the building imposed.
266
Bonding jumper. A reliable conductor (3) In which breakdown or faulty op-
to assure the required electrical con- eration of equipment or processes
ductivity between metal parts required might release ignitible concentrations
to be electrically connected. of flammable gases or vapors, and
Branch circuit. The circuit conductors might also cause simultaneous failure
between the final overcurrent device of electric equipment.
protecting the circuit and the outlet(s).
NOTE: This classification usually includes
Building. A structure which stands locations where volatile flammable liquids
alone or which is cut off from adjoining or liquefied flammable gases are transferred
structures by fire walls with all open- from one container to another; interiors of
ings therein protected by approved fire spray booths and areas in the vicinity of
doors. spraying and painting operations where vola-
Cabinet. An enclosure designed either tile flammable solvents are used; locations
for surface or flush mounting, and pro- containing open tanks or vats of volatile
vided with a frame, mat, or trim in flammable liquids; drying rooms or compart-
ments for the evaporation of flammable sol-
which a swinging door or doors are or vents; inadequately ventilated pump rooms
may be hung. for flammable gas or for volatile flammable
Certified. Equipment is ‘‘certified’’ if liquids; and all other locations where ignit-
it: ible concentrations of flammable vapors or
(a) Has been tested and found by a gases are likely to occur in the course of nor-
qualified testing laboratory to meet mal operations.
applicable test standards or to be safe (b) Class I, Division 2. A Class I, Divi-
for use in a specified manner, and sion 2 location is a location:
(b) Is of a kind whose production is (1) In which volatile flammable liq-
periodically inspected by a qualified uids or flammable gases are handled,
testing laboratory. Certified equipment processed, or used, but in which the
must bear a label, tag, or other record hazardous liquids, vapors, or gases will
of certification. normally be confined within closed
Circuit breaker—(a) (600 volts nomi- containers or closed systems from
nal, or less.) A device designed to open which they can escape only in case of
and close a circuit by nonautomatic accidental rupture or breakdown of
means and to open the circuit auto- such containers or systems, or in case
matically on a predetermined overcur- of abnormal operation of equipment; or
rent without injury to itself when (2) In which ignitible concentrations
properly applied within its rating. of gases or vapors are normally pre-
(b) (Over 600 volts, nominal.) A vented by positive mechanical ventila-
switching device capable of making, tion, and which might become haz-
carrying, and breaking currents under ardous through failure or abnormal op-
normal circuit conditions, and also erations of the ventilating equipment;
making, carrying for a specified time, or
and breaking currents under specified
(3) That is adjacent to a Class I, Divi-
abnormal circuit conditions, such as
sion 1 location, and to which ignitible
those of short circuit.
concentrations of gases or vapors
Class I locations. Class I locations are
might occasionally be communicated
those in which flammable gases or va-
unless such communication is pre-
pors are or may be present in the air in
vented by adequate positive-pressure
quantities sufficient to produce explo-
ventilation from a source of clean air,
sive or ignitible mixtures. Class I loca-
and effective safeguards against ven-
tions include the following:
tilation failure are provided.
(a) Class I, Division 1. A Class I, Divi-
sion 1 location is a location: NOTE: This classification usually includes
(1) In which ignitible concentrations locations where volatile flammable liquids
of flammable gases or vapors may exist or flammable gases or vapors are used, but
under normal operating conditions; or which would become hazardous only in case
of an accident or of some unusual operating
(2) In which ignitible concentrations
condition. The quantity of flammable mate-
of such gases or vapors may exist fre- rial that might escape in case of accident,
quently because of repair or mainte- the adequacy of ventilating equipment, the
nance operations or because of leakage; total area involved, and the record of the in-
or dustry or business with respect to explosions
267
or fires are all factors that merit consider- of electrical equipment or other appa-
ation in determining the classification and ratus; or
extent of each location.
(2) Dust may be in suspension in the
Piping without valves, checks, meters, and
similar devices would not ordinarily intro- air as a result of infrequent malfunc-
duce a hazardous condition even though used tioning of handling or processing
for flammable liquids or gases. Locations equipment, and dust accumulations re-
used for the storage of flammable liquids or sulting therefrom may be ignitible by
of liquefied or compressed gases in sealed abnormal operation or failure of elec-
containers would not normally be considered trical equipment or other apparatus.
hazardous unless also subject to other haz-
ardous conditions. NOTE: This classification includes loca-
Electrical conduits and their associated tions where dangerous concentrations of sus-
enclosures separated from process fluids by a pended dust would not be likely but where
single seal or barrier are classed as a Divi- dust accumulations might form on or in the
sion 2 location if the outside of the conduit vicinity of electric equipment. These areas
and enclosures is a nonhazardous location. may contain equipment from which appre-
ciable quantities of dust would escape under
Class II locations. Class II locations
abnormal operating conditions or be adja-
are those that are hazardous because of cent to a Class II Division 1 location, as de-
the presence of combustible dust. Class scribed above, into which an explosive or ig-
II locations include the following: nitible concentration of dust may be put into
(a) Class II, Division 1. A Class II, Di- suspension under abnormal operating condi-
vision 1 location is a location: tions.
(1) In which combustible dust is or
Class III locations. Class III locations
may be in suspension in the air under
are those that are hazardous because of
normal operating conditions, in quan-
tities sufficient to produce explosive or the presence of easily ignitible fibers
ignitible mixtures; or or flyings but in which such fibers or
(2) Where mechanical failure or ab- flyings are not likely to be in suspen-
normal operation of machinery or sion in the air in quantities sufficient
equipment might cause such explosive to produce ignitible mixtures. Class 111
or ignitible mixtures to be produced, locations include the following:
and might also provide a source of igni- (a) Class III, Division 1. A Class III,
tion through simultaneous failure of Division 1 location is a location in
electric equipment, operation of pro- which easily ignitible fibers or mate-
tection devices, or from other causes, rials producing combustible flyings are
or handled, manufactured, or used.
(3) In which combustible dusts of an NOTE: Easily ignitible fibers and flyings in-
electrically conductive nature may be clude rayon, cotton (including cotton linters
present. and cotton waste), sisal or henequen, istle,
jute, hemp, tow, cocoa fiber, oakum, baled
NOTE: Combustible dusts which are elec-
waste kapok, Spanish moss, excelsior, saw-
trically nonconductive include dusts pro-
dust, woodchips, and other material of simi-
duced in the handling and processing of grain
lar nature.
and grain products, pulverized sugar and
cocoa, dried egg and milk powders, pulver- (b) Class III, Division 2. A Class III,
ized spices, starch and pastes, potato and Division 2 location is a location in
woodflour, oil meal from beans and seed,
dried hay, and other organic materials which
which easily ignitible fibers are stored
may produce combustible dusts when proc- or handled, except in process of manu-
essed or handled. Dusts containing magne- facture.
sium or aluminum are particularly haz- Collector ring. A collector ring is an
ardous and the use of extreme caution is nec- assembly of slip rings for transferring
essary to avoid ignition and explosion. electrical energy from a stationary to
(b) Class II, Division 2. A Class II, Di- a rotating member.
vision 2 location is a location in which: Concealed. Rendered inaccessible by
(1) Combustible dust will not nor- the structure or finish of the building.
mally be in suspension in the air in Wires in concealed raceways are con-
quantities sufficient to produce explo- sidered concealed, even though they
sive or ignitible mixtures, and dust ac- may become accessible by withdrawing
cumulations are normally insufficient them. [See ‘‘Accessible. (As applied to
to interfere with the normal operation wiring methods.)’’]
268
Conductor—(a) Bare. A conductor hav- Equipment. A general term including
ing no covering or electrical insulation material, fittings, devices, appliances,
whatsoever. fixtures, apparatus, and the like, used
(b) Covered. A conductor encased as a part of, or in connection with, an
within material of composition or electrical installation.
thickness that is not recognized as Equipment grounding conductor. See
electrical insulation. ‘‘Grounding conductor, equipment.’’
(c) Insulated. A conductor encased Explosion-proof apparatus. Apparatus
within material of composition and enclosed in a case that is capable of
thickness that is recognized as elec- withstanding an explosion of a speci-
trical insulation. fied gas or vapor which may occur
Controller. A device or group of de- within it and of preventing the ignition
vices that serves to govern, in some of a specified gas or vapor surrounding
predetermined manner, the electric the enclosure by sparks, flashes, or ex-
power delivered to the apparatus to plosion of the gas or vapor within, and
which it is connected. which operates at such an external
Covered conductor. See ‘‘Conductor.’’ temperature that it will not ignite a
Cutout. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) An surrounding flammable atmosphere.
assembly of a fuse support with either Exposed. (As applied to live parts.)
a fuseholder, fuse carrier, or dis- Capable of being inadvertently touched
connecting blade. The fuseholder or or approached nearer than a safe dis-
fuse carrier may include a conducting tance by a person. It is applied to parts
element (fuse link), or may act as the not suitably guarded, isolated, or insu-
disconnecting blade by the inclusion of lated. (See ‘‘Accessible and ‘‘Con-
a nonfusible member. cealed.’’)
Exposed. (As applied to wiring meth-
Cutout box. An enclosure designed for
ods.) On or attached to the surface or
surface mounting and having swinging
behind panels designed to allow access.
doors or covers secured directly to and
[See ‘‘Accessible. (As applied to wiring
telescoping with the walls of the box
methods.)’’]
proper. (See ‘‘Cabinet.’’)
Exposed. (For the purposes of
Damp location. See ‘‘Location.’’
§ 1926.408(d), Communications systems.)
Dead front. Without live parts ex- Where the circuit is in such a position
posed to a person on the operating side that in case of failure of supports or in-
of the equipment. sulation, contact with another circuit
Device. A unit of an electrical system may result.
which is intended to carry but not uti- Externally operable. Capable of being
lize electric energy. operated without exposing the operator
Disconnecting means. A device, or to contact with live parts.
group of devices, or other means by Feeder. All circuit conductors be-
which the conductors of a circuit can tween the service equipment, or the
be disconnected from their source of generator switchboard of an isolated
supply. plant, and the final branch-circuit
Disconnecting (or Isolating) switch. overcurrent device.
(Over 600 volts, nominal.) A mechanical Festoon lighting. A string of outdoor
switching device used for isolating a lights suspended between two points
circuit or equipment from a source of more than 15 feet (4.57 m) apart.
power. Fitting. An accessory such as a lock-
Dry location. See ‘‘Location.’’ nut, bushing, or other part of a wiring
Enclosed. Surrounded by a case, hous- system that is intended primarily to
ing, fence or walls which will prevent perform a mechanical rather than an
persons from accidentally contacting electrical function.
energized parts. Fuse. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) An
Enclosure. The case or housing of ap- overcurrent protective device with a
paratus, or the fence or walls sur- circuit opening fusible part that is
rounding an installation to prevent heated and severed by the passage of
personnel from accidentally contacting overcurrent through it. A fuse com-
energized parts, or to protect the prises all the parts that form a unit ca-
equipment from physical damage. pable of performing the prescribed
269
functions. It may or may not be the space in which an elevator or dumb-
complete device necessary to connect waiter is designed to operate.
it into an electrical circuit. Identified (conductors or terminals).
Ground. A conducting connection, Identified, as used in reference to a
whether intentional or accidental, be- conductor or its terminal, means that
tween an electrical circuit or equip- such conductor or terminal can be rec-
ment and the earth, or to some con- ognized as grounded.
ducting body that serves in place of the Identified (for the use). Recognized as
earth. suitable for the specific purpose, func-
Grounded. Connected to earth or to tion, use, environment, application,
some conducting body that serves in etc. where described as a requirement
place of the earth. in this standard. Suitability of equip-
Grounded, effectively (Over 600 volts, ment for a specific purpose, environ-
nominal.) Permanently connected to ment, or application is determined by a
earth through a ground connection of qualified testing laboratory where such
sufficiently low impedance and having identification includes labeling or list-
sufficient ampacity that ground fault ing.
current which may occur cannot build Insulated conductor. See ‘‘Conductor.’’
up to voltages dangerous to personnel. Interrupter switch. (Over 600 volts,
Grounded conductor. A system or cir- nominal.) A switch capable of making,
cuit conductor that is intentionally carrying, and interrupting specified
grounded. currents.
Grounding conductor. A conductor Intrinsically safe equipment and associ-
used to connect equipment or the ated wiring. Equipment and associated
grounded circuit of a wiring system to wiring in which any spark or thermal
a grounding electrode or electrodes. effect, produced either normally or in
Grounding conductor, equipment. The specified fault conditions, is incapable,
conductor used to connect the noncur- under certain prescribed test condi-
rent-carrying metal parts of equip- tions, of causing ignition of a mixture
ment, raceways, and other enclosures of flammable or combustible material
to the system grounded conductor and/ in air in its most easily ignitible con-
or the grounding electrode conductor centration.
at the service equipment or at the Isolated. Not readily accessible to
source of a separately derived system. persons unless special means for access
Grounding electrode conductor. The are used.
conductor used to connect the ground- Isolated power system. A system com-
ing electrode to the equipment ground- prising an isolating transformer or its
ing conductor and/or to the grounded equivalent, a line isolation monitor,
conductor of the circuit at the service and its ungrounded circuit conductors.
equipment or at the source of a sepa- Labeled. Equipment or materials to
rately derived system. which has been attached a label, sym-
Ground-fault circuit interrupter. A de- bol or other identifying mark of a
vice for the protection of personnel qualified testing laboratory which indi-
that functions to deenergize a circuit cates compliance with appropriate
or portion thereof within an estab- standards or performance in a specified
lished period of time when a current to manner.
ground exceeds some predetermined Lighting outlet. An outlet intended for
value that is less than that required to the direct connection of a lampholder,
operate the overcurrent protective de- a lighting fixture, or a pendant cord
vice of the supply circuit. terminating in a lampholder.
Guarded. Covered, shielded, fenced, Listed. Equipment or materials in-
enclosed, or otherwise protected by cluded in a list published by a qualified
means of suitable covers, casings, bar- testing laboratory whose listing states
riers, rails, screens, mats, or platforms either that the equipment or material
to remove the likelihood of approach meets appropriate standards or has
to a point of danger or contact by per- been tested and found suitable for use
sons or objects. in a specified manner.
Hoistway. Any shaftway, hatchway, Location—(a) Damp location. Partially
well hole, or other vertical opening or protected locations under canopies,
270
marquees, roofed open porches, and Power fuse. (Over 600 volts, nominal.)
like locations, and interior locations See ‘‘Fuse.’’
subject to moderate degrees of mois- Power outlet. An enclosed assembly
ture, such as some basements. which may include receptacles, circuit
(b) Dry location. A location not nor- breakers, fuseholders, fused switches,
mally subject to dampness or wetness. buses and watt-hour meter mounting
A location classified as dry may be means; intended to serve as a means
temporarily subject to dampness or for distributing power required to oper-
wetness, as in the case of a building ate mobile or temporarily installed
under construction. equipment.
(c) Wet location. Installations under- Premises wiring system. That interior
ground or in concrete slabs or masonry and exterior wiring, including power,
in direct contact with the earth, and lighting, control, and signal circuit
locations subject to saturation with wiring together with all of its associ-
water or other liquids, such as loca- ated hardware, fittings, and wiring de-
tions exposed to weather and unpro- vices, both permanently and tempo-
tected. rarily installed, which extends from
Mobile X-ray. X-ray equipment the load end of the service drop, or load
mounted on a permanent base with end of the service lateral conductors to
wheels and/or casters for moving while the outlet(s). Such wiring does not in-
completely assembled. clude wiring internal to appliances, fix-
Motor control center. An assembly of tures, motors, controllers, motor con-
one or more enclosed sections having a trol centers, and similar equipment.
common power bus and principally con- Qualified person. One familiar with
taining motor control units. the construction and operation of the
Outlet. A point on the wiring system equipment and the hazards involved.
at which current is taken to supply
Qualified testing laboratory. A prop-
utilization equipment.
erly equipped and staffed testing lab-
Overcurrent. Any current in excess of
oratory which has capabilities for and
the rated current of equipment or the
which provides the following services:
ampacity of a conductor. It may result
from overload (see definition), short (a) Experimental testing for safety of
circuit, or ground fault. A current in specified items of equipment and mate-
excess of rating may be accommodated rials referred to in this standard to de-
by certain equipment and conductors termine compliance with appropriate
for a given set of conditions. Hence the test standards or performance in a
rules for overcurrent protection are specified manner;
specific for particular situations. (b) Inspecting the run of such items
Overload. Operation of equipment in of equipment and materials at fac-
excess of normal, full load rating, or of tories for product evaluation to assure
a conductor in excess of rated compliance with the test standards;
ampacity which, when it persists for a (c) Service-value determinations
sufficient length of time, would cause through field inspections to monitor
damage or dangerous overheating. A the proper use of labels on products
fault, such as a short circuit or ground and with authority for recall of the
fault, is not an overload. label in the event a hazardous product
(See‘‘Overcurrent.’’) is installed;
Panelboard. A single panel or group of (d) Employing a controlled procedure
panel units designed for assembly in for identifying the listed and/or labeled
the form of a single panel; including equipment or materials tested; and
buses, automatic overcurrent devices, (e) Rendering creditable reports or
and with or without switches for the findings that are objective and without
control of light, heat, or power cir- bias of the tests and test methods em-
cuits; designed to be placed in a cabi- ployed.
net or cutout box placed in or against Raceway. A channel designed ex-
a wall or partition and accessible only pressly for holding wires, cables, or
from the front. (See ‘‘Switchboard.’’) busbars, with additional functions as
Portable X-ray. X-ray equipment de- permitted in this subpart. Raceways
signed to be hand-carried. may be of metal or insulating material,
271
and the term includes rigid metal con- ice-entrance conductors at the building
duit, rigid nonmetallic conduit, inter- or other structure.
mediate metal conduit, liquidtight Service-entrance conductors, overhead
flexible metal conduit, flexible metal- system. The service conductors between
lic tubing, flexible metal conduit, elec- the terminals of the service equipment
trical metallic tubing, underfloor race- and a point usually outside the build-
ways, cellular concrete floor raceways, ing, clear of building walls, where
cellular metal floor raceways, surface joined by tap or splice to the service
raceways, wireways, and busways. drop.
Readily accessible. Capable of being Service-entrance conductors, under-
reached quickly for operation, renewal, ground system. The service conductors
or inspections, without requiring those between the terminals of the service
to whom ready access is requisite to equipment and the point of connection
climb over or remove obstacles or to to the service lateral. Where service
resort to portable ladders, chairs, etc. equipment is located outside the build-
(See ‘‘Accessible.’’) ing walls, there may be no service-en-
Receptacle. A receptacle is a contact trance conductors, or they may be en-
device installed at the outlet for the tirely outside the building.
connection of a single attachment Service equipment. The necessary
plug. A single receptacle is a single equipment, usually consisting of a cir-
contact device with no other contact cuit breaker or switch and fuses, and
device on the same yoke. A multiple their accessories, located near the
receptacle is a single device containing point of entrance of supply conductors
two or more receptacles. to a building or other structure, or an
Receptacle outlet. An outlet where one otherwise defined area, and intended to
or more receptacles are installed. constitute the main control and means
Remote-control circuit. Any electric of cutoff of the supply.
circuit that controls any other circuit Service raceway. The raceway that en-
through a relay or an equivalent de- closes the service-entrance conductors.
vice. Signaling circuit. Any electric circuit
Sealable equipment. Equipment en- that energizes signaling equipment.
closed in a case or cabinet that is pro- Switchboard. A large single panel,
vided with a means of sealing or lock- frame, or assembly of panels which
ing so that live parts cannot be made have switches, buses, instruments,
accessible without opening the enclo- overcurrent and other protective de-
sure. The equipment may or may not vices mounted on the face or back or
be operable without opening the enclo- both. Switchboards are generally ac-
sure. cessible from the rear as well as from
Separately derived system. A premises the front and are not intended to be in-
wiring system whose power is derived stalled in cabinets. (See ‘‘Panelboard.’’)
from generator, transformer, or con- Switches—(a) General-use switch. A
verter windings and has no direct elec- switch intended for use in general dis-
trical connection, including a solidly tribution and branch circuits. It is
connected grounded circuit conductor, rated in amperes, and it is capable of
to supply conductors originating in an- interrupting its rated current at its
other system. rated voltage.
Service. The conductors and equip- (b) General-use snap switch. A form of
ment for delivering energy from the general-use switch so constructed that
electricity supply system to the wiring it can be installed in flush device boxes
system of the premises served. or on outlet box covers, or otherwise
Service conductors. The supply con- used in conjunction with wiring sys-
ductors that extend from the street tems recognized by this subpart.
main or from transformers to the serv- (c) Isolating switch. A switch intended
ice equipment of the premises supplied. for isolating an electric circuit from
Service drop. The overhead service the source of power. It has no inter-
conductors from the last pole or other rupting rating, and it is intended to be
aerial support to and including the operated only after the circuit has been
splices, if any, connecting to the serv- opened by some other means.
272
(d) Motor-circuit switch. A switch, Watertight. So constructed that mois-
rated in horsepower, capable of inter- ture will not enter the enclosure.
rupting the maximum operating over- Weatherproof. So constructed or pro-
load current of a motor of the same tected that exposure to the weather
horsepower rating as the switch at the will not interfere with successful oper-
rated voltage. ation. Rainproof, raintight, or water-
Switching devices. (Over 600 volts, tight equipment can fulfill the require-
nominal.) Devices designed to close ments for weatherproof where varying
and/or open one or more electric cir- weather conditions other than wetness,
cuits. Included in this category are cir- such as snow, ice, dust, or temperature
cuit breakers, cutouts, disconnecting extremes, are not a factor.
(or isolating) switches, disconnecting Wet location. See ‘‘Location.’’
means, and interrupter switches.
Transportable X-ray. X-ray equipment Subpart L—Scaffolds
installed in a vehicle or that may read-
ily be disassembled for transport in a AUTHORITY: 40 U.S.C. 333; 29 U.S.C. 653, 655,
vehicle. 657; Secretary of Labor’s Order Nos. 1–90 (55
Utilization equipment. Utilization FR 9033), 5–2007 (72 FR 31159), or 1–2012 (77 FR
3912); and 29 CFR part 1911.
equipment means equipment which uti-
lizes electric energy for mechanical, SOURCE: 61 FR 46104, Aug. 30, 1996, unless
chemical, heating, lighting, or similar otherwise noted.
useful purpose.
§ 1926.450 Scope, application and defi-
Utilization system. A utilization sys- nitions applicable to this subpart.
tem is a system which provides electric
power and light for employee work- (a) Scope and application. This sub-
places, and includes the premises wir- part applies to all scaffolds used in
ing system and utilization equipment. workplaces covered by this part. It
does not apply to crane or derrick sus-
Ventilated. Provided with a means to
pended personnel platforms. The cri-
permit circulation of air sufficient to
teria for aerial lifts are set out exclu-
remove an excess of heat, fumes, or va-
sively in § 1926.453.
pors.
(b) Definitions. Adjustable suspension
Volatile flammable liquid. A flammable scaffold means a suspension scaffold
liquid having a flash point below 38 de- equipped with a hoist(s) that can be op-
grees C (100 degrees F) or whose tem- erated by an employee(s) on the scaf-
perature is above its flash point, or a fold.
Class II combustible liquid having a Bearer (putlog) means a horizontal
vapor pressure not exceeding 40 psia transverse scaffold member (which
(276 kPa) at 38 °C (100 °F) whose tem- may be supported by ledgers or run-
perature is above its flash point. ners) upon which the scaffold platform
Voltage. (Of a circuit.) The greatest rests and which joins scaffold uprights,
root-mean-square (effective) difference posts, poles, and similar members.
of potential between any two conduc- Boatswains’ chair means a single-
tors of the circuit concerned. point adjustable suspension scaffold
Voltage, nominal. A nominal value as- consisting of a seat or sling designed to
signed to a circuit or system for the support one employee in a sitting posi-
purpose of conveniently designating its tion.
voltage class (as 120/240, 480Y/277, 600, Body belt (safety belt) means a strap
etc.). The actual voltage at which a cir- with means both for securing it about
cuit operates can vary from the nomi- the waist and for attaching it to a lan-
nal within a range that permits satis- yard, lifeline, or deceleration device.
factory operation of equipment. Body harness means a design of straps
Voltage to ground. For grounded cir- which may be secured about the em-
cuits, the voltage between the given ployee in a manner to distribute the
conductor and that point or conductor fall arrest forces over at least the
of the circuit that is grounded; for thighs, pelvis, waist, chest and shoul-
ungrounded circuits, the greatest volt- ders, with means for attaching it to
age between the given conductor and other components of a personal fall ar-
any other conductor of the circuit. rest system.
273
Brace means a rigid connection that energy imposed on an employee during
holds one scaffold member in a fixed fall arrest.
position with respect to another mem- Double pole (independent pole) scaffold
ber, or to a building or structure. means a supported scaffold consisting
Bricklayers’ square scaffold means a of a platform(s) resting on cross beams
supported scaffold composed of framed (bearers) supported by ledgers and a
squares which support a platform. double row of uprights independent of
Carpenters’ bracket scaffold means a support (except ties, guys, braces) from
supported scaffold consisting of a plat- any structure.
form supported by brackets attached to Equivalent means alternative designs,
building or structural walls. materials or methods to protect
Catenary scaffold means a suspension against a hazard which the employer
scaffold consisting of a platform sup- can demonstrate will provide an equal
ported by two essentially horizontal or greater degree of safety for employ-
and parallel ropes attached to struc- ees than the methods, materials or de-
tural members of a building or other signs specified in the standard.
structure. Additional support may be Exposed power lines means electrical
provided by vertical pickups. power lines which are accessible to em-
Chimney hoist means a multi-point ployees and which are not shielded
adjustable suspension scaffold used to from contact. Such lines do not include
provide access to work inside chim- extension cords or power tool cords.
neys. (See ‘‘Multi-point adjustable sus- Eye or Eye splice means a loop with or
pension scaffold’’.) without a thimble at the end of a wire
Cleat means a structural block used rope.
at the end of a platform to prevent the Fabricated decking and planking
platform from slipping off its supports. means manufactured platforms made
Cleats are also used to provide footing of wood (including laminated wood, and
on sloped surfaces such as crawling solid sawn wood planks), metal or
boards. other materials.
Competent person means one who is Fabricated frame scaffold (tubular
capable of identifying existing and pre- welded frame scaffold) means a scaffold
dictable hazards in the surroundings or consisting of a platform(s) supported
working conditions which are unsani- on fabricated end frames with integral
tary, hazardous, or dangerous to em- posts, horizontal bearers, and inter-
ployees, and who has authorization to mediate members.
take prompt corrective measures to Failure means load refusal, breakage,
eliminate them. or separation of component parts. Load
Continuous run scaffold (Run scaffold) refusal is the point where the ultimate
means a two- point or multi-point ad- strength is exceeded.
justable suspension scaffold con- Float (ship) scaffold means a suspen-
structed using a series of inter- sion scaffold consisting of a braced
connected braced scaffold members or platform resting on two parallel bear-
supporting structures erected to form a ers and hung from overhead supports
continuous scaffold. by ropes of fixed length.
Coupler means a device for locking Form scaffold means a supported scaf-
together the tubes of a tube and cou- fold consisting of a platform supported
pler scaffold. by brackets attached to formwork.
Crawling board (chicken ladder) means Guardrail system means a vertical bar-
a supported scaffold consisting of a rier, consisting of, but not limited to,
plank with cleats spaced and secured to toprails, midrails, and posts, erected to
provide footing, for use on sloped sur- prevent employees from falling off a
faces such as roofs. scaffold platform or walkway to lower
Deceleration device means any mecha- levels.
nism, such as a rope grab, rip-stitch Hoist means a manual or power-oper-
lanyard, specially-woven lanyard, tear- ated mechanical device to raise or
ing or deforming lanyard, or automatic lower a suspended scaffold.
self-retracting lifeline lanyard, which Horse scaffold means a supported scaf-
dissipates a substantial amount of en- fold consisting of a platform supported
ergy during a fall arrest or limits the by construction horses (saw horses).
274
Horse scaffolds constructed of metal to be applied to a scaffold or scaffold
are sometimes known as trestle scaf- component at any one time.
folds. Mobile scaffold means a powered or
Independent pole scaffold (see ‘‘Double unpowered, portable, caster or wheel-
pole scaffold’’). mounted supported scaffold.
Interior hung scaffold means a suspen- Multi-level suspended scaffold means a
sion scaffold consisting of a platform two-point or multi-point adjustable
suspended from the ceiling or roof suspension scaffold with a series of
structure by fixed length supports. platforms at various levels resting on
Ladder jack scaffold means a sup- common stirrups.
ported scaffold consisting of a platform Multi-point adjustable suspension scaf-
resting on brackets attached to lad- fold means a suspension scaffold con-
ders. sisting of a platform(s) which is sus-
Ladder stand means a mobile, fixed- pended by more than two ropes from
size, self-supporting ladder consisting overhead supports and equipped with
of a wide flat tread ladder in the form means to raise and lower the platform
of stairs. to desired work levels. Such scaffolds
Landing means a platform at the end include chimney hoists.
of a flight of stairs. Needle beam scaffold means a platform
suspended from needle beams.
Large area scaffold means a pole scaf-
Open sides and ends means the edges
fold, tube and coupler scaffold, systems
of a platform that are more than 14
scaffold, or fabricated frame scaffold
inches (36 cm) away horizontally from
erected over substantially the entire
a sturdy, continuous, vertical surface
work area. For example: a scaffold
(such as a building wall) or a sturdy,
erected over the entire floor area of a
continuous horizontal surface (such as
room.
a floor), or a point of access. Exception:
Lean-to scaffold means a supported For plastering and lathing operations
scaffold which is kept erect by tilting the horizontal threshold distance is 18
it toward and resting it against a inches (46 cm).
building or structure. Outrigger means the structural mem-
Lifeline means a component con- ber of a supported scaffold used to in-
sisting of a flexible line that connects crease the base width of a scaffold in
to an anchorage at one end to hang order to provide support for and in-
vertically (vertical lifeline), or that creased stability of the scaffold.
connects to anchorages at both ends to Outrigger beam (Thrustout) means the
stretch horizontally (horizontal life- structural member of a suspension
line), and which serves as a means for scaffold or outrigger scaffold which
connecting other components of a per- provides support for the scaffold by ex-
sonal fall arrest system to the anchor- tending the scaffold point of attach-
age. ment to a point out and away from the
Lower levels means areas below the structure or building.
level where the employee is located Outrigger scaffold means a supported
and to which an employee can fall. scaffold consisting of a platform rest-
Such areas include, but are not limited ing on outrigger beams (thrustouts)
to, ground levels, floors, roofs, ramps, projecting beyond the wall or face of
runways, excavations, pits, tanks, ma- the building or structure, the inboard
terials, water, and equipment. ends of which are secured inside the
Masons’ adjustable supported scaffold building or structure.
(see ‘‘Self-contained adjustable scaf- Overhand bricklaying means the proc-
fold’’). ess of laying bricks and masonry units
Masons’ multi-point adjustable suspen- such that the surface of the wall to be
sion scaffold means a continuous run jointed is on the opposite side of the
suspension scaffold designed and used wall from the mason, requiring the
for masonry operations. mason to lean over the wall to com-
Maximum intended load means the plete the work. It includes mason tend-
total load of all persons, equipment, ing and electrical installation incor-
tools, materials, transmitted loads, porated into the brick wall during the
and other loads reasonably anticipated overhand bricklaying process.
275
Personal fall arrest system means a suspension scaffold consisting of an ad-
system used to arrest an employee’s justable platform(s) mounted on an
fall. It consists of an anchorage, con- independent supporting frame(s) not a
nectors, a body belt or body harness part of the object being worked on, and
and may include a lanyard, decelera- which is equipped with a means to per-
tion device, lifeline, or combinations of mit the raising and lowering of the
these. platform(s). Such systems include roll-
Platform means a work surface ele- ing roof rigs, rolling outrigger systems,
vated above lower levels. Platforms and some masons’ adjustable supported
can be constructed using individual scaffolds.
wood planks, fabricated planks, fab- Shore scaffold means a supported scaf-
ricated decks, and fabricated plat- fold which is placed against a building
forms. or structure and held in place with
Pole scaffold (see definitions for props.
‘‘Single-pole scaffold’’ and ‘‘Double Single-point adjustable suspension scaf-
(independent) pole scaffold’’). fold means a suspension scaffold con-
Power operated hoist means a hoist sisting of a platform suspended by one
which is powered by other than human rope from an overhead support and
energy. equipped with means to permit the
Pump jack scaffold means a supported movement of the platform to desired
scaffold consisting of a platform sup- work levels.
ported by vertical poles and movable Single-pole scaffold means a supported
support brackets. scaffold consisting of a platform(s)
Qualified means one who, by posses- resting on bearers, the outside ends of
sion of a recognized degree, certificate, which are supported on runners secured
or professional standing, or who by ex- to a single row of posts or uprights, and
tensive knowledge, training, and expe- the inner ends of which are supported
rience, has successfully demonstrated on or in a structure or building wall.
his/her ability to solve or resolve prob- Stair tower (Scaffold stairway/tower)
lems related to the subject matter, the means a tower comprised of scaffold
work, or the project. components and which contains inter-
Rated load means the manufacturer’s nal stairway units and rest platforms.
specified maximum load to be lifted by These towers are used to provide access
a hoist or to be applied to a scaffold or to scaffold platforms and other ele-
scaffold component. vated points such as floors and roofs.
Repair bracket scaffold means a sup- Stall load means the load at which
ported scaffold consisting of a platform the prime-mover of a power-operated
supported by brackets which are se- hoist stalls or the power to the prime-
cured in place around the circum- mover is automatically disconnected.
ference or perimeter of a chimney, Step, platform, and trestle ladder scaf-
stack, tank or other supporting struc- fold means a platform resting directly
ture by one or more wire ropes placed on the rungs of step ladders or trestle
around the supporting structure. ladders.
Roof bracket scaffold means a rooftop Stilts means a pair of poles or similar
supported scaffold consisting of a plat- supports with raised footrests, used to
form resting on angular-shaped sup- permit walking above the ground or
ports. working surface.
Runner (ledger or ribbon) means the Stonesetters’ multi-point adjustable sus-
lengthwise horizontal spacing or brac- pension scaffold means a continuous run
ing member which may support the suspension scaffold designed and used
bearers. for stonesetters’ operations.
Scaffold means any temporary ele- Supported scaffold means one or more
vated platform (supported or sus- platforms supported by outrigger
pended) and its supporting structure beams, brackets, poles, legs, uprights,
(including points of anchorage), used posts, frames, or similar rigid support.
for supporting employees or materials Suspension scaffold means one or
or both. more platforms suspended by ropes or
Self-contained adjustable scaffold other non-rigid means from an over-
means a combination supported and head structure(s).
276
System scaffold means a scaffold con- § 1926.451 General requirements.
sisting of posts with fixed connection This section does not apply to aerial
points that accept runners, bearers, lifts, the criteria for which are set out
and diagonals that can be inter- exclusively in § 1926.453.
connected at predetermined levels. (a) Capacity. (1) Except as provided in
Tank builders’ scaffold means a sup- paragraphs (a)(2), (a)(3), (a)(4), (a)(5)
ported scaffold consisting of a platform and (g) of this section, each scaffold
resting on brackets that are either di- and scaffold component shall be capa-
rectly attached to a cylindrical tank or ble of supporting, without failure, its
attached to devices that are attached own weight and at least 4 times the
to such a tank. maximum intended load applied or
Top plate bracket scaffold means a transmitted to it.
scaffold supported by brackets that (2) Direct connections to roofs and
hook over or are attached to the top of floors, and counterweights used to bal-
a wall. This type of scaffold is similar ance adjustable suspension scaffolds,
to carpenters’ bracket scaffolds and shall be capable of resisting at least 4
form scaffolds and is used in residen- times the tipping moment imposed by
tial construction for setting trusses. the scaffold operating at the rated load
Tube and coupler scaffold means a sup- of the hoist, or 1.5 (minimum) times
ported or suspended scaffold consisting the tipping moment imposed by the
scaffold operating at the stall load of
of a platform(s) supported by tubing,
the hoist, whichever is greater.
erected with coupling devices con-
(3) Each suspension rope, including
necting uprights, braces, bearers, and
connecting hardware, used on non-ad-
runners. justable suspension scaffolds shall be
Tubular welded frame scaffold (see capable of supporting, without failure,
‘‘Fabricated frame scaffold’’). at least 6 times the maximum intended
Two-point suspension scaffold (swing load applied or transmitted to that
stage) means a suspension scaffold con- rope.
sisting of a platform supported by (4) Each suspension rope, including
hangers (stirrups) suspended by two connecting hardware, used on adjust-
ropes from overhead supports and able suspension scaffolds shall be capa-
equipped with means to permit the ble of supporting, without failure, at
raising and lowering of the platform to least 6 times the maximum intended
desired work levels. load applied or transmitted to that
Unstable objects means items whose rope with the scaffold operating at ei-
strength, configuration, or lack of sta- ther the rated load of the hoist, or 2
bility may allow them to become dis- (minimum) times the stall load of the
located and shift and therefore may hoist, whichever is greater.
not properly support the loads imposed (5) The stall load of any scaffold hoist
on them. Unstable objects do not con- shall not exceed 3 times its rated load.
stitute a safe base support for scaf- (6) Scaffolds shall be designed by a
folds, platforms, or employees. Exam- qualified person and shall be con-
ples include, but are not limited to, structed and loaded in accordance with
barrels, boxes, loose brick, and con- that design. Non-mandatory appendix
crete blocks. A to this subpart contains examples of
Vertical pickup means a rope used to criteria that will enable an employer
support the horizontal rope in catenary to comply with paragraph (a) of this
scaffolds. section.
Walkway means a portion of a scaf- (b) Scaffold platform construction. (1)
fold platform used only for access and Each platform on all working levels of
not as a work level. scaffolds shall be fully planked or
decked between the front uprights and
Window jack scaffold means a plat-
the guardrail supports as follows:
form resting on a bracket or jack
(i) Each platform unit (e.g., scaffold
which projects through a window open-
plank, fabricated plank, fabricated
ing. deck, or fabricated platform) shall be
[61 FR 46104, Aug. 30, 1996, as amended at 75 installed so that the space between ad-
FR 48133, Aug. 9, 2010] jacent units and the space between the
277
platform and the uprights is no more face of the work, unless guardrail sys-
than 1 inch (2.5 cm) wide, except where tems are erected along the front edge
the employer can demonstrate that a and/or personal fall arrest systems are
wider space is necessary (for example, used in accordance with paragraph (g)
to fit around uprights when side brack- of this section to protect employees
ets are used to extend the width of the from falling.
platform). (i) The maximum distance from the
(ii) Where the employer makes the face for outrigger scaffolds shall be 3
demonstration provided for in para- inches (8 cm);
graph (b)(1)(i) of this section, the plat- (ii) The maximum distance from the
form shall be planked or decked as face for plastering and lathing oper-
fully as possible and the remaining ations shall be 18 inches (46 cm).
open space between the platform and (4) Each end of a platform, unless
the uprights shall not exceed 91⁄2 inches cleated or otherwise restrained by
(24.1 cm). hooks or equivalent means, shall ex-
Exception to paragraph (b)(1): The re- tend over the centerline of its support
quirement in paragraph (b)(1) to pro- at least 6 inches (15 cm).
vide full planking or decking does not (5)(i) Each end of a platform 10 feet or
apply to platforms used solely as walk- less in length shall not extend over its
ways or solely by employees per- support more than 12 inches (30 cm) un-
forming scaffold erection or disman- less the platform is designed and in-
tling. In these situations, only the stalled so that the cantilevered portion
planking that the employer establishes of the platform is able to support em-
is necessary to provide safe working ployees and/or materials without tip-
conditions is required. ping, or has guardrails which block em-
(2) Except as provided in paragraphs ployee access to the cantilevered end.
(b)(2)(i) and (b)(2)(ii) of this section, (ii) Each platform greater than 10
each scaffold platform and walkway feet in length shall not extend over its
shall be at least 18 inches (46 cm) wide. support more than 18 inches (46 cm),
(i) Each ladder jack scaffold, top unless it is designed and installed so
plate bracket scaffold, roof bracket that the cantilevered portion of the
scaffold, and pump jack scaffold shall platform is able to support employees
be at least 12 inches (30 cm) wide. without tipping, or has guardrails
There is no minimum width require- which block employee access to the
ment for boatswains’ chairs. cantilevered end.
(6) On scaffolds where scaffold planks
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b)(2)(i): Pursuant to
an administrative stay effective November
are abutted to create a long platform,
29, 1996 and published in the FEDERAL REG- each abutted end shall rest on a sepa-
ISTER on November 25, 1996, the requirement rate support surface. This provision
in paragraph (b)(2)(i) that roof bracket scaf- does not preclude the use of common
folds be at least 12 inches wide is stayed support members, such as ‘‘T’’ sec-
until November 25, 1997 or until rulemaking tions, to support abutting planks, or
regarding the minimum width of roof brack- hook on platforms designed to rest on
et scaffolds has been completed, whichever is common supports.
later.
(7) On scaffolds where platforms are
(ii) Where scaffolds must be used in overlapped to create a long platform,
areas that the employer can dem- the overlap shall occur only over sup-
onstrate are so narrow that platforms ports, and shall not be less than 12
and walkways cannot be at least 18 inches (30 cm) unless the platforms are
inches (46 cm) wide, such platforms and nailed together or otherwise restrained
walkways shall be as wide as feasible, to prevent movement.
and employees on those platforms and (8) At all points of a scaffold where
walkways shall be protected from fall the platform changes direction, such as
hazards by the use of guardrails and/or turning a corner, any platform that
personal fall arrest systems. rests on a bearer at an angle other than
(3) Except as provided in paragraphs a right angle shall be laid first, and
(b)(3) (i) and (ii) of this section, the platforms which rest at right angles
front edge of all platforms shall not be over the same bearer shall be laid sec-
more than 14 inches (36 cm) from the ond, on top of the first platform.
278
(9) Wood platforms shall not be cov- cumstances where an eccentric load,
ered with opaque finishes, except that such as a cantilevered work platform,
platform edges may be covered or is applied or is transmitted to the scaf-
marked for identification. Platforms fold.
may be coated periodically with wood (2) Supported scaffold poles, legs,
preservatives, fire-retardant finishes, posts, frames, and uprights shall bear
and slip-resistant finishes; however, on base plates and mud sills or other
the coating may not obscure the top or adequate firm foundation.
bottom wood surfaces. (i) Footings shall be level, sound,
(10) Scaffold components manufac- rigid, and capable of supporting the
tured by different manufacturers shall loaded scaffold without settling or dis-
not be intermixed unless the compo- placement.
nents fit together without force and (ii) Unstable objects shall not be used
the scaffold’s structural integrity is to support scaffolds or platform units.
maintained by the user. Scaffold com- (iii) Unstable objects shall not be
ponents manufactured by different used as working platforms.
manufacturers shall not be modified in (iv) Front-end loaders and similar
order to intermix them unless a com- pieces of equipment shall not be used
petent person determines the resulting to support scaffold platforms unless
scaffold is structurally sound. they have been specifically designed by
(11) Scaffold components made of dis- the manufacturer for such use.
similar metals shall not be used to- (v) Fork-lifts shall not be used to
gether unless a competent person has support scaffold platforms unless the
determined that galvanic action will entire platform is attached to the fork
not reduce the strength of any compo- and the fork-lift is not moved hori-
nent to a level below that required by zontally while the platform is occu-
paragraph (a)(1) of this section. pied.
(c) Criteria for supported scaffolds. (1) (3) Supported scaffold poles, legs,
Supported scaffolds with a height to posts, frames, and uprights shall be
base width (including outrigger sup- plumb and braced to prevent swaying
ports, if used) ratio of more than four and displacement.
to one (4:1) shall be restrained from tip- (d) Criteria for suspension scaffolds. (1)
ping by guying, tying, bracing, or All suspension scaffold support devices,
equivalent means, as follows: such as outrigger beams, cornice
(i) Guys, ties, and braces shall be in- hooks, parapet clamps, and similar de-
stalled at locations where horizontal vices, shall rest on surfaces capable of
members support both inner and outer supporting at least 4 times the load im-
legs. posed on them by the scaffold oper-
(ii) Guys, ties, and braces shall be in- ating at the rated load of the hoist (or
stalled according to the scaffold manu- at least 1.5 times the load imposed on
facturer’s recommendations or at the them by the scaffold at the stall capac-
closest horizontal member to the 4:1 ity of the hoist, whichever is greater).
height and be repeated vertically at lo- (2) Suspension scaffold outrigger
cations of horizontal members every 20 beams, when used, shall be made of
feet (6.1 m) or less thereafter for scaf- structural metal or equivalent
folds 3 feet (0.91 m) wide or less, and strength material, and shall be re-
every 26 feet (7.9 m) or less thereafter strained to prevent movement.
for scaffolds greater than 3 feet (0.91 m) (3) The inboard ends of suspension
wide. The top guy, tie or brace of com- scaffold outrigger beams shall be sta-
pleted scaffolds shall be placed no fur- bilized by bolts or other direct connec-
ther than the 4:1 height from the top. tions to the floor or roof deck, or they
Such guys, ties and braces shall be in- shall have their inboard ends stabilized
stalled at each end of the scaffold and by counterweights, except masons’
at horizontal intervals not to exceed 30 multi-point adjustable suspension scaf-
feet (9.1 m) (measured from one end fold outrigger beams shall not be sta-
[not both] towards the other). bilized by counterweights.
(iii) Ties, guys, braces, or outriggers (i) Before the scaffold is used, direct
shall be used to prevent the tipping of connections shall be evaluated by a
supported scaffolds in all cir- competent person who shall confirm,
279
based on the evaluation, that the sup- (i) Provided with stop bolts or shack-
porting surfaces are capable of sup- les at both ends;
porting the loads to be imposed. In ad- (ii) Securely fastened together with
dition, masons’ multi-point adjustable the flanges turned out when channel
suspension scaffold connections shall iron beams are used in place of I-
be designed by an engineer experienced beams;
in such scaffold design. (iii) Installed with all bearing sup-
(ii) Counterweights shall be made of ports perpendicular to the beam center
non-flowable material. Sand, gravel line;
and similar materials that can be eas- (iv) Set and maintained with the web
ily dislocated shall not be used as in a vertical position; and
counterweights. (v) When an outrigger beam is used,
(iii) Only those items specifically de- the shackle or clevis with which the
signed as counterweights shall be used rope is attached to the outrigger beam
to counterweight scaffold systems. shall be placed directly over the center
Construction materials such as, but line of the stirrup.
not limited to, masonry units and rolls (5) Suspension scaffold support de-
of roofing felt, shall not be used as vices such as cornice hooks, roof
counterweights. hooks, roof irons, parapet clamps, or
(iv) Counterweights shall be secured similar devices shall be:
by mechanical means to the outrigger (i) Made of steel, wrought iron, or
beams to prevent accidental displace- materials of equivalent strength;
ment. (ii) Supported by bearing blocks; and
(iii) Secured against movement by
(v) Counterweights shall not be re-
tiebacks installed at right angles to
moved from an outrigger beam until
the face of the building or structure, or
the scaffold is disassembled.
opposing angle tiebacks shall be in-
(vi) Outrigger beams which are not stalled and secured to a structurally
stabilized by bolts or other direct con- sound point of anchorage on the build-
nections to the floor or roof deck shall ing or structure. Sound points of an-
be secured by tiebacks. chorage include structural members,
(vii) Tiebacks shall be equivalent in but do not include standpipes, vents,
strength to the suspension ropes. other piping systems, or electrical con-
(viii) Outrigger beams shall be placed duit.
perpendicular to its bearing support (iv) Tiebacks shall be equivalent in
(usually the face of the building or strength to the hoisting rope.
structure). However, where the em- (6) When winding drum hoists are
ployer can demonstrate that it is not used on a suspension scaffold, they
possible to place an outrigger beam shall contain not less than four wraps
perpendicular to the face of the build- of the suspension rope at the lowest
ing or structure because of obstruc- point of scaffold travel. When other
tions that cannot be moved, the out- types of hoists are used, the suspension
rigger beam may be placed at some ropes shall be long enough to allow the
other angle, provided opposing angle scaffold to be lowered to the level
tiebacks are used. below without the rope end passing
(ix) Tiebacks shall be secured to a through the hoist, or the rope end shall
structurally sound anchorage on the be configured or provided with means
building or structure. Sound anchor- to prevent the end from passing
ages include structural members, but through the hoist.
do not include standpipes, vents, other (7) The use of repaired wire rope as
piping systems, or electrical conduit. suspension rope is prohibited.
(x) Tiebacks shall be installed per- (8) Wire suspension ropes shall not be
pendicular to the face of the building joined together except through the use
or structure, or opposing angle of eye splice thimbles connected with
tiebacks shall be installed. Single shackles or coverplates and bolts.
tiebacks installed at an angle are pro- (9) The load end of wire suspension
hibited. ropes shall be equipped with proper size
(4) Suspension scaffold outrigger thimbles and secured by eyesplicing or
beams shall be: equivalent means.
280
(10) Ropes shall be inspected for de- (14) Gasoline-powered equipment and
fects by a competent person prior to hoists shall not be used on suspension
each workshift and after every occur- scaffolds.
rence which could affect a rope’s integ- (15) Gears and brakes of power-oper-
rity. Ropes shall be replaced if any of ated hoists used on suspension scaf-
the following conditions exist: folds shall be enclosed.
(i) Any physical damage which im- (16) In addition to the normal oper-
pairs the function and strength of the ating brake, suspension scaffold power-
rope. operated hoists and manually operated
(ii) Kinks that might impair the hoists shall have a braking device or
tracking or wrapping of rope around locking pawl which engages automati-
the drum(s) or sheave(s). cally when a hoist makes either of the
following uncontrolled movements: an
(iii) Six randomly distributed broken
instantaneous change in momentum or
wires in one rope lay or three broken
an accelerated overspeed.
wires in one strand in one rope lay.
(17) Manually operated hoists shall
(iv) Abrasion, corrosion, scrubbing, require a positive crank force to de-
flattening or peening causing loss of scend.
more than one-third of the original di- (18) Two-point and multi-point sus-
ameter of the outside wires. pension scaffolds shall be tied or other-
(v) Heat damage caused by a torch or wise secured to prevent them from
any damage caused by contact with swaying, as determined to be necessary
electrical wires. based on an evaluation by a competent
(vi) Evidence that the secondary person. Window cleaners’ anchors shall
brake has been activated during an not be used for this purpose.
overspeed condition and has engaged (19) Devices whose sole function is to
the suspension rope. provide emergency escape and rescue
(11) Swaged attachments or spliced shall not be used as working platforms.
eyes on wire suspension ropes shall not This provision does not preclude the
be used unless they are made by the use of systems which are designed to
wire rope manufacturer or a qualified function both as suspension scaffolds
person. and emergency systems.
(12) When wire rope clips are used on (e) Access. This paragraph applies to
suspension scaffolds: scaffold access for all employees. Ac-
(i) There shall be a minimum of 3 cess requirements for employees erect-
wire rope clips installed, with the clips ing or dismantling supported scaffolds
a minimum of 6 rope diameters apart; are specifically addressed in paragraph
(ii) Clips shall be installed according (e)(9) of this section.
to the manufacturer’s recommenda- (1) When scaffold platforms are more
tions; than 2 feet (0.6 m) above or below a
point of access, portable ladders, hook-
(iii) Clips shall be retightened to the
on ladders, attachable ladders, stair
manufacturer’s recommendations after
towers (scaffold stairways/towers),
the initial loading;
stairway-type ladders (such as ladder
(iv) Clips shall be inspected and re- stands), ramps, walkways, integral pre-
tightened to the manufacturer’s rec- fabricated scaffold access, or direct ac-
ommendations at the start of each cess from another scaffold, structure,
workshift thereafter; personnel hoist, or similar surface
(v) U-bolt clips shall not be used at shall be used. Crossbraces shall not be
the point of suspension for any scaffold used as a means of access.
hoist; (2) Portable, hook-on, and attachable
(vi) When U-bolt clips are used, the ladders (Additional requirements for
U-bolt shall be placed over the dead the proper construction and use of
end of the rope, and the saddle shall be portable ladders are contained in sub-
placed over the live end of the rope. part X of this part—Stairways and
(13) Suspension scaffold power-oper- Ladders):
ated hoists and manual hoists shall be (i) Portable, hook-on, and attachable
tested by a qualified testing labora- ladders shall be positioned so as not to
tory. tip the scaffold;
281
(ii) Hook-on and attachable ladders they do not constitute a projection
shall be positioned so that their bot- hazard.
tom rung is not more than 24 inches (61 (vi) Handrails, and toprails that are
cm) above the scaffold supporting used as handrails, shall be at least 3
level; inches (7.6 cm) from other objects.
(iii) When hook-on and attachable (vii) Stairrails shall be not less than
ladders are used on a supported scaffold 28 inches (71 cm) nor more than 37
more than 35 feet (10.7 m) high, they inches (94 cm) from the upper surface
shall have rest platforms at 35-foot of the stairrail to the surface of the
(10.7 m) maximum vertical intervals. tread, in line with the face of the riser
(iv) Hook-on and attachable ladders at the forward edge of the tread.
shall be specifically designed for use (viii) A landing platform at least 18
with the type of scaffold used; inches (45.7 cm) wide by at least 18
(v) Hook-on and attachable ladders inches (45.7 cm) long shall be provided
shall have a minimum rung length of at each level.
111⁄2 inches (29 cm); and (ix) Each scaffold stairway shall be at
(vi) Hook-on and attachable ladders least 18 inches (45.7 cm) wide between
shall have uniformly spaced rungs with stairrails.
a maximum spacing between rungs of (x) Treads and landings shall have
163⁄4 inches. slip-resistant surfaces.
(3) Stairway-type ladders shall: (xi) Stairways shall be installed be-
(i) Be positioned such that their bot- tween 40 degrees and 60 degrees from
tom step is not more than 24 inches (61 the horizontal.
cm) above the scaffold supporting (xii) Guardrails meeting the require-
level; ments of paragraph (g)(4) of this sec-
tion shall be provided on the open sides
(ii) Be provided with rest platforms
and ends of each landing.
at 12 foot (3.7 m) maximum vertical in-
(xiii) Riser height shall be uniform,
tervals;
within 1⁄4 inch, (0.6 cm) for each flight
(iii) Have a minimum step width of 16
of stairs. Greater variations in riser
inches (41 cm), except that mobile scaf-
height are allowed for the top and bot-
fold stairway-type ladders shall have a
tom steps of the entire system, not for
minimum step width of 111⁄2 inches (30
each flight of stairs.
cm); and
(xiv) Tread depth shall be uniform,
(iv) Have slip-resistant treads on all within 1⁄4 inch, for each flight of stairs.
steps and landings. (5) Ramps and walkways. (i) Ramps
(4) Stairtowers (scaffold stairway/ and walkways 6 feet (1.8 m) or more
towers) shall be positioned such that above lower levels shall have guardrail
their bottom step is not more than 24 systems which comply with subpart M
inches (61 cm.) above the scaffold sup- of this part—Fall Protection;
porting level. (ii) No ramp or walkway shall be in-
(i) A stairrail consisting of a toprail clined more than a slope of one (1)
and a midrail shall be provided on each vertical to three (3) horizontal (20 de-
side of each scaffold stairway. grees above the horizontal).
(ii) The toprail of each stairrail sys- (iii) If the slope of a ramp or a walk-
tem shall also be capable of serving as way is steeper than one (1) vertical in
a handrail, unless a separate handrail eight (8) horizontal, the ramp or walk-
is provided. way shall have cleats not more than
(iii) Handrails, and toprails that fourteen (14) inches (35 cm) apart which
serve as handrails, shall provide an are securely fastened to the planks to
adequate handhold for employees provide footing.
grasping them to avoid falling. (6) Integral prefabricated scaffold ac-
(iv) Stairrail systems and handrails cess frames shall:
shall be surfaced to prevent injury to (i) Be specifically designed and con-
employees from punctures or lacera- structed for use as ladder rungs;
tions, and to prevent snagging of cloth- (ii) Have a rung length of at least 8
ing. inches (20 cm);
(v) The ends of stairrail systems and (iii) Not be used as work platforms
handrails shall be constructed so that when rungs are less than 111⁄2 inches in
282
length, unless each affected employee (iii) When erecting or dismantling tu-
uses fall protection, or a positioning bular welded frame scaffolds, (end)
device, which complies with § 1926.502; frames, with horizontal members that
(iv) Be uniformly spaced within each are parallel, level and are not more
frame section; than 22 inches apart vertically may be
(v) Be provided with rest platforms at used as climbing devices for access,
35-foot (10.7 m) maximum vertical in- provided they are erected in a manner
tervals on all supported scaffolds more that creates a usable ladder and pro-
than 35 feet (10.7 m) high; and vides good hand hold and foot space.
(vi) Have a maximum spacing be- (iv) Cross braces on tubular welded
tween rungs of 163⁄4 inches (43 cm). Non- frame scaffolds shall not be used as a
uniform rung spacing caused by joining means of access or egress.
end frames together is allowed, pro- (f) Use. (1) Scaffolds and scaffold com-
vided the resulting spacing does not ex- ponents shall not be loaded in excess of
ceed 163⁄4 inches (43 cm). their maximum intended loads or rated
(7) Steps and rungs of ladder and capacities, whichever is less.
stairway type access shall line up (2) The use of shore or lean-to scaf-
vertically with each other between rest folds is prohibited.
platforms. (3) Scaffolds and scaffold components
(8) Direct access to or from another shall be inspected for visible defects by
surface shall be used only when the a competent person before each work
scaffold is not more than 14 inches (36 shift, and after any occurrence which
cm) horizontally and not more than 24 could affect a scaffold’s structural in-
inches (61 cm) vertically from the other tegrity.
surface. (4) Any part of a scaffold damaged or
(9) Effective September 2, 1997, access weakened such that its strength is less
for employees erecting or dismantling than that required by paragraph (a) of
supported scaffolds shall be in accord- this section shall be immediately re-
ance with the following: paired or replaced, braced to meet
(i) The employer shall provide safe those provisions, or removed from serv-
means of access for each employee ice until repaired.
erecting or dismantling a scaffold (5) Scaffolds shall not be moved hori-
where the provision of safe access is zontally while employees are on them,
feasible and does not create a greater unless they have been designed by a
hazard. The employer shall have a com- registered professional engineer spe-
petent person determine whether it is cifically for such movement or, for mo-
feasible or would pose a greater hazard bile scaffolds, where the provisions of
to provide, and have employees use a § 1926.452(w) are followed.
safe means of access. This determina- (6) The clearance between scaffolds
tion shall be based on site conditions and power lines shall be as follows:
and the type of scaffold being erected Scaffolds shall not be erected, used,
or dismantled. dismantled, altered, or moved such
(ii) Hook-on or attachable ladders that they or any conductive material
shall be installed as soon as scaffold handled on them might come closer to
erection has progressed to a point that exposed and energized power lines than
permits safe installation and use. as follows:
Insulated lines
voltage Minimum distance Alternatives
Less than 300 volts .......................... 3 feet (0.9 m).

300 volts to 50 kv ............................ 10 feet (3.1m).
More than 50 kv ............................... 10 feet (3.1 m) plus 0.4 inches (1.0 cm) for 2 times the length of the line insulator, but
each 1 kv over 50 kv. never less than 10 feet (3.1 m).
Uninsulated lines
voltage Minimum distance Alternatives
Less than 50 kv ............................... 10 feet (3.1 m).

More than 50 kv ............................... 10 feet (3.1 m) plus 0.4 inches (1.0 cm) for 2 times the length of the line insulator, but
each 1 kv over 50 kv. never less than 10 feet (3.1 m).
283
EXCEPTION TO PARAGRAPH (f)(6): Scaffolds to increase the working level height of
and materials may be closer to power lines employees.
than specified above where such clearance is
(15) Ladders shall not be used on scaf-
necessary for performance of work, and only
after the utility company, or electrical sys- folds to increase the working level
tem operator, has been notified of the need height of employees, except on large
to work closer and the utility company, or area scaffolds where employers have
electrical system operator, has deenergized satisfied the following criteria:
the lines, relocated the lines, or installed (i) When the ladder is placed against
protective coverings to prevent accidental a structure which is not a part of the
contact with the lines. scaffold, the scaffold shall be secured
(7) Scaffolds shall be erected, moved, against the sideways thrust exerted by
dismantled, or altered only under the the ladder;
supervision and direction of a com- (ii) The platform units shall be se-
petent person qualified in scaffold erec- cured to the scaffold to prevent their
tion, moving, dismantling or alter- movement;
ation. Such activities shall be per- (iii) The ladder legs shall be on the
formed only by experienced and trained same platform or other means shall be
employees selected for such work by provided to stabilize the ladder against
the competent person. unequal platform deflection, and
(8) Employees shall be prohibited (iv) The ladder legs shall be secured
from working on scaffolds covered with to prevent them from slipping or being
snow, ice, or other slippery material pushed off the platform.
except as necessary for removal of such (16) Platforms shall not deflect more
materials. than 1⁄60 of the span when loaded.
(9) Where swinging loads are being (17) To reduce the possibility of weld-
hoisted onto or near scaffolds such that ing current arcing through the suspen-
the loads might contact the scaffold, sion wire rope when performing weld-
tag lines or equivalent measures to ing from suspended scaffolds, the fol-
control the loads shall be used. lowing precautions shall be taken, as
(10) Suspension ropes supporting ad- applicable:
justable suspension scaffolds shall be of (i) An insulated thimble shall be used
a diameter large enough to provide suf- to attach each suspension wire rope to
ficient surface area for the functioning its hanging support (such as cornice
of brake and hoist mechanisms. hook or outrigger). Excess suspension
(11) Suspension ropes shall be shield- wire rope and any additional inde-
ed from heat-producing processes. pendent lines from grounding shall be
When acids or other corrosive sub- insulated;
stances are used on a scaffold, the (ii) The suspension wire rope shall be
ropes shall be shielded, treated to pro- covered with insulating material ex-
tect against the corrosive substances, tending at least 4 feet (1.2 m) above the
or shall be of a material that will not hoist. If there is a tail line below the
be damaged by the substance being hoist, it shall be insulated to prevent
used. contact with the platform. The portion
(12) Work on or from scaffolds is proof the tail line that hangs free below
hibited during storms or high winds the scaffold shall be guided or retained,
unless a competent person has deter- or both, so that it does not become
mined that it is safe for employees to grounded;
be on the scaffold and those employees (iii) Each hoist shall be covered with
are protected by a personal fall arrest insulated protective covers;
system or wind screens. Wind screens (iv) In addition to a work lead at-
shall not be used unless the scaffold is tachment required by the welding proc-
secured against the anticipated wind ess, a grounding conductor shall be
forces imposed. connected from the scaffold to the
(13) Debris shall not be allowed to ac- structure. The size of this conductor
cumulate on platforms. shall be at least the size of the welding
(14) Makeshift devices, such as but process work lead, and this conductor
not limited to boxes and barrels, shall shall not be in series with the welding
not be used on top of scaffold platforms process or the work piece;
284
(v) If the scaffold grounding lead is (vi) Each employee performing
disconnected at any time, the welding overhand bricklaying operations from
machine shall be shut off; and a supported scaffold shall be protected
(vi) An active welding rod or from falling from all open sides and
uninsulated welding lead shall not be ends of the scaffold (except at the side
allowed to contact the scaffold or its next to the wall being laid) by the use
suspension system. of a personal fall arrest system or
(g) Fall protection. (1) Each employee guardrail system (with minimum 200
on a scaffold more than 10 feet (3.1 m) pound toprail capacity).
above a lower level shall be protected (vii) For all scaffolds not otherwise
from falling to that lower level. Para- specified in paragraphs (g)(1)(i) through
graphs (g)(1) (i) through (vii) of this (g)(1)(vi) of this section, each employee
section establish the types of fall pro- shall be protected by the use of per-
tection to be provided to the employees sonal fall arrest systems or guardrail
on each type of scaffold. Paragraph systems meeting the requirements of
(g)(2) of this section addresses fall pro- paragraph (g)(4) of this section.
tection for scaffold erectors and dis- (2) Effective September 2, 1997, the
mantlers. employer shall have a competent per-
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (g)(1): The fall protec- son determine the feasibility and safe-
tion requirements for employees installing ty of providing fall protection for em-
suspension scaffold support systems on ployees erecting or dismantling sup-
floors, roofs, and other elevated surfaces are ported scaffolds. Employers are re-
set forth in subpart M of this part. quired to provide fall protection for
(i) Each employee on a boatswains’ employees erecting or dismantling sup-
chair, catenary scaffold, float scaffold, ported scaffolds where the installation
needle beam scaffold, or ladder jack and use of such protection is feasible
scaffold shall be protected by a per- and does not create a greater hazard.
sonal fall arrest system; (3) In addition to meeting the re-
(ii) Each employee on a single-point quirements of § 1926.502(d), personal fall
or two-point adjustable suspension arrest systems used on scaffolds shall
scaffold shall be protected by both a be attached by lanyard to a vertical
personal fall arrest system and guard- lifeline, horizontal lifeline, or scaffold
rail system; structural member. Vertical lifelines
(iii) Each employee on a crawling shall not be used when overhead com-
board (chicken ladder) shall be pro- ponents, such as overhead protection
tected by a personal fall arrest system, or additional platform levels, are part
a guardrail system (with minimum 200 of a single-point or two-point adjust-
pound toprail capacity), or by a three- able suspension scaffold.
fourth inch (1.9 cm) diameter grabline (i) When vertical lifelines are used,
or equivalent handhold securely fas- they shall be fastened to a fixed safe
tened beside each crawling board; point of anchorage, shall be inde-
(iv) Each employee on a self-con- pendent of the scaffold, and shall be
tained adjustable scaffold shall be pro- protected from sharp edges and abra-
tected by a guardrail system (with sion. Safe points of anchorage include
minimum 200 pound toprail capacity) structural members of buildings, but
when the platform is supported by the do not include standpipes, vents, other
frame structure, and by both a per- piping systems, electrical conduit, out-
sonal fall arrest system and a guardrail rigger beams, or counterweights.
system (with minimum 200 pound top- (ii) When horizontal lifelines are
rail capacity) when the platform is sup- used, they shall be secured to two or
ported by ropes; more structural members of the scaf-
(v) Each employee on a walkway lo- fold, or they may be looped around
cated within a scaffold shall be pro- both suspension and independent sus-
tected by a guardrail system (with pension lines (on scaffolds so equipped)
minimum 200 pound toprail capacity) above the hoist and brake attached to
installed within 91⁄2 inches (24.1 cm) of the end of the scaffold. Horizontal life-
and along at least one side of the walk- lines shall not be attached only to the
way. suspension ropes.
285
(iii) When lanyards are connected to the guardrail system and the platform
horizontal lifelines or structural mem- surface.
bers on a single-point or two-point ad- (v) When screens and mesh are used,
justable suspension scaffold, the scaf- they shall extend from the top edge of
fold shall be equipped with additional the guardrail system to the scaffold
independent support lines and auto- platform, and along the entire opening
matic locking devices capable of stop- between the supports.
ping the fall of the scaffold in the event (vi) When intermediate members
one or both of the suspension ropes (such as balusters or additional rails)
fail. The independent support lines are used, they shall not be more than
shall be equal in number and strength 19 inches (48 cm) apart.
to the suspension ropes. (vii) Each toprail or equivalent mem-
(iv) Vertical lifelines, independent ber of a guardrail system shall be capa-
support lines, and suspension ropes ble of withstanding, without failure, a
shall not be attached to each other, nor force applied in any downward or hori-
shall they be attached to or use the zontal direction at any point along its
same point of anchorage, nor shall they top edge of at least 100 pounds (445 n)
be attached to the same point on the for guardrail systems installed on sin-
scaffold or personal fall arrest system. gle-point adjustable suspension scaf-
(4) Guardrail systems installed to folds or two-point adjustable suspen-
meet the requirements of this section sion scaffolds, and at least 200 pounds
shall comply with the following provi- (890 n) for guardrail systems installed
sions (guardrail systems built in ac- on all other scaffolds.
cordance with appendix A to this sub- (viii) When the loads specified in
part will be deemed to meet the re- paragraph (g)(4)(vii) of this section are
quirements of paragraphs (g)(4) (vii), applied in a downward direction, the
(viii), and (ix) of this section): top edge shall not drop below the
(i) Guardrail systems shall be in- height above the platform surface that
stalled along all open sides and ends of is prescribed in paragraph (g)(4)(ii) of
platforms. Guardrail systems shall be this section.
installed before the scaffold is released (ix) Midrails, screens, mesh, inter-
for use by employees other than erec- mediate vertical members, solid pan-
tion/dismantling crews. els, and equivalent structural members
(ii) The top edge height of toprails or of a guardrail system shall be capable
equivalent member on supported scaf- of withstanding, without failure, a
folds manufactured or placed in service force applied in any downward or hori-
after January 1, 2000 shall be installed zontal direction at any point along the
between 38 inches (0.97 m) and 45 inches midrail or other member of at least 75
(1.2 m) above the platform surface. The pounds (333 n) for guardrail systems
top edge height on supported scaffolds with a minimum 100 pound toprail ca-
manufactured and placed in service be- pacity, and at least 150 pounds (666 n)
fore January 1, 2000, and on all sus- for guardrail systems with a minimum
pended scaffolds where both a guardrail 200 pound toprail capacity.
and a personal fall arrest system are (x) Suspension scaffold hoists and
required shall be between 36 inches (0.9 non-walk-through stirrups may be used
m) and 45 inches (1.2 m). When condi- as end guardrails, if the space between
tions warrant, the height of the top the hoist or stirrup and the side guard-
edge may exceed the 45-inch height, rail or structure does not allow passage
provided the guardrail system meets of an employee to the end of the scaf-
all other criteria of paragraph (g)(4). fold.
(iii) When midrails, screens, mesh, (xi) Guardrails shall be surfaced to
intermediate vertical members, solid prevent injury to an employee from
panels, or equivalent structural mem- punctures or lacerations, and to pre-
bers are used, they shall be installed vent snagging of clothing.
between the top edge of the guardrail (xii) The ends of all rails shall not
system and the scaffold platform. overhang the terminal posts except
(iv) When midrails are used, they when such overhang does not con-
shall be installed at a height approxi- stitute a projection hazard to employ-
mately midway between the top edge of ees.
286
(xiii) Steel or plastic banding shall guardrail shall be erected for a dis-
not be used as a toprail or midrail. tance sufficient to protect employees
(xiv) Manila or plastic (or other syn- below; or
thetic) rope being used for toprails or (iv) A guardrail system shall be in-
midrails shall be inspected by a com- stalled with openings small enough to
petent person as frequently as nec- prevent passage of potential falling ob-
essary to ensure that it continues to jects; or
meet the strength requirements of (v) A canopy structure, debris net, or
paragraph (g) of this section. catch platform strong enough to with-
(xv) Crossbracing is acceptable in
stand the impact forces of the poten-
place of a midrail when the crossing
tial falling objects shall be erected
point of two braces is between 20 inches
(0.5 m) and 30 inches (0.8 m) above the over the employees below.
work platform or as a toprail when the (3) Canopies, when used for falling ob-
crossing point of two braces is between ject protection, shall comply with the
38 inches (0.97 m) and 48 inches (1.3 m) following criteria:
above the work platform. The end (i) Canopies shall be installed be-
points at each upright shall be no more tween the falling object hazard and the
than 48 inches (1.3 m) apart. employees.
(h) Falling object protection. (1) In ad- (ii) When canopies are used on sus-
dition to wearing hardhats each em- pension scaffolds for falling object pro-
ployee on a scaffold shall be provided tection, the scaffold shall be equipped
with additional protection from falling with additional independent support
hand tools, debris, and other small ob- lines equal in number to the number of
jects through the installation of points supported, and equivalent in
toeboards, screens, or guardrail sys- strength to the strength of the suspen-
tems, or through the erection of debris sion ropes.
nets, catch platforms, or canopy struc- (iii) Independent support lines and
tures that contain or deflect the falling
suspension ropes shall not be attached
objects. When the falling objects are
to the same points of anchorage.
too large, heavy or massive to be con-
tained or deflected by any of the above- (4) Where used, toeboards shall be:
listed measures, the employer shall (i) Capable of withstanding, without
place such potential falling objects failure, a force of at least 50 pounds
away from the edge of the surface from (222 n) applied in any downward or hor-
which they could fall and shall secure izontal direction at any point along the
those materials as necessary to prevent toeboard (toeboards built in accord-
their falling. ance with appendix A to this subpart
(2) Where there is a danger of tools, will be deemed to meet this require-
materials, or equipment falling from a ment); and
scaffold and striking employees below, (ii) At least three and one-half inches
the following provisions apply: (9 cm) high from the top edge of the
(i) The area below the scaffold to toeboard to the level of the walking/
which objects can fall shall be barri- working surface. Toeboards shall be se-
caded, and employees shall not be per- curely fastened in place at the outer-
mitted to enter the hazard area; or most edge of the platform and have not
(ii) A toeboard shall be erected along more than 1⁄4 inch (0.7 cm) clearance
the edge of platforms more than 10 feet above the walking/working surface.
(3.1 m) above lower levels for a distance Toeboards shall be solid or with open-
sufficient to protect employees below, ings not over one inch (2.5 cm) in the
except on float (ship) scaffolds where greatest dimension.
an edging of 3⁄4 × 11⁄2 inch (2 × 4 cm)
wood or equivalent may be used in lieu [61 FR 46107, Aug. 30, 1996, as corrected and
of toeboards; amended at 61 FR 59831, 59832, Nov. 25, 1996]
(iii) Where tools, materials, or equip- EFFECTIVE DATE NOTE: At 61 FR 59832, Nov.
ment are piled to a height higher than 25, 1996, § 1926.451(b)(2)(i) was amended and
the top edge of the toeboard, paneling certain requirements stayed until Nov. 25,
or screening extending from the 1997, or until further rulemaking has been
toeboard or platform to the top of the completed, whichever is later.
287
§ 1926.452 Additional requirements ap- criteria that will enable an employer

plicable to specific types of scaf- to comply with design and loading re-
folds. quirements for pole scaffolds under 60
In addition to the applicable require- feet in height.
ments of § 1926.451, the following re- (b) Tube and coupler scaffolds. (1)
quirements apply to the specific types When platforms are being moved to the
of scaffolds indicated. Scaffolds not next level, the existing platform shall
specifically addressed by § 1926.452, such be left undisturbed until the new bear-
as but not limited to systems scaffolds, ers have been set in place and braced
must meet the requirements of prior to receiving the new platforms.
§ 1926.451. (2) Transverse bracing forming an
(a) Pole scaffolds. (1) When platforms ‘‘X’’ across the width of the scaffold
are being moved to the next level, the shall be installed at the scaffold ends
existing platform shall be left undis- and at least at every third set of posts
turbed until the new bearers have been horizontally (measured from only one
set in place and braced, prior to receiv- end) and every fourth runner
ing the new platforms. vertically. Bracing shall extend diago-
(2) Crossbracing shall be installed be- nally from the inner or outer posts or
tween the inner and outer sets of poles runners upward to the next outer or
on double pole scaffolds. inner posts or runners. Building ties
(3) Diagonal bracing in both direc- shall be installed at the bearer levels
tions shall be installed across the en- between the transverse bracing and
tire inside face of double-pole scaffolds shall conform to the requirements of
used to support loads equivalent to a § 1926.451(c)(1).
uniformly distributed load of 50 pounds (3) On straight run scaffolds, longitu-
(222 kg) or more per square foot (929 dinal bracing across the inner and
square cm). outer rows of posts shall be installed
(4) Diagonal bracing in both direc- diagonally in both directions, and shall
tions shall be installed across the en- extend from the base of the end posts
tire outside face of all double- and sin- upward to the top of the scaffold at ap-
gle-pole scaffolds. proximately a 45 degree angle. On scaf-
(5) Runners and bearers shall be in- folds whose length is greater than their
stalled on edge. height, such bracing shall be repeated
(6) Bearers shall extend a minimum beginning at least at every fifth post.
of 3 inches (7.6 cm) over the outside On scaffolds whose length is less than
edges of runners. their height, such bracing shall be in-
(7) Runners shall extend over a min- stalled from the base of the end posts
imum of two poles, and shall be sup- upward to the opposite end posts, and
ported by bearing blocks securely at- then in alternating directions until
tached to the poles. reaching the top of the scaffold. Brac-
(8) Braces, bearers, and runners shall ing shall be installed as close as pos-
not be spliced between poles. sible to the intersection of the bearer
(9) Where wooden poles are spliced, and post or runner and post.
the ends shall be squared and the upper (4) Where conditions preclude the at-
section shall rest squarely on the lower tachment of bracing to posts, bracing
section. Wood splice plates shall be shall be attached to the runners as
provided on at least two adjacent sides, close to the post as possible.
and shall extend at least 2 feet (0.6 m) (5) Bearers shall be installed trans-
on either side of the splice, overlap the versely between posts, and when cou-
abutted ends equally, and have at least pled to the posts, shall have the in-
the same cross-sectional areas as the board coupler bear directly on the run-
pole. Splice plates of other materials of ner coupler. When the bearers are cou-
equivalent strength may be used. pled to the runners, the couplers shall
(10) Pole scaffolds over 60 feet in be as close to the posts as possible.
height shall be designed by a registered (6) Bearers shall extend beyond the
professional engineer, and shall be con- posts and runners, and shall provide
structed and loaded in accordance with full contact with the coupler.
that design. Non-mandatory appendix (7) Runners shall be installed along
A to this subpart contains examples of the length of the scaffold, located on
288
both the inside and outside posts at (iii) Be used only to support per-
level heights (when tube and coupler sonnel, unless the scaffold has been de-
guardrails and midrails are used on signed for other loads by a qualified en-
outside posts, they may be used in lieu gineer and built to withstand the tip-
of outside runners). ping forces caused by those other loads
(8) Runners shall be interlocked on being placed on the bracket-supported
straight runs to form continuous section of the scaffold.
lengths, and shall be coupled to each (6) Scaffolds over 125 feet (38.0 m) in
post. The bottom runners and bearers height above their base plates shall be
shall be located as close to the base as designed by a registered professional
possible. engineer, and shall be constructed and
(9) Couplers shall be of a structural loaded in accordance with such design.
metal, such as drop-forged steel, malle- (d) Plasterers’, decorators’, and large
able iron, or structural grade alu- area scaffolds. Scaffolds shall be con-
minum. The use of gray cast iron is structed in accordance with paragraphs
prohibited. (a), (b), or (c) of this section, as appro-
(10) Tube and coupler scaffolds over priate.
125 feet in height shall be designed by (e) Bricklayers’ square scaffolds
a registered professional engineer, and (squares). (1) Scaffolds made of wood
shall be constructed and loaded in ac- shall be reinforced with gussets on
cordance with such design. Non-manda- both sides of each corner.
tory appendix A to this subpart con- (2) Diagonal braces shall be installed
tains examples of criteria that will en- on all sides of each square.
able an employer to comply with de- (3) Diagonal braces shall be installed
sign and loading requirements for tube between squares on the rear and front
and coupler scaffolds under 125 feet in sides of the scaffold, and shall extend
height. from the bottom of each square to the
(c) Fabricated frame scaffolds (tubular top of the next square.
welded frame scaffolds). (1) When mov- (4) Scaffolds shall not exceed three
ing platforms to the next level, the ex- tiers in height, and shall be so con-
isting platform shall be left undis- structed and arranged that one square
turbed until the new end frames have rests directly above the other. The
been set in place and braced prior to re- upper tiers shall stand on a continuous
ceiving the new platforms. row of planks laid across the next
(2) Frames and panels shall be braced lower tier, and shall be nailed down or
by cross, horizontal, or diagonal otherwise secured to prevent displace-
braces, or combination thereof, which ment.
secure vertical members together lat- (f) Horse scaffolds. (1) Scaffolds shall
erally. The cross braces shall be of such not be constructed or arranged more
length as will automatically square than two tiers or 10 feet (3.0 m) in
and align vertical members so that the height, whichever is less.
erected scaffold is always plumb, level, (2) When horses are arranged in tiers,
and square. All brace connections shall each horse shall be placed directly over
be secured. the horse in the tier below.
(3) Frames and panels shall be joined (3) When horses are arranged in tiers,
together vertically by coupling or the legs of each horse shall be nailed
stacking pins or equivalent means. down or otherwise secured to prevent
(4) Where uplift can occur which displacement.
would displace scaffold end frames or (4) When horses are arranged in tiers,
panels, the frames or panels shall be each tier shall be crossbraced.
locked together vertically by pins or (g) Form scaffolds and carpenters’
equivalent means. bracket scaffolds. (1) Each bracket, ex-
(5) Brackets used to support canti- cept those for wooden bracket-form
levered loads shall: scaffolds, shall be attached to the sup-
(i) Be seated with side-brackets par- porting formwork or structure by
allel to the frames and end-brackets at means of one or more of the following:
90 degrees to the frames; nails; a metal stud attachment device;
(ii) Not be bent or twisted from these welding; hooking over a secured struc-
positions; and tural supporting member, with the
289
form wales either bolted to the form or fessional engineer and shall be con-
secured by snap ties or tie bolts ex- structed and loaded in accordance with
tending through the form and securely such design.
anchored; or, for carpenters’ bracket (j) Pump jack scaffolds. (1) Pump jack
scaffolds only, by a bolt extending brackets, braces, and accessories shall
through to the opposite side of the be fabricated from metal plates and an-
structure’s wall. gles. Each pump jack bracket shall
(2) Wooden bracket-form scaffolds have two positive gripping mechanisms
shall be an integral part of the form to prevent any failure or slippage.
panel. (2) Poles shall be secured to the
(3) Folding type metal brackets, structure by rigid triangular bracing or
when extended for use, shall be either equivalent at the bottom, top, and
bolted or secured with a locking-type other points as necessary. When the
pin. pump jack has to pass bracing already
(h) Roof bracket scaffolds. (1) Scaffold installed, an additional brace shall be
brackets shall be constructed to fit the installed approximately 4 feet (1.2 m)
pitch of the roof and shall provide a above the brace to be passed, and shall
level support for the platform. be left in place until the pump jack has
(2) Brackets (including those pro- been moved and the original brace re-
vided with pointed metal projections) installed.
shall be anchored in place by nails un- (3) When guardrails are used for fall
less it is impractical to use nails. When protection, a workbench may be used
nails are not used, brackets shall be se- as the toprail only if it meets all the
cured in place with first-grade manila requirements in paragraphs (g)(4) (ii),
rope of at least three-fourth inch (1.9 (vii), (viii), and (xiii) of § 1926.451.
cm) diameter, or equivalent. (4) Work benches shall not be used as
(i) Outrigger scaffolds. (1) The inboard scaffold platforms.
end of outrigger beams, measured from
(5) When poles are made of wood, the
the fulcrum point to the extreme point
pole lumber shall be straight-grained,
of anchorage, shall be not less than one
free of shakes, large loose or dead
and one-half times the outboard end in
knots, and other defects which might
length.
impair strength.
(2) Outrigger beams fabricated in the
shape of an I-beam or channel shall be (6) When wood poles are constructed
placed so that the web section is of two continuous lengths, they shall
vertical. be joined together with the seam par-
(3) The fulcrum point of outrigger allel to the bracket.
beams shall rest on secure bearings at (7) When two by fours are spliced to
least 6 inches (15.2 cm) in each hori- make a pole, mending plates shall be
zontal dimension. installed at all splices to develop the
(4) Outrigger beams shall be secured full strength of the member.
in place against movement, and shall (k) Ladder jack scaffolds. (1) Platforms
be securely braced at the fulcrum point shall not exceed a height of 20 feet (6.1
against tipping. m).
(5) The inboard ends of outrigger (2) All ladders used to support ladder
beams shall be securely anchored ei- jack scaffolds shall meet the require-
ther by means of braced struts bearing ments of subpart X of this part—Stair-
against sills in contact with the over- ways and Ladders, except that job-
head beams or ceiling, or by means of made ladders shall not be used to sup-
tension members secured to the floor port ladder jack scaffolds.
joists underfoot, or by both. (3) The ladder jack shall be so de-
(6) The entire supporting structure signed and constructed that it will bear
shall be securely braced to prevent any on the side rails and ladder rungs or on
horizontal movement. the ladder rungs alone. If bearing on
(7) To prevent their displacement, rungs only, the bearing area shall in-
platform units shall be nailed, bolted, clude a length of at least 10 inches (25.4
or otherwise secured to outriggers. cm) on each rung.
(8) Scaffolds and scaffold components (4) Ladders used to support ladder
shall be designed by a registered pro- jacks shall be placed, fastened, or
290
equipped with devices to prevent slip- (iii) The supporting rope is protected
ping. to ensure that it will not chafe at any
(5) Scaffold platforms shall not be point where a change in direction oc-
bridged one to another. curs, and
(l) Window jack scaffolds. (1) Scaffolds (iv) The scaffold is positioned so that
shall be securely attached to the win- swinging cannot bring the scaffold into
dow opening. contact with another surface.
(2) Scaffolds shall be used only for (3) Boatswains’ chair tackle shall
the purpose of working at the window consist of correct size ball bearings or
opening through which the jack is bushed blocks containing safety hooks
placed. and properly ‘‘eye-spliced’’ minimum
(3) Window jacks shall not be used to five-eighth (5⁄8) inch (1.6 cm) diameter
support planks placed between one win- first-grade manila rope, or other rope
dow jack and another, or for other ele- which will satisfy the criteria (e.g.,
ments of scaffolding. strength and durability) of manila
(m) Crawling boards (chicken ladders). rope.
(1) Crawling boards shall extend from (4) Boatswains’ chair seat slings shall
the roof peak to the eaves when used in be reeved through four corner holes in
connection with roof construction, re- the seat; shall cross each other on the
pair, or maintenance. underside of the seat; and shall be
(2) Crawling boards shall be secured rigged so as to prevent slippage which
to the roof by ridge hooks or by means could cause an out-of-level condition.
that meet equivalent criteria (e.g., (5) Boatswains’ chair seat slings shall
strength and durability). be a minimum of five-eight (5⁄8) inch
(n) Step, platform, and trestle ladder (1.6 cm) diameter fiber, synthetic, or
scaffolds. (1) Scaffold platforms shall other rope which will satisfy the cri-
not be placed any higher than the sec- teria (e.g., strength, slip resistance, du-
ond highest rung or step of the ladder rability, etc.) of first grade manila
supporting the platform. rope.
(2) All ladders used in conjunction (6) When a heat-producing process
with step, platform and trestle ladder such as gas or arc welding is being con-
scaffolds shall meet the pertinent re- ducted, boatswains’ chair seat slings
quirements of subpart X of this part— shall be a minimum of three-eight (3⁄8)
Stairways and Ladders, except that inch (1.0 cm) wire rope.
job-made ladders shall not be used to (7) Non-cross-laminated wood boat-
support such scaffolds. swains’ chairs shall be reinforced on
(3) Ladders used to support step, plat- their underside by cleats securely fas-
form, and trestle ladder scaffolds shall tened to prevent the board from split-
be placed, fastened, or equipped with ting.
devices to prevent slipping. (p) Two-point adjustable suspension
(4) Scaffolds shall not be bridged one scaffolds (swing stages). The following
to another. requirements do not apply to two-point
(o) Single-point adjustable suspension adjustable suspension scaffolds used as
scaffolds. (1) When two single-point ad- masons’ or stonesetters’ scaffolds.
justable suspension scaffolds are com- Such scaffolds are covered by para-
bined to form a two-point adjustable graph (q) of this section.
suspension scaffold, the resulting two- (1) Platforms shall not be more than
point scaffold shall comply with the re- 36 inches (0.9 m) wide unless designed
quirements for two-point adjustable by a qualified person to prevent unsta-
suspension scaffolds in paragraph (p) of ble conditions.
this section. (2) The platform shall be securely fas-
(2) The supporting rope between the tened to hangers (stirrups) by U-bolts
scaffold and the suspension device shall or by other means which satisfy the re-
be kept vertical unless all of the fol- quirements of § 1926.451(a).
lowing conditions are met: (3) The blocks for fiber or synthetic
(i) The rigging has been designed by a ropes shall consist of at least one dou-
qualified person, and ble and one single block. The sheaves
(ii) The scaffold is accessible to res- of all blocks shall fit the size of the
cuers, and rope used.
291
(4) Platforms shall be of the ladder- project a minimum of 6 inches (15.2 cm)
type, plank-type, beam-type, or light- beyond the platform on both sides.
metal type. Light metal-type plat- Each bearer shall be securely fastened
forms having a rated capacity of 750 to the platform.
pounds or less and platforms 40 feet (2) Rope connections shall be such
(12.2 m) or less in length shall be tested that the platform cannot shift or slip.
and listed by a nationally recognized (3) When only two ropes are used
testing laboratory. with each float:
(5) Two-point scaffolds shall not be (i) They shall be arranged so as to
bridged or otherwise connected one to provide four ends which are securely
another during raising and lowering fastened to overhead supports.
operations unless the bridge connec- (ii) Each supporting rope shall be
tions are articulated (attached), and hitched around one end of the bearer
the hoists properly sized. and pass under the platform to the
(6) Passage may be made from one other end of the bearer where it is
platform to another only when the hitched again, leaving sufficient rope
platforms are at the same height, are at each end for the supporting ties.
abutting, and walk-through stirrups (t) Interior hung scaffolds. (1) Scaf-
specifically designed for this purpose folds shall be suspended only from the
are used. roof structure or other structural
(q) Multi-point adjustable suspension member such as ceiling beams.
scaffolds, stonesetters’ multi-point adjust-
(2) Overhead supporting members
able suspension scaffolds, and masons’
(roof structure, ceiling beams, or other
multi-point adjustable suspension scaf-
structural members) shall be inspected
folds. (1) When two or more scaffolds
and checked for strength before the
are used they shall not be bridged one
scaffold is erected.
to another unless they are designed to
(3) Suspension ropes and cables shall
be bridged, the bridge connections are
be connected to the overhead sup-
articulated, and the hoists are properly
porting members by shackles, clips,
sized.
thimbles, or other means that meet
(2) If bridges are not used, passage
equivalent criteria (e.g., strength, du-
may be made from one platform to an-
rability).
other only when the platforms are at
the same height and are abutting. (u) Needle beam scaffolds. (1) Scaffold
(3) Scaffolds shall be suspended from support beams shall be installed on
metal outriggers, brackets, wire rope edge.
slings, hooks, or means that meet (2) Ropes or hangers shall be used for
equivalent criteria (e.g., strength, du- supports, except that one end of a nee-
rability). dle beam scaffold may be supported by
(r) Catenary scaffolds. (1) No more a permanent structural member.
than one platform shall be placed be- (3) The ropes shall be securely at-
tween consecutive vertical pickups, tached to the needle beams.
and no more than two platforms shall (4) The support connection shall be
be used on a catenary scaffold. arranged so as to prevent the needle
(2) Platforms supported by wire ropes beam from rolling or becoming dis-
shall have hook-shaped stops on each placed.
end of the platforms to prevent them (5) Platform units shall be securely
from slipping off the wire ropes. These attached to the needle beams by bolts
hooks shall be so placed that they will or equivalent means. Cleats and over-
prevent the platform from falling if hang are not considered to be adequate
one of the horizontal wire ropes breaks. means of attachment.
(3) Wire ropes shall not be tightened (v) Multi-level suspended scaffolds. (1)
to the extent that the application of a Scaffolds shall be equipped with addi-
scaffold load will overstress them. tional independent support lines, equal
(4) Wire ropes shall be continuous in number to the number of points sup-
and without splices between anchors. ported, and of equivalent strength to
(s) Float (ship) scaffolds. (1) The plat- the suspension ropes, and rigged to
form shall be supported by a minimum support the scaffold in the event the
of two bearers, each of which shall suspension rope(s) fail.
292
(2) Independent support lines and sus- (iii) Outrigger frames, when used, are
pension ropes shall not be attached to installed on both sides of the scaffold;
the same points of anchorage. (iv) When power systems are used,
(3) Supports for platforms shall be at- the propelling force is applied directly
tached directly to the support stirrup to the wheels, and does not produce a
and not to any other platform. speed in excess of 1 foot per second (.3
(w) Mobile scaffolds. (1) Scaffolds shall mps); and
be braced by cross, horizontal, or di- (v) No employee is on any part of the
agonal braces, or combination thereof, scaffold which extends outward beyond
to prevent racking or collapse of the the wheels, casters, or other supports.
scaffold and to secure vertical mem- (7) Platforms shall not extend out-
bers together laterally so as to auto- ward beyond the base supports of the
matically square and align the vertical scaffold unless outrigger frames or
members. Scaffolds shall be plumb, equivalent devices are used to ensure
level, and squared. All brace connec- stability.
tions shall be secured. (8) Where leveling of the scaffold is
(i) Scaffolds constructed of tube and necessary, screw jacks or equivalent
coupler components shall also comply means shall be used.
with the requirements of paragraph (b) (9) Caster stems and wheel stems
of this section; shall be pinned or otherwise secured in
(ii) Scaffolds constructed of fab- scaffold legs or adjustment screws.
ricated frame components shall also (10) Before a scaffold is moved, each
comply with the requirements of para- employee on the scaffold shall be made
graph (c) of this section. aware of the move.
(2) Scaffold casters and wheels shall (x) Repair bracket scaffolds. (1) Brack-
be locked with positive wheel and/or ets shall be secured in place by at least
wheel and swivel locks, or equivalent one wire rope at least 1⁄2 inch (1.27 cm)
means, to prevent movement of the in diameter.
scaffold while the scaffold is used in a (2) Each bracket shall be attached to
stationary manner. the securing wire rope (or ropes) by a
(3) Manual force used to move the positive locking device capable of pre-
scaffold shall be applied as close to the venting the unintentional detachment
base as practicable, but not more than of the bracket from the rope, or by
5 feet (1.5 m) above the supporting sur- equivalent means.
face. (3) Each bracket, at the contact point
(4) Power systems used to propel mo- between the supporting structure and
bile scaffolds shall be designed for such the bottom of the bracket, shall be pro-
use. Forklifts, trucks, similar motor vided with a shoe (heel block or foot)
vehicles or add-on motors shall not be capable of preventing the lateral move-
used to propel scaffolds unless the scaf- ment of the bracket.
fold is designed for such propulsion sys- (4) Platforms shall be secured to the
tems. brackets in a manner that will prevent
(5) Scaffolds shall be stabilized to the separation of the platforms from
prevent tipping during movement. the brackets and the movement of the
(6) Employees shall not be allowed to platforms or the brackets on a com-
ride on scaffolds unless the following pleted scaffold.
conditions exist: (5) When a wire rope is placed around
(i) The surface on which the scaffold the structure in order to provide a safe
is being moved is within 3 degrees of anchorage for personal fall arrest sys-
level, and free of pits, holes, and ob- tems used by employees erecting or
structions; dismantling scaffolds, the wire rope
(ii) The height to base width ratio of shall meet the requirements of subpart
the scaffold during movement is two to M of this part, but shall be at least 5⁄16
one or less, unless the scaffold is de- inch (0.8 cm) in diameter.
signed and constructed to meet or ex- (6) Each wire rope used for securing
ceed nationally recognized stability brackets in place or as an anchorage
test requirements such as those listed for personal fall arrest systems shall be
in paragraph (x) of appendix A to this protected from damage due to contact
subpart (ANSI/SIA A92.5 and A92.6); with edges, corners, protrusions, or
293
other discontinuities of the supporting less they shall have been modified so as
structure or scaffold components. to conform with the applicable design
(7) Tensioning of each wire rope used and construction requirements of ANSI
for securing brackets in place or as an A92.2–1969. Aerial lifts include the fol-
anchorage for personal fall arrest sys- lowing types of vehicle-mounted aerial
tems shall be by means of a turnbuckle devices used to elevate personnel to
at least 1 inch (2.54 cm) in diameter, or job-sites above ground:
by equivalent means. (i) Extensible boom platforms;
(8) Each turnbuckle shall be con- (ii) Aerial ladders;
nected to the other end of its rope by (iii) Articulating boom platforms;
use of an eyesplice thimble of a size ap- (iv) Vertical towers; and
propriate to the turnbuckle to which it (v) A combination of any such de-
is attached. vices. Aerial equipment may be made
(9) U-bolt wire rope clips shall not be of metal, wood, fiberglass reinforced
used on any wire rope used to secure plastic (FRP), or other material; may
brackets or to serve as an anchor for be powered or manually operated; and
personal fall arrest systems. are deemed to be aerial lifts whether or
(10) The employer shall ensure that not they are capable of rotating about
materials shall not be dropped to the a substantially vertical axis.
outside of the supporting structure. (2) Aerial lifts may be ‘‘field modi-
(11) Scaffold erection shall progress fied’’ for uses other than those in-
in only one direction around any struc- tended by the manufacturer provided
ture. the modification has been certified in
(y) Stilts. Stilts, when used, shall be writing by the manufacturer or by any
used in accordance with the following other equivalent entity, such as a na-
requirements: tionally recognized testing laboratory,
(1) An employee may wear stilts on a to be in conformity with all applicable
scaffold only if it is a large area scaf- provisions of ANSI A92.2–1969 and this
fold. section and to be at least as safe as the
(2) When an employee is using stilts equipment was before modification.
on a large area scaffold where a guard- (b) Specific requirements—(1) Ladder
rail system is used to provide fall pro- trucks and tower trucks. Aerial ladders
tection, the guardrail system shall be shall be secured in the lower traveling
increased in height by an amount equal position by the locking device on top of
to the height of the stilts being used by the truck cab, and the manually oper-
the employee. ated device at the base of the ladder be-
(3) Surfaces on which stilts are used fore the truck is moved for highway
shall be flat and free of pits, holes and travel.
obstructions, such as debris, as well as (2) Extensible and articulating boom
other tripping and falling hazards. platforms. (i) Lift controls shall be test-
(4) Stilts shall be properly main- ed each day prior to use to determine
tained. Any alteration of the original that such controls are in safe working
equipment shall be approved by the condition.
manufacturer. (ii) Only authorized persons shall op-
erate an aerial lift.
§ 1926.453 Aerial lifts. (iii) Belting off to an adjacent pole,
(a) General requirements. (1) Unless structure, or equipment while working
otherwise provided in this section, aer- from an aerial lift shall not be per-
ial lifts acquired for use on or after mitted.
January 22, 1973 shall be designed and (iv) Employees shall always stand
constructed in conformance with the firmly on the floor of the basket, and
applicable requirements of the Amer- shall not sit or climb on the edge of the
ican National Standards for ‘‘Vehicle basket or use planks, ladders, or other
Mounted Elevating and Rotating Work devices for a work position.
Platforms,’’ ANSI A92.2–1969, including (v) A body belt shall be worn and a
appendix. Aerial lifts acquired before lanyard attached to the boom or bas-
January 22, 1973 which do not meet the ket when working from an aerial lift.
requirements of ANSI A92.2–1969, may NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b)(2)(v): As of Janu-
not be used after January 1, 1976, un- ary 1, 1998, subpart M of this part
294
(§ 1926.502(d)) provides that body belts are not 1969, section 4.9 Bursting Safety Factor
acceptable as part of a personal fall arrest shall apply to all critical hydraulic and
system. The use of a body belt in a tethering pneumatic components. Critical com-
system or in a restraint system is acceptable
and is regulated under § 1926.502(e). ponents are those in which a failure
would result in a free fall or free rota-
(vi) Boom and basket load limits tion of the boom. All noncritical com-
specified by the manufacturer shall not ponents shall have a bursting safety
be exceeded. factor of at least 2 to 1.
(vii) The brakes shall be set and when (5) Welding standards. All welding
outriggers are used, they shall be posi- shall conform to the following stand-
tioned on pads or a solid surface. Wheel ards as applicable:
chocks shall be installed before using
(i) Standard Qualification Procedure,
an aerial lift on an incline, provided
AWS B3.0–41.
they can be safely installed.
(viii) An aerial lift truck shall not be (ii) Recommended Practices for
moved when the boom is elevated in a Automotive Welding Design, AWS
working position with men in the bas- D8.4–61.
ket, except for equipment which is spe- (iii) Standard Qualification of Weld-
cifically designed for this type of oper- ing Procedures and Welders for Piping
ation in accordance with the provisions and Tubing, AWS D10.9–69.
of paragraphs (a) (1) and (2) of this sec- (iv) Specifications for Welding High-
tion. way and Railway Bridges, AWS D2.0–69.
(ix) Articulating boom and extensible NOTE TO § 1926.453: Non-mandatory appen-
boom platforms, primarily designed as dix C to this subpart lists examples of na-
personnel carriers, shall have both tional consensus standards that are consid-
platform (upper) and lower controls. ered to provide employee protection equiva-
Upper controls shall be in or beside the lent to that provided through the application
platform within easy reach of the oper- of ANSI A92.2–1969, where appropriate. This
ator. Lower controls shall provide for incorporation by reference was approved by
overriding the upper controls. Controls the Director of the Federal Register in ac-
shall be plainly marked as to their cordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part
51. Copies may be obtained from the Amer-
function. Lower level controls shall not
ican National Standards Institute. Copies
be operated unless permission has been may be inspected at the Docket Office, Occu-
obtained from the employee in the lift, pational Safety and Health Administration,
except in case of emergency. U.S. Department of Labor, 200 Constitution
(x) Climbers shall not be worn while Avenue, NW., room N2634, Washington, DC or
performing work from an aerial lift. at the National Archives and Records Ad-
(xi) The insulated portion of an aerial ministration (NARA). For information on
lift shall not be altered in any manner the availability of this material at NARA,
that might reduce its insulating value. call 202–741–6030, or go to: http://
www.archives.gov/federallregister/
(xii) Before moving an aerial lift for codeloflfederallregulations/
travel, the boom(s) shall be inspected ibrllocations.html.
to see that it is properly cradled and
outriggers are in stowed position ex- [61 FR 46116, Aug. 30, 1996; 61 FR 59832, Nov.
cept as provided in paragraph 25, 1996, as amended at 69 FR 18803, Apr. 9,
2004]
(b)(2)(viii) of this section.
(3) Electrical tests. All electrical tests § 1926.454 Training requirements.
shall conform to the requirements of
ANSI A92.2–1969 section 5. However This section supplements and clari-
equivalent d.c.; voltage tests may be fies the requirements of § 1926.21(b)(2)
used in lieu of the a.c. voltage specified as these relate to the hazards of work
in A92.2–1969; d.c. voltage tests which on scaffolds.
are approved by the equipment manu- (a) The employer shall have each em-
facturer or equivalent entity shall be ployee who performs work while on a
considered an equivalent test for the scaffold trained by a person qualified
purpose of this paragraph (b)(3). in the subject matter to recognize the
(4) Bursting safety factor. The provi- hazards associated with the type of
sions of the American National Stand- scaffold being used and to understand
ards Institute standard ANSI A92.2– the procedures to control or minimize
295
Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–13 Edition)
those hazards. The training shall indicate that the employee has not re-
clude the following areas, as applica- tained the requisite proficiency.
ble:
(1) The nature of any electrical haz- NON-MANDATORY APPENDICES
ards, fall hazards and falling object
(NON-MANDATORY) APPENDIX A TO SUB-
hazards in the work area;
PART L OF PART 1926—SCAFFOLD
(2) The correct procedures for dealing SPECIFICATIONS
with electrical hazards and for erect-
ing, maintaining, and disassembling This appendix provides non-mandatory
the fall protection systems and falling guidelines to assist employers in complying
object protection systems being used; with the requirements of subpart L of this
part. An employer may use these guidelines
(3) The proper use of the scaffold, and and tables as a starting point for designing
the proper handling of materials on the scaffold systems. However, the guidelines do
scaffold; not provide all the information necessary to
(4) The maximum intended load and build a complete system, and the employer is
the load-carrying capacities of the still responsible for designing and assem-
scaffolds used; and bling these components in such a way that
the completed system will meet the require-
(5) Any other pertinent requirements
ments of § 1926.451(a). Scaffold components
of this subpart. which are not selected and loaded in accord-
(b) The employer shall have each em- ance with this Appendix, and components for
ployee who is involved in erecting, dis- which no specific guidelines or tables are
assembling, moving, operating, repair- given in this appendix (e.g., joints, ties, com-
ing, maintaining, or inspecting a scaf- ponents for wood pole scaffolds more than 60
fold trained by a competent person to feet in height, components for heavy-duty
recognize any hazards associated with horse scaffolds, components made with other
materials, and components with other di-
the work in question. The training mensions, etc.) must be designed and con-
shall include the following topics, as structed in accordance with the capacity re-
applicable: quirements of § 1926.451(a), and loaded in ac-
(1) The nature of scaffold hazards; cordance with § 1926.451(d)(1).
(2) The correct procedures for erect-
Index to appendix A for Subpart L
ing, disassembling, moving, operating,
repairing, inspecting, and maintaining 1. General guidelines and tables.
the type of scaffold in question; 2. Specific guidelines and tables.
(a) Pole scaffolds:
(3) The design criteria, maximum in- Single-pole wood pole scaffolds.
tended load-carrying capacity and in- Independent wood pole scaffolds.
tended use of the scaffold; (b) Tube and coupler scaffolds.
(4) Any other pertinent requirements (c) Fabricated frame scaffolds.
of this subpart. (d) Plasterers’, decorators’ and large area
(c) When the employer has reason to scaffolds.
(e) Bricklayers’ square scaffolds.
believe that an employee lacks the (f) Horse scaffolds.
skill or understanding needed for safe (g) Form scaffolds and carpenters’ bracket
work involving the erection, use or dis- scaffolds.
mantling of scaffolds, the employer (h) Roof bracket scaffolds.
shall retrain each such employee so (i) Outrigger scaffolds (one level).
that the requisite proficiency is re- (j) Pump jack scaffolds.
gained. Retraining is required in at (k) Ladder jack scaffolds.
least the following situations: (l) Window jack scaffolds.
(m) Crawling boards (chicken ladders).
(1) Where changes at the worksite (n) Step, platform and trestle ladder scaf-
present a hazard about which an em- folds.
ployee has not been previously trained; (o) Single-point adjustable suspension scaf-
or folds.
(2) Where changes in the types of (p) Two-point adjustable suspension scaf-
scaffolds, fall protection, falling object folds.
protection, or other equipment present (q)(1) Stonesetters’ multi-point adjustable
suspension scaffolds.
a hazard about which an employee has (2) Masons’ multi-point adjustable suspen-
not been previously trained; or sion scaffolds.
(3) Where inadequacies in an affected (r) Catenary scaffolds.
employee’s work involving scaffolds in- (s) Float (ship) scaffolds.
296
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. A
(t) Interior hung scaffolds. the American Softwood Lumber Standard of
(u) Needle beam scaffolds. the U.S. Department of Commerce.
(v) Multi-level suspension scaffolds. (i) Allowable spans shall be determined in
(w) Mobile scaffolds. compliance with the National Design Speci-
(x) Repair bracket scaffolds. fication for Wood Construction published by
(y) Stilts. the National Forest Products Association;
(z) Tank builders’ scaffolds. paragraph 5 of ANSI A10.8–1988 Scaffolding-
Safety Requirements published by the Amer-
1. GENERAL GUIDELINES AND TABLES
ican National Standards Institute; or for 2×10
(a) The following tables, and the tables in inch (nominal) or 2×9 inch (rough) solid sawn
Part 2—Specific guidelines and tables, as- wood planks, as shown in the following table:
sume that all load-carrying timber members
(except planks) of the scaffold are a min- Maximum per-
missible span Maximum per-
imum of 1,500 lb-f/in2 (stress grade) construc- Maximum intended nominal using full thick-
missible span
tion grade lumber. All dimensions are nomi- load ness un- using nominal
thickness
nal sizes as provided in the American (lb/ft2) dressed
lumber lumber
Softwood Lumber Standards, dated January (ft)
(ft)
1970, except that, where rough sizes are
noted, only rough or undressed lumber of the 25 ....................................... 10 8
size specified will satisfy minimum require- 50 ....................................... 8 6
ments. 75 ....................................... 6
(b) Solid sawn wood used as scaffold planks
shall be selected for such use following the (ii) The maximum permissible span for 11⁄4
grading rules established by a recognized × 9-inch or wider wood plank of full thick-
lumber grading association or by an inde- ness with a maximum intended load of 50 lb/
pendent lumber grading inspection agency. ft.2 shall be 4 feet.
Such planks shall be identified by the grade (c) Fabricated planks and platforms may
stamp of such association or agency. The as- be used in lieu of solid sawn wood planks.
sociation or agency and the grading rules Maximum spans for such units shall be as
under which the wood is graded shall be cer- recommended by the manufacturer based on
tified by the Board of Review, American the maximum intended load being calculated
Lumber Standard Committee, as set forth in as follows:
Rated load
Intended load
capacity
Light-duty ................... • 25 pounds per square foot applied uniformly over the entire span area.
Medium-duty .............. • 50 pounds per square foot applied uniformly over the entire span area.
Heavy-duty ................. • 75 pounds per square foot applied uniformly over the entire span area.
One-person ................ • 250 pounds placed at the center of the span (total 250 pounds).
Two-person ................ • 250 pounds placed 18 inches to the left and right of the center of the span (total 500 pounds).
Three-person ............. • 250 pounds placed at the center of the span and 250 pounds placed 18 inches to the left and right of
the center of the span (total 750 pounds).
NOTE: Platform units used to make scaf- (iii) Toeboards shall be equivalent in
fold platforms intended for light-duty use strength to 1 inch by 4 inch lumber; or
shall be capable of supporting at least 25 11⁄4 inch × 11⁄4 inch structural angle iron; or
pounds per square foot applied uniformly 1 inch × .070 inch wall steel tubing; or
over the entire unit-span area, or a 250-pound 1.990 inch × .058 inch wall aluminum tub-
point load placed on the unit at the center of ing.
the span, whichever load produces the great- (iv) Posts shall be equivalent in strength
er shear force. to 2 inch by 4 inch lumber; or
(d) Guardrails shall be as follows: 11⁄4 inch × 11⁄4 inch × 1⁄8 structural angle
(i) Toprails shall be equivalent in strength iron; or
to 2 inch by 4 inch lumber; or 1 inch × .070 inch wall steel tubing; or
11⁄4 inch × 1⁄8 inch structural angle iron; or 1.990 inch × .058 inch wall aluminum tub-
1 inch × .070 inch wall steel tubing; or 1.990 ing.
inch × .058 inch wall aluminum tubing. (v) Distance between posts shall not exceed
(ii) Midrails shall be equivalent in strength 8 feet.
to 1 inch by 6 inch lumber; or (e) Overhead protection shall consist of 2
11⁄4 inch × 11⁄4 inch × 1⁄8 inch structural inch nominal planking laid tight, or 3⁄4-inch
angle iron; or plywood.
1 inch × .070 inch wall steel tubing; or (f) Screen installed between toeboards and
1.990 inch × .058 inch wall aluminum tub- midrails or toprails shall consist of No. 18
ing. gauge U.S. Standard wire one inch mesh.
297
2. SPECIFIC GUIDELINES AND TABLES.
(a) Pole Scaffolds.
SINGLE POLE WOOD POLE SCAFFOLDS

Light duty up to Light duty up to Medium duty up to Heavy duty up to
20 feet high 60 feet high 60 feet high 60 feet high
Maximum intended load (lbs/ft 2) ................... 25 ......................... 25 ......................... 50 ......................... 75

Poles or uprights ........................................... 2×4 in ................... 4×4 in ................... 4×4 in ................... 4×6 in.
Maximum pole spacing (longitudinal) ............ 6 feet ................... 10 feet ................. 8 feet ................... 6 feet
Maximum pole spacing (transverse) ............. 5 feet ................... 5 feet ................... 5 feet ................... 5 feet
Runners ......................................................... 1×4 in ................... 11⁄4×9 in ............... 2×10 in ................. 2×10 in.
Bearers and maximum spacing of bearers:
3 feet ............................................... 2×4 in ................... 2×4 in ................... 2×10 in. or 3×4 in 2×10 in. or 3×5 in.
5 feet ............................................... 2×6 in. or 3×4 in .. 2×6 in. or 3×4 in. 2×10 in. or 3×4 in 2×10 in. or 3×5 in.
(rough).
6 feet ............................................... .............................. .............................. 2×10 in. or 3×4 in 2×10 in. or 3×5 in.
8 feet ............................................... .............................. .............................. 2×10 in. or 3×4 in
Planking ......................................................... 11⁄4×9 in ............... 2×10 in ................. 2×10 in ................. 2×10 in.
Maximum vertical spacing of horizontal 7 feet ................... 9 feet ................... 7 feet ................... 6 ft. 6 in.
members.
Bracing horizontal .......................................... 1×4 in ................... 1×4 in ................... 1×6 in. or 11⁄4×4 in 2×4 in.
Bracing diagonal ............................................ 1×4 in ................... 1×4 in ................... 1×4 in ................... 2×4 in.
Tie-ins ............................................................ 1×4 in ................... 1×4 in ................... 1×4 in ................... 1×4 in.
NOTE: All members except planking are used on edge. All wood bearers shall be reinforced with 3⁄16×2 inch steel strip, or the
equivalent, secured to the lower edges for the entire length of the bearer.
INDEPENDENT WOOD POLE SCAFFOLDS

Light duty up to Light duty up to Medium duty up to Heavy duty up to
20 feet high 60 feet high 60 feet high 60 feet high
Maximum intended load ................................ 25 lbs/ft2 .............. 25 lbs/ft2 .............. 50 lbs/ft2 .............. 75 lbs/ft2.
Poles or uprights ........................................... 2×4 in ................... 4×4 in ................... 4×4 in ................... 4×4 in.
Maximum pole spacing (longitudinal) ............ 6 feet ................... 10 feet ................. 8 feet ................... 6 feet.
Maximum (transverse) ................................... 6 feet ................... 10 feet ................. 8 feet ................... 8 feet.
Runners ......................................................... 11⁄4×4 in ............... 11⁄4×9 in ............... 2×10 in ................. 2×10 in.
Bearers and maximum spacing of bearers:
3 feet ............................................... 2×4 in ................... 2×4 in ................... 2×10 in ................. 2×10 in. (rough).
6 feet ............................................... 2×6 in. or 3×4 in .. 2×10 in. (rough) or 2×10 in ................. 2×10 in. (rough).
3×8 in.
8 feet ............................................... 2×6 in. or 3×4 in .. 2×10 in. (rough) or 2×10 in .................
3×8 in.
10 feet ............................................. 2×6 in. or 3×4 in .. 2×10 in. (rough) or ..............................
3×3 in.
Planking ......................................................... 11⁄4×9 in ............... 2×10 in ................. 2×10 in ................. 2×10 in.
Maximum vertical spacing of horizontal 7 feet ................... 7 feet ................... 6 feet ................... 6 feet.
members.
Bracing horizontal .......................................... 1×4 in ................... 1×4 in ................... 1×6 in. or 11⁄4×4 in 2×4 in.
Bracing diagonal ............................................ 1×4 in ................... 1×4 in ................... 1×4 in ................... 2×4 in.
Tie-ins ............................................................ 1×4 in ................... 1×4 in ................... 1×4 in ................... 1×4 in.
NOTE: All members except planking are used on edge. All wood bearers shall be reinforced with 3⁄16×2 inch steel strip, or the
equivalent, secured to the lower edges for the entire length of the bearer.
(b) Tube and coupler scaffolds.

MINIMUM SIZE OF MEMBERS
Light duty Medium duty Heavy duty
Maximum intended load .......... 25 lbs/ft2

................................. 50 lbs/ft2 ................................. 75 lbs/ft2.
Posts, runners and braces ...... Nominal 2 in. (1.90 inches) Nominal 2 in. (1.90 inches) Nominal 2 in. (1.90 inches)
OD steel tube or pipe. OD steel tube or pipe. OD steel tube or pipe.
Bearers .................................... Nominal 2 in. (1.90 inches) .... Nominal 2 in. (1.90 inches) .... Nominal 21⁄2 in. (2.375 in.).
OD steel tube or pipe and a OD steel tube or pipe and a OD steel tube or pipe and a
maximum post spacing of 4 maximum post spacing of 4 maximum post spacing of 6
ft.×10 ft.. ft.×7 ft. or. ft.×6 ft.
Nominal 21⁄2 in. (2.375 in.).
OD steel tube or pipe and a
maximum post spacing of 6
ft.×8 ft.*.
298
MINIMUM SIZE OF MEMBERS—Continued

Light duty Medium duty Heavy duty
Maximum runner spacing 6 ft. 6 in .................................. 6 ft. 6 in .................................. 6 ft. 6 in.

vertically.
* Bearers shall be installed in the direction of the shorter dimension.
NOTE: Longitudinal diagonal bracing shall be installed at an angle of 45° (±5°).
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF PLANKED LEVELS

Maximum number of addi-
tional planked levels Maximum
height of
Me- scaffold
Light Heavy
dium (in feet)
duty duty duty
Number of Working Levels:

1 ...................................................................................................................... 16 11 6 125
2 ...................................................................................................................... 11 1 0 125
3 ...................................................................................................................... 6 0 0 125
4 ...................................................................................................................... 1 0 0 125
(c) Fabricated frame scaffolds. Because of (2) Bolts used to attach brackets to struc-
their prefabricated nature, no additional tures shall not be less than 5⁄8 inches in di-
guidelines or tables for these scaffolds are ameter.
being adopted in this Appendix. (3) Maximum bracket spacing shall be 8
(d) Plasterers’, decorators’, and large area feet on centers.
scaffolds. The guidelines for pole scaffolds or (4) No more than two employees shall oc-
tube and coupler scaffolds (Appendix A (a) cupy any given 8 feet of a bracket or form
and (b)) may be applied. scaffold at any one time. Tools and materials
(e) Bricklayers’ square scaffolds. shall not exceed 75 pounds in addition to the
Maximum intended load: 50 lb/ft.2* occupancy.
Maximum width: 5 ft. (5) Wooden figure-four scaffolds:
Maximum height: 5 ft. Maximum intended load: 25 lb/ft.2
Gussets: 1 × 6 in. Uprights: 2 × 4 in. or 2 × 6 in.
Braces: 1 × 8 in. Bearers (two): 1 × 6 in.
Legs: 2 × 6 in. Braces: 1 × 6 in.
Bearers (horizontal members): 2 × 6 in. Maximum length of bearers (unsupported): 3
(f) Horse scaffolds. ft. 6 in.
Maximum intended load (light duty): 25 lb/ (i) Outrigger bearers shall consist of two
ft.2 **
pieces of 1 × 6 inch lumber nailed on opposite
Maximum intended load (medium duty): 50
sides of the vertical support.
lb/ft.2 **
(ii) Bearers for wood figure-four brackets
Horizontal members or bearers:
shall project not more than 3 feet 6 inches
Light duty: 2 × 4 in.
from the outside of the form support, and
Medium duty: 3 × 4 in.
Legs: 2 × 4 in. shall be braced and secured to prevent tip-
Longitudinal brace between legs: 1 × 6 in. ping or turning. The knee or angle brace
Gusset brace at top of legs: 1 × 8 in. shall intersect the bearer at least 3 feet from
Half diagonal braces: 2 × 4 in. the form at an angle of approximately 45 de-
grees, and the lower end shall be nailed to a
(g) Form scaffolds and carpenters’ bracket vertical support.
scaffolds. (6) Metal bracket scaffolds:
(1) Brackets shall consist of a triangular-
shaped frame made of wood with a cross-sec- Maximum intended load: 25 lb/ft.2
tion not less than 2 inches by 3 inches, or of Uprights: 2 × 4 inch
11⁄4 inch × 11⁄4 inch × 1⁄8 inch structural angle Bearers: As designed.
iron. Braces: As designed.
(7) Wood bracket scaffolds:
* The squares shall be set not more than 8 Maximum intended load: 25 lb/ft.2
feet apart for light duty scaffolds and not Uprights: 2 × 4 in or 2 × 6 in
more than 5 feet apart for medium duty scaf- Bearers: 2 × 6 in
folds. Maximum scaffold width: 3 ft 6 in
** Horses shall be spaced not more than 8 Braces: 1 × 6 in
feet apart for light duty loads, and not more (h) Roof bracket scaffolds. No specific guide-
than 5 feet apart for medium duty loads. lines or tables are given.
299
(i) Outrigger scaffolds (single level). No spe- ings (except window cleaners’ anchors) ac-
cific guidelines or tables are given. ceptable ways to prevent scaffold sway in-
(j) Pump jack scaffolds. Wood poles shall not clude angulated roping and static lines. An-
exceed 30 feet in height. Maximum intended gulated roping is a system of platform sus-
load—500 lbs between poles; applied at the pension in which the upper wire rope sheaves
center of the span. Not more than two em- or suspension points are closer to the plane
ployees shall be on a pump jack scaffold at of the building face than the corresponding
one time between any two supports. When 2 attachment points on the platform, thus
× 4’s are spliced together to make a 4 × 4 inch
causing the platform to press against the
wood pole, they shall be spliced with ‘‘10
face of the building. Static lines are separate
penny’’ common nails no more than 12 inches
ropes secured at their top and bottom ends
center to center, staggered uniformly from
the opposite outside edges. closer to the plane of the building face than
(k) Ladder jack scaffolds. Maximum in- the outermost edge of the platform. By draw-
tended load—25 lb/ft2. However, not more ing the static line taut, the platform is
than two employees shall occupy any plat- drawn against the face of the building.
form at any one time. Maximum span be- (2) On suspension scaffolds designed for a
tween supports shall be 8 feet. working load of 500 pounds, no more than
(l) Window jack scaffolds. Not more than two employees shall be permitted on the
one employee shall occupy a window jack scaffold at one time. On suspension scaffolds
scaffold at any one time. with a working load of 750 pounds, no more
(m) Crawling boards (chicken ladders). than three employees shall be permitted on
Crawling boards shall be not less than 10 the scaffold at one time.
inches wide and 1 inch thick, with cleats (3) Ladder-type platforms. The side string-
having a minimum 1 × 11⁄2 inch cross-sec- er shall be of clear straight-grained spruce.
tional area. The cleats shall be equal in The rungs shall be of straight-grained oak,
length to the width of the board and spaced
ash, or hickory, at least 11⁄8 inches in diame-
at equal intervals not to exceed 24 inches.
ter, with 7⁄8 inch tenons mortised into the
(n) Step, platform, and trestle ladder scaf-
folds. No additional guidelines or tables are side stringers at least 7⁄8 inch. The stringers
given. shall be tied together with tie rods not less
(o) Single-point adjustable suspension scaf- than 1⁄4 inch in diameter, passing through
folds. Maximum intended load—250 lbs. Wood the stringers and riveted up tight against
seats for boatswains’ chairs shall be not less washers on both ends. The flooring strips
than 1 inch thick if made of non-laminated shall be spaced not more than 5⁄8 inch apart,
wood, or 5⁄8 inches thick if made of marine except at the side rails where the space may
quality plywood. be 1 inch. Ladder-type platforms shall be
(p) Two-point adjustable suspension scaffolds. constructed in accordance with the following
(1) In addition to direct connections to build- table:
SCHEDULE FOR LADDER-TYPE PLATFORMS
Length of Platform ................................ 12 feet .............. 14 & 16 feet ...... 18 & 20 feet.
Side stringers, minimum cross section
(finished sizes):
At ends .......................................... 13⁄4 × 23⁄4 in ...... 13⁄4 × 23⁄4 in ...... 13⁄4 × 3 in.
At middle ....................................... 13⁄4 × 33⁄4 in ...... 13⁄4 × 33⁄4 in ...... 13⁄4 × 4 in.
Reinforcing strip (minimum) ................. A1⁄8 × 7⁄8 inch steel reinforcing strip shall be attached
to the side or underside, full length.
Rungs ................................................... Rungs shall be 11⁄8 inch minimum diameter with at
least 7⁄8 inch in diameter tenons, and the maximum
spacing shall be 12 inches to center.
Tie rods:
Number (minimum) ........................ 3 ....................... 4 ....................... 4
Diameter (minimum) ...................... ⁄ inch ..............
14 ⁄ inch ..............
14 ⁄ inch
14
Flooring, minimum finished size ........... 1⁄2 × 23⁄4 in ........ 1⁄2 × 23⁄4 in ........ 1⁄2 × 23⁄4 in.
SCHEDULE FOR LADDER-TYPE PLATFORMS
Length of Platform ............................................................... 22 & 24 ft .......... 28 & 30 ft.

Side stringers, minimum cross section (finished sizes):
At ends ......................................................................... 13⁄4×3 in ............ 13⁄4 × 31⁄2 in.
At middle ...................................................................... 13⁄4 × 41⁄4 in ...... 13⁄4 × 5 in.
300
SCHEDULE FOR LADDER-TYPE PLATFORMS—Continued
Reinforcing strip (minimum) ................................................ A1⁄8 × 7⁄8-inch steel reinforcing strip

shall be attached to the side or
underside, full length.
Rungs .................................................................................. Rungs shall be 11⁄8 inch minimum
diameter with at least 7⁄8 inch in
diameter tenons, and the max-
imum spacing shall be 12 inches
to center. Tie rods.
Number (minimum) ....................................................... 5 ....................... 6.
Diameter (minimum) ..................................................... 1⁄4 in .................. 1⁄4 in.
Flooring, minimum finished size .......................................... 1⁄2 × 23⁄4 in ........ 1⁄2 × 23⁄4 in.
(4) Plank-Type Platforms. Plank-type plat- (2) Platforms shall be made of 3⁄4 inch ply-
forms shall be composed of not less than wood, equivalent in rating to American Ply-
nominal 2 × 8 inch unspliced planks, con- wood Association Grade B-B, Group I, Exte-
nected together on the underside with cleats rior.
at intervals not exceeding 4 feet, starting 6 (3) Bearers shall be made from 2×4 inch, or
inches from each end. A bar or other effec- 1×10 inch rough lumber. They shall be free of
tive means shall be securely fastened to the knots and other flaws.
platform at each end to prevent the platform (4) Ropes shall be equivalent in strength to
from slipping off the hanger. The span be- at least 1 inch (2.5 cm) diameter first grade
tween hangers for plank-type platforms shall manila rope.
not exceed 10 feet. (t) Interior hung scaffolds.
(5) Beam-Type Platforms. Beam platforms Bearers (use on edge): 2×10 in.
shall have side stringers of lumber not less Maximum intended load: Maximum span
than 2 × 6 inches set on edge. The span be-
25 lb/ft.2: 10 ft.
tween hangers shall not exceed 12 feet when
50 lb/ft.2: 10 ft.
beam platforms are used. The flooring shall
75 lb/ft.2: 7 ft.
be supported on 2 × 6 inch cross beams, laid
flat and set into the upper edge of the string- (u) Needle beam scaffolds.
ers with a snug fit, at intervals of not more Maximum intended load: 25 lb/ft.2
than 4 feet, securely nailed to the cross Beams: 4×6 in.
beams. Floor-boards shall not be spaced Maximum platform span: 8 ft.
more than 1⁄2 inch apart. Maximum beam span: 10 ft.
(q)(1) Multi-point adjustable suspension scaf- (1) Ropes shall be attached to the needle
folds and stonesetters’ multi-point adjustable beams by a scaffold hitch or an eye splice.
suspension scaffolds. No specific guidelines or The loose end of the rope shall be tied by a
tables are given for these scaffolds. bowline knot or by a round turn and a half
(2) Masons’ multi-point adjustable suspension hitch.
scaffolds. Maximum intended load—50 lb/ft2. (2) Ropes shall be equivalent in strength to
Each outrigger beam shall be at least a at least 1 inch (2.5 cm) diameter first grade
standard 7 inch, 15.3 pound steel I-beam, at manila rope.
least 15 feet long. Such beams shall not (v) Multi-level suspension scaffolds. No addi-
project more than 6 feet 6 inches beyond the tional guidelines or tables are being given
bearing point. Where the overhang exceeds 6 for these scaffolds.
feet 6 inches, outrigger beams shall be com- (w) Mobile Scaffolds. Stability test as de-
posed of stronger beams or multiple beams. scribed in the ANSI A92 series documents, as
(r) Catenary scaffolds. (1) Maximum inappropriate for the type of scaffold, can be
tended load—500 lbs. used to establish stability for the purpose of
(2) Not more than two employees shall be § 1926.452(w)(6).
permitted on the scaffold at one time. (x) Repair bracket scaffolds. No additional
(3) Maximum capacity of come-along shall guidelines or tables are being given for these
be 2,000 lbs. scaffolds.
(4) Vertical pickups shall be spaced not (y) Stilts. No specific guidelines or tables
more than 50 feet apart. are given.
(5) Ropes shall be equivalent in strength to (z) Tank builder’s scaffold.
at least 1⁄2 inch (1.3 cm) diameter improved (1) The maximum distance between brack-
plow steel wire rope. ets to which scaffolding and guardrail sup-
(s) Float (ship) scaffolds. (1) Maximum in- ports are attached shall be no more than 10
tended load—750 lbs. feet 6 inches.
301
Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. C 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–13 Edition)
(2) Not more than three employees shall ANSI/SIA A92.9–1993 Mast-Climbing Work
occupy a 10 feet 6 inch span of scaffold plank- Platforms
ing at any time.
(3) A taut wire or synthetic rope supported (NON-MANDATORY) APPENDIX D TO SUB-
on the scaffold brackets shall be installed at PART L OF PART 1926—LIST OF
the scaffold plank level between the inner- TRAINING TOPICS FOR SCAFFOLD
most edge of the scaffold platform and the
ERECTORS AND DISMANTLERS
curved plate structure of the tank shell to
serve as a safety line in lieu of an inner This appendix D is provided to serve as a
guardrail assembly where the space between guide to assist employers when evaluating
the scaffold platform and the tank exceeds 12 the training needs of employees erecting or
inches (30.48 cm). In the event the open space dismantling supported scaffolds.
on either side of the rope exceeds 12 inches The Agency believes that employees erect-
(30.48 cm), a second wire or synthetic rope ing or dismantling scaffolds should be
appropriately placed, or guardrails in ac- trained in the following topics:
cordance with § 1926.451(g)(4), shall be in- • General Overview of Scaffolding
stalled in order to reduce that open space to • regulations and standards
less than 12 inches (30.48 cm). • erection/dismantling planning
(4) Scaffold planks of rough full-dimen-
• PPE and proper procedures
sioned 2-inch (5.1 cm)×12-inch (30.5 cm) Doug-
• fall protection
las Fir or Southern Yellow Pine of Select
• materials handling
Structural Grade shall be used. Douglas Fir
• access
planks shall have a fiber stress of at least
• working platforms
1900 lb/in2 (130,929 n/cm2) and a modulus of
• foundations
elasticity of at least 1,900,000 lb/in2
• guys, ties and braces
(130,929,000 n/cm2), while Yellow Pine planks
• Tubular Welded Frame Scaffolds
shall have a fiber stress of at least 2500 lb/in2
• specific regulations and standards
(172,275 n/cm2) and a modulus of elasticity of
• components
at least 2,000,000 lb/in2 (137,820,000 n/cm2).
• parts inspection
(5) Guardrails shall be constructed of a
• erection/dismantling planning
taut wire or synthetic rope, and shall be sup-
• guys, ties and braces
ported by angle irons attached to brackets
• fall protection
welded to the steel plates. These guardrails
• general safety
shall comply with § 1926.451(g)(4). Guardrail
• access and platforms
supports shall be located at no greater than
• erection/dismantling procedures
10 feet 6 inch intervals.
• rolling scaffold assembly
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979, as amended at 77 FR • putlogs
46950, Aug. 7, 2012] • Tube and Clamp Scaffolds
• specific regulations and standards
(NON-MANDATORY) APPENDIX B TO SUB- • components
PART L OF PART 1926—CRITERIA FOR • parts inspection
DETERMINING THE FEASIBILITY OF • erection/dismantling planning
PROVIDING SAFE ACCESS AND FALL • guys, ties and braces
PROTECTION FOR SCAFFOLD EREC- • fall protection
• general safety
TORS AND DISMANTLERS [RE- • access and platforms
SERVED] • erection/dismantling procedures
• buttresses, cantilevers, & bridges
(NON-MANDATORY) APPENDIX C TO SUB- • System Scaffolds
PART L OF PART 1926—LIST OF NA- • specific regulations and standards
TIONAL CONSENSUS STANDARDS • components
• parts inspection
ANSI/SIA A92.2–1990 Vehicle-Mounted Ele- • erection/dismantling planning
vating and Rotating Aerial Devices • guys, ties and braces
ANSI/SIA A92.3–1990 Manually Propelled Ele- • fall protection
vating Aerial Platforms • general safety
ANSI/SIA A92.5–1990 Boom Supported Ele- • access and platforms
vating Work Platforms • erection/dismantling procedures
ANSI/SIA A92.6–1990 Self-Propelled Elevating
• buttresses, cantilevers, & bridges
Work Platforms
ANSI/SIA A92.7–1990 Airline Ground Support Scaffold erectors and dismantlers should
Vehicle-Mounted Vertical Lift Devices all receive the general overview, and, in ad-
ANSI/SIA A92.8–1993 Vehicle-Mounted Bridge dition, specific training for the type of sup-
Inspection and Maintenance Devices ported scaffold being erected or dismantled.
302
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. E
(NON-MANDATORY) APPENDIX E TO SUBPART L OF PART 1926—DRAWINGS AND
ILLUSTRATIONS
This appendix provides drawings of particular types of scaffolds and scaffold components,
and graphic illustrations of bracing patterns and tie spacing patterns.
This appendix is intended to provide visual guidance to assist the user in complying with
the requirements of subpart L, part 1926.
303
ER30au96.000</GPH>
Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. E 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–13 Edition)
HOISTS MUST BE ELECTRONICALLY ISOLATED FROM SCAFFOLD
304
ER30au96.001
305
ER30au96.002</GPH>
306
ER30au96.003</GPH>
307
ER30au96.004</GPH>
308
ER30au96.005</GPH>
309
ER30au96.006</GPH>
310
ER30au96.007</GPH>
[61 FR 46122, Aug. 30, 1996; 61 FR 59832, Nov. 25, 1996]
Subpart M—Fall Protection § 1926.500 Scope, application, and defi-

nitions applicable to this subpart.
AUTHORITY: Section 3704 of the Contract (a) Scope and application. (1) This sub-
Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (Con- part sets forth requirements and cri-
struction Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 3701); Sec- teria for fall protection in construction
tions 4, 6 and 8 of the Occupational Safety workplaces covered under 29 CFR part
and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); 1926. Exception: The provisions of this
Secretary of Labor’s Order Nos. 1–90 (55 FR
9033), 6–96 (62 FR 111), 3–2000 (65 FR 50017),
subpart do not apply when employees
and 5–2007 (72 FR 31159); and 29 CFR part 1911. are making an inspection, investiga-
tion, or assessment of workplace condi-
SOURCE: 59 FR 40730, Aug. 9, 1994, unless tions prior to the actual start of con-
otherwise noted.
struction work or after all construc-
tion work has been completed.
311
ER30au96.008</GPH>
(2) Section 1926.501 sets forth those belts, lanyards and lifelines used for
workplaces, conditions, operations, and fall protection during tank and com-
circumstances for which fall protection munication and broadcast tower erec-
shall be provided except as follows: tion. Paragraphs (b),(c) and (f) of
(i) Requirements relating to fall pro- § 1926.107 provide definitions for the
tection for employees working on scaf- pertinent terms.)
folds are provided in subpart L of this (v) Criteria for steps, handholds, lad-
part. ders, and grabrails/guardrails/railings
(ii) Requirements relating to fall pro- required by subpart CC are provided in
tection for employees working on subpart CC. Sections 1926.502(a), (c)
cranes and derricks are provided in through (e), and (i) apply to activities
subpart CC of this part. covered under subpart CC unless other-
(iii) Fall protection requirements for wise stated in subpart CC. No other
employees performing steel erection paragraphs of § 1926.502 apply to subpart
work (except for towers and tanks) are CC.
provided in subpart R of this part. (4) Section 1926.503 sets forth require-
(iv) Requirements relating to fall ments for training in the installation
protection for employees working on and use of fall protection systems, ex-
certain types of equipment used in tun- cept in relation to steel erection ac-
neling operations are provided in sub- tivities and the use of equipment cov-
part S of this part. ered by subpart CC.
(v) Requirements relating to fall pro- (b) Definitions.
tection for employees engaged in the Anchorage means a secure point of at-
erection of tanks and communication tachment for lifelines, lanyards or de-
and broadcast towers are provided in celeration devices.
§ 1926.105. Body belt (safety belt) means a strap
(vi) Requirements relating to fall with means both for securing it about
protection for employees engaged in the waist and for attaching it to a lan-
the construction of electric trans- yard, lifeline, or deceleration device.
mission and distribution lines and Body harness means straps which
equipment are provided in subpart V of may be secured about the employee in
this part. a manner that will distribute the fall
(vii) Requirements relating to fall arrest forces over at least the thighs,
protection for employees working on pelvis, waist, chest and shoulders with
stairways and ladders are provided in means for attaching it to other compo-
subpart X of this part. nents of a personal fall arrest system.
(3) Section 1926.502 sets forth the re- Buckle means any device for holding
quirements for the installation, con- the body belt or body harness closed
struction, and proper use of fall protec- around the employee’s body.
tion required by part 1926, except as Connector means a device which is
follows: used to couple (connect) parts of the
(i) Performance requirements for personal fall arrest system and posi-
guardrail systems used on scaffolds and tioning device systems together. It
performance requirements for falling may be an independent component of
object protection used on scaffolds are the system, such as a carabiner, or it
provided in subpart L of this part. may be an integral component of part
(ii) Performance requirements for of the system (such as a buckle or dee-
stairways, stairrail systems, and hand- ring sewn into a body belt or body har-
rails are provided in subpart X of this ness, or a snap-hook spliced or sewn to
part. a lanyard or self-retracting lanyard).
(iii) Additional performance require- Controlled access zone (CAZ) means an
ments for personal climbing equip- area in which certain work (e.g.,
ment, lineman’s body belts, safety overhand bricklaying) may take place
straps, and lanyards are provided in without the use of guardrail systems,
subpart V of this part. personal fall arrest systems, or safety
(iv) Section 1926.502 does not apply to net systems and access to the zone is
the erection of tanks and communica- controlled.
tion and broadcast towers. (Note: Sec- Dangerous equipment means equip-
tion 1926.104 sets the criteria for body ment (such as pickling or galvanizing
312
tanks, degreasing units, machinery, a floor, roof, or other walking/working
electrical equipment, and other units) surface.
which, as a result of form or function, Infeasible means that it is impossible
may be hazardous to employees who to perform the construction work using
fall onto or into such equipment. a conventional fall protection system
Deceleration device means any mecha- (i.e., guardrail system, safety net sys-
nism, such as a rope grab, rip-stitch tem, or personal fall arrest system) or
lanyard, specially-woven lanyard, tear- that it is technologically impossible to
ing or deforming lanyards, automatic use any one of these systems to provide
self-retracting lifelines/lanyards, etc., fall protection.
which serves to dissipate a substantial Lanyard means a flexible line of rope,
amount of energy during a fall arrest, wire rope, or strap which generally has
or otherwise limit the energy imposed a connector at each end for connecting
on an employee during fall arrest. the body belt or body harness to a de-
Deceleration distance means the addi- celeration device, lifeline, or anchor-
tional vertical distance a falling em- age.
ployee travels, excluding lifeline elon- Leading edge means the edge of a
gation and free fall distance, before floor, roof, or formwork for a floor or
stopping, from the point at which the other walking/working surface (such as
deceleration device begins to operate. the deck) which changes location as ad-
It is measured as the distance between ditional floor, roof, decking, or
the location of an employee’s body belt formwork sections are placed, formed,
or body harness attachment point at or constructed. A leading edge is con-
the moment of activation (at the onset sidered to be an ‘‘unprotected side and
of fall arrest forces) of the deceleration edge’’ during periods when it is not ac-
device during a fall, and the location of tively and continuously under con-
that attachment point after the em- struction.
ployee comes to a full stop. Lifeline means a component con-
Equivalent means alternative designs, sisting of a flexible line for connection
materials, or methods to protect to an anchorage at one end to hang
against a hazard which the employer vertically (vertical lifeline), or for con-
can demonstrate will provide an equal nection to anchorages at both ends to
or greater degree of safety for employ- stretch horizontally (horizontal life-
ees than the methods, materials or de- line), and which serves as a means for
signs specified in the standard. connecting other components of a per-
Failure means load refusal, breakage, sonal fall arrest system to the anchor-
or separation of component parts. Load age.
refusal is the point where the ultimate Low-slope roof means a roof having a
strength is exceeded. slope less than or equal to 4 in 12
Free fall means the act of falling be- (vertical to horizontal).
fore a personal fall arrest system be- Lower levels means those areas or sur-
gins to apply force to arrest the fall. faces to which an employee can fall.
Free fall distance means the vertical Such areas or surfaces include, but are
displacement of the fall arrest attach- not limited to, ground levels, floors,
ment point on the employee’s body belt platforms, ramps, runways, exca-
or body harness between onset of the vations, pits, tanks, material, water,
fall and just before the system begins equipment, structures, or portions
to apply force to arrest the fall. This thereof.
distance excludes deceleration dis- Mechanical equipment means all
tance, and lifeline/lanyard elongation, motor or human propelled wheeled
but includes any deceleration device equipment used for roofing work, ex-
slide distance or self-retracting life- cept wheelbarrows and mopcarts.
line/lanyard extension before they op- Opening means a gap or void 30
erate and fall arrest forces occur. inches (76 cm) or more high and 18
Guardrail system means a barrier inches (48 cm) or more wide, in a wall
erected to prevent employees from fall- or partition, through which employees
ing to lower levels. can fall to a lower level.
Hole means a gap or void 2 inches (5.1 Overhand bricklaying and related work
cm) or more in its least dimension, in means the process of laying bricks and
313
masonry units such that the surface of permit the hook to receive an object
the wall to be jointed is on the opposite and, when released, automatically
side of the wall from the mason, requir- closes to retain the object. Snaphooks
ing the mason to lean over the wall to are generally one of two types:
complete the work. Related work in- (1) The locking type with a self-clos-
cludes mason tending and electrical ining, self-locking keeper which remains
stallation incorporated into the brick closed and locked until unlocked and
wall during the overhand bricklaying pressed open for connection or dis-
process. connection; or
Personal fall arrest system means a (2) The non-locking type with a self-
system used to arrest an employee in a closing keeper which remains closed
fall from a working level. It consists of until pressed open for connection or
an anchorage, connectors, a body belt disconnection. As of January 1, 1998,
or body harness and may include a lan- the use of a non-locking snaphook as
yard, deceleration device, lifeline, or part of personal fall arrest systems and
suitable combinations of these. As of positioning device systems is prohib-
January 1, 1998, the use of a body belt ited.
for fall arrest is prohibited. Steep roof means a roof having a slope
Positioning device system means a body greater than 4 in 12 (vertical to hori-
belt or body harness system rigged to zontal).
allow an employee to be supported on Toeboard means a low protective bar-
an elevated vertical surface, such as a rier that will prevent the fall of mate-
wall, and work with both hands free rials and equipment to lower levels and
while leaning. provide protection from falls for per-
Rope grab means a deceleration de- sonnel.
vice which travels on a lifeline and Unprotected sides and edges means any
automatically, by friction, engages the side or edge (except at entrances to
lifeline and locks so as to arrest the points of access) of a walking/working
fall of an employee. A rope grab usu- surface, e.g., floor, roof, ramp, or run-
ally employs the principle of inertial way where there is no wall or guardrail
locking, cam/level locking, or both. system at least 39 inches (1.0 m) high.
Roof means the exterior surface on Walking/working surface means any
the top of a building. This does not in- surface, whether horizontal or vertical
clude floors or formwork which, be- on which an employee walks or works,
cause a building has not been com- including, but not limited to, floors,
pleted, temporarily become the top roofs, ramps, bridges, runways,
surface of a building. formwork and concrete reinforcing
Roofing work means the hoisting, steel but not including ladders, vehi-
storage, application, and removal of cles, or trailers, on which employees
roofing materials and equipment, in- must be located in order to perform
cluding related insulation, sheet metal, their job duties.
and vapor barrier work, but not includ- Warning line system means a barrier
ing the construction of the roof deck. erected on a roof to warn employees
Safety-monitoring system means a safe- that they are approaching an unpro-
ty system in which a competent person tected roof side or edge, and which des-
is responsible for recognizing and warn- ignates an area in which roofing work
ing employees of fall hazards. may take place without the use of
Self-retracting lifeline/lanyard means a guardrail, body belt, or safety net sys-
deceleration device containing a drum- tems to protect employees in the area.
wound line which can be slowly ex- Work area means that portion of a
tracted from, or retracted onto, the walking/working surface where job du-
drum under slight tension during nor- ties are being performed.
mal employee movement, and which, [59 FR 40730, Aug. 9, 1994, as amended at 60
after onset of a fall, automatically FR 39255, Aug. 2, 1995; 66 FR 5265, Jan. 18,
locks the drum and arrests the fall. 2001; 75 FR 48133, Aug. 9, 2010]
Snaphook means a connector com-
prised of a hook-shaped member with a § 1926.501 Duty to have fall protection.
normally closed keeper, or similar ar- (a) General. (1) This section sets forth
rangement, which may be opened to requirements for employers to provide
314
fall protection systems. All fall protec- (3) Hoist areas. Each employee in a
tion required by this section shall con- hoist area shall be protected from fall-
form to the criteria set forth in ing 6 feet (1.8 m) or more to lower lev-
§ 1926.502 of this subpart. els by guardrail systems or personal
(2) The employer shall determine if fall arrest systems. If guardrail sys-
the walking/working surfaces on which tems, [or chain, gate, or guardrail] or
its employees are to work have the portions thereof, are removed to facili-
strength and structural integrity to tate the hoisting operation (e.g., dur-
support employees safely. Employees ing landing of materials), and an em-
shall be allowed to work on those sur- ployee must lean through the access
faces only when the surfaces have the opening or out over the edge of the ac-
requisite strength and structural integ- cess opening (to receive or guide equip-
rity. ment and materials, for example), that
(b)(1) Unprotected sides and edges. employee shall be protected from fall
Each employee on a walking/working hazards by a personal fall arrest sys-
surface (horizontal and vertical sur- tem.
face) with an unprotected side or edge (4) Holes. (i) Each employee on walk-
which is 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above a ing/working surfaces shall be protected
lower level shall be protected from fall- from falling through holes (including
ing by the use of guardrail systems, skylights) more than 6 feet (1.8 m)
safety net systems, or personal fall ar- above lower levels, by personal fall ar-
rest systems. rest systems, covers, or guardrail sys-
tems erected around such holes.
(2) Leading edges. (i) Each employee
(ii) Each employee on a walking/
who is constructing a leading edge 6
working surface shall be protected
feet (1.8 m) or more above lower levels
from tripping in or stepping into or
shall be protected from falling by
through holes (including skylights) by
guardrail systems, safety net systems,
covers.
or personal fall arrest systems. Excep-
(iii) Each employee on a walking/
tion: When the employer can dem-
working surface shall be protected
onstrate that it is infeasible or creates from objects falling through holes (in-
a greater hazard to use these systems, cluding skylights) by covers.
the employer shall develop and imple- (5) Formwork and reinforcing steel.
ment a fall protection plan which Each employee on the face of formwork
meets the requirements of paragraph or reinforcing steel shall be protected
(k) of § 1926.502. from falling 6 feet (1.8 m) or more to
NOTE: There is a presumption that it is fea- lower levels by personal fall arrest sys-
sible and will not create a greater hazard to
tems, safety net systems, or posi-
implement at least one of the above-listed
fall protection systems. Accordingly, the
tioning device systems.
employer has the burden of establishing that (6) Ramps, runways, and other walk-
it is appropriate to implement a fall protec- ways. Each employee on ramps, run-
tion plan which complies with § 1926.502(k) ways, and other walkways shall be pro-
for a particular workplace situation, in lieu tected from falling 6 feet (1.8 m) or
of implementing any of those systems. more to lower levels by guardrail sys-
(ii) Each employee on a walking/ tems.
working surface 6 feet (1.8 m) or more (7) Excavations. (i) Each employee at
above a lower level where leading edges the edge of an excavation 6 feet (1.8 m)
are under construction, but who is not or more in depth shall be protected
engaged in the leading edge work, shall from falling by guardrail systems,
be protected from falling by a guard- fences, or barricades when the exca-
rail system, safety net system, or per- vations are not readily seen because of
sonal fall arrest system. If a guardrail plant growth or other visual barrier;
system is chosen to provide the fall (ii) Each employee at the edge of a
protection, and a controlled access well, pit, shaft, and similar excavation
zone has already been established for 6 feet (1.8 m) or more in depth shall be
leading edge work, the control line protected from falling by guardrail sys-
may be used in lieu of a guardrail along tems, fences, barricades, or covers.
the edge that parallels the leading (8) Dangerous equipment. (i) Each em-
edge. ployee less than 6 feet (1.8 m) above
315
dangerous equipment shall be pro- not limited to the erection of wall pan-
tected from falling into or onto the els, columns, beams, and floor and roof
dangerous equipment by guardrail sys- ‘‘tees’’) and related operations such as
tems or by equipment guards. grouting of precast concrete members,
(ii) Each employee 6 feet (1.8 m) or who is 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above
more above dangerous equipment shall lower levels shall be protected from
be protected from fall hazards by falling by guardrail systems, safety net
guardrail systems, personal fall arrest systems, or personal fall arrest sys-
systems, or safety net systems. tems, unless another provision in para-
(9) Overhand bricklaying and related graph (b) of this section provides for an
work. (i) Except as otherwise provided alternative fall protection measure.
in paragraph (b) of this section, each Exception: When the employer can
employee performing overhand brick- demonstrate that it is infeasible or cre-
laying and related work 6 feet (1.8 m) ates a greater hazard to use these sys-
or more above lower levels, shall be tems, the employer shall develop and
protected from falling by guardrail sys- implement a fall protection plan which
tems, safety net systems, personal fall meets the requirements of paragraph
arrest systems, or shall work in a con- (k) of § 1926.502.
trolled access zone. NOTE: There is a presumption that it is fea-
(ii) Each employee reaching more sible and will not create a greater hazard to
than 10 inches (25 cm) below the level implement at least one of the above-listed
of the walking/working surface on fall protection systems. Accordingly, the
which they are working, shall be pro- employer has the burden of establishing that
tected from falling by a guardrail sys- it is appropriate to implement a fall protec-
tion plan which complies with § 1926.502(k)
tem, safety net system, or personal fall
for a particular workplace situation, in lieu
arrest system. of implementing any of those systems.
NOTE: Bricklaying operations performed on
(13) Residential construction. Each em-
scaffolds are regulated by subpart L—Scaf-
folds of this part. ployee engaged in residential construc-
(10) Roofing work on Low-slope roofs. tion activities 6 feet (1.8 m) or more
Except as otherwise provided in para- above lower levels shall be protected
graph (b) of this section, each employee by guardrail systems, safety net sys-
engaged in roofing activities on low- tem, or personal fall arrest system un-
slope roofs, with unprotected sides and less another provision in paragraph (b)
edges 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above lower of this section provides for an alter-
levels shall be protected from falling native fall protection measure. Excep-
by guardrail systems, safety net sys- tion: When the employer can dem-
tems, personal fall arrest systems, or a onstrate that it is infeasible or creates
combination of warning line system a greater hazard to use these systems,
and guardrail system, warning line sys- the employer shall develop and imple-
tem and safety net system, or warning ment a fall protection plan which
line system and personal fall arrest meets the requirements of paragraph
system, or warning line system and (k) of § 1926.502.
safety monitoring system. Or, on roofs NOTE: There is a presumption that it is fea-
50-feet (15.25 m) or less in width (see ap- sible and will not create a greater hazard to
pendix A to subpart M of this part), the implement at least one of the above-listed
fall protection systems. Accordingly, the
use of a safety monitoring system employer has the burden of establishing that
alone [i.e. without the warning line it is appropriate to implement a fall protec-
system] is permitted. tion plan which complies with § 1926.502(k)
(11) Steep roofs. Each employee on a for a particular workplace situation, in lieu
steep roof with unprotected sides and of implementing any of those systems.
edges 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above lower (14) Wall openings. Each employee
levels shall be protected from falling working on, at, above, or near wall
by guardrail systems with toeboards, openings (including those with chutes
safety net systems, or personal fall ar- attached) where the outside bottom
rest systems. edge of the wall opening is 6 feet (1.8 m)
(12) Precast concrete erection. Each em- or more above lower levels and the in-
ployee engaged in the erection of pre- side bottom edge of the wall opening is
cast concrete members (including, but less than 39 inches (1.0 m) above the
316
walking/working surface, shall be pro- guardrail system meets all other cri-
tected from falling by the use of a teria of this paragraph.
guardrail system, a safety net system, NOTE: When employees are using stilts, the
or a personal fall arrest system. top edge height of the top rail, or equivalent
(15) Walking/working surfaces not oth- member, shall be increased an amount equal
erwise addressed. Except as provided in to the height of the stilts.
§ 1926.500(a)(2) or in § 1926.501 (b)(1) (2) Midrails, screens, mesh, inter-
through (b)(14), each employee on a mediate vertical members, or equiva-
walking/working surface 6 feet (1.8 m) lent intermediate structural members
or more above lower levels shall be pro- shall be installed between the top edge
tected from falling by a guardrail sys- of the guardrail system and the walk-
tem, safety net system, or personal fall ing/working surface when there is no
arrest system. wall or parapet wall at least 21 inches
(c) Protection from falling objects. (53 cm) high.
When an employee is exposed to falling (i) Midrails, when used, shall be in-
objects, the employer shall have each stalled at a height midway between the
employee wear a hard hat and shall im- top edge of the guardrail system and
plement one of the following measures: the walking/working level.
(1) Erect toeboards, screens, or (ii) Screens and mesh, when used,
guardrail systems to prevent objects shall extend from the top rail to the
from falling from higher levels; or, walking/working level and along the
(2) Erect a canopy structure and keep entire opening between top rail sup-
potential fall objects far enough from ports.
the edge of the higher level so that (iii) Intermediate members (such as
those objects would not go over the balusters), when used between posts,
edge if they were accidentally dis- shall be not more than 19 inches (48
placed; or, cm) apart.
(3) Barricade the area to which ob- (iv) Other structural members (such
jects could fall, prohibit employees as additional midrails and architec-
from entering the barricaded area, and tural panels) shall be installed such
keep objects that may fall far enough that there are no openings in the
away from the edge of a higher level so guardrail system that are more than 19
that those objects would not go over inches (.5 m) wide.
the edge if they were accidentally dis- (3) Guardrail systems shall be capa-
placed. ble of withstanding, without failure, a
force of at least 200 pounds (890 N) ap-
§ 1926.502 Fall protection systems cri- plied within 2 inches (5.1 cm) of the top
teria and practices. edge, in any outward or downward di-
(a) General. (1) Fall protection sys- rection, at any point along the top
tems required by this part shall comply edge.
with the applicable provisions of this (4) When the 200 pound (890 N) test
section. load specified in paragraph (b)(3) of
(2) Employers shall provide and in- this section is applied in a downward
stall all fall protection systems re- direction, the top edge of the guardrail
quired by this subpart for an employee, shall not deflect to a height less than
and shall comply with all other perti- 39 inches (1.0 m) above the walking/
nent requirements of this subpart be- working level. Guardrail system com-
fore that employee begins the work ponents selected and constructed in ac-
that necessitates the fall protection. cordance with the appendix B to sub-
(b) Guardrail systems. Guardrail sys- part M of this part will be deemed to
tems and their use shall comply with meet this requirement.
the following provisions: (5) Midrails, screens, mesh, inter-
(1) Top edge height of top rails, or mediate vertical members, solid pan-
equivalent guardrail system members, els, and equivalent structural members
shall be 42 inches (1.1 m) plus or minus shall be capable of withstanding, with-
3 inches (8 cm) above the walking/ out failure, a force of at least 150
working level. When conditions war- pounds (666 N) applied in any downward
rant, the height of the top edge may or outward direction at any point
exceed the 45-inch height, provided the along the midrail or other member.
317
(6) Guardrail systems shall be so sur- are working, but in no case more than
faced as to prevent injury to an em- 30 feet (9.1 m) below such level. When
ployee from punctures or lacerations, nets are used on bridges, the potential
and to prevent snagging of clothing. fall area from the walking/working sur-
(7) The ends of all top rails and face to the net shall be unobstructed.
midrails shall not overhang the ter- (2) Safety nets shall extend outward
minal posts, except where such over- from the outermost projection of the
hang does not constitute a projection work surface as follows:
hazard.
Minimum required horizontal
(8) Steel banding and plastic banding Vertical distance from working distance of outer edge of net
shall not be used as top rails or level to horizontal plane of net from the edge of the working
surface
midrails.
(9) Top rails and midrails shall be at Up to 5 feet ............................ 8 feet.
least one-quarter inch (0.6 cm) nominal More than 5 feet up to 10 feet 10 feet.
More than 10 feet ................... 13 feet.
diameter or thickness to prevent cuts
and lacerations. If wire rope is used for (3) Safety nets shall be installed with
top rails, it shall be flagged at not sufficient clearance under them to pre-
more than 6-foot (1.8 m) intervals with vent contact with the surface or struc-
high-visibility material. tures below when subjected to an im-
(10) When guardrail systems are used pact force equal to the drop test speci-
at hoisting areas, a chain, gate or re- fied in paragraph (c)(4) of this section.
movable guardrail section shall be (4) Safety nets and their installations
placed across the access opening be- shall be capable of absorbing an impact
tween guardrail sections when hoisting force equal to that produced by the
operations are not taking place. drop test specified in paragraph (c)(4)(i)
(11) When guardrail systems are used of this section.
at holes, they shall be erected on all (i) Except as provided in paragraph
unprotected sides or edges of the hole. (c)(4)(ii) of this section, safety nets and
(12) When guardrail systems are used safety net installations shall be drop-
around holes used for the passage of tested at the jobsite after initial in-
materials, the hole shall have not more stallation and before being used as a
than two sides provided with remov- fall protection system, whenever relo-
able guardrail sections to allow the cated, after major repair, and at 6-
passage of materials. When the hole is month intervals if left in one place.
not in use, it shall be closed over with The drop-test shall consist of a 400
a cover, or a guardrail system shall be pound (180 kg) bag of sand 30 ±2 inches
provided along all unprotected sides or (76 ±5 cm) in diameter dropped into the
edges. net from the highest walking/working
(13) When guardrail systems are used surface at which employees are exposed
around holes which are used as points to fall hazards, but not from less than
of access (such as ladderways), they 42 inches (1.1 m) above that level.
shall be provided with a gate, or be so (ii) When the employer can dem-
offset that a person cannot walk di- onstrate that it is unreasonable to per-
rectly into the hole. form the drop-test required by para-
(14) Guardrail systems used on ramps graph (c)(4)(i) of this section, the em-
and runways shall be erected along ployer (or a designated competent per-
each unprotected side or edge. son) shall certify that the net and net
(15) Manila, plastic or synthetic rope installation is in compliance with the
being used for top rails or midrails provisions of paragraphs (c)(3) and
shall be inspected as frequently as nec- (c)(4)(i) of this section by preparing a
essary to ensure that it continues to certification record prior to the net
meet the strength requirements of being used as a fall protection system.
paragraph (b)(3) of this section. The certification record must include
(c) Safety net systems. Safety net sys- an identification of the net and net in-
tems and their use shall comply with stallation for which the certification
the following provisions: record is being prepared; the date that
(1) Safety nets shall be installed as it was determined that the identified
close as practicable under the walking/ net and net installation were in com-
working surface on which employees pliance with paragraph (c)(3) of this
318
section and the signature of the person ing, breaking, or taking permanent de-
making the determination and certifi- formation.
cation. The most recent certification (5) Snaphooks shall be sized to be
record for each net and net installation compatible with the member to which
shall be available at the jobsite for in- they are connected to prevent uninten-
spection. tional disengagement of the snaphook
(5) Defective nets shall not be used. by depression of the snaphook keeper
Safety nets shall be inspected at least by the connected member, or shall be a
once a week for wear, damage, and locking type snaphook designed and
other deterioration. Defective compo- used to prevent disengagement of the
nents shall be removed from service. snaphook by the contact of the
Safety nets shall also be inspected snaphook keeper by the connected
after any occurrence which could affect member. Effective January 1, 1998, only
the integrity of the safety net system. locking type snaphooks shall be used.
(6) Materials, scrap pieces, equip- (6) Unless the snaphook is a locking
ment, and tools which have fallen into type and designed for the following
the safety net shall be removed as soon connections, snaphooks shall not be en-
as possible from the net and at least gaged:
before the next work shift. (i) directly to webbing, rope or wire
(7) The maximum size of each safety rope;
net mesh opening shall not exceed 36 (ii) to each other;
square inches (230 cm 2) nor be longer (iii) to a Dee-ring to which another
than 6 inches (15 cm) on any side, and snaphook or other connector is at-
the opening, measured center-to-center tached;
of mesh ropes or webbing, shall not be (iv) to a horizontal lifeline; or
longer than 6 inches (15 cm). All mesh (v) to any object which is incom-
crossings shall be secured to prevent patibly shaped or dimensioned in rela-
enlargement of the mesh opening. tion to the snaphook such that unin-
(8) Each safety net (or section of it) tentional disengagement could occur
shall have a border rope for webbing by the connected object being able to
with a minimum breaking strength of depress the snaphook keeper and re-
5,000 pounds (22.2 kN). lease itself.
(9) Connections between safety net (7) On suspended scaffolds or similar
panels shall be as strong as integral work platforms with horizontal life-
net components and shall be spaced not lines which may become vertical life-
more than 6 inches (15 cm) apart. lines, the devices used to connect to a
(d) Personal fall arrest systems. Per- horizontal lifeline shall be capable of
sonal fall arrest systems and their use locking in both directions on the life-
shall comply with the provisions set line.
forth below. Effective January 1, 1998, (8) Horizontal lifelines shall be de-
body belts are not acceptable as part of signed, installed, and used, under the
a personal fall arrest system. Note: The supervision of a qualified person, as
use of a body belt in a positioning depart of a complete personal fall arrest
vice system is acceptable and is regu- system, which maintains a safety fac-
lated under paragraph (e) of this sector of at least two.
tion. (9) Lanyards and vertical lifelines
(1) Connectors shall be drop forged, shall have a minimum breaking
pressed or formed steel, or made of strength of 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN).
equivalent materials. (10) (i) Except as provided in para-
(2) Connectors shall have a corrosion- graph (d)(10)(ii) of this section, when
resistant finish, and all surfaces and vertical lifelines are used, each em-
edges shall be smooth to prevent dam- ployee shall be attached to a separate
age to interfacing parts of the system. lifeline.
(3) Dee-rings and snaphooks shall (ii) During the construction of eleva-
have a minimum tensile strength of tor shafts, two employees may be at-
5,000 pounds (22.2 kN). tached to the same lifeline in the
(4) Dee-rings and snaphooks shall be hoistway, provided both employees are
proof-tested to a minimum tensile load working atop a false car that is
of 3,600 pounds (16 kN) without crack- equipped with guardrails; the strength
319
of the lifeline is 10,000 pounds [5,000 ergy of an employee free falling a dis-
pounds per employee attached] (44.4 tance of 6 feet (1.8 m), or the free fall
kN); and all other criteria specified in distance permitted by the system,
this paragraph for lifelines have been whichever is less.
met. NOTE: If the personal fall arrest system
(11) Lifelines shall be protected meets the criteria and protocols contained in
against being cut or abraded. appendix C to subpart M, and if the system
(12) Self-retracting lifelines and lan- is being used by an employee having a com-
bined person and tool weight of less than 310
yards which automatically limit free pounds (140 kg), the system will be consid-
fall distance to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less ered to be in compliance with the provisions
shall be capable of sustaining a min- of paragraph (d)(16) of this section. If the
imum tensile load of 3,000 pounds (13.3 system is used by an employee having a com-
kN) applied to the device with the life- bined tool and body weight of 310 pounds (140
line or lanyard in the fully extended kg) or more, then the employer must appro-
position. priately modify the criteria and protocols of
(13) Self-retracting lifelines and lan- the appendix to provide proper protection for
such heavier weights, or the system will not
yards which do not limit free fall dis- be deemed to be in compliance with the re-
tance to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less, ripstitch quirements of paragraph (d)(16) of this sec-
lanyards, and tearing and deforming tion.
lanyards shall be capable of sustaining (17) The attachment point of the
a minimum tensile load of 5,000 pounds body belt shall be located in the center
(22.2 kN) applied to the device with the of the wearer’s back. The attachment
lifeline or lanyard in the fully extended point of the body harness shall be lo-
position. cated in the center of the wearer’s back
(14) Ropes and straps (webbing) used near shoulder level, or above the wear-
in lanyards, lifelines, and strength er’s head.
components of body belts and body har- (18) Body belts, harnesses, and com-
nesses shall be made from synthetic fi- ponents shall be used only for em-
bers. ployee protection (as part of a personal
(15) Anchorages used for attachment fall arrest system or positioning device
of personal fall arrest equipment shall system) and not to hoist materials.
be independent of any anchorage being (19) Personal fall arrest systems and
used to support or suspend platforms components subjected to impact load-
and capable of supporting at least 5,000 ing shall be immediately removed from
pounds (22.2 kN) per employee at- service and shall not be used again for
tached, or shall be designed, installed, employee protection until inspected
and used as follows: and determined by a competent person
(i) as part of a complete personal fall to be undamaged and suitable for
arrest system which maintains a safety reuse.
factor of at least two; and (20) The employer shall provide for
(ii) under the supervision of a quali- prompt rescue of employees in the
fied person. event of a fall or shall assure that em-
(16) Personal fall arrest systems, ployees are able to rescue themselves.
when stopping a fall, shall: (21) Personal fall arrest systems shall
(i) limit maximum arresting force on be inspected prior to each use for wear,
an employee to 900 pounds (4 kN) when damage and other deterioration, and
used with a body belt; defective components shall be removed
(ii) limit maximum arresting force from service.
on an employee to 1,800 pounds (8 kN) (22) Body belts shall be at least one
when used with a body harness; and five-eighths (15⁄8) inches (4.1 cm)
(iii) be rigged such that an employee wide.
can neither free fall more than 6 feet (23) Personal fall arrest systems shall
(1.8 m), nor contact any lower level; not be attached to guardrail systems,
(iv) bring an employee to a complete nor shall they be attached to hoists ex-
stop and limit maximum deceleration cept as specified in other subparts of
distance an employee travels to 3.5 feet this part.
(1.07 m); and, (24) When a personal fall arrest sys-
(v) have sufficient strength to with- tem is used at hoist areas, it shall be
stand twice the potential impact en- rigged to allow the movement of the
320
employee only as far as the edge of the (9) Positioning device systems shall
walking/working surface. be inspected prior to each use for wear,
(e) Positioning device systems. Posi- damage, and other deterioration, and
tioning device systems and their use defective components shall be removed
shall conform to the following provi- from service.
sions: (10) Body belts, harnesses, and com-
(1) Positioning devices shall be rigged ponents shall be used only for em-
such that an employee cannot free fall ployee protection (as part of a personal
more than 2 feet (.6 m). fall arrest system or positioning device
(2) Positioning devices shall be se- system) and not to hoist materials.
cured to an anchorage capable of sup- (f) Warning line systems. Warning line
porting at least twice the potential im-
systems [See § 1926.501(b)(10)] and their
pact load of an employee’s fall or 3,000
use shall comply with the following
pounds (13.3 kN), whichever is greater.
provisions:
(3) Connectors shall be drop forged,
pressed or formed steel, or made of (1) The warning line shall be erected
equivalent materials. around all sides of the roof work area.
(4) Connectors shall have a corrosion- (i) When mechanical equipment is
resistant finish, and all surfaces and not being used, the warning line shall
edges shall be smooth to prevent dam- be erected not less than 6 feet (1.8 m)
age to interfacing parts of this system. from the roof edge.
(5) Connecting assemblies shall have (ii) When mechanical equipment is
a minimum tensile strength of 5,000 being used, the warning line shall be
pounds (22.2 kN) erected not less than 6 feet (1.8 m) from
(6) Dee-rings and snaphooks shall be the roof edge which is parallel to the
proof-tested to a minimum tensile load direction of mechanical equipment op-
of 3,600 pounds (16 kN) without crack- eration, and not less than 10 feet (3.1
ing, breaking, or taking permanent de- m) from the roof edge which is perpen-
formation. dicular to the direction of mechanical
(7) Snaphooks shall be sized to be equipment operation.
compatible with the member to which (iii) Points of access, materials han-
they are connected to prevent uninten- dling areas, storage areas, and hoisting
tional disengagement of the snaphook areas shall be connected to the work
by depression of the snaphook keeper area by an access path formed by two
by the connected member, or shall be a warning lines.
locking type snaphook designed and (iv) When the path to a point of ac-
used to prevent disengagement of the cess is not in use, a rope, wire, chain,
snaphook by the contact of the or other barricade, equivalent in
snaphook keeper by the connected strength and height to the warning
member. As of January 1, 1998, only line, shall be placed across the path at
locking type snaphooks shall be used. the point where the path intersects the
(8) Unless the snaphook is a locking
warning line erected around the work
type and designed for the following
area, or the path shall be offset such
connections, snaphooks shall not be en-
that a person cannot walk directly into
gaged:
the work area.
(i) directly to webbing, rope or wire
rope; (2) Warning lines shall consist of
(ii) to each other; ropes, wires, or chains, and supporting
(iii) to a Dee-ring to which another stanchions erected as follows:
snaphook or other connector is at- (i) The rope, wire, or chain shall be
tached; flagged at not more than 6-foot (1.8 m)
(iv) to a horizontal lifeline; or intervals with high-visibility material;
(v) to any object which is incom- (ii) The rope, wire, or chain shall be
patibly shaped or dimensioned in rela- rigged and supported in such a way
tion to the snaphook such that unin- that its lowest point (including sag) is
tentional disengagement could occur no less than 34 inches (.9 m) from the
by the connected object being able to walking/working surface and its high-
depress the snaphook keeper and re- est point is no more than 39 inches (1.0
lease itself. m) from the walking/working surface;
321
(iii) After being erected, with the proximately parallel to the unpro-
rope, wire, or chain attached, stan- tected or leading edge.
chions shall be capable of resisting, (iv) The control line shall be con-
without tipping over, a force of at least nected on each side to a guardrail sys-
16 pounds (71 N) applied horizontally tem or wall.
against the stanchion, 30 inches (.8 m) (2) When used to control access to
above the walking/working surface, areas where overhand bricklaying and
perpendicular to the warning line, and related work are taking place:
in the direction of the floor, roof, or (i) The controlled access zone shall
platform edge; be defined by a control line erected not
(iv) The rope, wire, or chain shall less than 10 feet (3.1 m) nor more than
have a minimum tensile strength of 500 15 feet (4.5 m) from the working edge.
pounds (2.22 kN), and after being at- (ii) The control line shall extend for
tached to the stanchions, shall be capa- a distance sufficient for the controlled
ble of supporting, without breaking, access zone to enclose all employees
the loads applied to the stanchions as performing overhand bricklaying and
prescribed in paragraph (f)(2)(iii) of related work at the working edge and
this section; and shall be approximately parallel to the
(v) The line shall be attached at each working edge.
stanchion in such a way that pulling on (iii) Additional control lines shall be
one section of the line between stan- erected at each end to enclose the con-
chions will not result in slack being trolled access zone.
taken up in adjacent sections before
(iv) Only employees engaged in
the stanchion tips over.
overhand bricklaying or related work
(3) No employee shall be allowed in
shall be permitted in the controlled ac-
the area between a roof edge and a
cess zone.
warning line unless the employee is
performing roofing work in that area. (3) Control lines shall consist of
(4) Mechanical equipment on roofs ropes, wires, tapes, or equivalent mate-
shall be used or stored only in areas rials, and supporting stanchions as fol-
where employees are protected by a lows:
warning line system, guardrail system, (i) Each line shall be flagged or oth-
or personal fall arrest system. erwise clearly marked at not more
(g) Controlled access zones. Controlled than 6-foot (1.8 m) intervals with high-
access zones [See § 1926.501(b)(9) and visibility material.
§ 1926.502(k)] and their use shall con- (ii) Each line shall be rigged and sup-
form to the following provisions. ported in such a way that its lowest
(1) When used to control access to point (including sag) is not less than 39
areas where leading edge and other op- inches (1 m) from the walking/working
erations are taking place the con- surface and its highest point is not
trolled access zone shall be defined by more than 45 inches (1.3 m) [50 inches
a control line or by any other means (1.3 m) when overhand bricklaying op-
that restricts access. erations are being performed] from the
(i) When control lines are used, they walking/working surface.
shall be erected not less than 6 feet (1.8 (iii) Each line shall have a minimum
m) nor more than 25 feet (7.7 m) from breaking strength of 200 pounds (.88
the unprotected or leading edge, except kN).
when erecting precast concrete mem- (4) On floors and roofs where guard-
bers. rail systems are not in place prior to
(ii) When erecting precast concrete the beginning of overhand bricklaying
members, the control line shall be operations, controlled access zones
erected not less than 6 feet (1.8 m) nor shall be enlarged, as necessary, to en-
more than 60 feet (18 m) or half the close all points of access, material han-
length of the member being erected, dling areas, and storage areas.
whichever is less, from the leading (5) On floors and roofs where guard-
edge. rail systems are in place, but need to
(iii) The control line shall extend be removed to allow overhand brick-
along the entire length of the unpro- laying work or leading edge work to
tected or leading edge and shall be ap- take place, only that portion of the
322
guardrail necessary to accomplish that ment, and materials that may be im-
day’s work shall be removed. posed on the cover at any one time.
(h) Safety monitoring systems. Safety (3) All covers shall be secured when
monitoring systems [See installed so as to prevent accidental
§§ 1926.501(b)(10) and 1926.502(k)] and displacement by the wind, equipment,
their use shall comply with the fol- or employees.
lowing provisions: (4) All covers shall be color coded or
(1) The employer shall designate a they shall be marked with the word
competent person to monitor the safe- ‘‘HOLE’’ or ‘‘COVER’’ to provide warn-
ty of other employees and the em- ing of the hazard.
ployer shall ensure that the safety NOTE: This provision does not apply to cast
monitor complies with the following iron manhole covers or steel grates used on
streets or roadways.
requirements:
(i) The safety monitor shall be com- (j) Protection from falling objects. Fall-
petent to recognize fall hazards; ing object protection shall comply with
(ii) The safety monitor shall warn the following provisions:
(1) Toeboards, when used as falling
the employee when it appears that the
object protection, shall be erected
employee is unaware of a fall hazard or
along the edge of the overhead walking/
is acting in an unsafe manner;
working surface for a distance suffi-
(iii) The safety monitor shall be on
cient to protect employees below.
the same walking/working surface and
(2) Toeboards shall be capable of
within visual sighting distance of the
withstanding, without failure, a force
employee being monitored;
of at least 50 pounds (222 N) applied in
(iv) The safety monitor shall be close
any downward or outward direction at
enough to communicate orally with any point along the toeboard.
the employee; and (3) Toeboards shall be a minimum of
(v) The safety monitor shall not have 31⁄2 inches (9 cm) in vertical height
other responsibilities which could take from their top edge to the level of the
the monitor’s attention from the moni- walking/working surface. They shall
toring function. have not more than 1⁄4 inch (0.6 cm)
(2) Mechanical equipment shall not clearance above the walking/working
be used or stored in areas where safety surface. They shall be solid or have
monitoring systems are being used to openings not over 1 inch (2.5 cm) in
monitor employees engaged in roofing greatest dimension.
operations on low-slope roofs. (4) Where tools, equipment, or mate-
(3) No employee, other than an em- rials are piled higher than the top edge
ployee engaged in roofing work [on of a toeboard, paneling or screening
low-sloped roofs] or an employee cov- shall be erected from the walking/
ered by a fall protection plan, shall be working surface or toeboard to the top
allowed in an area where an employee of a guardrail system’s top rail or
is being protected by a safety moni- midrail, for a distance sufficient to
toring system. protect employees below.
(4) Each employee working in a con- (5) Guardrail systems, when used as
trolled access zone shall be directed to falling object protection, shall have all
comply promptly with fall hazard openings small enough to prevent pas-
warnings from safety monitors. sage of potential falling objects.
(i) Covers. Covers for holes in floors, (6) During the performance of
roofs, and other walking/working sur- overhand bricklaying and related work:
faces shall meet the following require- (i) No materials or equipment except
ments: masonry and mortar shall be stored
(1) Covers located in roadways and within 4 feet (1.2 m) of the working
vehicular aisles shall be capable of sup- edge.
porting, without failure, at least twice (ii) Excess mortar, broken or scat-
the maximum axle load of the largest tered masonry units, and all other ma-
vehicle expected to cross over the terials and debris shall be kept clear
cover. from the work area by removal at reg-
(2) All other covers shall be capable ular intervals.
of supporting, without failure, at least (7) During the performance of roofing
twice the weight of employees, equip- work:
323
(i) Materials and equipment shall not (7) The fall protection plan shall
be stored within 6 feet (1.8 m) of a roof identify each location where conven-
edge unless guardrails are erected at tional fall protection methods cannot
the edge. be used. These locations shall then be
(ii) Materials which are piled, classified as controlled access zones
grouped, or stacked near a roof edge and the employer must comply with
shall be stable and self-supporting. the criteria in paragraph (g) of this sec-
(8) Canopies, when used as falling ob- tion.
ject protection, shall be strong enough (8) Where no other alternative meas-
to prevent collapse and to prevent pen- ure has been implemented, the em-
etration by any objects which may fall ployer shall implement a safety moni-
onto the canopy. toring system in conformance with
(k) Fall protection plan. This option is § 1926.502(h).
available only to employees engaged in (9) The fall protection plan must in-
leading edge work, precast concrete clude a statement which provides the
erection work, or residential construc- name or other method of identification
tion work (See § 1926.501(b)(2), (b)(12), for each employee who is designated to
work in controlled access zones. No
and (b)(13)) who can demonstrate that
other employees may enter controlled
it is infeasible or it creates a greater
access zones.
hazard to use conventional fall protec-
(10) In the event an employee falls, or
tion equipment. The fall protection
some other related, serious incident oc-
plan must conform to the following
curs, (e.g., a near miss) the employer
provisions.
shall investigate the circumstances of
(1) The fall protection plan shall be the fall or other incident to determine
prepared by a qualified person and de- if the fall protection plan needs to be
veloped specifically for the site where changed (e.g. new practices, proce-
the leading edge work, precast concrete dures, or training) and shall implement
work, or residential construction work those changes to prevent similar types
is being performed and the plan must of falls or incidents.
be maintained up to date.
(2) Any changes to the fall protection § 1926.503 Training requirements.
plan shall be approved by a qualified The following training provisions
person. supplement and clarify the require-
(3) A copy of the fall protection plan ments of § 1926.21 regarding the hazards
with all approved changes shall be addressed in subpart M of this part.
maintained at the job site. (a) Training Program. (1) The em-
(4) The implementation of the fall ployer shall provide a training program
protection plan shall be under the su- for each employee who might be ex-
pervision of a competent person. posed to fall hazards. The program
(5) The fall protection plan shall doc- shall enable each employee to recog-
ument the reasons why the use of con- nize the hazards of falling and shall
ventional fall protection systems train each employee in the procedures
(guardrail systems, personal fall arrest to be followed in order to minimize
systems, or safety nets systems) are in- these hazards.
feasible or why their use would create (2) The employer shall assure that
a greater hazard. each employee has been trained, as
(6) The fall protection plan shall in- necessary, by a competent person
clude a written discussion of other qualified in the following areas:
measures that will be taken to reduce (i) The nature of fall hazards in the
or eliminate the fall hazard for workers work area;
who cannot be provided with protec- (ii) The correct procedures for erect-
tion from the conventional fall protec- ing, maintaining, disassembling, and
tion systems. For example, the em- inspecting the fall protection systems
ployer shall discuss the extent to to be used;
which scaffolds, ladders, or vehicle (iii) The use and operation of guard-
mounted work platforms can be used to rail systems, personal fall arrest sys-
provide a safer working surface and tems, safety net systems, warning line
thereby reduce the hazard of falling. systems, safety monitoring systems,
324
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. A
controlled access zones, and other pro- that the employee has not retained the
tection to be used; requisite understanding or skill.
(iv) The role of each employee in the NOTE: The following appendices to subpart
safety monitoring system when this M of this part serve as non-mandatory guide-
system is used; lines to assist employers in complying with
(v) The limitations on the use of me- the appropriate requirements of subpart M of
chanical equipment during the per- this part.
formance of roofing work on low-sloped
roofs; APPENDIX A TO SUBPART M OF PART
(vi) The correct procedures for the 1926—DETERMINING ROOF WIDTHS
handling and storage of equipment and Non-mandatory Guidelines for Complying With
materials and the erection of overhead § 1926.501(b)(10)
protection; and
(vii) The role of employees in fall (1) This appendix serves as a guideline to
assist employers complying with the require-
protection plans; ments of § 1926.501(b)(10). Section
(viii) The standards contained in this 1910.501(b)(10) allows the use of a safety mon-
subpart. itoring system alone as a means of providing
(b) Certification of training. (1) The fall protection during the performance of
employer shall verify compliance with roofing operations on low-sloped roofs 50 feet
paragraph (a) of this section by pre- (15.25 m) or less in width. Each example in
paring a written certification record. the appendix shows a roof plan or plans and
The written certification record shall indicates where each roof or roof area is to
contain the name or other identity of be measured to determine its width. Section
views or elevation views are shown where ap-
the employee trained, the date(s) of the
propriate. Some examples show ‘‘correct’’
training, and the signature of the per- and ‘‘incorrect’’ subdivisions of irregularly
son who conducted the training or the shaped roofs divided into smaller, regularly
signature of the employer. If the em- shaped areas. In all examples, the dimension
ployer relies on training conducted by selected to be the width of an area is the
another employer or completed prior to lesser of the two primary dimensions of the
the effective date of this section, the area, as viewed from above. Example A
certification record shall indicate the shows that on a simple rectangular roof,
date the employer determined the prior width is the lesser of the two primary overall
dimensions. This is also the case with roofs
training was adequate rather than the which are sloped toward or away from the
date of actual training. roof center, as shown in Example B.
(2) The latest training certification (2) Many roofs are not simple rectangles.
shall be maintained. Such roofs may be broken down into sub-
(c) Retraining. When the employer has areas as shown in Example C. The process of
reason to believe that any affected em- dividing a roof area can produce many dif-
ployee who has already been trained ferent configurations. Example C gives the
does not have the understanding and general rule of using dividing lines of min-
skill required by paragraph (a) of this imum length to minimize the size and num-
ber of the areas which are potentially less
section, the employer shall retrain than 50 feet (15.25 m) wide. The intent is to
each such employee. Circumstances minimize the number of roof areas where
where retraining is required include, safety monitoring systems alone are suffi-
but are not limited to, situations cient protection.
where: (3) Roofs which are comprised of several
(1) Changes in the workplace render separate, non-contiguous roof areas, as in
previous training obsolete; or Example D, may be considered as a series of
(2) Changes in the types of fall pro- individual roofs. Some roofs have pent-
tection systems or equipment to be houses, additional floors, courtyard open-
ings, or similar architectural features; Ex-
used render previous training obsolete; ample E shows how the rule for dividing
or roofs into subareas is applied to such con-
(3) Inadequacies in an affected em- figurations. Irregular, non-rectangular roofs
ployee’s knowledge or use of fall pro- must be considered on an individual basis, as
tection systems or equipment indicate shown in Example F.
325
Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–13 Edition)
EXAMPLE A: RECTANGULAR SHAPED ROOFS
EXAMPLE B: SLOPED RECTANGULAR SHAPED ROOFS
EXAMPLE C: IRREGULARLY SHAPED ROOFS the size of roof areas where the safety moni-
WITH RECTANGULAR SHAPED SECTIONS toring system alone can be used
Such roofs are to be divided into sub-areas [1926.502(b)(10)]. Dotted lines are used in the
by using dividing lines of minimum length to examples to show the location of dividing
minimize the size and number of the areas lines. W denotes incorrect measurements of
which are potentially less than or equal to 50 width.
feet (15.25 meters) in width, in order to limit ER09AU94.001</GPH>
326
ER09AU94.000</GPH>
327
ER09AU94.002</GPH>
Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–13 Edition)
EXAMPLE D: SEPARATE, NON-CONTIGUOUS ROOF AREAS
EXAMPLE E: ROOFS WITH PENTHOUSES, OPEN feet (15.25 meters) in width, in order to limit
COURTYARDS, ADDITIONAL FLOORS, ETC. the size of roof areas where the safety moni-
Such roofs are to be divided into sub-areas toring system alone can be used
by using dividing lines of minimum length to [1926.502(b)(10)]. Dotted lines are used in the
minimize the size and number of the areas examples to show the location of dividing
which are potentially less than or equal to 50
328
ER09AU94.003</GPH>
lines. W denotes incorrect measurements of
width.
329
ER09AU94.004</GPH>
Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. B 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–13 Edition)
EXAMPLE F: IRREGULAR, NON-RECTANGULAR SHAPED ROOFS
APPENDIX B TO SUBPART M OF PART plying with these requirements. An employer

1926—GUARDRAIL SYSTEMS may use these guidelines as a starting point
for designing guardrail systems. However,
Non-Mandatory Guidelines for Complying with the guidelines do not provide all the infor-
§ 1926.502(b) mation necessary to build a complete sys-
The standard requires guardrail systems tem, and the employer is still responsible for
and components to be designed and built to designing and assembling these components
meet the requirements of § 1926.502 (b) (3), (4), in such a way that the completed system
and (5). This appendix serves as a non-man- will meet the requirements of § 1926.502(b) (3),
datory guideline to assist employers in com- (4), and (5). Components for which no specific
330
ER09AU94.005</GPH>
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. C
guidelines are given in this appendix (e.g., of 38 inches plus or minus 4 inches (96 cm
joints, base connections, components made plus or minus 10 cm).
with other materials, and components with (5) The lanyard or lifeline used to create
other dimensions) must also be designed and the free fall distance should be supplied with
constructed in such a way that the com- the system, or in its absence, the least elas-
pleted system meets the requirements of tic lanyard or lifeline available to be used
§ 1926.502. with the system.
(1) For wood railings: Wood components (6) The test weight for each test should be
shall be minimum 1500 lb-ft/in2 fiber (stress hoisted to the required level and should be
grade) construction grade lumber; the posts quickly released without having any appre-
shall be at least 2-inch by 4-inch (5 cm×10 ciable motion imparted to it.
cm) lumber spaced not more than 8 feet (2.4 (7) The system’s performance should be
m) apart on centers; the top rail shall be at evaluated taking into account the range of
least 2-inch by 4-inch (5 cm×10 cm) lumber, environmental conditions for which it is de-
the intermediate rail shall be at least 1-inch signed to be used.
by 6-inch (2.5 cm×15 cm) lumber. All lumber (8) Following the test, the system need not
dimensions are nominal sizes as provided by be capable of further operation.
the American Softwood Lumber Standards, (c) Strength test. (1) During the testing of
dated January 1970. all systems, a test weight of 300 pounds plus
or minus 5 pounds (135 kg plus or minus 2.5
(2) For pipe railings: posts, top rails, and
kg) should be used. (See paragraph (b)(4) of
intermediate railings shall be at least one
this section.)
and one-half inches nominal diameter
(2) The test consists of dropping the test
(schedule 40 pipe) with posts spaced not more
weight once. A new unused system should be
than 8 feet (2.4 m) apart on centers. used for each test.
(3) For structural steel railings: posts, top (3) For lanyard systems, the lanyard
rails, and intermediate rails shall be at least length should be 6 feet plus or minus 2 inches
2-inch by 2-inch (5 cm×10 cm) by 3⁄8-inch (1.1 (1.83 m plus or minus 5 cm) as measured from
cm) angles, with posts spaced not more than the fixed anchorage to the attachment on
8 feet (2.4 m) apart on centers. the body belt or body harness.
(4) For rope-grab-type deceleration sys-
APPENDIX C TO SUBPART M OF PART tems, the length of the lifeline above the
1926—PERSONAL FALL ARREST SYSTEMS centerline of the grabbing mechanism to the
lifeline’s anchorage point should not exceed
Non-Mandatory Guidelines for Complying With 2 feet (0.61 m).
§ 1926.502(d) (5) For lanyard systems, for systems with
deceleration devices which do not automati-
I. Test methods for personal fall arrest systems
cally limit free fall distance to 2 feet (0.61 m)
and positioning device systems—(a) General.
or less, and for systems with deceleration de-
This appendix serves as a non-mandatory
vices which have a connection distance in ex-
guideline to assist employers comply with
cess of 1 foot (0.3 m) (measured between the
the requirements in § 1926.502(d). Paragraphs
centerline of the lifeline and the attachment
(b), (c), (d) and (e) of this appendix describe
point to the body belt or harness), the test
test procedures which may be used to deter-
weight should be rigged to free fall a dis-
mine compliance with the requirements in
tance of 7.5 feet (2.3 m) from a point that is
§ 1926.502 (d)(16). As noted in appendix D of
1.5 feet (.46 m) above the anchorage point, to
this subpart, the test methods listed here in
its hanging location (6 feet below the anchor-
appendix C can also be used to assist employ-
age). The test weight should fall without in-
ers comply with the requirements in
terference, obstruction, or hitting the floor
§ 1926.502(e) (3) and (4) for positioning device
or ground during the test. In some cases a
systems.
non-elastic wire lanyard of sufficient length
(b) General conditions for all tests in the ap- may need to be added to the system (for test
pendix to § 1926.502(d). (1) Lifelines, lanyards purposes) to create the necessary free fall
and deceleration devices should be attached distance.
to an anchorage and connected to the body- (6) For deceleration device systems with
belt or body harness in the same manner as integral lifelines or lanyards which auto-
they would be when used to protect employ- matically limit free fall distance to 2 feet
ees. (0.61 m) or less, the test weight should be
(2) The anchorage should be rigid, and rigged to free fall a distance of 4 feet (1.22
should not have a deflection greater than m).
0.04 inches (1 mm) when a force of 2,250 (7) Any weight which detaches from the
pounds (10 kN) is applied. belt or harness has failed the strength test.
(3) The frequency response of the load (d) Force test—(1) General. The test consists
measuring instrumentation should be 500 Hz. of dropping the respective test weight once
(4) The test weight used in the strength as specified in paragraph (d)(2)(i) or (d)(3)(i)
and force tests should be a rigid, metal, cy- of this section. A new, unused system should
lindrical or torso-shaped object with a girth be used for each test.
331
Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. C 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–13 Edition)
(2) For lanyard systems. (i) A test weight of (3) Other self-activating-type deceleration de-
220 pounds plus or minus 3 pounds (100 kg vices. The locking mechanisms of other self-
plus or minus 1.6 kg) should be used. (See activating-type deceleration devices de-
paragraph (b)(4) of this appendix). signed for more than one arrest should lock
(ii) Lanyard length should be 6 feet plus or each of 1,000 times as they would in normal
minus two inches (1.83 m plus or minus 5 cm) service.
as measured from the fixed anchorage to the II. Additional non-mandatory guidelines for
attachment on the body belt or body har- personal fall arrest systems. The following in-
ness. formation constitutes additional guidelines
(iii) The test weight should fall free from for use in complying with requirements for a
the anchorage level to its hanging location personal fall arrest system.
(a total of 6 feet (1.83 m) free fall distance) (a) Selection and use considerations. (1) The
without interference, obstruction, or hitting kind of personal fall arrest system selected
the floor or ground during the test. should match the particular work situation,
(3) For all other systems. (i) A test weight of and any possible free fall distance should be
220 pounds plus or minus 3 pounds (100 kg kept to a minimum. Consideration should be
plus or minus 1.6 kg) should be used. (See given to the particular work environment.
paragraph (b)(4) of this appendix) For example, the presence of acids, dirt,
(ii) The free fall distance to be used in the moisture, oil, grease, etc., and their effect on
test should be the maximum fall distance the system, should be evaluated. Hot or cold
physically permitted by the system during environments may also have an adverse ef-
normal use conditions, up to a maximum fect on the system. Wire rope should not be
free fall distance for the test weight of 6 feet
used where an electrical hazard is antici-
(1.83 m), except as follows:
pated. As required by the standard, the em-
(A) For deceleration systems which have a ployer must plan to have means available to
connection link or lanyard, the test weight
promptly rescue an employee should a fall
should free fall a distance equal to the con-
occur, since the suspended employee may not
nection distance (measured between the cen-
be able to reach a work level independently.
terline of the lifeline and the attachment
point to the body belt or harness). (2) Where lanyards, connectors, and life-
lines are subject to damage by work oper-
(B) For deceleration device systems with
ations such as welding, chemical cleaning,
integral lifelines or lanyards which auto-
and sandblasting, the component should be
matically limit free fall distance to 2 feet
(0.61 m) or less, the test weight should free protected, or other securing systems should
fall a distance equal to that permitted by the be used. The employer should fully evaluate
system in normal use. (For example, to test the work conditions and environment (in-
a system with a self-retracting lifeline or cluding seasonal weather changes) before se-
lanyard, the test weight should be supported lecting the appropriate personal fall protec-
and the system allowed to retract the life- tion system. Once in use, the system’s effec-
line or lanyard as it would in normal use. tiveness should be monitored. In some cases,
The test weight would then be released and a program for cleaning and maintenance of
the force and deceleration distance meas- the system may be necessary.
ured). (b) Testing considerations. Before pur-
(4) A system fails the force test if the re- chasing or putting into use a personal fall
corded maximum arresting force exceeds arrest system, an employer should obtain
1,260 pounds (5.6 kN) when using a body belt, from the supplier information about the sys-
and/or exceeds 2,520 pounds (11.2 kN) when tem based on its performance during testing
using a body harness. so that the employer can know if the system
(5) The maximum elongation and decelera- meets this standard. Testing should be done
tion distance should be recorded during the using recognized test methods. This appendix
force test. contains test methods recognized for evalu-
(e) Deceleration device tests—(1) General. The ating the performance of fall arrest systems.
device should be evaluated or tested under Not all systems may need to be individually
the environmental conditions, (such as rain, tested; the performance of some systems
ice, grease, dirt, type of lifeline, etc.), for may be based on data and calculations de-
which the device is designed. rived from testing of similar systems, pro-
(2) Rope-grab-type deceleration devices. (i) vided that enough information is available
Devices should be moved on a lifeline 1,000 to demonstrate similarity of function and
times over the same length of line a distance design.
of not less than 1 foot (30.5 cm), and the (c) Component compatibility considerations.
mechanism should lock each time. Ideally, a personal fall arrest system is de-
(ii) Unless the device is permanently signed, tested, and supplied as a complete
marked to indicate the type(s) of lifeline system. However, it is common practice for
which must be used, several types (different lanyards, connectors, lifelines, deceleration
diameters and different materials), of life- devices, body belts and body harnesses to be
lines should be used to test the device. interchanged since some components wear
332
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. C
out before others. The employer and em- can rescue themselves should a fall occur.
ployee should realize that not all compo- The availability of rescue personnel, ladders
nents are interchangeable. For instance, a or other rescue equipment should be evalu-
lanyard should not be connected between a ated. In some situations, equipment which
body belt (or harness) and a deceleration de- allows employees to rescue themselves after
vice of the self-retracting type since this can the fall has been arrested may be desirable,
result in additional free fall for which the such as devices which have descent capa-
system was not designed. Any substitution bility.
or change to a personal fall arrest system (g) Inspection considerations. As required by
should be fully evaluated or tested by a com- § 1926.502(d)(21), personal fall arrest systems
petent person to determine that it meets the must be regularly inspected. Any component
standard, before the modified system is put with any significant defect, such as cuts,
in use. tears, abrasions, mold, or undue stretching;
(d) Employee training considerations. Thor- alterations or additions which might affect
ough employee training in the selection and its efficiency; damage due to deterioration;
use of personal fall arrest systems is impera- contact with fire, acids, or other corrosives;
tive. Employees must be trained in the safe distorted hooks or faulty hook springs;
use of the system. This should include the tongues unfitted to the shoulder of buckles;
following: application limits; proper anchor- loose or damaged mountings; non-func-
ing and tie-off techniques; estimation of free tioning parts; or wearing or internal deterio-
fall distance, including determination of de- ration in the ropes must be withdrawn from
celeration distance, and total fall distance to service immediately, and should be tagged or
prevent striking a lower level; methods of marked as unusable, or destroyed.
use; and inspection and storage of the sys- (h) Tie-off considerations. (1) One of the
tem. Careless or improper use of the equip- most important aspects of personal fall pro-
ment can result in serious injury or death. tection systems is fully planning the system
Employers and employees should become fa- before it is put into use. Probably the most
miliar with the material in this Appendix, as overlooked component is planning for suit-
well as manufacturer’s recommendations, able anchorage points. Such planning should
before a system is used. Of uppermost impor- ideally be done before the structure or build-
tance is the reduction in strength caused by ing is constructed so that anchorage points
certain tie-offs (such as using knots, tying can be incorporated during construction for
around sharp edges, etc.) and maximum per- use later for window cleaning or other build-
mitted free fall distance. Also, to be stressed ing maintenance. If properly planned, these
are the importance of inspections prior to anchorage points may be used during con-
use, the limitations of the equipment, and struction, as well as afterwards.
unique conditions at the worksite which may (i) Properly planned anchorages should be
be important in determining the type of sys- used if they are available. In some cases, an-
tem to use. chorages must be installed immediately
(e) Instruction considerations. Employers prior to use. In such cases, a registered pro-
should obtain comprehensive instructions fessional engineer with experience in design-
from the supplier as to the system’s proper ing fall protection systems, or another quali-
use and application, including, where appli- fied person with appropriate education and
cable: experience should design an anchor point to
(1) The force measured during the sample be installed.
force test; (ii) In other cases, the Agency recognizes
(2) The maximum elongation measured for that there will be a need to devise an anchor
lanyards during the force test; point from existing structures. Examples of
(3) The deceleration distance measured for what might be appropriate anchor points are
deceleration devices during the force test; steel members or I-beams if an acceptable
(4) Caution statements on critical use limi- strap is available for the connection (do not
tations; use a lanyard with a snaphook clipped onto
(5) Application limits; itself); large eye-bolts made of an appro-
(6) Proper hook-up, anchoring and tie-off priate grade steel; guardrails or railings if
techniques, including the proper dee-ring or they have been designed for use as an anchor
other attachment point to use on the body point; or masonry or wood members only if
belt and harness for fall arrest; the attachment point is substantial and pre-
(7) Proper climbing techniques; cautions have been taken to assure that
(8) Methods of inspection, use, cleaning, bolts or other connectors will not pull
and storage; and through. A qualified person should be used to
(9) Specific lifelines which may be used. evaluate the suitable of these ‘‘make shift’’
This information should be provided to em- anchorages with a focus on proper strength.
ployees during training. (2) Employers and employees should at all
(f) Rescue considerations. As required by times be aware that the strength of a per-
§ 1926.502(d)(20), when personal fall arrest sys- sonal fall arrest system is based on its being
tems are used, the employer must assure attached to an anchoring system which does
that employees can be promptly rescued or not reduce the strength of the system (such
333
Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. C 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–13 Edition)
as a properly dimensioned eye-bolt/snap- greatly reduced if the force is applied at an
hook anchorage). Therefore, if a means of at- angle to this axis (in the direction of shear).
tachment is used that will reduce the Also, care should be exercised in selecting
strength of the system, that component the proper diameter of the eye to avoid acci-
should be replaced by a stronger one, but one dental disengagement of snap-hooks not de-
that will also maintain the appropriate max- signed to be compatible for the connection.
imum arrest force characteristics. (8) Due to the significant reduction in the
(3) Tie-off using a knot in a rope lanyard or strength of the lifeline/lanyard (in some
lifeline (at any location) can reduce the life- cases, as much as a 70 percent reduction), the
line or lanyard strength by 50 percent or sliding hitch knot (prusik) should not be
more. Therefore, a stronger lanyard or life- used for lifeline/lanyard connections except
line should be used to compensate for the in emergency situations where no other
weakening effect of the knot, or the lanyard available system is practical. The ‘‘one-and-
length should be reduced (or the tie-off loca- one’’ sliding hitch knot should never be used
tion raised) to minimize free fall distance, or because it is unreliable in stopping a fall.
the lanyard or lifeline should be replaced by The ‘‘two-and-two,’’ or ‘‘three-and-three’’
one which has an appropriately incorporated knot (preferable) may be used in emergency
connector to eliminate the need for a knot. situations; however, care should be taken to
(4) Tie-off of a rope lanyard or lifeline limit free fall distance to a minimum be-
around an ‘‘H’’ or ‘‘I’’ beam or similar sup- cause of reduced lifeline/lanyard strength.
port can reduce its strength as much as 70 (i) Vertical lifeline considerations. As re-
percent due to the cutting action of the quired by the standard, each employee must
beam edges. Therefore, use should be made of have a separate lifeline [except employees
a webbing lanyard or wire core lifeline engaged in constructing elevator shafts who
around the beam; or the lanyard or lifeline are permitted to have two employees on one
should be protected from the edge; or free lifeline] when the lifeline is vertical. The
fall distance should be greatly minimized. reason for this is that in multiple tie-offs to
(5) Tie-off where the line passes over or a single lifeline, if one employee falls, the
around rough or sharp surfaces reduces movement of the lifeline during the arrest of
strength drastically. Such a tie-off should be the fall may pull other employees’ lanyards,
avoided or an alternative tie-off rigging causing them to fall as well.
should be used. Such alternatives may in- (j) Snap-hook considerations. (1) Although
clude use of a snap-hook/dee ring connection, not required by this standard for all connec-
wire rope tie-off, an effective padding of the tions until January 1, 1998, locking
surfaces, or an abrasion-resistance strap snaphooks designed for connection to suit-
around or over the problem surface. able objects (of sufficient strength) are high-
(6) Horizontal lifelines may, depending on ly recommended in lieu of the nonlocking
their geometry and angle of sag, be subjected type. Locking snaphooks incorporate a posi-
to greater loads than the impact load im- tive locking mechanism in addition to the
posed by an attached component. When the spring loaded keeper, which will not allow
angle of horizontal lifeline sag is less than 30 the keeper to open under moderate pressure
degrees, the impact force imparted to the without someone first releasing the mecha-
lifeline by an attached lanyard is greatly nism. Such a feature, properly designed, ef-
amplified. For example, with a sag angle of fectively prevents roll-out from occurring.
15 degrees, the force amplification is about (2) As required by § 1926.502(d)(6), the fol-
2:1 and at 5 degrees sag, it is about 6:1. De- lowing connections must be avoided (unless
pending on the angle of sag, and the line’s properly designed locking snaphooks are
elasticity, the strength of the horizontal life- used) because they are conditions which can
line and the anchorages to which it is at- result in roll-out when a nonlocking
tached should be increased a number of snaphook is used:
times over that of the lanyard. Extreme care (i) Direct connection of a snaphook to a
should be taken in considering a horizontal horizontal lifeline.
lifeline for multiple tie-offs. The reason for (ii) Two (or more) snaphooks connected to
this is that in multiple tie-offs to a hori- one dee-ring.
zontal lifeline, if one employee falls, the (iii) Two snaphooks connected to each
movement of the falling employee and the other.
horizontal lifeline during arrest of the fall (iv) A snaphook connected back on its inte-
may cause other employees to fall also. Hori- gral lanyard.
zontal lifeline and anchorage strength should (v) A snaphook connected to a webbing
be increased for each additional employee to loop or webbing lanyard.
be tied off. For these and other reasons, the (vi) Improper dimensions of the dee-ring,
design of systems using horizontal lifelines rebar, or other connection point in relation
must only be done by qualified persons. Test- to the snaphook dimensions which would
ing of installed lifelines and anchors prior to allow the snaphook keeper to be depressed
use is recommended. by a turning motion of the snaphook.
(7) The strength of an eye-bolt is rated (k) Free fall considerations. The employer
along the axis of the bolt and its strength is and employee should at all times be aware
334
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. D
that a system’s maximum arresting force is be considered. In addition, when a body belt
evaluated under normal use conditions es- is used, the employee’s body will go through
tablished by the manufacturer, and in no a horizontal position to a jack-knifed posi-
case using a free fall distance in excess of 6 tion during the arrest of all falls. Thus, ob-
feet (1.8 m). A few extra feet of free fall can structions which might interfere with this
significantly increase the arresting force on motion should be avoided or a severe injury
the employee, possibly to the point of caus- could occur.
ing injury. Because of this, the free fall dis- (n) Other considerations. Because of the de-
tance should be kept at a minimum, and, as sign of some personal fall arrest systems, ad-
required by the standard, in no case greater ditional considerations may be required for
than 6 feet (1.8 m). To help assure this, the proper tie-off. For example, heavy decelera-
tie-off attachment point to the lifeline or an- tion devices of the self-retracting type
chor should be located at or above the con- should be secured overhead in order to avoid
nection point of the fall arrest equipment to the weight of the device having to be sup-
belt or harness. (Since otherwise additional
ported by the employee. Also, if self- retract-
free fall distance is added to the length of
ing equipment is connected to a horizontal
the connecting means (i.e. lanyard)). Attach-
lifeline, the sag in the lifeline should be
ing to the working surface will often result
minimized to prevent the device from sliding
in a free fall greater than 6 feet (1.8 m). For
down the lifeline to a position which creates
instance, if a 6 foot (1.8 m) lanyard is used,
a swing hazard during fall arrest. In all
the total free fall distance will be the dis-
tance from the working level to the body cases, manufacturer’s instructions should be
belt (or harness) attachment point plus the 6 followed.
feet (1.8 m) of lanyard length. Another im-
portant consideration is that the arresting APPENDIX D TO SUBPART M OF PART
force which the fall system must withstand 1926—POSITIONING DEVICE SYSTEMS
also goes up with greater distances of free
fall, possibly exceeding the strength of the Non-Mandatory Guidelines for Complying With
system. § 1926.502(e)
(l) Elongation and deceleration distance con- I. Testing Methods For Positioning Device
siderations. Other factors involved in a proper Systems. This appendix serves as a non-man-
tie-off are elongation and deceleration dis- datory guideline to assist employers comply
tance. During the arresting of a fall, a lan- with the requirements for positioning device
yard will experience a length of stretching or systems in § 1926.502(e). Paragraphs (b), (c),
elongation, whereas activation of a decelera- (d) and (e) of appendix C of subpart M relat-
tion device will result in a certain stopping ing to § 1926.502(d)—Personal Fall Arrest Sys-
distance. These distances should be available tems—set forth test procedures which may
with the lanyard or device’s instructions and
be used, along with the procedures listed
must be added to the free fall distance to ar-
below, to determine compliance with the re-
rive at the total fall distance before an em-
quirements for positioning device systems in
ployee is fully stopped. The additional stop-
§ 1926.502(e) (3) and (4) of subpart M.
ping distance may be very significant if the
lanyard or deceleration device is attached (a) General. (1) Single strap positioning de-
near or at the end of a long lifeline, which vices shall have one end attached to a fixed
may itself add considerable distance due to anchorage and the other end connected to a
its own elongation. As required by the stand- body belt or harness in the same manner as
ard, sufficient distance to allow for all of they would be used to protect employees.
these factors must also be maintained be- Double strap positioning devices, similar to
tween the employee and obstructions below, window cleaner’s belts, shall have one end of
to prevent an injury due to impact before the the strap attached to a fixed anchorage and
system fully arrests the fall. In addition, a the other end shall hang free. The body belt
minimum of 12 feet (3.7 m) of lifeline should or harness shall be attached to the strap in
be allowed below the securing point of a rope the same manner as it would be used to pro-
grab type deceleration device, and the end tect employees. The two strap ends shall be
terminated to prevent the device from slid- adjusted to their maximum span.
ing off the lifeline. Alternatively, the lifeline (2) The fixed anchorage shall be rigid, and
should extend to the ground or the next shall not have a deflection greater than .04
working level below. These measures are inches (1 mm) when a force of 2,250 pounds
suggested to prevent the worker from inad- (10 kN) is applied.
vertently moving past the end of the lifeline (3) During the testing of all systems, a test
and having the rope grab become disengaged weight of 250 pounds plus or minus 3 pounds
from the lifeline. (113 kg plus or minus 1.6 kg) shall be used.
(m) Obstruction considerations. The location The weight shall be a rigid object with a
of the tie-off should also consider the hazard girth of 38 inches plus or minus 4 inches (96
of obstructions in the potential fall path of cm plus or minus 10 cm).
the employee. Tie-offs which minimize the (4) Each test shall consist of dropping the
possibilities of exaggerated swinging should specified weight one time without failure of
335
Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. E 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–13 Edition)
the system being tested. A new system shall SAMPLE FALL PROTECTION PLANS
be used for each test.
(5) The test weight for each test shall be Fall Protection Plan For Precast/Prestress
Concrete Structures
hoisted exactly 4 feet (1.2 m above its ‘‘at
rest’’ position), and shall be dropped so as to This Fall Protection Plan is specific for
permit a vertical free fall of 4 feet (1.2 m). the following project:
(6) The test is failed whenever any break- Location of Job lllllllllllllll
age or slippage occurs which permits the Erecting Company lllllllllllll
weight to fall free of the system. Date Plan Prepared or Modified llllll
(7) Following the test, the system need not Plan Prepared By llllllllllllll
be capable of further operation; however, all Plan Approved By llllllllllllll
such incapacities shall be readily apparent. Plan Supervised By lllllllllllll
The following Fall Protection Plan is a
II. Inspection Considerations. As required in
sample program prepared for the prevention
§ 1926.502 (e)(5), positioning device systems of injuries associated with falls. A Fall Pro-
must be regularly inspected. Any component tection Plan must be developed and evalu-
with any significant defect, such as cuts, ated on a site by site basis. It is rec-
tears, abrasions, mold, or undue stretching; ommended that erectors discuss the written
alterations or additions which might affect Fall Protection Plan with their OSHA Area
its efficiency; damage due to deterioration; Office prior to going on a jobsite.
contact with fire, acids, or other corrosives;
distorted hooks or faulty hook springs; I. STATEMENT OF COMPANY POLICY
tongues unfitted to the shoulder of buckles; (Company Name) is dedicated to the pro-
loose or damaged mountings; non-func- tection of its employees from on-the-job in-
tioning parts; or wearing or internal deterio- juries. All employees of (Company Name)
ration in the ropes must be withdrawn from have the responsibility to work safely on the
service immediately, and should be tagged or job. The purpose of this plan is: (a) To sup-
marked as unusable, or destroyed. plement our standard safety policy by pro-
viding safety standards specifically designed
APPENDIX E TO SUBPART M OF PART to cover fall protection on this job and; (b) to
1926—SAMPLE FALL PROTECTION PLAN ensure that each employee is trained and
made aware of the safety provisions which
Non-Mandatory Guidelines for Complying With are to be implemented by this plan prior to
§ 1926.502(k) the start of erection.
This Fall Protection Plan addresses the
Employers engaged in leading edge work, use of other than conventional fall protec-
precast concrete construction work and resi- tion at a number of areas on the project, as
dential construction work who can dem- well as identifying specific activities that re-
onstrate that it is infeasible or creates a quire non-conventional means of fall protec-
greater hazard to use conventional fall pro- tion. These areas include:
tection systems must develop and follow a a. Connecting activity (point of erection).
fall protection plan. Below are sample fall b. Leading edge work.
protection plans developed for precast con- c. Unprotected sides or edge.
crete construction and residential work that d. Grouting.
could be tailored to be site specific for other This plan is designed to enable employers
precast concrete or residential jobsite. This and employees to recognize the fall hazards
sample plan can be modified to be used for on this job and to establish the procedures
that are to be followed in order to prevent
other work involving leading edge work. The
falls to lower levels or through holes and
sample plan outlines the elements that must
openings in walking/working surfaces. Each
be addressed in any fall protection plan. The employee will be trained in these procedures
reasons outlined in this sample fall protec- and strictly adhere to them except when
tion plan are for illustrative purposes only doing so would expose the employee to a
and are not necessarily a valid, acceptable greater hazard. If, in the employee’s opinion,
rationale (unless the conditions at the job this is the case, the employee is to notify the
site are the same as those covered by these foreman of the concern and the concern ad-
sample plans) for not using conventional fall dressed before proceeding.
protection systems for a particular precast Safety policy and procedure on any one
concrete or residential construction work- project cannot be administered, imple-
site. However, the sample plans provide guid- mented, monitored and enforced by any one
ance to employers on the type of information individual. The total objective of a safe, ac-
that is required to be discussed in fall pro- cident free work environment can only be ac-
tection plans. complished by a dedicated, concerted effort
by every individual involved with the project
from management down to the last em-
ployee. Each employee must understand
336
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. E
their value to the company; the costs of acci- Only individuals with the appropriate experi-
dents, both monetary, physical, and emo- ence, skills, and training will be authorized
tional; the objective of the safety policy and as designated erectors. All employees that
procedures; the safety rules that apply to the will be working as designated erectors under
safety policy and procedures; and what their the safety monitoring system shall have
individual role is in administering, imple- been trained and instructed in the following
menting, monitoring, and compliance of areas:
their safety policy and procedures. This al- 1. Recognition of the fall hazards in the
lows for a more personal approach to compli- work area (at the leading edge and when
ance through planning, training, under- making initial connections—point of erec-
standing and cooperative effort, rather than tion).
by strict enforcement. If for any reason an 2. Avoidance of fall hazards using estab-
unsafe act persists, strict enforcement will lished work practices which have been made
be implemented. known to the employees.
It is the responsibility of (name of com- 3. Recognition of unsafe practices or work-
petent person) to implement this Fall Pro- ing conditions that could lead to a fall, such
tection Plan. (Name of Competent Person) is as windy conditions.
responsible for continual observational safe- 4. The function, use, and operation of safe-
ty checks of their work operations and to en- ty monitoring systems, guardrail systems,
force the safety policy and procedures. The body belt/harness systems, control zones and
foreman also is responsible to correct any other protection to be used.
unsafe acts or conditions immediately. It is 5. The correct procedure for erecting,
the responsibility of the employee to under- maintaining, disassembling and inspecting
stand and adhere to the procedures of this the system(s) to be used.
plan and to follow the instructions of the 6. Knowledge of construction sequence or
foreman. It is also the responsibility of the the erection plan.
employee to bring to management’s atten- A conference will take place prior to start-
tion any unsafe or hazardous conditions or ing work involving all members of the erec-
acts that may cause injury to either them- tion crew, crane crew and supervisors of any
selves or any other employees. Any changes other concerned contractors. This conference
to this Fall Protection Plan must be ap- will be conducted by the precast concrete
proved by (name of Qualified Person). erection supervisor in charge of the project.
During the pre-work conference, erection
II. FALL PROTECTION SYSTEMS TO BE USED ON procedures and sequences pertinent to this
THIS PROJECT job will be thoroughly discussed and safety
Where conventional fall protection is in- practices to be used throughout the project
feasible or creates a greater hazard at the will be specified. Further, all personnel will
leading edge and during initial connecting be informed that the controlled access zones
activity, we plan to do this work using a are off limits to all personnel other than
safety monitoring system and expose only a those designated erectors specifically
minimum number of employees for the time trained to work in that area.
necessary to actually accomplish the job.
Safety Monitoring System
The maximum number of workers to be mon-
itored by one safety monitor is six (6). We A safety monitoring system means a fall
are designating the following trained em- protection system in which a competent per-
ployees as designated erectors and they are son is responsible for recognizing and warn-
permitted to enter the controlled access ing employees of fall hazards. The duties of
zones and work without the use of conven- the safety monitor are to:
tional fall protection. 1. Warn by voice when approaching the
Safety monitor: open edge in an unsafe manner.
Designated erector: 2. Warn by voice if there is a dangerous sit-
Designated erector: uation developing which cannot be seen by
another person involved with product place-
Designated erector:
ment, such as a member getting out of con-
Designated erector:
trol.
Designated erector:
3. Make the designated erectors aware they
Designated erector: are in a dangerous area.
The safety monitor shall be identified by 4. Be competent in recognizing fall haz-
wearing an orange hard hat. The designated ards.
erectors will be identified by one of the fol- 5. Warn employees when they appear to be
lowing methods: unaware of a fall hazard or are acting in an
1. They will wear a blue colored arm band, unsafe manner.
or 6. Be on the same walking/working surface
2. They will wear a blue colored hard hat, as the monitored employees and within vis-
or ual sighting distance of the monitored em-
3. They will wear a blue colored vest. ployees.
337
7. Be close enough to communicate orally ers will not be removed without the approval
with the employees. of the erection foreman.
8. Not allow other responsibilities to en- Precast concrete column erection through
cumber monitoring. If the safety monitor be- the existing deck requires that many holes
comes too encumbered with other respon- be provided through this deck. These are to
sibilities, the monitor shall (1) stop the erec- be covered and protected. Except for the
tion process; and (2) turn over other respon- opening being currently used to erect a col-
sibilities to a designated erector; or (3) turn umn, all opening protection is to be left un-
over the safety monitoring function to an- disturbed. The opening being uncovered to
other designated, competent person. The erect a column will become part of the point
safety monitoring system shall not be used of erection and will be addressed as part of
when the wind is strong enough to cause this Fall Protection Plan. This uncovering is
loads with large surface areas to swing out of to be done at the erection foreman’s direc-
radius, or result in loss of control of the tion and will only occur immediately prior
load, or when weather conditions cause the to ‘‘feeding’’ the column through the open-
walking-working surfaces to become icy or ing. Once the end of the column is through
slippery. the slab opening, there will no longer exist a
fall hazard at this location.
Control Zone System
III. IMPLEMENTATION OF FALL PROTECTION
A controlled access zone means an area PLAN
designated and clearly marked, in which
leading edge work may take place without The structure being erected is a multistory
the use of guardrail, safety net or personal total precast concrete building consisting of
fall arrest systems to protect the employees columns, beams, wall panels and hollow core
in the area. Control zone systems shall com- slabs and double tee floor and roof members.
ply with the following provisions: The following is a list of the products and
1. When used to control access to areas erection situations on this job:
where leading edge and other operations are
Columns
taking place the controlled access zone shall
be defined by a control line or by any other For columns 10 ft to 36 ft long, employees
means that restricts access. disconnecting crane hooks from columns will
When control lines are used, they shall be work from a ladder and wear a body belt/har-
erected not less than 6 feet (l.8 m) nor more ness with lanyard and be tied off when both
than 60 feet (18 m) or half the length of the hands are needed to disconnect. For tying
member being erected, whichever is less, off, a vertical lifeline will be connected to
from the leading edge. the lifting eye at the top of the column,
2. The control line shall extend along the prior to lifting, to be used with a manually
entire length of the unprotected or leading operated or mobile rope grab. For columns
edge and shall be approximately parallel to too high for the use of a ladder, 36 ft and
the unprotected or leading edge. higher, an added cable will be used to reduce
3. The control line shall be connected on the height of the disconnecting point so that
each side to a guardrail system or wall. a ladder can be used. This cable will be left
4. Control lines shall consist of ropes, in place until a point in erection that it can
wires, tapes, or equivalent materials, and be removed safely. In some cases, columns
supporting stanchions as follows: will be unhooked from the crane by using an
5. Each line shall be flagged or otherwise erection tube or shackle with a pull pin
clearly marked at not more than 6-foot (1.8 which is released from the ground after the
m) intervals with high- visibility material. column is stabilized.
6. Each line shall be rigged and supported The column will be adequately connected
in such a way that its lowest point (includ- and/or braced to safely support the weight of
ing sag) is not less than 39 inches (1 m) from a ladder with an employee on it.
the walking/working surface and its highest
point is not more than 45 inches (1.3 m) from Inverted Tee Beams
the walking/working surface. Employees erecting inverted tee beams, at
7. Each line shall have a minimum break- a height of 6 to 40 ft, will erect the beam,
ing strength of 200 pounds (.88 kN). make initial connections, and final align-
ment from a ladder. If the employee needs to
Holes
reach over the side of the beam to bar or
All openings greater than 12 in.×12 in. will make an adjustment to the alignment of the
have perimeter guarding or covering. All beam, they will mount the beam and be tied
predetermined holes will have the plywood off to the lifting device in the beam after en-
covers made in the precasters’ yard and suring the load has been stabilized on its
shipped with the member to the jobsite. bearing. To disconnect the crane from the
Prior to cutting holes on the job, proper pro- beam an employee will stand a ladder
tection for the hole must be provided to pro- against the beam. Because the use of ladders
tect the workers. Perimeter guarding or cov- is not practical at heights above 40 ft, beams
338
will be initially placed with the use of tag under the control of the safety monitor for
lines and their final alignment made by a fall protection and are directed to stay a
person on a manlift or similar employee po- minimum of six (6) ft from the edge. In the
sitioning systems. event a designated erector must move from
one end of a member, which has just been
Spandrel Beams placed at the leading edge, they must first
Spandrel beams at the exterior of the move away from the leading edge a min-
building will be aligned as closely as possible imum of six (6) ft and then progress to the
with the use of tag lines with the final place- other end while maintaining the minimum
ment of the spandrel beam made from a lad- distance of six (6) ft at all times.
der at the open end of the structure. A ladder Erection of double tees, where conditions
will be used to make the initial connections require bearing of one end into a closed
and a ladder will be used to disconnect the pocket and the other end on a beam ledge,
crane. The other end of the beam will be restricting the tee legs from going directly
placed by the designated erector from the into the pockets, require special consider-
double tee deck under the observation of the ations. The tee legs that are to bear in the
safety monitor. closed pocket must hang lower than those at
The beams will be adequately connected the beam bearing. The double tee will be
and/or braced to safely support the weight of ‘‘two-lined’’ in order to elevate one end high-
er than the other to allow for the low end to
a ladder with an employee on it.
be ducked into the closed pocket using the
Floor and Roof Members following procedure.
The double tee will be rigged with a stand-
During installation of the precast concrete ard four-way spreader off of the main load
floor and/or roof members, the work deck line. An additional choker will be attached
continuously increases in area as more and to the married point of the two-legged
more units are being erected and positioned. spreader at the end of the tee that is to be
Thus, the unprotected floor/roof perimeter is elevated. The double tee will be hoisted with
constantly modified with the leading edge the main load line and swung into a position
changing location as each member is in- as close as possible to the tee’s final bearing
stalled. The fall protection for workers at elevation. When the tee is in this position
the leading edge shall be assured by properly and stabilized, the whip line load block will
constructed and maintained control zone be lowered to just above the tee deck. At this
lines not more than 60 ft away from the lead- time, two erectors will walk out on the sus-
ing edge supplemented by a safety moni- pended tee deck at midspan of the tee mem-
toring system to ensure the safety of all des- ber and pull the load block to the end of the
ignated erectors working within the area de- tee to be elevated and attach the additional
fined by the control zone lines. choker to the load block. The possibility of
The hollow core slabs erected on the ma- entanglement with the crane lines and other
sonry portion of the building will be erected obstacles during this two lining process
and grouted using the safety monitoring sys- while raising and lowering the crane block
tem. Grout will be placed in the space be- on that second line could be hazardous to an
tween the end of the slab and face shell of encumbered employee. Therefore, the des-
the concrete masonry by dumping from a ignated erectors will not tie off during any
wheelbarrow. The grout in the keyways be- part of this process. While the designated
tween the slabs will be dumped from a wheel- erectors are on the double tee, the safety
barrow and then spread with long handled monitoring system will be used. After at-
tools, allowing the worker to stand erect fac- taching the choker, the two erectors then
ing toward the unprotected edge and back step back on the previously erected tee deck
from any work deck edge. and signal the crane operator to hoist the
Whenever possible, the designated erectors load with the whip line to the elevation that
will approach the incoming member at the will allow for enough clearance to let the low
leading edge only after it is below waist end tee legs slide into the pockets when the
height so that the member itself provides main load line is lowered. The erector, who
protection against falls. is handling the lowered end of the tee at the
Except for the situations described below, closed pocket bearing, will step out on the
when the arriving floor or roof member is suspended tee. An erection bar will then be
within 2 to 3 inches of its final position, the placed between the end of the tee leg and the
designated erectors can then proceed to their inside face of the pocketed spandrel member.
position of erection at each end of the mem- The tee is barred away from the pocketed
ber under the control of the safety monitor. member to reduce the friction and lateral
Crane hooks will be unhooked from double force against the pocketed member. As the
tee members by designated erectors under tee is being lowered, the other erector re-
the direction and supervision of the safety mains on the tee which was previously erect-
monitor. ed to handle the other end. At this point the
Designated erectors, while waiting for the tee is slowly lowered by the crane to a point
next floor or roof member, will be constantly where the tee legs can freely slide into the
339
pockets. The erector working the lowered IV. CONVENTIONAL FALL PROTECTION CONSID-
end of the tee must keep pressure on the bar ERED FOR THE POINT OF ERECTION OR LEAD-
between the tee and the face of the pocketed ING EDGE ERECTION OPERATIONS
spandrel member to very gradually let the
A. Personal Fall Arrest Systems
tee legs slide into the pocket to its proper
bearing dimension. The tee is then slowly In this particular erection sequence and
lowered into its final erected position. procedure, personal fall arrest systems re-
The designated erector should be allowed quiring body belt/harness systems, lifelines
onto the suspended double tee, otherwise and lanyards will not reduce possible hazards
there is no control over the horizontal move- to workers and will create offsetting hazards
ment of the double tee and this movement during their usage at the leading edge of pre-
cast/prestressed concrete construction.
could knock the spandrel off of its bearing or
Leading edge erection and initial connec-
the column out of plumb. The control nections are conducted by employees who are
essary to prevent hitting the spandrel can specifically trained to do this type of work
only be done safely from the top of the dou- and are trained to recognize the fall hazards.
ble tee being erected. The nature of such work normally exposes
Loadbearing Wall Panels: The erection of the employee to the fall hazard for a short
the loadbearing wall panels on the elevated period of time and installation of fall protec-
decks requires the use of a safety monitor tion systems for a short duration is not fea-
and a controlled access zone that is a min- sible because it exposes the installers of the
imum of 25 ft and a maximum of 1⁄2 the system to the same fall hazard, but for a
length of the wall panels away from the un- longer period of time.
protected edge, so that designated erectors 1. It is necessary that the employee be able
can move freely and unencumbered when re- to move freely without encumbrance in order
ceiving the panels. Bracing, if required for to guide the sections of precast concrete into
their final position without having lifelines
stability, will be installed by ladder. After
attached which will restrict the employee’s
the braces are secured, the crane will be dis-
ability to move about at the point of erec-
connected from the wall by using a ladder. tion.
The wall to wall connections will also be per- 2. A typical procedure requires 2 or more
formed from a ladder. workers to maneuver around each other as a
Non-Loadbearing Panels (Cladding): The concrete member is positioned to fit into the
locating of survey lines, panel layout and structure. If they are each attached to a life-
other installation prerequisites (prewelding, line, part of their attention must be diverted
etc.) for non-loadbearing panels (cladding) from their main task of positioning a mem-
will not commence until floor perimeter and ber weighing several tons to the task of
floor openings have been protected. In some avoiding entanglements of their lifelines or
areas, it is necessary because of panel con- avoiding tripping over lanyards. Therefore, if
figuration to remove the perimeter protec- these workers are attached to lanyards,
tion as the cladding is being installed. Re- more fall potential would result than from
moval of perimeter protection will be per- not using such a device.
In this specific erection sequence and pro-
formed on a bay to bay basis, just ahead of
cedure, retractable lifelines do not solve the
cladding erection to minimize temporarily
problem of two workers becoming tangled. In
unprotected floor edges. Those workers with- fact, such a tangle could prevent the lifeline
in 6 ft of the edge, receiving and positioning from retracting as the worker moved, thus
the cladding when the perimeter protection potentially exposing the worker to a fall
is removed shall be tied off. greater than 6 ft. Also, a worker crossing
over the lifeline of another worker can cre-
Detailing ate a hazard because the movement of one
Employees exposed to falls of six (6) feet or person can unbalance the other. In the event
more to lower levels, who are not actively of a fall by one person there is a likelihood
engaged in leading edge work or connecting that the other person will be caused to fall
as well. In addition, if contamination such as
activity, such as welding, bolting, cutting,
grout (during hollow core grouting) enters
bracing, guying, patching, painting or other
the retractable housing it can cause exces-
operations, and who are working less than
sive wear and damage to the device and
six (6) ft from an unprotected edge will be could clog the retracting mechanism as the
tied off at all times or guardrails will be in- lanyard is dragged across the deck. Obstruct-
stalled. Employees engaged in these activi- ing the cable orifice can defeat the device’s
ties but who are more than six (6) ft from an shock absorbing function, produce cable
unprotected edge as defined by the control slack and damage, and adversely affect cable
zone lines, do not require fall protection but extraction and retraction.
a warning line or control lines must be erect- 3. Employees tied to a lifeline can be
ed to remind employees they are approach- trapped and crushed by moving structural
ing an area where fall protection is required. members if the employee becomes restrained
340
by the lanyard or retractable lifeline and ation of erectors’ position is done before the
cannot get out of the path of the moving members are cast. Any hole or other attach-
load. ment must be approved by the engineer who
The sudden movement of a precast con- designed the member. It is possible that
crete member being raised by a crane can be some design restrictions will not allow a
caused by a number of factors. When this member to be weakened by an additional
happens, a connector may immediately have hole; however, it is anticipated that such sit-
to move a considerable distance to avoid in- uations would be the exception, not the rule.
jury. If a tied off body belt/harness is being Attachment points, other than on the deck
used, the connector could be trapped. There- surface, will require removal and/or
fore, there is a greater risk of injury if the patching. In order to remove and/or patch
connector is tied to the structure for this these points, requires the employee to be ex-
specific erection sequence and procedure. posed to an additional fall hazard at an un-
When necessary to move away from a re- protected perimeter. The fact that attach-
tractable device, the worker cannot move at ment points could be available anywhere on
a rate greater than the device locking speed the structure does not eliminate the hazards
typically 3.5 to 4.5 ft/sec. When moving to- of using these points for tying off as dis-
ward the device it is necessary to move at a cussed above. A logical point for tying off on
rate which does not permit cable slack to double tees would be using the lifting loops,
build up. This slack may cause cable retrac- except that they must be cut off to eliminate
tion acceleration and cause a worker to lose a tripping hazard at an appropriate time.
their balance by applying a higher than nor- 5. Providing attachment at a point above
mal jerking force on the body when the cable the walking/working surface would also cre-
suddenly becomes taut after building up mo- ate fall exposures for employees installing
mentum. This slack can also cause damage their devices. Final positioning of a precast
to the internal spring-loaded drum, uneven concrete member requires it to be moved in
coiling of cable on the drum, and possible such a way that it must pass through the
cable damage. area that would be occupied by the lifeline
The factors causing sudden movements for and the lanyards attached to the point
this location include: above. Resulting entanglements of lifelines
and lanyards on a moving member could pull
(a) Cranes employees from the work surface. Also, the
structure is being created and, in most cases,
(1) Operator error. there is no structure above the members
(2) Site conditions (soft or unstable being placed.
ground). (a) Temporary structural supports, in-
(3) Mechanical failure. stalled to provide attaching points for life-
(4) Structural failure. lines limit the space which is essential for
(5) Rigging failure. orderly positioning, alignment and place-
(6) Crane signal/radio communication fail- ment of the precast concrete members. To
ure. keep the lanyards a reasonable and manage-
(b) Weather Conditions able length, lifeline supports would nec-
essarily need to be in proximity to the posi-
(1) Wind (strong wind/sudden gusting)—par- tioning process. A sudden shift of the precast
ticularly a problem with the large surface concrete member being positioned because of
areas of precast concrete members. wind pressure or crane movement could
(2) Snow/rain (visibility). make it strike the temporary supporting
(3) Fog (visibility). structure, moving it suddenly and causing
(4) Cold—causing slowed reactions or me- tied off employees to fall.
chanical problems. (b) The time in manhours which would be
(c) Structure/Product Conditions. expended in placing and maintaining tem-
(1) Lifting Eye failure. porary structural supports for lifeline at-
(2) Bearing failure or slippage. taching points could exceed the expended
(3) Structure shifting. manhours involved in placing the precast
(4) Bracing failure. concrete members. No protection could be
(5) Product failure. provided for the employees erecting the tem-
(d) Human Error. porary structural supports and these sup-
(1) Incorrect tag line procedure. ports would have to be moved for each suc-
(2) Tag line hang-up. cessive step in the construction process, thus
(3) Incorrect or misunderstood crane sig- greatly increasing the employee’s exposure
nals. to the fall hazard.
(4) Misjudged elevation of member. (c) The use of a cable strung horizontally
(5) Misjudged speed of member. between two columns to provide tie off lines
(6) Misjudged angle of member. for erecting or walking a beam for con-
4. Anchorages or special attachment points necting work is not feasible and creates a
could be cast into the precast concrete mem- greater hazard on this multi-story building
bers if sufficient preplanning and consider- for the following reasons:
341
(1) If a connector is to use such a line, it ty block/retractable lifeline anchored to the
must be installed between the two columns. walking-working surface; and the potential
To perform this installation requires an for swing hazards is increased.
erector to have more fall exposure time at- Manufacturers also require that workers
taching the cable to the columns than would not work at a level where the point of
be spent to make the beam to column con- snaphook attachment to the body harness is
nection itself. above the device because this will increase
(2) If such a line is to be installed so that the free fall distance and the deceleration
an erector can walk along a beam, it must be distance and will cause higher forces on the
overhead or below him. For example, if a body in the event of an accidental fall.
connector must walk along a 24 in. wide Manufacturers recommend an anchorage
beam, the presence of a line next to the con- for the retractable lifeline which is immov-
nector at waist level, attached directly to ably fixed in space and is independent of the
the columns, would prevent the connector user’s support systems. A moveable anchor-
from centering their weight over the beam age is one which can be moved around (such
and balancing themselves. Installing the line as equipment or wheeled vehicles) or which
above the connector might be possible on the can deflect substantially under shock load-
first level of a two-story column; however, ing (such as a horizontal cable or very flexi-
the column may extend only a few feet above ble beam). In the case of a very flexible an-
the floor level at the second level or be flush chorage, a shock load applied to the anchor-
with the floor level. Attaching the line to age during fall arrest can cause oscillation of
the side of the beam could be a solution; the flexible anchorage such that the retract-
however, it would require the connector to
able brake mechanism may undergo one or
attach the lanyard below foot level which
more cycles of locking/unlocking/locking
would most likely extend a fall farther than
(ratchet effect) until the anchorage deflec-
6 ft.
tion is dampened. Therefore, use of a move-
(3) When lines are strung over every beam,
able anchorage involves critical engineering
it becomes more and more difficult for the
and safety factors and should only be consid-
crane operator to lower a precast concrete
ered after fixed anchorage has been deter-
member into position without the member
mined to be not feasible.
becoming fouled. Should the member become
entangled, it could easily dislodge the line Horizontal cables used as an anchorage
from a column. If a worker is tied to it at present an additional hazard due to amplifi-
the time, a fall could be caused. cation of the horizontal component of max-
6. The ANSI A10.14–1991 American National imum arrest force (of a fall) transmitted to
Standard for Construction and Demolition the points where the horizontal cable is at-
Operations—Requirements for Safety Belts, tached to the structure. This amplification
Harnesses, Lanyards and Lifelines for Con- is due to the angle of sag of a horizontal
struction and Demolition Use, states that cable and is most severe for small angles of
the anchor point of a lanyard or deceleration sag. For a cable sag angle of 2 degrees the
device should, if possible, be located above horizontal force on the points of cable at-
the wearer’s belt or harness attachment. tachment can be amplified by a factor of 15.
ANSI A10.14 also states that a suitable an- It is also necessary to install the retract-
chorage point is one which is located as high able device vertically overhead to minimize
as possible to prevent contact with an ob- swing falls. If an object is in the worker’s
struction below should the worker fall. Most swing path (or that of the cable) hazardous
manufacturers also warn in the user’s hand- situations exist: (1) due to the swing, hori-
book that the safety block/retractable life- zontal speed of the user may be high enough
line must be positioned above the D-ring to cause injury when an obstacle in the
(above the work space of the intended user) swing fall path is struck by either the user
and OSHA recommends that fall arrest and or the cable; (2) the total vertical fall dis-
restraint equipment be used in accordance tance of the user may be much greater than
with the manufacturer’s instructions. if the user had fallen only vertically without
Attachment of a retractable device to a a swing fall path.
horizontal cable near floor level or using the With retractable lines, overconfidence may
inserts in the floor or roof members may re- cause the worker to engage in inappropriate
sult in increased free fall due to the dorsal behavior, such as approaching the perimeter
D-ring of the full-body harness riding higher of a floor or roof at a distance appreciably
than the attachment point of the snaphook greater than the shortest distance between
to the cable or insert (e.g., 6 foot tall worker the anchorage point and the leading edge.
with a dorsal D-ring at 5 feet above the floor Though the retractable lifeline may arrest a
or surface, reduces the working length to worker’s fall before he or she has fallen a few
only one foot, by placing the anchorage five feet, the lifeline may drag along the edge of
feet away from the fall hazard). In addition, the floor or beam and swing the worker like
impact loads may exceed maximum fall ar- a pendulum until the line has moved to a po-
rest forces (MAF) because the fall arrest D- sition where the distance between the an-
ring would be 4 to 5 feet higher than the safe- chorage point and floor edge is the shortest
342
distance between those two points. Accom- time necessary to position and secure the
panying this pendulum swing is a lowering of concrete member.
the worker, with the attendant danger that 4. Use of safety nets on exposed perimeter
he or she may violently impact the floor or wall openings and opensided floors, causes
some obstruction below. attachment points to be left in architectural
The risk of a cable breaking is increased if concrete which must be patched and filled
a lifeline is dragged sideways across the with matching material after the net sup-
rough surface or edge of a concrete member porting hardware is removed. In order to
at the same moment that the lifeline is patch these openings, additional numbers of
being subjected to a maximum impact load- employees must be suspended by swing
ing during a fall. The typical 3⁄16 in. cable in stages, boatswain chairs or other devices,
a retractable lifeline has a breaking strength thereby increasing the amount of fall expo-
of from 3000 to 3700 lbs. sure time to employees.
7. The competent person, who can take 5. Installed safety nets pose an additional
into account the specialized operations being hazard at the perimeter of the erected struc-
performed on this project, should determine ture where limited space is available in
when and where a designated erector cannot which members can be turned after being
use a personal fall arrest system. lifted from the ground by the crane. There
B. Safety Net Systems would be a high probability that the member
being lifted could become entangled in net
The nature of this particular precast con- hardware, cables, etc.
crete erection worksite precludes the safe 6. The use of safety nets where structural
use of safety nets where point of erection or wall panels are being erected would prevent
leading edge work must take place. movement of panels to point of installation.
1. To install safety nets in the interior To be effective, nets would necessarily have
high bay of the single story portion of the to provide protection across the area where
building poses rigging attachment problems. structural supporting wall panels would be
Structural members do not exist to which set and plumbed before roof units could be
supporting devices for nets can be attached placed.
in the area where protection is required. As 7. Use of a tower crane for the erection of
the erection operation advances, the loca- the high rise portion of the structure poses a
tion of point of erection or leading edge work particular hazard in that the crane operator
changes constantly as each member is at- cannot see or judge the proximity of the load
tached to the structure. Due to this constant in relation to the structure or nets. If the
change it is not feasible to set net sections signaler is looking through nets and sup-
and build separate structures to support the porting structural devices while giving in-
nets. structions to the crane operator, it is not
2. The nature of the erection process for possible to judge precise relationships be-
the precast concrete members is such that tween the load and the structure itself or to
an installed net would protect workers as nets and supporting structural devices. This
they position and secure only one structural could cause the load to become entangled in
member. After each member is stabilized the the net or hit the structure causing poten-
net would have to be moved to a new loca- tial damage.
tion (this could mean a move of 8 to 10 ft or
the possibility of a move to a different level C. Guardrail Systems
or area of the structure) to protect workers
placing the next piece in the construction se- On this particular worksite, guardrails,
quence. The result would be the installation barricades, ropes, cables or other perimeter
and dismantling of safety nets repeatedly guarding devices or methods on the erection
throughout the normal work day. As the floor will pose problems to safe erection pro-
time necessary to install a net, test, and re- cedures. Typically, a floor or roof is erected
move it is significantly greater than the by placing 4 to 10 ft wide structural members
time necessary to position and secure a pre- next to one another and welding or grouting
cast concrete member, the exposure time for them together. The perimeter of a floor and
the worker installing the safety net would be roof changes each time a new member is
far longer than for the workers whom the net placed into position. It is unreasonable and
is intended to protect. The time exposure re- virtually impossible to erect guardrails and
peats itself each time the nets and sup- toe boards at the ever changing leading edge
porting hardware must be moved laterally or of a floor or roof.
upward to provide protection at the point of 1. To position a member safely it is nec-
erection or leading edge. essary to remove all obstructions extending
3. Strict interpretation of § 1926.502(c) re- above the floor level near the point of erec-
quires that operations shall not be under- tion. Such a procedure allows workers to
taken until the net is in place and has been swing a new member across the erected sur-
tested. With the point of erection constantly face as necessary to position it properly
changing, the time necessary to install and without worrying about knocking material
test a safety net significantly exceeds the off of this surface.
343
Hollow core slab erection on the masonry area that could be erected more safely by the
wall requires installation of the perimeter use of these fall protection measures, the
protection where the masonry wall has to be foreman should be notified.
constructed. This means the guardrail is in- A. Scaffolds are not used because:
stalled then subsequently removed to con- 1. The leading edge of the building is con-
tinue the masonry construction. The erector stantly changing and the scaffolding would
will be exposed to a fall hazard for a longer have to be moved at very frequent intervals.
period of time while installing and removing Employees erecting and dismantling the
perimeter protection than while erecting the scaffolding would be exposed to fall hazards
slabs. for a greater length of time than they would
In hollow core work, as in other precast by merely erecting the precast concrete
concrete erection, others are not typically member.
on the work deck until the precast concrete 2. A scaffold tower could interfere with the
erection is complete. The deck is not com- safe swinging of a load by the crane.
plete until the leveling, aligning, and grout- 3. Power lines, terrain and site do not
ing of the joints is done. It is normal prac- allow for the safe use of scaffolding.
tice to keep others off the deck until at least B. Vehicle mounted platforms are not used
the next day after the installation is com- because:
plete to allow the grout to harden. 1. A vehicle mounted platform will not
2. There is no permanent boundary until reach areas on the deck that are erected over
all structural members have been placed in other levels.
the floor or roof. At the leading edge, work- 2. The leading edge of the building is usu-
ers are operating at the temporary edge of ally over a lower level of the building and
the structure as they work to position the this lower level will not support the weight
next member in the sequence. Compliance of a vehicle mounted platform.
with the standard would require a guardrail 3. A vehicle mounted platform could inter-
and toe board be installed along this edge. fere with the safe swinging of a load by the
However, the presence of such a device would crane, either by the crane swinging the load
prevent a new member from being swung over or into the equipment.
over the erected surface low enough to allow 4. Power lines and surrounding site work
workers to control it safely during the posi- do not allow for the safe use of a vehicle
tioning process. Further, these employees mounted platform.
would have to work through the guardrail to C. Crane suspended personnel platforms are
align the new member and connect it to the not used because:
structure. The guardrail would not protect 1. A second crane close enough to suspend
an employee who must lean through it to do any employee in the working and erecting
the necessary work, rather it would hinder area could interfere with the safe swinging of
the employee to such a degree that a greater a load by the crane hoisting the product to
hazard is created than if the guardrail were be erected.
absent. 2. Power lines and surrounding site work
3. Guardrail requirements pose a hazard at do not allow for the safe use of a second
the leading edge of installed floor or roof crane on the job.
sections by creating the possibility of em-
ployees being caught between guardrails and VI. ENFORCEMENT
suspended loads. The lack of a clear work
area in which to guide the suspended load Constant awareness of and respect for fall
into position for placement and welding of hazards, and compliance with all safety rules
members into the existing structure creates are considered conditions of employment.
still further hazards. The jobsite Superintendent, as well as indi-
4. Where erection processes require precast viduals in the Safety and Personnel Depart-
concrete stairways or openings to be in- ment, reserve the right to issue disciplinary
stalled as an integral part of the overall warnings to employees, up to and including
erection process, it must also be recognized termination, for failure to follow the guide-
that guardrails or handrails must not project lines of this program.
above the surface of the erection floor. Such
guardrails should be terminated at the level VII. ACCIDENT INVESTIGATIONS
of the erection floor to avoid placing haz- All accidents that result in injury to work-
ardous obstacles in the path of a member ers, regardless of their nature, shall be inves-
being positioned. tigated and reported. It is an integral part of
any safety program that documentation take
V. OTHER FALL PROTECTION MEASURES place as soon as possible so that the cause
CONSIDERED FOR THIS JOB
and means of prevention can be identified to
The following is a list and explanation of prevent a reoccurrence.
other fall protection measures available and In the event that an employee falls or
an explanation of limitations for use on this there is some other related, serious incident
particular jobsite. If during the course of occurring, this plan shall be reviewed to de-
erecting the building the employee sees an termine if additional practices, procedures,
344
or training need to be implemented to pre- In these cases, conventional fall protection
vent similar types of falls or incidents from systems may not be the safest choice for
occurring. builders. This plan is designed to enable em-
ployers and employees to recognize the fall
VIII. CHANGES TO PLAN hazards associated with this job and to es-
Any changes to the plan will be approved tablish the safest procedures that are to be
by (name of the qualified person). This plan followed in order to prevent falls to lower
shall be reviewed by a qualified person as the levels or through holes and openings in walk-
job progresses to determine if additional ing/working surfaces.
practices, procedures or training needs to be Each employee will be trained in these pro-
implemented by the competent person to im- cedures and will strictly adhere to them ex-
prove or provide additional fall protection. cept when doing so would expose the em-
Workers shall be notified and trained, if nec- ployee to a greater hazard. If, in the employ-
essary, in the new procedures. A copy of this ee’s opinion, this is the case, the employee is
plan and all approved changes shall be main- to notify the competent person of their con-
tained at the jobsite. cern and have the concern addressed before
proceeding.
Sample Fall Protection Plan for Residential It is the responsibility of (name of com-
Construction petent person) to implement this Fall Pro-
tection Plan. Continual observational safety
(INSERT COMPANY NAME) checks of work operations and the enforce-
This Fall Protection Plan Is Specific For ment of the safety policy and procedures
The Following Project: shall be regularly enforced. The crew super-
Location of Job lllllllllllllll visor or foreman (insert name) is responsible
Date Plan Prepared or Modified llllll for correcting any unsafe practices or condi-
Plan Prepared By llllllllllllll tions immediately.
Plan Approved By llllllllllllll It is the responsibility of the employer to
Plan Supervised By lllllllllllll ensure that all employees understand and
The following Fall Protection Plan is a adhere to the procedures of this plan and to
sample program prepared for the prevention follow the instructions of the crew super-
of injuries associated with falls. A Fall Pro- visor. It is also the responsibility of the em-
tection Plan must be developed and evalu- ployee to bring to management’s attention
ated on a site by site basis. It is rec- any unsafe or hazardous conditions or prac-
ommended that builders discuss the written tices that may cause injury to either them-
Fall Protection Plan with their OSHA Area selves or any other employees. Any changes
Office prior to going on a jobsite. to the Fall Protection Plan must be ap-
proved by (name of qualified person).
I. STATEMENT OF COMPANY POLICY
II. FALL PROTECTION SYSTEMS TO BE USED ON
(Your company name here) is dedicated to THIS JOB
the protection of its employees from on-the-
job injuries. All employees of (Your company Installation of roof trusses/rafters, exterior
name here) have the responsibility to work wall erection, roof sheathing, floor sheathing
safely on the job. The purpose of the plan is and joist/truss activities will be conducted
to supplement our existing safety and health by employees who are specifically trained to
program and to ensure that every employee do this type of work and are trained to rec-
who works for (Your company name here) ognize the fall hazards. The nature of such
recognizes workplace fall hazards and takes work normally exposes the employee to the
the appropriate measures to address those fall hazard for a short period of time. This
hazards. Plan details how (Your company name here)
This Fall Protection Plan addresses the will minimize these hazards.
use of conventional fall protection at a num-
Controlled Access Zones
ber of areas on the project, as well as identi-
fies specific activities that require non-con- When using the Plan to implement the fall
ventional means of fall protection. During protection options available, workers must
the construction of residential buildings be protected through limited access to high
under 48 feet in height, it is sometimes infea- hazard locations. Before any non-conven-
sible or it creates a greater hazard to use tional fall protection systems are used as
conventional fall protection systems at spe- part of the work plan, a controlled access
cific areas or for specific tasks. The areas or zone (CAZ) shall be clearly defined by the
tasks may include, but are not limited to: competent person as an area where a recog-
a. Setting and bracing of roof trusses and nized hazard exists. The demarcation of the
rafters; CAZ shall be communicated by the com-
b. Installation of floor sheathing and petent person in a recognized manner, either
joists; through signs, wires, tapes, ropes or chains.
c. Roof sheathing operations; and (Your company name here) shall take the
d. Erecting exterior walls. following steps to ensure that the CAZ is
345
clearly marked or controlled by the com- exposed to fall hazards while working from
petent person: the top plate installing trusses/rafters:
• All access to the CAZ must be restricted • Only the following trained workers will
to authorized entrants; be allowed to work on the top plate during
• All workers who are permitted in the roof truss or rafter installation:
CAZ shall be listed in the appropriate sec- llllllllllllllllllllllll
tions of the Plan (or be visibly identifiable llllllllllllllllllllllll
by the competent person) prior to implemen- llllllllllllllllllllllll
tation;
• Workers shall have no other duties to
• The competent person shall ensure that
perform during truss/rafter erection proce-
all protective elements of the CAZ be imple-
dures;
mented prior to the beginning of work.
• All trusses/rafters will be adequately
Installation Procedures for Roof Truss and braced before any worker can use the truss/
Rafter Erection rafter as a support;
• Workers will remain on the top plate
During the erection and bracing of roof using the previously stabilized truss/rafter as
trusses/rafters, conventional fall protection a support while other trusses/rafters are
may present a greater hazard to workers. On being erected;
this job, safety nets, guardrails and personal • Workers will leave the area of the se-
fall arrest systems will not provide adequate cured trusses only when it is necessary to se-
fall protection because the nets will cause cure another truss/rafter;
the walls to collapse, while there are no suit- • The first two trusses/rafters will be set
able attachment or anchorage points for from ladders leaning on side walls at points
guardrails or personal fall arrest systems. where the walls can support the weight of
On this job, requiring workers to use a lad- the ladder; and
der for the entire installation process will • A worker will climb onto the interior top
cause a greater hazard because the worker plate via a ladder to secure the peaks of the
must stand on the ladder with his back or first two trusses/rafters being set.
side to the front of the ladder. While erecting
The workers responsible for detaching
the truss or rafter the worker will need both
trusses from cranes and/or securing trusses
hands to maneuver the truss and therefore
at the peaks traditionally are positioned at
cannot hold onto the ladder. In addition, lad-
the peak of the trusses/rafters. There are
ders cannot be adequately protected from
also situations where workers securing
movement while trusses are being maneu-
rafters to ridge beams will be positioned on
vered into place. Many workers may experi-
top of the ridge beam.
ence additional fatigue because of the in-
(Your company name here) shall take the
crease in overhead work with heavy mate-
following steps to protect workers who are
rials, which can also lead to a greater haz-
exposed to fall hazards while securing truss-
ard.
es/rafters at the peak of the trusses/ridge
Exterior scaffolds cannot be utilized on
beam:
this job because the ground, after recent
• Only the following trained workers will
backfilling, cannot support the scaffolding.
be allowed to work at the peak during roof
In most cases, the erection and dismantling
truss or rafter installation:
of the scaffold would expose workers to a
greater fall hazard than erection of the llllllllllllllllllllllll
trusses/rafters. llllllllllllllllllllllll
On all walls eight feet or less, workers will llllllllllllllllllllllll
install interior scaffolds along the interior • Once truss or rafter installation begins,
wall below the location where the trusses/ workers not involved in that activity shall
rafters will be erected. ‘‘Sawhorse’’ scaffolds not stand or walk below or adjacent to the
constructed of 46 inch sawhorses and 2×10 roof opening or exterior walls in any area
planks will often allow workers to be ele- where they could be struck by falling ob-
vated high enough to allow for the erection jects;
of trusses and rafters without working on • Workers shall have no other duties than
the top plate of the wall. securing/bracing the trusses/ridge beam;
In structures that have walls higher than • Workers positioned at the peaks or in the
eight feet and where the use of scaffolds and webs of trusses or on top of the ridge beam
ladders would create a greater hazard, safe shall work from a stable position, either by
working procedures will be utilized when sitting on a ‘‘ridge seat’’ or other equivalent
working on the top plate and will be mon- surface that provides additional stability or
itored by the crew supervisor. During all by positioning themselves in previously sta-
stages of truss/rafter erection the stability of bilized trusses/rafters and leaning into and
the trusses/rafters will be ensured at all reaching through the trusses/rafters;
times. • Workers shall not remain on or in the
(Your company name here) shall take the peak/ridge any longer than necessary to safe-
following steps to protect workers who are ly complete the task.
346
Roof Sheathing Operations are installed. For roofs with pitches in ex-
cess of 9-in-12, slide guards will be installed
Workers typically install roof sheathing
at four-foot intervals.
after all trusses/rafters and any permanent
truss bracing is in place. Roof structures are • When wet weather (rain, snow, or sleet)
unstable until some sheathing is installed, so are present, roof sheathing operations shall
workers installing roof sheathing cannot be be suspended unless safe footing can be as-
protected from fall hazards by conventional sured for those workers installing sheathing.
fall protection systems until it is determined • When strong winds (above 40 miles per
that the roofing system can be used as an an- hour) are present, roof sheathing operations
chorage point. At that point, employees are to be suspended unless wind breakers are
shall be protected by a personal fall arrest erected.
system.
Trusses/rafters are subject to collapse if a Installation of Floor Joists and Sheathing
worker falls while attached to a single truss During the installation of floor sheathing/
with a belt/harness. Nets could also cause joists (leading edge construction), the fol-
collapse, and there is no place to attach lowing steps shall be taken to protect work-
guardrails. ers:
All workers will ensure that they have se- • Only the following trained workers will
cure footing before they attempt to walk on
be allowed to install floor joists or sheath-
the sheathing, including cleaning shoes/boots
ing:
of mud or other slip hazards.
To minimize the time workers must be ex- llllllllllllllllllllllll
posed to a fall hazard, materials will be llllllllllllllllllllllll
staged to allow for the quickest installation llllllllllllllllllllllll
of sheathing. • Materials for the operations shall be con-
(Your company name here) shall take the veniently staged to allow for easy access to
following steps to protect workers who are workers;
exposed to fall hazards while installing roof • The first floor joists or trusses will be
sheathing: rolled into position and secured either from
• Once roof sheathing installation begins, the ground, ladders or sawhorse scaffolds;
workers not involved in that activity shall • Each successive floor joist or truss will
not stand or walk below or adjacent to the be rolled into place and secured from a plat-
roof opening or exterior walls in any area form created from a sheet of plywood laid
where they could be struck by falling ob- over the previously secured floor joists or
jects; trusses;
• The competent person shall determine
• Except for the first row of sheathing
the limits of this area, which shall be clearly
which will be installed from ladders or the
communicated to workers prior to place-
ground, workers shall work from the estab-
ment of the first piece of roof sheathing;
lished deck; and
• The competent person may order work
on the roof to be suspended for brief periods • Any workers not assisting in the leading
as necessary to allow other workers to pass edge construction while leading edges still
through such areas when this would not cre- exist (e.g. cutting the decking for the install-
ate a greater hazard; ers) shall not be permitted within six feet of
• Only qualified workers shall install roof the leading edge under construction.
sheathing;
Erection of Exterior Walls
• The bottom row of roof sheathing may be
installed by workers standing in truss webs; During the construction and erection of ex-
• After the bottom row of roof sheathing is terior walls, employers shall take the fol-
installed, a slide guard extending the width lowing steps to protect workers:
of the roof shall be securely attached to the • Only the following trained workers will
roof. Slide guards are to be constructed of no be allowed to erect exterior walls:
less than nominal 4’’ height capable of lim-
llllllllllllllllllllllll
iting the uncontrolled slide of workers.
Workers should install the slide guard while llllllllllllllllllllllll
standing in truss webs and leaning over the llllllllllllllllllllllll
sheathing; • A painted line six feet from the perim-
• Additional rows of roof sheathing may be eter will be clearly marked prior to any wall
installed by workers positioned on pre- erection activities to warn of the approach-
viously installed rows of sheathing. A slide ing unprotected edge;
guard can be used to assist workers in re- • Materials for operations shall be conven-
taining their footing during successive iently staged to minimize fall hazards; and
sheathing operations; and • Workers constructing exterior walls
• Additional slide guards shall be securely shall complete as much cutting of materials
attached to the roof at intervals not to ex- and other preparation as possible away from
ceed 13 feet as successive rows of sheathing the edge of the deck.
347
III. ENFORCEMENT operation for the pilot and ground per-
Constant awareness of and respect for fall sonnel.
hazards, and compliance with all safety rules (c) Slings and tag lines. Load shall be
are considered conditions of employment. properly slung. Tag lines shall be of a
The crew supervisor or foreman, as well as length that will not permit their being
individuals in the Safety and Personnel De- drawn up into rotors. Pressed sleeve,
partment, reserve the right to issue discipli-
swedged eyes, or equivalent means
nary warnings to employees, up to and in-
cluding termination, for failure to follow the shall be used for all freely suspended
guidelines of this program. loads to prevent hand splices from
spinning open or cable clamps from
IV. ACCIDENT INVESTIGATIONS loosening.
All accidents that result in injury to work- (d) Cargo hooks. All electrically oper-
ers, regardless of their nature, shall be inves- ated cargo hooks shall have the elec-
tigated and reported. It is an integral part of trical activating device so designed and
any safety program that documentation take installed as to prevent inadvertent op-
place as soon as possible so that the cause
eration. In addition, these cargo hooks
and means of prevention can be identified to
prevent a reoccurrence. shall be equipped with an emergency
In the event that an employee falls or mechanical control for releasing the
there is some other related, serious incident load. The hooks shall be tested prior to
occurring, this plan shall be reviewed to de- each day’s operation to determine that
termine if additional practices, procedures, the release functions properly, both
or training need to be implemented to pre- electrically and mechanically.
vent similar types of falls or incidents from
(e) Personal protective equipment. (1)
occurring.
Personal protective equipment for em-
V. CHANGES TO PLAN ployees receiving the load shall consist
Any changes to the plan will be approved of complete eye protection and hard
by (name of the qualified person). This plan hats secured by chinstraps.
shall be reviewed by a qualified person as the (2) Loose-fitting clothing likely to
job progresses to determine if additional flap in the downwash, and thus be
practices, procedures or training needs to be snagged on hoist line, shall not be
implemented by the competent person to im- worn.
prove or provide additional fall protection.
(f) Loose gear and objects. Every prac-
Workers shall be notified and trained, if nec-
essary, in the new procedures. A copy of this tical precaution shall be taken to pro-
plan and all approved changes shall be main- vide for the protection of the employ-
tained at the jobsite. ees from flying objects in the rotor
downwash. All loose gear within 100
[59 FR 40730, Aug. 9, 1994]
feet of the place of lifting the load, de-
positing the load, and all other areas
Subpart N—Helicopters, Hoists, susceptible to rotor downwash shall be
Elevators, and Conveyors secured or removed.
(g) Housekeeping. Good housekeeping
AUTHORITY: Section 3704 of the Contract shall be maintained in all helicopter
Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (40 loading and unloading areas.
U.S.C. 3701); Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occu- (h) Operator responsibility. The heli-
pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 copter operator shall be responsible for
Order Nos. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR
size, weight, and manner in which
25059), or 9–83 (49 FR 35736), and 5–2007 (72 FR loads are connected to the helicopter.
31159). If, for any reason, the helicopter oper-
ator believes the lift cannot be made
§ 1926.550 [Reserved] safely, the lift shall not be made.
(i) Hooking and unhooking loads. When
§ 1926.551 Helicopters. employees are required to perform
(a) Helicopter regulations. Helicopter work under hovering craft, a safe
cranes shall be expected to comply means of access shall be provided for
with any applicable regulations of the employees to reach the hoist line hook
Federal Aviation Administration. and engage or disengage cargo slings.
(b) Briefing. Prior to each day’s oper- Employees shall not perform work
ation a briefing shall be conducted. under hovering craft except when nec-
This briefing shall set forth the plan of essary to hook or unhook loads.
348
(j) Static charge. Static charge on the structure, or allowed to foul on any
suspended load shall be dissipated with fixed structure.
a grounding device before ground per- (m) Visibility. When visibility is re-
sonnel touch the suspended load, or duced by dust or other conditions,
protective rubber gloves shall be worn ground personnel shall exercise special
by all ground personnel touching the caution to keep clear of main and sta-
suspended load. bilizing rotors. Precautions shall also
(k) Weight limitation. The weight of an be taken by the employer to eliminate
external load shall not exceed the man- as far as practical reduced visibility.
ufacturer’s rating. (n) Signal systems. Signal systems be-
tween aircrew and ground personnel
(l) Ground lines. Hoist wires or other
shall be understood and checked in ad-
gear, except for pulling lines or con- vance of hoisting the load. This applies
ductors that are allowed to ‘‘pay out’’ to either radio or hand signal systems.
from a container or roll off a reel, shall Hand signals shall be as shown in Fig-
not be attached to any fixed ground ure N–1.
349
(o) Approach distance. No unauthor- (p) Approaching helicopter. Whenever

ized person shall be allowed to ap- approaching or leaving a helicopter
proach within 50 feet of the helicopter with blades rotating, all employees
when the rotor blades are turning. shall remain in full view of the pilot
350
EC30OC91.015</GPH>
and keep in a crouched position. Em- inches; and three thirty-seconds inch
ployees shall avoid the area from the for diameters 11⁄4 to 11⁄2 inches.
cockpit or cabin rearward unless au- (4) Hoisting ropes shall be installed
thorized by the helicopter operator to in accordance with the wire rope manu-
work there. facturers’ recommendations.
(q) Personnel. Sufficient ground per- (5) The installation of live booms on
sonnel shall be provided when required hoists is prohibited.
for safe helicopter loading and unload- (6) The use of endless belt-type
ing operations. manlifts on construction shall be pro-
(r) Communications. There shall be hibited.
constant reliable communication be- (b) Material hoists. (1)(i) Operating
tween the pilot, and a designated em- rules shall be established and posted at
ployee of the ground crew who acts as the operator’s station of the hoist.
a signalman during the period of load- Such rules shall include signal system
ing and unloading. This signalman and allowable line speed for various
shall be distinctly recognizable from loads. Rules and notices shall be posted
other ground personnel. on the car frame or crosshead in a con-
(s) Fires. Open fires shall not be per- spicuous location, including the state-
mitted in an area that could result in ment ‘‘No Riders Allowed.’’
such fires being spread by the rotor (ii) No person shall be allowed to ride
downwash. on material hoists except for the pur-
poses of inspection and maintenance.
§ 1926.552 Material hoists, personnel (2) All entrances of the hoistways
hoists, and elevators.
shall be protected by substantial gates
(a) General requirements. (1) The em- or bars which shall guard the full width
ployer shall comply with the manufac- of the landing entrance. All hoistway
turer’s specifications and limitations entrance bars and gates shall be paint-
applicable to the operation of all hoists ed with diagonal contrasting colors,
and elevators. Where manufacturer’s such as black and yellow stripes.
specifications are not available, the (i) Bars shall be not less than 2- by 4-
limitations assigned to the equipment inch wooden bars or the equivalent, lo-
shall be based on the determinations of cated 2 feet from the hoistway line.
a professional engineer competent in Bars shall be located not less than 36
the field. inches nor more than 42 inches above
(2) Rated load capacities, rec- the floor.
ommended operating speeds, and spe- (ii) Gates or bars protecting the en-
cial hazard warnings or instructions trances to hoistways shall be equipped
shall be posted on cars and platforms. with a latching device.
(3) Wire rope shall be removed from (3) Overhead protective covering of 2-
service when any of the following con- inch planking, 3⁄4-inch plywood, or
ditions exists: other solid material of equivalent
(i) In hoisting ropes, six randomly strength, shall be provided on the top
distributed broken wires in one rope of every material hoist cage or plat-
lay or three broken wires in one strand form.
in one rope lay; (4) The operator’s station of a hoist-
(ii) Abrasion, scrubbing, flattening, ing machine shall be provided with
or peening, causing loss of more than overhead protection equivalent to tight
one-third of the original diameter of planking not less than 2 inches thick.
the outside wires; The support for the overhead protec-
(iii) Evidence of any heat damage re- tion shall be of equal strength.
sulting from a torch or any damage (5) Hoist towers may be used with or
caused by contact with electrical without an enclosure on all sides. How-
wires; ever, whichever alternative is chosen,
(iv) Reduction from nominal diame- the following applicable conditions
ter of more than three sixty-fourths shall be met:
inch for diameters up to and including (i) When a hoist tower is enclosed, it
three-fourths inch; one-sixteenth inch shall be enclosed on all sides for its en-
for diameters seven-eights to 11⁄8 tire height with a screen enclosure of
351
⁄ -inch mesh, No. 18 U.S. gauge wire or
12 (6) A door or gate shall be provided at
equivalent, except for landing access. each entrance to the car which shall
(ii) When a hoist tower is not en- protect the full width and height of the
closed, the hoist platform or car shall car entrance opening.
be totally enclosed (caged) on all sides (7) Overhead protective covering of 2-
for the full height between the floor inch planking, 3⁄4-inch plywood or other
and the overhead protective covering solid material or equivalent strength
with 1⁄2-inch mesh of No. 14 U.S. gauge shall be provided on the top of every
wire or equivalent. The hoist platform personnel hoist.
enclosure shall include the required (8) Doors or gates shall be provided
gates for loading and unloading. A 6- with electric contacts which do not
foot high enclosure shall be provided allow movement of the hoist when door
on the unused sides of the hoist tower or gate is open.
at ground level. (9) Safeties shall be capable of stop-
ping and holding the car and rated load
(6) Car arresting devices shall be in-
when traveling at governor tripping
stalled to function in case of rope fail-
speed.
ure. (10) Cars shall be provided with a ca-
(7) All material hoist towers shall be pacity and data plate secured in a con-
designed by a licensed professional en- spicuous place on the car or crosshead.
gineer. (11) Internal combustion engines
(8) All material hoists shall conform shall not be permitted for direct drive.
to the requirements of ANSI A10.5–1969, (12) Normal and final terminal stop-
Safety Requirements for Material ping devices shall be provided.
Hoists. (13) An emergency stop switch shall
(c) Personnel hoists. (1) Hoist towers be provided in the car and marked
outside the structure shall be enclosed ‘‘Stop.’’
for the full height on the side or sides (14) Ropes: (i) The minimum number
used for entrance and exit to the struc- of hoisting ropes used shall be three for
ture. At the lowest landing, the enclo- traction hoists and two for drum-type
sure on the sides not used for exit or hoists.
entrance to the structure shall be en- (ii) The minimum diameter of hoist-
closed to a height of at least 10 feet. ing and counterweight wire ropes shall
Other sides of the tower adjacent to be 1⁄2-inch.
floors or scaffold platforms shall be en- (iii) Safety factors:
closed to a height of 10 feet above the
level of such floors or scaffolds. MINIMUM FACTORS OF SAFETY FOR SUSPENSION
(2) Towers inside of structures shall WIRE ROPES
be enclosed on all four sides through- Minimum
out the full height. Rope speed in feet per minute factor of
safety
(3) Towers shall be anchored to the
structure at intervals not exceeding 25 50 ......................................................................... 7.60
75 ......................................................................... 7.75
feet. In addition to tie-ins, a series of 100 ....................................................................... 7.95
guys shall be installed. Where tie-ins 125 ....................................................................... 8.10
are not practical the tower shall be an- 150 ....................................................................... 8.25
chored by means of guys made of wire 175 ....................................................................... 8.40
200 ....................................................................... 8.60
rope at least one-half inch in diameter, 225 ....................................................................... 8.75
securely fastened to anchorage to en- 250 ....................................................................... 8.90
sure stability. 300 ....................................................................... 9.20
350 ....................................................................... 9.50
(4) Hoistway doors or gates shall be 400 ....................................................................... 9.75
not less than 6 feet 6 inches high and 450 ....................................................................... 10.00
500 ....................................................................... 10.25
shall be provided with mechanical 550 ....................................................................... 10.45
locks which cannot be operated from 600 ....................................................................... 10.70
the landing side, and shall be acces-
sible only to persons on the car. (15) Following assembly and erection
(5) Cars shall be permanently en- of hoists, and before being put in serv-
closed on all sides and the top, except ice, an inspection and test of all func-
sides used for entrance and exit which tions and safety devices shall be made
have car gates or doors. under the supervision of a competent
352
person. A similar inspection and test is (c) Evidence of any heat damage from
required following major alteration of any cause;
an existing installation. All hoists (d) Reductions from nominal diame-
shall be inspected and tested at not ter of more than three-sixty-fourths
more than 3-month intervals. The em- inch for diameters to and including
ployer shall prepare a certification three-fourths inch, one-sixteenth inch
record which includes the date the infor diameters seven-eights inch to 11⁄8
spection and test of all functions and inches inclusive, three-thirty-seconds
safety devices was performed; the sig- inch for diameters 11⁄4 to 11⁄2 inches in-
nature of the person who performed the clusive;
inspection and test; and a serial num- (e) In standing ropes, more than two
ber, or other identifier, for the hoist broken wires in one lay in sections be-
that was inspected and tested. The yond end connections or more than one
most recent certification record shall broken wire at an end connection.
be maintained on file. (d) Permanent elevators under the
(16) All personnel hoists used by em- care and custody of the employer and
ployees shall be constructed of mate- used by employees for work covered by
rials and components which meet the this Act shall comply with the require-
specifications for materials, construc- ments of American National Standards
tion, safety devices, assembly, and Institute A17.1–1965 with addenda
structural integrity as stated in the A17.1a–1967, A17.1b–1968, A17.1c–1969,
American National Standard A10.4– A17.1d–1970, and inspected in accord-
1963, Safety Requirements for Work- ance with A17.2–1960 with addenda
men’s Hoists. The requirements of this A17.2a–1965, A17.2b–1967.
paragraph (c)(16) do not apply to canti-
lever type personnel hoists. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
1979, as amended at 52 FR 36382, Sept. 28,
(17) (i) Personnel hoists used in
1987]
bridge tower construction shall be ap-
proved by a registered professional en- § 1926.553 Base-mounted drum hoists.
gineer and erected under the super-
vision of a qualified engineer com- (a) General requirements. (1) Exposed
petent in this field. moving parts such as gears, projecting
(ii) When a hoist tower is not en- screws, setscrews, chain, cables, chain
closed, the hoist platform or car shall sprockets, and reciprocating or rotat-
be totally enclosed (caged) on all sides ing parts, which constitute a hazard,
for the full height between the floor shall be guarded.
and the overhead protective covering (2) All controls used during the nor-
with 3⁄4-inch mesh of No. 14 U.S. gauge mal operation cycle shall be located
wire or equivalent. The hoist platform within easy reach of the operator’s sta-
enclosure shall include the required tion.
gates for loading and unloading. (3) Electric motor operated hoists
(iii) These hoists shall be inspected shall be provided with:
and maintained on a weekly basis. (i) A device to disconnect all motors
Whenever the hoisting equipment is ex- from the line upon power failure and
posed to winds exceeding 35 miles per not permit any motor to be restarted
hour it shall be inspected and put in until the controller handle is brought
operable condition before reuse. to the ‘‘off’’ position;
(iv) Wire rope shall be taken out of (ii) Where applicable, an overspeed
service when any of the following con- preventive device;
ditions exist: (iii) A means whereby remotely oper-
(a) In running ropes, six randomly ated hoists stop when any control is in-
distributed broken wires in one lay or effective.
three broken wires in one strand in one (4) All base-mounted drum hoists in
lay; use shall meet the applicable require-
(b) Wear of one-third the original di- ments for design, construction, instal-
ameter of outside individual wires. lation, testing, inspection, mainte-
Kinking, crushing, bird caging, or any nance, and operations, as prescribed by
other damage resulting in distortion of the manufacturer.
the rope structure; (b) Specific requirements. [Reserved]
353
(c) This section does not apply to (5) Where a conveyor passes over
base-mounted drum hoists used in con- work areas, aisles, or thoroughfares,
junction with derricks. Base-mounted suitable guards shall be provided to
drum hoists used in conjunction with protect employees required to work
derricks must conform to § 1926.1436(e). below the conveyors.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979 as amended at 75 FR (6) All crossovers, aisles, and passage-
48134, Aug. 9, 2010] ways shall be conspicuously marked by
suitable signs, as required by subpart G
§ 1926.554 Overhead hoists. of this part.
(a) General requirements. (1) The safe (7) Conveyors shall be locked out or
working load of the overhead hoist, as otherwise rendered inoperable, and
determined by the manufacturer, shall tagged out with a ‘‘Do Not Operate’’
be indicated on the hoist, and this safe tag during repairs and when operation
working load shall not be exceeded. is hazardous to employees performing
(2) The supporting structure to which maintenance work.
the hoist is attached shall have a safe (8) All conveyors in use shall meet
working load equal to that of the hoist. the applicable requirements for design,
(3) The support shall be arranged so construction, inspection, testing,
as to provide for free movement of the maintenance, and operation, as pre-
hoist and shall not restrict the hoist scribed in the ANSI B20.1–1957, Safety
from lining itself up with the load. Code for Conveyors, Cableways, and
(4) The hoist shall be installed only Related Equipment.
in locations that will permit the oper-
ator to stand clear of the load at all Subpart O—Motor Vehicles,
times. Mechanized Equipment, and
(5) Air hoists shall be connected to an
air supply of sufficient capacity and
Marine Operations
pressure to safely operate the hoist. All
air hoses supplying air shall be posi- AUTHORITY: Section 107, Construction
tively connected to prevent their be- Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (Con-
struction Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); Secs. 4,
coming disconnected during use. 6, 8, Occupational Safety and Health Act of
(6) All overhead hoists in use shall 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of La-
meet the applicable requirements for bor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR
construction, design, installation, test- 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55 FR 9033), 6–
ing, inspection, maintenance, and oper- 96 (62 FR 111), or 5–2007 (72 FR 31159), as ap-
ation, as prescribed by the manufac- plicable. Section 1926.602 also issued under 29
turer. CFR part 1911.
(b) Specific requirements. [Reserved]
§ 1926.600 Equipment.
§ 1926.555 Conveyors. (a) General requirements. (1) All equip-
(a) General requirements. (1) Means for ment left unattended at night, adja-
stopping the motor or engine shall be cent to a highway in normal use, or ad-
provided at the operator’s station. Con- jacent to construction areas where
veyor systems shall be equipped with work is in progress, shall have appro-
an audible warning signal to be sound- priate lights or reflectors, or barri-
ed immediately before starting up the cades equipped with appropriate lights
conveyor. or reflectors, to identify the location of
(2) If the operator’s station is at a re- the equipment.
mote point, similar provisions for stop- (2) A safety tire rack, cage, or equiv-
ping the motor or engine shall be pro- alent protection shall be provided and
vided at the motor or engine location. used when inflating, mounting, or dis-
(3) Emergency stop switches shall be mounting tires installed on split rims,
arranged so that the conveyor cannot or rims equipped with locking rings or
be started again until the actuating similar devices.
stop switch has been reset to running (3) (i) Heavy machinery, equipment,
or ‘‘on’’ position. or parts thereof, which are suspended
(4) Screw conveyors shall be guarded or held aloft by use of slings, hoists, or
to prevent employee contact with turn- jacks shall be substantially blocked or
ing flights. cribbed to prevent falling or shifting
354
before employees are permitted to (v) Cage-type boom guards, insu-
work under or between them. Bulldozer lating links, or proximity warning de-
and scraper blades, end-loader buckets, vices may be used on cranes, but the
dump bodies, and similar equipment, use of such devices shall not alter the
shall be either fully lowered or blocked requirements of any other regulation
when being repaired or when not in of this part even if such device is re-
use. All controls shall be in a neutral quired by law or regulation;
position, with the motors stopped and (vi) Any overhead wire shall be con-
brakes set, unless work being per- sidered to be an energized line unless
formed requires otherwise. and until the person owning such line
(ii) Whenever the equipment is or the electrical utility authorities in-
parked, the parking brake shall be set. dicate that it is not an energized line
Equipment parked on inclines shall and it has been visibly grounded;
have the wheels chocked and the park- (vii) Prior to work near transmitter
ing brake set. towers where an electrical charge can
be induced in the equipment or mate-
(4) The use, care and charging of all
rials being handled, the transmitter
batteries shall conform to the require-
shall be de-energized or tests shall be
ments of subpart K of this part.
made to determine if electrical charge
(5) All cab glass shall be safety glass, is induced on the crane. The following
or equivalent, that introduces no visi- precautions shall be taken when nec-
ble distortion affecting the safe oper- essary to dissipate induced voltages:
ation of any machine covered by this (A) The equipment shall be provided
subpart. with an electrical ground directly to
(6) All equipment covered by this the upper rotating structure sup-
subpart shall comply with the fol- porting the boom; and
lowing requirements when working or (B) Ground jumper cables shall be at-
being moved in the vicinity of power tached to materials being handled by
lines or energized transmitters, except boom equipment when electrical
where electrical distribution and trans- charge is induced while working near
mission lines have been deenergized energized transmitters. Crews shall be
and visibly grounded at point of work provided with nonconductive poles hav-
or where insulating barriers, not a part ing large alligator clips or other simi-
of or an attachment to the equipment lar protection to attach the ground
or machinery, have been erected to pre- cable to the load.
vent physical contact with the lines: (C) Combustible and flammable ma-
(i) For lines rated 50 kV or below, terials shall be removed from the im-
minimum clearance between the lines mediate area prior to operations.
and any part of the crane or load shall (7) Rolling railroad cars. Derail and/or
be 10 feet; bumper blocks shall be provided on
(ii) For lines rated over 50 kV, min- spur railroad tracks where a rolling car
imum clearance between the lines and could contact other cars being worked,
any part of the crane or load shall be 10 enter a building, work or traffic area.
feet plus 0.4 inch for each 1 kV over 50 (b) Specific requirements. [Reserved]
kV, or twice the length of the line in- [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
sulator, but never less than 10 feet; 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35183, June 30, 1993;
(iii) In transit with no load and boom 75 FR 48134, Aug. 9, 2010]
lowered, the equipment clearance shall
be a minimum of 4 feet for voltages § 1926.601 Motor vehicles.
less than 50 kV, and 10 feet for voltages (a) Coverage. Motor vehicles as cov-
over 50 kV, up to and including 345 kV, ered by this part are those vehicles
and 16 feet for voltages up to and in- that operate within an off-highway job-
cluding 750 kV; site, not open to public traffic. The re-
(iv) A person shall be designated to quirements of this section do not apply
observe clearance of the equipment and to equipment for which rules are pre-
give timely warning for all operations scribed in § 1926.602.
where it is difficult for the operator to (b) General requirements. (1) All vehi-
maintain the desired clearance by vis- cles shall have a service brake system,
ual means; an emergency brake system, and a
355
parking brake system. These systems while maintenance or inspection work
may use common components, and is being done.
shall be maintained in operable condi- (11) Operating levers controlling
tion. hoisting or dumping devices on haulage
(2)(i) Whenever visibility conditions bodies shall be equipped with a latch or
warrant additional light, all vehicles, other device which will prevent acci-
or combinations of vehicles, in use dental starting or tripping of the mech-
shall be equipped with at least two anism.
headlights and two taillights in oper- (12) Trip handles for tailgates of
able condition. dump trucks shall be so arranged that,
(ii) All vehicles, or combination of in dumping, the operator will be in the
vehicles, shall have brake lights in op- clear.
erable condition regardless of light (13) (i) All rubber-tired motor vehicle
conditions. equipment manufactured on or after
(3) All vehicles shall be equipped with May 1, 1972, shall be equipped with
an adequate audible warning device at fenders. All rubber-tired motor vehicle
the operator’s station and in an oper- equipment manufactured before May 1,
able condition. 1972, shall be equipped with fenders not
(4) No employer shall use any motor later than May 1, 1973.
vehicle equipment having an ob-
(ii) Mud flaps may be used in lieu of
structed view to the rear unless:
fenders whenever motor vehicle equip-
(i) The vehicle has a reverse signal
ment is not designed for fenders.
alarm audible above the surrounding
noise level or: (14) All vehicles in use shall be
(ii) The vehicle is backed up only checked at the beginning of each shift
when an observer signals that it is safe to assure that the following parts,
to do so. equipment, and accessories are in safe
(5) All vehicles with cabs shall be operating condition and free of appar-
equipped with windshields and powered ent damage that could cause failure
wipers. Cracked and broken glass shall while in use: service brakes, including
be replaced. Vehicles operating in trailer brake connections; parking sys-
areas or under conditions that cause tem (hand brake); emergency stopping
fogging or frosting of the windshields system (brakes); tires; horn; steering
shall be equipped with operable mechanism; coupling devices; seat
defogging or defrosting devices. belts; operating controls; and safety
(6) All haulage vehicles, whose pay devices. All defects shall be corrected
load is loaded by means of cranes, before the vehicle is placed in service.
power shovels, loaders, or similar These requirements also apply to
equipment, shall have a cab shield and/ equipment such as lights, reflectors,
or canopy adequate to protect the oper- windshield wipers, defrosters, fire ex-
ator from shifting or falling materials. tinguishers, etc., where such equip-
(7) Tools and material shall be se- ment is necessary.
cured to prevent movement when
transported in the same compartment § 1926.602 Material handling equip-
ment.
with employees.
(8) Vehicles used to transport em- (a) Earthmoving equipment; General. (1)
ployees shall have seats firmly secured These rules apply to the following
and adequate for the number of em- types of earthmoving equipment:
ployees to be carried. scrapers, loaders, crawler or wheel
(9) Seat belts and anchorages meet- tractors, bulldozers, off-highway
ing the requirements of 49 CFR part 571 trucks, graders, agricultural and indus-
(Department of Transportation, Fed- trial tractors, and similar equipment.
eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standards) The promulgation of specific rules for
shall be installed in all motor vehicles. compactors and rubber-tired ‘‘skid-
(10) Trucks with dump bodies shall be steer’’ equipment is reserved pending
equipped with positive means of sup- consideration of standards currently
port, permanently attached, and capa- being developed.
ble of being locked in position to pre- (2) Seat belts. (i) Seat belts shall be
vent accidental lowering of the body provided on all equipment covered by
356
this section and shall meet the require- present no hazard to personnel from
ments of the Society of Automotive flying materials.
Engineers, J386–1969, Seat Belts for (6) Rollover protective structures
Construction Equipment. Seat belts for (ROPS). See subpart W of this part for
agricultural and light industrial trac- requirements for rollover protective
tors shall meet the seat belt require- structures and overhead protection.
ments of Society of Automotive Engi- (7) Rollover protective structures for off-
neers J333a–1970, Operator Protection highway trucks. The promulgation of
for Agricultural and Light Industrial standards for rollover protective struc-
Tractors. tures for off-highway trucks is reserved
(ii) Seat belts need not be provided pending further study and develop-
for equipment which is designed only ment.
for standup operation. (8) Specific effective dates—brakes and
(iii) Seat belts need not be provided fenders. (i) Equipment mentioned in
for equipment which does not have paragraph (a)(4) and (5) of this section,
roll-over protective structure (ROPS) and manufactured after January 1,
or adequate canopy protection. 1972, which is used by any employer
(3) Access roadways and grades. (i) No after that date, shall comply with the
employer shall move or cause to be applicable rules prescribed therein con-
moved construction equipment or vehi- cerning brakes and fenders. Equipment
cles upon any access roadway or grade mentioned in paragraphs (a) (4) and (5)
unless the access roadway or grade is of this section, and manufactured be-
constructed and maintained to accom- fore January 1, 1972, which is used by
modate safely the movement of the any employer after that date, shall
equipment and vehicles involved. meet the applicable rules prescribed
(ii) Every emergency access ramp herein not later than June 30, 1973. It
and berm used by an employer shall be should be noted that, as permitted
constructed to restrain and control under § 1926.2, employers may request
runaway vehicles. variations from the applicable brakes
(4) Brakes. All earthmoving equip- and fender standards required by this
ment mentioned in this § 1926.602(a) subpart. Employers wishing to seek
shall have a service braking system ca- variations from the applicable brakes
pable of stopping and holding the and fenders rules may submit any re-
equipment fully loaded, as specified in quests for variations after the publica-
Society of Automotive Engineers SAE- tion of this document in the FEDERAL
J237, Loader Dozer–1971, J236, Graders– REGISTER. Any statements intending to
1971, and J319b, Scrapers–1971. Brake
meet the requirements of § 1926.2(b)(4),
systems for self-propelled rubber-tired
should specify how the variation would
off-highway equipment manufactured
protect the safety of the employees by
after January 1, 1972 shall meet the ap-
providing for any compensating re-
plicable minimum performance criteria
strictions on the operation of equip-
set forth in the following Society of
ment.
Automotive Engineers Recommended
(ii) Notwithstanding the provisions of
Practices:
Self-Propelled Scrapers ................ SAE J319b–1971.
paragraphs (a)(5) and (a)(8)(i) of this
Self-Propelled Graders ................. SAE J236–1971. section, the requirement that fenders
Trucks and Wagons ...................... SAE J166–1971. be installed on pneumatic-tired
Front End Loaders and Dozers .... SAE J237–1971. earthmoving haulage equipment, is
(5) Fenders. Pneumatic-tired earth- suspended pending reconsideration of
moving haulage equipment (trucks, the requirement.
scrapers, tractors, and trailing units) (9) Audible alarms. (i) All
whose maximum speed exceeds 15 miles bidirectional machines, such as rollers,
per hour, shall be equipped with fend- compacters, front-end loaders, bull-
ers on all wheels to meet the require- dozers, and similar equipment, shall be
ments of Society of Automotive Engi- equipped with a horn, distinguishable
neers SAE J321a–1970, Fenders for from the surrounding noise level,
Pneumatic-Tired Earthmoving Haulage which shall be operated as needed when
Equipment. An employer may, of the machine is moving in either direc-
course, at any time seek to show under tion. The horn shall be maintained in
§ 1926.2, that the uncovered wheels an operative condition.
357
(ii) No employer shall permit accordingly. In no case shall the origi-
earthmoving or compacting equipment nal safety factor of the equipment be
which has an obstructed view to the reduced.
rear to be used in reverse gear unless (iii) If a load is lifted by two or more
the equipment has in operation a re- trucks working in unison, the propor-
verse signal alarm distinguishable tion of the total load carried by any
from the surrounding noise level or an one truck shall not exceed its capacity.
employee signals that it is safe to do (iv) Steering or spinner knobs shall
so. not be attached to the steering wheel
(10) Scissor points. Scissor points on
unless the steering mechanism is of a
all front-end loaders, which constitute
type that prevents road reactions from
a hazard to the operator during normal
operation, shall be guarded. causing the steering handwheel to spin.
(b) Excavating and other equipment. (1) The steering knob shall be mounted
Tractors covered in paragraph (a) of within the periphery of the wheel.
this section shall have seat belts as re- (v) All high lift rider industrial
quired for the operators when seated in trucks shall be equipped with overhead
the normal seating arrangement for guards which meet the configuration
tractor operation, even though back- and structural requirements as defined
hoes, breakers, or other similar attach- in paragraph 421 of American National
ments are used on these machines for Standards Institute B56.1–1969, Safety
excavating or other work. Standards for Powered Industrial
(2) For the purposes of this subpart Trucks.
and of subpart N of this part, the no- (vi) All industrial trucks in use shall
menclatures and descriptions for meas- meet the applicable requirements of
urement of dimensions of machinery design, construction, stability, inspec-
and attachments shall be as described tion, testing, maintenance, and oper-
in Society of Automotive Engineers ation, as defined in American National
1970 Handbook, pages 1088 through 1103. Standards Institute B56.1–1969, Safety
(3) The safety requirements, ratios, Standards for Powered Industrial
or limitations applicable to machines
Trucks.
or attachment usage covered in Power
(vii) Unauthorized personnel shall
Crane and Shovel Associations Stand-
ards No. 1 and No. 2 of 1968, and No. 3 not be permitted to ride on powered in-
of 1969, shall be complied with, and dustrial trucks. A safe place to ride
shall apply to cranes, machines, and shall be provided where riding of
attachments under this part. trucks is authorized.
(c) Lifting and hauling equipment (viii) Whenever a truck is equipped
(other than equipment covered under sub- with vertical only, or vertical and hori-
part N of this part). (1) Industrial trucks zontal controls elevatable with the lift-
shall meet the requirements of ing carriage or forks for lifting per-
§ 1926.600 and the following: sonnel, the following additional pre-
(i) Lift trucks, stackers, etc., shall cautions shall be taken for the protec-
have the rated capacity clearly posted tion of personnel being elevated.
on the vehicle so as to be clearly visi- (A) Use of a safety platform firmly
ble to the operator. When auxiliary re- secured to the lifting carriage and/or
movable counterweights are provided forks.
by the manufacturer, corresponding al- (B) Means shall be provided whereby
ternate rated capacities also shall be personnel on the platform can shut off
clearly shown on the vehicle. These power to the truck.
ratings shall not be exceeded.
(C) Such protection from falling ob-
(ii) No modifications or additions
which affect the capacity or safe oper- jects as indicated necessary by the op-
ation of the equipment shall be made erating conditions shall be provided.
without the manufacturer’s written ap- (d) Powered industrial truck operator
proval. If such modifications or training.
changes are made, the capacity, oper- NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
ation, and maintenance instruction struction work under this paragraph are
plates, tags, or decals shall be changed
358
identical to those set forth at § 1910.178(l) of vided with the same protection as re-
this chapter. quired for steam lines.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, (10) Safety chains, or equivalent
1979, as amended at 58 FR 35183, June 30, 1993; means, shall be provided for each hose
63 FR 66274, Dec. 1, 1998] connection to prevent the line from
thrashing around in case the coupling
§ 1926.603 Pile driving equipment. becomes disconnected.
(a) General requirements. (1) Boilers (11) Steam line controls shall consist
and piping systems which are a part of, of two shutoff valves, one of which
or used with, pile driving equipment shall be a quick-acting lever type with-
shall meet the applicable requirements in easy reach of the hammer operator.
of the American Society of Mechanical (12) Guys, outriggers, thrustouts, or
Engineers, Power Boilers (section I). counterbalances shall be provided as
(2) All pressure vessels which are a necessary to maintain stability of pile
part of, or used with, pile driving driver rigs.
equipment shall meet the applicable (b) Pile driving from barges and floats.
requirements of the American Society Barges or floats supporting pile driving
of Mechanical Engineers, Pressure Ves- operations shall meet the applicable
sels (section VIII). requirements of § 1926.605.
(c) Pile driving equipment. (1) Engi-
(3) Overhead protection, which will
neers and winchmen shall accept sig-
not obscure the vision of the operator
nals only from the designated signal-
and which meets the requirements of
men.
subpart N of this part, shall be pro-
(2) All employees shall be kept clear
vided. Protection shall be the equiva-
when piling is being hoisted into the
lent of 2-inch planking or other solid
leads.
material of equivalent strength.
(3) When piles are being driven in an
(4) Stop blocks shall be provided for excavated pit, the walls of the pit shall
the leads to prevent the hammer from be sloped to the angle of repose or
being raised against the head block. sheet-piled and braced.
(5) A blocking device, capable of safe- (4) When steel tube piles are being
ly supporting the weight of the ham- ‘‘blown out’’, employees shall be kept
mer, shall be provided for placement in well beyond the range of falling mate-
the leads under the hammer at all rials.
times while employees are working (5) When it is necessary to cut off the
under the hammer. tops of driven piles, pile driving oper-
(6) Guards shall be provided across ations shall be suspended except where
the top of the head block to prevent the cutting operations are located at
the cable from jumping out of the least twice the length of the longest
sheaves. pile from the driver.
(7) When the leads must be inclined (6) When driving jacked piles, all ac-
in the driving of batter piles, provi- cess pits shall be provided with ladders
sions shall be made to stabilize the and bulkheaded curbs to prevent mate-
leads. rial from falling into the pit.
(8) Fixed leads shall be provided with
ladder, and adequate rings, or similar § 1926.604 Site clearing.
attachment points, so that the loft (a) General requirements. (1) Employ-
worker may engage his safety belt lan- ees engaged in site clearing shall be
yard to the leads. If the leads are pro- protected from hazards of irritant and
vided with loft platforms(s), such plat- toxic plants and suitably instructed in
form(s) shall be protected by standard the first aid treatment available.
guardrails. (2) All equipment used in site clear-
(9) Steam hose leading to a steam ing operations shall be equipped with
hammer or jet pipe shall be securely rollover guards meeting the require-
attached to the hammer with an ade- ments of this subpart. In addition,
quate length of at least 1⁄4-inch diame- rider-operated equipment shall be
ter chain or cable to prevent whipping equipped with an overhead and rear
in the event the joint at the hammer is canopy guard meeting the following re-
broken. Air hammer hoses shall be pro- quirements:
359
(i) The overhead covering on this so located that the load will not pass
canopy structure shall be of not less over employees.
than 1⁄8-inch steel plate or 1⁄4-inch (c) Working surfaces of barges. (1) Em-
woven wire mesh with openings no ployees shall not be permitted to walk
greater than 1 inch, or equivalent. along the sides of covered lighters or
(ii) The opening in the rear of the barges with coamings more than 5 feet
canopy structure shall be covered with high, unless there is a 3-foot clear
not less than 1⁄4-inch woven wire mesh walkway, or a grab rail, or a taut
with openings no greater than 1 inch. handline is provided.
(b) Specific requirements. [Reserved] (2) Decks and other working surfaces
§ 1926.605 Marine operations and shall be maintained in a safe condition.
equipment. (3) Employees shall not be permitted
to pass fore and aft, over, or around
(a) Material handling operations. (1)
deckloads, unless there is a safe pas-
Operations fitting the definition of
sage.
‘‘material handling’’ shall be per-
formed in conformance with applicable (4) Employees shall not be permitted
requirements of part 1918, ‘‘Safety and to walk over deckloads from rail to
Health Regulations for Longshoring’’ coaming unless there is a safe passage.
of this chapter. The term ‘‘longshoring If it is necessary to stand at the out-
operations’’ means the loading, unload- board or inboard edge of the deckload
ing, moving, or handling of construc- where less than 24 inches of bulwark,
tion materials, equipment and supplies, rail, coaming, or other protection ex-
etc. into, in, on, or out of any vessel ists, all employees shall be provided
from a fixed structure or shore-to-ves- with a suitable means of protection
sel, vessel-to-shore or fixed structure against falling from the deckload.
or vessel-to-vessel. (d) First-aid and lifesaving equipment.
(b) Access to barges. (1) Ramps for ac- (1) Provisions for rendering first aid
cess of vehicles to or between barges and medical assistance shall be in ac-
shall be of adequate strength, provided cordance with subpart D of this part.
with side boards, well maintained, and (2) The employer shall ensure that
properly secured. there is in the vicinity of each barge in
(2) Unless employees can step safely use at least one U.S. Coast Guard-ap-
to or from the wharf, float, barge, or proved 30-inch lifering with not less
river towboat, either a ramp, meeting than 90 feet of line attached, and at
the requirements of paragraph (b)(1) of least one portable or permanent ladder
this section, or a safe walkway, shall which will reach the top of the apron
be provided. to the surface of the water. If the above
(3) Jacob’s ladders shall be of the equipment is not available at the pier,
double rung or flat tread type. They the employer shall furnish it during
shall be well maintained and properly the time that he is working the barge.
secured. (3) Employees walking or working on
(4) A Jacob’s ladder shall either hang the unguarded decks of barges shall be
without slack from its lashings or be protected with U.S. Coast Guard-ap-
pulled up entirely. proved work vests or buoyant vests.
(5) When the upper end of the means (e) Commercial diving operations. Com-
of access rests on or is flush with the mercial diving operations shall be sub-
top of the bulwark, substantial steps ject to subpart T of part 1910,
properly secured and equipped with at §§ 1910.401–1910.441, of this chapter.
least one substantial hand rail approxi-
mately 33 inches in height, shall be [39 FR 22801, June 24, 1974, as amended at 42
provided between the top of the bul- FR 37674, July 22, 1977]
wark and the deck.
(6) Obstructions shall not be laid on § 1926.606 Definitions applicable to
this subpart.
or across the gangway.
(7) The means of access shall be ade- (a) Apron—The area along the water-
quately illuminated for its full length. front edge of the pier or wharf.
(8) Unless the structure makes it im- (b) Bulwark—The side of a ship above
possible, the means of access shall be the upper deck.
360
(c) Coaming—The raised frame, as system, and its sudden movement into
around a hatchway in the deck, to keep the excavation, either by falling or
out water. sliding, in sufficient quantity so that it
(d) Jacob’s ladder—A marine ladder of could entrap, bury, or otherwise injure
rope or chain with wooden or metal and immobilize a person.
rungs. Competent person means one who is
(e) Rail, for the purpose of § 1926.605, capable of identifying existing and pre-
means a light structure serving as a dictable hazards in the surroundings,
guard at the outer edge of a ship’s or working conditions which are unsan-
deck. itary, hazardous, or dangerous to em-
Subpart P—Excavations take prompt corrective measures to
eliminate them.
AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Worker Cross braces mean the horizontal
Hours and Safety Standards Act (Construc- members of a shoring system installed
tion Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); Secs. 4, 6, 8, perpendicular to the sides of the exca-
Occupational Safety and Hea1th Act of 1970 vation, the ends of which bear against
(29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s either uprights or wales.
Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR
25059), or 9–83 (48 FR 35736), as applicable, and
Excavation means any man-made cut,
29 CFR part 1911. cavity, trench, or depression in an
earth surface, formed by earth re-
SOURCE: 54 FR 45959, Oct. 31, 1989, unless moval.
otherwise noted.
Faces or sides means the vertical or
§ 1926.650 Scope, application, and defi- inclined earth surfaces formed as a re-
nitions applicable to this subpart. sult of excavation work.
(a) Scope and application. This sub- Failure means the breakage, displace-
part applies to all open excavations ment, or permanent deformation of a
made in the earth’s surface. Exca- structural member or connection so as
vations are defined to include trenches. to reduce its structural integrity and
(b) Definitions applicable to this sub- its supportive capabilities.
part. Hazardous atmosphere means an at-
Accepted engineering practices means mosphere which by reason of being ex-
those requirements which are compat- plosive, flammable, poisonous, corro-
ible with standards of practice required sive, oxidizing, irritating, oxygen defi-
by a registered professional engineer. cient, toxic, or otherwise harmful, may
Aluminum Hydraulic Shoring means a cause death, illness, or injury.
pre-engineered shoring system com- Kickout means the accidental release
prised of aluminum hydraulic cylinders or failure of a cross brace.
(crossbraces) used in conjunction with Protective system means a method of
vertical rails (uprights) or horizontal protecting employees from cave-ins,
rails (walers). Such system is designed, from material that could fall or roll
specifically to support the sidewalls of from an excavation face or into an ex-
an excavation and prevent cave-ins. cavation, or from the collapse of adja-
Bell-bottom pier hole means a type of cent structures. Protective systems in-
shaft or footing excavation, the bottom clude support systems, sloping and
of which is made larger than the cross benching systems, shield systems, and
section above to form a belled shape. other systems that provide the nec-
Benching (Benching system) means a essary protection.
method of protecting employees from Ramp means an inclined walking or
cave-ins by excavating the sides of an working surface that is used to gain ac-
excavation to form one or a series of cess to one point from another, and is
horizontal levels or steps, usually with constructed from earth or from struc-
vertical or near-vertical surfaces be- tural materials such as steel or wood.
tween levels. Registered Professional Engineer means
Cave-in means the separation of a a person who is registered as a profes-
mass of soil or rock material from the sional engineer in the state where the
side of an excavation, or the loss of soil work is to be performed. However, a
from under a trench shield or support professional engineer, registered in any
361
state is deemed to be a ‘‘registered pro- cent structure, underground installa-
fessional engineer’’ within the meaning tion, or the sides of an excavation.
of this standard when approving de- Tabulated data means tables and
signs for ‘‘manufactured protective charts approved by a registered profes-
systems’’ or ‘‘tabulated data’’ to be sional engineer and used to design and
used in interstate commerce. construct a protective system.
Sheeting means the members of a Trench (Trench excavation) means a
shoring system that retain the earth in narrow excavation (in relation to its
position and in turn are supported by length) made below the surface of the
other members of the shoring system. ground. In general, the depth is greater
Shield (Shield system) means a struc- than the width, but the width of a
ture that is able to withstand the
trench (measured at the bottom) is not
forces imposed on it by a cave-in and
greater than 15 feet (4.6 m). If forms or
thereby protect employees within the
other structures are installed or con-
structure. Shields can be permanent
structures or can be designed to be structed in an excavation so as to re-
portable and moved along as work produce the dimension measured from the
gresses. Additionally, shields can be ei- forms or structure to the side of the ex-
ther premanufactured or job-built in cavation to 15 feet (4.6 m) or less
accordance with § 1926.652 (c)(3) or (measured at the bottom of the exca-
(c)(4). Shields used in trenches are usu- vation), the excavation is also consid-
ally referred to as ‘‘trench boxes’’ or ered to be a trench.
‘‘trench shields.’’ Trench box. See ‘‘Shield.’’
Shoring (Shoring system) means a Trench shield. See ‘‘Shield.’’
structure such as a metal hydraulic, Uprights means the vertical members
mechanical or timber shoring system of a trench shoring system placed in
that supports the sides of an exca- contact with the earth and usually po-
vation and which is designed to prevent sitioned so that individual members do
cave-ins. not contact each other. Uprights
Sides. See ‘‘Faces.’’ placed so that individual members are
Sloping (Sloping system) means a closely spaced, in contact with or
method of protecting employees from interconnected to each other, are often
cave-ins by excavating to form sides of called ‘‘sheeting.’’
an excavation that are inclined away Wales means horizontal members of a
from the excavation so as to prevent shoring system placed parallel to the
cave-ins. The angle of incline required excavation face whose sides bear
to prevent a cave-in varies with dif- against the vertical members of the
ferences in such factors as the soil shoring system or earth.
type, environmental conditions of ex-
posure, and application of surcharge § 1926.651 Specific excavation require-
loads. ments.
Stable rock means natural solid min-
(a) Surface encumbrances. All surface
eral material that can be excavated
encumbrances that are located so as to
with vertical sides and will remain in-
tact while exposed. Unstable rock is create a hazard to employees shall be
considered to be stable when the rock removed or supported, as necessary, to
material on the side or sides of the ex- safeguard employees.
cavation is secured against caving-in (b) Underground installations. (1) The
or movement by rock bolts or by an- estimated location of utility installa-
other protective system that has been tions, such as sewer, telephone, fuel,
designed by a registered professional electric, water lines, or any other un-
engineer. derground installations that reason-
Structural ramp means a ramp built of ably may be expected to be encoun-
steel or wood, usually used for vehicle tered during excavation work, shall be
access. Ramps made of soil or rock are determined prior to opening an exca-
not considered structural ramps. vation.
Support system means a structure (2) Utility companies or owners shall
such as underpinning, bracing, or shor- be contacted within established or cus-
ing, which provides support to an adja- tomary local response times, advised of
362
the proposed work, and asked to estab- (d) Exposure to vehicular traffic. Em-
lish the location of the utility under- ployees exposed to public vehicular
ground installations prior to the start traffic shall be provided with, and shall
of actual excavation. When utility wear, warning vests or other suitable
companies or owners cannot respond to garments marked with or made of
a request to locate underground utility reflectorized or high-visibility mate-
installations within 24 hours (unless a rial.
longer period is required by state or (e) Exposure to falling loads. No em-
local law), or cannot establish the ployee shall be permitted underneath
exact location of these installations, loads handled by lifting or digging
the employer may proceed, provided equipment. Employees shall be re-
the employer does so with caution, and quired to stand away from any vehicle
provided detection equipment or other being loaded or unloaded to avoid being
acceptable means to locate utility in- struck by any spillage or falling mate-
stallations are used. rials. Operators may remain in the
(3) When excavation operations ap- cabs of vehicles being loaded or un-
proach the estimated location of under- loaded when the vehicles are equipped,
ground installations, the exact loca- in accordance with § 1926.601(b)(6), to
tion of the installations shall be deter- provide adequate protection for the op-
mined by safe and acceptable means. erator during loading and unloading
(4) While the excavation is open, un- operations.
derground installations shall be pro- (f) Warning system for mobile equip-
tected, supported or removed as nec-
ment. When mobile equipment is oper-
essary to safeguard employees.
ated adjacent to an excavation, or
(c) Access and egress—(1) Structural when such equipment is required to ap-
ramps. (i) Structural ramps that are proach the edge of an excavation, and
used solely by employees as a means of
the operator does not have a clear and
access or egress from excavations shall
direct view of the edge of the exca-
be designed by a competent person.
vation, a warning system shall be uti-
Structural ramps used for access or
lized such as barricades, hand or me-
egress of equipment shall be designed
chanical signals, or stop logs. If pos-
by a competent person qualified in
structural design, and shall be con- sible, the grade should be away from
structed in accordance with the design. the excavation.
(ii) Ramps and runways constructed (g) Hazardous atmospheres—(1) Testing
of two or more structural members and controls. In addition to the require-
shall have the structural members con- ments set forth in subparts D and E of
nected together to prevent displace- this part (29 CFR 1926.50–1926.107) to
ment. prevent exposure to harmful levels of
(iii) Structural members used for atmospheric contaminants and to as-
ramps and runways shall be of uniform sure acceptable atmospheric condi-
thickness. tions, the following requirements shall
(iv) Cleats or other appropriate apply:
means used to connect runway struc- (i) Where oxygen deficiency
tural members shall be attached to the (atmospheres containing less than 19.5
bottom of the runway or shall be at- percent oxygen) or a hazardous atmos-
tached in a manner to prevent tripping. phere exists or could reasonably be ex-
(v) Structural ramps used in lieu of pected to exist, such as in excavations
steps shall be provided with cleats or in landfill areas or excavations in areas
other surface treatments on the top where hazardous substances are stored
surface to prevent slipping. nearby, the atmospheres in the exca-
(2) Means of egress from trench excavation shall be tested before employees
vations. A stairway, ladder, ramp or enter excavations greater than 4 feet
other safe means of egress shall be lo- (1.22 m) in depth.
cated in trench excavations that are 4 (ii) Adequate precautions shall be
feet (1.22 m) or more in depth so as to taken to prevent employee exposure to
require no more than 25 feet (7.62 m) of atmospheres containing less than 19.5
lateral travel for employees. percent oxygen and other hazardous
363
atmospheres. These precautions in- (3) If excavation work interrupts the
clude providing proper respiratory pro- natural drainage of surface water (such
tection or ventilation in accordance as streams), diversion ditches, dikes, or
with subparts D and E of this part re- other suitable means shall be used to
spectively. prevent surface water from entering
(iii) Adequate precaution shall be the excavation and to provide adequate
taken such as providing ventilation, to drainage of the area adjacent to the ex-
prevent employee exposure to an at- cavation. Excavations subject to runoff
mosphere containing a concentration from heavy rains will require an in-
of a flammable gas in excess of 20 per- spection by a competent person and
cent of the lower flammable limit of compliance with paragraphs (h)(1) and
the gas. (h)(2) of this section.
(iv) When controls are used that are (i) Stability of adjacent structures. (1)
intended to reduce the level of atmos- Where the stability of adjoining build-
pheric contaminants to acceptable lev- ings, walls, or other structures is en-
els, testing shall be conducted as often dangered by excavation operations,
as necessary to ensure that the atmos- support systems such as shoring, brac-
phere remains safe. ing, or underpinning shall be provided
(2) Emergency rescue equipment. (i) to ensure the stability of such struc-
Emergency rescue equipment, such as tures for the protection of employees.
breathing apparatus, a safety harness (2) Excavation below the level of the
and line, or a basket stretcher, shall be base or footing of any foundation or re-
readily available where hazardous at- taining wall that could be reasonably
mospheric conditions exist or may rea- expected to pose a hazard to employees
sonably be expected to develop during shall not be permitted except when:
work in an excavation. This equipment (i) A support system, such as under-
shall be attended when in use. pinning, is provided to ensure the safe-
(ii) Employees entering bell-bottom ty of employees and the stability of the
pier holes, or other similar deep and structure; or
confined footing excavations, shall (ii) The excavation is in stable rock;
wear a harness with a life-line securely or
attached to it. The lifeline shall be sep- (iii) A registered professional engi-
arate from any line used to handle ma- neer has approved the determination
terials, and shall be individually at- that the structure is sufficently re-
tended at all times while the employee moved from the excavation so as to be
wearing the lifeline is in the exca- unaffected by the excavation activity;
vation. or
(h) Protection from hazards associated (iv) A registered professional engi-
with water accumulation. (1) Employees neer has approved the determination
shall not work in excavations in which that such excavation work will not
there is accumulated water, or in exca- pose a hazard to employees.
vations in which water is accumu- (3) Sidewalks, pavements, and appur-
lating, unless adequate precautions tenant structure shall not be under-
have been taken to protect employees mined unless a support system or an-
against the hazards posed by water ac- other method of protection is provided
cumulation. The precautions necessary to protect employees from the possible
to protect employees adequately vary collapse of such structures.
with each situation, but could include (j) Protection of employees from loose
special support or shield systems to rock or soil. (1) Adequate protection
protect from cave-ins, water removal shall be provided to protect employees
to control the level of accumulating from loose rock or soil that could pose
water, or use of a safety harness and a hazard by falling or rolling from an
lifeline. excavation face. Such protection shall
(2) If water is controlled or prevented consist of scaling to remove loose ma-
from accumulating by the use of water terial; installation of protective barri-
removal equipment, the water removal cades at intervals as necessary on the
equipment and operations shall be face to stop and contain falling mate-
monitored by a competent person to rial; or other means that provide equiv-
ensure proper operation. alent protection.
364
(2) Employees shall be protected from (ii) Excavations are less than 5 feet
excavated or other materials or equip- (1.52m) in depth and examination of the
ment that could pose a hazard by fall- ground by a competent person provides
ing or rolling into excavations. Protec- no indication of a potential cave-in.
tion shall be provided by placing and (2) Protective systems shall have the
keeping such materials or equipment capacity to resist without failure all
at least 2 feet (.61 m) from the edge of loads that are intended or could rea-
excavations, or by the use of retaining sonably be expected to be applied or
devices that are sufficient to prevent transmitted to the system.
materials or equipment from falling or (b) Design of sloping and benching sys-
rolling into excavations, or by a com- tems. The slopes and configurations of
bination of both if necessary. sloping and benching systems shall be
(k) Inspections. (1) Daily inspections selected and constructed by the em-
of excavations, the adjacent areas, and ployer or his designee and shall be in
protective systems shall be made by a accordance with the requirements of
competent person for evidence of a sit- paragraph (b)(1); or, in the alternative,
uation that could result in possible paragraph (b)(2); or, in the alternative,
cave-ins, indications of failure of pro- paragraph (b)(3), or, in the alternative,
tective systems, hazardous paragraph (b)(4), as follows:
atmospheres, or other hazardous condi- (1) Option (1)—Allowable configurations
tions. An inspection shall be conducted and slopes. (i) Excavations shall be
by the competent person prior to the sloped at an angle not steeper than one
start of work and as needed throughout and one-half horizontal to one vertical
the shift. Inspections shall also be (34 degrees measured from the hori-
made after every rainstorm or other zontal), unless the employer uses one
hazard increasing occurrence. These in- of the other options listed below.
spections are only required when em- (ii) Slopes specified in paragraph
ployee exposure can be reasonably an- (b)(1)(i) of this section, shall be exca-
ticipated. vated to form configurations that are
(2) Where the competent person finds in accordance with the slopes shown
evidence of a situation that could re- for Type C soil in appendix B to this
sult in a possible cave-in, indications subpart.
of failure of protective systems, haz- (2) Option (2)—Determination of slopes
ardous atmospheres, or other haz- and configurations using Appendices A
ardous conditions, exposed employees and B. Maximum allowable slopes, and
shall be removed from the hazardous allowable configurations for sloping
area until the necessary precautions and benching systems, shall be deter-
have been taken to ensure their safety. mined in accordance with the condi-
(l) Walkways shall be provided where tions and requirements set forth in ap-
employees or equipment are required pendices A and B to this subpart.
or permitted to cross over excavations. (3) Option (3)—Designs using other tab-
Guardrails which comply with ulated data. (i) Designs of sloping or
§ 1926.502(b) shall be provided where benching systems shall be selected
walkways are 6 feet (1.8 m) or more from and be in accordance with tab-
above lower levels. ulated data, such as tables and charts.
(ii) The tabulated data shall be in
[54 FR 45959, Oct. 31, 1989, as amended at 59 written form and shall include all of
FR 40730, Aug. 9, 1994] the following:
(A) Identification of the parameters
§ 1926.652 Requirements for protective that affect the selection of a sloping or
systems.
benching system drawn from such data;
(a) Protection of employees in exca- (B) Identification of the limits of use
vations. (1) Each employee in an exca- of the data, to include the magnitude
vation shall be protected from cave-ins and configuration of slopes determined
by an adequate protective system de- to be safe;
signed in accordance with paragraph (C) Explanatory information as may
(b) or (c) of this section except when: be necessary to aid the user in making
(i) Excavations are made entirely in a correct selection of a protective sys-
stable rock; or tem from the data.
365
(iii) At least one copy of the tab- protective systems that are drawn
ulated data which identifies the reg- from manufacturer’s tabulated data
istered professional engineer who ap- shall be in accordance with all speci-
proved the data, shall be maintained at fications, recommendations, and limi-
the jobsite during construction of the tations issued or made by the manufac-
protective system. After that time the turer.
data may be stored off the jobsite, but (ii) Deviation from the specifications,
a copy of the data shall be made avail- recommendations, and limitations
able to the Secretary upon request. issued or made by the manufacturer
(4) Option (4)—Design by a registered shall only be allowed after the manu-
professional engineer. (i) Sloping and facturer issues specific written ap-
benching systems not utilizing Option proval.
(1) or Option (2) or Option (3) under (iii) Manufacturer’s specifications,
paragraph (b) of this section shall be recommendations, and limitations, and
approved by a registered professional manufacturer’s approval to deviate
engineer. from the specifications, recommenda-
(ii) Designs shall be in written form tions, and limitations shall be in writ-
and shall include at least the following: ten form at the jobsite during con-
(A) The magnitude of the slopes that struction of the protective system.
were determined to be safe for the par- After that time this data may be
ticular project; stored off the jobsite, but a copy shall
(B) The configurations that were de- be made available to the Secretary
termined to be safe for the particular upon request.
project; and (3) Option (3)—Designs using other tab-
(C) The identity of the registered pro- ulated data. (i) Designs of support sys-
fessional engineer approving the de- tems, shield systems, or other protec-
sign. tive systems shall be selected from and
(iii) At least one copy of the design be in accordance with tabulated data,
shall be maintained at the jobsite such as tables and charts.
while the slope is being constructed. (ii) The tabulated data shall be in
After that time the design need not be written form and include all of the fol-
at the jobsite, but a copy shall be made lowing:
available to the Secretary upon re- (A) Identification of the parameters
quest. that affect the selection of a protective
(c) Design of support systems, shield system drawn from such data;
systems, and other protective systems. De- (B) Identification of the limits of use
signs of support systems shield sys- of the data;
tems, and other protective systems (C) Explanatory information as may
shall be selected and constructed by be necessary to aid the user in making
the employer or his designee and shall a correct selection of a protective sys-
be in accordance with the requirements tem from the data.
of paragraph (c)(1); or, in the alter- (iii) At least one copy of the tab-
native, paragraph (c)(2); or, in the al- ulated data, which identifies the reg-
ternative, paragraph (c)(3); or, in the istered professional engineer who ap-
alternative, paragraph (c)(4) as follows: proved the data, shall be maintained at
(1) Option (1)—Designs using appen- the jobsite during construction of the
dices A, C and D. Designs for timber protective system. After that time the
shoring in trenches shall be determined data may be stored off the jobsite, but
in accordance with the conditions and a copy of the data shall be made avail-
requirements set forth in appendices A able to the Secretary upon request.
and C to this subpart. Designs for alu- (4) Option (4)—Design by a registered
minum hydraulic shoring shall be in professional engineer. (i) Support sys-
accordance with paragraph (c)(2) of this tems, shield systems, and other protec-
section, but if manufacturer’s tab- tive systems not utilizing Option 1, Op-
ulated data cannot be utilized, designs tion 2 or Option 3, above, shall be ap-
shall be in accordance with appendix D. proved by a registered professional en-
(2) Option (2)—Designs Using Manufac- gineer.
turer’s Tabulated Data. (i) Design of sup- (ii) Designs shall be in written form
port systems, shield systems, or other and shall include the following:
366
(A) A plan indicating the sizes, types, stalling other structural members to
and configurations of the materials to carry the loads imposed on the support
be used in the protective system; and system.
(B) The identity of the registered (v) Removal shall begin at, and
professional engineer approving the de- progress from, the bottom of the exca-
sign. vation. Members shall be released slow-
(iii) At least one copy of the design ly so as to note any indication of pos-
shall be maintained at the jobsite dur- sible failure of the remaining members
ing construction of the protective sys- of the structure or possible cave-in of
tem. After that time, the design may the sides of the excavation.
be stored off the jobsite, but a copy of (vi) Backfilling shall progress to-
the design shall be made available to gether with the removal of support sys-
the Secretary upon request. tems from excavations.
(d) Materials and equipment. (1) Mate- (2) Additional requirements for support
rials and equipment used for protective systems for trench excavations. (i) Exca-
systems shall be free from damage or vation of material to a level no greater
defects that might impair their proper than 2 feet (.61 m) below the bottom of
function. the members of a support system shall
(2) Manufactured materials and be permitted, but only if the system is
equipment used for protective systems designed to resist the forces calculated
shall be used and maintained in a man- for the full depth of the trench, and
ner that is consistent with the rec- there are no indications while the
ommendations of the manufacturer, trench is open of a possible loss of soil
and in a manner that will prevent em- from behind or below the bottom of the
ployee exposure to hazards. support system.
(3) When material or equipment that (ii) Installation of a support system
is used for protective systems is dam- shall be closely coordinated with the
aged, a competent person shall exam- excavation of trenches.
ine the material or equipment and (f) Sloping and benching systems. Em-
evaluate its suitability for continued ployees shall not be permitted to work
use. If the competent person cannot as- on the faces of sloped or benched exca-
sure the material or equipment is able vations at levels above other employ-
to support the intended loads or is oth- ees except when employees at the lower
erwise suitable for safe use, then such levels are adequately protected from
material or equipment shall be re- the hazard of falling, rolling, or sliding
moved from service, and shall be evalu- material or equipment.
ated and approved by a registered pro- (g) Shield systems—(1) General. (i)
fessional engineer before being re- Shield systems shall not be subjected
turned to service. to loads exceeding those which the sys-
(e) Installation and removal of sup- tem was designed to withstand.
port—(1) General. (i) Members of sup- (ii) Shields shall be installed in a
port systems shall be securely con- manner to restrict lateral or other haz-
nected together to prevent sliding, fall- ardous movement of the shield in the
ing, kickouts, or other predictable fail- event of the application of sudden lat-
ure. eral loads.
(ii) Support systems shall be in- (iii) Employees shall be protected
stalled and removed in a manner that from the hazard of cave-ins when enter-
protects employees from cave-ins, ing or exiting the areas protected by
structural collapses, or from being shields.
struck by members of the support sys- (iv) Employees shall not be allowed
tem. in shields when shields are being in-
(iii) Individual members of support stalled, removed, or moved vertically.
systems shall not be subjected to loads (2) Additional requirement for shield
exceeding those which those members systems used in trench excavations. Exca-
were designed to withstand. vations of earth material to a level not
(iv) Before temporary removal of in- greater than 2 feet (.61 m) below the
dividual members begins, additional bottom of a shield shall be permitted,
precautions shall be taken to ensure but only if the shield is designed to re-
the safety of employees, such as in- sist the forces calculated for the full
367
Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–13 Edition)
depth of the trench, and there are no strength. Some moist granular soils exhibit
indications while the trench is open of apparent cohesion. Granular soil cannot be
a possible loss of soil from behind or molded when moist and crumbles easily
when dry.
below the bottom of the shield. Layered system means two or more dis-
tinctly different soil or rock types arranged
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART P OF PART in layers. Micaceous seams or weakened
1926—SOIL CLASSIFICATION planes in rock or shale are considered lay-
ered.
(a) Scope and application—(1) Scope. This
Moist soil means a condition in which a soil
appendix describes a method of classifying
looks and feels damp. Moist cohesive soil can
soil and rock deposits based on site and envi-
easily be shaped into a ball and rolled into
ronmental conditions, and on the structure
small diameter threads before crumbling.
and composition of the earth deposits. The
Moist granular soil that contains some cohe-
appendix contains definitions, sets forth re- sive material will exhibit signs of cohesion
quirements, and describes acceptable visual between particles.
and manual tests for use in classifying soils. Plastic means a property of a soil which al-
(2) Application. This appendix applies when lows the soil to be deformed or molded with-
a sloping or benching system is designed in out cracking, or appreciable volume change.
accordance with the requirements set forth Saturated soil means a soil in which the
in § 1926.652(b)(2) as a method of protection voids are filled with water. Saturation does
for employees from cave-ins. This appendix not require flow. Saturation, or near satura-
also applies when timber shoring for exca- tion, is necessary for the proper use of in-
vations is designed as a method of protection struments such as a pocket penetrometer or
from cave-ins in accordance with appendix C sheer vane.
to subpart P of part 1926, and when alu- Soil classification system means, for the pur-
minum hydraulic shoring is designed in ac- pose of this subpart, a method of catego-
cordance with appendix D. This appendix rizing soil and rock deposits in a hierarchy
also applies if other protective systems are of Stable Rock, Type A, Type B, and Type C,
designed and selected for use from data pre- in decreasing order of stability. The cat-
pared in accordance with the requirements egories are determined based on an analysis
set forth in § 1926.652(c), and the use of the of the properties and performance character-
data is predicated on the use of the soil clas- istics of the deposits and the environmental
sification system set forth in this appendix. conditions of exposure.
(b) Definitions. The definitions and exam- Stable rock means natural solid mineral
ples given below are based on, in whole or in matter that can be excavated with vertical
part, the following: American Society for sides and remain intact while exposed.
Testing Materials (ASTM) Standards D653–85 Submerged soil means soil which is under-
and D2488; The Unified Soils Classification water or is free seeping.
System, The U.S. Department of Agriculture Type A means cohesive soils with an
(USDA) Textural Classification Scheme; and unconfined compressive strength of 1.5 ton
The National Bureau of Standards Report per square foot (tsf) (144 kPa) or greater. Ex-
BSS–121. amples of cohesive soils are: clay, silty clay,
Cemented soil means a soil in which the par- sandy clay, clay loam and, in some cases,
ticles are held together by a chemical agent, silty clay loam and sandy clay loam. Ce-
such as calcium carbonate, such that a hand- mented soils such as caliche and hardpan are
size sample cannot be crushed into powder or also considered Type A. However, no soil is
individual soil particles by finger pressure. Type A if:
Cohesive soil means clay (fine grained soil), (i) The soil is fissured; or
or soil with a high clay content, which has (ii) The soil is subject to vibration from
cohesive strength. Cohesive soil does not heavy traffic, pile driving, or similar effects;
crumble, can be excavated with vertical or
sideslopes, and is plastic when moist. Cohe- (iii) The soil has been previously disturbed;
sive soil is hard to break up when dry, and or
exhibits significant cohesion when sub- (iv) The soil is part of a sloped, layered
merged. Cohesive soils include clayey silt, system where the layers dip into the exca-
sandy clay, silty clay, clay and organic clay. vation on a slope of four horizontal to one
Dry soil means soil that does not exhibit vertical (4H:1V) or greater; or
visible signs of moisture content. (v) The material is subject to other factors
Fissured means a soil material that has a that would require it to be classified as a less
tendency to break along definite planes of stable material.
fracture with little resistance, or a material Type B means:
that exhibits open cracks, such as tension (i) Cohesive soil with an unconfined com-
cracks, in an exposed surface. pressive strength greater than 0.5 tsf (48
Granular soil means gravel, sand, or silt, kPa) but less than 1.5 tsf (144 kPa); or
(coarse grained soil) with little or no clay (ii) Granular cohesionless soils including:
content. Granular soil has no cohesive angular gravel (similar to crushed rock),
368
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. A
silt, silt loam, sandy loam and, in some (4) Layered systems. In a layered system,
cases, silty clay loam and sandy clay loam. the system shall be classified in accordance
(iii) Previously disturbed soils except those with its weakest layer. However, each layer
which would otherwise be classed as Type C may be classified individually where a more
soil. stable layer lies under a less stable layer.
(iv) Soil that meets the unconfined com- (5) Reclassification. If, after classifying a de-
pressive strength or cementation require- posit, the properties, factors, or conditions
ments for Type A, but is fissured or subject affecting its classification change in any
to vibration; or way, the changes shall be evaluated by a
(v) Dry rock that is not stable; or competent person. The deposit shall be re-
(vi) Material that is part of a sloped, lay- classified as necessary to reflect the changed
ered system where the layers dip into the ex- circumstances.
cavation on a slope less steep than four hori- (d) Acceptable visual and manual tests—(1)
zontal to one vertical (4H:1V), but only if the Visual tests. Visual analysis is conducted to
material would otherwise be classified as determine qualitative information regarding
Type B. the excavation site in general, the soil adja-
Type C means: cent to the excavation, the soil forming the
(i) Cohesive soil with an unconfined com- sides of the open excavation, and the soil
pressive strength of 0.5 tsf (48 kPa) or less; or taken as samples from excavated material.
(ii) Granular soils including gravel, sand, (i) Observe samples of soil that are exca-
and loamy sand; or vated and soil in the sides of the excavation.
(iii) Submerged soil or soil from which Estimate the range of particle sizes and the
water is freely seeping; or relative amounts of the particle sizes. Soil
(iv) Submerged rock that is not stable, or that is primarily composed of fine-grained
(v) Material in a sloped, layered system material is cohesive material. Soil composed
where the layers dip into the excavation or a primarily of coarse-grained sand or gravel is
slope of four horizontal to one vertical granular material.
(4H:1V) or steeper. (ii) Observe soil as it is excavated. Soil
Unconfined compressive strength means the that remains in clumps when excavated is
load per unit area at which a soil will fail in cohesive. Soil that breaks up easily and does
compression. It can be determined by labora- not stay in clumps is granular.
tory testing, or estimated in the field using (iii) Observe the side of the opened exca-
a pocket penetrometer, by thumb penetra- vation and the surface area adjacent to the
tion tests, and other methods. excavation. Crack-like openings such as ten-
Wet soil means soil that contains signifi- sion cracks could indicate fissured material.
cantly more moisture than moist soil, but in If chunks of soil spall off a vertical side, the
such a range of values that cohesive material soil could be fissured. Small spalls are evi-
will slump or begin to flow when vibrated. dence of moving ground and are indications
Granular material that would exhibit cohe- of potentially hazardous situations.
sive properties when moist will lose those co- (iv) Observe the area adjacent to the exca-
hesive properties when wet. vation and the excavation itself for evidence
(c) Requirements—(1) Classification of soil of existing utility and other underground
and rock deposits. Each soil and rock deposit structures, and to identify previously dis-
shall be classified by a competent person as turbed soil.
Stable Rock, Type A, Type B, or Type C in (v) Observe the opened side of the exca-
accordance with the definitions set forth in vation to identify layered systems. Examine
paragraph (b) of this appendix. layered systems to identify if the layers
(2) Basis of classification. The classification slope toward the excavation. Estimate the
of the deposits shall be made based on the re- degree of slope of the layers.
sults of at least one visual and at least one (vi) Observe the area adjacent to the exca-
manual analysis. Such analyses shall be con- vation and the sides of the opened exca-
ducted by a competent person using tests de- vation for evidence of surface water, water
scribed in paragraph (d) below, or in other seeping from the sides of the excavation, or
recognized methods of soil classification and the location of the level of the water table.
testing such as those adopted by the Amer- (vii) Observe the area adjacent to the exca-
ica Society for Testing Materials, or the U.S. vation and the area within the excavation
Department of Agriculture textural classi- for sources of vibration that may affect the
fication system. stability of the excavation face.
(3) Visual and manual analyses. The visual (2) Manual tests. Manual analysis of soil
and manual analyses, such as those noted as samples is conducted to determine quan-
being acceptable in paragraph (d) of this ap- titative as well as qualitative properties of
pendix, shall be designed and conducted to soil and to provide more information in
provide sufficient quantitative and quali- order to classify soil properly.
tative information as may be necessary to (i) Plasticity. Mold a moist or wet sample of
identify properly the properties, factors, and soil into a ball and attempt to roll it into
conditions affecting the classification of the threads as thin as 1⁄8-inch in diameter. Cohe-
deposits. sive material can be successfully rolled into
369
Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. B 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–13 Edition)
threads without crumbling. For example, if the two, pulverize the dried clumps of the
at least a two inch (50 mm) length of 1⁄8-inch sample by hand or by stepping on them. If
thread can be held on one end without tear- the clumps do not pulverize easily, the mate-
ing, the soil is cohesive. rial is cohesive with fissures. If they pul-
(ii) Dry strength. If the soil is dry and verize easily into very small fragments, the
crumbles on its own or with moderate pres- material is granular.
sure into individual grains or fine powder, it
is granular (any combination of gravel, sand, APPENDIX B TO SUBPART P OF PART
or silt). If the soil is dry and falls into 1926—SLOPING AND BENCHING
clumps which break up into smaller clumps,
but the smaller clumps can only be broken (a) Scope and application. This appendix
up with difficulty, it may be clay in any contains specifications for sloping and
combination with gravel, sand or silt. If the benching when used as methods of protecting
dry soil breaks into clumps which do not employees working in excavations from
break up into small clumps and which can cave-ins. The requirements of this appendix
only be broken with difficulty, and there is apply when the design of sloping and bench-
no visual indication the soil is fissured, the ing protective systems is to be performed in
soil may be considered unfissured. accordance with the requirements set forth
(iii) Thumb penetration. The thumb penetra- in § 1926.652(b)(2).
tion test can be used to estimate the (b) Definitions.
unconfined compressive strength of cohesive Actual slope means the slope to which an
soils. (This test is based on the thumb pene- excavation face is excavated.
tration test described in American Society Distress means that the soil is in a condi-
for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standard tion where a cave-in is imminent or is likely
designation D2488—‘‘Standard Recommended to occur. Distress is evidenced by such phe-
Practice for Description of Soils (Visual— nomena as the development of fissures in the
Manual Procedure).’’) Type A soils with an face of or adjacent to an open excavation;
unconfined compressive strength of 1.5 tsf the subsidence of the edge of an excavation;
can be readily indented by the thumb; how- the slumping of material from the face or
ever, they can be penetrated by the thumb the bulging or heaving of material from the
only with very great effort. Type C soils with bottom of an excavation; the spalling of ma-
an unconfined compressive strength of 0.5 tsf terial from the face of an excavation; and
can be easily penetrated several inches by ravelling, i.e., small amounts of material
the thumb, and can be molded by light finger such as pebbles or little clumps of material
pressure. This test should be conducted on suddenly separating from the face of an exca-
an undisturbed soil sample, such as a large vation and trickling or rolling down into the
clump of spoil, as soon as practicable after excavation.
excavation to keep to a miminum the effects Maximum allowable slope means the steep-
of exposure to drying influences. If the exca- est incline of an excavation face that is ac-
vation is later exposed to wetting influences ceptable for the most favorable site condi-
(rain, flooding), the classification of the soil tions as protection against cave-ins, and is
must be changed accordingly. expressed as the ratio of horizontal distance
(iv) Other strength tests. Estimates of to vertical rise (H:V).
unconfined compressive strength of soils can Short term exposure means a period of time
also be obtained by use of a pocket pene- less than or equal to 24 hours that an exca-
trometer or by using a hand-operated vation is open.
shearvane. (c) Requirements—(1) Soil classification. Soil
(v) Drying test. The basic purpose of the and rock deposits shall be classified in ac-
drying test is to differentiate between cohe- cordance with appendix A to subpart P of
sive material with fissures, unfissured cohe- part 1926.
sive material, and granular material. The (2) Maximum allowable slope. The maximum
procedure for the drying test involves drying allowable slope for a soil or rock deposit
a sample of soil that is approximately one shall be determined from Table B–1 of this
inch thick (2.54 cm) and six inches (15.24 cm) appendix.
in diameter until it is thoroughly dry: (3) Actual slope. (i) The actual slope shall
(A) If the sample develops cracks as it not be steeper than the maximum allowable
dries, significant fissures are indicated. slope.
(B) Samples that dry without cracking are (ii) The actual slope shall be less steep
to be broken by hand. If considerable force is than the maximum allowable slope, when
necessary to break a sample, the soil has sig- there are signs of distress. If that situation
nificant cohesive material content. The soil occurs, the slope shall be cut back to an ac-
can be classified as a unfissured cohesive ma- tual slope which is at least 1⁄2 horizontal to
terial and the unconfined compressive one vertical (1⁄2H:1V) less steep than the
strength should be determined. maximum allowable slope.
(C) If a sample breaks easily by hand, it is (iii) When surcharge loads from stored ma-
either a fissured cohesive material or a terial or equipment, operating equipment, or
granular material. To distinguish between traffic are present, a competent person shall
370
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. B
determine the degree to which the actual adjacent structures shall be evaluated in ac-
slope must be reduced below the maximum cordance with § 1926.651(i).
allowable slope, and shall assure that such (4) Configurations. Configurations of slop-
reduction is achieved. Surcharge loads from ing and benching systems shall be in accord-
ance with Figure B–1.
Figure B–1
Slope Configurations
(All slopes stated below are in the horizontal to vertical ratio)
B–1.1 Excavations made in Type A soil.
1. All simple slope excavation 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope
of 3⁄4:1.
SIMPLE SLOPE—GENERAL
EC30OC91.017</GPH>
Exception: Simple slope excavations which are open 24 hours or less (short term) and which
are 12 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope of 1⁄2:1.
371
EC30OC91.016</GPH>
SIMPLE SLOPE—SHORT TERM

2. All benched excavations 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope
of 3⁄4 to 1 and maximum bench dimensions as follows:
SIMPLE BENCH
EC30OC91.020</GPH>
MULTIPLE BENCH
3. All excavations 8 feet or less in depth which have unsupported vertically sided lower por-
tions shall have a maximum vertical side of 31⁄2 feet.
EC30OC91.019</GPH>
372
EC30OC91.018</GPH>
UNSUPPORTED VERTICALLY SIDED LOWER PORTION—MAXIMUM 8 FEET IN DEPTH

All excavations more than 8 feet but not more than 12 feet in depth which unsupported
vertically sided lower portions shall have a maximum allowable slope of 1:1 and a maximum
vertical side of 31⁄2 feet.
UNSUPPORTED VERTICALLY SIDED LOWER PORTION—MAXIMUM 12 FEET IN DEPTH

All excavations 20 feet or less in depth which have vertically sided lower portions that are
supported or shielded shall have a maximum allowable slope of 3⁄4:1. The support or shield sys-
tem must extend at least 18 inches above the top of the vertical side.
EC30OC91.023</GPH>
SUPPORTED OR SHIELDED VERTICALLY SIDED LOWER PORTION

EC30OC91.022</GPH>
4. All other simple slope, compound slope, and vertically sided lower portion excavations
shall be in accordance with the other options permitted under § 1926.652(b).
373
EC30OC91.021</GPH>
B–1.2 Excavations Made in Type B Soil
1. All simple slope excavations 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable
slope of 1:1.
SIMPLE SLOPE
2. All benched excavations 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope
of 1:1 and maximum bench dimensions as follows:
SINGLE BENCH
EC30OC91.026</GPH>
MULTIPLE BENCH
EC30OC91.025</GPH>
3. All excavations 20 feet or less in depth which have vertically sided lower portions shall
be shielded or supported to a height at least 18 inches above the top of the vertical side. All
such excavations shall have a maximum allowable slope of 1:1.
374
EC30OC91.024</GPH>
VERTICALLY SIDED LOWER PORTION

4. All other sloped excavations shall be in accordance with the other options permitted in
§ 1926.652(b).
B–1.3 Excavations Made in Type C Soil

1. All simple slope excavations 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable
slope of 11⁄2:1.
SIMPLE SLOPE
2. All excavations 20 feet or less in depth which have vertically sided lower portions shall
be shielded or supported to a height at least 18 inches above the top of the vertical side. All
such excavations shall have a maximum allowable slope of 11⁄2:1.
EC30OC91.029</GPH>
VERTICAL SIDED LOWER PORTION

EC30OC91.028</GPH>
§ 1926.652(b).
375
EC30OC91.027</GPH>
B–1.4 Excavations Made in Layered Soils
1. All excavations 20 feet or less in depth made in layered soils shall have a maximum al-
lowable slope for each layer as set forth below.
376
EC30OC91.030</GPH>
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. C
§ 1926.652(b).
APPENDIX C TO SUBPART P OF PART (b) Soil Classification. In order to use the

1926—TIMBER SHORING FOR TRENCHES data presented in this appendix, the soil type
or types in which the excavation is made
(a) Scope. This appendix contains informa- must first be determined using the soil clas-
tion that can be used timber shoring is pro- sification method set forth in appendix A of
vided as a method of protection from cave- subpart P of this part.
ins in trenches that do not exceed 20 feet (6.1 (c) Presentation of Information. Information
m) in depth. This appendix must be used is presented in several forms as follows:
when design of timber shoring protective (1) Information is presented in tabular
systems is to be performed in accordance form in Tables C–1.1, C–1.2, and C–1.3, and Ta-
with § 1926.652(c)(1). Other timber shoring bles C–2.1, C–2.2 and C–2.3 following para-
configurations; other systems of support graph (g) of the appendix. Each table pre-
such as hydraulic and pneumatic systems; sents the minimum sizes of timber members
and other protective systems such as slop- to use in a shoring system, and each table
ing, benching, shielding, and freezing sys- contains data only for the particular soil
tems must be designed in accordance with type in which the excavation or portion of
the requirements set forth in § 1926.652(b) and
§ 1926.652(c).
377
EC30OC91.031</GPH>
Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. C 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–13 Edition)
the excavation is made. The data are ar- (B) When vertical loads imposed on cross
ranged to allow the user the flexibility to se- braces exceed a 240-pound gravity load dis-
lect from among several acceptable configu- tributed on a one-foot section of the center
rations of members based on varying the of the crossbrace.
horizontal spacing of the crossbraces. Stable (C) When surcharge loads are present from
rock is exempt from shoring requirements equipment weighing in excess of 20,000
and therefore, no data are presented for this pounds.
condition. (D) When only the lower portion of a
(2) Information concerning the basis of the trench is shored and the remaining portion
tabular data and the limitations of the data of the trench is sloped or benched unless:
is presented in paragraph (d) of this appen- The sloped portion is sloped at an angle less
dix, and on the tables themselves. steep than three horizontal to one vertical;
(3) Information explaining the use of the or the members are selected from the tables
tabular data is presented in paragraph (e) of for use at a depth which is determined from
this appendix. the top of the overall trench, and not from
(4) Information illustrating the use of the the toe of the sloped portion.
tabular data is presented in paragraph (f) of (e) Use of Tables. The members of the shor-
this appendix.
ing system that are to be selected using this
(5) Miscellaneous notations regarding Ta-
information are the cross braces, the
bles C–1.1 through C–1.3 and Tables C–2.1
uprights, and the wales, where wales are re-
through C–2.3 are presented in paragraph (g)
quired. Minimum sizes of members are speci-
of this Appendix.
fied for use in different types of soil. There
(d) Basis and limitations of the data—(1) Di-
are six tables of information, two for each
mensions of timber members. (i) The sizes of the
soil type. The soil type must first be deter-
timber members listed in Tables C–1.1
through C–1.3 are taken from the National mined in accordance with the soil classifica-
Bureau of Standards (NBS) report, ‘‘Rec- tion system described in appendix A to sub-
ommended Technical Provisions for Con- part P of part 1926. Using the appropriate
struction Practice in Shoring and Sloping of table, the selection of the size and spacing of
Trenches and Excavations.’’ In addition, the members is then made. The selection is
where NBS did not recommend specific sizes based on the depth and width of the trench
of members, member sizes are based on an where the members are to be installed and,
analysis of the sizes required for use by ex- in most instances, the selection is also based
isting codes and on empirical practice. on the horizontal spacing of the crossbraces.
(ii) The required dimensions of the mem- Instances where a choice of horizontal spac-
bers listed in Tables C–1.1 through C–1.3 refer ing of crossbracing is available, the hori-
to actual dimensions and not nominal di- zontal spacing of the crossbraces must be
mensions of the timber. Employers wanting chosen by the user before the size of any
to use nominal size shoring are directed to member can be determined. When the soil
Tables C–2.1 through C–2.3, or have this type, the width and depth of the trench, and
choice under § 1926.652(c)(3), and are referred the horizontal spacing of the crossbraces are
to The Corps of Engineers, The Bureau of known, the size and vertical spacing of the
Reclamation or data from other acceptable crossbraces, the size and vertical spacing of
sources. the wales, and the size and horizontal spac-
(2) Limitation of application. (i) It is not ining of the uprights can be read from the ap-
tended that the timber shoring specification propriate table.
apply to every situation that may be experi- (f) Examples to Illustrate the Use of Tables C–
enced in the field. These data were developed 1.1 through C–1.3.
to apply to the situations that are most (1) Example 1.
commonly experienced in current trenching A trench dug in Type A soil is 13 feet deep
practice. Shoring systems for use in situa- and five feet wide.
tions that are not covered by the data in this From Table C–1.1, for acceptable arrange-
appendix must be designed as specified in ments of timber can be used.
§ 1926.652(c).
(ii) When any of the following conditions Arrangement #B1
are present, the members specified in the ta- Space 4×4 crossbraces at six feet hori-
bles are not considered adequate. Either an zontally and four feet vertically.
alternate timber shoring system must be de-
Wales are not required.
signed or another type of protective system
Space 3×8 uprights at six feet horizontally.
designed in accordance with § 1926.652.
(A) When loads imposed by structures or This arrangement is commonly called ‘‘skip
by stored material adjacent to the trench shoring.’’
weigh in excess of the load imposed by a two- Arrangement #B2
foot soil surcharge. The term ‘‘adjacent’’ as
used here means the area within a horizontal Space 4×6 crossbraces at eight feet hori-
distance from the edge of the trench equal to zontally and four feet vertically.
the depth of the trench. Space 8×8 wales at four feet vertically.
378
Space 2×6 uprights at four feet hori- Space 12×12 wales at five feet vertically.
zontally. Position 2×6 uprights in a close sheeting
configuration unless water pressure must be
Arrangement #B3 resisted. Tight sheeting must be used where
Space 6×6 crossbraces at 10 feet hori- water must be retained.
zontally and four feet vertically. (4) Example 4.
Space 8×10 wales at four feet vertically. A trench dug in Type C soil is 20 feet deep
Space 2×6 uprights at five feet hori- and 11 feet wide. The size and spacing of
zontally. members for the section of trench that is
over 15 feet in depth is determined using
Arrangement #B4
Table C–1.3. Only one arrangement of mem-
Space 6×6 crossbraces at 12 feet hori- bers is provided.
zontally and four feet vertically. Space 8×10 crossbraces at six feet hori-
Space 10×10 wales at four feet vertically. zontally and five feet vertically.
Spaces 3×8 uprights at six feet hori- Space 12×12 wales at five feet vertically.
zontally.
Use 3×6 tight sheeting.
(2) Example 2.
A trench dug in Type B soil in 13 feet deep Use of Tables C–2.1 through C–2.3 would fol-
and five feet wide. From Table C–1.2 three low the same procedures.
acceptable arrangements of members are (g) Notes for all Tables.
listed. 1. Member sizes at spacings other than in-
dicated are to be determined as specified in
Arrangement #B1 § 1926.652(c), ‘‘Design of Protective Systems.’’
Space 6×6 crossbraces at six feet hori- 2. When conditions are saturated or sub-
zontally and five feet vertically. merged use Tight Sheeting. Tight Sheeting
Space 8×8 wales at five feet vertically. refers to the use of specially-edged timber
Space 2×6 uprights at two feet hori- planks (e.g., tongue and groove) at least
zontally. three inches thick, steel sheet piling, or
similar construction that when driven or
Arrangement #B2 placed in position provide a tight wall to re-
Space 6×8 crossbraces at eight feet hori- sist the lateral pressure of water and to pre-
zontally and five feet vertically. vent the loss of backfill material. Close
Space 10×10 wales at five feet vertically. Sheeting refers to the placement of planks
Space 2×6 uprights at two feet hori- side-by-side allowing as little space as pos-
zontally. sible between them.
3. All spacing indicated is measured center
Arrangement #B3 to center.
Space 8×8 crossbraces at 10 feet hori- 4. Wales to be installed with greater di-
zontally and five feet vertically. mension horizontal.
Space 10×12 wales at five feet vertically. 5. If the vertical distance from the center
Space 2×6 uprights at two feet vertically. of the lowest crossbrace to the bottom of the
(3) Example 3. trench exceeds two and one-half feet,
A trench dug in Type C soil is 13 feet deep uprights shall be firmly embedded or a
and five feet wide. mudsill shall be used. Where uprights are
From Table C–1.3 two acceptable arrange- embedded, the vertical distance from the
ments of members can be used. center of the lowest crossbrace to the bot-
tom of the trench shall not exceed 36 inches.
Arrangement #B1 When mudsills are used, the vertical dis-
Space 8×8 crossbraces at six feet hori- tance shall not exceed 42 inches. Mudsills are
zontally and five feet vertically. wales that are installed at the toe of the
Space 10×12 wales at five feet vertically. trench side.
Position 2×6 uprights as closely together as 6. Trench jacks may be used in lieu of or in
possible. combination with timber crossbraces.
If water must be retained use special 7. Placement cf crossbraces. When the
tongue and groove uprights to form tight vertical spacing of crossbraces is four feet,
sheeting. place the top crossbrace no more than two
feet below the top of the trench. When the
Arrangement #B2
vertical spacing of crossbraces is five feet,
Space 8×10 crossbraces at eight feet hori- place the top crossbrace no more than 2.5
zontally and five feet vertically. feet below the top of the trench.
379
380
EC30OC91.032</GPH>
381
EC30OC91.033</GPH>
382
EC30OC91.034</GPH>
383
EC30OC91.035</GPH>
384
EC30OC91.036</GPH>
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. D
APPENDIX D TO SUBPART P OF PART do not exceed 20 feet (6.1m) in depth. This ap-
1926—ALUMINUM HYDRAULIC SHOR- pendix must be used when design of the alu-
ING FOR TRENCHES minum hydraulic protective system cannot
be performed in accordance with
(a) Scope. This appendix contains informa- § 1926.652(c)(2).
tion that can be used when aluminum hy- (b) Soil Classification. In order to use data
draulic shoring is provided as a method of presented in this appendix, the soi1 type or
protection against cave-ins in trenches that types in which the excavation is made must
385
EC30OC91.037</GPH>
Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. D 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–13 Edition)
first be determined using the soil classifica- bles are not considered adequate. In this
tion method set forth in appendix A of sub- case, an alternative aluminum hydraulic
part P of part 1926. shoring system or other type of protective
(c) Presentation of Information. Information system must be designed in accordance with
is presented in several forms as follows: § 1926.652.
(1) Information is presented in tabular (A) When vertical loads imposed on cross
form in Tables D–1.1, D–1.2, D–1.3 and E–1.4. braces exceed a 100 Pound gravity load dis-
Each table presents the maximum vertical tributed on a one foot section of the center
and horizontal spacings that may be used of the hydraulic cylinder.
with various aluminum member sizes and (B) When surcharge loads are present from
various hydraulic cylinder sizes. Each table equipment weighing in excess of 20,000
contains data only for the particular soil pounds.
type in which the excavation or portion of (C) When only the lower portion or a
the excavation is made. Tables D–1.1 and D– trench is shored and the remaining portion
1.2 are for vertical shores in Types A and B of the trench is sloped or benched unless:
soil. Tables D–1.3 and D1.4 are for horizontal The sloped portion is sloped at an angle less
waler systems in Types B and C soil. steep than three horizontal to one vertical;
(2) Information concerning the basis of the or the members are selected from the tables
tabular data and the limitations of the data for use at a depth which is determined from
is presented in paragraph (d) of this appen- the top of the overall trench, and not from
dix. the toe of the sloped portion.
(3) Information explaining the use of the (e) Use of Tables D–1.1, D–1.2, D–1.3 and D–
tabular data is presented in paragraph (e) of 1.4. The members of the shoring system that
this appendix. are to be selected using this information are
(4) Information illustrating the use of the the hydraulic cylinders, and either the
tabular data is presented in paragraph (f) of vertical shores or the horizontal wales. When
this appendix. a waler system is used the vertical timber
(5) Miscellaneous notations (footnotes) re- sheeting to be used is also selected from
garding Table D–1.1 through D–1.4 are pre- these tables. The Tables D–1.1 and D–1.2 for
sented in paragraph (g) of this appendix. vertical shores are used in Type A and B
(6) Figures, illustrating typical installa- soils that do not require sheeting. Type B
tions of hydraulic shoring, are included just soils that may require sheeting, and Type C
prior to the Tables. The illustrations page is soils that always require sheeting are found
entitled ‘‘Aluminum Hydraulic Shoring; in the horizontal wale Tables D–1.3 and D–1.4.
Typical Installations.’’ The soil type must first be determined in ac-
(d) Basis and limitations of the data. (1) cordance with the soil classification system
Vertical shore rails and horizontal wales are described in appendix A to subpart P of part
those that meet the Section Modulus re- 1926. Using the appropriate table, the selec-
quirements in the D–1 Tables. Aluminum tion of the size and spacing of the members
material is 6061–T6 or material of equivalent is made. The selection is based on the depth
strength and properties. and width of the trench where the members
(2) Hydraulic cylinders specifications. (i) 2- are to be installed. In these tables the
inch cylinders shall be a minimum 2-inch in- vertical spacing is held constant at four feet
side diameter with a minimum safe working on center. The tables show the maximum
capacity of no less than 18,000 pounds axial horizontal spacing of cylinders allowed for
compressive load at maximum extension. each size of wale in the waler system tables,
Maximum extension is to include full range and in the vertical shore tables, the hydrau-
of cylinder extensions as recommended by lic cylinder horizontal spacing is the same as
product manufaturer. the vertical shore spacing.
(ii) 3-inch cylinders shall be a minimum 3- (f) Example to Illustrate the Use of the Tables:
inch inside diameter with a safe working ca- (1) Example 1:
pacity of not less than 30,000 pounds axial A trench dug in Type A soil is 6 feet deep
compressive load at extensions as rec- and 3 feet wide. From Table D–1.1: Find
ommended by product manufacturer. vertical shores and 2 inch diameter cylinders
(3) Limitation of application. spaced 8 feet on center (o.c.) horizontally and
(i) It is not intended that the aluminum 4 feet on center (o.c.) vertically. (See Figures
hydraulic specification apply to every situa- 1 & 3 for typical installations.)
tion that may be experienced in the field. (2) Example 2:
These data were developed to apply to the A trench is dug in Type B soil that does
situations that are most commonly experi- not require sheeting, 13 feet deep and 5 feet
enced in current trenching practice. Shoring wide. From Table D–1.2: Find vertical shores
systems for use in situations that are not and 2 inch diameter cylinders spaced 6.5 feet
covered by the data in this appendix must be o.c. horizontally and 4 feet o.c. vertically.
otherwise designed as specified in (See Figures 1 & 3 for typical installations.)
§ 1926.652(c). (3) A trench is dug in Type B soil that does
(ii) When any of the following conditions not require sheeting, but does experience
are present, the members specified in the Ta- some minor raveling of the trench face. The
386
trench is 16 feet deep and 9 feet wide. From (2) 2 inch diameter cylinders, at this width,
Table D–1.2: Find vertical shores and 2 inch shall have structural steel tube
diameter cylinder (with special oversleeves (3.5×3.5×0.1875) oversleeves, or structural
as designated by footnote #B2) spaced 5.5 feet oversleeves of manufacturer’s specification,
o.c. horizontally and 4 feet o.c. vertically, extending the full, collapsed length.
plywood (per footnote (g)(7) to the D–1 Table) (3) Hydraulic cylinders capacities. (i) 2
should be used behind the shores. (See Fig- inch cylinders shall be a minimum 2-inch in-
ures 2 & 3 for typical installations.) side diameter with a safe working capacity
(4) Example 4: A trench is dug in pre- of not less than 18,000 pounds axial compres-
viously disturbed Type B soil, with charac- sive load at maximum extension. Maximum
teristics of a Type C soil, and will require extension is to include full range of cylinder
sheeting. The trench is 18 feet deep and 12 extensions as recommended by product man-
feet wide. 8 foot horizontal spacing between ufacturer.
cylinders is desired for working space. From (ii) 3-inch cylinders shall be a minimum 3-
Table D–1.3: Find horizontal wale with a sec- inch inside diameter with a safe work capac-
tion modulus of 14.0 spaced at 4 feet o.c. ity of not less than 30,000 pounds axial com-
vertically and 3 inch diameter cylinder pressive load at maximum extension. Max-
spaced at 9 feet maximum o.c. horizontally. imum extension is to include full range of
3×12 timber sheeting is required at close cylinder extensions as recommended by
spacing vertically. (See Figure 4 for typical product manufacturer.
installation.)
(4) All spacing indicated is measured cen-
(5) Example 5: A trench is dug in Type C
ter to center.
soil, 9 feet deep and 4 feet wide. Horizontal
cylinder spacing in excess of 6 feet is desired (5) Vertical shoring rails shall have a min-
for working space. From Table D–1.4: Find imum section modulus of 0.40 inch.
horizontal wale with a section modulus of 7.0 (6) When vertical shores are used, there
and 2 inch diameter cylinders spaced at 6.5 must be a minimum of three shores spaced
feet o.c. horizontally. Or, find horizontal equally, horizontally, in a group.
wale with a 14.0 section modulus and 3 inch (7) Plywood shall be 1.125 in. thick
diameter cylinder spaced at 10 feet o.c. hori- softwood or 0.75 inch. thick, 14 ply, arctic
zontally. Both wales are spaced 4 feet o.c. white birch (Finland form). Please note that
vertically. 3×12 timber sheeting is required plywood is not intended as a structural
at close spacing vertically. (See Figure 4 for member, but only for prevention of local rav-
typical installation.) eling (sloughing of the trench face) between
(g) Footnotes, and general notes, for Tables shores.
D–1.1, D–1.2, D–1.3, and D–1.4. (8) See appendix C for timber specifica-
(1) For applications other than those listed tions.
in the tables, refer to § 1926.652(c)(2) for use of (9) Wales are calculated for simple span
manufacturer’s tabulated data. For trench conditions.
depths in excess of 20 feet, refer to (10) See appendix D, item (d), for basis and
§ 1926.652(c)(2) and § 1926.652(c)(3). limitations of the data.
387
388
EC30OC91.038</GPH>
389
EC30OC91.039</GPH>
390
EC30OC91.040</GPH>
391
EC30OC91.041</GPH>
392
EC30OC91.042</GPH>
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. E
APPENDIX E TO SUBPART P OF PART 1926—ALTERNATIVES TO TIMBER SHORING
393
EC30OC91.043</GPH>
Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. F 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–13 Edition)
APPENDIX F TO SUBPART P OF PART part P for excavations 20 feet or less in

1926—SELECTION OF PROTECTIVE depth. Protective systems for use in exca-
SYSTEMS vations more than 20 feet in depth must be
designed by a registered professional engi-
The following figures are a graphic sum- neer in accordance with § 1926.652 (b) and (c).
mary of the requirements contained in sub-
394
EC30OC91.044</GPH>
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. F
395
EC30OC91.045</GPH>
Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. F 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–13 Edition)
396
EC30OC91.046</GPH>
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. F
397
EC30OC91.047</GPH>
Subpart Q—Concrete and forms and shores are removed, in order

Masonry Construction to support partially cured concrete and
construction loads.
(7) Shore means a supporting member
AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours that resists a compressive force im-
and Safety Standards Act (Construction
Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); Secs. 4, 6 and 8
posed by a load.
Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (8) Vertical slip forms means forms
(29 U.S.C. 653, 655, and 657); Secretary of La- which are jacked vertically during the
bor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR placement of concrete.
25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), or 1–90 (55 FR 9033), (9) Jacking operation means the task
as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911. of lifting a slab (or group of slabs)
SOURCE: 53 FR 22643, June 16, 1988, unless vertically from one location to another
otherwise noted. (e.g., from the casting location to a
temporary (parked) location, or from a
§ 1926.700 Scope, application, and defi- temporary location to another tem-
nitions applicable to this subpart. porary location, or to its final location
(a) Scope and application. This sub- in the structure), during the construc-
part sets forth requirements to protect tion of a building/structure where the
all construction employees from the lift-slab process is being used.
hazards associated with concrete and [53 FR 22643, June 16, 1988, as amended at 55
masonry construction operations per- FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990]
formed in workplaces covered under 29
CFR part 1926. In addition to the re- § 1926.701 General requirements.
quirements in subpart Q, other rel- (a) Construction loads. No construc-
evant provisions in parts 1910 and 1926 tion loads shall be placed on a concrete
apply to concrete and masonry con- structure or portion of a concrete
struction operations. structure unless the employer deter-
(b) Definitions applicable to this sub- mines, based on information received
part. In addition to the definitions set from a person who is qualified in struc-
forth in § 1926.32, the following defini- tural design, that the structure or por-
tions apply to this subpart. tion of the structure is capable of sup-
(1) Bull float means a tool used to porting the loads.
spread out and smooth concrete. (b) Reinforcing steel. All protruding
(2) Formwork means the total system reinforcing steel, onto and into which
of support for freshly placed or par- employees could fall, shall be guarded
tially cured concrete, including the to eliminate the hazard of impalement.
mold or sheeting (form) that is in con- (c) Post-tensioning operations. (1) No
tact with the concrete as well as all employee (except those essential to the
supporting members including shores, post-tensioning operations) shall be
reshores, hardware, braces, and related permitted to be behind the jack during
hardware. tensioning operations.
(3) Lift slab means a method of con- (2) Signs and barriers shall be erected
crete construction in which floor, and to limit employee access to the post-
roof slabs are cast on or at ground level tensioning area during tensioning oper-
and, using jacks, lifted into position. ations.
(4) Limited access zone means an area (d) Riding concrete buckets. No em-
alongside a masonry wall, which is ployee shall be permitted to ride con-
under construction, and which is clear- crete buckets.
ly demarcated to limit access by em- (e) Working under loads. (1) No em-
ployees. ployee shall be permitted to work
(5) Precast concrete means concrete under concrete buckets while buckets
members (such as walls, panels, slabs, are being elevated or lowered into posi-
columns, and beams) which have been tion.
formed, cast, and cured prior to final (2) To the extent practical, elevated
placement in a structure. concrete buckets shall be routed so
(6) Reshoring means the construction that no employee, or the fewest num-
operation in which shoring equipment ber of employees, are exposed to the
(also called reshores or reshoring hazards associated with falling con-
equipment) is placed, as the original crete buckets.
398
(f) Personal protective equipment. No (g) Tremies. Sections of tremies and
employee shall be permitted to apply a similar concrete conveyances shall be
cement, sand, and water mixture secured with wire rope (or equivalent
through a pneumatic hose unless the materials) in addition to the regular
employee is wearing protective head couplings or connections.
and face equipment. (h) Bull floats. Bull float handles,
[53 FR 22643, June 16, 1988, as amended at 59 used where they might contact ener-
FR 40730, Aug. 9, 1994] gized electrical conductors, shall be
constructed of nonconductive material
§ 1926.702 Requirements for equip- or insulated with a nonconductive
ment and tools. sheath whose electrical and mechan-
(a) Bulk cement storage. (1) Bulk stor- ical characteristics provide the equiva-
age bins, containers, and silos shall be lent protection of a handle constructed
equipped with the following: of nonconductive material.
(i) Conical or tapered bottoms; and (i) Masonry saws. (1) Masonry saws
(ii) Mechanical or pneumatic means shall be guarded with a semicircular
of starting the flow of material. enclosure over the blade.
(2) No employee shall be permitted to (2) A method for retaining blade frag-
enter storage facilities unless the ejec- ments shall be incorporated in the de-
tion system has been shut down, locked sign of the semicircular enclosure.
out, and tagged to indicate that the (j) Lockout/Tagout Procedures. (1) No
ejection system is not to be operated. employee shall be permitted to perform
(b) Concrete mixers. Concrete mixers maintenance or repair activity on
with one cubic yard (.8 m3) or larger equipment (such as compressors, mix-
loading skips shall be equipped with ers, screens or pumps used for concrete
the following: and masonry construction activities)
(1) A mechanical device to clear the where the inadvertent operation of the
skip of materials; and equipment could occur and cause in-
(2) Guardrails installed on each side jury, unless all potentially hazardous
of the skip. energy sources have been locked out
(c) Power concrete trowels. Powered and tagged.
and rotating type concrete troweling
(2) Tags shall read Do Not Start or
machines that are manually guided
similar language to indicate that the
shall be equipped with a control switch
equipment is not to be operated.
that will automatically shut off the
power whenever the hands of the oper- § 1926.703 Requirements for cast-in-
ator are removed from the equipment place concrete.
handles.
(d) Concrete buggies. Concrete buggy (a) General requirements for formwork.
handles shall not extend beyond the (1) Formwork shall be designed, fab-
wheels on either side of the buggy. ricated, erected, supported, braced and
(e) Concrete pumping systems. (1) Con- maintained so that it will be capable of
crete pumping systems using discharge supporting without failure all vertical
pipes shall be provided with pipe sup- and lateral loads that may reasonably
ports designed for 100 percent overload. be anticipated to be applied to the
(2) Compressed air hoses used on con- formwork. Formwork which is de-
crete pumping system shall be provided signed, fabricated, erected, supported,
with positive fail-safe joint connectors braced and maintained in conformance
to prevent separation of sections when with the appendix to this section will
pressurized. be deemed to meet the requirements of
(f) Concrete buckets. (1) Concrete this paragraph.
buckets equipped with hydraulic or (2) Drawings or plans, including all
pneumatic gates shall have positive revisions, for the jack layout,
safety latches or similar safety devices formwork (including shoring equip-
installed to prevent premature or acci- ment), working decks, and scaffolds,
dental dumping. shall be available at the jobsite.
(2) Concrete buckets shall be de- (b) Shoring and reshoring. (1) All shor-
signed to prevent concrete from hanging equipment (including equipment
ing up on top and the sides. used in reshoring operations) shall be
399
inspected prior to erection to deter- (c) Vertical slip forms. (1) The steel
mine that the equipment meets the re- rods or pipes on which jacks climb or
quirements specified in the formwork by which the forms are lifted shall be—
drawings. (i) Specifically designed for that pur-
(2) Shoring equipment found to be pose; and
damaged such that its strength is re- (ii) Adequately braced where not en-
duced to less than that required by cased in concrete.
§ 1926.703(a)(1) shall not be used for (2) Forms shall be designed to pre-
shoring. vent excessive distortion of the struc-
(3) Erected shoring equipment shall ture during the jacking operation.
be inspected immediately prior to, dur- (3) All vertical slip forms shall be
ing, and immediately after concrete provided with scaffolds or work plat-
placement. forms where employees are required to
(4) Shoring equipment that is found work or pass.
to be damaged or weakened after erec- (4) Jacks and vertical supports shall
tion, such that its strength is reduced be positioned in such a manner that
to less than that required by the loads do not exceed the rated ca-
§ 1926.703(a)(1), shall be immediately re- pacity of the jacks.
inforced. (5) The jacks or other lifting devices
(5) The sills for shoring shall be shall be provided with mechanical dogs
sound, rigid, and capable of carrying or other automatic holding devices to
the maximum intended load. support the slip forms whenever failure
(6) All base plates, shore heads, ex- of the power supply or lifting mecha-
tension devices, and adjustment screws nism occurs.
shall be in firm contact, and secured (6) The form structure shall be main-
when necessary, with the foundation tained within all design tolerances
and the form. specified for plumbness during the
jacking operation.
(7) Eccentric loads on shore heads
(7) The predetermined safe rate of lift
and similar members shall be prohib-
shall not be exceeded.
ited unless these members have been
(d) Reinforcing steel. (1) Reinforcing
designed for such loading.
steel for walls, piers, columns, and
(8) Whenever single post shores are
similar vertical structures shall be
used one on top of another (tiered), the
adequately supported to prevent over-
employer shall comply with the fol-
turning and to prevent collapse.
lowing specific requirements in addi-
(2) Employers shall take measures to
tion to the general requirements for
prevent unrolled wire mesh from re-
formwork:
coiling. Such measures may include,
(i) The design of the shoring shall be but are not limited to, securing each
prepared by a qualified designer and end of the roll or turning over the roll.
the erected shoring shall be inspected (e) Removal of formwork. (1) Forms
by an engineer qualified in structural and shores (except those used for slabs
design. on grade and slip forms) shall not be
(ii) The single post shores shall be removed until the employer determines
vertically aligned. that the concrete has gained sufficient
(iii) The single post shores shall be strength to support its weight and su-
spliced to prevent misalignment. perimposed loads. Such determination
(iv) The single post shores shall be shall be based on compliance with one
adequately braced in two mutually per- of the following:
pendicular directions at the splice (i) The plans and specifications stipu-
level. Each tier shall also be diagonally late conditions for removal of forms
braced in the same two directions. and shores, and such conditions have
(9) Adjustment of single post shores been followed, or
to raise formwork shall not be made (ii) The concrete has been properly
after the placement of concrete. tested with an appropriate ASTM
(10) Reshoring shall be erected, as the standard test method designed to indi-
original forms and shores are removed, cate the concrete compressive
whenever the concrete is required to strength, and the test results indicate
support loads in excess of its capacity. that the concrete has gained sufficient
400
strength to support its weight and su- § 1926.705 Requirements for lift-slab
perimposed loads. construction operations.
(2) Reshoring shall not be removed (a) Lift-slab operations shall be de-
until the concrete being supported has signed and planned by a registered pro-
attained adequate strength to support fessional engineer who has experience
its weight and all loads in place upon in lift-slab construction. Such plans
it. and designs shall be implemented by
the employer and shall include detailed
APPENDIX TO § 1926.703(a)(1)
instructions and sketches indicating
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FORMWORK the prescribed method of erection.
These plans and designs shall also in-
(This appendix is non-mandatory.) clude provisions for ensuring lateral
This appendix serves as a non-mandatory stability of the building/structure dur-
guideline to assist employers in complying ing construction.
with the formwork requirements in (b) Jacks/lifting units shall be
§ 1926.703(a)(1). Formwork which has been de- marked to indicate their rated capac-
signed, fabricated, erected, braced, supported ity as established by the manufacturer.
and maintained in accordance with Sections (c) Jacks/lifting units shall not be
6 and 7 of the American National Standard loaded beyond their rated capacity as
for Construction and Demolition Oper- established by the manufacturer.
ations—Concrete and Masonry Work, ANSI (d) Jacking equipment shall be capa-
A10.9–1983, shall be deemed to be in compli-
ance with the provision of § 1926.703(a)(1).
ble of supporting at least two and one-
half times the load being lifted during
[53 FR 22643, June 16, 1988, as amended at 61 jacking operations and the equipment
FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996] shall not be overloaded. For the pur-
pose of this provision, jacking equip-
§ 1926.704 Requirements for precast ment includes any load bearing compo-
concrete.
nent which is used to carry out the lift-
(a) Precast concrete wall units, ing operation(s). Such equipment in-
structural framing, and tilt-up wall cludes, but is not limited, to the fol-
panels shall be adequately supported to lowing: threaded rods, lifting attach-
prevent overturning and to prevent col- ments, lifting nuts, hook-up collars, T-
lapse until permanent connections are caps, shearheads, columns, and foot-
completed. ings.
(b) Lifting inserts which are embed- (e) Jacks/lifting units shall be de-
ded or otherwise attached to tilt-up signed and installed so that they will
precast concrete members shall be ca- neither lift nor continue to lift when
pable of supporting at least two times they are loaded in excess of their rated
the maximum intended load applied or capacity.
transmitted to them. (f) Jacks/lifting units shall have a
(c) Lifting inserts which are embed- safety device installed which will cause
ded or otherwise attached to precast the jacks/lifting units to support the
concrete members, other than the tilt- load in any position in the event any
up members, shall be capable of sup- jack/lifting unit malfunctions or loses
porting at least four times the max- its lifting ability.
imum intended load applied or trans- (g) Jacking operations shall be syn-
mitted to them. chronized in such a manner to ensure
(d) Lifting hardware shall be capable even and uniform lifting of the slab.
During lifting, all points at which the
of supporting at least five times the
slab is supported shall be kept within
maximum intended load applied or 1⁄2 inch of that needed to maintain the
transmitted to the lifting hardware.
slab in a level position.
(e) No employee shall be permitted (h) If leveling is automatically con-
under precast concrete members being trolled, a device shall be installed that
lifted or tilted into position except will stop the operation when the 1⁄2inch
those employees required for the erec- tolerance set forth in paragraph (g) of
tion of those members. this section is exceeded or where there
[53 FR 22643, June 16, 1988, as amended at 54 is a malfunction in the jacking (lifting)
FR 41088, Oct. 5, 1989] system.
401
(i) If leveling is maintained by man- until the wedges at that column have
ual controls, such controls shall be lo- been secured.
cated in a central location and at- (m) All welding on temporary and
tended by a competent person while permanent connections shall be per-
lifting is in progress. In addition to formed by a certified welder, familiar
meeting the definition in § 1926.32(f), with the welding requirements speci-
the competent person must be experi- fied in the plans and specifications for
enced in the lifting operation and with the lift-slab operation.
the lifting equipment being used. (n) Load transfer from jacks/lifting
(j) The maximum number of manu- units to building columns shall not be
ally controlled jacks/lifting units on executed until the welds on the column
one slab shall be limited to a number shear plates (weld blocks) are cooled to
that will permit the operator to main- air temperature.
tain the slab level within specified tol- (o) Jacks/lifting units shall be posi-
erances of paragraph (g) of this section, tively secured to building columns so
but in no case shall that number ex- that they do not become dislodged or
ceed 14. dislocated.
(k)(1) No employee, except those es- (p) Equipment shall be designed and
sential to the jacking operation, shall installed so that the lifting rods cannot
be permitted in the building/structure slip out of position or the employer
while any jacking operation is taking shall institute other measures, such as
place unless the building/structure has the use of locking or blocking devices,
been reinforced sufficiently to ensure which will provide positive connection
its integrity during erection. The between the lifting rods and attach-
phrase ‘‘reinforced sufficiently to en- ments and will prevent components
from disengaging during lifting oper-
sure its integrity’’ used in this para-
ations.
graph means that a registered profes-
sional engineer, independent of the en- APPENDIX TO § 1926.705—LIFT-SLAB
gineer who designed and planned the OPERATIONS
lifting operation, has determined from
(This appendix is non-mandatory.)
the plans that if there is a loss of sup-
port at any jack location, that loss will In paragraph 1926.705(k), OSHA requires
be confined to that location and the employees to be removed from the building/
structure during jacking operations unless
structure as a whole will remain sta-
an independent registered professional engi-
ble. neer, other than the engineer who designed
(2) Under no circumstances, shall any and planned the lifting operation, has deter-
employee who is not essential to the mined that the building/structure has been
jacking operation be permitted imme- sufficiently reinforced to insure the integ-
diately beneath a slab while it is being rity of the building/structure. One method to
lifted. comply with this provision is for the em-
ployer to ensure that continuous bottom
(3) For the purpose of paragraph (k) steel is provided in every slab and in both di-
of this section, a jacking operation be- rections through every wall or column head
gins when a slab or group of slabs is area. (Column head area means the distance
lifted and ends when such slabs are se- between lines that are one and one half
cured (with either temporary connec- times the thickness of the slab or drop panel.
tions or permanent connections). These lines are located outside opposite
faces of the outer edges of the shearhead sec-
(4) Employers who comply with ap- tions—See Figure 1). The amount of bottom
pendix A to § 1926.705 shall be consid- steel shall be established by assuming loss of
ered to be in compliance with the pro- support at a given lifting jack and then de-
visions of paragraphs (k)(1) through termining the steel necessary to carry, by
(k)(3) of this section. catenary action over the span between sur-
(l) When making temporary connec- rounding supports, the slab service dead load
plus any service dead and live loads likely to
tions to support slabs, wedges shall be
be acting on the slab during jacking. In addi-
secured by tack welding, or an equiva- tion, the surrounding supports must be capa-
lent method of securing the wedges to ble of resisting any additional load trans-
prevent them from falling out of posi- ferred to them as a result of the loss of sup-
tion. Lifting rods may not be released port at the lifting jack considered.
402
[55 FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990]
§ 1926.706 Requirements for masonry constructed plus four feet, and shall
construction. run the entire length of the wall.
(a) A limited access zone shall be es- (3) The limited access zone shall be
tablished whenever a masonry wall is established on the side of the wall
being constructed. The limited access which will be unscaffolded.
zone shall conform to the following. (4) The limited access zone shall be
(1) The limited access zone shall be restricted to entry by employees ac-
established prior to the start of con- tively engaged in constructing the
struction of the wall. wall. No other employees shall be per-
(2) The limited access zone shall be mitted to enter the zone.
equal to the height of the wall to be
403
EC30OC91.048</GPH>
Pt. 1926, Subpt. Q, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–13 Edition)
(5) The limited access zone shall re- Insulating Concrete for Compressive
main in place until the wall is ade- Strength (ASTM C513–86).
quately supported to prevent over- • Test Method for Comprehensive Strength
of Lightweight Insulating Concrete (ASTM
turning and to prevent collapse unless
C495–86).
the height of wall is over eight feet, in • Method of Making, Accelerating Curing,
which case, the limited access zone and Testing of Concrete Compression Test
shall remain in place until the require- Specimens (ASTM C684–81).
ments of paragraph (b) of this section • Test Method for Compressive Strength of
have been met. Concrete Using Portions of Beams Broken in
(b) All masonry walls over eight feet Flexure (ASTM C116–68 (1980)).
in height shall be adequately braced to
prevent overturning and to prevent col- Subpart R—Steel Erection
lapse unless the wall is adequately sup-
ported so that it will not overturn or AUTHORITY: Section 3704 of the Contract
collapse. The bracing shall remain in Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (40
place until permanent supporting ele- U.S.C. 3701); Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occu-
ments of the structure are in place. pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART Q OF PART Order Nos. 3–2000 (65 FR 50017), 5–2002 (67 FR
1926—REFERENCES TO SUBPART Q OF 65008), and 5–2007 (72 FR 31159); and 29 CFR
PART 1926 part 1911.
SOURCE: 66 FR 5265, Jan. 18, 2001, unless
(This appendix is non-mandatory.)
otherwise noted.
The following non-mandatory references
provide information which can be helpful in § 1926.750 Scope.
understanding and complying with the re-
quirements contained in subpart Q.
(a) This subpart sets forth require-
• Accident Prevention Manual for Indus- ments to protect employees from the
trial Operations; Eighth Edition; National hazards associated with steel erection
Safety Council. activities involved in the construction,
• Building Code Requirements for Rein- alteration, and/or repair of single and
forced Concrete (ACI 318–83). multi-story buildings, bridges, and
• Formwork for Concrete (ACI SP–4). other structures where steel erection
• Recommended Practice for Concrete
occurs. The requirements of this sub-
Formwork (ACI 347–78).
• Safety Requirements for Concrete and part apply to employers engaged in
Masonry Work (ANSI A10.9–1983). steel erection unless otherwise speci-
• Standard Test Method for Compressive fied. This subpart does not cover elec-
Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens trical transmission towers, commu-
(ASTM C39–86). nication and broadcast towers, or
• Standard Test Method for Making and tanks.
Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field
(ASTM C31–85). NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (a): Examples of struc-
• Standard Test Method for Penetration tures where steel erection may occur include
Resistance of Hardened Concrete (ASTM but are not limited to the following: Single
C803–82). and multi-story buildings; systems-engi-
• Standard Test Method for Compressive neered metal buildings; lift slab/tilt-up
Strength of Concrete Cylinders Cast In-Place structures; energy exploration structures;
in Cylindrical Molds (ASTM C873–85). energy production, transfer and storage
• Standard Method for Developing Early structures and facilities; auditoriums; malls;
Age Compressive Test Values and Projecting amphitheaters; stadiums; power plants;
Later Age Strengths (ASTM C918–80). mills; chemical process structures; bridges;
• Recommended Practice for Inspection trestles; overpasses; underpasses; viaducts;
and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel and aqueducts; aerospace facilities and struc-
Bituminous Materials as Used in Construc- tures; radar and communication structures;
tion (ASTM E329–77). light towers; signage; billboards; score-
• Method of Making and Curing Concrete boards; conveyor systems; conveyor supports
Test Specimens in the Laboratory (ASTM and related framing; stairways; stair towers;
C192–88). fire escapes; draft curtains; fire containment
• Methods of Obtaining and Testing Drilled structures; monorails; aerialways; catwalks;
Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete (ASTM curtain walls; window walls; store fronts; el-
C42–87). evator fronts; entrances; skylights; metal
• Methods of Securing, Preparing and Test- roofs; industrial structures; hi-bay struc-
ing Specimens from Hardened Lightweight tures; rail, marine and other transportation
404
structures; sound barriers; water process and pansion joint assemblies; slide bear-
water containment structures; air and cable ings; hydraulic structures; fascias; sof-
supported structures; space frames; geodesic fit panels; penthouse enclosures; sky-
domes; canopies; racks and rack support
structures and frames; platforms; walkways;
lights; joint fillers; gaskets; sealants
balconies; atriums; penthouses; car dumpers; and seals; doors; windows; hardware;
stackers/reclaimers; cranes and craneways; detention/security equipment and
bins; hoppers; ovens; furnaces; stacks; doors, windows and hardware; con-
amusement park structures and rides; and veying systems; building specialties;
artistic and monumental structures. building equipment; machinery and
(b)(1) Steel erection activities in- plant equipment, furnishings and spe-
clude hoisting, laying out, placing, cial construction.
connecting, welding, burning, guying, (c) The duties of controlling contrac-
bracing, bolting, plumbing and rigging tors under this subpart include, but are
structural steel, steel joists and metal not limited to, the duties specified in
buildings; installing metal decking, §§ 1926.752 (a) and (c), 1926.755(b)(2),
curtain walls, window walls, siding sys- 1926.759(b), and 1926.760(e).
tems, miscellaneous metals, orna-
mental iron and similar materials; and § 1926.751 Definitions.
moving point-to-point while per- Anchored bridging means that the
forming these activities. steel joist bridging is connected to a
(2) The following activities are cov- bridging terminus point.
ered by this subpart when they occur Bolted diagonal bridging means diago-
during and are a part of steel erection nal bridging that is bolted to a steel
activities: rigging, hoisting, laying out, joist or joists.
placing, connecting, guying, bracing,
Bridging clip means a device that is
dismantling, burning, welding, bolting,
attached to the steel joist to allow the
grinding, sealing, caulking, and all re-
bolting of the bridging to the steel
lated activities for construction, alter-
joist.
ation and/or repair of materials and as-
semblies such as structural steel; fer- Bridging terminus point means a wall,
rous metals and alloys; non-ferrous a beam, tandem joists (with all bridg-
metals and alloys; glass; plastics and ing installed and a horizontal truss in
synthetic composite materials; struc- the plane of the top chord) or other ele-
tural metal framing and related brac- ment at an end or intermediate
ing and assemblies; anchoring devices; point(s) of a line of bridging that pro-
structural cabling; cable stays; perma- vides an anchor point for the steel joist
nent and temporary bents and towers; bridging.
falsework for temporary supports of Choker means a wire rope or syn-
permanent steel members; stone and thetic fiber rigging assembly that is
other non-precast concrete architec- used to attach a load to a hoisting de-
tural materials mounted on steel vice.
frames; safety systems for steel erec- Cold forming means the process of
tion; steel and metal joists; metal using press brakes, rolls, or other
decking and raceway systems and ac- methods to shape steel into desired
cessories; metal roofing and acces- cross sections at room temperature.
sories; metal siding; bridge flooring; Column means a load-carrying
cold formed steel framing; elevator vertical member that is part of the pri-
beams; grillage; shelf racks; multi-pur- mary skeletal framing system. Col-
pose supports; crane rails and acces- umns do not include posts.
sories; miscellaneous, architectural Competent person (also defined in
and ornamental metals and metal § 1926.32) means one who is capable of
work; ladders; railings; handrails; identifying existing and predictable
fences and gates; gratings; trench cov- hazards in the surroundings or working
ers; floor plates; castings; sheet metal conditions which are unsanitary, haz-
fabrications; metal panels and panel ardous, or dangerous to employees, and
wall systems; louvers; column covers; who has authorization to take prompt
enclosures and pockets; stairs; per- corrective measures to eliminate them.
forated metals; ornamental iron work, Connector means an employee who,
expansion control including bridge ex- working with hoisting equipment, is
405
placing and connecting structural Double connection seat means a struc-
members and/or components. tural attachment that, during the in-
Constructibility means the ability to stallation of a double connection, sup-
erect structural steel members in ac- ports the first member while the sec-
cordance with subpart R without hav- ond member is connected.
ing to alter the over-all structural de- Erection bridging means the bolted di-
sign. agonal bridging that is required to be
Construction load (for joist erection) installed prior to releasing the hoisting
means any load other than the weight cables from the steel joists.
of the employee(s), the joists and the Fall restraint system means a fall pro-
bridging bundle. tection system that prevents the user
Controlled Decking Zone (CDZ) means from falling any distance. The system
an area in which certain work (for ex- is comprised of either a body belt or
ample, initial installation and place- body harness, along with an anchorage,
ment of metal decking) may take place connectors and other necessary equip-
without the use of guardrail systems, ment. The other components typically
personal fall arrest systems, fall re- include a lanyard, and may also in-
straint systems, or safety net systems clude a lifeline and other devices.
and where access to the zone is con- Final interior perimeter means the pe-
trolled. rimeter of a large permanent open
Controlled load lowering means low- space within a building such as an atri-
ering a load by means of a mechanical um or courtyard. This does not include
hoist drum device that allows a hoisted openings for stairways, elevator shafts,
load to be lowered with maximum con- etc.
trol using the gear train or hydraulic Girt (in systems-engineered metal build-
components of the hoist mechanism. ings) means a ‘‘Z’’ or ‘‘C’’ shaped mem-
Controlled load lowering requires the ber formed from sheet steel spanning
use of the hoist drive motor, rather between primary framing and sup-
than the load hoist brake, to lower the porting wall material.
load. Headache ball means a weighted hook
Controlling contractor means a prime that is used to attach loads to the hoist
contractor, general contractor, con- load line of the crane.
struction manager or any other legal Hoisting equipment means commer-
entity which has the overall responsi- cially manufactured lifting equipment
bility for the construction of the designed to lift and position a load of
project—its planning, quality and com- known weight to a location at some
pletion. known elevation and horizontal dis-
Critical lift means a lift that (1) ex- tance from the equipment’s center of
ceeds 75 percent of the rated capacity rotation. ‘‘Hoisting equipment’’ in-
of the crane or derrick, or (2) requires cludes but is not limited to cranes, der-
the use of more than one crane or derricks, tower cranes, barge-mounted
rick. derricks or cranes, gin poles and gan-
Decking hole means a gap or void try hoist systems. A ‘‘come-a-long’’ (a
more than 2 inches (5.1 cm) in its least mechanical device, usually consisting
dimension and less than 12 inches (30.5 of a chain or cable attached at each
cm) in its greatest dimension in a end, that is used to facilitate move-
floor, roof or other walking/working ment of materials through leverage) is
surface. Pre-engineered holes in cel- not considered ‘‘hoisting equipment.’’
lular decking (for wires, cables, etc.) Leading edge means the unprotected
are not included in this definition. side and edge of a floor, roof, or
Derrick floor means an elevated floor formwork for a floor or other walking/
of a building or structure that has been working surface (such as deck) which
designated to receive hoisted pieces of changes location as additional floor,
steel prior to final placement. roof, decking or formwork sections are
Double connection means an attach- placed, formed or constructed.
ment method where the connection Metal decking means a commercially
point is intended for two pieces of steel manufactured, structural grade, cold
which share common bolts on either rolled metal panel formed into a series
side of a central piece. of parallel ribs; for this subpart, this
406
includes metal floor and roof decks, sional responsible for the design of
standing seam metal roofs, other metal structural steel framing and whose seal
roof systems and other products such appears on the structural contract doc-
as bar gratings, checker plate, ex- uments.
panded metal panels, and similar prod- Purlin (in systems-engineered metal
ucts. After installation and proper fas- buildings) means a ‘‘Z’’ or ‘‘C’’ shaped
tening, these decking materials serve a member formed from sheet steel span-
combination of functions including, ning between primary framing and sup-
but not limited to: a structural ele- porting roof material.
ment designed in combination with the
Qualified person (also defined in
structure to resist, distribute and
§ 1926.32) means one who, by possession
transfer loads, stiffen the structure and
provide a diaphragm action; a walking/ of a recognized degree, certificate, or
working surface; a form for concrete professional standing, or who by exten-
slabs; a support for roofing systems; sive knowledge, training, and experi-
and a finished floor or roof. ence, has successfully demonstrated
Multiple lift rigging means a rigging the ability to solve or resolve problems
assembly manufactured by wire rope relating to the subject matter, the
rigging suppliers that facilitates the work, or the project.
attachment of up to five independent Safety deck attachment means an ini-
loads to the hoist rigging of a crane. tial attachment that is used to secure
Opening means a gap or void 12 an initially placed sheet of decking to
inches (30.5 cm) or more in its least di- keep proper alignment and bearing
mension in a floor, roof or other walk- with structural support members.
ing/working surface. For the purposes Shear connector means headed steel
of this subpart, skylights and smoke studs, steel bars, steel lugs, and similar
domes that do not meet the strength devices which are attached to a struc-
requirements of § 1926.754(e)(3) shall be tural member for the purpose of
regarded as openings. achieving composite action with con-
Permanent floor means a structurally crete.
completed floor at any level or ele-
Steel erection means the construction,
vation (including slab on grade).
alteration or repair of steel buildings,
Personal fall arrest system means a
system used to arrest an employee in a bridges and other structures, including
fall from a working level. A personal the installation of metal decking and
fall arrest system consists of an an- all planking used during the process of
chorage, connectors, a body harness erection.
and may include a lanyard, decelera- Steel joist means an open web, sec-
tion device, lifeline, or suitable com- ondary load-carrying member of 144
bination of these. The use of a body feet (43.9 m) or less, designed by the
belt for fall arrest is prohibited. manufacturer, used for the support of
Positioning device system means a body floors and roofs. This does not include
belt or body harness rigged to allow an structural steel trusses or cold-formed
employee to be supported on an ele- joists.
vated, vertical surface, such as a wall Steel joist girder means an open web,
or column and work with both hands primary load-carrying member, de-
free while leaning. signed by the manufacturer, used for
Post means a structural member with the support of floors and roofs. This
a longitudinal axis that is essentially does not include structural steel truss-
vertical, that: (1) weighs 300 pounds or es.
less and is axially loaded (a load press-
Steel truss means an open web mem-
es down on the top end), or (2) is not
ber designed of structural steel compo-
axially loaded, but is laterally re-
strained by the above member. Posts nents by the project structural engi-
typically support stair landings, wall neer of record. For the purposes of this
framing, mezzanines and other sub- subpart, a steel truss is considered
structures. equivalent to a solid web structural
Project structural engineer of record member.
means the registered, licensed profes-
407
Structural steel means a steel member, erect steel unless it has received writ-
or a member made of a substitute ma- ten notification that the concrete in
terial (such as, but not limited to, fi- the footings, piers and walls or the
berglass, aluminum or composite mem- mortar in the masonry piers and walls
bers). These members include, but are has attained, on the basis of an appro-
not limited to, steel joists, joist gird- priate ASTM standard test method of
ers, purlins, columns, beams, trusses, field-cured samples, either 75 percent
splices, seats, metal decking, girts, and of the intended minimum compressive
all bridging, and cold formed metal design strength or sufficient strength
framing which is integrated with the to support the loads imposed during
structural steel framing of a building. steel erection.
Systems-engineered metal building (c) Site layout. The controlling con-
means a metal, field-assembled build- tractor shall ensure that the following
ing system consisting of framing, roof is provided and maintained:
and wall coverings. Typically, many of (1) Adequate access roads into and
these components are cold-formed through the site for the safe delivery
shapes. These individual parts are fab- and movement of derricks, cranes,
ricated in one or more manufacturing trucks, other necessary equipment, and
facilities and shipped to the job site for the material to be erected and means
assembly into the final structure. The and methods for pedestrian and vehic-
engineering design of the system is ular control. Exception: this require-
normally the responsibility of the sys- ment does not apply to roads outside of
tems-engineered metal building manu- the construction site.
facturer. (2) A firm, properly graded, drained
Tank means a container for holding area, readily accessible to the work
gases, liquids or solids. with adequate space for the safe stor-
Unprotected sides and edges means any age of materials and the safe operation
side or edge (except at entrances to of the erector’s equipment.
points of access) of a walking/working (d) Pre-planning of overhead hoisting
surface, for example a, floor, roof, ramp operations. All hoisting operations in
or runway, where there is no wall or steel erection shall be pre-planned to
guardrail system at least 39 inches (1.0 ensure that the requirements of
m) high. § 1926.753(d) are met.
§ 1926.752 Site layout, site-specific (e) Site-specific erection plan. Where
erection plan and construction se- employers elect, due to conditions spe-
quence. cific to the site, to develop alternate
means and methods that provide em-
(a) Approval to begin steel erection. Be-
ployee protection in accordance with
fore authorizing the commencement of
§ 1926.753(c)(5), § 1926.757(a)(4) or
steel erection, the controlling con-
§ 1926.757(e)(4), a site-specific erection
tractor shall ensure that the steel erec-
plan shall be developed by a qualified
tor is provided with the following writ-
person and be available at the work
ten notifications:
site. Guidelines for establishing a site-
(1) The concrete in the footings, piers
specific erection plan are contained in
and walls and the mortar in the ma-
appendix A to this subpart.
sonry piers and walls has attained, on
the basis of an appropriate ASTM § 1926.753 Hoisting and rigging.
standard test method of field-cured
samples, either 75 percent of the in- (a) All the provisions of subpart CC
tended minimum compressive design apply to hoisting and rigging with the
strength or sufficient strength to sup- exception of § 1926.1431(a).
port the loads imposed during steel (b) In addition, paragraphs (c)
erection. through (e) of this section apply re-
(2) Any repairs, replacements and garding the hazards associated with
modifications to the anchor bolts were hoisting and rigging.
conducted in accordance with (c) General. (1) Pre-shift visual in-
§ 1926.755(b). spection of cranes.
(b) Commencement of steel erection. A (i) Cranes being used in steel erection
steel erection contractor shall not activities shall be visually inspected
408
prior to each shift by a competent per- (2) A qualified rigger (a rigger who is
son; the inspection shall include obser- also a qualified person) shall inspect
vation for deficiencies during oper- the rigging prior to each shift in ac-
ation. At a minimum this inspection cordance with § 1926.251.
shall include the following: (3) The headache ball, hook or load
(A) All control mechanisms for mal- shall not be used to transport per-
adjustments; sonnel except as provided in paragraph
(B) Control and drive mechanism for (c)(4) of this section.
excessive wear of components and con- (4) Cranes or derricks may be used to
tamination by lubricants, water or hoist employees on a personnel plat-
other foreign matter; form when work under this subpart is
(C) Safety devices, including but not being conducted, provided that all pro-
limited to boom angle indicators, boom visions of § 1926.1431 (except for
stops, boom kick out devices, anti-two § 1926.1431(a)) are met.
block devices, and load moment indica- (5) Safety latches on hooks shall not
tors where required; be deactivated or made inoperable ex-
(D) Air, hydraulic, and other pressur- cept:
ized lines for deterioration or leakage, (i) When a qualified rigger has deter-
particularly those which flex in normal mined that the hoisting and placing of
operation; purlins and single joists can be per-
(E) Hooks and latches for deforma- formed more safely by doing so; or
tion, chemical damage, cracks, or (ii) When equivalent protection is
wear; provided in a site-specific erection
(F) Wire rope reeving for compliance plan.
with hoisting equipment manufactur- (d) Working under loads. (1) Routes for
er’s specifications; suspended loads shall be pre-planned to
(G) Electrical apparatus for malfunc- ensure that no employee is required to
tioning, signs of excessive deteriora- work directly below a suspended load
tion, dirt, or moisture accumulation; except for:
(H) Hydraulic system for proper fluid (i) Employees engaged in the initial
level; connection of the steel; or
(I) Tires for proper inflation and con- (ii) Employees necessary for the
dition; hooking or unhooking of the load.
(J) Ground conditions around the (2) When working under suspended
hoisting equipment for proper support, loads, the following criteria shall be
including ground settling under and met:
around outriggers, ground water accu- (i) Materials being hoisted shall be
mulation, or similar conditions; rigged to prevent unintentional dis-
(K) The hoisting equipment for level placement;
position; and (ii) Hooks with self-closing safety
(L) The hoisting equipment for level latches or their equivalent shall be
position after each move and setup. used to prevent components from slip-
(ii) If any deficiency is identified, an ping out of the hook; and
immediate determination shall be (iii) All loads shall be rigged by a
made by the competent person as to qualified rigger
whether the deficiency constitutes a (e) Multiple lift rigging procedure. (1) A
hazard. multiple lift shall only be performed if
(iii) If the deficiency is determined to the following criteria are met:
constitute a hazard, the hoisting equip- (i) A multiple lift rigging assembly is
ment shall be removed from service used;
until the deficiency has been corrected. (ii) A maximum of five members are
(iv) The operator shall be responsible hoisted per lift;
for those operations under the opera- (iii) Only beams and similar struc-
tor’s direct control. Whenever there is tural members are lifted; and
any doubt as to safety, the operator (iv) All employees engaged in the
shall have the authority to stop and multiple lift have been trained in these
refuse to handle loads until safety has procedures in accordance with
been assured. § 1926.761(c)(1).
409
(v) No crane is permitted to be used porate by reference. (See http://
for a multiple lift where such use is www.fhwa.dot.gov/bridge/lrfd/index.htm.)
contrary to the manufacturer’s speci- (b) The following additional require-
fications and limitations. ments shall apply for multi-story
(2) Components of the multiple lift structures:
rigging assembly shall be specifically (1) The permanent floors shall be in-
designed and assembled with a max- stalled as the erection of structural
imum capacity for total assembly and members progresses, and there shall be
for each individual attachment point. not more than eight stories between
This capacity, certified by the manu- the erection floor and the upper-most
facturer or a qualified rigger, shall be permanent floor, except where the
based on the manufacturer’s specifica- structural integrity is maintained as a
tions with a 5 to 1 safety factor for all result of the design.
components. (2) At no time shall there be more
(3) The total load shall not exceed: than four floors or 48 feet (14.6 m),
(i) The rated capacity of the hoisting whichever is less, of unfinished bolting
equipment specified in the hoisting or welding above the foundation or up-
equipment load charts; permost permanently secured floor, ex-
(ii) The rigging capacity specified in cept where the structural integrity is
the rigging rating chart. maintained as a result of the design.
(4) The multiple lift rigging assembly (3) A fully planked or decked floor or
shall be rigged with members: nets shall be maintained within two
(i) Attached at their center of grav- stories or 30 feet (9.1 m), whichever is
ity and maintained reasonably level; less, directly under any erection work
(ii) Rigged from top down; and being performed.
(iii) Rigged at least 7 feet (2.1 m) (c) Walking/working surfaces—shear
apart. connectors and other similar devices—(1)
(5) The members on the multiple lift Tripping hazards. Shear connectors
rigging assembly shall be set from the (such as headed steel studs, steel bars
bottom up. or steel lugs), reinforcing bars, de-
(6) Controlled load lowering shall be formed anchors or threaded studs shall
used whenever the load is over the con- not be attached to the top flanges of
nectors. beams, joists or beam attachments so
that they project vertically from or
[66 FR 5265, Jan. 18, 2001, as amended at 75
horizontally across the top flange of
FR 48134, Aug. 9, 2010]
the member until after the metal deck-
§ 1926.754 Structural steel assembly. ing, or other walking/working surface,
has been installed.
(a) Structural stability shall be (2) Installation of shear connectors on
maintained at all times during the composite floors, roofs and bridge decks.
erection process. When shear connectors are used in con-
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (a): Federal Highway struction of composite floors, roofs and
Administration (FHWA) regulations incor- bridge decks, employees shall lay out
porate by reference a number of standards, and install the shear connectors after
policies, and standard specifications pub- the metal decking has been installed,
lished by the American Association of State using the metal decking as a working
Highway and Transportation Officials
(AASHTO) and other organizations. (See 23
platform. Shear connectors shall not be
CFR 625.4). Many of these incorporated pro- installed from within a controlled
visions may be relevant to maintaining decking zone (CDZ), as specified in
structural stability during the erection proc- § 1926.760(c)(8).
ess. For instance, as of May 17, 2010, in many (d) Plumbing-up. (1) When deemed
cases FHWA requires a Registered Engineer necessary by a competent person,
to prepare and seal working drawings for plumbing-up equipment shall be in-
falsework used in highway bridge construc- stalled in conjunction with the steel
tion. (See AASHTO Specifications for High-
way Bridges, Div. II, § 3.2.1, 15th edition, 1992,
erection process to ensure the stability
which FHWA incorporates by reference in 23 of the structure.
CFR 625.4). FHWA also encourages compli- (2) When used, plumbing-up equip-
ance with AASHTO Specifications that the ment shall be in place and properly in-
FHWA regulations do not currently incor- stalled before the structure is loaded
410
with construction material such as (ii) All covers shall be secured when
loads of joists, bundles of decking or installed to prevent accidental dis-
bundles of bridging. placement by the wind, equipment or
(3) Plumbing-up equipment shall be employees.
removed only with the approval of a (iii) All covers shall be painted with
competent person. high-visibility paint or shall be marked
(e) Metal decking—(1) Hoisting, landing with the word ‘‘HOLE’’ or ‘‘COVER’’ to
and placing of metal decking bundles. (i) provide warning of the hazard.
Bundle packaging and strapping shall (iv) Smoke dome or skylight fixtures
not be used for hoisting unless specifi- that have been installed, are not con-
cally designed for that purpose. sidered covers for the purpose of this
(ii) If loose items such as dunnage, section unless they meet the strength
flashing, or other materials are placed requirements of paragraph (e)(3)(i) of
on the top of metal decking bundles to this section.
be hoisted, such items shall be secured (4) Decking gaps around columns. Wire
to the bundles. mesh, exterior plywood, or equivalent,
(iii) Bundles of metal decking on shall be installed around columns
joists shall be landed in accordance where planks or metal decking do not
with § 1926.757(e)(4). fit tightly. The materials used must be
(iv) Metal decking bundles shall be of sufficient strength to provide fall
landed on framing members so that protection for personnel and prevent
enough support is provided to allow the objects from falling through.
bundles to be unbanded without dis- (5) Installation of metal decking. (i) Ex-
lodging the bundles from the supports. cept as provided in § 1926.760(c), metal
(v) At the end of the shift or when en- decking shall be laid tightly and imme-
vironmental or jobsite conditions re- diately secured upon placement to pre-
quire, metal decking shall be secured vent accidental movement or displace-
against displacement. ment.
(2) Roof and floor holes and openings. (ii) During initial placement, metal
Metal decking at roof and floor holes decking panels shall be placed to en-
and openings shall be installed as fol- sure full support by structural mem-
lows: bers.
(i) Framed metal deck openings shall (6) Derrick floors. (i) A derrick floor
have structural members turned down shall be fully decked and/or planked
to allow continuous deck installation and the steel member connections com-
except where not allowed by structural pleted to support the intended floor
design constraints or constructibility. loading.
(ii) Roof and floor holes and openings (ii) Temporary loads placed on a der-
shall be decked over. Where large size, rick floor shall be distributed over the
configuration or other structural de- underlying support members so as to
sign does not allow openings to be prevent local overloading of the deck
decked over (such as elevator shafts, material.
stair wells, etc.) employees shall be
protected in accordance with [66 FR 5265, Jan. 18, 2001, as amended at 71
§ 1926.760(a)(1). FR 2885, Jan. 18, 2006; 71 FR 16674, Apr. 3,
(iii) Metal decking holes and open- 2006; 75 FR 27429, May 17, 2010]
ings shall not be cut until immediately
§ 1926.755 Column anchorage.
prior to being permanently filled with
the equipment or structure needed or (a) General requirements for erection
intended to fulfill its specific use and stability. (1) All columns shall be an-
which meets the strength requirements chored by a minimum of 4 anchor rods
of paragraph (e)(3) of this section, or (anchor bolts).
shall be immediately covered. (2) Each column anchor rod (anchor
(3) Covering roof and floor openings. (i) bolt) assembly, including the column-
Covers for roof and floor openings shall to-base plate weld and the column
be capable of supporting, without fail- foundation, shall be designed to resist
ure, twice the weight of the employees, a minimum eccentric gravity load of
equipment and materials that may be 300 pounds (136.2 kg) located 18 inches
imposed on the cover at any one time. (.46m) from the extreme outer face of
411
the column in each direction at the top tached seat or equivalent connection
of the column shaft. device is supplied with the member to
(3) Columns shall be set on level fin- secure the first member and prevent
ished floors, pre-grouted leveling the column from being displaced (See
plates, leveling nuts, or shim packs appendix H to this subpart for exam-
which are adequate to transfer the con- ples of equivalent connection devices).
struction loads. (2) If a seat or equivalent device is
(4) All columns shall be evaluated by used, the seat (or device) shall be de-
a competent person to determine signed to support the load during the
whether guying or bracing is needed; if double connection process. It shall be
guying or bracing is needed, it shall be adequately bolted or welded to both a
installed. supporting member and the first mem-
(b) Repair, replacement or field modi- ber before the nuts on the shared bolts
fication of anchor rods (anchor bolts). (1) are removed to make the double con-
Anchor rods (anchor bolts) shall not be nection.
repaired, replaced or field-modified (d) Column splices. Each column splice
without the approval of the project shall be designed to resist a minimum
structural engineer of record. eccentric gravity load of 300 pounds
(2) Prior to the erection of a column, (136.2 kg) located 18 inches (.46 m) from
the controlling contractor shall pro- the extreme outer face of the column
vide written notification to the steel in each direction at the top of the col-
erector if there has been any repair, re- umn shaft.
placement or modification of the an- (e) Perimeter columns. Perimeter col-
chor rods (anchor bolts) of that columns shall not be erected unless:
umn. (1) The perimeter columns extend a
minimum of 48 inches (1.2 m) above the
§ 1926.756 Beams and columns. finished floor to permit installation of
(a) General. (1) During the final plac- perimeter safety cables prior to erec-
ing of solid web structural members, tion of the next tier, except where
the load shall not be released from the constructibility does not allow (see ap-
hoisting line until the members are se- pendix F to this subpart);
cured with at least two bolts per con- (2) The perimeter columns have holes
nection, of the same size and strength or other devices in or attached to pe-
as shown in the erection drawings, rimeter columns at 42–45 inches (107–114
drawn up wrench-tight or the equiva- cm) above the finished floor and the
lent as specified by the project struc- midpoint between the finished floor
tural engineer of record, except as and the top cable to permit installa-
specified in paragraph (b) of this section of perimeter safety cables required
tion. by § 1926.760(a)(2), except where
(2) A competent person shall deter- constructibility does not allow. (See
mine if more than two bolts are nec- appendix F to this subpart).
essary to ensure the stability of canti-
levered members; if additional bolts § 1926.757 Open web steel joists.
are needed, they shall be installed. (a) General. (1) Except as provided in
(b) Diagonal bracing. Solid web struc- paragraph (a)(2) of this section, where
tural members used as diagonal brac- steel joists are used and columns are
ing shall be secured by at least one bolt not framed in at least two directions
per connection drawn up wrench-tight with solid web structural steel mem-
or the equivalent as specified by the bers, a steel joist shall be field-bolted
project structural engineer of record. at the column to provide lateral sta-
(c) (1) Double connections at columns bility to the column during erection.
and/or at beam webs over a column. When For the installation of this joist:
two structural members on opposite (i) A vertical stabilizer plate shall be
sides of a column web, or a beam web provided on each column for steel
over a column, are connected sharing joists. The plate shall be a minimum of
common connection holes, at least one 6 inch by 6 inch (152 mm by 152 mm)
bolt with its wrench-tight nut shall re- and shall extend at least 3 inches (76
main connected to the first member mm) below the bottom chord of the
unless a shop-attached or field-at- joist with a 13⁄16 inch (21 mm) hole to
412
provide an attachment point for guying fabricated to allow for field bolting
or plumbing cables. during erection.
(ii) The bottom chords of steel joists (ii) These connections shall be field-
at columns shall be stabilized to pre- bolted unless constructibility does not
vent rotation during erection. allow.
(iii) Hoisting cables shall not be re- (9) Steel joists and steel joist girders
leased until the seat at each end of the shall not be used as anchorage points
steel joist is field-bolted, and each end for a fall arrest system unless written
of the bottom chord is restrained by approval to do so is obtained from a
the column stabilizer plate. qualified person.
(2) Where constructibility does not
(10) A bridging terminus point shall
allow a steel joist to be installed at the
be established before bridging is in-
column:
(i) an alternate means of stabilizing stalled. (See appendix C to this sub-
joists shall be installed on both sides part.)
near the column and shall: (b) Attachment of steel joists and steel
(A) provide stability equivalent to joist girders. (1) Each end of ‘‘K’’ series
paragraph (a)(1) of this section; steel joists shall be attached to the
(B) be designed by a qualified person; support structure with a minimum of
(C) be shop installed; and two 1⁄8-inch (3 mm) fillet welds 1 inch
(D) be included in the erection draw- (25 mm) long or with two 1⁄2-inch (13
ings. mm) bolts, or the equivalent.
(ii) hoisting cables shall not be re- (2) Each end of ‘‘LH’’ and ‘‘DLH’’ se-
leased until the seat at each end of the ries steel joists and steel joist girders
steel joist is field-bolted and the joist shall be attached to the support struc-
is stabilized. ture with a minimum of two 1⁄4-inch (6
(3) Where steel joists at or near col- mm) fillet welds 2 inches (51 mm) long,
umns span 60 feet (18.3 m) or less, the or with two 3⁄4-inch (19 mm) bolts, or
joist shall be designed with sufficient the equivalent.
strength to allow one employee to re- (3) Except as provided in paragraph
lease the hoisting cable without the (b)(4) of this section, each steel joist
need for erection bridging. shall be attached to the support struc-
(4) Where steel joists at or near col- ture, at least at one end on both sides
umns span more than 60 feet (18.3 m), of the seat, immediately upon place-
the joists shall be set in tandem with ment in the final erection position and
all bridging installed unless an alter- before additional joists are placed.
native method of erection, which pro- (4) Panels that have been pre-assem-
vides equivalent stability to the steel bled from steel joists with bridging
joist, is designed by a qualified person shall be attached to the structure at
and is included in the site-specific erec- each corner before the hoisting cables
tion plan. are released.
(5) A steel joist or steel joist girder
(c) Erection of steel joists. (1) Both
shall not be placed on any support
sides of the seat of one end of each
structure unless such structure is sta-
bilized. steel joist that requires bridging under
(6) When steel joist(s) are landed on a Tables A and B shall be attached to the
structure, they shall be secured to pre- support structure before hoisting ca-
vent unintentional displacement prior bles are released.
to installation. (2) For joists over 60 feet, both ends
(7) No modification that affects the of the joist shall be attached as speci-
strength of a steel joist or steel joist fied in paragraph (b) of this section and
girder shall be made without the ap- the provisions of paragraph (d) of this
proval of the project structural engi- section met before the hoisting cables
neer of record. are released.
(8) Field-bolted joists. (i) Except for (3) On steel joists that do not require
steel joists that have been pre-assem- erection bridging under Tables A and
bled into panels, connections of indi- B, only one employee shall be allowed
vidual steel joists to steel structures in on the joist until all bridging is in-
bays of 40 feet (12.2 m) or more shall be stalled and anchored.
413
TABLE A—ERECTION BRIDGING FOR SHORT TABLE A—ERECTION BRIDGING FOR SHORT
SPAN JOISTS SPAN JOISTS—Continued
Joist Span Joist Span
8L1 ................................................................. NM 14KCS2 ......................................................... NM

10K1 .............................................................. NM 14KCS3 ......................................................... NM
12K1 .............................................................. 23–0 16KCS2 ......................................................... NM
12K3 .............................................................. NM 16KCS3 ......................................................... NM
12K5 .............................................................. NM 16KCS4 ......................................................... NM
14K1 .............................................................. 27–0 16KCS5 ......................................................... NM
14K3 .............................................................. NM 18KCS2 ......................................................... 35–0
14K4 .............................................................. NM 18KCS3 ......................................................... NM
14K6 .............................................................. NM 18KCS4 ......................................................... NM
16K2 .............................................................. 29–0 18KCS5 ......................................................... NM
16K3 .............................................................. 30–0 20KCS2 ......................................................... 36–0
16K4 .............................................................. 32–0 20KCS3 ......................................................... 39–0
16K5 .............................................................. 32–0 20KCS4 ......................................................... NM
16K6 .............................................................. NM 20KCS5 ......................................................... NM
16K7 .............................................................. NM 22KCS2 ......................................................... 36–0
16K9 .............................................................. NM 22KCS3 ......................................................... 40–0
18K3 .............................................................. 31–0 22KCS4 ......................................................... NM
18K4 .............................................................. 32–0 22KCS5 ......................................................... NM
18K5 .............................................................. 33–0 24KCS2 ......................................................... 39–0
18K6 .............................................................. 35–0 24KCS3 ......................................................... 44–0
18K7 .............................................................. NM 24KCS4 ......................................................... NM
18K9 .............................................................. NM 24KCS5 ......................................................... NM
18K10 ............................................................ NM 26KCS2 ......................................................... 39–0
20K3 .............................................................. 32–0 26KCS3 ......................................................... 44–0
20K4 .............................................................. 34–0 26KCS4 ......................................................... NM
20K5 .............................................................. 34–0 26KCS5 ......................................................... NM
20K6 .............................................................. 36–0 28KCS2 ......................................................... 40–0
20K7 .............................................................. 39–0 28KCS3 ......................................................... 45–0
20K9 .............................................................. 39–0 28KCS4 ......................................................... 53–0
20K10 ............................................................ NM 28KCS5 ......................................................... 53–0
22K4 .............................................................. 34–0 30KC53 .......................................................... 45–0
22K5 .............................................................. 35–0 30KCS4 ......................................................... 54–0
22K6 .............................................................. 36–0 30KCS5 ......................................................... 54–0
22K7 .............................................................. 40–0
22K9 .............................................................. 40–0 NM=diagonal bolted bridging not mandatory for joists under
40 feet.
22K10 ............................................................ 40–0
22K11 ............................................................ 40–0
24K4 .............................................................. 36–0 TABLE B—ERECTION BRIDGING FOR LONG SPAN
24K5 .............................................................. 38–0 JOISTS
24K6 .............................................................. 39–0
24K7 .............................................................. 43–0 Joist Span
24K8 .............................................................. 43–0
24K9 .............................................................. 44–0 18LH02 .................................. 33–0.
24K10 ............................................................ NM 18LH03 .................................. NM.
24K12 ............................................................ NM 18LH04 .................................. NM.
26K5 .............................................................. 38–0 18LH05 .................................. NM.
26K6 .............................................................. 39–0 18LH06 .................................. NM.
26K7 .............................................................. 43–0 18LH07 .................................. NM.
26K8 .............................................................. 44–0 18LH08 .................................. NM.
26K9 .............................................................. 45–0 18LH09 .................................. NM.
26K10 ............................................................ 49–0 20LH02 .................................. 33–0.
26K12 ............................................................ NM 20LH03 .................................. 38–0.
28K6 .............................................................. 40–0 20LH04 .................................. NM.
28K7 .............................................................. 43–0 20LH05 .................................. NM.
28K8 .............................................................. 44–0 20LH06 .................................. NM.
28K9 .............................................................. 45–0 20LH07 .................................. NM.
28K10 ............................................................ 49–0 20LH08 .................................. NM.
28K12 ............................................................ 53–0 20LH09 .................................. NM.
30K7 .............................................................. 44–0 20LH10 .................................. NM.
30K8 .............................................................. 45–0 24LH03 .................................. 35–0.
30K9 .............................................................. 45–0 24LH04 .................................. 39–0.
30K10 ............................................................ 50–0 24LH05 .................................. 40–0.
30K11 ............................................................ 52–0 24LH06 .................................. 45–0.
30K12 ............................................................ 54–0 24LH07 .................................. NM.
10KCS1 ......................................................... NM 24LH08 .................................. NM.
10KCS2 ......................................................... NM 24LH09 .................................. NM.
10KCS3 ......................................................... NM 24LH10 .................................. NM.
12KCS1 ......................................................... NM 24LH11 .................................. NM.
12KCS2 ......................................................... NM 28LH05 .................................. 42–0.
12KCS3 ......................................................... NM 28LH06 .................................. 42–0.
14KCS1 ......................................................... NM 28LH07 .................................. NM.
414
TABLE B—ERECTION BRIDGING FOR LONG SPAN (ii) Two rows of bolted diagonal erec-
JOISTS—Continued tion bridging shall be installed near
the third points of the steel joist;
Joist Span
(iii) Hoisting cables shall not be re-
28LH08 .................................. NM. leased until this bolted diagonal erec-
28LH09 .................................. NM. tion bridging is installed and anchored;
28LH10 .................................. NM. and
28LH11 .................................. NM.
28LH12 .................................. NM. (iv) No more than two employees
28LH13 .................................. NM. shall be allowed on these spans until
32LH06 .................................. 47–0 through 60–0. all other bridging is installed and an-
32LH07 .................................. 47–0 through 60–0. chored.
32LH08 .................................. 55–0 through 60–0.
32LH09 .................................. NM through 60–0.
(3) Where the span of the steel joist is
32LH10 .................................. NM through 60–0. over 100 feet (30.5 m) through 144 feet
32LH11 .................................. NM through 60–0. (43.9 m), the following shall apply:
32LH12 .................................. NM through 60–0. (i) All rows of bridging shall be
32LH13 .................................. NM through 60–0. bolted diagonal bridging;
32LH14 .................................. NM through 60–0.
32LH15 .................................. NM through 60–0. (ii) Hoisting cables shall not be re-
36LH07 .................................. 47–0 through 60–0. leased until all bridging is installed
36LH08 .................................. 47–0 through 60–0. and anchored; and
36LH09 .................................. 57–0 through 60–0. (iii) No more than two employees
36LH10 .................................. NM through 60–0.
36LH11 .................................. NM through 60–0.
shall be allowed on these spans until
36LH12 .................................. NM through 60–0. all bridging is installed and anchored.
36LH13 .................................. NM through 60–0. (4) For steel members spanning over
36LH14 .................................. NM through 60–0. 144 feet (43.9 m), the erection methods
36LH15 .................................. NM through 60–0.
used shall be in accordance with
NM = diagonal bolted bridging not mandatory for joists § 1926.756.
under 40 feet.
(5) Where any steel joist specified in
(4) Employees shall not be allowed on paragraphs (c)(2) and (d)(1), (d)(2), and
steel joists where the span of the steel (d)(3) of this section is a bottom chord
joist is equal to or greater than the bearing joist, a row of bolted diagonal
span shown in Tables A and B except in bridging shall be provided near the sup-
accordance with § 1926.757(d). port(s). This bridging shall be installed
(5) When permanent bridging ter- and anchored before the hoisting
minus points cannot be used during cable(s) is released.
erection, additional temporary bridg- (6) When bolted diagonal erection
ing terminus points are required to bridging is required by this section, the
provide stability. (See appendix C of following shall apply:
this subpart.) (i) The bridging shall be indicated on
(d) Erection bridging. (1) Where the the erection drawing;
span of the steel joist is equal to or (ii) The erection drawing shall be the
greater than the span shown in Tables exclusive indicator of the proper place-
A and B, the following shall apply: ment of this bridging;
(i) A row of bolted diagonal erection (iii) Shop-installed bridging clips, or
bridging shall be installed near the functional equivalents, shall be used
midspan of the steel joist; where the bridging bolts to the steel
(ii) Hoisting cables shall not be re- joists;
leased until this bolted diagonal erec- (iv) When two pieces of bridging are
tion bridging is installed and anchored; attached to the steel joist by a com-
and mon bolt, the nut that secures the first
(iii) No more than one employee shall piece of bridging shall not be removed
be allowed on these spans until all from the bolt for the attachment of the
other bridging is installed and an- second; and
chored. (v) Bridging attachments shall not
(2) Where the span of the steel joist is protrude above the top chord of the
over 60 feet (18.3 m) through 100 feet steel joist.
(30.5 m), the following shall apply: (e) Landing and placing loads. (1) Dur-
(i) All rows of bridging shall be ing the construction period, the em-
bolted diagonal bridging; ployer placing a load on steel joists
415
shall ensure that the load is distrib- each flange before the hoisting equip-
uted so as not to exceed the carrying ment is released.
capacity of any steel joist. (d) Construction loads shall not be
(2) Except for paragraph (e)(4) of this placed on any structural steel frame-
section, no construction loads are al- work unless such framework is safely
lowed on the steel joists until all bridg- bolted, welded or otherwise adequately
ing is installed and anchored and all secured.
joist-bearing ends are attached. (e) In girt and eave strut-to-frame
(3) The weight of a bundle of joist connections, when girts or eave struts
bridging shall not exceed a total of share common connection holes, at
1,000 pounds (454 kg). A bundle of joist least one bolt with its wrench-tight
bridging shall be placed on a minimum nut shall remain connected to the first
of three steel joists that are secured at member unless a manufacturer-sup-
one end. The edge of the bridging bun- plied, field-attached seat or similar
dle shall be positioned within 1 foot (.30 connection device is present to secure
m) of the secured end. the first member so that the girt or
(4) No bundle of decking may be eave strut is always secured against
placed on steel joists until all bridging displacement.
has been installed and anchored and all (f) Both ends of all steel joists or
joist bearing ends attached, unless all cold-formed joists shall be fully bolted
of the following conditions are met: and/or welded to the support structure
(i) The employer has first determined before:
from a qualified person and docu- (1) Releasing the hoisting cables;
mented in a site-specific erection plan (2) Allowing an employee on the
that the structure or portion of the joists; or
structure is capable of supporting the (3) Allowing any construction loads
load; on the joists.
(g) Purlins and girts shall not be used
(ii) The bundle of decking is placed
as an anchorage point for a fall arrest
on a minimum of three steel joists;
system unless written approval is ob-
(iii) The joists supporting the bundle tained from a qualified person.
of decking are attached at both ends; (h) Purlins may only be used as a
(iv) At least one row of bridging is in- walking/working surface when install-
stalled and anchored; ing safety systems, after all permanent
(v) The total weight of the bundle of bridging has been installed and fall
decking does not exceed 4,000 pounds protection is provided.
(1816 kg); and (i) Construction loads may be placed
(vi) Placement of the bundle of deck- only within a zone that is within 8 feet
ing shall be in accordance with para- (2.5 m) of the center-line of the primary
graph (e)(5) of this section. support member.
(5) The edge of the construction load
shall be placed within 1 foot (.30 m) of § 1926.759 Falling object protection.
the bearing surface of the joist end. (a) Securing loose items aloft. All mate-
rials, equipment, and tools, which are
§ 1926.758 Systems-engineered metal not in use while aloft, shall be secured
buildings.
against accidental displacement.
(a) All of the requirements of this (b) Protection from falling objects other
subpart apply to the erection of sys- than materials being hoisted. The con-
tems-engineered metal buildings ex- trolling contractor shall bar other con-
cept §§ 1926.755 (column anchorage) and struction processes below steel erec-
1926.757 (open web steel joists). tion unless overhead protection for the
(b) Each structural column shall be employees below is provided.
anchored by a minimum of four anchor
rods (anchor bolts). § 1926.760 Fall protection.
(c) Rigid frames shall have 50 percent (a) General requirements. (1) Except as
of their bolts or the number of bolts provided by paragraph (a)(3) of this sec-
specified by the manufacturer (which- tion, each employee engaged in a steel
ever is greater) installed and tightened erection activity who is on a walking/
on both sides of the web adjacent to working surface with an unprotected
416
side or edge more than 15 feet (4.6 m) (4) Each employee working in a CDZ
above a lower level shall be protected shall have completed CDZ training in
from fall hazards by guardrail systems, accordance with § 1926.761.
safety net systems, personal fall arrest (5) Unsecured decking in a CDZ shall
systems, positioning device systems or not exceed 3,000 square feet (914.4 m2).
fall restraint systems. (6) Safety deck attachments shall be
(2) Perimeter safety cables. On multi- performed in the CDZ from the leading
story structures, perimeter safety ca- edge back to the control line and shall
bles shall be installed at the final inte- have at least two attachments for each
rior and exterior perimeters of the metal decking panel.
floors as soon as the metal decking has (7) Final deck attachments and in-
been installed. stallation of shear connectors shall not
(3) Connectors and employees work- be performed in the CDZ.
ing in controlled decking zones shall be (d) Criteria for fall protection equip-
protected from fall hazards as provided ment. (1) Guardrail systems, safety net
in paragraphs (b) and (c) of this sec- systems, personal fall arrest systems,
tion, respectively. positioning device systems and their
(b) Connectors. Each connector shall: components shall conform to the cri-
(1) Be protected in accordance with teria in § 1926.502 (see appendix G to
paragraph (a)(1) of this section from this subpart).
fall hazards of more than two stories or (2) Fall arrest system components
30 feet (9.1 m) above a lower level, shall be used in fall restraint systems
whichever is less; and shall conform to the criteria in
(2) Have completed connector train- § 1926.502 (see appendix G). Either body
ing in accordance with § 1926.761; and belts or body harnesses shall be used in
(3) Be provided, at heights over 15 fall restraint systems.
and up to 30 feet above a lower level, (3) Perimeter safety cables shall
with a personal fall arrest system, po- meet the criteria for guardrail systems
sitioning device system or fall rein § 1926.502 (see appendix G).
straint system and wear the equipment
(e) Custody of fall protection. Fall pro-
necessary to be able to be tied off; or be
tection provided by the steel erector
provided with other means of protec-
shall remain in the area where steel
tion from fall hazards in accordance
erection activity has been completed,
with paragraph (a)(1) of this section.
to be used by other trades, only if the
(c) Controlled Decking Zone (CDZ). A
controlling contractor or its author-
controlled decking zone may be estab-
ized representative:
lished in that area of the structure
over 15 and up to 30 feet above a lower (1) Has directed the steel erector to
level where metal decking is initially leave the fall protection in place; and
being installed and forms the leading (2) Has inspected and accepted con-
edge of a work area. In each CDZ, the trol and responsibility of the fall pro-
following shall apply: tection prior to authorizing persons
(1) Each employee working at the other than steel erectors to work in
leading edge in a CDZ shall be pro- the area.
tected from fall hazards of more than
§ 1926.761 Training.
two stories or 30 feet (9.1 m), whichever
is less. The following provisions supplement
(2) Access to a CDZ shall be limited the requirements of § 1926.21 regarding
to only those employees engaged in the hazards addressed in this subpart.
leading edge work. (a) Training personnel. Training re-
(3) The boundaries of a CDZ shall be quired by this section shall be provided
designated and clearly marked. The by a qualified person(s).
CDZ shall not be more than 90 feet (27.4 (b) Fall hazard training. The employer
m) wide and 90 (27.4 m) feet deep from shall train each employee exposed to a
any leading edge. The CDZ shall be fall hazard in accordance with the re-
marked by the use of control lines or quirements of this section. The em-
the equivalent. Examples of acceptable ployer shall institute a training pro-
procedures for demarcating CDZ’s can gram and ensure employee participa-
be found in appendix D to this subpart. tion in the program.
417
Pt. 1926, Subpt. R, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–13 Edition)
(c) Special training programs. In addi- inspection(s) are held between the erector
tion to the training required in para- and the controlling contractor, and others
graphs (a) and (b) of this section, the such as the project engineer and fabricator
before the start of steel erection. The pur-
employer shall provide special training
pose of such conference(s) is to develop and
to employees engaged in the following review the site-specific erection plan that
activities. will meet the requirements of this section.
(1) Multiple lift rigging procedure. The (c) Components of a site-specific erection
employer shall ensure that each em- plan. In developing a site-specific erection
ployee who performs multiple lift rig- plan, a steel erector considers the following
ging has been provided training in the elements:
following areas: (1) The sequence of erection activity, de-
(i) The nature of the hazards associ- veloped in coordination with the controlling
ated with multiple lifts; and contractor, that includes the following:
(ii) The proper procedures and equip- (i) Material deliveries:
(ii) Material staging and storage; and
ment to perform multiple lifts required
(iii) Coordination with other trades and
by § 1926.753(e). construction activities.
(2) Connector procedures. The em- (2) A description of the crane and derrick
ployer shall ensure that each connector selection and placement procedures, includ-
has been provided training in the fol- ing the following:
lowing areas: (i) Site preparation;
(i) The nature of the hazards associ- (ii) Path for overhead loads; and
ated with connecting; and (iii) Critical lifts, including rigging sup-
(ii) The establishment, access, proper plies and equipment.
connecting techniques and work prac- (3) A description of steel erection activities
tices required by § 1926.756(c) and and procedures, including the following:
(i) Stability considerations requiring tem-
§ 1926.760(b).
porary bracing and guying;
(3) Controlled Decking Zone Procedures. (ii) Erection bridging terminus point;
Where CDZs are being used, the em- (iii) Anchor rod (anchor bolt) notifications
ployer shall assure that each employee regarding repair, replacement and modifica-
has been provided training in the fol- tions;
lowing areas: (iv) Columns and beams (including joists
(i) The nature of the hazards associ- and purlins);
ated with work within a controlled (v) Connections;
decking zone; and (vi) Decking; and
(ii) The establishment, access, proper (vii) Ornamental and miscellaneous iron.
installation techniques and work prac- (4) A description of the fall protection pro-
cedures that will be used to comply with
tices required by § 1926.760(c) and
§ 1926.760.
§ 1926.754(e). (5) A description of the procedures that
[66 FR 5265, Jan. 18, 2001, as amended at 73 will be used to comply with § 1926.759.
FR 75589, Dec. 12, 2008] (6) A description of the special procedures
required for hazardous non-routine tasks.
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART R OF PART (7) A certification for each employee who
1926—GUIDELINES FOR ESTABLISHING has received training for performing steel
THE COMPONENTS OF A SITE-SPECIFIC erection operations as required by § 1926.761.
ERECTION PLAN: NON-MANDATORY (8) A list of the qualified and competent
persons.
GUIDELINES FOR COMPLYING WITH
(9) A description of the procedures that
§ 1926.752(e) will be utilized in the event of rescue or
(a) General. This appendix serves as a emergency response.
guideline to assist employers who elect to (d) Other plan information. The plan:
develop a site-specific erection plan in ac- (1) Includes the identification of the site
cordance with § 1926.752(e) with alternate and project; and
means and methods to provide employee pro- (2) Is signed and dated by the qualified per-
tection in accordance with § 1926.752(e), son(s) responsible for its preparation and
§ 1926.753(c)(5), § 1926.757(a)(4) and modification.
§ 1926.757(e)(4).
(b) Development of a site-specific erection APPENDIX B TO SUBPART R OF PART 1926
plan. Pre-construction conference(s) and site [RESERVED]
418
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. R, App. C
APPENDIX C TO SUBPART R OF PART 1926—ILLUSTRATIONS OF BRIDGING TERMINUS
POINTS: NON-MANDATORY
419
ER18JA01.021</GPH>
Pt. 1926, Subpt. R, App. C 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–13 Edition)
420
ER18JA01.022</GPH>
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. R, App. D
APPENDIX D TO SUBPART R OF PART metal deck and other operations connected

1926—ILLUSTRATION OF THE USE OF with leading edge work are taking place, the
controlled decking zone (CDZ) is defined by a
CONTROL LINES TO DEMARCATE CON-
control line or by any other means that re-
TROLLED DECKING ZONES (CDZS): stricts access.
NON-MANDATORY GUIDELINES FOR (i) A control line for a CDZ is erected not
COMPLYING WITH § 1926.760(c)(3) less than 6 feet (1.8 m) nor more than 90 feet
(27.4 m) from the leading edge.
(1) When used to control access to areas (ii) Control lines extend along the entire
where leading edge and initial securement of length of the unprotected or leading edge
421
ER18JA01.023</GPH>
Pt. 1926, Subpt. R, App. E 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–13 Edition)
and are approximately parallel to the unpro- NOTE: When employees are using stilts, the
tected or leading edge. top edge height of the top rail, or equivalent
(iii) Control lines are connected on each member, shall be increased an amount equal
side to a guardrail system, wall, stanchion or to the height of the stilts.
other suitable anchorage. (2) Midrails, screens, mesh, intermediate
(2) Control lines consist of ropes, wires, vertical members, or equivalent inter-
tapes, or equivalent materials, and sup- mediate structural members shall be in-
porting stanchions as follows: stalled between the top edge of the guardrail
(i) Each line is rigged and supported in system and the walking/working surface
such a way that its lowest point (including when there is no wall or parapet wall at least
sag) is not less than 39 inches (1.0 m) from 21 inches (53 cm) high.
the walking/working surface and its highest
(i) Midrails, when used, shall be installed
point is not more than 45 inches (1.3 m) from
at a height midway between the top edge of
the walking/working surface.
the guardrail system and the walking/work-
(ii) Each line has a minimum breaking
ing level.
strength of 200 pounds (90.8 kg).
(ii) Screens and mesh, when used, shall ex-
tend from the top rail to the walking/work-
APPENDIX E TO SUBPART R OF PART
ing level and along the entire opening be-
1926—TRAINING: NON-MANDATORY tween top rail supports.
GUIDELINES FOR COMPLYING WITH (iii) Intermediate members (such as balus-
§ 1926.761 ters), when used between posts, shall be not
more than 19 inches (48 cm) apart.
The training requirements of § 1926.761 will
(iv) Other structural members (such as ad-
be deemed to have been met if employees
ditional midrails and architectural panels)
have completed a training course on steel
shall be installed such that there are no
erection, including instruction in the provi-
openings in the guardrail system that are
sions of this standard, that has been ap-
more than 19 inches (.5 m) wide.
proved by the U.S. Department of Labor Bu-
(3) Guardrail systems shall be capable of
reau of Apprenticeship.
withstanding, without failure, a force of at
least 200 pounds (890 N) applied within 2
APPENDIX F TO SUBPART R OF PART inches (5.1 cm) of the top edge, in any out-
1926—PERIMETER COLUMNS: NON- ward or downward direction, at any point
MANDATORY GUIDELINES FOR COM- along the top edge.
PLYING WITH § 1926.756(e) TO PRO- (4) When the 200 pound (890 N) test load
TECT THE UNPROTECTED SIDE OR specified in paragraph (b)(3) of this section
EDGE OF A WALKING/WORKING SUR- (§ 1926.502) is applied in a downward direc-
FACE tion, the top edge of the guardrail shall not
deflect to a height less than 39 inches (1.0 m)
In multi-story structures, when holes in above the walking/working level. Guardrail
the column web are used for perimeter safety system components selected and constructed
cables, the column splice must be placed suf- in accordance with the appendix B to subpart
ficiently high so as not to interfere with any M of this part will be deemed to meet this re-
attachments to the column necessary for the quirement.
column splice. Column splices are rec- (5) Midrails, screens, mesh, intermediate
ommended to be placed at every other or vertical members, solid panels, and equiva-
fourth levels as design allows. Column lent structural members shall be capable of
splices at third levels are detrimental to the withstanding, without failure, a force of at
erection process and should be avoided if pos- least 150 pounds (666 N) applied in any down-
sible. ward or outward direction at any point along
the midrail or other member.
APPENDIX G TO SUBPART R OF PART (6) Guardrail systems shall be so surfaced
1926—§ 1926.502 (b)–(e) FALL PROTEC- as to prevent injury to an employee from
TION SYSTEMS CRITERIA AND PRAC- punctures or lacerations, and to prevent
TICES snagging of clothing.
(7) The ends of all top rails and midrails
(b) ‘‘Guardrail systems.’’ Guardrail sys- shall not overhang the terminal posts, ex-
tems and their use shall comply with the fol- cept where such overhang does not con-
lowing provisions: stitute a projection hazard.
(1) Top edge height of top rails, or equiva- (8) Steel banding and plastic banding shall
lent guardrail system members, shall be 42 not be used as top rails or midrails.
inches (1.1 m) plus or minus 3 inches (8 cm) (9) Top rails and midrails shall be at least
above the walking/working level. When con- one-quarter inch (0.6 cm) nominal diameter
ditions warrant, the height of the top edge or thickness to prevent cuts and lacerations.
may exceed the 45-inch height, provided the If wire rope is used for top rails, it shall be
guardrail system meets all other criteria of flagged at not more than 6-foot intervals
this paragraph (§ 1926.502(b)). with high-visibility material.
422
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. R, App. G
(10) When guardrail systems are used at (14) Guardrail systems used on ramps and
hoisting areas, a chain, gate or removable runways shall be erected along each unpro-
guardrail section shall be placed across the tected side or edge.
access opening between guardrail sections (15) Manila, plastic or synthetic rope being
when hoisting operations are not taking used for top rails or midrails shall be in-
place. spected as frequently as necessary to ensure
(11) When guardrail systems are used at that it continues to meet the strength re-
holes, they shall be erected on all unpro- quirements of paragraph (b)(3) of this section
tected sides or edges of the hole. (§ 1926.502).
(12) When guardrail systems are used
(c) Safety net systems. Safety net systems
around holes used for the passage of mate-
and their use shall comply with the fol-
rials, the hole shall have not more than two
lowing provisions:
sides provided with removable guardrail sec-
tions to allow the passage of materials. (1) Safety nets shall be installed as close as
When the hole is not in use, it shall be closed practicable under the walking/working sur-
over with a cover, or a guardrail system face on which employees are working, but in
shall be provided along all unprotected sides no case more than 30 feet (9.1 m) below such
or edges. level. When nets are used on bridges, the po-
(13) When guardrail systems are used tential fall area from the walking/working
around holes which are used as points of ac- surface to the net shall be unobstructed.
cess (such as ladderways), they shall be pro- (2) Safety nets shall extend outward from
vided with a gate, or be so offset that a per- the outermost projection of the work surface
son cannot walk directly into the hole. as follows:
Minimum required horizontal distance of outer edge of net from

Vertical distance from working level to horizontal plane of net the edge of the working surface
Up to 5 feet .................................................................................. 8 feet

More than 5 feet up to 10 feet .................................................... 10 feet
More than 10 feet ........................................................................ 13 feet
(3) Safety nets shall be installed with suffi- certification record must include an identi-
cient clearance under them to prevent con- fication of the net and net installation for
tact with the surface or structures below which the certification record is being pre-
when subjected to an impact force equal to pared; the date that it was determined that
the drop test specified in paragraph (4) of the identified net and net installation were
this section [§ 1926.502]. in compliance with paragraph (c)(3) of this
(4) Safety nets and their installations shall section (§ 1926.502) and the signature of the
be capable of absorbing an impact force person making the determination and cer-
equal to that produced by the drop test spec- tification. The most recent certification
ified in paragraph (c)(4)(i) of this section record for each net and net installation shall
[§ 1926.502]. be available at the jobsite for inspection.
(i) Except as provided in paragraph (5) Defective nets shall not be used. Safety
(c)(4)(ii) of this section (§ 1926.502), safety nets shall be inspected at least once a week
nets and safety net installations shall be for wear, damage, and other deterioration.
drop-tested at the jobsite after initial instal- Defective components shall be removed from
lation and before being used as a fall protec- service. Safety nets shall also be inspected
tion system, whenever relocated, after major after any occurrence which could affect the
repair, and at 6-month intervals if left in one
integrity of the safety net system.
place. The drop-test shall consist of a 400
(6) Materials, scrap pieces, equipment, and
pound (180 kg) bag of sand 30+ or ¥2 inches
(76+ or ¥5 cm) in diameter dropped into the tools which have fallen into the safety net
net from the highest walking/working sur- shall be removed as soon as possible from the
face at which employees are exposed to fall net and at least before the next work shift.
hazards, but not from less than 42 inches (1.1 (7) The maximum size of each safety net
m) above that level. mesh opening shall not exceed 36 square
(ii) When the employer can demonstrate inches (230 cm) nor be longer than 6 inches
that it is unreasonable to perform the drop- (15 cm) on any side, and the opening, meas-
test required by paragraph (c)(4)(i) of this ured center-to-center of mesh ropes or web-
section (§ 1926.502), the employer (or a des- bing, shall not be longer than 6 inches (15
ignated competent person) shall certify that cm). All mesh crossings shall be secured to
the net and net installation is in compliance prevent enlargement of the mesh opening.
with the provisions of paragraphs (c)(3) and (8) Each safety net (or section of it) shall
(c)(4)(i) of this section (§ 1926.502) by pre- have a border rope for webbing with a min-
paring a certification record prior to the net imum breaking strength of 5,000 pounds (22.2
being used as a fall protection system. The kN).
423
Pt. 1926, Subpt. R, App. G 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–13 Edition)
(9) Connections between safety net panels (9) Lanyards and vertical lifelines shall
shall be as strong as integral net components have a minimum breaking strength of 5,000
and shall be spaced not more than 6 inches pounds (22.2 kN).
(15 cm) apart. (10)(i) Except as provided in paragraph
(d) ‘‘Personal fall arrest systems.’’ Per- (d)(10)(ii) of this section [§ 1926.502], when
sonal fall arrest systems and their use shall vertical lifelines are used, each employee
comply with the provisions set forth below. shall be attached to a separate lifeline.
Effective January 1, 1998, body belts are not (ii) During the construction of elevator
acceptable as part of a personal fall arrest shafts, two employees may be attached to
system. the same lifeline in the hoistway, provided
both employees are working atop a false car
NOTE: The use of a body belt in a posi- that is equipped with guardrails; the
tioning device system is acceptable and is strength of the lifeline is 10,000 pounds [5,000
regulated under paragraph (e) of this section pounds per employee attached] (44.4 kN); and
(§ 1926.502). all other criteria specified in this paragraph
(1) Connectors shall be drop forged, pressed for lifelines have been met.
or formed steel, or made of equivalent mate- (11) Lifelines shall be protected against
rials. being cut or abraded.
(2) Connectors shall have a corrosion-re- (12) Self-retracting lifelines and lanyards
sistant finish, and all surfaces and edges which automatically limit free fall distance
shall be smooth to prevent damage to inter- to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less shall be capable of
facing parts of the system. sustaining a minimum tensile load of 3,000
(3) Dee-rings and snaphooks shall have a pounds (13.3 kN) applied to the device with
minimum tensile strength of 5,000 pounds the lifeline or lanyard in the fully extended
(22.2 kN). position.
(13) Self-retracting lifelines and lanyards
(4) Dee-rings and snaphooks shall be proof-
which do not limit free fall distance to 2 feet
tested to a minimum tensile load of 3,600
(0.61 m) or less, ripstitch lanyards, and tear-
pounds (16 kN) without cracking, breaking,
ing and deforming lanyards shall be capable
or taking permanent deformation.
of sustaining a minimum tensile load of 5,000
(5) Snaphooks shall be sized to be compat-
pounds (22.2 kN) applied to the device with
ible with the member to which they are con-
the lifeline or lanyard in the fully extended
nected to prevent unintentional disengage-
position.
ment of the snaphook by depression of the
(14) Ropes and straps (webbing) used in lan-
snaphook keeper by the connected member,
yards, lifelines, and strength components of
or shall be a locking type snaphook designed
body belts and body harnesses shall be made
and used to prevent disengagement of the
from synthetic fibers.
snaphook by the contact of the snaphook
(15) Anchorages used for attachment of
keeper by the connected member. Effective
personal fall arrest equipment shall be inde-
January 1, 1998, only locking type snaphooks
pendent of any anchorage being used to sup-
shall be used.
port or suspend platforms and capable of sup-
(6) Unless the snaphook is a locking type porting at least 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN) per
and designed for the following connections, employee attached, or shall be designed, in-
snaphooks shall not be engaged: stalled, and used as follows:
(i) directly to webbing, rope or wire rope; (i) as part of a complete personal fall ar-
(ii) to each other; rest system which maintains a safety factor
(iii) to a dee-ring to which another of at least two; and
snaphook or other connector is attached; (ii) under the supervision of a qualified
(iv) to a horizontal lifeline; or person.
(v) to any object which is incompatibly (16) Personal fall arrest systems, when
shaped or dimensioned in relation to the stopping a fall, shall:
snaphook such that unintentional disengage- (i) limit maximum arresting force on an
ment could occur by the connected object employee to 900 pounds (4 kN) when used
being able to depress the snaphook keeper with a body belt;
and release itself. (ii) limit maximum arresting force on an
(7) On suspended scaffolds or similar work employee to 1,800 pounds (8 kN) when used
platforms with horizontal lifelines which with a body harness;
may become vertical lifelines, the devices (iii) be rigged such that an employee can
used to connect to a horizontal lifeline shall neither free fall more than 6 feet (1.8 m), nor
be capable of locking in both directions on contact any lower level;
the lifeline. (iv) bring an employee to a complete stop
(8) Horizontal lifelines shall be designed, and limit maximum deceleration distance an
installed, and used, under the supervision of employee travels to 3.5 feet (1.07 m); and,
a qualified person, as part of a complete per- (v) have sufficient strength to withstand
sonal fall arrest system, which maintains a twice the potential impact energy of an em-
safety factor of at least two. ployee free falling a distance of 6 feet (1.8 m),
424
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. R, App. H
or the free fall distance permitted by the (2) Positioning devices shall be secured to
system, whichever is less. an anchorage capable of supporting at least
twice the potential impact load of an em-
NOTE: If the personal fall arrest system
ployee’s fall or 3,000 pounds (13.3 kN), which-
meets the criteria and protocols contained in
appendix C to subpart M, and if the system ever is greater.
is being used by an employee having a com- (3) Connectors shall be drop forged, pressed
bined person and tool weight of less than 310 or formed steel, or made of equivalent mate-
pounds (140 kg), the system will be consid- rials.
ered to be in compliance with the provisions (4) Connectors shall have a corrosion-re-
of paragraph (d)(16) of this section [§ 1926.502]. sistant finish, and all surfaces and edges
If the system is used by an employee having shall be smooth to prevent damage to inter-
a combined tool and body weight of 310 facing parts of this system.
pounds (140 kg) or more, then the employer (5) Connecting assemblies shall have a
must appropriately modify the criteria and minimum tensile strength of 5,000 pounds
protocols of the appendix to provide proper (22.2 kN)
protection for such heavier weights, or the (6) Dee-rings and snaphooks shall be proof-
system will not be deemed to be in compli- tested to a minimum tensile load of 3,600
ance with the requirements of paragraph pounds (16 kN) without cracking, breaking,
(d)(16) of this section (§ 1926.502). or taking permanent deformation.
(7) Snaphooks shall be sized to be compat-
(17) The attachment point of the body belt
ible with the member to which they are con-
shall be located in the center of the wearer’s
nected to prevent unintentional disengage-
back. The attachment point of the body har-
ment of the snaphook by depression of the
ness shall be located in the center of the
wearer’s back near shoulder level, or above snaphook keeper by the connected member,
the wearer’s head. or shall be a locking type snaphook designed
(18) Body belts, harnesses, and components and used to prevent disengagement of the
shall be used only for employee protection snaphook by the contact of the snaphook
(as part of a personal fall arrest system or keeper by the connected member. As of Jan-
positioning device system) and not to hoist uary 1, 1998, only locking type snaphooks
materials. shall be used.
(19) Personal fall arrest systems and com- (8) Unless the snaphook is a locking type
ponents subjected to impact loading shall be and designed for the following connections,
immediately removed from service and shall snaphooks shall not be engaged:
not be used again for employee protection (i) directly to webbing, rope or wire rope;
until inspected and determined by a com- (ii) to each other;
petent person to be undamaged and suitable (iii) to a dee-ring to which another
for reuse. snaphook or other connector is attached;
(20) The employer shall provide for prompt (iv) to a horizontal lifeline; or to depress
rescue of employees in the event of a fall or the snaphook keeper and release itself.
shall assure that employees are able to res- (v) to any object which is incompatibly
cue themselves. shaped or dimensioned in relation to the
(21) Personal fall arrest systems shall be snaphook such that unintentional disengage-
inspected prior to each use for wear, damage ment could occur by the connected object
and other deterioration, and defective com- being able to depress the snaphook keeper
ponents shall be removed from service. and release itself.
(22) Body belts shall be at least one and (9) Positioning device systems shall be in-
five-eighths (15⁄8) inches (4.1 cm) wide. spected prior to each use for wear, damage,
(23) Personal fall arrest systems shall not and other deterioration, and defective com-
be attached to guardrail systems, nor shall ponents shall be removed from service.
they be attached to hoists except as specified (10) Body belts, harnesses, and components
in other subparts of this Part. shall be used only for employee protection
(24) When a personal fall arrest system is (as part of a personal fall arrest system or
used at hoist areas, it shall be rigged to positioning device system) and not to hoist
allow the movement of the employee only as materials.
far as the edge of the walking/working sur-
face. APPENDIX H TO SUBPART R OF PART
(e) Positioning device systems. Positioning
1926—DOUBLE CONNECTIONS: ILLUS-
device systems and their use shall conform
to the following provisions: TRATION OF A CLIPPED END CONNEC-
(1) Positioning devices shall be rigged such TION AND A STAGGERED CONNECTION:
that an employee cannot free fall more than NON-MANDATORY GUIDELINES FOR
2 feet (.9 m). COMPLYING WITH § 1926.756(c)(1)
425
Pt. 1926, Subpt. R, App. H 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–13 Edition)
Clipped end connections are connection member to remain in place. The notch(es)
material on the end of a structural member fits around the nut or bolt head of the oppos-
which has a notch at the bottom and/or top ing member to allow the second member to
to allow the bolt(s) of the first member be bolted up without removing the bolt(s)
placed on the opposite side of the central holding the first member.
Staggered connections are connection ma- Subpart S—Underground Con-

terial on a structural member in which all of
the bolt holes in the common member web struction, Caissons,
are not shared by the two incoming members Cofferdams and Compressed
in the final connection. The extra hole in the Air
column web allows the erector to maintain
at least a one bolt connection at all times
while making the double connection.
657; and Secretary of Labor’s Orders 12–71 (36
ER18JA01.024</GPH> ER18JA01.025</GPH>
FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736),

1–90 (55 FR 9033), 6–96 (62 FR 111), 5–2007 (72
426
FR 31159), or 1–2012 (77 FR 3912), as applica- when the remaining construction ac-
ble. tivity will not cause any environ-
mental hazard or structural failure
§ 1926.800 Underground construction. within the facilities.
(a) Scope and application. (1) This sec- (d) Safety instruction. All employees
tion applies to the construction of un- shall be instructed in the recognition
derground tunnels, shafts, chambers, and avoidance of hazards associated
and passageways. This section also ap- with underground construction activi-
plies to cut-and-cover excavations ties including, where appropriate, the
which are both physically connected to following subjects:
ongoing underground construction op- (1) Air monitoring;
erations within the scope of this sec- (2) Ventilation;
tion, and covered in such a manner as (3) Illumination;
to create conditions characteristic of (4) Communications;
underground construction. (5) Flood control;
(2) This section does not apply to the (6) Mechanical equipment;
following: (7) Personal protective equipment;
(i) Excavation and trenching oper- (8) Explosives;
ations covered by subpart P of this (9) Fire prevention and protection;
part, such as foundation operations for and
above-ground structures that are not (10) Emergency procedures, including
physically connected to underground evacuation plans and check-in/check-
construction operations, and surface out systems.
excavation; nor (e) Notification. (1) Oncoming shifts
(ii) Underground electrical trans- shall be informed of any hazardous oc-
mission and distribution lines, as ad- currences or conditions that have af-
dressed in subpart V of this part. fected or might affect employee safety,
(b) Access and egress. (1) The employer including liberation of gas, equipment
shall provide and maintain safe means failures, earth or rock slides, cave-ins,
of access and egress to all work sta- floodings, fires or explosions.
tions. (2) The employer shall establish and
(2) The employer shall provide access maintain direct communications for
and egress in such a manner that em- coordination of activities with other
ployees are protected from being employers whose operations at the job-
struck by excavators, haulage ma- site affect or may affect the safety of
chines, trains and other mobile equip- employees underground.
ment. (f) Communications. (1) When natural
(3) The employer shall control access unassisted voice communication is in-
to all openings to prevent unauthorized effective, a power-assisted means of
entry underground. Unused chutes, voice communication shall be used to
manways, or other openings shall be provide communication between the
tightly covered, bulkheaded, or fenced work face, the bottom of the shaft, and
off, and shall be posted with warning the surface.
signs indicating ‘‘Keep Out’’ or similar (2) Two effective means of commu-
language. Completed or unused sec- nication, at least one of which shall be
tions of the underground facility shall voice communication, shall be provided
be barricaded. in all shafts which are being developed
(c) Check-in/check-out. The employer or used either for personnel access or
shall maintain a check-in/check-out for hoisting. Additional requirements
procedure that will ensure that above- for hoist operator communication are
ground personnel can determine an ac- contained in paragraph (t)(3)(xiv) of
curate count of the number of persons this section.
underground in the event of an emer- (3) Powered communication systems
gency. However, this procedure is not shall operate on an independent power
required when the construction of un- supply, and shall be installed so that
derground facilities designed for the use of or disruption of any one
human occupancy has been sufficiently phone or signal location will not dis-
completed so that the permanent envi- rupt the operation of the system from
ronmental controls are effective, and any other location.
427
(4) Communication systems shall be provide (or make arrangements in ad-
tested upon initial entry of each shift vance with locally available rescue
to the underground, and as often as services to provide) at least two 5-per-
necessary at later times, to ensure that son rescue teams, one on the jobsite or
they are in working order. within one-half hour travel time from
(5) Any employee working alone un- the entry point, and the other within 2
derground in a hazardous location, who hours travel time.
is both out of the range of natural un- (ii) On jobsites where less than 25 em-
assisted voice communication and not ployees work underground at one time,
under observation by other persons, the employer shall provide (or make
shall be provided with an effective arrangements in advance with locally
means of obtaining assistance in an available rescue services to provide) at
emergency. least one 5-person rescue team to be ei-
(g) Emergency provisions—(1) Hoisting ther on the jobsite or within one-half
capability. When a shaft is used as a hour travel time from the entry point.
means of egress, the employer shall (iii) Rescue team members shall be
make advance arrangements for power- qualified in rescue procedures, the use
assisted hoisting capability to be read- and limitations of breathing apparatus,
ily available in an emergency, unless and the use of firefighting equipment.
the regular hoisting means can con- Qualifications shall be reviewed not
tinue to function in the event of an less than annually.
electrical power failure at the jobsite. (iv) On jobsites where flammable or
Such hoisting means shall be designed noxious gases are encountered or an-
so that the load hoist drum is powered ticipated in hazardous quantities, res-
in both directions of rotation and so cue team members shall practice don-
that the brake is automatically applied ning and using self-contained breathing
upon power release or failure. apparatus monthly.
(2) Self-rescuers. The employer must (v) The employer shall ensure that
provide self-rescuers approved by the rescue teams are familiar with condi-
National Institute for Occupational tions at the jobsite.
Safety and Health under 42 CFR part (h) Hazardous classifications—(1) Po-
84. The respirators must be imme- tentially gassy operations. Underground
diately available to all employees at construction operations shall be classi-
work stations in underground areas fied as potentially gassy if either:
where employees might be trapped by (i) Air monitoring discloses 10 per-
smoke or gas. The selection, issuance, cent or more of the lower explosive
use, and care of respirators must be in limit for methane or other flammable
accordance with 29 CFR 1926.103. gases measured at 12 inches (304.8 mm)
(3) Designated person. At least one ±0.25 inch (6.35 mm) from the roof, face,
designated person shall be on duty floor or walls in any underground work
above ground whenever any employee area for more than a 24-hour period; or
is working underground. This des- (ii) The history of the geographical
ignated person shall be responsible for area or geological formation indicates
securing immediate aid and keeping an that 10 percent or more of the lower ex-
accurate count of employees under- plosive limit for methane or other
ground in case of emergency. The des- flammable gases is likely to be encoun-
ignated person must not be so busy tered in such underground operations.
with other responsibilities that the (2) Gassy operations. Underground
counting function is encumbered. construction operations shall be classi-
(4) Emergency lighting. Each employee fied as gassy if:
underground shall have an acceptable (i) Air monitoring discloses 10 per-
portable hand lamp or cap lamp in his cent or more of the lower explosive
or her work area for emergency use, limit for methane or other flammable
unless natural light or an emergency gases measured at 12 inches (304.8 mm)
lighting system provides adequate illu- ±0.25 inch (6.35 mm) from the roof, face,
mination for escape. floor or walls in any underground work
(5) Rescue teams. (i) On jobsites where area for three consecutive days; or
25 or more employees work under- (ii) There has been an ignition of
ground at one time, the employer shall methane or of other flammable gases
428
emanating from the strata that indi- (j) Air quality and monitoring—(1) Gen-
cates the presence of such gases; or eral. Air quality limits and control re-
(iii) The underground construction quirements for construction are found
operation is both connected to an unin § 1926.55, except as modified by this
derground work area which is cur- section.
rently classified as gassy and is also (i)(A) The employer shall assign a
subject to a continuous course of air competent person who shall perform all
containing the flammable gas con- air monitoring required by this sec-
centration. tion.
(3) Declassification to potentially gassy (B) Where this paragraph requires
operations. Underground construction monitoring of airborne contaminants
gassy operations may be declassified to ‘‘as often as necessary,’’ the competent
Potentially Gassy when air monitoring person shall make a reasonable deter-
results remain under 10 percent of the mination as to which substances to
lower explosive limit for methane or monitor and how frequently to mon-
other flammable gases for three con- itor, considering at least the following
secutive days. factors:
(i) Gassy operations-additional require- (1) Location of jobsite: Proximity to
ments. (1) Only acceptable equipment, fuel tanks, sewers, gas lines, old land-
maintained in suitable condition, shall fills, coal deposits, and swamps;
be used in gassy operations.
(2) Geology: Geological studies of the
(2) Mobile diesel-powered equipment
jobsite, particularly involving the soil
used in gassy operations shall be either
type and its permeability;
approved in accordance with the re-
(3) History: Presence of air contami-
quirements of 30 CFR part 36 (formerly
nants in nearby jobsites, changes in
Schedule 31) by MSHA, or shall be dem-
levels of substances monitored on the
onstrated by the employer to be fully
prior shift; and
equivalent to such MSHA-approved
equipment, and shall be operated in ac- (4) Work practices and jobsite condi-
cordance with that part. tions: The use of diesel engines, use of
(3) Each entrance to a gassy oper- explosives, use of fuel gas, volume and
ation shall be prominently posted with flow of ventilation, visible atmospheric
signs notifying all entrants of the conditions, decompression of the at-
gassy classification. mosphere, welding, cutting and hot
(4) Smoking shall be prohibited in all work, and employees’ physical reac-
gassy operations and the employer tions to working underground.
shall be responsible for collecting all (ii)(A) The atmosphere in all under-
personal sources of ignition, such as ground work areas shall be tested as
matches and lighters, from all persons often as necessary to assure that the
entering a gassy operation. atmosphere at normal atmospheric
(5) A fire watch as described in pressure contains at least 19.5 percent
§ 1926.352(e) shall be maintained when oxygen and no more than 22 percent ox-
hot work is performed. ygen.
(6) Once an operation has met the cri- (B) Tests for oxygen content shall be
teria in paragraph (h)(2) warranting made before tests for air contaminants.
classification as gassy, all operations (iii)(A) The atmosphere in all under-
in the affected area, except the fol- ground work areas shall be tested
lowing, shall be discontinued until the quantitatively for carbon monoxide, ni-
operation either is in compliance with trogen dioxide, hydrogen sulfide, and
all of the gassy operation requirements other toxic gases, dusts, vapors, mists,
or has been declassified in accordance and fumes as often as necessary to en-
with paragraph (h)(3) of this section: sure that the permissible exposure lim-
(i) Operations related to the control its prescribed in § 1926.55 are not ex-
of the gas concentration; ceeded.
(ii) Installation of new equipment, or (B) The atmosphere in all under-
conversion of existing equipment, to ground work areas shall be tested
comply with this paragraph (i); and quantitatively for methane and other
(iii) Installation of above-ground con- flammable gases as often as necessary
trols for reversing the air flow. to determine:
429
(1) Whether action is to be taken to inform all entrants of the hazardous
under paragraphs (j)(1)(vii), (viii), and condition; and
(ix), of this section; and (B) Ensure that the necessary pre-
(2) Whether an operation is to be cautions are taken.
classified potentially gassy or gassy (vii) Whenever five percent or more
under paragraph (h) of this section. of the lower explosive limit for meth-
(C) If diesel-engine or gasoline-engine ane or other flammable gases is de-
driven ventilating fans or compressors tected in any underground work area(s)
are used, an initial test shall be made or in the air return, steps shall be
of the inlet air of the fan or com- taken to increase ventilation air vol-
pressor, with the engines operating, to ume or otherwise control the gas con-
ensure that the air supply is not con-
centration, unless the employer is op-
taminated by engine exhaust.
erating in accordance with the poten-
(D) Testing shall be performed as
tially gassy or gassy operation require-
often as necessary to ensure that the
ventilation requirements of paragraph ments. Such additional ventilation
(k) of this section are met. controls may be discontinued when gas
(iv) When rapid excavation machines concentrations are reduced below five
are used, a continuous flammable gas percent of the lower explosive limit,
monitor shall be operated at the face but shall be reinstituted whenever the
with the sensor(s) placed as high and five percent level is exceeded.
close to the front of the machine’s cut- (viii) Whenever 10 percent or more of
ter head as practicable. the lower explosive limit for methane
(v)(A) Whenever air monitoring indi- or other flammable gases is detected in
cates the presence of 5 ppm or more of the vicinity of welding, cutting, or
hydrogen sulfide, a test shall be con- other hot work, such work shall be sus-
ducted in the affected underground pended until the concentration of such
work area(s), at least at the beginning flammable gas is reduced to less than
and midpoint of each shift, until the 10 percent of the lower explosive limit.
concentration of hydrogen sulfide has (ix) Whenever 20 percent or more of
been less than 5 ppm for 3 consecutive the lower explosive limit for methane
days. or other flammable gases is detected in
(B) Whenever hydrogen sulfide is de- any underground work area(s) or in the
tected in an amount exceeding 10 ppm, air return:
a continuous sampling and indicating (A) All employees, except those nec-
hydrogen sulfide monitor shall be used essary to eliminate the hazard, shall be
to monitor the affected work area. immediately withdrawn to a safe loca-
(C) Employees shall be informed tion above ground; and
when a concentration of 10 ppm hydro-
(B) Electrical power, except for ac-
gen sulfide is exceeded.
ceptable pumping and ventilation
(D) The continuous sampling and in-
equipment, shall be cut off to the area
dicating hydrogen sulfide monitor shall
endangered by the flammable gas until
be designed, installed, and maintained
the concentration of such gas is re-
to provide a visual and aural alarm
when the hydrogen sulfide concentra- duced to less than 20 percent of the
tion reaches 20 ppm to signal that addi- lower explosive limit.
tional measures, such as respirator use, (2) Additional monitoring for potentially
increased ventilation, or evacuation, gassy and gassy operations. Operations
might be necessary to maintain hydro- which meet the criteria for potentially
gen sulfide exposure below the permis- gassy and gassy operations set forth in
sible exposure limit. paragraph (h) of this section shall be
(vi) When the competent person de- subject to the additional monitoring
termines, on the basis of air moni- requirements of this paragraph.
toring results or other information, (i) A test for oxygen content shall be
that air contaminants may be present conducted in the affected underground
in sufficient quantity to be dangerous work areas and work areas imme-
to life, the employer shall: diately adjacent to such areas at least
(A) Prominently post a notice at all at the beginning and midpoint of each
entrances to the underground jobsite shift.
430
(ii) When using rapid excavation ma- other underground work areas shall be
chines, continuous automatic flam- at least 30 feet (9.15 m) per minute
mable gas monitoring equipment shall where blasting or rock drilling is con-
be used to monitor the air at the head- ducted, or where other conditions like-
ing, on the rib, and in the return air ly to produce dust, fumes, mists, va-
duct. The continuous monitor shall sig- pors, or gases in harmful or explosive
nal the heading, and shut down electric quantities are present.
power in the affected underground (4) The direction of mechanical air
work area, except for acceptable pump- flow shall be reversible.
ing and ventilation equipment, when 20 (5) Following blasting, ventilation
percent or more of the lower explosive systems shall exhaust smoke and
limit for methane or other flammable fumes to the outside atmosphere before
gases is encountered. work is resumed in affected areas.
(iii) A manual flammable gas mon- (6) Ventilation doors shall be de-
itor shall be used as needed, but at signed and installed so that they re-
least at the beginning and midpoint of main closed when in use, regardless of
each shift, to ensure that the limits the direction of the air flow.
prescribed in paragraphs (h) and (j) are (7) When ventilation has been re-
not exceeded. In addition, a manual duced to the extent that hazardous lev-
electrical shut down control shall be els of methane or flammable gas may
provided near the heading. have accumulated, a competent person
(iv) Local gas tests shall be made shall test all affected areas after ven-
prior to and continuously during any tilation has been restored and shall de-
welding, cutting, or other hot work. termine whether the atmosphere is
(v) In underground operations driven within flammable limits before any
by drill-and-blast methods, the air in power, other than for acceptable equip-
the affected area shall be tested for ment, is restored or work is resumed.
flammable gas prior to re-entry after (8) Whenever the ventilation system
blasting, and continuously when em- has been shut down with all employees
ployees are working underground. out of the underground area, only com-
(3) Recordkeeping. A record of all air petent persons authorized to test for
quality tests shall be maintained above air contaminants shall be allowed un-
ground at the worksite and be made derground until the ventilation has
available to the Secretary of Labor been restored and all affected areas
upon request. The record shall include have been tested for air contaminants
the location, date, time, substance and and declared safe.
amount monitored. Records of expo- (9) When drilling rock or concrete,
sures to toxic substances shall be re- appropriate dust control measures
tained in accordance with § 1910.33 of shall be taken to maintain dust levels
this chapter. All other air quality test within limits set in § 1926.55. Such
records shall be retained until comple- measures may include, but are not lim-
tion of the project. ited to, wet drilling, the use of vacuum
(k) Ventilation. (1)(i) Fresh air shall collectors, and water mix spray sys-
be supplied to all underground work tems.
areas in sufficient quantities to pre- (10)(i) Internal combustion engines,
vent dangerous or harmful accumula- except diesel-powered engines on mo-
tion of dusts, fumes, mists, vapors or bile equipment, are prohibited under-
gases. ground.
(ii) Mechanical ventilation shall be (ii) Mobile diesel-powered equipment
provided in all underground work areas used underground in atmospheres other
except when the employer can dem- than gassy operations shall be either
onstrate that natural ventilation pro- approved by MSHA in accordance with
vides the necessary air quality through the provisions of 30 CFR part 32 (for-
sufficient air volume and air flow. merly Schedule 24), or shall be dem-
(2) A minimum of 200 cubic feet (5.7 onstrated by the employer to be fully
m3) of fresh air per minute shall be sup- equivalent to such MSHA-approved
plied for each employee underground. equipment, and shall be operated in ac-
(3) The linear velocity of air flow in cordance with that part. (Each brake
the tunnel bore, in shafts, and in all horsepower of a diesel engine requires
431
at least 100 cubic feet (28.32 m3) of air (4) The piping of diesel fuel from the
per minute for suitable operation in ad- surface to an underground location is
dition to the air requirements for per- permitted only if:
sonnel. Some engines may require a (i) Diesel fuel is contained at the sur-
greater amount of air to ensure that face in a tank whose maximum capac-
the allowable levels of carbon mon- ity is no more than the amount of fuel
oxide, nitric oxide, and nitrogen diox- required to supply for a 24-hour period
ide are not exceeded.) the equipment serviced by the under-
(11) Potentially gassy or gassy oper- ground fueling station; and
ations shall have ventilation systems (ii) The surface tank is connected to
installed which shall: the underground fueling station by an
(i) Be constructed of fire-resistant acceptable pipe or hose system that is
materials; and controlled at the surface by a valve,
(ii) Have acceptable electrical sys- and at the shaft bottom by a hose noz-
tems, including fan motors. zle; and
(12) Gassy operations shall be pro- (iii) The pipe is empty at all times
vided with controls located above except when transferring diesel fuel
ground for reversing the air flow of from the surface tank to a piece of
ventilation systems. equipment in use underground; and
(13) In potentially gassy or gassy op- (iv) Hoisting operations in the shaft
erations, wherever mine-type ventila- are suspended during refueling oper-
tion systems using an offset main fan ations if the supply piping in the shaft
installed on the surface are used, they is not protected from damage.
shall be equipped with explosion-doors (5)(i) Gasoline shall not be carried,
or a weak-wall having an area at least stored, or used underground.
equivalent to the cross-sectional area (ii) Acetylene, liquefied petroleum
of the airway. gas, and Methylacetylene Propadiene
(l) Illumination. (1) Illumination re- Stabilized gas may be used under-
quirements applicable to underground ground only for welding, cutting and
construction operations are found in other hot work, and only in accordance
Table D–3 of § 1926.56 of this part. with subpart J of this part, and para-
(2) Only acceptable portable lighting graphs (j), (k), (m), and (n) of this sec-
equipment shall be used within 50 feet tion.
(15.24 m) of any underground heading (6) Oil, grease, and diesel fuel stored
during explosives handling. underground shall be kept in tightly
(m) Fire prevention and control. Fire sealed containers in fire-resistant areas
prevention and protection require- at least 300 feet (91.44 m) from under-
ments applicable to underground con- ground explosive magazines, and at
struction operations are found in sub- least 100 feet (30.48 m) from shaft sta-
part F of this part, except as modified tions and steeply inclined passageways.
by the following additional standards. Storage areas shall be positioned or
(1) Open flames and fires are prohib- diked so that the contents of ruptured
ited in all underground construction or overturned containers will not flow
operations except as permitted for from the storage area.
welding, cutting and other hot work (7) Flammable or combustible mate-
operations in paragraph (n) of this sec- rials shall not be stored above ground
tion. within 100 feet (30.48 m) of any access
(2) (i) Smoking may be allowed only opening to any underground operation.
in areas free of fire and explosion haz- Where this is not feasible because of
ards. space limitations at the jobsite, such
(ii) Readily visible signs prohibiting materials may be located within the
smoking and open flames shall be post- 100-foot limit, provided that:
ed in areas having fire or explosion (i) They are located as far as prac-
hazards. ticable from the opening; and
(3) The employer may store under- (ii) Either a fire-resistant barrier of
ground no more than a 24-hour supply not less than one-hour rating is placed
of diesel fuel for the underground between the stored material and the
equipment used at the worksite. opening, or additional precautions are
432
taken which will protect the materials (2) Subsidence areas. The employer
from ignition sources. shall ensure ground stability in haz-
(8) Fire-resistant hydraulic fluids ardous subsidence areas by shoring, by
shall be used in hydraulically-actuated filling in, or by erecting barricades and
underground machinery and equipment posting warning signs to prevent entry.
unless such equipment is protected by (3) Underground areas. (i)(A) A com-
a fire suppression system or by multi- petent person shall inspect the roof,
purpose fire extinguisher(s) rated at of face, and walls of the work area at the
sufficient capacity for the type and size start of each shift and as often as nec-
of hydraulic equipment involved, but essary to determine ground stability.
rated at least 4A:40B:C. (B) Competent persons conducting
(9)(i) Electrical installations in un- such inspections shall be protected
derground areas where oil, grease, or from loose ground by location, ground
diesel fuel are stored shall be used only support or equivalent means.
for lighting fixtures. (ii) Ground conditions along
(ii) Lighting fixtures in storage haulageways and travelways shall be
areas, or within 25 feet (7.62 m) of un- inspected as frequently as necessary to
derground areas where oil, grease, or ensure safe passage.
diesel fuel are stored, shall be approved (iii) Loose ground that might be haz-
for Class I, Division 2 locations, in ac- ardous to employees shall be taken
cordance with subpart K of this part. down, scaled or supported.
(10) Leaks and spills of flammable or (iv) (A) Torque wrenches shall be
combustible fluids shall be cleaned up used wherever bolts that depend on
immediately. torsionally applied force are used for
(11) A fire extinguisher of at least ground support.
4A:40B:C rating or other equivalent ex- (B) A competent person shall deter-
tinguishing means shall be provided at mine whether rock bolts meet the nec-
the head pulley and at the tail pulley essary torque, and shall determine the
of underground belt conveyors. testing frequency in light of the bolt
(12) Any structure located under- system, ground conditions and the dis-
ground or within 100 feet (30.48 m) of an tance from vibration sources.
opening to the underground shall be (v) Suitable protection shall be pro-
constructed of material having a fire- vided for employees exposed to the haz-
resistance rating of at least one hour. ard of loose ground while installing
(n) Welding, cutting, and other hot ground support systems.
work. In addition to the requirements (vi) Support sets shall be installed so
of subpart J of this part, the following that the bottoms have sufficient an-
requirements shall apply to under- chorage to prevent ground pressures
ground welding, cutting, and other hot from dislodging the support base of the
work. sets. Lateral bracing (collar bracing,
(1) No more than the amount of fuel tie rods, or spreaders) shall be provided
gas and oxygen cylinders necessary to between immediately adjacent sets to
perform welding, cutting, or other hot ensure added stability.
work during the next 24-hour period (vii) Damaged or dislodged ground
shall be permitted underground. supports that create a hazardous condi-
(2) Noncombustible barriers shall be tion shall be promptly repaired or re-
installed below welding, cutting, or placed. When replacing supports, the
other hot work being done in or over a new supports shall be installed before
shaft or raise. the damaged supports are removed.
(o) Ground support—(1) Portal areas. (viii) A shield or other type of sup-
Portal openings and access areas shall port shall be used to maintain a safe
be guarded by shoring, fencing, head travelway for employees working in
walls, shotcreting or other equivalent dead-end areas ahead of any support re-
protection to ensure safe access of em- placement operation.
ployees and equipment. Adjacent areas (4) Shafts. (i) Shafts and wells over 5
shall be scaled or otherwise secured to feet (1.53 m) in depth that employees
prevent loose soil, rock, or fractured must enter shall be supported by a
materials from endangering the portal steel casing, concrete pipe, timber,
and access area. solid rock or other suitable material.
433
(ii) (A) The full depth of the shaft (3) Employees shall not be allowed on
shall be supported by casing or bracing a drill mast while the drill bit is in op-
except where the shaft penetrates into eration or the drill machine is being
solid rock having characteristics that moved.
will not change as a result of exposure. (4) When a drill machine is being
Where the shaft passes through earth moved from one drilling area to an-
into solid rock, or through solid rock other, drill steel, tools, and other
into earth, and where there is potential equipment shall be secured and the
for shear, the casing or bracing shall mast shall be placed in a safe position.
extend at least 5 feet (1.53 m) into the (5) Receptacles or racks shall be pro-
solid rock. When the shaft terminates vided for storing drill steel located on
in solid rock, the casing or bracing jumbos.
shall extend to the end of the shaft or (6) Employees working below jumbo
5 feet (1.53 m) into the solid rock, decks shall be warned whenever drill-
whichever is less. ing is about to begin.
(B) The casing or bracing shall ex- (7) Drills on columns shall be an-
tend 42 inches (1.07 m) plus or minus 3 chored firmly before starting drilling,
inches (8 cm) above ground level, ex- and shall be retightened as necessary
cept that the minimum casing height thereafter.
may be reduced to 12 inches (0.3 m), (8) (i) The employer shall provide me-
provided that a standard railing is in- chanical means on the top deck of a
stalled; that the ground adjacent to the jumbo for lifing unwieldy or heavy ma-
top of the shaft is sloped away from the terial.
shaft collar to prevent entry of liquids; (ii) When jumbo decks are over 10
and that effective barriers are used to feet (3.05 m) in height, the employer
prevent mobile equipment operating shall install stairs wide enough for two
near the shaft from jumping over the 12 persons.
inch (0.3 m) barrier. (iii) Jumbo decks more than 10 feet
(iii) After blasting operations in (3.05 m) in height shall be equipped
shafts, a competent person shall deter- with guardrails on all open sides, ex-
mine if the walls, ladders, timbers, cluding access openings of platforms,
blocking, or wedges have loosened. If unless an adjacent surface provides
so, necessary repairs shall be made be- equivalent fall protection.
fore employees other than those as- (iv) (A) Only employees assisting the
signed to make the repairs are allowed operator shall be allowed to ride on
in or below the affected areas. jumbos, unless the jumbo meets the re-
(p) Blasting. This paragraph applies in quirements of paragraph (r)(6)(ii) of
addition to the requirements for blast- this section.
ing and explosives operations, includ- (B) Jumbos shall be chocked to pre-
ing handling of misfires, which are vent movement while employees are
found in subpart U of this part. working on them.
(1) Blasting wires shall be kept clear (v) (A) Walking and working surfaces
of electrical lines, pipes, rails, and of jumbos shall be maintained to pre-
other conductive material, excluding vent the hazards of slipping, tripping
earth, to prevent explosives initiation and falling.
or employee exposure to electric cur- (B) Jumbo decks and stair treads
rent. shall be designed to be slip-resistent
(2) Following blasting, an employee and secured to prevent accidental dis-
shall not enter a work area until the placement.
air quality meets the requirements of (9) Scaling bars shall be available at
paragraph (j) of this section. scaling operations and shall be main-
(q) Drilling. (1) A competent person tained in good condition at all times.
shall inspect all drilling and associated Blunted or severely worn bars shall not
equipment prior to each use. Equip- be used.
ment defects affecting safety shall be (10) (i) Blasting holes shall not be
corrected before the equipment is used. drilled through blasted rock (muck) or
(2) The drilling area shall be in- water.
spected for hazards before the drilling (ii) Employees in a shaft shall be pro-
operation is started. tected either by location or by suitable
434
barrier(s) if powered mechanical load- vehicle transportation of employees
ing equipment is used to remove muck are found in § 1926.601 of this part.
containing unfired explosives. (7) Powered mobile haulage equip-
(11) A caution sign reading ‘‘Buried ment, including trains, shall not be left
Line,’’ or similar wording shall be post- unattended unless the master switch or
ed where air lines are buried or other- motor is turned off; operating controls
wise hidden by water or debris. are in neutral or park position; and the
(r) Haulage. (1)(i) A competent person brakes are set, or equivalent pre-
shall inspect haulage equipment before cautions are taken to prevent rolling.
each shift. (8) Whenever rails serve as a return
(ii) Equipment defects affecting safe- for a trolley circuit, both rails shall be
ty and health shall be corrected before bonded at every joint and crossbonded
the equipment is used. every 200 feet (60.96 m).
(2) Powered mobile haulage equip- (9) When dumping cars by hand, the
ment shall have suitable means of stop- car dumps shall have tiedown chains,
ping. bumper blocks, or other locking or
(3)(i) Power mobile haulage equip- holding devices to prevent the cars
ment, including trains, shall have audi- from overturning.
ble warning devices to warn employees (10) Rocker-bottom or bottom-dump
to stay clear. The operator shall sound cars shall be equipped with positive
the warning device before moving the locking devices to prevent unintended
equipment and whenever necessary dumping.
during travel. (11) Equipment to be hauled shall be
(ii) The operator shall assure that loaded and secured to prevent sliding
lights which are visible to employees or dislodgement.
at both ends of any mobile equipment,
(12)(i) Mobile equipment, including
including a train, are turned on when-
rail-mounted equipment, shall be
ever the equipment is operating.
stopped for manual connecting or serv-
(4) In those cabs where glazing is
ice work.
used, the glass shall be safety glass, or
(ii) Employees shall not reach be-
its equivalent, and shall be maintained
tween moving cars during coupling op-
and cleaned so that vision is not ob-
erations.
structed.
(5) Anti-roll back devices or brakes (iii) Couplings shall not be aligned,
shall be installed on inclined conveyor shifted or cleaned on moving cars or lo-
drive units to prevent conveyors from comotives.
inadvertently running in reverse. (13)(i) Safety chains or other connec-
(6)(i) (A) Employees shall not be per- tions shall be used in addition to cou-
mitted to ride a power-driven chain, plers to connect man cars or powder
belt, or bucket conveyor unless the cars whenever the locomotive is uphill
conveyor is specifically designed for of the cars.
the transportation of persons. (ii) When the grade exceeds one per-
(B) Endless belt-type manlifts are cent and there is a potential for run-
prohibited in underground construc- away cars, safety chains or other con-
tion. nections shall be used in addition to
(C) General requirements also appli- couplers to connect haulage cars or, as
cable to underground construction for an alternative, the locomotive must be
use of conveyors in construction are downhill of the train.
found in § 1926.555 of this part. (iii) Such safety chains or other con-
(ii) No employee shall ride haulage nections shall be capable of maintain-
equipment unless it is equipped with ing connection between cars in the
seating for each passenger and protects event of either coupler disconnect, fail-
passengers from being struck, crushed, ure or breakage.
or caught between other equipment or (14) Parked rail equipment shall be
surfaces. Members of train crews may chocked, blocked, or have brakes set to
ride on a locomotive if it is equipped prevent inadvertent movement.
with handholds and nonslip steps or (15) Berms, bumper blocks, safety
footboards. Requirements applicable to hooks, or equivalent means shall be
Underground Construction for motor provided to prevent overtravel and
435
overturning of haulage equipment at elevator requirements of § 1926.552(a)
dumping locations. and (d) of this part.
(16) Bumper blocks or equivalent (1) General requirements for cranes and
stopping devices shall be provided at hoists. (i) Materials, tools, and supplies
all track dead ends. being raised or lowered, whether within
(17)(i) Only small handtools, lunch a cage or otherwise, shall be secured or
pails or similar small items may be stacked in a manner to prevent the
transported with employees in man- load from shifting, snagging or falling
cars, or on top of a locomotive. into the shaft.
(ii) When small hand tools or other (ii) A warning light suitably located
small items are carried on top of a lo- to warn employees at the shaft bottom
comotive, the top shall be designed or and subsurface shaft entrances shall
modified to retain them while trav- flash whenever a load is above the
eling. shaft bottom or subsurface entrances,
(18)(i) Where switching facilities are or the load is being moved in the shaft.
available, occupied personnel-cars shall This paragraph does not apply to fully
be pulled, not pushed. If personnel-cars enclosed hoistways.
must be pushed and visibility of the (iii) Whenever a hoistway is not fully
track ahead is hampered, then a quali- enclosed and employees are at the
fied person shall be stationed in the shaft bottom, conveyances or equip-
lead car to give signals to the loco- ment shall be stopped at least 15 feet
motive operator. (4.57 m) above the bottom of the shaft
(ii) Crew trips shall consist of per- and held there until the signalman at
sonnel-loads only. the bottom of the shaft directs the op-
(s) Electrical safety. This paragraph erator to continue lowering the load,
applies in addition to the general re- except that the load may be lowered
quirements for electrical safety which without stopping if the load or convey-
are found in subpart K of this part. ance is within full view of a bottom
(1) Electric power lines shall be insu- signalman who is in constant voice
lated or located away from water lines, communication with the operator.
telephone lines, air lines, or other con- (iv)(A) Before maintenance, repairs,
ductive materials so that a damaged or other work is commenced in the
circuit will not energize the other sys- shaft served by a cage, skip, or bucket,
tems. the operator and other employees in
(2) Lighting circuits shall be located the area shall be informed and given
so that movement of personnel or suitable instructions.
equipment will not damage the circuits (B) A sign warning that work is being
or disrupt service. done in the shaft shall be installed at
(3) Oil-filled transformers shall not the shaft collar, at the operator’s sta-
be used underground unless they are lo- tion, and at each underground landing.
cated in a fire-resistant enclosure suit- (v) Any connection between the
ably vented to the outside and sur- hoisting rope and the cage or skip shall
rounded by a dike to retain the con- be compatible with the type of wire
tents of the transformers in the event rope used for hoisting.
of rupture. (vi) Spin-type connections, where
(t) Hoisting unique to underground con- used, shall be maintained in a clean
struction. Except as modified by this condition and protected from foreign
paragraph (t), employers must: Comply matter that could affect their oper-
with the requirements of subpart CC of ation.
this part, except that the limitation in (vii) Cage, skip, and load connections
§ 1926.1431(a) does not apply to the rou- to the hoist rope shall be made so that
tine access of employees to an under- the force of the hoist pull, vibration,
ground worksite via a shaft; ensure misalignment, release of lift force, or
that material hoists comply with impact will not disengage the connec-
§ 1926.552(a) and (b) of this part; and en- tion. Moused or latched openthroat
sure that personnel hoists comply with hooks do not meet this requirement.
the personnel-hoists requirements of (viii) When using wire rope wedge
§ 1926.552(a) and (c) of this part and the sockets, means shall be provided to
436
prevent wedge escapement and to en- (x) A fire extinguisher that is rated
sure that the wedge is properly seated. at least 2A:10B:C (multi-purpose, dry
(2) Additional requirements for cranes. chemical) shall be mounted in each
Cranes shall be equipped with a limit hoist house.
switch to prevent overtravel at the (xi) Hoist controls shall be arranged
boom tip. Limit switches are to be used so that the operator can perform all
only to limit travel of loads when oper- operating cycle functions and reach the
ational controls malfunction and shall emergency power cutoff without hav-
not be used as a substitute for other ing to reach beyond the operator’s nor-
operational controls. mal operating position.
(3) Additional requirements for hoists. (xii) Hoists shall be equipped with
(i) Hoists shall be designed so that the limit switches to prevent overtravel at
load hoist drum is powered in both di- the top and bottom of the hoistway.
rections of rotation, and so that brakes (xiii) Limit switches are to be used
are automatically applied upon power only to limit travel of loads when oper-
release or failure. ational controls malfunction and shall
(ii) Control levers shall be of the not be used as a substitute for other
‘‘deadman type’’ which return auto- operational controls.
matically to their center (neutral) po- (xiv) Hoist operators shall be pro-
sition upon release. vided with a closed-circuit voice com-
(iii) When a hoist is used for both munication system to each landing sta-
personnel hoisting and material hoist- tion, with speaker microphones so lo-
ing, load and speed ratings for per- cated that the operator can commu-
sonnel and for materials shall be as- nicate with individual landing stations
signed to the equipment. during hoist use.
(iv) Material hoisting may be per- (xv) When sinking shafts 75 feet (22.86
formed at speeds higher than the rated m) or less in depth, cages, skips, and
speed for personnel hoisting if the hoist buckets that may swing, bump, or snag
and components have been designed for against shaft sides or other structural
such higher speeds and if shaft condi- protrusions shall be guided by fenders,
tions permit. rails, ropes, or a combination of those
(v) Employees shall not ride on top of means.
any cage, skip or bucket except when (xvi) When sinking shafts more than
necessary to perform inspection or 75 feet (22.86 m) in depth, all cages,
maintenance of the hoisting system, in skips, and buckets shall be rope or rail
which case they shall be protected by a guided to within a rail length from the
body belt/harness system to prevent sinking operation.
falling. (xvii) Cages, skips, and buckets in all
(vi) Personnel and materials (other completed shafts, or in all shafts being
than small tools and supplies secured used as completed shafts, shall be rope
in a manner that will not create a haz- or rail-guided for the full length of
ard to employees) shall not be hoisted their travel.
together in the same conveyance. How- (xviii) Wire rope used in load lines of
ever, if the operator is protected from material hoists shall be capable of sup-
the shifting of materials, then the op- porting, without failure, at least five
erator may ride with materials in times the maximum intended load or
cages or skips which are designed to be the factor recommended by the rope
controlled by an operator within the manufacturer, whichever is greater.
cage or skip. Refer to § 1926.552(c)(14)(iii) of this part
(vii) Line speed shall not exceed the for design factors for wire rope used in
design limitations of the systems. personnel hoists. The design factor
(viii) Hoists shall be equipped with shall be calculated by dividing the
landing level indicators at the opera- breaking strength of wire rope, as re-
tor’s station. Marking the hoist rope ported in the manufacturer’s rating ta-
does not satisfy this requirement. bles, by the total static load, including
(ix) Whenever glazing is used in the the weight of the wire rope in the shaft
hoist house, it shall be safety glass, or when fully extended.
its equivalent, and be free of distor- (xix) A competent person shall vis-
tions and obstructions. ually check all hoisting machinery,
437
equipment, anchorages, and hoisting (iv) All personnel cages shall be pro-
rope at the beginning of each shift and vided with a positive locking door that
during hoist use, as necessary. does not open outward.
(xx) Each safety device shall be (v) All personnel cages shall be pro-
checked by a competent person at least vided with a protective canopy. The
weekly during hoist use to ensure suit- canopy shall be made of steel plate, at
able operation and safe condition. least 3/16-inch (4.763 mm) in thickness,
(xxi) In order to ensure suitable oper- or material of equivalent strength and
ation and safe condition of all func- impact resistance. The canopy shall be
tions and safety devices, each hoist as- sloped to the outside, and so designed
sembly shall be inspected and load- that a section may be readily pushed
tested to 100 percent of its rated capac- upward to afford emergency egress.
ity: at the time of installation; after The canopy shall cover the top in such
any repairs or alterations affecting its a manner as to protect those inside
structural integrity; after the oper- from objects falling in the shaft.
ation of any safety device; and annu- (vi) Personnel platforms operating on
ally when in use. The employer shall
guide rails or guide ropes shall be
prepare a certification record which in-
equipped with broken-rope safety de-
cludes the date each inspection and
vices, safety catches or arrestment de-
load-test was performed; the signature
of the person who performed the in- vices that will stop and hold 150 per-
spection and test; and a serial number cent of the weight of the personnel
or other identifier for the hoist that platform and its maximum rated load.
was inspected and tested. The most re- (vii) During sinking operations in
cent certification record shall be main- shafts where guides and safeties are
tained on file until completion of the not yet used, the travel speed of the
project. personnel platform shall not exceed 200
(xxii) Before hoisting personnel or feet (60.96 m) per minute. Governor
material, the operator shall perform a controls set for 200 feet (60.96 m) per
test run of any cage or skip whenever minute shall be installed in the control
it has been out of service for one com- system and shall be used during per-
plete shift, and whenever the assembly sonnel hoisting.
or components have been repaired or (viii) The personnel platform may
adjusted. travel over the controlled length of the
(xxiii) Unsafe conditions shall be cor- hoistway at rated speeds up to 600 feet
rected before using the equipment. (182.88 m) per minute during sinking
(4) Additional requirements for per- operations in shafts where guides and
sonnel hoists. (i) Hoist drum systems safeties are used.
shall be equipped with at least two (ix) The personnel platform may
means of stopping the load, each of travel at rated speeds greater than 600
which shall be capable of stopping and feet (182.88 m) per minute in completed
holding 150 percent of the hoist’s rated shafts.
line pull. A broken-rope safety, safety (u) Definitions. ‘‘Accept’’—Any de-
catch, or arrestment device is not a vice, equipment, or appliance that is
permissible means of stopping under either approved by MSHA and main-
this paragraph (t). tained in permissible condition, or is
(ii) The operator shall remain within listed or labeled for the class and loca-
sight and sound of the signals at the tion under subpart K of this part.
operator’s station.
‘‘Rapid Excavation Machine’’—Tun-
(iii) All sides of personnel cages shall
nel boring machines, shields,
be enclosed by one-half inch (12.70 mm)
roadheaders, or any other similar exca-
wire mesh (not less than No. 14 gauge
vation machine.
or equivalent) to a height of not less
than 6 feet (1.83 m). However, when the [54 FR 23850, June 2, 1989; 58 FR 35311, June
cage or skip is being used as a work 30, 1993, as amended at 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13,
platform, its sides may be reduced in 1996; 63 FR 1297, Jan. 8, 1998; 71 FR 16674, Apr.
height to 42 inches (1.07 m) when the 3, 2006; 75 FR 48135, Aug. 9, 2010; 77 FR 49728,
conveyance is not in motion. Aug. 17, 2012; 78 FR 23841, Apr. 24, 2013]
438
§ 1926.801 Caissons. § 1926.803 Compressed air.

(a) Wherever, in caisson work in (a) General provisions. (1) There shall
which compressed air is used, and the be present, at all times, at least one
working chamber is less than 11 feet in competent person designated by and
length, and when such caissons are at representing the employer, who shall
any time suspended or hung while work be familiar with this subpart in all re-
is in progress so that the bottom of the spects, and responsible for full compli-
excavation is more than 9 feet below ance with these and other applicable
the deck of the working chamber, a subparts.
shield shall be erected therein for the
(2) Every employee shall be in-
protection of the employees.
structed in the rules and regulations
(b) Shafts shall be subjected to a hy-
which concern his safety or the safety
drostatic or air-pressure test, at which
pressure they shall be tight. The shaft of others.
shall be stamped on the outside shell (b) Medical attendance, examination,
about 12 inches from each flange to and regulations. (1) There shall be re-
show the pressure to which they have tained one or more licensed physicians
been subjected. familiar with and experienced in the
(c) Whenever a shaft is used, it shall physical requirements and the medical
be provided, where space permits, with aspects of compressed air work and the
a safe, proper, and suitable staircase treatment of decompression illness. He
for its entire length, including landing shall be available at all times while
platforms, not more than 20 feet apart. work is in progress in order to provide
Where this is impracticable, suitable medical supervision of employees em-
ladders shall be installed with landing ployed in compressed air work. He
platforms located about 20 feet apart to shall himself be physically qualified
break the climb. and be willing to enter a pressurized
(d) All caissons having a diameter or environment.
side greater than 10 feet shall be pro- (2) No employee shall be permitted to
vided with a man lock and shaft for the enter a compressed air environment
exclusive use of employees. until he has been examined by the phy-
(e) In addition to the gauge in the sician and reported by him to be phys-
locks, an accurate gauge shall be main- ically qualified to engage in such work.
tained on the outer and inner side of
(3) In the event an employee is absent
each bulkhead. These gauges shall be
from work for 10 days, or is absent due
accessible at all times and kept in ac-
to sickness or injury, he shall not re-
curate working order.
sume work until he is reexamined by
(f) In caisson operations where em-
ployees are exposed to compressed air the physician, and his physical condi-
working environments, the require- tion reported, as provided in this para-
ments contained in § 1926.803 shall be graph, to be such as to permit him to
complied with. work in compressed air.
(4) After an employee has been em-
§ 1926.802 Cofferdams. ployed continuously in compressed air
(a) If overtopping of the cofferdam by for a period designated by the physi-
high waters is possible, means shall be cian, but not to exceed 1 year, he shall
provided for controlled flooding of the be reexamined by the physician to de-
work area. termine if he is still physically quali-
(b) Warning signals for evacuation of fied to engage in compressed air work.
employees in case of emergency shall (5) Such physician shall at all times
be developed and posted. keep a complete and full record of ex-
(c) Cofferdam walkways, bridges, or aminations made by him. The physi-
ramps with at least two means of rapid cian shall also keep an accurate record
exit shall be provided with guardrails of any decompression illness or other
as specified in subpart M of this part. illness or injury incapacitating any
(d) Cofferdams located close to navi- employee for work, and of all loss of
gable shipping channels shall be pro- life that occurs in the operation of a
tected from vessels in transit, where tunnel, caisson, or other compartment
possible. in which compressed air is used.
439
(6) Records shall be available for the (xi) Be provided with oxygen lines
inspection of the Secretary or his rep- and fittings leading into external
resentatives, and a copy thereof shall tanks. The lines shall be fitted with
be forwarded to OSHA within 48 hours check valves to prevent reverse flow.
following the occurrence of the acci- The oxygen system inside the chamber
dent, death, injury, or decompression shall be of a closed circuit design and
illness. It shall state as fully as pos- be so designed as to automatically shut
sible the cause of said death or decom- off the oxygen supply whenever the fire
pression illness, and the place where system is activated.
the injured or sick employee was (xii) Be in constant charge of an at-
taken, and such other relative informa- tendant under the direct control of the
tion as may be required by the Sec- retained physician. The attendant shall
retary. be trained in the use of the lock and
(7) A fully equipped first aid station suitably instructed regarding steps to
shall be provided at each tunnel project be taken in the treatment of employee
regardless of the number of persons exhibiting symptoms compatible with
employed. An ambulance or transpor- a diagnosis of decompression illness;
tation suitable for a litter case shall be (xiii) Be adjacent to an adequate
at each project. emergency medical facility;
(8) Where tunnels are being excavated (xiv) The medical facility shall be
from portals more than 5 road miles equipped with demand-type oxygen in-
apart, a first aid station and transpor- halation equipment approved by the
tation facilities shall be provided at U.S. Bureau of Mines;
each portal. (xv) Be capable of being maintained
(9) A medical lock shall be estab- at a temperature, in use, not to exceed
lished and maintained in immediate 90 °F. nor be less than 70 °F.; and
working order whenever air pressure in (xvi) Be provided with sources of air,
the working chamber is increased free of oil and carbon monoxide, for
above the normal atmosphere. normal and emergency use, which are
(10) The medical lock shall: capable of raising the air pressure in
(i) Have at least 6 feet of clear head- the lock from 0 to 75 p.s.i.g. in 5 min-
room at the center, and be subdivided utes.
into not less than two compartments; (11) Identification badges shall be
(ii) Be readily accessible to employ- furnished to all employees, indicating
ees working under compressed air; that the wearer is a compressed air
(iii) Be kept ready for immediate use worker. A permanent record shall be
for at least 5 hours subsequent to the kept of all identification badges issued.
emergence of any employee from the The badge shall give the employee’s
working chamber; name, address of the medical lock, the
(iv) Be properly heated, lighted and telephone number of the licensed phy-
ventilated; sician for the compressed air project,
(v) Be maintained in a sanitary con- and contain instructions that in case of
dition; emergency of unknown or doubtful
(vi) Have a nonshatterable port cause or illness, the wearer shall be
through which the occupant(s) may be rushed to the medical lock. The badge
kept under constant observation; shall be worn at all times—off the job,
(vii) Be designed for a working pres- as well as on the job.
sure of 75 p.s.i.g. (c) Telephone and signal communica-
(viii) Be equipped with internal con- tion. (1) Effective and reliable means of
trols which may be overridden by ex- communication, such as bells, whistles,
ternal controls; or telephones, shall be maintained, at
(ix) Be provided with air pressure all times between all the following lo-
gauges to show the air pressure within cations:
each compartment to observers inside (i) The working chamber face;
and outside the medical lock. (ii) The working chamber side of the
(x) Be equipped with a manual type man lock near the door;
sprinkler system that can be activated (iii) The interior of the man lock;
inside the lock or by the outside lock (iv) Lock attendant’s station;
tender. (v) The compressor plant;
440
(vi) The first-aid station; (5) No employee shall be subjected to
(vii) The emergency lock (if one is re- pressure exceeding 50 pounds per
quired); and square inch except in emergency.
(viii) The special decompression (f) Decompression. (1) Decompression
chamber (if one is required). to normal condition shall be in accord-
(d) Signs and records. (1) The time of ance with the Decompression Tables in
decompression shall be posted in each appendix A of this subpart.
man lock as follows: (2) In the event it is necessary for an
employee to be in compressed air more
TIME OF DECOMPRESSION FOR THIS LOCK than once in a 24-hour period, the ap-
ll pounds to ll pounds in ll minutes.
pointed physician shall be responsible
ll pounds to ll pounds in ll minutes.
for the establishment of methods and
(Signed by) llllll (Superintendent) procedures of decompression applicable
to repetitive exposures.
This form shall be posted in the Man Lock at
(3) If decanting is necessary, the ap-
all times.
pointed physician shall establish proce-
(2) Any code of signals used shall be dures before any employee is permitted
conspicuously posted near workplace to be decompressed by decanting meth-
entrances and such other locations as ods. The period of time that the em-
may be necessary to bring them to the ployees spend at atmospheric pressure
attention of all employees concerned. between the decompression following
(3) For each 8-hour shift, a record of the shift and recompression shall not
employees employed under air pressure exceed 5 minutes.
shall be kept by an employee who shall (g) Man locks and special decompres-
remain outside the lock near the en- sion chambers—(1) Man locks. (i) Except
trance. This record shall show the pe- in emergency, no employees employed
riod each employee spends in the air in compressed air shall be permitted to
chamber and the time taken from de- pass from the working chamber to at-
compression. A copy shall be submitted mospheric pressure until after decom-
to the appointed physician after each pression, in accordance with the proce-
shift. dures in this subpart.
(ii) The lock attendant in charge of a
(e) Compression. (1) Every employee
man lock shall be under the direct su-
going under air pressure for the first
pervision of the appointed physician.
time shall be instructed on how to
He shall be stationed at the lock con-
avoid excessive discomfort.
trols on the free air side during the pe-
(2) During the compression of em- riod of compression and decompression
ployees, the pressure shall not be in- and shall remain at the lock control
creased to more than 3 p.s.i.g. within station whenever there are men in the
the first minute. The pressure shall be working chamber or in the man lock.
held at 3 p.s.i.g. and again at 7 p.s.i.g. (iii) Except where air pressure in the
sufficiently long to determine if any working chamber is below 12 p.s.i.g.,
employees are experiencing discomfort. each man lock shall be equipped with
(3) After the first minute the pres- automatic controls which, through
sure shall be raised uniformly and at a taped programs, cams, or similar appa-
rate not to exceed 10 p.s.i. per minute. ratus, shall automatically regulate de-
(4) If any employee complains of dis- compressions. It shall also be equipped
comfort, the pressure shall be held to with manual controls to permit the
determine if the symptoms are re- lock attendant to override the auto-
lieved. If, after 5 minutes the discom- matic mechanism in the event of an
fort does not disappear, the lock at- emergency, as provided in paragraph
tendant shall gradually reduce the (g)(1)(viii) of this section.
pressure until the employee signals (iv) A manual control, which can be
that the discomfort has ceased. If he used in the event of an emergency,
does not indicate that the discomfort shall be placed inside the man lock.
has disappeared, the lock attendant (v) A clock, thermometer, and con-
shall reduce the pressure to atmos- tinuous recording pressure gauge with
pheric and the employee shall be re- a 4-hour graph shall be installed out-
leased from the lock. side of each man lock and shall be
441
changed prior to each shift’s decom- served from the working chamber and
pression. The chart shall be of suffi- from the free air side of the lock.
cient size to register a legible record of (xiii) Adequate ventilation in the
variations in pressure within the man lock shall be provided.
lock and shall be visible to the lock at- (xiv) Man locks shall be maintained
tendant. A copy of each graph shall be at a minimum temperature of 70 °F.
submitted to the appointed physician (xv) When locks are not in use and
after each shift. In addition, a pressure employees are in the working chamber,
gauge, clock, and thermometer shall lock doors shall be kept open to the
also be installed in each man lock. Ad- working chamber, where practicable.
ditional fittings shall be provided so (xvi) Provision shall be made to
that test gauges may be attached allow for rescue parties to enter the
whenever necessary. tunnel if the working force is disabled.
(vi) Except where air pressure is (xvii) A special decompression cham-
below 12 p.s.i.g. and there is no danger ber of sufficient size to accommodate
of rapid flooding, all caissons having a the entire force of employees being de-
working area greater than 150 square compressed at the end of a shift shall
feet, and each bulkhead in tunnels of 14 be provided whenever the regularly es-
feet or more in diameter, or equivalent tablished working period requires a
area, shall have at least two locks in total time of decompression exceeding
perfect working condition, one of 75 minutes.
which shall be used exclusively as a (2) Special decompression chamber. (i)
man lock, the other, as a materials The headroom in the special decom-
lock. pression chamber shall be not less than
(vii) Where only a combination man- a minimum 7 feet and the cubical con-
and-materials lock is required, this tent shall provide at least 50 cubic feet
single lock shall be of sufficient capac- of airspace for each employee. For each
ity to hold the employees constituting occupant, there shall be provided 4
two successive shifts. square feet of free walking area and 3
(viii) Emergency locks shall be large square feet of seating space, exclusive
enough to hold an entire heading shift of area required for lavatory and toilet
and a limit maintained of 12 p.s.i.g. facilities. The rated capacity shall be
There shall be a chamber available for based on the stated minimum space per
oxygen decompression therapy to 28 employee and shall be posted at the
p.s.i.g. chamber entrance. The posted capacity
(ix) The man lock shall be large shall not be exceeded, except in case of
enough so that those using it are not emergency.
compelled to be in a cramped position, (ii) Each special decompression
and shall not have less than 5 feet clear chamber shall be equipped with the fol-
head room at the center and a min- lowing:
imum of 30 cubic feet of air space per (a) A clock or clocks suitably placed
occupant. so that the attendant and the chamber
(x) Locks on caissons shall be so lo- occupants can readily ascertain the
cated that the bottom door shall be not time;
less than 3 feet above the water level (b) Pressure gauges which will indi-
surrounding the caisson on the outside. cate to the attendants and to the
(The water level, where it is affected by chamber occupants the pressure in the
tides, is construed to mean high tide.) chamber;
(xi) In addition to the pressure gauge (c) Valves to enable the attendant to
in the locks, an accurate pressure control the supply and discharge of
gauge shall be maintained on the outer compressed air into and from the
and inner side of each bulkhead. These chamber;
gauges shall be accessible at all times (d) Valves and pipes, in connection
and shall be kept in accurate working with the air supply and exhaust, ar-
order. ranged so that the chamber pressure
(xii) Man locks shall have an observa- can be controlled from within and
tion port at least 4 inches in diameter without;
located in such a position that all oc- (e) Effective means of oral inter-
cupants of the man lock may be ob- communication between the attendant,
442
occupants of the chamber, and the air pressure in not more than two head-
compressor plant; and ings: Provided, That the gauge and con-
(f) An observation port at the en- trols are all in one location. In caisson
trance to permit observation of the work, there shall be a gauge tender for
chamber occupants. each caisson.
(iii) Seating facilities in special de- (2) The low air compressor plant shall
compression chambers shall be so ar- be of sufficient capacity to not only
ranged as to permit a normal sitting permit the work to be done safely, but
posture without cramping. Seating shall also provide a margin to meet
space, not less than 18 inches by 24 emergencies and repairs.
inches wide, shall be provided per occu- (3) Low air compressor units shall
pant. have at least two independent and sep-
(iv) Adequate toilet and washing fa- arate sources of power supply and each
cilities, in a screened or enclosed re- shall be capable of operating the entire
cess, shall be provided. Toilet bowls low air plant and its accessory sys-
shall have a built-in protector on the tems.
rim so that an air space is created (4) The capacity, arrangement, and
when the seat lid is closed. number of compressors shall be suffi-
(v) Fresh and pure drinking water cient to maintain the necessary pres-
shall be available. This may be accom- sure without overloading the equip-
plished by either piping water into the ment and to assure maintenance of
special decompression chamber and such pressure in the working chamber
providing drinking fountains, or by during periods of breakdown, repair, or
providing individual canteens, or by emergency.
some other sanitary means. Commu- (5) Switching from one independent
nity drinking vessels are prohibited. source of power supply to the other
(vi) No refuse or discarded material shall be done periodically to ensure the
of any kind shall be permitted to accu- workability of the apparatus in an
mulate, and the chamber shall be kept emergency.
clean. (6) Duplicate low-pressure air
(vii) Unless the special decompres- feedlines and regulating valves shall be
sion chamber is serving as the man provided between the source of air sup-
lock to atmospheric pressure, the spe- ply and a point beyond the locks with
cial decompression chamber shall be one of the lines extending to within 100
situated, where practicable, adjacent feet of the working face.
to the man lock on the atmospheric (7) All high- and low-pressure air sup-
pressure side of the bulkhead. A pas- ply lines shall be equipped with check
sageway shall be provided, connecting valves.
the special chamber with the man lock, (8) Low-pressure air shall be regu-
to permit employees in the process of lated automatically. In addition,
decompression to move from the man manually operated valves shall be pro-
lock to the special chamber without a vided for emergency conditions.
reduction in the ambient pressure from (9) The air intakes for all air com-
that designated for the next stage of pressors shall be located at a place
decompression. The passageway shall where fumes, exhaust, gases, and other
be so arranged as to not interfere with air contaminants will be at a min-
the normal operation of the man lock, imum.
nor with the release of the occupants of (10) Gauges indicating the pressure in
the special chamber to atmospheric the working chamber shall be installed
pressure upon the completion of the de- in the compressor building, the lock at-
compression procedure. tendant’s station, and at the employ-
(h) Compressor plant and air supply. (1) er’s field office.
At all times there shall be a thor- (i) Ventilation and air quality. (1) Ex-
oughly experienced, competent, and re- haust valves and exhaust pipes shall be
liable person on duty at the air control provided and operated so that the
valves as a gauge tender who shall reg- working chamber shall be well venti-
ulate the pressure in the working lated, and there shall be no pockets of
areas. During tunneling operations, dead air. Outlets may be required at in-
one gauge tender may regulate the termediate points along the main low-
443
pressure air supply line to the heading constructed of noncombustible, non-
to eliminate such pockets of dead air. absorptive, insulating materials, ex-
Ventilating air shall be not less than 30 cept that metal may be used if it is ef-
cubic feet per minute. fectively grounded.
(2) The air in the workplace shall be (5) Portable lamps shall be equipped
analyzed by the employer not less than with noncombustible, nonabsorptive,
once each shift, and records of such insulating sockets, approved handles,
tests shall be kept on file at the place basket guards, and approved cords.
where the work is in progress. The test (6) The use of worn or defective port-
results shall be within the threshold able and pendant conductors is prohib-
limit values specified in subpart D of ited.
this part, for hazardous gases, and
(k) Sanitation. (1) Sanitary, heated,
within 10 percent of the lower explosive
limit of flammable gases. If these lim- lighted, and ventilated dressing rooms
its are not met, immediate action to and drying rooms shall be provided for
correct the situation shall be taken by all employees engaged in compressed
the employer. air work. Such rooms shall contain
(3) The temperature of all working suitable benches and lockers. Bathing
chambers which are subjected to air accommodations (showers at the ratio
pressure shall, by means of after-cool- of one to 10 employees per shift),
ers or other suitable devices, be main- equipped with running hot and cold
tained at a temperature not to exceed water, and suitable and adequate toilet
85 °F. accommodations, shall be provided.
(4) Forced ventilation shall be pro- One toilet for each 15 employees, or
vided during decompression. During fractional part thereof, shall be pro-
the entire decompression period, forced vided.
ventilation through chemical or me- (2) When the toilet bowl is shut by a
chanical air purifying devices that will cover, there should be an air space so
ensure a source of fresh air shall be that the bowl or bucket does not im-
provided. plode when pressure is increased.
(5) Whenever heat-producing ma- (3) All parts of caissons and other
chines (moles, shields) are used in com- working compartments shall be kept in
pressed air tunnel operations, a posi- a sanitary condition.
tive means of removing the heat build- (l) Fire prevention and protection. (1)
up at the heading shall be provided. Firefighting equipment shall be avail-
(j) Electricity. (1) All lighting in com- able at all times and shall be main-
pressed-air chambers shall be by elec- tained in working condition.
tricity exclusively, and two inde- (2) While welding or flame-cutting is
pendent electric-lighting systems with
being done in compressed air, a
independent sources of supply shall be
firewatch with a fire hose or approved
used. The emergency source shall be
extinguisher shall stand by until such
arranged to become automatically op-
operation is completed.
erative in the event of failure of the
regularly used source. (3) Shafts and caissons containing
(2) The minimum intensity of light flammable material of any kind, either
on any walkway, ladder, stairway, or above or below ground, shall be pro-
working level shall be not less than 10 vided with a waterline and a fire hose
foot-candles, and in all workplaces the connected thereto, so arranged that all
lighting shall at all times be such as to points of the shaft or caisson are with-
enable employees to see clearly. in reach of the hose stream.
(3) All electrical equipment and wir- (4) Fire hose shall be at least 11⁄2
ing for light and power circuits shall inches in nominal diameter; the water
comply with the requirements of sub- pressure shall at all times be adequate
part K of this part for use in damp, for efficient operation of the type of
hazardous, high temperature, and com- nozzle used; and the water supply shall
pressed air environments. be such as to ensure an uninterrupted
(4) External parts of lighting fixtures flow. Fire hose, when not in use, shall
and all other electrical equipment, be located or guarded to prevent injury
when within 8 feet of the floor, shall be thereto.
444
(5) The power house, compressor vided inside and outside the man lock.
house, and all buildings housing ven- The portable fire extinguisher shall be
tilating equipment, shall be provided the dry chemical type.
with at least one hose connection in (10) Equipment, fixtures, and fur-
the water line, with a fire hose con- niture in man locks and special decom-
nected thereto. A fire hose shall be pression chambers shall be constructed
maintained within reach of structures of noncombustible materials. Bedding,
of wood over or near shafts. etc., shall be chemically treated so as
(6) Tunnels shall be provided with a to be fire resistant.
2-inch minimum diameter water line
(11) Head frames shall be constructed
extending into the working chamber
of structural steel or open frame-work
and to within 100 feet of the working
face. Such line shall have hose outlets fireproofed timber. Head houses and
with 100 feet of fire hose attached and other temporary surface buildings or
maintained as follows: One at the structures within 100 feet of the shaft,
working face; one immediately inside caisson, or tunnel opening shall be
of the bulkhead of the working cham- built of fire-resistant materials.
ber; and one immediately outside such (12) No oil, gasoline, or other combus-
bulkhead. In addition, hose outlets tible material shall be stored within
shall be provided at 200-foot intervals 100 feet of any shaft, caisson, or tunnel
throughout the length of the tunnel, opening, except that oils may be stored
and 100 feet of fire hose shall be at- in suitable tanks in isolated fireproof
tached to the outlet nearest to any lo- buildings, provided such buildings are
cation where flammable material is not less than 50 feet from any shaft,
being kept or stored or where any caisson, or tunnel opening, or any
flame is being used. building directly connected thereto.
(7) In addition to fire hose protection (13) Positive means shall be taken to
required by this subpart, on every floor prevent leaking flammable liquids
of every building not under compressed from flowing into the areas specifically
air, but used in connection with the mentioned in the preceding paragraph.
compressed air work, there shall be
(14) All explosives used in connection
provided at least one approved fire ex-
with compressed air work shall be se-
tinguisher of the proper type for the
hazard involved. At least two approved lected, stored, transported, and used as
fire extinguishers shall be provided in specified in subpart U of this part.
the working chamber as follows: One at (m) Bulkheads and safety screens. (1)
the working face and one immediately Intermediate bulkheads with locks, or
inside the bulkhead (pressure side). Ex- intermediate safety screens or both,
tinguishers in the working chamber are required where there is the danger
shall use water as the primary extin- of rapid flooding.
guishing agent and shall not use any (2) In tunnels 16 feet or more in di-
extinguishing agent which could be ameter, hanging walkways shall be
harmful to the employees in the work- provided from the face to the man lock
ing chamber. The fire extinguisher as high in the tunnel as practicable,
shall be protected from damage. with at least 6 feet of head room. Walk-
(8) Highly combustible materials ways shall be constructed of non-
shall not be used or stored in the work- combustible material. Standard rail-
ing chamber. Wood, paper, and similar ings shall be securely installed
combustible material shall not be used throughout the length of all walkways
in the working chamber in quantities on open sides in accordance with sub-
which could cause a fire hazard. The part M of this part. Where walkways
compressor building shall be con-
are ramped under safety screens, the
structed of non-combustible material.
walkway surface shall be skidproofed
(9) Man locks shall be equipped with
a manual type fire extinguisher system by cleats or by equivalent means.
that can be activated inside the man (3) Bulkheads used to contain com-
lock and also by the outside lock at- pressed air shall be tested, where prac-
tendant. In addition, a fire hose and ticable, to prove their ability to resist
portable fire extinguisher shall be pro-
445
the highest air pressure which may be and a second exposure to compressed
expected to be used. air does not occur until at least 12 con-
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
secutive hours of exposure to normal
1979, as amended at 47 FR 14696, 14706, Apr. 6, atmospheric pressure has elapsed since
1982; 51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986; 61 FR 5510, the employee has been under pressure.
Feb. 13, 1996] (k) Pressure—A force acting on a unit
area. Usually shown as pounds per
§ 1926.804 Definitions applicable to square inch. (p.s.i.)
this subpart. (l) Absolute pressure (p.s.i.a.)—The
(a) Bulkhead—An airtight structure sum of the atmospheric pressure and
separating the working chamber from gauge pressure (p.s.i.g.).
free air or from another chamber under (m) Atmospheric pressure—The pres-
a lesser pressure than the working sure of air at sea level, usually 14.7
pressure. p.s.i.a. (1 atmosphere), or 0 p.s.i.g.
(b) Caisson—A wood, steel, concrete (n) Gauge pressure (p.s.i.g.)—Pressure
or reinforced concrete, air- and water- measured by a gauge and indicating
tight chamber in which it is possible the pressure exceeding atmospheric.
for men to work under air pressure (o) Safety screen—An air- and water-
greater than atmospheric pressure to tight diaphragm placed across the
excavate material below water level. upper part of a compressed air tunnel
(c) Decanting—A method used for de- between the face and bulkhead, in
compressing under emergency cir- order to prevent flooding the crown of
cumstances. In this procedure, the em- the tunnel between the safety screen
ployees are brought to atmospheric and the bulkhead, thus providing a safe
pressure with a very high gas tension means of refuge and exit from a flood-
in the tissues and then immediately re- ing or flooded tunnel.
compressed in a second and separate (p) Special decompression chamber—A
chamber or lock. chamber to provide greater comfort of
(d) Emergency locks—A lock designed employees when the total decompres-
to hold and permit the quick passage of sion time exceeds 75 minutes.
an entire shift of employees. (q) Working chamber—The space or
(e) High air—Air pressure used to sup- compartment under air pressure in
ply power to pneumatic tools and de- which the work is being done.
vices.
(f) Low air—Air supplied to pressurize APPENDIX A TO SUBPART S OF PART
working chambers and locks. 1926—DECOMPRESSION TABLES
(g) Man lock—A chamber through
1. Explanation. The decompression tables
which men pass from one air pressure
are computed for working chamber pressures
environment into another. from 0 to 14 pounds, and from 14 to 50 pounds
(h) Materials lock—A chamber per square inch gauge inclusive by 2-pound
through which materials and equip- increments and for exposure times for each
ment pass from one air pressure envi- pressure extending from one-half to over 8
ronment into another. hours inclusive. Decompressions will be con-
(i) Medical lock—A special chamber in ducted by two or more stages with a max-
which employees are treated for de- imum of four stages, the latter for a working
chamber pressure of 40 pounds per square
compression illness. It may also be
inch gauge or over.
used in preemployment physical ex- Stage 1 consists of a reduction in ambient
aminations to determine the adapt- pressure ranging from 10 to a maximum of 16
ability of the prospective employee to pounds per square inch, but in no instance
changes in pressure. will the pressure be reduced below 4 pounds
(j) Normal condition—One during at the end of stage 1. This reduction in pres-
which exposure to compressed air is sure in stage 1 will always take place at a
limited to a single continuous working rate not greater than 5 pounds per minute.
period followed by a single decompres- Further reduction in pressure will take
place during stage 2 and subsequent stages as
sion in any given 24-hour period; the required at a slower rate, but in no event at
total time of exposure to compressed a rate greater than 1 pound per minute.
air during the single continuous work- Decompression Table No. 1 indicates in the
ing period is not interrupted by expo- body of the table the total decompression
sure to normal atmospheric pressure, time in minutes for various combinations of
446
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. S, App. A
working chamber pressure and exposure Examples Minutes
time.
Decompression Table No. 2 indicates for Stage 2 (final stage): Reduce pressure at a
the same various combinations of working uniform rate from 4 pounds to 0-pound
gage over a period of 40 minutes.
chamber pressure and exposure time the fol-
Rate—0.10 pound per minute or 10 minutes
lowing:
per pound.
a. The number of stages required;
Stage 2 (final) elapsed time ......................... 40
b. The reduction in pressure and the ter-
minal pressure for each required stage; Total time .............................................. 43
c. The time in minutes through which the Example No. 2: 5-hour working period at 24
reduction in pressure is accomplished for pounds gage.
each required stage; Decompression Table No. 1: 24 pounds for 5
d. The pressure reduction rate in minutes hours, total decompression time ...................... 117
per pound for each required stage; Decompression Table No. 2:
IMPORTANT NOTE: The Pressure Reduction Stage 1: Reduce pressure from 24 pounds
in Each Stage is Accomplished at a Uniform to 8 pounds at the uniform rate of 5
pounds per minute.
Rate. Do Not Interpolate Between Values
Elapsed time stage 1: 16/5 ................... 3
Shown on the Tables. Use the Next Higher
Stage 2: Reduce pressure at a uniform rate
Value of Working Chamber Pressure or Expo- from 8 pounds to 4 pounds over a period
sure Time Should the Actual Working Cham- of 4 minutes. Rate, 1 pound per minute
ber Pressure or the Actual Exposure Time, elapsed time, stage 2 ............................... 4
Respectively, Fall Between Those for Which Transfer men to special decompression
Calculated Values Are Shown in the Body of chamber maintaining the 4-pound pres-
the Tables. sure during the transfer operation.
Stage 3 (final stage): In the special decom-
Examples Minutes pression chamber, reduce the pressure at
a uniform rate from 4 pounds to 0-pound
Example No. 1: 4 hours working period at 20 gage over a period of 110 minutes. Rate,
pounds gauge. 0.037 pound per minute or 27.5 minutes
Decompression Table No. 1: 20 pounds for 4 per pound. Stage 3 (final) elapsed time ... 110
hours, total decompression time ...................... 43
Decompression Table No. 2: Total time .............................................. 117
Stage 1: Reduce pressure from 20 pounds
to 4 pounds at the uniform rate of 5
pounds per minute.
Elapsed time stage 1: 16/5 ................... 3
DECOMPRESSION TABLE NO. 1—TOTAL DECOMPRESSION TIME

Working period hours
Work pressure p.s.i.g.
⁄
12 1 1 ⁄
12 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Over
8
9 to 12 ........................................ 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
14 ................................................ 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 16 16 33
16 ................................................ 7 7 7 7 7 7 17 33 48 48 62
18 ................................................ 7 7 7 8 11 17 48 63 63 73 87
20 ................................................ 7 7 8 15 15 43 63 73 83 103 113
22 ................................................ 9 9 16 24 38 68 93 103 113 128 133
24 ................................................ 11 12 23 27 52 92 117 122 127 137 151
26 ................................................ 13 14 29 34 69 104 126 141 142 142 163
28 ................................................ 15 23 31 41 98 127 143 153 153 165 183
30 ................................................ 17 28 38 62 105 143 165 168 178 188 204
32 ................................................ 19 35 43 85 126 163 178 193 203 213 226
34 ................................................ 21 39 58 98 151 178 195 218 223 233 248
36 ................................................ 24 44 63 113 170 198 223 233 243 253 273
38 ................................................ 28 49 73 128 178 203 223 238 253 263 278
40 ................................................ 31 49 84 143 183 213 233 248 258 278 288
42 ................................................ 37 56 102 144 189 215 245 260 263 268 293
44 ................................................ 43 64 118 154 199 234 254 264 269 269 293
46 ................................................ 44 74 139 171 214 244 269 274 289 299 318
48 ................................................ 51 89 144 189 229 269 299 309 319 319 ..........
50 ................................................ 58 94 164 209 249 279 309 329 .......... .......... ..........
447
Pt. 1926, Subpt. S, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–13 Edition)
DECOMPRESSION TABLE NO. 2
[Do not interpolate, use next higher value for conditions not computed]
Decompression data
Working chamber pressure Working Total time
p.s.i.g. period Pressure reduc. p.s.i.g. Time in Pressure decom-
hours Stage No. stage min- reduc. rate press min-
utes Min/pound
From To utes
14 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 14 4 2 0.20 6
2 4 0 4 1.00 6
1 1 14 4 2 0.20 6
2 4 0 4 1.00 6
11⁄2 1 14 4 2 0.20 6
2 4 0 4 1.00 6
2 1 14 4 2 0.20 6
2 4 0 4 1.00 6
3 1 14 4 2 0.20 6
2 4 0 4 1.00 6
4 1 14 0 2 0.20 6
2 4 0 4 1.00 6
5 1 14 4 2 0.20 6
2 4 0 4 1.00 6
6 1 14 4 2 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 4 1.00 6
7 1 14 4 2 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 14 3.50 16
8 1 14 4 2 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 14 3.50 16
Over 8 1 14 4 2 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 30 7.50 32
16 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 16 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 4 1.00 7
1 1 16 4 3 0.20 7
2 4 0 4 1.00 7
1 ⁄
12 1 16 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 4 1.00 7
2 1 16 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 4 1.00 7
3 1 16 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 4 1.00 7
4 1 14 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 4 1.00 7
5 1 14 4 3 0.20 7
2 4 0 4 3.50 17
6 1 14 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 30 7.50 33
7 1 14 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 45 11.25 48
8 1 14 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 45 11.25 48
Over 8 1 14 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 60 15.00 63
18 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 18 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 4 1.00 7
1 1 18 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 4 1.00 7
11⁄2 1 18 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 4 1.00 7
2 1 18 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 5 1.25 8
3 1 18 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 8 2.00 11
4 1 18 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 14 3.50 17
5 1 18 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 45 11.25 48
6 1 18 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 60 15.00 63
7 1 18 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 60 15.00 63
8 1 18 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 70 17.50 73
Over 8 1 18 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 84 21.00 87
448
DECOMPRESSION TABLE NO. 2—Continued
Decompression data
utes Min/pound
From To utes
20 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 20 4 3 0.20 ..................

2 4 0 4 1.00 7
1 1 20 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 4 1.00 7
11⁄2 1 20 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 5 1.25 8
2 1 20 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 12 3.00 15
3 1 20 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 12 3.00 15
4 1 20 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 40 10.00 43
5 1 20 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 60 15.00 63
6 1 20 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 70 17.50 73
7 1 20 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 80 20.00 83
8 1 20 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 100 25.00 103
Over 8 1 20 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 110 27.50 113
22 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 22 6 3 0.20 ..................
2 6 0 6 1.00 9
1 1 22 6 3 0.20 ..................
2 6 0 6 1.00 9
1 ⁄
12 1 22 6 3 0.20 ..................
2 6 0 13 2.20 16
2 1 22 6 3 0.20 ..................
2 6 0 21 3.50 24
3 1 22 6 3 0.20 ..................
2 6 0 35 5.85 38
4 1 22 6 3 0.20 ..................
2 6 0 65 10.83 68
5 1 22 6 3 0.20 ..................
2 6 0 90 15.00 93
6 1 22 6 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 100 16.67 103
7 1 22 6 3 0.20 ..................
2 6 0 110 18.35 113
8 1 22 6 3 0.20 ..................
2 6 0 125 20.80 128
Over 8 1 22 6 3 0.20 ..................
2 6 0 130 21.70 133
24 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 24 8 3 0.20 ..................
2 8 4 4 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 4 1.00 11
1 1 24 8 3 0.20 ..................
2 8 4 4 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 5 1.25 12
11⁄2 1 24 8 3 0.20 ..................
2 8 4 4 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 16 4.00 23
2 1 24 8 3 0.20 ..................
2 8 4 4 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 20 5.00 27
3 1 24 8 3 0.20 ..................
2 8 4 4 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 45 11.25 52
4 1 24 8 3 0.20 ..................
2 8 4 4 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 85 21.25 92
5 1 24 8 3 0.20 ..................
2 8 4 4 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 110 27.50 117
6 1 24 8 3 0.20 ..................
449
Decompression data
utes Min/pound
From To utes
2 8 4 4 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 115 28.80 122
7 1 24 8 3 0.20 ..................
2 8 4 4 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 120 30.00 127
8 1 24 8 3 0.20 ..................
2 8 4 4 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 137
Over 8 1 24 8 3 0.20 ..................
2 8 4 8 2.00 ..................
3 4 0 140 35.00 151
26 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 26 10 3 0.20 ..................
2 10 4 6 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 4 1.00 13
1 1 26 10 3 0.20 ..................
2 10 4 6 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 5 1.25 14
11⁄2 1 26 10 3 0.20 ..................
2 10 4 6 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 20 5.00 29
2 1 26 10 3 0.20 ..................
2 10 4 6 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 25 6.25 34
3 1 26 10 3 0.20 ..................
2 10 4 6 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 60 15.00 69
4 1 26 10 3 0.20 ..................
2 10 4 6 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 95 23.75 104
5 1 26 10 3 0.20 ..................
2 10 4 8 1.33 ..................
3 4 0 115 28.80 126
6 1 26 10 3 0.20 ..................
2 10 4 8 1.33 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 141
7 1 26 10 3 2.20 ..................
2 10 4 9 1.50 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 142
8 1 26 10 3 0.20 ..................
2 10 4 9 1.50 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 142
Over 8 1 26 10 3 0.20 ..................
2 10 4 30 5.00 ..................
3 4 0 30 32.50 163
28 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 28 12 3 0.20 ..................
2 12 4 8 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 4 1.00 15
1 1 28 12 3 0.20 ..................
2 12 4 8 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 12 3.00 23
11⁄2 1 28 12 3 0.20 ..................
2 12 4 8 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 20 5.00 31
2 1 28 12 3 0.20 ..................
2 12 4 8 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 30 7.50 41
3 1 28 12 3 0.20 ..................
2 12 4 10 1.25 ..................
3 4 0 85 21.20 98
4 1 28 12 3 0.20 ..................
2 12 4 14 1.75 ..................
3 4 0 110 27.50 127
5 1 28 12 3 0.20 ..................
2 12 4 20 2.50 ..................
3 4 0 120 30.00 143
6 1 28 12 3 0.20 ..................
450
Decompression data
utes Min/pound
From To utes
2 12 4 20 2.50 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 153
7 1 28 12 3 0.20 ..................
2 12 4 20 2.50 ..................
3 4 0 120 32.50 153
8 1 28 12 3 0.20 ..................
2 12 4 32 4.00 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 165
Over 8 1 28 12 3 0.20 ..................
2 12 4 50 6.25 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 183
30 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 30 14 3 0.20 ..................
2 14 4 10 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 4 1.00 17
1 1 30 14 3 0.20 ..................
2 14 4 10 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 15 3.75 28
11⁄2 1 30 14 3 0.20 ..................
2 14 4 10 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 25 6.25 38
2 1 30 14 3 0.20 ..................
2 14 4 14 1.40 ..................
3 4 0 45 11.25 62
3 1 30 14 3 0.20 ..................
2 14 4 17 1.70 ..................
3 4 0 85 21.20 105
4 1 30 14 3 0.20 ..................
2 14 4 30 3.00 ..................
3 4 0 110 27.50 143
5 1 30 14 3 0.20 ..................
2 14 4 35 3.50 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 165
6 1 30 14 3 0.20 ..................
2 14 4 35 3.50 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 168
7 1 30 14 3 0.20 ..................
2 14 4 45 4.50 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 178
8 1 30 14 3 0.20 ..................
2 14 4 55 5.50 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 188
Over 8 1 30 14 3 0.20 ..................
2 14 4 71 7.10 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 204
32 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 32 16 3 0.20 ..................
2 16 4 12 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 4 1.00 19
1 1 32 16 3 0.20 ..................
2 16 4 12 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 20 5.00 35
11⁄2 1 32 16 3 0.20 ..................
2 16 4 15 1.25 ..................
3 4 0 25 6.25 43
2 1 32 16 3 0.20 ..................
2 16 4 22 1.83 ..................
3 4 0 60 15.00 85
3 1 32 16 3 0.20 ..................
2 16 4 28 2.33 ..................
3 4 0 95 23.75 126
4 1 32 16 3 0.20 ..................
2 16 4 40 3.33 ..................
3 4 0 120 30.00 163
5 1 32 16 3 0.20 ..................
2 16 4 45 3.75 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 178
6 1 32 16 3 0.20 ..................
451
Decompression data
utes Min/pound
From To utes
2 16 4 60 5.00 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 193
7 1 32 16 3 0.20 ..................
2 16 4 70 5.83 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 203
8 1 32 16 3 0.20 ..................
2 16 4 80 6.67 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 213
Over 8 1 32 16 3 0.20 ..................
2 16 4 93 7.75 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 226
34 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 34 18 3 0.20 ..................
2 18 4 14 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 4 1.00 21
1 1 34 18 3 0.20 ..................
2 18 4 14 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 22 5.50 39
11⁄2 1 34 18 3 0.20 ..................
2 18 4 25 1.80 ..................
3 4 0 30 7.50 58
2 1 34 18 3 0.20 ..................
2 18 4 35 2.50 ..................
3 4 0 60 15.00 98
3 1 34 18 3 0.20 ..................
2 18 4 43 3.10 ..................
3 4 0 105 26.25 151
4 1 34 18 3 0.20 ..................
2 18 4 55 3.93 ..................
3 4 0 120 30.00 178
5 1 34 18 3 0.20 ..................
2 18 4 62 4.43 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 195
6 1 34 18 3 0.20 ..................
2 18 4 85 6.07 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 218
7 1 34 18 3 0.20 ..................
2 18 4 90 6.43 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 223
8 1 34 18 3 0.20 ..................
2 18 4 100 7.15 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 233
Over 8 1 34 18 3 0.20 ..................
2 18 4 115 8.23 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 248
36 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 36 20 3 0.20 ..................
2 20 4 16 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 5 1.25 24
1 1 36 20 3 0.20 ..................
2 20 4 16 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 25 6.25 44
11⁄2 1 36 20 3 0.20 ..................
2 20 4 30 1.88 ..................
3 4 0 30 7.50 63
2 1 36 20 3 0.20 ..................
2 20 4 40 2.50 ..................
3 4 0 70 17.50 113
3 1 36 20 3 0.20 ..................
2 20 4 52 3.25 ..................
3 4 0 115 28.75 170
4 1 36 20 3 0.20 ..................
2 20 4 65 4.06 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 198
5 1 36 20 3 0.20 ..................
2 20 4 90 5.63 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 223
6 1 36 20 3 0.20 ..................
452
Decompression data
utes Min/pound
From To utes
2 20 4 100 6.25 ..................

3 4 0 130 32.50 233
7 1 36 20 3 0.20 ..................
2 20 4 110 6.88 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 243
8 1 36 20 3 0.20 ..................
2 20 4 120 7.50 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 253
Over 8 1 36 20 3 0.20 ..................
2 20 4 140 8.75 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 273
38 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 38 22 3 0.20 ..................
2 22 6 16 1.00 ..................
3 6 0 9 1.50 28
1 1 38 22 3 0.20 ..................
2 22 6 16 1.00 ..................
3 6 0 30 5.00 49
11⁄2 1 38 22 3 0.20 ..................
2 22 6 20 1.25 ..................
3 6 0 50 8.34 73
2 1 38 22 3 0.20 ..................
2 22 6 30 1.88 ..................
3 6 0 95 15.83 128
3 1 38 22 3 0.20 ..................
2 22 6 35 2.19 ..................
3 6 0 140 23.35 178
4 1 38 22 3 0.20 ..................
2 22 6 50 3.12 ..................
3 6 0 150 25.00 203
5 1 38 22 3 0.20 ..................
2 22 6 55 3.44 ..................
3 6 0 165 27.50 223
6 1 38 22 3 0.20 ..................
2 22 6 70 4.38 ..................
3 6 0 165 27.50 238
7 1 38 22 3 0.20 ..................
2 22 6 85 5.32 ..................
3 6 0 165 27.50 253
8 1 38 22 3 0.20 ..................
2 22 6 95 5.93 ..................
3 6 0 165 27.50 263
Over 8 1 38 22 3 0.20 ..................
2 22 6 110 6.88 ..................
3 6 0 165 27.50 278
40 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 40 24 3 0.20 ..................
2 24 8 16 1.00 ..................
3 8 4 4 1.00 ..................
4 4 0 8 2.00 31
1 1 40 24 3 0.20 ..................
2 24 8 16 1.00 ..................
3 8 4 5 1.25 ..................
4 4 0 25 6.25 49
11⁄2 1 40 24 3 0.20 ..................
2 24 8 16 1.00 ..................
3 8 4 20 5.00 ..................
4 4 0 45 11.25 84
2 2 40 24 3 0.20 ..................
1 24 8 25 1.56 ..................
3 8 4 20 5.00 ..................
4 4 0 95 23.75 143
3 1 40 24 3 0.20 ..................
2 24 8 30 1.88 ..................
3 8 4 30 7.50 ..................
4 4 0 120 30.00 183
4 1 40 24 3 0.20 ..................
2 24 8 45 2.81 ..................
453
Decompression data
utes Min/pound
From To utes
3 8 4 35 8.75 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 213
5 1 40 24 3 0.20 ..................
2 24 8 47 2.94 ..................
3 8 4 53 13.25 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 233
6 1 40 24 3 0.20 ..................
2 24 8 55 3.44 ..................
3 8 4 60 15.00 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 248
7 1 40 24 3 0.20 ..................
2 24 8 65 4.06 ..................
3 8 4 60 15.00 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 258
8 1 40 24 3 0.20 ..................
2 24 8 75 4.70 ..................
3 8 4 60 15.00 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 268
Over 8 1 40 24 3 0.20 ..................
2 24 8 95 5.93 ..................
3 8 4 60 15.00 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 288
42 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 42 26 3 0.20 ..................
2 26 10 16 1.00 ..................
3 10 4 6 1.00 ..................
4 4 0 12 3.00 37
1 1 42 26 3 0.20 ..................
2 26 10 16 1.00 ..................
3 10 4 12 2.00 ..................
4 4 0 25 6.25 56
11⁄2 1 42 26 3 0.20 ..................
2 26 10 16 1.00 ..................
3 10 4 23 3.83 ..................
4 4 0 60 15.00 102
2 1 42 26 3 0.20 ..................
2 26 10 16 1.00 ..................
3 10 4 30 5.00 ..................
4 4 0 95 23.75 144
3 1 42 26 3 0.20 ..................
2 26 10 16 1.00 ..................
3 10 4 50 8.34 ..................
4 4 0 120 30.00 189
4 1 42 26 3 0.20 ..................
2 26 10 17 1.06 ..................
3 10 4 65 10.83 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 215
5 1 42 26 3 0.20 ..................
2 26 10 27 1.69 ..................
3 10 4 85 14.18 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 245
6 1 42 26 3 0.20 ..................
2 26 10 27 1.69 ..................
3 10 4 100 16.67 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 260
7 1 42 26 3 0.20 ..................
2 26 10 30 1.88 ..................
3 10 4 100 16.67 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 263
8 1 42 26 3 0.20 ..................
2 26 10 35 2.19 ..................
3 10 4 100 16.67 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 268
Over 8 1 42 26 3 0.20 ..................
2 26 10 60 3.75 ..................
3 10 4 100 16.67 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 293
454
Decompression data
utes Min/pound
From To utes
44 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 44 28 3 0.20 ..................

2 28 12 16 1.00 ..................
3 12 4 8 1.00 ..................
4 4 0 16 4.00 43
1 1 44 28 3 0.20 ..................
2 28 12 16 1.00 ..................
3 12 4 20 2.50 ..................
4 4 0 25 6.25 64
11⁄2 1 44 28 3 0.20 ..................
2 28 12 16 1.00 ..................
3 12 4 27 3.38 ..................
4 4 0 72 18.00 118
2 1 44 28 3 0.20 ..................
2 28 12 16 1.00 ..................
3 12 4 40 5.00 ..................
4 4 0 95 23.75 154
3 1 44 28 3 0.20 ..................
2 28 12 16 1.00 ..................
3 12 4 60 7.50 ..................
4 4 0 120 30.00 199
4 1 44 28 3 0.20 ..................
2 28 12 16 1.00 ..................
3 12 4 85 10.62 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 234
5 1 44 28 3 0.20 ..................
2 28 12 16 1.00 ..................
3 12 4 105 13.13 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 254
6 1 44 28 3 0.20 ..................
2 28 12 16 1.00 ..................
3 12 4 115 14.38 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 264
7 1 44 28 3 0.20 ..................
2 28 12 16 1.00 ..................
3 12 4 120 15.00 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 269
8 1 44 28 3 0.20 ..................
2 28 12 16 1.00 ..................
3 12 4 120 15.00 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 269
Over 8 1 44 28 3 0.20 ..................
2 28 12 40 2.50 ..................
3 12 4 120 15.00 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 293
46 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 46 30 3 0.20 ..................
2 30 14 16 1.00 ..................
3 14 4 10 1.00 ..................
4 4 0 15 3.75 44
1 1 46 30 3 0.20 ..................
2 30 14 16 1.00 ..................
3 14 4 25 2.50 ..................
4 4 0 30 7.50 74
11⁄2 1 46 30 3 0.20 ..................
2 30 14 16 1.00 ..................
3 14 4 35 3.50 ..................
4 4 0 85 21.20 139
2 1 46 30 3 0.20 ..................
2 30 14 16 1.00 ..................
3 14 4 47 4.70 ..................
4 4 0 105 26.25 171
3 1 46 30 3 0.20 ..................
2 30 14 16 1.00 ..................
3 14 4 65 6.50 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 214
4 1 46 30 3 0.20 ..................
2 30 14 16 1.00 ..................
455
Decompression data
utes Min/pound
From To utes
3 14 4 95 9.50 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 244
5 1 46 30 3 0.20 ..................
2 30 14 16 1.00 ..................
3 14 4 120 12.00 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 269
6 1 46 30 3 0.20 ..................
2 30 14 16 1.00 ..................
3 14 4 125 12.50 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 274
7 1 46 30 3 0.20 ..................
2 34 14 16 1.00 ..................
3 10 4 140 14.00 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 289
8 1 46 30 3 0.20 ..................
2 30 14 16 1.00 ..................
3 14 4 150 15.00 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 299
Over 8 1 46 30 3 0.20 ..................
2 30 14 25 1.56 ..................
3 14 4 160 16.00 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 318
48 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 48 32 3 0.20 ..................
2 32 16 16 1.00 ..................
3 16 4 12 1.00 ..................
4 4 0 20 5.00 51
1 1 48 32 3 0.20 ..................
2 32 16 16 1.00 ..................
3 16 4 35 2.92 ..................
4 4 0 35 8.75 89
11⁄2 1 48 32 3 0.20 ..................
2 32 16 16 1.00 ..................
3 16 4 45 3.75 ..................
4 4 0 80 20.00 144
2 1 48 32 3 0.20 ..................
2 32 16 16 1.00 ..................
3 16 4 60 5.00 ..................
4 4 0 110 27.50 189
3 1 48 32 3 0.20 ..................
2 32 16 16 1.00 ..................
3 16 4 90 7.50 ..................
4 4 0 120 30.00 229
4 1 48 32 3 0.20 ..................
2 32 16 16 1.00 ..................
3 16 4 120 10.00 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 269
5 1 48 32 3 0.20 ..................
2 32 16 16 1.00 ..................
3 16 4 140 11.67 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 209
6 1 48 32 3 0.20 ..................
2 32 16 16 1.00 ..................
3 16 4 160 13.33 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 309
7 1 48 32 3 0.20 ..................
2 32 16 16 1.00 ..................
3 16 4 170 14.17 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 ..................
8 1 48 32 3 0.20 ..................
2 32 16 16 1.00 ..................
3 16 4 170 14.17 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 ..................
50 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 50 34 3 0.20 ..................
2 34 18 16 1.00 ..................
3 18 4 14 1.00 ..................
4 4 0 25 6.25 58
456
Decompression data
utes Min/pound
From To utes
1 1 50 34 3 0.20 ..................
2 34 18 16 1.00 ..................
3 18 4 40 2.86 ..................
4 4 0 35 8.75 94
11⁄2 1 50 34 3 0.20 ..................
2 34 18 16 1.00 ..................
3 18 4 55 3.93 ..................
4 4 0 90 22.50 164
2 1 50 34 3 0.20 ..................
2 34 18 16 1.00 ..................
3 18 4 70 5.00 ..................
4 4 0 120 30.00 209
3 1 50 34 3 0.20 ..................
2 34 18 16 1.00 ..................
3 18 4 100 7.15 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 249
4 1 50 34 3 0.20 ..................
2 34 18 16 1.00 ..................
3 18 4 130 8.58 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 279
5 1 50 34 3 0.20 ..................
2 34 18 16 1.00 ..................
3 18 4 160 11.42 ..................
DECOMPRESSION TABLE NO. 2—CONTINUED

Decompression data
Working
Working chamber pressure Total time
period Pressure reduc. p.s.i.g. Time in Pressure
p.s.i.g. hours Stage No. stage min- reduc. rate decom-
press min-
utes Min/pound
From To utes
4 4 0 130 32.50 309

6 1 50 34 3 0.20 ..................
2 34 18 16 1.00 ..................
3 18 4 180 12.85 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 329
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6. 1979; as amended at 58 FR 35311, June 30, 1993]
Subpart T—Demolition the structure. Any adjacent structure

where employees may be exposed shall
also be similarly checked. The em-
657; and Secretary of Labor’s Orders 12–71 (36 ployer shall have in writing evidence
FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), that such a survey has been performed.
1–90 (55 FR 9033), 6–96 (62 FR 111), 5–2007 (72 (b) When employees are required to
FR 31159), or 1–2012 (77 FR 3912), as applica- work within a structure to be demol-
ble. ished which has been damaged by fire,
flood, explosion, or other cause, the
§ 1926.850 Preparatory operations. walls or floor shall be shored or braced.
(a) Prior to permitting employees to (c) All electric, gas, water, steam,
start demolition operations, an engi- sewer, and other service lines shall be
neering survey shall be made, by a shut off, capped, or otherwise con-
competent person, of the structure to trolled, outside the building line before
determine the condition of the fram- demolition work is started. In each
ing, floors, and walls, and possibility of case, any utility company which is in-
unplanned collapse of any portion of volved shall be notified in advance.
457
(d) If it is necessary to maintain any protection from the face of the build-
power, water or other utilities during ing for a minimum of 8 feet. All such
demolition, such lines shall be tempo- canopies shall be at least 2 feet wider
rarily relocated, as necessary, and pro- than the building entrances or open-
tected. ings (1 foot wider on each side thereof),
(e) It shall also be determined if any and shall be capable of sustaining a
type of hazardous chemicals, gases, ex- load of 150 pounds per square foot.
plosives, flammable materials, or simi-
larly dangerous substances have been § 1926.851 Stairs, passageways, and
used in any pipes, tanks, or other ladders.
equipment on the property. When the (a) Only those stairways, passage-
presence of any such substances is ap- ways, and ladders, designated as means
parent or suspected, testing and purg- of access to the structure of a building,
ing shall be performed and the hazard shall be used. Other access ways shall
eliminated before demolition is start- be entirely closed at all times.
ed. (b) All stairs, passageways, ladders
(f) Where a hazard exists from frag- and incidental equipment thereto,
mentation of glass, such hazards shall which are covered by this section, shall
be removed. be periodically inspected and main-
(g) Where a hazard exists to employ- tained in a clean safe condition.
ees falling through wall openings, the
(c) In a multistory building, when a
opening shall be protected to a height
stairwell is being used, it shall be prop-
of approximately 42 inches.
erly illuminated by either natural or
(h) When debris is dropped through
artificial means, and completely and
holes in the floor without the use of
substantially covered over at a point
chutes, the area onto which the mate-
not less than two floors below the floor
rial is dropped shall be completely en-
on which work is being performed, and
closed with barricades not less than 42
access to the floor where the work is in
inches high and not less than 6 feet
progress shall be through a properly
back from the projected edge of the
lighted, protected, and separate pas-
opening above. Signs, warning of the
sageway.
hazard of falling materials, shall be
posted at each level. Removal shall not § 1926.852 Chutes.
be permitted in this lower area until
debris handling ceases above. (a) No material shall be dropped to
(i) All floor openings, not used as ma- any point lying outside the exterior
terial drops, shall be covered over with walls of the structure unless the area is
material substantial enough to support effectively protected.
the weight of any load which may be (b) All materials chutes, or sections
imposed. Such material shall be prop- thereof, at an angle of more than 45°
erly secured to prevent its accidental from the horizontal, shall be entirely
movement. enclosed, except for openings equipped
(j) Except for the cutting of holes in with closures at or about floor level for
floors for chutes, holes through which the insertion of materials. The open-
to drop materials, preparation of stor- ings shall not exceed 48 inches in
age space, and similar necessary pre- height measured along the wall of the
paratory work, the demolition of exte- chute. At all stories below the top
rior walls and floor construction shall floor, such openings shall be kept
begin at the top of the structure and closed when not in use.
proceed downward. Each story of exte- (c) A substantial gate shall be in-
rior wall and floor construction shall stalled in each chute at or near the dis-
be removed and dropped into the stor- charge end. A competent employee
age space before commencing the re- shall be assigned to control the oper-
moval of exterior walls and floors in ation of the gate, and the backing and
the story next below. loading of trucks.
(k) Employee entrances to multi- (d) When operations are not in
story structures being demolished shall progress, the area surrounding the dis-
be completely protected by sidewalk charge end of a chute shall be securely
sheds or canopies, or both, providing closed off.
458
(e) Any chute opening, into which hibit the cutting of floor beams for the
workmen dump debris, shall be pro- disposal of materials or for the instal-
tected by a substantial guardrail ap- lation of equipment, provided that the
proximately 42 inches above the floor requirements of §§ 1926.853 and 1926.855
or other surface on which the men are met.
stand to dump the material. Any space (e) Floor openings within 10 feet of
between the chute and the edge of any wall being demolished shall be
openings in the floors through which it planked solid, except when employees
passes shall be solidly covered over. are kept out of the area below.
(f) Where the material is dumped (f) In buildings of ‘‘skeleton-steel’’
from mechanical equipment or wheel- construction, the steel framing may be
barrows, a securely attached toeboard left in place during the demolition of
or bumper, not less than 4 inches thick masonry. Where this is done, all steel
and 6 inches high, shall be provided at beams, girders, and similar structural
each chute opening. supports shall be cleared of all loose
(g) Chutes shall be designed and con- material as the masonry demolition
structed of such strength as to elimi- progresses downward.
nate failure due to impact of materials (g) Walkways or ladders shall be pro-
or debris loaded therein. vided to enable employees to safely
§ 1926.853 Removal of materials reach or leave any scaffold or wall.
through floor openings. (h) Walls, which serve as retaining
walls to support earth or adjoining
Any openings cut in a floor for the
structures, shall not be demolished
disposal of materials shall be no larger
until such earth has been properly
in size than 25 percent of the aggregate
braced or adjoining structures have
of the total floor area, unless the lat-
been properly underpinned.
eral supports of the removed flooring
(i) Walls, which are to serve as re-
remain in place. Floors weakened or
taining walls against which debris will
otherwise made unsafe by demolition
be piled, shall not be so used unless ca-
operations shall be shored to carry
pable of safely supporting the imposed
safely the intended imposed load from
load.
demolition operations.
§ 1926.854 Removal of walls, masonry § 1926.855 Manual removal of floors.
sections, and chimneys. (a) Openings cut in a floor shall ex-
(a) Masonry walls, or other sections tend the full span of the arch between
of masonry, shall not be permitted to supports.
fall upon the floors of the building in (b) Before demolishing any floor
such masses as to exceed the safe car- arch, debris and other material shall be
rying capacities of the floors. removed from such arch and other ad-
(b) No wall section, which is more jacent floor area. Planks not less than
than one story in height, shall be per- 2 inches by 10 inches in cross section,
mitted to stand alone without lateral full size undressed, shall be provided
bracing, unless such wall was origi- for, and shall be used by employees to
nally designed and constructed to stand on while breaking down floor
stand without such lateral support, and arches between beams. Such planks
is in a condition safe enough to be self- shall be so located as to provide a safe
supporting. All walls shall be left in a support for the workmen should the
stable condition at the end of each arch between the beams collapse. The
shift. open space between planks shall not
(c) Employees shall not be permitted exceed 16 inches.
to work on the top of a wall when (c) Safe walkways, not less than 18
weather conditions constitute a haz- inches wide, formed of planks not less
ard. than 2 inches thick if wood, or of equiv-
(d) Structural or load-supporting alent strength if metal, shall be pro-
members on any floor shall not be cut vided and used by workmen when nec-
or removed until all stories above such essary to enable them to reach any
a floor have been demolished and re- point without walking upon exposed
moved. This provision shall not pro- beams.
459
(d) Stringers of ample strength shall (e) Storage space into which material
be installed to support the flooring is dumped shall be blocked off, except
planks, and the ends of such stringers for openings necessary for the removal
shall be supported by floor beams or of material. Such openings shall be
girders, and not by floor arches alone. kept closed at all times when material
(e) Planks shall be laid together over is not being removed.
solid bearings with the ends overlap-
ping at least 1 foot. § 1926.858 Removal of steel construc-
(f) When floor arches are being re- tion.
moved, employees shall not be allowed (a) When floor arches have been re-
in the area directly underneath, and moved, planking in accordance with
such an area shall be barricaded to pre- § 1926.855(b) shall be provided for the
vent access to it. workers engaged in razing the steel
(g) Demolition of floor arches shall framing.
not be started until they, and the sur- (b) Cranes, derricks, and other hoisting
rounding floor area for a distance of 20 equipment. Employers must meet the
feet, have been cleared of debris and requirements specified in subparts N
any other unnecessary materials. and CC of this part.
(c) Steel construction shall be dis-
§ 1926.856 Removal of walls, floors, mantled column length by column
and material with equipment. length, and tier by tier (columns may
(a) Mechanical equipment shall not be in two-story lengths).
be used on floors or working surfaces (d) Any structural member being dis-
unless such floors or surfaces are of membered shall not be overstressed.
sufficient strength to support the im- [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979 , 75 FR 48135, Aug. 9,
posed load. 2010; 77 FR 49730, Aug. 17, 2012; 78 FR 23843,
(b) Floor openings shall have curbs or Apr. 23, 2013]
stop-logs to prevent equipment from
running over the edge. § 1926.859 Mechanical demolition.
(c) Cranes, derricks, and other mechan- (a) No workers shall be permitted in
ical equipment. Employers must meet any area, which can be adversely af-
the requirements specified in subparts fected by demolition operations, when
N, O, and CC of this part. balling or clamming is being per-
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979 , 75 FR 48135, Aug. 9, formed. Only those workers necessary
2010; 77 FR 49730, Aug. 17, 2012; 78 FR 23843, for the performance of the operations
Apr. 23, 2013] shall be permitted in this area at any
other time.
§ 1926.857 Storage. (b) The weight of the demolition ball
(a) The storage of waste material and shall not exceed 50 percent of the
debris on any floor shall not exceed the crane’s rated load, based on the length
allowable floor loads. of the boom and the maximum angle of
(b) In buildings having wooden floor operation at which the demolition ball
construction, the flooring boards may will be used, or it shall not exceed 25
be removed from not more than one percent of the nominal breaking
floor above grade to provide storage strength of the line by which it is sus-
space for debris, provided falling mate- pended, whichever results in a lesser
rial is not permitted to endanger the value.
stability of the structure. (c) The crane boom and loadline shall
(c) When wood floor beams serve to be as short as possible.
brace interior walls or free-standing (d) The ball shall be attached to the
exterior walls, such beams shall be left loadline with a swivel-type connection
in place until other equivalent support to prevent twisting of the loadline, and
can be installed to replace them. shall be attached by positive means in
(d) Floor arches, to an elevation of such manner that the weight cannot
not more than 25 feet above grade, may become accidentally disconnected.
be removed to provide storage area for (e) When pulling over walls or por-
debris: Provided, That such removal tions thereof, all steel members af-
does not endanger the stability of the fected shall have been previously cut
structure. free.
460
(f) All roof cornices or other such or- with explosives. All employees shall be
namental stonework shall be removed removed to a safe area and the fire area
prior to pulling walls over. guarded against intruders.
(g) During demoliton, continuing in- (g) Original containers, or Class II
spections by a competent person shall magazines, shall be used for taking det-
be made as the work progresses to de- onators and other explosives from stor-
tect hazards resulting from weakened age magazines to the blasting area.
or deteriorated floors, or walls, or loos- (h) When blasting is done in con-
ened material. No employee shall be gested areas or in proximity to a struc-
permitted to work where such hazards
ture, railway, or highway, or any other
exist until they are corrected by shor-
installation that may be damaged, the
ing, bracing, or other effective means.
blaster shall take special precautions
§ 1926.860 Selective demolition by ex- in the loading, delaying, initiation, and
plosives. confinement of each blast with mats or
Selective demolition by explosives other methods so as to control the
shall be conducted in accordance with throw of fragments, and thus prevent
the applicable sections of subpart U of bodily injury to employees.
this part. (i) Employees authorized to prepare
explosive charges or conduct blasting
Subpart U—Blasting and the Use operations shall use every reasonable
of Explosives precaution including, but not limited
to, visual and audible warning signals,
flags, or barricades, to ensure employee
AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours
and Safety Standards Act (40 U.S.C. 333); safety.
secs. 4, 6, 8, Occupational Safety and Health (j) Insofar as possible, blasting oper-
Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary ations above ground shall be conducted
of Labor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 between sunup and sundown.
(41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), or 6–96 (62 FR
(k) Due precautions shall be taken to
111), as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911.
prevent accidental discharge of electric
§ 1926.900 General provisions. blasting caps from current induced by
radar, radio transmitters, lightning,
(a) The employer shall permit only
authorized and qualified persons to adjacent powerlines, dust storms, or
handle and use explosives. other sources of extraneous electricity.
(b) Smoking, firearms, matches, open These precautions shall include:
flame lamps, and other fires, flame or (1) Detonators shall be short-
heat producing devices and sparks shall circuited in holes which have been
be prohibited in or near explosive mag- primed and shunted until wired into
azines or while explosives are being the blasting circuit.
handled, transported or used. (2) The suspension of all blasting op-
(c) No person shall be allowed to han- erations and removal of persons from
dle or use explosives while under the the blasting area during the approach
influence of intoxicating liquors, nar- and progress of an electric storm;
cotics, or other dangerous drugs. (3) (i) The prominent display of ade-
(d) All explosives shall be accounted quate signs, warning against the use of
for at all times. Explosives not being mobile radio transmitters, on all roads
used shall be kept in a locked maga- within 1,000 feet of blasting operations.
zine, unavailable to persons not au- Whenever adherence to the 1,000-foot
thorized to handle them. The employer distance would create an operational
shall maintain an inventory and use
handicap, a competent person shall be
record of all explosives. Appropriate
consulted to evaluate the particular
authorities shall be notified of any
loss, theft, or unauthorized entry into situation, and alternative provisions
a magazine. may be made which are adequately de-
(e) No explosives or blasting agents signed to prevent any premature firing
shall be abandoned. of electric blasting caps. A description
(f) No fire shall be fought where the of any such alternatives shall be re-
fire is in imminent danger of contact duced to writing and shall be certified
461
as meeting the purposes of this subdivi- (q) All loading and firing shall be di-
sion by the competent person con- rected and supervised by competent
sulted. The description shall be main- persons thoroughly experienced in this
tained at the construction site during field.
the duration of the work, and shall be (r) All blasts shall be fired elec-
available for inspection by representa- trically with an electric blasting ma-
tives of the Secretary of Labor. chine or properly designed electric
(ii) Specimens of signs which would power source, except as provided in
meet the requirements of paragraph § 1926.906 (a) and (r).
(k)(3) of this section are the following: (s) Buildings used for the mixing of
blasting agents shall conform to the re-
quirements of this section.
(1) Buildings shall be of noncombus-
tible construction or sheet metal on
wood studs.
(2) Floors in a mixing plant shall be
of concrete or of other nonabsorbent
materials.
(3) All fuel oil storage facilities shall
be separated from the mixing plant and
located in such a manner that in case
(4) Ensuring that mobile radio trans- of tank rupture, the oil will drain away
mitters which are less than 100 feet from the mixing plant building.
away from electric blasting caps, in (4) The building shall be well venti-
other than original containers, shall be lated.
deenergized and effectively locked; (5) Heating units which do not depend
(5) Compliance with the rec- on combustion processes, when prop-
ommendations of The Institute of the erly designed and located, may be used
Makers of Explosives with regard to in the building. All direct sources of
blasting in the vicinity of radio trans- heat shall be provided exclusively from
mitters as stipulated in Radio Fre- units located outside the mixing build-
quency Energy—A Potential Hazard in ing.
the Use of Electric Blasting Caps, IME (6) All internal-combustion engines
Publication No. 20, March 1971. used for electric power generation shall
(l) Empty boxes and paper and fiber be located outside the mixing plant
packing materials, which have pre- building, or shall be properly venti-
viously contained high explosives, lated and isolated by a firewall. The ex-
shall not be used again for any purpose, haust systems on all such engines shall
but shall be destroyed by burning at an be located so any spark emission can-
approved location. not be a hazard to any materials in or
(m) Explosives, blasting agents, and adjacent to the plant.
blasting supplies that are obviously de- (t) Buildings used for the mixing of
teriorated or damaged shall not be water gels shall conform to the re-
used. quirements of this subdivision.
(n) Delivery and issue of explosives (1) Buildings shall be of noncombus-
shall only be made by and to author- tible construction or sheet metal on
ized persons and into authorized maga- wood studs.
zines or approved temporary storage or (2) Floors in a mixing plant shall be
handling areas. of concrete or of other nonabsorbent
(o) Blasting operations in the prox- materials.
imity of overhead power lines, commu- (3) Where fuel oil is used all fuel oil
nication lines, utility services, or other storage facilities shall be separated
services and structures shall not be from the mixing plant and located in
carried on until the operators and/or such a manner that in case of tank rup-
owners have been notified and meas- ture, the oil will drain away from the
ures for safe control have been taken. mixing plant building.
(p) The use of black powder shall be (4) The building shall be well venti-
prohibited. lated.
462
EC30OC91.049</GPH>
(5) Heating units that do not depend (c) No person shall smoke, or carry
on combustion processes, when prop- matches or any other flame-producing
erly designed and located, may be used device, nor shall firearms or loaded
in the building. All direct sources of cartridges be carried while in or near a
heat shall be provided exclusively from motor vehicle or conveyance trans-
units located outside of the mixing porting explosives.
building. (d) Explosives, blasting agents, and
(6) All internal-combustion engines blasting supplies shall not be trans-
used for electric power generation shall ported with other materials or cargoes.
be located outside the mixing plant
Blasting caps (including electric) shall
building, or shall be properly venti-
not be transported in the same vehicle
lated and isolated by a firewall. The ex-
haust systems on all such engines shall with other explosives.
be located so any spark emission can- (e) Vehicles used for transporting ex-
not be a hazard to any materials in or plosives shall be strong enough to
adjacent to the plant. carry the load without difficulty, and
shall be in good mechanical condition.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
(f) When explosives are transported
by a vehicle with an open body, a Class
§ 1926.901 Blaster qualifications. II magazine or original manufacturer’s
(a) A blaster shall be able to under- container shall be securely mounted on
stand and give written and oral orders. the bed to contain the cargo.
(b) A blaster shall be in good physical (g) All vehicles used for the transpor-
condition and not be addicted to nar- tation of explosives shall have tight
cotics, intoxicants, or similar types of floors and any exposed spark-producing
drugs. metal on the inside of the body shall be
(c) A blaster shall be qualified, by covered with wood, or other non-
reason of training, knowledge, or expe- sparking material, to prevent contact
rience, in the field of transporting, with containers of explosives.
storing, handling, and use of explo- (h) Every motor vehicle or convey-
sives, and have a working knowledge of ance used for transporting explosives
State and local laws and regulations shall be marked or placarded on both
which pertain to explosives. sides, the front, and the rear with the
(d) Blasters shall be required to fur- word ‘‘Explosives’’ in red letters, not
nish satisfactory evidence of com- less than 4 inches in height, on white
petency in handling explosives and per- background. In addition to such mark-
forming in a safe manner the type of ing or placarding, the motor vehicle or
blasting that will be required. conveyance may display, in such a
(e) The blaster shall be knowledge- manner that it will be readily visible
able and competent in the use of each from all directions, a red flag 18 inches
type of blasting method used. by 30 inches, with the word ‘‘Explo-
§ 1926.902 Surface transportation of sives’’ painted, stamped, or sewed
explosives. thereon, in white letters, at least 6
inches in height.
(a) Transportation of explosives shall
meet the provisions of Department of (i) Each vehicle used for transpor-
Transportation regulations contained tation of explosives shall be equipped
in 46 CFR parts 146–149, Water Carriers; with a fully charged fire extinguisher,
49 CFR parts 171–179, Highways and in good condition. An Underwriters
Railways; 49 CFR part 195, Pipelines; Laboratory-approved extinguisher of
and 49 CFR parts 390–397, Motor Car- not less than 10-ABC rating will meet
riers. the minimum requirement. The driver
(b) Motor vehicles or conveyances shall be trained in the use of the extin-
transporting explosives shall only be guisher on his vehicle.
driven by, and be in the charge of, a li- (j) Motor vehicles or conveyances
censed driver who is physically fit. He carrying explosives, blasting agents, or
shall be familiar with the local, State, blasting supplies, shall not be taken in-
and Federal regulation governing the side a garage or shop for repairs or
transportation of explosives. servicing.
463
(k) No motor vehicle transporting ex- (k) No explosives or blasting agents
plosives shall be left unattended. shall be transported on a man haul
trip.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
(l) The car or conveyance containing
explosives or blasting agents shall be
§ 1926.903 Underground transpor- pulled, not pushed, whenever possible.
tation of explosives. (m) The powder car or conveyance es-
pecially built for the purpose of trans-
(a) All explosives or blasting agents
porting explosives or blasting agents
in transit underground shall be taken
shall bear a reflectorized sign on each
to the place of use or storage without
side with the word ‘‘Explosives’’ in let-
delay.
ters, not less than 4 inches in height;
(b) The quantity of explosives or upon a background of sharply con-
blasting agents taken to an under- trasting color.
ground loading area shall not exceed (n) Compartments for transporting
the amount estimated to be necessary detonators and explosives in the same
for the blast. car or conveyance shall be physically
(c) Explosives in transit shall not be separated by a distance of 24 inches or
left unattended. by a solid partition at least 6 inches
(d) The hoist operator shall be noti- thick.
fied before explosives or blasting (o) Detonators and other explosives
agents are transported in a shaft con- shall not be transported at the same
veyance. time in any shaft conveyance.
(e) Trucks used for the transpor- (p) Explosives, blasting agents, or
tation of explosives underground shall blasting supplies shall not be trans-
have the electrical system checked ported with other materials.
weekly to detect any failures which (q) Explosives or blasting agents, not
may constitute an electrical hazard. A in original containers, shall be placed
certification record which includes the in a suitable container when trans-
date of the inspection; the signature of ported manually.
the person who performed the inspec- (r) Detonators, primers, and other ex-
tion; and a serial number, or other plosives shall be carried in separate
identifier, of the truck inspected shall containers when transported manually.
be prepared and the most recent cer-
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
tification record shall be maintained 1979, as amended at 52 FR 36382, Sept. 28,
on file. 1987]
(f) The installation of auxiliary
lights on truck beds, which are pow- § 1926.904 Storage of explosives and
ered by the truck’s electrical system, blasting agents.
shall be prohibited. (a) Explosives and related materials
(g) Explosives and blasting agents shall be stored in approved facilities
shall be hoisted, lowered, or conveyed required under the applicable provi-
in a powder car. No other materials, sions of the Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco
supplies, or equipment shall be trans- and Firearms regulations contained in
ported in the same conveyance at the 27 CFR part 55, Commerce in Explo-
same time. sives.
(h) No one, except the operator, his (b) Blasting caps, electric blasting
helper, and the powderman, shall be caps, detonating primers, and primed
permitted to ride on a conveyance cartridges shall not be stored in the
transporting explosives and blasting same magazine with other explosives
agents. or blasting agents.
(i) No person shall ride in any shaft (c) Smoking and open flames shall
conveyance transporting explosives not be permitted within 50 feet of ex-
and blasting agents. plosives and detonator storage maga-
(j) No explosives or blasting agents zine.
shall be transported on any loco- (d) No explosives or blasting agents
motive. At least two car lengths shall shall be permanently stored in any un-
separate the locomotive from the pow- derground operation until the oper-
der car. ation has been developed to the point
464
where at least two modes of exit have or blasting agents being loaded into
been provided. drill holes. Cables in the proximity of
(e) Permanent underground storage the blast area shall be deenergized and
magazines shall be at least 300 feet locked out by the blaster.
from any shaft, adit, or active under- (k) Holes shall be checked prior to
ground working area. loading to determine depth and condi-
(f) Permanent underground maga- tions. Where a hole has been loaded
zines containing detonators shall not with explosives but the explosives have
be located closer than 50 feet to any failed to detonate, there shall be no
magazine containing other explosives drilling within 50 feet of the hole.
or blasting agents. (l) When loading a long line of holes
with more than one loading crew, the
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
1979, as amended at 58 FR 35311, June 30, 1993] crews shall be separated by practical
distance consistent with efficient oper-
§ 1926.905 Loading of explosives or ation and supervision of crews.
blasting agents. (m) No explosive shall be loaded or
(a) Procedures that permit safe and used underground in the presence of
efficient loading shall be established combustible gases or combustible
before loading is started. dusts.
(b) All drill holes shall be sufficiently (n) No explosives other than those in
large to admit freely the insertion of Fume Class 1, as set forth by the Insti-
the cartridges of explosives. tute of Makers of Explosives, shall be
(c) Tamping shall be done only with used; however, explosives complying
wood rods or plastic tamping poles with the requirements of Fume Class 2
without exposed metal parts, but non- and Fume Class 3 may be used if ade-
sparking metal connectors may be used quate ventilation has been provided.
for jointed poles. Violent tamping shall (o) All blast holes in open work shall
be avoided. The primer shall never be be stemmed to the collar or to a point
tamped. which will confine the charge.
(d) No holes shall be loaded except (p) Warning signs, indicating a blast
those to be fired in the next round of area, shall be maintained at all ap-
blasting. After loading, all remaining proaches to the blast area. The warn-
explosives and detonators shall be im- ing sign lettering shall not be less than
mediately returned to an authorized 4 inches in height on a contrasting
magazine. background.
(e) Drilling shall not be started until (q) A bore hole shall never be sprung
all remaining butts of old holes are ex- when it is adjacent to or near a hole
amined for unexploded charges, and if that is loaded. Flashlight batteries
any are found, they shall be refired be- shall not be used for springing holes.
fore work proceeds. (r) Drill holes which have been
(f) No person shall be allowed to sprung or chambered, and which are
deepen drill holes which have con- not water-filled, shall be allowed to
tained explosives or blasting agents. cool before explosives are loaded.
(g) No explosives or blasting agents (s) No loaded holes shall be left unat-
shall be left unattended at the blast tended or unprotected.
site. (t) The blaster shall keep an accu-
(h) Machines and all tools not used rate, up-to-date record of explosives,
for loading explosives into bore holes blasting agents, and blasting supplies
shall be removed from the immediate used in a blast and shall keep an accu-
location of holes before explosives are rate running inventory of all explosives
delivered. Equipment shall not be oper- and blasting agents stored on the oper-
ated within 50 feet of loaded holes. ation.
(i) No activity of any nature other (u) When loading blasting agents
than that which is required for loading pneumatically over electric blasting
holes with explosives shall be per- caps, semiconductive delivery hose
mitted in a blast area. shall be used and the equipment shall
(j) Powerlines and portable electric be bonded and grounded.
cables for equipment being used shall [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
be kept a safe distance from explosives 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35184, June 30, 1993]
465
§ 1926.906 Initiation of explosive This gap shall be bridged by a flexible

charges—electric blasting. jumper cord just before firing the blast.
(a) Electric blasting caps shall not be (l) When firing from a power circuit,
used where sources of extraneous elec- the firing switch shall be locked in the
tricity make the use of electric blast- open or ‘‘Off’’ position at all times, ex-
ing caps dangerous. Blasting cap leg cept when firing. It shall be so designed
wires shall be kept short-circuited that the firing lines to the cap circuit
(shunted) until they are connected into are automatically short-circuited when
the circuit for firing. the switch is in the ‘‘Off’’ position.
(b) Before adopting any system of Keys to this switch shall be entrusted
electrical firing, the blaster shall con- only to the blaster.
duct a thorough survey for extraneous (m) Blasting machines shall be in
currents, and all dangerous currents good condition and the efficiency of
shall be eliminated before any holes the machine shall be tested periodi-
are loaded. cally to make certain that it can de-
(c) In any single blast using electric liver power at its rated capacity.
blasting caps, all caps shall be of the (n) When firing with blasting ma-
same style or function, and of the same chines, the connections shall be made
manufacture. as recommended by the manufacturer
(d) Electric blasting shall be carried of the electric blasting caps used.
out by using blasting circuits or power (o) The number of electric blasting
circuits in accordance with the electric caps connected to a blasting machine
blasting cap manufacturer’s rec- shall not be in excess of its rated ca-
ommendations, or an approved con- pacity. Furthermore, in primary blast-
tractor or his designated representa- ing, a series circuit shall contain no
tive. more caps than the limits rec-
(e) When firing a circuit of electric ommended by the manufacturer of the
blasting caps, care must be exercised to electric blasting caps in use.
ensure that an adequate quantity of de- (p) The blaster shall be in charge of
livered current is available, in accord- the blasting machines, and no other
ance with the manufacturer’s rec- person shall connect the leading wires
ommendations. to the machine.
(f) Connecting wires and lead wires (q) Blasters, when testing circuits to
shall be insulated single solid wires of charged holes, shall use only blasting
sufficient current-carrying capacity. galvanometers or other instruments
(g) Bus wires shall be solid single that are specifically designed for this
wires of sufficient current-carrying ca- purpose.
pacity. (r) Whenever the possibility exists
(h) When firing electrically, the insu- that a leading line or blasting wire
lation on all firing lines shall be ade- might be thrown over a live powerline
quate and in good condition. by the force of an explosion, care shall
(i) A power circuit used for firing be taken to see that the total length of
electric blasting caps shall not be wires are kept too short to hit the
grounded. lines, or that the wires are securely an-
(j) In underground operations when chored to the ground. If neither of
firing from a power circuit, a safety these requirements can be satisfied, a
switch shall be placed in the perma- nonelectric system shall be used.
nent firing line at intervals. This (s) In electrical firing, only the man
switch shall be made so it can be making leading wire connections shall
locked only in the ‘‘Off’’ position and fire the shot. All connections shall be
shall be provided with a short- made from the bore hole back to the
circuiting arrangement of the firing source of firing current, and the lead-
lines to the cap circuit. ing wires shall remain shorted and not
(k) In underground operations there be connected to the blasting machine
shall be a ‘‘lightning’’ gap of at least 5 or other source of current until the
feet in the firing system ahead of the charge is to be fired.
main firing switch; that is, between (t) After firing an electric blast from
this switch and the source of power. a blasting machine, the leading wires
466
shall be immediately disconnected one charge from dislodging other shots
from the machine and short-circuited. in the blast.
(m) When blasting with safety fuses,
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
1979, as amended at 63 FR 33469, June 18, 1998] consideration shall be given to the
length and burning rate of the fuse.
§ 1926.907 Use of safety fuse. Sufficient time, with a margin of safe-
ty, shall always be provided for the
(a) Safety fuse shall only be used blaster to reach a place of safety.
where sources of extraneous electricity
make the use of electric blasting caps § 1926.908 Use of detonating cord.
dangerous. The use of a fuse that has
(a) Care shall be taken to select a
been hammered or injured in any way
detonating cord consistent with the
shall be forbidden.
type and physical condition of the bore
(b) The hanging of a fuse on nails or
hole and stemming and the type of ex-
other projections which will cause a
plosives used.
sharp bend to be formed in the fuse is (b) Detonating cord shall be handled
prohibited. and used with the same respect and
(c) Before capping safety fuse, a short care given other explosives.
length shall be cut from the end of the (c) The line of detonating cord ex-
supply reel so as to assure a fresh cut tending out of a bore hole or from a
end in each blasting cap. charge shall be cut from the supply
(d) Only a cap crimper of approved spool before loading the remainder of
design shall be used for attaching the bore hole or placing additional
blasting caps to safety fuse. Crimpers charges.
shall be kept in good repair and acces- (d) Detonating cord shall be handled
sible for use. and used with care to avoid damaging
(e) No unused cap or short capped or severing the cord during and after
fuse shall be placed in any hole to be loading and hooking-up.
blasted; such unused detonators shall (e) Detonating cord connections shall
be removed from the working place and be competent and positive in accord-
destroyed. ance with approved and recommended
(f) No fuse shall be capped, or primers methods. Knot-type or other cord-to-
made up, in any magazine or near any cord connections shall be made only
possible source of ignition. with detonating cord in which the ex-
(g) No one shall be permitted to carry plosive core is dry.
detonators or primers of any kind on (f) All detonating cord trunklines and
his person. branchlines shall be free of loops, sharp
(h) The minimum length of safety kinks, or angles that direct the cord
fuse to be used in blasting shall be as back toward the oncoming line of deto-
required by State law, but shall not be nation.
less than 30 inches. (g) All detonating cord connections
(i) At least two men shall be present shall be inspected before firing the
when multiple cap and fuse blasting is blast.
done by hand lighting methods. (h) When detonating cord milli-
(j) Not more than 12 fuses shall be second-delay connectors or short-inter-
lighted by each blaster when hand val-delay electric blasting caps are
lighting devices are used. However, used with detonating cord, the practice
when two or more safety fuses in a shall conform strictly to the manufac-
group are lighted as one by means of turer’s recommendations.
igniter cord, or other similar fuse- (i) When connecting a blasting cap or
lighting devices, they may be consid- an electric blasting cap to detonating
ered as one fuse. cord, the cap shall be taped or other-
(k) The so-called ‘‘drop fuse’’ method wise attached securely along the side
of dropping or pushing a primer or any or the end of the detonating cord, with
explosive with a lighted fuse attached the end of the cap containing the ex-
is forbidden. plosive charge pointed in the direction
(l) Cap and fuse shall not be used for in which the detonation is to proceed.
firing mudcap charges unless charges (j) Detonators for firing the trunk-
are separated sufficiently to prevent line shall not be brought to the loading
467
area nor attached to the detonating and in tunnels, after the muck pile has
cord until everything else is in readi- been wetted down.
ness for the blast.
§ 1926.911 Misfires.
§ 1926.909 Firing the blast. (a) If a misfire is found, the blaster
(a) A code of blasting signals equiva- shall provide proper safeguards for ex-
lent to Table U–1, shall be posted on cluding all employees from the danger
one or more conspicuous places at the zone.
operation, and all employees shall be (b) No other work shall be done ex-
required to familiarize themselves with cept that necessary to remove the haz-
the code and conform to it. Danger ard of the misfire and only those em-
signs shall be placed at suitable loca- ployees necessary to do the work shall
tions. remain in the danger zone.
(b) Before a blast is fired, a loud (c) No attempt shall be made to ex-
warning signal shall be given by the tract explosives from any charged or
blaster in charge, who has made cer- misfired hole; a new primer shall be
tain that all surplus explosives are in a put in and the hole reblasted. If re-
safe place and all employees, vehicles, firing of the misfired hole presents a
and equipment are at a safe distance, hazard, the explosives may be removed
or under sufficient cover. by washing out with water or, where
(c) Flagmen shall be safely stationed the misfire is under water, blown out
on highways which pass through the with air.
danger zone so as to stop traffic during (d) If there are any misfires while
blasting operations. using cap and fuse, all employees shall
(d) It shall be the duty of the blaster remain away from the charge for at
to fix the time of blasting. least 1 hour. Misfires shall be handled
(e) Before firing an underground under the direction of the person in
blast, warning shall be given, and all charge of the blasting. All wires shall
possible entries into the blasting area, be carefully traced and a search made
and any entrances to any working for unexploded charges.
place where a drift, raise, or other (e) No drilling, digging, or picking
opening is about to hole through, shall shall be permitted until all missed
be carefully guarded. The blaster shall holes have been detonated or the au-
make sure that all employees are out thorized representative has approved
of the blast area before firing a blast. that work can proceed.
TABLE U–1
§ 1926.912 Underwater blasting.
WARNING SIGNAL—A 1-minute series of long
blasts 5 minutes prior to blast signal.
(a) A blaster shall conduct all blast-
BLAST SIGNAL—A series of short blasts 1 ing operations, and no shot shall be
minute prior to the shot. fired without his approval.
ALL CLEAR SIGNAL—A prolonged blast fol- (b) Loading tubes and casings of dis-
lowing the inspection of blast area. similar metals shall not be used be-
cause of possible electric transient cur-
§ 1926.910 Inspection after blasting. rents from galvanic action of the met-
(a) Immediately after the blast has als and water.
been fired, the firing line shall be dis- (c) Only water-resistant blasting caps
connected from the blasting machine, and detonating cords shall be used for
or where power switches are used, they all marine blasting. Loading shall be
shall be locked open or in the off posi- done through a nonsparking metal
tion. loading tube when tube is necessary.
(b) Sufficient time shall be allowed, (d) No blast shall be fired while any
not less than 15 minutes in tunnels, for vessel under way is closer than 1,500
the smoke and fumes to leave the feet to the blasting area. Those on
blasted area before returning to the board vessels or craft moored or an-
shot. An inspection of the area and the chored within 1,500 feet shall be noti-
surrounding rubble shall be made by fied before a blast is fired.
the blaster to determine if all charges (e) No blast shall be fired while any
have been exploded before employees swimming or diving operations are in
are allowed to return to the operation, progress in the vicinity of the blasting
468
area. If such operations are in progress, (g) When tunnel excavation in rock
signals and arrangements shall be face is approaching mixed face, and
agreed upon to assure that no blast when tunnel excavation is in mixed
shall be fired while any person is in the face, blasting shall be performed with
water. light charges and with light burden on
(f) Blasting flags shall be displayed. each hole. Advance drilling shall be
(g) The storage and handling of ex- performed as tunnel excavation in rock
plosives aboard vessels used in under- face approaches mixed face, to deter-
water blasting operations shall be ac- mine the general nature and extent of
cording to provisions outlined herein rock cover and the remaining distance
on handling and storing explosives. ahead to soft ground as excavation ad-
(h) When more than one charge is vances.
placed under water, a float device shall
be attached to an element of each § 1926.914 Definitions applicable to
charge in such manner that it will be this subpart.
released by the firing. Misfires shall be
handled in accordance with the re- (a) American Table of Distances (also
quirements of § 1926.911. known as Quantity Distance Tables)
means American Table of Distances for
§ 1926.913 Blasting in excavation work Storage of Explosives as revised and
under compressed air. approved by the Institute of the Mak-
(a) Detonators and explosives shall ers of Explosives, June 5, 1964.
not be stored or kept in tunnels, shafts, (b) Approved storage facility—A facil-
or caissons. Detonators and explosives ity for the storage of explosive mate-
for each round shall be taken directly rials conforming to the requirements of
from the magazines to the blasting this part and covered by a license or
zone and immediately loaded. Deto- permit issued under authority of the
nators and explosives left over after Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco and Fire-
loading a round shall be removed from arms. (See 27 CFR part 55)
the working chamber before the con- (c) Blast area—The area in which ex-
necting wires are connected up. plosives loading and blasting oper-
(b) When detonators or explosives are ations are being conducted.
brought into an air lock, no employee (d) Blaster—The person or persons au-
except the powderman, blaster, lock thorized to use explosives for blasting
tender and the employees necessary for purposes and meeting the qualifica-
carrying, shall be permitted to enter tions contained in § 1926.901.
the air lock. No other material, sup-
(e) Blasting agent—A blasting agent is
plies, or equipment shall be locked
any material or mixture consisting of a
through with the explosives.
fuel and oxidizer used for blasting, but
(c) Detonators and explosives shall be
not classified an explosive and in which
taken separately into pressure working
none of the ingredients is classified as
chambers.
(d) The blaster or powderman shall be an explosive provided the furnished
responsible for the receipt, unloading, (mixed) product cannot be detonated
storage, and on-site transportation of with a No. 8 test blasting cap when
explosives and detonators. confined. A common blasting agent
(e) All metal pipes, rails, air locks, presently in use is a mixture of ammo-
and steel tunnel lining shall be elec- nium nitrate (NH4 NO3) and carbo-
trically bonded together and grounded naceous combustibles, such as fuel oil
at or near the portal or shaft, and such or coal, and may either be procured,
pipes and rails shall be cross-bonded to- premixed and packaged from explosives
gether at not less than 1,000-foot inter- companies or mixed in the field.
vals throughout the length of the tun- (f) Blasting cap—A metallic tube
nel. In addition, each low air supply closed at one end, containing a charge
pipe shall be grounded at its delivery of one or more detonating compounds,
end. and designed for and capable of detona-
(f) The explosives suitable for use in tion from the sparks or flame from a
wet holes shall be water-resistant and safety fuse inserted and crimped into
shall be Fume Class 1. the open end.
469
(g) Block holing—The breaking of Class A Explosives. Possessing detonating
boulders by firing a charge of explo- hazard, such as dynamite, nitroglycerin, pic-
sives that has been loaded in a drill ric acid, lead azide, fulminate of mercury,
black powder, blasting caps, and detonating
hole.
primers.
(h) Conveyance—Any unit for trans- Class B Explosives. Possessing flammable
porting explosives or blasting agents, hazard, such as propellant explosives, includ-
including but not limited to trucks, ing some smokeless propellants.
trailers, rail cars, barges, and vessels. Class C Explosives. Include certain types of
(i) Detonating cord—A flexible cord manufactured articles which contain Class A
containing a center core of high explo- or Class B explosives, or both, as compo-
sives which when detonated, will have nents, but in restricted quantities.
sufficient strength to detonate other (o) Fuse lighters—Special devices for
cap-sensitive explosives with which it the purpose of igniting safety fuse.
is in contact. (p) Magazine—Any building or struc-
(j) Detonator—Blasting caps, electric ture, other than an explosives manu-
blasting caps, delay electric blasting facturing building, used for the storage
caps, and nonelectric delay blasting of explosives.
caps. (q) Misfire—An explosive charge
(k) Electric blasting cap—A blasting which failed to detonate.
cap designed for and capable of detona- (r) Mud-capping (sometimes known as
tion by means of an electric current. bulldozing, adobe blasting, or dobying).
(l) Electric blasting circuitry— The blasting of boulders by placing a
(1) Bus wire. An expendable wire, quantity of explosives against a rock,
used in parallel or series, in parallel boulder, or other object without con-
circuits, to which are connected the leg fining the explosives in a drill hole.
wires of electric blasting caps. (s) Nonelectric delay blasting cap—A
(2) Connecting wire. An insulated ex- blasting cap with an integral delay ele-
pendable wire used between electric ment in conjunction with and capable
blasting caps and the leading wires or of being detonated by a detonation im-
between the bus wire and the leading pulse or signal from miniaturized deto-
wires. nating cord.
(3) Leading wire. An insulated wire (t) Primary blasting—The blasting op-
used between the electric power source eration by which the original rock for-
and the electric blasting cap circuit. mation is dislodged from its natural lo-
(4) Permanent blasting wire. A per- cation.
manently mounted insulated wire used (u) Primer—A cartridge or container
between the electric power source and of explosives into which a detonator or
the electric blasting cap circuit. detonating cord is inserted or attached.
(m) Electric delay blasting caps—Caps (v) Safety fuse—A flexible cord con-
designed to detonate at a predeter- taining an internal burning medium by
mined period of time after energy is which fire is conveyed at a continuous
applied to the ignition system. and uniform rate for the purpose of fir-
(n) Explosives—(1) Any chemical coming blasting caps.
pound, mixture, or device, the primary (w) Secondary blasting—The reduction
or common purpose of which is to func- of oversize material by the use of ex-
tion by explosion; that is, with sub- plosives to the dimension required for
stantially instantaneous release of gas handling, including mudcapping and
and heat, unless such compound, mix- blockholing.
ture or device is otherwise specifically (x) Stemming—A suitable inert incom-
classified by the U.S. Department of bustible material or device used to con-
Transportation. fine or separate explosives in a drill
(2) All material which is classified as hole, or to cover explosives in mud-cap-
Class A, Class B, and Class C Explo- ping.
sives by the U.S. Department of Trans- (y) Springing—The creation of a pock-
portation. et in the bottom of a drill hole by the
(3) Classification of explosives by the use of a moderate quantity of explo-
U.S. Department of Transportation is sives in order that larger quantities or
as follows: explosives may be inserted therein.
470
(z) Water gels, or slurry explosives—A work as described in paragraph (a)(1) of
wide variety of materials used for this section is to be performed on such
blasting. They all contain substantial lines or equipment.
proportions of water and high propor- (3) The standards set forth in this
tions of ammonium nitrate, some of subpart V provide minimum require-
which is in solution in the water. Two ments for safety and health. Employers
broad classes of water gels are: (1) may require adherence to additional
Those which are sensitized by a mate- standards which are not in conflict
rial classed as an explosive, such as with the standards contained in this
TNT or smokeless powder, and (2) those subpart V.
which contain no ingredient classified (b) Initial inspections, tests, or deter-
as an explosive; these are sensitized minations. (1) Existing conditions shall
with metals such as aluminum or with be determined before starting work, by
other fuels. Water gels may be an inspection or a test. Such condi-
premixed at an explosives plant or tions shall include, but not be limited
mixed at the site immediately before to, energized lines and equipment, con-
delivery into the bore hole. ditions of poles, and the location of cir-
(aa) Semiconductive hose. cuits and equipment, including power
Semiconductive hose—a hose with an and communication lines, CATV and
electrical resistance high enough to fire alarm circuits.
limit flow of stray electric currents to (2) Electric equipment and lines shall
safe levels, yet not so high as to pre- be considered energized until deter-
vent drainage of static electric charges mined to be deenergized by tests or
to ground; hose of not more than 2 other appropriate methods or means.
megohms resistance over its entire (3) Operating voltage of equipment
length and of not less than 5,000 ohms and lines shall be determined before
per foot meets the requirement. working on or near energized parts.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, (c) Clearances. The provisions of para-
1979, as amended at 58 FR 35184 and 35311, graph (c) (1) or (2) of this section shall
June 30, 1993] be observed.
(1) No employee shall be permitted to
Subpart V—Power Transmission approach or take any conductive object
and Distribution without an approved insulating handle
closer to exposed energized parts than
shown in Table V–1, unless:
657; Secretary of Labor’s Order Nos. 12–71 (36
(i) The employee is insulated or
FR 8754); 8–76 (41 FR 25059); 9–83 (48 FR 35736), guarded from the energized part (gloves
1–90 (55 FR 9033), 5–2007 (72 FR 31159), or 1– or gloves with sleeves rated for the
2012 (77 FR 3912), as applicable. Section voltage involved shall be considered in-
1926.951 also is issued under 29 CFR part 1911. sulation of the employee from the en-
ergized part), or
§ 1926.950 General requirements. (ii) The energized part is insulated or
(a) Application. The occupational guarded from him and any other con-
safety and health standards contained ductive object at a different potential,
in this subpart V shall apply to the or
construction of electric transmission (iii) The employee is isolated, insu-
and distribution lines and equipment. lated, or guarded from any other con-
(1) As used in this subpart V the term ductive object(s), as during live-line
‘‘construction’’ includes the erection of bare-hand work.
new electric transmission and distribu- (2) (i) The minimum working dis-
tion lines and equipment, and the al- tance and minimum clear hot stick dis-
teration, conversion, and improvement tances stated in Table V–1 shall not be
of existing electric transmission and violated. The minimum clear hot stick
distribution lines and equipment. distance is that for the use of live-line
(2) Existing electric transmission and tools held by linemen when performing
distribution lines and electrical equip- live-line work.
ment need not be modified to conform (ii) Conductor support tools, such as
to the requirements of applicable link sticks, strain carriers, and insu-
standards in this subpart V, until such lator cradles, may be used: Provided,
471
That the clear insulation is at least as (iv) Protective grounds shall be ap-
long as the insulator string or the min- plied on the disconnected lines or
imum distance specified in Table V–1 equipment to be worked on.
for the operating voltage. (v) Guards or barriers shall be erect-
ed as necessary to adjacent energized
TABLE V–1—ALTERNATING CURRENT—MINIMUM lines.
DISTANCES (vi) When more than one independent
Minimum
crew requires the same line or equip-
working ment to be deenergized, a prominent
Voltage range (phase to phase) kilovolt) and clear tag for each such independent crew
hot stick
distance shall be placed on the line or equip-
ment by the designated employee in
2.1 to 15 .............................................................. 2 ft. 0 in.
15.1 to 35 ............................................................ 2 ft. 4 in.
charge.
35.1 to 46 ............................................................ 2 ft. 6 in. (vii) Upon completion of work on de-
46.1 to 72.5 ......................................................... 3 ft. 0 in. energized lines or equipment, each des-
72.6 to 121 .......................................................... 3 ft. 4 in. ignated employee in charge shall deter-
138 to 145 ........................................................... 3 ft. 6 in. mine that all employees in his crew are
161 to 169 ........................................................... 3 ft. 8 in.
230 to 242 ........................................................... 5 ft. 0 in.
clear, that protective grounds installed
345 to 362 ........................................................... 17 ft. 0 in. by his crew have been removed, and he
500 to 552 ........................................................... 1 11 ft. 0 shall report to the designated author-
in. ity that all tags protecting his crew
700 to 765 ........................................................... 1 15 ft. 0
in.
may be removed.
1 NOTE: For 345–362 kv., 500–552 kv., and 700–765 kv.,
(2) When a crew working on a line or
the minimum working distance and the minimum clear hot equipment can clearly see that the
stick distance may be reduced provided that such distances means of disconnecting from electric
are not less than the shortest distance between the energized
part and a grounded surface. energy are visibly open or visibly
locked-out, the provisions of para-
(d) Deenergizing lines and equipment. graphs (d)(i), and (ii) of this section
(1) When deenergizing lines and equip- shall apply:
ment operated in excess of 600 volts, (i) Guards or barriers shall be erected
and the means of disconnecting from as necessary to adjacent energized
electric energy is not visibly open or lines.
visibly locked out, the provisions of (ii) Upon completion of work on de-
paragraphs (d)(1) (i) through (vii) of energized lines or equipment, each des-
this section shall be complied with: ignated employee in charge shall deter-
(i) The particular section of line or mine that all employees in his crew are
equipment to be deenergized shall be clear, that protective grounds installed
clearly identified, and it shall be iso- by his crew have been removed, and he
lated from all sources of voltage. shall report to the designated author-
(ii) Notification and assurance from ity that all tags protecting his crew
the designated employee shall be ob- may be removed.
tained that: (e) Emergency procedures and first aid.
(a) All switches and disconnectors (1) The employer shall provide training
through which electric energy may be or require that his employees are
supplied to the particular section of knowledgeable and proficient in:
line or equipment to be worked have (i) Procedures involving emergency
been deenergized; situations, and
(b) All switches and disconnectors are (ii) First-aid fundamentals including
plainly tagged indicating that men are resuscitation.
at work; (2) In lieu of paragraph (e)(1) of this
(c) And that where design of such section the employer may comply with
switches and disconnectors permits, the provisions of § 1926.50(c) regarding
they have been rendered inoperable. first-aid requirements.
(iii) After all designated switches and (f) Night work. When working at
disconnectors have been opened, ren- night, spotlights or portable lights for
dered inoperable, and tagged, visual in- emergency lighting shall be provided
spection or tests shall be conducted to as needed to perform the work safely.
insure that equipment or lines have (g) Work near and over water. When
been deenergized. crews are engaged in work over or near
472
water and when danger of drowning ex- (2) Body belts and safety straps shall
ists, suitable protection shall be pro- meet the requirements of § 1926.959. In
vided as stated in § 1926.104, or § 1926.105, addition to being used as an employee
or § 1926.106. safeguarding item, body belts with ap-
(h) Sanitation facilities. The require- proved tool loops may be used for the
ments of § 1926.51 of subpart D of this purpose of holding tools. Body belts
part shall be complied with for sanita- shall be free from additional metal
tion facilities. hooks and tool loops other than those
(i) Hydraulic fluids. All hydraulic permitted in § 1926.959.
fluids used for the insulated sections of (3) Body belts and straps shall be in-
derrick trucks, aerial lifts, and hydrau- spected before use each day to deter-
lic tools which are used on or around mine that they are in safe working
energized lines and equipment shall be condition.
of the insulating type. The require- (4)(i) Lifelines and lanyards shall
ments for fire resistant fluids of comply with the provisions of § 1926.502.
§ 1926.302(d)(1) do not apply to hydraulic (ii) Safety lines are not intended to
tools covered by this paragraph. be subjected to shock loading and are
used for emergency rescue such as low-
§ 1926.951 Tools and protective equip-
ment. ering a man to the ground. Such safety
lines shall be a minimum of one-half-
(a) Protective equipment. (1)(i) Rubber inch diameter and three or four strand
protective equipment shall be in ac- first-grade manila or its equivalent in
cordance with the provisions of the strength (2,650 lb.) and durability.
American National Standards Institute (5) Defective ropes shall be replaced.
(ANSI), ANSI J6 series, as follows: (c) Ladders. (1) Portable metal or con-
Item Standard ductive ladders shall not be used near
energized lines or equipment except as
Rubber insulating gloves ..................... J6.6–1971. may be necessary in specialized work
Rubber matting for use around electric J6.7–1935 (R1971).
apparatus. such as in high voltage substations
Rubber insulating blankets .................. J6.4–1971. where nonconductive ladders might
Rubber insulating hoods ..................... J6.2–1950 (R1971). present a greater hazard than conduc-
Rubber insulating line hose ................. J6.1–1950 (R1971). tive ladders. Conductive or metal lad-
Rubber insulating sleeves ................... J6.5–1971.
ders shall be prominently marked as
(ii) Rubber protective equipment conductive and all necessary pre-
shall be visually inspected prior to use. cautions shall be taken when used in
specialized work.
(iii) In addition, an ‘‘air’’ test shall
be performed for rubber gloves prior to (2) Hook or other type ladders used in
use. structures shall be positively secured
(iv) Protective equipment of material to prevent the ladder from being acci-
other than rubber shall provide equal dentally displaced.
or better electrical and mechanical (d) Live-line tools. (1) Only live-line
protection. tool poles having a manufacturer’s cer-
(2) Protective hats shall be in accord- tification to withstand the following
ance with the provisions of ANSI Z89.2– minimum tests shall be used:
1971 Industrial Protective Helmets for (i) 100,000 volts per foot of length for
Electrical Workers, Class B, and shall 5 minutes when the tool is made of fi-
be worn at the jobsite by employees berglass; or
who are exposed to the hazards of fall- (ii) 75,000 volts per foot of length for
ing objects, electric shock, or burns. 3 minutes when the tool is made of
(b) Personal climbing equipment. (1) wood; or
Body belts with straps or lanyards (iii) Other tests equivalent to para-
shall be worn to protect employees graph (d) (i) or (ii) of this section as ap-
working at elevated locations on poles, propriate.
towers, or other structures except (2) All live-line tools shall be visually
where such use creates a greater haz- inspected before use each day. Tools to
ard to the safety of the employees, in be used shall be wiped clean and if any
which case other safeguards shall be hazardous defects are indicated such
employed. tools shall be removed from service.
473
(e) Measuring tapes or measuring ropes. (b) Aerial lifts. (1) The provisions of
Measuring tapes or measuring ropes § 1926.556, subpart N of this part, shall
which are metal or contain conductive apply to the utilization of aerial lifts.
strands shall not be used when working (2) When working near energized
on or near energized parts. lines or equipment, aerial lift trucks
(f) Handtools. (1) Switches for all pow- shall be grounded or barricaded and
ered hand tools shall comply with considered as energized equipment, or
§ 1926.300(d). the aerial lift truck shall be insulated
(2) All portable electric handtools for the work being performed.
shall: (3) Equipment or material shall not
(i) Be equipped with three-wire cord be passed between a pole or structure
having the ground wire permanently and an aerial lift while an employee
connected to the tool frame and means working from the basket is within
for grounding the other end; or reaching distance of energized conduc-
(ii) Be of the double insulated type tors or equipment that are not covered
and permanently labeled as ‘‘Double with insulating protective equipment.
Insulated’’; or (c) Cranes and other lifting equipment.
(iii) Be connected to the power sup- (1) All equipment shall comply with
ply by means of an isolating trans- subparts CC and O of this part, as ap-
former, or other isolated power supply. plicable.
(3) All hydraulic tools which are used (2) Use of digger derricks must com-
on or around energized lines or equip- ply with § 1910.269 (in addition to 29
ment shall use nonconducting hoses CFR part 1926, subpart O) whenever 29
having adequate strength for the nor- CFR part 1926, subpart CC, excludes
mal operating pressures. It should be such use in accordance with
noted that the provisions of § 1926.1400(c)(4).
§ 1926.302(d)(2) shall also apply. (3) With the exception of equipment
certified for work on the proper volt-
(4) All pneumatic tools which are
age, mechanical equipment shall not be
used on or around energized lines or
operated closer to any energized line or
equipment shall:
equipment than the clearances set
(i) Have nonconducting hoses having forth in § 1926.950(c) unless, in addition
adequate strength for the normal oper- to the requirements in § 1926.1410:
ating pressures, and
(i) The mechanical equipment is in-
(ii) Have an accumulator on the com- sulated, or
pressor to collect moisture.
(ii) The mechanical equipment is
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, considered as energized.
1979, as amended at 59 FR 40730, Aug. 9, 1994]
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (c)(3): In accordance
with 29 CFR 1926.1400(g), compliance with 29
§ 1926.952 Mechanical equipment.
CFR 1910.269(p) will be deemed compliance
(a) General. (1) Visual inspections with §§ 1926.1407 through 1926.1411, including
shall be made of the equipment to de- § 1926.1410.
termine that it is in good condition [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979 , 75 FR 48135, Aug. 9,
each day the equipment is to be used. 2010; 78 FR 32116, May 29, 2013]
(2) Tests shall be made at the begin-
ning of each shift during which the § 1926.953 Material handling.
equipment is to be used to determine (a) Unloading. Prior to unloading
that the brakes and operating systems steel, poles, cross arms and similar ma-
are in proper working condition. terial, the load shall be thoroughly ex-
(3) No employer shall use any motor amined to ascertain if the load has
vehicle equipment having an ob- shifted, binders or stakes have broken
structed view to the rear unless: or the load is otherwise hazardous to
(i) The vehicle has a reverse signal employees.
alarm audible above the surrounding (b) Pole hauling. (1) During pole haul-
noise level or: ing operations, all loads shall be se-
(ii) The vehicle is backed up only cured to prevent displacement and a
when an observer signals that it is safe red flag shall be displayed at the trail-
to do so. ing end of the longest pole.
474
(2) Precautions shall be exercised to (c) Communication conductors. Bare
prevent blocking of roadways or endan- wire communication conductors on
gering other traffic. power poles or structures shall be
(3) When hauling poles during the treated as energized lines unless pro-
hours of darkness, illuminated warning tected by insulating materials.
devices shall be attached to the trail- (d) Voltage testing. Deenergized con-
ing end of the longest pole. ductors and equipment which are to be
(c) Storage. (1) No materials or equip- grounded shall be tested for voltage.
ment shall be stored under energized Results of this voltage test shall deter-
bus, energized lines, or near energized mine the subsequent procedures as re-
equipment, if it is practical to store quired in § 1926.950(d).
them elsewhere. (e) Attaching grounds. (1) When at-
(2) When materials or equipment are taching grounds, the ground end shall
stored under energized lines or near en- be attached first, and the other end
ergized equipment, applicable clear- shall be attached and removed by
ances shall be maintained as stated in means of insulated tools or other suit-
Table V–1; and extraordinary caution able devices.
shall be exercised when moving mate- (2) When removing grounds, the
rials near such energized equipment. grounding device shall first be removed
(d) Tag line. Where hazards to em- fromt the line or equipment using insu-
ployees exist tag lines or other suitable lating tools or other suitable devices.
devices shall be used to control loads (f) Grounds shall be placed between
being handled by hoisting equipment. work location and all sources of energy
(e) Oil filled equipment. During con- and as close as practicable to the work
struction or repair of oil filled equip- location, or grounds shall be placed at
ment the oil may be stored in tem- the work location. If work is to be per-
porary containers other than those re- formed at more than one location in a
quired in § 1926.152, such as pillow line section, the line section must be
tanks. grounded and short circuited at one lo-
cation in the line section and the con-
(f) Framing. During framing oper-
ductor to be worked on shall be
ations, employees shall not work under
grounded at each work location. The
a pole or a structure suspended by a
minimum distance shown in Table V–1
crane, A-frame or similar equipment
shall be maintained from ungrounded
unless the pole or structure is ade-
conductors at the work location. Where
quately supported.
the making of a ground is impracti-
(g) Attaching the load. The hoist rope cable, or the conditions resulting
shall not be wrapped around the load. therefrom would be more hazardous
This provision shall not apply to elec- than working on the lines or equip-
tric construction crews when setting or ment without grounding, the grounds
removing poles. may be omitted and the line or equip-
ment worked as energized.
§ 1926.954 Grounding for protection of
employees. (g) Testing without grounds. Grounds
may be temporarily removed only
(a) General. All conductors and equip- when necessary for test purposes and
ment shall be treated as energized extreme caution shall be exercised dur-
until tested or otherwise determined to ing the test procedures.
be deenergized or until grounded. (h) Grounding electrode. When ground-
(b) New construction. New lines or ing electrodes are utilized, such elec-
equipment may be considered deener- trodes shall have a resistance to
gized and worked as such where: ground low enough to remove the dan-
(1) The lines or equipment are ger of harm to personnel or permit
grounded, or prompt operation of protective devices.
(2) The hazard of induced voltages is (i) Grounding to tower. Grounding to
not present, and adequate clearances or tower shall be made with a tower
other means are implemented to pre- clamp capable of conducting the antici-
vent contact with energized lines or pated fault current.
equipment and the new lines or equip- (j) Ground lead. A ground lead, to be
ment. attached to either a tower ground or
475
driven ground, shall be capable of con- (b) Metal tower construction. (1) When
ducting the anticipated fault current working in unstable material the exca-
and shall have a minimum conductance vation for pad- or pile-type footings in
of No. 2 AWG copper. excess of 5 feet deep shall be either
sloped to the angle of repose as re-
§ 1926.955 Overhead lines. quired in § 1926.652 or shored if entry is
(a) Overhead lines. (1) When working required. Ladders shall be provided for
on or with overhead lines the provi- access to pad- or pile-type footing ex-
sions of paragraphs (a) (2) through (8) cavations in excess of 4 feet.
of this section shall be complied with (2) When working in unstable mate-
in addition to other applicable provi- rial provision shall be made for clean-
sions of this subpart. ing out auger-type footings without re-
(2) Prior to climbing poles, ladders, quiring an employee to enter the foot-
scaffolds, or other elevated structures, ing unless shoring is used to protect
an inspection shall be made to deter- the employee.
mine that the structures are capable of (3)(i) A designated employee shall be
sustaining the additional or unbal- used in directing mobile equipment ad-
anced stresses to which they will be jacent to footing excavations.
subjected. (ii) No one shall be permitted to re-
(3) Where poles or structures may be main in the footing while equipment is
unsafe for climbing, they shall not be being spotted for placement.
climbed until made safe by guying, (iii) Where necessary to assure the
bracing, or other adequate means. stability of mobile equipment the loca-
(4) Before installing or removing wire tion of use for such equipment shall be
or cable, strains to which poles and graded and leveled.
structures will be subjected shall be (4)(i) Tower assembly shall be carried
considered and necessary action taken out with a minimum exposure of em-
to prevent failure of supporting struc- ployees to falling objects when working
tures. at two or more levels on a tower.
(5)(i) When setting, moving, or re- (ii) Guy lines shall be used as nec-
moving poles using cranes, derricks, essary to maintain sections or parts of
gin poles, A-frames, or other mecha- sections in position and to reduce the
nized equipment near energized lines or possibility of tipping.
equipment, precautions shall be taken (iii) Members and sections being as-
to avoid contact with energized lines or sembled shall be adequately supported.
equipment, except in bare-hand live- (5) When assembling and erecting
line work, or where barriers or protec- towers the provisions of paragraphs
tive devices are used. (b)(5) (i), (ii) and (iii) of this section
(ii) Equipment and machinery oper- shall be complied with:
ating adjacent to energized lines or (i) The construction of transmission
equipment shall comply with towers and the erecting of poles, hoist-
§ 1926.952(c)(2). ing machinery, site preparation ma-
(6)(i) Unless using suitable protective chinery, and other types of construc-
equipment for the voltage involved, tion machinery shall conform to the
employees standing on the ground shall applicable requirements of this part.
avoid contacting equipment or machin- (ii) No one shall be permitted under a
ery working adjacent to energized lines tower which is in the process of erec-
or equipment. tion or assembly, except as may be re-
(ii) Lifting equipment shall be bond- quired to guide and secure the section
ed to an effective ground or it shall be being set.
considered energized and barricaded (iii) When erecting towers using
when utilized near energized equip- hoisting equipment adjacent to ener-
ment or lines. gized transmission lines, the lines shall
(7) Pole holes shall not be left unat- be deenergized when practical. If the
tended or unguarded in areas where lines are not deenergized, extraor-
employees are currently working. dinary caution shall be exercised to
(8) Tag lines shall be of a nonconduc- maintain the minimum clearance dis-
tive type when used near energized tances required by § 1926.950(c), includ-
lines. ing Table V–1.
476
(6)(i) Erection cranes shall be set on (ii) When crossing over energized
firm level foundations and when the conductors in excess of 600 volts, rope
cranes are so equipped outriggers shall nets or guard structures shall be in-
be used. stalled unless provision is made to iso-
(ii) Tag lines shall be utilized to late or insulate the workman or the en-
maintain control of tower sections ergized conductor. Where practical the
being raised and positioned, except automatic reclosing feature of the cir-
where the use of such lines would cre- cuit interrupting device shall be made
ate a greater hazard. inoperative. In addition, the line being
(iii) The loadline shall not be de- strung shall be grounded on either side
tached from a tower section until the of the crossover or considered and
section is adequately secured. worked as energized.
(iv) Except during emergency res- (5) Conductors being strung in or re-
toration procedures erection shall be moved shall be kept under positive
discontinued in the event of high wind control by the use of adequate tension
or other adverse weather conditions reels, guard structures, tielines, or
which would make the work hazardous. other means to prevent accidental con-
(v) Equipment and rigging shall be tact with energized circuits.
regularly inspected and maintained in (6) Guard structure members shall be
safe operating condition. sound and of adequate dimension and
(7) Adequate traffic control shall be strength, and adequately supported.
maintained when crossing highways
(7)(i) Catch-off anchors, rigging, and
and railways with equipment as re-
hoists shall be of ample capacity to
quired by the provisions of § 1926.200(g)
prevent loss of the lines.
(1) and (2).
(ii) The manufacturer’s load rating
(8) A designated employee shall be
shall not be exceeded for stringing
utilized to determine that required
lines, pulling lines, sock connections,
clearance is maintained in moving
and all load-bearing hardware and ac-
equipment under or near energized
cessories.
lines.
(c) Stringing or removing deenergized (iii) Pulling lines and accessories
conductors. (1) When stringing or re- shall be inspected regularly and re-
moving deenergized conductors, the placed or repaired when damaged or
provisions of paragraphs (c) (2) through when dependability is doubtful. The
(12) of this section shall be complied provisions of § 1926.251(c)(4)(ii) (con-
with. cerning splices) shall not apply.
(2) Prior to stringing operations a (8) Conductor grips shall not be used
briefing shall be held setting forth the on wire rope unless designed for this
plan of operation and specifying the application.
type of equipment to be used, ground- (9) While the conductor or pulling
ing devices and procedures to be fol- line is being pulled (in motion) employ-
lowed, crossover methods to be em- ees shall not be permitted directly
ployed, and the clearance authoriza- under overhead operations, nor shall
tion required. any employee be permitted on the
(3) Where there is a possibility of the crossarm.
conductor accidentally contacting an (10) A transmission clipping crew
energized circuit or receiving a dan- shall have a minimum of two struc-
gerous induced voltage buildup, to fur- tures clipped in between the crew and
ther protect the employee from the the conductor being sagged. When
hazards of the conductor, the con- working on bare conductors, clipping
ductor being installed or removed shall and tying crews shall work between
be grounded or provisions made to in- grounds at all times. The grounds shall
sulate or isolate the employee. remain intact until the conductors are
(4)(i) If the existing line is deener- clipped in, except on dead end struc-
gized, proper clearance authorization tures.
shall be secured and the line grounded (11)(i) Except during emergency res-
on both sides of the crossover or, the toration procedures, work from struc-
line being strung or removed shall be tures shall be discontinued when ad-
considered and worked as energized. verse weather (such as high wind or ice
477
on structures) makes the work haz- (ii) Such grounds shall be removed as
ardous. the last phase of aerial cleanup.
(ii) Stringing and clipping operations (iii) Except for moving type grounds,
shall be discontinued during the the grounds shall be placed and re-
progress of an electrical storm in the moved with a hot stick.
immediate vicinity. (6) Conductors, subconductors, and
(12)(i) Reel handling equipment, in- overhead ground conductors shall be
cluding pulling and braking machines, grounded at all dead-end or catch-off
shall have ample capacity, operate points.
smoothly, and be leveled and aligned in (7) A ground shall be located at each
accordance with the manufacturer’s side and within 10 feet of working areas
operating instructions. where conductors, subconductors, or
(ii) Reliable communications be- overhead ground conductors are being
tween the reel tender and pulling rig spliced at ground level. The two ends
operator shall be provided. to be spliced shall be bonded to each
(iii) Each pull shall be snubbed or other. It is recommended that splicing
dead ended at both ends before subse- be carried out on either an insulated
quent pulls. platform or on a conductive metallic
(d) Stringing adjacent to energized grounding mat bonded to both grounds.
lines. (1) Prior to stringing parallel to When a grounding mat is used, it is
an existing energized transmission line
recommended that the grounding mat
a competent determination shall be
be roped off and an insulated walkway
made to ascertain whether dangerous
provided for access to the mat.
induced voltage buildups will occur,
particularly during switching and (8)(i) All conductors, subconductors,
ground fault conditions. When there is and overhead ground conductors shall
a possibility that such dangerous in- be bonded to the tower at any isolated
duced voltage may exist the employer tower where it may be necessary to
shall comply with the provisions of complete work on the transmission
paragraphs (d) (2) through (9) of this line.
section in addition to the provisions of (ii) Work on dead-end towers shall re-
paragraph (c) of this § 1926.955, unless quire grounding on all deenergized
the line is worked as energized. lines.
(2) When stringing adjacent to ener- (iii) Grounds may be removed as soon
gized lines the tension stringing meth- as the work is completed: Provided,
od or other methods which preclude un- That the line is not left open circuited
intentional contact between the lines at the isolated tower at which work is
being pulled and any employee shall be being completed.
used. (9) When performing work from the
(3) All pulling and tensioning equip- structures, clipping crews and all oth-
ment shall be isolated, insulated, or ef- ers working on conductors, subconduc-
fectively grounded. tors, or overhead ground conductors
(4) A ground shall be installed be- shall be protected by individual
tween the tensioning reel setup and the grounds installed at every work loca-
first structure in order to ground each tion.
bare conductor, subconductor, and
(e) Live-line bare-hand work. In addi-
overhead ground conductor during
tion to any other applicable standards
stringing operations.
contained elsewhere in this subpart all
(5) During stringing operations, each
live-line bare-hand work shall be per-
bare conductor, subconductor, and
overhead ground conductor shall be formed in accordance with the fol-
grounded at the first tower adjacent to lowing requirements:
both the tensioning and pulling setup (1) Employees shall be instructed and
and in increments so that no point is trained in the live-line bare-hand tech-
more than 2 miles from a ground. nique and the safety requirements per-
(i) The grounds shall be left in place tinent thereto before being permitted
until conductor installation is com- to use the technique on energized cir-
pleted. cuits.
478
(2) Before using the live-line bare- age is going to be worked and when
hand technique on energized high-volt- changed conditions indicate a need for
age conductors or parts, a check shall additional tests. Aerial buckets used
be made of: for bare-hand live-line work shall be
(i) The voltage rating of the circuit subjected to an arm current test. This
on which the work is to be performed; test shall consist of placing the bucket
(ii) The clearances to ground of lines in contact with an energized source
and other energized parts on which equal to the voltage to be worked upon
work is to be performed; and for a minimum time of three (3) min-
(iii) The voltage limitations of the utes. the leakage current shall not ex-
aerial-lift equipment intended to be ceed 1 microampere per kilo-volt of
used.
nominal line-to-line voltage. Work op-
(3) Only equipment designed, tested,
erations shall be suspended imme-
and intended for live-line bare-hand
work shall be used. diately upon any indication of a mal-
(4) All work shall be personally su- function in the equipment.
pervised by a person trained and quali- (12) All aerial lifts to be used for live-
fied to perform live-line bare-hand line bare-hand work shall have dual
work. controls (lower and upper) as required
(5) The automatic reclosing feature by paragraph (e)(12) (i) and (ii) of this
of circuit interrupting devices shall be section.
made inoperative where practical be- (i) The upper controls shall be within
fore working on any energized line or easy reach of the employee in the bas-
equipment. ket. If a two basket type lift is used ac-
(6) Work shall not be performed dur- cess to the controls shall be within
ing the progress of an electrical storm easy reach from either basket.
in the immediate vicinity. (ii) The lower set of controls shall be
(7) A conductive bucket liner or other located near base of the boom that will
suitable conductive device shall be pro- permit over-ride operation of equip-
vided for bonding the insulated aerial ment at any time.
device to the energized line or equip-
(13) Ground level lift control shall
ment.
not be operated unless permission has
(i) The employee shall be connected
been obtained from the employee in
to the bucket liner by use of conduc-
tive shoes, leg clips, or other suitable lift, except in case of emergency.
means. (14) Before the employee contacts the
(ii) Where necessary, adequate elec- energized part to be worked on, the
trostatic shielding for the voltage conductive bucket liner shall be bond-
being worked or conductive clothing ed to the energized conductor by means
shall be provided. of a positive connection which shall re-
(8) Only tools and equipment in- main attached to the energized con-
tended for live-line bare-hand work ductor until the work on the energized
shall be used, and such tools and equip- circuit is completed.
ment shall be kept clean and dry. (15) The minimum clearance dis-
(9) Before the boom is elevated, the tances for live-line bare-hand work
outriggers on the aerial truck shall be shall be as specified in Table V–2.
extended and adjusted to stabilize the These minimum clearance distances
truck and the body of the truck shall shall be maintained from all grounded
be bonded to an effective ground, or objects and from lines and equipment
barricaded and considered as energized at a different potential than that to
equipment. which the insulated aerial device is
(10) Before moving the aerial lift into bonded unless such grounded objects or
the work position, all controls (ground
other lines and equipment are covered
level and bucket) shall be checked and
by insulated guards. These distances
tested to determine that they are in
proper working condition. shall be maintained when approaching,
(11) Arm current tests shall be made leaving, and when bonded to the ener-
before starting work each day, each gized circuit.
time during the day when higher volt-
479
TABLE V–2—MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCES § 1926.956 Underground lines.
FOR LIVE-LINE BARE-HAND WORK (ALTER-
(a) Guarding and ventilating street
NATING CURRENT)
opening used for access to underground
Distance in feet and lines or equipment. (1) Appropriate
inches for maximum warning signs shall be promptly placed
Voltage range (phase-to-phase) voltage
kilovolts when covers of manholes, handholes, or
Phase to Phase to vaults are removed. What is an appro-
ground phase
priate warning sign is dependent upon
2.1 to 15 ........................................ 2′0″ 2′0″ the nature and location of the hazards
15.1 to 35 ...................................... 2′4″ 2′4″ involved.
35.1 to 46 ...................................... 2′6″ 2′6″ (2) Before an employee enters a street
46.1 to 72.5 ................................... 3′0″ 3′0″ opening, such as a manhole or an
72.6 to 121 .................................... 3′4″ 4′6″
138 to 145 ..................................... 3′6″ 5′0″
unvented vault, it shall be promptly
161 to 169 ..................................... 3′8″ 5′6″ protected with a barrier, temporary
230 to 242 ..................................... 5′0″ 8′4″ cover, or other suitable guard.
345 to 362 ..................................... 1 7′0″ 1 13′4″
(3) When work is to be performed in a
500 to 552 ..................................... 1 11′0″ 1 20′0″
1 15′0″ 1 31′0″
manhole or unvented vault:
700 to 765 .....................................
(i) No entry shall be permitted unless
1 For 345–362kv., 500–552kv., and 700–765kv., the min-
forced ventilation is provided or the at-
imum clearance distance may be reduced provided the dis-
tances are not made less than the shortest distance between mosphere is found to be safe by testing
the energized part and a grounded surface. for oxygen deficiency and the presence
(16) When approaching, leaving, or of explosive gases or fumes;
(ii) Where unsafe conditions are de-
bonding to an energized circuit the
tected, by testing or other means, the
minimum distances in Table V–2 shall
work area shall be ventilated and oth-
be maintained between all parts of the
erwise made safe before entry;
insulated boom assembly and any
(iii) Provisions shall be made for an
grounded parts (including the lower
adequate continuous supply of air.
arm or portions of the truck).
(b) Work in manholes. (1) While work
(17) When positioning the bucket is being performed in manholes, an em-
alongside an energized bushing or insu- ployee shall be available in the imme-
lator string, the minimum line-to- diate vicinity to render emergency as-
ground clearances of Table V–2 must be sistance as may be required. This shall
maintained between all parts of the not preclude the employee in the im-
bucket and the grounded end of the mediate vicinity from occasionally en-
bushing or insulator string. tering a manhole to provide assistance,
(18)(i) The use of handlines between other than emergency. This require-
buckets, booms, and the ground is pro- ment does not preclude a qualified em-
hibited. ployee, working alone, from entering
(ii) No conductive materials over 36 for brief periods of time, a manhole
inches long shall be placed in the buck- where energized cables or equipment
et, except for appropriate length jump- are in service, for the purpose of in-
ers, armor rods, and tools. spection, housekeeping, taking read-
(iii) Nonconductive-type handlines ings, or similar work if such work can
may be used from line to ground when be performed safely.
not supported from the bucket. (2) When open flames must be used or
(19) The bucket and upper insulated smoking is permitted in manholes,
boom shall not be overstressed by at- extra precautions shall be taken to
tempting to lift or support weights in provide adequate ventilation.
excess of the manufacturer’s rating. (3) Before using open flames in a
(20)(i) A minimum clearance table (as manhole or excavation in an area
shown in table V–2) shall be printed on where combustible gases or liquids may
a plate of durable nonconductive mate- be present, such as near a gasoline
rial, and mounted in the buckets or its service station, the atmosphere of the
vicinity so as to be visible to the oper- manhole or excavation shall be tested
ator of the boom. and found safe or cleared of the com-
(ii) It is recommended that insulated bustible gases or liquids.
measuring sticks be used to verify (c) Trenching and excavating. (1) Dur-
clearance distances. ing excavation or trenching, in order to
480
prevent the exposure of employees to (c) Barricades and barriers. (1) Barri-
the hazards created by damage to dan- cades or barriers shall be installed to
gerous underground facilities, efforts prevent accidental contact with ener-
shall be made to determine the loca- gized lines or equipment.
tion of such facilities and work con- (2) Where appropriate, signs indi-
ducted in a manner designed to avoid cating the hazard shall be posted near
damage. the barricade or barrier. These signs
(2) Trenching and excavation oper- shall comply with § 1926.200.
ations shall comply with §§ 1926.651 and
(d) Control panels. (1) Work on or ad-
1926.652.
jacent to energized control panels shall
(3) When underground facilities are
be performed by designated employees.
exposed (electric, gas, water, tele-
phone, etc.) they shall be protected as (2) Precaution shall be taken to pre-
necessary to avoid damage. vent accidental operation of relays or
(4) Where multiple cables exist in an other protective devices due to jarring,
excavation, cables other than the one vibration, or improper wiring.
being worked on shall be protected as (e) Mechanized equipment. (1) Use of
necessary. vehicles, gin poles, cranes, and other
(5) When multiple cables exist in an equipment in restricted or hazardous
excavation, the cable to be worked on areas shall at all times be controlled
shall be identified by electrical means by designated employees.
unless its identity is obvious by reason (2) All mobile cranes and derricks
of distinctive appearance. shall be effectively grounded when
(6) Before cutting into a cable or being moved or operated in close prox-
opening a splice, the cable shall be imity to energized lines or equipment,
identified and verified to be the proper or the equipment shall be considered
cable. energized.
(7) When working on buried cable or (3) Fenders shall not be required for
on cable in manholes, metallic sheath
lowboys used for transporting large
continuity shall be maintained by
electrical equipment, transformers, or
bonding across the opening or by equiv-
alent means. breakers.
(f) Storage. The storage requirements
§ 1926.957 Construction in energized of § 1926.953(c) shall be complied with.
substations. (g) Substation fences. (1) When a sub-
(a) Work near energized equipment fa- station fence must be expanded or re-
cilities. (1) When construction work is moved for construction purposes, a
performed in an energized substation, temporary fence affording similar pro-
authorization shall be obtained from tection when the site is unattended,
the designated, authorized person be- shall be provided. Adequate inter-
fore work is started. connection with ground shall be main-
(2) When work is to be done in an en- tained between temporary fence and
ergized substation, the following shall permanent fence.
be determined: (2) All gates to all unattended sub-
(i) What facilities are energized, and stations shall be locked, except when
(ii) What protective equipment and work is in progress.
precautions are necessary for the safe- (h) Footing excavation. (1) Excavation
ty of personnel.
for auger, pad and piling type footings
(3) Extraordinary caution shall be ex-
for structures and towers shall require
ercised in the handling of busbars,
the same precautions as for metal
tower steel, materials, and equipment
in the vicinity of energized facilities. tower construction (see § 1926.955(b)(1)).
The requirements set forth in (2) No employee shall be permitted to
§ 1926.950(c), shall be complied with. enter an unsupported auger-type exca-
(b) Deenergized equipment or lines. vation in unstable material for any
When it is necessary to deenergize purpose. Necessary clean-out in such
equipment or lines for protection of cases shall be accomplished without
employees, the requirements of entry.
§ 1926.950(d) shall be complied with.
481
§ 1926.958 External load helicopters. pockets. On shifting D belts, this meas-

In all operations performed using a urement for pocket tabs shall be taken
rotorcraft for moving or placing exter- when the D ring section is centered.
nal loads, the provisions of § 1926.551 of (3) A maximum of four (4) tool loops
subpart N of this part shall be complied shall be so situated on the body belt
with. that four (4) inches of the body belt in
the center of the back, measuring from
§ 1926.959 Lineman’s body belts, safety D ring to D ring, shall be free of tool
straps, and lanyards. loops, and any other attachments.
(a) General requirements. The require- (4) Suitable copper, steel, or equiva-
ments of paragraphs (a) and (b) of this lent liners shall be used around bar of
section shall be complied with for all D rings to prevent wear between these
lineman’s body belts, safety straps and members and the leather or fabric en-
lanyards acquired for use after the ef- closing them.
fective date of this subpart.
(5) All stitching shall be of a min-
(1) Hardware for lineman’s body
belts, safety straps, and lanyards shall imum 42-pound weight nylon or equiva-
be drop forged or pressed steel and have lent thread and shall be lock stitched.
a corrosive resistive finish tested to Stitching parallel to an edge shall not
American Society for Testing and Ma- be less than three-sixteenths (3⁄16) inch
terials B117–64 (50-hour test). Surfaces from edge of narrowest member caught
shall be smooth and free of sharp edges. by the thread. The use of cross stitch-
(2) All buckles shall withstand a ing on leather is prohibited.
2,000-pound tensile test with a max- (6) The keeper of snaphooks shall
imum permanent deformation no have a spring tension that will not
greater than one sixty-fourth inch. allow the keeper to begin to open with
(3) D rings shall withstand a 5,000- a weight of 21⁄2 pounds or less, but the
pound tensile test without failure. keeper of snaphooks shall begin to
Failure of a D ring shall be considered open with a weight of four (4) pounds,
cracking or breaking. when the weight is supported on the
(4) Snaphooks shall withstand a 5,000- keeper against the end of the nose.
pound tensile test without failure. (7) Testing of lineman’s safety straps,
Failure of a snaphook shall be distor- body belts and lanyards shall be in ac-
tion sufficient to release the keeper.
cordance with the following procedure:
(b) Specific requirements. (1)(i) All fab-
ric used for safety straps shall with- (i) Attach one end of the safety strap
stand an A.C. dielectric test of not less or lanyard to a rigid support, the other
than 25,000 volts per foot ‘‘dry’’ for 3 end shall be attached to a 250-pound
minutes, without visible deterioration. canvas bag of sand:
(ii) All fabric and leather used shall (ii) Allow the 250-pound canvas bag of
be tested for leakage current and shall sand to free fall 4 feet for (safety strap
not exceed 1 milliampere when a test) and 6 feet for (lanyard test); in
potention of 3,000 volts is applied to the each case stopping the fall of the 250-
electrodes positioned 12 inches apart. pound bag:
(iii) Direct current tests may be per- (iii) Failure of the strap or lanyard
mitted in lieu of alternating current shall be indicated by any breakage, or
tests. slippage sufficient to permit the bag to
(2) The cushion part of the body belt fall free of the strap or lanyard. The
shall: entire ‘‘body belt assembly’’ shall be
(i) Contain no exposed rivets on the tested using one D ring. A safety strap
inside; or lanyard shall be used that is capable
(ii) Be at least three (3) inches in
of passing the ‘‘impact loading test’’
width;
(iii) Be at least five thirty-seconds and attached as required in paragraph
(5⁄32) inch thick, if made of leather; and (b)(7)(i) of this section. The body belt
(iv) Have pocket tabs that extended shall be secured to the 250-pound bag of
at least 11⁄2 inches down and three (3) sand at a point to simulate the waist of
inches back of the inside of circle of a man and allowed to drop as stated in
each D ring for riveting on plier or tool paragraph (b)(7)(ii) of this section.
482
Failure of the body belt shall be indi- NOTE: A cable sheath may consist of mul-
cated by any breakage, or slippage suf- tiple layers of which one or more is conduc-
tive.
ficient to permit the bag to fall free of
the body belt. (i) Circuit. The term means a con-
ductor or system of conductors
§ 1926.960 Definitions applicable to through which an electric current is in-
this subpart. tended to flow.
(a) Alive or live (energized). The term (j) Communication lines. The term
means electrically connected to a means the conductors and their sup-
source of potential difference, or elec- porting or containing structures which
trically charged so as to have a poten- are used for public or private signal or
communication service, and which op-
tial significantly different from that of
erate at potentials not exceeding 400
the earth in the vicinity. The term
volts to ground or 750 volts between
‘‘live’’ is sometimes used in place of any two points of the circuit, and the
the term ‘‘current-carrying,’’ where transmitted power of which does not
the intent is clear, to avoid repetition exceed 150 watts. When operating at
of the longer term. less than 150 volts no limit is placed on
(b) Automatic circuit recloser. The term the capacity of the system.
means a self-controlled device for auto- NOTE: Telephone, telegraph, railroad sig-
matically interrupting and reclosing nal, data, clock, fire, police-alarm, commu-
an alternating current circuit with a nity television antenna, and other systems
predetermined sequence of opening and conforming with the above are included.
Lines used for signaling purposes, but not in-
reclosing followed by resetting, hold cluded under the above definition, are con-
closed, or lockout operation. sidered as supply lines of the same voltage
(c) Barrier. The term means a phys- and are to be so run.
ical obstruction which is intended to
(k) Conductor. The term means a ma-
prevent contact with energized lines or terial, usually in the form of a wire,
equipment. cable, or bus bar suitable for carrying
(d) Barricade. The term means a phys- an electric current.
ical obstruction such as tapes, screens, (l) Conductor shielding. The term
or cones intended to warn and limit ac- means an envelope which encloses the
cess to a hazardous area. conductor of a cable and provides an
(e) Bond. The term means an elec- equipotential surface in contact with
trical connection from one conductive the cable insulation.
element to another for the purpose of (m) Current-carrying part. The term
minimizing potential differences or means a conducting part intended to be
providing suitable conductivity for connected in an electric circuit to a
fault current or for mitigation of leak- source of voltage. Non-current-car-
age current and electrolytic action. rying parts are those not intended to
(f) Bushing. The term means an insu- be so connected.
lating structure including a through (n) Dead (deenergized). The term
conductor, or providing a passageway means free from any electrical connec-
for such a conductor, with provision for tion to a source of potential difference
mounting on a barrier, conducting or and from electrical charges: Not having
otherwise, for the purpose of insulating a potential difference from that of
the conductor from the barrier and earth.
conducting current from one side of the NOTE: The term is used only with reference
to current-carrying parts which are some-
barrier to the other. times alive (energized).
(g) Cable. The term means a con- (o) Designated employee. The term
ductor with insulation, or a stranded means a qualified person delegated to
conductor with or without insulation perform specific duties under the con-
and other coverings (single-conductor ditions existing.
cable) or a combination of conductors (p) Effectively grounded. The term
insulated from one another (multiple- means intentionally connected to earth
conductor cable). through a ground connection or con-
(h) Cable sheath. The term means a nections of sufficiently low impedance
protective covering applied to cables. and having sufficient current-carrying
483
capacity to prevent the buildup of (y) Ground (as a verb). The term
voltages which may result in undue means the connecting or establishment
hazard to connected equipment or to of a connection, whether by intention
persons. or accident of an electric circuit or
(q) Electric line trucks. The term equipment to reference ground.
means a truck used to transport men, (z) Grounding electrode (ground elec-
tools, and material, and to serve as a trode). The term grounding electrode
traveling workshop for electric power means a conductor embedded in the
line construction and maintenance earth, used for maintaining ground po-
work. It is sometimes equipped with a tential on conductors connected to it,
boom and auxiliary equipment for set- and for dissipating into the earth cur-
ting poles, digging holes, and elevating rent conducted to it.
material or men. (aa) Grounding electrode resistance.
The term means the resistance of the
(r) Enclosed. The term means sur-
grounding electrode to earth.
rounded by a case, cage, or fence,
(bb) Grounding electrode conductor
which will protect the contained equip-
(grounding conductor). The term means
ment and prevent accidental contact of
a conductor used to connect equipment
a person with live parts.
or the grounded circuit of a wiring sys-
(s) Equipment. This is a general term tem to a grounding electrode.
which includes fittings, devices, appli- (cc) Grounded conductor. The term
ances, fixtures, apparatus, and the like, means a system or circuit conductor
used as part of, or in connection with, which is intentionally grounded.
an electrical power transmission and (dd) Grounded system. The term
distribution system, or communication means a system of conductors in which
systems. at least one conductor or point (usu-
(t) Exposed. The term means not iso- ally the middle wire, or neutral point
lated or guarded. of transformer or generator windings)
(u) Electric supply lines. The term is intentionally grounded, either sol-
means those conductors used to trans- idly or through a current-limiting de-
mit electric energy and their necessary vice (not a current-interrupting de-
supporting or containing structures. vice).
Signal lines of more than 400 volts to (ee) Hotline tools and ropes. The term
ground are always supply lines within means those tools and ropes which are
the meaning of the rules, and those of especially designed for work on ener-
less than 400 volts to ground may be gized high voltage lines and equipment.
considered as supply lines, if so run and Insulated aerial equipment especially
operated throughout. designed for work on energized high
(v) Guarded. The term means pro- voltage lines and equipment shall be
tected by personnel, covered, fenced, or considered hot line.
enclosed by means of suitable casings, (ff) Insulated. The term means sepa-
barrier rails, screens, mats, platforms, rated from other conducting surfaces
or other suitable devices in accordance by a dielectric substance (including air
with standard barricading techniques space) offering a high resistance to the
designed to prevent dangerous ap- passage of current.
proach or contact by persons or ob- NOTE: When any object is said to be insu-
jects. lated, it is understood to be insulated in
suitable manner for the conditions to which
NOTE: Wires, which are insulated but not it is subjected. Otherwise, it is within the
otherwise protected, are not considered as purpose of this subpart, uninsulated. Insu-
guarded. lating covering of conductors is one means of
(w) Ground. (Reference). The term making the conductor insulated.
means that conductive body, usually (gg) Insulation (as applied to cable).
earth, to which an electric potential is The term means that which is relied
referenced. upon to insulate the conductor from
(x) Ground (as a noun). The term other conductors or conducting parts
means a conductive connection wheth- or from ground.
er intentional or accidental, by which (hh) Insulation shielding. The term
an electric circuit or equipment is con- means an envelope which encloses the
nected to reference ground. insulation of a cable and provides an
484
equipotential surface in contact with between any two conductors. If one cir-
cable insulation. cuit is directly connected to and sup-
(ii) Isolated. The term means an ob- plied from another circuit of higher
ject that is not readily accessible to voltage (as in the case of an
persons unless special means of access autotransformer), both are considered
are used. as of the higher voltage, unless the cir-
(jj) Manhole. The term means a sub- cuit of lower voltage is effectively
surface enclosure which personnel may grounded, in which case its voltage is
enter and which is used for the purpose not determined by the circuit of higher
of installing, operating, and maintain- voltage. Direct connection implies
ing equipment and/or cable. electric connection as distinguished
(kk) Pulling tension. The term means from connection merely through elec-
the longitudinal force exerted on a tromagnetic or electrostatic induction.
cable during installation.
(ll) Qualified person. The term means Subpart W—Rollover Protective
a person who by reason of experience or Structures; Overhead Protection
training is familiar with the operation
to be performed and the hazards in- AUTHORITY: Section 3704 of the Contract
volved. Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (40
(mm) Switch. The term means a de- U.S.C. 3701); Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occu-
vice for opening and closing or chang- pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29
ing the connection of a circuit. In these U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); and Secretary of Labor’s
rules, a switch is understood to be Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR
manually operable, unless otherwise 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55 FR 9033), 6–
96 (62 FR 111), 3–2000 (65 FR 50017), or 5–2002
stated. (67 FR 65008), as applicable.
(nn) Tag. The term means a system
or method of identifying circuits, sys- § 1926.1000 Rollover protective struc-
tems or equipment for the purpose of tures (ROPS) for material handling
alerting persons that the circuit, sys- equipment.
tem or equipment is being worked on. (a) Coverage. (1) This section applies
(oo) Unstable material. The term to the following types of material han-
means earth material, other than run- dling equipment: To all rubber-tired,
ning, that because of its nature or the self-propelled scrapers, rubber-tired
influence of related conditions, cannot front-end loaders, rubber-tired dozers,
be depended upon to remain in place wheel-type agricultural and industrial
without extra support, such as would tractors, crawler tractors, crawler-type
be furnished by a system of shoring. loaders, and motor graders, with or
(pp) Vault. The term means an enclo- without attachments, that are used in
sure above or below ground which per- construction work. This requirement
sonnel may enter and is used for the does not apply to sideboom pipelaying
purpose of installing, operating, and/or tractors.
maintaining equipment and/or cable. (2) The promulgation of specific
(qq) Voltage. The term means the ef- standards for rollover protective struc-
fective (rms) potential difference be- tures for compactors and rubber-tired
tween any two conductors or between a skid-steer equipment is reserved pend-
conductor and ground. Voltages are ex- ing consideration of standards cur-
pressed in nominal values. The nominal rently being developed.
voltage of a system or circuit is the (b) Equipment manufactured on or after
value assigned to a system or circuit of September 1, 1972. Material handling
a given voltage class for the purpose of machinery described in paragraph (a)
convenient designation. The operating of this section and manufactured on or
voltage of the system may vary above after September 1, 1972, shall be
or below this value. equipped with rollover protective
(rr) Voltage of an effectively grounded structures which meet the minimum
circuit. The term means the voltage be- performance standards prescribed in
tween any conductor and ground unless §§ 1926.1001 and 1926.1002, as applicable.
otherwise indicated. (c) Equipment manufactured before Sep-
(ss) Voltage of a circuit not effectively tember 1, 1972. (1) All material handling
grounded. The term means the voltage equipment described in paragraph (a)
485
of this section and manufactured or tive structures, shall be deemed in
placed in service (owned or operated by compliance with this section if it
the employer) prior to September 1, meets the rollover protective structure
1972, shall be fitted with rollover pro- requirements of the State of Cali-
tective structures no later than the fornia, the U.S. Army Corps of Engi-
dates listed below: neers, or the Bureau of Reclamation of
(i) Machines manufactured on or the U.S. Department of the Interior in
after January 1, 1972, shall be fitted no effect on April 5, 1972. The require-
later than April 1, 1973. ments in effect are:
(ii) Machines manufactured between (1) State of California: Construction
July 1, 1971, and December 31, 1971, Safety Orders, issued by the Depart-
shall be fitted no later than July 1, ment of Industrial Relations pursuant
1973. to Division 5, Labor Code, § 6312, State
(iii) Machines manufactured between of California.
July 1, 1970, and June 30, 1971, shall be (2) U.S. Army Corps of Engineers:
fitted no later than January 1, 1974. General Safety Requirements, EM–385–
(iv) Machines manufactured between 1–1 (March 1967).
July 1, 1969, and June 30, 1970, shall be (3) Bureau of Reclamation, U.S. De-
fitted no later than July 1, 1974. partment of the Interior: Safety and
(v) Machines manufactured before
Health Regulations for Construction.
July 1, 1969: Reserved pending further
Part II (September 1971).
study, development, and review.
(2) Rollover protective structures and § 1926.1001 Minimum performance cri-
supporting attachment shall meet the teria for rollover protective struc-
minimum performance criteria de- tures for designated scrapers, load-
tailed in §§ 1926.1001 and 1926.1002, as ap- ers, dozers, graders, and crawler
plicable or shall be designed, fab- tractors.
ricated, and installed in a manner (a) General. This section prescribes
which will support, based on the ulti- minimum performance criteria for roll-
mate strength of the metal, at least over protective structures (ROPS) for
two times the weight of the prime rubber-tired self-propelled scrapers;
mover applied at the point of impact. rubber-tired front-end loaders and rub-
(i) The design objective shall be to ber-tired dozers; crawler tractors, and
minimize the likelihood of a complete crawler-type loaders, and motor grad-
overturn and thereby minimize the ers. The vehicle and ROPS as a system
possibility of the operator being shall have the structural characteris-
crushed as a result of a rollover or
tics prescribed in paragraph (f) of this
upset.
section for each type of machine de-
(ii) The design shall provide a
scribed in this paragraph.
vertical clearance of at least 52 inches
from the work deck to the ROPS at the (b) The static laboratory test pre-
point of ingress or egress. scribed herein will determine the ade-
(d) Remounting. ROPS removed for quacy of the structures used to protect
any reason, shall be remounted with the operator under the following condi-
equal quality, or better, bolts or weld- tions:
ing as required for the original mount- (1) For rubber-tired self-propelled
ing. scrapers, rubber-tired front-end load-
(e) Labeling. Each ROPS shall have ers, and rubber-tired dozers: Operating
the following information permanently between 0 and 10 miles per hour over
affixed to the structure: hard clay where rollover would be lim-
(1) Manufacturer or fabricator’s name ited to a maximum roll angle of 360°
and address; down a slope of 30° maximum.
(2) ROPS model number, if any; (2) For motor graders: Operating be-
(3) Machine make, model, or series tween 0 and 10 miles per hour over hard
number that the structure is designed clay where rollover would be limited to
to fit. 360° down a slope of 30° maximum.
(f) Machines meeting certain existing (3) For crawler tractors and crawler-
governmental requirements. Any machine type loaders: Operating between 0 and
in use, equipped with rollover protec- 10 miles per hour over hard clay where
486
rollover would be limited to a max- structure in the same manner as it will
imum roll angle of 360° down a slope of be attached during vehicle use. A to-
45°. tally assembled vehicle is not required.
(c) Facilities and apparatus. (1) The However, the vehicle structure and
following material is necessary: frame which support the ROPS must
(i) Material, equipment, and tiedown represent the actual vehicle installa-
means adequate to insure that the tion. All normally detachable windows,
ROPS and its vehicle frame absorb the panels, or nonstructural fittings shall
applied energy.
be removed so that they do not con-
(ii) Equipment necessary to measure
tribute to the strength of the ROPS.
and apply loads to the ROPS. Adequate
means to measure deflections and (e) Test procedure. The test procedure
lengths should also be provided. shall include the following, in the se-
(iii) Recommended, but not manda- quence indicated:
tory, types of test setups are illus- (1) Energy absorbing capabilities of
trated in Figure W–1 for all types of ROPS shall be verified when loaded lat-
equipment to which this section ap- erally by incrementally applying a dis-
plies; and in Figure W–2 for rubber- tributed load to the longitudinal out-
tired self-propelled scrapers; Figure W– side top member of the ROPS, as shown
3 for rubber-tired front-end loaders, in Figure W–1, W–2, or W–3, as applica-
rubber-tired dozers, and motor graders; ble. The distributed load must be ap-
and Figure W–4 for crawler tractors plied so as to result in approximately
and crawler-type loaders. uniform deflection of the ROPS. The
(2) Table W–1 contains a listing of the load increments should correspond
required apparatus for all types of with approximately 0.5 in. ROPS de-
equipment described in paragraph (a)
flection increment in the direction of
of this section.
the load application, measured at the
TABLE W–1 ROPS top edge. Should the operator’s
seat be offcenter, the load shall be ap-
Means to measure Accuracy
plied on the offcenter side. For each ap-
Deflection of ROPS, inches .......... ±5% of deflection meas- plied load increment, the total load
ured. (lb.) versus corresponding deflection
Vehicle weight, pounds ................ ±5% of the weight meas-
ured. (in.) shall be plotted, and the area
Force applied to frame, pounds ... ±5% of force measured. under the load -deflection curve shall
Dimensions of critical zone, ±0.5 in. be calculated. This area is equal to the
inches.
energy (in.-lb.) absorbed by the ROPS.
(d) Vehicle condition. The ROPS to be For a typical load-deflection curve and
tested must be attached to the vehicle calculation method, see Figure W–5.
487
EC30OC91.051</GPH>
488
EC30OC91.050</GPH>
ROPS shall be verified by suitable ma-

terial tests or material certification
(see paragraph (f)(2)(iv) of this section).
Incremental loading shall be continued

until the ROPS has absorbed the
amount of energy and the minimum
applied load specified under paragraph
(f) of this section has been reached or
surpassed.
(2) To cover the possibility of the ve-
hicle coming to rest on its top, the sup-
port capability shall be verified by ap-
plying a distributed vertical load to
EC30OC91.054</GPH>
the top of the ROPS so as to result in

approximately uniform deflection (see
Figure W–1). The load magnitude is
specified in paragraph (f)(2)(iii) of this
section.
EC30OC91.053</GPH>
(3) The low temperature impact

strength of the material used in the
489
EC30OC91.052</GPH>
(f) Performance requirements—(1) Gen- (iii) The load magnitude for purposes
eral performance requirements. (i) No re- of compliance with paragraph (e)(2) of
pairs or straightening of any member this section is equal to the vehicle
shall be carried out between each pre- weight. The test of load magnitude
scribed test. shall only be made after the require-
(ii) During each test, no part of the ments of paragraph (f)(2)(i) of this sec-
ROPS shall enter the critical zone as tion are met.
detailed in SAE J397 (1969). Deforma-
tion of the ROPS shall not allow the
plane of the ground to enter this zone.
(2) Specific performance requirements.
(i) The energy requirement for pur-
poses of meeting the requirements of
paragraph (e)(1) of this section is to be
determined by referring to the plot of
the energy versus weight of vehicle (see
Figure W–6 for rubber-tired self-pro-
pelled scrapers; Figure W–7 for rubber-
tired front-end loaders and rubber-tired
dozers; Figure W–8 for crawler tractors
and crawler-type loaders; and Figure
W–9 for motor graders). For purposes of
this section, force and weight are
measured as pounds (lb.); energy (U) is
measured as inch-pounds.
(iv) Material used in the ROPS must

have the capability of performing at
zero degrees Fahrenheit, or exhibit
Charpy V notch impact strength of 8
foot-pounds at minus 20 °Fahrenheit.
This is a standard Charpy specimen as
described in American Society of Test-
ing and Materials A 370, Methods and
Definitions for Mechanical Testing of
Steel Products (available at each Re-
gional Office of the Occupational Safe-
ty and Health Administration). The
purpose of this requirement is to re-
duce the tendency of brittle fracture
associated with dynamic loading, low
temperature operation, and stress rais-
ers which cannot be entirely avoided
(ii) The applied load must attain at on welded structures.
least a value which is determined by
multiplying the vehicle weight by the
corresponding factor shown in Figure
W–10 for rubber-tired self-propelled
scrapers; in Figure W–11 for rubber-
tired front-end loaders and rubber-tired
dozers; in Figure W–12 for crawler trac-
EC30OC91.056</GPH>
tors and crawler-type loaders; and in

Figure W–13 for motor graders.
490
EC30OC91.055</GPH>
weight of the vehicle plus the heaviest
attachment.
EC30OC91.060</GPH>
(g) Definitions. For purposes of this

section, ‘‘vehicle weight’’ means the
EC30OC91.059</GPH>
manufacturer’s maximum weight of

the prime mover for rubber-tired self-
propelled scrapers. For other types of
equipment to which this section ap-
plies, ‘‘vehicle weight’’ means the man-
EC30OC91.058</GPH>
ufacturer’s maximum recommended
491
EC30OC91.057</GPH>
of interpretation arise. The rec-
ommended practices appear in the 1971
SAE Handbook, which may be exam-
ined in each of the Regional Offices of
the Occupational Safety and Health
Administration.
§ 1926.1002 Protective frames (roll-

over protective structures, known
as ROPS) for wheel-type agricul-
tural and industrial tractors used
in construction.
(a) General. (1) The purpose of this
section is to set forth requirements for
frames used to protect operators of
wheel-type agricultural and industrial
tractors that will minimize the possi-
bility of operator injury resulting from
accidental upsets during normal oper-
ation. With respect to agricultural and
industrial tractors, the provisions of 29
CFR 1926.1001 and 1926.1003 for rubber-
tired dozers and rubber-tired loaders
may be used instead of the require-
ments of this section.
(2) The protective frame that is the
subject of this standard is a structure
mounted to the tractor that extends
above the operator’s seat and conforms
generally to Figure W–14.
(3) When an overhead weather shield
is attached to the protective frame, it
may be in place during testing, pro-
vided that it does not contribute to the
strength of the protective frame. When
such an overhead weather shield is at-
tached, it must meet the requirements
of paragraph (i) of this section.
(4) For overhead protection require-
ments, see 29 CFR 1926.1003.
(h) Source of standard. This standard (5) The following provisions address
is derived from, and restates, the fol- requirements for protective enclosures.
lowing Society of Automotive Engi- (i) When protective enclosures are
neers Recommended Practices: SAE used on wheel-type agricultural and in-
J320a, Minimum Performance Criteria dustrial tractors, they shall meet the
for Roll-Over Protective Structure for requirements of Society of Automotive
Rubber-Tired, Self-Propelled Scrapers; Engineers (‘‘SAE’’) standard J168–1970
SAE J394, Minimum Performance Cri- (‘‘Protective enclosures—test proce-
teria for Roll-Over Protective Struc- dures and performance requirements’’),
ture for Rubber-Tired Front End Load- which is incorporated by reference. The
ers and Rubber-Tired Dozers; SAE J395, incorporation by reference was ap-
Minimum Performance Criteria for proved by the Director of the Federal
Roll-Over Protective Structure for Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C.
Crawler Tractors and Crawler-Type 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51.
Loaders; and SAE J396, Minimum Per- (ii) SAE standard J168–1970 appears in
formance Criteria for Roll-Over Protec- the 1971 SAE Handbook, or it may be
tive Structure for Motor Graders. examined at: any OSHA Regional Of-
EC30OC91.062</GPH>
These recommended practices shall be fice; the OSHA Docket Office, U.S. De-
resorted to in the event that questions partment of Labor, 200 Constitution
492
EC30OC91.061</GPH>
Avenue, NW., Room N–2625, Wash- (6) The low-temperature impact
ington, DC 20210 (telephone: (202) 693– strength of the material used in the
2350 (TTY number: (877) 889–5627)); or protective structure shall be verified
the National Archives and Records Ad- by suitable material tests or material
ministration (‘‘NARA’’). (For informa- certifications according to 29 CFR
tion on the availability of this mate- 1926.1001(f)(2)(iv).
rial at NARA, telephone (202) 741–6030 (e) Test procedure for vehicle overturn—
or access the NARA Web site at (1) Vehicle weight. The weight of the
www.archives.gov/federallregister/ tractor, for purposes of this section, in-
codeloflfederallregulations/ cludes the protective frame, all fuels,
ibrllocations.html.) Copies may be pur- and other components required for nor-
chased from the Society of Automotive mal use of the tractor. Ballast must be
Engineers, 400 Commonwealth Drive,
added when necessary to achieve a
Warrendale, Pennsylvania 15096–0001.
minimum total weight of 130 lb (59 kg)
(b) Applicability. The requirements of per maximum power-takeoff horse-
this section apply to wheel-type agri-
power at the rated engine speed. The
cultural and industrial tractors used in
weight of the front end must be at
construction work. See paragraph (j) of
least 33 lb (15 kg) per maximum power-
this section for definitions of agricul-
tural tractors set forth in paragraph (i) takeoff horsepower. In case power-
of this section. takeoff horsepower is unavailable, 95
(c) Performance requirements. (1) Ei- percent of net engine flywheel horse-
ther a laboratory test or a field test is power shall be used.
required to determine the performance (2) Agricultural tractors shall be
requirements set forth in paragraph (i) tested at the weight set forth in para-
of this section. graph (e)(1) of this section.
(2) A laboratory test may be either (3) Industrial tractors shall be tested
static or dynamic. The laboratory test with items of integral or mounted
must be under conditions of repeatable equipment and ballast that are sold as
and controlled loading to permit anal- standard equipment or approved by the
ysis of the protective frame. vehicle manufacturer for use with the
(3) A field-upset test, when used, vehicle when the protective frame is
shall be conducted under reasonably expected to provide protection for the
controlled conditions, both rearward operator with such equipment in-
and sideways to verify the effectiveness stalled. The total vehicle weight and
of the protective frame under actual front-end weight as tested shall not be
dynamic conditions. less than the weights established in
(d) Test procedures—general. (1) The paragraph (e)(1) of this section.
tractor used shall be the tractor with (4) The following provisions address
the greatest weight on which the pro- soil bank test conditions.
tective frame is to be used. (i) The test shall be conducted on a
(2) A new protective frame and dry, firm soil bank as illustrated in
mounting connections of the same de- Figure W–15. The soil in the impact
sign shall be used for each test proce- area shall have an average cone index
dure. in the 0-in. to 6-in. (0-mm to 153-mm)
(3) Instantaneous and permanent layer not less than 150 according to
frame deformation shall be measured American Society of Agricultural En-
and recorded for each segment of the
gineers (‘‘ASAE’’) recommendation
test.
ASAE R313.1–1971 (‘‘Soil cone pene-
(4) Dimensions relative to the seat
trometer’’), as reconfirmed in 1975,
shall be determined with the seat un-
which is incorporated by reference. The
loaded and adjusted to its highest and
incorporation by reference was ap-
most rearward latched position pro-
vided for a seated operator. proved by the Director of the Federal
Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C.
(5) When the seat is offset, the frame
loading shall be on the side with the 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. The path of
least space between the centerline of vehicle travel shall be 12° ±2° to the top
the seat and the upright. edge of the bank.
493
(ii) ASAE recommendation ASAE to which the protective frame is at-
R313.1–1971, as reconfirmed in 1975, ap- tached, including the mounting parts.
pears in the 1977 Agricultural Engi- (ii) The protective frame shall be in-
neers Yearbook, or it may be examined strumented with the necessary equip-
at: any OSHA Regional Office; the ment to obtain the required load-de-
OSHA Docket Office, U.S. Department flection data at the locations and di-
of Labor, 200 Constitution Avenue, rections specified in Figures W–16, W–
NW., Room N–2625, Washington, DC 17, and W–18.
20210 (telephone: (202) 693–2350 (TTY (iii) The protective frame and mount-
number: (877) 889–5627)); or the National ing connections shall be instrumented
Archives and Records Administration with the necessary recording equip-
(‘‘NARA’’). (For information on the ment to obtain the required load-de-
availability of this material at NARA, flection data to be used in calculating
telephone (202) 741–6030 or access the FSB (see paragraph (j)(3) of this sec-
NARA Web site at www.archives.gov/ tion). The gauges shall be placed on
federallregister/ mounting connections before the in-
codeloflfederallregulations/ stallation load is applied.
ibrllocations.html). Copies may be pur- (2) Test procedure. (i) The side-load
chased from the American Society of application shall be at the upper ex-
Agricultural Engineers 2950 Niles Road, tremity of the frame upright at a 90°
St. Joseph, MI 49085. angle to the centerline of the vehicle.
(5) The upper edge of the bank shall The side load L shall be applied accord-
be equipped with an 18-in. (457-mm) ing to Figure W–16. L and D shall be re-
high ramp as described in Figure W–15 corded simultaneously. The test shall
to assist in tipping the vehicle. be stopped when:
(6) The front and rear wheel-tread
(A) The strain energy absorbed by
settings, when adjustable, shall be at
the frame is equal to the required input
the position nearest to halfway be-
energy (Eis);
tween the minimum and maximum set-
tings obtainable on the vehicle. When (B) Deflection of the frame exceeds
only two settings are obtainable, the the allowable deflection; or
minimum setting shall be used. (C) The frame load limit occurs be-
(7) Vehicle overturn test—sideways and fore the allowable deflection is reached
rearward. (i) The tractor shall be driven in the side load.
under its own power along the specified (ii) The L–D diagram (see Figure W–
path of travel at a minimum speed of 10 19 for an example) shall be constructed
mph (16 kph), or maximum vehicle using the data obtained according to
speed when under 10 mph (16 kph), up paragraph (g)(2)(i) of this section.
the ramp as described in paragraph (iii) The modified Lm–Dm diagram
(d)(5) of this section to induce sideways shall be constructed according to para-
overturn. graph (g)(2)(ii) and Figure W–20 of this
(ii) Rear upset shall be induced by en- section. The strain energy absorbed by
gine power with the tractor operating the frame (Eu) shall then be deter-
in gear to obtain 3 to 5 mph (4.8 to 8 mined.
kph) at maximum governed engine (iv) Eis, FER, and FSB shall be cal-
rpm, preferably by driving forward di- culated.
rectly up a minimum slope of two (v) The test procedure shall be re-
vertical to one horizontal. The engine peated on the same frame using L (rear
clutch may be used to aid in inducing input; see Figure W–18) and Eir. Rear-
the upset. load application shall be distributed
(f) Other test procedures. When the uniformly along a maximum projected
field-upset test is not used to deter- dimension of 27 in. (686 mm) and a max-
mine ROPS performance, either the imum area of 160 sq. in. (1,032 sq. cm)
static test or the dynamic test, con- normal to the direction of load applica-
tained in paragraph (g) or (h) of this tion. The load shall be applied to the
section, shall be made. upper extremity of the frame at the
(g) Static test—(1) Test conditions. (i) point that is midway between the cen-
The laboratory mounting base shall in- terline of the seat and the inside of the
clude that part of the tractor chassis frame upright.
494
(h) Dynamic test—(1) Test conditions. three times its depth (see Figures W–22
(i) The protective frame and tractor and W–23).
shall meet the requirements of para- (v) Means shall be provided for indi-
graphs (e)(2) or (3) of this section, as cating the maximum instantaneous de-
appropriate. flection along the line of impact. A
(ii) The dynamic loading shall be pro- simple friction device is illustrated in
duced by using a 4,410-lb (2,000-kg) Figure W–18.
weight acting as a pendulum. The im- (vi) No repair or adjustments may be
pact face of the weight shall be 27 ± 1 carried out during the test.
in. by 27 ± 1 in. (686 ± 25 mm by 686 ± 25 (vii) When any cables, props, or
mm), and shall be constructed so that blocking shift or break during the test,
its center of gravity is within 1.0 in. the test shall be repeated.
(25.4 mm) of its geometric center. The (2) Test procedure. (i) General. The
weight shall be suspended from a pivot frame shall be evaluated by imposing
point 18 to 22 ft (5.5 to 6.7 m) above the dynamic loading to the rear, followed
point of impact on the frame, and shall by a load to the side on the same
be conveniently and safely adjustable frame. The pendulum dropped from the
for height (see Figure W–21). height (see the definition of ‘‘H’’ in
paragraph (j)(3) of this section) imposes
(iii) For each phase of testing, the
the dynamic load. The position of the
tractor shall be restrained from mov-
pendulum shall be so selected that the
ing when the dynamic load is applied.
initial point of impact on the frame
The restraining members shall be 0.50-
shall be in line with the arc of travel of
to 0.63-in. (12.5- to 16.0-mm) steel cable,
the center of gravity of the pendulum.
and points for attaching restraining
A quick-release mechanism should be
members shall be located an appro- used but, when used, it shall not influ-
priate distance behind the rear axle ence the attitude of the block.
and in front of the front axle to provide (ii) Impact at rear. The tractor shall
a 15° to 30° angle between the restrain- be restrained properly according to
ing cable and the horizontal. The re- paragraphs (h)(1)(iii) and (h)(1)(iv) of
straining cables shall either be in the this section. The tractor shall be posi-
plane in which the center of gravity of tioned with respect to the pivot point
the pendulum will swing, or more than of the pendulum so that the pendulum
one restraining cable shall give a re- is 20° from the vertical prior to impact
sultant force in this plane (see Figure as shown in Figure W–22. The impact
W–22). shall be applied to the upper extremity
(iv) The wheel-tread setting shall of the frame at the point that is mid-
comply with the requirements of para- way between the centerline of the
graph (e)(6) of this section. The tires frame and the inside of the frame up-
shall have no liquid ballast, and shall right of a new frame.
be inflated to the maximum operating (iii) Impact at side. The blocking and
pressure recommended by the tire man- restraining shall conform to para-
ufacturer. With the specified tire infla- graphs (h)(1)(iii) and (h)(1)(iv) of this
tion, the restraining cables shall be section. The center point of impact
tightened to provide tire deflection of 6 shall be that structural member of the
to 8 percent of the nominal tire-section protective frame likely to hit the
width. After the vehicle is restrained ground first in a sideways accidental
properly, a wooden beam that is 6-in. × upset. The side impact shall be applied
6-in. (150 mm × 150 mm) shall be driven to the side opposite that used for rear
tightly against the appropriate wheels impact.
and clamped. For the test to the side, (i) Performance requirements—(1) Gen-
an additional wooden beam shall be eral. (i) The frame, overhead weather
placed as a prop against the wheel shield, fenders, or other parts in the
nearest to the operator’s station, and operator area may be deformed in these
shall be secured to the floor so that tests, but shall not shatter or leave
when it is positioned against the wheel sharp edges exposed to the operator, or
rim, it is at an angle of 25° to 40° to the violate the dimensions shown in Fig-
horizontal. It shall have a length 20 to ures W–16 and W–17, and specified as
25 times its depth, and a width two to follows:
495
D = 2 in. (51 mm) inside of the frame rubber-tired loaders and dozers de-
upright to the vertical centerline of scribed in 29 CFR 1926.1001), used in op-
the seat; erations such as landscaping, construc-
E = 30 in. (762 mm); tion services, loading, digging, grounds
F = Not less than 0 in. (0 mm) and not keeping, and highway maintenance.
more than 12 in. (305 mm), meas- (3) The following symbols, terms, and
ured at the centerline of the seat explanations apply to this section:
backrest to the crossbar along the Eis = Energy input to be absorbed dur-
line of load application as shown in ing side loading in ft-lb (E′is in J
Figure W–17; and [joules]);
G = 24 in. (610 mm). Eis = 723 + 0.4 W ft-lb (E′ is = 100 + 0.12
(ii) The material and design combina- W′ , J);
tion used in the protective structure Eir = Energy input to be absorbed dur-
must be such that the structure can ing rear loading in ft-lb (E′ ir in J);
meet all prescribed performance tests Eir = 0.47 W ft-lb (E′ ir = 0.14 W’, J);
at 0 °F (¥18 °C) according to 29 CFR W = Tractor weight as specified by 29
1926.1001(f)(2)(iv). CFR 1926.1002(e)(1) and (e)(3), in lb
(2) Vehicle overturn performance re- (W′ , kg);
quirements. The requirements of this L = Static load, lb (kg);
paragraph (i) must be met in both side D = Deflection under L, in. (mm);
and rear overturns. L–D = Static load-deflection diagram;
(3) Static test performance requirements. Lm–Dm = Modified static load-deflection
Design factors shall be incorporated in diagram (Figure W–20). To account
each design to withstand an overturn for an increase in strength due to
test as specified by this paragraph (i). an increase in strain rate, raise L
The structural requirements will be in the plastic range L × K;
met generally when FER is greater K = Increase in yield strength induced
than 1.0 and FSB is greater than K–1 in by higher rate of loading (1.3 for
both side and rear loadings. hot, rolled, low-carbon steel 1010–
(4) Dynamic test performance require- 1030). Low carbon is preferable;
ments. Design factors shall be incor- however, when higher carbon or
porated in each design to withstand the other material is used, K must be
overturn test specified by this para- determined in the laboratory. Refer
graph (i). The structural requirements to Norris, C.H., Hansen, R.J.,
will be met generally when the dimen- Holley, M.J., Biggs, J.M., Namyet,
sions in this paragraph (i) are used dur- S., and Minami, J.V., Structural De-
ing both side and rear loads. sign for Dynamic Loads, McGraw-
(j) Definitions applicable to this section. Hill, New York, 1959, p. 3;
(1) ‘‘Agricultural tractor’’ means a Lmax = Maximum observed static load;
wheel-type vehicle of more than 20 en- Load Limit = Point on a continuous L–
gine horsepower, used in construction D curve at which the observed stat-
work, that is designed to furnish the ic load is 0.8 Lmax (refer to Figure
power to pull, propel, or drive imple- W–19);
ments. (SAE standard J333a–1970 (‘‘Op- Eu = Strain energy absorbed by the
erator protection for wheel-type agri- frame, ft-lb (J); area under the Lm–
cultural and industrial tractors’’) de- Dm curve;
fines ‘‘agricultural tractor’’ as a FER = Factor of energy ratio, FER =
‘‘wheel-type vehicle of more than 20 en- EuEis; also, FER = EuEir;
gine horsepower designed to furnish Pb = Maximum observed force in
the power to pull, carry, propel, or mounting connection under a static
drive implements that are designed for load, L, lb (kg);
agricultural usage.’’ Since this part Pu = Ultimate force capacity of mount-
1926 applies only to construction work, ing connection, lb (kg);
the SAE definition of ‘‘agricultural FSB = Design margin for a mounting
tractor’’ is adopted for purposes of this connection (PuPb)¥1; and
subpart.) H = Vertical height of lift of 4,410-lb
(2) ‘‘Industrial tractor’’ means that (2,000-kg) weight, in. (H′, mm). The
class of wheel-type tractors of more weight shall be pulled back so that
than 20 engine horsepower (other than the height of its center of gravity
496
above the point of impact is defined stalled in such a way as to become a
as follows: H = 4.92 + 0.00190 W (H′ = hazard in the case of upset.
125 + 0.107 W′) (see Figure W–24). (c) Test procedures—general. (1) The
(k) Source of standard. The standard requirements of 29 CFR 1926.1002(d), (e),
in this section is derived from, and re- and (f) shall be met.
states, in part, Society of Automotive (2) Static and dynamic rear load ap-
Engineers (‘‘SAE’’) standard J334a-1970 plication shall be distributed uni-
(‘‘Protective frame test procedures and formly along a maximum projected di-
performance requirements’’). The SAE mension of 27 in. (686 mm), and a max-
standard appears in the 1971 SAE Hand- imum area of 160 sq. in. (1,032 sq. cm),
book, which may be examined at any normal to the direction of load applica-
OSHA regional office. tion. The load shall be applied to the
upper extremity of the frame at the
[70 FR 76985, Dec. 29, 2005, as amended at 71 point that is midway between the cen-
FR 41129, July 20, 2006] terline of the seat and the inside of the
frame upright.
§ 1926.1003 Overhead protection for (3) The static and dynamic side load
operators of agricultural and indus-
trial tractors used in construction. application shall be distributed uni-
formly along a maximum projected di-
(a) General—(1) Purpose. When over- mension of 27 in. (686 mm), and a max-
head protection is provided on wheel- imum area of 160 sq. in. (1,032 sq. cm),
type agricultural and industrial trac- normal to the direction of load applica-
tors, the overhead protection shall be tion. The direction of load application
designed and installed according to the is the same as in 29 CFR 1926.1002 (g)
requirements contained in this section. and (h). To simulate the characteris-
The provisions of 29 CFR 1926.1001 for tics of the structure during an upset,
rubber-tired dozers and rubber-tired the center of load application may be
loaders may be used instead of the located from a point 24 in. (610 mm) (K)
standards contained in this section. forward to 12 in. (305 mm) (L) rearward
The purpose of this standard is to mini- of the front of the seat backrest, to
mize the possibility of operator injury best use the structural strength (see
resulting from overhead hazards such Figure W–25).
as flying and falling objects, and at the (d) Drop test procedures. (1) The same
same time to minimize the possibility frame shall be subjected to the drop
of operator injury from the cover itself test following either the static or dy-
in the event of accidental upset. namic test.
(2) Applicability. This standard applies (2) A solid steel sphere or material of
to wheel-type agricultural and indus- equivalent spherical dimension weigh-
trial tractors used in construction ing 100 lb (45.4 kg) shall be dropped
work (see 29 CFR 1926.1002(b) and (j)). once from a height 10 ft (3.08 m) above
In the case of machines to which 29 the overhead cover.
CFR 1926.604 (relating to site clearing) (3) The point of impact shall be on
also applies, the overhead protection the overhead cover at a point within
may be either the type of protection the zone of protection as shown in Fig-
provided in 29 CFR 1926.604, or the type ure W–26, which is furthest removed
of protection provided by this section. from major structural members.
(b) Overhead protection. When over- (e) Crush test procedure. (1) The same
head protection is installed on wheel- frame shall be subjected to the crush
type agricultural or industrial tractors test following the drop test and static
used in construction work, it shall or dynamic test.
meet the requirements of this para- (2) The test load shall be applied as
graph. The overhead protection may be shown in Figure W–27, with the seat po-
constructed of a solid material. When sitioned as specified in 29 CFR
grid or mesh is used, the largest per- 1926.1002(d)(4). Loading cylinders shall
missible opening shall be such that the be mounted pivotally at both ends.
maximum circle that can be inscribed Loads applied by each cylinder shall be
between the elements of the grid or equal within two percent, and the sum
mesh is 1.5 in. (38 mm) in diameter. The of the loads of the two cylinders shall
overhead protection shall not be in- be two times the tractor weight as set
497
Pt. 1926, Subpt. W, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–13 Edition)
forth in 29 CFR 1926.1002(e)(1). The (3) Crush test performance require-
maximum width of the beam illus- ments. The protected zone as described
trated in Figure W–27 shall be 6 in. (152 in Figure W–28 must not be violated.
mm). (g) Source of standard. This standard
(f) Performance requirements. (1) Gen- is derived from, and restates, in part,
eral. The performance requirements set the portions of Society of Automotive
forth in 29 CFR 1926.1002(i)(2), (3), and Engineers (‘‘SAE’’) standard J167–1970
(4) shall be met.
(‘‘Protective frame with overhead pro-
(2) Drop test performance requirements.
tection—test procedures and perform-
(i) Instantaneous deformation due to
impact of the sphere shall not enter ance requirements’’), which pertain to
the protected zone as illustrated in overhead protection requirements. The
Figures W–25, W–26, and W–28. SAE standard appears in the 1971 SAE
(ii) In addition to the dimensions set Handbook, which may be examined at
forth in 29 CFR 1926.1002(i)(1)(i), the fol- any OSHA regional office.
lowing dimensions apply to Figure W– [70 FR 76985, Dec. 29, 2005]
28:
H = 17.5 in. (444 mm); and APPENDIX A TO SUBPART W OF PART
J = 2 in. (50.8 mm), measured from the 1926—FIGURES W–14 THROUGH W–28
outer periphery of the steering
wheel.
498
ER20JY06.009</GPH>
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. W, App. A
499
ER20JY06.010</GPH>
500
ER20JY06.011</GPH>
501
ER20JY06.012</GPH>
ER20JY06.013</GPH> ER20JY06.014</GPH>
502
503
ER20JY06.015</GPH>
504
ER20JY06.016</GPH>
505
ER20JY06.017</GPH>
506
ER20JY06.018</GPH>
507
ER20JY06.019</GPH>
508
ER20JY06.020</GPH>
509
ER20JY06.021</GPH>
510
ER20JY06.022</GPH>
[70 FR 76985, Dec. 29, 2005, as amended at 71 tional requirements for ladders used on
FR 41130, July 20, 2006] or with scaffolds are contained in sub-
part L—Scaffolds. This subpart does
Subpart X—Stairways and Ladders not apply to integral components of
equipment covered by subpart CC. Sub-
AUTHORITY: Section 107, Contract Work part CC exclusively sets forth the cir-
Hours and Safety Standards Act (Construc- cumstances when ladders and stair-
tion Safety Act](40 U.S.C. 333); Secs. 4, 6, 8, ways must be provided on equipment
Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970
(29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s covered by subpart CC.
Order Nos. 1–90 (55 FR 9033), 5–2007 (72 FR (b) Definitions. Cleat means a ladder
31159); and 29 CFR part 1911. crosspiece of rectangular cross section
SOURCE: 55 FR 47687, Nov. 14, 1990, unless placed on edge upon which a person
otherwise noted. may step while ascending or descend-
ing a ladder.
§ 1926.1050 Scope, application, and Double-cleat ladder means a ladder
definitions applicable to this sub-
part. similar in construction to a single-
cleat ladder, but with a center rail to
(a) Scope and application. This sub- allow simultaneous two-way traffic for
part applies to all stairways and lad- employees ascending or descending.
ders used in construction, alteration,
Equivalent means alternative designs,
repair (including painting and deco-
rating), and demolition workplaces materials, or methods that the em-
covered under 29 CFR part 1926, and ployer can demonstrate will provide an
also sets forth, in specified cir- equal or greater degree of safety for
cumstances, when ladders and stair- employees than the method or item
ways are required to be provided. Addi- specified in the standard.
511
ER20JY06.023</GPH>
Extension trestle ladder means a self- Point of access means all areas used
supporting portable ladder, adjustable by employees for work-related passage
in length, consisting of a trestle ladder from one area or level to another. Such
base and a vertically adjustable exten- open areas include doorways,
sion section, with a suitable means for 1passageways, stairway openings, stud-
locking the ladders together. ded walls, and various other permanent
Failure means load refusal, breakage, or temporary openings used for such
or separation of component parts. Load travel.
refusal is the point where the struc- Portable ladder means a ladder that
tural members lose their ability to can be readily moved or carried.
carry the loads. Riser height means the vertical dis-
Fixed ladder means a ladder that can- tance from the top of a tread to the top
not be readily moved or carried be- of the next higher tread or platform/
cause it is an integral part of a build- landing or the distance from the top of
ing or structure. A side-step fixed ladder a platform/landing to the top of the
is a fixed ladder that requires a person next higher tread or platform/landing.
getting off at the top to step to the Side-step fixed ladder. See ‘‘Fixed lad-
side of the ladder side rails to reach the der.’’
landing. A through fixed ladder is a Single-cleat ladder means a ladder
fixed ladder that requires a person get- consisting of a pair of side rails, con-
ting off at the top to step between the nected together by cleats, rungs, or
side rails of the ladder to reach the steps.
landing. Single-rail ladder means a portable
Handrail means a rail used to provide ladder with rungs, cleats, or steps
employees with a handhold for support. mounted on a single rail instead of the
Individual-rung/step ladders means normal two rails used on most other
ladders without a side rail or center ladders.
rail support. Such ladders are made by Spiral stairway means a series of steps
mounting individual steps or rungs di- attached to a vertical pole and pro-
rectly to the side or wall of the struc- gressing upward in a winding fashion
ture. within a cylindrical space.
Job-made ladder means a ladder that Stairrail system means a vertical bar-
is fabricated by employees, typically at rier erected along the unprotected
the construction site, and is not com- sides and edges of a stariway to pre-
mercially manufactured. This defini- vent employees from falling to lower
tion does not apply to any individual- levels. The top surface of a stairrail
rung/step ladders. system may also be a ‘‘handrail.’’
Ladder stand. A mobile fixed size self- Step stool (ladder type) means a self-
supporting ladder consisting of a wide supporting, foldable, portable ladder,
flat tread ladder in the form of stairs. nonadjustable in length, 32 inches or
The assenbly may include handrails. less in overall size, with flat steps and
Lower levels means those areas to without a pail shelf, designed to be
which an employee can fall from a climbed on the ladder top cap as well
stairway or ladder. Such areas include as all steps. The side rails may con-
ground levels, floors, roofs, ramps, run- tinue above the top cap.
ways, excavations, pits, tanks, mate- Through fixed ladder. See ‘‘Fixed lad-
rial, water, equipment, and similar sur- der.’’
faces. It does not include the surface Tread depth means the horizontal dis-
from which the employee falls. tance from front to back of a tread (ex-
Maximum intended load means the cluding nosing, if any).
total load of all employees, equipment, Unprotected sides and edges means any
tools, materials, transmitted loads, side or edge (except at entrances to
and other loads anticipated to be ap- points of access) of a stairway where
plied to a ladder component at any one there is no stairrail system or wall 36
time. inches (.9 m) or more in height, and
Nosing means that portion of a tread any side or edge (except at entrances to
projecting beyond the face of the riser points of access) of a stairway landing,
immediately below. or ladder platform where there is no
512
wall or guardrail system 39 inches (1 m) (2) Stairs shall be installed between
or more in height. 30° and 50° from horizontal.
[55 FR 47687, Nov. 14, 1990; 56 FR 2585, Jan. 23,
(3) Riser height and tread depth shall
1991, as amended at 58 FR 35184, June 30, 1993; be uniform within each flight of stairs,
75 FR 48135, Aug. 9, 2010] including any foundation structure
used as one or more treads of the
§ 1926.1051 General requirements. stairs. Variations in riser height or
(a) A stairway or ladder shall be pro- tread depth shall not be over 1⁄4-inch
vided at all personnel points of access (0.6 cm) in any stairway system.
where there is a break in elevation of (4) Where doors or gates open directly
19 inches (48 cm) or more, and no ramp, on a stairway, a platform shall be pro-
runway, sloped embankment, or per- vided, and the swing of the door shall
sonnel hoist is provided. not reduce the effective width of the
(1) Employees shall not use any spi- platform to less than 20 inches (51 cm).
ral stairways that will not be a perma- (5) Metal pan landings and metal pan
nent part of the structure on which treads, when used, shall be secured in
construction work is being performed. place before filling with concrete or
(2) A double-cleated ladder or two or other material.
more separate ladders shall be provided (6) All parts of stairways shall be free
when ladders are the only mean of ac- of hazardous projections, such as pro-
cess or exit from a working area for 25 truding nails.
or more employees, or when a ladder is (7) Slippery conditions on stairways
to serve simultaneous two-way traffic. shall be eliminated before the stair-
(3) When a building or structure has ways are used to reach other levels.
only one point of access between levels, (b) Temporary service. The following
that point of access shall be kept clear requirements apply to all stairways as
to permit free passage of employees. indicated:
When work must be performed or (1) Except during stairway construc-
equipment must be used such that free tion, foot traffic is prohibited on stair-
passage at that point of access is re- ways with pan stairs where the treads
stricted, a second point of access shall and/or landings are to be filled in with
be provided and used. concrete or other material at a later
(4) When a building or structure has date, unless the stairs are temporarily
two or more points of access between fitted with wood or other solid mate-
levels, at least one point of access shall rial at least to the top edge of each
be kept clear to permit free passage of pan. Such temporary treads and land-
employees. ings shall be replaced when worn below
(b) Employers shall provide and in- the level of the top edge of the pan.
stall all stairway and ladder fall pro- (2) Except during stairway construc-
tection systems required by this sub- tion, foot traffic is prohibited on skel-
part and shall comply with all other eton metal stairs where permanent
pertinent requirements of this subpart treads and/or landings are to be in-
before employees begin the work that stalled at a later date, unless the stairs
necessitates the installation and use of are fitted with secured temporary
stairways, ladders, and their respective treads and landings long enough to
fall protection systems. cover the entire tread and/or landing
area.
§ 1926.1052 Stairways. (3) Treads for temporary service shall
(a) General. The following require- be made of wood or other solid mate-
ments apply to all stairways as indi- rial, and shall be installed the full
cated: width and depth of the stair.
(1) Stairways that will not be a per- (c) Stairrails and handrails. The fol-
manent part of the structure on which lowing requirements apply to all stair-
construction work is being performed ways as indicated:
shall have landings of not less than 30 (1) Stairways having four or more ris-
inches (76 cm) in the direction of travel ers or rising more than 30 inches (76
and extend at least 22 inches (56 cm) in cm), whichever is less, shall be
width at every 12 feet (3.7 m) or less of equipped with:
vertical rise. (i) At least one handrail; and
513
(ii) One stairrail system along each surface of the tread, in line with the
unprotected side or edge. face of the riser at the forward edge of
NOTE: When the top edge of a stairrail sys- the tread.
tem also serves as a handrail, paragraph (7) When the top edge of a stairrail
(c)(7) of this section applies. system also serves as a handrail, the
(2) Winding and spiral stairways shall height of the top edge shall be not
be equipped with a handrail offset suf- more than 37 inches (94 cm) nor less
ficiently to prevent walking on those than 36 inches (91.5 cm) from the upper
portions of the stairways where the surface of the stairrail system to the
tread width is less than 6 inches (15 surface of the tread, in line with the
cm). face of the riser at the forward edge of
(3) The height of stairrails shall be as the tread.
follows:
(8) Stairrail systems and handrails
(i) Stairrails installed after March 15,
shall be so surfaced as to prevent in-
1991, shall be not less than 36 inches
(91.5 cm) from the upper surface of the jury to employees from punctures or
stairrail system to the surface of the lacerations, and to prevent snagging of
tread, in line with the face of the riser clothing.
at the forward edge of the tread. (9) Handrails shall provide an ade-
(ii) Stairrails installed before March quate handhold for employees grasping
15, 1991, shall be not less than 30 inches them to avoid falling.
(76 cm) nor more than 34 inches (86 cm) (10) The ends of stairrail systems and
from the upper surface of the stairrail handrails shall be constructed so as not
system to the surface of the tread, in to constitute a projection hazard.
line with the face of the riser at the (11) Handrails that will not be a per-
forward edge of the tread. manent part of the structure being
(4) Midrails, screens, mesh, inter- built shall have a minimum clearance
mediate vertical members, or equiva- of 3 inches (8 cm) between the handrail
lent intermediate structural members, and walls, stairrail systems, and other
shall be provided between the top rail objects.
of the stairrail system and the stair- (12) Unprotected sides and edges of
way steps. stairway landings shall be provided
(i) Midrails, when used, shall be lo- with guardrail systems. Guardrail sys-
cated at a height midway between the tem criteria are contained in subpart
top edge of the stairrail system and the M of this part.
stairway steps.
[55 FR 47687, Nov. 14, 1990; 56 FR 2585, Jan. 23,
(ii) Screens or mesh, when used, shall
1991; 56 FR 5061, Feb. 7, 1991; 56 FR 41794, Aug.
extend from the top rail to the stair- 23, 1991]
way step, and along the entire opening
between top rail supports. § 1926.1053 Ladders.
(iii) When intermediate vertical
members, such as balusters, are used (a) General. The following require-
between posts, they shall be not more ments apply to all ladders as indicated,
than 19 inches (48 cm) apart. including job-made ladders.
(iv) Other structural members, when (1) Ladders shall be capable of sup-
used, shall be installed such that there porting the following loads without
are no openings in the stairrail system failure:
that are more than 19 inches (48 cm) (i) Each self-supporting portable lad-
wide. der: At least four times the maximum
(5) Handrails and the top rails of intended load, except that each extra-
stairrail systems shall be capable of heavy-duty type 1A metal or plastic
withstanding, without failure, a force ladder shall sustain at least 3.3 times
of at least 200 pounds (890 n) applied the maximum intended load. The abil-
within 2 inches (5 cm) of the top edge, ity of a ladder to sustain the loads in-
in any downward or outward direction, dicated in this paragraph shall be de-
at any point along the top edge. termined by applying or transmitting
(6) The height of handrails shall be the requisite load to the ladder in a
not more than 37 inches (94 cm) nor downward vertical direction. Ladders
less than 30 inches (76 cm) from the built and tested in conformance with
upper surface of the handrail to the the applicable provisions of appendix A
514
of this subpart will be deemed to meet lines of the rungs, cleats, and steps.
this requirement. The rung spacing on the extension sec-
(ii) Each portable ladder that is not tion of the extension trestle ladder
self-supporting: At least four times the shall be not less than 6 inches (15 cm)
maximum intended load, except that nor more than 12 inches (31 cm), as
each extra-heavy-duty type 1A metal measured between center lines of the
or plastic ladders shall sustain at least rungs, cleats, and steps.
3.3 times the maximum intended load. (4)(i) The minimum clear distance be-
The ability of a ladder to sustain the tween the sides of individual-rung/step
loads indicated in this paragraph shall ladders and the minimum clear dis-
be determined by applying or transmit- tance between the side rails of other
ting the requisite load to the ladder in fixed ladders shall be 16 inches (41 cm).
a downward vertical direction when the (ii) The minimum clear distance be-
ladder is placed at an angle of 751⁄2 de- tween side rails for all portable ladders
grees from the horizontal. Ladders shall be 111⁄2 inches (29 cm).
built and tested in conformance with (5) The rungs of individual-rung/step
the applicable provisions of appendix A ladders shall be shaped such that em-
will be deemed to meet this require- ployees’ feet cannot slide off the end of
ment. the rungs.
(iii) Each fixed ladder: At least two (6)(i) The rungs and steps of fixed
loads of 250 pounds (114 kg) each, con- metal ladders manufactured after
centrated between any two consecutive March 15, 1991, shall be corrugated,
attachments (the number and position knurled, dimpled, coated with skid-re-
of additional concentrated loads of 250 sistant material, or otherwise treated
pounds (114 kg) each, determined from to minimize slipping.
anticipated usage of the ladder, shall (ii) The rungs and steps of portable
also be included), plus anticipated metal ladders shall be corrugated,
loads caused by ice buildup, winds, rig- knurled, dimpled, coated with skid-re-
ging, and impact loads resulting from sistant material, or otherwise treated
the use of ladder safety devices. Each to minimize slipping.
step or rung shall be capable of sup- (7) Ladders shall not be tied or fas-
porting a single concentrated load of at tened together to provide longer sec-
least 250 pounds (114 kg) applied in the tions unless they are specifically de-
middle of the step or rung. Ladders signed for such use.
built in conformance with the applica- (8) A metal spreader or locking de-
ble provisions of appendix A will be vice shall be provided on each step-
deemed to meet this requirement. ladder to hold the front and back sec-
(2) Ladder rungs, cleats, and steps tions in an open position when the lad-
shall be parallel, level, and uniformly der is being used.
spaced when the ladder is in position (9) When splicing is required to ob-
for use. tain a given length of side rail, the re-
(3)(i) Rungs, cleats, and steps of port- sulting side rail must be at least equiv-
able ladders (except as provided below) alent in strength to a one-piece side
and fixed ladders (including individual- rail made of the same material.
rung/step ladders) shall be spaced not (10) Except when portable ladders are
less than 10 inches (25 cm) apart, nor used to gain access to fixed ladders
more than 14 inches (36 cm) apart, as (such as those on utility towers, bill-
measured between center lines of the boards, and other structures where the
rungs, cleats, and steps. bottom of the fixed ladder is elevated
(ii) Rungs, cleats, and steps of step to limit access), when two or more sep-
stools shall be not less than 8 inches (20 arate ladders are used to reach an ele-
cm) apart, nor more than 12 inches (31 vated work area, the ladders shall be
cm) apart, as measured between center offset with a platform or landing be-
lines of the rungs, cleats, and steps. tween the ladders. (The requirements
(iii) Rungs, cleats, and steps of the to have guardrail systems with
base section of extension trestle lad- toeboards for falling object and over-
ders shall not be less than 8 inches (20 head protection on platforms and land-
cm) nor more than 18 inches (46 cm) ings are set forth in subpart M of this
apart, as measured between center part.)
515
(11) Ladder components shall be sur- ladders shall be equipped with one of
faced so as to prevent injury to an em- the following:
ployee from punctures or lacerations, (i) Ladder safety devices; or
and to prevent snagging of clothing. (ii) Self-retracting lifelines, and rest
(12) Wood ladders shall not be coated platforms at intervals not to exceed 150
with any opaque covering, except for feet (45.7 m); or
identification or warning labels which (iii) A cage or well, and multiple lad-
may be placed on one face only of a der sections, each ladder section not to
side rail. exceed 50 feet (15.2 m) in length. Ladder
(13) The minimum perpendicular sections shall be offset from adjacent
clearance between fixed ladder rungs, sections, and landing platforms shall
cleats, and steps, and any obstruction be provided at maximum intervals of 50
behind the ladder shall be 7 inches (18 feet (15.2 m).
cm), except in the case of an elevator (20) Cages for fixed ladders shall con-
pit ladder, for which a minimum perform to all of the following:
pendicular clearance of 41⁄2 inches (11 (i) Horizontal bands shall be fastened
cm) is required. to the side rails of rail ladders, or di-
(14) The minimum perpendicular rectly to the structure, building, or
clearance between the center line of equipment for individual-rung ladders;
fixed ladder rungs, cleats, and steps, (ii) Vertical bars shall be on the in-
and any obstruction on the climbing side of the horizontal bands and shall
side of the ladder shall be 30 inches (76 be fastened to them;
cm), except as provided in paragraph (iii) Cages shall extend not less than
(a)(15) of this section. 27 inches (68 cm), or more than 30
(15) When unavoidable obstructions inches (76 cm) from the centerline of
are encountered, the minimum perpen- the step or rung (excluding the flare at
dicular clearance between the center- the bottom of the cage), and shall not
line of fixed ladder rungs, cleats, and be less than 27 inches (68 cm) in width;
steps, and the obstruction on the (iv) The inside of the cage shall be
climbing side of the ladder may be re- clear of projections;
duced to 24 inches (61 cm), provided (v) Horizontal bands shall be spaced
that a deflection device is installed to not more than 4 feet (1.2 m) on center
guide employees around the obstruc- vertically;
tion. (vi) Vertical bars shall be spaced at
(16) Through fixed ladders at their intervals not more than 91⁄2 inches (24
point of access/egress shall have a step- cm) on center horizontally;
across distance of not less than 7 (vii) The bottom of the cage shall be
inches (18 cm) nor more than 12 inches at a level not less than 7 feet (2.1 m)
(30 cm) as measured from the center- nor more than 8 feet (2.4 m) above the
line of the steps or rungs to the nearest point of access to the bottom of the
edge of the landing area. If the normal ladder. The bottom of the cage shall be
step-across distance exceeds 12 inches flared not less than 4 inches (10 cm) all
(30 cm), a landing platform shall be around within the distance between the
provided to reduce the distance to the bottom horizontal band and the next
specified limit. higher band;
(17) Fixed ladders without cages or (viii) The top of the cage shall be a
wells shall have a clear width to the minimum of 42 inches (1.1 m) above the
nearest permanent object of at least 15 top of the platform, or the point of ac-
inches (38 cm) on each side of the cen- cess at the top of the ladder, with pro-
terline of the ladder. vision for access to the platform or
(18) Fixed ladders shall be provided other point of access.
with cages, wells, ladder safety devices, (21) Wells for fixed ladders shall con-
or self-retracting lifelines where the form to all of the following:
length of climb is less than 24 feet (7.3 (i) They shall completely encircle the
m) but the top of the ladder is at a dis- ladder;
tance greater than 24 feet (7.3 m) above (ii) They shall be free of projections;
lower levels. (iii) Their inside face on the climbing
(19) Where the total length of a climb side of the ladder shall extend not less
equals or exceeds 24 feet (7.3 m), fixed than 27 inches (68 cm) nor more than 30
516
inches (76 cm) from the centerline of the access level shall be the top of the
the step or rung; parapet.
(iv) The inside clear width shall be at (25) For through-fixed-ladder exten-
least 30 inches (76 cm); sions, the steps or rungs shall be omit-
(v) The bottom of the wall on the acted from the extension and the exten-
cess side shall start at a level not less sion of the side rails shall be flared to
than 7 feet (2.1 m) nor more than 8 feet provide not less than 24 inches (61 cm)
(2.4 m) above the point of access to the nor more than 30 inches (76 cm) clear-
bottom of the ladder. ance between side rails. Where ladder
(22) Ladder safety devices, and re- safety devices are provided, the max-
lated support systems, for fixed ladders imum clearance between side rails of
shall conform to all of the following: the extensions shall not exceed 36
(i) They shall be capable of with- inches (91 cm).
standing without failure a drop test (26) For side-step fixed ladders, the
consisting of an 18-inch (41 cm) drop of side rails and the steps or rungs shall
a 500-pound (226 kg) weight; be continuous in the extension.
(ii) They shall permit the employee (27) Individual-rung/step ladders, ex-
using the device to ascend or descend cept those used where their access
without continually having to hold, openings are covered with manhole
push or pull any part of the device,
covers or hatches, shall extend at least
leaving both hands free for climbing;
42 inches (1.1 m) above an access level
(iii) They shall be activated within 2
or landing platform either by the con-
feet (.61 m) after a fall occurs, and
tinuation of the rung spacings as hori-
limit the descending velocity of an em-
zontal grab bars or by providing
ployee to 7 feet/sec. (2.1 m/sec.) or less;
vertical grab bars that shall have the
(iv) The connection between the car-
same lateral spacing as the vertical
rier or lifeline and the point of attach-
legs of the rungs.
ment to the body belt or harness shall
not exceed 9 inches (23 cm) in length. (b) Use. The following requirements
(23) The mounting of ladder safety apply to the use of all ladders, includ-
devices for fixed ladders shall conform ing job-made ladders, except as other-
to the following: wise indicated:
(i) Mountings for rigid carriers shall (1) When portable ladders are used for
be attached at each end of the carrier, access to an upper landing surface, the
with intermediate mountings, as nec- ladder side rails shall extend at least 3
essary, spaced along the entire length feet (.9 m) above the upper landing sur-
of the carrier, to provide the strength face to which the ladder is used to gain
necessary to stop employees’ falls. access; or, when such an extension is
(ii) Mountings for flexible carriers not possible because of the ladder’s
shall be attached at each end of the length, then the ladder shall be secured
carrier. When the system is exposed to at its top to a rigid support that will
wind, cable guides for flexible carriers not deflect, and a grasping device, such
shall be installed at a minimum spac- as a grabrail, shall be provided to as-
ing of 25 feet (7.6 m) and maximum sist employees in mounting and dis-
spacing of 40 feet (12.2 m) along the en- mounting the ladder. In no case shall
tire length of the carrier, to prevent the extension be such that ladder de-
wind damage to the system. flection under a load would, by itself,
(iii) The design and installation of cause the ladder to slip off its support.
mountings and cable guides shall not (2) Ladders shall be maintained free
reduce the design strength of the lad- of oil, grease, and other slipping haz-
der. ards.
(24) The side rails of through or side- (3) Ladders shall not be loaded be-
step fixed ladders shall extend 42 inches yond the maximum intended load for
(1.1 m) above the top of the access level which they were built, nor beyond
or landing platform served by the lad- their manufacturer’s rated capacity.
der. For a parapet ladder, the access (4) Ladders shall be used only for the
level shall be the roof if the parapet is purpose for which they were designed.
cut to permit passage through the (5)(i) Non-self-supporting ladders
parapet; if the parapet is continuous, shall be used at an angle such that the
517
horizontal distance from the top sup- climbing on both front and rear sec-
port to the foot of the ladder is ap- tions.
proximately one-quarter of the work- (15) Ladders shall be inspected by a
ing length of the ladder (the distance competent person for visible defects on
along the ladder between the foot and a periodic basis and after any occur-
the top support). rence that could affect their safe use.
(ii) Wood job-made ladders with (16) Portable ladders with structural
spliced side rails shall be used at an defects, such as, but not limited to,
angle such that the horizontal distance broken or missing rungs, cleats, or
is one-eighth the working length of the steps, broken or split rails, corroded
ladder. components, or other faulty or defec-
(iii) Fixed ladders shall be used at a tive components, shall either be imme-
pitch no greater than 90 degrees from diately marked in a manner that read-
the horizontal, as measured to the ily identifies them as defective, or be
back side of the ladder. tagged with ‘‘Do Not Use’’ or similar
(6) Ladders shall be used only on sta- language, and shall be withdrawn from
ble and level surfaces unless secured to service until repaired.
prevent accidental displacement. (17) Fixed ladders with structural de-
(7) Ladders shall not be used on slip- fects, such as, but not limited to, bro-
pery surfaces unless secured or pro- ken or missing rungs, cleats, or steps,
vided with slip-resistant feet to pre- broken or split rails, or corroded com-
vent accidental displacement. Slip-re- ponents, shall be withdrawn from serv-
sistant feet shall not be used as a sub- ice until repaired. The requirement to
stitute for care in placing, lashing, or withdraw a defective ladder from serv-
holding a ladder that is used upon slip- ice is satisfied if the ladder is either:
pery surfaces including, but not lim- (i) Immediately tagged with ‘‘Do Not
ited to, flat metal or concrete surfaces Use’’ or similar language,
that are constructed so they cannot be (ii) Marked in a manner that readily
prevented from becoming slippery. identifies it as defective;
(8) Ladders placed in any location (iii) Or blocked (such as with a ply-
where they can be displaced by work- wood attachment that spans several
place activities or traffic, such as in rungs).
passageways, doorways, or driveways, (18) Ladder repairs shall restore the
shall be secured to prevent accidental ladder to a condition meeting its origi-
displacement, or a barricade shall be nal design criteria, before the ladder is
used to keep the activities or traffic returned to use.
away from the ladder. (19) Single-rail ladders shall not be
(9) The area around the top and bot- used.
tom of ladders shall be kept clear. (20) When ascending or descending a
(10) The top of a non-self-supporting ladder, the user shall face the ladder.
ladder shall be placed with the two (21) Each employee shall use at least
rails supported equally unless it is one hand to grasp the ladder when pro-
equipped with a single support attach- gressing up and/or down the ladder.
ment. (22) An employee shall not carry any
(11) Ladders shall not be moved, object or load that could cause the em-
shifted, or extended while occupied. ployee to lose balance and fall.
(12) Ladders shall have nonconduc- [55 FR 47687, Nov. 14, 1990; 56 FR 2585, Jan. 23,
tive siderails if they are used where the 1991, as amended at 56 FR 41794, Aug. 23, 1991]
employee or the ladder could contact
exposed energized electrical equip- §§ 1926.1054–1926.1059 [Reserved]
ment, except as provided in
§ 1926.951(c)(1) of this part. § 1926.1060 Training requirements.
(13) The top or top step of a step- The following training provisions
ladder shall not be used as a step. clarify the requirements of
(14) Cross-bracing on the rear section § 1926.21(b)(2), regarding the hazards ad-
of stepladders shall not be used for dressed in subpart X.
climbing unless the ladders are de- (a) The employer shall provide a
signed and provided with steps for training program for each employee
518
using ladders and stairways, as nec- U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Sec. 107, Contract Work
essary. The program shall enable each Hours and Safety Standards Act (the Con-
employee to recognize hazards related struction Safety Standards Act) (40 U.S.C.
333); Sec. 41, Longshore and Harbor Workers’
to ladders and stairways, and shall
Compensation Act (33 U.S.C. 941); Secretary
train each employee in the procedures of Labor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76
to be followed to minimize these haz- (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55 FR
ards. 9033), 3–2000 (65 FR 50017) or 5–2002 (67 FR
(1) The employer shall ensure that 65008) as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911.
each employee has been trained by a SOURCE: 58 FR 35184, June 30, 1993, unless
competent person in the following otherwise noted.
areas, as applicable:
(i) The nature of fall hazards in the GENERAL
work area;
(ii) The correct procedures for erect- § 1926.1071 Scope and application.
ing, maintaining, and disassembling NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
the fall protection systems to be used; struction work under this section are iden-
(iii) The proper construction, use, tical to those set forth at § 1910.401 of this
placement, and care in handling of all chapter.
stairways and ladders; [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996]
(iv) The maximum intended load-car-
rying capacities of ladders used; and § 1926.1072 Definitions.
(v) The standards contained in this
NOTE: The provisions applicable to con-
subpart. struction work under this section are iden-
(b) Retraining shall be provided for tical to those set forth at § 1910.402 of this
each employee as necessary so that the chapter.
employee maintains the understanding
[61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996]
and knowledge acquired through com-
pliance with this section. PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART X OF PART § 1926.1076 Qualifications of dive team.
1926—LADDERS
This appendix serves as a non-mandatory struction work under this section are iden-
guideline to assist employers in complying tical to those set forth at § 1910.410 of this
with the ladder loading and strength require- chapter.
ments of § 1926.1053(a)(1). A ladder designed
and built in accordance with the applicable [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996]
national consensus standards, as set forth
below, will be considered to meet the re- GENERAL OPERATIONS PROCEDURES
quirements of § 1926.1053(a)(1):
• Manufactured portable wood ladders: § 1926.1080 Safe practices manual.
American National Standards Institute NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
(ANSI) A14.1–1982—American National struction work under this section are iden-
Standard for Ladders-Portable Wood-Safety tical to those set forth at § 1910.420 of this
Requirements. chapter.
• Manufactured portable metal ladders:
ANSI A14.2–1982—American National Stand- [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996]
ard for Ladders—Portable Metal-Safety Re-
quirements. § 1926.1081 Pre-dive procedures.
• Manufactured fixed ladders: ANSI A14.3– NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
1984—American National Standard for Lad- struction work under this section are iden-
ders-Fixed-Safety Requirements. tical to those set forth at § 1910.421 of this
• Job-made ladders: ANSI A14.4–1979—Safe- chapter.
ty Requirements for Job-Made Ladders.
• Plastic ladders: ANSI A14.5–1982—Amer- [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996]
ican National Standard for Ladders-Portable
Reinforced Plastic-Safety Requirements. § 1926.1082 Procedures during dive.
Subpart Y—Diving struction work under this section are iden-
tical to those set forth at § 1910.422 of this
chapter.
AUTHORITY: Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occu-
pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996]
519
§ 1926.1083 Post-dive procedures. APPENDIX A TO SUBPART Y OF PART

1926—EXAMPLES OF CONDITIONS
WHICH MAY RESTRICT OR LIMIT EX-
tical to those set forth at § 1910.423 of this POSURE TO HYPERBARIC CONDITIONS
chapter.
[61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] struction work under this appendix A are
identical to those set forth at appendix A to
SPECIFIC OPERATIONS PROCEDURES Subpart T of part 1910 of this chapter.
[61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996]
§ 1926.1084 SCUBA diving.
NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- APPENDIX B TO SUBPART Y OF PART
struction work under this section are iden- 1926—GUIDELINES FOR SCIENTIFIC DIVING
chapter. NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
[61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] identical to those set forth at appendix B to
subpart T of part 1910 of this chapter.
§ 1926.1085 Surface-supplied air div-
[61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996]
ing.
Subpart Z—Toxic and Hazardous
tical to those set forth at § 1910.425 of this Substances
chapter.
[61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] AUTHORITY: Section107 of the Contract
Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (40
§ 1926.1086 Mixed-gas diving. U.S.C. 3704); Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occu-
pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29
NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); and Secretary of Labor’s
struction work under this section are iden- Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR
tical to those set forth at § 1910.426 of this 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55 FR 9033), 6–
chapter. 96 (62 FR 111), 3–2000 (65 FR 50017), 5–2002 (67
FR 65008), 5–2007 (72 FR 31159), 4–2010 (75 FR
[61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] 55355), or 1–2012 (77 FR 3912) as applicable;
and 29 CFR part 1911.
§ 1926.1087 Liveboating.
Section 1926.1102 not issued under 29 U.S.C.
NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- 655 or 29 CFR part 1911; also issued under 5
struction work under this section are iden- U.S.C. 553.
chapter. § 1926.1100 [Reserved]
[61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996]
§ 1926.1101 Asbestos.
EQUIPMENT PROCEDURES AND (a) Scope and application. This section
REQUIREMENTS regulates asbestos exposure in all work
as defined in 29 CFR 1910.12(b), includ-
§ 1926.1090 Equipment. ing but not limited to the following:
NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- (1) Demolition or salvage of struc-
struction work under this section are iden- tures where asbestos is present;
tical to those set forth at § 1910.430 of this (2) Removal or encapsulation of ma-
chapter. terials containing asbestos;
[61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] (3) Construction, alteration, repair,
maintenance, or renovation of struc-
RECORDKEEPING tures, substrates, or portions thereof,
that contain asbestos;
§ 1926.1091 Recordkeeping require- (4) Installation of products con-
ments. taining asbestos;
NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- (5) Asbestos spill/emergency cleanup;
struction work under this section are iden- and
tical to those set forth at § 1910.440 of this (6) Transportation, disposal, storage,
chapter.
containment of and housekeeping ac-
[61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] tivities involving asbestos or products
520
containing asbestos, on the site or lo- sheeting, roofing and siding shingles,
cation at which construction activities and construction mastics.
are performed. Class III asbestos work means repair
(7) Coverage under this standard and maintenance operations, where
shall be based on the nature of the ‘‘ACM’’, including TSI and surfacing
work operation involving asbestos ex- ACM and PACM, is likely to be dis-
posure. turbed.
(8) This section does not apply to as- Class IV asbestos work means mainte-
bestos-containing asphalt roof coat- nance and custodial activities during
ings, cements and mastics. which employees contact but do not
(b) Definitions. disturb ACM or PACM and activities to
Aggressive method means removal or clean up dust, waste and debris result-
disturbance of building material by ing from Class I, II, and III activities.
sanding, abrading, grinding or other Clean room means an uncontaminated
method that breaks, crumbles, or dis- room having facilities for the storage
integrates intact ACM. of employees’ street clothing and
Amended water means water to which uncontaminated materials and equip-
surfactant (wetting agent) has been ment.
added to increase the ability of the liq- Closely resemble means that the major
uid to penetrate ACM. workplace conditions which have con-
tributed to the levels of historic asbes-
Asbestos includes chrysotile, amosite,
tos exposure, are no more protective
crocidolite, tremolite asbestos,
than conditions of the current work-
anthophyllite asbestos, actinolite as-
place.
bestos, and any of these minerals that
Competent person means, in addition
has been chemically treated and/or al-
to the definition in 29 CFR 1926.32 (f),
tered. For purposes of this standard,
one who is capable of identifying exist-
‘‘asbestos’’ includes PACM, as defined
ing asbestos hazards in the workplace
below.
and selecting the appropriate control
Asbestos-containing material (ACM),
strategy for asbestos exposure, who has
means any material containing more
the authority to take prompt correc-
than one percent asbestos.
tive measures to eliminate them, as
Assistant Secretary means the Assist- specified in 29 CFR 1926.32(f): in addi-
ant Secretary of Labor for Occupa- tion, for Class I and Class II work who
tional Safety and Health, U.S. Depart- is specially trained in a training course
ment of Labor, or designee. which meets the criteria of EPA’s
Authorized person means any person Model Accreditation Plan (40 CFR part
authorized by the employer and re- 763) for supervisor, or its equivalent
quired by work duties to be present in and, for Class III and Class IV work,
regulated areas. who is trained in a manner consistent
Building/facility owner is the legal en- with EPA requirements for training of
tity, including a lessee, which exercises local education agency maintenance
control over management and record and custodial staff as set forth at 40
keeping functions relating to a build- CFR 763.92 (a)(2).
ing and/or facility in which activities Critical barrier means one or more
covered by this standard take place. layers of plastic sealed over all open-
Certified Industrial Hygienist (CIH) ings into a work area or any other
means one certified in the practice of similarly placed physical barrier suffi-
industrial hygiene by the American cient to prevent airborne asbestos in a
Board of Industrial Hygiene. work area from migrating to an adja-
Class I asbestos work means activities cent area.
involving the removal of TSI and sur- Decontamination area means an en-
facing ACM and PACM. closed area adjacent and connected to
Class II asbestos work means activities the regulated area and consisting of an
involving the removal of ACM which is equipment room, shower area, and
not thermal system insulation or sur- clean room, which is used for the de-
facing material. This includes, but is contamination of workers, materials,
not limited to, the removal of asbestos- and equipment that are contaminated
containing wallboard, floor tile and with asbestos.
521
Demolition means the wrecking or Modification for purposes of para-
taking out of any load-supporting graph (g)(6)(ii), means a changed or al-
structural member and any related tered procedure, material or compo-
razing, removing, or stripping of asbes- nent of a control system, which re-
tos products. places a procedure, material or compo-
Director means the Director, National nent of a required system. Omitting a
Institute for Occupational Safety and procedure or component, or reducing or
Health, U.S. Department of Health and diminishing the stringency or strength
Human Services, or designee. of a material or component of the con-
Disturbance means activities that dis- trol system is not a ‘‘modification’’ for
rupt the matrix of ACM or PACM, purposes of paragraph (g)(6) of this sec-
crumble or pulverize ACM or PACM, or tion.
generate visible debris from ACM or Negative Initial Exposure Assessment
PACM. In no event shall the amount of means a demonstration by the em-
ACM or PACM so disturbed exceed that ployer, which complies with the cri-
which can be contained in one glove teria in paragraph (f)(2)(iii) of this sec-
bag or waste bag which shall not ex- tion, that employee exposure during an
ceed 60 inches in length and width. operation is expected to be consist-
Employee exposure means that expo- ently below the PELs.
sure to airborne asbestos that would PACM means ‘‘presumed asbestos
occur if the employee were not using containing material’’.
respiratory protective equipment. Presumed Asbestos Containing Material
Equipment room (change room) means means thermal system insulation and
a contaminated room located within surfacing material found in buildings
the decontamination area that is sup- constructed no later than 1980. The des-
plied with impermeable bags or con- ignation of a material as ‘‘PACM’’ may
tainers for the disposal of contami- be rebutted pursuant to paragraph
nated protective clothing and equip- (k)(5) of this section.
ment. Project Designer means a person who
Fiber means a particulate form of as- has successfully completed the train-
bestos, 5 micrometers or longer, with a ing requirements for an abatement
length-to-diameter ratio of at least 3 to project designer established by 40
1. U.S.C. 763.90(g).
Glovebag means not more than a 60×60 Regulated area means: an area estab-
inch impervious plastic bag-like enclo- lished by the employer to demarcate
sure affixed around an asbestos-con- areas where Class I, II, and III asbestos
taining material, with glove-like ap- work is conducted, and any adjoining
pendages through which material and area where debris and waste from such
tools may be handled. asbestos work accumulate; and a work
High-efficiency particulate air (HEPA) area within which airborne concentra-
filter means a filter capable of trapping tions of asbestos, exceed or there is a
and retaining at least 99.97 percent of reasonable possibility they may exceed
all mono-dispersed particles of 0.3 mi- the permissible exposure limit. Re-
crometers in diameter. quirements for regulated areas are set
Homogeneous area means an area of out in paragraph (e) of this section.
surfacing material or thermal system Removal means all operations where
insulation that is uniform in color and ACM and/or PACM is taken out or
texture. stripped from structures or substrates,
Industrial hygienist means a profes- and includes demolition operations.
sional qualified by education, training, Renovation means the modifying of
and experience to anticipate, recog- any existing structure, or portion
nize, evaluate and develop controls for thereof.
occupational health hazards. Repair means overhauling, rebuild-
Intact means that the ACM has not ing, reconstructing, or reconditioning
crumbled, been pulverized, or otherwise of structures or substrates, including
deteriorated so that the asbestos is no encapsulation or other repair of ACM
longer likely to be bound with its ma- or PACM attached to structures or sub-
trix. strates.
522
Surfacing material means material (3) In addition, all employers of em-
that is sprayed, troweled-on or other- ployees exposed to asbestos hazards
wise applied to surfaces (such as acous- shall comply with applicable protective
tical plaster on ceilings and fire- provisions to protect their employees.
proofing materials on structural mem- For example, if employees working im-
bers, or other materials on surfaces for mediately adjacent to a Class I asbes-
acoustical, fireproofing, and other pur- tos job are exposed to asbestos due to
poses). the inadequate containment of such
Surfacing ACM means surfacing mate- job, their employer shall either remove
rial which contains more than 1% as- the employees from the area until the
bestos. enclosure breach is repaired; or per-
Thermal system insulation (TSI) means form an initial exposure assessment
ACM applied to pipes, fittings, boilers, pursuant to (f) of this section.
breeching, tanks, ducts or other struc- (4) All employers of employees work-
tural components to prevent heat loss ing adjacent to regulated areas estab-
or gain. lished by another employer on a multi-
Thermal system insulation ACM is employer work-site, shall take steps on
thermal system insulation which con- a daily basis to ascertain the integrity
tains more than 1% asbestos. of the enclosure and/or the effective-
ness of the control method relied on by
(c) Permissible exposure limits (PELS)—
the primary asbestos contractor to as-
(1) Time-weighted average limit (TWA).
sure that asbestos fibers do not mi-
The employer shall ensure that no em-
grate to such adjacent areas.
ployee is exposed to an airborne con- (5) All general contractors on a con-
centration of asbestos in excess of 0.1 struction project which includes work
fiber per cubic centimeter of air as an covered by this standard shall be
eight (8) hour time-weighted average deemed to exercise general supervisory
(TWA), as determined by the method authority over the work covered by
prescribed in appendix A to this sec- this standard, even though the general
tion, or by an equivalent method. contractor is not qualified to serve as
(2) Excursion limit. The employer shall the asbestos ‘‘competent person’’ as de-
ensure that no employee is exposed to fined by paragraph (b) of this section.
an airborne concentration of asbestos As supervisor of the entire project, the
in excess of 1.0 fiber per cubic centi- general contractor shall ascertain
meter of air (1 f/cc) as averaged over a whether the asbestos contractor is in
sampling period of thirty (30) minutes, compliance with this standard, and
as determined by the method pre- shall require such contractor to come
scribed in appendix A to this section, into compliance with this standard
or by an equivalent method. when necessary.
(d) Multi-employer worksites. (1) On (e) Regulated areas. (1) All Class I, II
multi-employer worksites, an employer and III asbestos work shall be con-
performing work requiring the estab- ducted within regulated areas. All
lishment of a regulated area shall in- other operations covered by this stand-
form other employers on the site of the ard shall be conducted within a regu-
nature of the employer’s work with as- lated area where airborne concentra-
bestos and/or PACM, of the existence of tions of asbestos exceed, or there is a
and requirements pertaining to regu- reasonable possibility they may exceed
lated areas, and the measures taken to a PEL. Regulated areas shall comply
ensure that employees of such other with the requirements of paragraphs
employers are not exposed to asbestos. (2), (3),(4) and (5) of this section.
(2) Asbestos hazards at a multi-em- (2) Demarcation. The regulated area
ployer work site shall be abated by the shall be demarcated in any manner
contractor who created or controls the that minimizes the number of persons
source of asbestos contamination. For within the area and protects persons
example, if there is a significant outside the area from exposure to air-
breach of an enclosure containing Class borne asbestos. Where critical barriers
I work, the employer responsible for or negative pressure enclosures are
erecting the enclosure shall repair the used, they may demarcate the regu-
breach immediately. lated area. Signs shall be provided and
523
displayed pursuant to the requirements workplace. The assessment must be
of paragraph (k)(7) of this section. completed in time to comply with re-
(3) Access. Access to regulated areas quirements which are triggered by ex-
shall be limited to authorized persons posure data or the lack of a ‘‘negative
and to persons authorized by the Act or exposure assessment,’’ and to provide
regulations issued pursuant thereto. information necessary to assure that
(4) Respirators. All persons entering a all control systems planned are appro-
regulated area where employees are re- priate for that operation and will work
quired pursuant to paragraph (h)(1) of properly.
this section to wear respirators shall (ii) Basis of Initial Exposure Assess-
be supplied with a respirator selected ment: Unless a negative exposure as-
in accordance with paragraph (h)(2) of sessment has been made pursuant to
this section. paragraph (f)(2)(iii) of this section, the
(5) Prohibited activities. The employer initial exposure assessment shall, if
shall ensure that employees do not eat, feasible, be based on monitoring con-
drink, smoke, chew tobacco or gum, or ducted pursuant to paragraph (f)(1)(iii)
apply cosmetics in the regulated area. of this section. The assessment shall
(6) Competent Persons. The employer take into consideration both the moni-
shall ensure that all asbestos work per- toring results and all observations, in-
formed within regulated areas is super- formation or calculations which indi-
vised by a competent person, as defined cate employee exposure to asbestos, in-
in paragraph (b) of this section. The cluding any previous monitoring con-
duties of the competent person are set ducted in the workplace, or of the oper-
out in paragraph (o) of this section. ations of the employer which indicate
(f) Exposure assessments and moni- the levels of airborne asbestos likely to
toring—(1) General monitoring criteria. (i) be encountered on the job. For Class I
Each employer who has a workplace or asbestos work, until the employer con-
work operation where exposure moni- ducts exposure monitoring and docu-
toring is required under this section ments that employees on that job will
shall perform monitoring to determine not be exposed in excess of the PELs,
accurately the airborne concentrations or otherwise makes a negative expo-
of asbestos to which employees may be sure assessment pursuant to paragraph
exposed. (f)(2)(iii) of this section, the employer
(ii) Determinations of employee ex- shall presume that employees are ex-
posure shall be made from breathing posed in excess of the TWA and excur-
zone air samples that are representa- sion limit.
tive of the 8-hour TWA and 30-minute (iii) Negative Exposure Assessment:
short-term exposures of each employee. For any one specific asbestos job which
(iii) Representative 8-hour TWA em- will be performed by employees who
ployee exposure shall be determined on have been trained in compliance with
the basis of one or more samples rep- the standard, the employer may dem-
resenting full-shift exposure for em- onstrate that employee exposures will
ployees in each work area. Representa- be below the PELs by data which con-
tive 30-minute short-term employee ex- form to the following criteria;
posures shall be determined on the (A) Objective data demonstrating
basis of one or more samples rep- that the product or material con-
resenting 30 minute exposures associ- taining asbestos minerals or the activ-
ated with operations that are most ity involving such product or material
likely to produce exposures above the cannot release airborne fibers in con-
excursion limit for employees in each centrations exceeding the TWA and ex-
work area. cursion limit under those work condi-
(2) Initial Exposure Assessment. (i) tions having the greatest potential for
Each employer who has a workplace or releasing asbestos; or
work operation covered by this stand- (B) Where the employer has mon-
ard shall ensure that a ‘‘competent per- itored prior asbestos jobs for the PEL
son’’ conducts an exposure assessment and the excursion limit within 12
immediately before or at the initiation months of the current or projected job,
of the operation to ascertain expected the monitoring and analysis were per-
exposures during that operation or formed in compliance with the asbestos
524
standard in effect; and the data were (4) Termination of monitoring. (i) If the
obtained during work operations con- periodic monitoring required by para-
ducted under workplace conditions graph (f)(3) of this section reveals that
‘‘closely resembling’’ the processes, employee exposures, as indicated by
type of material, control methods, statistically reliable measurements,
work practices, and environmental are below the permissible exposure
conditions used and prevailing in the limit and excursion limit the employer
employer’s current operations, the op- may discontinue monitoring for those
erations were conducted by employees employees whose exposures are rep-
whose training and experience are no resented by such monitoring.
more extensive than that of employees (ii) Additional monitoring. Notwith-
performing the current job, and these standing the provisions of paragraph (f)
data show that under the conditions (2) and (3), and (f)(4) of this section, the
prevailing and which will prevail in the employer shall institute the exposure
current workplace there is a high de- monitoring required under paragraph
gree of certainty that employee expo- (f)(3) of this section whenever there has
sures will not exceed the TWA and ex- been a change in process, control
cursion limit; or equipment, personnel or work practices
(C) The results of initial exposure that may result in new or additional
monitoring of the current job made exposures above the permissible expo-
from breathing zone air samples that sure limit and/or excursion limit or
are representative of the 8-hour TWA when the employer has any reason to
and 30-minute short-term exposures of suspect that a change may result in
each employee covering operations new or additional exposures above the
which are most likely during the per- permissible exposure limit and/or ex-
formance of the entire asbestos job to cursion limit. Such additional moni-
result in exposures over the PELs. toring is required regardless of whether
(3) Periodic monitoring—(i) Class I and a ‘‘negative exposure assessment’’ was
II operations. The employer shall con- previously produced for a specific job.
duct daily monitoring that is rep- (5) Employee notification of monitoring
resentative of the exposure of each em- results. The employer must, as soon as
ployee who is assigned to work within possible but no later than 5 working
a regulated area who is performing days after the receipt of the results of
Class I or II work, unless the employer any monitoring performed under this
pursuant to (f)(2)(iii) of this section, section, notify each affected employee
has made a negative exposure assess- of these results either individually in
ment for the entire operation. writing or by posting the results in an
(ii) All operations under the standard appropriate location that is accessible
other than Class I and II operations. to employees.
The employer shall conduct periodic (6) Observation of monitoring. (i) The
monitoring of all work where exposures employer shall provide affected em-
are expected to exceed a PEL, at inter- ployees and their designated represent-
vals sufficient to document the valid- atives an opportunity to observe any
ity of the exposure prediction. monitoring of employee exposure to as-
(iii) Exception: When all employees bestos conducted in accordance with
required to be monitored daily are this section.
equipped with supplied-air respirators (ii) When observation of the moni-
operated in the pressure demand mode, toring of employee exposure to asbes-
or other positive pressure mode res- tos requires entry into an area where
pirator, the employer may dispense the use of protective clothing or equip-
with the daily monitoring required by ment is required, the observer shall be
this paragraph. However, employees provided with and be required to use
performing Class I work using a con- such clothing and equipment and shall
trol method which is not listed in para- comply with all other applicable safety
graph (g)(4) (i), (ii), or (iii) of this sec- and health procedures.
tion or using a modification of a listed (g) Methods of compliance. (1) Engi-
control method, shall continue to be neering controls and work practices for
monitored daily even if they are all operations covered by this section.
equipped with supplied-air respirators. The employer shall use the following
525
engineering controls and work prac- with the requirements of paragraph (h)
tices in all operations covered by this of this section.
section, regardless of the levels of ex- (3) Prohibitions. The following work
posure: practices and engineering controls
(i) Vacuum cleaners equipped with shall not be used for work related to
HEPA filters to collect all debris and asbestos or for work which disturbs
dust containing ACM and PACM, ex- ACM or PACM, regardless of measured
cept as provided in paragraph (g)(8)(ii) levels of asbestos exposure or the re-
of this section in the case of roofing sults of initial exposure assessments:
material. (i) High-speed abrasive disc saws that
(ii) Wet methods, or wetting agents, are not equipped with point of cut ven-
to control employee exposures during tilator or enclosures with HEPA fil-
asbestos handling, mixing, removal, tered exhaust air.
cutting, application, and cleanup, ex- (ii) Compressed air used to remove
cept where employers demonstrate asbestos, or materials containing as-
that the use of wet methods is infeasi- bestos, unless the compressed air is
ble due to for example, the creation of used in conjunction with an enclosed
electrical hazards, equipment malfunc- ventilation system designed to capture
tion, and, in roofing, except as provided the dust cloud created by the com-
in paragraph (g)(8)(ii) of this section; pressed air.
and (iii) Dry sweeping, shoveling or other
dry clean-up of dust and debris con-
(iii) Prompt clean-up and disposal of
taining ACM and PACM.
wastes and debris contaminated with
(iv) Employee rotation as a means of
asbestos in leak-tight containers ex-
reducing employee exposure to asbes-
cept in roofing operations, where the
tos.
procedures specified in paragraph
(4) Class I Requirements. In addition to
(g)(8)(ii) of this section apply.
the provisions of paragraphs (g) (1) and
(2) In addition to the requirements of (2) of this section, the following engi-
paragraph (g)(1) of this section, the em- neering controls and work practices
ployer shall use the following control and procedures shall be used.
methods to achieve compliance with (i) All Class I work, including the in-
the TWA permissible exposure limit stallation and operation of the control
and excursion limit prescribed by para- system shall be supervised by a com-
graph (c) of this section; petent person as defined in paragraph
(i) Local exhaust ventilation (b) of this section;
equipped with HEPA filter dust collec- (ii) For all Class I jobs involving the
tion systems; removal of more than 25 linear or 10
(ii) Enclosure or isolation of proc- square feet of thermal system insula-
esses producing asbestos dust; tion or surfacing material; for all other
(iii) Ventilation of the regulated area Class I jobs, where the employer can-
to move contaminated air away from not produce a negative exposure assess-
the breathing zone of employees and ment pursuant to paragraph (f)(2)(iii)
toward a filtration or collection device of this section, or where employees are
equipped with a HEPA filter; working in areas adjacent to the regu-
(iv) Use of other work practices and lated area, while the Class I work is
engineering controls that the Assistant being performed, the employer shall
Secretary can show to be feasible. use one of the following methods to en-
(v) Wherever the feasible engineering sure that airborne asbestos does not
and work practice controls described migrate from the regulated area:
above are not sufficient to reduce em- (A) Critical barriers shall be placed
ployee exposure to or below the permis- over all the openings to the regulated
sible exposure limit and/or excursion area, except where activities are per-
limit prescribed in paragraph (c) of this formed outdoors; or
section, the employer shall use them to (B) The employer shall use another
reduce employee exposure to the lowest barrier or isolation method which pre-
levels attainable by these controls and vents the migration of airborne asbes-
shall supplement them by the use of tos from the regulated area, as verified
respiratory protection that complies by perimeter area surveillance during
526
each work shift at each boundary of (2) At least 4 air changes per hour
the regulated area, showing no visible shall be maintained in the NPE,
asbestos dust; and perimeter area mon- (3) A minimum of ¥0.02 column
itoring showing that clearance levels inches of water pressure differential,
contained in 40 CFR part 763, subpt. E, relative to outside pressure, shall be
of the EPA Asbestos in Schools Rule maintained within the NPE as evi-
are met, or that perimeter area levels, denced by manometric measurements,
measured by Phase Contrast Micros- (4) The NPE shall be kept under neg-
copy (PCM) are no more than back- ative pressure throughout the period of
ground levels representing the same its use, and
area before the asbestos work began. (5) Air movement shall be directed
The results of such monitoring shall be away from employees performing as-
made known to the employer no later bestos work within the enclosure, and
than 24 hours from the end of the work toward a HEPA filtration or a collec-
shift represented by such monitoring. tion device.
Exception: For work completed out- (B) Work Practices:
doors where employees are not working (1) Before beginning work within the
in areas adjacent to the regulated enclosure and at the beginning of each
areas, this paragraph (g)(4)(ii) is satis- shift, the NPE shall be inspected for
fied when the specific control methods breaches and smoke-tested for leaks,
in paragraph (g)(5) of this section are and any leaks sealed.
used. (2) Electrical circuits in the enclo-
(iii) For all Class I jobs, HVAC sys- sure shall be deactivated, unless
tems shall be isolated in the regulated equipped with ground-fault circuit in-
area by sealing with a double layer of terrupters.
6 mil plastic or the equivalent; (ii) Glove bag systems may be used to
(iv) For all Class I jobs, impermeable remove PACM and/or ACM from
dropcloths shall be placed on surfaces straight runs of piping and elbows and
beneath all removal activity; other connections with the following
(v) For all Class I jobs, all objects specifications and work practices:
within the regulated area shall be cov- (A) Specifications:
ered with impermeable dropcloths or (1) Glovebags shall be made of 6 mil
plastic sheeting which is secured by thick plastic and shall be seamless at
duct tape or an equivalent. the bottom.
(vi) For all Class I jobs where the em- (2) Glovebags used on elbows and
ployer cannot produce a negative expo- other connections must be designed for
sure assessment, or where exposure that purpose and used without modi-
monitoring shows that a PEL is ex- fications.
ceeded, the employer shall ventilate (B) Work Practices:
the regulated area to move contami- (1) Each glovebag shall be installed
nated air away from the breathing zone so that it completely covers the cir-
of employees toward a HEPA filtration cumference of pipe or other structure
or collection device. where the work is to be done.
(5) Specific control methods for Class I (2) Glovebags shall be smoke-tested
work. In addition, Class I asbestos work for leaks and any leaks sealed prior to
shall be performed using one or more of use.
the following control methods pursu- (3) Glovebags may be used only once
ant to the limitations stated below: and may not be moved.
(i) Negative Pressure Enclosure (4) Glovebags shall not be used on
(NPE) systems: NPE systems may be surfaces whose temperature exceeds 150
used where the configuration of the °F.
work area does not make the erection (5) Prior to disposal, glovebags shall
of the enclosure infeasible, with the be collapsed by removing air within
following specifications and work prac- them using a HEPA vacuum.
tices. (6) Before beginning the operation,
(A) Specifications: loose and friable material adjacent to
(1) The negative pressure enclosure the glovebag/box operation shall be
(NPE) may be of any configuration, wrapped and sealed in two layers of six
527
mil plastic or otherwise rendered in- (5) An aperture at the base of the box
tact, shall serve as a bagging outlet for
(7) Where system uses attached waste waste ACM and water:
bag, such bag shall be connected to col- (6) A back-up generator shall be
lection bag using hose or other mate- present on site:
rial which shall withstand pressure of (7) Waste bags shall consist of 6 mil
ACM waste and water without losing thick plastic double-bagged before they
its integrity: are filled or plastic thicker than 6 mil.
(8) Sliding valve or other device shall (B) Work practices:
separate waste bag from hose to ensure (1) At least two persons shall perform
no exposure when waste bag is discon- the removal:
nected: (2) The box shall be smoke-tested for
(9) At least two persons shall perform leaks and any leaks sealed prior to
Class I glovebag removal operations. each use.
(iii) Negative Pressure Glove Bag Sys- (3) Loose or damaged ACM adjacent
tems. Negative pressure glove bag sys- to the box shall be wrapped and sealed
tems may be used to remove ACM or in two layers of 6 mil plastic prior to
PACM from piping. the job, or otherwise made intact prior
(A) Specifications: In addition to spec- to the job.
ifications for glove bag systems above, (4) A HEPA filtration system shall be
negative pressure glove bag systems used to maintain pressure barrier in
shall attach HEPA vacuum systems or box.
other devices to bag to prevent collapse (v) Water Spray Process System. A
during removal. water spray process system may be
(B) Work Practices: (1) The employer used for removal of ACM and PACM
shall comply with the work practices from cold line piping if, employees car-
for glove bag systems in paragraph rying out such process have completed
(g)(5)(ii)(B)(4) of this section. a 40-hour separate training course in
(2) The HEPA vacuum cleaner or its use, in addition to training required
other device used to prevent collapse of for employees performing Class I work.
bag during removal shall run contin- The system shall meet the following
ually during the operation until it is specifications and shall be performed
completed at which time the bag shall by employees using the following work
be collapsed prior to removal of the practices.
bag from the pipe. (A) Specifications:
(3) Where a separate waste bag is (1) Piping shall be surrounded on 3
used along with a collection bag and sides by rigid framing,
discarded after one use, the collection (2) A 360 degree water spray, deliv-
bag may be reused if rinsed clean with ered through nozzles supplied by a high
amended water before reuse. pressure separate water line, shall be
(iv) Negative Pressure Glove Box formed around the piping.
Systems: Negative pressure glove boxes (3) The spray shall collide to form a
may be used to remove ACM or PACM fine aerosol which provides a liquid
from pipe runs with the following spec- barrier between workers and the ACM
ifications and work practices. and PACM.
(A) Specifications: (B) Work Practices:
(1) Glove boxes shall be constructed (1) The system shall be run for at
with rigid sides and made from metal least 10 minutes before removal begins.
or other material which can withstand (2) All removal shall take place with-
the weight of the ACM and PACM and in the water barrier.
water used during removal: (3) The system shall be operated by
(2) A negative pressure generator at least three persons, one of whom
shall be used to create negative pres- shall not perform removal, but shall
sure in the system: check equipment, and ensure proper
(3) An air filtration unit shall be at- operation of the system.
tached to the box: (4) After removal, the ACM and
(4) The box shall be fitted with gloved PACM shall be bagged while still inside
apertures: the water barrier.
528
(vi) A small walk-in enclosure which criteria in paragraph (g)(4)(ii)(B) of
accommodates no more than two per- this section.
sons (mini-enclosure) may be used if (A) Where the TSI or surfacing mate-
the disturbance or removal can be com- rial to be removed is 25 linear or 10
pletely contained by the enclosure with square feet or less , the evaluation re-
the following specifications and work quired in paragraph (g)(6) of this sec-
practices. tion may be performed by a ‘‘com-
(A) Specifications: petent person’’, and may omit consid-
(1) The fabricated or job-made enclo- eration of perimeter or clearance moni-
sure shall be constructed of 6 mil plas- toring otherwise required.
tic or equivalent: (B) The evaluation of employee expo-
(2) The enclosure shall be placed sure required in paragraph (g)(6) of this
under negative pressure by means of a section, shall include and be based on
HEPA filtered vacuum or similar ven- sampling and analytical data rep-
tilation unit: resenting employee exposure during
(B) Work practices: the use of such method under worst-
(1) Before use, the mini-enclosure case conditions and by employees
shall be inspected for leaks and smoke- whose training and experience are
tested to detect breaches, and any equivalent to employees who are to
breaches sealed. perform the current job.
(2) Before reuse, the interior shall be (7) Work Practices and Engineering
completely washed with amended Controls for Class II work.
water and HEPA-vacuumed. (i) All Class II work shall be super-
(3) During use, air movement shall be vised by a competent person as defined
directed away from the employee’s in paragraph (b) of this section.
breathing zone within the mini-enclo- (ii) For all indoor Class II jobs, where
sure. the employer has not produced a nega-
(6) Alternative control methods for Class tive exposure assessment pursuant to
I work. Class I work may be performed paragraph (f)(2)(iii) of this section, or
using a control method which is not where during the job, changed condi-
referenced in paragraph (g)(5) of this tions indicate there may be exposure
section, or which modifies a control above the PEL or where the employer
method referenced in paragraph (g)(5)of does not remove the ACM in a substan-
this section, if the following provisions tially intact state, the employer shall
are complied with: use one of the following methods to en-
(i) The control method shall enclose, sure that airborne asbestos does not
contain or isolate the processes or migrate from the regulated area;
source of airborne asbestos dust, or (A) Critical barriers shall be placed
otherwise capture or redirect such dust over all openings to the regulated area;
before it enters the breathing zone of or,
employees. (B) The employer shall use another
(ii) A certified industrial hygienist or barrier or isolation method which pre-
licensed professional engineer who is vents the migration of airborne asbes-
also qualified as a project designer as tos from the regulated area, as verified
defined in paragraph (b) of this section, by perimeter area monitoring or clear-
shall evaluate the work area, the pro- ance monitoring which meets the cri-
jected work practices and the engineer- teria set out in paragraph (g)(4)(ii)(B)
ing controls and shall certify in writ- of this section.
ing that the planned control method is (C) Impermeable dropcloths shall be
adequate to reduce direct and indirect placed on surfaces beneath all removal
employee exposure to below the PELs activity;
under worst-case conditions of use, and (iii) [Reserved]
that the planned control method will (iv) All Class II asbestos work shall
prevent asbestos contamination out- be performed using the work practices
side the regulated area, as measured by and requirements set out above in
clearance sampling which meets the re- paragraph (g)(1) (i) through (g)(1)(iii) of
quirements of EPA’s Asbestos in this section.
Schools rule issued under AHERA, or (8) Additional Controls for Class II
perimeter monitoring which meets the work. Class II asbestos work shall also
529
be performed by complying with the shall ensure that the following work
work practices and controls designated practices are followed:
for each type of asbestos work to be (A) Roofing material shall be re-
performed, set out in this paragraph. moved in an intact state to the extent
Where more than one control method feasible.
may be used for a type of asbestos (B) Wet methods shall be used to re-
work, the employer may choose one or move roofing materials that are not in-
a combination of designated control tact, or that will be rendered not in-
methods. Class II work also may be tact during removal, unless such wet
performed using a method allowed for methods are not feasible or will create
Class I work, except that glove bags safety hazards.
and glove boxes are allowed if they (C) Cutting machines shall be con-
fully enclose the Class II material to be tinuously misted during use, unless a
removed. competent person determines that
(i) For removing vinyl and asphalt misting substantially decreases worker
flooring materials which contain ACM safety.
or for which in buildings constructed (D) When removing built-up roofs
no later than 1980, the employer has with asbestos-containing roofing felts
not verified the absence of ACM pursu- and an aggregate surface using a power
ant to paragraph (g)(8)(i)(I) of this sec- roof cutter, all dust resulting from the
tion. The employer shall ensure that cutting operation shall be collected by
employees comply with the following a HEPA dust collector, or shall be
work practices and that employees are HEPA vacuumed by vacuuming along
trained in these practices pursuant to the cut line. When removing built-up
paragraph (k)(9): roofs with asbestos-containing roofing
(A) Flooring or its backing shall not felts and a smooth surface using a
be sanded. power roof cutter, the dust resulting
(B) Vacuums equipped with HEPA fil- from the cutting operation shall be col-
ter, disposable dust bag, and metal lected either by a HEPA dust collector
floor tool (no brush) shall be used to or HEPA vacuuming along the cut line,
clean floors. or by gently sweeping and then care-
(C) Resilient sheeting shall be re- fully and completely wiping up the
moved by cutting with wetting of the still-wet dust and debris left along the
snip point and wetting during cut line. The dust and debris shall be
delamination. Rip-up of resilient sheet immediately bagged or placed in cov-
floor material is prohibited. ered containers.
(D) All scraping of residual adhesive (E) Asbestos-containing material
and/or backing shall be performed that has been removed from a roof
using wet methods. shall not be dropped or thrown to the
(E) Dry sweeping is prohibited. ground. Unless the material is carried
(F) Mechanical chipping is prohibited or passed to the ground by hand, it
unless performed in a negative pressure shall be lowered to the ground via cov-
enclosure which meets the require- ered, dust-tight chute, crane or hoist:
ments of paragraph (g)(5)(i) of this sec- (1) Any ACM that is not intact shall
tion. be lowered to the ground as soon as is
(G) Tiles shall be removed intact, un- practicable, but in any event no later
less the employer demonstrates that than the end of the work shift. While
intact removal is not possible. the material remains on the roof it
(H) When tiles are heated and can be shall either be kept wet, placed in an
removed intact, wetting may be omit- impermeable waste bag, or wrapped in
ted. plastic sheeting.
(I) Resilient flooring material includ- (2) Intact ACM shall be lowered to
ing associated mastic and backing the ground as soon as is practicable,
shall be assumed to be asbestos-con- but in any event no later than the end
taining unless an industrial hygienist of the work shift.
determines that it is asbestos-free (F) Upon being lowered, unwrapped
using recognized analytical techniques. material shall be transferred to a
(ii) For removing roofing material closed receptacle in such manner so as
which contains ACM the employer to preclude the dispersion of dust.
530
(G) Roof level heating and ventila- (v) When performing any other Class
tion air intake sources shall be isolated II removal of asbestos containing ma-
or the ventilation system shall be shut terial for which specific controls have
down. not been listed in paragraph (g)(8)(iv)
(H) Notwithstanding any other provi- (A) through (D) of this section, the em-
sion of this section, removal or repair ployer shall ensure that the following
of sections of intact roofing less than work practices are complied with.
25 square feet in area does not require (A) The material shall be thoroughly
use of wet methods or HEPA wetted with amended water prior to
vacuuming as long as manual methods and during its removal.
which do not render the material non- (B) The material shall be removed in
intact are used to remove the material an intact state unless the employer
and no visible dust is created by the re- demonstrates that intact removal is
moval method used. In determining not possible.
whether a job involves less than 25 (C) Cutting, abrading or breaking the
square feet, the employer shall include material shall be prohibited unless the
all removal and repair work performed employer can demonstrate that meth-
on the same roof on the same day. ods less likely to result in asbestos
(iii) When removing cementitious as- fiber release are not feasible.
bestos-containing siding and shingles (D) Asbestos-containing material re-
or transite panels containing ACM on moved, shall be immediately bagged or
building exteriors (other than roofs, wrapped, or kept wetted until trans-
where paragraph (g)(8)(ii) of this sec- ferred to a closed receptacle, no later
tion applies) the employer shall ensure than the end of the work shift.
that the following work practices are (vi) Alternative Work Practices and
followed: Controls. Instead of the work practices
(A) Cutting, abrading or breaking and controls listed in paragraph (g)(8)
siding, shingles, or transite panels, (i) through (v) of this section, the em-
shall be prohibited unless the employer ployer may use different or modified
can demonstrate that methods less engineering and work practice controls
likely to result in asbestos fiber re- if the following provisions are complied
lease cannot be used. with.
(B) Each panel or shingle shall be (A) The employer shall demonstrate
sprayed with amended water prior to by data representing employee expo-
removal. sure during the use of such method
(C) Unwrapped or unbagged panels or under conditions which closely resem-
shingles shall be immediately lowered ble the conditions under which the
to the ground via covered dust-tight method is to be used, that employee ex-
chute, crane or hoist, or placed in an posure will not exceed the PELs under
impervious waste bag or wrapped in any anticipated circumstances.
plastic sheeting and lowered to the (B) A competent person shall evalu-
ground no later than the end of the ate the work area, the projected work
work shift. practices and the engineering controls,
(D) Nails shall be cut with flat, sharp and shall certify in writing, that the
instruments. different or modified controls are ade-
(iv) When removing gaskets con- quate to reduce direct and indirect em-
taining ACM, the employer shall en- ployee exposure to below the PELs
sure that the following work practices under all expected conditions of use
are followed: and that the method meets the require-
(A) If a gasket is visibly deteriorated ments of this standard. The evaluation
and unlikely to be removed intact, re- shall include and be based on data rep-
moval shall be undertaken within a resenting employee exposure during
glovebag as described in paragraph the use of such method under condi-
(g)(5)(ii) of this section. tions which closely resemble the condi-
(B) [Reserved] tions under which the method is to be
(C) The gasket shall be immediately used for the current job, and by em-
placed in a disposal container. ployees whose training and experience
(D) Any scraping to remove residue are equivalent to employees who are to
must be performed wet. perform the current job.
531
(9) Work Practices and Engineering (ii) Employers of employees who
Controls for Class III asbestos work. Class clean up waste and debris in, and em-
III asbestos work shall be conducted ployers in control of, areas where fri-
using engineering and work practice able thermal system insulation or sur-
controls which minimize the exposure facing material is accessible, shall as-
to employees performing the asbestos sume that such waste and debris con-
work and to bystander employees. tain asbestos.
(i) The work shall be performed using (11) Alternative methods of compliance
wet methods. for installation, removal, repair, and
(ii) To the extent feasible, the work maintenance of certain roofing and pipe-
shall be performed using local exhaust line coating materials. Notwithstanding
ventilation. any other provision of this section, an
(iii) Where the disturbance involves
employer who complies with all provi-
drilling, cutting, abrading, sanding,
sions of this paragraph (g)(11) when in-
chipping, breaking, or sawing of ther-
stalling, removing, repairing, or main-
mal system insulation or surfacing ma-
terial, the employer shall use imper- taining intact pipeline asphaltic wrap,
meable dropcloths, and shall isolate or roof flashings which contain asbes-
the operation using mini-enclosures or tos fibers encapsulated or coated by bi-
glove bag systems pursuant to para- tuminous or resinous compounds shall
graph (g)(5) of this section or another be deemed to be in compliance with
isolation method. this section. If an employer does not
(iv) Where the employer does not comply with all provisions of this para-
produce a ‘‘negative exposure assess- graph (g)(11) or if during the course of
ment’’ for a job, or where monitoring the job the material does not remain
results show the PEL has been exceed- intact, the provisions of paragraph
ed, the employer shall contain the area (g)(8) of this section apply instead of
using impermeable dropcloths and this paragraph (g)(11).
plastic barriers or their equivalent, or (i) Before work begins and as needed
shall isolate the operation using a con- during the job, a competent person who
trol system listed in and in compliance is capable of identifying asbestos haz-
with paragraph (g)(5) of this section. ards in the workplace and selecting the
(v) Employees performing Class III appropriate control strategy for asbes-
jobs, which involve the disturbance of tos exposure, and who has the author-
thermal system insulation or surfacing ity to take prompt corrective measures
material, or where the employer does to eliminate such hazards, shall con-
not produce a ‘‘negative exposure as- duct an inspection of the worksite and
sessment’’ or where monitoring results determine that the roofing material is
show a PEL has been exceeded, shall intact and will likely remain intact.
wear respirators which are selected, (ii) All employees performing work
used and fitted pursuant to provisions
covered by this paragraph (g)(11) shall
of paragraph (h) of this section.
be trained in a training program that
(10) Class IV asbestos work. Class IV
meets the requirements of paragraph
asbestos jobs shall be conducted by em-
(k)(9)(viii) of this section.
ployees trained pursuant to the asbes-
tos awareness training program set out (iii) The material shall not be sand-
in paragraph (k)(9) of this section. In ed, abraded, or ground. Manual meth-
addition, all Class IV jobs shall be con- ods which do not render the material
ducted in conformity with the require- non-intact shall be used.
ments set out in paragraph (g)(1) of (iv) Material that has been removed
this section, mandating wet methods, from a roof shall not be dropped or
HEPA vacuums, and prompt clean up thrown to the ground. Unless the mate-
of debris containing ACM or PACM. rial is carried or passed to the ground
(i) Employees cleaning up debris and by hand, it shall be lowered to the
waste in a regulated area where res- ground via covered, dust-tight chute,
pirators are required shall wear res- crane or hoist. All such material shall
pirators which are selected, used and be removed from the roof as soon as is
fitted pursuant to provisions of para- practicable, but in any event no later
graph (h) of this section. than the end of the work shift.
532
(v) Where roofing products which ployees will be impaired by the em-
have been labeled as containing asbes- ployee’s respirator use. Such employ-
tos pursuant to paragraph (k)(8) of this ees must be assigned to another job or
section are installed on non-residential given the opportunity to transfer to a
roofs during operations covered by this different position that they can per-
paragraph (g)(11), the employer shall form. If such a transfer position is
notify the building owner of the pres- available, it must be with the same em-
ence and location of such materials no ployer, in the same geographical area,
later than the end of the job. and with the same seniority, status,
(vi) All removal or disturbance of rate of pay, and other job benefits the
pipeline asphaltic wrap shall be per- employee had just prior to such trans-
formed using wet methods. fer.
(h) Respiratory protection—(1) General. (3) Respirator selection. (i) Employers
For employees who use respirators re- must:
quired by this section, the employer (A) Select, and provide to employees,
must provide each employee an appro- the appropriate respirators specified in
priate respirator that complies with paragraph (d)(3)(i)(A) of 29 CFR
the requirements of this paragraph. 1910.134; however, employers must not
Respirators must be used during: select or use filtering facepiece res-
(i) Class I asbestos work. pirators for use against asbestos fibers.
(ii) Class II asbestos work when ACM (B) Provide HEPA filters for powered
is not removed in a substantially in- and non-powered air-purifying res-
tact state. pirators.
(iii) Class II and III asbestos work (ii) Employers must provide an em-
that is not performed using wet meth- ployee with tight-fitting, powered air-
ods, except for removal of ACM from purifying respirator (PAPR) instead of
sloped roofs when a negative-exposure a negative pressure respirator selected
assessment has been conducted and according to paragraph (h)(3)(i)(A) of
ACM is removed in an intact state. this standard when the employee
(iv) Class II and III asbestos work for chooses to use a PAPR and it provides
which a negative-exposure assessment adequate protection to the employee.
has not been conducted. (iii) Employers must provide employ-
(v) Class III asbestos work when TSI ees with an air-purifying half mask res-
or surfacing ACM or PACM is being pirator, other than a filtering facepiece
disturbed. respirator, whenever the employees
(vi) Class IV asbestos work performed perform:
within regulated areas where employ- (A) Class II or Class III asbestos work
ees who are performing other work are for which no negative exposure assess-
required to use respirators. ment is available.
(vii) Work operations covered by this (B) Class III asbestos work involving
section for which employees are ex- disturbance of TSI or surfacing ACM or
posed above the TWA or excursion PACM.
limit. (iv) Employers must provide employ-
(viii) Emergencies. ees with:
(2) Respirator program. (i) The em- (A) A tight-fitting powered air-puri-
ployer must implement a respiratory fying respirator or a full facepiece, sup-
protection program in accordance with plied-air respirator operated in the
§ 1910.134 (b) through (d) (except pressure-demand mode and equipped
(d)(1)(iii)), and (f) through (m), which with either HEPA egress cartridges or
covers each employee required by this an auxiliary positive-pressure, self-con-
section to use a respirator. tained breathing apparatus (SCBA)
(ii) No employee shall be assigned to whenever the employees are in a regu-
asbestos work that requires respirator lated area performing Class I asbestos
use if, based on their most recent med- work for which a negative exposure as-
ical examination, the examining physi- sessment is not available and the expo-
cian determines that the employee will sure assessment indicates that the ex-
be unable to function normally while posure level will be at or below 1 f/cc as
using a respirator, or that the safety or an 8-hour time-weighted average
health of the employee or other em- (TWA).
533
(B) A full facepiece supplied-air res- (j) Hygiene facilities and practices for
pirator operated in the pressure-de- employees. (1) Requirements for employ-
mand mode and equipped with an auxil- ees performing Class I asbestos jobs in-
iary positive-pressure SCBA whenever volving over 25 linear or 10 square feet
the employees are in a regulated area of TSI or surfacing ACM and PACM.
performing Class I asbestos work for (i) Decontamination areas. The em-
which a negative exposure assessment ployer shall establish a decontamina-
is not available and the exposure as- tion area that is adjacent and con-
sessment indicates that the exposure nected to the regulated area for the de-
level will be above 1 f/cc as an 8-hour contamination of such employees. The
TWA. decontamination area shall consist of
(i) Protective clothing—(1) General. The an equipment room, shower area, and
employer shall provide or require the clean room in series. The employer
use of protective clothing, such as cov- shall ensure that employees enter and
eralls or similar whole-body clothing, exit the regulated area through the de-
head coverings, gloves, and foot cov- contamination area.
erings for any employee exposed to air- (A) Equipment room. The equipment
borne concentrations of asbestos that room shall be supplied with imper-
exceed the TWA and/or excursion limit meable, labeled bags and containers for
prescribed in paragraph (c) of this sec- the containment and disposal of con-
tion, or for which a required negative taminated protective equipment.
exposure assessment is not produced, (B) Shower area. Shower facilities
or for any employee performing Class I shall be provided which comply with 29
operations which involve the removal CFR 1910.141(d)(3), unless the employer
of over 25 linear or 10 square feet of TSI can demonstrate that they are not fea-
or surfacing ACM and PACM. sible. The showers shall be adjacent
both to the equipment room and the
(2) Laundering. (i) The employer shall
clean room, unless the employer can
ensure that laundering of contami-
demonstrate that this location is not
nated clothing is done so as to prevent
feasible. Where the employer can dem-
the release of airborne asbestos in ex-
onstrate that it is not feasible to lo-
cess of the TWA or excursion limit pre-
cate the shower between the equipment
scribed in paragraph (c) of this section.
room and the clean room, or where the
(ii) Any employer who gives contami- work is performed outdoors, the em-
nated clothing to another person for ployers shall ensure that employees:
laundering shall inform such person of (1) Remove asbestos contamination
the requirement in paragraph (i)(2)(i) from their worksuits in the equipment
of this section to effectively prevent room using a HEPA vacuum before pro-
the release of airborne asbestos in exceeding to a shower that is not adja-
cess of the TWA and excursion limit cent to the work area; or
prescribed in paragraph (c) of this sec- (2) Remove their contaminated
tion. worksuits in the equipment room, then
(3) Contaminated clothing. Contami- don clean worksuits, and proceed to a
nated clothing shall be transported in shower that is not adjacent to the work
sealed impermeable bags, or other area.
closed, impermeable containers, and be (C) Clean change room. The clean
labeled in accordance with paragraph room shall be equipped with a locker or
(k) of this section. appropriate storage container for each
(4) Inspection of protective clothing. (i) employee’s use. When the employer can
The competent person shall examine demonstrate that it is not feasible to
worksuits worn by employees at least provide a clean change area adjacent to
once per workshift for rips or tears the work area or where the work is per-
that may occur during performance of formed outdoors, the employer may
work. permit employees engaged in Class I
(ii) When rips or tears are detected asbestos jobs to clean their protective
while an employee is working, rips and clothing with a portable HEPA-
tears shall be immediately mended, or equipped vacuum before such employ-
the worksuit shall be immediately re- ees leave the regulated area. Following
placed. showering, such employees however
534
must then change into street clothing on the floor or horizontal working sur-
in clean change areas provided by the face.
employer which otherwise meet the re- (ii) The area must be of sufficient
quirements of this section. size as to accommodate cleaning of
(ii) Decontamination area entry proce- equipment and removing personal pro-
dures. The employer shall ensure that tective equipment without spreading
employees: contamination beyond the area (as de-
(A) Enter the decontamination area termined by visible accumulations).
through the clean room; (iii) Work clothing must be cleaned
(B) Remove and deposit street cloth- with a HEPA vacuum before it is re-
ing within a locker provided for their moved.
use; and (iv) All equipment and surfaces of
(C) Put on protective clothing and containers filled with ACM must be
respiratory protection before leaving cleaned prior to removing them from
the clean room. the equipment room or area.
(D) Before entering the regulated (v) The employer shall ensure that
area, the employer shall ensure that employees enter and exit the regulated
employees pass through the equipment area through the equipment room or
room. area.
(iii) Decontamination area exit proce- (3) Requirements for Class IV work.
dures. The employer shall ensure that: Employers shall ensure that employees
(A) Before leaving the regulated area, performing Class IV work within a reg-
employees shall remove all gross con- ulated area comply with the hygiene
tamination and debris from their pro- practice required of employees per-
tective clothing. forming work which has a higher clas-
(B) Employees shall remove their sification within that regulated area.
protective clothing in the equipment Otherwise employers of employees
room and deposit the clothing in la- cleaning up debris and material which
beled impermeable bags or containers. is TSI or surfacing ACM or identified
(C) Employees shall not remove their as PACM shall provide decontamina-
respirators in the equipment room. tion facilities for such employees
(D) Employees shall shower prior to which are required by paragraph (j)(2)
entering the clean room. of this section.
(E) After showering, employees shall (4) Smoking in work areas. The em-
enter the clean room before changing ployer shall ensure that employees do
into street clothes. not smoke in work areas where they
(iv) Lunch Areas. Whenever food or are occupationally exposed to asbestos
beverages are consumed at the work- because of activities in that work area.
site where employees are performing (k) Communication of hazards—(1)
Class I asbestos work, the employer Hazard communication. (i) This section
shall provide lunch areas in which the applies to the communication of infor-
airborne concentrations of asbestos are mation concerning asbestos hazards in
below the permissible exposure limit construction activities to facilitate
and/or excursion limit. compliance with this standard. Most
(2) Requirements for Class I work in- asbestos-related construction activi-
volving less than 25 linear or 10 square ties involve previously installed build-
feet of TSI or surfacing ACM and ing materials. Building owners often
PACM, and for Class II and Class III as- are the only and/or best sources of in-
bestos work operations where expo- formation concerning them. Therefore,
sures exceed a PEL or where there is they, along with employers of poten-
no negative exposure assessment pro- tially exposed employees, are assigned
duced before the operation. specific information conveying and re-
(i) The employer shall establish an tention duties under this section. In-
equipment room or area that is adja- stalled Asbestos Containing Building
cent to the regulated area for the de- Material. Employers and building own-
contamination of employees and their ers shall identify TSI and sprayed or
equipment which is contaminated with troweled on surfacing materials in
asbestos which shall consist of an area buildings as asbestos-containing, un-
covered by an impermeable drop cloth less they determine in compliance with
535
paragraph (k)(5) of this section that (C) On multi-employer worksites, all
the material is not asbestos-con- employers of employees who will be
taining. Asphalt and vinyl flooring ma- performing work within or adjacent to
terial installed no later than 1980 must areas containing such materials;
also be considered as asbestos con- (D) Tenants who will occupy areas
taining unless the employer, pursuant containing such material.
to paragraph (g)(8)(i)(I) of this section (3) Duties of employers whose em-
determines that it is not asbestos-con- ployees perform work subject to this
taining. If the employer/building owner standard in or adjacent to areas con-
has actual knowledge, or should have taining ACM and PACM. Building/facil-
known through the exercise of due dili- ity owners whose employees perform
gence, that other materials are asbes-
such work shall comply with these pro-
tos-containing, they too must be treat-
visions to the extent applicable.
ed as such. When communicating infor-
mation to employees pursuant to this (i) Before work in areas containing
standard, owners and employers shall ACM and PACM is begun; employers
identify ‘‘PACM’’ as ACM. Additional shall identify the presence, location,
requirements relating to communica- and quantity of ACM, and/or PACM
tion of asbestos work on multi-em- therein pursuant to paragraph (k)(1)(i)
ployer worksites are set out in para- of this section.
graph (d) of this section. (ii) Before work under this standard
(ii) The employer shall include asbes- is performed employers of employees
tos in the program established to com- who will perform such work shall in-
ply with the Hazard Communication form the following persons of the loca-
Standard (HCS) (§ 1910.1200). The em- tion and quantity of ACM and/or PACM
ployer shall ensure that each employee present in the area and the precautions
has access to labels on containers of as- to be taken to insure that airborne as-
bestos and safety data sheets, and is bestos is confined to the area.
trained in accordance with the provi- (A) Owners of the building/facility;
sions of HCS and paragraphs (k)(9) and (B) Employees who will perform such
(10) of this section. The employer shall work and employers of employees who
provide information on at least the fol- work and/or will be working in adja-
lowing hazards: Cancer and lung ef- cent areas.
fects. (iii) Within 10 days of the completion
(2) Duties of building and facility own- of such work, the employer whose em-
ers. (i) Before work subject to this ployees have performed work subject to
standard is begun, building and facility this standard, shall inform the build-
owners shall determine the presence, ing/facility owner and employers of
location, and quantity of ACM and/or
employees who will be working in the
PACM at the work site pursuant to
area of the current location and quan-
paragraph (k)(1)(i) of this section.
tity of PACM and/or ACM remaining in
(ii) Building and/or facility owners
the area and final monitoring results,
shall notify the following persons of
if any.
the presence, location and quantity of
ACM or PACM, at the work sites in (4) In addition to the above require-
their buildings and facilities. Notifica- ments, all employers who discover
tion either shall be in writing, or shall ACM and/or PACM on a worksite shall
consist of a personal communication convey information concerning the
between the owner and the person to presence, location and quantity of such
whom notification must be given or newly discovered ACM and/or PACM to
their authorized representatives: the owner and to other employers of
(A) Prospective employers applying employees working at the work site,
or bidding for work whose employees within 24 hours of the discovery.
reasonably can be expected to work in (5) Criteria to rebut the designation
or adjacent to areas containing such of installed material as PACM. (i) At
material; any time, an employer and/or building
(B) Employees of the owner who will owner may demonstrate, for purposes
work in or adjacent to areas containing of this standard, that PACM does not
such material: contain asbestos. Building owners and/
536
or employers are not required to com- the extent feasible, that employees
municate information about the pres- who come in contact with these signs
ence of building material for which can comprehend them. Means to ensure
such a demonstration pursuant to the employee comprehension may include
requirements of paragraph (k)(5)(ii) of the use of foreign languages, picto-
this section has been made. However, graphs, graphics, and awareness train-
in all such cases, the information, data ing.
and analysis supporting the determina- (7) Signs. (i) Warning signs that de-
tion that PACM does not contain as- marcate the regulated area shall be
bestos, shall be retained pursuant to provided and displayed at each location
paragraph (n) of this section. where a regulated area is required to be
(ii) An employer or owner may dem- established by paragraph (e) of this sec-
onstrate that PACM does not contain tion. Signs shall be posted at such a
more than 1% asbestos by the fol- distance from such a location that an
lowing: (A) Having a completed inspec- employee may read the signs and take
tion conducted pursuant to the require- necessary protective steps before en-
ments of AHERA (40 CFR part 763, sub- tering the area marked by the signs.
part E) which demonstrates that the (ii) (A) The warning signs required by
material is not ACM; or paragraph (k)(7) of this section shall
(B) Performing tests of the material bear the following information.
containing PACM which demonstrate
that no ACM is present in the material. DANGER
ASBESTOS
Such tests shall include analysis of
MAY CAUSE CANCER
bulk samples collected in the manner
CAUSES DAMAGE TO LUNGS
described in 40 CFR 763.86. The tests,
AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY
evaluation and sample collection shall
be conducted by an accredited inspec- (B) In addition, where the use of res-
tor or by a CIH. Analysis of samples pirators and protective clothing is re-
shall be performed by persons or lab- quired in the regulated area under this
oratories with proficiency dem- section, the warning signs shall include
onstrated by current successful partici- the following:
pation in a nationally recognized test-
ing program such as the National Vol- WEAR RESPIRATORY PROTECTION AND
untary Laboratory Accreditation Pro- PROTECTIVE CLOTHING IN THIS AREA
gram (NVLAP) or the National Insti-
tute for Standards and Technology (C) Prior to June 1, 2016, employers
(NIST) or the Round Robin for bulk may use the following legend in lieu of
samples administered by the American that specified in paragraph (k)(7)(ii)(A)
Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA) of this section:
or an equivalent nationally-recognized DANGER
round robin testing program. ASBESTOS
(iii) The employer and/or building CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD
owner may demonstrate that flooring AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY
material including associated mastic
and backing does not contain asbestos, (D) Prior to June 1, 2016, employers
by a determination of an industrial hy- may use the following legend in lieu of
gienist based upon recognized analyt- that specified in paragraph (k)(7)(ii)(B)
ical techniques showing that the mate- of this section:
rial is not ACM. RESPIRATORS AND PROTECTIVE
(6) At the entrance to mechanical CLOTHING ARE REQUIRED IN THIS AREA
rooms/areas in which employees rea-
sonably can be expected to enter and (iii) The employer shall ensure that
which contain ACM and/or PACM, the employees working in and contiguous
building owner shall post signs which to regulated areas comprehend the
identify the material which is present, warning signs required to be posted by
its location, and appropriate work paragraph (k)(7)(i) of this section.
practices which, if followed, will ensure Means to ensure employee comprehen-
that ACM and/or PACM will not be dis- sion may include the use of foreign lan-
turbed. The employer shall ensure, to guages, pictographs and graphics.
537
(8) Labels. (i) Labels shall be affixed tain PACM and/or ACM. The employer
to all products containing asbestos and shall attach such labels in areas where
to all containers containing such prod- they will clearly be noticed by employ-
ucts, including waste containers. ees who are likely to be exposed, such
Where feasible, installed asbestos prod- as at the entrance to mechanical room/
ucts shall contain a visible label. areas. Signs required by paragraph
(ii) The employer shall ensure that (k)(6) of this section may be posted in
such labels comply with paragraphs (k) lieu of labels so long as they contain
of this section. information required for labelling. The
(iii) The employer shall ensure that employer shall ensure, to the extent
labels of bags or containers of protec- feasible, that employees who come in
tive clothing and equipment, scrap, contact with these signs or labels can
waste, and debris containing asbestos comprehend them. Means to ensure em-
fibers bear the following information: ployee comprehension may include the
DANGER use of foreign languages, pictographs,
CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBERS graphics, and awareness training.
MAY CAUSE CANCER (9) Employee Information and Training.
CAUSES DAMAGE TO LUNGS (i) The employer shall train each em-
DO NOT BREATHE DUST ployee who is likely to be exposed in
AVOID CREATING DUST excess of a PEL, and each employee
(iv) (A) Prior to June 1, 2015, employ- who performs Class I through IV asbes-
ers may include the following informa- tos operations, in accordance with the
tion on raw materials, mixtures or la- requirements of this section. Such
bels of bags or containers of protective training shall be conducted at no cost
clothing and equipment, scrap, waste, to the employee. The employer shall
and debris containing asbestos fibers in institute a training program and en-
lieu of the labeling requirements in sure employee participation in the pro-
paragraphs (k)(8)(ii) and (k)(8)(iii) of gram.
this section: (ii) Training shall be provided prior
DANGER
to or at the time of initial assignment
CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBERS and at least annually thereafter.
AVOID CREATING DUST (iii) Training for Class I operations
CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD and for Class II operations that require
(B) Labels shall also contain a warn- the use of critical barriers (or equiva-
ing statement against breathing asbes- lent isolation methods) and/or negative
tos fibers. pressure enclosures under this section
(v) [Reserved] shall be the equivalent in curriculum,
(vi) The provisions for labels required training method and length to the EPA
by paragraphs (k)(8)(i) through Model Accreditation Plan (MAP) asbes-
(k)(8)(iii) of this section do not apply tos abatement workers training (40
where: CFR part 763, subpart E, appendix C).
(A) Asbestos fibers have been modi- (iv) Training for other Class II work.
fied by a bonding agent, coating, bind- (A) For work with asbestos con-
er, or other material, provided that the taining roofing materials, flooring ma-
manufacturer can demonstrate that, terials, siding materials, ceiling tiles,
during any reasonably foreseeable use, or transite panels, training shall in-
handling, storage, disposal, processing, clude at a minimum all the elements
or transportation, no airborne con- included in paragraph (k)(9)(viii) of
centrations of asbestos fibers in excess this section and in addition, the spe-
of the permissible exposure limit and/ cific work practices and engineering
or excursion limit will be released, or controls set forth in paragraph (g) of
(B) Asbestos is present in a product this section which specifically relate to
in concentrations less than 1.0 percent. that category. Such course shall in-
(vii) When a building owner or em- clude ‘‘hands-on’’ training and shall
ployer identifies previously installed take at least 8 hours.
PACM and/or ACM, labels or signs shall (B) An employee who works with
be affixed or posted so that employees more than one of the categories of ma-
will be notified of what materials con- terial specified in paragraph
538
(k)(9)(iv)(A) of this section shall re- recognition of damage, deterioration,
ceive training in the work practices ap- and delamination of asbestos con-
plicable to each category of material taining building materials. Such course
that the employee removes and each shall take at least 2 hours.
removal method that the employee (vii) Training for employees who are
uses. likely to be exposed in excess of the
(C) For Class II operations not in- PEL and who are not otherwise re-
volving the categories of material spec- quired to be trained under paragraph
ified in paragraph (k)(9)(iv)(A) of this (k)(9)(iii) through (vi) of this section,
section, training shall be provided shall meet the requirements of para-
which shall include at a minimum all graph (k)(9)(viii) of this section.
the elements included in paragraph (viii) The training program shall be
(k)(9)(viii) of this section and in addi- conducted in a manner that the em-
tion, the specific work practices and ployee is able to understand. In addi-
engineering controls set forth in para- tion to the content required by provi-
graph (g) of this section which specifi- sions in paragraphs (k)(9)(iii) through
cally relate to the category of material (vi) of this section, the employer shall
being removed, and shall include ensure that each such employee is in-
‘‘hands-on’’ training in the work prac- formed of the following:
tices applicable to each category of (A) Methods of recognizing asbestos,
material that the employee removes including the requirement in paragraph
and each removal method that the em- (k)(1) of this section to presume that
ployee uses. certain building materials contain as-
(v) Training for Class III employees bestos;
shall be consistent with EPA require- (B) The health effects associated with
ments for training of local education asbestos exposure;
agency maintenance and custodial staff (C) The relationship between smok-
as set forth at 40 CFR 763.92(a)(2). Such ing and asbestos in producing lung can-
a course shall also include ‘‘hands-on’’ cer;
training and shall take at least 16 (D) The nature of operations that
hours. Exception: For Class III oper- could result in exposure to asbestos,
ations for which the competent person the importance of necessary protective
determines that the EPA curriculum controls to minimize exposure includ-
does not adequately cover the training ing, as applicable, engineering con-
needed to perform that activity, train- trols, work practices, respirators,
ing shall include as a minimum all the housekeeping procedures, hygiene fa-
elements included in paragraph cilities, protective clothing, decon-
(k)(9)(viii) of this section and in addi- tamination procedures, emergency pro-
tion, the specific work practices and cedures, and waste disposal procedures,
engineering controls set forth in para- and any necessary instruction in the
graph (g) of this section which specifi- use of these controls and procedures;
cally relate to that activity, and shall where Class III and IV work will be or
include ‘‘hands-on’’ training in the is performed, the contents of EPA 20T–
work practices applicable to each cat- 2003, ‘‘Managing Asbestos In-Place’’
egory of material that the employee July 1990 or its equivalent in content;
disturbs. (E) The purpose, proper use, fitting
(vi) Training for employees per- instructions, and limitations of res-
forming Class IV operations shall be pirators as required by 29 CFR 1910.134;
consistent with EPA requirements for (F) The appropriate work practices
training of local education agency for performing the asbestos job;
maintenance and custodial staff as set (G) Medical surveillance program re-
forth at 40 CFR 763.92(a)(1). Such a quirements;
course shall include available informa- (H) The content of this standard in-
tion concerning the locations of ther- cluding appendices;
mal system insulation and surfacing (I) The names, addresses and phone
ACM/PACM, and asbestos-containing numbers of public health organizations
flooring material, or flooring material which provide information, materials
where the absence of asbestos has not and/or conduct programs concerning
yet been certified; and instruction in smoking cessation. The employer may
539
distribute the list of such organiza- speeds lower than 300 rpm and wet
tions contained in appendix J to this methods.
section, to comply with this require- (iv) Burnishing or dry buffing may be
ment; and performed only on flooring which has
(J) The requirements for posting sufficient finish so that the pad cannot
signs and affixing labels and the mean- contact the flooring material.
ing of the required legends for such (4) Waste and debris and accom-
signs and labels. panying dust in an area containing ac-
(10) Access to training materials. (i) cessible thermal system insulation or
The employer shall make readily avail- surfacing ACM/PACM or visibly dete-
able to affected employees without riorated ACM:
cost, written materials relating to the (i) Shall not be dusted or swept dry,
employee training program, including or vacuumed without using a HEPA fil-
a copy of this regulation. ter;
(ii) The employer shall provide to the
(ii) Shall be promptly cleaned up and
Assistant Secretary and the Director,
disposed of in leak tight containers.
upon request, all information and
training materials relating to the em- (m) Medical surveillance. (1) General—
ployee information and training pro- (i) Employees covered. (A) The employer
gram. shall institute a medical surveillance
(iii) The employer shall inform all program for all employees who for a
employees concerning the availability combined total of 30 or more days per
of self-help smoking cessation program year are engaged in Class I, II and III
material. Upon employee request, the work or are exposed at or above a per-
employer shall distribute such mate- missible exposure limit. For purposes
rial, consisting of NIH Publication No, of this paragraph, any day in which a
89–1647, or equivalent self-help mate- worker engages in Class II or Class III
rial, which is approved or published by operations or a combination thereof on
a public health organization listed in intact material for one hour or less
appendix J to this section. (taking into account the entire time
(l) Housekeeping—(1) Vacuuming. spent on the removal operation, includ-
Where vacuuming methods are se- ing cleanup) and, while doing so, ad-
lected, HEPA filtered vacuuming heres fully to the work practices speci-
equipment must be used. The equip- fied in this standard, shall not be
ment shall be used and emptied in a counted.
manner that minimizes the reentry of (B) For employees otherwise required
asbestos into the workplace. by this standard to wear a negative
(2) Waste disposal. Asbestos waste, pressure respirator, employers shall en-
scrap, debris, bags, containers, equip- sure employees are physically able to
ment, and contaminated clothing con- perform the work and use the equip-
signed for disposal shall be collected ment. This determination shall be
and disposed of in sealed, labeled, im- made under the supervision of a physi-
permeable bags or other closed, la- cian.
beled, impermeable containers except (ii) Examination. (A) The employer
in roofing operations, where the proce- shall ensure that all medical examina-
dures specified in paragraph (g)(8)(ii) of tions and procedures are performed by
this section apply. or under the supervision of a licensed
(3) Care of asbestos-containing flooring physician, and are provided at no cost
material. (i) All vinyl and asphalt floor- to the employee and at a reasonable
ing material shall be maintained in ac- time and place.
cordance with this paragraph unless (B) Persons other than such licensed
the building/facility owner dem- physicians who administer the pul-
onstrates, pursuant to paragraph monary function testing required by
(g)(8)(i)(I) of this section that the floor- this section shall complete a training
ing does not contain asbestos. course in spirometry sponsored by an
(ii) Sanding of flooring material is appropriate academic or professional
prohibited. institution.
(iii) Stripping of finishes shall be (2) Medical examinations and consulta-
conducted using low abrasion pads at tions. (i) Frequency. The employer
540
shall make available medical examina- (D) Any other examinations or tests
tions and consultations to each em- deemed necessary by the examining
ployee covered under paragraph physician.
(m)(1)(i) of this section on the fol- (3) Information provided to the physi-
lowing schedules: cian. The employer shall provide the
(A) Prior to assignment of the em- following information to the exam-
ployee to an area where negative-pres- ining physician:
sure respirators are worn; (i) A copy of this standard and Ap-
(B) When the employee is assigned to pendices D, E, and I to this section;
an area where exposure to asbestos (ii) A description of the affected em-
may be at or above the permissible ex- ployee’s duties as they relate to the
employee’s exposure;
posure limit for 30 or more days per
(iii) The employee’s representative
year, or engage in Class I, II, or III
exposure level or anticipated exposure
work for a combined total of 30 or more
level;
days per year, a medical examination (iv) A description of any personal
must be given within 10 working days protective and respiratory equipment
following the thirtieth day of exposure; used or to be used; and
(C) And at least annually thereafter. (v) Information from previous med-
(D) If the examining physician deter- ical examinations of the affected em-
mines that any of the examinations ployee that is not otherwise available
should be provided more frequently to the examining physician.
than specified, the employer shall pro- (4) Physician’s written opinion. (i) The
vide such examinations to affected em- employer shall obtain a written opin-
ployees at the frequencies specified by ion from the examining physician. This
the physician. written opinion shall contain the re-
(E) Exception: No medical examina- sults of the medical examination and
tion is required of any employee if ade- shall include:
quate records show that the employee (A) The physician’s opinion as to
has been examined in accordance with whether the employee has any detected
this paragraph within the past 1-year medical conditions that would place
period. the employee at an increased risk of
(ii) Content. Medical examinations material health impairment from expo-
made available pursuant to paragraphs sure to asbestos;
(m)(2)(i)(A) through (m)(2)(i)(C) of this (B) Any recommended limitations on
section shall include: the employee or on the use of personal
(A) A medical and work history with protective equipment such as res-
special emphasis directed to the pul- pirators; and
monary, cardiovascular, and gastro- (C) A statement that the employee
has been informed by the physician of
intestinal systems.
the results of the medical examination
(B) On initial examination, the
and of any medical conditions that
standardized questionnaire contained may result from asbestos exposure.
in part 1 of appendix D to this section, (D) A statement that the employee
and, on annual examination, the abbre- has been informed by the physician of
viated standardized questionnaire con- the increased risk of lung cancer at-
tained in part 2 of appendix D to this tributable to the combined effect of
section. smoking and asbestos exposure.
(C) A physical examination directed (ii) The employer shall instruct the
to the pulmonary and gastrointestinal physician not to reveal in the written
systems, including a chest roentgeno- opinion given to the employer specific
gram to be administered at the discre- findings or diagnoses unrelated to oc-
tion of the physician, and pulmonary cupational exposure to asbestos.
function tests of forced vital capacity (iii) The employer shall provide a
(FVC) and forced expiratory volume at copy of the physician’s written opinion
one second (FEV(1)). Interpretation to the affected employee within 30 days
and classification of chest shall be con- from its receipt.
ducted in accordance with appendix E (n) Recordkeeping. (1) Objective data
to this section. relied on pursuant to paragraph (f) to
541
this section. (i) Where the employer (iii) The employer shall maintain
has relied on objective data that dem- this record for at least thirty (30)
onstrates that products made from or years, in accordance with 29 CFR
containing asbestos or the activity in- 1910.33.
volving such products or material are (3) Medical surveillance. (i) The em-
not capable of releasing fibers of asbes- ployer shall establish and maintain an
tos in concentrations at or above the accurate record for each employee sub-
permissible exposure limit and/or ex- ject to medical surveillance by para-
cursion limit under the expected condi- graph (m) of this section, in accordance
tions of processing, use, or handling to with 29 CFR 1910.33.
satisfy the requirements of paragraph (ii) The record shall include at least
(f), the employer shall establish and the following information:
maintain an accurate record of objec- (A) The name and social security
tive data reasonably relied upon in sup- number of the employee;
port of the exemption. (B) A copy of the employee’s medical
(ii) The record shall include at least examination results, including the
the following information: medical history, questionnaire re-
(A) The product qualifying for ex- sponses, results of any tests, and physi-
emption; cian’s recommendations.
(B) The source of the objective data; (C) Physician’s written opinions;
(C) The testing protocol, results of (D) Any employee medical com-
testing, and/or analysis of the material plaints related to exposure to asbestos;
for the release of asbestos; and
(D) A description of the operation ex- (E) A copy of the information pro-
empted and how the data support the vided to the physician as required by
exemption; and paragraph (m) of this section.
(E) Other data relevant to the oper- (iii) The employer shall ensure that
ations, materials, processing, or em- this record is maintained for the dura-
ployee exposures covered by the ex- tion of employment plus thirty (30)
emption. years, in accordance with 29 CFR
1910.33.
(iii) The employer shall maintain
(4) Training records. The employer
this record for the duration of the em-
shall maintain all employee training
ployer’s reliance upon such objective
records for one (1) year beyond the last
data.
date of employment by that employer.
(2) Exposure measurements. (i) The em-
(5) Data to Rebut PACM. Where the
ployer shall keep an accurate record of
building owner and employer have re-
all measurements taken to monitor
lied on data to demonstrate that PACM
employee exposure to asbestos as pre-
is not asbestos-containing, such data
scribed in paragraph (f) of this section.
shall be maintained for as long as they
NOTE: The employer may utilize the
are relied upon to rebut the presump-
services of competent organizations
tion.
such as industry trade associations and
(6) Records of required notifications.
employee associations to maintain the
Where the building owner has commu-
records required by this section.
nicated and received information con-
(ii) This record shall include at least cerning the identification, location and
the following information: quantity of ACM and PACM, written
(A) The date of measurement; records of such notifications and their
(B) The operation involving exposure content shall be maintained by the
to asbestos that is being monitored; building owner for the duration of own-
(C) Sampling and analytical methods ership and shall be transferred to suc-
used and evidence of their accuracy; cessive owners of such buildings/facili-
(D) Number, duration, and results of ties.
samples taken; (7) Availability. (i) The employer,
(E) Type of protective devices worn, upon written request, shall make all
if any; and records required to be maintained by
(F) Name, social security number, this section available to the Assistant
and exposure of the employees whose Secretary and the Director for exam-
exposures are represented. ination and copying.
542
(ii) The employer must comply with bags wear respirators and protective
the requirements concerning avail- clothing as required by paragraphs (h)
ability of records set forth in 29 CFR and (i) of this section;
1910.1020. (F) Ensure through on-site super-
(8) Transfer of records. The employer vision, that employees set up, use, and
must comply with the requirements remove engineering controls, use work
concerning transfer of records set forth practices and personal protective
in 29 CFR 1910.1020(h). equipment in compliance with all re-
(o) Competent person. (1) General. On quirements;
all construction worksites covered by (G) Ensure that employees use the
this standard, the employer shall des- hygiene facilities and observe the de-
ignate a competent person, having the
contamination procedures specified in
qualifications and authorities for en-
paragraph (j) of this section;
suring worker safety and health re-
quired by subpart C, General Safety (H) Ensure that through on-site in-
and Health Provisions for Construction spection, engineering controls are func-
(29 CFR 1926.20 through 1926.32). tioning properly and employees are
(2) Required inspections by the com- using proper work practices; and,
petent person. Section 1926.20(b)(2) (I) Ensure that notification require-
which requires health and safety pre- ment in paragraph (k) of this section
vention programs to provide for fre- are met.
quent and regular inspections of the (ii) [Reserved]
job sites, materials, and equipment to (4) Training for the competent person.
be made by competent persons, is in- (i) For Class I and II asbestos work the
corporated. competent person shall be trained in
(3) Additional inspections. In addition, all aspects of asbestos removal and
the competent person shall make fre- handling, including: abatement, instal-
quent and regular inspections of the lation, removal and handling; the con-
job sites, in order to perform the duties tents of this standard; the identifica-
set out below in paragraph (o)(3)(i) of tion of asbestos; removal procedures,
this section. For Class I jobs, on-site where appropriate; and other practices
inspections shall be made at least once for reducing the hazard. Such training
during each work shift, and at any shall be obtained in a comprehensive
time at employee request. For Class II, course for supervisors that meets the
III, and IV jobs, on-site inspections criteria of EPA’s Model Accreditation
shall be made at intervals sufficient to
Plan (40 CFR part 763, subpart E, ap-
assess whether conditions have
pendix C), such as a course conducted
changed, and at any reasonable time at
by an EPA-approved or state-approved
employee request.
training provider, certified by EPA or a
(i) On all worksites where employees
state, or a course equivalent in strin-
are engaged in Class I or II asbestos
work, the competent person designated gency, content, and length.
in accordance with paragraph (e)(6) of (ii) For Class III and IV asbestos
this section shall perform or supervise work, the competent person shall be
the following duties, as applicable: trained in aspects of asbestos handling
(A) Set up the regulated area, enclo- appropriate for the nature of the work,
sure, or other containment; to include procedures for setting up
(B) Ensure (by on-site inspection) the glove bags and mini-enclosures, prac-
integrity of the enclosure or contain- tices for reducing asbestos exposures,
ment; use of wet methods, the contents of
(C) Set up procedures to control this standard, and the identification of
entry to and exit from the enclosure asbestos. Such training shall include
and/or area; successful completion of a course that
(D) Supervise all employee exposure is consistent with EPA requirements
monitoring required by this section for training of local education agency
and ensure that it is conducted as re- maintenance and custodial staff as set
quired by paragraph (f) of this section; forth at 40 CFR 763.92(a)(2), or its
(E) Ensure that employees working equivalent in stringency, content and
within the enclosure and/or using glove length. Competent persons for Class III
543
and IV work, may also be trained pur- its surface (e.g., expanded polystyrene) can-
suant to the requirements of paragraph not be used because such material can cause
(o)(4)(i) of this section. loss of fibers to the sides of the cassette.
(p) Appendices. (1) Appendices A, C, D, 6. Calibrate each personal sampling pump
before and after use with a representative fil-
and E to this section are incorporated ter cassette installed between the pump and
as part of this section and the contents the calibration devices.
of these appendices are mandatory. 7. Personal samples shall be taken in the
(2) Appendices B, F, H, I, J, and K to ‘‘breathing zone’’ of the employee (i.e., at-
this section are informational and are tached to or near the collar or lapel near the
not intended to create any additional worker’s face).
obligations not otherwise imposed or 8. Fiber counts shall be made by positive
to detract from any existing obliga- phase contrast using a microscope with an 8
tions. to 10 X eyepiece and a 40 to 45 X objective for
a total magnification of approximately 400 X
APPENDIX A TO § 1926.1101—OSHA REFERENCE and a numerical aperture of 0.65 to 0.75. The
METHOD—MANDATORY microscope shall also be fitted with a green
or blue filter.
This mandatory appendix specifies the pro-
9. The microscope shall be fitted with a
cedure for analyzing air samples for asbestos
Walton-Beckett eyepiece graticule cali-
and specifies quality control procedures that
brated for a field diameter of 100 microm-
must be implemented by laboratories per-
forming the analysis. The sampling and ana- eters (±2 micrometers).
lytical methods described below represent 10. The phase-shift detection limit of the
the elements of the available monitoring microscope shall be about 3 degrees meas-
methods (such as appendix B of this regula- ured using the HSE phase shift test slide as
tion, the most current version of the OSHA outlined below.
method ID–160, or the most current version a. Place the test slide on the microscope
of the NIOSH Method 7400). All employers stage and center it under the phase objec-
who are required to conduct air monitoring tive.
under paragraph (f) of the standard are re- b. Bring the blocks of grooved lines into
quired to utilize analytical laboratories that focus.
use this procedure, or an equivalent method, NOTE: The slide consists of seven sets of
for collecting and analyzing samples. grooved lines (ca. 20 grooves to each block)
Sampling and Analytical Procedure in descending order of visibility from sets 1
to 7, seven being the least visible. The re-
1. The sampling medium for air samples quirements for asbestos counting are that
shall be mixed cellulose ester filter mem- the microscope optics must resolve the
branes. These shall be designated by the grooved lines in set 3 completely, although
manufacturer as suitable for asbestos count- they may appear somewhat faint, and that
ing. See below for rejection of blanks. the grooved lines in sets 6 and 7 must be in-
2. The preferred collection device shall be visible. Sets 4 and 5 must be at least par-
the 25-mm diameter cassette with an open- tially visible but may vary slightly in visi-
faced 50-mm electrically conductive exten- bility between microscopes. A microscope
sion cowl. The 37-mm cassette may be used if that fails to meet these requirements has ei-
necessary but only if written justification ther too low or too high a resolution to be
for the need to use the 37-mm filter cassette used for asbestos counting.
accompanies the sample results in the em-
ployee’s exposure monitoring record. Do not c. If the image deteriorates, clean and ad-
reuse or reload cassettes for asbestos sample just the microscope optics. If the problem
collection. persists, cosult the microscope manufac-
3. An air flow rate between 0.5 liter/min turer.
and 2.5 liters/min shall be selected for the 25/ 11. Each set of samples taken will include
mm cassette. If the 37-mm cassette is used, 10% field blanks or a minimum of 2 field
an air flow rate between 1 liter/min and 2.5 blanks. These blanks must come from the
liters/min shall be selected. same lot as the filters used for sample collec-
4. Where possible, a sufficient air volume tion. The field blank results shall be aver-
for each air sample shall be collected to aged and subtracted from the analytical re-
yield between 100 and 1,300 fibers per square sults before reporting. A set consists of any
millimeter on the membrane filter. If a filter sample or group of samples for which an
darkens in appearance or if loose dust is seen evaluation for this standard must be made.
on the filter, a second sample shall be start- Any samples represented by a field blank
ed. having a fiber count in excess of the detec-
5. Ship the samples in a rigid container tion limit of the method being used shall be
with sufficient packing material to prevent rejected.
dislodging the collected fibers. Packing ma- 12. The samples shall be mounted by the
terial that has a high electrostatic charge on acetone/triacetin method or a method with
544
an equivalent index of refraction and similar microscopist and between microscopists. In a
clarity. company with more than one laboratory, the
13. Observe the following counting rules. program shall include all laboratories, and
a. Count only fibers equal to or longer than shall also evaluate the laboratory-to-labora-
5 micrometers. Measure the length of curved tory variability.
fibers along the curve. 2a. Interlaboratory program. Each labora-
b. In the absence of other information, tory analyzing asbestos samples for compli-
count all particles as asbestos, that have a ance determination shall implement an
length-to-width ratio (aspect ratio) of 3:1 or interlaboratory quality assurance program
greater. that, as a minimum, includes participation
c. Fibers lying entirely within the bound- of at least two other independent labora-
ary of the Walton-Beckett graticule field tories. Each laboratory shall participate in
shall receive a count of 1. Fibers crossing the round robin testing at least once every 6
boundary once, having one end within the months with at least all the other labora-
circle, shall receive the count of one half tories in its interlaboratory quality assur-
(1⁄2). Do not count any fiber that crosses the ance group. Each laboratory shall submit
graticule boundary more than once. Reject slides typical of its own workload for use in
and do not count any other fibers even this program. The round robin shall be de-
though they may be visible outside the grati- signed and results analyzed using appro-
cule area. priate statistical methodology.
d. Count bundles of fibers as one fiber un- b. All laboratories should also participate
less individual fibers can be identified by ob- in a national sample testing scheme such as
serving both ends of an individual fiber. the Proficiency Analytical Testing Program
e. Count enough graticule fields to yield (PAT), or the Asbestos Registry sponsored by
100 fibers. Count a minimum of 20 fields; stop the American Industrial Hygiene Association
counting at 100 fields regardless of fiber (AIHA).
count. 3. All individuals performing asbestos anal-
14. Blind recounts shall be conducted at ysis must have taken the NIOSH course for
the rate of 10 percent. sampling and evaluating airborne asbestos
dust or an equivalent course.
Quality Control Procedures
4. When the use of different microscopes
1. Intralaboratory program. Each labora- contributes to differences between counters
tory and/or each company with more than and laboratories, the effect of the different
one microscopist counting slides shall estab- microscope shall be evaluated and the micro-
lish a statistically designed quality assur- scope shall be replaced, as necessary.
ance program involving blind recounts and 5. Current results of these quality assur-
comparisons between microscopists to mon- ance programs shall be posted in each lab-
itor the variability of counting by each oratory to keep the microscopists informed.
APPENDIX B TO § 1926.1101—SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS (NON-MANDATORY)

Matrix Air:
OSHA Permissible Exposure Limits:
Time Weighted Average ......................................................................................................................... 0.1 fiber/cc
Excursion Level (30 minutes) ................................................................................................................. 1.0 fiber/cc
Collection Procedure:
A known volume of air is drawn through a 25-mm diameter cassette containing a mixed-cellulose ester filter. The cassette must
be equipped with an electrically conductive 50-mm extension cowl. The sampling time and rate are chosen to give a fiber density
of between 100 to 1,300 fibers/mm2 on the filter.
Recommended Sampling Rate ..................................................................................................................... 0.5 to 5.0 liters/minute

(L/min)
Recommended Air Volumes:
Minimum ................................................................................................................................................. 25 L
Maximum ................................................................................................................................................ 2,400 L
Analytical Procedure: 1. Introduction

A portion of the sample filter is cleared
and prepared for asbestos fiber counting by This method describes the collection of
Phase Contrast Microscopy (PCM) at 400X. airborne asbestos fibers using calibrated
Commercial manufacturers and products sampling pumps with mixed-cellulose ester
mentioned in this method are for descriptive (MCE) filters and analysis by phase contrast
use only and do not constitute endorsements microscopy (PCM). Some terms used are
by USDOL-OSHA. Similar products from unique to this method and are defined below:
other sources can be substituted.
545
Asbestos: A term for naturally occurring fi- of total dust with the counts expressed as
brous minerals. Asbestos includes chrysotile, million particles per cubic foot. The British
crocidolite, amosite (cummingtonite- Asbestos Research Council recommended fil-
grunerite asbestos), tremolite asbestos, acter membrane counting in 1969. In July 1969,
tinolite asbestos, anthophyllite asbestos, and the Bureau of Occupational Safety and
any of these minerals that have been chemi- Health published a filter membrane method
cally treated and/or altered. The precise for counting asbestos fibers in the United
chemical formulation of each species will States. This method was refined by NIOSH
vary with the location from which it was and published as P & CAM 239. On May 29,
mined. Nominal compositions are listed: 1971, OSHA specified filter membrane sam-
Chrysotile .......... Mg3 Si2 O5(OH)4 pling with phase contrast counting for eval-
Crocidolite ......... Na2 Fe32+ Fe23+ Si8 uation of asbestos exposures at work sites in
O22(OH)2 the United States. The use of this technique
Amosite ............. (Mg,Fe)7 Si8 O22(OH)2 was again required by OSHA in 1986. Phase
Tremolite-actin- contrast microscopy has continued to be the
olite ................ Ca2(Mg,Fe)5 Si8 O22(OH)2 method of choice for the measurement of oc-
Anthophyllite .... (Mg,Fe)7 Si8 O22(OH)2 cupational exposure to asbestos.
Asbestos Fiber: A fiber of asbestos which 1.2. Principle
meets the criteria specified below for a fiber.
Aspect Ratio: The ratio of the length of a Air is drawn through a MCE filter to cap-
fiber to it’s diameter (e.g. 3:1, 5:1 aspect ra- ture airborne asbestos fibers. A wedge shaped
tios). portion of the filter is removed, placed on a
Cleavage Fragments: Mineral particles glass microscope slide and made transparent.
formed by comminution of minerals, espe- A measured area (field) is viewed by PCM.
cially those characterized by parallel sides All the fibers meeting defined criteria for as-
and a moderate aspect ratio (usually less bestos are counted and considered a measure
than 20:1). of the airborne asbestos concentration.
Detection Limit: The number of fibers nec-
1.3. Advantages and Disadvantages
essary to be 95% certain that the result is
greater than zero. There are four main advantages of PCM
Differential Counting: The term applied to over other methods:
the practice of excluding certain kinds of fi- (1) The technique is specific for fibers.
bers from the fiber count because they do Phase contrast is a fiber counting technique
not appear to be asbestos. which excludes non-fibrous particles from
Fiber: A particle that is 5 µm or longer, the analysis.
with a length-to-width ratio of 3 to 1 or (2) The technique is inexpensive and does
longer. not require specialized knowledge to carry
Field: The area within the graticule circle out the analysis for total fiber counts.
that is superimposed on the microscope (3) The analysis is quick and can be per-
image. formed on-site for rapid determination of air
Set: The samples which are taken, sub- concentrations of asbestos fibers.
mitted to the laboratory, analyzed, and for (4) The technique has continuity with his-
which, interim or final result reports are torical epidemiological studies so that esti-
generated. mates of expected disease can be inferred
Tremolite, Anthophyllite, and Actinolite: The from long-term determinations of asbestos
non-asbestos form of these minerals which exposures.
meet the definition of a fiber. It includes any The main disadvantage of PCM is that it
of these minerals that have been chemically does not positively identify asbestos fibers.
treated and/or altered. Other fibers which are not asbestos may be
Walton-Beckett Graticule: An eyepiece grati- included in the count unless differential
cule specifically designed for asbestos fiber counting is performed. This requires a great
counting. It consists of a circle with a pro- deal of experience to adequately differen-
jected diameter of 100 ±2 µm (area of about tiate asbestos from non-asbestos fibers. Posi-
0.00785 mm2) with a crosshair having tic- tive identification of asbestos must be per-
marks at 3-µm intervals in one direction and formed by polarized light or electron micros-
5-µm in the orthogonal direction. There are copy techniques. A further disadvantage of
marks around the periphery of the circle to PCM is that the smallest visible fibers are
demonstrate the proper sizes and shapes of about 0.2 µm in diameter while the finest as-
fibers. This design is reproduced in Figure 1. bestos fibers may be as small as 0.02 µm in
The disk is placed in one of the microscope diameter. For some exposures, substantially
eyepieces so that the design is superimposed more fibers may be present than are actually
on the field of view. counted.
1.1. History 1.4. Workplace Exposure
Early surveys to determine asbestos expo- Asbestos is used by the construction indus-
sures were conducted using impinger counts try in such products as shingles, floor tiles,
546
asbestos cement, roofing felts, insulation the fiber distribution on the filter. A general
and acoustical products. Non-construction rule is to count at least 20 and not more than
uses include brakes, clutch facings, paper, 100 fields. The count is discontinued when 100
paints, plastics, and fabrics. One of the most fibers are counted, provided that 20 fields
significant exposures in the workplace is the have already been counted. Counting more
removal and encapsulation of asbestos in than 100 fibers results in only a small gain in
schools, public buildings, and homes. Many precision. As the total count drops below 10
workers have the potential to be exposed to fibers, an accelerated loss of precision is
asbestos during these operations. noted.
About 95% of the asbestos in commercial At this time, there is no known method to
use in the United States is chrysotile. Cro- determine the absolute accuracy of the as-
cidolite and amosite make up most of the re- bestos analysis. Results of samples prepared
mainder. Anthophyllite and tremolite or ac- through the Proficiency Analytical Testing
tinolite are likely to be encountered as con- (PAT) Program and analyzed by the OSHA-
taminants in various industrial products. SLTC showed no significant bias when com-
pared to PAT reference values. The PAT
1.5. Physical Properties samples were analyzed from 1987 to 1989
Asbestos fiber possesses a high tensile (N=36) and the concentration range was from
strength along its axis, is chemically inert, 120 to 1,300 fibers/mm2.
non-combustible, and heat resistant. It has a
4. Interferences
high electrical resistance and good sound ab-
sorbing properties. It can be weaved into ca- Fibrous substances, if present, may inter-
bles, fabrics or other textiles, and also mat- fere with asbestos analysis.
ted into asbestos papers, felts, or mats. Some common fibers are:
fiberglass
2. Range and Detection Limit
anhydrite
2.1. The ideal counting range on the filter plant fibers
is 100 to 1,300 fibers/mm2. With a Walton- perlite veins
Beckett graticule this range is equivalent to gypsum
0.8 to 10 fibers/field. Using NIOSH counting some synthetic fibers
statistics, a count of 0.8 fibers/field would membrane structures
give an approximate coefficient of variation sponge spicules
(CV) of 0.13. diatoms
2.2. The detection limit for this method is microorganisms
4.0 fibers per 100 fields or 5.5 fibers/mm2. This wollastonite
was determined using an equation to esti- The use of electron microscopy or optical
mate the maximum CV possible at a specific tests such as polarized light, and dispersion
concentration (95% confidence) and a Lower staining may be used to differentiate these
Control Limit of zero. The CV value was materials from asbestos when necessary.
then used to determine a corresponding con-
centration from historical CV vs fiber rela- 5. Sampling
tionships. As an example:
5.1. Equipment
Lower Control Limit (95% Confidence) =
AC—1.645(CV)(AC) 5.1.1. Sample assembly (The assembly is
shown in Figure 3). Conductive filter holder
Where:
consisting of a 25-mm diameter, 3-piece cas-
AC = Estimate of the airborne fiber con- sette having a 50-mm long electrically con-
centration (fibers/cc) Setting the Lower ductive extension cowl. Backup pad, 25-mm,
Control Limit=0 and solving for CV: cellulose. Membrane filter, mixed-cellulose
0 = AC—1.645(CV)(AC) ester (MCE), 25-mm, plain, white, 0.4 to 1.2-
CV = 0.61 µm pore size.
This value was compared with CV vs. count NOTES:
curves. The count at which CV = 0.61 for (a) DO NOT RE-USE CASSETTES.
Leidel-Busch counting statistics or for an (b) Fully conductive cassettes are required
OSHA Salt Lake Technical Center (OSHA- to reduce fiber loss to the sides of the cas-
SLTC) CV curve (see appendix A for further sette due to electrostatic attraction.
information) was 4.4 fibers or 3.9 fibers per (c) Purchase filters which have been selected
100 fields, respectively. Although a lower de- by the manufacturer for asbestos counting
tection limit of 4 fibers per 100 fields is sup- or analyze representative filters for fiber
ported by the OSHA-SLTC data, both data background before use. Discard the filter
sets support the 4.5 fibers per 100 fields value. lot if more than 4 fibers/100 fields are
found.
3. Method Performance—Precision and
(d) To decrease the possibility of contamina-
Accuracy
tion, the sampling system (filter-backup
Precision is dependent upon the total num- pad-cassette) for asbestos is usually
ber of fibers counted and the uniformity of preassembled by the manufacturer.
547
(e) Other cassettes, such as the Bell-mouth, 5.2.8. The most significant problem when
may be used within the limits of their vali- sampling for asbestos is overloading the fil-
dation. ter with non-asbestos dust. Suggested max-
5.1.2. Gel bands for sealing cassettes. imum air sample volumes for specific envi-
5.1.3. Sampling pump. ronments are:
Each pump must be a battery operated,
Environment Air Vol. (L)
self-contained unit small enough to be
placed on the monitored employee and not Asbestos removal operations (visible 100.
interfere with the work being performed. The dust).
pump must be capable of sampling at the col- Asbestos removal operations (little 240.
lection rate for the required sampling time. dust).
Office environments ............................. 400 to 2,400.
5.1.4. Flexible tubing, 6-mm bore.
5.1.5. Pump calibration.
Stopwatch and bubble tube/burette or elec- CAUTION: Do not overload the filter with
tronic meter. dust. High levels of non-fibrous dust par-
5.2. Sampling Procedure ticles may obscure fibers on the filter and
5.2.1. Seal the point where the base and lower the count or make counting impos-
cowl of each cassette meet with a gel band or sible. If more than about 25 to 30% of the
tape. field area is obscured with dust, the result
5.2.2. Charge the pumps completely before may be biased low. Smaller air volumes may
beginning. be necessary when there is excessive non-as-
5.2.3. Connect each pump to a calibration bestos dust in the air.
cassette with an appropriate length of 6-mm While sampling, observe the filter with a
bore plastic tubing. Do not use luer connec- small flashlight. If there is a visible layer of
tors—the type of cassette specified above has dust on the filter, stop sampling, remove and
built-in adapters. seal the cassette, and replace with a new
5.2.4. Select an appropriate flow rate for sampling assembly. The total dust loading
the situation being monitored. The sampling should not exceed 1 mg.
flow rate must be between 0.5 and 5.0 L/min 5.2.9. Blank samples are used to determine
for personal sampling and is commonly set if any contamination has occurred during
between 1 and 2 L/min. Always choose a flow sample handling. Prepare two blanks for the
first 1 to 20 samples. For sets containing
rate that will not produce overloaded filters.
5.2.5. Calibrate each sampling pump before greater than 20 samples, prepare blanks as
10% of the samples. Handle blank samples in
and after sampling with a calibration cas-
the same manner as air samples with one ex-
sette in-line (Note: This calibration cassette
ception: Do not draw any air through the
should be from the same lot of cassettes used
blank samples. Open the blank cassette in
for sampling). Use a primary standard (e.g.
the place where the sample cassettes are
bubble burette) to calibrate each pump. If
mounted on the employee. Hold it open for
possible, calibrate at the sampling site.
about 30 seconds. Close and seal the cassette
NOTE: If sampling site calibration is not appropriately. Store blanks for shipment
possible, environmental influences may af- with the sample cassettes.
fect the flow rate. The extent is dependent 5.2.10. Immediately after sampling, close
on the type of pump used. Consult with the and seal each cassette with the base and
pump manufacturer to determine dependence plastic plugs. Do not touch or puncture the
on environmental influences. If the pump is filter membrane as this will invalidate the
affected by temperature and pressure analysis.
changes, correct the flow rate using the for- 5.2.11 Attach and secure a sample seal
mula shown in the section ‘‘Sampling Pump around each sample cassette in such a way
Flow Rate Corrections’’ at the end of this ap- as to assure that the end cap and base plugs
pendix. cannot be removed without destroying the
5.2.6. Connect each pump to the base of seal. Tape the ends of the seal together since
each sampling cassette with flexible tubing. the seal is not long enough to be wrapped
Remove the end cap of each cassette and end-to-end. Also wrap tape around the cas-
take each air sample open face. Assure that sette at each joint to keep the seal secure.
each sample cassette is held open side down 5.3.1. Send the samples to the laboratory
in the employee’s breathing zone during with paperwork requesting asbestos analysis.
sampling. The distance from the nose/mouth List any known fibrous interferences present
of the employee to the cassette should be during sampling on the paperwork. Also,
about 10 cm. Secure the cassette on the col- note the workplace operation(s) sampled.
lar or lapel of the employee using spring 5.3.2. Secure and handle the samples in
clips or other similar devices. such that they will not rattle during ship-
5.2.7. A suggested minimum air volume ment nor be exposed to static electricity. Do
when sampling to determine TWA compli- not ship samples in expanded polystyrene
ance is 25 L. For Excursion Limit (30 min peanuts, vermiculite, paper shreds, or excel-
sampling time) evaluations, a minimum air sior. Tape sample cassettes to sheet bubbles
volume of 48 L is recommended. and place in a container that will cushion
548
the samples in such a manner that they will 6.4. Standard Preparation
not rattle.
A way to prepare standard asbestos sam-
5.3.3. To avoid the possibility of sample
ples of known concentration has not been de-
contamination, always ship bulk samples in
veloped. It is possible to prepare replicate
separate mailing containers.
samples of nearly equal concentration. This
6. Analysis has been performed through the PAT pro-
gram. These asbestos samples are distributed
6.1. Safety Precautions by the AIHA to participating laboratories.
6.1.1. Acetone is extremely flammable and Since only about one-fourth of a 25-mm
precautions must be taken not to ignite it. sample membrane is required for an asbestos
Avoid using large containers or quantities of count, any PAT sample can serve as a
acetone. Transfer the solvent in a ventilated ‘‘standard’’ for replicate counting.
laboratory hood. Do not use acetone near 6.5. Sample Mounting
any open flame. For generation of acetone
vapor, use a spark free heat source. NOTE: See Safety Precautions in Section
6.1.2. Any asbestos spills should be cleaned 6.1. before proceeding. The objective is to
up immediately to prevent dispersal of fi- produce samples with a smooth (non-grainy)
bers. Prudence should be exercised to avoid background in a medium with a refractive
contamination of laboratory facilities or ex- index of approximately 1.46. The technique
posure of personnel to asbestos. Asbestos below collapses the filter for easier focusing
spills should be cleaned up with wet methods and produces permanent mounts which are
and/or a High Efficiency Particulate-Air useful for quality control and interlabora-
(HEPA) filtered vacuum. tory comparison.
CAUTION: Do not use a vacuum without a An aluminum block or similar device is re-
HEPA filter—It will disperse fine asbestos fi- quired for sample preparation.
bers in the air. 6.5.1. Heat the aluminum block to about 70
°C. The hot block should not be used on any
6.2. Equipment
surface that can be damaged by either the
6.2.1. Phase contrast microscope with bin- heat or from exposure to acetone.
ocular or trinocular head. 6.5.2. Ensure that the glass slides and cover
6.2.2. Widefield or Huygenian 10X eyepieces glasses are free of dust and fibers.
(NOTE: The eyepiece containing the grati- 6.5.3. Remove the top plug to prevent a
cule must be a focusing eyepiece. Use a 40X vacuum when the cassette is opened. Clean
phase objective with a numerical aperture of the outside of the cassette if necessary. Cut
0.65 to 0.75). the seal and/or tape on the cassette with a
6.2.3. Kohler illumination (if possible) with razor blade. Very carefully separate the base
green or blue filter. from the extension cowl, leaving the filter
6.2.4. Walton-Beckett Graticule, type G–22 and backup pad in the base.
with 100 ±2 µm projected diameter. 6.5.4. With a rocking motion cut a tri-
6.2.5. Mechanical stage. A rotating me- angular wedge from the filter using the scal-
chanical stage is convenient for use with po- pel. This wedge should be one-sixth to one-
larized light. fourth of the filter. Grasp the filter wedge
6.2.6. Phase telescope. with the forceps on the perimeter of the fil-
6.2.7. Stage micrometer with 0.01-mm sub- ter which was clamped between the cassette
divisions. pieces. DO NOT TOUCH the filter with your
6.2.8. Phase-shift test slide, mark II (Avail- finger. Place the filter on the glass slide
able from PTR optics Ltd., and also sample side up. Static electricity will usu-
McCrone). ally keep the filter on the slide until it is
6.2.9. Precleaned glass slides, 25 mm×75 cleared.
mm. One end can be frosted for convenience 6.5.5. Place the tip of the micropipette con-
in writing sample numbers, etc., or paste-on taining about 200 µL acetone into the alu-
labels can be used. minum block. Insert the glass slide into the
6.2.10. Cover glass #11⁄2. receiving slot in the aluminum block. Inject
6.2.11. Scalpel (#10, curved blade). the acetone into the block with slow, steady
6.2.12. Fine tipped forceps. pressure on the plunger while holding the pi-
6.2.13. Aluminum block for clearing filter pette firmly in place. Wait 3 to 5 seconds for
(see appendix D and Figure 4). the filter to clear, then remove the pipette
6.2.14. Automatic adjustable pipette, 100- to and slide from the aluminum block.
500-µL. 6.5.6. Immediately (less than 30 seconds)
6.2.15. Micropipette, 5 µL. place 2.5 to 3.5 µL of triacetin on the filter
(NOTE: Waiting longer than 30 seconds will
6.3. Reagents
result in increased index of refraction and
6.3.1. Acetone (HPLC grade). decreased contrast between the fibers and
6.3.2. Triacetin (glycerol triacetate). the preparation. This may also lead to sepa-
6.3.3. Lacquer or nail polish. ration of the cover slip from the slide).
549
6.5.7. Lower a cover slip gently onto the fil- (5) Count only fibers equal to or longer
ter at a slight angle to reduce the possibility than 5 µm. Measure the length of curved fi-
of forming air bubbles. If more than 30 sec- bers along the curve.
onds have elapsed between acetone exposure (6) Count fibers which have a length to
and triacetin application, glue the edges of width ratio of 3:1 or greater.
the cover slip to the slide with lacquer or (7) Count all the fibers in at least 20 fields.
nail polish. Continue counting until either 100 fibers are
6.5.8. If clearing is slow, warm the slide for counted or 100 fields have been viewed;
15 min on a hot plate having a surface tem- whichever occurs first. Count all the fibers
perature of about 50 °C to hasten clearing. in the final field.
The top of the hot block can be used if the (8) Fibers lying entirely within the bound-
slide is not heated too long. ary of the Walton-Beckett graticule field
6.5.9. Counting may proceed immediately shall receive a count of 1. Fibers crossing the
after clearing and mounting are completed. boundary once, having one end within the
circle shall receive a count of 1⁄2. Do not
6.6. Sample Analysis count any fiber that crosses the graticule
boundary more than once. Reject and do not
Completely align the microscope according count any other fibers even though they may
to the manufacturer’s instructions. Then, be visible outside the graticule area. If a
align the microscope using the following fiber touches the circle, it is considered to
general alignment routine at the beginning cross the line.
of every counting session and more often if (9) Count bundles of fibers as one fiber un-
necessary. less individual fibers can be clearly identi-
6.6.1. Alignment fied and each individual fiber is clearly not
(1) Clean all optical surfaces. Even a small connected to another counted fiber. See Fig-
amount of dirt can significantly degrade the ure 1 for counting conventions.
image. (10) Record the number of fibers in each
(2) Rough focus the objective on a sample. field in a consistent way such that filter
(3) Close down the field iris so that it is non-uniformity can be assessed.
visible in the field of view. Focus the image (11) Regularly check phase ring alignment.
of the iris with the condenser focus. Center (12) When an agglomerate (mass of mate-
the image of the iris in the field of view. rial) covers more than 25% of the field of
(4) Install the phase telescope and focus on view, reject the field and select another. Do
the phase rings. Critically center the rings. not include it in the number of fields count-
Misalignment of the rings results in astig- ed.
matism which will degrade the image. (13) Perform a ‘‘blind recount’’ of 1 in every
(5) Place the phase-shift test slide on the 10 filter wedges (slides). Re-label the slides
microscope stage and focus on the lines. The using a person other than the original
analyst must see line set 3 and should see at counter.
least parts of 4 and 5 but, not see line set 6
or 6. A microscope/microscopist combination 6.7. Fiber Identification
which does not pass this test may not be As previously mentioned in Section 1.3.,
used. PCM does not provide positive confirmation
6.6.2. Counting Fibers of asbestos fibers. Alternate differential
(1) Place the prepared sample slide on the counting techniques should be used if dis-
mechanical stage of the microscope. Position crimination is desirable. Differential count-
the center of the wedge under the objective ing may include primary discrimination
lens and focus upon the sample. based on morphology, polarized light anal-
(2) Start counting from one end of the ysis of fibers, or modification of PCM data
wedge and progress along a radial line to the by Scanning Electron or Transmission Elec-
other end (count in either direction from pe- tron Microscopy.
rimeter to wedge tip). Select fields ran- A great deal of experience is required to
domly, without looking into the eyepieces, routinely and correctly perform differential
by slightly advancing the slide in one direc- counting. It is discouraged unless it is le-
tion with the mechanical stage control. gally necessary. Then, only if a fiber is obvi-
(3) Continually scan over a range of focal ously not asbestos should it be excluded from
planes (generally the upper 10 to 15 µm of the the count. Further discussion of this tech-
filter surface) with the fine focus control nique can be found in reference 8.10.
during each field count. Spend at least 5 to If there is a question whether a fiber is as-
15 seconds per field. bestos or not, follow the rule:
(4) Most samples will contain asbestos fi- ‘‘WHEN IN DOUBT, COUNT.’’
bers with fiber diameters less than 1 µm.
6.8. Analytical Recommendations—Quality
Look carefully for faint fiber images. The
Control System
small diameter fibers will be very hard to
see. However, they are an important con- 6.8.1. All individuals performing asbestos
tribution to the total count. analysis must have taken the NIOSH course
550
for sampling and evaluating airborne asbes- diameter using an inside micrometer. The
tos or an equivalent course. collection area is calculated according to the
6.8.2. Each laboratory engaged in asbestos formula:
counting shall set up a slide trading arrange- Area = †(d/2)2
ment with at least two other laboratories in
order to compare performance and eliminate 7.2. Short-Cut Calculation
inbreeding of error. The slide exchange oc-
curs at least semiannually. The round robin Since a given analyst always has the same
results shall be posted where all analysts can interpupillary distance, the number of fields
view individual analyst’s results. per filter for a particular analyst will remain
6.8.3. Each laboratory engaged in asbestos constant for a given size filter. The field size
counting shall participate in the Proficiency for that analyst is constant (i.e. the analyst
Analytical Testing Program, the Asbestos is using an assigned microscope and is not
Analyst Registry or equivalent. changing the reticle).
6.8.4. Each analyst shall select and count For example, if the exposed area of the fil-
prepared slides from a ‘‘slide bank’’. These ter is always 385 mm2 and the size of the field
are quality assurance counts. The slide bank is always 0.00785 mm2 the number of fields
shall be prepared using uniformly distributed per filter will always be 49,000. In addition it
samples taken from the workload. Fiber den- is necessary to convert liters of air to cc.
sities should cover the entire range routinely These three constants can then be combined
analyzed by the laboratory. These slides are such that ECA/(1,000×MFA)=49. The previous
counted blind by all counters to establish an equation simplifies to:
original standard deviation. This historical
distribution is compared with the quality as-
 FB   BFB 
 −  × 49
surance counts. A counter must have 95% of

all quality control samples counted within  FL   BFL 
three standard deviations of the historical AC =
mean. This count is then integrated into a
new historical mean and standard deviation
FR × T
for the slide. 7.3. Recount Calculations
The analyses done by the counters to es-
tablish the slide bank may be used for an in- As mentioned in step 13 of Section 6.6.2., a
terim quality control program if the data are ‘‘blind recount’’ of 10% of the slides is per-
treated in a proper statistical fashion. formed. In all cases, differences will be ob-
served between the first and second counts of
7. Calculations the same filter wedge. Most of these dif-
7.1. Calculate the estimated airborne asbes- ferences will be due to chance alone, that is,
tos fiber concentration on the filter sample due to the random variability (precision) of
using the following formula: the count method. Statistical recount cri-
teria enables one to decide whether observed
differences can be explained due to chance
 FB   BFB   alone or are probably due to systematic dif-
  −   × ECA
 FL   BFL  
ferences between analysts, microscopes, or
AC = other biasing factors.
The following recount criterion is for a
1000 × FR × T × MFA pair of counts that estimate AC in fibers/cc.
where: The criterion is given at the type-I error
AC=Airborne fiber concentration level. That is, there is 5% maximum risk
FB=Total number of fibers greater than 5 µm that we will reject a pair of counts for the
counted reason that one might be biased, when the
FL=Total number of fields counted on the large observed difference is really due to
filter chance.
BFB=Total number of fibers greater than 5 Reject a pair of counts if:
µm counted in the blank
BFL=Total number of fields counted on the
blank AC 2 − AC1 > 2.78
ECA=Effective collecting area of filter (385
mm2 nominal for a 25-mm filter.)
FR=Pump flow rate (L/min) × ( )
AC AVG × CVFB
ER29JN95.002</GPH>
MFA=Microscope count field area (mm2).

This is 0.00785 mm2 for a Walton-Beckett Where:
Graticule. AC1=lower estimated airborne fiber con-
T=Sample collection time (min) centration
1,000=Conversion of L to cc AC2=higher estimated airborne fiber con-
NOTE: The collection area of a filter is sel- centration
ER10AU94.034</GPH>
dom equal to 385 mm2. It is appropriate for ACavg=average of the two concentration esti-
laboratories to routinely monitor the exact mates
551
ER10AU94.033</GPH>
CVFB=CV for the average of the two con- and A.W. Verstuyft. Wash. DC: American
centration estimates Chemical Society, (ACS Symposium Series
If a pair of counts are rejected by this cri- 120) 1980. pp. 13–41.
terion then, recount the rest of the filters in
the submitted set. Apply the test and reject Quality Control
any other pairs failing the test. Rejection The OSHA asbestos regulations require
shall include a memo to the industrial hy- each laboratory to establish a quality con-
gienist stating that the sample failed a sta- trol program. The following is presented as
tistical test for homogeneity and the true air an example of how the OSHA-SLTC con-
concentration may be significantly different structed its internal CV curve as part of
than the reported value. meeting this requirement. Data is from 395
samples collected during OSHA compliance
7.4. Reporting Results inspections and analyzed from October 1980
Report results to the industrial hygienist through April 1986.
as fibers/cc. Use two significant figures. If Each sample was counted by 2 to 5 dif-
multiple analyses are performed on a sam- ferent counters independently of one an-
ple, an average of the results is to be re- other. The standard deviation and the CV
ported unless any of the results can be re- statistic was calculated for each sample.
jected for cause. This data was then plotted on a graph of CV
vs. fibers/mm2. A least squares regression
8. References was performed using the following equation:
8.1. Dreesen, W.C., et al., U.S. Public Health CV = antilog10[A(log10(x))2+B(log10(x))+C]
Service: A Study of Asbestosis in the Asbestos where:
Textile Industry (Public Health Bulletin No. x = the number of fibers/mm2
241), U.S. Treasury Dept., Washington, DC, Application of least squares gave:
1938. A = 0.182205
8.2. Asbestos Research Council: The Measure- B = 0.973343
ment of Airborne Asbestos Dust by the Mem- C = 0.327499
brane Filter Method (Technical Note), Asbes-
Using these values, the equation becomes:
tos Research Council, Rockdale, Lancashire,
Great Britain, 1969. CV = antilog10[0.182205(log10(x))2
8.3. Bayer, S.G., Zumwalde, R.D., Brown, ¥0.973343(log10(x))+0.327499]
T.A., Equipment and Procedure for Mounting Sampling Pump Flow Rate Corrections
Millipore Filters and Counting Asbestos Fibers
by Phase Contrast Microscopy, Bureau of Oc- This correction is used if a difference
cupational Health, U.S. Dept. of Health, Edu- greater than 5% in ambient temperature and/
cation and Welfare, Cincinnati, OH, 1969. or pressure is noted between calibration and
8.4. NIOSH Manual of Analytical Methods, sampling sites and the pump does not com-
2nd ed., Vol. 1 (DHEW/NIOSH Pub. No. 77– pensate for the differences.
157–A). National Institute for Occupational
Safety and Health, Cincinnati, OH, 1977. pp.
239–1—239–21.
P  T 
8.5. Asbestos, Code of Federal Regulations Q act = Q cal ×  cal  ×  act 
29 CFR 1910.1001. 1971.  Pact   Tcal 
8.6. Occupational Exposure to Asbestos,
Tremolite, Anthophyllite, and Actinolite. Final Where:
Rule, FEDERAL REGISTER 51:119 (20 June 1986). Qact = actual flow rate
pp. 22612–22790. Qcal = calibrated flow rate (if a rotameter was
8.7. Asbestos, Tremolite, Anthophyllite, and used, the rotameter value)
Actinolite, Code of Federal Regulations Pcal = uncorrected air pressure at calibration
1910.1001. 1988. pp. 711–752. Pact = uncorrected air pressure at sampling
8.8. Criteria for a Recommended Standard— site
Occupational Exposure to Asbestos (DHEW/ Tact = temperature at sampling site (K)
NIOSH Pub. No. HSM 72–10267), National In- Tcal = temperature at calibration (K)
stitute for Occupational Safety and Health,
NIOSH, Cincinnati, OH, 1972. pp. III–1—III–24. Walton-Beckett Graticule
8.9. Leidel, N.A., Bayer, S.G., Zumwalde, When ordering the Graticule for asbestos
R.D., Busch, K.A., USPHS/NIOSH Membrane counting, specify the exact disc diameter
Filter Method for Evaluating Airborne Asbestos needed to fit the ocular of the microscope
Fibers (DHEW/NIOSH Pub. No. 79–127). Na- and the diameter (mm) of the circular count-
tional Institute for Occupational Safety and ing area. Instructions for measuring the di-
Health, Cincinnati, OH, 1979. mensions necessary are listed:
8.10. Dixon, W.C., Applications of Optical Mi- (1) Insert any available graticule into the
croscopy in Analysis of Asbestos and Quartz, focusing eyepiece and focus so that the grati-
Analytical Techniques in Occupational cule lines are sharp and clear.
Health Chemistry, edited by D.D. Dollberg (2) Align the microscope.
552
ER10AU94.036</GPH>
(3) Place a stage micrometer on the micro- (7) Each eyepiece-objective-reticle com-
scope object stage and focus the microscope bination on the microscope must be cali-
on the graduated lines. brated. Should any of the three be changed
(4) Measure the magnified grid length, PL (by zoom adjustment, disassembly, replace-
(µm), using the stage micrometer. ment, etc.), the combination must be recali-
(5) Remove the graticule from the micro- brated. Calibration may change if interpupil-
scope and measure its actual grid length, AL lary distance is changed.
(mm). This can be accomplished by using a Measure the field diameter, D (acceptable
mechanical stage fitted with verniers, or a range: 100 ±2 µm) with a stage micrometer
jeweler’s loupe with a direct reading scale. upon receipt of the graticule from the manu-
(6) Let D=100 µm. Calculate the circle di- facturer. Determine the field area (mm2).
ameter, dc (mm), for the Walton-Beckett Field Area = †(D/2) 2
graticule and specify the diameter when If D = 100 µm=0.1 mm, then
making a purchase: Field Area = †(0.1 mm/2) 2=0.00785 mm 2
The Graticule is available from: Graticules
AL × D
dc = Ltd., Morley Road, Tonbridge TN9 IRN,
Kent, England (Telephone 011–44–732–359061).
PL Also available from PTR Optics Ltd., 145
Example: If PL=108 µm, AL=2.93 mm and Newton Street, Waltham, MA 02154 [tele-
D=100 µm, then, phone (617) 891–6000] or McCrone Accessories
and Components, 2506 S. Michigan Ave., Chi-
2.93 × 100 cago, IL 60616 [phone (312)-842–7100]. The
dc = = 2.71mm graticule is custom made for each micro-
108 scope.
ER10AU94.038</GPH></EXAMPLE>
553
ER10AU94.037</GPH>
COUNTS FOR THE FIBERS IN THE FIGURE istered to all employees who are exposed to
asbestos above the permissible exposure
Structure No. Count Explanation limit, and who will therefore be included in
1 to 6 ............. 1 Single fibers all contained within the their employer’s medical surveillance pro-
Circle. gram. Part 1 of the appendix contains the
7 ..................... ⁄
12 Fiber crosses circle once. Initial Medical Questionnaire, which must be
8 ..................... 0 Fiber too short. obained for all new hires who will be covered
9 ..................... 2 Two crossing fibers.
10 ................... 0 Fiber outside graticule.
by the medical surveillance requirements.
11 ................... 0 Fiber crosses graticule twice. Part 2 includes the abbreviated Periodical
12 ................... 1⁄2 Although split, fiber only crosses Medical Questionnaire, which must be ad-
once. ministered to all employees who are pro-
vided periodic medical examinations under
APPENDIX C TO § 1926.1101 [RESERVED] the medical surveillance provisions of the
standard.
APPENDIX D TO § 1926.1101—MEDICAL
QUESTIONNAIRES; MANDATORY
This mandatory appendix contains the
medical questionnaires that must be admin-
554
ER10au94.025</GPH>
555
EC30OC91.064</GPH>
556
EC30OC91.065</GPH>
557
EC30OC91.066</GPH>
558
EC30OC91.067</GPH>
559
EC30OC91.068</GPH>
560
EC30OC91.069</GPH>
561
EC30OC91.070</GPH>
562
EC30OC91.071</GPH>
563
EC30OC91.072</GPH>
564
EC30OC91.073</GPH>
565
EC30OC91.074</GPH>
APPENDIX E TO § 1926.1101—INTERPRETATION APPENDIX F TO § 1926.1101—WORK PRACTICES

AND CLASSIFICATION OF CHEST ROENTGENO- AND ENGINEERING CONTROLS FOR CLASS I
GRAMS—MANDATORY ASBESTOS OPERATIONS (NON-MANDATORY)
(a) Chest roentgenograms shall be inter- This is a non-mandatory appendix to the
preted and classified in accordance with a asbestos standards for construction and for
professionally accepted classification system shipyards. It describes criteria and proce-
and recorded on an interpretation form fol- dures for erecting and using negative pres-
lowing the format of the CDC/NIOSH (M) 2.8 sure enclosures for Class I Asbestos Work,
form. As a minimum, the content within the when NPEs are used as an allowable control
bold lines of this form (items 1 through 4) method to comply with paragraph (g)(5)(i) of
shall be included. This form is not to be sub- this section. Many small and variable details
mitted to NIOSH. are involved in the erection of a negative
(b) Roentgenograms shall be interpreted pressure enclosure. OSHA and most partici-
and classified only by a B-reader, a board eli- pants in the rulemaking agreed that only the
gible/certified radiologist, or an experienced major, more performance oriented criteria
should be made mandatory. These criteria
physician with known s.
are set out in paragraph (g) of this section.
(c) All interpreters, whenever interpreting
In addition, this appendix includes these
chest roentgenograms made under this sec- mandatory specifications and procedures in
tion, shall have immediately available for its guidelines in order to make this appendix
reference a complete set of the ILO-U/C coherent and helpful. The mandatory nature
International Classification of Radiographs of the criteria which appear in the regu-
for Pneumoconioses, 1980. latory text is not changed because they are
included in this ‘‘non-mandatory’’ appendix.
EC30OC91.075</GPH></EXTRACT>
566
Similarly, the additional criteria and proce- A physical description of the work area;
dures included as guidelines in the appendix, A description of the approximate amount of
do not become mandatory because manda- material to be removed;
tory criteria are also included in these com- A schedule for turning off and sealing exist-
prehensive guidelines. ing ventilation systems;
In addition, none of the criteria, both man- Personnel hygiene procedures;
datory and recommended, are meant to A description of personal protective equip-
specify or imply the need for use of patented ment and clothing to be worn by employ-
or licensed methods or equipment. Rec- ees;
ommended specifications included in this at- A description of the local exhaust ventila-
tachment should not discourage the use of tion systems to be used and how they are
creative alternatives which can be shown to to be tested;
reliably achieve the objectives of negative- A description of work practices to be ob-
pressure enclosures. served by employees;
Requirements included in this appendix, An air monitoring plan;
cover general provisions to be followed in all
A description of the method to be used to
asbestos jobs, provisions which must be fol-
transport waste material; and
lowed for all Class I asbestos jobs, and provi-
The location of the dump site.
sions governing the construction and testing
of negative pressure enclosures. The first Materials and Equipment Necessary for Asbestos
category includes the requirement for use of Removal
wet methods, HEPA vacuums, and imme-
diate bagging of waste; Class I work must Although individual asbestos removal
conform to the following provisions: projects vary in terms of the equipment re-
• oversight by competent person quired to accomplish the removal of the ma-
• use of critical barriers over all openings terials, some equipment and materials are
to work area common to most asbestos removal oper-
• isolation of HVAC systems ations.
• use of impermeable dropcloths and cov- Plastic sheeting used to protect horizontal
erage of all objects within regulated areas surfaces, seal HVAC openings or to seal
In addition, more specific requirements for vertical openings and ceilings should have a
NPEs include: minimum thickness of 6 mils. Tape or other
• maintenance of ¥0.02 inches water gauge adhesive used to attach plastic sheeting
within enclosure should be of sufficient adhesive strength to
• manometric measurements support the weight of the material plus all
• air movement away from employees per- stresses encountered during the entire dura-
forming removal work tion of the project without becoming de-
• smoke testing or equivalent for detection tached from the surface.
of leaks and air direction Other equipment and materials which
• deactivation of electrical circuits, if not should be available at the beginning of each
provided with ground-fault circuit inter- project are:
rupters. —HEPA Filtered Vacuum is essential for
cleaning the work area after the asbestos
Planning the Project has been removed. It should have a long
The standard requires that an exposure as- hose capable of reaching out-of-the-way
sessment be conducted before the asbestos places, such as areas above ceiling tiles,
job is begun [§ 1926.1101 (f)(1)]. Information behind pipes, etc.
needed for that assessment, includes data re- —Portable air ventilation systems installed
lating to prior similar jobs, as applied to the to provide the negative air pressure and air
specific variables of the current job. The in- removal from the enclosure must be
formation needed to conduct the assessment equipped with a HEPA filter. The number
will be useful in planning the project, and in and capacity of units required to ventilate
complying with any reporting requirements an enclosure depend on the size of the area
under this standard, when significant to be ventilated. The filters for these sys-
changes are being made to a control system tems should be designed in such a manner
listed in the standard, [see also those of that they can be replaced when the air flow
USEPA (40 CFR 61, subpart M). Thus, al- volume is reduced by the build-up of dust
though the standard does not explicitly rein the filtration material. Pressure moni-
quire the preparation of a written asbestos toring devices with alarms and strip chart
removal plan, the usual constituents of such recorders attached to each system to indi-
a plan, i.e., a description of the enclosure, cate the pressure differential and the loss
the equipment, and the procedures to be used due to dust buildup on the filter are rec-
throughout the project, must be determined ommended.
before the enclosure can be erected. The fol- —Water sprayers should be used to keep the
lowing information should be included in the asbestos material as saturated as possible
planning of the system: during removal; the sprayers will provide a
567
fine mist that minimizes the impact of the sheeting should be secured with duct tape or
spray on the material. an equivalent method to provide a tight seal
—Water used to saturate the asbestos con- around the object.
taining material can be amended by adding Bagging Waste: In addition to the require-
at least 15 milliliters (1⁄4 ounce) of wetting ment for immediate bagging of waste for dis-
agent in 1 liter (1 pint) of water. An exam- posal, it is further recommended that the
ple of a wetting agent is a 50/50 mixture of waste material be double-bagged and sealed
polyoxyethylene ether and in plastic bags designed for asbestos disposal.
polyoxyethylene polyglycol ester. The bags should be stored in a waste storage
—Backup power supplies are recommended, area that can be controlled by the workers
especially for ventilation systems. conducting the removal. Filters removed
—Shower and bath water should be with from air handling units and rubbish removed
mixed hot and cold water faucets. Water from the area are to be bagged and handled
that has been used to clean personnel or as hazardous waste.
equipment should either be filtered or be
collected and discarded as asbestos waste. Constructing the Enclosure
Soap and shampoo should be provided to The enclosure should be constructed to
aid in removing dust from the workers’ provide an air-tight seal around ducts and
skin and hair. openings into existing ventilation systems
—See paragraphs (h) and (i) of this section and around penetrations for electrical con-
for appropriate respiratory protection and duits, telephone wires, water lines, drain
protective clothing. pipes, etc. Enclosures should be both airtight
—See paragraph (k) of this section for re- and watertight except for those openings de-
quired signs and labels. signed to provide entry and/or air flow con-
trol.
Preparing the Work Area
Size: An enclosure should be the minimum
Disabling HVAC Systems: The power to volume to encompass all of the working sur-
the heating, ventilation, and air condi- faces yet allow unencumbered movement by
tioning systems that service the restricted the worker(s), provide unrestricted air flow
area must be deactivated and locked off. All past the worker(s), and ensure walking sur-
ducts, grills, access ports, windows and vents faces can be kept free of tripping hazards.
must be sealed off with two layers of plastic Shape: The enclosure may be any shape
to prevent entrainment of contaminated air. that optimizes the flow of ventilation air
Operating HVAC Systems in the Restricted past the worker(s).
Area: If components of a HVAC system lo- Structural Integrity: The walls, ceilings
cated in the restricted area are connected to and floors must be supported in such a man-
a system that will service another zone dur- ner that portions of the enclosure will not
ing the project, the portion of the duct in the fall down during normal use.
restricted area must be sealed and pressur- Openings: It is not necessary that the
ized. Necessary precautions include caulking structure be airtight; openings may be de-
the duct joints, covering all cracks and open- signed to direct air flow. Such openings
ings with two layers of sheeting, and pres- should be located at a distance from active
surizing the duct throughout the duration of removal operations. They should be designed
the project by restricting the return air flow. to draw air into the enclosure under all an-
The power to the fan supplying the positive ticipated circumstances. In the event that
pressure should be locked ‘‘on’’ to prevent negative pressure is lost, they should be
pressure loss. fitted with either HEPA filters to trap dust
Sealing Elevators: If an elevator shaft is or automatic trap doors that prevent dust
located in the restricted area, it should be ei- from escaping the enclosure. Openings for
ther shut down or isolated by sealing with exits should be controlled by an airlock or a
two layers of plastic sheeting. The sheeting vestibule.
should provide enough slack to accommo- Barrier Supports: Frames should be con-
date the pressure changes in the shaft with- structed to support all unsupported spans of
out breaking the air-tight seal. sheeting.
Removing Mobile Objects: All movable ob- Sheeting: Walls, barriers, ceilings, and
jects should be cleaned and removed from floors should be lined with two layers of
the work area before an enclosure is con- plastic sheeting having a thickness of at
structed unless moving the objects creates a least 6 mil.
hazard. Mobile objects will be assumed to be Seams: Seams in the sheeting material
contaminated and should be either cleaned should be minimized to reduce the possibili-
with amended water and a HEPA vacuum ties of accidental rips and tears in the adhe-
and then removed from the area or wrapped sive or connections. All seams in the sheet-
and then disposed of as hazardous waste. ing should overlap, be staggered and not be
Cleaning and Sealing Surfaces: After located at corners or wall-to-floor joints.
cleaning with water and a HEPA vacuum, Areas Within an Enclosure: Each enclosure
surfaces of stationary objects should be cov- consists of a work area, a decontamination
ered with two layers of plastic sheeting. The area, and waste storage area. The work area
568
where the asbestos removal operations occur figuration, and shape of the enclosure as well
should be separated from both the waste as ambient and mechanical air pressure con-
storage area and the contamination control ditions around the enclosure.
area by physical curtains, doors, and/or air- Air Flow Patterns: The flow of air past
flow patterns that force any airborne con- each worker shall be enhanced by posi-
tamination back into the work area. tioning the intakes and exhaust ports to re-
See paragraph (j) of this section for remove contaminated air from the worker’s
quirements for hygiene facilities. breathing zone, by positioning HEPA vacu-
During egress from the work area, each um cleaners to draw air from the worker’s
worker should step into the equipment room, breathing zone, by forcing relatively
clean tools and equipment, and remove gross uncontaminated air past the worker toward
contamination from clothing by wet clean- an exhaust port, or by using a combination
ing and HEPA vacuuming. Before entering of methods to reduce the worker’s exposure.
the shower area, foot coverings, head cov- Air Handling Unit Exhaust: The exhaust
erings, hand coverings, and coveralls are re- plume from air handling units should be lo-
moved and placed in impervious bags for dis- cated away from adjacent personnel and in-
posal or cleaning. Airline connections from takes for HVAC systems.
airline respirators with HEPA disconnects Air Flow Volume: The air flow volume
and power cables from powered air-purifying (cubic meters per minute) exhausted (re-
respirators (PAPRs) will be disconnected moved) from the workplace must exceed the
just prior to entering the shower room. amount of makeup air supplied to the enclo-
sure. The rate of air exhausted from the en-
Establishing Negative Pressure Within the closure should be designed to maintain a
Enclosure negative pressure in the enclosure and air
Negative Pressure: Air is to be drawn into movement past each worker. The volume of
the enclosure under all anticipated condi- air flow removed from the enclosure should
tions and exhausted through a HEPA filter replace the volume of the container at every
for 24 hours a day during the entire duration 5 to 15 minutes. Air flow volume will need to
of the project. be relatively high for large enclosures, enclo-
Air Flow Tests: Air flow patterns will be sures with awkward shapes, enclosures with
checked before removal operations begin, at multiple openings, and operations employing
least once per operating shift and any time several workers in the enclosure.
there is a question regarding the integrity of Air Flow Velocity: At each opening, the air
the enclosure. The primary test for air flow flow velocity must visibly ‘‘drag’’ air into
is to trace air currents with smoke tubes or the enclosure. The velocity of air flow within
other visual methods. Flow checks are made the enclosure must be adequate to remove
at each opening and at each doorway to dem- airborne contamination from each worker’s
onstrate that air is being drawn into the en- breathing zone without disturbing the asbes-
closure and at each worker’s position to tos-containing material on surfaces.
show that air is being drawn away from the Airlocks: Airlocks are mechanisms on
breathing zone. doors and curtains that control the air flow
Monitoring Pressure Within the Enclosure: patterns in the doorways. If air flow occurs,
After the initial air flow patterns have been the patterns through doorways must be such
checked, the static pressure must be mon- that the air flows toward the inside of the
itored within the enclosure. Monitoring may enclosure. Sometimes vestibules, double
be made using manometers, pressure gauges, doors, or double curtains are used to prevent
or combinations of these devices. It is rec- air movement through the doorways. To use
ommended that they be attached to alarms a vestibule, a worker enters a chamber by
and strip chart recorders at points identified opening the door or curtain and then closing
by the design engineer. the entry before opening the exit door or
Corrective Actions: If the manometers or curtain.
pressure gauges demonstrate a reduction in Airlocks should be located between the
pressure differential below the required equipment room and shower room, between
level, work should cease and the reason for the shower room and the clean room, and be-
the change investigated and appropriate tween the waste storage area and the outside
changes made. The air flow patterns should of the enclosure. The air flow between adja-
be retested before work begins again. cent rooms must be checked using smoke
Pressure Differential: The design param- tubes or other visual tests to ensure the flow
eters for static pressure differentials be- patterns draw air toward the work area with-
tween the inside and outside of enclosures out producing eddies.
typically range from 0.02 to 0.10 inches of
Monitoring for Airborne Concentrations
water gauge, depending on conditions. All
zones inside the enclosure must have less In addition to the breathing zone samples
pressure than the ambient pressure outside taken as outlined in paragraph (f) of this sec-
of the enclosure (¥0.02 inches water gauge tion, samples of air should be taken to dem-
differential). Design specifications for the onstrate the integrity of the enclosure, the
differential vary according to the size, con- cleanliness of the clean room and shower
569
area, and the effectiveness of the HEPA fil- C. The potential for an asbestos-containing
ter. If the clean room is shown to be con- product to release breathable fibers depends
taminated, the room must be relocated to an largely on its degree of friability. Friable
uncontaminated area. means that the material can be crumbled
Samples taken near the exhaust of port- with hand pressure and is therefore likely to
able ventilation systems must be done with emit fibers. The fibrous fluffy sprayed-on
care. materials used for fireproofing, insulation,
or sound proofing are considered to be fri-
General Work Practices able, and they readily release airborne fibers
Preventing dust dispersion is the primary if disturbed. Materials such as vinyl-asbestos
means of controlling the spread of asbestos floor tile or roofing felt are considered non-
within the enclosure. Whenever practical, friable if intact and generally do not emit
the point of removal should be isolated, en- airborne fibers unless subjected to sanding,
closed, covered, or shielded from the workers sawing and other aggressive operations. As-
in the area. Waste asbestos containing mate- bestos-cement pipe or sheet can emit air-
rials must be bagged during or immediately borne fibers if the materials are cut or
after removal; the material must remain sawed, or if they are broken.
saturated until the waste container is sealed. D. Permissible exposure: Exposure to air-
Waste material with sharp points or cor- borne asbestos fibers may not exceed 0.1 fi-
ners must be placed in hard air-tight con- bers per cubic centimeter of air (0.1 f/cc)
tainers rather than bags. averaged over the 8-hour workday, and 1
Whenever possible, large components fiber per cubic centimeter of air (1.0 f/cc)
should be sealed in plastic sheeting and re- averaged over a 30 minute work period.
moved intact.
Bags or containers of waste will be moved II. Health Hazard Data
to the waste holding area, washed, and A. Asbestos can cause disabling respiratory
wrapped in a bag with the appropriate labels. disease and various types of cancers if the fi-
Cleaning the Work Area bers are inhaled. Inhaling or ingesting fibers
from contaminated clothing or skin can also
Surfaces within the work area should be result in these diseases. The symptoms of
kept free of visible dust and debris to the ex- these diseases generally do not appear for 20
tent feasible. Whenever visible dust appears or more years after initial exposure.
on surfaces, the surfaces within the enclo- B. Exposure to asbestos has been shown to
sure must be cleaned by wiping with a wet cause lung cancer, mesothelioma, and cancer
sponge, brush, or cloth and then vacuumed of the stomach and colon. Mesothelioma is a
with a HEPA vacuum. rare cancer of the thin membrane lining of
All surfaces within the enclosure should be the chest and abdomen. Symptoms of meso-
cleaned before the exhaust ventilation sys- thelioma include shortness of breath, pain in
tem is deactivated and the enclosure is dis- the walls of the chest, and/or abdominal
assembled. An approved encapsulant may be pain.
sprayed onto areas after the visible dust has
been removed. III. Respirators and Protective Clothing
APPENDIX G TO § 1926.1101 [RESERVED] A. Respirators: You are required to wear a
respirator when performing tasks that result
APPENDIX H TO § 1926.1101—SUBSTANCE TECH- in asbestos exposure that exceeds the per-
NICAL INFORMATION FOR ASBESTOS. NON- missible exposure limit (PEL) of 0.1 f/cc and
MANDATORY when performing certain designated oper-
ations. Air-purifying respirators equipped
I. Substance Identification with a high-efficiency particulate air
A. Substance: ‘‘Asbestos’’ is the name of a (HEPA) filter can be used where airborne as-
class of magnesium-silicate minerals that bestos fiber concentrations do not exceed 1.0
occur in fibrous form. Minerals that are in- f/cc; otherwise, more protective respirators
cluded in this group are chrysotile, crocid- such as air-supplied, positive-pressure, full
olite, amosite, anthophyllite asbestos, facepiece respirators must be used. Dispos-
tremolite asbestos, and actinolite asbestos. able respirators or dust masks are not per-
B. Asbestos is and was used in the manu- mitted to be used for asbestos work. For ef-
facture of heat-resistant clothing, auto- fective protection, respirators must fit your
motive brake and clutch linings, and a vari- face and head snugly. Your employer is re-
ety of building materials including floor quired to conduct a fit test when you are
tiles, roofing felts, ceiling tiles, asbestos-ce- first assigned a respirator and every 6
ment pipe and sheet, and fire-resistant months thereafter. Respirators should not be
drywall. Asbestos is also present in pipe and loosened or removed in work situations
boiler insulation materials and in sprayed-on where their use is required.
materials located on beams, in crawlspaces, B. Protective Clothing: You are required to
and between walls. wear protective clothing in work areas where
570
asbestos fiber concentrations exceed the per- aminations. These exposure records must be
missible exposure limit (PEL) of 0.1 f/cc. kept for at least thirty (30) years. Medical
records must be kept for the period of your
IV. Disposal Procedures and Clean-up employment plus thirty (30) years.
A. Wastes that are generated by processes D. Your employer is required to release
where asbestos is present include: your exposure and medical records to your
1. Empty asbestos shipping containers. physician or designated representative upon
2. Process wastes such as cuttings, trim- your written request.
mings, or reject materials.
3. Housekeeping waste from wet-sweeping APPENDIX I TO § 1926.1101—MEDICAL SURVEIL-
or HEPA-vacuuming. LANCE GUIDELINES FOR ASBESTOS, NON-
4. Asbestos fireproofing or insulating mate- MANDATORY
rial that is removed from buildings.
5. Asbestos-containing building products I. Route of Entry
removed during building renovation or dem- Inhalation, ingestion.
olition.
6. Contaminated disposable protective II. Toxicology
clothing.
B. Empty shipping bags can be flattened Clinical evidence of the adverse effects as-
under exhaust hoods and packed into air- sociated with exposure to asbestos is present
tight containers for disposal. Empty ship- in the form of several well-conducted epide-
ping drums are difficult to clean and should miological studies of occupationally exposed
be sealed. workers, family contacts of workers, and
C. Vacuum bags or disposable paper filters persons living near asbestos mines. These
should not be cleaned, but should be sprayed studies have shown a definite association be-
with a fine water mist and placed into a la- tween exposure to asbestos and an increased
beled waste container. incidence of lung cancer, pleural and peri-
D. Process waste and housekeeping waste toneal mesothelioma, gastrointestinal can-
should be wetted with water or a mixture of cer, and asbestosis. The latter is a disabling
water and surfactant prior to packaging in fibrotic lung disease that is caused only by
disposable containers. exposure to asbestos. Exposure to asbestos
E. Asbestos-containing material that is re- has also been associated with an increased
moved from buildings must be disposed of in incidence of esophageal, kidney, laryngeal,
leak-tight 6-mil plastic bags, plastic-lined pharyngeal, and buccal cavity cancers. As
cardboard containers, or plastic-lined metal with other known chronic occupational dis-
containers. These wastes, which are removed eases, disease associated with asbestos gen-
while wet, should be sealed in containers be- erally appears about 20 years following the
fore they dry out to minimize the release of first occurrence of exposure: There are no
asbestos fibers during handling. known acute effects associated with expo-
sure to asbestos.
V. Access to Information Epidemiological studies indicate that the
A. Each year, your employer is required to risk of lung cancer among exposed workers
inform you of the information contained in who smoke cigarettes is greatly increased
this standard and appendices for asbestos. In over the risk of lung cancer among non-ex-
addition, your employer must instruct you posed smokers or exposed nonsmokers. These
in the proper work practices for handling as- studies suggest that cessation of smoking
bestos-containing materials, and the correct will reduce the risk of lung cancer for a per-
use of protective equipment. son exposed to asbestos but will not reduce it
B. Your employer is required to determine to the same level of risk as that existing for
whether you are being exposed to asbestos. an exposed worker who has never smoked.
Your employer must treat exposure to ther- III. Signs and Symptoms of Exposure-Related
mal system insulation and sprayed-on and Disease
troweled-on surfacing material as asbestos
exposure, unless results of laboratory anal- The signs and symptoms of lung cancer or
ysis show that the material does not contain gastrointestinal cancer induced by exposure
asbestos. You or your representative has the to asbestos are not unique, except that a
right to observe employee measurements and chest X-ray of an exposed patient with lung
to record the results obtained. Your em- cancer may show pleural plaques, pleural
ployer is required to inform you of your ex- calcification, or pleural fibrosis. Symptoms
posure, and, if you are exposed above the per- characteristic of mesothelioma include
missible exposure limit, he or she is required shortness of breath, pain in the walls of the
to inform you of the actions that are being chest, or abdominal pain. Mesothelioma has
taken to reduce your exposure to within the a much longer latency period compared with
permissible limit. lung cancer (40 years versus 15–20 years), and
C. Your employer is required to keep mesothelioma is therefore more likely to be
records of your exposures and medical ex- found among workers who were first exposed
571
to asbestos at an early age. Mesothelioma is (iii) A physical examination including a
always fatal. chest roentgenogram and pulmonary func-
Asbestosis is pulmonary tibrosis caused by tion test that includes measurement of the
the accumulation of asbestos fibers in the employee’s forced vital capacity (FVC) and
lungs. Symptoms include shortness of forced expiratory volume at one second
breath, coughing, fatigue, and vague feelings (FEV1).
of sickness. When the fibrosis worsens, short- (iv) Any laboratory or other test that the
ness of breath occurs even at rest. The diag- examining physician deems by sound med-
nosis of asbestosis is based on a history of ical practice to be necessary.
exposure to asbestos, the presence of charac-
The employer is required to make the pre-
teristics radiologic changes, end-inspiratory
crackles (rales), and other clinical features scribed tests available at least annually to
of fibrosing lung disease. Pleural plaques and those employees covered; more often than
thickening are observed on X-rays taken specified if recommended by the examining
during the early stages of the disease. Asbes- physician; and upon termination of employ-
tosis is often a progressive disease even in ment.
the absence of continued exposure, although The employer is required to provide the
this appears to be a highly individualized physician with the following information: A
characteristic. In severe cases, death may be copy of this standard and appendices; a de-
caused by respiratory or cardiac failure. scription of the employee’s duties as they re-
late to asbestos exposure; the employee’s
IV. Surveillance and Preventive Considerations representative level of exposure to asbestos;
As noted above, exposure to asbestos has a description of any personal protective and
been linked to an increased risk of lung can- respiratory equipment used; and information
cer, mesothelioma, gastrointestinal cancer, from previous medical examinations of the
and asbestosis among occupationally ex- affected employee that is not otherwise
posed workers. Adequate screening tests to available to the physician. Making this in-
determine an employee’s potential for devel- formation available to the physician will aid
oping serious chronic diseases, such as a can- in the evaluation of the employee’s health in
cer, from exposure to asbestos do not pres- relation to assigned duties and fitness to
ently exist. However, some tests, particu- wear personal protective equipment, if re-
larly chest X-rays and pulmonary function quired.
tests, may indicate that an employee has The employer is required to obtain a writ-
been overexposed to asbestos increasing his ten opinion from the examining physician
or her risk of developing exposure related containing the results of the medical exam-
chronic diseases. It is important for the phy- ination; the physician’s opinion as to wheth-
sician to become familiar with the operating
er the employee has any detected medical
conditions in which occupational exposure to
conditions that would place the employee at
asbestos is likely to occur. This is particu-
an increased risk of exposure-related disease;
larly important in evaluating medical and
work histories and in conducting physical any recommended limitations on the em-
examinations. When an active employee has ployee or on the use of personal protective
been identified as having been overexposed equipment; and a statement that the em-
to asbestos measures taken by the employer ployee has been informed by the physician of
to eliminate or mitigate further exposure the results of the medical examination and
should also lower the risk of serious long- of any medical conditions related to asbestos
term consequences. exposure that require further explanation or
The employer is required to institute a treatment. This written opinion must not re-
medical surveillance program for all employ- veal specific findings or diagnoses unrelated
ees who are or will be exposed to asbestos at to exposure to asbestos, and a copy of the
or above the permissible exposure limit (0.1 opinion must be provided to the affected em-
fiber per cubic centimeter of air). All exami- ployee.
nations and procedures must be performed
by or under the supervision of a licensed APPENDIX J TO § 1926.1101—SMOKING CES-
physician, at a reasonable time and place, SATION PROGRAM INFORMATION FOR ASBES-
and at no cost to the employee. TOS—NON-MANDATORY
Although broad latitude is given to the
physician in prescribing specific tests to be The following organizations provide smok-
included in the medical surveillance pro- ing cessation information.
gram, OSHA requires inclusion of the fol- 1. The National Cancer Institute operates a
lowing elements in the routine examination: toll-free Cancer Information Service (CIS)
(i) Medical and work histories with special with trained personnel to help you. Call 1–
emphasis directed to symptoms of the res- 800–4–CANCER* to reach the CIS office serv-
piratory system, cardiovascular system, and ing your area, or write: Office of Cancer
digestive tract. Communications, National Cancer Institute,
(ii) Completion of the respiratory disease National Institutes of Health, Building 31
questionnaire contained in appendix D. Room 10A24, Bethesda, Maryland 20892.
572
2. American Cancer Society, 3340 Peachtree ID–191
Road, N.E., Atlanta, Georgia 30026, (404) Matrix: Bulk
320–3333 Collection Procedure:
The American Cancer Society (ACS) is a Collect approximately 1 to 2 grams of each
voluntary organization composed of 58 divi- type of material and place into separate
sions and 3,100 local units. Through ‘‘The 20 mL scintillation vials.
Great American Smokeout’’ in November, Analytical Procedure:
the annual Cancer Crusade in April, and nu- A portion of each separate phase is ana-
merous educational materials, ACS helps lyzed by gross examination, phase-polar
people learn about the health hazards of examination, and central stop dispersion
smoking and become successful ex-smokers. microscopy.
3. American Heart Association, 7320 Green- Commercial manufacturers and products
ville Avenue, Dallas, Texas 75231, (214) 750– mentioned in this method are for descriptive
5300 use only and do not constitute endorsements
The American Heart Association (AHA) is by USDOL-OSHA. Similar products from
a voluntary organization with 130,000 mem- other sources may be substituted.
bers (physicians, scientists, and laypersons) 1. Introduction
in 55 state and regional groups. AHA pro-
duces a variety of publications and audio- This method describes the collection and
visual materials about the effects of smok- analysis of asbestos bulk materials by light
ing on the heart. AHA also has developed a microscopy techniques including phase-
guidebook for incorporating a weight-control polar illumination and central-stop disper-
component into smoking cessation pro- sion microscopy. Some terms unique to as-
grams. bestos analysis are defined below:
4. American Lung Association, 1740 Broad- Amphibole: A family of minerals whose
way, New York, New York 10019, (212) 245– crystals are formed by long, thin units which
8000 have two thin ribbons of double chain sili-
A voluntary organization of 7,500 members cate with a brucite ribbon in between. The
(physicians, nurses, and laypersons), the shape of each unit is similar to an ‘‘I beam’’.
American Lung Association (ALA) conducts Minerals important in asbestos analysis in-
numerous public information programs clude cummingtonite-grunerite, crocidolite,
about the health effects of smoking. ALA tremolite-actinolite and anthophyllite.
has 59 state and 85 local units. The organiza- Asbestos: A term for naturally occurring fi-
tion actively supports legislation and infor- brous minerals. Asbestos includes chrysotile,
mation campaigns for non-smokers’ rights cummingtonite-grunerite asbestos (amosite),
and provides help for smokers who want to anthophyllite asbestos, tremolite asbestos,
quit, for example, through ‘‘Freedom From crocidolite, actinolite asbestos and any of
Smoking,’’ a self-help smoking cessation these minerals which have been chemically
program. treated or altered. The precise chemical for-
mulation of each species varies with the lo-
5. Office on Smoking and Health, U.S. De-
cation from which it was mined. Nominal
partment of Health and Human Services,
compositions are listed:
5600 Fishers Lane, Park Building, Room
110, Rockville, Maryland 20857 Chrysotile .......... Mg3 Si2 O5(OH)4
Crocidolite
The Office on Smoking and Health (OSH) is
(Riebeckite as-
the Department of Health and Human Serv-
bestos) ............. Na2 Fe32+Fe23+Si8
ices’ lead agency in smoking control. OSH
O22(OH)2
has sponsored distribution of publications on
smoking-related topics, such as free flyers on Cummingtonite-
relapse after initial quitting, helping a Grunerite as-
friend or family member quit smoking, the bestos
health hazards of smoking, and the effects of (Amosite) ........ (Mg,Fe)7 Si8 O22(OH)2
parental smoking on teenagers. Tremolite-Actin-
*In Hawaii, on Oahu call 524–1234 (call col- olite asbestos .. Ca2(Mg,Fe)5 Si8 O22(OH)2
lect from neighboring islands), Anthophyllite as-
Spanish-speaking staff members are avail- bestos .............. (Mg,Fe)7 Si8 O22(OH)2
able during daytime hours to callers from Asbestos Fiber: A fiber of asbestos meeting
the following areas: California, Florida, the criteria for a fiber. (See section 3.5. of
Georgia, Illinois, New Jersey (area code 201), this Appendix)
New York, and Texas. Consult your local Aspect Ratio: The ratio of the length of a
telephone directory for listings of local chap- fiber to its diameter usually defined as
ters. ‘‘length : width’’, e.g. 3:1.
Brucite: A sheet mineral with the composi-
APPENDIX K TO § 1926.1101—POLARIZED LIGHT
tion Mg(OH)2.
MICROSCOPY OF ASBESTOS (NON-MANDATORY)
Central Stop Dispersion Staining (microscope):
Method number: This is a dark field microscope technique
573
that images particles using only light re- en huts the people lived in as well as
fracted by the particle, excluding light that strengthening for pottery. Adverse health as-
travels through the particle unrefracted. pects of the mineral were noted nearly 2000
This is usually accomplished with a McCrone years ago when Pliny the Younger wrote
objective or other arrangement which places about the poor health of slaves in the asbes-
a circular stop with apparent aperture equal tos mines. Although known to be injurious
to the objective aperture in the back focal for centuries, the first modern references to
plane of the microscope. its toxicity were by the British Labor
Cleavage Fragments: Mineral particles Inspectorate when it banned asbestos dust
formed by the comminution of minerals, es- from the workplace in 1898. Asbestosis cases
pecially those characterized by relatively were described in the literature after the
parallel sides and moderate aspect ratio. turn of the century. Cancer was first sus-
Differential Counting: The term applied to pected in the mid 1930’s and a causal link to
the practice of excluding certain kinds of fi- mesothelioma was made in 1965. Because of
bers from a phase contrast asbestos count the public concern for worker and public
because they are not asbestos. safety with the use of this material, several
Fiber: A particle longer than or equal to 5
different types of analysis were applied to
µm with a length to width ratio greater than
the determination of asbestos content. Light
or equal to 3:1. This may include cleavage
microscopy requires a great deal of experi-
fragments. (see section 3.5 of this appendix).
ence and craft. Attempts were made to apply
Phase Contrast: Contrast obtained in the
microscope by causing light scattered by less subjective methods to the analysis. X-
small particles to destructively interfere ray diffraction was partially successful in
with unscattered light, thereby enhancing determining the mineral types but was un-
the visibility of very small particles and parable to separate out the fibrous portions
ticles with very low intrinsic contrast. from the non-fibrous portions. Also, the min-
Phase Contrast Microscope: A microscope imum detection limit for asbestos analysis
configured with a phase mask pair to create by X-ray diffraction (XRD) is about 1%. Dif-
phase contrast. The technique which uses ferential Thermal Analysis (DTA) was no
this is called Phase Contrast Microscopy more successful. These provide useful cor-
(PCM). roborating information when the presence of
Phase-Polar Analysis: This is the use of po- asbestos has been shown by microscopy;
larized light in a phase contrast microscope. however, neither can determine the dif-
It is used to see the same size fibers that are ference between fibrous and non-fibrous min-
visible in air filter analysis. Although fibers erals when both habits are present. The same
finer than 1 µm are visible, analysis of these is true of Infrared Absorption (IR).
is inferred from analysis of larger bundles When electron microscopy was applied to
that are usually present. asbestos analysis, hundreds of fibers were
Phase-Polar Microscope: The phase-polar discovered present too small to be visible in
microscope is a phase contrast microscope any light microscope. There are two dif-
which has an analyzer, a polarizer, a first ferent types of electron microscope used for
order red plate and a rotating phase con- asbestos analysis: Scanning Electron Micro-
denser all in place so that the polarized light scope (SEM) and Transmission Electron Mi-
image is enhanced by phase contrast. croscope (TEM). Scanning Electron Micros-
Sealing Encapsulant: This is a product copy is useful in identifying minerals. The
which can be applied, preferably by spraying, SEM can provide two of the three pieces of
onto an asbestos surface which will seal the information required to identify fibers by
surface so that fibers cannot be released. electron microscopy: morphology and chem-
Serpentine: A mineral family consisting of istry. The third is structure as determined
minerals with the general composition by Selected Area Electron Diffraction—
Mg3(Si2 O5(OH)4 having the magnesium in SAED which is performed in the TEM. Al-
brucite layer over a silicate layer. Minerals though the resolution of the SEM is suffi-
important in asbestos analysis included in cient for very fine fibers to be seen, accuracy
this family are chrysotile, lizardite, of chemical analysis that can be performed
antigorite. on the fibers varies with fiber diameter in fi-
bers of less than 0.2 µm diameter. The TEM
1.1. History
is a powerful tool to identify fibers too small
Light microscopy has been used for well to be resolved by light microscopy and
over 100 years for the determination of min- should be used in conjunction with this
eral species. This analysis is carried out method when necessary. The TEM can pro-
using specialized polarizing microscopes as vide all three pieces of information required
well as bright field microscopes. The identi- for fiber identification. Most fibers thicker
fication of minerals is an on-going process than 1 µm can adequately be defined in the
with many new minerals described each light microscope. The light microscope re-
year. The first recorded use of asbestos was mains as the best instrument for the deter-
in Finland about 2500 B.C. where the mate- mination of mineral type. This is because
rial was used in the mud wattle for the wood- the minerals under investigation were first
574
described analytically with the light micro- analysis such as X-ray diffraction, IR anal-
scope. It is inexpensive and gives positive ysis, DTA, etc. are inappropriate where the
identification for most samples analyzed. material is not known to be fibrous.
Further, when optical techniques are inad- (c) The analysis is quick, requires little
equate, there is ample indication that alter- preparation time, and can be performed on-
native techniques should be used for com- site if a suitably equipped microscope is
plete identification of the sample. available.
The disadvantages are:
1.2. Principle (a) Even using phase-polar illumination,
Minerals consist of atoms that may be ar- not all the fibers present may be seen. This
ranged in random order or in a regular ar- is a problem for very low asbestos concentra-
rangement. Amorphous materials have tions where agglomerations or large bundles
atoms in random order while crystalline ma- of fibers may not be present to allow identi-
terials have long range order. Many mate- fication by inference.
rials are transparent to light, at least for (b) The method requires a great degree of
small particles or for thin sections. The sophistication on the part of the
properties of these materials can be inves- microscopist. An analyst is only as useful as
tigated by the effect that the material has his mental catalog of images. Therefore, a
on light passing through it. The six asbestos microscopist’s accuracy is enhanced by expe-
minerals are all crystalline with particular rience. The mineralogical training of the an-
properties that have been identified and catalyst is very important. It is the basis on
aloged. These six minerals are anisotropic. which subjective decisions are made.
They have a regular array of atoms, but the (c) The method uses only a tiny amount of
arrangement is not the same in all direc- material for analysis. This may lead to sam-
tions. Each major direction of the crystal pling bias and false results (high or low).
presents a different regularity. Light pho- This is especially true if the sample is se-
tons travelling in each of these main direc- verely inhomogeneous.
tions will encounter different electrical (d) Fibers may be bound in a matrix and
neighborhoods, affecting the path and time not distinguishable as fibers so identifica-
of travel. The techniques outlined in this tion cannot be made.
method use the fact that light traveling
through fibers or crystals in different direc- 1.4. Method Performance
tions will behave differently, but predict- 1.4.1. This method can be used for deter-
ably. The behavior of the light as it travels mination of asbestos content from 0 to 100%
through a crystal can be measured and com- asbestos. The detection limit has not been
pared with known or determined values to adequately determined, although for selected
identify the mineral species. Usually, Polar- samples, the limit is very low, depending on
ized Light Microscopy (PLM) is performed the number of particles examined. For most-
with strain-free objectives on a bright-field ly homogeneous, finely divided samples, with
microscope platform. This would limit the no difficult fibrous interferences, the detec-
resolution of the microscope to about 0.4 µm. tion limit is below 1%. For inhomogeneous
Because OSHA requires the counting and samples (most samples), the detection limit
identification of fibers visible in phase con- remains undefined. NIST has conducted pro-
trast, the phase contrast platform is used to ficiency testing of laboratories on a national
visualize the fibers with the polarizing ele- scale. Although each round is reported sta-
ments added into the light path. Polarized tistically with an average, control limits,
light methods cannot identify fibers finer etc., the results indicate a difficulty in es-
than about 1 µm in diameter even though tablishing precision especially in the low
they are visible. The finest fibers are usually concentration range. It is suspected that
identified by inference from the presence of there is significant bias in the low range es-
larger, identifiable fiber bundles. When fibers pecially near 1%. EPA tried to remedy this
are present, but not identifiable by light mi- by requiring a mandatory point counting
croscopy, use either SEM or TEM to deter- scheme for samples less than 10%. The point
mine the fiber identity. counting procedure is tedious, and may in-
troduce significant biases of its own. It has
1.3. Advantages and Disadvantages
not been incorporated into this method.
The advantages of light microcopy are: 1.4.2. The precision and accuracy of the
(a) Basic identification of the materials quantitation tests performed in this method
was first performed by light microscopy and are unknown. Concentrations are easier to
gross analysis. This provides a large base of determine in commercial products where as-
published information against which to bestos was deliberately added because the
check analysis and analytical technique. amount is usually more than a few percent.
(b) The analysis is specific to fibers. The An analyst’s results can be ‘‘calibrated’’
minerals present can exist in asbestiform, fi- against the known amounts added by the
brous, prismatic, or massive varieties all at manufacturer. For geological samples, the
the same time. Therefore, bulk methods of degree of homogeneity affects the precision.
575
1.4.3. The performance of the method is an- 1.6. Uses and Occupational Exposure
alyst dependent. The analyst must choose
Asbestos is ubiquitous in the environment.
carefully and not necessarily randomly the
More than 40% of the land area of the United
portions for analysis to assure that detection
States is composed of minerals which may
of asbestos occurs when it is present. For
contain asbestos. Fortunately, the actual
this reason, the analyst must have adequate formation of great amounts of asbestos is
training in sample preparation, and experi- relatively rare. Nonetheless, there are loca-
ence in the location and identification of as- tions in which environmental exposure can
bestos in samples. This is usually accom- be severe such as in the Serpentine Hills of
plished through substantial on-the-job train- California.
ing as well as formal education in min- There are thousands of uses for asbestos in
eralogy and microscopy. industry and the home. Asbestos abatement
workers are the most current segment of the
1.5. Interferences
population to have occupational exposure to
Any material which is long, thin, and great amounts of asbestos. If the material is
small enough to be viewed under the micro- undisturbed, there is no exposure. Exposure
scope can be considered an interference for occurs when the asbestos-containing mate-
asbestos. There are literally hundreds of rial is abraded or otherwise disturbed during
interferences in workplaces. The techniques maintenance operations or some other activ-
described in this method are normally suffi- ity. Approximately 95% of the asbestos in
cient to eliminate the interferences. An ana- place in the United States is chrysotile.
lyst’s success in eliminating the inter- Amosite and crocidolite make up nearly
ferences depends on proper training. all the difference. Tremolite and
Asbestos minerals belong to two mineral anthophyllite make up a very small percent-
families: the serpentines and the amphiboles. age. Tremolite is found in extremely small
In the serpentine family, the only common amounts in certain chrysotile deposits. Ac-
fibrous mineral is chrysotile. Occasionally, tinolite exposure is probably greatest from
the mineral antigorite occurs in a fibril environmental sources, but has been identi-
habit with morphology similar to the fied in vermiculite containing, sprayed-on
amphiboles. The amphibole minerals consist insulating materials which may have been
of a score of different minerals of which only certified as asbestos-free.
five are regulated by federal standard:
1.7. Physical and Chemical Properties
amosite, crocidolite, anthophyllite asbestos,
tremolite asbestos and actinolite asbestos. The nominal chemical compositions for
These are the only amphibole minerals that the asbestos minerals were given in Section
have been commercially exploited for their 1. Compared to cleavage fragments of the
fibrous properties; however, the rest can and same minerals, asbestiform fibers possess a
do occur occasionally in asbestiform habit. high tensile strength along the fiber axis.
In addition to the related mineral inter- They are chemically inert, non-combustible,
ferences, other minerals common in building and heat resistant. Except for chrysotile,
material may present a problem for some they are insoluble in Hydrochloric acid
microscopists: gypsum, anhydrite, brucite, (HCl). Chrysotile is slightly soluble in HCl.
quartz fibers, talc fibers or ribbons, wollas- Asbestos has high electrical resistance and
tonite, perlite, attapulgite, etc. Other fi- good sound absorbing characteristics. It can
brous materials commonly present in work- be woven into cables, fabrics or other tex-
places are: fiberglass, mineral wool, ceramic tiles, or matted into papers, felts, and mats.
wool, refractory ceramic fibers, kevlar,
nomex, synthetic fibers, graphite or carbon 1.8. Toxicology (This section is for Informa-
fibers, cellulose (paper or wood) fibers, metal tion Only and Should Not Be Taken as
fibers, etc. OSHA Policy)
Matrix embedding material can sometimes Possible physiologic results of respiratory
be a negative interference. The analyst may exposure to asbestos are mesothelioma of the
not be able to easily extract the fibers from pleura or peritoneum, interstitial fibrosis,
the matrix in order to use the method. asbestosis, pneumoconiosis, or respiratory
Where possible, remove the matrix before cancer. The possible consequences of asbes-
the analysis, taking careful note of the loss tos exposure are detailed in the NIOSH Cri-
of weight. Some common matrix materials teria Document or in the OSHA Asbestos
are: vinyl, rubber, tar, paint, plant fiber, ce- Standards 29 CFR 1910.1001 and 29 CFR
ment, and epoxy. A further negative inter- 1926.1101 and 29 CFR 1915.1001.
ference is that the asbestos fibers themselves
may be either too small to be seen in Phase 2. Sampling Procedure
contrast Microscopy (PCM) or of a very low
fibrous quality, having the appearance of 2.1. Equipment for sampling
plant fibers. The analyst’s ability to deal (a) Tube or cork borer sampling device
with these materials increases with experi- (b) Knife
ence. (c) 20 mL scintillation vial or similar vial
576
(d) Sealing encapsulant 3. Analysis
2.2. Safety Precautions The analysis of asbestos samples can be di-
vided into two major parts: sample prepara-
Asbestos is a known carcinogen. Take care tion and microscopy. Because of the different
when sampling. While in an asbestos-con- asbestos uses that may be encountered by
taining atmosphere, a properly selected and the analyst, each sample may need different
fit-tested respirator should be worn. Take preparation steps. The choices are outlined
samples in a manner to cause the least below. There are several different tests that
amount of dust. Follow these general guide- are performed to identify the asbestos spe-
lines: cies and determine the percentage. They will
(a) Do not make unnecessary dust. be explained below.
(b) Take only a small amount (1 to 2 g).
(c) Tightly close the sample container. 3.1. Safety
(d) Use encapsulant to seal the spot where
(a) Do not create unnecessary dust. Handle
the sample was taken, if necessary.
the samples in HEPA-filter equipped hoods.
2.3. Sampling Procedure If samples are received in bags, envelopes or
other inappropriate container, open them
Samples of any suspect material should be only in a hood having a face velocity at or
taken from an inconspicuous place. Where greater than 100 fpm. Transfer a small
the material is to remain, seal the sampling amount to a scintillation vial and only han-
wound with an encapsulant to eliminate the dle the smaller amount.
potential for exposure from the sample site. (b) Open samples in a hood, never in the
Microscopy requires only a few milligrams of open lab area.
material. The amount that will fill a 20 mL (c) Index of refraction oils can be toxic.
scintillation vial is more than adequate. Be Take care not to get this material on the
sure to collect samples from all layers and skin. Wash immediately with soap and water
phases of material. If possible, make sepa- if this happens.
rate samples of each different phase of the (d) Samples that have been heated in the
material. This will aid in determining the muffle furnace or the drying oven may be
actual hazard. DO NOT USE ENVELOPES, hot. Handle them with tongs until they are
PLASTIC OR PAPER BAGS OF ANY KIND TO cool enough to handle.
COLLECT SAMPLES. The use of plastic bags (e) Some of the solvents used, such as THF
presents a contamination hazard to labora- (tetrahydrofuran), are toxic and should only
tory personnel and to other samples. When be handled in an appropriate fume hood and
these containers are opened, a bellows effect according to instructions given in the Mate-
blows fibers out of the container onto every- rial Safety Data Sheet (MSDS).
thing, including the person opening the con-
tainer. 3.2. Equipment
If a cork-borer type sampler is available, (a) Phase contrast microscope with 10x, 16x
push the tube through the material all the and 40x objectives, 10x wide-field eyepieces,
way, so that all layers of material are sam- G–22 Walton-Beckett graticule, Whipple
pled. Some samplers are intended to be dis- disk, polarizer, analyzer and first order red
posable. These should be capped and sent to or gypsum plate, 100 Watt illuminator, rotat-
the laboratory. If a non-disposable cork ing position condenser with oversize phase
borer is used, empty the contents into a scin- rings, central stop dispersion objective,
tillation vial and send to the laboratory. Kohler illumination and a rotating mechan-
Vigorously and completely clean the cork ical stage.
borer between samples. (b) Stereo microscope with reflected light
illumination, transmitted light illumina-
2.4 Shipment tion, polarizer, analyzer and first order red
Samples packed in glass vials must not or gypsum plate, and rotating stage.
touch or they might break in shipment. (c) Negative pressure hood for the stereo
(a) Seal the samples with a sample seal microscope
over the end to guard against tampering and (d) Muffle furnace capable of 600 °C
to identify the sample. (e) Drying oven capable of 50–150 °C
(b) Package the bulk samples in separate (f) Aluminum specimen pans
packages from the air samples. They may (g) Tongs for handling samples in the fur-
cross-contaminate each other and will inval- nace
idate the results of the air samples. (h) High dispersion index of refraction oils
(c) Include identifying paperwork with the (Special for dispersion staining.)
samples, but not in contact with the sus- n = 1.550
pected asbestos. n = 1.585
(d) To maintain sample accountability, n = 1.590
ship the samples by certified mail, overnight n = 1.605
express, or hand carry them to the labora- n = 1.620
tory. n = 1.670
577
n = 1.680 lower temperatures for 1 to 2 h may have a
n = 1.690 measurable effect on the optical properties
(i) A set of index of refraction oils from of the minerals. If the analyst is unsure of
about n=1.350 to n=2.000 in n=0.005 incre- what to expect, a sample of standard asbes-
ments. (Standard for Becke line analysis.) tos should be heated to the same tempera-
(j) Glass slides with painted or frosted ends ture for the same length of time so that it
1×3 inches 1mm (thick, precleaned. can be examined for the proper interpreta-
(k) Cover Slips 22×22 mm, #11⁄2 tion.
(l) Paper clips or dissection needles
(m) Hand grinder (c) Samples With Organic Interference—THF
(n) Scalpel with both #10 and #11 blades Vinyl asbestos tile is the most common
(o) 0.1 molar HCl material treated with this solvent, although,
(p) Decalcifying solution (Baxter Scientific substances containing tar will sometimes
Products) Ethylenediaminetetraacetic Acid, yield to this treatment. Select a portion of
Tetrasodium ..........................................0.7 g/l the material and then grind it up if possible.
Sodium Potassium Tartrate .........8.0 mg/liter Weigh the sample and place it in a test tube.
Hydrochloric Acid ..........................99.2 g/liter Add sufficient THF to dissolve the organic
Sodium Tartrate.............................0.14 g/liter matrix. This is usually about 4 to 5 mL. Re-
(q) Tetrahydrofuran (THF) member, THF is highly flammable. Filter the
(r) Hotplate capable of 60 °C remaining material through a tared silver
(s) Balance membrane, dry and weigh to determine how
(t) Hacksaw blade much is left after the solvent extraction.
(u) Ruby mortar and pestle Further process the sample to remove car-
bonate or mount directly.
3.3. Sample Pre-Preparation (d) Samples With Carbonate Interference
Sample preparation begins with pre-prepa- Carbonate material is often found on fibers
ration which may include chemical reduc- and sometimes must be removed in order to
tion of the matrix, heating the sample to perform dispersion microscopy. Weigh out a
dryness or heating in the muffle furnace. The portion of the material and place it in a test
end result is a sample which has been re- tube. Add a sufficient amount of 0.1 M HCl or
duced to a powder that is sufficiently fine to decalcifying solution in the tube to react all
fit under the cover slip. Analyze different the carbonate as evidenced by gas formation;
phases of samples separately, e.g., tile and i.e., when the gas bubbles stop, add a little
the tile mastic should be analyzed separately more solution. If no more gas forms, the re-
as the mastic may contain asbestos while action is complete. Filter the material out
the tile may not. through a tared silver membrane, dry and
(a) Wet Samples weigh to determine the weight lost.
Samples with a high water content will not
3.4. Sample Preparation
give the proper dispersion colors and must be
dried prior to sample mounting. Remove the Samples must be prepared so that accurate
lid of the scintillation vial, place the bottle determination can be made of the asbestos
in the drying oven and heat at 100 °C to dry- type and amount present. The following
ness (usually about 2 h). Samples which are steps are carried out in the low-flow hood (a
not submitted to the lab in glass must be re- low-flow hood has less than 50 fpm flow):
moved and placed in glass vials or aluminum (1) If the sample has large lumps, is hard,
weighing pans before placing them in the or cannot be made to lie under a cover slip,
drying oven. the grain size must be reduced. Place a small
(b) Samples With Organic Interference—Muf- amount between two slides and grind the
fle Furnace material between them or grind a small
These may include samples with tar as a amount in a clean mortar and pestle. The
matrix, vinyl asbestos tile, or any other or- choice of whether to use an alumina, ruby,
ganic that can be reduced by heating. Re- or diamond mortar depends on the hardness
move the sample from the vial and weigh in of the material. Impact damage can alter the
a balance to determine the weight of the sub- asbestos mineral if too much mechanical
mitted portion. Place the sample in a muffle shock occurs. (Freezer mills can completely
furnace at 500 °C for 1 to 2 h or until all obvi- destroy the observable crystallinity of asbes-
ous organic material has been removed. Re- tos and should not be used). For some sam-
trieve, cool and weigh again to determine ples, a portion of material can be shaved off
the weight loss on ignition. This is necessary with a scalpel, ground off with a hand grind-
to determine the asbestos content of the sub- er or hack saw blade.
mitted sample, because the analyst will be The preparation tools should either be dis-
looking at a reduced sample. posable or cleaned thoroughly. Use vigorous
NOTE: Heating above 600 °C will cause the scrubbing to loosen the fibers during the
sample to undergo a structural change washing. Rinse the implements with copious
which, given sufficient time, will convert the amounts of water and air-dry in a dust-free
chrysotile to forsterite. Heating even at environment.
578
(2) If the sample is powder or has been re- This is useful to identify asbestos in severely
duced as in (1) above, it is ready to mount. inhomogeneous samples.
Place a glass slide on a piece of optical tis- When it is determined that amphiboles
sue and write the identification on the paint- may be present, repeat the above process
ed or frosted end. Place two drops of index of using the appropriate high-dispersion oils
refraction medium n=1.550 on the slide. (The until an identification is made or all six as-
medium n=1.550 is chosen because it is the bestos minerals have been ruled out. Note
matching index for chrysotile. Dip the end of that percent determination must be done in
a clean paper-clip or dissecting needle into the index medium 1.550 because amphiboles
the droplet of refraction medium on the slide tend to disappear in their matching medi-
to moisten it. Then dip the probe into the ums.
powder sample. Transfer what sticks on the
probe to the slide. The material on the end of 3.5. Analytical procedure
the probe should have a diameter of about 3 NOTE: This method presumes some knowl-
mm for a good mount. If the material is very edge of mineralogy and optical petrography.
fine, less sample may be appropriate. For The analysis consists of three parts: The
non-powder samples such as fiber mats, for- determination of whether there is asbestos
ceps should be used to transfer a small present, what type is present and the deter-
amount of material to the slide. Stir the ma- mination of how much is present. The gen-
terial in the medium on the slide, spreading eral flow of the analysis is:
it out and making the preparation as uni- (1) Gross examination.
form as possible. Place a cover-slip on the (2) Examination under polarized light on
preparation by gently lowering onto the the stereo microscope.
slide and allowing it to fall ‘‘trapdoor’’ fash- (3) Examination by phase-polar illumina-
ion on the preparation to push out any bub- tion on the compound phase microscope.
bles. Press gently on the cover slip to even (4) Determination of species by dispersion
out the distribution of particulate on the stain. Examination by Becke line analysis
slide. If there is insufficient mounting oil on may also be used; however, this is usually
the slide, one or two drops may be placed more cumbersome for asbestos determina-
near the edge of the coverslip on the slide. tion.
Capillary action will draw the necessary (5) Difficult samples may need to be ana-
amount of liquid into the preparation. Re- lyzed by SEM or TEM, or the results from
move excess oil with the point of a labora- those techniques combined with light mi-
tory wiper. croscopy for a definitive identification.
Treat at least two different areas of each Identification of a particle as asbestos re-
phase in this fashion. Choose representative quires that it be asbestiform. Description of
areas of the sample. It may be useful to se- particles should follow the suggestion of
lect particular areas or fibers for analysis. Campbell. (Figure 1)
579
For the purpose of regulation, the mineral ily parted from it. Asbestos fibers are very
must be one of the six minerals covered and long compared with their widths. The fibers
must be in the asbestos growth habit. Large have a very high tensile strength as dem-
specimen samples of asbestos generally have onstrated by bending without breaking. As-
the gross appearance of wood. Fibers are eas- bestos fibers exist in bundles that are easily
580
ER10AU94.026</GPH>
parted, show longitudinal fine structure and venience. Examine with the polarizing stereo
may be tufted at the ends showing ‘‘bundle microscope. Estimate the percentage of as-
of sticks’’ morphology. In the microscope bestos based on the amount of birefringent
some of these properties may not be observ- fiber present.
able. Amphiboles do not always show stri- (3) Examine the slides on the phase-polar
ations along their length even when they are microscopes at magnifications of 160 and
asbestos. Neither will they always show tuft- 400×. Note the morphology of the fibers.
ing. They generally do not show a curved na- Long, thin, very straight fibers with little
ture except for very long fibers. Asbestos and curvature are indicative of fibers from the
asbestiform minerals are usually character- amphibole family. Curved, wavy fibers are
ized in groups by extremely high aspect ra- usually indicative of chrysotile. Estimate
tios (greater than 100:1). While aspect ratio the percentage of asbestos on the phase-polar
analysis is useful for characterizing popu- microscope under conditions of crossed
lations of fibers, it cannot be used to identify polars and a gypsum plate. Fibers smaller
individual fibers of intermediate to short as- than 1.0 µm in thickness must be identified
pect ratio. Observation of many fibers is by inference to the presence of larger, identi-
often necessary to determine whether a sam- fiable fibers and morphology. If no larger fi-
ple consists of ‘‘cleavage fragments’’ or of as- bers are visible, electron microscopy should
bestos fibers. be performed. At this point, only a tentative
Most cleavage fragments of the asbestos identification can be made. Full identifica-
minerals are easily distinguishable from true tion must be made with dispersion micros-
asbestos fibers. This is because true cleavage copy. Details of the tests are included in the
fragments usually have larger diameters appendices.
than 1 µm. Internal structure of particles (4) Once fibers have been determined to be
larger than this usually shows them to have present, they must be identified. Adjust the
no internal fibrillar structure. In addition, microscope for dispersion mode and observe
cleavage fragments of the monoclinic the fibers. The microscope has a rotating
amphiboles show inclined extinction under stage, one polarizing element, and a system
crossed polars with no compensator. Asbes- for generating dark-field dispersion micros-
tos fibers usually show extinction at zero de- copy (see Section 4.6. of this appendix). Align
grees or ambiguous extinction if any at all. a fiber with its length parallel to the polar-
Morphologically, the larger cleavage frag- izer and note the color of the Becke lines.
ments are obvious by their blunt or stepped Rotate the stage to bring the fiber length
ends showing prismatic habit. Also, they perpendicular to the polarizer and note the
tend to be acicular rather than filiform. color. Repeat this process for every fiber or
Where the particles are less than 1 µm in fiber bundle examined. The colors must be
diameter and have an aspect ratio greater consistent with the colors generated by
than or equal to 3:1, it is recommended that standard asbestos reference materials for a
the sample be analyzed by SEM or TEM if positive identification. In n=1.550,
there is any question whether the fibers are amphiboles will generally show a yellow to
cleavage fragments or asbestiform particles. straw-yellow color indicating that the fiber
Care must be taken when analyzing by indices of refraction are higher than the liq-
electron microscopy because the inter- uid. If long, thin fibers are noted and the col-
ferences are different from those in light mi- ors are yellow, prepare further slides as
croscopy and may structurally be very simi- above in the suggested matching liquids list-
lar to asbestos. The classic interference is ed below:
between anthophyllite and biopyribole or in-
termediate fiber. Use the same morpho- Type of asbestos Index of refraction
logical clues for electron microscopy as are
Chrysotile ............................... n=1.550.
used for light microscopy, e.g. fibril split-
Amosite .................................. n=1.670 or 1.680.
ting, internal longitudinal striation, fraying, Crocidolite .............................. n=1.690.
curvature, etc. Anthophyllite .......................... n=1.605 and 1.620.
(1) Gross examination: Tremolite ................................ n=1.605 and 1.620.
Examine the sample, preferably in the Actinolite ................................ n=1.620.
glass vial. Determine the presence of any ob-
vious fibrous component. Estimate a per- Where more than one liquid is suggested,
centage based on previous experience and the first is preferred; however, in some cases
current observation. Determine whether any this liquid will not give good dispersion
pre-preparation is necessary. Determine the color. Take care to avoid interferences in the
number of phases present. This step may be other liquid; e.g., wollastonite in n=1.620 will
carried out or augmented by observation at give the same colors as tremolite. In n=1.605
6 to 40× under a stereo microscope. wollastonite will appear yellow in all direc-
(2) After performing any necessary pre- tions. Wollastonite may be determined under
preparation, prepare slides of each phase as crossed polars as it will change from blue to
described above. Two preparations of the yellow as it is rotated along its fiber axis by
same phase in the same index medium can be tapping on the cover slip. Asbestos minerals
made side-by-side on the same glass for con- will not change in this way.
581
Determination of the angle of extinction Step 3. Microvisual estimation determines
may, when present, aid in the determination that 5% of the sample is chrysotile asbes-
of anthophyllite from tremolite. True asbestos.
tos fibers usually have 0° extinction or am- The reported result is:
biguous extinction, while cleavage fragments
have more definite extinction. R = (Microvisual result in percent) × (Frac-
Continue analysis until both preparations tion remaining after step 2) × (Fraction re-
have been examined and all present species maining of original sample after step 1)
of asbestos are identified. If there are no fi- R = (5)×(.30)×(.60)=0.9%
bers present, or there is less than 0.1% (8) Report the percent and type of asbestos
present, end the analysis with the minimum present. For samples where asbestos was
number of slides (2). identified, but is less than 1.0%, report ‘‘As-
(5) Some fibers have a coating on them bestos present, less than 1.0%.’’ There must
which makes dispersion microscopy very dif- have been at least two observed fibers or
ficult or impossible. Becke line analysis or fiber bundles in the two preparations to be
electron microscopy may be performed in reported as present. For samples where as-
those cases. Determine the percentage by bestos was not seen, report as ‘‘None De-
light microscopy. TEM analysis tends to tected.’’
overestimate the actual percentage present.
(6) Percentage determination is an esti- Auxiliary Information
mate of occluded area, tempered by gross ob- Because of the subjective nature of asbes-
servation. Gross observation information is tos analysis, certain concepts and procedures
used to make sure that the high magnifica- need to be discussed in more depth. This in-
tion microscopy does not greatly over- or formation will help the analyst understand
underestimate the amount of fiber present. why some of the procedures are carried out
This part of the analysis requires a great the way they are.
deal of experience. Satisfactory models for
asbestos content analysis have not yet been 4.1. Light
developed, although some models based on
metallurgical grain-size determination have Light is electromagnetic energy. It travels
found some utility. Estimation is more eas- from its source in packets called quanta. It
ily handled in situations where the grain is instructive to consider light as a plane
sizes visible at about 160× are about the same wave. The light has a direction of travel.
and the sample is relatively homogeneous. Perpendicular to this and mutually perpen-
View all of the area under the cover slip to dicular to each other, are two vector compo-
make the percentage determination. View nents. One is the magnetic vector and the
the fields while moving the stage, paying at- other is the electric vector. We shall only be
tention to the clumps of material. These are concerned with the electric vector. In this
not usually the best areas to perform disper- description, the interaction of the vector and
sion microscopy because of the interference the mineral will describe all the observable
from other materials. But, they are the areas phenomena. From a light source such a mi-
most likely to represent the accurate per- croscope illuminator, light travels in all dif-
centage in the sample. Small amounts of as- ferent direction from the filament.
bestos require slower scanning and more fre- In any given direction away from the fila-
quent analysis of individual fields. ment, the electric vector is perpendicular to
Report the area occluded by asbestos as the direction of travel of a light ray. While
the concentration. This estimate does not perpendicular, its orientation is random
generally take into consideration the dif- about the travel axis. If the electric vectors
ference in density of the different species from all the light rays were lined up by pass-
present in the sample. For most samples this ing the light through a filter that would only
is adequate. Simulation studies with similar let light rays with electric vectors oriented
materials must be carried out to apply in one direction pass, the light would then be
microvisual estimation for that purpose and POLARIZED.
is beyond the scope of this procedure. Polarized light interacts with matter in
(7) Where successive concentrations have the direction of the electric vector. This is
been made by chemical or physical means, the polarization direction. Using this prop-
the amount reported is the percentage of the erty it is possible to use polarized light to
material in the ‘‘as submitted’’ or original probe different materials and identify them
state. The percentage determined by micros- by how they interact with light.
copy is multiplied by the fractions remain- The speed of light in a vacuum is a con-
ing after pre-preparation steps to give the stant at about 2.99×108 m/s. When light trav-
percentage in the original sample. For exam- els in different materials such as air, water,
ple: minerals or oil, it does not travel at this
Step 1. 60% remains after heating at 550 °C speed. It travels slower. This slowing is a
for 1 h. function of both the material through which
Step 2. 30% of the residue of step 1 remains the light is traveling and the wavelength or
after dissolution of carbonate in 0.1 m HCl. frequency of the light. In general, the more
582
dense the material, the slower the light trav- tion to fiber length is used to aid in the iden-
els. Also, generally, the higher the fre- tification of asbestos.
quency, the slower the light will travel. The
ratio of the speed of light in a vacuum to 4.3. Polarized Light Technique
that in a material is called the index of re-
Polarized light microscopy as described in
fraction (n). It is usually measured at 589 nm
this section uses the phase-polar microscope
(the sodium D line). If white light (light con-
taining all the visible wavelengths) travels described in Section 3.2. A phase contrast
through a material, rays of longer wave- microscope is fitted with two polarizing ele-
lengths will travel faster than those of short- ments, one below and one above the sample.
er wavelengths, this separation is called dis- The polarizers have their polarization direc-
persion. Dispersion is used as an identifier of tions at right angles to each other. Depend-
materials as described in Section 4.6. ing on the tests performed, there may be a
compensator between these two polarizing
4.2. Material Properties elements. A compensator is a piece of min-
Materials are either amorphous or crys- eral with known properties that ‘‘com-
talline. The difference between these two de- pensates’’ for some deficiency in the optical
scriptions depends on the positions of the train. Light emerging from a polarizing ele-
atoms in them. The atoms in amorphous ma- ment has its electric vector pointing in the
terials are randomly arranged with no long polarization direction of the element. The
range order. An example of an amorphous light will not be subsequently transmitted
material is glass. The atoms in crystalline through a second element set at a right
materials, on the other hand, are in regular angle to the first element. Unless the light is
arrays and have long range order. Most of altered as it passes from one element to the
the atoms can be found in highly predictable other, there is no transmission of light.
locations. Examples of crystalline material
are salt, gold, and the asbestos minerals. 4.4. Angle of Extinction
It is beyond the scope of this method to de-
Crystals which have different crystal regu-
scribe the different types of crystalline ma-
terials that can be found, or the full descrip- larity in two or three main directions are
tion of the classes into which they can fall. said to be anisotropic. They have a different
However, some general crystallography is index of refraction in each of the main direc-
provided below to give a foundation to the tions. When such a crystal is inserted be-
procedures described. tween the crossed polars, the field of view is
With the exception of anthophyllite, all no longer dark but shows the crystal in
the asbestos minerals belong to the color. The color depends on the properties of
monoclinic crystal type. The unit cell is the the crystal. The light acts as if it travels
basic repeating unit of the crystal and for through the crystal along the optical axes. If
monoclinic crystals can be described as hav- a crystal optical axis were lined up along one
ing three unequal sides, two 90° angles and of the polarizing directions (either the polar-
one angle not equal to 90°. The orthorhombic izer or the analyzer) the light would appear
group, of which anthophyllite is a member to travel only in that direction, and it would
has three unequal sides and three 90° angles. blink out or go dark. The difference in de-
The unequal sides are a consequence of the grees between the fiber direction and the
complexity of fitting the different atoms angle at which it blinks out is called the
into the unit cell. Although the atoms are in angle of extinction. When this angle can be
a regular array, that array is not symmet- measured, it is useful in identifying the min-
rical in all directions. There is long range eral. The procedure for measuring the angle
order in the three major directions of the of extinction is to first identify the polariza-
crystal. However, the order is different in tion direction in the microscope. A commer-
each of the three directions. This has the ef- cial alignment slide can be used to establish
fect that the index of refraction is different
the polarization directions or use
in each of the three directions. Using polar-
anthophyllite or another suitable mineral.
ized light, we can investigate the index of re-
This mineral has a zero degree angle of ex-
fraction in each of the directions and iden-
tify the mineral or material under investiga- tinction and will go dark to extinction as it
tion. The indices a, b, and g are used to iden- aligns with the polarization directions. When
tify the lowest, middle, and highest index of a fiber of anthophyllite has gone to extinc-
refraction respectively. The x direction, as- tion, align the eyepiece reticle or graticule
sociated with a is called the fast axis. Con- with the fiber so that there is a visual cue as
versely, the z direction is associated with g to the direction of polarization in the field of
and is the slow direction. Crocidolite has a view. Tape or otherwise secure the eyepiece
along the fiber length making it ‘‘length- in this position so it will not shift.
fast’’. The remainder of the asbestos min- After the polarization direction has been
erals have the g axis along the fiber length. identified in the field of view, move the par-
They are called ‘‘length-slow’’. This orienta- ticle of interest to the center of the field of
583
view and align it with the polarization direc- used for this test is a gypsum plate of known
tion. For fibers, align the fiber along this di- thickness and birefringence. Such a compen-
rection. Note the angular reading of the ro- sator when oriented at 45° to the polarizer di-
tating stage. Looking at the particle, rotate rection, provides a retardation of 530 nm of
the stage until the fiber goes dark or ‘‘blinks the 530 nm wavelength color. This enhances
out’’. Again note the reading of the stage. the red color and gives the background a
The difference in the first reading and the characteristic red to red-magenta color. If
second is an angle of extinction. this ‘‘full-wave’’ compensator is in place
The angle measured may vary as the ori- when the asbestos preparation is inserted
entation of the fiber changes about its long into the light train, the colors seen on the fi-
axis. Tables of mineralogical data usually re- bers are quite different. Gypsum, like asbes-
port the maximum angle of extinction. As- tos has a fast axis and a slow axis. When a
bestos forming minerals, when they exhibit fiber is aligned with its fast axis in the same
an angle of extinction, usually do show an direction as the fast axis of the gypsum
angle of extinction close to the reported plate, the ray vibrating in the slow direction
maximum, or as appropriate depending on is retarded by both the asbestos and the gyp-
the substitution chemistry. sum. This results in a higher retardation
than would be present for either of the two
4.5. Crossed Polars with Compensator
minerals. The color seen is a second order
When the optical axes of a crystal are not blue. When the fiber is rotated 90° using the
lined up along one of the polarizing direc- rotating stage, the slow direction of the fiber
tions (either the polarizer or the analyzer) is now aligned with the fast direction of the
part of the light travels along one axis and gypsum and the fast direction of the fiber is
part travels along the other visible axis. This aligned with the slow direction of the gyp-
is characteristic of birefringent materials. sum. Thus, one ray vibrates faster in the fast
The color depends on the difference of the direction of the gypsum, and slower in the
two visible indices of refraction and the slow direction of the fiber; the other ray will
thickness of the crystal. The maximum dif- vibrate slower in the slow direction of the
ference available is the difference between gypsum and faster in the fast direction of
the a and the g axes. This maximum dif- the fiber. In this case, the effect is subtrac-
ference is usually tabulated as the tive and the color seen is a first order yel-
birefringence of the crystal. low. As long as the fiber thickness does not
For this test, align the fiber at 45° to the add appreciably to the color, the same basic
polarization directions in order to maximize colors will be seen for all asbestos types ex-
the contribution to each of the optical axes. cept crocidolite. In crocidolite the colors
The colors seen are called retardation colors. will be weaker, may be in the opposite direc-
They arise from the recombination of light tions, and will be altered by the blue absorp-
which has traveled through the two separate tion color natural to crocidolite. Hundreds of
directions of the crystal. One of the rays is other materials will give the same colors as
retarded behind the other since the light in asbestos, and therefore, this test is not defin-
that direction travels slower. On recombina- itive for asbestos. The test is useful in dis-
tion, some of the colors which make up criminating against fiberglass or other
white light are enhanced by constructive in- amorphous fibers such as some synthetic fi-
terference and some are suppressed by de- bers. Certain synthetic fibers will show re-
structive interference. The result is a color tardation colors different than asbestos;
dependent on the difference between the in- however, there are some forms of poly-
dices and the thickness of the crystal. The ethylene and aramid which will show mor-
proper colors, thicknesses, and retardations phology and retardation colors similar to as-
are shown on a Michel-Levy chart. The three bestos minerals. This test must be supple-
items, retardation, thickness and mented with a positive identification test
birefringence are related by the following re- when birefringent fibers are present which
lationship: can not be excluded by morphology. This
R=t(nγ¥nα) test is relatively ineffective for use on fibers
R=retardation, t=crystal thickness in µm, less than 1 µm in diameter. For positive con-
and firmation TEM or SEM should be used if no
nα,γ=indices of refraction. larger bundles or fibers are visible.
Examination of the equation for asbestos
4.6. Dispersion Staining
minerals reveals that the visible colors for
almost all common asbestos minerals and Dispersion microscopy or dispersion stain-
fiber sizes are shades of gray and black. The ing is the method of choice for the identi-
eye is relatively poor at discriminating dif- fication of asbestos in bulk materials. Becke
ferent shades of gray. It is very good at dis- line analysis is used by some laboratories
criminating different colors. In order to and yields the same results as does disper-
compensate for the low retardation, a com- sion staining for asbestos and can be used in
pensator is added to the light train between lieu of dispersion staining. Dispersion stain-
the polarization elements. The compensator ing is performed on the same platform as the
584
phase-polar analysis with the analyzer and note the color. Both colors must be con-
compensator removed. One polarizing ele- sistent with standard asbestos minerals in
ment remains to define the direction of the the correct direction for a positive identi-
light so that the different indices of refrac- fication of asbestos. If only one of the colors
tion of the fibers may be separately deter- is correct while the other is not, the identi-
mined. Dispersion microscopy is a dark-field fication is not positive. If the colors in both
technique when used for asbestos. Particles directions are bluish-white, the analyst has
are imaged with scattered light. Light which chosen a matching index oil which is higher
is unscattered is blocked from reaching the than the correct matching oil, e.g. the ana-
eye either by the back field image mask in a lyst has used n=1.620 where chrysotile is
McCrone objective or a back field image present. The next lower oil (Section 3.5.)
mask in the phase condenser. The most con- should be used to prepare another specimen.
venient method is to use the rotating phase If the color in both directions is yellow-
condenser to move an oversized phase ring white to straw-yellow-white, this indicates
into place. The ideal size for this ring is for that the index of the oil is lower than the
the central disk to be just larger than the index of the fiber, e.g. the preparation is in
objective entry aperture as viewed in the n=1.550 while anthophyllite is present. Select
back focal plane. The larger the disk, the the next higher oil (Section 3.5.) and prepare
less scattered light reaches the eye. This will another slide. Continue in this fashion until
have the effect of diminishing the intensity a positive identification of all asbestos spe-
of dispersion color and will shift the actual cies present has been made or all possible as-
color seen. The colors seen vary even on mi- bestos species have been ruled out by nega-
croscopes from the same manufacturer. This tive results in this test. Certain plant fibers
is due to the different bands of wavelength can have similar dispersion colors as asbes-
exclusion by different mask sizes. The mask tos. Take care to note and evaluate the mor-
may either reside in the condenser or in the phology of the fibers or remove the plant fi-
objective back focal plane. It is imperative bers in pre-preparation. Coating material on
that the analyst determine by experimen- the fibers such as carbonate or vinyl may de-
tation with asbestos standards what the ap- stroy the dispersion color. Usually, there
propriate colors should be for each asbestos will be some outcropping of fiber which will
type. The colors depend also on the tempera- show the colors sufficient for identification.
ture of the preparation and the exact chem- When this is not the case, treat the sample
istry of the asbestos. Therefore, some slight as described in Section 3.3. and then perform
differences from the standards should be al- dispersion staining. Some samples will yield
lowed. This is not a serious problem for com- to Becke line analysis if they are coated or
mercial asbestos uses. This technique is used electron microscopy can be used for identi-
for identification of the indices of refraction fication.
for fibers by recognition of color. There is no
direct numerical readout of the index of re- 5. References
fraction. Correlation of color to actual index 5.1. Crane, D.T., Asbestos in Air, OSHA meth-
of refraction is possible by referral to pub- od ID160, Revised November 1992.
lished conversion tables. This is not nec- 5.2. Ford, W.E., Dana’s Textbook of Min-
essary for the analysis of asbestos. Recogni- eralogy; Fourth Ed.; John Wiley and Son,
tion of appropriate colors along with the New York, 1950, p. vii.
proper morphology are deemed sufficient to 5.3. Selikoff, I.J., Lee, D.H.K., Asbestos and
identify the commercial asbestos minerals. Disease, Academic Press, New York, 1978,
Other techniques including SEM, TEM, and pp. 3,20.
XRD may be required to provide additional 5.4. Women Inspectors of Factories. Annual Re-
information in order to identify other types port for 1898, H.M. Statistical Office, Lon-
of asbestos. don, p. 170 (1898).
Make a preparation in the suspected 5.5. Selikoff,.I.J., Lee, D.H.K., Asbestos and
matching high dispersion oil, e.g., n=1.550 for Disease, Academic Press, New York, 1978,
chrysotile. Perform the preliminary tests to pp. 26,30.
determine whether the fibers are 5.6. Campbell, W.J., et al, Selected Silicate
birefringent or not. Take note of the mor- Minerals and Their Asbestiform Varieties,
phological character. Wavy fibers are indic- United States Department of the Interior,
ative of chrysotile while long, straight, thin, Bureau of Mines, Information Circular
frayed fibers are indicative of amphibole as- 8751, 1977.
bestos. This can aid in the selection of the 5.7. Asbestos, Code of Federal Regulations, 29
appropriate matching oil. The microscope is CFR 1910.1001 and 29 CFR 1926.58.
set up and the polarization direction is noted 5.8. National Emission Standards for Hazardous
as in Section 4.4. Align a fiber with the po- Air Pollutants; Asbestos NESHAP Revision,
larization direction. Note the color. This is FEDERAL REGISTER, Vol. 55, No. 224, 20 No-
the color parallel to the polarizer. Then ro- vember 1990, p. 48410.
tate the fiber rotating the stage 90° so that 5.9. Ross, M. The Asbestos Minerals: Defini-
the polarization direction is across the fiber. tions, Description, Modes of Formation, Phys-
This is the perpendicular position. Again ical and Chemical Properties and Health Risk
585
to the Mining Community, Nation Bureau of § 1926.1103 13 carcinogens (4-
Standards Special Publication, Wash- Nitrobiphenyl, etc.).
ington, DC, 1977.
5.10. Lilis, R., Fibrous Zeolites and Endemic NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
Mesothelioma in Cappadocia, Turkey, J. struction work under this section are iden-
Occ Medicine, 1981, 23,(8),548–550. tical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this
5.11. Occupational Exposure to Asbestos—1972, chapter.
U.S. Department of Health Education and [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996]
Welfare, Public Health Service, Center for
Disease Control, National Institute for Oc- § 1926.1104 alpha-Naphthylamine.
cupational Safety and Health, HSM–72–
10267. NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
5.12. Campbell,W.J., et al, Relationship of struction work under this section are iden-
Mineral Habit to Size Characteristics for tical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this
Tremolite Fragments and Fibers, United chapter.
States Department of the Interior, Bureau [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996]
of Mines, Information Circular 8367, 1979.
5.13. Mefford, D., DCM Laboratory, Denver, § 1926.1105 [Reserved]
private communication, July 1987.
5.14. Deer, W.A., Howie, R.A., Zussman, J., § 1926.1106 Methyl chloromethyl ether.
Rock Forming Minerals, Longman, Thetford,
UK, 1974. NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
5.15. Kerr, P.F., Optical Mineralogy; Third Ed. struction work under this section are iden-
McGraw-Hill, New York, 1959. tical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this
5.16. Veblen, D.R. (Ed.), Amphiboles and Other chapter.
Hydrous Pyriboles—Mineralogy, Reviews in [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996]
Mineralogy, Vol 9A, Michigan, 1982, pp 1–
102. § 1926.1107 3,3′-Dichlorobenzidiene
5.17. Dixon, W.C., Applications of Optical Mi- (and its salts).
croscopy in the Analysis of Asbestos and
Quartz, ACS Symposium Series, No. 120, NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
Analytical Techniques in Occupational struction work under this section are iden-
Health Chemistry, 1979. tical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this
5.18. Polarized Light Microscopy, McCrone chapter.
Research Institute, Chicago, 1976. [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996]
5.19. Asbestos Identification, McCrone Re-
search Institute, G & G printers, Chicago, § 1926.1108 bis-Chloromethyl ether.
1987.
5.20. McCrone, W.C., Calculation of Refrac- NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
tive Indices from Dispersion Staining struction work under this section are iden-
Data, The Microscope, No 37, Chicago, 1989. tical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this
5.21. Levadie, B. (Ed.), Asbestos and Other chapter.
Health Related Silicates, ASTM Technical [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996]
Publication 834, ASTM, Philadelphia 1982.
5.22. Steel, E. and Wylie, A., Riordan, P.H. § 1926.1109 beta-Naphthylamine.
(Ed.), Mineralogical Characteristics of As-
bestos, Geology of Asbestos Deposits, pp. 93– NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
101, SME-AIME, 1981. struction work under this section are iden-
5.23. Zussman, J., The Mineralogy of Asbes- tical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this
tos, Asbestos: Properties, Applications and chapter.
Hazards, pp. 45–67 Wiley, 1979. [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996]
[51 FR 22756, June 20, 1986]
§ 1926.1110 Benzidine.
EDITORIAL NOTE: For FEDERAL REGISTER ci-
tations affecting § 1926.1101, see the List of
CFR Sections Affected, which appears in the
Finding Aids section of the printed volume
chapter.
and at www.fdsys.gov.
[61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996]
§ 1926.1102 Coal tar pitch volatiles; in-
terpretation of term. § 1926.1111 4-Aminodiphenyl.
NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
struction work under this section are iden- struction work under this section are iden-
tical to those set forth at § 1910.1002 of this tical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this
chapter. chapter.
[61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] [61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996]
586
§ 1926.1112 Ethyleneimine. another Federal government agency

(e.g., the treatment of wood with pre-
struction work under this section are iden- servatives);
tical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this (3) Exposures to portland cement; or
chapter. (4) Where the employer has objective
[61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996]
data demonstrating that a material
containing chromium or a specific
§ 1926.1113 beta-Propiolactone. process, operation, or activity involv-
ing chromium cannot release dusts,
fumes, or mists of chromium (VI) in
tical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this concentrations at or above 0.5 µgm/m3
chapter. as an 8-hour time-weighted average
(TWA) under any expected conditions
[61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996]
of use.
§ 1926.1114 2-Acetylaminofluorene. (b) Definitions. For the purposes of
this section the following definitions
apply:
tical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this Action level means a concentration of
chapter. airborne chromium (VI) of 2.5
micrograms per cubic meter of air (2.5
[61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996]
µgm/m3) calculated as an 8-hour time-
§ 1926.1115 4- weighted average (TWA).
Dimethylaminoazobenzene. Assistant Secretary means the Assist-
ant Secretary of Labor for Occupa-
tional Safety and Health, U.S. Depart-
tical to those set forth at § 1910.1003 of this ment of Labor, or designee.
chapter. Chromium (VI) [hexavalent chromium
or Cr(VI)] means chromium with a va-
[61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996]
lence of positive six, in any form and in
§ 1926.1116 N-Nitrosodimethylamine. any compound.
Director means the Director of the
NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- National Institute for Occupational
Safety and Health (NIOSH), U.S. De-
chapter. partment of Health and Human Serv-
ices, or designee.
[61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] Emergency means any occurrence
§ 1926.1117 Vinyl chloride. that results, or is likely to result, in an
uncontrolled release of chromium (VI).
NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- If an incidental release of chromium
struction work under this section are iden- (VI) can be controlled at the time of re-
lease by employees in the immediate
chapter.
release area, or by maintenance per-
[61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] sonnel, it is not an emergency.
Employee exposure means the expo-
§ 1926.1118 Inorganic arsenic.
sure to airborne chromium (VI) that
NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- would occur if the employee were not
struction work under this section are iden- using a respirator.
tical to those set forth at § 1910.1018 of this High-efficiency particulate air [HEPA]
chapter.
filter means a filter that is at least 99.97
[61 FR 31433, June 20, 1996] percent efficient in removing mono-dis-
persed particles of 0.3 micrometers in
§ 1926.1126 Chromium (VI). diameter or larger.
(a) Scope. (1) This standard applies to Historical monitoring data means data
occupational exposures to chromium from chromium (VI) monitoring con-
(VI) in all forms and compounds in conducted prior to May 30, 2006, obtained
struction, except: during work operations conducted
(2) Exposures that occur in the appli- under workplace conditions closely re-
cation of pesticides regulated by the sembling the processes, types of mate-
Environmental Protection Agency or rial, control methods, work practices,
587
and environmental conditions in the (ii) If initial monitoring indicates
employer’s current operations. that employee exposures are below the
Objective data means information action level, the employer may dis-
such as air monitoring data from in- continue monitoring for those employ-
dustry-wide surveys or calculations ees whose exposures are represented by
based on the composition or chemical such monitoring.
and physical properties of a substance (iii) If monitoring reveals employee
demonstrating the employee exposure exposures to be at or above the action
to chromium (VI) associated with a level, the employer shall perform peri-
particular product or material or a spe- odic monitoring at least every six
cific process, operation, or activity. months.
The data must reflect workplace condi- (iv) If monitoring reveals employee
tions closely resembling the processes, exposures to be above the PEL, the em-
types of material, control methods, ployer shall perform periodic moni-
work practices, and environmental toring at least every three months.
conditions in the employer’s current (v) If periodic monitoring indicates
operations. that employee exposures are below the
Physician or other licensed health care action level, and the result is con-
professional [PLHCP] is an individual firmed by the result of another moni-
whose legally permitted scope of prac- toring taken at least seven days later,
tice (i.e., license, registration, or cer- the employer may discontinue the
tification) allows him or her to inde- monitoring for those employees whose
pendently provide or be delegated the exposures are represented by such mon-
responsibility to provide some or all of itoring.
the particular health care services re- (vi) The employer shall perform addi-
quired by paragraph (i) of this section. tional monitoring when there has been
This section means this § 1926.1126 any change in the production process,
chromium (VI) standard. raw materials, equipment, personnel,
(c) Permissible exposure limit (PEL). work practices, or control methods
The employer shall ensure that no em- that may result in new or additional
ployee is exposed to an airborne con- exposures to chromium (VI), or when
centration of chromium (VI) in excess the employer has any reason to believe
of 5 micrograms per cubic meter of air that new or additional exposures have
(5 µgm/m3), calculated as an 8-hour occurred.
time-weighted average (TWA). (3) Performance-oriented option. The
(d) Exposure determination—(1) Gen- employer shall determine the 8-hour
eral. Each employer who has a work- TWA exposure for each employee on
place or work operation covered by this the basis of any combination of air
section shall determine the 8-hour monitoring data, historical monitoring
TWA exposure for each employee ex- data, or objective data sufficient to ac-
posed to chromium (VI). This deter- curately characterize employee expo-
mination shall be made in accordance sure to chromium (VI).
with either paragraph (d)(2) or para- (4) Employee notification of determina-
graph (d)(3) of this section. tion results. (i) Within 5 work days after
(2) Scheduled monitoring option. (i) The making an exposure determination in
employer shall perform initial moni- accordance with paragraph (d)(2) or
toring to determine the 8-hour TWA paragraph (d)(3) of this section, the em-
exposure for each employee on the ployer shall individually notify each
basis of a sufficient number of personal affected employee in writing of the re-
breathing zone air samples to accu- sults of that determination or post the
rately characterize full shift exposure results in an appropriate location ac-
on each shift, for each job classifica- cessible to all affected employees.
tion, in each work area. Where an em- (ii) Whenever the exposure deter-
ployer does representative sampling in- mination indicates that employee ex-
stead of sampling all employees in posure is above the PEL, the employer
order to meet this requirement, the shall describe in the written notifica-
employer shall sample the employee(s) tion the corrective action being taken
expected to have the highest chromium to reduce employee exposure to or
(VI) exposures. below the PEL.
588
(5) Accuracy of measurement. Where different jobs to achieve compliance
air monitoring is performed to comply with the PEL.
with the requirements of this section, (f) Respiratory protection—(1) General.
the employer shall use a method of Where respiratory protection is re-
monitoring and analysis that can quired by this section, the employer
measure chromium (VI) to within an must provide each employee an appro-
accuracy of plus or minus 25 percent priate respirator that complies with
(±25%) and can produce accurate meas- the requirements of this paragraph.
urements to within a statistical con- Respiratory protection is required dur-
fidence level of 95 percent for airborne ing:
concentrations at or above the action (i) Periods necessary to install or im-
level. plement feasible engineering and work
(6) Observation of monitoring. (i) practice controls;
Where air monitoring is performed to (ii) Work operations, such as mainte-
comply with the requirements of this nance and repair activities, for which
section, the employer shall provide af- engineering and work practice controls
fected employees or their designated are not feasible;
representatives an opportunity to ob- (iii) Work operations for which an
serve any monitoring of employee ex- employer has implemented all feasible
posure to chromium (VI). engineering and work practice controls
(ii) When observation of monitoring and such controls are not sufficient to
requires entry into an area where the reduce exposures to or below the PEL;
use of protective clothing or equipment (iv) Work operations where employ-
is required, the employer shall provide ees are exposed above the PEL for
the observer with clothing and equip- fewer than 30 days per year, and the
ment and shall assure that the ob- employer has elected not to implement
server uses such clothing and equip- engineering and work practice controls
ment and complies with all other appli- to achieve the PEL; or
cable safety and health procedures. (v) Emergencies.
(e) Methods of compliance. (1) Engi- (2) Respiratory protection program.
neering and work practice controls. (i) Where respirator use is required by this
Except as permitted in paragraph section, the employer shall institute a
(e)(1)(ii) of this section, the employer respiratory protection program in ac-
shall use engineering and work prac- cordance with § 1910.134, which covers
tice controls to reduce and maintain each employee required to use a res-
employee exposure to chromium (VI) pirator.
to or below the PEL unless the em- (g) Protective work clothing and equip-
ployer can demonstrate that such con- ment—(1) Provision and use. Where a
trols are not feasible. Wherever fea- hazard is present or is likely to be
sible engineering and work practice present from skin or eye contact with
controls are not sufficient to reduce chromium (VI), the employer shall pro-
employee exposure to or below the vide appropriate personal protective
PEL, the employer shall use them to clothing and equipment at no cost to
reduce employee exposure to the lowest employees, and shall ensure that em-
levels achievable, and shall supplement ployees use such clothing and equip-
them by the use of respiratory protec- ment.
tion that complies with the require- (2) Removal and storage. (i) The em-
ments of paragraph (f) of this section. ployer shall ensure that employees re-
(ii) Where the employer can dem- move all protective clothing and equip-
onstrate that a process or task does ment contaminated with chromium
not result in any employee exposure to (VI) at the end of the work shift or at
chromium (VI) above the PEL for 30 or the completion of their tasks involving
more days per year (12 consecutive chromium (VI) exposure, whichever
months), the requirement to imple- comes first.
ment engineering and work practice (ii) The employer shall ensure that
controls to achieve the PEL does not no employee removes chromium (VI)-
apply to that process or task. contaminated protective clothing or
(2) Prohibition of rotation. The em- equipment from the workplace, except
ployer shall not rotate employees to for those employees whose job it is to
589
launder, clean, maintain, or dispose of ing facilities capable of removing chro-
such clothing or equipment. mium (VI) from the skin, and shall en-
(iii) When contaminated protective sure that affected employees use these
clothing or equipment is removed for facilities when necessary.
laundering, cleaning, maintenance, or (ii) The employer shall ensure that
disposal, the employer shall ensure employees who have skin contact with
that it is stored and transported in chromium (VI) wash their hands and
sealed, impermeable bags or other faces at the end of the work shift and
closed, impermeable containers. prior to eating, drinking, smoking,
(iv) The employer shall ensure that chewing tobacco or gum, applying cos-
bags or containers of contaminated metics, or using the toilet.
protective clothing or equipment that (4) Eating and drinking areas. (i)
are removed from change rooms for Whenever the employer allows employ-
laundering, cleaning, maintenance, or ees to consume food or beverages at a
disposal shall be labeled in accordance worksite where chromium (VI) is
with the requirements of the Hazard present, the employer shall ensure that
Communication Standard, § 1910.1200. eating and drinking areas and surfaces
(3) Cleaning and replacement. (i) The are maintained as free as practicable of
employer shall clean, launder, repair chromium (VI).
and replace all protective clothing and (ii) The employer shall ensure that
equipment required by this section as employees do not enter eating and
needed to maintain its effectiveness. drinking areas with protective work
(ii) The employer shall prohibit the clothing or equipment unless surface
removal of chromium (VI) from protec- chromium (VI) has been removed from
tive clothing and equipment by blow- the clothing and equipment by meth-
ing, shaking, or any other means that ods that do not disperse chromium (VI)
disperses chromium (VI) into the air or into the air or onto an employee’s
onto an employee’s body. body.
(iii) The employer shall inform any (5) Prohibited activities. The employer
person who launders or cleans protec- shall ensure that employees do not eat,
tive clothing or equipment contami- drink, smoke, chew tobacco or gum, or
nated with chromium (VI) of the poten- apply cosmetics in areas where skin or
tially harmful effects of exposure to eye contact with chromium (VI) oc-
chromium (VI) and that the clothing curs; or carry the products associated
and equipment should be laundered or with these activities, or store such
cleaned in a manner that minimizes products in these areas.
skin or eye contact with chromium
(i) Medical surveillance—(1) General. (i)
(VI) and effectively prevents the re-
The employer shall make medical sur-
lease of airborne chromium (VI) in ex-
veillance available at no cost to the
cess of the PEL.
employee, and at a reasonable time and
(h) Hygiene areas and practices—(1)
place, for all employees:
General. Where protective clothing and
equipment is required, the employer (A) Who are or may be occupation-
shall provide change rooms in conform- ally exposed to chromium (VI) at or
ance with 29 CFR 1926.51 Where skin above the action level for 30 or more
contact with chromium (VI) occurs, days a year;
the employer shall provide washing fa- (B) Experiencing signs or symptoms
cilities in conformance with 29 CFR of the adverse health effects associated
1926.51. Eating and drinking areas pro- with chromium (VI) exposure; or
vided by the employer shall also be in (C) Exposed in an emergency.
conformance with § 1926.51. (ii) The employer shall assure that
(2) Change rooms. The employer shall all medical examinations and proce-
assure that change rooms are equipped dures required by this section are per-
with separate storage facilities for pro- formed by or under the supervision of a
tective clothing and equipment and for PLHCP.
street clothes, and that these facilities (2) Frequency. The employer shall
prevent cross-contamination. provide a medical examination:
(3) Washing facilities. (i) The employer (i) Within 30 days after initial assign-
shall provide readily accessible wash- ment, unless the employee has received
590
a chromium (VI) related medical exam- (5) PLHCP’s written medical opinion.
ination that meets the requirements of (i) The employer shall obtain a written
this paragraph within the last twelve medical opinion from the PLHCP,
months; within 30 days for each medical exam-
(ii) Annually; ination performed on each employee,
(iii) Within 30 days after a PLHCP’s which contains:
written medical opinion recommends (A) The PLHCP’s opinion as to
an additional examination; whether the employee has any detected
(iv) Whenever an employee shows medical condition(s) that would place
signs or symptoms of the adverse the employee at increased risk of ma-
health effects associated with chro- terial impairment to health from fur-
mium (VI) exposure; ther exposure to chromium (VI);
(v) Within 30 days after exposure dur- (B) Any recommended limitations
ing an emergency which results in an upon the employee’s exposure to chro-
uncontrolled release of chromium (VI); mium (VI) or upon the use of personal
or protective equipment such as res-
(vi) At the termination of employ- pirators;
ment, unless the last examination that (C) A statement that the PLHCP has
satisfied the requirements of paragraph explained to the employee the results
(i) of this section was less than six of the medical examination, including
months prior to the date of termi- any medical conditions related to chro-
nation. mium (VI) exposure that require fur-
(3) Contents of examination. A medical ther evaluation or treatment, and any
examination consists of: special provisions for use of protective
(i) A medical and work history, with clothing or equipment.
emphasis on: past, present, and antici- (ii) The PLHCP shall not reveal to
pated future exposure to chromium the employer specific findings or diag-
(VI); any history of respiratory system noses unrelated to occupational expo-
dysfunction; any history of asthma, sure to chromium (VI).
dermatitis, skin ulceration, or nasal (iii) The employer shall provide a
septum perforation; and smoking sta- copy of the PLHCP’s written medical
tus and history; opinion to the examined employee
(ii) A physical examination of the within two weeks after receiving it.
skin and respiratory tract; and (j) Communication of chromium (VI)
(iii) Any additional tests deemed ap- hazards to employees—(1) Hazard commu-
propriate by the examining PLHCP. nication. The employer shall include
(4) Information provided to the PLHCP. chromium (VI) in the program estab-
The employer shall ensure that the ex- lished to comply with the Hazard Com-
amining PLHCP has a copy of this munication Standard (HCS)
standard, and shall provide the fol- (§ 1910.1200). The employer shall ensure
lowing information: that each employee has access to labels
(i) A description of the affected em- on containers of chromium and safety
ployee’s former, current, and antici- data sheets, and is trained in accord-
pated duties as they relate to the em- ance with the provisions of § 1910.1200
ployee’s occupational exposure to chro- and paragraph (j)(2) of this section. The
mium (VI); employer shall provide information on
(ii) The employee’s former, current, at least the following hazards: Cancer;
and anticipated levels of occupational eye irritation; and skin sensitization.
exposure to chromium (VI); (2) Employee information and training.
(iii) A description of any personal (i) The employer shall ensure that each
protective equipment used or to be employee can demonstrate knowledge
used by the employee, including when of at least the following:
and for how long the employee has used (A) The contents of this section; and
that equipment; and (B) The purpose and a description of
(iv) Information from records of em- the medical surveillance program re-
ployment-related medical examina- quired by paragraph (i) of this section.
tions previously provided to the af- (ii) The employer shall make a copy
fected employee, currently within the of this section readily available with-
control of the employer. out cost to all affected employees.
591
(k) Recordkeeping—(1) Air monitoring (E) Other data relevant to the oper-
data. (i) The employer shall maintain ations, materials, processing, or em-
an accurate record of all air moni- ployee exposures covered by the excep-
toring conducted to comply with the tion.
requirements of this section. (iii) The employer shall ensure that
(ii) This record shall include at least historical exposure records are main-
the following information: tained and made available in accord-
(A) The date of measurement for each ance with 29 CFR 1910.1020.
sample taken; (3) Objective data. (i) The employer
(B) The operation involving exposure shall maintain an accurate record of
to chromium (VI) that is being mon- all objective data relied upon to com-
itored; ply with the requirements of this sec-
(C) Sampling and analytical methods tion.
used and evidence of their accuracy; (ii) This record shall include at least
(D) Number, duration, and the results the following information:
of samples taken; (A) The chromium containing mate-
(E) Type of personal protective rial in question;
equipment, such as respirators worn; (B) The source of the objective data;
and (C) The testing protocol and results
(F) Name, social security number, of testing, or analysis of the material
and job classification of all employees for the release of chromium (VI);
represented by the monitoring, indi- (D) A description of the process, oper-
cating which employees were actually ation, or activity and how the data
monitored. support the determination; and
(iii) The employer shall ensure that (E) Other data relevant to the proc-
exposure records are maintained and ess, operation, activity, material, or
made available in accordance with 29 employee exposures.
CFR 1910.1020. (iii) The employer shall ensure that
(2) Historical monitoring data. (i) objective data are maintained and
Where the employer has relied on his- made available in accordance with 29
torical monitoring data to determine CFR 1910.1020.
exposure to chromium (VI), the em- (4) Medical surveillance. (i) The em-
ployer shall establish and maintain an ployer shall establish and maintain an
accurate record of the historical moni- accurate record for each employee cov-
toring data relied upon. ered by medical surveillance under
(ii) The record shall include informa- paragraph (i) of this section.
tion that reflects the following condi- (ii) The record shall include the fol-
tions: lowing information about the em-
(A) The data were collected using ployee:
methods that meet the accuracy re- (A) Name and social security number;
quirements of paragraph (d)(5) of this (B) A copy of the PLHCP’s written
section; opinions;
(B) The processes and work practices (C) A copy of the information pro-
that were in use when the historical vided to the PLHCP as required by
monitoring data were obtained are es- paragraph (i)(4) of this section.
sentially the same as those to be used (iii) The employer shall ensure that
during the job for which exposure is medical records are maintained and
being determined; made available in accordance with 29
(C) The characteristics of the chro- CFR 1910.1020.
mium (VI) containing material being (l) Dates. (1) For employers with 20 or
handled when the historical moni- more employees, all obligations of this
toring data were obtained are the same section, except engineering controls re-
as those on the job for which exposure quired by paragraph (e) of this section,
is being determined; commence November 27, 2006.
(D) Environmental conditions pre- (2) For employers with 19 or fewer
vailing when the historical monitoring employees, all obligations of this sec-
data were obtained are the same as tion, except engineering controls re-
those on the job for which exposure is quired by paragraph (e) of this section,
being determined; and commence May 30, 2007.
592
(3) For all employers, engineering quired by work duties to be present in
controls required by paragraph (e) of regulated areas or any person author-
this section shall be implemented no ized by the OSH Act or regulations
later than May 31, 2010. issued under it to be in regulated areas.
[71 FR 10382, Feb. 28, 2006, as amended at 73
Competent person, in accordance with
FR 75589, Dec. 12, 2008; 75 FR 12686, Mar. 17, 29 CFR 1926.32(f), means a person des-
2010; 77 FR 17895, Mar. 26, 2012] ignated by the employer to act on the
employer’s behalf who is capable of
§ 1926.1127 Cadmium. identifying existing and potential cad-
(a) Scope. This standard applies to all mium hazards in the workplace and the
occupational exposures to cadmium proper methods to control them in
and cadmium compounds, in all forms, order to protect workers, and has the
in all construction work where an em- authority necessary to take prompt
ployee may potentially be exposed to corrective measures to eliminate or
cadmium. Construction work is defined control such hazards. The duties of a
as work involving construction, alter- competent person include at least the
ation and/or repair, including but not following: Determining prior to the
limited to the following: performance of work whether cadmium
(1) Wrecking, demolition or salvage is present in the workplace; estab-
of structures where cadmium or mate- lishing, where necessary, regulated
rials containing cadmium are present; areas and assuring that access to and
(2) Use of cadmium containing-paints from those areas is limited to author-
and cutting, brazing, burning, grinding ized employees; assuring the adequacy
or welding on surfaces that were paint- of any employee exposure monitoring
ed with cadmium-containing paints; required by this standard; assuring
(3) Construction, alteration, repair, that all employees exposed to air cad-
maintenance, or renovation of struc- mium levels above the PEL wear ap-
tures, substrates, or portions thereof, propriate personal protective equip-
that contain cadmium, or materials ment and are trained in the use of ap-
containing cadmium; propriate methods of exposure control;
(4) Cadmium welding; cutting and assuring that proper hygiene facilities
welding cadmium-plated steel; brazing are provided and that workers are
or welding with cadmium alloys; trained to use those facilities; and as-
(5) Installation of products con- suring that the engineering controls
taining cadmium; required by this standard are imple-
(6) Electrical grounding with cad- mented, maintained in proper oper-
mium welding, or electrical work using ating condition, and functioning prop-
cadmium-coated conduit; erly.
(7) Maintaining or retrofitting cad- Director means the Director of the
mium-coated equipment; National Institute for Occupational
(8) Cadmium contamination/emer- Safety and Health (NIOSH), U.S. De-
gency cleanup; and partment of Health and Human Serv-
(9) Transportation, disposal, storage, ices, or designee.
or containment of cadmium or mate- Employee exposure and similar lan-
rials containing cadmium on the site guage referring to the air cadmium
or location at which construction ac- level to which an employee is exposed
tivities are performed. means the exposure to airborne cad-
(b) Definitions. mium that would occur if the employee
Action level (AL) is defined as an air- were not using respiratory protective
borne concentration of cadmium of 2.5 equipment.
micrograms per cubic meter of air (2.5 Final medical determination is the
µg/m3), calculated as an 8-hour time- written medical opinion of the employ-
weighted average (TWA). ee’s health status by the examining
Assistant Secretary means the Assist- physician under paragraphs (l)(3)-(12) of
ant Secretary of Labor for Occupa- this section or, if multiple physician
tional Safety and Health, U.S. Depart- review under paragraph (l)(13) of this
ment of Labor, or designee. section or the alternative physician de-
Authorized person means any person termination under paragraph (l)(14) of
authorized by the employer and re- this section is invoked, it is the final,
593
written medical finding, recommenda- (iv) Eight-hour TWA exposures shall
tion or determination that emerges be determined for each employee on
from that process. the basis of one or more personal
High-efficiency Particulate Air [HEPA] breathing-zone air samples reflecting
filter means a filter capable of trapping full shift exposure on each shift, for
and retaining at least 99.97 percent of each job classification, in each work
mono-dispersed particles of 0.3 microm- area. Where several employees perform
eters in diameter. the same job tasks, in the same job
Regulated area means an area demar- classification, on the same shift, in the
cated by the employer where an em- same work area, and the length, dura-
ployee’s exposure to airborne con- tion, and level of cadmium exposures
centrations of cadmium exceeds, or can are similar, an employer may sample a
reasonably be expected to exceed the representative fraction of the employ-
permissible exposure limit (PEL). ees instead of all employees in order to
This section means this cadmium meet this requirement. In representa-
standard. tive sampling, the employer shall sam-
(c) Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL). ple the employee(s) expected to have
The employer shall assure that no em- the highest cadmium exposures.
ployee is exposed to an airborne con- (2) Specific. (i) Initial monitoring. Ex-
centration of cadmium in excess of five cept as provided for in paragraph
micrograms per cubic meter of air (5 (d)(2)(iii) of this section, where a deter-
µg/m3), calculated as an eight-hour mination conducted under paragraph
time-weighted average exposure (d)(1)(i) of this section shows the possi-
(TWA). bility of employee exposure to cad-
(d) Exposure Monitoring—(1) General. mium at or above the action level, the
(i) Prior to the performance of any con- employer shall conduct exposure moni-
struction work where employees may toring as soon as practicable that is
be potentially exposed to cadmium, the representative of the exposure for each
employer shall establish the applica- employee in the workplace who is or
bility of this standard by determining may be exposed to cadmium at or
whether cadmium is present in the above the action level.
workplace and whether there is the (ii) In addition, if the employee peri-
possibility that employee exposures odically performs tasks that may ex-
will be at or above the action level. pose the employee to a higher con-
The employer shall designate a com- centration of airborne cadmium, the
petent person who shall make this de- employee shall be monitored while per-
termination. Investigation and mate- forming those tasks.
rial testing techniques shall be used, as (iii) Where the employer has objec-
appropriate, in the determination. In- tive data, as defined in paragraph (n)(2)
vestigation shall include a review of of this section, demonstrating that em-
relevant plans, past reports, material ployee exposure to cadmium will not
safety data sheets, and other available exceed airborne concentrations at or
records, and consultations with the above the action level under the ex-
property owner and discussions with pected conditions of processing, use, or
appropriate individuals and agencies. handling, the employer may rely upon
(ii) Where cadmium has been deter- such data instead of implementing ini-
mined to be present in the workplace, tial monitoring.
and it has been determined that there (iv) Where a determination con-
is a possibility the employee’s exposure ducted under paragraphs (d)(1) or (d)(2)
will be at or above the action level, the of this section is made that a poten-
competent person shall identify em- tially exposed employee is not exposed
ployees potentially exposed to cad- to airborne concentrations of cadmium
mium at or above the action level. at or above the action level, the em-
(iii) Determinations of employee ex- ployer shall make a written record of
posure shall be made from breathing- such determination. The record shall
zone air samples that reflect the mon- include at least the monitoring data
itored employee’s regular, daily 8-hour developed under paragraphs (d)(2)(i)–
TWA exposure to cadmium. (iii) of this section, where applicable,
594
and shall also include the date of deter- taken by the employer to reduce em-
mination, and the name and social se- ployee exposure to or below the PEL.
curity number of each employee. (6) Accuracy of measurement. The em-
(3) Monitoring frequency (periodic mon- ployer shall use a method of moni-
itoring). (i) If the initial monitoring or toring and analysis that has an accu-
periodic monitoring reveals employee racy of not less than plus or minus 25
exposures to be at or above the action percent (±25%), with a confidence level
level, the employer shall monitor at a of 95 percent, for airborne concentra-
frequency and pattern needed to assure tions of cadmium at or above the ac-
that the monitoring results reflect tion level and the permissible exposure
with reasonable accuracy the employ- limit.
ee’s typical exposure levels, given the (e) Regulated areas—(1) Establishment.
variability in the tasks performed, The employer shall establish a regu-
work practices, and environmental lated area wherever an employee’s ex-
conditions on the job site, and to as- posure to airborne concentrations of
sure the adequacy of respiratory selec- cadmium is, or can reasonably be ex-
tion and the effectiveness of engineer- pected to be in excess of the permis-
ing and work practice controls. sible exposure limit (PEL).
(ii) If the initial monitoring or the (2) Demarcation. Regulated areas shall
periodic monitoring indicates that em- be demarcated from the rest of the
ployee exposures are below the action workplace in any manner that ade-
level and that result is confirmed by quately establishes and alerts employ-
the results of another monitoring ees of the boundaries of the regulated
taken at least seven days later, the em- area, including employees who are or
ployer may discontinue the monitoring may be incidentally in the regulated
for those employees whose exposures areas, and that protects persons out-
are represented by such monitoring. side the area from exposure to airborne
(4) Additional monitoring. The em- concentrations of cadmium in excess of
ployer also shall institute the exposure the PEL.
monitoring required under paragraphs (3) Access. Access to regulated areas
(d)(2)(i) and (d)(3) of this section when- shall be limited to authorized persons.
ever there has been a change in the raw (4) Provision of respirators. Each per-
materials, equipment, personnel, work son entering a regulated area shall be
practices, or finished products that supplied with and required to use a res-
may result in additional employees pirator, selected in accordance with
being exposed to cadmium at or above paragraph (g)(2) of this section.
the action level or in employees al- (5) Prohibited activities. The employer
ready exposed to cadmium at or above shall assure that employees do not eat,
the action level being exposed above drink, smoke, chew tobacco or gum, or
the PEL, or whenever the employer or apply cosmetics in regulated areas, or
competent person has any reason to carry the products associated with any
suspect that any other change might of these activities into regulated areas
result in such further exposure. or store such products in those areas.
(5) Employee notification of monitoring (f) Methods of compliance—(1) Compli-
results. (i) The employer must, as soon ance hierarchy. (i) Except as specified in
as possible but no later than 5 working paragraph (f)(1)(ii) of this section, the
days after the receipt of the results of employer shall implement engineering
any monitoring performed under this and work practice controls to reduce
section, notify each affected employee and maintain employee exposure to
of these results either individually in cadmium at or below the PEL, except
writing or by posting the results in an to the extent that the employer can
appropriate location that is accessible demonstrate that such controls are not
to employees. feasible.
(ii) Wherever monitoring results indi- (ii) The requirement to implement
cate that employee exposure exceeds engineering controls to achieve the
the PEL, the employer shall include in PEL does not apply where the em-
the written notice a statement that ployer demonstrates the following:
the PEL has been exceeded and a de- (A) The employee is only intermit-
scription of the corrective action being tently exposed; and
595
(B) The employee is not exposed sult in a significant increase in em-
above the PEL on 30 or more days per ployee exposure to cadmium.
year (12 consecutive months). (iii) Recirculation of air. If air from
(iii) Wherever engineering and work exhaust ventilation is recirculated into
practice controls are not sufficient to the workplace, the system shall have a
reduce employee exposure to or below high efficiency filter and be monitored
the PEL, the employer nonetheless to assure effectiveness.
shall implement such controls to re- (iv) Procedures shall be developed
duce exposures to the lowest levels and implemented to minimize em-
achievable. The employer shall supple- ployee exposure to cadmium when
ment such controls with respiratory maintenance of ventilation systems
protection that complies with the re-
and changing of filters is being con-
quirements of paragraph (g) of this sec-
ducted.
tion and the PEL.
(iv) The employer shall not use em- (5) Compliance program. (i) Where em-
ployee rotation as a method of compli- ployee exposure to cadmium exceeds
ance. the PEL and the employer is required
(2) Specific operations—(i) Abrasive under paragraph (f)(1) of this section to
blasting. Abrasive blasting on cadmium implement controls to comply with the
or cadmium-containing materials shall PEL, prior to the commencement of
be conducted in a manner that will pro- the job the employer shall establish
vide adequate protection. and implement a written compliance
(ii) Heating cadmium and cadmium- program to reduce employee exposure
containing materials. Welding, cutting, to or below the PEL. To the extent
and other forms of heating of cadmium that engineering and work practice
or cadmium-containing materials shall controls cannot reduce exposures to or
be conducted in accordance with the below the PEL, the employer shall in-
requirements of 29 CFR 1926.353 and 29 clude in the written compliance pro-
CFR 1926.354, where applicable. gram the use of appropriate respiratory
(3) Prohibitions. (i) High speed abra- protection to achieve compliance with
sive disc saws and similar abrasive the PEL.
power equipment shall not be used for (ii) Written compliance programs
work on cadmium or cadmium-con- shall be reviewed and updated as often
taining materials unless they are and as promptly as necessary to reflect
equipped with appropriate engineering significant changes in the employer’s
controls to minimize emissions, if the compliance status or significant
exposure levels are above the PEL. changes in the lowest air cadmium
(ii) Materials containing cadmium level that is technologically feasible.
shall not be applied by spray methods, (iii) A competent person shall review
if exposures are above the PEL, unless the comprehensive compliance pro-
employees are protected with supplied- gram initially and after each change.
air respirators with full facepiece,
(iv) Written compliance programs
hood, helmet, suit, operated in positive
shall be provided upon request for ex-
pressure mode and measures are insti-
tuted to limit overspray and prevent amination and copying to the Assist-
contamination of adjacent areas. ant Secretary, the Director, affected
(4) Mechanical ventilation. (i) When employees, and designated employee
ventilation is used to control exposure, representatives.
measurements that demonstrate the ef- (g) Respirator protection—(1) General.
fectiveness of the system in controlling For employees who use respirators re-
exposure, such as capture velocity, quired by this section, the employer
duct velocity, or static pressure shall must provide each employee an appro-
be made as necessary to maintain its priate respirator that complies with
effectiveness. the requirements of this paragraph.
(ii) Measurements of the system’s ef- Respirators must be used during:
fectiveness in controlling exposure (i) Periods necessary to install or im-
shall be made as necessary within five plement feasible engineering and work-
working days of any change in produc- practice controls when employee expo-
tion, process, or control that might re- sures exceed the PEL.
596
(ii) Maintenance and repair activi- paragraph (d)(3)(i)(A) of 29 CFR
ties, and brief or intermittent work op- 1910.134.
erations, for which employee exposures (B) Provide employees with full face-
exceed the PEL and engineering and piece respirators when they experience
work-practice controls are not feasible eye irritation.
or are not required. (C) Provide HEPA filters for powered
(iii) Work operations in the regulated and non-powered air-purifying res-
areas specified in paragraph (e) of this pirators.
section. (ii) The employer must provide a
(iv) Work operations for which the powered air-purifying respirator in-
employer has implemented all feasible stead of a negative-pressure respirator
engineering and work-practice con- when an employee entitled to a res-
trols, and such controls are not suffi- pirator chooses to use this type of res-
cient to reduce employee exposures to pirator and such a respirator will pro-
or below the PEL. vide adequate protection to the em-
(v) Work operations for which an employee.
ployee, who is exposed to cadmium at (h) Emergency situations. The em-
or above the action level, requests a ployer shall develop and implement a
respirator. written plan for dealing with emer-
gency situations involving substantial
(vi) Work operations for which engi-
releases of airborne cadmium. The plan
neering controls are not required by
shall include provisions for the use of
paragraph (f)(1)(ii) of this section to re-
appropriate respirators and personal
duce employee exposures that exceed
protective equipment. In addition, em-
the PEL.
ployees not essential to correcting the
(vii) Emergencies.
emergency situation shall be restricted
(2) Respirator program. (i) The em- from the area and normal operations
ployer must implement a respiratory halted in that area until the emer-
protection program in accordance with gency is abated.
§ 1910.134 (b) through (d) (except (i) Protective work clothing and equip-
(d)(1)(iii)), and (f) through (m), which ment—(1) Provision and use. If an em-
covers each employee required by this ployee is exposed to airborne cadmium
section to use a respirator. above the PEL or where skin or eye ir-
(ii) If an employee exhibits breathing ritation is associated with cadmium
difficulty during fit testing or res- exposure at any level, the employer
pirator use, the employer must provide shall provide at no cost to the em-
the employee with a medical examina- ployee, and assure that the employee
tion in accordance with paragraph uses, appropriate protective work
(l)(6)(ii) of this section to determine if clothing and equipment that prevents
the employee can use a respirator contamination of the employee and the
while performing the required duties. employee’s garments. Protective work
(iii) No employee must use a res- clothing and equipment includes, but is
pirator when, based on their most re- not limited to:
cent medical examination, the exam- (i) Coveralls or similar full-body
ining physician determines that the work clothing;
employee will be unable to continue to (ii) Gloves, head coverings, and boots
function normally while using a res- or foot coverings; and
pirator. If the physician determines the (iii) Face shields, vented goggles, or
employee must be limited in, or re- other appropriate protective equip-
moved from, their current job because ment that complies with 29 CFR
of the employee’s inability to use a res- 1910.133.
pirator, the job limitation or removal (2) Removal and storage. (i) The em-
must be conducted in accordance with ployer shall assure that employees re-
paragraphs (l) (11) and (12) of this sec- move all protective clothing and equip-
tion. ment contaminated with cadmium at
(3) Respirator selection. (i) Employers the completion of the work shift and do
must: so only in change rooms provided in ac-
(A) Select, and provide to employees, cordance with paragraph (j)(1) of this
the appropriate respirators specified in section.
597
(ii) The employer shall assure that no missible exposure limit prescribed in
employee takes cadmium-contami- paragraph (c) of this section.
nated protective clothing or equipment (v) The employer shall inform any
from the workplace, except for employ- person who launders or cleans protec-
ees authorized to do so for purposes of tive clothing or equipment contami-
laundering, cleaning, maintaining, or nated with cadmium of the potentially
disposing of cadmium-contaminated harmful effects of exposure to cad-
protective clothing and equipment at mium, and that the clothing and equip-
an appropriate location or facility ment should be laundered or cleaned in
away from the workplace. a manner to effectively prevent the re-
(iii) The employer shall assure that lease of airborne cadmium in excess of
contaminated protective clothing and the PEL.
equipment, when removed for laun- (j) Hygiene areas and practices—(1)
dering, cleaning, maintenance, or dis- General. For employees whose airborne
posal, is placed and stored in sealed, exposure to cadmium is above the PEL,
impermeable bags or other closed, im- the employer shall provide clean
permeable containers that are designed change rooms, handwashing facilities,
to prevent dispersion of cadmium dust. showers, and lunchroom facilities that
(iv) The employer shall ensure that comply with 29 CFR 1926.51.
containers of contaminated protective (2) Change rooms. The employer shall
clothing and equipment that are to be
assure that change rooms are equipped
taken out of the change rooms or the
with separate storage facilities for
workplace for laundering, cleaning,
street clothes and for protective cloth-
maintenance or disposal shall bear la-
ing and equipment, which are designed
bels in accordance with paragraph
to prevent dispersion of cadmium and
(m)(3)(ii) of this section.
contamination of the employee’s street
(3) Cleaning, replacement, and disposal.
clothes.
(i) The employer shall provide the pro-
(3) Showers and handwashing facilities.
tective clothing and equipment re-
(i) The employer shall assure that em-
quired by paragraph (i)(1) of this sec-
tion in a clean and dry condition as ployees whose airborne exposure to
often as necessary to maintain its ef- cadmium is above the PEL shower dur-
fectiveness, but in any event at least ing the end of the work shift.
weekly. The employer is responsible (ii) The employer shall assure that
for cleaning and laundering the protec- employees who are exposed to cad-
tive clothing and equipment required mium above the PEL wash their hands
by this paragraph to maintain its effec- and faces prior to eating, drinking,
tiveness and is also responsible for dis- smoking, chewing tobacco or gum, or
posing of such clothing and equipment. applying cosmetics.
(ii) The employer also is responsible (4) Lunchroom facilities. (i) The em-
for repairing or replacing required pro- ployer shall assure that the lunchroom
tective clothing and equipment as facilities are readily accessible to em-
needed to maintain its effectiveness. ployees, that tables for eating are
When rips or tears are detected while maintained free of cadmium, and that
an employee is working they shall be no employee in a lunchroom facility is
immediately mended, or the worksuit exposed at any time to cadmium at or
shall be immediately replaced. above a concentration of 2.5 µg/m3.
(iii) The employer shall prohibit the (ii) The employer shall assure that
removal of cadmium from protective employees do not enter lunchroom fa-
clothing and equipment by blowing, cilities with protective work clothing
shaking, or any other means that dis- or equipment unless surface cadmium
perses cadmium into the air. has been removed from the clothing
(iv) The employer shall assure that and equipment by HEPA vacuuming or
any laundering of contaminated cloth- some other method that removes cad-
ing or cleaning of contaminated equip- mium dust without dispersing it.
ment in the workplace is done in a (k) Housekeeping. (1) All surfaces
manner that prevents the release of shall be maintained as free as prac-
airborne cadmium in excess of the per- ticable of accumulations of cadmium.
598
(2) All spills and sudden releases of ployer demonstrates that the em-
material containing cadmium shall be ployee:
cleaned up as soon as possible. (1) Is not currently exposed by the
(3) Surfaces contaminated with cad- employer to airborne concentrations of
mium shall, wherever possible, be cadmium at or above the action level
cleaned by vacuuming or other meth- on 30 or more days per year (twelve
ods that minimize the likelihood of consecutive months); and,
cadmium becoming airborne. (2) Is not currently exposed by the
(4) HEPA-filtered vacuuming equip- employer in those tasks on 30 or more
ment or equally effective filtration days per year (twelve consecutive
methods shall be used for vacuuming. months).
The equipment shall be used and (B) Previously exposed— The employer
emptied in a manner that minimizes shall also institute a medical surveil-
the reentry of cadmium into the work- lance program for all employees who
place. might previously have been exposed to
(5) Shoveling, dry or wet sweeping, cadmium by the employer prior to the
and brushing may be used only where effective date of this standard in tasks
vacuuming or other methods that min- specified under paragraph (l)(1)(i)(A) of
imize the likelihood of cadmium be- this section, unless the employer dem-
coming airborne have been tried and onstrates that the employee did not in
found not to be effective. the years prior to the effective date of
(6) Compressed air shall not be used this section work in those tasks for the
to remove cadmium from any surface employer with exposure to cadmium
unless the compressed air is used in for an aggregated total of more than 12
conjunction with a ventilation system months.
designed to capture the dust cloud cre- (ii) To determine an employee’s fit-
ated by the compressed air. ness for using a respirator, the em-
(7) Waste, scrap, debris, bags, and ployer shall provide the limited med-
containers, personal protective equip- ical examination specified in paragraph
ment and clothing contaminated with (l)(6) of this section.
cadmium and consigned for disposal (iii) The employer shall assure that
shall be collected and disposed of in all medical examinations and proce-
sealed impermeable bags or other dures required by this section are per-
closed, impermeable containers. These formed by or under the supervision of a
bags and containers shall be labeled in licensed physician, who has read and is
accordance with paragraph (m)(3)(ii) of familiar with the health effects section
this section. of appendix A to this section, the regu-
(l) Medical Surveillance—(1) General— latory text of this section, the protocol
(i) Scope—(A) Currently exposed—The for sample handling and lab selection
employer shall institute a medical sur- in appendix F to this section, and the
veillance program for all employees questionnaire of appendix D to this sec-
who are or may be exposed at or above tion.
the action level and all employees who (iv) The employer shall provide the
perform the following tasks, operations medical surveillance required by this
or jobs: Electrical grounding with cad- section, including multiple physician
mium welding; cutting, brazing, burn- review under paragraph (l)(13) of this
ing, grinding or welding on surfaces section without cost to employees, and
that were painted with cadmium-con- at a time and place that is reasonable
taining paints; electrical work using and convenient to employees.
cadmium-coated conduit; use of cad- (v) The employer shall assure that
mium containing paints; cutting and the collecting and handling of biologi-
welding cadmium-plated steel; brazing cal samples of cadmium in urine (CdU),
or welding with cadmium alloys; fusing cadmium in blood (CdB), and beta-2
of reinforced steel by cadmium weld- microglobulin in urine (b2-M) taken
ing; maintaining or retrofitting cad- from employees under this section is
mium-coated equipment; and, wrecking done in a manner that assures their re-
and demolition where cadmium is liability and that analysis of biological
present. A medical surveillance pro- samples of cadmium in urine (CdU),
gram will not be required if the em- cadmium in blood (CdB), and beta-2
599
microglobulin in urine (b2-M) taken CdB level to be at or below 5 µg/lwb,
from employees under this section is then:
performed in laboratories with dem- (A) For employees who are subject to
onstrated proficiency to perform the medical surveillance under paragraphs
particular analysis. (See appendix F to (l)(1)(i)(A) of this section because of
this section.) current or anticipated exposure to cad-
(2) Initial Examination. (i) For em- mium, the employer shall provide the
ployees covered by medical surveil- minimum level of periodic medical sur-
lance under paragraph (l)(1)(i) of this veillance in accordance with the re-
section, the employer shall provide an quirements in paragraph (l)(4)(i) of this
initial medical examination. The ex- section; and
amination shall be provided to those (B) For employees who are subject to
employees within 30 days after initial medical surveillance under paragraph
assignment to a job with exposure to (l)(1)(i)(B) of this section because of
cadmium or no later than 90 days after prior but not current exposure, the em-
the effective date of this section, ployer shall provide biological moni-
whichever date is later. toring for CdU, B2-M, and CdB one year
(ii) The initial medical examination after the initial biological monitoring
shall include: and then the employer shall comply
(A) A detailed medical and work his- with the requirements of paragraph
(l)(4)(vi) of this section.
tory, with emphasis on: Past, present,
(ii) For all employees who are subject
and anticipated future exposure to cad-
to medical surveillance under para-
mium; any history of renal, cardio-
graph (l)(1)(i) of this section, if the re-
vascular, respiratory, hematopoietic,
sults of the initial biological moni-
reproductive, and/or musculo-skeletal
toring tests show the level of CdU to
system dysfunction; current usage of
exceed 3 µg/g Cr, the level of b2-M to be
medication with potential nephrotoxic
in excess of 300 µg/g Cr, or the level of
side-effects; and smoking history and
CdB to be in excess of 5 µg/lwb, the em-
current status; and
ployer shall:
(B) Biological monitoring that in-
(A) Within two weeks after receipt of
cludes the following tests:
biological monitoring results, reassess
(1) Cadmium in urine (CdU), stand- the employee’s occupational exposure
ardized to grams of creatinine (g/Cr); to cadmium as follows:
(2) Beta-2 microglobulin in urine (b2- (1) Reassess the employee’s work
M), standardized to grams of creatinine practices and personal hygiene;
(g/Cr), with pH specified, as described (2) Reevaluate the employee’s res-
in appendix F to this section; and pirator use, if any, and the respirator
(3) Cadmium in blood (CdB), stand- program;
ardized to liters of whole blood (lwb). (3) Review the hygiene facilities;
(iii) Recent Examination: An initial (4) Reevaluate the maintenance and
examination is not required to be pro- effectiveness of the relevant engineer-
vided if adequate records show that the ing controls;
employee has been examined in accord- (5) Assess the employee’s smoking
ance with the requirements of para- history and status;
graph (l)(2)(ii) of this section within (B) Within 30 days after the exposure
the past 12 months. In that case, such reassessment, specified in paragraph
records shall be maintained as part of (l)(3)(ii)(A) of this section, take reason-
the employee’s medical record and the able steps to correct any deficiencies
prior exam shall be treated as if it were found in the reassessment that may be
an initial examination for the purposes responsible for the employee’s excess
of paragraphs (l)(3) and (4) of this sec- exposure to cadmium; and,
tion. (C) Within 90 days after receipt of bi-
(3) Actions triggered by initial biological ological monitoring results, provide a
monitoring. (i) If the results of the bio- full medical examination to the em-
logical monitoring tests in the initial ployee in accordance with the require-
examination show the employee’s CdU ments of paragraph (l)(4)(ii) of this sec-
level to be at or below 3 µg/g Cr, b2-M tion. After completing the medical ex-
level to be at or below 300 µg/g Cr and amination, the examining physician
600
shall determine in a written medical or below 3 µg/g Cr, b2-M level falls to or
opinion whether to medically remove below 300 µg/g Cr and CdB level falls to
the employee. If the physician deter- or below 5 µg/lwb, the employer shall:
mines that medical removal is not nec- (A) Periodically reassess the employ-
essary, then until the employee’s CdU ee’s occupational exposure to cad-
level falls to or below 3 µg/g Cr, b2-M mium;
level falls to or below 300 µg/g Cr and (B) Provide biological monitoring in
CdB level falls to or below 5 µg/lwb, the accordance with paragraph (l)(2)(ii)(B)
employer shall: of this section on a quarterly basis; and
(1) Provide biological monitoring in (C) Provide semiannual medical ex-
accordance with paragraph (l)(2)(ii)(B) aminations in accordance with para-
of this section on a semiannual basis; graph (l)(4)(ii) of this section.
and (iv) For all employees to whom med-
(2) Provide annual medical examina- ical surveillance is provided, beginning
tions in accordance with paragraph on January 1, 1999, and in lieu of para-
(l)(4)(ii) of this section. graph (l)(3)(iii) of this section, when-
(iii) For all employees who are sub- ever the results of initial biological
ject to medical surveillance under monitoring tests show the employee’s
paragraph (l)(1)(i) of this section, if the CdU level to be in excess of 7 µg/g Cr, or
results of the initial biological moni- b2-M level to be in excess of 750 µg/g Cr,
toring tests show the level of CdU to be or CdB level to be in excess of 10 µg/
in excess of 15 µg/g Cr, or the level of lwb, the employer shall comply with
CdB to be in excess of 15 µg/lwb, or the the requirements of paragraphs
level of b2-M to be in excess of 1,500 µg/ (l)(3)(ii)(A)–(B) of this section. Within
g Cr, the employer shall comply with 90 days after receipt of biological moni-
the requirements of paragraphs toring results, the employer shall pro-
(l)(3)(ii)(A)–(B) of this section. Within vide a full medical examination to the
90 days after receipt of biological moni- employee in accordance with the re-
toring results, the employer shall pro- quirements of paragraph (l)(4)(ii) of
vide a full medical examination to the this section. After completing the med-
employee in accordance with the re- ical examination, the examining physi-
quirements of paragraph (l)(4)(ii) of cian shall determine in a written med-
this section. After completing the medical opinion whether to medically re-
ical examination, the examining physi- move the employee. However, if the
cian shall determine in a written med- initial biological monitoring results
ical opinion whether to medically re- and the biological monitoring results
move the employee. However, if the obtained during the medical examina-
initial biological monitoring results tion both show that: CdU exceeds 7 µg/
and the biological monitoring results g Cr; or CdB exceeds 10 µg/lwb; or b2-M
obtained during the medical examina- exceeds 750 µg/g Cr, and in addition CdU
tion both show that: CdU exceeds 15 µg/ exceeds 3 µg/g Cr or CdB exceeds 5 µg/
g Cr; or CdB exceeds 15 µg/lwb; or b2-M liter of whole blood, then the physician
exceeds 1500 µg/g Cr, and in addition shall medically remove the employee
CdU exceeds 3 µg/g Cr or CdB exceeds 5 from exposure to cadmium at or above
µg/liter of whole blood, then the physi- the action level. If the second set of bi-
cian shall medically remove the em- ological monitoring results obtained
ployee from exposure to cadmium at or during the medical examination does
above the action level. If the second set not show that a mandatory removal
of biological monitoring results ob- trigger level has been exceeded, then
tained during the medical examination the employee is not required to be re-
does not show that a mandatory removed by the mandatory provisions of
moval trigger level has been exceeded, this paragraph. If the employee is not
then the employee is not required to be required to be removed by the manda-
removed by the mandatory provisions tory provisions of this paragraph or by
of this paragraph. If the employee is the physician’s determination, then
not required to be removed by the man- until the employee’s CdU level falls to
datory provisions of this paragraph or or below 3 µg/g Cr, b2-M level falls to or
by the physician’s determination, then below 300 µg/g Cr and CdB level falls to
until the employee’s CdU level falls to or below 5 µg/lwb, the employer shall:
601
(A) Periodically reassess the employ- (E) Biological monitoring, as re-
ee’s occupational exposure to cad- quired in paragraph (l)(2)(ii)(B) of this
mium; section;
(B) Provide biological monitoring in (F) Blood analysis, in addition to the
accordance with paragraph (l)(2)(ii)(B) analysis required under paragraph
of this section on a quarterly basis; and (l)(2)(ii)(B) of this section, including
(C) Provide semiannual medical ex- blood urea nitrogen, complete blood
aminations in accordance with para- count, and serum creatinine;
graph (l)(4)(ii) of this section. (G) Urinalysis, in addition to the
(4) Periodic medical surveillance. (i) analysis required under paragraph
For each employee who is covered by (l)(2)(ii)(B) of this section, including
medical surveillance under paragraph the determination of albumin, glucose,
(l)(1)(i)(A) of this section because of and total and low molecular weight
current or anticipated exposure to cad- proteins;
mium, the employer shall provide at (H) For males over 40 years old, pros-
least the minimum level of periodic tate palpation, or other at least as ef-
medical surveillance, which consists of fective diagnostic test(s), and;
periodic medical examinations and (I) Any additional tests or procedures
periodic biological monitoring. A peri- deemed appropriate by the examining
odic medical examination shall be pro- physician.
vided within one year after the initial (iii) Periodic biological monitoring
examination required by paragraph shall be provided in accordance with
(l)(2) of this section and thereafter at paragraph (l)(2)(ii)(B) of this section.
least biennially. Biological sampling (iv) If the results of periodic biologi-
shall be provided at least annually ei- cal monitoring or the results of bio-
ther as part of a periodic medical ex- logical monitoring performed as part of
amination or separately as periodic bi- the periodic medical examination show
ological monitoring. the level of the employee’s CdU, b2–M,
(ii) The periodic medical examination or CdB to be in excess of the levels
shall include: specified in paragraphs (l)(3)(ii) or (iii)
of this section; or beginning on Janu-
(A) A detailed medical and work his-
ary 1, 1999, in excess of the levels speci-
tory, or update thereof, with emphasis
fied in paragraphs (l)(3)(ii) or (iv), the
on: Past, present and anticipated fu-
employer shall take the appropriate
ture exposure to cadmium; smoking actions specified in paragraphs
history and current status; reproduc- (l)(3)(ii)–(iv) of this section, respec-
tive history; current use of medica- tively.
tions with potential nephrotoxic side-
(v) For previously exposed employees
effects; any history of renal, cardio- under paragraph (l)(1)(i)(B) of this sec-
vascular, respiratory, hematopoietic, tion:
and/or musculo-skeletal system dys-
(A) If the employee’s levels of CdU
function; and as part of the medical
did not exceed 3 µg/g Cr, CdB did not
and work history, for employees who exceed 5 µg/lwb, and b2–M did not ex-
wear respirators, questions 3–11 and 25– ceed 300 µg/g Cr in the initial biological
32 in appendix D to this section; monitoring tests, and if the results of
(B) A complete physical examination the followup biological monitoring re-
with emphasis on: blood pressure, the quired by paragraph (l)(3)(i)(B) of this
respiratory system, and the urinary section one year after the initial exam-
system; ination confirm the previous results,
(C) A 14 inch by 17 inch, or a reason- the employer may discontinue all peri-
ably standard sized posterior-anterior odic medical surveillance for that em-
chest X-ray (after the initial X-ray, the ployee.
frequency of chest X-rays is to be de- (B) If the initial biological moni-
termined by the examining physician); toring results for CdU, CdB, or b2–M
(D) Pulmonary function tests, includ- were in excess of the levels specified in
ing forced vital capacity (FVC) and paragraph (l)(3)(i) of this section, but
forced expiratory volume at 1 second subsequent biological monitoring re-
(FEV1); sults required by paragraph (l)(3)(ii)–
602
(iv) of this section show that the em- if any; the employee’s smoking history
ployee’s CdU levels no longer exceed 3 and status; the respiratory protection
µg/g Cr, CdB levels no longer exceed 5 program; the hygiene facilities; the
µg/lwb, and b2–M levels no longer ex- maintenance and effectiveness of the
ceed 300 µg/g Cr, the employer shall relevant engineering controls; and take
provide biological monitoring for CdU, all reasonable steps to correct the defi-
CdB, and b2–M one year after these ciencies found in the reassessment that
most recent biological monitoring re- may be responsible for the employee’s
sults. If the results of the followup bio- excess exposure to cadmium.
logical monitoring specified in this (B) Provide semi-annual medical re-
paragraph, confirm the previous re- examinations to evaluate the abnormal
sults, the employer may discontinue clinical sign(s) of cadmium toxicity
all periodic medical surveillance for until the results are normal or the em-
that employee. ployee is medically removed; and
(C) However, if the results of the fol- (C) Where the results of tests for
low-up tests specified in paragraph total proteins in urine are abnormal,
(l)(4)(v)(A) or (B) of this section indi- provide a more detailed medical eval-
cate that the level of the employee’s uation of the toxic effects of cadmium
CdU, b2–M, or CdB exceeds these same on the employee’s renal system.
levels, the employer is required to pro-
(6) Examination for respirator use. (i)
vide annual medical examinations in
To determine an employee’s fitness for
accordance with the provisions of para-
respirator use, the employer shall pro-
graph (l)(4)(ii) of this section until the
vide a medical examination that in-
results of biological monitoring are
cludes the elements specified in para-
consistently below these levels or the
graph (l)(6)(i)(A)–(D) of this section.
examining physician determines in a
This examination shall be provided
written medical opinion that further
prior to the employee’s being assigned
medical surveillance is not required to
to a job that requires the use of a res-
protect the employee’s health.
pirator or no later than 90 days after
(vi) A routine, biennial medical ex-
amination is not required to be pro- this section goes into effect, whichever
vided in accordance with paragraphs date is later, to any employee without
(l)(3)(i) and (l)(4) of this section if ade- a medical examination within the pre-
quate medical records show that the ceding 12 months that satisfies the re-
employee has been examined in accord- quirements of this paragraph.
ance with the requirements of para- (A) A detailed medical and work his-
graph (l)(4)(ii) of this section within tory, or update thereof, with emphasis
the past 12 months. In that case, such on: past exposure to cadmium; smoking
records shall be maintained by the em- history and current status; any history
ployer as part of the employee’s med- of renal, cardiovascular, respiratory,
ical record, and the next routine, peri- hematopoietic, and/or musculo-skeletal
odic medical examination shall be system dysfunction; a description of
made available to the employee within the job for which the respirator is re-
two years of the previous examination. quired; and questions 3–11 and 25–32 in
(5) Actions triggered by medical exami- appendix D;
nations. (i) If the results of a medical (B) A blood pressure test;
examination carried out in accordance (C) Biological monitoring of the em-
with this section indicate any labora- ployee’s levels of CdU, CdB and b2–M in
tory or clinical finding consistent with accordance with the requirements of
cadmium toxicity that does not require paragraph (l)(2)(ii)(B) of this section,
employer action under paragraphs unless such results already have been
(l)(2), (3) or (4) of this section, the em- obtained within the twelve months;
ployer shall take the following steps and
and continue to take them until the (D) Any other test or precedure that
physician determines that they are no the examining physician deems appro-
longer necessary. priate.
(A) Periodically reassess: The em- (ii) After reviewing all the informa-
ployee’s work practices and personal tion obtained from the medical exam-
hygiene; the employee’s respirator use, ination required in paragraph (l)(6)(i)
603
of this section, the physician shall de- this section, no termination of employ-
termine whether the employee is fit to ment medical examination is required.
wear a respirator. (9) Information provided to the physi-
(iii) Whenever an employee has ex- cian. The employer shall provide the
hibited difficulty in breathing during a following information to the exam-
respirator fit test or during use of a ining physician:
respirator, the employer, as soon as (i) A copy of this standard and appen-
possible, shall provide the employee dices;
with a periodic medical examination in (ii) A description of the affected em-
accordance with paragraph (l)(4)(ii) of ployee’s former, current, and antici-
this section to determine the employ- pated duties as they relate to the em-
ee’s fitness to wear a respirator. ployee’s occupational exposure to cad-
(iv) Where the results of the exam- mium;
ination required under paragraphs (iii) The employee’s former, current,
(l)(6)(i), (ii), or (iii) of this section are and anticipated future levels of occupa-
abnormal, medical limitation or prohi- tional exposure to cadmium;
bition of respirator use shall be consid- (iv) A description of any personal
ered. If the employee is allowed to wear protective equipment, including res-
a respirator, the employee’s ability to pirators, used or to be used by the em-
continue to do so shall be periodically ployee, including when and for how
evaluated by a physician. long the employee has used that equip-
(7) Emergency Examinations. (i) In ad- ment; and
dition to the medical surveillance re-
(v) Relevant results of previous bio-
quired in paragraphs (l)(2)–(6) of this
logical monitoring and medical exami-
section, the employer shall provide a
nations.
medical examination as soon as pos-
sible to any employee who may have (10) Physician’s written medical opin-
been acutely exposed to cadmium be- ion. (i) The employer shall promptly
cause of an emergency. obtain a written, medical opinion from
(ii) The examination shall include the examining physician for each med-
the requirements of paragraph (l)(4)(ii), ical examination performed on each
of this section, with emphasis on the employee. This written opinion shall
respiratory system, other organ sys- contain:
tems considered appropriate by the ex- (A) The physician’s diagnosis for the
amining physician, and symptoms of employee;
acute overexposure, as identified in (B) The physician’s opinion as to
paragraphs II(B)(1)–(2) and IV of appen- whether the employee has any detected
dix A of this section. medical condition(s) that would place
(8) Termination of employment exam- the employee at increased risk of ma-
ination. (i) At termination of employ- terial impairment to health from fur-
ment, the employer shall provide a ther exposure to cadmium, including
medical examination in accordance any indications of potential cadmium
with paragraph (l)(4)(ii) of this section, toxicity;
including a chest X-ray where nec- (C) The results of any biological or
essary, to any employee to whom at other testing or related evaluations
any prior time the employer was re- that directly assess the employee’s ab-
quired to provide medical surveillance sorption of cadmium;
under paragraph (l)(1)(i) or (l)(7) of this (D) Any recommended removal from,
section. However, if the last examina- or limitation on the activities or duties
tion satisfied the requirements of para- of the employee or on the employee’s
graph (l)(4)(ii) of this section and was use of personal protective equipment,
less than six months prior to the date such as respirators;
of termination, no further examination (E) A statement that the physician
is required unless otherwise specified has clearly and carefully explained to
in paragraph (l)(3) or (l)(5) of this sec- the employee the results of the medical
tion; examination, including all biological
(ii) In addition, if the employer has monitoring results and any medical
discontinued all periodic medical sur- conditions related to cadmium expo-
veillance under paragraph (l)(4)(v) of sure that require further evaluation or
604
treatment, and any limitation on the ployee must be permanently removed
employee’s diet or use of medications. from excess cadmium exposure.
(ii) The employer shall promptly ob- (E) The employer may not return an
tain a copy of the results of any bio- employee who has been medically re-
logical monitoring provided by an em- moved for any reason to his/her former
ployer to an employee independently of job status until a physician determines
a medical examination under para- in a written medical opinion that con-
graphs (l)(2) and (l)(4) of this section, tinued medical removal is no longer
and, in lieu of a written medical opin- necessary to protect the employee’s
ion, an explanation sheet explaining health.
those results. (ii) Where an employee is found unfit
(iii) The employer shall instruct the to wear a respirator under paragraph
physician not to reveal orally or in the (l)(6)(ii) of this section, the employer
written medical opinion given to the shall remove the employee from work
employer specific findings or diagnoses where exposure to cadmium is above
unrelated to occupational exposure to the PEL.
cadmium. (iii) Where removal is based upon any
(11) Medical Removal Protection reason other than the employee’s in-
(MRP)—(i) General. (A) The employer ability to wear a respirator, the em-
shall temporarily remove an employee ployer shall remove the employee from
work where exposure to cadmium is at
from work where there is excess expo-
or above the action level.
sure to cadmium on each occasion that
(iv) Except as specified in paragraph
medical removal is required under
(l)(11)(v) of this section, no employee
paragraphs (l)(3), (l)(4), or (l)(6) of this
who was removed because his/her level
section and on each occasion that a
of CdU, CdB and/or b2–M exceeded the
physician determines in a written med-
trigger levels in paragraph (l)(3) or
ical opinion that the employee should
(l)(4) of this section may be returned to
be removed from such exposure. The
work with exposure to cadmium at or
physician’s determination may be
above the action level until the em-
based on biological monitoring results, ployee’s levels of CdU fall to or below 3
inability to wear a respirator, evidence µg/g Cr, CdB fall to or below 5 µg/lwb,
of illness, other signs or symptoms of and b2–M fall to or below 300 µg/g Cr.
cadmium-related dysfunction or dis- (v) However, when in the examining
ease, or any other reason deemed medi- physician’s opinion continued exposure
cally sufficient by the physician. to cadmium will not pose an increased
(B) The employer shall medically re- risk to the employee’s health and there
move an employee in accordance with are special circumstances that make
paragraph (l)(11) of this section regard- continued medical removal an inappro-
less of whether at the time of removal priate remedy, the physician shall fully
a job is available into which the re- discuss these matters with the em-
moved employee may be transferred. ployee, and then in a written deter-
(C) Whenever an employee is medi- mination may return a worker to his/
cally removed under paragraph (l)(11) her former job status despite what
of this section, the employer shall would otherwise be unacceptably high
transfer the removed employee to a job biological monitoring results. There-
where the exposure to cadmium is after and until such time as the em-
within the permissible levels specified ployee’s biological monitoring results
in that paragraph as soon as one behave decreased to levels where he/she
comes available. could have been returned to his/her
(D) For any employee who is medi- former job status, the returned em-
cally removed under the provisions of ployee shall continue medical surveil-
paragraph (l)(11)(i) of this section, the lance as if he/she were still on medical
employer shall provide follow-up med- removal. Until such time, the employee
ical examinations semi-annually until, is no longer subject to mandatory med-
in a written medical opinion, the ex- ical removal. Subsequent questions re-
amining physician determines that ei- garding the employee’s medical re-
ther the employee may be returned to moval shall be decided solely by a final
his/her former job status or the em- medical determination.
605
(vi) Where an employer, although not ticipation in medical surveillance pro-
required by this section to do so, re- vided in accordance with this section.
moves an employee from exposure to (13) Multiple physician review. (i) If
cadmium or otherwise places limita- the employer selects the initial physi-
tions on an employee due to the effects cian to conduct any medical examina-
of cadmium exposure on the employ- tion or consultation provided to an em-
ee’s medical condition, the employer ployee under this section, the employee
shall provide the same medical re- may designate a second physician to:
moval protection benefits to that em- (A) Review any findings, determina-
ployee under paragraph (l)(12) of this tions, or recommendations of the ini-
section as would have been provided tial physician; and
had the removal been required under (B) Conduct such examinations, con-
paragraph (l)(11) of this section. sultations, and laboratory tests as the
(12) Medical removal protection benefits. second physician deems necessary to
(i) The employer shall provide medical facilitate this review.
removal protection benefits to an em- (ii) The employer shall promptly no-
ployee for up to a maximum of 18 tify an employee of the right to seek a
months each time, and while the em- second medical opinion after each oc-
ployee is temporarily medically re- casion that an initial physician pro-
moved under paragraph (l)(11) of this vided by the employer conducts a med-
section. ical examination or consultation pur-
(ii) For purposes of this section, the suant to this section. The employer
requirement that the employer provide may condition its participation in, and
medical removal protection benefits payment for, multiple physician review
means that the employer shall main- upon the employee doing the following
tain the total normal earnings, senior- within fifteen (15) days after receipt of
this notice, or receipt of the initial
ity, and all other employee rights and
physician’s written opinion, whichever
benefits of the removed employee, in-
is later:
cluding the employee’s right to his/her
(A) Informing the employer that he
former job status, as if the employee
or she intends to seek a medical opin-
had not been removed from the em-
ion; and
ployee’s job or otherwise medically
(B) Initiating steps to make an ap-
limited.
pointment with a second physician.
(iii) Where, after 18 months on med- (iii) If the findings, determinations,
ical removal because of elevated bio- or recommendations of the second phy-
logical monitoring results, the employ- sician differ from those of the initial
ee’s monitoring results have not de- physician, then the employer and the
clined to a low enough level to permit employee shall assure that efforts are
the employee to be returned to his/her made for the two physicians to resolve
former job status: any disagreement.
(A) The employer shall make avail- (iv) If the two physicians have been
able to the employee a medical exam- unable to quickly resolve their dis-
ination pursuant to this section in agreement, then the employer and the
order to obtain a final medical deter- employee, through their respective
mination as to whether the employee physicians, shall designate a third phy-
may be returned to his/her former job sician to:
status or must be permanently re- (A) Review any findings, determina-
moved from excess cadmium exposure; tions, or recommendations of the other
and two physicians; and
(B) The employer shall assure that (B) Conduct such examinations, con-
the final medical determination indi- sultations, laboratory tests, and dis-
cates whether the employee may be re- cussions with the other two physicians
turned to his/her former job status and as the third physician deems necessary
what steps, if any, should be taken to to resolve the disagreement among
protect the employee’s health; them.
(iv) The employer may condition the (v) The employer shall act consist-
provision of medical removal protec- ently with the findings, determina-
tion benefits upon the employee’s par- tions, and recommendations of the
606
third physician, unless the employer (2) Warning signs. (i) Warning signs
and the employee reach an agreement shall be provided and displayed in regu-
that is consistent with the rec- lated areas. In addition, warning signs
ommendations of at least one of the shall be posted at all approaches to
other two physicians. regulated areas so that an employee
(14) Alternate physician determination. may read the signs and take necessary
The employer and an employee or des- protective steps before entering the
ignated employee representative may area.
agree upon the use of any alternate (ii) Warning signs required by para-
form of physician determination in lieu graph (m)(2)(i) of this section shall
of the multiple physician review pro- bear the following legend:
vided by paragraph (l)(13) of this sec-
DANGER
tion, so long as the alternative is expe- CADMIUM
ditious and at least as protective of the MAY CAUSE CANCER
employee. CAUSES DAMAGE TO LUNGS AND KID-
(15) Information the employer must pro- NEYS
vide the employee. (i) The employer WEAR RESPIRATORY PROTECTION IN
shall provide a copy of the physician’s THIS AREA
written medical opinion to the exam- AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY
ined employee within five working (iii) The employer shall ensure that
days after receipt thereof. signs required by this paragraph (m)(2)
(ii) The employer shall provide the are illuminated, cleaned, and main-
employee with a copy of the employ- tained as necessary so that the legend
ee’s biological monitoring results and is readily visible.
an explanation sheet explaining the re- (iv) Prior to June 1, 2016, employers
sults within five working days after re- may use the following legend in lieu of
ceipt thereof. that specified in paragraph (m)(2)(ii) of
(iii) Within 30 days after a request by this section:
an employee, the employer shall pro-
vide the employee with the informa- DANGER
CADMIUM
tion the employer is required to pro-
CANCER HAZARD
vide the examining physician under CAN CAUSE LUNG AND KIDNEY DISEASE
paragraph (l)(9) of this section. AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY
(16) Reporting. In addition to other RESPIRATORS REQUIRED IN THIS AREA
medical events that are required to be
reported on the OSHA Form No. 200, (3) Warning labels. (i) Shipping and
the employer shall report any abnor- storage containers containing cad-
mal condition or disorder caused by oc- mium or cadmium compounds shall
cupational exposure to cadmium asso- bear appropriate warning labels, as
ciated with employment as specified in specified in paragraph (m)(1) of this
Chapter (V)(E) of the Reporting Guide- section.
lines for Occupational Injuries and Ill- (ii) The warning labels for containers
nesses. of cadmium-contaminated protective
(m) Communication of cadmium haz- clothing, equipment, waste, scrap, or
ards to employees—(1) Hazard commu- debris shall include at least the fol-
nication. The employer shall include lowing information:
cadmium in the program established to DANGER
comply with the Hazard Communica- CONTAINS CADMIUM
tion Standard (HCS) (§ 1910.1200). The MAY CAUSE CANCER
employer shall ensure that each em- CAUSES DAMAGE TO LUNGS AND KID-
ployee has access to labels on con- NEYS
AVOID CREATING DUST
tainers of cadmium and safety data
sheets, and is trained in accordance (iii) Where feasible, installed cad-
with the provisions of HCS and para- mium products shall have a visible
graph (m)(4) of this section. The em- label or other indication that cadmium
ployer shall provide information on at is present.
least the following hazards: Cancer; (iv) Prior to June 1, 2015, employers
lung effects; kidney effects; and acute may include the following information
toxicity effects. on shipping and storage containers
607
containing cadmium, cadmium com- (G) The contents of this section and
pounds, or cadmium-contaminated its appendices, and,
clothing, equipment, waste, scrap, or (H) The employee’s rights of access
debris in lieu of the labeling require- to records under § 1926.33(g) (1) and (2).
ments specified in paragraphs (m)(3)(i) (iv) Additional access to information
and (m)(3)(ii) of this section: and training program and materials.
DANGER (A) The employer shall make a copy
CONTAINS CADMIUM of this section and its appendices read-
CANCER HAZARD ily available to all affected employees
AVOID CREATING DUST and shall provide a copy without cost if
CAN CAUSE LUNG AND KIDNEY DISEASE requested.
(4) Employee information and training. (B) Upon request, the employer shall
(i) The employer shall train each em- provide to the Assistant Secretary or
ployee who is potentially exposed to the Director all materials relating to
cadmium in accordance with the re- the employee information and the
quirements of this section. The em- training program.
ployer shall institute a training pro- (5) Multi-employer workplace. In a
gram, ensure employee participation in multi-employer workplace, an em-
the program, and maintain a record of ployer who produces, uses, or stores
the contents of the training program. cadmium in a manner that may expose
(ii) Training shall be provided prior employees of other employers to cad-
to or at the time of initial assignment mium shall notify those employers of
to a job involving potential exposure to the potential hazard in accordance
cadmium and at least annually therewith paragraph (e) of the hazard com-
after. munication standard for construction,
(iii) The employer shall make the 29 CFR 1926.59.
training program understandable to (n) Recordkeeping—(1) Exposure moni-
the employee and shall assure that toring. (i) The employer shall establish
each employee is informed of the fol- and keep an accurate record of all air
lowing: monitoring for cadmium in the work-
(A) The health hazards associated place.
with cadmium exposure, with special (ii) This record shall include at least
attention to the information incor- the following information:
porated in appendix A to this section; (A) The monitoring date, shift, dura-
(B) The quantity, location, manner of tion, air volume, and results in terms
use, release, and storage of cadmium in of an 8-hour TWA of each sample
the workplace and the specific nature taken, and if cadmium is not detected,
of operations that could result in expo- the detection level;
sure to cadmium, especially exposures (B) The name, social security num-
above the PEL; ber, and job classification of all em-
(C) The engineering controls and ployees monitored and of all other em-
work practices associated with the employees whose exposures the moni-
ployee’s job assignment; toring result is intended to represent,
(D) The measures employees can take including, where applicable, a descrip-
to protect themselves from exposure to tion of how it was determined that the
cadmium, including modification of employee’s monitoring result could be
such habits as smoking and personal taken to represent other employee’s
hygiene, and specific procedures the exposures;
employer has implemented to protect (C) A description of the sampling and
employees from exposure to cadmium analytical methods used and evidence
such as appropriate work practices, of their accuracy;
emergency procedures, and the provi- (D) The type of respiratory protec-
sion of personal protective equipment; tive device, if any, worn by the mon-
(E) The purpose, proper selection, fit- itored employee and by any other em-
ting, proper use, and limitations of res- ployee whose exposure the monitoring
pirators and protective clothing; result is intended to represent;
(F) The purpose and a description of (E) A notation of any other condi-
the medical surveillance program re- tions that might have affected the
quired by paragraph (l) of this section; monitoring results.
608
(F) Any exposure monitoring or ob- quired to be provided by this section,
jective data that were used and the lev- including biological tests, X-rays, pul-
els. monary function tests, etc., or that
(iii) The employer shall maintain have been obtained to further evaluate
this record for at least thirty (30) any condition that might be related to
years, in accordance with § 1926.33 of cadmium exposure;
this part. (D) The employee’s medical symp-
(iv) The employer shall also provide a toms that might be related to exposure
copy of the results of an employee’s air to cadmium; and
monitoring prescribed in paragraph (d) (E) A copy of the information pro-
of this section to an industry trade as- vided to the physician as required by
sociation and to the employee’s union, paragraph (l)(9) of this section.
if any, or, if either of such associations (iii) The employer shall assure that
or unions do not exist, to another com- this record is maintained for the dura-
parable organization that is competent tion of employment plus thirty (30)
to maintain such records and is reason- years, in accordance with § 1926.33 of
ably accessible to employers and em- this part.
ployees in the industry. (iv) At the employee’s request, the
(2) Objective data for exemption from re- employer shall promptly provide a
quirement for initial monitoring. (i) For copy of the employee’s medical record,
purposes of this section, objective data or update as appropriate, to a medical
are information demonstrating that a doctor or a union specified by the em-
particular product or material con- ployee.
taining cadmium or a specific process, (4) Availability. (i) Except as other-
operation, or activity involving cad- wise provided for in this section, access
mium cannot release dust or fumes in to all records required to be main-
concentrations at or above the action tained by paragraphs (n)(1) through (3)
level even under the worst-case release of this section shall be in accordance
conditions. Objective data can be ob- with the provisions of 29 CFR 1910.1020.
tained from an industry-wide study or (ii) Within 15 days after a request,
from laboratory product test results the employer shall make an employee’s
from manufacturers of cadmium-con- medical records required to be kept by
taining products or materials. The data paragraph (n)(3) of this section avail-
the employer uses from an industry- able for examination and copying to
wide survey must be obtained under the subject employee, to designated
workplace conditions closely resem- representatives, to anyone having the
bling the processes, types of material, specific written consent of the subject
control methods, work practices and employee, and after the employee’s
environmental conditions in the em- death or incapacitation, to the employ-
ployer’s current operations. ee’s family members.
(ii) The employer shall maintain the (5) Transfer of records. Whenever an
record for at least 30 years of the objec- employer ceases to do business and
tive data relied upon. there is no successor employer or des-
(3) Medical surveillance. (i) The em- ignated organization to receive and re-
ployer shall establish and maintain an tain records for the prescribed period,
accurate record for each employee cov- the employer shall comply with the re-
ered by medical surveillance under quirements concerning transfer of
paragraph (l)(1)(i) of this section. records set forth in § 1926.33 (h) of this
(ii) The record shall include at least part.
the following information about the (o) Observation of monitoring—(1) Em-
employee: ployee observation. The employer shall
(A) Name, social security number, provide affected employees or their
and description of duties; designated representatives an oppor-
(B) A copy of the physician’s written tunity to observe any monitoring of
opinions and of the explanation sheets employee exposure to cadmium.
for biological monitoring results; (2) Observation procedures. When ob-
(C) A copy of the medical history, servation of monitoring requires entry
and the results of any physical exam- into an area where the use of protec-
ination and all test results that are re- tive clothing or equipment is required,
609
the employer shall provide the observer § 1926.1128 Benzene.
with that clothing and equipment and
shall assure that the observer uses struction work under this section are iden-
such clothing and equipment and com- tical to those set forth at § 1910.1028 of this
plies with all other applicable safety chapter.
and health procedures.
[61 FR 31434, June 20, 1996]
(p) [Reserved]
(q) Appendices. Except where portions § 1926.1129 Coke oven emissions.
of appendices A, B, D, E, and F to this
section are expressly incorporated in NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
requirements of this section, these ap-
pendices are purely informational and chapter.
are not intended to create any addi-
tional obligations not otherwise im- [61 FR 31434, June 20, 1996]
posed or to detract from any existing
§ 1926.1144 1,2-dibromo-3-
obligations. chloropropane.
APPENDIX A TO § 1926.1127—SUBSTANCE NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
SAFETY DATA SHEET struction work under this section are iden-
NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- tical to those set forth at § 1910.1044 of this
struction work under this appendix A are chapter.
identical to those set forth in appendix A to [61 FR 31434, June 20, 1996]
§ 1910.1027 of this chapter.
APPENDIX B TO § 1926.1127—SUBSTANCE
§ 1926.1145 Acrylonitrile.
TECHNICAL GUIDELINES FOR CADMIUM NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
chapter.
identical to those set forth in appendix B to
§ 1910.1027 of this chapter. [61 FR 31434, June 20, 1996]
APPENDIX C TO § 1926.1127 [RESERVED] § 1926.1147 Ethylene oxide.
APPENDIX D TO § 1926.1127—OCCUPATIONAL NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
HEALTH HISTORY INTERVIEW WITH REF- struction work under this section are iden-
ERENCE TO CADMIUM EXPOSURE tical to those set forth at § 1910.1047 of this
NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- chapter.
struction work under this appendix D are [61 FR 31434, June 20, 1996]
identical to those set forth in appendix D to
§ 1910.1027 of this chapter. § 1926.1148 Formaldehyde.
APPENDIX E TO § 1926.1127—CADMIUM IN NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
WORKPLACE ATMOSPHERES struction work under this section are iden-
NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- chapter.
struction work under this appendix E are
identical to those set forth in appendix E to [61 FR 31434, June 20, 1996]
§ 1910.1027 of this chapter.
§ 1926.1152 Methylene chloride.
APPENDIX F TO § 1926.1127—NONMANDATORY
PROTOCOL FOR BIOLOGICAL MONITORING NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
struction employment under this section are
NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- identical to those set forth at 29 CFR
struction work under this appendix F are 1910.1052.
identical to those set forth in appendix F to
§ 1910.1027 of this chapter. [62 FR 1619, Jan. 10, 1997]
[57 FR 42452, Sept. 14, 1992, as amended at 57

FR 49272, Oct. 30, 1992; 58 FR 21787, Apr. 23, Subparts AA–BB [Reserved]
1993. Redesignated and amended at 59 FR 215,
Jan. 3, 1994; 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996; 61 FR Subpart CC—Cranes and Derricks
31433, 31434, June 20, 1996; 63 FR 1298, Jan. 8,
1998; 70 FR 1144, Jan. 5, 2005; 71 FR 16675, Apr.
in Construction
3, 2006; 71 FR 50192, Aug. 24, 2006; 73 FR 75589,
Dec. 12, 2008; 76 FR 33612, June 8, 2011; 77 FR AUTHORITY: 40 U.S.C. 3701; 29 U.S.C. 653, 655,
17895, Mar. 26, 2012] 657; and Secretary of Labor’s Order No. 5–2007
610
(72 FR 31159) or 1–2012 (77 FR 3912), as appli- (3) Automotive wreckers and tow
cable; and 29 CFR part 1911. trucks when used to clear wrecks and
SOURCE: 75 FR 48135, Aug. 9, 2010, unless haul vehicles.
otherwise noted. (4) Digger derricks when used for
augering holes for poles carrying elec-
§ 1926.1400 Scope. tric or telecommunication lines, plac-
(a) This standard applies to power-oping and removing the poles, and for
erated equipment, when used in con- handling associated materials for in-
struction, that can hoist, lower and stallation on, or removal from, the
horizontally move a suspended load. poles, or when used for any other work
Such equipment includes, but is not subject to subpart V of this part. To be
eligible for this exclusion, digger-der-
limited to: Articulating cranes (such as
rick use in work subject to subpart V
knuckle-boom cranes); crawler cranes;
of this part must comply with all of
floating cranes; cranes on barges; loco-
the provisionsof that subpart, and dig-
motive cranes; mobile cranes (such as
ger-derrick use in construction work
wheel-mounted, rough-terrain, all-ter-
for telecommunication service (as
rain, commercial truck-mounted, and
definedat § 1910.268(s)(40)) must comply
boom truck cranes); multi-purpose ma-
with all of the provisions of § 1910.268.
chines when configured to hoist and
(5) Machinery originally designed as
lower (by means of a winch or hook)
vehicle-mounted aerial devices (for lift-
and horizontally move a suspended
ing personnel) and self-propelled ele-
load; industrial cranes (such as carry- vating work platforms.
deck cranes); dedicated pile drivers; (6) Telescopic/hydraulic gantry sys-
service/mechanic trucks with a hoist- tems.
ing device; a crane on a monorail; (7) Stacker cranes.
tower cranes (such as a fixed jib, i.e., (8) Powered industrial trucks (fork-
‘‘hammerhead boom’’), luffing boom lifts), except when configured to hoist
and self-erecting); pedestal cranes; por- and lower (by means of a winch or
tal cranes; overhead and gantry cranes; hook) and horizontally move a sus-
straddle cranes; sideboom cranes; der- pended load.
ricks; and variations of such equip- (9) Mechanic’s truck with a hoisting
ment. However, items listed in para- device when used in activities related
graph (c) of this section are excluded to equipment maintenance and repair.
from the scope of this standard. (10) Machinery that hoists by using a
(b) Attachments. This standard applies come-a-long or chainfall.
to equipment included in paragraph (a) (11) Dedicated drilling rigs.
of this section when used with attach- (12) Gin poles when used for the erec-
ments. Such attachments, whether tion of communication towers.
crane-attached or suspended include, (13) Tree trimming and tree removal
but are not limited to: Hooks, magnets, work.
grapples, clamshell buckets, orange (14) Anchor handling or dredge-re-
peel buckets, concrete buckets, drag lated operations with a vessel or barge
lines, personnel platforms, augers or using an affixed A-frame.
drills and pile driving equipment. (15) Roustabouts.
(c) Exclusions. This subpart does not (16) Helicopter cranes.
cover: (17) Material Delivery
(1) Machinery included in paragraph (i) Articulating/knuckle-boom truck
(a) of this section while it has been cranes that deliver material to a con-
converted or adapted for a non-hoist- struction site when used to transfer
ing/lifting use. Such conversions/adap- materials from the truck crane to the
tations include, but are not limited to, ground, without arranging the mate-
power shovels, excavators and concrete rials in a particular sequence for hoist-
pumps. ing.
(2) Power shovels, excavators, wheel (ii) Articulating/knuckle-boom truck
loaders, backhoes, loader backhoes, cranes that deliver material to a con-
track loaders. This machinery is also struction site when the crane is used to
excluded when used with chains, slings transfer building supply sheet goods or
or other rigging to lift suspended loads. building supply packaged materials
611
from the truck crane onto a structure, (h) Section 1926.1402 does not apply to
using a fork/cradle at the end of the cranes designed for use on railroad
boom, but only when the truck crane is tracks, when used on railroad tracks
equipped with a properly functioning that are part of the general railroad
automatic overload prevention device. system of transportation that is regu-
Such sheet goods or packaged mate- lated pursuant to the Federal Railroad
rials include, but are not limited to: Administration under 49 CFR part 213,
Sheets of sheet rock, sheets of ply- and that comply with applicable Fed-
wood, bags of cement, sheets or pack- eral Railroad Administration require-
ages of roofing shingles, and rolls of ments. See § 1926.1402(f).
roofing felt. [75 FR 48135, Aug. 9, 2010, as amended at 78
(iii) This exclusion does not apply FR 32116, May 29, 2013]
when:
(A) The articulating/knuckle-boom § 1926.1401 Definitions.
crane is used to hold, support or sta- A/D director (Assembly/Disassembly di-
bilize the material to facilitate a con- rector) means an individual who meets
struction activity, such as holding ma- this subpart’s requirements for an A/D
terial in place while it is attached to director, irrespective of the person’s
the structure; formal job title or whether the person
(B) The material being handled by is non-management or management
the articulating/knuckle-boom crane is personnel.
a prefabricated component. Such pre- Articulating crane means a crane
fabricated components include, but are whose boom consists of a series of fold-
not limited to: Precast concrete mem- ing, pin connected structural members,
bers or panels, roof trusses (wooden, typically manipulated to extend or re-
cold-formed metal, steel, or other ma- tract by power from hydraulic cyl-
terial), prefabricated building sections inders.
such as, but not limited to: Floor pan- Assembly/Disassembly means the as-
els, wall panels, roof panels, roof struc- sembly and/or disassembly of equip-
tures, or similar items; ment covered under this standard.
(C) The material being handled by With regard to tower cranes, ‘‘erecting
the crane is a structural steel member and climbing’’ replaces the term ‘‘as-
(for example, steel joists, beams, col- sembly,’’ and ‘‘dismantling’’ replaces
umns, steel decking (bundled or the term ‘‘disassembly.’’ Regardless of
unbundled) or a component of a sys- whether the crane is initially erected
tems-engineered metal building (as de- to its full height or is climbed in
fined in 29 CFR 1926 subpart R). stages, the process of increasing the
(D) The activity is not specifically height of the crane is an erection proc-
excluded under § 1400(c)(17)(i) and (ii). ess.
(d) All sections of this subpart CC Assist crane means a crane used to as-
apply to the equipment covered by this sist in assembling or disassembling a
standard unless specified otherwise. crane.
(e) The duties of controlling entities Attachments means any device that
under this subpart include, but are not expands the range of tasks that can be
limited to, the duties specified in done by the equipment. Examples in-
§ 1926.1402(c), § 1926.1402(e) and clude, but are not limited to: An auger,
§ 1926.1424(b). drill, magnet, pile-driver, and boom-at-
(f) Where provisions of this standard tached personnel platform.
direct an operator, crewmember, or Audible signal means a signal made by
other employee to take certain actions, a distinct sound or series of sounds. Ex-
the employer must establish, effec- amples include, but are not limited to,
tively communicate to the relevant sounds made by a bell, horn, or whistle.
persons, and enforce, work rules to en- Blocking (also referred to as ‘‘crib-
sure compliance with such provisions. bing’’) is wood or other material used
(g) For work covered by subpart V of to support equipment or a component
this part, compliance with 29 CFR and distribute loads to the ground. It is
§ 1910.269(p) is deemed compliance with typically used to support lattice boom
§§ 1926.1407 through 1926.1411. sections during assembly/disassembly
612
and under outrigger and stabilizer ports the boom tip and controls the
floats. boom angle.
Boatswain’s chair means a single- Builder means the builder/constructor
point adjustable suspension scaffold of equipment.
consisting of a seat or sling (which Center of gravity: The center of grav-
may be incorporated into a full body ity of any object is the point in the ob-
harness) designed to support one em- ject around which its weight is evenly
ployee in a sitting position. distributed. If you could put a support
Bogie means ‘‘travel bogie,’’ which is under that point, you could balance the
defined below. object on the support.
Boom (equipment other than tower Certified welder means a welder who
crane) means an inclined spar, strut, or meets nationally recognized certifi-
other long structural member which cation requirements applicable to the
supports the upper hoisting tackle on a task being performed.
crane or derrick. Typically, the length Climbing means the process in which
and vertical angle of the boom can be a tower crane is raised to a new work-
varied to achieve increased height or ing height, either by adding additional
height and reach when lifting loads. tower sections to the top of the crane
Booms can usually be grouped into (top climbing), or by a system in which
general categories of hydraulically ex- the entire crane is raised inside the
tendible, cantilevered type, latticed structure (inside climbing).
section, cable supported type or articu- Come-a-long means a mechanical de-
lating type.
vice typically consisting of a chain or
Boom (tower cranes): On tower cranes, cable attached at each end that is used
if the ‘‘boom’’ (i.e., principal horizontal to facilitate movement of materials
structure) is fixed, it is referred to as a through leverage.
jib; if it is moveable up and down, it is
Competent person means one who is
referred to as a boom.
capable of identifying existing and pre-
Boom angle indicator means a device
dictable hazards in the surroundings or
which measures the angle of the boom
working conditions which are unsani-
relative to horizontal.
tary, hazardous, or dangerous to em-
Boom hoist limiting device includes
boom hoist disengaging device, boom
take prompt corrective measures to
hoist shut-off, boom hoist disconnect,
eliminate them.
boom hoist hydraulic relief, boom hoist
kick-outs, automatic boom stop device, Controlled load lowering means low-
or derricking limiter. This type of de- ering a load by means of a mechanical
vice disengages boom hoist power when hoist drum device that allows a hoisted
the boom reaches a predetermined op- load to be lowered with maximum con-
erating angle. It also sets brakes or trol using the gear train or hydraulic
closes valves to prevent the boom from components of the hoist mechanism.
lowering after power is disengaged. Controlled load lowering requires the
Boom length indicator indicates the use of the hoist drive motor, rather
length of the permanent part of the than the load hoist brake, to lower the
boom (such as ruled markings on the load.
boom) or, as in some computerized sys- Controlling entity means an employer
tems, the length of the boom with ex- that is a prime contractor, general con-
tensions/attachments. tractor, construction manager or any
Boom stop includes boom stops, (belly other legal entity which has the over-
straps with struts/standoff), tele- all responsibility for the construction
scoping boom stops, attachment boom of the project—its planning, quality
stops, and backstops. These devices re- and completion.
strict the boom from moving above a Counterweight means a weight used to
certain maximum angle and toppling supplement the weight of equipment in
over backward. providing stability for lifting loads by
Boom suspension system means a sys- counterbalancing those loads.
tem of pendants, running ropes, Crane/derrick includes all equipment
sheaves, and other hardware which sup- covered by this subpart.
613
Crawler crane means equipment that Encroachment is where any part of
has a type of base mounting which in- the crane, load line or load (including
corporates a continuous belt of sprock- rigging and lifting accessories)
et driven track. breaches a minimum clearance dis-
Crossover points means locations on a tance that this subpart requires to be
wire rope which is spooled on a drum maintained from a power line.
where one layer of rope climbs up on Equipment means equipment covered
and crosses over the previous layer. by this subpart.
This takes place at each flange of the Equipment criteria means instruc-
drum as the rope is spooled onto the tions, recommendations, limitations
drum, reaches the flange, and begins to and specifications.
wrap back in the opposite direction. Fall protection equipment means
Dedicated channel means a line of guardrail systems, safety net systems,
communication assigned by the em- personal fall arrest systems, posi-
ployer who controls the communica- tioning device systems or fall restraint
tion system to only one signal person systems.
and crane/derrick or to a coordinated Fall restraint system means a fall pro-
group of cranes/derricks/signal per- tection system that prevents the user
son(s). from falling any distance. The system
Dedicated pile-driver is a machine that is comprised of either a body belt or
is designed to function exclusively as a body harness, along with an anchorage,
pile-driver. These machines typically connectors and other necessary equip-
have the ability to both hoist the ma- ment. The other components typically
terial that will be pile-driven and to include a lanyard, and may also in-
pile-drive that material. clude a lifeline and other devices.
Dedicated spotter (power lines): To be Fall zone means the area (including
considered a dedicated spotter, the re- but not limited to the area directly be-
quirements of § 1926.1428 (Signal person neath the load) in which it is reason-
qualifications) must be met and his/her ably foreseeable that partially or com-
sole responsibility is to watch the sepa- pletely suspended materials could fall
ration between the power line and the in the event of an accident.
equipment, load line and load (includ- Flange points are points of contact be-
ing rigging and lifting accessories), and tween rope and drum flange where the
ensure through communication with rope changes layers.
the operator that the applicable min- Floating cranes/derricks means equip-
imum approach distance is not ment designed by the manufacturer (or
breached. employer) for marine use by permanent
Directly under the load means a part attachment to a barge, pontoons, ves-
or all of an employee is directly be- sel or other means of flotation.
neath the load. For example means ‘‘one example, al-
Dismantling includes partial disman- though there are others.’’
tling (such as dismantling to shorten a Free fall (of the load line) means that
boom or substitute a different compo- only the brake is used to regulate the
nent). descent of the load line (the drive
Drum rotation indicator means a de- mechanism is not used to drive the
vice on a crane or hoist which indicates load down faster or retard its low-
in which direction and at what relative ering).
speed a particular hoist drum is turn- Free surface effect is the uncontrolled
ing. transverse movement of liquids in com-
Electrical contact occurs when a per- partments which reduce a vessel’s
son, object, or equipment makes con- transverse stability.
tact or comes in close proximity with Hoist means a mechanical device for
an energized conductor or equipment lifting and lowering loads by winding a
that allows the passage of current. line onto or off a drum.
Employer-made equipment means float- Hoisting is the act of raising, low-
ing cranes/derricks designed and built ering or otherwise moving a load in the
by an employer for the employer’s own air with equipment covered by this
use. standard. As used in this standard,
614
‘‘hoisting’’ can be done by means other Locomotive crane means a crane
than wire rope/hoist drum equipment. mounted on a base or car equipped for
Include/including means ‘‘including, travel on a railroad track.
but not limited to.’’ Luffing jib limiting device is similar to
Insulating link/device means an insu- a boom hoist limiting device, except
lating device listed, labeled, or accept- that it limits the movement of the
ed by a Nationally Recognized Testing luffing jib.
Laboratory in accordance with 29 CFR Marine hoisted personnel transfer de-
1910.7. vice means a device, such as a ‘‘transfer
Jib stop (also referred to as a jib back- net,’’ that is designed to protect the
stop), is the same type of device as a employees being hoisted during a ma-
boom stop but is for a fixed or luffing rine transfer and to facilitate rapid
jib. entry into and exit from the device.
Such devices do not include boat-
Land crane/derrick is equipment not
swain’s chairs when hoisted by equip-
originally designed by the manufac-
ment covered by this standard.
turer for marine use by permanent at-
Marine worksite means a construction
tachment to barges, pontoons, vessels,
worksite located in, on or above the
or other means of floatation.
water.
List means the angle of inclination Mobile crane means a lifting device
about the longitudinal axis of a barge, incorporating a cable suspended
pontoons, vessel or other means of latticed boom or hydraulic telescopic
floatation. boom designed to be moved between
Load refers to the object(s) being operating locations by transport over
hoisted and/or the weight of the ob- the road.
ject(s); both uses refer to the object(s) Moving point-to-point means the times
and the load-attaching equipment, during which an employee is in the
such as, the load block, ropes, slings, process of going to or from a work sta-
shackles, and any other ancillary at- tion.
tachment. Multi-purpose machine means a ma-
Load moment (or rated capacity) indi- chine that is designed to be configured
cator means a system which aids the in various ways, at least one of which
equipment operator by sensing (di- allows it to hoist (by means of a winch
rectly or indirectly) the overturning or hook) and horizontally move a sus-
moment on the equipment, i.e., load pended load. For example, a machine
multiplied by radius. It compares this that can rotate and can be configured
lifting condition to the equipment’s with removable forks/tongs (for use as
rated capacity, and indicates to the op- a forklift) or with a winch pack, jib
erator the percentage of capacity at (with a hook at the end) or jib used in
which the equipment is working. conjunction with a winch. When config-
Lights, bells, or buzzers may be incor- ured with the forks/tongs, it is not cov-
porated as a warning of an approaching ered by this subpart. When configured
overload condition. with a winch pack, jib (with a hook at
Load moment (or rated capacity) limiter the end) or jib used in conjunction with
means a system which aids the equip- a winch, it is covered by this subpart.
ment operator by sensing (directly or Nationally recognized accrediting agen-
indirectly) the overturning moment on cy is an organization that, due to its
the equipment, i.e., load multiplied by independence and expertise, is widely
radius. It compares this lifting condi- recognized as competent to accredit
tion to the equipment’s rated capacity, testing organizations. Examples of
and when the rated capacity is reached, such accrediting agencies include, but
it shuts off power to those equipment are not limited to, the National Com-
functions which can increase the sever- mission for Certifying Agencies and the
ity of loading on the equipment, e.g., American National Standards Insti-
hoisting, telescoping out, or luffing tute.
out. Typically, those functions which Nonconductive means that, because of
decrease the severity of loading on the the nature and condition of the mate-
equipment remain operational, e.g., rials used, and the conditions of use
lowering, telescoping in, or luffing in. (including environmental conditions
615
and condition of the material), the ob- Procedures include, but are not lim-
ject in question has the property of not ited to: Instructions, diagrams, rec-
becoming energized (that is, it has high ommendations, warnings, specifica-
dielectric properties offering a high re- tions, protocols and limitations.
sistance to the passage of current Proximity alarm is a device that pro-
under the conditions of use). vides a warning of proximity to a
Operational aids are devices that as- power line and that has been listed, la-
sist the operator in the safe operation beled, or accepted by a Nationally Rec-
of the crane by providing information ognized Testing Laboratory in accord-
or automatically taking control of a ance with 29 CFR 1910.7.
crane function. These include, but are Qualified evaluator (not a third party)
not limited to, the devices listed in means a person employed by the signal
§ 1926.1416 (‘‘listed operational aids’’). person’s employer who has dem-
Operational controls means levers, onstrated that he/she is competent in
switches, pedals and other devices for accurately assessing whether individ-
controlling equipment operation. uals meet the Qualification Require-
Operator means a person who is oper- ments in this subpart for a signal per-
ating the equipment. son.
Overhead and gantry cranes includes Qualified evaluator (third party) means
overhead/bridge cranes, semigantry, an entity that, due to its independence
cantilever gantry, wall cranes, storage and expertise, has demonstrated that it
bridge cranes, launching gantry cranes, is competent in accurately assessing
and similar equipment, irrespective of whether individuals meet the Quali-
whether it travels on tracks, wheels, or fication Requirements in this subpart
other means. for a signal person.
Paragraph refers to a paragraph in Qualified person means a person who,
the same section of this subpart that by possession of a recognized degree,
the word ‘‘paragraph’’ is used, unless certificate, or professional standing, or
otherwise specified. who by extensive knowledge, training
Pendants includes both wire and bar and experience, successfully dem-
types. Wire type: A fixed length of wire onstrated the ability to solve/resolve
rope with mechanical fittings at both problems relating to the subject mat-
ends for pinning segments of wire rope ter, the work, or the project.
together. Bar type: Instead of wire
Qualified rigger is a rigger who meets
rope, a bar is used. Pendants are typi-
the criteria for a qualified person.
cally used in a latticed boom crane sys-
tem to easily change the length of the Range control limit device is a device
boom suspension system without com- that can be set by an equipment oper-
pletely changing the rope on the drum ator to limit movement of the boom or
when the boom length is increased or jib tip to a plane or multiple planes.
decreased. Range control warning device is a de-
Personal fall arrest system means a vice that can be set by an equipment
system used to arrest an employee in a operator to warn that the boom or jib
fall from a working level. It consists of tip is at a plane or multiple planes.
an anchorage, connectors, a body har- Rated capacity means the maximum
ness and may include a lanyard, decel- working load permitted by the manu-
eration device, lifeline, or suitable facturer under specified working condi-
combination of these. tions. Such working conditions typi-
Portal crane is a type of crane con- cally include a specific combination of
sisting of a rotating upperstructure, factors such as equipment configura-
hoist machinery, and boom mounted on tion, radii, boom length, and other pa-
top of a structural gantry which may rameters of use.
be fixed in one location or have travel Rated capacity indicator: See load mo-
capability. The gantry legs or columns ment indicator.
usually have portal openings in be- Rated capacity limiter: See load mo-
tween to allow passage of traffic be- ment limiter.
neath the gantry. Repetitive pickup points refer to, when
Power lines means electric trans- operating on a short cycle operation,
mission and distribution lines. the rope being used on a single layer
616
and being spooled repetitively over a slewing). The tower base may be fixed
short portion of the drum. in one location or ballasted and move-
Running wire rope means a wire rope able between locations. Mobile cranes
that moves over sheaves or drums. that are configured with luffing jib
Runway means a firm, level surface and/or tower attachments are not con-
designed, prepared and designated as a sidered tower cranes under this sec-
path of travel for the weight and con- tion.
figuration of the crane being used to Travel bogie (tower cranes) is an as-
lift and travel with the crane sus- sembly of two or more axles arranged
pended platform. An existing surface to permit vertical wheel displacement
may be used as long as it meets these and equalize the loading on the wheels.
criteria. Trim means angle of inclination
Section means a section of this sub- about the transverse axis of a barge,
part, unless otherwise specified. pontoons, vessel or other means of
Sideboom crane means a track-type or floatation.
wheel-type tractor having a boom Two blocking means a condition in
mounted on the side of the tractor, which a component that is uppermost
used for lifting, lowering or trans- on the hoist line such as the load
porting a load suspended on the load block, hook block, overhaul ball, or
hook. The boom or hook can be lifted similar component, comes in contact
or lowered in a vertical direction only. with the boom tip, fixed upper block or
Special hazard warnings means warn- similar component. This binds the sys-
ings of site-specific hazards (for exam- tem and continued application of power
ple, proximity of power lines). can cause failure of the hoist rope or
Stability (flotation device) means the other component.
tendency of a barge, pontoons, vessel Unavailable procedures means proce-
or other means of flotation to return to dures that are no longer available from
an upright position after having been the manufacturer, or have never been
inclined by an external force. available, from the manufacturer.
Standard Method means the protocol Upperstructure: See Upperworks.
in appendix A of this subpart for hand Upperworks means the revolving
signals. frame of equipment on which the oper-
Such as means ‘‘such as, but not lim- ating machinery (and many cases the
ited to.’’ engine) are mounted along with the op-
Superstructure: See Upperworks. erator’s cab. The counterweight is
Tagline means a rope (usually fiber) typically supported on the rear of the
attached to a lifted load for purposes of upperstructure and the boom or other
controlling load spinning and pendular front end attachment is mounted on
motions or used to stabilize a bucket the front.
or magnet during material handling Up to means ‘‘up to and including.’’
operations. Wire rope means a flexible rope con-
Tender means an individual respon- structed by laying steel wires into var-
sible for monitoring and commu- ious patterns of multi-wired strands
nicating with a diver. around a core system to produce a
Tilt up or tilt down operation means helically wound rope.
raising/lowering a load from the hori-
zontal to vertical or vertical to hori- § 1926.1402 Ground conditions.
zontal. (a) Definitions.
Tower crane is a type of lifting struc- (1) ‘‘Ground conditions’’ means the
ture which utilizes a vertical mast or ability of the ground to support the
tower to support a working boom (jib) equipment (including slope, compac-
in an elevated position. Loads are sus- tion, and firmness).
pended from the working boom. While (2) ‘‘Supporting materials’’ means
the working boom may be of the fixed blocking, mats, cribbing, marsh
type (horizontal or angled) or have buggies (in marshes/wetlands), or simi-
luffing capability, it can always rotate lar supporting materials or devices.
to swing loads, either by rotating on (b) The equipment must not be as-
the top of the tower (top slewing) or by sembled or used unless ground condi-
the rotation of the tower (bottom tions are firm, drained, and graded to a
617
sufficient extent so that, in conjunc- manufacturer prohibitions and must
tion (if necessary) with the use of sup- comply with either:
porting materials, the equipment man- (a) Manufacturer procedures applica-
ufacturer’s specifications for adequate ble to assembly and disassembly, or
support and degree of level of the (b) Employer procedures for assembly
equipment are met. The requirement and disassembly. Employer procedures
for the ground to be drained does not may be used only where the employer
apply to marshes/wetlands. can demonstrate that the procedures
(c) The controlling entity must: used meet the requirements in
(1) Ensure that ground preparations § 1926.1406. NOTE: The employer must
necessary to meet the requirements in follow manufacturer procedures when
paragraph (b) of this section are pro- an employer uses synthetic slings dur-
vided. ing assembly or disassembly rigging.
(2) Inform the user of the equipment (See § 1926.1404(r).)
and the operator of the location of haz-
§ 1926.1404 Assembly/Disassembly—
ards beneath the equipment set-up area general requirements (applies to all
(such as voids, tanks, utilities) if those assembly and disassembly oper-
hazards are identified in documents ations).
(such as site drawings, as-built draw-
(a) Supervision—competent-qualified
ings, and soil analyses) that are in the
person.
possession of the controlling entity (1) Assembly/disassembly must be di-
(whether at the site or off-site) or the rected by a person who meets the cri-
hazards are otherwise known to that teria for both a competent person and
controlling entity. a qualified person, or by a competent
(d) If there is no controlling entity person who is assisted by one or more
for the project, the requirement in qualified persons (‘‘A/D director’’).
paragraph (c)(1) of this section must be (2) Where the assembly/disassembly
met by the employer that has author- is being performed by only one person,
ity at the site to make or arrange for that person must meet the criteria for
ground preparations needed to meet both a competent person and a quali-
paragraph (b) of this section. fied person. For purposes of this stand-
(e) If the A/D director or the operator ard, that person is considered the A/D
determines that ground conditions do director.
not meet the requirements in para- (b) Knowledge of procedures. The A/D
graph (b) of this section, that person’s director must understand the applica-
employer must have a discussion with ble assembly/disassembly procedures.
the controlling entity regarding the (c) Review of procedures. The A/D di-
ground preparations that are needed so rector must review the applicable as-
that, with the use of suitable sup- sembly/disassembly procedures imme-
porting materials/devices (if nec- diately prior to the commencement of
essary), the requirements in paragraph assembly/disassembly unless the A/D
(b) of this section can be met. director understands the procedures
(f) This section does not apply to and has applied them to the same type
cranes designed for use on railroad and configuration of equipment (in-
tracks when used on railroad tracks cluding accessories, if any).
that are part of the general railroad (d) Crew instructions.
system of transportation that is regu- (1) Before commencing assembly/dis-
lated pursuant to the Federal Railroad assembly operations, the A/D director
Administration under 49 CFR part 213 must ensure that the crew members
and that comply with applicable Fed- understand all of the following:
eral Railroad Administration require- (i) Their tasks.
ments. (ii) The hazards associated with their
tasks.
§ 1926.1403 Assembly/Disassembly—se- (iii) The hazardous positions/loca-
lection of manufacturer or em- tions that they need to avoid.
ployer procedures. (2) During assembly/disassembly op-
When assembling or disassembling erations, before a crew member takes
equipment (or attachments), the em- on a different task, or when adding new
ployer must comply with all applicable personnel during the operations, the
618
requirements in paragraphs (d)(1)(i) operations and to support the equip-
through (d)(1)(iii) of this section must ment during assembly/disassembly (see
be met. § 1926.1402 for ground condition require-
(e) Protecting assembly/disassembly ments).
crew members out of operator view. (2) Blocking material. The size,
(1) Before a crew member goes to a amount, condition and method of
location that is out of view of the oper- stacking the blocking must be suffi-
ator and is either in, on, or under the cient to sustain the loads and maintain
equipment, or near the equipment (or stability.
load) where the crew member could be (3) Proper location of blocking. When
injured by movement of the equipment used to support lattice booms or com-
(or load), the crew member must in- ponents, blocking must be appro-
form the operator that he/she is going priately placed to:
to that location. (i) Protect the structural integrity of
(2) Where the operator knows that a the equipment, and
crew member went to a location cov- (ii) Prevent dangerous movement and
ered by paragraph (e)(1) of this section, collapse.
the operator must not move any part (4) Verifying assist crane loads. When
of the equipment (or load) until the op- using an assist crane, the loads that
erator is informed in accordance with a will be imposed on the assist crane at
pre-arranged system of communication each phase of assembly/disassembly
that the crew member is in a safe posi- must be verified in accordance with
tion. § 1926.1417(o)(3) before assembly/dis-
(f) Working under the boom, jib or other assembly begins.
components.
(5) Boom and jib pick points. The
(1) When pins (or similar devices) are
point(s) of attachment of rigging to a
being removed, employees must not be
boom (or boom sections or jib or jib
under the boom, jib, or other compo-
sections) must be suitable for pre-
nents, except where the requirements
venting structural damage and facili-
of paragraph (f)(2) of this section are
tating safe handling of these compo-
met.
nents.
(2) Exception. Where the employer
demonstrates that site constraints re- (6) Center of gravity.
quire one or more employees to be (i) The center of gravity of the load
under the boom, jib, or other compo- must be identified if that is necessary
nents when pins (or similar devices) are for the method used for maintaining
being removed, the A/D director must stability.
implement procedures that minimize (ii) Where there is insufficient infor-
the risk of unintended dangerous move- mation to accurately identify the cen-
ment and minimize the duration and ter of gravity, measures designed to
extent of exposure under the boom. (See prevent unintended dangerous move-
Non-mandatory appendix B of this sub- ment resulting from an inaccurate
part for an example.) identification of the center of gravity
(g) Capacity limits. During all phases must be used. (See Non-mandatory ap-
of assembly/disassembly, rated capac- pendix B of this subpart for an exam-
ity limits for loads imposed on the ple.)
equipment, equipment components (in- (7) Stability upon pin removal. The
cluding rigging), lifting lugs and equip- boom sections, boom suspension sys-
ment accessories, must not be exceeded tems (such as gantry A-frames and jib
for the equipment being assembled/dis- struts), and components must be rigged
assembled. or supported to maintain stability
(h) Addressing specific hazards. The A/ upon the removal of the pins.
D director supervising the assembly/ (8) Snagging. Suspension ropes and
disassembly operation must address pendants must not be allowed to catch
the hazards associated with the oper- on the boom or jib connection pins or
ation, which include: cotter pins (including keepers and
(1) Site and ground bearing conditions. locking pins).
Site and ground conditions must be (9) Struck by counterweights. The po-
adequate for safe assembly/disassembly tential for unintended movement from
619
inadequately supported counterweights tion (see § 1926.1412(c) for post-assembly
and from hoisting counterweights. inspection requirements).
(10) Boom hoist brake failure. Each (n) [Reserved]
time reliance is to be placed on the (o) Shipping pins. Reusable shipping
boom hoist brake to prevent boom pins, straps, links, and similar equip-
movement during assembly/dis- ment must be removed. Once they are
assembly, the brake must be tested removed they must either be stowed or
prior to such reliance to determine if it otherwise stored so that they do not
is sufficient to prevent boom move- present a falling object hazard.
ment. If it is not sufficient, a boom (p) Pile driving. Equipment used for
hoist pawl, other locking device/back- pile driving must not have a jib at-
up braking device, or another method tached during pile driving operations.
of preventing dangerous movement of (q) Outriggers and Stabilizers. When
the boom (such as blocking or using an the load to be handled and the oper-
assist crane) from a boom hoist brake ating radius require the use of out-
failure must be used. riggers or stabilizers, or at any time
(11) Loss of backward stability. Back- when outriggers or stabilizers are used,
ward stability before swinging the all of the following requirements must
upperworks, travel, and when attach- be met (except as otherwise indicated):
ing or removing equipment compo- (1) The outriggers or stabilizers must
nents. be either fully extended or, if manufac-
(12) Wind speed and weather. The ef- turer procedures permit, deployed as
fect of wind speed and weather on the specified in the load chart.
equipment. (2) The outriggers must be set to re-
(i) [Reserved] move the equipment weight from the
(j) Cantilevered boom sections. Manu- wheels, except for locomotive cranes
facturer limitations on the maximum (see paragraph (q)(6) of this section for
amount of boom supported only by use of outriggers on locomotive
cantilevering must not be exceeded. cranes). This provision does not apply
Where these are unavailable, a reg- to stabilizers.
istered professional engineer familiar (3) When outrigger floats are used,
with the type of equipment involved they must be attached to the out-
must determine in writing this limita- riggers. When stabilizer floats are used,
tion, which must not be exceeded. they must be attached to the stabi-
lizers.
(k) Weight of components. The weight
(4) Each outrigger or stabilizer must
of each of the components must be
be visible to the operator or to a signal
readily available.
person during extension and setting.
(l) [Reserved] (5) Outrigger and stabilizer blocking
(m) Components and configuration. must:
(1) The selection of components, and (i) Meet the requirements in para-
configuration of the equipment, that graphs (h)(2) and (h)(3) of this section.
affect the capacity or safe operation of (ii) Be placed only under the out-
the equipment must be in accordance rigger or stabilizer float/pad of the jack
with: or, where the outrigger or stabilizer is
(i) Manufacturer instructions, prohi- designed without a jack, under the
bitions, limitations, and specifications. outer bearing surface of the extended
Where these are unavailable, a reg- outrigger or stabilizer beam.
istered professional engineer familiar (6) For locomotive cranes, when
with the type of equipment involved using outriggers or stabilizers to han-
must approve, in writing, the selection dle loads, the manufacturer’s proce-
and configuration of components; or dures must be followed. When lifting
(ii) Approved modifications that loads without using outriggers or sta-
meet the requirements of § 1926.1434 bilizers, the manufacturer’s procedures
(Equipment modifications). must be met regarding truck wedges or
(2) Post-assembly inspection. Upon screws.
completion of assembly, the equipment (r) Rigging. In addition to following
must be inspected to ensure compli- the requirements in 29 CFR 1926.251 and
ance with paragraph (m)(1) of this sec- other requirements in this and other
620
standards applicable to rigging, when assembly/disassembly, the employer
rigging is used for assembly/dis- must ensure that the procedures:
assembly, the employer must ensure (1) Prevent unintended dangerous
that: movement, and prevent collapse, of any
(1) The rigging work is done by a part of the equipment.
qualified rigger. (2) Provide adequate support and sta-
(2) Synthetic slings are protected bility of all parts of the equipment.
from: Abrasive, sharp or acute edges, (3) Position employees involved in
and configurations that could cause a the assembly/disassembly operation so
reduction of the sling’s rated capacity, that their exposure to unintended
such as distortion or localized compres- movement or collapse of part or all of
sion. NOTE: Requirements for the pro- the equipment is minimized.
tection of wire rope slings are con- (b) Qualified person. Employer proce-
tained in 29 CFR 1926.251(c)(9). dures must be developed by a qualified
(3) When synthetic slings are used, person.
the synthetic sling manufacturer’s in-
structions, limitations, specifications § 1926.1407 Power line safety (up to
350 kV)—assembly and disassembly.
and recommendations must be fol-
lowed. (a) Before assembling or disassem-
bling equipment, the employer must
§ 1926.1405 Disassembly—additional determine if any part of the equipment,
requirements for dismantling of load line, or load (including rigging
booms and jibs (applies to both the and lifting accessories) could get, in
use of manufacturer procedures the direction or area of assembly/dis-
and employer procedures).
assembly, closer than 20 feet to a power
Dismantling (including dismantling for line during the assembly/disassembly
changing the length of) booms and jibs. process. If so, the employer must meet
(a) None of the pins in the pendants the requirements in Option (1), Option
are to be removed (partly or com- (2), or Option (3) of this section, as fol-
pletely) when the pendants are in ten- lows:
sion. (1) Option (1)—Deenergize and ground.
(b) None of the pins (top or bottom) Confirm from the utility owner/oper-
on boom sections located between the ator that the power line has been deen-
pendant attachment points and the ergized and visibly grounded at the
crane/derrick body are to be removed worksite.
(partly or completely) when the pend- (2) Option (2)—20 foot clearance. En-
ants are in tension. sure that no part of the equipment,
(c) None of the pins (top or bottom) load line or load (including rigging and
on boom sections located between the lifting accessories), gets closer than 20
uppermost boom section and the crane/ feet to the power line by implementing
derrick body are to be removed (partly the measures specified in paragraph (b)
or completely) when the boom is being of this section.
supported by the uppermost boom sec- (3) Option (3)—Table A clearance.
tion resting on the ground (or other (i) Determine the line’s voltage and
support). the minimum clearance distance per-
(d) None of the top pins on boom sec- mitted under Table A (see § 1926.1408).
tions located on the cantilevered por- (ii) Determine if any part of the
tion of the boom being removed (the equipment, load line, or load (including
portion being removed ahead of the rigging and lifting accessories), could
pendant attachment points) are to be get closer than the minimum clearance
removed (partly or completely) until distance to the power line permitted
the cantilevered section to be removed under Table A (see § 1926.1408). If so,
is fully supported. then the employer must follow the re-
quirements in paragraph (b) of this sec-
§ 1926.1406 Assembly/Disassembly— tion to ensure that no part of the
employer procedures—general re- equipment, load line, or load (including
quirements. rigging and lifting accessories), gets
(a) When using employer procedures closer to the line than the minimum
instead of manufacturer procedures for clearance distance.
621
(b) Preventing encroachment/electrocu- erator, equipped with flags or similar
tion. Where encroachment precautions high-visibility markings.
are required under Option (2), or Option (c) Assembly/disassembly below power
(3) of this section, all of the following lines prohibited. No part of a crane/der-
requirements must be met: rick, load line, or load (including rig-
(1) Conduct a planning meeting with ging and lifting accessories), whether
the Assembly/Disassembly director (A/ partially or fully assembled, is allowed
D director), operator, assembly/dis- below a power line unless the employer
assembly crew and the other workers has confirmed that the utility owner/
who will be in the assembly/dis- operator has deenergized and (at the
assembly area to review the location of worksite) visibly grounded the power
the power line(s) and the steps that line.
will be implemented to prevent en- (d) Assembly/disassembly inside Table A
croachment/electrocution. clearance prohibited. No part of a crane/
(2) If tag lines are used, they must be derrick, load line, or load (including
nonconductive. rigging and lifting accessories), wheth-
(3) At least one of the following addi- er partially or fully assembled, is al-
tional measures must be in place. The lowed closer than the minimum ap-
measure selected from this list must be proach distance under Table A (see
effective in preventing encroachment. § 1926.1408) to a power line unless the
The additional measures are: employer has confirmed that the util-
(i) Use a dedicated spotter who is in ity owner/operator has deenergized and
continuous contact with the equipment (at the worksite) visibly grounded the
operator. The dedicated spotter must: power line.
(A) Be equipped with a visual aid to (e) Voltage information. Where Option
assist in identifying the minimum (3) of this section is used, the utility
clearance distance. Examples of a vis- owner/operator of the power lines must
ual aid include, but are not limited to: provide the requested voltage informa-
A clearly visible line painted on the tion within two working days of the
ground; a clearly visible line of stan- employer’s request.
chions; a set of clearly visible line-of- (f) Power lines presumed energized. The
sight landmarks (such as a fence post employer must assume that all power
behind the dedicated spotter and a lines are energized unless the utility
building corner ahead of the dedicated owner/operator confirms that the
spotter). power line has been and continues to be
(B) Be positioned to effectively gauge deenergized and visibly grounded at the
the clearance distance. worksite.
(C) Where necessary, use equipment (g) Posting of electrocution warnings.
that enables the dedicated spotter to There must be at least one electrocu-
communicate directly with the oper- tion hazard warning conspicuously
ator. posted in the cab so that it is in view
(D) Give timely information to the of the operator and (except for over-
operator so that the required clearance head gantry and tower cranes) at least
distance can be maintained. two on the outside of the equipment.
(ii) A proximity alarm set to give the
operator sufficient warning to prevent § 1926.1408 Power line safety (up to
encroachment. 350 kV)—equipment operations.
(iii) A device that automatically (a) Hazard assessments and precautions
warns the operator when to stop move- inside the work zone. Before beginning
ment, such as a range control warning equipment operations, the employer
device. Such a device must be set to must:
give the operator sufficient warning to (1) Identify the work zone by either:
prevent encroachment. (i) Demarcating boundaries (such as
(iv) A device that automatically lim- with flags, or a device such as a range
its range of movement, set to prevent limit device or range control warning
encroachment. device) and prohibiting the operator
(v) An elevated warning line, barri- from operating the equipment past
cade, or line of signs, in view of the op- those boundaries, or
622
(ii) Defining the work zone as the (3) Erect and maintain an elevated
area 360 degrees around the equipment, warning line, barricade, or line of
up to the equipment’s maximum work- signs, in view of the operator, equipped
ing radius. with flags or similar high-visibility
(2) Determine if any part of the markings, at 20 feet from the power
equipment, load line or load (including line (if using Option (2) of this section)
rigging and lifting accessories), if oper- or at the minimum approach distance
ated up to the equipment’s maximum under Table A (see § 1926.1408) (if using
working radius in the work zone, could Option (3) of this section). If the oper-
get closer than 20 feet to a power line. ator is unable to see the elevated warn-
If so, the employer must meet the re- ing line, a dedicated spotter must be
quirements in Option (1), Option (2), or used as described in § 1926.1408(b)(4)(ii)
Option (3) of this section, as follows: in addition to implementing one of the
(i) Option (1)—Deenergize and ground. measures described in
Confirm from the utility owner/oper- §§ 1926.1408(b)(4)(i), (iii), (iv) and (v).
ator that the power line has been deen- (4) Implement at least one of the fol-
ergized and visibly grounded at the lowing measures:
worksite. (i) A proximity alarm set to give the
(ii) Option (2)—20 foot clearance. En- operator sufficient warning to prevent
sure that no part of the equipment, encroachment.
load line, or load (including rigging (ii) A dedicated spotter who is in con-
and lifting accessories), gets closer tinuous contact with the operator.
than 20 feet to the power line by imple- Where this measure is selected, the
menting the measures specified in dedicated spotter must:
paragraph (b) of this section. (A) Be equipped with a visual aid to
(iii) Option (3)—Table A clearance. assist in identifying the minimum
(A) Determine the line’s voltage and clearance distance. Examples of a vis-
the minimum approach distance per- ual aid include, but are not limited to:
mitted under Table A (see § 1926.1408). A clearly visible line painted on the
(B) Determine if any part of the ground; a clearly visible line of stan-
equipment, load line or load (including chions; a set of clearly visible line-of-
rigging and lifting accessories), while sight landmarks (such as a fence post
operating up to the equipment’s max- behind the dedicated spotter and a
imum working radius in the work zone, building corner ahead of the dedicated
could get closer than the minimum ap- spotter).
proach distance of the power line per-
(B) Be positioned to effectively gauge
mitted under Table A (see § 1926.1408). If
the clearance distance.
so, then the employer must follow the
requirements in paragraph (b) of this (C) Where necessary, use equipment
section to ensure that no part of the that enables the dedicated spotter to
equipment, load line, or load (including communicate directly with the oper-
rigging and lifting accessories), gets ator.
closer to the line than the minimum (D) Give timely information to the
approach distance. operator so that the required clearance
(b) Preventing encroachment/electrocu- distance can be maintained.
tion. Where encroachment precautions (iii) A device that automatically
are required under Option (2) or Option warns the operator when to stop move-
(3) of this section, all of the following ment, such as a range control warning
requirements must be met: device. Such a device must be set to
(1) Conduct a planning meeting with give the operator sufficient warning to
the operator and the other workers prevent encroachment.
who will be in the area of the equip- (iv) A device that automatically lim-
ment or load to review the location of its range of movement, set to prevent
the power line(s), and the steps that encroachment.
will be implemented to prevent en- (v) An insulating link/device, as de-
croachment/electrocution. fined in § 1926.1401, installed at a point
(2) If tag lines are used, they must be between the end of the load line (or
non-conductive. below) and the load.
623
(5) The requirements of paragraph the following precautions must be
(b)(4) of this section do not apply to taken:
work covered by subpart V of this part. (1) The equipment must be provided
(c) Voltage information. Where Option with an electrical ground.
(3) of this section is used, the utility (2) If tag lines are used, they must be
owner/operator of the power lines must non-conductive.
provide the requested voltage informa- (g) Training.
tion within two working days of the (1) The employer must train each op-
employer’s request. erator and crew member assigned to
(d) Operations below power lines. work with the equipment on all of the
(1) No part of the equipment, load following:
line, or load (including rigging and lift- (i) The procedures to be followed in
ing accessories) is allowed below a the event of electrical contact with a
power line unless the employer has power line. Such training must include:
confirmed that the utility owner/oper- (A) Information regarding the danger
ator has deenergized and (at the work- of electrocution from the operator si-
site) visibly grounded the power line, multaneously touching the equipment
except where one of the exceptions in and the ground.
paragraph (d)(2) of this section applies.
(B) The importance to the operator’s
(2) Exceptions. Paragraph (d)(1) of this
safety of remaining inside the cab ex-
section is inapplicable where the em-
cept where there is an imminent dan-
ployer demonstrates that one of the
ger of fire, explosion, or other emer-
following applies:
gency that necessitates leaving the
(i) The work is covered by subpart V
cab.
of this part.
(C) The safest means of evacuating
(ii) For equipment with non-exten-
from equipment that may be energized.
sible booms: The uppermost part of the
equipment, with the boom at true (D) The danger of the potentially en-
vertical, would be more than 20 feet ergized zone around the equipment
below the plane of the power line or (step potential).
more than the Table A of this section (E) The need for crew in the area to
minimum clearance distance below the avoid approaching or touching the
plane of the power line. equipment and the load.
(iii) For equipment with articulating (F) Safe clearance distance from
or extensible booms: The uppermost power lines.
part of the equipment, with the boom (ii) Power lines are presumed to be
in the fully extended position, at true energized unless the utility owner/oper-
vertical, would be more than 20 feet ator confirms that the power line has
below the plane of the power line or been and continues to be deenergized
more than the Table A of this section and visibly grounded at the worksite.
minimum clearance distance below the (iii) Power lines are presumed to be
plane of the power line. uninsulated unless the utility owner/
(iv) The employer demonstrates that operator or a registered engineer who
compliance with paragraph (d)(1) of is a qualified person with respect to
this section is infeasible and meets the electrical power transmission and dis-
requirements of § 1926.1410. tribution confirms that a line is insu-
(e) Power lines presumed energized. The lated.
employer must assume that all power (iv) The limitations of an insulating
lines are energized unless the utility link/device, proximity alarm, and
owner/operator confirms that the range control (and similar) device, if
power line has been and continues to be used.
deenergized and visibly grounded at the (v) The procedures to be followed to
worksite. properly ground equipment and the
(f) When working near transmitter/ limitations of grounding.
communication towers where the (2) Employees working as dedicated
equipment is close enough for an elec- spotters must be trained to enable
trical charge to be induced in the them to effectively perform their task,
equipment or materials being handled, including training on the applicable re-
the transmitter must be deenergized or quirements of this section.
624
(3) Training under this section must a means to prevent power line contact
be administered in accordance with or electrocution, when used to comply
§ 1926.1430(g). with this section, must meet the manu-
(h) Devices originally designed by the facturer’s procedures for use and condi-
manufacturer for use as: A safety de- tions of use.
vice (see § 1926.1415), operational aid, or
TABLE A—MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCES
Voltage Minimum clearance distance
(nominal, kV, alternating current) (feet)
up to 50 ....................................................................................... 10
over 50 to 200 ............................................................................. 15
over 200 to 350 ........................................................................... 20
over 350 to 500 ........................................................................... 25
over 500 to 750 ........................................................................... 35
over 750 to 1,000 ........................................................................ 45
over 1,000 .................................................................................... (as established by the utility owner/operator or registered pro-
fessional engineer who is a qualified person with respect to
electrical power transmission and distribution).
Note: The value that follows ‘‘to’’ is up to and includes that value. For example, over 50 to 200 means up to and including
200kV.
§ 1926.1409 Power line safety (over 350 ergize and ground the power line or re-
kV). locate the power line.
The requirements of § 1926.1407 and (c) Minimum clearance distance.
§ 1926.1408 apply to power lines over 350 (1) The power line owner/operator or
kV except: registered professional engineer who is
(a) For power lines at or below 1000 a qualified person with respect to elec-
kV, wherever the distance ‘‘20 feet’’ is trical power transmission and distribu-
specified, the distance ‘‘50 feet’’ must tion determines the minimum clear-
be substituted; and ance distance that must be maintained
(b) For power lines over 1000 kV, the to prevent electrical contact in light of
minimum clearance distance must be the on-site conditions. The factors that
established by the utility owner/oper- must be considered in making this de-
ator or registered professional engineer termination include, but are not lim-
who is a qualified person with respect ited to: Conditions affecting atmos-
to electrical power transmission and pheric conductivity; time necessary to
distribution. bring the equipment, load line, and
load (including rigging and lifting ac-
§ 1926.1410 Power line safety (all cessories) to a complete stop; wind con-
voltages)—equipment operations ditions; degree of sway in the power
closer than the Table A zone. line; lighting conditions, and other
Equipment operations in which any conditions affecting the ability to pre-
part of the equipment, load line, or vent electrical contact.
load (including rigging and lifting ac- (2) Paragraph (c)(1) of this section
cessories) is closer than the minimum does not apply to work covered by sub-
approach distance under Table A of part V of this part; instead, for such
§ 1926.1408 to an energized power line is work, the minimum clearance dis-
prohibited, except where the employer tances specified in § 1926.950 Table V–1
demonstrates that all of the following apply. Employers engaged in subpart V
requirements are met: work are permitted to work closer than
(a) The employer determines that it the distances in § 1926.950 Table V–1
is infeasible to do the work without where both the requirements of this
breaching the minimum approach dissection and § 1926.952(c)(3)(i) or (ii) are
tance under Table A of § 1926.1408. met.
(b) The employer determines that, (d) A planning meeting with the em-
after consultation with the utility ployer and utility owner/operator (or
owner/operator, it is infeasible to deen- registered professional engineer who is
625
a qualified person with respect to elec- § 1910.269(p)(4)(iii)(B) or (C) may be sub-
trical power transmission and distribu- stituted for the requirement in (d)(4)(i)
tion) is held to determine the proce- of this section.
dures that will be followed to prevent (iv) Until November 8, 2011, the fol-
electrical contact and electrocution. lowing procedure may be substituted
At a minimum these procedures must for the requirement in paragraph
include: (d)(4)(i) of this section: All employees,
(1) If the power line is equipped with excluding equipment operators located
a device that automatically reener- on the equipment, who may come in
gizes the circuit in the event of a power contact with the equipment, the load
line contact, before the work begins, line, or the load must be insulated or
the automatic reclosing feature of the guarded from the equipment, the load
circuit interrupting device must be line, and the load. Insulating gloves
made inoperative if the design of the rated for the voltage involved are ade-
device permits. quate insulation for the purposes of
(2) A dedicated spotter who is in con- this paragraph.
tinuous contact with the operator. The (v) Until November 8, 2013, the fol-
dedicated spotter must: lowing procedure may be substituted
(i) Be equipped with a visual aid to for the requirement in (d)(4)(i) of this
assist in identifying the minimum section:
clearance distance. Examples of a vis-
(A) The employer must use a link/de-
ual aid include, but are not limited to:
vice manufactured on or before Novem-
A line painted on the ground; a clearly
ber 8, 2011, that meets the definition of
visible line of stanchions; a set of
an insulating link/device, except that
clearly visible line-of-sight landmarks
it has not been approved by a Nation-
(such as a fence post behind the dedi-
ally Recognized Testing Laboratory,
cated spotter and a building corner
and that is maintained and used in ac-
ahead of the dedicated spotter).
cordance with manufacturer require-
(ii) Be positioned to effectively gauge
ments and recommendations, and is in-
the clearance distance.
(iii) Where necessary, use equipment stalled at a point between the end of
that enables the dedicated spotter to the load line (or below) and the load;
communicate directly with the oper- and
ator. (B) All employees, excluding equip-
(iv) Give timely information to the ment operators located on the equip-
operator so that the required clearance ment, who may come in contact with
distance can be maintained. the equipment, the load line, or the
(3) An elevated warning line, or barri- load must be insulated or guarded from
cade (not attached to the crane), in the equipment, the load line, and the
view of the operator (either directly or load through an additional means
through video equipment), equipped other than the device described in
with flags or similar high-visibility paragraph (d)(4)(v)(A) of this section.
markings, to prevent electrical con- Insulating gloves rated for the voltage
tact. However, this provision does not involved are adequate additional
apply to work covered by subpart V of means of protection for the purposes of
this part. this paragraph.
(4) Insulating link/device. (5) Nonconductive rigging if the rig-
(i) An insulating link/device installed ging may be within the Table A of
at a point between the end of the load § 1926.1408 distance during the oper-
line (or below) and the load. ation.
(ii) For work covered by subpart V of (6) If the equipment is equipped with
this part, the requirement in paragraph a device that automatically limits
(d)(4)(i) of this section applies only range of movement, it must be used
when working inside the § 1926.950 and set to prevent any part of the
Table V–1 clearance distances. equipment, load line, or load (including
(iii) For work covered by subpart V rigging and lifting accessories) from
of this part involving operations where breaching the minimum approach dis-
use of an insulating link/device is in- tance established under paragraph (c)
feasible, the requirements of of this section.
626
(7) If a tag line is used, it must be of with paragraph (d) of this section, or
the nonconductive type. indicating that those procedures are
(8) Barricades forming a perimeter at inadequate to prevent electrocution,
least 10 feet away from the equipment the employer must safely stop oper-
to prevent unauthorized personnel ations and either develop new proce-
from entering the work area. In areas dures to comply with paragraph (d) of
where obstacles prevent the barricade this section or have the utility owner/
from being at least 10 feet away, the operator deenergize and visibly ground
barricade must be as far from the or relocate the power line before re-
equipment as feasible. suming work.
(9) Workers other than the operator (k) Devices originally designed by
must be prohibited from touching the the manufacturer for use as a safety
load line above the insulating link/de- device (see § 1926.1415), operational aid,
vice and crane. Operators remotely op- or a means to prevent power line con-
erating the equipment from the ground tact or electrocution, when used to
must use either wireless controls that comply with this section, must comply
isolate the operator from the equip- with the manufacturer’s procedures for
ment or insulating mats that insulate use and conditions of use.
the operator from the ground. (l) [Reserved]
(10) Only personnel essential to the (m) The employer must train each
operation are permitted to be in the operator and crew member assigned to
area of the crane and load. work with the equipment in accordance
(11) The equipment must be properly with § 1926.1408(g).
grounded.
(12) Insulating line hose or cover-up § 1926.1411 Power line safety—while
must be installed by the utility owner/ traveling under or near power lines
operator except where such devices are with no load.
unavailable for the line voltages in- (a) This section establishes proce-
volved. dures and criteria that must be met for
(e) The procedures developed to com- equipment traveling under or near a
ply with paragraph (d) of this section power line on a construction site with
are documented and immediately no load. Equipment traveling on a con-
available on-site. struction site with a load is governed
(f) The equipment user and utility by §§ 1926.1408, 1926.1409 or 1926.1410,
owner/operator (or registered profes- whichever is appropriate, and
sional engineer) meet with the equip- § 1926.1417(u).
ment operator and the other workers (b) The employer must ensure that:
who will be in the area of the equip- (1) The boom/mast and boom/mast
ment or load to review the procedures support system are lowered sufficiently
that will be implemented to prevent to meet the requirements of this para-
breaching the minimum approach dis- graph.
tance established in paragraph (c) of (2) The clearances specified in Table
this section and prevent electrocution. T of this section are maintained.
(g) The procedures developed to com- (3) The effects of speed and terrain on
ply with paragraph (d) of this section equipment movement (including move-
are implemented. ment of the boom/mast) are considered
(h) The utility owner/operator (or so that those effects do not cause the
registered professional engineer) and minimum clearance distances specified
all employers of employees involved in in Table T of this section to be
the work must identify one person who breached.
will direct the implementation of the (4) Dedicated spotter. If any part of the
procedures. The person identified in ac- equipment while traveling will get
cordance with this paragraph must di- closer than 20 feet to the power line,
rect the implementation of the proce- the employer must ensure that a dedi-
dures and must have the authority to cated spotter who is in continuous con-
stop work at any time to ensure safety. tact with the driver/operator is used.
(i) [Reserved] The dedicated spotter must:
(j) If a problem occurs implementing (i) Be positioned to effectively gauge
the procedures being used to comply the clearance distance.
627
(ii) Where necessary, use equipment bility, in addition to the measures
that enables the dedicated spotter to specified in paragraphs (b)(1) through
communicate directly with the oper- (4) of this section, the employer must
ator. ensure that:
(iii) Give timely information to the (i) The power lines are illuminated or
operator so that the required clearance another means of identifying the loca-
distance can be maintained. tion of the lines is used.
(5) Additional precautions for traveling
(ii) A safe path of travel is identified
in poor visibility. When traveling at
and used.
night, or in conditions of poor visi-
TABLE T—MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCES WHILE TRAVELING WITH NO LOAD
Voltage While traveling—minimum clearance distance
(nominal, kV, alternating current) (feet)
up to 0.75 .................................................................................... 4
over .75 to 50 .............................................................................. 6
over 50 to 345 ............................................................................. 10
over 345 to 750 ........................................................................... 16
Over 750 to 1,000 ....................................................................... 20
Over 1,000 ................................................................................... (as established by the utility owner/operator or registered pro-
fessional engineer who is a qualified person with respect to
electrical power transmission and distribution).
§ 1926.1412 Inspections. hook, or in-use operating mechanism),

(a) Modified equipment. must be inspected by a qualified person
(1) Equipment that has had modifica- after such a repair or adjustment has
tions or additions which affect the safe been completed, prior to initial use.
operation of the equipment (such as The inspection must meet all of the
modifications or additions involving a following requirements:
safety device or operational aid, crit- (i) The qualified person must deter-
ical part of a control system, power mine if the repair/adjustment meets
plant, braking system, load-sustaining manufacturer equipment criteria
structural components, load hook, or (where applicable and available).
in-use operating mechanism) or capac- (ii) Where manufacturer equipment
ity must be inspected by a qualified criteria are unavailable or inappli-
person after such modifications/addi- cable, the qualified person must:
tions have been completed, prior to ini- (A) Determine if a registered profes-
tial use. The inspection must meet all sional engineer (RPE) is needed to de-
of the following requirements: velop criteria for the repair/adjust-
(i) The inspection must assure that ment. If an RPE is not needed, the em-
the modifications or additions have ployer must ensure that the criteria
been done in accordance with the ap- are developed by the qualified person.
proval obtained pursuant to § 1926.1434 If an RPE is needed, the employer must
(Equipment modifications). ensure that they are developed by an
(ii) The inspection must include func- RPE.
tional testing of the equipment. (B) Determine if the repair/adjust-
(2) Equipment must not be used until ment meets the criteria developed in
an inspection under this paragraph accordance with paragraph (b)(1)(ii)(A)
demonstrates that the requirements of of this section.
paragraph (a)(1)(i) of this section have (iii) The inspection must include
been met. functional testing of the repaired/ad-
(b) Repaired/adjusted equipment. justed parts and other components that
(1) Equipment that has had a repair may be affected by the repair/adjust-
or adjustment that relates to safe oper- ment.
ation (such as: A repair or adjustment (4) Equipment must not be used until
to a safety device or operator aid, or to an inspection under this paragraph
a critical part of a control system, demonstrates that the repair/adjust-
power plant, braking system, load-sus- ment meets the requirements of para-
taining structural components, load graph (b)(1)(i) of this section (or, where
628
applicable, paragraph (b)(1)(ii) of this age, particularly those which flex in
section). normal operation.
(c) Post-assembly. (iv) Hydraulic system for proper fluid
(1) Upon completion of assembly, the level.
equipment must be inspected by a (v) Hooks and latches for deforma-
qualified person to assure that it is tion, cracks, excessive wear, or damage
configured in accordance with manu- such as from chemicals or heat.
facturer equipment criteria. (vi) Wire rope reeving for compliance
(2) Where manufacturer equipment with the manufacturer’s specifications.
criteria are unavailable, a qualified (vii) Wire rope, in accordance with
person must: § 1926.1413(a).
(i) Determine if a registered profes- (viii) Electrical apparatus for mal-
sional engineer (RPE) familiar with functioning, signs of apparent exces-
the type of equipment involved is need- sive deterioration, dirt or moisture ac-
ed to develop criteria for the equip- cumulation.
ment configuration. If an RPE is not (ix) Tires (when in use) for proper in-
needed, the employer must ensure that flation and condition.
the criteria are developed by the quali- (x) Ground conditions around the
fied person. If an RPE is needed, the equipment for proper support, includ-
employer must ensure that they are de- ing ground settling under and around
veloped by an RPE. outriggers/stabilizers and supporting
foundations, ground water accumula-
(ii) Determine if the equipment
tion, or similar conditions. This para-
meets the criteria developed in accord-
graph does not apply to the inspection
ance with paragraph (c)(2)(i) of this
of ground conditions for railroad
section.
tracks and their underlying support
(3) Equipment must not be used until when the railroad tracks are part of
an inspection under this paragraph the general railroad system of trans-
demonstrates that the equipment is portation that is regulated pursuant to
configured in accordance with the ap- the Federal Railroad Administration
plicable criteria. under 49 CFR part 213.
(d) Each shift. (xi) The equipment for level position
(1) A competent person must begin a within the tolerances specified by the
visual inspection prior to each shift the equipment manufacturer’s rec-
equipment will be used, which must be ommendations, both before each shift
completed before or during that shift. and after each move and setup.
The inspection must consist of observa- (xii) Operator cab windows for sig-
tion for apparent deficiencies. Taking nificant cracks, breaks, or other defi-
apart equipment components and ciencies that would hamper the opera-
booming down is not required as part tor’s view.
of this inspection unless the results of (xiii) Rails, rail stops, rail clamps
the visual inspection or trial operation and supporting surfaces when the
indicate that further investigation ne- equipment has rail traveling. This
cessitating taking apart equipment paragraph does not apply to the inspec-
components or booming down is need- tion of rails, rail stops, rail clamps and
ed. Determinations made in conducting supporting surfaces when the railroad
the inspection must be reassessed in tracks are part of the general railroad
light of observations made during oper- system of transportation that is regu-
ation. At a minimum the inspection lated pursuant to the Federal Railroad
must include all of the following: Administration under 49 CFR part 213.
(i) Control mechanisms for mal- (xiv) Safety devices and operational
adjustments interfering with proper aids for proper operation.
operation. (2) If any deficiency in paragraphs
(ii) Control and drive mechanisms for (d)(1)(i) through (xiii) of this section
apparent excessive wear of components (or in additional inspection items re-
and contamination by lubricants, quired to be checked for specific types
water or other foreign matter. of equipment in accordance with other
(iii) Air, hydraulic, and other pres- sections of this standard) is identified,
surized lines for deterioration or leak- an immediate determination must be
629
made by the competent person as to (ii) Sheaves and drums for cracks or
whether the deficiency constitutes a significant wear.
safety hazard. If the deficiency is de- (iii) Parts such as pins, bearings,
termined to constitute a safety hazard, shafts, gears, rollers and locking de-
the equipment must be taken out of vices for distortion, cracks or signifi-
service until it has been corrected. See cant wear.
§ 1926.1417. (iv) Brake and clutch system parts,
(3) If any deficiency in paragraph linings, pawls and ratchets for exces-
(d)(1)(xiv) of this section (safety de- sive wear.
vices/operational aids) is identified, the (v) Safety devices and operational
action specified in § 1926.1415 and aids for proper operation (including
§ 1926.1416 must be taken prior to using significant inaccuracies).
the equipment. (vi) Gasoline, diesel, electric, or
(e) Monthly. other power plants for safety-related
(1) Each month the equipment is in problems (such as leaking exhaust and
service it must be inspected in accord- emergency shut-down feature) and con-
ance with paragraph (d) of this section ditions, and proper operation.
(each shift). (vii) Chains and chain drive sprockets
(2) Equipment must not be used until for excessive wear of sprockets and ex-
an inspection under this paragraph cessive chain stretch.
demonstrates that no corrective action (viii) Travel steering, brakes, and
under paragraphs (d)(2) and (3) of this locking devices, for proper operation.
section is required. (ix) Tires for damage or excessive
(3) Documentation. wear.
(i) The following information must (x) Hydraulic, pneumatic and other
be documented and maintained by the pressurized hoses, fittings and tubing,
employer that conducts the inspection: as follows:
(A) The items checked and the re- (A) Flexible hose or its junction with
sults of the inspection. the fittings for indications of leaks.
(B) The name and signature of the (B) Threaded or clamped joints for
person who conducted the inspection leaks.
and the date. (C) Outer covering of the hose for
(ii) This document must be retained blistering, abnormal deformation or
for a minimum of three months. other signs of failure/impending fail-
(f) Annual/comprehensive. ure.
(1) At least every 12 months the (D) Outer surface of a hose, rigid
equipment must be inspected by a tube, or fitting for indications of exces-
qualified person in accordance with sive abrasion or scrubbing.
paragraph (d) of this section (each (xi) Hydraulic and pneumatic pumps
shift) except that the corrective action and motors, as follows:
set forth in paragraphs (f)(4), (f)(5), and (A) Performance indicators: Unusual
(f)(6) of this section must apply in noises or vibration, low operating
place of the corrective action required speed, excessive heating of the fluid,
by paragraphs (d)(2) and (d)(3) of this low pressure.
section. (B) Loose bolts or fasteners.
(2) In addition, at least every 12 (C) Shaft seals and joints between
months, the equipment must be in- pump sections for leaks.
spected by a qualified person. Dis- (xii) Hydraulic and pneumatic valves,
assembly is required, as necessary, to as follows:
complete the inspection. The equip- (A) Spools: Sticking, improper return
ment must be inspected for all of the to neutral, and leaks.
following: (B) Leaks.
(i) Equipment structure (including (C) Valve housing cracks.
the boom and, if equipped, the jib): (D) Relief valves: Failure to reach
(A) Structural members: Deformed, correct pressure (if there is a manufac-
cracked, or significantly corroded. turer procedure for checking pressure,
(B) Bolts, rivets and other fasteners: it must be followed).
loose, failed or significantly corroded. (xiii) Hydraulic and pneumatic cyl-
(C) Welds for cracks. inders, as follows:
630
(A) Drifting caused by fluid leaking 12 months, by the employer that con-
across the piston. ducts the inspection:
(B) Rod seals and welded joints for (i) The items checked and the results
leaks. of the inspection.
(C) Cylinder rods for scores, nicks, or (ii) The name and signature of the
dents. person who conducted the inspection
(D) Case (barrel) for significant and the date.
dents. (g) Severe service. Where the severity
(E) Rod eyes and connecting joints: of use/conditions is such that there is a
Loose or deformed. reasonable probability of damage or ex-
(xiv) Outrigger or stabilizer pads/ cessive wear (such as loading that may
floats for excessive wear or cracks. have exceeded rated capacity, shock
(xv) Slider pads for excessive wear or loading that may have exceeded rated
cracks. capacity, prolonged exposure to a cor-
rosive atmosphere), the employer must
(xvi) Electrical components and wir-
stop using the equipment and a quali-
ing for cracked or split insulation and
fied person must:
loose or corroded terminations.
(1) Inspect the equipment for struc-
(xvii) Warning labels and decals
tural damage to determine if the equip-
originally supplied with the equipment
ment can continue to be used safely.
by the manufacturer or otherwise re- (2) In light of the use/conditions de-
quired under this standard: Missing or termine whether any items/conditions
unreadable. listed in paragraph (f) of this section
(xviii) Originally equipped operator need to be inspected; if so, the qualified
seat (or equivalent): Missing. person must inspect those items/condi-
(xix) Operator seat: Unserviceable. tions.
(xx) Originally equipped steps, lad- (3) If a deficiency is found, the em-
ders, handrails, guards: Missing. ployer must follow the requirements in
(xxi) Steps, ladders, handrails, paragraphs (f)(4) through (6) of this sec-
guards: In unusable/unsafe condition. tion.
(3) This inspection must include func- (h) Equipment not in regular use.
tional testing to determine that the Equipment that has been idle for 3
equipment as configured in the inspec- months or more must be inspected by a
tion is functioning properly. qualified person in accordance with the
(4) If any deficiency is identified, an requirements of paragraph (e) (Month-
immediate determination must be ly) of this section before initial use.
made by the qualified person as to (i) [Reserved]
whether the deficiency constitutes a (j) Any part of a manufacturer’s pro-
safety hazard or, though not yet a safe- cedures regarding inspections that re-
ty hazard, needs to be monitored in the late to safe operation (such as to a
monthly inspections. safety device or operational aid, crit-
(5) If the qualified person determines ical part of a control system, power
that a deficiency is a safety hazard, the plant, braking system, load-sustaining
equipment must be taken out of service structural components, load hook, or
until it has been corrected, except in-use operating mechanism) that is
when temporary alternative measures more comprehensive or has a more fre-
are implemented as specified in quent schedule of inspection than the
§ 1926.1416(d) or § 1926.1435(e). See requirements of this section must be
§ 1926.1417. followed.
(6) If the qualified person determines (k) All documents produced under
that, though not presently a safety this section must be available, during
hazard, the deficiency needs to be mon- the applicable document retention pe-
itored, the employer must ensure that riod, to all persons who conduct inspec-
the deficiency is checked in the month- tions under this section.
ly inspections.
(7) Documentation of annual/com- § 1926.1413 Wire rope—inspection.
prehensive inspection. The following in- (a) Shift inspection.
formation must be documented, main- (1) A competent person must begin a
tained, and retained for a minimum of visual inspection prior to each shift the
631
equipment is used, which must be com- (3) Critical review items. The com-
pleted before or during that shift. The petent person must give particular at-
inspection must consist of observation tention to all of the following:
of wire ropes (running and standing) (i) Rotation resistant wire rope in
that are likely to be in use during the use.
shift for apparent deficiencies, includ- (ii) Wire rope being used for boom
ing those listed in paragraph (a)(2) of hoists and luffing hoists, particularly
this section. Untwisting (opening) of at reverse bends.
wire rope or booming down is not re- (iii) Wire rope at flange points, cross-
quired as part of this inspection. over points and repetitive pickup
(2) Apparent deficiencies. points on drums.
(i) Category I. Apparent deficiencies (iv) Wire rope at or near terminal
in this category include the following: ends.
(A) Significant distortion of the wire (v) Wire rope in contact with saddles,
rope structure such as kinking, crush- equalizer sheaves or other sheaves
ing, unstranding, birdcaging, signs of where rope travel is limited.
core failure or steel core protrusion be- (4) Removal from service.
tween the outer strands. (i) If a deficiency in Category I (see
(B) Significant corrosion. paragraph (a)(2)(i) of this section) is
(C) Electric arc damage (from a identified, an immediate determination
source other than power lines) or heat must be made by the competent person
damage. as to whether the deficiency con-
(D) Improperly applied end connec- stitutes a safety hazard. If the defi-
tions. ciency is determined to constitute a
(E) Significantly corroded, cracked, safety hazard, operations involving use
bent, or worn end connections (such as of the wire rope in question must be
from severe service). prohibited until:
(ii) Category II. Apparent deficiencies (A) The wire rope is replaced (see
in this category are: § 1926.1417), or
(A) Visible broken wires, as follows: (B) If the deficiency is localized, the
(1) In running wire ropes: Six ran- problem is corrected by severing the
domly distributed broken wires in one wire rope in two; the undamaged por-
rope lay or three broken wires in one tion may continue to be used. Joining
strand in one rope lay, where a rope lay lengths of wire rope by splicing is pro-
is the length along the rope in which hibited. If a rope is shortened under
one strand makes a complete revolu- this paragraph, the employer must en-
tion around the rope. sure that the drum will still have two
(2) In rotation resistant ropes: Two wraps of wire when the load and/or
randomly distributed broken wires in boom is in its lowest position.
six rope diameters or four randomly (ii) If a deficiency in Category II (see
distributed broken wires in 30 rope di- paragraph (a)(2)(ii) of this section) is
ameters. identified, operations involving use of
(3) In pendants or standing wire the wire rope in question must be pro-
ropes: More than two broken wires in hibited until:
one rope lay located in rope beyond end (A) The employer complies with the
connections and/or more than one bro- wire rope manufacturer’s established
ken wire in a rope lay located at an end criterion for removal from service or a
connection. different criterion that the wire rope
(B) A diameter reduction of more manufacturer has approved in writing
than 5% from nominal diameter. for that specific wire rope (see
(iii) Category III. Apparent defi- § 1926.1417),
ciencies in this category include the (B) The wire rope is replaced (see
following: § 1926.1417), or
(A) In rotation resistant wire rope, (C) If the deficiency is localized, the
core protrusion or other distortion in- problem is corrected by severing the
dicating core failure. wire rope in two; the undamaged por-
(B) Prior electrical contact with a tion may continue to be used. Joining
power line. lengths of wire rope by splicing is pro-
(C) A broken strand. hibited. If a rope is shortened under
632
this paragraph, the employer must en- (i) The inspection must be for defi-
sure that the drum will still have two ciencies of the types listed in para-
wraps of wire when the load and/or graph (a)(2) of this section.
boom is in its lowest position. (ii) The inspection must be complete
(iii) If a deficiency in Category III is and thorough, covering the surface of
identified, operations involving use of the entire length of the wire ropes,
the wire rope in question must be pro- with particular attention given to all
hibited until: of the following:
(A) The wire rope is replaced (see (A) Critical review items listed in
§ 1926.1417), or paragraph (a)(3) of this section.
(B) If the deficiency (other than (B) Those sections that are normally
power line contact) is localized, the hidden during shift and monthly in-
problem is corrected by severing the spections.
wire rope in two; the undamaged por- (C) Wire rope subject to reverse
tion may continue to be used. Joining bends.
lengths of wire rope by splicing is pro- (D) Wire rope passing over sheaves.
hibited. Repair of wire rope that con- (iii) Exception: In the event an inspec-
tacted an energized power line is also tion under paragraph (c)(2) of this sec-
prohibited. If a rope is shortened under tion is not feasible due to existing set-
this paragraph, the employer must en- up and configuration of the equipment
sure that the drum will still have two (such as where an assist crane is need-
wraps of wire when the load and/or ed) or due to site conditions (such as a
boom is in its lowest position. dense urban setting), such inspections
(iv) Where a wire rope is required to must be conducted as soon as it be-
be removed from service under this sec- comes feasible, but no longer than an
tion, either the equipment (as a whole) additional 6 months for running ropes
or the hoist with that wire rope must and, for standing ropes, at the time of
be tagged-out, in accordance with disassembly.
§ 1926.1417(f)(1), until the wire rope is (3) If a deficiency is identified, an im-
repaired or replaced. mediate determination must be made
(b) Monthly inspection. by the qualified person as to whether
the deficiency constitutes a safety haz-
(1) Each month an inspection must be
ard.
conducted in accordance with para-
(i) If the deficiency is determined to
graph (a) (shift inspection) of this sec-
constitute a safety hazard, operations
tion.
involving use of the wire rope in ques-
(2) The inspection must include any tion must be prohibited until:
deficiencies that the qualified person (A) The wire rope is replaced (see
who conducts the annual inspection de- § 1926.1417), or
termines under paragraph (c)(3)(ii) of (B) If the deficiency is localized, the
this section must be monitored. problem is corrected by severing the
(3) Wire ropes on equipment must not wire rope in two; the undamaged por-
be used until an inspection under this tion may continue to be used. Joining
paragraph demonstrates that no cor- lengths of wire rope by splicing is pro-
rective action under paragraph (a)(4) of hibited. If a rope is shortened under
this section is required. this paragraph, the employer must en-
(4) The inspection must be docu- sure that the drum will still have two
mented according to § 1926.1412(e)(3) wraps of wire when the load and/or
(monthly inspection documentation). boom is in its lowest position.
(c) Annual/comprehensive. (ii) If the qualified person determines
(1) At least every 12 months, wire that, though not presently a safety
ropes in use on equipment must be in- hazard, the deficiency needs to be mon-
spected by a qualified person in accord- itored, the employer must ensure that
ance with paragraph (a) of this section the deficiency is checked in the month-
(shift inspection). ly inspections.
(2) In addition, at least every 12 (4) The inspection must be docu-
months, the wire ropes in use on equip- mented according to § 1926.1412(f)(7) (an-
ment must be inspected by a qualified nual/comprehensive inspection docu-
person, as follows: mentation).
633
(d) Rope lubricants that are of the of lay of the outer strands is opposite
type that hinder inspection must not to that of the underlying layer.
be used. (ii) Type II rotation resistant wire rope
(e) All documents produced under (‘‘Type II’’). Type II rotation resistant
this section must be available, during rope is stranded rope constructed to
the applicable document retention pe- have significant resistance to rotation.
riod, to all persons who conduct inspec- It has at least 10 outer strands and
tions under this section. comprises an assembly of two or more
layers of strands laid helically over a
§ 1926.1414 Wire rope—selection and center in two or three operations. The
installation criteria.
direction of lay of the outer strands is
(a) Original equipment wire rope and opposite to that of the underlying
replacement wire rope must be selected layer.
and installed in accordance with the (iii) Type III rotation resistant wire
requirements of this section. Selection rope (‘‘Type III’’). Type III rotation re-
of replacement wire rope must be in ac- sistant rope is stranded rope con-
cordance with the recommendations of structed to have limited resistance to
the wire rope manufacturer, the equip- rotation. It has no more than nine
ment manufacturer, or a qualified per- outer strands, and comprises an assem-
son. bly of two layers of strands laid
(b) Wire rope design criteria: Wire rope helically over a center in two oper-
(other than rotation resistant rope) ations. The direction of lay of the
must comply with either Option (1) or outer strands is opposite to that of the
Option (2) of this section, as follows: underlying layer.
(1) Option (1). Wire rope must comply (2) Requirements.
with section 5–1.7.1 of ASME B30.5–2004
(i) Types II and III with an operating
(incorporated by reference, see § 1926.6)
design factor of less than 5 must not be
except that section’s paragraph (c)
used for duty cycle or repetitive lifts.
must not apply.
(2) Option (2). Wire rope must be de- (ii) Rotation resistant ropes (includ-
signed to have, in relation to the equip- ing Types I, II and III) must have an
ment’s rated capacity, a sufficient operating design factor of no less than
minimum breaking force and design 3.5.
factor so that compliance with the ap- (iii) Type I must have an operating
plicable inspection provisions in design factor of no less than 5, except
§ 1926.1413 will be an effective means of where the wire rope manufacturer and
preventing sudden rope failure. the equipment manufacturer approves
(c) Wire rope must be compatible the design factor, in writing.
with the safe functioning of the equip- (iv) Types II and III must have an op-
ment. erating design factor of no less than 5,
(d) Boom hoist reeving. except where the requirements of para-
(1) Fiber core ropes must not be used graph (e)(3) of this section are met.
for boom hoist reeving, except for der- (3) When Types II and III with an op-
ricks. erating design factor of less than 5 are
(2) Rotation resistant ropes must be used (for non-duty cycle, non-repet-
used for boom hoist reeving only where itive lifts), the following requirements
the requirements of paragraph (e)(4)(ii) must be met for each lifting operation:
of this section are met. (i) A qualified person must inspect
(e) Rotation resistant ropes. the rope in accordance with
(1) Definitions. § 1926.1413(a). The rope must be used
(i) Type I rotation resistant wire rope only if the qualified person determines
(‘‘Type I’’). Type I rotation resistant that there are no deficiencies consti-
rope is stranded rope constructed to tuting a hazard. In making this deter-
have little or no tendency to rotate or, mination, more than one broken wire
if guided, transmits little or no torque. in any one rope lay must be considered
It has at least 15 outer strands and a hazard.
comprises an assembly of at least three (ii) Operations must be conducted in
layers of strands laid helically over a such a manner and at such speeds as to
center in two operations. The direction minimize dynamic effects.
634
(iii) Each lift made under rope only, except that the use of de-
§ 1926.1414(e)(3) must be recorded in the vices specifically designed for dead-
monthly and annual inspection docu- ending rope in a wedge socket is per-
ments. Such prior uses must be consid- mitted.
ered by the qualified person in deter- (g) Socketing must be done in the
mining whether to use the rope again. manner specified by the manufacturer
(4) Additional requirements for rotation of the wire rope or fitting.
resistant ropes for boom hoist reeving. (h) Prior to cutting a wire rope,
(i) Rotation resistant ropes must not seizings must be placed on each side of
be used for boom hoist reeving, except the point to be cut. The length and
where the requirements of paragraph number of seizings must be in accord-
(e)(4)(ii) of this section are met. ance with the wire rope manufacturer’s
(ii) Rotation resistant ropes may be instructions.
used as boom hoist reeving when load
hoists are used as boom hoists for at- § 1926.1415 Safety devices.
tachments such as luffing attachments (a) Safety devices. The following safe-
or boom and mast attachment systems. ty devices are required on all equip-
Under these conditions, all of the fol- ment covered by this subpart, unless
lowing requirements must be met: otherwise specified:
(A) The drum must provide a first (1) Crane level indicator.
layer rope pitch diameter of not less (i) The equipment must have a crane
than 18 times the nominal diameter of level indicator that is either built into
the rope used. the equipment or is available on the
(B) The requirements in § 1926.1426(a) equipment.
(irrespective of the date of manufac- (ii) If a built-in crane level indicator
ture of the equipment), and is not working properly, it must be
§ 1926.1426(b). tagged-out or removed. If a removable
(C) The requirements in ASME B30.5– crane level indicator is not working
2004 sections 5–1.3.2(a), (a)(2) through properly, it must be removed.
(a)(4), (b) and (d) (incorporated by ref- (iii) This requirement does not apply
erence, see § 1926.6) except that the min- to portal cranes, derricks, floating
imum pitch diameter for sheaves used cranes/derricks and land cranes/der-
in multiple rope reeving is 18 times the ricks on barges, pontoons, vessels or
nominal diameter of the rope used (in- other means of flotation.
stead of the value of 16 specified in sec- (2) Boom stops, except for derricks
tion 5–1.3.2(d)). and hydraulic booms.
(D) All sheaves used in the boom (3) Jib stops (if a jib is attached), ex-
hoist reeving system must have a rope cept for derricks.
pitch diameter of not less than 18 times (4) Equipment with foot pedal brakes
the nominal diameter of the rope used. must have locks.
(E) The operating design factor for (5) Hydraulic outrigger jacks and hy-
the boom hoist reeving system must be draulic stabilizer jacks must have an
not less than five. integral holding device/check valve.
(F) The operating design factor for (6) Equipment on rails must have rail
these ropes must be the total minimum clamps and rail stops, except for portal
breaking force of all parts of rope in cranes.
the system divided by the load imposed (7) Horn
on the rope system when supporting (i) The equipment must have a horn
the static weights of the structure and that is either built into the equipment
the load within the equipment’s rated or is on the equipment and imme-
capacity. diately available to the operator.
(G) When provided, a power-con- (ii) If a built-in horn is not working
trolled lowering system must be capa- properly, it must be tagged-out or re-
ble of handling rated capacities and moved. If a removable horn is not
speeds as specified by the manufac- working properly, it must be removed.
turer. (b) Proper operation required. Oper-
(f) Wire rope clips used in conjunc- ations must not begin unless all of the
tion with wedge sockets must be at- devices listed in this section are in
tached to the unloaded dead end of the proper working order. If a device stops
635
working properly during operations, (1) Boom hoist limiting device.
the operator must safely stop oper- (i) For equipment manufactured after
ations. If any of the devices listed in December 16, 1969, a boom hoist lim-
this section are not in proper working iting device is required. Temporary al-
order, the equipment must be taken ternative measures (use at least one). One
out of service and operations must not or more of the following methods must
resume until the device is again work- be used:
ing properly. See § 1926.1417 (Operation). (A) Use a boom angle indicator.
Alternative measures are not per- (B) Clearly mark the boom hoist
mitted to be used. cable (so that it can easily be seen by
the operator) at a point that will give
§ 1926.1416 Operational aids. the operator sufficient time to stop the
(a) The devices listed in this section hoist to keep the boom within the min-
(‘‘listed operational aids’’) are required imum allowable radius. In addition, in-
on all equipment covered by this sub- stall mirrors or remote video cameras
part, unless otherwise specified. and displays if necessary for the oper-
(1) The requirements in paragraphs ator to see the mark.
(e)(1), (e)(2), and (e)(3) of this section do (C) Clearly mark the boom hoist
not apply to articulating cranes. cable (so that it can easily be seen by
(2) The requirements in paragraphs a spotter) at a point that will give the
(d)(3), (e)(1), and (e)(4) of this section spotter sufficient time to signal the op-
apply only to those digger derricks erator and have the operator stop the
manufactured after November 8, 2011. hoist to keep the boom within the min-
(b) Operations must not begin unless imum allowable radius.
the listed operational aids are in prop- (ii) If the equipment was manufac-
er working order, except where an tured on or before December 16, 1969,
operational aid is being repaired the and is not equipped with a boom hoist
employer uses the specified temporary limiting device, at least one of the
alternative measures. The time periods measures in paragraphs (d)(1)(i)(A)
permitted for repairing defective oper- through (C) of this section must be
ational aids are specified in paragraphs used.
(d) and (e) of this section. More protec- (2) Luffing jib limiting device. Equip-
tive alternative measures specified by ment with a luffing jib must have a
the crane/derrick manufacturer, if any, luffing jib limiting device. Temporary
must be followed. alternative measures are the same as
(c) If a listed operational aid stops in paragraph (d)(1)(i) of this section,
working properly during operations, except to limit the movement of the
the operator must safely stop oper- luffing jib rather than the boom hoist.
ations until the temporary alternative (3) Anti two-blocking device.
measures are implemented or the de- (i) Telescopic boom cranes manufac-
vice is again working properly. If a re- tured after February 28, 1992, must be
placement part is no longer available, equipped with a device which auto-
the use of a substitute device that per- matically prevents damage from con-
forms the same type of function is per- tact between the load block, overhaul
mitted and is not considered a modi- ball, or similar component, and the
fication under § 1926.1434. boom tip (or fixed upper block or simi-
(d) Category I operational aids and al- lar component). The device(s) must
ternative measures. Operational aids prevent such damage at all points
listed in this paragraph that are not where two-blocking could occur.
working properly must be repaired no Temporary alternative measures: Clear-
later than 7 calendar days after the de- ly mark the cable (so that it can easily
ficiency occurs. Exception: If the em- be seen by the operator) at a point that
ployer documents that it has ordered will give the operator sufficient time
the necessary parts within 7 calendar to stop the hoist to prevent two-block-
days of the occurrence of the defi- ing, and use a spotter when extending
ciency, the repair must be completed the boom.
within 7 calendar days of receipt of the (ii) Lattice boom cranes.
parts. See § 1926.1417(j) for additional re- (A) Lattice boom cranes manufac-
quirements. tured after Feb 28, 1992, must be
636
equipped with a device that either will give the operator sufficient time
automatically prevents damage and to stop the hoist to prevent two-block-
load failure from contact between the ing, and use a spotter when extending
load block, overhaul ball, or similar the boom.
component, and the boom tip (or fixed (e) Category II operational aids and al-
upper block or similar component), or ternative measures. Operational aids
warns the operator in time for the op- listed in this paragraph that are not
erator to prevent two-blocking. The de- working properly must be repaired no
vice must prevent such damage/failure later than 30 calendar days after the
or provide adequate warning for all deficiency occurs. Exception: If the em-
points where two-blocking could occur. ployer documents that it has ordered
(B) Lattice boom cranes and derricks the necessary parts within 7 calendar
manufactured after November 8, 2011 days of the occurrence of the defi-
must be equipped with a device which ciency, and the part is not received in
automatically prevents damage and time to complete the repair in 30 cal-
load failure from contact between the endar days, the repair must be com-
load block, overhaul ball, or similar pleted within 7 calendar days of receipt
component, and the boom tip (or fixed of the parts. See § 1926.1417(j) for addi-
upper block or similar component). tional requirements.
The device(s) must prevent such dam- (1) Boom angle or radius indicator. The
age/failure at all points where two- equipment must have a boom angle or
blocking could occur. radius indicator readable from the op-
(C) Exception. The requirements in erator’s station. Temporary alternative
paragraphs (d)(3)(ii)(A) and (B) of this measures: Radii or boom angle must be
section do not apply to such lattice determined by measuring the radii or
boom equipment when used for drag- boom angle with a measuring device.
line, clamshell (grapple), magnet, drop (2) Jib angle indicator if the equip-
ball, container handling, concrete ment has a luffing jib. Temporary alter-
bucket, marine operations that do not native measures: Radii or jib angle must
involve hoisting personnel, and pile be determined by ascertaining the
driving work. main boom angle and then measuring
(D) Temporary alternative measures. the radii or jib angle with a measuring
Clearly mark the cable (so that it can device.
easily be seen by the operator) at a (3) Boom length indicator if the
point that will give the operator suffi- equipment has a telescopic boom, ex-
cient time to stop the hoist to prevent cept where the rated capacity is inde-
two-blocking, or use a spotter. pendent of the boom length. Temporary
(iii) Articulating cranes manufac- alternative measures. One or more of the
tured after December 31, 1999, that are following methods must be used:
equipped with a load hoist must be (i) Mark the boom with measured
equipped with a device that automati- marks to calculate boom length,
cally prevents damage from contact be- (ii) Calculate boom length from boom
tween the load block, overhaul ball, or angle and radius measurements,
similar component, and the boom tip (iii) Measure the boom with a meas-
(or fixed upper block or similar compo- uring device.
nent). The device must prevent such (4) Load weighing and similar devices.
damage at all points where two-block- (i) Equipment (other than derricks
ing could occur. Temporary alternative and articulating cranes) manufactured
measures: When two-blocking could after March 29, 2003 with a rated capac-
only occur with movement of the load ity over 6,000 pounds must have at least
hoist, clearly mark the cable (so that one of the following: load weighing de-
it can easily be seen by the operator) vice, load moment (or rated capacity)
at a point that will give the operator indicator, or load moment (or rated ca-
sufficient time to stop the hoist to pre- pacity) limiter. Temporary alternative
vent two-blocking, or use a spotter. measures: The weight of the load must
When two-blocking could occur with- be determined from a source recognized
out movement of the load hoist, clearly by the industry (such as the load’s
mark the cable (so that it can easily be manufacturer) or by a calculation
seen by the operator) at a point that method recognized by the industry
637
(such as calculating a steel beam from (2) Procedures for the operational
measured dimensions and a known per controls must be developed by a quali-
foot weight). This information must be fied person.
provided to the operator prior to the (3) Procedures related to the capacity
lift. of the equipment must be developed
(ii) Articulating cranes manufac- and signed by a registered professional
tured after November 8, 2011 must have engineer familiar with the equipment.
at least one of the following: automatic (c) Accessibility of procedures.
overload prevention device, load weigh- (1) The procedures applicable to the
ing device, load moment (or rated ca- operation of the equipment, including
pacity) indicator, or load moment rated capacities (load charts), rec-
(rated capacity) limiter. Temporary al- ommended operating speeds, special
ternative measures: The weight of the hazard warnings, instructions, and op-
load must be determined from a source erator’s manual, must be readily avail-
recognized by the industry (such as the able in the cab at all times for use by
load’s manufacturer) or by a calcula- the operator.
tion method recognized by the industry (2) Where rated capacities are avail-
(such as calculating a steel beam from able in the cab only in electronic form:
measured dimensions and a known per In the event of a failure which makes
foot weight). This information must be the rated capacities inaccessible, the
provided to the operator prior to the operator must immediately cease oper-
lift. ations or follow safe shut-down proce-
(5) The following devices are required dures until the rated capacities (in
on equipment manufactured after No- electronic or other form) are available.
vember 8, 2011: (d) The operator must not engage in
(i) Outrigger/stabilizer position (hori- any practice or activity that diverts
zontal beam extension) sensor/monitor his/her attention while actually en-
if the equipment has outriggers or sta- gaged in operating the equipment, such
bilizers. Temporary alternative measures: as the use of cellular phones (other
The operator must verify that the posi- than when used for signal communica-
tion of the outriggers or stabilizers is tions).
correct (in accordance with manufac- (e) Leaving the equipment unattended.
turer procedures) before beginning op- (1) The operator must not leave the
erations requiring outrigger or sta- controls while the load is suspended,
bilizer deployment. except where all of the following are
met:
(ii) Hoist drum rotation indicator if
(i) The operator remains adjacent to
the equipment has a hoist drum not
the equipment and is not engaged in
visible from the operator’s station.
any other duties.
Temporary alternative measures: Mark
(ii) The load is to be held suspended
the drum to indicate the rotation of
for a period of time exceeding normal
the drum. In addition, install mirrors
lifting operations.
or remote video cameras and displays if
(iii) The competent person deter-
necessary for the operator to see the
mines that it is safe to do so and imple-
mark.
ments measures necessary to restrain
§ 1926.1417 Operation. the boom hoist and telescoping, load,
swing, and outrigger or stabilizer func-
(a) The employer must comply with tions.
all manufacturer procedures applicable (iv) Barricades or caution lines, and
to the operational functions of equip- notices, are erected to prevent all em-
ment, including its use with attach- ployees from entering the fall zone. No
ments. employees, including those listed in
(b) Unavailable operation procedures. §§ 1926.1425(b)(1) through (3),
(1) Where the manufacturer proce- § 1926.1425(d) or § 1926.1425(e), are per-
dures are unavailable, the employer mitted in the fall zone.
must develop and ensure compliance (2) The provisions in § 1926.1417(e)(1)
with all procedures necessary for the do not apply to working gear (such as
safe operation of the equipment and at- slings, spreader bars, ladders, and weld-
tachments. ing machines) where the weight of the
638
working gear is negligible relative to mation and, where there are successive
the lifting capacity of the equipment shifts, to the next operator; and
as positioned, and the working gear is (2) The employer must notify all af-
suspended over an area other than an fected employees, at the beginning of
entrance or exit. each shift, of the necessary adjust-
(f) Tag-out. ments or repairs and all alternative
(1) Tagging out of service equipment/ measures.
functions. Where the employer has (k) Safety devices and operational
taken the equipment out of service, a aids must not be used as a substitute
tag must be placed in the cab stating for the exercise of professional judg-
that the equipment is out of service ment by the operator.
and is not to be used. Where the em- (l) [Reserved]
ployer has taken a function(s) out of (m) If the competent person deter-
service, a tag must be placed in a con- mines that there is a slack rope condi-
spicuous position stating that the function requiring re-spooling of the rope,
tion is out of service and is not to be it must be verified (before starting to
used. lift) that the rope is seated on the
(2) Response to ‘‘do not operate’’/tag- drum and in the sheaves as the slack is
out signs. removed.
(i) If there is a warning (tag-out or (n) The competent person must ad-
maintenance/do not operate) sign on just the equipment and/or operations
the equipment or starting control, the to address the effect of wind, ice, and
operator must not activate the switch snow on equipment stability and rated
or start the equipment until the sign capacity.
has been removed by a person author- (o) Compliance with rated capacity.
ized to remove it, or until the operator (1) The equipment must not be oper-
has verified that: ated in excess of its rated capacity.
(A) No one is servicing, working on, (2) The operator must not be required
or otherwise in a dangerous position on to operate the equipment in a manner
the machine. that would violate paragraph (o)(1) of
this section.
(B) The equipment has been repaired
(3) Load weight. The operator must
and is working properly.
verify that the load is within the rated
(ii) If there is a warning (tag-out or capacity of the equipment by at least
maintenance/do not operate) sign on one of the following methods:
any other switch or control, the oper- (i) The weight of the load must be de-
ator must not activate that switch or termined from a source recognized by
control until the sign has been re- the industry (such as the load’s manu-
moved by a person authorized to re- facturer), or by a calculation method
move it, or until the operator has recognized by the industry (such as cal-
verified that the requirements in para- culating a steel beam from measured
graphs (f)(2)(i)(A) and (B) of this sec- dimensions and a known per foot
tion have been met. weight), or by other equally reliable
(g) Before starting the engine, the op- means. In addition, when requested by
erator must verify that all controls are the operator, this information must be
in the proper starting position and that provided to the operator prior to the
all personnel are in the clear. lift; or
(h) Storm warning. When a local storm (ii) The operator must begin hoisting
warning has been issued, the com- the load to determine, using a load
petent person must determine whether weighing device, load moment indi-
it is necessary to implement manufac- cator, rated capacity indicator, or
turer recommendations for securing rated capacity limiter, if it exceeds 75
the equipment. percent of the maximum rated capac-
(i) [Reserved] ity at the longest radius that will be
(j) If equipment adjustments or reused during the lift operation. If it
pairs are necessary: does, the operator must not proceed
(1) The operator must, in writing, with the lift until he/she verifies the
promptly inform the person designated weight of the load in accordance with
by the employer to receive such infor- paragraph (o)(3)(i) of this section.
639
(p) The boom or other parts of the position where railway cars on an adja-
equipment must not contact any ob- cent track could strike it, until it is
struction. determined that cars are not being
(q) The equipment must not be used moved on the adjacent track and that
to drag or pull loads sideways. proper flag protection has been estab-
(r) On wheel-mounted equipment, no lished.
loads must be lifted over the front (aa) Counterweight/ballast.
area, except as permitted by the manu- (1) The following applies to equip-
facturer. ment other than tower cranes:
(s) The operator must test the brakes (i) Equipment must not be operated
each time a load that is 90% or more of without the counterweight or ballast
the maximum line pull is handled by in place as specified by the manufac-
lifting the load a few inches and apply- turer.
ing the brakes. In duty cycle and repet- (ii) The maximum counterweight or
itive lifts where each lift is 90% or ballast specified by the manufacturer
more of the maximum line pull, this for the equipment must not be exceed-
requirement applies to the first lift but ed.
not to successive lifts. (2) Counterweight/ballast require-
(t) Neither the load nor the boom ments for tower cranes are specified in
must be lowered below the point where § 1926.1435(b)(8).
less than two full wraps of rope remain
on their respective drums. § 1926.1418 Authority to stop oper-
(u) Traveling with a load. ation.
(1) Traveling with a load is prohib-
Whenever there is a concern as to
ited if the practice is prohibited by the
safety, the operator must have the au-
manufacturer.
thority to stop and refuse to handle
(2) Where traveling with a load, the
loads until a qualified person has deter-
employer must ensure that:
mined that safety has been assured.
(i) A competent person supervises the
operation, determines if it is necessary § 1926.1419 Signals—general require-
to reduce rated capacity, and makes ments.
determinations regarding load posi-
tion, boom location, ground support, (a) A signal person must be provided
travel route, overhead obstructions, in each of the following situations:
and speed of movement necessary to (1) The point of operation, meaning
ensure safety. the load travel or the area near or at
(ii) The determinations of the com- load placement, is not in full view of
petent person required in paragraph the operator.
(u)(2)(i) of this section are imple- (2) When the equipment is traveling,
mented. the view in the direction of travel is
(iii) For equipment with tires, tire obstructed.
pressure specified by the manufacturer (3) Due to site specific safety con-
is maintained. cerns, either the operator or the person
(v) Rotational speed of the equipment handling the load determines that it is
must be such that the load does not necessary.
swing out beyond the radius at which it (b) Types of signals. Signals to opera-
can be controlled. tors must be by hand, voice, audible, or
(w) A tag or restraint line must be new signals.
used if necessary to prevent rotation of (c) Hand signals.
the load that would be hazardous. (1) When using hand signals, the
(x) The brakes must be adjusted in Standard Method must be used (see ap-
accordance with manufacturer proce- pendix A of this subpart). Exception:
dures to prevent unintended move- Where use of the Standard Method for
ment. hand signals is infeasible, or where an
(y) The operator must obey a stop (or operation or use of an attachment is
emergency stop) signal, irrespective of not covered in the Standard Method,
who gives it. non-standard hand signals may be used
(z) Swinging locomotive cranes. A loco- in accordance with paragraph (c)(2) of
motive crane must not be swung into a this section.
640
(2) Non-standard hand signals. When is in communication with more than
using non-standard hand signals, the one crane/derrick, a system must be
signal person, operator, and lift direc- used for identifying the crane/derrick
tor (where there is one) must contact each signal is for, as follows:
each other prior to the operation and (1) for each signal, prior to giving the
agree on the non-standard hand signals function/direction, the signal person
that will be used. must identify the crane/derrick the sig-
(d) New signals. Signals other than nal is for, or
hand, voice, or audible signals may be (2) must use an equally effective
used where the employer demonstrates method of identifying which crane/der-
that: rick the signal is for.
(1) The new signals provide at least
equally effective communication as § 1926.1420 Signals—radio, telephone
voice, audible, or Standard Method or other electronic transmission of
hand signals, or signals.
(2) The new signals comply with a na-
tional consensus standard that pro- (a) The device(s) used to transmit
vides at least equally effective commu- signals must be tested on site before
nication as voice, audible, or Standard beginning operations to ensure that
Method hand signals. the signal transmission is effective,
(e) Suitability. The signals used (hand, clear, and reliable.
voice, audible, or new), and means of (b) Signal transmission must be
transmitting the signals to the oper- through a dedicated channel, except:
ator (such as direct line of sight, video, (1) Multiple cranes/derricks and one
radio, etc.), must be appropriate for the or more signal persons may share a
site conditions. dedicated channel for the purpose of
(f) During operations requiring sig- coordinating operations.
nals, the ability to transmit signals be- (2) Where a crane is being operated
tween the operator and signal person on or adjacent to railroad tracks, and
must be maintained. If that ability is the actions of the crane operator need
interrupted at any time, the operator to be coordinated with the movement
must safely stop operations requiring of other equipment or trains on the
signals until it is reestablished and a same or adjacent tracks.
proper signal is given and understood. (c) The operator’s reception of sig-
(g) If the operator becomes aware of nals must be by a hands-free system.
a safety problem and needs to commu-
nicate with the signal person, the oper- § 1926.1421 Signals—voice signals—ad-
ator must safely stop operations. Oper- ditional requirements.
ations must not resume until the oper-
(a) Prior to beginning operations, the
ator and signal person agree that the
operator, signal person and lift director
problem has been resolved.
(if there is one), must contact each
(h) Only one person may give signals
other and agree on the voice signals
to a crane/derrick at a time, except in
that will be used. Once the voice sig-
circumstances covered by paragraph (j)
of this section. nals are agreed upon, these workers
(i) [Reserved] need not meet again to discuss voice
(j) Anyone who becomes aware of a signals unless another worker is added
safety problem must alert the operator or substituted, there is confusion about
or signal person by giving the stop or the voice signals, or a voice signal is to
emergency stop signal. (NOTE: be changed.
§ 1926.1417(y) requires the operator to (b) Each voice signal must contain
obey a stop or emergency stop signal). the following three elements, given in
(k) All directions given to the oper- the following order: function (such as
ator by the signal person must be given hoist, boom, etc.), direction; distance
from the operator’s direction perspec- and/or speed; function, stop command.
tive. (c) The operator, signal person and
(l) [Reserved] lift director (if there is one), must be
(m) Communication with multiple able to effectively communicate in the
cranes/derricks. Where a signal person(s) language used.
641
§ 1926.1422 Signals—hand signal chart. These devices must meet the following
criteria:
Hand signal charts must be either
(i) Steps, handholds, ladders and
posted on the equipment or conspicu-
guardrails/railings/grabrails must meet
ously posted in the vicinity of the
the criteria of SAE J185 (May 2003) (in-
hoisting operations.
corporated by reference, see § 1926.6) or
§ 1926.1423 Fall protection. ISO 11660–2:1994(E) (incorporated by ref-
erence, see § 1926.6) except where infea-
(a) Application. sible.
(1) Paragraphs (b), (c)(3), (e) and (f) of (ii) Walking/stepping surfaces, except
this section apply to all equipment for crawler treads, must have slip-re-
covered by this subpart except tower sistant features/properties (such as dia-
cranes. mond plate metal, strategically placed
(2) Paragraphs (c)(1), (c)(2), (d), (g), (j) grip tape, expanded metal, or slip-re-
and (k) of this section apply to all sistant paint).
equipment covered by this subpart. (4) Tower cranes manufactured after
(3) Paragraphs (c)(4) and (h) of this November 8, 2011 must be equipped so
section apply only to tower cranes. as to provide safe access and egress be-
(b) Boom walkways. tween the ground and the cab, machin-
(1) Equipment manufactured after ery platforms, and tower (mast), by the
November 8, 2011 with lattice booms provision of devices such as steps,
must be equipped with walkways on handholds, ladders, and guardrails/rail-
the boom(s) if the vertical profile of ings/grabrails. These devices must
the boom (from cord centerline to cord meet the following criteria:
centerline) is 6 or more feet. (i) Steps, handholds, ladders, and
(2) Boom walkway criteria. guardrails/railings/grabrails must meet
(i) The walkways must be at least 12 the criteria of ISO 11660–1:2008(E) (in-
inches wide. corporated by reference, see § 1926.6)
(ii) Guardrails, railings and other and ISO 11660–3:2008(E) (incorporated
permanent fall protection attachments by reference, see § 1926.6) or SAE J185
along walkways are: (May 2003) (incorporated by reference,
(A) Not required. see § 1926.6) except where infeasible.
(B) Prohibited on booms supported by (ii) Walking/stepping surfaces must
pendant ropes or bars if the guardrails/ have slip-resistant features/properties
railings/attachments could be snagged (such as diamond plate metal, strategi-
by the ropes or bars. cally placed grip tape, expanded metal,
(C) Prohibited if of the removable or slip-resistant paint).
type (designed to be installed and re- (d) Personal fall arrest and fall re-
moved each time the boom is assem- straint systems. Personal fall arrest sys-
bled/disassembled). tem components must be used in per-
(D) Where not prohibited, guardrails sonal fall arrest and fall restraint sys-
or railings may be of any height up to, tems and must conform to the criteria
but not more than, 45 inches. in § 1926.502(d) except that
(c) Steps, handholds, ladders, grabrails, § 1926.502(d)(15) does not apply to com-
guardrails and railings. ponents used in personal fall arrest and
(1) Section 1926.502(b) does not apply fall restraint systems. Either body
to equipment covered by this subpart. belts or body harnesses must be used in
(2) The employer must maintain in personal fall arrest and fall restraint
good condition originally-equipped systems.
steps, handholds, ladders and guard- (e) For non-assembly/disassembly
rails/railings/grabrails. work, the employer must provide and
(3) Equipment manufactured after ensure the use of fall protection equip-
November 8, 2011 must be equipped so ment for employees who are on a walk-
as to provide safe access and egress being/working surface with an unpro-
tween the ground and the operator tected side or edge more than 6 feet
work station(s), including the forward above a lower level as follows:
and rear positions, by the provision of (1) When moving point-to-point:
devices such as steps, handholds, lad- (i) On non-lattice booms (whether
ders, and guardrails/railings/grabrails. horizontal or not horizontal).
642
(ii) On lattice booms that are not (1) For work other than erecting,
horizontal. climbing, and dismantling, the em-
(iii) On horizontal lattice booms ployer must provide and ensure the use
where the fall distance is 15 feet or of fall protection equipment for em-
more. ployees who are on a walking/working
(2) While at a work station on any surface with an unprotected side or
part of the equipment (including the edge more than 6 feet above a lower
boom, of any type), except when the level, except when the employee is at
employee is at or near draw-works or near draw-works (when the equip-
(when the equipment is running), in ment is running), in the cab, or on the
the cab, or on the deck. deck.
(f) For assembly/disassembly work, (2) For erecting, climbing, and dis-
the employer must provide and ensure mantling work, the employer must pro-
the use of fall protection equipment for vide and ensure the use of fall protec-
employees who are on a walking/work- tion equipment for employees who are
ing surface with an unprotected side or on a walking/working surface with an
edge more than 15 feet above a lower unprotected side or edge more than 15
level, except when the employee is at feet above a lower level.
or near draw-works (when the equip- (i) [Reserved]
ment is running), in the cab, or on the (j) Anchoring to the load line. A per-
deck. sonal fall arrest system is permitted to
(g) Anchorage criteria. be anchored to the crane/derrick’s hook
(or other part of the load line) where
(1) Sections 1926.502(d)(15) and
all of the following requirements are
1926.502(e)(2) apply to equipment cov-
met:
ered by this subpart only to the extent
(1) A qualified person has determined
delineated in paragraph (g)(2) of this
that the set-up and rated capacity of
section.
the crane/derrick (including the hook,
(2) Anchorages for personal fall arrest load line and rigging) meets or exceeds
and positioning device systems. the requirements in § 1926.502(d)(15).
(i) Personal fall arrest systems must (2) The equipment operator must be
be anchored to any apparently substan- at the work site and informed that the
tial part of the equipment unless a equipment is being used for this pur-
competent person, from a visual in- pose.
spection, without an engineering anal- (3) No load is suspended from the load
ysis, would conclude that the criteria line when the personal fall arrest sys-
in § 1926.502(d)(15) would not be met. tem is anchored to the crane/derrick’s
(ii) Positioning device systems must hook (or other part of the load line).
be anchored to any apparently substan- (k) Training. The employer must
tial part of the equipment unless a train each employee who may be ex-
competent person, from a visual in- posed to fall hazards while on, or hoist-
spection, without an engineering anal- ed by, equipment covered by this sub-
ysis, would conclude that the criteria part on all of the following:
in § 1926.502(e)(2) would not be met. (1) the requirements in this subpart
(iii) Attachable anchor devices (port- that address fall protection.
able anchor devices that are attached (2) the applicable requirements in
to the equipment) must meet the an- §§ 1926.500 and 1926.502.
chorage criteria in § 1926.502(d)(15) for
personal fall arrest systems and § 1926.1424 Work area control.
§ 1926.502(e)(2) for positioning device (a) Swing radius hazards.
systems. (1) The requirements in paragraph
(3) Anchorages for fall restraint sys- (a)(2) of this section apply where there
tems. Fall restraint systems must be are accessible areas in which the equip-
anchored to any part of the equipment ment’s rotating superstructure (wheth-
that is capable of withstanding twice er permanently or temporarily mount-
the maximum load that an employee ed) poses a reasonably foreseeable risk
may impose on it during reasonably of:
anticipated conditions of use. (i) Striking and injuring an em-
(h) Tower cranes. ployee; or
643
(ii) Pinching/crushing an employee the extent consistent with public safe-
against another part of the equipment ty.
or another object. (b) While the operator is not moving
(2) To prevent employees from enter- a suspended load, no employee must be
ing these hazard areas, the employer within the fall zone, except for employ-
must: ees:
(i) Train each employee assigned to (1) Engaged in hooking, unhooking or
work on or near the equipment (‘‘au- guiding a load;
thorized personnel’’) in how to recog- (2) Engaged in the initial attachment
nize struck-by and pinch/crush hazard of the load to a component or struc-
areas posed by the rotating super- ture; or
structure. (3) Operating a concrete hopper or
(ii) Erect and maintain control lines, concrete bucket.
warning lines, railings or similar bar- (c) When employees are engaged in
riers to mark the boundaries of the hooking, unhooking, or guiding the
hazard areas. Exception: When the em- load, or in the initial connection of a
ployer can demonstrate that it is nei-
load to a component or structure and
ther feasible to erect such barriers on
are within the fall zone, all of the fol-
the ground nor on the equipment, the
lowing criteria must be met:
hazard areas must be clearly marked
by a combination of warning signs (1) The materials being hoisted must
(such as ‘‘Danger—Swing/Crush Zone’’) be rigged to prevent unintentional dis-
and high visibility markings on the placement.
equipment that identify the hazard (2) Hooks with self-closing latches or
areas. In addition, the employer must their equivalent must be used. Excep-
train each employee to understand tion: ‘‘J’’ hooks are permitted to be
what these markings signify. used for setting wooden trusses.
(3) Protecting employees in the hazard (3) The materials must be rigged by a
area. qualified rigger.
(i) Before an employee goes to a loca- (d) Receiving a load. Only employees
tion in the hazard area that is out of needed to receive a load are permitted
view of the operator, the employee (or to be within the fall zone when a load
someone instructed by the employee) is being landed.
must ensure that the operator is in- (e) During a tilt-up or tilt-down oper-
formed that he/she is going to that lo- ation:
cation. (1) No employee must be directly
(ii) Where the operator knows that under the load.
an employee went to a location covered (2) Only employees essential to the
by paragraph (a)(1) of this section, the operation are permitted in the fall zone
operator must not rotate the super- (but not directly under the load). An
structure until the operator is in- employee is essential to the operation
formed in accordance with a pre-ar- if the employee is conducting one of
ranged system of communication that the following operations and the em-
the employee is in a safe position. ployer can demonstrate it is infeasible
(b) Where any part of a crane/derrick for the employee to perform that oper-
is within the working radius of another ation from outside the fall zone: (1)
crane/derrick, the controlling entity Physically guide the load; (2) closely
must institute a system to coordinate monitor and give instructions regard-
operations. If there is no controlling
ing the load’s movement; or (3) either
entity, the employer (if there is only
detach it from or initially attach it to
one employer operating the multiple
another component or structure (such
pieces of equipment), or employers,
as, but not limited to, making an ini-
must institute such a system.
tial connection or installing bracing).
§ 1926.1425 Keeping clear of the load. NOTE: Boom free fall is prohibited when an
employee is in the fall zone of the boom or
(a) Where available, hoisting routes load, and load line free fall is prohibited
that minimize the exposure of employ- when an employee is directly under the load;
ees to hoisted loads must be used, to see § 1926.1426.
644
§ 1926.1426 Free fall and controlled hoist movement in the event of hy-
load lowering. draulic failure.
(a) Boom free fall prohibitions. (3) Neither clutches nor hydraulic
(1) The use of equipment in which the motors must be considered brake or
boom is designed to free fall (live locking devices for purposes of this
boom) is prohibited in each of the fol- subpart.
lowing circumstances: (4) Hydraulic boom cylinders must
(i) An employee is in the fall zone of have an integrally mounted holding de-
the boom or load. vice.
(ii) An employee is being hoisted. (c) Preventing uncontrolled retraction.
(iii) The load or boom is directly over Hydraulic telescoping booms must
a power line, or over any part of the have an integrally mounted holding de-
area extending the Table A of § 1926.1408 vice to prevent the boom from retract-
clearance distance to each side of the ing in the event of hydraulic failure.
power line; or any part of the area ex- (d) Load line free fall. In each of the
tending the Table A clearance distance following circumstances, controlled
to each side of the power line is within load lowering is required and free fall
the radius of vertical travel of the of the load line hoist is prohibited:
boom or the load. (1) An employee is directly under the
(iv) The load is over a shaft, except load.
where there are no employees in the (2) An employee is being hoisted.
shaft. (3) The load is directly over a power
(v) The load is over a cofferdam, ex- line, or over any part of the area ex-
cept where there are no employees in tending the Table A of § 1926.1408 clear-
the fall zone of the boom or the load. ance distance to each side of the power
(vi) Lifting operations are taking line; or any part of the area extending
place in a refinery or tank farm. the Table A of § 1926.1408 clearance dis-
(2) The use of equipment in which the tance to each side of the power line is
boom is designed to free fall (live within the radius of vertical travel of
boom) is permitted only where none of the load.
the circumstances listed in paragraph
(4) The load is over a shaft.
(a)(1) of this section are present and:
(i) The equipment was manufactured (5) The load is over a cofferdam, ex-
prior to October 31, 1984; or cept where there are no employees in
(ii) The equipment is a floating the fall zone of the load.
crane/derrick or a land crane/derrick § 1926.1427 Operator qualification and
on a vessel/flotation device. certification.
(b) Preventing boom free fall. Where
the use of equipment with a boom that (a) The employer must ensure that,
is designed to free fall (live boom) is prior to operating any equipment cov-
prohibited, the boom hoist must have a ered under subpart CC, the person is
secondary mechanism or device de- operating the equipment during a
signed to prevent the boom from fall- training period in accordance with
ing in the event the primary system paragraph (f) of this section, or the op-
used to hold or regulate the boom hoist erator is qualified or certified to oper-
fails, as follows: ate the equipment in accordance with
(1) Friction drums must have: the following:
(i) A friction clutch and, in addition, (1) When a non-military government
a braking device, to allow for con- entity issues operator licenses for
trolled boom lowering. equipment covered under subpart CC,
(ii) A secondary braking or locking and that government licensing pro-
device, which is manually or automati- gram meets the requirements of para-
cally engaged, to back-up the primary graphs (e)(2) and (j) of this section, the
brake while the boom is held (such as a equipment operator must either be:
secondary friction brake or a ratchet (i) Licensed by that government enti-
and pawl device). ty for operation of equipment within
(2) Hydraulic drums must have an in- that entity’s jurisdiction; or
tegrally mounted holding device or in- (ii) qualified in compliance with
ternal static brake to prevent boom paragraph (d) of this section.
645
(2) Where paragraph (a)(1) of this sec- that type and capacity of equipment or
tion is not applicable, the certification for higher-capacity equipment of that
or qualification must comply with one type. If no accredited testing agency
of the options in paragraphs (b) offers certification examinations for a
through (d) of this section. particular type and/or capacity of
(3) Exceptions: Operator qualification equipment, an operator will be deemed
or certification under this section is qualified to operate that equipment if
not required for operators of derricks the operator has been certified for the
(see § 1926.1436), sideboom cranes (see type/capacity that is most similar to
§ 1926.1440), or equipment with a max- that equipment and for which a certifi-
imum manufacturer-rated hoisting/lift- cation examination is available. The
ing capacity of 2,000 pounds or less (see operator’s certificate must state the
§ 1926.1441). type/capacity of equipment for which
(4) Whenever operator qualification the operator is certified.
or certification is required under (3) A certification issued under this
§ 1926.1427, the employer must provide option is portable and meets the re-
the qualification or certification at no quirements of paragraph (a)(2) of this
cost to operators who are employed by
section.
the employer on November 8, 2010.
(4) A certification issued under this
(b) Option (1): Certification by an ac-
credited crane operator testing organiza- paragraph is valid for 5 years.
tion. (c) Option (2): Qualification by an au-
(1) For a testing organization to be dited employer program. The employer’s
considered accredited to certify opera- qualification of its employee must
tors under this subpart, it must: meet the following requirements:
(i) Be accredited by a nationally rec- (1) The written and practical tests
ognized accrediting agency based on must be either:
that agency’s determination that in- (i) Developed by an accredited crane
dustry recognized criteria for written operator testing organization (see para-
testing materials, practical examina- graph (b) of this section); or
tions, test administration, grading, fa- (ii) Approved by an auditor in accord-
cilities/equipment and personnel have ance with the following requirements:
been met. (A) The auditor is certified to evalu-
(ii) Administer written and practical ate such tests by an accredited crane
tests that: operator testing organization (see para-
(A) Assess the operator applicant re- graph (b) of this section).
garding, at a minimum, the knowledge (B) The auditor is not an employee of
and skills listed in paragraphs (j)(1) the employer.
and (2) of this section. (C) The approval must be based on
(B) Provide different levels of certifi-
the auditor’s determination that the
cation based on equipment capacity
written and practical tests meet na-
and type.
tionally recognized test development
(iii) Have procedures for operators to
criteria and are valid and reliable in
re-apply and be re-tested in the event
assessing the operator applicants re-
an operator applicant fails a test or is
garding, at a minimum, the knowledge
decertified.
(iv) Have testing procedures for re- and skills listed in paragraphs (j)(1)
certification designed to ensure that and (2) of this section.
the operator continues to meet the (D) The audit must be conducted in
technical knowledge and skills require- accordance with nationally recognized
ments in paragraphs (j)(1) and (2) of auditing standards.
this section. (2) Administration of tests.
(v) Have its accreditation reviewed (i) The written and practical tests
by the nationally recognized accred- must be administered under cir-
iting agency at least every three years. cumstances approved by the auditor as
(2) An operator will be deemed quali- meeting nationally recognized test ad-
fied to operate a particular piece of ministration standards.
equipment if the operator is certified (ii) The auditor must be certified to
under paragraph (b) of this section for evaluate the administration of the
646
written and practical tests by an ache/she has a current operator qualifica-
credited crane operator testing organi- tion issued by the U.S. military for op-
zation (see paragraph (b) of this sec- eration of the equipment. An employee
tion). of the U.S. military is a Federal em-
(iii) The auditor must not be an employee of the Department of Defense or
ployee of the employer. Armed Forces and does not include em-
(iv) The audit must be conducted in ployees of private contractors.
accordance with nationally recognized (2) A qualification under this para-
auditing standards. graph is:
(3) The employer program must be (i) Not portable. Such a qualification
audited within 3 months of the begin- meets the requirements of paragraph
ning of the program and at least every (a) of this section only where the oper-
3 years thereafter. ator is employed by (and operating the
(4) The employer program must have equipment for) the employer that
testing procedures for re-qualification issued the qualification.
designed to ensure that the operator (ii) Valid for the period of time stipu-
continues to meet the technical knowl- lated by the issuing entity.
edge and skills requirements in para- (e) Option (4): Licensing by a govern-
graphs (j)(1) and (2) of this section. The ment entity.
re-qualification procedures must be au- (1) For purposes of this section, a
dited in accordance with paragraphs government licensing department/of-
(c)(1) and (2) of this section. fice that issues operator licenses for
(5) Deficiencies. If the auditor deter- operating equipment covered by this
mines that there is a significant defi- standard is considered a government
ciency (‘‘deficiency’’) in the program, accredited crane operator testing orga-
the employer must ensure that: nization if the criteria in paragraph
(i) No operator is qualified until the (e)(2) of this section are met.
auditor confirms that the deficiency (2) Licensing criteria.
has been corrected. (i) The requirements for obtaining
(ii) The program is audited again the license include an assessment, by
within 180 days of the confirmation written and practical tests, of the oper-
that the deficiency was corrected. ator applicant regarding, at a min-
(iii) The auditor files a documented imum, the knowledge and skills listed
report of the deficiency to the appro- in paragraphs (j)(1) and (2) of this sec-
priate Regional Office of the Occupa- tion.
tional Safety and Health Administra- (ii) The testing meets industry recog-
tion within 15 days of the auditor’s de- nized criteria for written testing mate-
termination that there is a deficiency. rials, practical examinations, test ad-
(iv) Records of the audits of the em- ministration, grading, facilities/equip-
ployer’s program are maintained by ment and personnel.
the auditor for three years and are (iii) The government authority that
made available by the auditor to the oversees the licensing department/of-
Secretary of Labor or the Secretary’s fice, has determined that the require-
designated representative upon re- ments in paragraphs (e)(2)(i) and (ii) of
quest. this section have been met.
(6) A qualification under this para- (iv) The licensing department/office
graph is: has testing procedures for re-licensing
(i) Not portable. Such a qualification designed to ensure that the operator
meets the requirements of paragraph continues to meet the technical knowl-
(a) of this section only where the oper- edge and skills requirements in para-
ator is employed by (and operating the graphs (j)(1) and (2) of this section.
equipment for) the employer that (3) A license issued by a government
issued the qualification. accredited crane operator testing orga-
(ii) Valid for 5 years. nization that meets the requirements
(d) Option (3): Qualification by the U.S. of this option:
military. (i) Meets the operator qualification
(1) For purposes of this section, an requirements of this section for oper-
operator who is an employee of the ation of equipment only within the ju-
U.S. military is considered qualified if risdiction of the government entity.
647
(ii) Is valid for the period of time (i) The break lasts no longer than 15
stipulated by the licensing department/ minutes and there is no more than one
office, but no longer than 5 years. break per hour.
(f) Pre-qualification/certification train- (ii) Immediately prior to the break
ing period. An employee who is not the operator’s trainer informs the oper-
qualified or certified under this section ator-in-training of the specific tasks
is permitted to operate equipment only that the operator-in-training is to per-
as an operator-in-training and only form and limitations to which he/she
where the requirements of this para- must adhere during the operator train-
graph are met. er’s break.
(1) The employer must provide each (iii) The specific tasks that the oper-
operator-in-training with sufficient ator-in-training will perform during
training prior to operating the equip- the operator trainer’s break are within
ment to enable the operator-in-train- the operator-in-training’s abilities.
ing to operate the equipment safely (5) The operator-in-training must not
under limitations established by this operate the equipment in any of the
section (including continuous moni- following circumstances unless the ex-
toring) and any additional limitations ception stated in paragraph (f)(5)(v) of
established by the employer. this section is applicable:
(2) The tasks performed by the oper- (i) If any part of the equipment, load
ator-in-training while operating the line or load (including rigging and lift-
equipment must be within the oper- ing accessories), if operated up to the
ator-in-training’s ability. equipment’s maximum working radius
(3) Trainer. While operating the in the work zone (see § 1926.1408(a)(1)),
equipment, the operator-in-training could get within 20 feet of a power line
must be continuously monitored by an that is up to 350 kV, or within 50 feet
individual (‘‘operator’s trainer’’) who of a power line that is over 350 kV.
meets all of the following require- (ii) If the equipment is used to hoist
ments: personnel.
(i) The operator’s trainer is an em- (iii) In multiple-equipment lifts.
ployee or agent of the operator-in-
(iv) If the equipment is used over a
training’s employer.
shaft, cofferdam, or in a tank farm.
(ii) The operator’s trainer is either a
(v) In multiple-lift rigging oper-
certified operator under this section, or
ations, except where the operator’s
has passed the written portion of a cer-
trainer determines that the operator-
tification test under one of the options
in paragraphs (b) through (e) of this in-training skills are sufficient for this
section, and is familiar with the proper high-skill work.
use of the equipment’s controls. (g) Under this section, a testing enti-
(iii) While monitoring the operator- ty is permitted to provide training as
in-training, the operator’s trainer per- well as testing services as long as the
forms no tasks that detract from the criteria of the applicable accrediting
trainer’s ability to monitor the oper- agency (in the option selected) for an
ator-in-training. organization providing both services
(iv) For equipment other than tower are met.
cranes: The operator’s trainer and the (h) Language and Literacy Require-
operator-in-training must be in direct ments.
line of sight of each other. In addition, (1) Tests under this section may be
they must communicate verbally or by administered verbally, with answers
hand signals. For tower cranes: The op- given verbally, where the operator can-
erator’s trainer and the operator-in- didate:
training must be in direct communica- (i) Passes a written demonstration of
tion with each other. literacy relevant to the work.
(4) Continuous monitoring. The oper- (ii) Demonstrates the ability to use
ator-in-training must be monitored by the type of written manufacturer pro-
the operator’s trainer at all times, ex- cedures applicable to the class/type of
cept for short breaks where all of the equipment for which the candidate is
following are met: seeking certification.
648
(2) Tests under this section may be (i) Ability to recognize, from visual
administered in any language the oper- and auditory observation, the items
ator candidate understands, and the listed in § 1926.1412(d) (shift inspection).
operator’s certificate must note the (ii) Operational and maneuvering
language in which the test was given. skills.
The operator is qualified under para- (iii) Application of load chart infor-
graph (b)(2) of this section to operate mation.
equipment that is furnished with mate- (iv) Application of safe shut-down
rials required by this subpart that are and securing procedures.
written in the language of the certifi- (k) Phase-in.
cation. The operator may only operate (1) The provisions of this section are
equipment furnished with such mate- applicable November 8, 2010, except for
rials. paragraphs (a)(2) and (f) which are ap-
(i) [Reserved] plicable November 10, 2014.
(j) Certification criteria. Qualifications (2) When § 1926.1427(a)(1) is not appli-
cable, all of the requirements in para-
and certifications must be based, at a
graphs (k)(2)(i) and (ii) of this section
minimum, on the following:
apply until November 10, 2014:
(1) A determination through a writ- (i) The employer must ensure that
ten test that: operators of equipment covered by this
(i) The individual knows the informa- standard are competent to operate the
tion necessary for safe operation of the equipment safely.
specific type of equipment the indi- (ii) Where an employee assigned to
vidual will operate, including all of the operate machinery does not have the
following: required knowledge or ability to oper-
(A) The controls and operational/per- ate the equipment safely, the employer
formance characteristics. must train that employee prior to op-
(B) Use of, and the ability to cal- erating the equipment. The employer
culate (manually or with a calculator), must ensure that each operator is eval-
load/capacity information on a variety uated to confirm that he/she under-
of configurations of the equipment. stands the information provided in the
(C) Procedures for preventing and retraining.
sponding to power line contact.
(D) Technical knowledge similar to § 1926.1428 Signal person qualifica-
tions.
the subject matter criteria listed in ap-
pendix C of this subpart applicable to (a) The employer of the signal person
the specific type of equipment the indi- must ensure that each signal person
vidual will operate. Use of the appendix meets the Qualification Requirements
C criteria meets the requirements of (paragraph (c) of this section) prior to
this provision. giving any signals. This requirement
(E) Technical knowledge applicable must be met by using either Option (1)
to: or Option (2) of this section.
(1) The suitability of the supporting (1) Option (1)—Third party qualified
evaluator. The signal person has docu-
ground and surface to handle expected
mentation from a third party qualified
loads.
evaluator (see Qualified Evaluator
(2) Site hazards.
(third party), § 1926.1401 for definition)
(3) Site access. showing that the signal person meets
(F) This subpart, including applicable the Qualification Requirements (see
incorporated materials. paragraph (c) of this section).
(ii) The individual is able to read and (2) Option (2)—Employer’s qualified
locate relevant information in the evaluator. The employer’s qualified (see
equipment manual and other materials Qualified Evaluator (not a third party),
containing information referred to in § 1926.1401 for definition) evaluator as-
paragraph (j)(1)(i) of this section. sesses the individual and determines
(2) A determination through a prac- that the individual meets the Quali-
tical test that the individual has the fication Requirements (see paragraph
skills necessary for safe operation of (c) of this section) and provides docu-
the equipment, including the following: mentation of that determination. An
649
assessment by an employer’s qualified (2) The personnel either:
evaluator under this option is not port- (i) Operate the equipment under the
able—other employers are not per- direct supervision of an operator who
mitted to use it to meet the require- meets the requirements of § 1926.1427
ments of this section. (Operator qualification and certifi-
(3) The employer must make the doc- cation); or
umentation for whichever option is (ii) Are familiar with the operation,
used available at the site while the sig- limitations, characteristics and haz-
nal person is employed by the em- ards associated with the type of equip-
ployer. The documentation must speci- ment.
fy each type of signaling (e.g. hand sig- (b) Maintenance and repair personnel
nals, radio signals, etc.) for which the must meet the definition of a qualified
signal person meets the requirements person with respect to the equipment
of paragraph (c) of this section. and maintenance/repair tasks per-
(b) If subsequent actions by the sig- formed.
nal person indicate that the individual
does not meet the Qualification Re- § 1926.1430 Training.
quirements (see paragraph (c) of this The employer must provide training
section), the employer must not allow as follows:
the individual to continue working as a (a) Overhead powerlines. The employer
signal person until re-training is pro- must train each employee specified in
vided and a re-assessment is made in § 1926.1408(g) and § 1926.1410(m) in the
accordance with paragraph (a) of this topics listed in § 1926.1408(g).
section that confirms that the indi- (b) Signal persons. The employer must
vidual meets the Qualification Re- train each employee who will be as-
quirements. signed to work as a signal persons who
(c) Qualification Requirements. Each does not meet the requirements of
signal person must: § 1926.1428(c) in the areas addressed in
(1) Know and understand the type of that paragraph.
signals used. If hand signals are used, (c) Operators.
the signal person must know and un- (1) Operators-in-Training for equipment
derstand the Standard Method for hand where certification or qualification is re-
signals. quired by this subpart. The employer
(2) Be competent in the application must train each operator-in-training in
of the type of signals used. the areas addressed in § 1926.1427(j). The
(3) Have a basic understanding of employer must provide re-training if
equipment operation and limitations, the operator-in-training does not pass
including the crane dynamics involved a qualification or certification test.
in swinging and stopping loads and (2) Transitional Period. During the
boom deflection from hoisting loads. four-year phase-in period for operator
(4) Know and understand the relevant certification or qualification, as pro-
requirements of § 1926.1419 through vided in § 1926.1427(k), employers must
§ 1926.1422 and § 1926.1428. train each operator who has not yet
(5) Demonstrate that he/she meets been certified or qualified in the areas
the requirements in paragraphs (c)(1) addressed in § 1926.1427(j).
through (4) of this section through an (3) Operators excepted from the require-
oral or written test, and through a ments of § 1926.1427. The employer must
practical test. train each operator excepted under
§ 1926.1427(a) from the requirements of
§ 1926.1429 Qualifications of mainte- § 1926.1427 on the safe operation of the
nance & repair employees. equipment the operator will be using.
(a) Maintenance, inspection and re- (4) The employer must train each op-
pair personnel are permitted to operate erator of the equipment covered by this
the equipment only where all of the subpart in the following practices:
following requirements are met: (i) On friction equipment, whenever
(1) The operation is limited to those moving a boom off a support, first raise
functions necessary to perform mainte- the boom a short distance (sufficient to
nance, inspect the equipment, or verify take the load of the boom) to deter-
its performance. mine if the boom hoist brake needs to
650
be adjusted. On other types of equip- platform, or scaffold, would be more
ment with a boom, the same practice is hazardous, or is not possible because of
applicable, except that typically there the project’s structural design or work-
is no means of adjusting the brake; if site conditions. This paragraph does
the brake does not hold, a repair is nec- not apply to work covered by subpart R
essary. See § 1926.1417(f) and (j) for addi- (Steel Erection) of this part.
tional requirements. (b) Use of personnel platform.
(ii) Where available, the manufactur- (1) When using equipment to hoist
er’s emergency procedures for halting employees, the employees must be in a
unintended equipment movement. personnel platform that meets the re-
(d) Competent persons and qualified quirements of paragraph (e) of this sec-
persons. The employer must train each tion.
competent person and each qualified (2) Exceptions: A personnel platform
person regarding the requirements of is not required for hoisting employees:
this subpart applicable to their respec- (i) Into and out of drill shafts that
tive roles. are up to and including 8 feet in diame-
(e) Crush/pinch points. The employer ter (see paragraph (o) of this section for
must train each employee who works requirements for hoisting these em-
with the equipment to keep clear of ployees).
holes, and crush/pinch points and the (ii) In pile driving operations (see
hazards addressed in § 1926.1424 (Work paragraph (p) of this section for re-
area control). quirements for hoisting these employ-
(f) Tag-out. The employer must train ees).
each operator and each additional em- (iii) Solely for transfer to or from a
ployee authorized to start/energize marine worksite in a marine-hoisted
equipment or operate equipment con- personnel transfer device (see para-
trols (such as maintenance and repair graph (r) of this section for require-
employees), in the tag-out and start-up ments for hoisting these employees).
procedures in §§ 1926.1417(f) and (g). (iv) In storage-tank (steel or con-
(g) Training administration. crete), shaft and chimney operations
(1) The employer must evaluate each (see paragraph (s) of this section for re-
employee required to be trained under quirements for hoisting these employ-
this subpart to confirm that the em- ees).
ployee understands the information (c) Equipment set-up.
provided in the training. (1) The equipment must be uniformly
(2) The employer must provide re- level, within one percent of level grade,
fresher training in relevant topics for and located on footing that a qualified
each employee when, based on the con- person has determined to be suffi-
duct of the employee or an evaluation ciently firm and stable.
of the employee’s knowledge, there is (2) Equipment with outriggers or sta-
an indication that retraining is nec- bilizers must have them all extended
essary. and locked. The amount of extension
(3) Whenever training is required must be the same for all outriggers and
under subpart CC, the employer must stabilizers and in accordance with
provide the training at no cost to the manufacturer procedures and load
employee. charts.
(d) Equipment criteria.
§ 1926.1431 Hoisting personnel. (1) Capacity: Use of suspended per-
The requirements of this section are sonnel platforms. The total load (with
supplemental to the other require- the platform loaded, including the
ments in this subpart and apply when hook, load line and rigging) must not
one or more employees are hoisted. exceed 50 percent of the rated capacity
(a) The use of equipment to hoist em- for the radius and configuration of the
ployees is prohibited except where the equipment, except during proof testing.
employer demonstrates that the erec- (2) Capacity: Use of boom-attached per-
tion, use, and dismantling of conven- sonnel platforms. The total weight of
tional means of reaching the work the loaded personnel platform must not
area, such as a personnel hoist, ladder, exceed 50 percent of the rated capacity
stairway, aerial lift, elevating work for the radius and configuration of the
651
equipment (except during proof test- speed of the hoist mechanism. This sys-
ing). tem or device must be used when hoist-
(3) Capacity: Hoisting personnel with- ing personnel.
out a personnel platform. When hoisting NOTE: Free fall of the load line hoist is pro-
personnel without a personnel platform hibited (see § 1926.1426(d); the use of equip-
pursuant to paragraph (b)(2) of this sec- ment in which the boom hoist mechanism
can free fall is also prohibited (see
tion, the total load (including the
§ 1926.1426(a)(1).
hook, load line, rigging and any other (vii) Proper operation required. Per-
equipment that imposes a load) must sonnel hoisting operations must not
not exceed 50 percent of the rated ca- begin unless the devices listed in this
pacity for the radius and configuration section are in proper working order. If
of the equipment, except during proof a device stops working properly during
testing. such operations, the operator must
(4) When the occupied personnel plat- safely stop operations. Personnel hoist-
form is in a stationary working posi- ing operations must not resume until
tion, the load and boom hoist brakes, the device is again working properly.
swing brakes, and operator actuated Alternative measures are not per-
secondary braking and locking features mitted. (See § 1926.1417 for tag-out and
(such as pawls or dogs) or automatic related requirements.)
secondary brakes must be engaged. (6) Direct attachment of a personnel
(5) Devices. platform to a luffing jib is prohibited.
(i) Equipment (except for derricks (e) Personnel platform criteria.
and articulating cranes) with a vari- (1) A qualified person familiar with
able angle boom must be equipped with structural design must design the per-
all of the following: sonnel platform and attachment/sus-
(A) A boom angle indicator, readily pension system used for hoisting per-
visible to the operator, and sonnel.
(B) A boom hoist limiting device. (2) The system used to connect the
(ii) Articulating cranes must be personnel platform to the equipment
equipped with a properly functioning must allow the platform to remain
automatic overload protection device. within 10 degrees of level, regardless of
(iii) Equipment with a luffing jib boom angle.
must be equipped with: (3) The suspension system must be
(A) A jib angle indicator, readily visi- designed to minimize tipping of the
ble to the operator, and. platform due to movement of employ-
(B) A jib hoist limiting device. ees occupying the platform.
(iv) Equipment with telescoping (4) The personnel platform itself (ex-
booms must be equipped with a device cluding the guardrail system and per-
to indicate the boom’s extended length sonal fall arrest system anchorages),
clearly to the operator, or must have must be capable of supporting, without
measuring marks on the boom. failure, its own weight and at least five
(v) Anti two-block. A device which times the maximum intended load.
automatically prevents damage and (5) All welding of the personnel plat-
load failure from contact between the form and its components must be per-
load block, overhaul ball, or similar formed by a certified welder familiar
component, and the boom tip (or fixed with the weld grades, types and mate-
upper block or similar component) rial specified in the platform design.
must be used. The device(s) must pre- (6) The personnel platform must be
vent such damage/failure at all points equipped with a guardrail system
where two-blocking could occur. Excep- which meets the requirements of sub-
tion: This device is not required when part M of this part, and must be en-
hoisting personnel in pile driving oper- closed at least from the toeboard to
ations. Instead, paragraph (p)(2) of this mid-rail with either solid construction
section specifies how to prevent two- material or expanded metal having
blocking during such operations. openings no greater than 1⁄2 inch (1.27
(vi) Controlled load lowering. The load cm). Points to which personal fall ar-
line hoist drum must have a system, rest systems are attached must meet
other than the load line hoist brake, the anchorage requirements in subpart
which regulates the lowering rate of M of this part.
652
(7) A grab rail must be installed in- (4) The number of employees occu-
side the entire perimeter of the per- pying the personnel platform must not
sonnel platform except for access exceed the maximum number the plat-
gates/doors. form was designed to hold or the num-
(8) Access gates/doors. If installed, ac- ber required to perform the work,
cess gates/doors of all types (including whichever is less.
swinging, sliding, folding, or other (g) Attachment and rigging.
types) must: (1) Hooks and other detachable devices.
(i) Not swing outward. If due to the (i) Hooks used in the connection be-
size of the personnel platform, such as tween the hoist line and the personnel
a 1-person platform, it is infeasible for platform (including hooks on overhaul
the door to swing inward and allow safe ball assemblies, lower load blocks, bri-
entry for the platform occupant, then dle legs, or other attachment assem-
the access gate/door may swing out- blies or components) must be:
ward. (A) Of a type that can be closed and
(ii) Be equipped with a device that locked, eliminating the throat opening.
prevents accidental opening. (B) Closed and locked when attached.
(9) Headroom must be sufficient to (ii) Shackles used in place of hooks
allow employees to stand upright in must be of the alloy anchor type, with
the platform. either:
(10) In addition to the use of hard (A) A bolt, nut and retaining pin, in
hats, employees must be protected by place; or
overhead protection on the personnel (B) Of the screw type, with the screw
platform when employees are exposed pin secured from accidental removal.
to falling objects. The platform over- (iii) Where other detachable devices
head protection must not obscure the are used, they must be of the type that
view of the operator or platform occu- can be closed and locked to the same
pants (such as wire mesh that has up to extent as the devices addressed in para-
1⁄2 inch openings), unless full protection graphs (g)(1)(i) and (ii) of this section.
is necessary. Such devices must be closed and locked
(11) All edges exposed to employee when attached.
contact must be smooth enough to pre- (2) Rope bridle. When a rope bridle is
vent injury. used to suspend the personnel plat-
form, each bridle leg must be con-
(12) The weight of the platform and
nected to a master link or shackle (see
its rated capacity must be conspicu-
paragraph (g)(1) of this section) in a
ously posted on the platform with a
manner that ensures that the load is
plate or other permanent marking.
evenly divided among the bridle legs.
(f) Personnel platform loading.
(3) Rigging hardware (including wire
(1) The personnel platform must not rope, shackles, rings, master links, and
be loaded in excess of its rated capac- other rigging hardware) and hooks
ity. must be capable of supporting, without
(2) Use. failure, at least five times the max-
(i) Personnel platforms must be used imum intended load applied or trans-
only for employees, their tools, and the mitted to that component. Where rota-
materials necessary to do their work. tion resistant rope is used, the slings
Platforms must not be used to hoist must be capable of supporting without
materials or tools when not hoisting failure at least ten times the maximum
personnel. intended load.
(ii) Exception: Materials and tools to (4) Eyes in wire rope slings must be
be used during the lift, if secured and fabricated with thimbles.
distributed in accordance with para- (5) Bridles and associated rigging for
graph (f)(3) of this section may be in suspending the personnel platform
the platform for trial lifts. must be used only for the platform and
(3) Materials and tools must be: the necessary employees, their tools
(i) Secured to prevent displacement. and materials necessary to do their
(ii) Evenly distributed within the work. The bridles and associated rig-
confines of the platform while it is sus- ging must not have been used for any
pended. purpose other than hoisting personnel.
653
(h) Trial lift and inspection. (i) The platform must be hoisted a
(1) A trial lift with the unoccupied few inches with the personnel and ma-
personnel platform loaded at least to terials/tools on board and inspected by
the anticipated liftweight must be a competent person to ensure that it is
made from ground level, or any other secure and properly balanced.
location where employees will enter (ii) The following conditions must be
the platform, to each location at which determined by a competent person to
the platform is to be hoisted and posi- exist before the lift of personnel pro-
tioned. Where there is more than one ceeds:
location to be reached from a single (A) Hoist ropes must be free of defi-
set-up position, either individual trial ciencies in accordance with
lifts for each location, or a single trial § 1926.1413(a).
lift, in which the platform is moved se- (B) Multiple part lines must not be
quentially to each location, must be twisted around each other.
performed; the method selected must (C) The primary attachment must be
be the same as the method that will be centered over the platform.
used to hoist the personnel. (D) If the load rope is slack, the
(2) The trial lift must be performed hoisting system must be inspected to
immediately prior to each shift in ensure that all ropes are properly seat-
which personnel will be hoisted. In ad- ed on drums and in sheaves.
dition, the trial lift must be repeated (6) Any condition found during the
prior to hoisting employees in each of trial lift and subsequent inspection(s)
the following circumstances: that fails to meet a requirement of this
(i) The equipment is moved and set standard or otherwise creates a safety
up in a new location or returned to a hazard must be corrected before hoist-
previously used location. ing personnel. (See § 1926.1417 for tag-
(ii) The lift route is changed, unless out and related requirements.)
the competent person determines that (i) [Reserved]
the new route presents no new factors (j) Proof testing.
affecting safety. (1) At each jobsite, prior to hoisting
(3) The competent person must deter- employees on the personnel platform,
mine that: and after any repair or modification,
(i) Safety devices and operational the platform and rigging must be proof
aids required by this section are acti- tested to 125 percent of the platform’s
vated and functioning properly. Other rated capacity. The proof test may be
safety devices and operational aids done concurrently with the trial lift.
must meet the requirements of (2) The platform must be lowered by
§ 1926.1415 and § 1926.1416. controlled load lowering, braked, and
(ii) Nothing interferes with the held in a suspended position for a min-
equipment or the personnel platform in imum of five minutes with the test
the course of the trial lift. load evenly distributed on the plat-
(iii) The lift will not exceed 50 perform.
cent of the equipment’s rated capacity (3) After proof testing, a competent
at any time during the lift. person must inspect the platform and
(iv) The load radius to be used during rigging to determine if the test has
the lift has been accurately deter- been passed. If any deficiencies are
mined. found that pose a safety hazard, the
(4) Immediately after the trial lift, platform and rigging must not be used
the competent person must: to hoist personnel unless the defi-
(i) Conduct a visual inspection of the ciencies are corrected, the test is re-
equipment, base support or ground, and peated, and a competent person deter-
personnel platform, to determine mines that the test has been passed.
whether the trial lift has exposed any (See § 1926.1417 for tag-out and related
defect or problem or produced any ad- requirements.)
verse effect. (4) Personnel hoisting must not be
(ii) Confirm that, upon the comple- conducted until the competent person
tion of the trial lift process, the test determines that the platform and rig-
weight has been removed. ging have successfully passed the proof
(5) Immediately prior to each lift: test.
654
(k) Work practices. (iii) The platform operating manual
(1) Hoisting of the personnel platform must be in the platform or on the
must be performed in a slow, con- equipment.
trolled, cautious manner, with no sud- (8) Environmental conditions.
den movements of the equipment or (i) Wind. When wind speed (sustained
the platform. or gusts) exceeds 20 mph at the per-
(2) Platform occupants must: sonnel platform, a qualified person
(i) Keep all parts of the body inside must determine if, in light of the wind
the platform during raising, lowering, conditions, it is not safe to lift per-
and horizontal movement. This provi- sonnel. If it is not, the lifting operation
sion does not apply to an occupant of must not begin (or, if already in
the platform when necessary to posi- progress, must be terminated).
tion the platform or while performing (ii) Other weather and environmental
the duties of a signal person. conditions. A qualified person must de-
(ii) Not stand, sit on, or work from termine if, in light of indications of
the top or intermediate rail or dangerous weather conditions, or other
toeboard, or use any other means/de- impending or existing danger, it is not
vice to raise their working height. safe to lift personnel. If it is not, the
lifting operation must not begin (or, if
(iii) Not pull the platform out of
already in progress, must be termi-
plumb in relation to the hoisting
nated).
equipment.
(9) Employees being hoisted must re-
(3) Before employees exit or enter a
main in direct communication with the
hoisted personnel platform that is not
signal person (where used), or the oper-
landed, the platform must be secured
ator.
to the structure where the work is to
(10) Fall protection.
be performed, unless the employer can
demonstrate that securing to the (i) Except over water, employees oc-
cupying the personnel platform must
structure would create a greater haz-
be provided and use a personal fall ar-
ard.
rest system. The system must be at-
(4) If the platform is tied to the tached to a structural member within
structure, the operator must not move the personnel platform. When working
the platform until the operator re- over or near water, the requirements of
ceives confirmation that it is freely § 1926.106 apply.
suspended. (ii) The fall arrest system, including
(5) Tag lines must be used when nec- the attachment point (anchorage) used
essary to control the platform. to comply with paragraph (i) of this
(6) Platforms without controls. Where section, must meet the requirements in
the platform is not equipped with con- § 1926.502.
trols, the equipment operator must re- (11) Other load lines.
main at the equipment controls, on (i) No lifts must be made on any
site, and in view of the equipment, at other of the equipment’s load lines
all times while the platform is occu- while personnel are being hoisted, ex-
pied. cept in pile driving operations.
(7) Platforms with controls. Where the (ii) Factory-produced boom-mounted
platform is equipped with controls, all personnel platforms that incorporate a
of the following must be met at all winch as original equipment. Loads are
times while the platform is occupied: permitted to be hoisted by such a
(i) The occupant using the controls in winch while employees occupy the per-
the platform must be a qualified person sonnel platform only where the load on
with respect to their use, including the the winch line does not exceed 500
safe limitations of the equipment and pounds and does not exceed the rated
hazards associated with its operation. capacity of the winch and platform.
(ii) The equipment operator must be (12) Traveling—equipment other than
at a set of equipment controls that in- derricks.
clude boom and swing functions of the (i) Hoisting of employees while the
equipment, and must be on site and in equipment is traveling is prohibited,
view of the equipment. except for:
655
(A) Equipment that travels on fixed (o) Hoisting personnel in drill shafts.
rails; or When hoisting employees into and out
(B) Where the employer demonstrates of drill shafts that are up to and in-
that there is no less hazardous way to cluding 8 feet in diameter, all of the
perform the work. following requirements must be met:
(C) This exception does not apply to (1) The employee must be in either a
rubber-tired equipment. personnel platform or on a boatswain’s
(ii) Where employees are hoisted chair.
while the equipment is traveling, all of (2) If using a personnel platform,
the following criteria must be met: paragraphs (a) through (n) of this sec-
(A) Equipment travel must be re- tion apply.
stricted to a fixed track or runway. (3) If using a boatswain’s chair:
(B) Where a runway is used, it must (i) The following paragraphs of this
be a firm, level surface designed, pre- section apply: (a), (c), (d)(1), (d)(3),
pared and designated as a path of trav- (d)(4), (e)(1), (e)(2), (e)(3), (f)(1), (f)(2)(i),
el for the weight and configuration of (f)(3)(i), (g), (h), (k)(1), (k)(6), (k)(8),
the equipment being used to lift and (k)(9), (k)(11)(i), (m), (n). Where the
travel with the personnel platform. An terms ‘‘personnel platform’’ or ‘‘plat-
existing surface may be used as long as form’’ are used in these paragraphs,
it meets these criteria. substitute them with ‘‘boatswain’s
(C) Equipment travel must be limited chair.’’
to boom length. (ii) A signal person must be stationed
at the shaft opening.
(D) The boom must be parallel to the
(iii) The employee must be hoisted in
direction of travel, except where it is
a slow, controlled descent and ascent.
safer to do otherwise.
(iv) The employee must use personal
(E) A complete trial run must be per-
fall protection equipment, including a
formed to test the route of travel be-
full body harness, attached inde-
fore employees are allowed to occupy
pendent of the crane/derrick.
the platform. This trial run can be per-
(v) The fall protection equipment
formed at the same time as the trial
must meet the applicable requirements
lift required by paragraph (h) of this
in § 1926.502.
section which tests the lift route.
(vi) The boatswain’s chair itself (ex-
(13) Traveling—derricks. Derricks are cluding the personal fall arrest system
prohibited from traveling while per- anchorages), must be capable of sup-
sonnel are hoisted. porting, without failure, its own
(l) [Reserved] weight and at least five times the max-
(m) Pre-lift meeting. A pre-lift meet- imum intended load.
ing must be: (vii) No more than one person must
(1) Held to review the applicable re- be hoisted at a time.
quirements of this section and the pro- (p) Hoisting personnel for pile driving
cedures that will be followed. operations. When hoisting an employee
(2) Attended by the equipment oper- in pile driving operations, the fol-
ator, signal person (if used for the lift), lowing requirements must be met:
employees to be hoisted, and the per- (1) The employee must be in a per-
son responsible for the task to be personnel platform or boatswain’s chair.
formed. (2) For lattice boom cranes: Clearly
(3) Held prior to the trial lift at each mark the cable (so that it can easily be
new work location, and must be re- seen by the operator) at a point that
peated for any employees newly as- will give the operator sufficient time
signed to the operation. to stop the hoist to prevent two-block-
(n) Hoisting personnel near power lines. ing, or use a spotter who is in direct
Hoisting personnel within 20 feet of a communication with the operator to
power line that is up to 350 kV, and inform the operator when this point is
hoisting personnel within 50 feet of a reached. For telescopic boom cranes:
power line that is over 350 kV, is pro- Clearly mark the cable (so that it can
hibited, except for work covered by be easily seen by the operator) at a
subpart V of this part (Power Trans- point that will give the operator suffi-
mission and Distribution). cient time to stop the hoist to prevent
656
two-blocking, and use a spotter who is (ii) The transfer device must be used
in direct communication with the oper- only for transferring workers.
ator to inform the operator when this (iii) The number of workers occu-
point is reached. pying the transfer device must not ex-
(3) If using a personnel platform, ceed the maximum number it was de-
paragraphs (b) through (n) of this sec- signed to hold.
tion apply. (iv) Each employee must wear a U.S.
(4) If using a boatswain’s chair: Coast Guard personal flotation device
(i) The following paragraphs of this approved for industrial use.
section apply: (a), (c), (d)(1), (d)(3),
(s) Hoisting personnel for storage-tank
(d)(4), (e)(1), (e)(2), (e)(3), (f)(1), (f)(2)(i),
(f)(3)(i), (g), (h), (j), (k)(1), (k)(6), (k)(8), (steel or concrete), shaft and chimney op-
(k)(9), (k)(11)(i), (m), and (n). Where the erations. When hoisting an employee in
terms ‘‘personnel platform’’ or ‘‘plat- storage tank (steel or concrete), shaft
form’’ are used in these paragraphs, and chimney operations, the following
substitute them with ‘‘boatswains requirements must be met:
chair.’’ (1) The employee must be in a per-
(ii) The employee must be hoisted in sonnel platform except when the em-
a slow, controlled descent and ascent. ployer can demonstrate that use of a
(iii) The employee must use personal personnel platform is infeasible; in
fall protection equipment, including a such a case, a boatswain’s chair must
full body harness, independently at- be used.
tached to the lower load block or over- (2) If using a personnel platform,
haul ball. paragraphs (a) through (n) of this sec-
(iv) The fall protection equipment tion apply.
must meet the applicable requirements (3) If using a boatswain’s chair:
in § 1926.502. (i) The following paragraphs of this
(v) The boatswain’s chair itself (ex-
section apply: (a), (c), (d)(1), (d)(3),
cluding the personal fall arrest system
(d)(4), (e)(1), (e)(2), (e)(3), (f)(1), (f)(2)(i),
anchorages), must be capable of sup-
(f)(3)(i), (g), (h), (k)(1), (k)(6), (k)(8),
porting, without failure, its own
weight and at least five times the max- (k)(9), (k)(11)(i), (m), (n). Where the
imum intended load. terms ‘‘personnel platform’’ or ‘‘plat-
(vi) No more than one person must be form’’ are used in these paragraphs,
hoisted at a time. substitute them with ‘‘boatswains
(q) [Reserved] chair.’’
(r) Hoisting personnel for marine trans- (ii) The employee must be hoisted in
fer. When hoisting employees solely for a slow, controlled descent and ascent.
transfer to or from a marine worksite, (iii) The employee must use personal
the following requirements must be fall protection equipment, including a
met: full body harness, attached inde-
(1) The employee must be in either a pendent of the crane/derrick. When
personnel platform or a marine-hoisted there is no adequate structure for at-
personnel transfer device. tachment of personal fall arrest equip-
(2) If using a personnel platform, ment as required in § 1926.502(d)(15), the
paragraphs (a) through (n) of this sec- attachment must be to the lower load
tion apply. block or overhaul ball.
(3) If using a marine-hoisted per- (iv) The fall protection equipment
sonnel transfer device:
must meet the applicable requirements
(i) The following paragraphs of this
in § 1926.502.
section apply: (a), (c)(2), (d)(1), (d)(3),
(d)(4), (e)(1) through (5), (e)(12), (f)(1), (v) The boatswain’s chair itself (ex-
(g), (h), (j), (k)(1), (k)(8), (k)(9), cluding the personal fall arrest system
(k)(10)(ii), (k)(11)(i), (k)(12), (m), and anchorages), must be capable of sup-
(n). Where the terms ‘‘personnel plat- porting, without failure, its own
form’’ or ‘‘platform’’ are used in these weight and at least five times the max-
paragraphs, substitute them with imum intended load.
‘‘marine-hoisted personnel transfer de- (vi) No more than one person must be
vice.’’ hoisted at a time.
657
§ 1926.1432 Multiple-crane/derrick (2) In section 5–1.1.2 (‘‘Load Ratings—

lifts—supplemental requirements. Where Structural Competence Governs
Lifting Performance’’), paragraph (b).
(a) Plan development. Before begin-
(3) Section 5–1.2 (‘‘Stability (Back-
ning a crane/derrick operation in which
ward and Forward)’’).
more than one crane/derrick will be
(4) In section 5–1.3.1 (‘‘Boom Hoist
supporting the load, the operation
Mechanism’’), paragraphs (a), (b)(1) and
must be planned. The planning must
(b)(2), except that when using rotation
meet the following requirements:
resistant rope, § 1926.1414(c)(4)(ii)(A) ap-
(1) The plan must be developed by a plies.
qualified person. (5) In section 5–1.3.2 (‘‘Load Hoist
(2) The plan must be designed to en- Mechanism’’), paragraphs (a)(2)
sure that the requirements of this sub- through (a)(4) (including subpara-
part are met. graphs), (b) (including subparagraphs),
(3) Where the qualified person deter- (c) (first sentence only) and (d).
mines that engineering expertise is (6) Section 5–1.3.3 (‘‘Telescoping
needed for the planning, the employer Boom’’).
must ensure that it is provided. (7) Section 5–1.4 (‘‘Swing Mecha-
(b) Plan implementation. nism’’).
(1) The multiple-crane/derrick lift (8) In section 5–1.5 (‘‘Crane Travel’’),
must be directed by a person who all provisions except 5–1.5.3(d).
meets the criteria for both a competent (9) In section 5–1.6 (‘‘Controls’’), all
person and a qualified person, or by a provisions except 5–1.6.1 (c).
competent person who is assisted by (10) Section 5–1.7.4 (‘‘Sheaves’’).
one or more qualified persons (lift di- (11) Section 5–1.7.5 (‘‘Sheave sizes’’).
rector). (12) In section 5–1.9.1 (‘‘Booms’’),
(2) The lift director must review the paragraph (f).
plan in a meeting with all workers who (13) Section 5–1.9.3 (‘‘Outriggers’’).
will be involved with the operation. (14) Section 5–1.9.4 (‘‘Locomotive
Crane Equipment’’).
§ 1926.1433 Design, construction and (15) Section 5–1.9.7 (‘‘Clutch and
testing. Brake Protection’’).
The following requirements apply to (16) In section 5–1.9.11 (‘‘Miscella-
equipment that has a manufacturer- neous equipment’’), paragraphs (a), (c),
rated hoisting/lifting capacity of more (e), and (f).
than 2,000 pounds. (c) Prototype testing: mobile (includ-
(a) Crawler, truck and locomotive ing crawler and truck) and locomotive
cranes manufactured prior to Novem- cranes manufactured on or after No-
ber 8, 2010 must meet the applicable re- vember 8, 2010 must meet the prototype
quirements for design, construction, testing requirements in Test Option A
and testing as prescribed in ANSI or Test Option B of this section. Tower
B30.5–1968 (incorporated by reference, cranes manufactured on or after No-
see § 1926.6), PCSA Std. No. 2 (1968) (in- vember 8, 2010 must meet the prototype
corporated by reference, see § 1926.6), testing requirements in BS EN
the requirements in paragraph (b) of 14439:2006 (incorporated by reference,
this section, or the applicable DIN see § 1926.6).
NOTE: Prototype testing of crawler, loco-
standards that were in effect at the
motive and truck cranes manufactured prior
time of manufacture. to November 8, 2010 must conform to para-
(b) Mobile (including crawler and graph (a) of this section.
truck) and locomotive cranes manufac- (1) Test Option A.
tured on or after November 8, 2010 must (i) The following applies to equip-
meet the following portions of ASME ment with cantilevered booms (such as
B30.5–2004 (incorporated by reference, hydraulic boom cranes): All the tests
see § 1926.6) as applicable: listed in SAE J1063 (Nov. 1993) Table 1
(1) In section 5–1.1.1 (‘‘Load Ratings— (incorporated by reference, see § 1926.6)
Where Stability Governs Lifting Per- must be performed to load all critical
formance’’), paragraphs (a)–(d) (includ- structural elements to their respective
ing subparagraphs). limits. All the strength margins listed
658
in SAE J1063 (Nov. 1993) Table 2 (incor- (i) A complete range of the manufac-
porated by reference, see § 1926.6) must turer’s equipment rated capacities, as
be met. follows:
(ii) The following applies to equip- (A) At all manufacturer approved op-
ment with pendant supported lattice erating radii, boom angles, work areas,
booms: All the tests listed in SAE J987 boom lengths and configurations, jib
(Jun. 2003) Table 1 (incorporated by ref- lengths and angles (or offset).
erence, see § 1926.6) must be performed (B) Alternate ratings for use and non-
to load all critical structural elements use of option equipment which affects
to their respective limits. All the rated capacities, such as outriggers,
strength margins listed in SAE J987 stabilizers, and extra counterweights.
(Jun. 2003) Table 2 (incorporated by ref- (ii) A work area chart for which ca-
erence, see § 1926.6) must be met. pacities are listed in the load chart.
(2) Test Option B. The testing and (NOTE: An example of this type of chart
verification requirements of BS EN is in ASME B30.5–2004, section 5–1.1.3,
13000:2004 (incorporated by reference, Figure 11).
see § 1926.6) must be met. In applying (iii) The work area figure and load
BS EN 13000:2004, the following addi- chart must clearly indicate the areas
tional requirements must be met: where no load is to be handled.
(iv) Recommended reeving for the
(i) The following applies to equip-
hoist lines must be shown.
ment with cantilevered booms (such as
(v) Recommended parts of hoist
hydraulic boom cranes): The analysis
reeving, size, and type of wire rope for
methodology (computer modeling)
various equipment loads.
must demonstrate that all load cases
(vi) Recommended boom hoist
listed in SAE J1063 (Nov. 1993) (incor-
reeving diagram, where applicable;
porated by reference, see § 1926.6) meet
size, type and length of wire rope.
the strength margins listed in SAE
(vii) Tire pressure (where applicable).
J1063 (Nov. 1993) Table 2.
(viii) Caution or warnings relative to
(ii) The following applies to equip- limitations on equipment and oper-
ment with pendant supported lattice ating procedures, including an indica-
booms: The analysis methodology tion of the least stable direction.
(computer modeling) must dem- (ix) Position of the gantry and re-
onstrate that all load cases listed in quirements for intermediate boom sus-
SAE J987 (Jun. 2003) (incorporated by pension (where applicable).
reference, see § 1926.6) meet the (x) Instructions for boom erection
strength margins listed in SAE J987 and conditions under which the boom,
(Jun. 2003) Table 2. or boom and jib combinations, may be
(iii) Analysis verification. The physical raised or lowered.
testing requirements under SAE J1063 (xi) Whether the hoist holding mech-
(Nov. 1993) (incorporated by reference, anism is automatically or manually
see § 1926.6) and SAE J987 (Jun. 2003) (in- controlled, whether free fall is avail-
corporated by reference, see § 1926.6) able, or any combination of these.
must be met unless the reliability of (xii) The maximum telescopic travel
the analysis methodology (computer length of each boom telescopic section.
modeling) has been demonstrated by a (xiii) Whether sections are telescoped
documented history of verification manually or with power.
through strain gauge measuring or (xiv) The sequence and procedure for
strain gauge measuring in combination extending and retracting the telescopic
with other physical testing. boom section.
(d) All equipment covered by this (xv) Maximum loads permitted dur-
subpart must meet the following re- ing the boom extending operation, and
quirements: any limiting conditions or cautions.
(1) Rated capacity and related informa- (xvi) Hydraulic relief valve settings
tion. The information available in the specified by the manufacturer.
cab (see § 1926.1417(c)) regarding ‘‘rated (2) Load hooks (including latched and
capacity’’ and related information unlatched types), ball assemblies and
must include, at a minimum, the fol- load blocks must be of sufficient
lowing information: weight to overhaul the line from the
659
highest hook position for boom or ficient to give the operator a view of
boom and jib lengths and the number the boom point at all times.
of parts of the line in use. (B) Windows may have sections de-
(3) Hook and ball assemblies and load signed to be opened or readily removed.
blocks must be marked with their Windows with sections designed to be
rated capacity and weight. opened must be designed so that they
(4) Latching hooks. can be secured to prevent inadvertent
(i) Hooks must be equipped with closure.
latches, except where the requirements (C) Windows must be of safety glass
of paragraph (d)(4)(ii) of this section or material with similar optical and
are met. safety properties, that introduce no
(ii) Hooks without latches, or with visible distortion or otherwise obscure
latches removed or disabled, must not visibility that interferes with the safe
be used unless: operation of the equipment.
(A) A qualified person has determined (iv) A clear passageway must be pro-
that it is safer to hoist and place the vided from the operator’s station to an
load without latches (or with the exit door on the operator’s side.
latches removed/tied-back). (v) Areas of the cab roof that serve as
(B) Routes for the loads are pre- a workstation for rigging, maintenance
planned to ensure that no employee is or other equipment-related tasks must
required to work in the fall zone except be capable of supporting 250 pounds
for employees necessary for the hook- without permanent distortion.
ing or unhooking of the load. (8) Belts, gears, shafts, pulleys,
(iii) The latch must close the throat sprockets, spindles, drums, fly wheels,
opening and be designed to retain chains, and other parts or components
slings or other lifting devices/acces- that reciprocate, rotate or otherwise
sories in the hook when the rigging ap- move must be guarded where contact
paratus is slack. by employees (except for maintenance
(5) Posted warnings. Posted warnings and repair employees) is possible in the
required by this subpart as well as performance of normal duties.
those originally supplied with the
(9) All exhaust pipes, turbochargers,
equipment by the manufacturer must
and charge air coolers must be insu-
be maintained in legible condition.
lated or guarded where contact by em-
(6) An accessible fire extinguisher
ployees (except for maintenance and
must be on the equipment.
repair employees) is possible in the
(7) Cabs. Equipment with cabs must
performance of normal duties.
meet the following requirements:
(i) Cabs must be designed with a form (10) Hydraulic and pneumatic lines
of adjustable ventilation and method must be protected from damage to the
for clearing the windshield for main- extent feasible.
taining visibility and air circulation. (11) The equipment must be designed
Examples of means for adjustable ven- so that exhaust fumes are not dis-
tilation include air conditioner or win- charged in the cab and are discharged
dow that can be opened (for ventilation in a direction away from the operator.
and air circulation); examples of means (12) Friction mechanisms. Where fric-
for maintaining visibility include heat- tion mechanisms (such as brakes and
er (for preventing windshield icing), de- clutches) are used to control the boom
froster, fan, windshield wiper. hoist or load line hoist, they must be:
(ii) Cab doors (swinging, sliding) (i) Of a size and thermal capacity suf-
must be designed to prevent inad- ficient to control all rated loads with
vertent opening or closing while trav- the minimum recommended reeving.
eling or operating the machine. Swing- (ii) Adjustable to permit compensa-
ing doors adjacent to the operator tion for lining wear to maintain proper
must open outward. Sliding operator operation.
doors must open rearward. (13) Hydraulic load hoists. Hydraulic
(iii) Windows. drums must have an integrally mount-
(A) The cab must have windows in ed holding device or internal static
front and on both sides of the operator. brake to prevent load hoist movement
Forward vertical visibility must be suf- in the event of hydraulic failure.
660
(e) The employer’s obligations under scription of the proposed modification/
paragraphs (a) through (c) and (d)(7) addition, is asked to approve the modi-
through (13) of this section are met fication/addition, agrees to review the
where the equipment has not changed technical merits of the proposal, but
(except in accordance with § 1926.1434 fails to complete the review of the pro-
(Equipment modifications)) and it can posal within 120 days of the date it was
refer to documentation from the manu- provided the detailed description of the
facturer showing that the equipment proposed modification/addition, and
has been designed, constructed and the requirements of paragraphs (a)(2)(i)
tested in accordance with those para- and (ii) of this section are met.
graphs. (5) Multiple manufacturers of equip-
ment designed for use on marine work
§ 1926.1434 Equipment modifications.
sites. The equipment is designed for ma-
(a) Modifications or additions which rine work sites, contains major struc-
affect the capacity or safe operation of tural components from more than one
the equipment are prohibited except manufacturer, and the requirements of
where the requirements of paragraphs paragraphs (a)(2)(i) and (ii) of this sec-
(a)(1), (a)(2), (a)(3), (a)(4), or (a)(5) of tion are met.
this section are met. (b) Modifications or additions which
(1) Manufacturer review and approval. affect the capacity or safe operation of
(i) The manufacturer approves the the equipment are prohibited where the
modifications/additions in writing. manufacturer, after a review of the
(ii) The load charts, procedures, in- technical safety merits of the proposed
struction manuals and instruction modification/addition, rejects the pro-
plates/tags/decals are modified as nec- posal and explains the reasons for the
essary to accord with the modification/ rejection in a written response. If the
addition. manufacturer rejects the proposal but
(iii) The original safety factor of the does not explain the reasons for the re-
equipment is not reduced. jection in writing, the employer may
(2) Manufacturer refusal to review re- treat this as a manufacturer refusal to
quest. The manufacturer is provided a review the request under paragraph
detailed description of the proposed (a)(2) of this section.
modification/addition, is asked to ap-
(c) The provisions in paragraphs (a)
prove the modification/addition, but it
and (b) of this section do not apply to
declines to review the technical merits
modifications made or approved by the
of the proposal or fails, within 30 days,
U.S. military.
to acknowledge the request or initiate
the review, and all of the following are § 1926.1435 Tower cranes.
met:
(i) A registered professional engineer (a) This section contains supple-
who is a qualified person with respect mental requirements for tower cranes;
to the equipment involved: all sections of this subpart apply to
(A) Approves the modification/addi- tower cranes unless specified other-
tion and specifies the equipment con- wise.
figurations to which that approval ap- (b) Erecting, climbing and dismantling.
plies, and (1) Section 1926.1403 (Assembly/Dis-
(B) Modifies load charts, procedures, assembly—selection of manufacturer
instruction manuals and instruction or employer procedures), § 1926.1404 (As-
plates/tags/decals as necessary to ac- sembly/Disassembly—general require-
cord with the modification/addition. ments (applies to all assembly and dis-
(ii) The original safety factor of the assembly operations)), § 1926.1405 (Dis-
equipment is not reduced. assembly—additional requirements for
(3) Unavailable manufacturer. The dismantling of booms and jibs (applies
manufacturer is unavailable and the to both the use of manufacturer proce-
requirements of paragraphs (a)(2)(i) dures and employer procedures)), and
and (ii) of this section are met. § 1926.1406 (Assembly/Disassembly—em-
(4) Manufacturer does not complete the ployer procedures—general require-
review within 120 days of the request. The ments), apply to tower cranes (except
manufacturer is provided a detailed de- as otherwise specified), except that the
661
term ‘‘assembly/disassembly’’ is re- (7) Climbing procedures. Prior to, and
placed by ‘‘erecting, climbing and dis- during, all climbing procedures (includ-
mantling,’’ and the term ‘‘dis- ing inside climbing and top climbing),
assembly’’ is replaced by ‘‘disman- the employer must:
tling.’’ (i) Comply with all manufacturer
(2) Dangerous areas (self-erecting tower prohibitions.
cranes). In addition to the requirements (ii) Have a registered professional en-
in § 1926.1404(e), for self-erecting tower gineer verify that the host structure is
cranes, the following applies: Employ- strong enough to sustain the forces im-
ees must not be in or under the tower, posed through the braces, brace an-
jib, or rotating portion of the crane chorages and supporting floors.
during erecting, climbing and disman- (8) Counterweight/ballast.
tling operations until the crane is se- (i) Equipment must not be erected,
cured in a locked position and the com- dismantled or operated without the
petent person in charge indicates it is amount and position of counterweight
safe to enter this area, unless the man- and/or ballast in place as specified by
ufacturer’s instructions direct other- the manufacturer or a registered pro-
wise and only the necessary personnel fessional engineer familiar with the
are permitted in this area. equipment.
(3) Foundations and structural sup- (ii) The maximum counterweight
ports. Tower crane foundations and and/or ballast specified by the manu-
structural supports (including both the facturer or registered professional en-
portions of the structure used for sup- gineer familiar with the equipment
port and the means of attachment) must not be exceeded.
must be designed by the manufacturer (c) Signs. The size and location of
or a registered professional engineer. signs installed on tower cranes must be
(4) Addressing specific hazards. The rein accordance with manufacturer speci-
quirements in § 1926.1404(h)(1) through fications. Where these are unavailable,
(9) apply. In addition, the A/D director a registered professional engineer fa-
must address the following: miliar with the type of equipment in-
(i) Foundations and structural sup- volved must approve in writing the size
ports. The A/D director must determine and location of any signs.
that tower crane foundations and (d) Safety devices.
structural supports are installed in ac- (1) Section 1926.1415 does not apply to
cordance with their design. tower cranes.
(ii) Loss of backward stability. Back- (2) The following safety devices are
ward stability before swinging self required on all tower cranes unless oth-
erecting cranes or cranes on traveling erwise specified:
or static undercarriages. (i) Boom stops on luffing boom type
(iii) Wind speed. Wind must not ex- tower cranes.
ceed the speed recommended by the (ii) Jib stops on luffing boom type
manufacturer or, where manufacturer tower cranes if equipped with a jib at-
does not specify this information, the tachment.
speed determined by a qualified person. (iii) Travel rail end stops at both
(5) Plumb tolerance. Towers must be ends of travel rail.
erected plumb to the manufacturer’s (iv) Travel rail clamps on all travel
tolerance and verified by a qualified bogies.
person. Where the manufacturer does (v) Integrally mounted check valves
not specify plumb tolerance, the crane on all load supporting hydraulic cyl-
tower must be plumb to a tolerance of inders.
at least 1:500 (approximately 1 inch in (vi) Hydraulic system pressure lim-
40 feet). iting device.
(6) Multiple tower crane jobsites. On (vii) The following brakes, which
jobsites where more than one fixed jib must automatically set in the event of
(hammerhead) tower crane is installed, pressure loss or power failure, are re-
the cranes must be located such that quired:
no crane can come in contact with the (A) A hoist brake on all hoists.
structure of another crane. Cranes are (B) Swing brake.
permitted to pass over one another. (C) Trolley brake.
662
(D) Rail travel brake. (i) Trolley travel limiting device. The
(viii) Deadman control or forced neu- travel of the trolley must be restricted
tral return control (hand) levers. at both ends of the jib by a trolley
(ix) Emergency stop switch at the op- travel limiting device to prevent the
erator’s station. trolley from running into the trolley
(x) Trolley end stops must be pro- end stops. Temporary alternative meas-
vided at both ends of travel of the trol- ures:
ley. (A) Option A. The trolley rope must
(3) Proper operation required. Oper- be marked (so it can be seen by the op-
ations must not begin unless the de- erator) at a point that will give the op-
vices listed in this section are in proper erator sufficient time to stop the trol-
working order. If a device stops work- ley prior to the end stops.
ing properly during operations, the op- (B) Option B. A spotter who is in di-
erator must safely stop operations. The rect communication with the operator
equipment must be taken out of serv- must be used when operations are con-
ice, and operations must not resume ducted within 10 feet of the outer or
until the device is again working prop- inner trolley end stops.
erly. See § 1926.1417(f). Alternative (ii) Boom hoist limiting device. The
measures are not permitted to be used. range of the boom must be limited at
(e) Operational aids. the minimum and maximum radius.
(1) Section 1926.1416 does not apply to Temporary alternative measures: Clearly
tower cranes. mark the cable (so it can be seen by
(2) The devices listed in this section the operator) at a point that will give
(‘‘operational aids’’) are required on all the operator sufficient time to stop the
tower cranes covered by this subpart, boom hoist within the minimum and
unless otherwise specified. maximum boom radius, or use a spot-
(3) Operations must not begin unless ter who is in direct communication
the operational aids are in proper with the operator to inform the oper-
working order, except where the em- ator when this point is reached.
ployer meets the specified temporary (iii) Anti two-blocking device. The
alternative measures. More protective tower crane must be equipped with a
alternative measures specified by the device which automatically prevents
tower crane manufacturer, if any, must damage from contact between the load
be followed. See § 1926.1417(j) for addi- block, overhaul ball, or similar compo-
tional requirements. nent, and the boom tip (or fixed upper
(4) If an operational aid stops work- block or similar component). The de-
ing properly during operations, the op- vice(s) must prevent such damage at
erator must safely stop operations all points where two-blocking could
until the temporary alternative meas- occur. Temporary alternative measures:
ures are implemented or the device is Clearly mark the cable (so it can be
again working properly. If a replace- seen by the operator) at a point that
ment part is no longer available, the will give the operator sufficient time
use of a substitute device that per- to stop the hoist to prevent two-block-
forms the same type of function is per- ing, or use a spotter who is in direct
mitted and is not considered a modi- communication with the operator to
fication under § 1926.1434. inform the operator when this point is
(5) Category I operational aids and al- reached.
ternative measures. Operational aids (iv) Hoist drum lower limiting device.
listed in this paragraph that are not Tower cranes manufactured after No-
working properly must be repaired no vember 8, 2011 must be equipped with a
later than 7 calendar days after the de- device that prevents the last 2 wraps of
ficiency occurs. Exception: If the em- hoist cable from being spooled off the
ployer documents that it has ordered drum. Temporary alternative measures:
the necessary parts within 7 calendar Mark the cable (so it can be seen by
days of the occurrence of the defi- the operator) at a point that will give
ciency, the repair must be completed the operator sufficient time to stop the
within 7 calendar days of receipt of the hoist prior to last 2 wraps of hoist
parts. cable being spooled off the drum, or use
663
a spotter who is in direct communica- later than 30 calendar days after the
tion with the operator to inform the deficiency occurs. Exception: If the em-
operator when this point is reached ployer documents that it has ordered
(v) Load moment limiting device. The the necessary parts within 7 calendar
tower crane must have a device that days of the occurrence of the defi-
prevents moment overloading. Tem- ciency, and the part is not received in
porary alternative measures: A radius in- time to complete the repair in 30 cal-
dicating device must be used (if the endar days, the repair must be com-
tower crane is not equipped with a ra- pleted within 7 calendar days of receipt
dius indicating device, the radius must of the parts.
be measured to ensure the load is with- (i) Boom angle or hook radius indicator.
in the rated capacity of the crane). In (A) Luffing boom tower cranes must
addition, the weight of the load must have a boom angle indicator readable
be determined from a source recognized from the operator’s station.
by the industry (such as the load’s (B) Hammerhead tower cranes manu-
manufacturer), or by a calculation factured after November 8, 2011 must
method recognized by the industry have a hook radius indicator readable
(such as calculating a steel beam from from the operator’s station.
measured dimensions and a known per (C) Temporary alternative measures:
foot weight), or by other equally reli- Hook radii or boom angle must be de-
able means. This information must be termined by measuring the hook radii
provided to the operator prior to the or boom angle with a measuring device.
lift. (ii) Trolley travel deceleration device.
(vi) Hoist line pull limiting device. The The trolley speed must be automati-
capacity of the hoist must be limited cally reduced prior to the trolley
to prevent overloading, including each reaching the end limit in both direc-
individual gear ratio if equipped with a tions. Temporary alternative measure:
multiple speed hoist transmission. The employer must post a notice in the
Temporary alternative measures: The op- cab of the crane notifying the operator
erator must ensure that the weight of that the trolley travel deceleration de-
the load does not exceed the capacity vice is malfunctioning and instructing
of the hoist (including for each indi- the operator to take special care to re-
vidual gear ratio if equipped with a duce the trolley speed when approach-
multiple speed hoist transmission). ing the trolley end limits.
(vii) Rail travel limiting device. The (iii) Boom hoist deceleration device.
travel distance in each direction must The boom speed must be automatically
be limited to prevent the travel bogies reduced prior to the boom reaching the
from running into the end stops or minimum or maximum radius limit.
buffers. Temporary alternative measures: Temporary alternative measure: The em-
A spotter who is in direct communica- ployer must post a notice in the cab of
tion with the operator must be used the crane notifying the operator that
when operations are conducted within the boom hoist deceleration device is
10 feet of either end of the travel rail malfunctioning and instructing the op-
end stops; the spotter must inform the erator to take special care to reduce
operator of the distance of the travel the boom speed when approaching the
bogies from the end stops or buffers. minimum or maximum radius limits.
(viii) Boom hoist drum positive locking (iv) Load hoist deceleration device. The
device and control. The boom hoist load speed must be automatically re-
drum must be equipped with a control duced prior to the hoist reaching the
that will enable the operator to posi- upper limit. Temporary alternative meas-
tively lock the boom hoist drum from ure: The employer must post a notice
the cab. Temporary alternative measures: in the cab of the crane notifying the
The device must be manually set when operator that the load hoist decelera-
required if an electric, hydraulic or tion device is malfunctioning and in-
automatic control is not functioning. structing the operator to take special
(6) Category II operational aids and al- care to reduce the load speed when ap-
ternative measures. Operational aids proaching the upper limits.
listed in this paragraph that are not (v) Wind speed indicator. A device
working properly must be repaired no must be provided to display the wind
664
speed and must be mounted above the to any individual who conducts a
upper rotating structure on tower monthly inspection.
cranes. On self erecting cranes, it must (3) Post-erection inspection. In addition
be mounted at or above the jib level. to the requirements in § 1926.1412(c), the
Temporary alternative measures: Use of following requirements must be met:
wind speed information from a properly (i) A load test using certified
functioning indicating device on an- weights, or scaled weights using a cer-
other tower crane on the same site, or tified scale with a current certificate
a qualified person estimates the wind of calibration, must be conducted after
speed. each erection.
(vi) Load indicating device. Cranes (ii) The load test must be conducted
manufactured after November 8, 2011 in accordance with the manufacturer’s
must have a device that displays the instructions when available. Where
magnitude of the load on the hook. these instructions are unavailable, the
Displays that are part of load moment test must be conducted in accordance
limiting devices that display the load with written load test procedures de-
on the hook meet this requirement. veloped by a registered professional en-
Temporary alternative measures: The gineer familiar with the type of equip-
weight of the load must be determined ment involved.
from a source recognized by the indus- (4) Monthly. The following additional
try (such as the load’s manufacturer), items must be included:
or by a calculation method recognized (i) Tower (mast) bolts and other
by the industry (such as calculating a structural bolts (for loose or dislodged
steel beam from measured dimensions condition) from the base of the tower
and a known per foot weight), or by crane up or, if the crane is tied to or
other equally reliable means. This in- braced by the structure, those above
formation must be provided to the op- the upper-most brace support.
erator prior to the lift. (ii) The upper-most tie-in, braces,
(f) Inspections. floor supports and floor wedges where
(1) Section 1926.1412 (Inspections) ap- the tower crane is supported by the
plies to tower cranes, except that the structure, for loose or dislodged compo-
term ‘‘assembly’’ is replaced by ‘‘erec- nents.
tion.’’ Section 1926.1413 (Wire rope—in- (5) Annual. In addition to the items
spection) applies to tower cranes. that must be inspected under
(2) Pre-erection inspection. Before each § 1926.1412(f), all turntable and tower
crane component is erected, it must be bolts must be inspected for proper con-
inspected by a qualified person for dition and torque.
damage or excessive wear.
(i) The qualified person must pay par- § 1926.1436 Derricks.
ticular attention to components that (a) This section contains supple-
will be difficult to inspect thoroughly mental requirements for derricks,
during shift inspections. whether temporarily or permanently
(ii) If the qualified person determines mounted; all sections of this subpart
that a component is damaged or worn apply to derricks unless specified oth-
to the extent that it would create a erwise. A derrick is powered equipment
safety hazard if used on the crane, that consisting of a mast or equivalent
component must not be erected on the member that is held at or near the end
crane unless it is repaired and, upon re- by guys or braces, with or without a
inspection by the qualified person, boom, and its hoisting mechanism. The
found to no longer create a safety haz- mast/equivalent member and/or the
ard. load is moved by the hoisting mecha-
(iii) If the qualified person deter- nism (typically base-mounted) and op-
mines that, though not presently a erating ropes. Derricks include: A-
safety hazard, the component needs to frame, basket, breast, Chicago boom,
be monitored, the employer must en- gin pole (except gin poles used for erec-
sure that the component is checked in tion of communication towers), guy,
the monthly inspections. Any such de- shearleg, stiffleg, and variations of
termination must be documented, and such equipment.
the documentation must be available (b) Operation—procedures.
665
(1) Section 1926.1417 (Operation) ap- (iii) For guy derricks manufactured
plies except for § 1926.1417(c) (Accessi- after December 18, 1970, in addition to
bility of procedures). the information required in paragraph
(2) Load chart contents. Load charts (c)(2)(ii) of this section, the employer
must contain at least the following in- must have the following guy informa-
formation: tion from the manufacturer or a quali-
(i) Rated capacity at corresponding fied person, when not available from
ranges of boom angle or operating the manufacturer:
radii. (A) The amount of initial sag or ten-
(ii) Specific lengths of components to sion.
which the rated capacities apply. (B) The amount of tension in guy line
(iii) Required parts for hoist reeving. rope at anchor.
(iv) Size and construction of rope (iv) The mast base must permit the
must be included on the load chart or mast to rotate freely with allowance
in the operating manual. for slight tilting of the mast caused by
(3) Load chart location. guy slack.
(i) Permanent installations. For perma- (v) The mast cap must:
nently installed derricks with fixed (A) Permit the mast to rotate freely.
lengths of boom, guy, and mast, a load (B) Withstand tilting and cramping
chart must be posted where it is visible caused by the guy loads.
to personnel responsible for the oper- (C) Be secured to the mast to prevent
ation of the equipment. disengagement during erection.
(ii) Non-permanent installations. For (D) Be provided with means for at-
derricks that are not permanently in- taching guy ropes.
stalled, the load chart must be readily
(3) Stiffleg derricks.
available at the job site to personnel
(i) The mast must be supported in the
responsible for the operation of the
vertical position by at least two
equipment.
stifflegs; one end of each must be con-
(c) Construction.
nected to the top of the mast and the
(1) General requirements.
other end securely anchored.
(i) Derricks must be constructed to
(ii) The stifflegs must be capable of
meet all stresses imposed on members
withstanding the loads imposed at any
and components when installed and op-
point of operation within the load
erated in accordance with the manufac-
chart range.
turer’s/builder’s procedures and within
its rated capacity. (iii) The mast base must:
(ii) Welding of load sustaining mem- (A) Permit the mast to rotate freely
bers must conform to recommended (when necessary).
practices in ANSI/AWS D14.3–94 (incor- (B) Permit deflection of the mast
porated by reference, see § 1926.6) or without binding.
AWS D1.1/D1.1M:2002 (incorporated by (iv) The mast must be prevented from
reference, see § 1926.6). lifting out of its socket when the mast
(2) Guy derricks. is in tension.
(i) The minimum number of guys (v) The stiffleg connecting member
must be 6, with equal spacing, except at the top of the mast must:
where a qualified person or derrick (A) Permit the mast to rotate freely
manufacturer approves variations from (when necessary).
these requirements and revises the (B) Withstand the loads imposed by
rated capacity to compensate for such the action of the stifflegs.
variations. (C) Be secured so as to oppose sepa-
(ii) Guy derricks must not be used rating forces.
unless the employer has the following (4) Gin pole derricks.
guy information from the manufac- (i) Guy lines must be sized and spaced
turer or a qualified person, when not so as to make the gin pole stable in
available from the manufacturer: both boomed and vertical positions. Ex-
(A) The number of guys. ception: Where the size and/or spacing
(B) The spacing around the mast. of guy lines do not result in the gin
(C) The size, grade, and construction pole being stable in both boomed and
of rope to be used for each guy. vertical positions, the employer must
666
ensure that the derrick is not used in sections of ASME B30.7–2001 (incor-
an unstable position. porated by reference, see § 1926.6):
(ii) The base of the gin pole must per- (A) Sections 7–1.1 (‘‘Load ratings and
mit movement of the pole (when nec- markings’’).
essary). (B) Section 7–1.2 (‘‘Construction’’),
(iii) The gin pole must be anchored at except: 7–1.2.13 (‘‘Operator’s cab’’); 7–
the base against horizontal forces 1.2.15 (‘‘Fire extinguishers’’).
(when such forces are present). (C) Section 7–1.3 (‘‘Installation’’).
(5) Chicago boom derricks. The fittings (D) Applicable terms in section 7–0.2
for stepping the boom and for attach- (‘‘Definitions’’).
ing the topping lift must be arranged (ii) Load tests for new hoists. The em-
to: ployer must ensure that new hoists are
(i) Permit the derrick to swing at all load tested to a minimum of 110% of
permitted operating radii and mount- rated capacity, but not more than 125%
ing heights between fittings. of rated capacity, unless otherwise rec-
(ii) Accommodate attachment to the ommended by the manufacturer. This
upright member of the host structure. requirement is met where the manufac-
(iii) Withstand the forces applied turer has conducted this testing.
when configured and operated in ac- (iii) Repaired or modified hoists. Hoists
cordance with the manufacturer’s/ that have had repairs, modifications or
builder’s procedures and within its additions affecting their capacity or
rated capacity. safe operation must be evaluated by a
(iv) Prevent the boom or topping lift qualified person to determine if a load
from lifting out under tensile forces. test is necessary. If it is, load testing
(d) Anchoring and guying. must be conducted in accordance with
paragraphs (e)(2)(ii) and (iv) of this sec-
(1) Load anchoring data developed by
tion.
the manufacturer or a qualified person
(iv) Load test procedure. Load tests re-
must be used.
quired by paragraphs (e)(2)(ii) or
(2) Guy derricks.
(e)(2)(iii) of this section must be con-
(i) The mast base must be anchored. ducted as follows:
(ii) The guys must be secured to the (A) The test load must be hoisted a
ground or other firm anchorage. vertical distance to assure that the
(iii) The anchorage and guying must load is supported by the hoist and held
be designed to withstand maximum by the hoist brake(s).
horizontal and vertical forces encoun- (B) The test load must be lowered,
tered when operating within rated ca- stopped and held with the brake(s).
pacity with the particular guy slope (C) The hoist must not be used unless
and spacing specified for the applica- a competent person determines that
tion. the test has been passed.
(3) Stiffleg derricks. (f) Operational aids.
(i) The mast base and stifflegs must (1) Section 1926.1416 (Operational
be anchored. aids) applies, except for § 1926.1416(d)(1)
(ii) The mast base and stifflegs must (Boom hoist limiting device),
be designed to withstand maximum § 1926.1416(e)(1) (Boom angle or radius
horizontal and vertical forces encoun- indicator), and § 1926.1416(e)(4) (Load
tered when operating within rated ca- weighing and similar devices).
pacity with the particular stiffleg spac- (2) Boom angle aid. A boom angle indi-
ing and slope specified for the applica- cator is not required but if the derrick
tion. is not equipped with a functioning one,
(e) Swingers and hoists. the employer must ensure that either:
(1) The boom, swinger mechanisms (i) The boom hoist cable must be
and hoists must be suitable for the der- marked with caution and stop marks.
rick work intended and must be an- The stop marks must correspond to
chored to prevent displacement from maximum and minimum allowable
the imposed loads. boom angles. The caution and stop
(2) Hoists. marks must be in view of the operator,
(i) Base mounted drum hoists must or a spotter who is in direct commu-
meet the requirements in the following nication with the operator; or
667
(ii) An electronic or other device that (iii) Swinging in each direction
signals the operator in time to prevent through the full range of swing.
the boom from moving past its max- (iv) Actuating the anti two-block and
imum and minimum angles, or auto- boom hoist limit devices (if provided).
matically prevents such movement, is (v) Actuating locking, limiting and
used. indicating devices (if provided).
(3) Load weight/capacity devices. (3) Load test. Prior to initial use, new
(i) Derricks manufactured more than or reinstalled derricks must be load
one year after November 8, 2010 with a tested by a competent person. The test
maximum rated capacity over 6,000 load must meet the following require-
pounds must have at least one of the ments:
following: load weighing device, load (i) Test loads must be at least 100%
moment indicator, rated capacity indi- and no more than 110% of the rated ca-
cator, or rated capacity limiter. Tem- pacity, unless otherwise recommended
porary alternative measures: The weight by the manufacturer or qualified per-
of the load must be determined from a son, but in no event must the test load
source recognized by the industry (such be less than the maximum anticipated
as the load’s manufacturer), or by a load.
calculation method recognized by the (ii) The test must consist of:
industry (such as calculating a steel
(A) Hoisting the test load a few
beam from measured dimensions and a
inches and holding to verify that the
known per foot weight), or by other
equally reliable means. This informa- load is supported by the derrick and
tion must be provided to the operator held by the hoist brake(s).
prior to the lift. See § 1926.1417(j) for ad- (B) Swinging the derrick, if applica-
ditional requirements. ble, the full range of its swing, at the
(ii) A load weight/capacity device maximum allowable working radius for
that is not working properly must be the test load.
repaired no later than 30 days after the (C) Booming the derrick up and down
deficiency occurs. Exception: If the em- within the allowable working radius
ployer documents that it has ordered for the test load.
the necessary parts within 7 days of the (D) Lowering, stopping and holding
occurrence of the deficiency, and the the load with the brake(s).
part is not received in time to com- (iii) The derrick must not be used un-
plete the repair in 30 days, the repair less the competent person determines
must be completed within 7 days of re- that the test has been passed.
ceipt of the parts. (4) Documentation. Tests conducted
(g) Post-assembly approval and test- under this paragraph must be docu-
ing—new or reinstalled derricks. mented. The document must contain
(1) Anchorages. the date, test results and the name of
(i) Anchorages, including the struc- the tester. The document must be re-
ture to which the derrick is attached tained until the derrick is re-tested or
(if applicable), must be approved by a dismantled, whichever occurs first. All
qualified person. such documents must be available, dur-
(ii) If using a rock or hairpin anchoring the applicable document retention
age, the qualified person must deter- period, to all persons who conduct in-
mine if any special testing of the an- spections in accordance with § 1926.1412.
chorage is needed. If so, it must be (h) Load testing repaired or modified
tested accordingly. derricks. Derricks that have had re-
(2) Functional test. Prior to initial pairs, modifications or additions af-
use, new or reinstalled derricks must fecting the derrick’s capacity or safe
be tested by a competent person with operation must be evaluated by a
no hook load to verify proper oper- qualified person to determine if a load
ation. This test must include: test is necessary. If it is, load testing
(i) Lifting and lowering the hook(s) must be conducted and documented in
through the full range of hook travel. accordance with paragraph (g) of this
(ii) Raising and lowering the boom section.
through the full range of boom travel. (i) [Reserved]
668
(j) Power failure procedures. If power § 1926.1437 Floating cranes/derricks
fails during operations, the derrick op- and land cranes/derricks on barges.
erator must safely stop operations. (a) This section contains supple-
This must include: mental requirements for floating
(1) Setting all brakes or locking de- cranes/derricks and land cranes/der-
vices. ricks on barges, pontoons, vessels or
(2) Moving all clutch and other power other means of flotation (i.e., vessel/
controls to the off position. flotation device). The sections of this
(k) Use of winch heads. subpart apply to floating cranes/der-
(1) Ropes must not be handled on a ricks and land cranes/derricks on
winch head without the knowledge of barges, pontoons, vessels or other
the operator. means of flotation, unless specified
(2) While a winch head is being used, otherwise. The requirements of this
the operator must be within reach of section do not apply when using jacked
the power unit control lever. barges when the jacks are deployed to
(l) [Reserved] the river, lake, or sea bed and the
barge is fully supported by the jacks.
(m) Securing the boom.
(b) General requirements. The require-
(1) When the boom is being held in a ments in paragraphs (c) through (k) of
fixed position, dogs, pawls, or other this section apply to both floating
positive holding mechanisms on the cranes/derricks and land cranes/der-
boom hoist must be engaged. ricks on barges, pontoons, vessels or
(2) When taken out of service for 30 other means of flotation.
days or more, the boom must be se- (c) Work area control.
cured by one of the following methods: (1) The requirements of § 1926.1424
(i) Laid down. (Work area control) apply, except for
(ii) Secured to a stationary member, § 1926.1424(a)(2)(ii).
as nearly under the head as possible, by (2) The employer must either:
attachment of a sling to the load (i) Erect and maintain control lines,
block. warning lines, railings or similar bar-
(iii) For guy derricks, lifted to a riers to mark the boundaries of the
vertical position and secured to the hazard areas; or
mast. (ii) Clearly mark the hazard areas by
(iv) For stiffleg derricks, secured a combination of warning signs (such
against the stiffleg. as, ‘‘Danger—Swing/Crush Zone’’) and
(n) The process of jumping the der- high visibility markings on the equip-
rick must be supervised by the A/D di- ment that identify the hazard areas. In
rector. addition, the employer must train each
(o) Derrick operations must be super- employee to understand what these
vised by a competent person. markings signify.
(d) Keeping clear of the load. Section
(p) Inspections. In addition to the re-
1926.1425 does not apply.
quirements in § 1926.1412, the following
(e) Additional safety devices. In addi-
additional items must be included in
tion to the safety devices listed in
the inspections:
§ 1926.1415, the following safety devices
(1) Daily: Guys for proper tension. are required:
(2) Annual. (1) Barge, pontoon, vessel or other
(i) Gudgeon pin for cracks, wear, and means of flotation list and trim device.
distortion. The safety device must be located in
(ii) Foundation supports for contin- the cab or, when there is no cab, at the
ued ability to sustain the imposed operator’s station.
loads. (2) Positive equipment house lock.
(q) Qualification and Training. The (3) Wind speed and direction indicator.
employer must train each operator of a A competent person must determine if
derrick on the safe operation of equip- wind is a factor that needs to be con-
ment the individual will operate. Sec- sidered; if wind needs to be considered,
tion 1926.1427 of this subpart (Operator a wind speed and direction indicator
qualification and certification) does must be used.
not apply. (f) Operational aids.
669
(1) An anti two-block device is re- (v) The firefighting and lifesaving
quired only when hoisting personnel or equipment is in place and functional.
hoisting over an occupied cofferdam or (3) The shift and monthly inspections
shaft. are conducted by a competent person,
(2) Section 1926.1416(e)(4) (Load and:
weighing and similar devices) does not (i) If any deficiency is identified, an
apply to dragline, clamshell (grapple), immediate determination is made by a
magnet, drop ball, container handling, qualified person whether the deficiency
concrete bucket, and pile driving work constitutes a hazard.
performed under this section. (ii) If the deficiency is determined to
(g) Accessibility of procedures applica- constitute a hazard, the vessel/flota-
ble to equipment operation. If the crane/ tion device is removed from service
derrick has a cab, the requirements of until the deficiency has been corrected.
§ 1926.1417(c) apply. If the crane/derrick (4) Annual: external vessel/flotation de-
does not have a cab, the employer must vice inspection. For each annual inspec-
ensure that: tion:
(1) Rated capacities (load charts) are (i) The external portion of the barge,
posted at the operator’s station. If the pontoons, vessel or other means of flo-
operator’s station is moveable (such as tation used is inspected annually by a
with pendant-controlled equipment), qualified person who has expertise with
the load charts are posted on the equip- respect to vessels/flotation devices and
ment. that the inspection includes the fol-
(2) Procedures applicable to the oper- lowing items:
ation of the equipment (other than (A) The items identified in para-
load charts), recommended operating graphs (h)(1) (Shift) and (h)(2) (Monthly)
speeds, special hazard warnings, in- of this section.
structions and operators manual, must (B) Cleats, bitts, chocks, fenders, cap-
be readily available on board the ves- stans, ladders, and stanchions, for sig-
sel/flotation device. nificant corrosion, wear, deterioration,
(h) Inspections. In addition to meeting or deformation that could impair the
the requirements of § 1926.1412 for in- function of these items.
specting the crane/derrick, the em- (C) External evidence of leaks and
ployer must inspect the barge, pon- structural damage; evidence of leaks
toons, vessel or other means of flota- and damage below the waterline may
tion used to support a floating crane/ be determined through internal inspec-
derrick or land crane/derrick, and en- tion of the vessel/flotation device.
sure that: (D) Four-corner draft readings.
(1) Shift. For each shift inspection, (E) Firefighting equipment for serv-
the means used to secure/attach the iceability.
equipment to the vessel/flotation de- (ii) Rescue skiffs, lifelines, work
vice is in proper condition, including vests, life preservers and ring buoys are
wear, corrosion, loose or missing fas- inspected for proper condition.
teners, defective welds, and (when ap- (iii) If any deficiency is identified, an
plicable) insufficient tension. immediate determination is made by
(2) Monthly. For each monthly in- the qualified person whether the defi-
spection: ciency constitutes a hazard or, though
(i) The means used to secure/attach not yet a hazard, needs to be monitored
the equipment to the vessel/flotation in the monthly inspections.
device is in proper condition, including (A) If the qualified person determines
inspection for wear, corrosion, and, that the deficiency constitutes a haz-
when applicable, insufficient tension. ard, the vessel/flotation device is re-
(ii) The vessel/flotation device is not moved from service until it has been
taking on water. corrected. See requirements in
(iii) The deckload is properly se- § 1926.1417(f).
cured. (B) If the qualified person determines
(iv) The vessel/flotation device is wa- that, though not presently a hazard,
tertight based on the condition of the the deficiency needs to be monitored,
chain lockers, storage, fuel compart- the deficiency is checked in the month-
ments, and hatches. ly inspections.
670
(5) Four-year: internal vessel/flotation (3) In addition to the requirements in
device inspection. For each four-year in- §§ 1926.1419 through 1926.1422 (Signals),
spection: either:
(i) A marine engineer, marine archi- (i) A clear line of sight must be main-
tect, licensed surveyor, or other quali- tained between the operator and ten-
fied person who has expertise with re- der; or
spect to vessels/flotation devices sur- (ii) The signals between the operator
veys the internal portion of the barge, and tender must be transmitted elec-
pontoons, vessel, or other means of flo- tronically.
tation. (4) The means used to secure the
crane/derrick to the vessel/flotation de-
(ii) If the surveyor identifies a defi-
vice (see paragraph (n)(5) of this sec-
ciency, an immediate determination is
tion) must not allow any amount of
made by the surveyor as to whether the
shifting in any direction.
deficiency constitutes a hazard or,
(k) Manufacturer’s specifications and
though not yet a hazard, needs to be limitations.
monitored in the monthly or annual in- (1) The employer must ensure that
spections, as appropriate. the barge, pontoons, vessel, or other
(A) If the surveyor determines that means of flotation must be capable of
the deficiency constitutes a hazard, the withstanding imposed environmental,
vessel/flotation device is removed from operational and in-transit loads when
service until it has been corrected. used in accordance with the manufac-
(B) If the surveyor determines that, turer’s specifications and limitations.
though not presently a hazard, the de- (2) The employer must ensure that
ficiency needs to be monitored, the de- the manufacturer’s specifications and
ficiency is checked in the monthly or limitations with respect to environ-
annual inspections, as appropriate. mental, operational, and in-transit
(6) Documentation. The monthly and loads for a barge, pontoon, vessel, or
annual inspections required in para- other means of flotation are not ex-
graphs (h)(2) and (h)(4) of this section ceeded or violated.
are documented in accordance with (3) When the manufacturer’s speci-
§§ 1926.1412 (e)(3) and 1926.1412(f)(7), re- fications and limitations are unavail-
spectively, and that the four-year in- able, the employer must ensure that
spection required in paragraph (h)(5) of the specifications and limitations es-
this section is documented in accord- tablished by a qualified person with re-
ance with § 1926.1412(f)(7), except that spect to environmental, operational
the documentation for that inspection and in-transit loads for the barge, pon-
must be retained for a minimum of 4 toons, vessel, or other means of flota-
years. All such documents must be tion are not exceeded or violated.
made available, during the applicable (l) [Reserved]
document retention period, to all per- (m) Floating cranes/derricks. For
sons who conduct inspections in ac- equipment designed by the manufac-
cordance with § 1926.1412. turer (or employer) for marine use by
permanent attachment to barges, pon-
(i) [Reserved]
toons, vessels or other means of flota-
(j) Working with a diver. The employer tion:
must meet the following additional re- (1) Load charts.
quirements when working with a diver (i) The employer must not exceed the
in the water: manufacturer load charts applicable to
(1) If a crane/derrick is used to get a operations on water. When using these
diver into and out of the water, it must charts, the employer must comply with
not be used for any other purpose until all parameters and limitations (such as
the diver is back on board. When used dynamic and environmental param-
for more than one diver, it must not be eters) applicable to the use of the
used for any other purpose until all charts.
divers are back on board. (ii) The employer must ensure that
(2) The operator must remain at the load charts take into consideration a
controls of the crane/derrick at all minimum wind speed of 40 miles per
times. hour.
671
(2) The employer must ensure that pacity with all planned and actual deck
the requirements for maximum allow- loads and ballasted compartments.
able list and maximum allowable trim (ii) Have a subdivided hull with one
as specified in Table M1 of this section or more longitudinal watertight bulk-
are met. heads for reducing the free-surface ef-
fect.
TABLE M1
(iii) Have access to void compart-
Maximum Maximum ments to allow for inspection and
allowable allowable
Rated capacity list trim pumping.
(degrees) (degrees) (n) Land cranes/derricks. For land
Equipment designed for marine use cranes/derricks used on barges, pon-
by permanent attachment (other toons, vessels or other means of flota-
than derricks): tion, the employer must ensure that:
25 tons or less ................................... 5 5
Over 25 tons ...................................... 7 7 (1) The rated capacity of the equip-
Derricks designed for marine use by ment (including but not limited to
permanent attachment: modification of load charts) applicable
Any rated capacity ............................. 10 10
for use on land is reduced to:
(3) The employer must ensure that (i) Account for increased loading
the equipment is stable under the con- from list, trim, wave action, and wind.
ditions specified in Tables M2 and M3 (ii) Be applicable to a specified loca-
of this section. (NOTE: Freeboard is the tion(s) on the specific barge, pontoons,
vertical distance between the water vessel or other means of flotation that
line and the main deck of the vessel.) will be used, under the environmental
conditions expected and encountered.
TABLE M2 (iii) The conditions required in para-
Wind Minimum graphs (n)(3) and (n)(4) of this section
Operated at speed freeboard are met.
(mph) (ft)
(2) The rated capacity modification
Rated capacity ................................... 60 2 required in paragraph (n)(1) of this sec-
Rated capacity plus 25% .................. 60 1 tion is performed by the equipment
High boom, no load ........................... 60 2
manufacturer, or a qualified person
who has expertise with respect to both
TABLE M3 land crane/derrick capacity and the
Wind stability of vessels/flotation devices.
Operated at
speed (3) For list and trim.
For backward stability of the boom: (i) The maximum allowable list and
High boom, no load, full back list (least stable 90 mph. the maximum allowable trim for the
condition).
barge, pontoon, vessel or other means
(4) If the equipment is employer- of flotation must not exceed the
made, it must not be used unless the amount necessary to ensure that the
employer has documents dem- conditions in paragraph (n)(4) of this
onstrating that the load charts and ap- section are met. In addition, the max-
plicable parameters for use meet the imum allowable list and the maximum
requirements of paragraphs (m)(1) allowable trim does not exceed the
through (3) of this section. Such docu- least of the following: 5 degrees, the
ments must be signed by a registered amount specified by the crane/derrick
professional engineer who is a qualified manufacturer, or, when, an amount is
person with respect to the design of not so specified, the amount specified
this type of equipment (including the by the qualified person.
means of flotation). (ii) The maximum allowable list and
(5) The employer must ensure that the maximum allowable trim for the
the barge, pontoons, vessel or other land crane/derrick does not exceed the
means of flotation used: amount specified by the crane/derrick
(i) Are structurally sufficient to manufacturer, or, when, an amount is
withstand the static and dynamic loads not so specified, the amount specified
of the crane/derrick when operating at by the qualified person.
the crane/derrick’s maximum rated ca- (4) For the following conditions:
672
(i) All deck surfaces of the barge, crane/derrick longitudinally along the
pontoons, vessel or other means of flo- vessel/flotation device for repo-
tation used are above water. sitioning.
(ii) The entire bottom area of the (D) Means are installed to prevent
barge, pontoons, vessel or other means the crane/derrick from passing the for-
of flotation used is submerged. ward or aft end of the wire rope attach-
(5) Physical attachment, corralling, ments.
rails system and centerline cable sys- (E) The crane/derrick is secured from
tem meet the requirements in Option movement during operation.
(1), Option (2), Option (3), or Option (4) (v) The systems/means used to com-
of this section, and that whichever op- ply with Option (1), Option (2), Option
tion is used also meets the require- (3), or Option (4) of this section are de-
ments of paragraph (n)(5)(v) of this sec- signed by a marine engineer, registered
tion. professional engineer familiar with
(i) Option (1)—Physical attachment. floating crane/derrick design, or quali-
The crane/derrick is physically at- fied person familiar with floating
tached to the barge, pontoons, vessel or crane/derrick design.
other means of flotation. Methods of (6) Exception. For mobile auxiliary
physical attachment include crossed- cranes used on the deck of a floating
cable systems attached to the crane/ crane/derrick, the requirement speci-
derrick and vessel/flotation device, fied by paragraph (n)(5) of this section
bolting or welding the crane/derrick to to use Option (1), Option (2), Option (3),
the vessel/flotation device, strapping or Option (4) does not apply when the
the crane/derrick to the vessel/flota- employer demonstrates implementa-
tion device with chains, or other meth- tion of a plan and procedures that meet
ods of physical attachment. the following requirements:
(ii) Option (2)—Corralling. The crane/ (i) A marine engineer or registered
derrick is prevented from shifting by professional engineer familiar with
installing barricade restraints (i.e., a floating crane/derrick design develops
corralling system). Employers must en- and signs a written plan for the use of
sure that corralling systems do not the mobile auxiliary crane.
allow the equipment to shift by any (ii) The plan is designed so that the
amount of shifting in any direction. applicable requirements of this section
(iii) Option (3)—Rails. The crane/der- are met despite the position, travel, op-
rick must be prevented from shifting eration, and lack of physical attach-
by being mounted on a rail system. ment (or corralling, use of rails or
Employers must ensure that rail cable system) of the mobile auxiliary
clamps and rail stops are used unless crane.
the system is designed to prevent (iii) The plan specifies the areas of
movement during operation by other the deck where the mobile auxiliary
means. crane is permitted to be positioned,
(iv) Option (4)—Centerline cable system. travel, and operate, and the parameters
The crane/derrick is prevented from and limitations of such movements and
shifting by being mounted to a wire operation.
rope system. The employer must en- (iv) The deck is marked to identify
sure that the wire rope system meets the permitted areas for positioning,
the following requirements: travel, and operation.
(A) The wire rope and attachments (v) The plan specifies the dynamic
are of sufficient size and strength to and environmental conditions that
support the side load of crane/derrick. must be present for use of the plan.
(B) The wire rope is attached phys- (vi) If the dynamic and environ-
ically to the vessel/flotation device. mental conditions in paragraph
(C) The wire rope is attached to the (n)(6)(v) of this section are exceeded,
crane/derrick by appropriate attach- the mobile auxiliary crane is attached
ment methods (such as shackles or physically or corralled in accordance
sheaves) on the undercarriage, and that with Option (1), Option (2) or Option (4)
the method used will allow the crew to of paragraph (n)(5) of this section.
secure the crane/derrick from move- (7) The barge, pontoons, vessel or
ment during operation and to move the other means of flotation used:
673
(i) Are structurally sufficient to (C) Section 1910.179(b)(2), but only
withstand the static and dynamic loads where the equipment identified in
of the crane/derrick when operating at paragraph (b)(1) of this section
the crane/derrick’s maximum rated ca- (§ 1926.1438) was manufactured before
pacity with all anticipated deck loads September 19, 2001.
and ballasted compartments. (iii) For equipment manufactured on
(ii) Have a subdivided hull with one or after September 19, 2001, the fol-
or more longitudinal watertight bulk- lowing sections of ASME B30.2–2005 (in-
heads for reducing the free surface ef- corporated by reference, see § 1926.6)
fect. apply: 2–1.3.1; 2–1.3.2; 2–1.4.1; 2–1.6; 2–
(iii) Have access to void compart- 1.7.2; 2–1.8.2; 2–1.9.1; 2–1.9.2; 2–1.11; 2–
ments to allow for inspection and 1.12.2; 2–1.13.7; 2–1.14.2; 2–1.14.3; 2–1.14.5;
pumping. 2–1.15.; 2–2.2.2; 2–3.2.1.1. In addition, 2–
3.5 applies, except in 2–3.5.1(b), ‘‘29 CFR
§ 1926.1438 Overhead & gantry cranes.
1910.147’’ is substituted for ‘‘ANSI
(a) Permanently installed overhead and Z244.1.’’
gantry cranes. The requirements of
§ 1910.179, except for § 1910.179(b)(1), and § 1926.1439 Dedicated pile drivers.
not the requirements of this subpart
(a) The provisions of subpart CC
CC, apply to the following equipment
apply to dedicated pile drivers, except
when used in construction and perma-
as specified in this section.
nently installed in a facility: overhead
and gantry cranes, including (b) Section 1926.1416(d)(3) (Anti two-
semigantry, cantilever gantry, wall blocking device) does not apply.
cranes, storage bridge cranes, and oth- (c) Section 1926.1416(e)(4) (Load
ers having the same fundamental char- weighing and similar devices) applies
acteristics. only to dedicated pile drivers manufac-
(b) Overhead and gantry cranes that tured after November 8, 2011.
are not permanently installed in a facil- (d) In § 1926.1433, only §§ 1926.1433(d)
ity. and (e) apply to dedicated pile drivers.
(1) This paragraph applies to the fol-
lowing equipment when used in con- § 1926.1440 Sideboom cranes.
struction and not permanently in- (a) The provisions of this standard
stalled in a facility: Overhead and gan- apply, except § 1926.1402 (Ground condi-
try cranes, overhead/bridge cranes, tions), § 1926.1415 (Safety devices),
semigantry, cantilever gantry, wall § 1926.1416 (Operational aids), and
cranes, storage bridge cranes, launch- § 1926.1427 (Operator qualification and
ing gantry cranes, and similar equip- certification).
ment having the same fundamental (b) Section 1926.1426 (Free fall and
characteristics, irrespective of whether controlled load lowering) applies, ex-
it travels on tracks, wheels, or other cept § 1926.1426(a)(2)(i). Sideboom cranes
means. in which the boom is designed to free
(2) The following requirements apply fall (live boom) are permitted only if
to equipment identified in paragraph manufactured prior to November 8,
(b)(1) of this section: 2010.
(i) Sections 1926.1400 through
(c) Sideboom cranes mounted on
1926.1414; §§ 1926.1417 through 1926.1425;
wheel or crawler tractors must meet
§ 1926.1426(d), §§ 1926.1427 through
all of the following requirements of
1926.1434; § 1926.1437, § 1926.1439, and
ASME B30.14–2004 (incorporated by ref-
§ 1926.1441.
erence, see § 1926.6):
(ii) The following portions of
§ 1910.179: (1) Section 14–1.1 (‘‘Load Ratings’’).
(A) Paragraphs (b)(5),(6),(7); (2) Section 14–1.3 (‘‘Side Boom Trac-
(e)(1),(3),(5),(6); (f)(1),(4); (g); (h)(1),(3); tor Travel’’).
(k); and (n) of § 1910.179. (3) Section 14–1.5 (‘‘Ropes and
(B) The definitions in § 1910.179(a) ex- Reeving Accessories’’).
cept for ‘‘hoist’’ and ‘‘load.’’ For those (4) Section 14–1.7.1 (‘‘Booms’’).
words, the definitions in § 1926.1401 (5) Section 14–1.7.2 (‘‘General Re-
apply. quirements—Exhaust Gases’’).
674
(6) Section 14–1.7.3 (‘‘General Re- 1926.1406 (Assembly/disassembly—em-
quirements—Stabilizers (Wheel-Type ployer procedures), the employer must
Side Boom Tractors)’’). also comply with § 1926.1441(b)(2)–(3).
(7) Section 14–1.7.4 (‘‘General Re- (2) Components and configuration. The
quirements—Welded Construction’’). employer must ensure that:
(8) Section 14–1.7.6 (‘‘General Re- (i) The selection of components, and
quirements—Clutch and Brake Protec- the configuration of the equipment,
tion’’). that affect the capacity or safe oper-
(9) Section 14–2.2.2 (‘‘Testing—Rated ation of the equipment complies with
Load Test’’), except that it applies only either the:
to equipment that has been altered or (A) Manufacturer instructions, rec-
modified. ommendations, limitations, and speci-
(10) In section 14–3.1.2 (‘‘Operator fications. When these documents and
Qualifications’’), paragraph (a), except
information are unavailable, a reg-
the phrase ‘‘When required by law.’’
istered professional engineer familiar
(11) In section 14–3.1.3 (‘‘Operating
with the type of equipment involved
Practices’’), paragraphs (e), (f)(1)–(f)(4),
must approve, in writing, the selection
(f)(6), (f)(7), (h), and (i).
and configuration of components; or
(12) In section 14–3.2.3 (‘‘Moving the
Load’’), paragraphs (j), (l), and (m). (B) Approved modifications that
meet the requirements of § 1926.1434
§ 1926.1441 Equipment with a rated (Equipment modifications).
hoisting/lifting capacity of 2,000 (ii) Post-assembly inspection. Upon
pounds or less. completion of assembly, the equipment
The following paragraphs of this sec- is inspected to ensure that it is in com-
tion specify requirements for employ- pliance with paragraph (b)(2)(i) of this
ers using equipment with a maximum section (see § 1926.1412(c) for post-assem-
rated hoisting/lifting capacity of 2,000 bly inspection requirements).
pounds or less. (3) Manufacturer prohibitions. The em-
(a) The employer using this equip- ployer must comply with applicable
ment must comply with the following manufacturer prohibitions.
provisions of this subpart: § 1926.1400 (c) Operation—procedures. (1) The em-
(Scope); § 1926.1401 (Definitions); ployer must comply with all manufac-
§ 1926.1402 (Ground conditions); turer procedures applicable to the oper-
§ 1926.1403 (Assembly/disassembly—se- ational functions of the equipment, in-
lection of manufacturer or employer cluding its use with attachments.
procedures); § 1926.1406 (Assembly/dis- (2) Unavailable operation procedures.
assembly—employer procedures); The employer must:
§§ 1926.1407 through 1926.1411 (Power line (i) When the manufacturer’s proce-
safety); § 1926.1412(c) (Post-assembly); dures are unavailable, develop, and en-
§§ 1926.1413 through 1926.1414 (Wire sure compliance with, all procedures
rope); § 1926.1418 (Authority to stop op-
necessary for the safe operation of the
eration); §§ 1926.1419 through 1926.1422
equipment and attachments.
(Signals); § 1926.1423 (Fall protection);
(ii) Ensure that procedures for the
§ 1926.1425 (Keeping clear of the load)
(except for § 1926.1425(c)(3) (qualified operational controls are developed by a
rigger)); § 1926.1426 (Free fall and con- qualified person.
trolled load lowering); § 1926.1432 (Mul- (iii) Ensure that procedures related
tiple crane/derrick lifts—supplemental to the capacity of the equipment are
requirements); § 1926.1434 (Equipment developed and signed by a registered
modifications); § 1926.1435 (Tower professional engineer familiar with the
cranes); § 1926.1436 (Derricks); § 1926.1437 equipment.
(Floating cranes/derricks and land (3) Accessibility. The employer must
cranes/derricks on barges); § 1926.1438 ensure that:
(Overhead & gantry cranes). (i) The load chart is available to the
(b) Assembly/disassembly. (1) In addi- operator at the control station;
tion to compliance with §§ 1926.1403 (As- (ii) Procedures applicable to the op-
sembly/disassembly—selection of man- eration of the equipment, rec-
ufacturer or employer procedures) and ommended operating speeds, special
675
hazard warnings, instructions, and op- to operating the equipment, on the safe
erator’s manual are readily available operation of the type of equipment the
for use by the operator. operator will be using.
(iii) When rated capacities are avail- (f) Signal person qualifications. The
able at the control station only in elec- employer must train each signal person
tronic form and a failure occurs that in the proper use of signals applicable
makes the rated capacities inacces- to the use of the equipment.
sible, the operator immediately ceases
(g) [Reserved]
operations or follows safe shut-down
procedures until the rated capacities (h) Inspections. The employer must
(in electronic or other form) are avail- ensure that equipment is inspected in
able. accordance with manufacturer proce-
(d) Safety devices and operational aids. dures.
(1) The employer must ensure that (i) [Reserved]
safety devices and operational aids (j) Hoisting personnel. The employer
that are part of the original equipment must ensure that equipment covered by
are maintained in accordance with this section is not used to hoist per-
manufacturer procedures. sonnel.
(2) Anti two-blocking. The employer (k) Design. The employer must ensure
must ensure that equipment covered by that the equipment is designed by a
this section manufactured more than qualified engineer.
one year after November 8, 2010 have
either an anti two-block device that § 1926.1442 Severability.
meets the requirements of
§ 1926.1416(d)(3), or is designed so that, Should a court of competent jurisdic-
in the event of a two-block situation, tion hold any provision(s) of subpart
no damage or load failure will occur CC to be invalid, such action shall not
(for example, by using a power unit affect any other provision of the sub-
that stalls in response to a two-block part.
situation).
(e) Operator qualifications. The em- APPENDIX A TO SUBPART CC OF PART
ployer must train each operator, prior 1926—STANDARD HAND SIGNALS
676
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. CC, App. A
677
ER09AU10.003</GPH>
Pt. 1926, Subpt. CC, App. B 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–13 Edition)
APPENDIX B TO SUBPART CC OF PART implement procedures that minimize the

1926—ASSEMBLY/DISASSEMBLY: SAM- risk of unintended dangerous movement and
PLE PROCEDURES FOR MINIMIZING minimize the duration and extent of expo-
THE RISK OF UNINTENDED DAN-
sure under the boom.
The following scenario is an example of
GEROUS BOOM MOVEMENT
how the exception applies: A boom cannot be
1. Section 1926.1404(f)(1) provides that when disassembled on the ground because of
pins (or similar devices) are being removed, aboveground piping (as might be found, for
employees must not be under the boom, jib, example, in an oil refinery) that precludes
or other components, except where the re- lowering the boom to the ground. The boom
quirements of § 1926.1404(f)(2) are met. The must therefore be disassembled in the air,
exception in § 1926.1404(f)(2) applies when the and the employees who remove the pins must
employer demonstrates that site constraints perform that work from an aerial lift whose
require one or more employees to be under base is positioned on one side (the near side)
the boom, jib, or other components when of the boom. To gain access to the pins on
pins (or similar devices) are being removed. the far side, the aerial lift basket must move
In such a situation, the A/D director must under the boom, since, due to lack of room,
678
ER09AU10.004</GPH>
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. CC, App. C
the aerial lift cannot be repositioned on the (1) The functions and limitations of the
far side. Due to lack of room, the aerial lift crane and attachments.
cannot be repositioned on the far side, so the (2) Wire rope:
aerial basket must move under the boom to (i) Background information necessary to
gain access to the pins on the far side. understand the inspection and removal from
To minimize the risk of unintended dan- service criteria in § 1926.1413 and § 1926.1414.
gerous movement while the pins are re- (ii) Capacity and when multi-part rope is
moved, the A/D director uses an assist crane needed.
that is rigged to support the boom section (iii) Relationship between line pull and
that is being detached, using particular care safe working load.
to ensure that the section end that is near (iv) How to determine the manufacturer’s
the employee(s) removing the pins is well recommended rope for the crane.
supported. The duration and extent of expo- (3) Rigging devices and their use, such as:
sure is minimized by removing the far side
(i) Slings.
pins first, moving the aerial lift basket as
(ii) Spreaders.
soon as possible to the near side so that the
(iii) Lifting beams.
employees are no longer under the boom, and
then removing the near side pins. (iv) Wire rope fittings, such as clips, shack-
2. Section 1926.1404(h)(6)(i) provides that, les and wedge sockets.
during assembly/disassembly, the center of (v) Saddles (softeners).
gravity of the load must be identified if that (vi) Clamps (beams).
is necessary for the method used for main- (4) The technical limitations of protective
taining stability. Section 1926.1404(h)(6)(ii) measures against electrical hazards:
states that, where there is insufficient infor- (i) Grounding.
mation to accurately identify the center of (ii) Proximity warning devices.
gravity, measures designed to prevent unin- (iii) Insulated links.
tended dangerous movement resulting from (iv) Boom cages.
an inaccurate identification of the center of (v) Proximity to electric power lines, radii,
gravity must be used. and microwave structures.
An example of the application of (5) The effects of load share and load trans-
§ 1926.1404(h)(6)(ii) is as follows: The boom is fer in multi-crane lifts.
assembled by lowering boom sections se- (6) Basic crane terms.
quentially into place using an assist crane. (7) The basics of machine power flow sys-
The A/D director’s plan is to keep the boom tems.
sections stable while they are lowered into (i) Mechanical.
place by attaching the assist crane hoist line (ii) Electrical.
above the center of gravity of each section. (iii) Pneumatic.
However, in assembling the non-symmetrical (iv) Hydraulic.
top section of the boom, the A/D director is
(v) Combination.
not able to determine where to attach the
(8) The significance of the instruments and
assist crane hoist line so that it is above the
gauge readings.
center of gravity. In this situation, before
raising the section, all personnel are kept (9) The effects of thermal expansion and
clear of the section and the section is first contraction in hydraulic cylinders.
raised a few inches to determine whether it (10) Background information necessary to
tips when raised (if it did tip, it would indi- understand the requirements of pre-oper-
cate it is not rigged over the center of grav- ation and inspection.
ity). If this occurs, the hoist line is reposi- (11) How to use the safety devices and oper-
tioned and the procedure repeated (with em- ational aids required under § 1926.1415 and
ployees kept clear of the section while it is § 1926.1416.
raised) until the A/D director determines (12) The difference between duty-cycle and
that it is rigged over the center of gravity lifting operations.
and can be moved into place without dan- (13) How to calculate net capacity for
gerous movement. every possible configuration of the equip-
ment using the manufacturer’s load chart.
APPENDIX C TO SUBPART CC OF PART (14) How to use manufacturer-approved at-
1926—OPERATOR CERTIFICATION: tachments and their effect on the equipment.
WRITTEN EXAMINATION: TECHNICAL (15) How to obtain dimensions, weight, and
center of gravity of the load.
KNOWLEDGE CRITERIA
(16) The effects of dynamic loading from:
This appendix contains information for (i) Wind.
employers, accredited testing organizations, (ii) Stopping and starting.
auditors and government entities developing (iii) Impact loading.
criteria for a written examination to test an (iv) Moving with the load.
individual’s technical knowledge relating to (17) The effect of side loading.
the operation of cranes. (18) The principles of backward stability.
(a) General technical information. (b) Site information.
679
Pt. 1926, Subpt. CC, App. C 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–13 Edition)
(1) How to identify the suitability of the (iii) Operating near power lines.
supporting ground/surface to support the ex- (iv) Hoisting personnel.
pected loads of the operation. Elements in- (v) Using other than full outrigger/crawler
clude: or stabilizer extensions.
(i) Weaknesses below the surface (such as (vi) Lifting loads from beneath the surface
voids, tanks, loose fill). of the water.
(ii) Weaknesses on the surface (such as re-
(vii) Using various approved counterweight
taining walls, slopes, excavations, depres-
sions). configurations.
(2) Proper use of mats, blocking/cribbing, (viii) Handling loads out of the operator’s
outriggers, stabilizers, or crawlers. vision (‘‘operating in the blind’’).
(3) Identification of site hazards such as (ix) Using electronic communication sys-
power lines, piping, and traffic. tems for signal communication.
(4) How to review operation plans with su- (14) Know the proper procedures for load
pervisors and other workers (such as the sig- control and the use of hand-held tag lines.
nal person), including how to determine (15) Know the emergency response proce-
working height, boom length, load radius, dure for:
and travel clearance. (i) Fires.
(5) How to determine if there is adequate
(ii) Power line contact.
room for extension of crawlers or outriggers/
stabilizers and counterweights. (iii) Loss of stability.
(c) Operations. (iv) Control malfunction.
(1) How to pick, carry, swing and place the (v) Two-blocking.
load smoothly and safely on rubber tires and (vi) Overload.
on outriggers/stabilizers or crawlers (where (vii) Carrier or travel malfunction.
applicable). (16) Know how to properly use outriggers
(2) How to communicate at the site with and stabilizers in accordance with manufac-
supervisors, the crew and the signal person. turer specifications.
(3) Proper procedures and methods of (d) Use of load charts.
reeving wire ropes and methods of reeving
(1) Know the terminology necessary to use
multiple-part lines and selecting the proper
load charts.
load block and/or ball.
(4) How to react to changes in conditions (2) Know how to ensure that the load chart
that affect the safe operation of the equip- is the appropriate chart for the equipment in
ment. its particular configuration and application.
(5) How to shut down and secure the equip- (3) Know how to use load charts. This in-
ment properly when leaving it unattended. cludes knowing:
(6) Know how to apply the manufacturer’s (i) The operational limitations of load
specifications for operating in various charts and footnotes.
weather conditions, and understand how en- (ii) How to relate the chart to the configu-
vironmental conditions affect the safe oper- ration of the crane, crawlers, or outriggers/
ation of the equipment. stabilizers extended or retracted, jib erected
(7) How to properly level the equipment. or offset, and various counterweight configu-
(8) How to verify the weight of the load and
rations.
rigging prior to initiating the lift.
(9) How to determine where the load is to (iii) The difference between structural ca-
be picked up and placed and how to verify pacity and capacity limited by stability.
the radii. (iv) What is included in capacity ratings.
(10) Know basic rigging procedures. (v) The range diagram and its relationship
(11) How to carry out the shift inspection to the load chart.
required in this subpart. (vi) The work area chart and its relation-
(12) Know that the following operations re- ship to the load chart.
quire specific procedures and skill levels: (vii) Where to find and how to use the
(i) Multi-crane lifts. ‘‘parts-of-line’’ information.
(ii) Hoisting personnel. (4) Know how to use the load chart to-
(iii) Clamshell/dragline operations.
gether with the load indicators and/or load
(iv) Pile driving and extracting.
moment devices.
(v) Concrete operations, including poured-
in-place and tilt-up.
(vi) Demolition operations.
(vii) Operations on water.
(viii) Magnet operations.
(ix) Multi-drum operations.
(13) Know the proper procedures for oper-
ating safely under the following conditions:
(i) Traveling with suspended loads.
(ii) Approaching a two-block condition.
680
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, App. A
APPENDIX A TO PART 1926—DESIGNA- 1926 DESIGNATIONS FOR APPLICABLE 1910
TIONS FOR GENERAL INDUSTRY STANDARDS—Continued
STANDARDS INCORPORATED INTO
BODY OF CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS Source § no. and/or
New § no. and/or para. para.
New Designations for General Industry
Standards Incorporated Into Body of Con- [Do.] (o) ................ [Do.] (d)(10)
struction Standards 1926.156 ......................... 1910.160
1926.157 ......................... 1910.162
1926 DESIGNATIONS FOR APPLICABLE 1910 1926.158 ......................... 1910.164
STANDARDS 1926.159 ......................... 1910.165
1926.200(c)(3) ................ 1910.145(d)(4)
Source § no. and/or 1926.250(c) ..................... 1910.176(c)
New § no. and/or para. para. [Do.] (d) (1)–(4) ....... 1910.30(a) (1), (2), (4)
and (5)
1926.20 (c) ..................... 1910.5 (a) 1926.251(a)(5) ................ 1910.184(a)
[Do.] (d) ................... [Do.] (c) [Do.] (a)(6) ................... [Do.] (d)
[Do.] (e) ................... [Do.] (d) [Do.] (b)(6)(i)–(ii) ......... [Do.] (e)(3)(i)–(ii)
1926.32(g) ...................... 1910.12(b) [Do.] (c)(6)–(7) ............ [Do.] (c) (2)–(3)
1926.33 ........................... 1910.20 [Do.] (c)(8) ................... [Do.] (c)(5)
1926.34 (a) ..................... 1910.36(b)(4) [Do.] (c)(9) ................... [Do.] (c)(7)
[Do.] (b) ................... 1910.37 (q)(1) [Do.] (c)(10)–(12) ........ [Do.] (c)(10)–(12)
[Do.] (c) .................... [Do.] (k)(2) [Do.] (c)(13)–(15) ........ [Do.](f) (2)–(4)
1926.35 ........................... 1910.38(a) [Do.] (d)(3)–(6) ............ [Do.] (h) (2)–(5)
1926.50(g) ...................... 1910.151(c) [Do.] (e)(3)–(5) ............ [Do.] (i) (2)–(4)
1926.51(a)(6) .................. 1910.141(a)(2)(v) [Do.] (e)(6)–(7) ............ [Do.] (i) (6)–(7)
[Do.] (d)(2) ................... [Do.] (h) [Do.] (e)(8) ................... [Do.] (i)(9)
[Do.] (f) (2)–(4) ............ [Do.] (d) (1)–(3) 1926.300(b) (3) ............... 1910.212(a)(1)
[Do.] (g) ....................... [Do.] (g)(2) [Do.] (4) ................... [Do.] (a)(3)
[Do.] (h) ....................... [Do.] (a)(5) [Do.] (5) ................... [Do.] (a)(5)
[Do.] (i) ........................ [Do.] (e) [Do.] (6) ................... [Do.] (b)
1926.53 (c)–(r) ................ 1910.96 [Do.] (7) ................... 1910.215(b)(9)
1926.57 (f)–(i) ................. 1910.94 [Do.] (8) and (9) ....... [Do.] (b) (3) and (4)
1926.64 ........................... 1910.119 1926.302(b)(10) .............. 1910.244(b)
1926.65 ........................... 1910.120 1926.303(b)(2) ................ 1910.215(a) (2)
1926.66 (a) ..................... 1910.107 (a) [Do.] (e) ................... [Do.] (4)
[Do.] (b) ....................... [Do.] (b) (1)–(10) 1926.304 (g) ................... 1910.213(h)(1)
[Do.] (c)–(d) ................. [Do.] (c)–(d) [Do.] (h) ................... [Do.] (d)(1)
[Do.] (e)–(g) ................. [Do.] (h)–(j) [Do.] (i) ..................... [Do.] (c)(1)
1926.95 ........................... 1910.132 1926.305(d)(1) ................ 1910.244(a)(2) (iii)–(viii)
1926.96 ........................... 1910.136 1926.306 ......................... 1910.169
1926.97 (a)–(e) ............... 1910.156(e) 1926.307 ......................... 1910.219
[Do.] (f)–(h) .................. [Do.] Subpt. L App. 1926.350(a) (10) ............. 1910.253(b) (4)(iii)
E [Do.] (11) ................. [Do.] (2)(ii)
1926.98 ........................... 1910.156(f) [Do.] (12) ................. 1910.101(b)
1926.102(a) (6) ............... 1910.133(a) (2) 1926.353(b)(3) ................ 1910.252(b)(4)(iv)
[Do.] (7) ....................... [Do.] (4) 1926.416 (a)(4) ............... 1910.333(c)(2)
[Do.] (8) ....................... [Do.] (5) [Do.] (f) (1) .................. [Do.] (c)(10)
1926.103 (d) ................... 1910.134 (a) [Do.] (2) ................... 1910.334(a)(1)
[Do.] (e) ....................... [Do.] (b) [Do.] (3) ................... [Do.] (a)(2)(iii)
[Do.] (f)–(i) ................... [Do.] (d)–(g) [Do.] (4) ................... [Do.] (a)(5)
1926.150(c)(1) (xi) .......... 1910.157 (g)(1) [Do.] (5)–(6) ............. [Do.] (b) (1)–(2)
[Do.] (xii) .................. [Do.] (g)(2) [Do.] (7)–(9) ............. [Do.] (c) (1)–(3)
[Do.] (xiii) ................. [Do.] (c)(4) [Do.] (10) ................. [Do.] (d)
[Do.] (xiv) ................. [Do.] (e)(3) 1926.417(d) .................... 1910.333(b)(2)
1926.152 (b)(5) ............... 1910.107(e)(2) 1926.451(a) (22) ............. 1910.28(a) (15)
[Do.] (h) ................... 1910.106(j) [Do.] (23) ................. [Do.] (18)
[Do.] (i) ..................... [Do.] (b) [Do.] (24) ................. [Do.] (20)
[Do.] (j) ..................... [Do.] (c) 1926.453 (a) ................... 1910.29(a)
[Do.] (k) (1)–(3) ........ [Do.] (g)(4) [Do.] (b) ................... [Do.] (c)
[Do.] (k)(4) ............... [Do.] (a)(22) 1926.600(a)(7) ................ 1910.176(f)
1926.153(a) (3) ............... 1910.110(a)(4) 1926.602(c)(1) (vii) ......... 1910.178(m) (3)
[Do.] (m) (1) ............. [Do.] (d)(1) [Do.] (viii) .............. [Do.] (12)
[Do.] (2) ................... [Do.] (d)(2) 1926.900 (s) ................... 1910.109 (g)(2)(ii)
[Do.] (3) ................... [Do.] (d)(7)(vii) [Do.] (t) .................... [Do.] (h)(3)(ii)
[Do.] (4) ................... [Do.] (d)(7)(viii) 1926.905(u) .................... [Do.] (e)(3)(iii)
[Do.] (n) ................... [Do.] (b)(5)(iii) 1926.914(aa) .................. [Do.] (a)(12)
681
Pt. 1926, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–13 Edition)
1926 DESIGNATIONS FOR APPLICABLE 1910 1926 DESIGNATIONS FOR APPLICABLE 1910
STANDARDS—Continued STANDARDS—Continued
Source § no. and/or Source § no. and/or

New § no. and/or para. para. New § no. and/or para. para.
1926.1050(b) .................. 1910.21(g)(9) 1926.1107 ....................... 1910.1007

1926.1108 ....................... 1910.1008
1926.1071 ....................... 1910.401 1926.1109 ....................... 1910.1009
1926.1072 ....................... 1910.402 1926.1110 ....................... 1910.1010
1926.1076 ....................... 1910.410 1926.1111 ....................... 1910.1011
1926.1080 ....................... 1910.420 1926.1112 ....................... 1910.1012
1926.1081 ....................... 1910.421 1926.1113 ....................... 1910.1013
1926.1082 ....................... 1910.422 1926.1114 ....................... 1910.1014
1926.1083 ....................... 1910.423 1926.1115 ....................... 1910.1015
1926.1084 ....................... 1910.424 1926.1116 ....................... 1910.1016
1926.1085 ....................... 1910.425 1926.1117 ....................... 1910.1017
1926.1086 ....................... 1910.426 1926.1118 ....................... 1910.1018
1926.1087 ....................... 1910.427 1926.1128 ....................... 1910.1028
1926.1090 ....................... 1910.430 1926.1129 ....................... 1910.1029
1926.1091 ....................... 1910.440 1926.1144 ....................... 1910.1044
1926.1092 ....................... 1910.441 1926.1145 ....................... 1910.1045
1926.1147 ....................... 1910.1047
1926.1102 ....................... 1910.1002 1926.1148 ....................... 1910.1048
1926.1103 ....................... 1910.1003
1926.1104 ....................... 1910.1004
1926.1105 ....................... 1910.1005 [58 FR 35305, June 30, 1993, as amended at 61
1926.1106 ....................... 1910.1006 FR 9255, Mar. 7, 1996; 75 FR 48135, Aug. 9, 2010]
682

OHSA CFR 29 - 2013 - Part 1926

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

OHSA CFR 29 - 2013 - Part 1926

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PART 1926—SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926.

61 Retention of DOT markings, plac-

Subpart C—General Safety and Health 1926.150 Fire protection.

GENERAL Subparts AA–BB [Reserved]

§ 1926.27 Sanitation. § 1926.32 Definitions.

APPENDIX A TO § 1926.55—1970 AMERICAN CONFERENCE OF GOVERNMENTAL INDUSTRIAL

THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS FOR CONSTRUCTION

Abate; see Temephos.

Biphenyl; see Diphenyl.

Butanethiol; see Butyl mercaptan.

Substance CAS No. d ppm a mg/m 3,b Skin Designa-

1,2-Dibromoethane; see Ethylene

Substance CAS No. d ppm a mg/m 3,b Skin Designa-

Dipropylene glycol methyl ether ............ 34590–94–8 100 600 X

Substance CAS No. d ppm a mg/m 3,b Skin Designa-

Gasoline ................................................ 8006–61–9 A3 —

Substance CAS No. d ppm a mg/m 3,b Skin Designa-

L.P.G. (Liquefied petroleum gas) .......... 68476–85–7 1000 1800

Substance CAS No. d ppm a mg/m 3,b Skin Designa-

Methyl methacrylate .............................. 80–62–6 100 410 —

Substance CAS No. d ppm a mg/m 3,b Skin Designa-

Pentachloronaphthalene ....................... 1321–64–8 — 0.5 X

Substance CAS No. d ppm a mg/m 3,b Skin Designa-

Total dust ....................................... — —

Substance CAS No. d ppm a mg/m 3,b Skin Designa-

Respirable fraction ......................... — —

Total dust ....................................... — —

§ 1926.56 Illumination. limits specified in § 1926.55(a). When

Dia. D inches (cm) Exhaust E Volume Ex-

.................................... 20 (50.8) 2 4 (10.16) 780 When no hood can be used over

Wheel dimension, inches (centimeters)

9 (22.86) 11⁄2 (3.81) 3 220

FIGURE D–57.3—A METHOD OF APPLYING AN EXHAUST ENCLOSURE TO SWING-FRAME GRINDERS

NOTE: Baffle to reduce front opening as

STANDARD BUFFING AND POLISHING HOOD

9 (22.86) 2 (5.08) 31⁄2 (3.81) 300

FIGURE D–57.5—CRADLE POLISHING OR GRINDING ENCLOSURE

Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for

Dia D, inches (centimeters) Volume ex-

12 (30.48) 3 (7.6) 220

Disc dia. inches (centimeters) Exhaust E Volume

FIGURE D–57.8—A TYPICAL HOOD FOR A BELT OPERATION

Crossdraft, Airflow velocities, f.p.m.

................. 150 small booth .................... 125–175

................. 200 small booth .................... 150–250

(ii) In addition to the requirements TABLE D–57.8—LOWER EXPLOSIVE LIMIT OF

1 ................................ Over 200 (93.33) 0–20 Fast ...................................... High.

(3) Ventilation. Where ventilation is (ii) All tanks exhausted by means of

50 ............................................................................................ 75 90 100 110 125

§ 1926.61 Retention of DOT markings, Director means the Director, National

Chemical Name CAS* TQ** Chemical Name CAS* TQ**

APPENDIX B TO § 1926.64—BLOCK FLOW DIAGRAM AND SIMPLIFIED PROCESS

APPENDIX C TO § 1926.64—COMPLIANCE GUIDE- ment program requires a systematic ap-

Foot- 20 or fewer ............................. One.

Acetylene—Burning, Acety- Sparks, harmful rays, molten 7, 8, 9.

Chipping .................................... Flying particles ........................ 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7A, 8A.

Operation Hazards Recommended protectors: Bold type numbers signify pre-

Grinding—Light ......................... Flying particles ........................ 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10.

Machining .................................. Flying particles ........................ 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10.

Spot welding ............................. Flying particles, sparks ........... 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10.

(D) For tanks and storage vessels de- V = 1337÷L√ M

Inches (cm) Inches (cm) Inches (cm)

(C) Location and arrangement of to discharge, within the pressure limi-

number of stitches to develop the full ⁄ .........................................................................